summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-11 23:51:04 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2006-01-11 23:51:04 +0000
commitbf7e5eda82d5177d838d28170dce0f539f5e1687 (patch)
tree2cd920ffe6994cdaab8d37b5b0a59df9a5111822 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base
parent83bcc02ee855f0bf515d44433547956d38805bf0 (diff)
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@151 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/Makefile.unx56
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx213
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins79
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/autoload.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx4452
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins113
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd1300
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins113
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx4894
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx4349
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins126
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins130
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx183
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins95
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.dtx1791
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.ins82
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx1337
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins207
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx189
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins78
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx527
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins78
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx2745
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins169
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx1147
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins121
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexbug.el502
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx218
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins141
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx1918
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins101
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx176
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx407
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx1174
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx1694
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx323
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx434
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx1455
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx911
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx821
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx862
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx631
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx1314
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx777
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx1910
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx414
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx1521
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx583
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx1887
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx158
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx217
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx152
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx1075
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx123
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx996
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx796
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx3320
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins97
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx3963
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx334
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx101
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx196
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx1487
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx1112
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx866
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx1000
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx1621
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx289
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx146
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx518
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx341
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx313
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins96
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins122
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx219
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx445
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins79
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins113
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx267
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx284
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx456
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins97
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx2724
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins197
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd485
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/source2e.tex477
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx289
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins80
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins128
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx1221
91 files changed, 72038 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/Makefile.unx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/Makefile.unx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..414293e93b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/Makefile.unx
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+
+########################################################################
+# Start of customization section
+########################################################################
+
+# The directory where all runtime files reside
+DESTDIR=
+
+# The directory where the format files reside
+FORMATDIR=
+
+######### Edit the following only if you want to move *.fd or *.ist
+######### to a different place.
+
+# The directory where the .fd files reside:
+FDDIR=$(DESTDIR)
+
+# The directory where class and package files reside:
+INPUTDIR=$(DESTDIR)
+
+# The directory where the makeindex style files reside
+ISTDIR=$(DESTDIR)
+
+########################################################################
+# End of customization section
+########################################################################
+
+FORMAT=latex
+
+
+default:
+ @if test ! "${DESTDIR}" -o ! "$(FORMATDIR)" ; then \
+ echo "Destination directories not set." ; \
+ echo "Please edit the Makefile first!" ; \
+ exit 1 ; \
+ else \
+ make format ; \
+ fi
+
+
+format: $(FORMAT).fmt
+
+$(FORMAT).fmt: $(FORMAT).ltx
+ initex $(FORMAT).ltx
+
+
+install: $(FORMAT).fmt
+ cp -i $(FORMAT).fmt $(FORMATDIR)
+ cp -i *.fd $(FDDIR)
+ cp -i *.cls *.clo *.sty *.def *.tex $(INPUTDIR)
+ cp -i *.ist $(ISTDIR)
+
+clean:
+ rm $(FORMAT).fmt
+ rm *.dvi *.log *.aux *.glo *.idx *.ind *.gls *.lof *.lot *.toc
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9b546ca9d82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{108}
+% \iffalse
+%%
+%% File `alltt.dtx'.
+%% Copyright (C) 1987 by Leslie Lamport
+%% Copyright (C) 1994--1997 LaTeX3 project, Johannes Braams
+%% all rights reserved.
+%%
+%<*dtx>
+\ProvidesFile{alltt.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{alltt}
+%<driver>\ProvidesFile{alltt.drv}
+%\ProvidesFile{alltt.dtx}
+ [1997/06/16 v2.0g defines alltt environment]
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\providecommand{\Lenv}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\providecommand{\pkg}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\providecommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\DocInput{alltt.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{v2.0g}{1997/06/16}{A few documentation fixes (PR 2520)}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1995/04/02}{A few documentation fixes (PR 1517)}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{alltt.dtx}
+% \title{The \texttt{alltt} environment\thanks{This file
+% has version number \fileversion, last
+% revised \filedate.}}
+% \author{Johannes Braams}
+% \date{\filedate}
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% This package defines the \Lenv{alltt} environment, which is like
+% the \Lenv{verbatim} environment except that |\|, |{|, and |}|
+% have their usual meanings.
+%
+% Thus, other commands and environments can appear within an
+% \Lenv{alltt} environment.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{alltt}
+% Here are some things you may want to do in an \Lenv{alltt}
+% environment:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Change fonts--e.g., by typing |{\em emphasized text\/}|
+%
+% \item Insert text from a file \file{foo.tex} by typing
+% |\input{foo}|. Beware that each |<return>| starts a new line, so
+% if \file{foo.tex} ends with a |<return>| you can wind up with an
+% extra blank line if you're not careful.
+%
+% \item Insert a math formula. Note that |$| just produces a dollar
+% sign, so you'll have to type |\(...\)| or |\[...\]|. Also, |^|
+% and |_| just produce their characters; use |\sp| or |\sb| for
+% super- and subscripts, as in |\(x\sp{2}\)|.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{alltt}
+% The \Lenv{alltt} environment is similar to the \Lenv{verbatim}
+% environment, except that |\|, |{| and |}| have their usual
+% behaviour.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1994/10/29}{Added a missing \cs{dospecials}}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{1995/01/27}{Reset \cs{dospecials} after its changed
+% version is executed}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1995/05/13}{brought definition up to date with the
+% verbatim environment}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1995/05/13}{Save and restore (in math mode) the
+% definition of the \texttt{'} character}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\lccode`\~=`\'
+\lowercase{\endgroup
+\newenvironment{alltt}{%
+ \trivlist
+ \item\relax
+ \if@minipage
+ \else
+ \vskip\parskip
+ \fi
+ \leftskip\@totalleftmargin
+ \rightskip\z@skip
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parfillskip\@flushglue
+ \parskip\z@skip
+ \@@par
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \def\par{%
+ \if@tempswa
+ \leavevmode\null\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
+ \fi}
+ \obeylines
+ \verbatim@font
+ \let\org@prime~%
+ \@noligs
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{1995/07/24}{Added setting of the \cs{catcode} of the
+% \texttt{'} character}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \everymath\expandafter{\the\everymath
+ \catcode`\'=12 \let~\org@prime}
+ \everydisplay\expandafter{\the\everydisplay
+ \catcode`\'=12 \let~\org@prime}
+ \let\org@dospecials\dospecials
+ \g@remfrom@specials{\\}
+ \g@remfrom@specials{\{}
+ \g@remfrom@specials{\}}
+ \let\do\@makeother
+ \dospecials
+ \let\dospecials\org@dospecials
+ \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
+ \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}}
+{\endtrivlist}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\g@remfrom@specials}
+% In the old implementation of the \pkg{alltt} package a fixed
+% |\dospecials| was used. However nowadays the |\dospecials|
+% command might contain more special characters at run-time then as
+% was defined in the format. Therefore we remove the necessary
+% special character from |\dospecials| at the start of the
+% \Lenv{alltt} environment. For this we need a macro. Remember that
+% the list of special characters in |\dospecials| contains the
+% control sequence |\do| between the characters. We use that to
+% check whether a character has to be removed.
+%
+% The macro |\g@remfrom@specials| takes one argument, the chracter
+% to be removed from the list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\g@remfrom@specials#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We build up a new list in |\@new@speicals|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@new@specials{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The command |\@remove| compares its argument with the argument of\\
+% |\g@remfrom@specials|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@remove##1{%
+ \ifx##1#1\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When they are not the same the argument of |\@remove| is added
+% (together with |\do|) to the new list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \g@addto@macro\@new@specials{\do ##1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we |\let| |\do| be equal to |\@remove| and execute
+% |\dospecials|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\do\@remove\dospecials
+% \end{macrocode}
+% All that's left is to make |\dospecials| point to the new list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\dospecials\@new@specials
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..eceb19c9c86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/alltt.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generateFile{alltt.sty}{t}{%
+ \from{alltt.dtx}{package}}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/autoload.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/autoload.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..62da1132621
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/autoload.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\keepsilent
+\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+\usepreamble\mainpreamble
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{latexa.ltx}{%
+ \from{ltdirchk.dtx}{initex,2ekernel,dircheck}
+ \from{ltplain.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltvers.dtx}{2ekernel,autoload}
+ \from{ltdefns.dtx}{2ekernel,autoload}
+ \from{ltalloc.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltcntrl.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{lterror.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltpar.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltspace.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltlogos.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfiles.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltfssbas.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltfsstrc.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltfsscmp.dtx}{compat,2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfssdcl.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltfssini.dtx}{compat}
+ \from{ltfntcmd.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltcounts.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltpageno.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltxref.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltlength.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltmiscen.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltmath.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltlists.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltboxes.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{lttab.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltpictur.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltthm.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltsect.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfloat.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltidxglo.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltbibl.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltpage.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltoutput.dtx}{autoload}
+ \from{ltclass.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfinal.dtx}{2ekernel}}
+ \file{autopict.sty}{%
+ \from{ltpictur.dtx}{def}}
+ \file{autotabg.sty}{%
+ \from{lttab.dtx}{def}}
+ \file{autoerr.sty}{%
+ \from{ltplain.dtx}{autoerr}
+ \from{lterror.dtx}{def}
+ \from{ltfiles.dtx}{autoerr}
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{autoerr}
+ \from{ltfssbas.dtx}{autoerr}
+ \from{ltfssdcl.dtx}{autoerr}}
+ \file{autofss1.sty}{%
+ \from{ltfssbas.dtx}{def1}
+ \from{ltfsstrc.dtx}{def1}}
+% This one is disabled at present.
+% \file{autofss2.sty}}{%
+% \from{ltfssbas.dtx}{def2}
+% \from{ltfsstrc.dtx}{def2}}
+ \file{autoout1.sty}{%
+ \from{ltoutput.dtx}{def1}}
+}
+
+
+\Msg{}
+\Msg{***********************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Now run INITEX on latexa.ltx}
+\Msg{* to generate the auto-load version}
+\Msg{* of LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{***********************************}
+\Msg{}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..498bed48e0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4452 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{2976}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \section{Identification}
+%
+% These document classes can only be used with \LaTeXe, so we make
+% sure that an appropriate message is displayed when another \TeX{}
+% format is used.
+% \changes{v1.3p}{1995/11/30}{Added date of \LaTeX\ format to argument
+% of \cs{NeedsTeXFormat}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<article|report|book>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Announce the Class name and its version:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<article>\ProvidesClass{article}
+%<report>\ProvidesClass{report}
+%<book>\ProvidesClass{book}
+%<10pt&!bk>\ProvidesFile{size10.clo}
+%<11pt&!bk>\ProvidesFile{size11.clo}
+%<12pt&!bk>\ProvidesFile{size12.clo}
+%<10pt&bk>\ProvidesFile{bk10.clo}
+%<11pt&bk>\ProvidesFile{bk11.clo}
+%<12pt&bk>\ProvidesFile{bk12.clo}
+%<*driver>
+\ProvidesFile{classes.drv}
+%</driver>
+ [2004/02/16 v1.4f
+%<article|report|book> Standard LaTeX document class]
+%<10pt|11pt|12pt> Standard LaTeX file (size option)]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{A driver for this document}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
+% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the
+% {\sc docstrip} program.
+%
+% \changes{1.0f}{1993/12/07}{Use class ltxdoc document class}
+% \changes{1.0r}{1994/02/28}{Moved driver code in order not to need a
+% separate driver}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We don't want everything to appear in the index
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@Alph,\@alph,\@addtoreset,\@arabic}
+\DoNotIndex{\@badmath,\@centercr,\@cite}
+\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
+\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m,\@minus,\@mkboth}
+\DoNotIndex{\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\roman,\@set@topoint}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\advance,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
+\DoNotIndex{\bullet}
+\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
+\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
+\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
+\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end@dblfloat,\end@float,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
+\DoNotIndex{\fbox}
+\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
+\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\input}
+\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark}
+\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th,\mark,\markboth,\markright}
+\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
+\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
+\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
+\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
+\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright}
+\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand}
+\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rightmark,\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily}
+\DoNotIndex{\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
+\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
+\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
+\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We do want an index, using linenumbers
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use so many \file{docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from the file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\GetFileInfo{classes.drv}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some commonly used abbreviations
+% \changes{v1.2w}{1994/12/01}{Use \cs{newcommand*}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}
+\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}
+\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}
+\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also want the full details.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{classes.dtx}
+\PrintIndex
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1993/11/30}{remove \cs{@in}, made option makeindex
+% a synonym for option makeidx}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1993/11/30}{removed \cs{@minus}, \cs{@plus},
+% \cs{@settopoint}, \cs{@setfontsize}; they are now in the
+% kernel}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1993/11/30}{Added use of \cs{NeedsTeXFormat}}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1993/11/30}{Replaced \cs{bf} with \cs{bfseries};
+% \cs{rm} with \cs{rmfamily}}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1993/11/30}{Made eqaution and eqnarray environments
+% in the fleqn option up to date with latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/08}{Made all lines shorter than 72 characters}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/08}{Made change in eqnarray for the fleqn
+% option, as suggested by Rainer.}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Made the definitions of the font- and
+% size-changing commands use \cs{renew} rather than \cs{new}.
+% Defined the float parameters with \cs{renewcommand} rather than
+% \cs{newcommand}. Corrected some typos in the fleqn option.
+% Replaced two occurrences of -\cs{@secpenalty} by
+% \cs{@secpenalty}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/20}{Added \cs{ProvidesFile} to size files}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/10}{Use \cs{cmd} in change entries}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/01/09}{Removed some typos/bugs}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/01/11}{add the extension to the names of the
+% files}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/01/10}{Changed version numbering; moved leqno
+% and fleqn options to an external file.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/01/19}{Removed code for makeidx option and made
+% it a separate package; removed use of \cs{setlength} from list
+% parameters.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/01/31}{Small documention changes}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/02/16}{Small documention changes}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/03/12}{Removed \cs{typeout} messages}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/04/15}{Inserted forgotten line break}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/03/17}{Added openright option. (LL)}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1994/03/17}{Added the \ldots{}matter commands. (LL)}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/03/17}{Fixed page numbering in titlepage
+% env. (LL)}
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1994/04/11}{Checked the file for long lines and
+% wrapped them when necessary; made a slight implementation
+% modification to the openright and openany options.}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1994/04/28}{Use LaTeX instead of LaTeX2e in messages}
+% \changes{v1.2j}{1994/05/01}{Removed the use of \cs{fileversion}
+% c.s.}
+% \changes{v1.2l}{1994/05/11}{changed some \cs{changes} entries}
+% \changes{v1.2m}{1994/05/12}{Forgot a few entries}
+% \changes{v1.2o}{1994/05/24}{Changed file information}
+% \changes{v1.2p}{1994/05/27}{Moved identification and driver to the
+% front of the file}
+% \changes{v1.2t}{1994/06/22}{Refrased a few sentences to prevent
+% overfull hboxes}
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1994/12/01}{Made the oneside option work for the
+% book class}
+% \changes{v1.2w}{1994/12/01}{Use \cs{newcommand*} for commands with
+% arguments}
+% \changes{v1.2z}{1995/05/16}{Always use \cs{cs} in \cs{changes}
+% entries}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{1995/05/17}{Replaced all \cs{hbox to} by \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \changes{v1.3d}{1995/06/05}{Replaced all \cs{uppercase} by
+% \cs{MakeUppercase}}
+% \changes{v1.3l}{1995/10/20}{Disabled in compatibility mode all
+% options that are new in \LaTeXe.}
+% \changes{v1.3v}{1997/06/16}{Documentation fixes.}
+%
+%
+% \title{Standard Document Classes for \LaTeX{} version 2e\thanks{This
+% file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.}}
+%
+% \author{%
+% Copyright (C) 1992 by Leslie Lamport \and
+% Copyright (C) 1994-97 by Frank Mittelbach \and Johannes Braams
+% }
+% \date{\filedate}
+% \maketitle
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \StopEventually{} ^^A
+%
+% \section{The {\sc docstrip} modules}
+%
+% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
+% {\sc docstrip} in generating the external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% article & produce the documentclass article\\
+% report & produce the documentclass report\\
+% size10 & produce the class option for 10pt\\
+% size11 & produce the class option for 11pt\\
+% size12 & produce the class option for 12pt\\
+% book & produce the documentclass book\\
+% bk10 & produce the book class option for 10pt\\
+% bk11 & produce the book class option for 11pt\\
+% bk12 & produce the book class option for 12pt\\
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \section{Initial Code}
+%
+% In this part we define a few commands that are used later on.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ptsize}
+% This control sequence is used to store the second digit of the
+% pointsize we are typesetting in. So, normally, it's value is one
+% of 0, 1 or 2.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article|report|book>
+\newcommand\@ptsize{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@restonecol}
+% When the document has to printed in two columns, we sometimes
+% have to temporarily switch to one column. This switch is used to
+% remember to switch back.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@restonecol
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@titlepage}
+% A switch to indicate if a titlepage has to be produced. For the
+% article document class the default is not to make a separate
+% titlepage.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@titlepage
+%<article>\@titlepagefalse
+%<!article>\@titlepagetrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@openright}
+% A switch to indicate if chapters must start on a right-hand page.
+% The default for the report class is no; for the book class it's
+% yes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!article>\newif\if@openright
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.3k}{1995/08/27}{Macro \cs{if@openbib} removed}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mainmatter}
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1994/12/01}{Moved the allocation of
+% \cs{if@mainmatter} here}
+%
+% The switch |\if@mainmatter|, only available in the document class
+% book, indicates whether we are processing the main material in
+% the book.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<book>\newif\if@mainmatter \@mainmattertrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Declaration of Options}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}
+%
+% The variables |\paperwidth| and |\paperheight| should reflect the
+% physical paper size after trimming. For desk printer output this
+% is usually the real paper size since there is no post-processing.
+% Classes for real book production will probably add other paper
+% sizes and additionally the production of crop marks for trimming.
+% In compatibility mode, these (and some of the subsequent) options
+% are disabled, as they were not present in \LaTeX 2.09.
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Removed typo, A4 is not 279 mm high}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility\else
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {297mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {210mm}}
+\DeclareOption{a5paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {210mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {148mm}}
+\DeclareOption{b5paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {250mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {176mm}}
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {11in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {8.5in}}
+\DeclareOption{legalpaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {14in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {8.5in}}
+\DeclareOption{executivepaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {10.5in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {7.25in}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{landscape} switches the values of |\paperheight|
+% and |\paperwidth|, assuming the dimensions were given for portrait
+% paper.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{landscape}
+ {\setlength\@tempdima {\paperheight}%
+ \setlength\paperheight {\paperwidth}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {\@tempdima}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Choosing the type size}
+%
+% The type size options are handled by defining |\@ptsize| to contain
+% the last digit of the size in question and branching on |\ifcase|
+% statements. This is done for historical reasons to stay compatible
+% with other packages that use the |\@ptsize| variable to select
+% special actions. It makes the declarations of size options less
+% than 10pt difficult, although one can probably use \texttt{9}
+% and \texttt{8} assuming that a class wont define both
+% \Lopt{8pt} and \Lopt{18pt} options.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \renewcommand\@ptsize{0}
+\else
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{0}}
+\fi
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{1}}
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}
+%
+% For two-sided printing we use the switch |\if@twoside|. In
+% addition we have to set the |\if@mparswitch| to get any margin
+% paragraphs into the outside margin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility\else
+\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse \@mparswitchfalse}
+\fi
+\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue \@mparswitchtrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Draft option}
+%
+% If the user requests \Lopt{draft} we show any overfull boxes.
+% We could probably add some more interesting stuff to this option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}}
+\if@compatibility\else
+\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength\overfullrule{0pt}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Titlepage option}
+% An article usually has no separate titlepage, but the user can
+% request one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{titlepage}{\@titlepagetrue}
+\if@compatibility\else
+\DeclareOption{notitlepage}{\@titlepagefalse}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{openright option}
+% This option determines whether or not a chapter must start on
+% a right-hand page
+% request one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!article>\if@compatibility
+%<book>\@openrighttrue
+%<!article>\else
+%<!article>\DeclareOption{openright}{\@openrighttrue}
+%<!article>\DeclareOption{openany}{\@openrightfalse}
+%<!article>\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Twocolumn printing}
+%
+% Two-column and one-column printing is again realized via a switch.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility\else
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@twocolumnfalse}
+\fi
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@twocolumntrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Equation numbering on the left}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{leqno} can be used to get the equation numbers
+% on the left side of the equation. It loads code which is generated
+% automatically from the kernel files when the format is built.
+% If the equation number does get a special formatting then instead
+% of using the kernel file the class would need to provide the code
+% explicitly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{leqno}{\input{leqno.clo}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Flush left displays}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{fleqn} redefines the displayed math environments
+% in such a way that they come out flush left, with an indentation
+% of |\mathindent| from the prevailing left margin. It loads
+% code which is generated
+% automatically from the kernel files when the format is built.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Corrected some typos. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Open bibliography}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{openbib} produces the ``open'' bibliography
+% style, in which each block starts on a new line, and succeeding
+% lines in a block are indented by |\bibindent|.
+% \changes{v1.3k}{1995/08/27}{openbib option reimplemented}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{openbib}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First some hook into the bibliography environment is filled.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \renewcommand\@openbib@code{%
+ \advance\leftmargin\bibindent
+ \itemindent -\bibindent
+ \listparindent \itemindent
+ \parsep \z@
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In addition the definition of |\newblock| is overwritten.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \renewcommand\newblock{\par}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Executing Options}
+%
+% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
+% variables. Note that the document class `book' always uses two
+% sided printing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,oneside,onecolumn,final}
+%</article>
+%<*report>
+\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,oneside,onecolumn,final,openany}
+%</report>
+%<*book>
+\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twoside,onecolumn,final,openright}
+%</book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code
+% for every option \Lopt{FOO}
+% which is declared and for which the user typed
+% the \Lopt{FOO} option in his
+% |\documentclass| command. For every option \Lopt{BAR} he typed,
+% which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option.
+% All options will be passed as document options to any
+% |\usepackage| command in the document preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now that all the options have been executed we can load the
+% chosen class option file that contains all size dependent code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!book>\input{size1\@ptsize.clo}
+%<book>\input{bk1\@ptsize.clo}
+%</article|report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Loading Packages}
+%
+% The standard class files do not load additional packages.
+%
+%
+% \section{Document Layout}
+% \label{sec:classes:maincode}
+%
+% In this section we are finally dealing with the nasty typographical
+% details.
+%
+% \subsection{Fonts}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ offers the user commands to change the size of the font,
+% relative to the `main' size. Each relative size changing command
+% |\size| executes the command
+% |\@setfontsize||\size|\meta{font-size}\meta{baselineskip} where:
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{font-size}] The absolute size of the font to use from
+% now on.
+%
+% \item[\meta{baselineskip}] The normal value of |\baselineskip|
+% for the size of the font selected. (The actual value will be
+% |\baselinestretch| * \meta{baselineskip}.)
+% \end{description}
+%
+% A number of commands, defined in the \LaTeX{} kernel, shorten the
+% following definitions and are used throughout. They are:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll@{\qquad}ll@{\qquad}ll}
+% \verb=\@vpt= & 5 & \verb=\@vipt= & 6 & \verb=\@viipt= & 7 \\
+% \verb=\@viiipt= & 8 & \verb=\@ixpt= & 9 & \verb=\@xpt= & 10 \\
+% \verb=\@xipt= & 10.95 & \verb=\@xiipt= & 12 & \verb=\@xivpt= & 14.4\\
+% ...
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
+% \begin{macro}{\@normalsize}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/01/31}{\cs{@normalsize} now defined in the
+% kernel}
+%
+% The user level command for the main size is |\normalsize|.
+% Internally \LaTeX{} uses |\@normalsize| when it refers to the
+% main size. |\@normalsize| will be defined to work like
+% |\normalsize| if the latter is redefined from its default
+% definition (that just issues an error message). Otherwise
+% |\@normalsize| simply selects a 10pt/12pt size.
+%
+% The |\normalsize| macro also sets new values for\\
+% |\abovedisplayskip|, |\abovedisplayshortskip| and
+% |\belowdisplayshortskip|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1993/12/07}{\cs{normalsize} doesn't exist, so use
+% \cs{newcommand}}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{\cs{normalsize} is now defined in the
+% kernel, so use \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt|11pt|12pt>
+\renewcommand\normalsize{%
+%<*10pt>
+ \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
+ \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+ \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
+ \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+ \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14.5}%
+ \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+%</12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\belowdisplayskip| is always equal to the
+% |\abovedisplayskip|. The parameters of the first level list are
+% always given by |\@listI|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+ \let\@listi\@listI}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We initially choose the normalsize font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\normalsize
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\small}
+% This is similar to |\normalsize|.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{\cs{small} is now defined in the kernel,
+% so use \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/14}{\cs{small} is no longer defined in the
+% kernel; use \cs{newcommand}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\small{%
+%<*10pt>
+ \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{11}%
+ \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+ \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+ \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \itemsep \parsep}%
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+ \@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
+ \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+ \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+ \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \itemsep \parsep}%
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+ \@setfontsize\small\@xipt{13.6}%
+ \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
+ \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
+ \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \itemsep \parsep}%
+%</12pt>
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
+% This is similar to |\normalsize|.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{\cs{footnotesize} is now defined in the
+% kernel, so use \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/14}{use \cs{newcommand} again}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\footnotesize{%
+%<*10pt>
+ \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5}%
+ \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
+ \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \itemsep \parsep}%
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+ \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
+ \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+ \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+ \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \itemsep \parsep}%
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+ \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt\@xiipt
+ \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
+ \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
+ \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+ \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \itemsep \parsep}%
+%</12pt>
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}
+%</10pt|11pt|12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scriptsize}
+% \begin{macro}{\tiny}
+% \begin{macro}{\large}
+% \begin{macro}{\Large}
+% \begin{macro}{\LARGE}
+% \begin{macro}{\huge}
+% \begin{macro}{\Huge}
+% These are all much simpler than the previous macros, they just
+% select a new fontsize, but leave the parameters for displays and
+% lists alone.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{These are now defined in the kernel,
+% so use \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/14}{use \cs{newcommand} again}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt>
+\newcommand\scriptsize{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt\@viiipt}
+\newcommand\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt\@vipt}
+\newcommand\large{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14}}
+\newcommand\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}}
+\newcommand\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}}
+\newcommand\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25}}
+\newcommand\Huge{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30}}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\newcommand\scriptsize{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}}
+\newcommand\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt\@viipt}
+\newcommand\large{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14}}
+\newcommand\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}}
+\newcommand\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}}
+\newcommand\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25}}
+\newcommand\Huge{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30}}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\newcommand\scriptsize{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}}
+\newcommand\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt\@viipt}
+\newcommand\large{\@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18}}
+\newcommand\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22}}
+\newcommand\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25}}
+\newcommand\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30}}
+\let\Huge=\huge
+%</12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Paragraphing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
+% These parameters control \TeX's behaviour when two lines tend to
+% come too close together.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article|report|book>
+\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}
+\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
+% This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|. The default is
+% to \emph{not} stretch the baselines. Note that if this command
+% doesn't resolve to ``empty'' any \texttt{plus} or \texttt{minus}
+% part in the specification of |\baselineskip| is ignored.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\baselinestretch{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
+% |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
+% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation. The value
+% of |\parindent| depends on whether we are in two column mode.
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/01/12}{\cs{parindent} should be different,
+% depending on the pointsize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\parskip{0\p@ \@plus \p@}
+%</article|report|book>
+%<*10pt|11pt|12pt>
+\if@twocolumn
+ \setlength\parindent{1em}
+\else
+%<10pt> \setlength\parindent{15\p@}
+%<11pt> \setlength\parindent{17\p@}
+%<12pt> \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
+\fi
+%</10pt|11pt|12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% The values for these three parameters are set in the \LaTeX\
+% kernel. They should perhaps vary, according to the size option
+% specified. But as they have always had the same value regardless
+% of the size option we do not change them to stay compatible with
+% both \LaTeX~2.09 and older releases of \LaTeXe.
+% \changes{v1.3n}{1995/10/29}{Added setting the values of
+% \cs{...skipamount}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt|11pt|12pt>
+\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
+\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</10pt|11pt|12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}%
+% The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties
+% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
+% They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|,
+% dependent on their argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article|report|book>
+\@lowpenalty 51
+\@medpenalty 151
+\@highpenalty 301
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
+% These penalties are use to discourage club and widow lines.
+% Because we use their default values we only show them here,
+% commented out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \clubpenalty 150
+% \widowpenalty 150
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
+% Discourage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display
+% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
+% after a display without a penalty. Again the default values are
+% used, therefore we only show them here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \displaywidowpenalty 50
+% \predisplaypenalty 10000
+% \postdisplaypenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
+% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \interlinepenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
+% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/03/12}{Show correct default which is 100}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \brokenpenalty 100
+%</article|report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Page Layout}
+%
+% All margin dimensions are measured from a point one inch from the
+% top and lefthand side of the page.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
+% The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the
+% running head. The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom
+% of the running head and the top of the text. The |\topskip| is
+% the |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page; \LaTeX's output
+% routine will not work properly if it has the value 0pt, so do not
+% do that!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt|11pt|12pt>
+\setlength\headheight{12\p@}
+%<!bk>\setlength\headsep {25\p@}
+%<10pt&bk>\setlength\headsep {.25in}
+%<11pt&bk>\setlength\headsep {.275in}
+%<12pt&bk>\setlength\headsep {.275in}
+%<10pt>\setlength\topskip {10\p@}
+%<11pt>\setlength\topskip {11\p@}
+%<12pt>\setlength\topskip {12\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footskip}
+% The distance from the baseline of the box which contains the
+% running footer to the baseline of last line of text is controlled
+% by the |\footskip|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!bk>\setlength\footskip{30\p@}
+%<10pt&bk>\setlength\footskip{.35in}
+%<11pt&bk>\setlength\footskip{.38in}
+%<12pt&bk>\setlength\footskip{30\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxdepth}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1994/05/06}{Added setting of \cs{maxdepth} and
+% \cs{@maxdepth}}
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{Take setting of
+% \cs{@maxdepth} out again}
+% The \TeX\ primitive register |\maxdepth| has a function that is
+% similar to that of |\topskip|. The register |\@maxdepth| should
+% always contain a copy of |\maxdepth|. This is achieved by setting
+% it internally at |\begin{document}|. In both plain \TeX\ and
+% \LaTeX~2.09 |\maxdepth| had a fixed value of \texttt{4pt}; in
+% native \LaTeX2e\ mode we let the value depend on the typesize. We
+% set it so that |\maxdepth| $+$ |\topskip| $=$ typesize $\times
+% 1.5$. As it happens, in these classes |\topskip| is equal to the
+% typesize, therefore we set |\maxdepth| to half the value of
+% |\topskip|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility \setlength\maxdepth{4\p@} \else
+\setlength\maxdepth{.5\topskip} \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The dimension of text}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
+% When we are in compatibility mode we have to make sure that the
+% dimensions of the printed area are not different from what the
+% user was used to see.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \setlength\textwidth{410\p@}
+ \else
+%<10pt&!bk> \setlength\textwidth{345\p@}
+%<11pt&!bk> \setlength\textwidth{360\p@}
+%<12pt&!bk> \setlength\textwidth{390\p@}
+%<10pt&bk> \setlength\textwidth{4.5in}
+%<11pt&bk> \setlength\textwidth{5in}
+%<12pt&bk> \setlength\textwidth{5in}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we are not in compatibility mode we can set some of the
+% dimensions differently, taking into account the paper size for
+% instance.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First, we calculate the maximum |\textwidth|, which we will allow
+% on the selected paper and store it in |\@tempdima|. Then we store
+% the length of a line with approximately 60--70 characters in
+% |\@tempdimb|. The values given are more or less suitable when
+% Computer Modern fonts are used.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/03/12}{Have old values for width in native mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\@tempdima{\paperwidth}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
+%<10pt> \setlength\@tempdimb{345\p@}
+%<11pt> \setlength\@tempdimb{360\p@}
+%<12pt> \setlength\@tempdimb{390\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now we can set the |\textwidth|, depending on whether we will be
+% setting one or two columns.
+%
+% In two column mode each \emph{column} shouldn't be wider than
+% |\@tempdimb| (which could happen on \textsc{a3} paper for
+% instance).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \ifdim\@tempdima>2\@tempdimb\relax
+ \setlength\textwidth{2\@tempdimb}
+ \else
+ \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In one column mode the text should not be wider than the minimum
+% of the paperwidth (minus 2 inches for the margins) and the
+% maximum length of a line as defined by the number of characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \ifdim\@tempdima>\@tempdimb\relax
+ \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdimb}
+ \else
+ \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here we modify the width of the text a little to be a whole
+% number of points.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility\else
+ \@settopoint\textwidth
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
+% Now that we have computed the width of the text, we have to take
+% care of the height. The |\textheight| is the height of text
+% (including footnotes and figures, excluding running head and
+% foot).
+%
+% First make sure that the compatibility mode gets the same
+% dimensions as we had with \LaTeX2.09. The number of lines was
+% calculated as the floor of the old |\textheight| minus
+% |\topskip|, divided by |\baselineskip| for |\normalsize|. The
+% old value of |\textheight| was 528pt.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+%<10pt&!bk> \setlength\textheight{43\baselineskip}
+%<10pt&bk> \setlength\textheight{41\baselineskip}
+%<11pt> \setlength\textheight{38\baselineskip}
+%<12pt> \setlength\textheight{36\baselineskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Again we compute this, depending on the papersize and depending
+% on the baselineskip that is used, in order to have a whole number
+% of lines on the page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \setlength\@tempdima{\paperheight}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We leave at least a 1 inch margin on the top and the bottom of
+% the page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We also have to leave room for the running headers and footers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima{-1.5in}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then we divide the result by the current |\baselineskip| and
+% store this in the count register |\@tempcnta|, which then
+% contains the number of lines that fit on this page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \divide\@tempdima\baselineskip
+ \@tempcnta=\@tempdima
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% From this we can calculate the height of the text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\textheight{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The first line on the page has a height of |\topskip|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\addtolength\textheight{\topskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Margins}
+%
+% Most of the values of these parameters are now calculated, based
+% on the papersize in use. In the calcluations the |\marginparsep|
+% needs to be taken into account so we give it its value first.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
+% The horizontal space between the main text and marginal notes is
+% determined by |\marginparsep|, the minimum vertical separation
+% between two marginal notes is controlled by |\marginparpush|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twocolumn
+ \setlength\marginparsep {10\p@}
+\else
+%<10pt&!bk> \setlength\marginparsep{11\p@}
+%<11pt&!bk> \setlength\marginparsep{10\p@}
+%<12pt&!bk> \setlength\marginparsep{10\p@}
+%<bk> \setlength\marginparsep{7\p@}
+\fi
+%<10pt|11pt>\setlength\marginparpush{5\p@}
+%<12pt>\setlength\marginparpush{7\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now we can give the values for the other margin parameters. For
+% native \LaTeXe, these are calculated.
+% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
+% First we give the values for the compatibility mode.
+%
+% Values for two-sided printing:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+%<*bk>
+%<10pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {.5in}
+%<11pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {.25in}
+%<12pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {.25in}
+%<10pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {1.5in}
+%<11pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {1.25in}
+%<12pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {1.25in}
+%<10pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {.75in}
+%<11pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {1in}
+%<12pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {1in}
+%</bk>
+%<*!bk>
+ \if@twoside
+%<10pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {44\p@}
+%<11pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {36\p@}
+%<12pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {21\p@}
+%<10pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {82\p@}
+%<11pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {74\p@}
+%<12pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {59\p@}
+%<10pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {107\p@}
+%<11pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {100\p@}
+%<12pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {85\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Values for one-sided printing:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+%<10pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {63\p@}
+%<11pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {54\p@}
+%<12pt> \setlength\oddsidemargin {39.5\p@}
+%<10pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {63\p@}
+%<11pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {54\p@}
+%<12pt> \setlength\evensidemargin {39.5\p@}
+%<10pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {90\p@}
+%<11pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {83\p@}
+%<12pt> \setlength\marginparwidth {68\p@}
+ \fi
+%</!bk>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And values for two column mode:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \setlength\oddsidemargin {30\p@}
+ \setlength\evensidemargin {30\p@}
+ \setlength\marginparwidth {48\p@}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When we are not in compatibility mode we can take the dimensions
+% of the selected paper into account.
+%
+% The values for |\oddsidemargin| and |\marginparwidth| will be set
+% depending on the status of the |\if@twoside|.
+%
+% If |@twoside| is true (which is always the case for book) we make
+% the inner margin smaller than the outer one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \if@twoside
+ \setlength\@tempdima {\paperwidth}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima {-\textwidth}
+ \setlength\oddsidemargin {.4\@tempdima}
+ \addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The width of the margin for text is set to the remainder of the
+% width except for a `real margin' of white space of width 0.4in.
+% A check should perhaps be built in to ensure that the (text)
+% margin width does not get too small!
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/03/12}{New algorithm for \cs{oddsidemargin}}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/03/12}{New algorithm for \cs{marginparwidth}}
+% \changes{v1.2z}{1995/04/14}{Also take \cs{marginparsep} into account
+% here}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\marginparwidth {.6\@tempdima}
+ \addtolength\marginparwidth {-\marginparsep}
+ \addtolength\marginparwidth {-0.4in}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For one-sided printing we center the text on the page, by
+% calculating the difference between |\textwidth| and
+% |\paperwidth|. Half of that difference is than used for
+% the margin (thus |\oddsidemargin| is |1in| less).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \setlength\@tempdima {\paperwidth}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima {-\textwidth}
+ \setlength\oddsidemargin {.5\@tempdima}
+ \addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
+ \setlength\marginparwidth {.5\@tempdima}
+ \addtolength\marginparwidth {-\marginparsep}
+ \addtolength\marginparwidth {-0.4in}
+ \addtolength\marginparwidth {-.4in}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% With the above algorithm the |\marginparwidth| can come out quite
+% large which we may not want.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \marginparwidth >2in
+ \setlength\marginparwidth{2in}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Having done these calculations we make them pt values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@settopoint\oddsidemargin
+ \@settopoint\marginparwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\evensidemargin| can now be computed from the values set
+% above.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/01/11}{Computing of \cs{evensidemargin}
+% should only occur in compatibility mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\evensidemargin {\paperwidth}
+ \addtolength\evensidemargin{-2in}
+ \addtolength\evensidemargin{-\textwidth}
+ \addtolength\evensidemargin{-\oddsidemargin}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Setting |\evensidemargin| to a full point value may produce a
+% small error. However it will lie within the error range a
+% doublesided printer of today's technology can accurately print.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@settopoint\evensidemargin
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
+% The |\topmargin| is the distance between the top of `the
+% printable area'---which is 1 inch below the top of the
+% paper--and the top of the box which contains the running head.
+%
+% It can now be computed from the values set above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+%<!bk> \setlength\topmargin{27pt}
+%<10pt&bk> \setlength\topmargin{.75in}
+%<11pt&bk> \setlength\topmargin{.73in}
+%<12pt&bk> \setlength\topmargin{.73in}
+\else
+ \setlength\topmargin{\paperheight}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-2in}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-\headheight}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-\headsep}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-\textheight}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-\footskip} % this might be wrong!
+% \end{macrocode}
+% By changing the factor in the next line the complete page
+% can be shifted vertically.
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1994/07/13}{Moved rounding of \cs{topmargin} to
+% native mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-.5\topmargin}
+ \@settopoint\topmargin
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
+% |\footnotesep| is the height of the strut placed at the beginning
+% of every footnote. It equals the height of a normal
+% |\footnotesize| strut in this
+% class, thus no extra space occurs between footnotes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<10pt>\setlength\footnotesep{6.65\p@}
+%<11pt>\setlength\footnotesep{7.7\p@}
+%<12pt>\setlength\footnotesep{8.4\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footins}
+% |\skip\footins| is the space between the last line of the main
+% text and the top of the first footnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<10pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{9\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%<11pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%<12pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10.8\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%</10pt|11pt|12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Float placement parameters}
+%
+% All float parameters are given default values in the \LaTeXe{}
+% kernel. For this reason parameters that are not counters
+% need to be set with |\renewcommand|.
+%
+% \paragraph{Limits for the placement of floating objects}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@topnumber}
+% The \Lcount{topnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
+% floats that can appear on the top of a text page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article|report|book>
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topfraction}
+% This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
+% occupied by floats at the top.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} with
+% \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\topfraction{.7}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@bottomnumber}
+% The \Lcount{bottomnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
+% floats that can appear on the bottom of a text page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bottomfraction}
+% This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
+% occupied by floats at the bottom.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} with
+% \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\bottomfraction{.3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@totalnumber}
+% This indicates the maximum number of floats that can appear on
+% any text page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textfraction}
+% This indicates the minimum part of a text page that has to be
+% occupied by text.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} with
+% \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\textfraction{.2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floatpagefraction}
+% This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
+% occupied by floating objects before a `float page' is produced.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} with
+% \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\floatpagefraction{.5}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@dbltopnumber}
+% The \Lcount{dbltopnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
+% two column floats that can appear on the top of a two column text
+% page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dbltopfraction}
+% This indicates the maximum part of a two column text page that
+% can be occupied by two column floats at the top.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} with
+% \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\dbltopfraction{.7}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatpagefraction}
+% This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
+% occupied by two column wide floating objects before a `float
+% page' is produced.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} with
+% \cs{renewcommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\dblfloatpagefraction{.5}
+%</article|report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Floats on a text page}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\textfloatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\intextsep}
+% When a floating object is placed on a page with text, these
+% parameters control the separation between the float and the other
+% objects on the page. These parameters are used for both
+% one-column mode and single-column floats in two-column mode.
+%
+% |\floatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
+% to the top or bottom of the text page.
+%
+% |\textfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
+% at the top or bottom of the page.
+%
+% |\intextsep| is the space between in-text floats and the text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\dbltextfloatsep}
+% When floating objects that span the whole |\textwidth| are placed
+% on a text page when we are in twocolumn mode the separation
+% between the float and the text is controlled by |\dblfloatsep|
+% and |\dbltextfloatsep|.
+%
+% |\dblfloatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
+% to the top or bottom of the text page.
+%
+% |\dbltextfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
+% at the top or bottom of the page.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\dblfloatsep {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+%</12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Floats on their own page or column}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fptop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fpsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fpbot}
+% When floating objects are placed on separate pages the layout of
+% such pages is controlled by these parameters. At the top of the
+% page |\@fptop| amount of stretchable whitespace is inserted, at
+% the bottom of the page we get an |\@fpbot| amount of stretchable
+% whitespace. Between adjacent floats the |\@fpsep| is inserted.
+%
+% These parameters are used for the placement of floating objects
+% in one column mode, or in single column floats in two column
+% mode.
+%
+% Note that at least one of the two parameters |\@fptop| and
+% |\@fpbot| should contain a |plus ...fil| to allow filling the
+% remaining empty space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfptop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpbot}
+% Double column floats in two column mode are handled with similar
+% parameters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+%</12pt>
+%<*article|report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Page Styles}
+%
+% The page style \pstyle{foo} is defined by defining the command
+% |\ps@foo|. This command should make only local definitions.
+% There should be no stray spaces in the definition, since they
+% could lead to mysterious extra spaces in the output (well, that's
+% something that should be always avoided).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@evenhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\@oddhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\@evenfoot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@oddfoot}
+% The |\ps@...| command defines the macros |\@oddhead|,
+% |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|, and |\@evenfoot| to define the running
+% heads and feet---e.g., |\@oddhead| is the macro to produce the
+% contents of the heading box for odd-numbered pages. It is called
+% inside an |\hbox| of width |\textwidth|.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Marking conventions}
+%
+% To make headings determined by the sectioning commands, the page
+% style defines the commands |\chaptermark|, |\sectionmark|,
+% \ldots,\\
+% where |\chaptermark{|\meta{TEXT}|}| is called by
+% |\chapter| to set a mark, and so on.
+%
+% The |\...mark| commands and the |\...head| macros are defined
+% with the help of the following macros. (All the |\...mark|
+% commands should be initialized to no-ops.)
+%
+% \LaTeX{} extends \TeX's |\mark| facility by producing two kinds
+% of marks, a `left' and a `right' mark, using the following
+% commands:
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% |\markboth{|\meta{LEFT}|}{|\meta{RIGHT}|}|: Adds both marks.
+%
+% |\markright{|\meta{RIGHT}|}|: Adds a `right' mark.
+%
+% |\leftmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
+% or |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current `left'
+% mark. |\leftmark| works like \TeX's |\botmark|
+% command.
+%
+% |\rightmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
+% or |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current
+% `right' mark. |\rightmark| works like \TeX's
+% |\firstmark| command.
+% \end{flushleft}
+%
+% The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks
+% `numbered within' left marks---e.g., the left mark is changed by a
+% |\chapter| command and the right mark is changed by a |\section|
+% command. However, it does produce somewhat anomalous results if
+% two |\markboth|'s occur on the same page.
+%
+%
+% Commands like |\tableofcontents| that should set the marks in some
+% page styles use a |\@mkboth| command, which is |\let| by the
+% pagestyle command (|\ps@...|) to |\markboth| for setting the
+% heading or to |\@gobbletwo| to do nothing.
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Defining the page styles}
+% \label{sec:classes:pagestyle}
+%
+% The pagestyles \pstyle{empty} and \pstyle{plain} are defined in
+% \file{latex.dtx}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
+% The definition of the page style \pstyle{headings} has to be
+% different for two sided printing than it is for one sided
+% printing.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twoside
+ \def\ps@headings{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The running feet are empty in this page style, the running head
+% contains the page number and one of the marks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+ \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
+ \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When using this page style, the contents of the running head is
+% determined by the chapter and section titles. So we |\let|
+% |\@mkboth| to |\markboth|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@mkboth\markboth
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For the article document class we define |\sectionmark| to clear
+% the right mark and put the number of the section (when it is
+% numbered) and its title in the left mark. The rightmark is set by
+% |\subsectionmark| to contain the subsection titles.
+%
+% Note the use of |##1| for the parameter of the |\sectionmark|
+% command, which will be defined when |\ps@headings| is executed.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2z}{1995/04/03}{Removed extra dot after \cs{thesection}
+% (PR 1519)}
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1995/05/25}{Replace \cs{hskip}
+% \texttt{1em}\cs{relax} with \cs{quad}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+ \def\sectionmark##1{%
+ \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
+ \thesection\quad
+ \fi
+ ##1}}{}}%
+ \def\subsectionmark##1{%
+ \markright {%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
+ \thesubsection\quad
+ \fi
+ ##1}}}
+%</article>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In the report and book document classes we use the |\chaptermark|
+% and |\sectionmark| macros to fill the running heads.
+%
+% Note the use of |##1| for the parameter of the |\chaptermark|
+% command, which will be defined when |\ps@headings| is executed.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+ \def\chaptermark##1{%
+ \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+%<book> \if@mainmatter
+ \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
+%<book> \fi
+ \fi
+ ##1}}{}}%
+ \def\sectionmark##1{%
+ \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
+ \thesection. \ %
+ \fi
+ ##1}}}}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The definition of |\ps@headings| for one sided printing can be
+% much simpler, because we treat even and odd pages the same.
+% Therefore we don't need to define |\@even...|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \def\ps@headings{%
+ \let\@oddfoot\@empty
+ \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+ \let\@mkboth\markboth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use |\markright| now instead of |\markboth| as we did for two
+% sided printing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+ \def\sectionmark##1{%
+ \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \thesection\quad
+ \fi
+ ##1}}}}
+%</article>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+ \def\chaptermark##1{%
+ \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+%<book> \if@mainmatter
+ \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
+%<book> \fi
+ \fi
+ ##1}}}}
+%</report|book>
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
+% The definition of the page style \pstyle{myheadings} is fairly
+% simple because the user determines the contents of the running
+% head himself by using the |\markboth| and |\markright| commands.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@myheadings{%
+ \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+ \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
+ \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We have to make sure that the marking commands that are used by
+% the chapter and section headings are disabled. We do this
+% |\let|ting them to a macro that gobbles its argument(s).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+%<!article> \let\chaptermark\@gobble
+ \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+%<article> \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Document Markup}
+%
+% \subsection{The title}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title}
+% \begin{macro}{\author}
+% \begin{macro}{\date}
+% These three macros are provided by \file{latex.dtx} to provide
+% information about the title, author(s) and date of the document.
+% The information is stored away in internal control sequences.
+% It is the task of the |\maketitle| command to use the
+% information provided. The definitions of these macros are shown
+% here for information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \newcommand*{\title}[1]{\gdef\@title{#1}}
+% \newcommand*{\author}[1]{\gdef\@author{#1}}
+% \newcommand*{\date}[1]{\gdef\@date{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\date| macro gets today's date by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \date{\today}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+% The definition of |\maketitle| depends on whether a separate
+% title page is made. This is the default for the report and book
+% document classes, but for the article class it is optional.
+%
+% When we are making a title page, we locally redefine
+% |\footnotesize| and |footnoterule| to change the appearance of
+% the footnotes that are produced by the |\thanks| command;
+% these changes affect all footnotes.
+% \changes{v1.3o}{1995/11/02}{(CAR) Make \cs{footnote} always work in
+% title, etc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@titlepage
+ \newcommand\maketitle{\begin{titlepage}%
+ \let\footnotesize\small
+ \let\footnoterule\relax
+ \let \footnote \thanks
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We center the entire title vertically; the centering is set off a
+% little by adding a |\vskip|. (In compatibility mode the pagenumber
+% is set to 0 by the titlepage environment to keep the behaviour
+% of \LaTeX\ 2.09 style files.)
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Removed the setting of the page number,
+% when not in compatibility mode}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/03/17}{Removed setting of page number, now done
+% in titlepage environment}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \null\vfil
+ \vskip 60\p@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we set the title, in a |\LARGE| font; leave a little space
+% and set the author(s) in a |\large| font. We do this inside a
+% tabular environment to get them in a single column.
+% Before the date we leave a little whitespace again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begin{center}%
+ {\LARGE \@title \par}%
+ \vskip 3em%
+ {\large
+ \lineskip .75em%
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+ \@author
+ \end{tabular}\par}%
+ \vskip 1.5em%
+ {\large \@date \par}% % Set date in \large size.
+ \end{center}\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we call |\@thanks| to print the information that goes into
+% the footnote and finish the page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@thanks
+ \vfil\null
+ \end{titlepage}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We reset the \Lcount{footnote} counter, disable |\thanks| and
+% |\maketitle| and save some storage space by emptying the internal
+% information macros.
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{use \cs{let} to save space}
+% \changes{v1.3n}{1995/10/29}{Empty \cs{@date} as well}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+ \global\let\thanks\relax
+ \global\let\maketitle\relax
+ \global\let\@thanks\@empty
+ \global\let\@author\@empty
+ \global\let\@date\@empty
+ \global\let\@title\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After the title is set the declaration commands |\title|, etc.\
+% can vanish.
+% The definition of |\and| makes only sense within the argument of
+% |\author| so this can go as well.
+% \changes{v1.3k}{1995/08/27}{Disable \cs{title} and similar decls}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\title\relax
+ \global\let\author\relax
+ \global\let\date\relax
+ \global\let\and\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the title is not on a page of its own, the layout of the
+% title is a little different. We use symbols to mark the footnotes
+% and we have to deal with two column documents.
+%
+% Therefore we first start a new group to keep changes local. Then
+% we redefine |\thefootnote| to use |\fnsymbol|; and change
+% |\@makefnmark| so that footnotemarks have zero width (to make the
+% centering of the author names look better).
+% \changes{v1.2s}{1994/06/02}{Reset \cs{@makefntext}}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{1995/05/17}{Use \cs{@makefnmark} in definition of
+% \cs{@makefntext}}
+% \changes{v1.3g}{1995/06/26}{Fix definition of \cs{@makefnmark} and
+% \cs{@makefntext} to a) work and b) without using math}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+\newcommand\maketitle{\par
+ \begingroup
+ \renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
+ \def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}%
+ \long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent
+ \hb@xt@1.8em{%
+ \hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}##1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this is a twocolumn document we start a new page in twocolumn
+% mode, with the title set to the full width of the text. The
+% actual printing of the title information is left to
+% |\@maketitle|.
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1994/05/06}{Added check on number of columns in use
+% locally}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \ifnum \col@number=\@ne
+ \@maketitle
+ \else
+ \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When this is not a twocolumn document we just start a new page,
+% prevent floating objects from appearing on the top of this page
+% and print the title information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newpage
+ \global\@topnum\z@ % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
+ \@maketitle
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This page gets a \pstyle{plain} layout. We call |\@thanks| to
+% produce the footnotes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \thispagestyle{plain}\@thanks
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can close the group, reset the \Lcount{footnote} counter,
+% disable |\thanks|, |\maketitle| and |\@maketitle| and save some
+% storage space by emptying the internal information macros.
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{use \cs{let} to save space}
+% \changes{v1.3k}{1995/08/27}{Disable \cs{title} and similar decls}
+% \changes{v1.3n}{1995/10/29}{Empty \cs{@date} as well}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+ \global\let\thanks\relax
+ \global\let\maketitle\relax
+ \global\let\@maketitle\relax
+ \global\let\@thanks\@empty
+ \global\let\@author\@empty
+ \global\let\@date\@empty
+ \global\let\@title\@empty
+ \global\let\title\relax
+ \global\let\author\relax
+ \global\let\date\relax
+ \global\let\and\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
+% This macro takes care of formatting the title information when we
+% have no separate title page.
+%
+% We always start a new page, leave some white space and center the
+% information. The title is set in a |\LARGE| font, the author
+% names and the in a |\large| font.
+% \changes{v1.3o}{1995/11/02}{(CAR) Make \cs{footnote} always work in
+% title, etc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@maketitle{%
+ \newpage
+ \null
+ \vskip 2em%
+ \begin{center}%
+ \let \footnote \thanks
+ {\LARGE \@title \par}%
+ \vskip 1.5em%
+ {\large
+ \lineskip .5em%
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+ \@author
+ \end{tabular}\par}%
+ \vskip 1em%
+ {\large \@date}%
+ \end{center}%
+ \par
+ \vskip 1.5em}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Chapters and Sections}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Building blocks} The definitions in this part of the
+% class file make use of two internal macros, |\@startsection| and
+% |\secdef|. To understand
+% what is going on here, we describe their syntax.
+%
+% The macro |\@startsection| has 6 required arguments, optionally
+% followed by a $*$, an optional argument and a required argument:
+%
+% |\@startsection|\meta{name}\meta{level}\meta{indent}^^A
+% \meta{beforeskip}\meta{afterskip}\meta{style}
+% optional *\\
+% \null\hphantom{\bslash @startsection}^^A
+% |[|\meta{altheading}|]|\meta{heading}
+%
+% It is a generic command to start a section, the arguments have
+% the following meaning:
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{name}] The name of the user level command, e.g.,
+% `section'.
+% \item[\meta{level}] A number, denoting the depth of the section
+% -- e.g., chapter=1, section = 2, etc. A section number
+% will be printed if and only if \meta{level} $<=$ the value
+% of the \Lcount{secnumdepth} counter.
+% \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation of the heading from the left
+% margin
+% \item[\meta{beforeskip}] The absolute value of this argument
+% gives the skip to leave above the heading. If it is
+% negative, then the paragraph indent of the text following
+% the heading is suppressed.
+% \item[\meta{afterskip}] If positive, this gives the skip to leave
+% below the heading, else it gives the skip to leave to the
+% right of a run-in heading.
+% \item[\meta{style}] Commands to set the style of the heading.
+% \item[$*$] When this is missing the heading is numbered and the
+% corresponding counter is incremented.
+% \item[\meta{altheading}] Gives an alternative heading to use in
+% the table of contents and in the running heads. This should
+% be present when the $*$ form is used.
+% \item[\meta{heading}] The heading of the new section.
+% \end{description}
+% A sectioning command is normally defined to |\@startsection| and
+% its first six arguments.
+%
+% The macro |\secdef| can be used when a sectioning command is
+% defined without using |\@startsection|. It has two arguments:
+%
+% |\secdef|\meta{unstarcmds}\meta{starcmds}
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{unstarcmds}] Used for the normal form of the
+% sectioning command.
+% \item[\meta{starcmds}] Used for the $*$-form of the
+% sectioning command.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% You can use |\secdef| as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\chapter { ... \secdef \CMDA \CMDB }
+% \def\CMDA [#1]#2{ ... } % Command to define
+% % \chapter[...]{...}
+% \def\CMDB #1{ ... } % Command to define
+% % \chapter*{...}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Mark commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chaptermark}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraphmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphmark}
+% Default initializations of |\...mark| commands. These commands
+% are used in the definition of the page styles (see
+% section~\ref{sec:classes:pagestyle}) Most of them are already defined by
+% \file{latex.dtx}, so they are only shown here.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!article>\newcommand*\chaptermark[1]{}
+% \newcommand*\sectionmark[1]{}
+% \newcommand*\subsectionmark[1]{}
+% \newcommand*\subsubsectionmark[1]{}
+% \newcommand*\paragraphmark[1]{}
+% \newcommand*\subparagraphmark[1]{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Define Counters}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@secnumdepth}
+% The value of the counter \Lcount{secnumdepth} gives the depth of
+% the highest-level sectioning command that is to produce section
+% numbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<article>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
+%<!article>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@section}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@subparagraph}
+% These counters are used for the section numbers. The macro\\
+% |\newcounter{|\meta{newctr}|}[|\meta{oldctr}|]|\\
+% defines\meta{newctr} to be a counter, which is reset to zero when
+% counter \meta{oldctr} is stepped. Counter \meta{oldctr} must
+% already be defined.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter {part}
+%<article>\newcounter {section}
+%<*report|book>
+\newcounter {chapter}
+\newcounter {section}[chapter]
+%</report|book>
+\newcounter {subsection}[section]
+\newcounter {subsubsection}[subsection]
+\newcounter {paragraph}[subsubsection]
+\newcounter {subparagraph}[paragraph]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thepart}
+% \begin{macro}{\thechapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesubparagraph}
+% For any counter \Lcount{CTR}, |\theCTR| is a macro that defines
+% the printed version of counter \Lcount{CTR}. It is defined in
+% terms of the following macros:
+%
+% |\arabic{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
+% \Lcount{COUNTER} as an arabic numeral.
+%
+% |\roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
+% \Lcount{COUNTER} as a lowercase roman numberal.
+%
+% |\Roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
+% \Lcount{COUNTER} as an uppercase roman numberal.
+%
+% |\alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
+% as a lowercase letter: $1 =$~a, $2 =$~ b, etc.
+%
+% |\Alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
+% as an uppercase letter: $1 =$~A, $2 =$~B, etc.
+%
+% Actually to save space the internal counter repesentations
+% and the commands operating on those are used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand \thepart {\@Roman\c@part}
+%<article>\renewcommand \thesection {\@arabic\c@section}
+%<*report|book>
+\renewcommand \thechapter {\@arabic\c@chapter}
+\renewcommand \thesection {\thechapter.\@arabic\c@section}
+%</report|book>
+\renewcommand\thesubsection {\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}
+\renewcommand\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection .\@arabic\c@subsubsection}
+\renewcommand\theparagraph {\thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph}
+\renewcommand\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapapp}
+% |\@chapapp| is initially defined to be `|\chaptername|'. The
+% |\appendix| command redefines it to be `|\appendixname|'.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<report|book>\newcommand\@chapapp{\chaptername}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Front Matter, Main Matter, and Back Matter}
+%
+% A book contains these three (logical) sections. The switch
+% |\@mainmatter| is true iff we are processing Main Matter. When
+% this switch is false, the |\chapter| command does not print
+% chapter numbers.
+%
+% Here we define the commands that start these sections.
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter}
+% This command starts Roman page numbering and turns off chapter
+% numbering. Since this restarts the page numbering from 1, it
+% should also ensure that a recto page is used.
+% \changes{v1.3r}{1996/05/26}{Make this command react to the option
+% \texttt{openany}}
+% \changes{v1.3y}{1998/05/05}{Two years on: Make this command not
+% react to the option \texttt{openany} as this makes the
+% verso/recto numbering wrong: see pr/2754 for discussion}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*book>
+\newcommand\frontmatter{%
+% \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+% \else
+% \clearpage
+% \fi
+ \@mainmatterfalse
+ \pagenumbering{roman}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter}
+% This command clears the page, starts arabic page numbering and
+% turns on chapter numbering. Since this restarts the page numbering
+% from 1, it should also ensure that a recto page is used.
+% \changes{v1.3r}{1996/05/26}{Make this command react to the option
+% \texttt{openany}}
+% \changes{v1.3y}{1998/05/05}{Two years on: Make this command not
+% react to the option \texttt{openany} as this makes the
+% verso/recto numbering wrong: see pr/2754 for discussion}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\mainmatter{%
+% \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+% \else
+% \clearpage
+% \fi
+ \@mainmattertrue
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\backmatter}
+% This clears the page, turns off chapter numbering and leaves page
+% numbering unchanged.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\backmatter{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \@mainmatterfalse}
+%</book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Parts}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% The command to start a new part of our document.
+%
+% In the article class the definition of |\part| is rather simple;
+% we start a new paragraph, add a little white space, suppress the
+% indentation of the first paragraph and make use of |\secdef|.
+% As in other sectioning commands (cf.\ |\@startsection| in the
+% {\LaTeXe} kernel), we need to check the |@noskipsec| switch and
+% force horizontal mode if it is set.
+% \changes{v1.4a}{1999/01/07}{Check \texttt{@noskipsec} switch and
+% possibly force horizontal mode; see PR/2889.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\newcommand\part{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \addvspace{4ex}%
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@part\@spart}
+%</article>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For the report and book classes we things a bit different.
+%
+% We start a new (righthand) page and use the \pstyle{plain}
+% pagestyle.
+% \changes{v1.3r}{1996/05/26}{Make this command react to the option
+% \texttt{openany}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+\newcommand\part{%
+ \if@openright
+ \cleardoublepage
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we are making a two column document, this will be a one
+% column page. We use |@tempswa| to remember to switch back to two
+% columns.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \onecolumn
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need an empty box to prevent the fil glue from disappearing.
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{Replace \cs{hbox} by \cs{null}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \null\vfil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we use |\secdef| to indicate which commands to use to make
+% the actual heading.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \secdef\@part\@spart}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% This macro does the actual formatting of the title of the part.
+% Again the macro is differently defined for the article document
+% class than for the document classes report and book.
+
+% When \Lcount{secnumdepth} is larger than $-1$ for the
+% document class article, we have a numbered
+% part, otherwise it is unnumbered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\def\@part[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We print the title flush left in the article class.
+% Also we prevent breaking between lines and reset the font.
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1995/05/25}{replace \cs{reset@font} with
+% \cs{normalfont}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When this is a numbered part we have to print the number and the
+% title. The |\nobreak| should prevent a page break here.
+% \changes{v1.4e}{2001/05/24}{Replaced tilde with \cs{nobreakspace}
+% (pr/3310)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \Large\bfseries \partname\nobreakspace\thepart
+ \par\nobreak
+ \fi
+ \huge \bfseries #2%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we empty the mark registers, leave some white space and let
+% |\@afterheading| take care of suppressing the indentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \markboth{}{}\par}%
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip 3ex
+ \@afterheading}
+%</article>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When \Lcount{secnumdepth} is larger than $-2$ for the
+% document class report and book, we have a numbered
+% part, otherwise it is unnumbered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+\def\@part[#1]#2{%
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We empty the mark registers and center the title on the page in the
+% report and book document classes.
+% Also we prevent breaking between lines and reset the font.
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1995/05/25}{replace \cs{reset@font} with
+% \cs{normalfont}}
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{add missing percent}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ {\centering
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When this is a numbered part we have to print the number.
+% \changes{v1.4e}{2001/05/24}{Replaced tilde with \cs{nobreakspace}
+% (pr/3310)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \huge\bfseries \partname\nobreakspace\thepart
+ \par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We leave some space before we print the title and leave the
+% finishing up to |\@endpart|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \vskip 20\p@
+ \fi
+ \Huge \bfseries #2\par}%
+ \@endpart}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% This macro does the actual formatting of the title of the part
+% when the star form of the user command was used. In this case we
+% \emph{never} print a number. Otherwise the formatting is the
+% same.
+%
+% The differences between the definition of this macro in the
+% article document class and in the report and book document
+% classes are similar as they were for |\@part|.
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1995/05/25}{replace \cs{reset@font} with
+% \cs{normalfont}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\def\@spart#1{%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+ \huge \bfseries #1\par}%
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip 3ex
+ \@afterheading}
+%</article>
+%<*report|book>
+\def\@spart#1{%
+ {\centering
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ \normalfont
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par}%
+ \@endpart}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endpart}
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{move docstrip guard to avoid defining
+% \cs{@endpart} in article}
+% This macro finishes the part page, for both |\@part| and
+% |\@spart|.
+%
+% First we fill the current page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+\def\@endpart{\vfil\newpage
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then, when we are in twosided mode and chapters are supposed to
+% be on right hand sides, we produce a completely blank page.
+% \changes{v1.4b}{2000/05/19}{Only add empty page after part if
+% twoside and openright (pr/3155)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twoside
+ \if@openright
+ \null
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \newpage
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When this was a two column document we have to switch back to two
+% column mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@tempswa
+ \twocolumn
+ \fi}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Chapters}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% A chapter should always start on a new page therefore we start by
+% calling |\clearpage| and setting the pagestyle for this page to
+% \pstyle{plain}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+\newcommand\chapter{\if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we prevent floats from appearing at the top of this page
+% because it looks weird to see a floating object above a chapter
+% title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\@topnum\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we suppress the indentation of the first paragraph by
+% setting the switch |\@afterindent| to |false|. We use |\secdef|
+% to specify the macros to use for actually setting the chapter
+% title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@afterindentfalse
+ \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% This macro is called when we have a numbered chapter. When
+% \Lcount{secnumdepth} is larger than $-1$ and, in the book
+% class, |\@mainmatter| is true, we display the chapter
+% number. We also inform the user that a new chapter is about to be
+% typeset by writing a message to the terminal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+%<book> \if@mainmatter
+ \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+ \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter.}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
+ {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}%
+%<*book>
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+ \fi
+%</book>
+ \else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After having written an entry to the table of contents we store
+% the (alternative) title of this chapter with |\chaptermark| and
+% add some white space to the lists of figures and tables.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \chaptermark{#1}%
+ \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+ \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we call upon |\@makechapterhead| to format the actual
+% chapter title. We have to do this in a special way when we are in
+% twocolumn mode in order to have the chapter title use the entire
+% |\textwidth|. In one column mode we call |\@afterheading| which
+% takes care of suppressing the indentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+ \else
+ \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
+% The macro above uses |\@makechapterhead|\meta{text} to format the
+% heading of the chapter.
+%
+% We begin by leaving some white space. The we open a group in
+% which we have a paragraph indent of 0pt, and in which we have the
+% text set ragged right. We also reset the font.
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1995/05/25}{replace \cs{reset@font} with
+% \cs{normalfont}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace*{50\p@}%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we check whether the number of the chapter has to be printed.
+% If so we leave some whitespace between the chapternumber and its
+% title.
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1994/11/30}{Added a \cs{nobreak} to prevent a
+% pagebreak between the chapternumber and the chaptertitle}
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{replace braces by \cs{space}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+%<book> \if@mainmatter
+ \huge\bfseries \@chapapp\space \thechapter
+ \par\nobreak
+ \vskip 20\p@
+%<book> \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we set the title in a large bold font. We prevent a pagebreak
+% from occuring in the middle of or after the title. Finally we
+% leave some whitespace before the text begins.
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1994/11/30}{Added \cs{interlinepenalty}\cs{@M} to
+% prevent a pagebreak in the middle of a title}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 40\p@
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% This macro is called when we have an unnumbered chapter. It is
+% much simpler than |\@chapter| because it only needs to typeset
+% the chapter title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@schapter#1{\if@twocolumn
+ \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
+ \else
+ \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+ \@afterheading
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makeschapterhead}
+% The macro above uses |\@makeschapterhead|\meta{text}to format
+% the heading of the chapter. It is similar to |\@makechapterhead|
+% except that it never has to print a chapter number.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1994/11/30}{Added \cs{interlinepenalty}\cs{@M} to
+% prevent a pagebreak in the middle of a title}
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1995/05/25}{replace \cs{reset@font} with
+% \cs{normalfont}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+ \vspace*{50\p@}%
+ {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+ \normalfont
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \Huge \bfseries #1\par\nobreak
+ \vskip 40\p@
+ }}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Lower level headings}
+%
+% These commands all make use of |\@startsection|.
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% This gives a normal heading with white space above and below the
+% heading, the title set in |\Large\bfseries|, and no indentation
+% on the first paragraph.
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1995/05/25}{replace \cs{reset@font} with
+% \cs{normalfont}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\section{\@startsection {section}{1}{\z@}%
+ {-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {2.3ex \@plus.2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\Large\bfseries}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% This gives a normal heading with white space above and below the
+% heading, the title set in |\large\bfseries|, and no indentation
+% on the first paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+ {-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\large\bfseries}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% This gives a normal heading with white space above and below the
+% heading, the title set in |\normalsize\bfseries|, and no
+% indentation on the first paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+ {-3.25ex\@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}%
+ {1.5ex \@plus .2ex}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% This gives a run-in heading with white space above and to the
+% right of the heading, the title set in |\normalsize\bfseries|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus.2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% This gives an indented run-in heading with white space above and
+% to the right of the heading, the title set in
+% |\normalsize\bfseries|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}{\parindent}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Lists}
+%
+% \subsubsection{General List Parameters}
+%
+% The following commands are used to set the default values for the list
+% environment's parameters. See the \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation
+% of the meanings of the parameters. Defaults for the list
+% environment are set as follows. First, |\rightmargin|,
+% |\listparindent| and |\itemindent| are set to 0pt. Then, for a Kth
+% level list, the command |\@listK| is called, where `K' denotes `i',
+% '`i', ... , `vi'. (I.e., |\@listiii| is called for a third-level
+% list.) By convention, |\@listK| should set |\leftmargin| to
+% |\leftmarginK|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargini}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginvi}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/01/12}{Use em instead of pt to remain
+% compatible with old styles}
+% \changes{v1.3q}{1995/12/20}{Temporary(?) fix: revert to setting
+% \cs{leftmargin} at outer level}
+%
+% When we are in two column mode some of the margins are set somewhat
+% smaller.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twocolumn
+ \setlength\leftmargini {2em}
+\else
+ \setlength\leftmargini {2.5em}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Until the whole of the parameter setting in these files is
+% rationalised, we need to set the value of |\leftmargin| at this
+% outer level.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\leftmargin \leftmargini
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following three are calculated so that they are larger than
+% the sum of |\labelsep| and the width of the default labels (which
+% are `(m)', `vii.' and `M.').
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\leftmarginii {2.2em}
+\setlength\leftmarginiii {1.87em}
+\setlength\leftmarginiv {1.7em}
+\if@twocolumn
+ \setlength\leftmarginv {.5em}
+ \setlength\leftmarginvi {.5em}
+\else
+ \setlength\leftmarginv {1em}
+ \setlength\leftmarginvi {1em}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelwidth}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/01/12}{Use em instead of pt to remain
+% compatible with old styles}
+% |\labelsep| is the distance between the label and the text of an
+% item; |\labelwidth| is the width of the label.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength \labelsep {.5em}
+\setlength \labelwidth{\leftmargini}
+\addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partopsep}
+% When the user leaves a blank line before the environment an extra
+% vertical space of |\partopsep| is inserted, in addition to
+% |\parskip| and |\topsep|.
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/01/12}{\cs{partopsep} should be different,
+% depending on the pointsize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</article|report|book>
+%<10pt>\setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
+%<11pt>\setlength\partopsep{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
+%<12pt>\setlength\partopsep{3\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@beginparpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endparpenalty}
+% These penalties are inserted before and after a list or paragraph
+% environment. They are set to a bonus value to encourage page
+% breaking at these points.
+% \begin{macro}{\@itempenalty}
+% This penalty is inserted between list items.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article|report|book>
+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
+\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
+\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty
+%</article|report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listI}
+% |\@listi| defines the values of
+% |\leftmargin|, |\parsep|, |\topsep|, |\itemsep|, etc.\ for the
+% lists that appear on top-level. Its definition is modified by the
+% font-size commands (eg within |\small| the list parameters get
+% ``smaller'' values).
+%
+% For this reason \@listI is defined to hold a saved copy of \@listi
+% so that |\normalsize| can switch all parameters back.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*10pt|11pt|12pt>
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+%<*10pt>
+ \parsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \topsep 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+ \itemsep4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@}
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+ \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
+ \itemsep4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@}
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+ \parsep 5\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \topsep 10\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
+ \itemsep5\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@}
+%</12pt>
+\let\@listI\@listi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We initialise the parameters although strictly speaking that
+% is not necessary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@listi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listvi}
+% Here are the same macros for the higher level lists. Note that
+% they don't have saved versions and are not modified by the font
+% size commands. In other words this class assumes that nested
+% lists only appear in |\normalsize|, i.e.\ the main document size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listii {\leftmargin\leftmarginii
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginii
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+%<*10pt>
+ \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+%</10pt>
+%<*11pt>
+ \topsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+%</11pt>
+%<*12pt>
+ \topsep 5\p@ \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
+ \parsep 2.5\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+%</12pt>
+ \itemsep \parsep}
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+%<10pt> \topsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@\@minus\p@
+%<11pt> \topsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@\@minus\p@
+%<12pt> \topsep 2.5\p@\@plus\p@\@minus\p@
+ \parsep \z@
+ \partopsep \p@ \@plus\z@ \@minus\p@
+ \itemsep \topsep}
+\def\@listiv {\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+\def\@listv {\leftmargin\leftmarginv
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginv
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+\def\@listvi {\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+%</10pt|11pt|12pt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Enumerate}
+%
+% The enumerate environment uses four counters: \Lcount{enumi},
+% \Lcount{enumii}, \Lcount{enumiii} and \Lcount{enumiv}, where
+% \Lcount{enumN} controls the numbering of the Nth level
+% enumeration.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
+% The counters are already defined in \file{latex.dtx}, but their
+% representation is changed here.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article|report|book>
+\renewcommand\theenumi{\@arabic\c@enumi}
+\renewcommand\theenumii{\@alph\c@enumii}
+\renewcommand\theenumiii{\@roman\c@enumiii}
+\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiv}
+% The label for each item is generated by the commands\\
+% |\labelenumi| \ldots\ |\labelenumiv|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
+\newcommand\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
+\newcommand\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
+\newcommand\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiv}
+% The expansion of |\p@enumN||\theenumN| defines the output of a
+% |\ref| command when referencing an item of the Nth level of an
+% enumerated list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+\renewcommand\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\renewcommand\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemi}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemii}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1994/05/06}{Inserted \cs{normalfont}}
+% \changes{v1.3s}{1996/08/24}{Replaced -{}- with \cs{textendash}}
+% \changes{v1.3u}{1996/10/31}{Changed to \cs{textbullet},
+% \cs{textasteriskcentered} and \cs{textperiodcentered}}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiv}
+% Itemization is controlled by four commands: |\labelitemi|,
+% |\labelitemii|, |\labelitemiii|, and |\labelitemiv|, which define
+% the labels of thevarious itemization levels: the symbols used are
+% bullet, bold en-dash, centered asterisk and centred dot.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\labelitemi{\textbullet}
+\newcommand\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries \textendash}
+\newcommand\labelitemiii{\textasteriskcentered}
+\newcommand\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Description}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{description}
+% The description environment is defined here -- while the itemize
+% and enumerate environments are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{description}
+ {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+ \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel}
+% To change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
+% |\descriptionlabel|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1994/05/06}{Inserted \cs{normalfont}}
+% \changes{v1.2y}{1995/01/31}{made command short}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
+ \normalfont\bfseries #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Defining new environments}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Abstract}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{abstract}
+% When we are producing a separate titlepage we also put the
+% abstract on a page of its own. It will be centred vertically on
+% the page.
+%
+% Note that this environment is not defined for books.
+% \changes{v1.3e}{1995/06/19}{Added setting of \cs{@endparpenalty}
+% to avoid page break after abstract heading.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.3m}{1995/10/23}{Added setting of \cs{beginparpenalty} to
+% discourage page break before abstract heading.}
+%<*article|report>
+\if@titlepage
+ \newenvironment{abstract}{%
+ \titlepage
+ \null\vfil
+ \@beginparpenalty\@lowpenalty
+ \begin{center}%
+ \bfseries \abstractname
+ \@endparpenalty\@M
+ \end{center}}%
+ {\par\vfil\null\endtitlepage}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we are not making a separate titlepage --the default for the
+% article document class-- we have to check if we are in twocolumn
+% mode. In that case the abstract is as a |\section*|, otherwise
+% the quotation environment is used to typeset the abstract.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \newenvironment{abstract}{%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \section*{\abstractname}%
+ \else
+ \small
+ \begin{center}%
+ {\bfseries \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}%
+ \end{center}%
+ \quotation
+ \fi}
+ {\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi}
+\fi
+%</article|report>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Verse}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{verse}
+% The verse environment is defined by making clever use of the
+% list environment's parameters. The user types |\\| to end a line.
+% This is implemented by |\let|'ing |\\| equal |\@centercr|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with
+% \cs{relax}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{verse}
+ {\let\\\@centercr
+ \list{}{\itemsep \z@
+ \itemindent -1.5em%
+ \listparindent\itemindent
+ \rightmargin \leftmargin
+ \advance\leftmargin 1.5em}%
+ \item\relax}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Quotation}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quotation}
+% The quotation environment is also defined by making clever use of
+% the list environment's parameters. The lines in the environment
+% are set smaller than |\textwidth|. The first line of a paragraph
+% inside this environment is indented.
+%
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with
+% \cs{relax}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quotation}
+ {\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em%
+ \itemindent \listparindent
+ \rightmargin \leftmargin
+ \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}%
+ \item\relax}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Quote}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quote}
+% The quote environment is like the quotation environment except
+% that paragraphs are not indented.
+%
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{stop \cs{item} scanning for [ with
+% \cs{relax}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quote}
+ {\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
+ \item\relax}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Theorem}
+%
+% This document class does not define it's own theorem environments,
+% the defaults, supplied by \file{latex.dtx} are available.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Titlepage}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{titlepage}
+% In the normal environments, the titlepage environment does nothing
+% but start and end a page, and inhibit page numbers. In the report
+% style, it also resets the page number to one, and then sets it
+% back to one at the end. In compatibility mode, it sets the
+% page number to zero. This is incorrect since it results in using
+% the page parameters for a right-hand page but it is the way it was.
+% In two-column style, it still makes a
+% one-column page.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Moved the setting of
+% \cs{@restonecolfalse}}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/03/17}{page :!= 0 only in compatibility mode
+% (LL)}
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1994/04/11}{Moved \cs{cleardoublepage} inside
+% definition of titlepage environment}
+% \changes{v1.3i}{1995/08/08}{New implementation with support for
+% twoside and openright option}
+%
+% First we do give the definition for compatibility mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+\newenvironment{titlepage}
+ {%
+%<book> \cleardoublepage
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \else
+ \@restonecolfalse\newpage
+ \fi
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \setcounter{page}\z@
+ }%
+ {\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And here is the one for native \LaTeXe{}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+\newenvironment{titlepage}
+ {%
+%<book> \cleardoublepage
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \else
+ \@restonecolfalse\newpage
+ \fi
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \setcounter{page}\@ne
+ }%
+ {\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we are not in two-side mode the first page after the title page
+% should also get page number 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@twoside\else
+ \setcounter{page}\@ne
+ \fi
+ }
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Appendix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+%
+% The |\appendix| command is not really an environment, it is a
+% macro that makes some changes in the way things are done.
+%
+% In the article document class the |\appendix| command must do the
+% following:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item reset the section and subsection counters to zero,
+% \item redefine |\thesection| to produce alphabetic appendix
+% numbers. This redefinition is done globally to ensure that it
+% survives even if |\appendix| is issued within an environment such
+% as \texttt{multicols}.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \changes{1.3z}{1998/09/19}{Redefine \cs{thesection} globally (pr/2862)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\newcommand\appendix{\par
+ \setcounter{section}{0}%
+ \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
+ \gdef\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}}
+%</article>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In the report and book document classes the |\appendix| command
+% must do the following:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item reset the chapter and section counters to zero,
+% \item set |\@chapapp| to |\appendixname| (for messages),
+% \item redefine the chapter counter to produce appendix numbers,
+% \item possibly redefine the |\chapter| command if appendix titles
+% and headings are to look different from chapter titles and
+% headings. This redefinition is done globally to ensure that it
+% survives even if |\appendix| is issued within an environment such
+% as \texttt{multicols}.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \changes{1.3z}{1998/09/19}{Redefine \cs{thechapter} and
+% \cs{@chapapp} globally (pr/2862)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+\newcommand\appendix{\par
+ \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
+ \setcounter{section}{0}%
+ \gdef\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
+ \gdef\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Setting parameters for existing environments}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Array and tabular}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arraycolsep}
+% The columns in an array environment are separated by
+% 2|\arraycolsep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arraycolsep{5\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabcolsep}
+% The columns in an tabular environment are separated by
+% 2|\tabcolsep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\tabcolsep{6\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulewidth}
+% The width of rules in the array and tabular environments is given
+% by\\ |\arrayrulewidth|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.4\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesep}
+% The space between adjacent rules in the array and tabular
+% environments is given by |\doublerulesep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\doublerulesep{2\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Tabbing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabbingsep}
+% This controls the space that the |\'| command puts in. (See
+% \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Minipage}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
+% The macro |\@minipagerestore| is called upon entry to a minipage
+% environment to set up things that are to be handled differently
+% inside a minipage environment. In the current styles, it does
+% nothing.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootins}
+% Minipages have their own footnotes; |\skip||\@mpfootins| plays
+% same r\^ole for footnotes in a minipage as |\skip||\footins| does
+% for ordinary footnotes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Framed boxes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxsep}
+% The space left by |\fbox| and |\framebox| between the box and the
+% text in it.
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxrule}
+% The width of the rules in the box made by |\fbox| and |\framebox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\fboxsep{3\p@}
+\setlength\fboxrule{.4\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Equation and eqnarray}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
+% When within chapters, the equation counter will be reset at
+% the beginning of a new chapter and the equation number will
+% be prefixed by the chapter number.
+% \changes{v1.3u}{1996/10/31}{Added test for non-zero chapter number}
+%
+% This code must follow the |\chapter| definition or, more exactly,
+% the definition of the chapter counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<article>\renewcommand \theequation {\@arabic\c@equation}
+%<*report|book>
+\@addtoreset {equation}{chapter}
+\renewcommand\theequation
+ {\ifnum \c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@equation}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\jot}
+% |\jot| is the extra space added between lines of an eqnarray
+% environment. The default value is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \setlength\jot{3pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
+% The macro |\@eqnnum| defines how equation numbers are to appear in
+% equations. Again the default is used.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@eqnnum{(\theequation)}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Floating objects}
+%
+% The file \file{latex.dtx} only defines a number of tools with
+% which floating objects can be defined. This is done in the
+% document class. It needs to define the following macros for each
+% floating object of type \texttt{TYPE} (e.g., \texttt{TYPE} =
+% figure).
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash fps@TYPE}]
+% The default placement specifier for floats of type
+% \texttt{TYPE}.
+%
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash ftype@TYPE}]
+% The type number for floats of type \texttt{TYPE}. Each
+% \texttt{TYPE} has associated a unique positive \texttt
+% {TYPE} number, which is a power of two. E.g., figures might
+% have type number 1, tables type number 2, programs type
+% number 4, etc.
+%
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash ext@TYPE}]
+% The file extension indicating the file on which the contents
+% list for float type \texttt{TYPE} is stored. For example,
+% |\ext@figure| = `lof'.
+%
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash fnum@TYPE}]
+% A macro to generate the figure number for a caption. For
+% example, |\fnum@TYPE| == `Figure |\thefigure|'.
+%
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash @makecaption}{\meta{num}}{\meta{text}}]
+% A macro to make a caption, with \meta{num} the value produced
+% by |\fnum@...| and \meta{text} the text of the caption. It
+% can assume it's in a |\parbox| of the appropriate width.
+% This will be used for \emph{all} floating objects.
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+% The actual environment that implements a floating object such as
+% a figure is defined using the macros |\@float| and |\end@float|,
+% which are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
+%
+% An environment that implements a single column floating object is
+% started with |\@float{|\texttt{TYPE}|}[|\meta{placement}|]| of type
+% \texttt{TYPE} with \meta{placement} as the placement specifier.
+% The default value of \meta{PLACEMENT} is defined by |\fps@TYPE|.
+%
+% The environment is ended by |\end@float|. E.g., |\figure| ==
+% |\@float|{figure}, |\endfigure| == |\end@float|.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Figure}
+%
+% Here is the implementation of the figure environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@figure}
+% First we have to allocate a counter to number the figures.
+%
+% In the report and book document classes figures within chapters are
+% numbered per chapter.
+% \changes{v1.3u}{1996/10/31}{Added test for non-zero chapter number}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\newcounter{figure}
+\renewcommand \thefigure {\@arabic\c@figure}
+%</article>
+%<*report|book>
+\newcounter{figure}[chapter]
+\renewcommand \thefigure
+ {\ifnum \c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@figure}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\ftype@figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\ext@figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\num@figure}
+% Here are the parameters for the floating objects of type `figure'.
+% \changes{v1.4e}{2001/05/24}{Replaced tilde with \cs{nobreakspace}
+% (pr/3310)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}
+\def\ftype@figure{1}
+\def\ext@figure{lof}
+\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\nobreakspace\thefigure}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{figure}
+% \begin{environment}{figure*}
+% And the definition of the actual environment. The form with the
+% |*| is used for double column figures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{figure}
+ {\@float{figure}}
+ {\end@float}
+\newenvironment{figure*}
+ {\@dblfloat{figure}}
+ {\end@dblfloat}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table}
+%
+% Here is the implementation of the table environment. It is very
+% much the same as the figure environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@table}
+% First we have to allocate a counter to number the tables.
+%
+% In the report and book document classes tables within chapters are
+% numbered per chapter.
+% \changes{v1.3u}{1996/10/31}{Added test for non-zero chapter number}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\newcounter{table}
+\renewcommand\thetable{\@arabic\c@table}
+%</article>
+%<*report|book>
+\newcounter{table}[chapter]
+\renewcommand \thetable
+ {\ifnum \c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@table}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@table}
+% \begin{macro}{\ftype@table}
+% \begin{macro}{\ext@table}
+% \begin{macro}{\num@table}
+% Here are the parameters for the floating objects of type `table'.
+% \changes{v1.4e}{2001/05/24}{Replaced tilde with \cs{nobreakspace}
+% (pr/3310)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fps@table{tbp}
+\def\ftype@table{2}
+\def\ext@table{lot}
+\def\fnum@table{\tablename\nobreakspace\thetable}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{table}
+% \begin{environment}{table*}
+% And the definition of the actual environment. The form with the
+% |*| is used for double column tables.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{table}
+ {\@float{table}}
+ {\end@float}
+\newenvironment{table*}
+ {\@dblfloat{table}}
+ {\end@dblfloat}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Captions}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
+% The |\caption| command calls |\@makecaption| to format the
+% caption of floating objects. It gets two arguments,
+% \meta{number}, the number of the floating object and \meta{text},
+% the text of the caption. Usually \meta{number} contains a string
+% such as `Figure 3.2'. The macro can assume it is called inside a
+% |\parbox| of right width, with |\normalsize|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abovecaptionskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\belowcaptionskip}
+% These lengths contain the amount of white space to leave above
+% and below the caption.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\abovecaptionskip
+\newlength\belowcaptionskip
+\setlength\abovecaptionskip{10\p@}
+\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The definition of this macro is |\long| in order to allow more
+% then one paragraph in a caption.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+ \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We want to see if the caption fits on one line on the page,
+% therefore we first typeset it in a temporary box.
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1994/05/29}{Use \cs{sbox}\cs{@tempboxa} instead of
+% \cs{setbox}\cs{@tempboxa}\cs{hbox} to make this colour safe}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \sbox\@tempboxa{#1: #2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We can the measure its width. It that is larger than the current
+% |\hsize| we typeset the caption as an ordinary paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
+ #1: #2\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the caption fits, we center it. Because this uses an |\hbox|
+% directly in vertical mode, it does not execute the |\everypar|
+% tokens; the only thing that could be needed here is resetting the
+% `minipage flag' so we do this explicitly.
+% \changes{v1.2x}{1994/12/09}{Due to a change in the way floats are
+% handled we need to set the \cs{if@minipage} switch to false}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \global \@minipagefalse
+ \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+ \fi
+ \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Font changing}
+%
+% Here we supply the declarative font changing commands that were
+% common in \LaTeX\ version 2.09 and earlier. These commands work
+% in text mode \emph{and} in math mode. They are provided for
+% compatibility, but one should start using the |\text...| and
+% |\math...| commands instead. These commands are defined using
+% |\DeclareTextFontCommand|, a command with three arguments: the
+% user command to be defined; \LaTeX\ commands to execute in text
+% mode and \LaTeX\ commands to execute in math mode.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/12}{Distinguished between compatibility and
+% `normal' mode for the font changing commands.}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{These are now defined in the kernel, so
+% use \cs{@renewfontswitch}. Compatibility mode defines
+% \cs{@renewfontswitch} to do nothing, so we don't need to check
+% for compatibility mode any more.}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/20}{Added \cs{normalfont} back in the
+% definitions of \cs{rm} etc. as this should be the default
+% behaviour}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/14}{\cs{@renewfontswitch} has become
+% \cs{DeclareOldFontCommand}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rm}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/08}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\tt}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/08}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\sf}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/08}{Macro added}
+%
+% The commands to change the family. When in compatibility mode we
+% select the `default' font first, to get \LaTeX2.09 behviour.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bf}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/08}{Macro added}
+% The command to change to the bold series. One should use
+% |\mdseries| to explicitly switch back to medium series.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sl}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/08}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1994/04/24}{Added warning if used in math mode}
+% \begin{macro}{\it}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/08}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\sc}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/08}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1994/04/24}{Added warning if used in math mode}
+%
+% And the commands to change the shape of the font. The slanted and
+% small caps shapes are not available by default as math alphabets,
+% so those changes do nothing in math mode. However, we do warn the
+% user that the selection will not have any effect.One should use
+% |\upshape| to explicitly change back to the upright shape.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cal}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/12}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\mit}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/12}{Macro added}
+%
+% The commands |\cal| and |\mit| should only be used in math mode,
+% outside math mode they have no effect. Currently the New Font
+% Selection Scheme defines these commands to generate warning
+% messages. Therefore we have to define them `by hand'.
+% \changes{v1.2w}{1994/12/01}{Now define \cs{cal} and \cs{mit} using
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand*}}
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{Remove surplus braces}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Cross Referencing}
+% \subsection{Table of Contents, etc.}
+%
+% A |\section| command writes a
+% |\contentsline{section}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| command
+% on the \file{.toc} file, where \meta{title} contains the
+% contents of the entry and \meta{page} is the page number. If
+% sections are being numbered, then \meta{title} will be of the
+% form |\numberline{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{heading}|}| where
+% \meta{num} is the number produced by |\thesection|. Other
+% sectioning commands work similarly.
+%
+% A |\caption| command in a `figure' environment writes
+%
+% |\contentsline{figure}{\numberline{|\meta{num}|}{|%
+% \meta{caption}|}}{|\meta{page}|}|
+%
+% on the .\file{lof} file, where \meta{num} is the number produced
+% by |\thefigure| and \meta{caption} is the figure caption. It
+% works similarly for a `table' environment.
+%
+% The command |\contentsline{|\meta{name}|}| expands to
+% |\l@|\meta{name}. So, to specify the table of contents, we must
+% define |\l@chapter|, |\l@section|, |\l@subsection|, ... ; to
+% specify the list of figures, we must define |\l@figure|; and so
+% on. Most of these can be defined with the |\@dottedtocline|
+% command, which works as follows.
+%
+% |\@dottedtocline{|\meta{level}|}{|\meta{indent}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{numwidth}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{level}] An entry is produced only if\meta{ level}
+% $<=$ value of the \Lcount{tocdepth} counter. Note,
+% |\chapter| is level 0, |\section| is level 1, etc.
+% \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation from the outer left margin
+% of the start of the contents line.
+% \item[\meta{numwidth}] The width of a box in which the section
+% number is to go, if \meta{title} includes a |\numberline|
+% command.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
+% This command uses the following three parameters, which are set
+% with a |\newcommand| (so em's can be used to make them depend upon
+% the font).
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash @pnumwidth}] The width of a box in which the
+% page number is put.
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1994/10/29}{Changed documentation from $!>$ or $!=$ to
+% $\ge$}
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash @tocrmarg}] The right margin for multiple
+% line entries. One wants |\@tocrmarg| $\ge$ |\@pnumwidth|
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash @dotsep}] Separation between dots, in mu
+% units. Should be defined as a number like 2 or 1.7
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\newcommand\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
+\newcommand\@dotsep{4.5}
+%<article>\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+%<!article>\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% This macro is used to request that \LaTeX{} produces a table of
+% contents. In the report and book document classes the tables of
+% contents, figures etc. are always set in single-column style.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Moved the setting of
+% \cs{@restonecolfalse}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\tableofcontents{%
+%<*report|book>
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \else
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The title is set using the |\chapter*| command, making sure that
+% the running head --if one is required-- contains the right
+% information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \chapter*{\contentsname
+%</report|book>
+%<article> \section*{\contentsname
+ \@mkboth{%
+ \MakeUppercase\contentsname}{\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The the actual table of contents is made by calling
+% |\@starttoc{toc}|. After that we restore twocolumn mode if
+% necessary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@starttoc{toc}%
+%<!article> \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
+% Each sectioning command needs an additional macro to format its
+% entry in the table of contents, as described above. The macro for
+% the entry for parts is defined in a special way.
+%
+% First we make sure that if a pagebreak should occur, it occurs
+% \emph{before} this entry. Also a little whitespace is added and a
+% group begun to keep changes local.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced -\cs{@secpenalty} by
+% \cs{@secpenalty}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1994/04/28}{Don't print a toc line when the tocdepth
+% counter is less then -1}
+% \changes{v1.3b}{1995/05/23}{Added missing braces around argument
+% to \cs{addpenalty}.}
+% \changes{v1.3x}{1997/10/10}{Removed setting of \cs{@tempdima} as
+% this macro does not use \cs{numberline} to set the toc line.}
+% \changes{v1.4a}{1998/10/12}{we should use \cs{@tocrmarg}; see PR/2881.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\l@part[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
+%<article> \addpenalty\@secpenalty
+%<!article> \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro |\numberline| requires that the width of the box that
+% holds the part number is stored in \LaTeX's scratch register
+% |\@tempdima|. Therefore we initialize it there even though we do
+% not use |\numberline| internally---the value used is quite large
+% so that something like |\numberline{VIII}| would still work.
+% \changes{v1.4d}{2001/04/21}{Initialize \cs{@tempdima} to some
+% sensible value (pr/3327)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We set |\parindent| to 0pt and use |\rightskip| to leave
+% enough room for the pagenumbers.\footnote{^^A
+% We should really set \cs{rightskip} to \cs{@tocrmarg} instead
+% of \cs{@pnumwidth} (no version of {\LaTeX} ever did this),
+% otherwise the \cs{rightskip} is too small.
+% Unfortunately this can't be changed in {\LaTeXe} as we don't
+% want to create different versions of {\LaTeXe} which produce
+% different typset output unless this is absolutely necessary;
+% instead we suspend it for \LaTeX3.}
+% To prevent overfull box messages the |\parfillskip| is set to a
+% negative value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can set the entry, in a large bold font. We make sure to
+% leave vertical mode, set the part title and add the pagenumber,
+% set flush right.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\leavevmode
+ \large \bfseries #1\hfil \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Prevent a pagebreak immediately after this entry, but use
+% |\everypar| to reset the |\if@nobreak| switch. Finally we close
+% the group.
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{Add missing percent}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \nobreak
+%<article> \if@compatibility
+ \global\@nobreaktrue
+ \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
+%<article> \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
+% This macro formats the entries in the table of contents for
+% chapters. It is very similar to |\l@part|
+%
+% First we make sure that if a pagebreak should occur, it occurs
+% \emph{before} this entry. Also a little whitespace is added and a
+% group begun to keep changes local.
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1994/04/28}{Don't print a toc line when the tocdepth
+% counter is less than 0}
+% \changes{v1.3b}{1995/05/23}{Added missing braces around argument
+% to \cs{addpenalty}.}
+% \changes{v1.4a}{1998/10/12}{we should use \cs{@tocrmarg}; see PR/2881.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+\newcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The macro |\numberline| requires that the width of the box that
+% holds the part number is stored in \LaTeX's scratch register
+% |\@tempdima|. Therefore we initialize it there even though we do
+% not use |\numberline| internally (the position as well as the
+% values seems questionable but can't be changed without producing
+% compatibility problems). We begin a group, and change
+% some of the paragraph parameters (see also the remark at
+% \cs{l@part} regarding \cs{rightskip}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we leave vertical mode and switch to a bold font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \leavevmode \bfseries
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Because we do not use |\numberline| here, we have do some fine
+% tuning `by hand', before we can set the entry. We discourage but
+% not disallow a pagebreak immediately after a chapter entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% In the article document class the entry in the table of contents
+% for sections looks much like the chapter entries for the report
+% and book document classes.
+%
+% First we make sure that if a pagebreak should occur, it occurs
+% \emph{before} this entry. Also a little whitespace is added and a
+% group begun to keep changes local.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/18}{Replaced -\cs{@secpenalty} by
+% \cs{@secpenalty}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1994/04/28}{Don't print a toc line when the tocdepth
+% counter is less than 1.}
+% \changes{v1.4a}{1998/10/12}{we should use \cs{@tocrmarg}; see PR/2881.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\newcommand*\l@section[2]{%
+ \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\z@
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty
+ \addvspace{1.0em \@plus\p@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The macro |\numberline| requires that the width of the box that
+% holds the part number is stored in \LaTeX's scratch register
+% |\@tempdima|. Therefore we put it there. We begin a group, and
+% change some of the paragraph parameters (see also the remark at
+% \cs{l@part} regarding \cs{rightskip}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we leave vertical mode and switch to a bold font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \leavevmode \bfseries
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Because we do not use |\numberline| here, we have do some fine
+% tuning `by hand', before we can set the entry. We discourage but
+% not disallow a pagebreak immediately after a chapter entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+%</article>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the report and book document classes the definition for
+% |\l@section| is much simpler.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*report|book>
+\newcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph}
+% All lower level entries are defined using the macro
+% |\@dottedtocline| (see above).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article>
+\newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
+\newcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+\newcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{10em}{5em}}
+%</article>
+%<*report|book>
+\newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
+\newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+\newcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}
+\newcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}
+%</report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{List of figures}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% This macro is used to request that \LaTeX{} produces a list of
+% figures. It is very similar to |\tableofcontents|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Moved the setting of
+% \cs{@restonecolfalse}}
+% \changes{v1.4c}{2001/01/06}{Moved \cs{@mkboth} out of heading
+% arg (pr/3285)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\listoffigures{%
+%<*report|book>
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \else
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \fi
+ \chapter*{\listfigurename}%
+%</report|book>
+%<article> \section*{\listfigurename}%
+ \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}%
+ {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}%
+ \@starttoc{lof}%
+%<report|book> \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@figure}
+% This macro produces an entry in the list of figures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{List of tables}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% This macro is used to request that \LaTeX{} produces a list of
+% tables. It is very similar to |\tableofcontents|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Moved the setting of
+% \cs{@restonecolfalse}}
+% \changes{v1.4c}{2001/01/06}{Moved \cs{@mkboth} out of heading
+% arg (pr/3285)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\listoftables{%
+%<*report|book>
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \else
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \fi
+ \chapter*{\listtablename}%
+%</report|book>
+%<article> \section*{\listtablename}%
+ \@mkboth{%
+ \MakeUppercase\listtablename}%
+ {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}%
+ \@starttoc{lot}%
+%<report|book> \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@table}
+% This macro produces an entry in the list of tables.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Bibliography}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibindent}
+% The ``open'' bibliography format uses an indentation of
+% |\bibindent|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\bibindent
+\setlength\bibindent{1.5em}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
+% The `thebibliography' environment executes the following
+% commands:
+%
+% |\renewcommand{\newblock}{\hskip.11em \@plus.33em \@minus.07em}|\\
+% --- Defines the ``closed'' format, where the blocks (major units
+% of information) of an entry run together.
+%
+% |\sloppy| --- Used because it's rather hard to do line breaks in
+% bibliographies,
+%
+% |\sfcode`\.=1000\relax| ---
+% Causes a `.' (period) not to produce an end-of-sentence space.
+%
+% The implementation of this environment is based on the generic
+% list environment. It uses the \Lcount{enumiv} counter internally
+% to generate the labels of the list.
+%
+% When an empty `thebibliography' environment is found, a warning
+% is issued.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1993/12/19}{Corrected definition of thebibliography
+% for article}
+% \changes{v1.2z}{1995/05/09}{added a missing percent character}
+% \changes{v1.3b}{1995/05/23}{Added missing braces in definition
+% of thebibliography environment.}
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{remove surplus spaces}
+% \changes{v1.3k}{1995/08/27}{Code for openbib changed}
+% \changes{v1.3t}{1996/10/05}{Added setting value of \cs{@clubpenalty}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]
+%<*article>
+ {\section*{\refname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\@mkboth| was moved out of the heading argument since at
+% least in report and book (twocolumn option) there are definitions
+% for |\chapter| which would swallow it otherwise.
+% \changes{v1.4c}{2001/01/06}{Moved \cs{@mkboth} out of heading
+% arg (pr/3285)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\refname}{\MakeUppercase\refname}%
+%</article>
+%<*!article>
+ {\chapter*{\bibname}%
+ \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\bibname}{\MakeUppercase\bibname}%
+%</!article>
+ \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+ {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
+ \leftmargin\labelwidth
+ \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+ \@openbib@code
+ \usecounter{enumiv}%
+ \let\p@enumiv\@empty
+ \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+ \sloppy
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is setting the normal (non-infinite) value of
+% |\clubpenalty| for the whole of this environment,
+% so we must reset its stored value also. (Why is there a |%| after
+% the second 4000 below?)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \clubpenalty4000
+ \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
+ \widowpenalty4000%
+ \sfcode`\.\@m}
+ {\def\@noitemerr
+ {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
+ \endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% The default definition for |\newblock| is to produce a small space.
+% \changes{v1.3k}{1995/08/27}{Default changed.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@openbib@code}
+% The default definition for |\@openbib@code| is to do nothing.
+% It will be changed by the \Lopt{openbib} option.
+% \changes{v1.3k}{1995/08/27}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@openbib@code\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
+% The label for a |\bibitem[...]| command is produced by this
+% macro. The default from \file{latex.dtx} is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \renewcommand*{\@biblabel}[1]{[#1]\hfill}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
+% The output of the |\cite| command is produced by this macro. The
+% default from \file{latex.dtx} is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \renewcommand*{\@cite}[1]{[#1]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The index}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{theindex}
+% The environment `theindex' can be used for indices. It makes an
+% index with two columns, with each entry a separate paragraph. At
+% the user level the commands |\item|, |\subitem| and |\subsubitem|
+% are used to produce index entries of various levels. When a new
+% letter of the alphabet is encountered an amount of |\indexspace|
+% white space can be added.
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/09}{Moved the setting of
+% \cs{@restonecoltrue}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theindex}
+ {\if@twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+%<article> \twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]%
+%<!article> \twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}]%
+ \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Parameter changes to |\columnseprule| and |\columnsep| have to be
+% done after |\twocolumn| has acted. Otherwise they can affect the
+% last page before the index.
+% \changes{ v1.4f}{2004/02/16}{Moved setting of \cs{columnsep} and
+% \cs{columnseprule} later to avoid affecting the wrong page (pr/3616)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \let\item\@idxitem}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the document continues after the index and it was a one
+% column document we have to switch back to one column after the
+% index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@idxitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\subitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubitem}
+% These macros are used to format the entries in the index. ^^AA ???
+% \changes{v1.3f}{1995/06/23}{Corrected error in definition of
+% \cs{@idxitem}.}
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{use \cs{@idxitem} to save space}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
+\newcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}}
+\newcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indexspace}
+% The amount of white space that is inserted between `letter
+% blocks' in the index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
+% Usually, footnotes are separated from the main body of the text
+% by a small rule. This rule is drawn by the macro |\footnoterule|.
+% We have to make sure that the rule takes no vertical space (see
+% \file{plain.tex}) so we compensate for the natural heigth of the
+% rule of 0.4pt by adding the right amount of vertical skip.
+%
+% To prevent the rule from colliding with the footnote we first add
+% a little negative vertical skip, then we put the rule and make
+% sure we end up at the same point where we begun this operation.
+% \changes{v1.3a}{1995/05/17}{use \cs{@width}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
+ \kern-3\p@
+ \hrule\@width.4\columnwidth
+ \kern2.6\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@footnote}
+% Footnotes are numbered within chapters in the report and book
+% document styles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!article>\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+% The footnote mechanism of \LaTeX{} calls the macro |\@makefntext|
+% to produce the actual footnote. The macro gets the text of the
+% footnote as its argument and should use |\@thefnmark| as the mark
+% of the footnote. The macro |\@makefntext|is called when
+% effectively inside a |\parbox| of width |\columnwidth| (i.e.,
+% with |\hsize| = |\columnwidth|).
+%
+% An example of what can be achieved is given by the following piece
+% of \TeX\ code.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand\@makefntext[1]{%
+% \@setpar{\@@par
+% \@tempdima = \hsize
+% \advance\@tempdima-10pt
+% \parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}%
+% \par
+% \parindent 1em\noindent
+% \hbox to \z@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% The effect of this definition is that all lines of the footnote
+% are indented by 10pt, while the first line of a new paragraph is
+% indented by 1em. To change these dimensions, just substitute the
+% desired value for `10pt' (in both places) or `1em'. The mark is
+% flushright against the footnote.
+%
+% In these document classes we use a simpler macro, in which the
+% footnote text is set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no
+% indentation except on the first line of a paragraph, and the
+% first line of the footnote. Thus, all the macro must do is set
+% |\parindent| to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs
+% and put the proper indentation before the mark.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/03/13}{Use \cs{@makefnmark} to generate
+% footnote marker}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\@makefntext[1]{%
+ \parindent 1em%
+ \noindent
+ \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
+% The footnote markers that are printed in the text to point to the
+% footnotes should be produced by the macro |\@makefnmark|. We use
+% the default definition for it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\renewcommand\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript
+% {\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Initialization}
+%
+% \subsection{Words}
+%
+% This document class is for documents prepared in the English language.
+% To prepare a version for another language, various English words must
+% be replaced. All the English words that require replacement are
+% defined below in command names. These commands may be redefined in
+% any class or package that is customising \LaTeX\ for use with
+% non-English languages.
+% \changes{v1.3h}{1995/07/20}{Split up to save save stack /1742}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsname}
+% \begin{macro}{\listfigurename}
+% \begin{macro}{\listtablename}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\contentsname{Contents}
+\newcommand\listfigurename{List of Figures}
+\newcommand\listtablename{List of Tables}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\refname}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibname}
+% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<article>\newcommand\refname{References}
+%<report|book>\newcommand\bibname{Bibliography}
+\newcommand\indexname{Index}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
+% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\figurename{Figure}
+\newcommand\tablename{Table}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partname}
+% \begin{macro}{\chaptername}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
+% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\partname{Part}
+%<report|book>\newcommand\chaptername{Chapter}
+\newcommand\appendixname{Appendix}
+%<!book>\newcommand\abstractname{Abstract}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Date}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% This macro uses the \TeX\ primitives |\month|, |\day| and |\year|
+% to provide the date of the \LaTeX-run.
+%
+% At |\begin{document}| this definition will be optimised
+% so that the names of all the `wrong' months are not stored.
+% This optimisation is not done here as that would `freeze'
+% |\today| in any special purpose format made by loading the class
+% file into the format file.
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/08/16}{use \cs{edef} to save a lot of space}
+% \changes{v1.3w}{1997/10/06}{use \cs{def} again, latex/2620}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+ January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+ July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+ \space\number\day, \number\year}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Two column mode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
+% This gives the distance between two columns in two column mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\columnsep{10\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\columnseprule}
+% This gives the width of the rule between two columns in two
+% column mode. We have no visible rule.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The page style}
+% We have \pstyle{plain} pages in the document classes article and
+% report unless the user specified otherwise. In the `book'
+% document class we use the page style \pstyle{headings} by
+% default. We use arabic pagenumbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!book>\pagestyle{plain}
+%<book>\pagestyle{headings}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Single or double sided printing}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1994/11/10}{removed typo}
+% When the \Lopt{twoside} option wasn't specified, we don't try to
+% make each page as long as all the others.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twoside
+\else
+ \raggedbottom
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the \Lopt{twocolumn} option was specified we call
+% |\twocolumn| to activate this mode. We try to make each column as
+% long as the others, but call |sloppy| to make our life easier.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twocolumn
+ \twocolumn
+ \sloppy
+ \flushbottom
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Normally we call |\onecolumn| to initiate typesetting in one
+% column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \onecolumn
+\fi
+%</article|report|book>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.3i}{1995/08/09}{Moved code for generic class options
+% leqno and fleqn to kernel file}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0ae699f7832
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/classes.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{\file{article.cls}{\from{classes.dtx}{article}}
+ \file{report.cls}{\from{classes.dtx}{report}}
+ \file{book.cls}{\from{classes.dtx}{book}}
+ \file{size10.clo}{\from{classes.dtx}{10pt}}
+ \file{size11.clo}{\from{classes.dtx}{11pt}}
+ \file{size12.clo}{\from{classes.dtx}{12pt}}
+ \file{bk10.clo}{\from{classes.dtx}{10pt,bk}}
+ \file{bk11.clo}{\from{classes.dtx}{11pt,bk}}
+ \file{bk12.clo}{\from{classes.dtx}{12pt,bk}}
+ }
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space article.cls}
+\Msg{* \space\space report.cls}
+\Msg{* \space\space book.cls}
+\Msg{* \space\space size10.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space size11.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space size12.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space bk10.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space bk11.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space bk12.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space leqno.clo}
+\Msg{* \space\space fleqn.clo}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.dtx' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..88df1a1a397
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmextra.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
+this file to serve the needs of your installation.
+
+However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
+of this file under its original name.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+% Concrete font support removed: Use the contributed package available
+% from ctan tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/supported/ccfonts.
+%
+% \Ask\answer{%
+% **************************************************************
+% ^^J*
+% ^^J* Do you have the Concrete Roman fonts installed on your system,
+% ^^J* or do you intend to install them?
+% ^^J*
+% ^^J* If so please answer with `y' otherwise with `n' below.
+% ^^J*
+% ^^J* You can easily redo this installation later in case you
+% ^^J* change your mind.
+% ^^J**************************************************************}
+%
+% {\ifx\answer\y
+%
+% \Msg{*** Generating font defs for Cork encoded fonts ***}
+% \Msg{*** Generating font defs for old TeX Text encoding ***}
+% \Msg{*** Generating font defs for math italic encoding ***}
+%
+% \generate{%
+% \file{t1ccr.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1ccr}}
+% \file{ot1ccr.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,OT1ccr}}
+% \file{omlccm.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,OMLccm}}}
+%
+% \fi}
+
+\Ask\answer{%
+ **************************************************************
+ ^^J*
+ ^^J* Do you have the cyrillic fonts from the University of
+ ^^J* Washington installed on your system,
+ ^^J* or do you intend to install them?
+ ^^J*
+ ^^J* If so please answer with `y' otherwise with `n' below.
+ ^^J*
+ ^^J* You can easily redo this installation later in case you
+ ^^J* change your mind.
+ ^^J**************************************************************}
+
+{\ifx\answer\y
+
+\Msg{*** Generating font defs for old TeX cyrillic text encoding ***}
+
+\generate{%
+ \file{ot2cmr.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,OT2cmr}}
+ \file{ot2cmss.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,OT2cmss}}}
+
+\fi}
+
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f493f30c724
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.fdd
@@ -0,0 +1,1300 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{295}
+%
+%\iffalse This is a META comment
+%
+% File `cmfonts.fdd'.
+% Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+% all rights reserved.
+%
+%<OMLccm, >\ProvidesFile{omlccm.fd}
+%<OMLcmm, >\ProvidesFile{omlcmm.fd}
+%<OMLcmr, >\ProvidesFile{omlcmr.fd}
+%<OMScmr, >\ProvidesFile{omscmr.fd}
+%<OMScmsy, >\ProvidesFile{omscmsy.fd}
+%<OMXcmex, >\ProvidesFile{omxcmex.fd}
+%<OT1ccr, >\ProvidesFile{ot1ccr.fd}
+%<OT1cmdh, >\ProvidesFile{ot1cmdh.fd}
+%<OT1cmfib, >\ProvidesFile{ot1cmfib.fd}
+%<OT1cmfr, >\ProvidesFile{ot1cmfr.fd}
+%<OT1cmr, >\ProvidesFile{ot1cmr.fd}
+%<OT1cmss, >\ProvidesFile{ot1cmss.fd}
+%<OT1cmtt, >\ProvidesFile{ot1cmtt.fd}
+%<OT1cmvtt, >\ProvidesFile{ot1cmvtt.fd}
+%<OT2cmr, >\ProvidesFile{ot2cmr.fd}
+%<OT2cmss, >\ProvidesFile{ot2cmss.fd}
+%<T1ccr, >\ProvidesFile{t1ccr.fd}
+%<T1cmdh, >\ProvidesFile{t1cmdh.fd}
+%<T1cmfib, >\ProvidesFile{t1cmfib.fd}
+%<T1cmfr, >\ProvidesFile{t1cmfr.fd}
+%<T1cmr, >\ProvidesFile{t1cmr.fd}
+%<T1cmss, >\ProvidesFile{t1cmss.fd}
+%<T1cmtt, >\ProvidesFile{t1cmtt.fd}
+%<T1cmvtt, >\ProvidesFile{t1cmvtt.fd}
+%<TS1cmr, >\ProvidesFile{ts1cmr.fd}
+%<TS1cmss, >\ProvidesFile{ts1cmss.fd}
+%<TS1cmtt, >\ProvidesFile{ts1cmtt.fd}
+%<TS1cmvtt, >\ProvidesFile{ts1cmvtt.fd}
+%<Ucmr, >\ProvidesFile{ucmr.fd}
+%<Ucmss, >\ProvidesFile{ucmss.fd}
+%<Ucmtt, >\ProvidesFile{ucmtt.fd}
+%<*driver, >
+ \ProvidesFile{cmfonts.drv}
+%</driver, >
+ [1999/05/25 v2.5h Standard LaTeX font definitions]
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{cmfonts.drv}
+\providecommand\dst{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+\title{The file \texttt{cmfonts.fdd} for use with
+ \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
+ number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
+\date{\filedate}\author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{cmfonts.fdd}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+%\fi
+%
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.5e}{1997/06/16}{Replaced reference to DC-fonts by ec
+% fonts.}
+% \changes{v2.5c}{1997/05/26}{Removed spaces in and around arguments
+% to \cs{DeclareFontShape} and \cs{EC@family}.}
+% \changes{v2.4j}{1996/11/20}{lowercase filenames /1044}
+% \changes{v2.4h}{1996/05/19}{Added CM variable typewriter family}
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/05/17}
+% {Force \cs{hyphenchar} of OT1 fonts to 45, in case
+% \cs{defaulthyphenchar} has changed.}
+% \changes{v2.4g}{1996/05/17}
+% {Remove some spurious extra empty arguments to
+% \cs{DeclareFontFamily} calls}
+% \changes{v2.4d}{1995/12/01}
+% {Documentation changes from Ulrik Vieth /1989}
+% \changes{v2.4d}{1995/12/01}
+% {Dont force T1 hyphenchar to 127. latex/1853}
+% \changes{v2.4c}{1995/11/07}{Use decimal rather than octal character
+% specification for \cs{hyphenchar} and \cs{skewchar} so that there is
+% no problem with an active quote character.}
+% \changes{v2.4a}{1995/10/22}{Added support for new (v1.2) DC fonts
+% and text companion fonts (TS1 encoding).}
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/11/02}{Added more font substitutions for
+% \cs{pounds}.}
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/10/30}{Added OMLcmr.fd and OMScmr.fd.}
+% \changes{v2.3b}{1994/05/12}{Added \cs{ProvidesFile} commands}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1994/05/03}{Included definitions for
+% AMS-supplied cm fonts.}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{1994/02/07}{Added missing size 10.95 for
+% cmr/b/n and cmr/m/ui.}
+% \changes{v2.2e}{1994/02/02}{Corrected encoding scheme U.}
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1994/01/27}{Replaced most ssub with sub}
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1993/12/13}{Removed \cs{CodelineIndex} from the
+% driver code.}
+%
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/10/17}{Shape u renamed to ui.}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/10/17}{File renamed to cmfonts.fdd.}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file contains the external font information needed to load
+% the Computer Modern fonts designed by Don Knuth and distributed with
+% \TeX.
+%
+% From this file all {\ttfamily.fd} files (font definition files) for
+% the Computer Modern fonts, both with old encoding (|OT1|) and Cork
+% encoding (|T1|) are generated. The Cork encoded fonts are known
+% under the name ec fonts.
+%
+% \section{Customization}
+%
+% If you plan to install the AMS font package or if you have it
+% already installed, please note that within this package there are
+% additional sizes of the Computer Modern symbol and math italic
+% fonts. With the release of \LaTeXe, these AMS `extracm' fonts have
+% been included in the \LaTeX\ font set. Therefore, the math |.fd| files
+% produced here assume the presence of these AMS extensions.
+%
+% For text fonts in \texttt{T1} encoding, the directive |new| selects
+% the new (version 1.2) DC fonts.
+%
+% For the text fonts in \texttt{OT1} and \texttt{U} encoding,
+% the optional \dst{} directive |ori| selects a conservatively
+% generated set of font definition files,
+% which means that only the basic font sizes coming with an old
+% \LaTeX~2.09 installation are included into the |\DeclareFontShape|
+% commands. However, on many installations, people have added missing
+% sizes by scaling up or down available Metafont sources. For example,
+% the Computer Modern Roman italic font |cmti| is only available in
+% the sizes 7, 8, 9, and 10pt. Nevertheless one could generate it for
+% the sizes 5, and 6pt by using the source from |cmti7| scaled
+% downwards. The corresponding enlarged font set is generated if the
+% \dst{} directive |ori| is not used.
+%
+% When you generate the |.fd| files using the installation script
+% |cmfonts.ins| distributed with \LaTeXe, the enlarged font set is
+% selected.
+% If you want to select the conservative set of |.fd| files, you have to
+% replace statements like
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \generateFile{OT1cmr.fd}{t}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,OT1cmr}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% with
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \generateFile{OT1cmr.fd}{t}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,OT1cmr,ori}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% in the installation script, or more exactly by copying the
+% installation script to a file with a new name and change that copy.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{The \texttt{docstrip} modules}
+%
+% The following modules are used to direct \texttt{docstrip} in
+% generating external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% nowarn & produce |.fd| files that do not warn about substitutions\\
+% ori & make conservative |.fd| files\\
+% new & select version 1.2 DC fonts\\
+% ec & select EC fonts\\
+% fd & produce a font definition file (actually no longer used)\\[2pt]
+% OMLccm & make Concrete Roman Math italic\\
+% OMLcmm & make Computer Modern Math italic\\
+% OMLcmr & make Computer Modern Roman (math italic encoding)\\
+% OMScmr & make Computer Modern Roman (math symbol encoding)\\
+% OMScmsy & make Computer Modern Symbols \\
+% OMXcmex & make Computer Modern large Symbols\\
+% OT1ccr & make Concrete Roman (old encoding) \\
+% OT1cmdh & make Computer Modern Dunhill (old encoding)\\
+% OT1cmfib & make Computer Modern Fibonacci (old encoding)\\
+% OT1cmfr & make Computer Modern Funny (old encoding)\\
+% OT1cmr & make Computer Modern Roman (old encoding)\\
+% OT1cmss & make Computer Modern Sans (old encoding)\\
+% OT1cmtt & make Computer Modern Typewriter (old encoding)\\
+% OT1cmvtt & make Computer Modern Variable Typewriter (old encoding)\\
+% OT2cmr & make Computer Modern Roman (old cyrillic encoding)\\
+% OT2cmss & make Computer Modern Sans (old cyrillic encoding)\\
+% T1ccr & make Concrete Roman (Cork encoding)\\
+% T1cmdh & make Computer Modern Dunhill (Cork encoding)\\
+% T1cmfib & make Computer Modern Fibonacci (Cork encoding)\\
+% T1cmfr & make Computer Modern Funny (Cork encoding)\\
+% T1cmr & make Computer Modern Roman (Cork encoding)\\
+% T1cmss & make Computer Modern Sans (Cork encoding)\\
+% T1cmtt & make Computer Modern Typewriter (Cork encoding)\\
+% T1cmvtt & make Computer Modern Variable Typewriter (Cork
+% encoding)\\
+% TS1cmr & make Computer Modern Roman text companion fonts\\
+% TS1cmss & make Computer Modern Sans text companion fonts\\
+% TS1cmtt & make Computer Modern Typewriter text companion fonts\\
+% TS1cmvtt & make Computer Modern Variable Typewriter text
+% companion fonts\\
+% Ucmr & make Computer Modern Roman (unknown encoding)\\
+% Ucmss & make Computer Modern Sans (unknown encoding)\\
+% Ucmtt & make Computer Modern Typewriter (unknown encoding)\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% A typical \texttt{docstrip} command file would then have entries like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\generateFile{OT1cmr.fd}{t}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,OT1cmr}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \section{The font definition files}
+%
+% As always we begin by identifying the latest version of the files
+% in the \textsf{log} file. The explicit spaces are necessary in an
+% |.fd| file and the |\string| guards against situations where |`|,
+% |<| or |>| is active.
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/02/15}{Removed surplus \cs{string}}
+%
+% \subsection{Fonts with Cork encoding (\texttt{T1})}
+%
+% We start with the DC-fonts. These are Computer Modern fonts
+% reimplemented originally by Norbert Schwarz, and since release~1.2
+% by J\"org Knappen.
+% You can get them from \TeX{}
+% archives and from \TeX{} organizations. We strongly recommend
+% that you use them because they are encoded in the approved
+% standard encoding for text fonts.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for fonts with the `EC' naming scheme}
+% Before the declarations for the individual fonts, first define
+% some abreviations that may be used as most of the fonts in the
+% `new' dc font distribution come in the same range of sizes.
+% The same is true for the ec fonts, with a somewhat enlarged font
+% size range.
+% \changes{v2.5f}{1998/01/10}{Added larger sizes for ec fonts only
+% (thanks to Christian Cornelssen)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*new|ec>
+%<*!tt>
+\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+ {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
+%<ec> <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
+%<!ec> <17.28><20.74><24.88>genb*#5}{}}
+%</!tt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For monospaced fonts, the normal interpolation breaks down below
+% 8pt, so scale the 8pt fonts instead.
+% \changes{v2.5f}{1998/01/10}{Added larger sizes for ec fonts only
+% (thanks to Christian Cornelssen)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tt>
+\providecommand{\EC@ttfamily}[5]{%
+ \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+ {<5><6><7><8>#50800%
+%<ec> <9><10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86>%
+%<ec> <35.83>genb*#5}{}}
+%<!ec> <9><10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>genb*#5}{}}
+%</tt>
+%</new|ec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The Computer Modern Roman}
+%
+% This family is available in the shapes |n|, |sl|, |it|, |sc|, and
+% |ui|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1cmr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmr}{}
+%<*!new&!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*dcr%
+ <10><10.95>dcr10%
+ <12><14.4>dcr12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcr17}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{%
+ <5><6><7><8>dcsl8%
+ <9>dcsl9%
+ <10><10.95>dcsl10%
+ <12><14.4>dcsl12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcsl17%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{it}{%
+ <5><6>dcti7%
+ <7><8><9>gen*dcti%
+ <10><10.95>dcti10%
+ <12><14.4>dcti12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcti17%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{sc}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95>dccsc10%
+ <12><14.4>dccsc12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dccsc17%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{%
+ <5><6>dcu7%
+ <7><8><9>gen*dcu%
+ <10><10.95>dcu10%
+ <12><14.4>dcu12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcu17%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There is a bold `|b|' series, but unfortunately only the normal
+% shape is available in this series.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+T1cmr>%%%%%%% bold series
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{b}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*dcb%
+ <10><10.95>dcb10%
+ <12><14.4>dcb12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcb17%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally there is a bold extended series `|bx|' with the shapes
+% |n|, |sl|, and |it|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+T1cmr>%%%%%%%% bold extended series
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*dcbx%
+ <10><10.95>dcbx10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>dcbx12%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*dcbxsl%
+ <10><10.95>dcbxsl10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>dcbxsl12%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{it}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95>dcbxti10%
+ <12><14.4>dcbxti12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcbxti17%
+ }{}
+%</!new&!ec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.4d}{1995/12/01}
+% {Ulrik Vieth. Add ui shape /1989}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*new>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}{dcr}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{dcsl}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{it}{dcti}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{sc}{dccc}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{dcbx}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{b}{n}{dcb}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{bx}{it}{dcbi}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}{dcbl}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{dcu}
+%</new>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/01/14}
+% {EC fonts}
+% \changes{v2.5d}{1997/06/02}{bold sc fonts latex/2497}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ec>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}{ecrm}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{ecsl}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{it}{ecti}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{sc}{eccc}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{ecbx}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{b}{n}{ecrb}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{bx}{it}{ecbi}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}{ecbl}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sc}{ecxc}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{ecui}
+%</ec>
+%</T1cmr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Fibonacci}
+%
+% This family was created by Don Knuth as an experiment, supplying
+% only Fibonacci numbers to the parameters of the Metafont sources
+% of the Computer Modern Meta family.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1cmfib>
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmfib}{}
+%<*!new&!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfib}{m}{n}{%
+ <8><9><10><12>gen*dcfib%
+ }{}
+%</!new&!ec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.4f}{1995/12/20}
+% {Family name and external file name corrected Ulrik Vieth /2017}
+% In fact these `dcfb' fonts are currently withdrawn as they generate
+% metafont errors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*new>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmfib}{m}{n}{dcfb}
+%</new>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/01/14}
+% {EC fonts, new slanted fibonacci}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ec>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmfib}{m}{n}{ecfb}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmfib}{m}{sl}{ecfs}
+%</ec>
+%</T1cmfib>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Funny (Roman)}
+%
+% This family was created by Don Knuth as another experiment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1cmfr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmfr}{}
+%<*!new&!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfr}{m}{n}{%
+ <10>dcff10%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmfr}{m}{it}{%
+ <10>dcfi10%
+ }{}
+%</!new&!ec>
+%<*new>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmfr}{m}{n}{dcff}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmfr}{m}{it}{dcfi}
+%</new>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/01/14}
+% {EC fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ec>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmfr}{m}{n}{ecff}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmfr}{m}{it}{ecfi}
+%</ec>
+%</T1cmfr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Sans}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1cmss>
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmss}{}
+%<*!new&!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{m}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8>dcss8%
+ <9>dcss9%
+ <10><10.95>dcss10%
+ <12><14.4>dcss12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcss17%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{m}{it}%
+ {<->sub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{m}{sl}{%
+ <5><6><7><8>dcssi8%
+ <9>dcssi9%
+ <10><10.95>dcssi10%
+ <12><14.4>dcssi12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcssi17%
+ }{}
+%</!new&!ec>
+%<*new>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{m}{n}{dcss}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{m}{sl}{dcsi}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{m}{it}{dcsi}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{bx}{n}{dcsx}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{bx}{it}{dcso}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{bx}{sl}{dcso}
+%</new>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/01/14}
+% {EC fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ec>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{m}{n}{ecss}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{m}{sl}{ecsi}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{m}{it}{ecsi}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{bx}{n}{ecsx}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{bx}{it}{ecso}
+\EC@family{T1}{cmss}{bx}{sl}{ecso}
+%</ec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next substitution is very questionable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+T1cmss>%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{m}{sc}%
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/sc}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next font group is quite attractive for display.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+T1cmss>%%%%%%% semibold condensed series
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{sbc}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28>%
+ <20.74><24.88>%
+%<!ec>dcssdc10
+%<ec>ecssdc10
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!new&!ec>
+%<+T1cmss>%%%%%%%% bold extended series
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{bx}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28>%
+ <20.74><24.88>dcssbx10%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Another questionable substitution, but if we have the above
+% we might as well have this one
+% \changes{v2.5g}{1998/03/27}{Added subst for cmss/bx/sc (pr/2586)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+T1cmss>%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{bx}{sc}%
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/sc}{}
+%</!new&!ec>
+%</T1cmss>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Typewriter}
+%
+% Perhaps the best font in the Computer Modern suite.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1cmtt>
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}
+%<*!new&!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{%
+ <8><9>gen*dctt%
+ <10><10.95>dctt10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>dctt12%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{m}{it}{%
+ <8><9>gen*dcitt%
+ <10><10.95>dcitt10%
+ <12><14.4>dcitt12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcitt17%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{%
+ <8><9>gen*dcsltt%
+ <10><10.95>dcsltt10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>dcsltt12%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{m}{sc}{%
+ <10><10.95>dctcsc10%
+ <12><14.4>dctcsc12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dctcsc17%
+ }{}
+%</!new&!ec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1995/12/04}
+% {Ulrik Vieth. added dctc /1989}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*new>
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{dctt}
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{dcst}
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmtt}{m}{it}{dcit}
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmtt}{m}{sc}{dctc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.4i}{1996/09/26}{Added substitutions for T1 bold
+% extended typewriter fonts (new version).}
+% Finally, we define substitutions for the series |bx|. It comes
+% with or without a warning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmtt/m/n}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{bx}{it}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%</new>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.5a}{1997/01/14}
+% {EC fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ec>
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{ectt}
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{ecst}
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmtt}{m}{it}{ecit}
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmtt}{m}{sc}{ectc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.4i}{1996/09/26}{Added substitutions for T1 bold
+% extended typewriter fonts (new version).}
+% Finally, we define substitutions for the series |bx|. It comes
+% with or without a warning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmtt/m/n}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{bx}{it}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%</ec>
+%</T1cmtt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Variable Typewriter}
+%
+% The Computer Modern Variable Typewriter family is the
+% proportional spaced version of the Computer Modern Typewriter
+% family. It is implemented as a separate family to allow easy use
+% in normal text, including changes of shape/series etc if available.
+% This family also allows normal hyphenation.
+%
+% In the first implementations for the Cork encoding only the
+% normal shape is available. Starting with release 1.3 italic will
+% be provided as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1cmvtt>
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmvtt}{}
+%<*!new&!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}{%
+ <8><9>gen*dcvtt%
+ <10><10.95>dcvtt10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>dcvtt12%
+ }{}
+%</!new&!ec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% With release 1.3 there will be an italic shape as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*new>
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}{dcvt}
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmvtt}{m}{it}{dcvi}
+%</new>
+%<*ec>
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}{ecvt}
+\EC@ttfamily{T1}{cmvtt}{m}{it}{ecvi}
+%</ec>
+%</T1cmvtt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Dunhill}
+%
+% The smoker's choice? Within the Cork encoding this font comes with
+% a full size range by default but only with one series.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1cmdh>
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmdh}{}
+%<*!new&!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*dcdunh%
+ <10><10.95>dcdunh10%
+ <12><14.4>dcdunh12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dcdunh17}{}
+%</!new&!ec>
+%<*new>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{dcdh}
+%</new>
+%<*ec>
+\EC@family{T1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{ecdh}
+%</ec>
+%</T1cmdh>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Concrete Roman}
+%
+% A font near to Computer Modern Typewriter designed to go with the
+% Euler Math fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1ccr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{ccr}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{m}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10><12>gen*dccr%
+ <10.95>dccr11 <14.4>dccr14%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>dccr17}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{m}{it}{%
+ <10><10.95><12>dcti10}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{m}{sc}{%
+ <10><10.95><12>dccsc10 }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note the condensed slanted variant (not used).
+% \changes{v2.4d}{1995/12/01}
+% {Ulrik Vieth. Removed dcslc9 (no such font...) /1989}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{c}{sl}{<9>dcslc9}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally a few substitution fonts for combinations not available.
+% As suggested by Leslie Lamport and several others the
+% substitution should warn by default. We control this my a \dst{}
+% module so that one can modify this behavior from the outside.
+% \changes{v2.0f}{1993/09/24}{Added substitution fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{sl}{%
+%<-nowarn> <->sub*cmr/bx/it
+%<+nowarn> <->ssub*cmr/bx/it
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{n}{%
+%<-nowarn> <->sub*cmr/bx/n
+%<+nowarn> <->ssub*cmr/bx/n
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{ccr}{bx}{it}{%
+%<-nowarn> <->sub*cmr/bx/it
+%<+nowarn> <->ssub*cmr/bx/it
+}{}
+%</T1ccr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{The text companion fonts for \texttt{T1} encoding}
+%
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1995/12/04}
+% {Ulrik Vieth. added tcu /1989}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*TS1cmr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{TS1}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+%<!ec>\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{m}{n}{tcr}
+%<ec>\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{m}{n}{tcrm}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{tcsl}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{m}{it}{tcti}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{tcbx}
+%<!ec>\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{b}{n}{tcb}
+%<ec>\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{b}{n}{tcrb}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{bx}{it}{tcbi}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}{tcbl}
+%<!ec>\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{tcu}
+%<ec>\EC@family{TS1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{tcui}
+%</TS1cmr>
+%<*TS1cmss>
+\DeclareFontFamily{TS1}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmss}{m}{n}{tcss}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmss}{m}{sl}{tcsi}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmss}{m}{it}{tcsi}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmss}{bx}{n}{tcsx}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmss}{bx}{it}{tcso}
+\EC@family{TS1}{cmss}{bx}{sl}{tcso}
+%</TS1cmss>
+%<*TS1cmtt>
+\DeclareFontFamily{TS1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+\EC@ttfamily{TS1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{tctt}
+\EC@ttfamily{TS1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{tcst}
+\EC@ttfamily{TS1}{cmtt}{m}{it}{tcit}
+%</TS1cmtt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Again the italic shape is only available with release 1.3.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*TS1cmvtt>
+\DeclareFontFamily{TS1}{cmvtt}{}
+\EC@ttfamily{TS1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}{tcvt}
+\EC@ttfamily{TS1}{cmvtt}{m}{it}{tcvi}
+%</TS1cmvtt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Fonts with the old \TeX{} text encoding (\texttt{OT1})}
+%
+% Note that in contrast to the Cork encoding, which is fully
+% defined, the old \TeX{} text encoding isn't implemented consistent
+% within all fonts. Most noticeably is that a dollar sign (\$) in
+% some fonts is replaced by a pound symbol (\pounds) in others,
+% which produced quite a number of bug fixes in the NFSS1. Also the
+% typewriter fonts contain a few different characters which are not
+% present in other fonts.
+%
+% If one would use the philosophy of NFSS2 consequently all these
+% would therefore be different encodings and font mixing would
+% therefore be nearly impossible with older fonts. Therefore such
+% encodings are considered the same but one should be remember that
+% in some situations this may cause problems.
+%
+% In other words, use |T1| encoding whenever possible, the |OT..|
+% encodings will be removed in some future release.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Roman (\texttt{OT1})}
+%
+% Beside the |OT1| encoding we also define the same family as |U|
+% encoded which is used for accepting old sources with stuff like
+% |\newmathalphabet| in it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1cmr,Ucmr>
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontFamily{U}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}%
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{m}{n}%
+ {<5><6><7><8><9><10><12>gen*cmr%
+ <10.95>cmr10%
+ <14.4>cmr12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>cmr17}{}
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}%
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{m}{sl}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <5-8>sub*cmr/m/n%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7>cmsl8%
+ <8><9>gen*cmsl%
+ <10><10.95>cmsl10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmsl12%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{it}%
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{m}{it}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <5-7>sub*cmr/m/n%
+%<+ori> <7>cmti7%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7>cmti7%
+ <8>cmti8%
+ <9>cmti9%
+ <10><10.95>cmti10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmti12%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sc}%
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{m}{sc}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <5-8>sub*cmr/m/n%
+%<+ori> <8><9><10><10.95><12>%
+%<+ori> <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmcsc10%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>%
+%<-ori> <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmcsc10%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we try to cure the famous \$ $\to$ \pounds{} bug:
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1994/01/18}{Corrected forgotten renaming of font
+% shape u to ui in substitution.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>% Warning: please note that the upright shape below is
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>% used for the \pounds symbol of LaTeX. So this
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>% font definition shouldn't be removed.
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>%
+%<+ori>% If cmu below 10pt is not available we substitute
+%<+ori>% cmti as far as possible (sizes 7, 8, 9). This is
+%<+ori>% done because cmu is used mainly for producing the
+%<+ori>% the \pound symbol and it is better to get a slanted
+%<+ori>% (or bigger) pound then to get a $ sign in such
+%<+ori>% situations.
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{ui}
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{m}{ui}
+ {
+%<+ori> <7>subf*cmti7%
+%<+ori> <8>subf*cmti8%
+%<+ori> <9>subf*cmti9%
+%<+ori> <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmu10%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>%
+%<-ori> <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmu10%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>%%%%%%% bold series
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{b}{n}
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{b}{n}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-10>sub*cmr/bx/n%
+%<+ori> <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmb10%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>%
+%<-ori> <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmb10%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>%%%%%%%% bold extended series
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{bx}{n}%
+ {%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*cmbx%
+ <10><10.95>cmbx10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmbx12%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{bx}{sl}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-10>sub*cmr/bx/n%
+%<+ori> <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmbxsl10%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9>%
+%<-ori> <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmbxsl10%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{it}
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{bx}{it}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-10>sub*cmr/bx/n%
+%<+ori> <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmbxti10%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9>%
+%<-ori> <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmbxti10%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.5h}{1999/05/09}{docstrip `nowarn' guard was the wrong way
+% around (pr/3036)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>% Again this is necessary for a correct \pounds symbol in
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>% the cmr fonts Hopefully the dc/ec font layout will take
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>% over soon.
+%<+OT1cmr,Ucmr>%
+%<+OT1cmr>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{ui}
+%<+Ucmr>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmr}{bx}{ui}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+%</OT1cmr,Ucmr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Sans (\texttt{OT1})}
+%
+% Same game for the Sans family.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1cmss,Ucmss>
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontFamily{U}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmss}{m}{n}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-8>sub*cmr/m/n%
+%<+ori> <8>cmss8%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8>cmss8%
+ <9>cmss9%
+ <10><10.95>cmss10%
+ <12><14.4>cmss12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>cmss17%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmss,Ucmss>% Font undefined, therefore substituted
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmss}{m}{it}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{sl}
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmss}{m}{sl}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-8>sub*cmss/m/n%
+%<+ori> <8><9>gen*cmssi%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8>cmssi8<9>cmssi9%
+ <10><10.95>cmssi10%
+ <12><14.4>cmssi12%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>cmssi17%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmss,Ucmss>%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{sc}
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmss}{m}{sc}%
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/sc}{}
+%<+OT1cmss,Ucmss>%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{ui}
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmss}{m}{ui}%
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+%<+OT1cmss,Ucmss>%%%%%%%% semibold condensed series
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{sbc}{n}
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmss}{sbc}{n}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-10>sub*cmss/m/n%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9>cmssdc10%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmssdc10%
+ }{}
+
+%<+OT1cmss,Ucmss>%%%%%%%%% bold extended series
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{bx}{n}
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmss}{bx}{n}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-10>sub*cmss/m/n%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9>cmssbx10%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmssbx10%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmss,Ucmss>%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
+%<+OT1cmss>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{bx}{ui}
+%<+Ucmss>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmss}{bx}{ui}%
+ {<->sub*cmr/bx/ui}{}
+%</OT1cmss,Ucmss>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Typewriter (\texttt{OT1})}
+%
+% Notice that this encoding is in fact quite different and we
+% shouldn't therefore substitute some other font group if the
+% correct size or shape isn't available. Otherwise, we may end with
+% a |\verb| suddenly producing a lot of funny chars instead of the
+% desired ones.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1cmtt,Ucmtt>
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontFamily{U}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmtt}{m}{n}%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This substitution for |ori| is wrong and only in here because
+% that was the way stuff has be set up in the old |lfonts.tex| file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+ori> <-8>sub*cmr/m/n%
+%<+ori> <8><9>gen*cmtt%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8>cmtt8<9>cmtt9%
+ <10><10.95>cmtt10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmtt12%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmtt,Ucmtt>%%%%%% make sure subst shapes are available
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{it}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmtt}{m}{it}%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following substitution however is okay since both fonts have
+% the same encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+ori> <-10>sub*cmtt/m/n%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9>%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmitt10%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmtt}{m}{sl}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-10>sub*cmtt/m/n%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9>%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmsltt10%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{sc}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmtt}{m}{sc}%
+ {%
+%<+ori> <-10>sub*cmtt/m/n%
+%<-ori> <5><6><7><8><9>%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmtcsc10%
+ }{}
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{ui}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmtt}{m}{ui}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmtt}{bx}{n}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmtt/m/n}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmtt/m/n}{}
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmtt}{bx}{it}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%<+OT1cmtt>\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{ui}
+%<+Ucmtt>\DeclareFontShape{U}{cmtt}{bx}{ui}%
+%<-nowarn> {<->sub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%<+nowarn> {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%</OT1cmtt,Ucmtt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Variable Typewriter (\texttt{OT1})}
+%
+% The Computer Modern Variable Typewriter family is the
+% proportional spaced version of the Computer Modern Typewriter
+% family. It is implemented as a separate family to allow easy use
+% in normal text, including changes of shape/series etc if available.
+% This family also allows normal hyphenation.
+% \changes{v2.5b}{1997/02/25}
+% {typo fixed in ot1cmvtt \cs{ProvidesFile} latex/2394}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1cmvtt>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmvtt}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}%
+ {%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95>%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmvtt10%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This font is probably not available to everybody as it is not
+% part of the standard distribution. One might find it in
+% \texttt{.../systems/knuth/local} on CTAN.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmvtt}{m}{it}%
+ {%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95>%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmvtti10%
+ }{}
+%</OT1cmvtt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Funny (\texttt{OT1})}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1cmfr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmfr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfr}{m}{n}{%
+ <10>cmff10%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfr}{m}{it}{%
+ <10>cmfi10%
+ }{}
+%</OT1cmfr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Dunhill (\texttt{OT1})}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1cmdh>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmdh}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmdh}{m}{n}{%
+ <10>cmdunh10%
+ }{}
+%</OT1cmdh>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Fibonacci (\texttt{OT1})}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1cmfib>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmfib}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmfib}{m}{n}{%
+ <8>cmfib8%
+ }{}
+%</OT1cmfib>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Math fonts}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Math italics}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1993/06/12}{OML/cmm/bx/it added for
+% \cs{oldstylenums}}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1994/05/02}{Included font definitions for
+% AMS-supplied cm fonts.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OMLcmm>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{cmm}{\skewchar\font127 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}%
+ {<5><6><7><8><9>gen*cmmi%
+ <10><10.95>cmmi10%
+ <12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmmi12%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmm}{b}{it}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*cmmib%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmmib10%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This will allow the |\oldstylenums| command to work within
+% |\textbf|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmm}{bx}{it}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/b/it}{}
+%</OMLcmm>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Roman Math italics}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/10/30}{Added OMLcmr font substitutions pointing
+% to OMLcmm. }
+% \changes{v2.3f}{1995/04/22}{Corrected OMLcmr \cs{skewchar}}
+%
+% Some text symbols like `\t oo' and `$<$' are kept in the OML
+% encoding, so we need font substititutions from OML/cmr to OML/cmm.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OMLcmr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{cmr}{\skewchar\font127 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{m}{n}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{m}{it}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{m}{sl}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{m}{sc}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{bx}{n}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/b/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{bx}{it}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/b/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{bx}{sl}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/b/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmr}{bx}{sc}%
+ {<->ssub*cmm/b/it}{}
+%</OMLcmr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Math symbols}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1994/05/02}{Included font definitions for
+% AMS-supplied cm fonts.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OMScmsy>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmsy}{\skewchar\font48 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10>gen*cmsy%
+ <10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmsy10%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*cmbsy%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>cmbsy10%
+ }{}
+%</OMScmsy>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Roman Math symbols}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/10/30}{Added OMScmr font substitutions pointing
+% to OMScmm. }
+%
+% Some text symbols like `\P' and `\dag' are kept in the OMS encoding,
+% so we need font substititutions from OMS/cmr to OMS/cmsy.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OMScmr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmr}{\skewchar\font48 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{m}{n}%
+ {<->ssub*cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{m}{it}%
+ {<->ssub*cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{m}{sl}%
+ {<->ssub*cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{m}{sc}%
+ {<->ssub*cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{bx}{n}%
+ {<->ssub*cmsy/b/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{bx}{it}%
+ {<->ssub*cmsy/b/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{bx}{sl}%
+ {<->ssub*cmsy/b/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmr}{bx}{sc}%
+ {<->ssub*cmsy/b/n}{}
+%</OMScmr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern large symbols}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OMXcmex>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMX}{cmex}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}{%
+ <->sfixed*cmex10%
+ }{}
+%</OMXcmex>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Concrete Roman}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/07/13}{Added new concrete shapes}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1ccr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{ccr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{m}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10>gen*ccr%
+ <10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>ccr10}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{m}{it}{%
+ <10><10.95><12>ccti10}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{m}{sc}{%
+ <10><10.95><12>cccsc10}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{m}{sl}{%
+ <9>ccsl9%
+ <10><10.95><12>ccsl10}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{c}{sl}{<9>ccslc9}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally a few substitution fonts for combinations not available.
+% \changes{v2.0f}{1993/09/24}{Added substitution fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{n}%
+ {<->sub*cmr/bx/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{sl}%
+ {<->sub*cmr/bx/sl}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ccr}{bx}{it}%
+ {<->sub*cmr/bx/it}{}
+%</OT1ccr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Concrete Roman math italic}
+%
+% \changes{v2.4d}{1995/12/01}
+% {Ulrik Vieth. Add 10.95 and 12 size for ccmi10 /1989}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OMLccm>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{ccm}{\skewchar\font127 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ccm}{m}{it}{%
+ <10><10.95><12>ccmi10}{}
+%</OMLccm>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Roman in \texttt{OT2} encoding}
+%
+% These fonts are from the University of Washington. They do not
+% belong into this file but at the moment there is no other place.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT2cmr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT2}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT2}{cmr}{m}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*wncyr%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>wncyr10}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT2}{cmr}{m}{it}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*wncyi%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>wncyi10}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT2}{cmr}{m}{sc}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
+ <17.28><20.74><24.88>wncysc10}{}
+%<+OT2cmr>%%%%%%%%%%%%% bold series
+\DeclareFontShape{OT2}{cmr}{b}{n}{%
+ <5><6><7><8><9>gen*wncyb%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>wncyb10}{}
+%</OT2cmr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Computer Modern Sans in \texttt{OT2} encoding}
+%
+% Some more fonts from the University of Washington.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT2cmss>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT2}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT2}{cmss}{m}{n}{%
+ <8><9>gen*wncyss%
+ <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>wncyss10}{}
+%</OT2cmss>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The next line goes into all files and in addition prevents \dst{}
+% from adding any further code from the main source file (such as a
+% character table.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8c06ef303f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/cmfonts.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
+this file to serve the needs of your installation.
+
+However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
+of this file under its original name.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{\file{ot1cmss.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OT1cmss}}
+ \file{ot1cmr.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OT1cmr}}
+ \file{ot1cmtt.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OT1cmtt,nowarn}}
+ \file{ot1cmvtt.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OT1cmvtt}}
+ \file{ot1cmfib.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OT1cmfib}}
+ \file{ot1cmfr.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OT1cmfr}}
+ \file{ot1cmdh.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OT1cmdh}}}
+
+\generate{\file{ucmr.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{Ucmr}}
+ \file{ucmss.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{Ucmss}}
+ \file{ucmtt.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{Ucmtt}}
+ \file{omlcmm.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OMLcmm}}
+ \file{omscmsy.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OMScmsy}}
+ \file{omxcmex.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OMXcmex}}
+ \file{omlcmr.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OMLcmr}}
+ \file{omscmr.fd}{\from{cmfonts.fdd}{OMScmr}}
+ }
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cb658e0c800
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/doc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4894 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% ^^A -*-LaTeX-*-
+%
+% ^^A These shouldn't come out in .ist files, hence the module
+% ^^A comments, or in the printed version, hence temporary comment
+% ^^A category for `<'
+%\catcode`\<=14
+%<+package|shortvrb>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01]
+%<+package> \ProvidesPackage{doc}
+%<+shortvrb>\ProvidesPackage{shortvrb}
+%<+package|shortvrb> [2004/02/09 v2.1b
+%<+package|shortvrb> Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi)]
+%\catcode`\<=12
+%
+% \CheckSum{2171}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%\iffalse This is a METACOMMENT
+% Everything up to the next `\ fi' (without a blank) will
+% be ignored. This is necessary because `%' may no longer
+% be a comment mark when this file is read in.
+%
+%
+%% Package `doc' to use with LaTeX 2e
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Frank Mittelbach, all rights reserved.
+%
+%
+% Version: Date: Changes:
+%
+% 1.0a 5.5.88 This is nothing but a collection of tests and
+% hacks. It is certainly going to be greatly
+% changed.
+% Better not to use it!
+% 1.5a and earlier... are not longer recorded
+% 1.5b and higher... are documented with the (undocumented) \changes
+% feature.
+%\fi
+% \changes{v1.5f}{1989/4/29}{Thanks to Brian who documented the
+% \cs{changes} macro feature.}
+% \changes{v1.5g}{1989/5/07}{MacroTopsep now called MacrocodeTopsep and
+% new MacroTopsep added}
+% \changes{v1.5h}{1989/05/17}{All lines shortened to <72 characters}
+% \changes{v1.5j}{1989/06/09}{Corrections by Ron Whitney added}
+% \changes{v1.5q}{1989/11/03}{`\ldots{}Listing macros renamed to
+% `\ldots{}Input. Suggested by R. Wonneberger}
+% \changes{v1.5w}{1990/02/05}{Counter codelineno renamed to CodelineNo}
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1993/12/02}{Upgrade for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.9d}{1993/12/20}{Protected changes entry.}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/05/21}{Use new error commands}
+%
+%
+% \hyphenation{make-index}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@gobble,\@input}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@ne,\@spaces,\@tempa}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@tempb,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@topnum}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@@,\@elt,\@forloop,\@fortmp,\@gtempa,\@totalleftmargin}
+% \DoNotIndex{\",\/,\@ifundefined,\@nil,\@verbatim,\@vobeyspaces}
+% \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials,\edef}
+% \DoNotIndex{\egroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endtrivlist}
+% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet,\gdef,\global}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hss,\if,\if@inlabel,\if@tempswa,\if@twocolumn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifcase}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\iffalse,\ifx,\ignorespaces,\index,\input,\item}
+% \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower}
+% \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage,\nobreak,\noexpand,\nonfrenchspacing}
+% \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\protect,\raggedleft,\rightskip,\rm,\sc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\small,\space,\string,\strut}
+% \DoNotIndex{\strutbox}
+% \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thispagestyle,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\xdef,\z@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\,,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@noligs,\@vobeyspaces,\@xverbatim}
+% \DoNotIndex{\`,\catcode,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hangindent,\hfil,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\it,\langle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\markboth,\mathcode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newskip}
+% \DoNotIndex{\nopagebreak}
+% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty,\raise,\rangle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\section,\setlength,\TeX,\topsep,\underline,\unskip,\verb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\[,\{,\},\]}
+% \DoNotIndex{\count@,\ifnum,\loop,\today,\uppercase,\uccode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\tw@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\a,\b,\c,\d,\e,\f,\g,\h,\i,\j,\k,\l,\m,\n,\o,\p,\q}
+% \DoNotIndex{\r,\s,\t,\u,\v,\w,\x,\y,\z,\A,\B,\C,\D,\E,\F,\G,\H}
+% \DoNotIndex{\I,\J,\K,\L,\M,\N,\O,\P,\Q,\R,\S,\T,\U,\V,\W,\X,\Y,\Z}
+% \DoNotIndex{\1,\2,\3,\4,\5,\6,\7,\8,\9,\0}
+% \DoNotIndex{\!,\#,\$,\&,\',\(,\),\+,\.,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\_}
+% \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\immediate,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
+% \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\newenvironment,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment}
+% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize,\selectfont,\the,\undefined}
+% \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\write,\@ehc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@author,\@ehc,\@ifstar,\@sanitize,\@title,\everypar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifeof,\ifmmode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\lccode,\newtoks,\onecolumn,\openin,\p@,\SelfDocumenting}
+% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\@resetonecoltrue,\@resetonecolfalse,\bf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\closein,\lowercase,\@inlabelfalse}
+% \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault}
+% \DoNotIndex{\bfdefault}
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb{\"}
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% {\catcode`\p=12 \catcode`\t=12 ^^A hack used later on to print
+% \gdef\dimenvalue#1pt{$#1$pt}} ^^A a register value with a - sign
+%
+% \newcommand{\DOC}{\texttt{doc}}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9t}{1995/05/11}{Use \cs{GetFileInfo}}
+% \GetFileInfo{doc.sty}
+%
+% \title{The \DOC{} and \texttt{shortvrb} Packages\thanks
+% {This file has version number \fileversion{} dated \filedate{}.}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach\thanks{Further commentary added at Royal
+% Military College of Science by B. Hamilton Kelly; English
+% translation of parts of the original German commentary
+% provided by Andrew Mills; fairly substantial additions,
+% particularly from \texttt{newdoc}, and
+% documentation of post-v1.5q features added at v1.7a by Dave
+% Love (SERC Daresbury Lab). Extraction of \texttt{shortvrb}
+% package added by Joachim Schrod (TU~Darmstadt).}\\
+% Gutenberg Universit\"at Mainz}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% This package contains the definitions that are necessary to
+% format the documentation of package files. The package was
+% developed in Mainz in cooperation with the Royal Military College
+% of Science. This is an update which documents various changes
+% and new features in \DOC{} and integrates the features of
+% \textsf{newdoc}.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \newif\ifmulticols
+% \IfFileExists{multicol.sty}{\multicolstrue}{}
+%
+% \ifmulticols
+% \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\begin{multicols}{2}}
+% \fi
+%
+% {\parskip 0pt ^^A We have to reset \parskip
+% ^^A (bug in \LaTeX)
+% \tableofcontents
+% }
+%
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/25}{Miscellaneous small changes to the text}
+%
+% \ifmulticols
+% \begin{multicols}{2}[\section*{Preface to version 1.7}]
+% \else \section*{Preface to version 1.7} \fi
+%
+% This version of \texttt{doc.dtx} documents changes which have occurred
+% since the last published version \cite{art:doc} but which have been
+% present in distributed versions of \texttt{doc.sty} for some time. It
+% also integrates the (undocumented) features of the distributed
+% \texttt{newdoc.sty}.
+%
+% The following changes and additions have been made to the user
+% interface since the published version~\cite{art:doc}. See
+% \S\ref{sec:interface} for more details.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[Driver mechanism] "\DocInput" is now used in the driver file
+% to input possibly multiple independent \DOC{} files and \DOC{} no
+% longer has to be the last package. "\IndexListing" is replaced
+% by "\IndexInput";
+% \item[Indexing] is controlled by "\PageIndex" and "\CodelineIndex",
+% one of which must be specified to produce an index---there is no
+% longer a "\makeindex" in the default "\DocstyleParms";
+% \item[The \texttt{macro} environment] now takes as argument the
+% macro name {\em with\/} the backslash;
+% \item[Verbatim text] Newlines are now forbidden inside "\verb" and
+% commands "\MakeShortVerb" and "\DeleteShortVerb" are provided for
+% verbatim shorthand;
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash par}] can now be used in "\DoNotIndex";
+% \item[Checksum/character table support] for ensuring the integrity
+% of distributions is added;
+% \item[\texttt{\bslash printindex}] becomes "\PrintIndex";
+% \item[\texttt{multicol.sty}] is no longer necessary to use \DOC{} or
+% print the documentation (although it is recommended);
+% \item[`Docstrip' modules] are recognised and formatted specially.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% As well as adding some completely new stuff,
+% the opportunity has been taken to add some commentary to the code
+% formerly in \texttt{newdoc.sty} and that added after version 1.5k of
+% \texttt{doc.sty}. Since (as noted in the sections concerned) this
+% commentary wasn't written by Frank Mittelbach but the code was, it is
+% probably {\em not\/} true in this case that ``if the code and
+% comments disagree both are probably wrong''!
+%
+% \subsection*{Bugs}
+%
+% There are some known bugs in this version:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The "\DoNotIndex" command doesn't work for some single
+% character commands most noticeable "\%".
+% \item The `General changes' glossary entry would come out after
+% macro names with a leading "!" and possibly a leading |"|;
+% \item If you have an old version of \textsf{makeindex} long "\changes"
+% entries will come out strangely and you may find the section
+% header amalgamated with the first changes entry. Try to get an
+% up-to-date one (see p.~\pageref{makeindex:version});
+% \item Because the accompanying \textsf{makeindex} style files support
+% the inconsistent attribute specifications of older and newer
+% versions \textsf{makeindex} always complains about three `unknown
+% specifier's when sorting the index and changes entries.
+% \item If "\MakeShortVerb" and "\DeleteShortVerb" are used with
+% single character arguments, e.g., "{|}" instead of "{\|}" chaos
+% may happen.
+% \end{itemize}
+% (Some `features' are documented below.)
+%
+% \subsection*{Wish list}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Hooks to allow "\DescribeMacro" and "\DescribeEnv" to write
+% out to a special file information about the package's `exported'
+% definitions which they describe. This could subsequently be
+% included in the \texttt{docstrip}ped \texttt{.sty} file in a
+% suitable form for use by smart editors in command completion,
+% spelling checking etc., based on the packages used in a document.
+% This would need agreement on a `suitable form'. \item Indexing of
+% the modules used in \texttt{docstrip}'s "%<" directives. I'm not
+% sure how to index directives containing module combinations; \item
+% Writing out bibliographic information about the package; \item Allow
+% turning off use of the special font for, say, the next guarded
+% block.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \ifmulticols
+% \end{multicols}
+%
+% \begin{multicols}{2}[\medskip \rule{\textwidth}{.3pt}
+% \section{Introduction}]
+% \else
+% \section{Introduction}
+% \fi
+%
+% The \TeX{} macros which are described here allow definitions and
+% documentation to be held in one and the same file. This has the
+% advantage that normally very complicated instructions are made
+% simpler to understand by comments inside the definition. In addition
+% to this, updates are easier and only one source file needs to be
+% changed. On the other hand, because of this, the package files are
+% considerably longer: thus \TeX{} takes longer to load them. If this
+% is a problem, there is an easy remedy: one needs only to run the
+% \texttt{docstrip.tex} program that removes nearly all lines that begin
+% with a
+% percent sign.
+%
+% The idea of integrated documentation was born with the development
+% of the \TeX{} program; it was crystallized in Pascal with the \Web{}
+% system. The advantages of this method are plain to see (it's easy
+% to make comparisons \cite{art:Knuthliterat}). Since this
+% development, systems similar to \Web{} have been developed for other
+% programming languages. But for one of the most complicated
+% programming languages (\TeX) the documentation has however been
+% neglected. The \TeX{} world seems to be divided between:---
+% \begin{itemize} \item a couple of ``wizards'', who produce many
+% lines of completely unreadable code ``off the cuff'', and \item many
+% users who are amazed that it works just how they want it to do. Or
+% rather, who despair that certain macros refuse to do what is
+% expected of them.\end{itemize}
+%
+% I do not think that the \Web{} system is {\em the\/} reference work;
+% on the contrary, it is a prototype which suffices for the
+% development of programs within the \TeX{} world. It is sufficient,
+% but not totally sufficient.\footnote{I know that this will be seen
+% differently by a few people, but this product should not be seen as
+% the finished product, at least as far as applications concerning
+% \TeX{} are concerned. The long-standing debate over `multiple
+% change files' shows this well.} As a result of \Web, new programming
+% perspectives have been demonstrated; unfortunately, though, they
+% haven't been developed further for other programming languages.
+%
+% The method of documentation of \TeX{} macros which I have introduced
+% here should also only be taken as a first sketch. It is designed
+% explicitly to run under \LaTeX{} alone. Not because I was of the
+% opinion that this was the best starting point, but because from this
+% starting point it was the quickest to develop.\footnote{This
+% argument is a bad one, however, it is all too often trotted out.} As
+% a result of this design decision, I had to move away from the
+% concept of modularization; this was certainly a step backward.
+%
+% I would be happy if this article could spark off discussion over
+% \TeX\ documentation. I can only advise anyone who thinks that they
+% can cope without documentation to ``Stop Time'' until he or she
+% completely understands the \AmSTeX{} source code.
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Using the \DOC{} package}
+%
+% Just like any other package, invoke it by requesting it with a
+% |\usepackage| command in the preamble. \textsf{Doc}'s use of
+% |\reversemarginpars| may make it incompatible with some classes.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/25}{Altered usage info}
+%
+%
+% \ifmulticols\end{multicols}\fi
+%
+%
+% \section{The User Interface}\label{sec:interface}
+% \subsection{The driver file}
+%
+% If one is going to document a set of macros with the \DOC{}
+% package one has to prepare a special driver file which produces the
+% formatted document. This driver file has the following
+% characteristics:
+%
+% \noindent |\documentclass[|\meta{options}]^^A
+% |{|\meta{document-class}|}|\\[1pt]
+% |\usepackage{doc}|\\[3pt]
+% \hspace*{10pt}\meta{preamble}\\[3pt]
+% |\begin{document}|\\[3pt]
+% \hspace*{10pt}\meta{special input commands}\\[3pt]
+% |\end{document}|
+%
+% The \meta{document-class} might be any document class, I normally
+% use \texttt{article}.
+%
+% In the \meta{preamble} one should place declarations which
+% manipulate the behavior of the \DOC{} package like
+% |\DisableCrossrefs| or |\OnlyDescription|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\DocInput \DescribeMacro\IndexInput
+% Finally the \meta{special input commands} part should contain one or
+% more |\DocInput|\meta{file name} and/or
+% |\IndexInput|\meta{file name} commands. The
+% |\DocInput| command is used for files prepared for the
+% \DOC{} package whereas |\IndexInput| can be used for all kinds of
+% macro files. See page \pageref{..Input} for more details of
+% "\IndexInput". Multiple "\DocInput"s can be used with a
+% number of included files which are each self-contained
+% self-documenting packages---for instance, each containing
+% "\maketitle".
+%
+% As an example, the driver file for the \DOC{} package itself is
+% the following text surrounded by "%<*driver>" and "%</driver>".
+% To produce the documentation you can simply run the \texttt{.dtx}
+% file through \LaTeX{} in which case this code will be executed
+% (loading the document class \texttt{ltxdoc}, etc.) or you can
+% extract this into a separate file by using
+% the \texttt{docstrip} program.
+% The line numbers below are added by
+% \DOC{}'s formatting.
+% Note that the class \textsf{ltxdoc} has the \DOC{} package
+% preloaded.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/06}{Added
+% docstrip-derivable driver file as example.}
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1992/04/01}{Expurgated ltugboat.sty from driver.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\EnableCrossrefs
+ %\DisableCrossrefs % Say \DisableCrossrefs if index is ready
+\CodelineIndex
+\RecordChanges % Gather update information
+ %\OnlyDescription % comment out for implementation details
+ %\OldMakeindex % use if your MakeIndex is pre-v2.9
+\setlength\hfuzz{15pt} % dont make so many
+\hbadness=7000 % over and under full box warnings
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{doc.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{General conventions}
+%
+% A \TeX{} file prepared to be used with the `doc' package
+% consists of `documentation parts' intermixed with `definition
+% parts'.
+%
+% Every line of a `documentation part' starts with a percent sign
+% (|%|) in column one. It may contain arbitrary \TeX{} or
+% \LaTeX{} commands except that the character `|%|' cannot be
+% used as a comment character.
+% \SortIndex{\string^\string^A}{\string\verb\verbatimchar
+% \string^\string^A\verbatimchar \encapchar usage} To allow user
+% comments, the |^^A| character is defined as a comment character
+% later on. Such `metacomments' may be also be included simply by
+% surrounding them with "\iffalse" \ldots~"\fi".
+%
+% All other parts of the file are called `definition parts'. They
+% contain fractions of the macros described in the `documentation
+% parts'.
+%
+% If the file is used to define new macros (e.g.\ as a package file in
+% the |\usepackage| macro), the `documentation parts' are
+% bypassed at high speed and the macro definitions are pasted
+% together, even if they are split into several `definition parts'.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{macrocode}
+% On the other hand, if the documentation of these macros is to be
+% produced, the `definition parts' should be typeset verbatim. To
+% achieve this, these parts are surrounded by the \textsf{macrocode}
+% environment.
+% More exactly: before a `definition part' there should be a line
+% containing\\
+% \hspace*{\MacroIndent}\verb*+% \begin{macrocode}+\\
+% and after this part a line\\
+% \hspace*{\MacroIndent}\verb*+% \end{macrocode}+\\
+% There must be {\em exactly\/} four spaces between the |%|
+% and |\end{macrocode}| --- \TeX{} is looking for this string
+% and not for the macro while processing a `definition part'.
+%
+% Inside a `definition part' all \TeX{} commands are allowed; even the
+% percent sign could be used to suppress unwanted spaces etc.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{macrocode*} Instead of the \textsf{macrocode}
+% environment one can also use the \textsf{macrocode$*$} environment
+% which produces the same results except that spaces are printed as
+% \nopagebreak\verb*+ + characters.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Describing the usage of new macros}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\DescribeMacro
+% When you describe a new macro you may use |\DescribeMacro| to
+% indicate that at this point the usage of a specific macro is
+% explained. It takes one argument which will be printed in the margin
+% and also produces a special index entry. For example, I used
+% |\DescribeMacro{\DescribeMacro}| to make clear that this is the
+% point where the usage of |\DescribeMacro| is explained.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\DescribeEnv
+% An analogous macro |\DescribeEnv| should be used to indicate
+% that a \LaTeX{} environment is explained. It will produce a somewhat
+% different index entry. Below I used |\DescribeEnv{verbatim}|.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{verbatim}
+% It is often a good idea to include examples of the usage of new macros
+% in the text. Because of the |%| sign in the first column of every
+% row, the \textsf{verbatim} environment is slightly altered to suppress
+% those
+% characters.\footnote{These macros were written by Rainer
+% Sch\"opf~\cite{art:verbatim}. He also
+% provided a new \textsf{verbatim} environment
+% which can be used inside of other macros.}
+% \DescribeEnv{verbatim*}
+% The \textsf{verbatim$*$} environment is changed in the same way.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Documented \cs{verb} change.}
+% \DescribeMacro\verb
+% The "\verb" command is re-implemented to give an error report if a
+% newline appears in its argument.
+% The \textsf{verbatim} and \textsf{verbatim$*$} environments set text
+% in the style defined by "\MacroFont"~(\S\ref{sec:macrofont}).
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Describing the definition of new macros}
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{macro}
+% To describe the definition of a new macro we use the \textsf{macro}
+% environment. It has one argument: the name of the new
+% macro.\footnote{This is a change to the style design I described in
+% ^^A \TUB ^^A removed in case ltugboat.sty not used
+% \textsl{TUGboat\/}\ 10\#1 (Jan.~89). We finally decided
+% that it would
+% be better to use the macro name {\em with\/} the
+% backslash as an argument.}
+% This argument is also used to print the name in the margin and to
+% produce an index entry.
+% Actually the index entries for usage and definition are different to
+% allow an easy reference.
+% This environment might be nested. In this case the
+% labels in the margin are placed under each other.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Note on need for some text in macro env.}
+% There should be some text---even if it's just an empty
+% "\mbox{}"---in this environment before "\begin{macrocode}" or the
+% marginal label won't print in the right place.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\MacrocodeTopsep
+% \DescribeMacro\MacroTopsep
+% There also exist four style parameters: |\MacrocodeTopsep| and
+% |\MacroTopsep| are used to control the vertical spacing above
+% and below the \textsf{macrocode} and the \textsf{macro}
+% \DescribeMacro\MacroIndent
+% environment, |\MacroIndent| is used to indent the lines of code
+% and
+% \DescribeMacro\MacroFont \label{sec:macrofont}
+% |\MacroFont| holds the font and a possible size change command
+% for the code lines, the "verbatim"["*"] environment and the macro
+% names printed in the margin. If you want
+% to change their default values in a
+% class file (like \texttt{ltugboat.cls}) use the |\DocstyleParms|
+% command described below. Starting with release 2.0a it can now
+% be changed directly as long as the redefinition happens before
+% the |\begin{document}|.
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Formatting the margins}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\PrintDescribeMacro
+% \DescribeMacro\PrintDescribeEnv
+% \DescribeMacro\PrintMacroName
+% \DescribeMacro\PrintEnvName
+% As mentioned earlier, some macros and the \textsf{macro} environment
+% print their arguments in the margin. This is actually done by four
+% macros which are user
+% definable.\footnote{You may place the changed definitions in a
+% separate package
+% file or at the beginning of the documentation
+% file.
+% For example, if you don't like any names in the
+% margin
+% but want a fine index you can simply
+% \texttt{\bslash let}
+% these macros equal \texttt{\bslash @gobble}.
+% The doc package won't redefine any existing
+% definitions of these macros.}
+% They are named |\PrintDescribeMacro|, |\PrintDescribeEnv|,
+% |\PrintMacroName| (called by the \textsf{macro} environment) and
+% |\PrintEnvName| (called by the \textsf{environment} environment).
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Using a special escape character}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\SpecialEscapechar
+% If one defines complicated macros it is sometimes necessary to
+% introduce a new escape character because the `|\|' has got a
+% special |\catcode|. In this case one can use
+% |\SpecialEscapechar| to indicate which character is actually
+% used to play the r\^ole of the `|\|'. A scheme like this is
+% needed because the \textsf{macrocode} environment and its counterpart
+% \textsf{macrocode$*$} produce an index entry for every occurrence of a
+% macro name. They would be very confused if you didn't tell them that
+% you'd changed |\catcode|$\,$s. The argument to
+% |\SpecialEscapechar| is a single-letter control sequence, that
+% is, one has to use "\|" for example to denote that `\verb+|+'
+% is used as an escape character. |\SpecialEscapechar| only
+% changes the behavior of the next \textsf{macrocode} or
+% \textsf{macrocode$*$} environment.
+%
+% The actual index entries created will all be printed with |\|
+% rather than \verb+|+, but this probably reflects their usage, if not
+% their definition, and anyway must be preferable to not having any
+% entry at all. The entries {\em could\/} be formatted appropriately,
+% but the effort is hardly worth it, and the resulting index might be
+% more confusing (it would certainly be longer!).
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Cross-referencing all macros used}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\DisableCrossrefs \DescribeMacro\EnableCrossrefs As
+% already mentioned, every new macro name used within a
+% \textsf{macrocode} or \textsf{macrocode$*$} environment will produce
+% an index entry. In this way one can easily find out where a specific
+% macro is used. Since \TeX{} is considerably slower when it has to
+% produce such a bulk of index entries one can turn off this feature
+% by using |\DisableCrossrefs| in the driver file. To turn it on again
+% just use |\EnableCrossrefs|.\footnote{Actually, \texttt{\bslash
+% EnableCrossrefs} changes things more drastically; any following
+% \texttt{\bslash DisableCrossrefs} which might be present in the
+% source will be ignored.}
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\DoNotIndex
+% But also finer control is provided. The |\DoNotIndex| macro
+% takes a list of macro names separated by commas. Those names won't
+% show up in the index. You might use several |\DoNotIndex|
+% commands: their lists will be concatenated. In this article I used
+% |\DoNotIndex| for
+% all macros which are already defined in \LaTeX.
+%
+% All three above declarations are local to the current group.
+%
+% Production (or not) of the index (via the "\makeindex" commend) is
+% controlled by using or omitting the following declarations in the
+% driver file preamble; if neither is used, no index is produced.
+% \DescribeMacro\PageIndex Using "\PageIndex" makes all index
+% entries refer to their page number; with
+% \DescribeMacro\CodelineIndex "\CodelineIndex", index entries
+% produced by "\DescribeMacro" and "\DescribeEnv" refer to page number
+% but those produced by the \textsf{macro} environment refer to the
+% code lines, which will be numbered automatically.\footnote{The line
+% number is actually that of the first line of the first
+% \textsf{macrocode} environment in the \textsf{macro} environment.}
+% \DescribeMacro\theCodelineNo
+% The style of this numbering can be controlled by defining the macro
+% "\theCodelineNo". Its default definition is to use scriptsize
+% arabic numerals; a user-supplied definition won't be overwritten.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\CodelineNumbered
+% When you don't wish to get an index but want your code lines
+% numbered use "\CodelineNumbered" instead of "\CodelineIndex". This
+% prevents the generation of an unnecessary ".idx" file.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Producing the actual index entries}
+%
+% Several of the aforementioned macros will produce some sort of index
+% entries. These entries have to be sorted by an external
+% program---the current implementation assumes that the
+% \textsf{makeindex} program by Chen~\cite{art:Chen} is used.
+%
+% But this isn't built in: one has only to redefine some of the
+% following macros to be able to use any other index program. All
+% macros which are installation
+% dependent are defined in such a way that they won't overwrite a
+% previous definition. Therefore it is safe to put the changed
+% versions in a package file which might be read in before the doc
+% package.
+%
+% To allow the user to change the specific characters recognized by
+% his or her index program all characters which have special meaning
+% in the \textsf{makeindex} program are given symbolic
+% names.\footnote{I don't know if there exists a program which needs
+% more command characters, but I hope not.}
+% However, all characters used should be of |\catcode| other than
+% `letter' (11).
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\actualchar}
+% The |\actualchar| is used to separate the `key' and the actual
+% index entry.
+% \DescribeMacro{\quotechar}
+% The |\quotechar| is used before a special index program
+% character to suppress its special meaning.
+% \DescribeMacro{\encapchar}
+% The |\encapchar| separates the indexing information from a
+% letter string which \textsf{makeindex} uses as a \TeX{} command to
+% format the page number associated with a special entry. It is used
+% in this package to apply the |\main| and the |\usage|
+% commands.
+% \DescribeMacro{\levelchar}
+% Additionally |\levelchar| is used to separate `item',
+% `subitem' and `subsubitem' entries.
+%
+% It is a good idea to stick to these symbolic names even if you know
+% which index program is used. In this way your files will be
+% portable.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\SpecialMainIndex
+% \DescribeMacro\SpecialMainEnvIndex
+% To produce a main index entry for a macro the
+% |\SpecialMainIndex| macro\footnote{This macro is called by the
+% \textsf{macro} environment.} may be used. It is called `special'
+% because it has to print its argument verbatim.
+% A similar macro, called |\SpecialMainEnvIndex| is used for indexing
+% the main definition point of an
+% environment.\footnote{This macro is called by the
+% \textsf{environment} environment.}
+% \DescribeMacro\SpecialIndex
+% If you want a normal index entry for a macro name
+% |\SpecialIndex| might be used.\footnote{This macro is called
+% within the \textsf{macrocode} environment when encountering a macro
+% name.}
+% \DescribeMacro\SpecialUsageIndex
+% \DescribeMacro\SpecialEnvIndex
+% To index the usage of a macro or an environment
+% |\SpecialUsageIndex| and |\SpecialEnvIndex| may be used.
+% \DescribeMacro\SortIndex
+% Additionally a |\SortIndex| command is provided. It takes two
+% arguments---the sort key and the actual index entry.
+%
+% All these macros are normally used by other macros; you will need
+% them only in an emergency.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\verbatimchar
+% But there is one characteristic worth mentioning: all macro names in
+% the index are typeset with the |\verb*| command. Therefore one
+% special character is needed to act as a delimiter for this command.
+% To allow a change in this respect, again this character is
+% referenced indirectly, by the macro |\verbatimchar|. It expands
+% by default to \verb?+? but if your code lines contain macros with
+% `\texttt{+}' characters in their names (e.g.\ when you use \verb?\+?)
+% you will end up with an index entry containing \verb?\verb+\++?
+% which will be typeset as `\verb+\++' and not as `\verb?\+?'. In this
+% case you should redefine |\verbatimchar| globally or locally to
+% overcome this problem.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\*
+% We also provide a |\*| macro. This is intended to be used for
+% index entries like
+% \begin{quote}
+% index entries \\
+% \hspace*{30pt} Special macros for \*
+% \end{quote}
+% Such an entry might be produced with the line:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \index{index entries\levelchar Special macros for \*}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\OldMakeindex
+% Versions of \textsf{makeindex} prior to 2.9 had some bugs affecting
+% \DOC{}. One of these,
+% pertaining to the "%" character doesn't have a work-around
+% appropriate for versions with and without the
+% bug.\label{makeindex:version} If
+% you have an old version, invoke "\OldMakeindex" in a
+% package file or the driver file to prevent problems with index entries
+% such as "\%", although you'll probably normally want to turn off
+% indexing of "\%" anyway. Try to get an up-to-date \textsf{makeindex}
+% from one of the \TeX{} repositories.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Setting the index entries}
+%
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/11}{Usage note on gind.ist.} After the first
+% formatting pass through the \texttt{.dtx} file you need to sort the
+% index entries written to the \texttt{.idx} file using
+% \textsf{makeindex} or your favourite alternative. You need a
+% suitable style file for \textsf{makeindex} (specified by the
+% \texttt{-s} switch). A suitable one is supplied with \DOC{},
+% called \texttt{gind.ist}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\PrintIndex
+% To read in and print the sorted index, just put the
+% |\PrintIndex| command as the last (commented-out, and thus
+% executed during the documentation pass through the file) command
+% in your package file. Precede it by any bibliography commands
+% necessary for your citations.
+% Alternatively, it may be more convenient to put all such calls
+% amongst the arguments of the |\StopEventually| macro, in
+% which case a |\Finale| command should appear at the end of
+% your file.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{theindex}
+% Contrary to standard \LaTeX, the index is typeset in three columns
+% by default. This is controlled by the \LaTeX{} counter
+% `\textsf{IndexColumns}' and can therefore be changed with a
+% |\setcounter| declaration. Additionally one doesn't want to
+% start a new page unnecessarily. Therefore the \textsf{theindex}
+% environment is redefined.
+% \DescribeMacro\IndexMin
+% When the \textsf{theindex} environment starts it will measure how much
+% space is left on the current page. If this is more than
+% |\IndexMin| then the index will start on this page. Otherwise
+% |\newpage| is called.
+%
+% Then a short introduction about the meaning of several index entries
+% is typeset (still in onecolumn mode). Afterwards the actual index
+% entries follow in multi-column mode.
+% \DescribeMacro\IndexPrologue
+% You can change this prologue with the help of the
+% |\IndexPrologue| macro. Actually the section heading is also
+% produced in this way, so you'd better write something like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \IndexPrologue{\section*{Index} The index entries underlined ...}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% When the \textsf{theindex} environment is finished the last page will
+% be reformatted to produce balanced columns. This improves the layout
+% and allows the next article to start on the same page.
+% \DescribeMacro\IndexParms
+% Formatting of the index columns (values for |\columnssep|
+% etc.)\ is controlled by the |\IndexParms| macro. It assigns the
+% following values:
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\parindent}\SpecialUsageIndex{\columnsep}^^A
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\parskip}\SpecialUsageIndex{\rightskip}^^A
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\mathsurround}\SpecialUsageIndex{\parfillskip}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{l@{\,=\,}ll@{\,=\,}l}
+% |\parindent| & \IndexParms \the\parindent &
+% |\columnsep| & \IndexParms \the\columnsep \\
+% |\parskip| & \IndexParms \the\parskip &
+% |\rightskip| & \IndexParms
+% \expandafter\dimenvalue\the\rightskip \\
+% |\mathsurround| & \IndexParms \the\mathsurround &
+% |\parfillskip| & \IndexParms
+% \expandafter\dimenvalue\the\parfillskip
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \DescribeMacro{\@idxitem}
+% Additionally it defines |\@idxitem| (which will be used when an
+% |\item| command is encountered) and selects |\small| size.
+% If you want to change any of these values you have to define them
+% all.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\main
+% \DescribeMacro\usage
+% The page numbers for main index entries are encapsulated by the
+% |\main| macro (underlining its argument) and the numbers
+% denoting the description are encapsulated by the |\usage| macro
+% (which produces {\em italics}). As usual these commands are user
+% definable.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Changing the default values of style parameters}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\DocstyleParms If you want to overwrite some default
+% settings made by the \DOC{} package, you can either put your
+% declarations in the driver file (that is after \texttt{doc.sty} is
+% read in) or use a separate package file for doing this work. In the
+% latter case you can define the macro |\DocstyleParms| to contain all
+% assignments. This indirect approach is necessary if your package file
+% might be read before the \texttt{doc.sty}, when some of the
+% registers are not allocated. Its default definition is null.
+%
+% The doc package currently assigns values to the following
+% registers:
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\IndexMin}\SpecialUsageIndex{\MacrocodeTopsep}^^A
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\MacroTopsep}^^A
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\MacroIndent}\SpecialUsageIndex{\marginparpush}^^A
+% \SpecialUsageIndex{\marginparwidth}\SpecialUsageIndex{\tolerance}
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{l@{\,=\,}ll@{\,=\,}l}
+% |\IndexMin| & \the\IndexMin &
+% |\MacroTopsep| & \the\MacroTopsep \\
+% |\marginparwidth|& \the\marginparwidth &
+% |\MacroIndent| & \the\MacroIndent \\
+% |\marginparpush| & \the\marginparpush &
+% |\MacrocodeTopsep| & \the\MacrocodeTopsep \\
+% |\tolerance| & \the\tolerance
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Short input of verbatim text pieces}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\MakeShortVerb
+% \DescribeMacro{\MakeShortVerb*} \DescribeMacro\DeleteShortVerb It is
+% awkward to have to type, say, "\verb|"\ldots"|" continually when
+% quoting
+% verbatim bits (like macro names) in the text, so an abbreviation
+% mechanism is provided. Pick a character \meta{c}---one which
+% normally has catcode `other' unless you have very good reason not
+% to---which you don't envisage using in the text, or not using often.
+% (I like |"|, but you may prefer "|" if you have |"| active to do
+% umlauts, for instance.) Then if you say
+% "\MakeShortVerb{\"\meta{c}"}" you can subsequently use
+% \meta{c}\meta{text}\meta{c} as the equivalent of
+% "\verb"\meta{c}\meta{text}\meta{c}; analogously, the "*"-form
+% "\MakeShortVerb*{\"\meta{c}"}" gives you the equivalent of
+% "\verb*"\meta{c}\meta{text}\meta{c}. Use
+% "\DeleteShortVerb{\"\meta{c}"}" if you subsequently want \meta{c} to
+% revert to its previous meaning---you can always turn it on again
+% after the unusual section. The `short verb' commands make global
+% changes. The abbreviated "\verb" may not appear in the argument of
+% another command just like "\verb". However the `short verb'
+% character may be used freely in the \textsf{verbatim} and
+% \textsf{macrocode} environments without ill effect.
+% "\DeleteShortVerb" is silently ignored if its argument does not
+% currently represent a short verb character. Both commands type a
+% message to tell you the meaning of the character is being changed.
+%
+% Please remember that the command "\verb" cannot be used in arguments
+% of other commands. Therefore abbreviation characters for "\verb"
+% cannot be used there either.
+%
+% This feature is also available as a sole package, \texttt{shortvrb}.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Additional bells and whistles}
+%
+% We provide macros for logos such as \Web, \AmSTeX, \BibTeX,
+% \SliTeX{} and \PlainTeX. Just type |\Web|, |\AmSTeX|,
+% |\BibTeX|, |\SliTeX| or |\PlainTeX|, respectively.
+% \LaTeX{} and \TeX{} are already defined in \texttt{latex.tex}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\meta
+% Another useful macro is |\meta| which has one argument and
+% produces something like \meta{dimen parameter}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\OnlyDescription
+% \DescribeMacro\StopEventually
+% You can use the |\OnlyDescription| declaration in the driver
+% file to suppress the last part of your document (which presumably
+% exhibits the code). To make this work
+% you have to place the command |\StopEventually| at a suitable
+% point in your file. This macro has one argument in which you put
+% all information you want to see printed if your document ends at
+% this point (for example a bibliography which is normally printed at
+% the very end). When the |\OnlyDescription| declaration is
+% missing the |\StopEventually|
+% \DescribeMacro\Finale
+% macro saves its argument in a macro called |\Finale| which can
+% afterwards be used to get things back (usually at the very end).
+% Such a scheme makes changes in two places unnecessary.
+%
+% Thus you can use this feature to produce a local guide for the
+% \TeX{} users which describes only the usage of macros (most of them
+% won't be interested in your definitions anyway). For the same
+% reason the |\maketitle| \DescribeMacro\maketitle command is slightly
+% changed to allow multiple titles in one document. So you can make
+% one driver file reading in several articles at once.
+% \DescribeMacro{\ps@titlepage} To avoid an unwanted
+% \textsf{pagestyle} on the title page the |\maketitle| command issues
+% a |\thispagestyle{titlepage}| declaration which produces a
+% \textsf{plain} page if the \textsf{titlepage} page style is
+% undefined. This allows class files like \textsf{ltugboat.cls} to
+% define their own page styles for title pages.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\AlsoImplementation
+% Typesetting the whole document is the default. However, this default
+% can also be explicitly selected using the declaration
+% |\AlsoImplementation|. This overwrites any previous
+% |\OnlyDescription| declaration. The \LaTeXe{} distribution, for
+% example, is documented using the \texttt{ltxdoc} class which allows
+% for a configuration file \texttt{ltxdoc.cfg}. In such a file one
+% could then add the statement
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\AtBeginDocument{\AlsoImplementation}|
+% \end{quote}
+% to make sure that all documents will show the code part.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\IndexInput \label{..Input} Last but not least I
+% defined an |\IndexInput| macro which takes a file name as an
+% argument and produces a verbatim listing of the file, indexing every
+% command as it goes along. This might be handy, if you want to learn
+% something about macros without enough documentation. I used this
+% feature to cross-reference \texttt{latex.tex} getting a verbatim
+% copy with about 15 pages index.\footnote{It took quite a long time
+% and the resulting \texttt{.idx} file was longer than the
+% \texttt{.dvi} file. Actually too long to be handled by the
+% \textsf{makeindex} program directly (on our MicroVAX) but the final
+% result was worth the trouble.}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\changes
+% To maintain a change history within the file, the |\changes|
+% command may be placed amongst the description part of the changed
+% code. It takes three arguments, thus:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\changes{|\meta{version}|}{|\meta{date}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{text}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% The changes may be used to produce an auxiliary file (\LaTeX's
+% |\glossary| mechanism is used for this) which may be printed
+% after suitable formatting. The |\changes| macro encloses the
+% \meta{date} in parentheses and appends the \meta{text} to form the
+% printed entry in such a change history; because old
+% versions\footnote{Before 2.6.} of the \textsf{makeindex}
+% program limit such fields to 64 characters, care should be taken
+% not to exceed this limit when describing the change. When
+% referring to macros in change descriptions it is conventional to use
+% "`"\meta{macroname} rather than attempting to format it properly and
+% using up valuable characters in the entry with old \textsf{makeindex}
+% versions.
+%
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Description of \cs{RecordChanges} etc.
+% added
+% to interface section.} \DescribeMacro\RecordChanges To cause the
+% change information to be written out, include "\RecordChanges" in
+% the driver file. \DescribeMacro\PrintChanges To read in and print
+% the sorted change history (in two columns), just put the
+% |\PrintChanges| command as the last (commented-out, and thus
+% executed during the documentation pass through the file) command in
+% your package file. Alternatively, this command may form one of the
+% arguments of the |\StopEventually| command, although a change
+% history is probably {\em not\/} required if only the description is
+% being printed. The command assumes that \textsf{makeindex} or some
+% other program has processed the \texttt{.glo} file to generate a
+% sorted \texttt{.gls} file. You need a special \textsf{makeindex}
+% style file; a suitable one is supplied with \DOC{}, called
+% \texttt{gglo.ist}. \DescribeMacro\GlossaryMin
+% \DescribeMacro\GlossaryPrologue \DescribeMacro\GlossaryParms The
+% "\GlossaryMin", "\GlossaryPrologue" and "\GlossaryParms" macros are
+% analagous to the "\Index"\ldots\ versions. (The \LaTeX{} `glossary'
+% mechanism is used for the change entries.)
+%
+% \label{sec:checksum}
+% \DescribeMacro\CharacterTable
+% \DescribeMacro\CheckSum
+% To overcome some of the problems of sending files over the networks
+% we developed two macros which should detect corrupted files. If one
+% places the lines
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% \small\ttfamily ^^A \ttfamily to get the blanks between "..."s
+% ^^A right
+%"%%\CharacterTable"\\
+%"%% {Upper-case "
+%"\A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z"\\
+%"%% Lower-case "
+%"\a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z"\\
+%"%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9"\\
+%"%% Exclamation \! Double quote "\verb=\"=
+%" Hash (number) \#"\\
+%"%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&"\\
+%"%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)"\\
+%"%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,"\\
+%"%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/"\\
+%"%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<"\\
+%"%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?"\\
+%"%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\"\\
+%"%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_"\\
+%"%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|"\\
+%"%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}"\\
+%"%%"
+%\end{flushleft}
+% at the beginning of the file then character translation failures
+% will be detected, provided of course, that the used \DOC{}
+% package has a correct default table. The percent
+% signs\footnote{There are two percent signs in each line. This has
+% the effect that these lines are not removed by the
+% \texttt{docstrip.tex} program.} at the beginning of the lines should
+% be typed in, since only the \DOC{} package should look at this
+% command.
+%
+% Another problem of mailing files is possible truncation. To detect
+% these sort of errors we provide a |\CheckSum| macro. The check-sum
+% of a file is simply the number of backslashes in the code, i.e.\ all
+% lines between the \textsf{macrocode} environments. But don't be
+% afraid: you don't have count the code-lines yourself; this is done
+% by the \DOC{} package for you. You simply have to use
+% the |\StopEventually| (which starts looking for backslashes) and the
+% |\Finale| command. The latter will inform you either that your file
+% has no check-sum (telling you the right number) or that your number
+% is incorrect (this time telling you both the correct and the
+% incorrect one). Then you go to the top of your file inserting the
+% line
+% \begin{quote}
+% |%% \CheckSum{|\meta{number}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% and that's all. If you precede it only with one percent then the
+% line will not show up in \texttt{docstrip} versions of the file.
+% You should do so whenever you are using conditional code (see
+% \texttt{docstrip} documentation) since then the check-sum will not
+% reflect the number of backslashes in the stripped of versions.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\bslash
+% From time to time, it is necessary to print a |\| without
+% being able to use the |\verb| command because the
+% |\catcode|$\,$s of the symbols are already firmly
+% established. In this instance we can use the command
+% |\bslash| presupposing, of course, that the actual font in
+% use at this point contains a `backslash' as a symbol. Note that
+% this definition of |\bslash| is expandable; it inserts a
+% $"\"_{12}$. This means that you have to |\protect|
+% it if it is used in `moving arguments'.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\MakePrivateLetters
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Documented \cs{MakePrivateLetters} in
+% interface section}^^A
+% If your macros "\catcode" anything other than "@" to `letter', you
+% should redefine "\MakePrivateLetters" so that it also makes the
+% relevant characters `letters' for the benefit of the indexing. The
+% default definition is just "\makeatletter".
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\DontCheckModules \DescribeMacro\CheckModules
+% \DescribeMacro\Module \DescribeMacro\AltMacroFont The `module'
+% directives of the \textsf{docstrip} system \cite{art:docstrip} are
+% normally recognised and invoke special formatting. This can be
+% turned on and off in the \texttt{.dtx} file or the driver file using
+% "\CheckModules" and "\DontCheckModules". If checking for module
+% directives is on (the default) then code in the scope of the
+% directives is set as determined by the hook "\AltMacroFont", which
+% gives {\small\ttfamily\itshape small italic type\-writer\/} by
+% default in the New Font Selection Scheme but just ordinary
+% {\small\ttfamily small type\-writer} in the old one, where a font
+% such as italic typewriter can't be used portably (plug for NFSS);
+% you will need to override this if you don't have the italic
+% typewriter font available. Code is in such a scope if it's on a
+% line beginning with "%<" or is between lines starting with
+% "%<*"\meta{name list}">" and "%</"\meta{name list}">". The
+% directive is formatted by the macro "\Module" whose single argument
+% is the text of the directive between, but not including, the angle
+% brackets; this macro may be re-defined in the driver or package file
+% and by default produces results like \Module{+foo\string|bar} with no
+% following space.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{StandardModuleDepth} Sometimes (as in this file) the
+% whole code is surrounded by modules to produce several files from a
+% single source. In this case it is clearly not appropriate to format
+% all code lines in a special "\AltMacroFont". For this reason a
+% counter "StandardModuleDepth" is provided which defines the level of
+% module nesting which is still supposed to be formatted in
+% "\MacroFont" rather then "\AltMacroFont". The default setting is
+% "0", for this documentation it was set to
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% at the beginning of the file.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Basic usage summary}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/11}{Added basic usage summary to spell
+% it out.}
+%
+% To sum up, the basic structure of a \texttt{.dtx} file without any
+% refinements is like this:
+% \begin{verse}\small
+% "% "\meta{waffle}\ldots\\
+% \quad\ldots \\
+% "% \DescribeMacro{\fred}"\\
+% "% "\meta{description of fred's use}\\
+% \quad\ldots\\
+% "% \StopEventually{"\meta{finale code}"}"\\
+% \quad\ldots\\
+% "% \begin{macro}{\fred}"\\
+% "% "\meta{commentary on macro fred}\\
+% \verb*+% \begin{macrocode}+\\
+% \meta{code for macro fred}\\
+% \verb*+% \end{macrocode}+\\
+% "% \end{macro}"\\
+% \quad\ldots\\
+% "% \Finale \PrintIndex \PrintChanges"
+% \end{verse}
+% For examples of the use of most---if not all---of the features
+% described above consult the \texttt{doc.dtx} source itself.
+%
+% \subsection{Acknowledgements}
+%
+% I would like to thank all folks at Mainz and at the Royal Military
+% College of Science for their help in this project. Especially Brian
+% and Rainer who pushed everything with their suggestions, bug fixes,
+% etc.
+%
+% A big thank you to David Love who brought the documentation
+% up-to-date again, after I neglected this file for more than two
+% years. This was most certainly a tough job as many features added to
+% \texttt{doc.dtx} after its publication in \textsl{TUGboat\/} have
+% been never properly described. Beside this splendid work he kindly
+% provided additional code (like ``docstrip'' module formatting) which
+% I think every \textsf{doc.dtx} user will be grateful for.
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{
+% \begin{thebibliography}{1}
+% \bibitem{book:Buerger} \textsc{G. A. B\"urger}.
+% \newblock Wunderbare Reisen zu Wasser und zu Lande, Feldz\"uge
+% und lustige Abenteuer des Freyherrn v.\ M\"unchhausen.
+% \newblock London, 1786 \& 1788.
+% \bibitem{art:Knuthliterat} \textsc{D. E. Knuth}.
+% \newblock Literate Programming.
+% \newblock Computer Journal, Vol.~27, \textit{pp}.~97--111,
+% May 1984.
+% \bibitem{book:KnuthA} \textsc{D. E. Knuth}.
+% \newblock Computers \& Typesetting (The \TeX book).
+% \newblock Addison-Wesley, Vol. A, 1986.
+% \bibitem{art:Chen} \textsc{L. Lamport}.
+% \newblock MakeIndex: An Index Processor for \LaTeX.
+% \newblock 17 February 1987.
+% \newblock (Taken from the file \texttt{makeindex.tex} provided
+% with
+% the program source code.)
+% \bibitem{art:doc} \textsc{Frank Mittelbach}.
+% \newblock The \DOC{}-option.
+% \newblock \textsl{TUGboat}, Vol.~10(2), \textit{pp}.~245--273,
+% July 1989.
+% \bibitem{art:docstrip} \textsc{Frank Mittelbach, Denys Duchier and
+% Johannes Braams}.
+% \newblock \texttt{docstrip.dtx} (to appear).
+% \newblock The file is part of the DOC package.
+% \bibitem{book:Raspe} \textsc{R. E. Raspe} (*1737, \dag 1797).
+% \newblock Baron M\"unchhausens narrative of his marvellous
+% travels and campaigns in Russia.
+% \newblock Oxford, 1785.
+% \bibitem{art:verbatim} \textsc{Rainer Sch\"opf}.
+% \newblock A New Implementation of \LaTeX's \texttt{verbatim} and
+% \texttt{verbatim*} Environments.
+% \newblock File \texttt{verbatim.doc}, version 1.4i.
+% \end{thebibliography}
+% ^^A\PrintIndex
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+%
+% \ifmulticols
+% \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\end{multicols}}
+% \fi
+%
+% } ^^A end \StopEventually
+%
+%
+% \section{The Description of Macros}
+%
+% Most of the following code is destined for \texttt{doc.sty} after
+% processing with \texttt{docstrip} to include the module
+% \textbf{style} indicated here. (All code in this file not
+% appropriate to \texttt{doc.sty} has to be included explicitly by
+% docstrip so that this \texttt{.dtx} file can be used as directly as
+% a package file rather than the stripped version.) The usual font
+% change for the conditionally-included lines between the
+% \Module{*style} and \Module{/style} directives is suppressed since
+% only the lines with an explicit directive are special in this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Under \LaTeXe{} the test to avoid reading
+% \DOC{} in twice is normally unnecessary. It was kept to only to
+% stay compatible with \LaTeX209 styles that |\input| \DOC{}
+% directly.
+% \changes{v1.5i}{1989/06/07}{Avoid reading the file twice.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{macro@cnt}{}{\endinput}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\fileversion
+% \DescribeMacro\filedate
+% \DescribeMacro\docdate
+% As you can see I used macros like |\fileversion| to denote the
+% version number and the date. They are defined at the very beginning
+% of the package file (without a surrounding \textsf{macrocode}
+% environment), so I don't have to search for this place here when I
+% change the version number. You can see their actual outcome in a
+% footnote to the title.
+%
+%
+% The first thing that we do next is to get ourselves a new comment
+% sign. Because all sensible signs are already occupied, we will
+% choose one that can only be entered indirectly:
+% {\DoNotIndex{\^}^^A avoid misinterpretion !!!!! VERIFY
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode`\^^A=14
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We repeat this statement at the beginning of the document in case
+% the \texttt{inputenc} package is used disabling it again.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1998/05/19}{Init docs private comment char at begin
+% of document again (pr2581)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\catcode`\^^A=14\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \SortIndex{\string^\string^A}{\string\verb\verbatimchar
+% \string^\string^A\verbatimchar
+% \encapchar main}
+% }
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Options supported by \DOC{}}
+%
+% Not options available at the moment
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\macrocode}
+% Parts of the macro definition will be surrounded by the
+% environment \textsf{macrocode}. Put more precisely, they will be
+% enclosed by a macro whose argument (the text to be set
+% `verbatim') is terminated by the string
+% \verb*+% \end{macrocode}+. Carefully note the number of spaces.
+% |\macrocode| is defined completely analogously to
+% |\verbatim|, but because a few small changes were carried
+% out, almost all internal macros have got new names. We start by
+% calling the macro |\macro@code|, the macro which bears the
+% brunt of most of the work, such as |\catcode| reassignments,
+% etc.
+% \changes{v1.5r}{1989/11/04}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macrocode{\macro@code
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we take care that all spaces have the same width, and that
+% they are not discarded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \frenchspacing \@vobeyspaces
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Before closing, we need to call |\xmacro@code|. It is this
+% macro that expects an argument which is terminated by the above
+% string. This way it is possible to keep the |\catcode|
+% changes local.
+% \changes{v1.5r}{1989/11/04}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \changes{v1.5t}{1989/11/07}{Common code moved to \cs{macro@code}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xmacro@code}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\macro@code}
+% We will now begin with the macro that does the actual work:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macro@code{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In theory it should consist of a \textsf{trivlist} environment, but
+% the empty space before and after the environment should not be
+% too large.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \topsep \MacrocodeTopsep
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next parameter we set is |\@beginparpenalty|, in order
+% to prevent a page break before such an environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@beginparpenalty \predisplaypenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We then start a |\trivlist|, set |\parskip| back to
+% zero and start an empty |\item|.
+% \changes{v1.9b}{1993/12/03}{Forcing any label from macro env.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@inlabel\leavevmode\fi
+ \trivlist \parskip \z@ \item[]%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Additionally, everything should be set in \texttt{typewriter} font.
+% Some people might prefer it somewhat differently; because of this
+% the font choice is
+% macro-driven.\footnote{The font change has to be placed
+% {\em after\/}
+% the \texttt{\bslash item}. Otherwise a change to
+% \texttt{\bslash baselineskip} will affect the
+% paragraph above.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \macro@font
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Because |\item| sets various parameters, we have found it
+% necessary to alter some of these retrospectively.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \leftskip\@totalleftmargin \advance\leftskip\MacroIndent
+ \rightskip\z@ \parindent\z@ \parfillskip\@flushglue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next line consists of the \LaTeX{} definition of |\par|
+% used in |\verbatim| and should result in blank lines being
+% shown as blank lines.
+% \changes{v1.5l}{1989/09/10}{Code line numbers supported.}
+% \changes{v1.5t}{1989/11/07}{Call \cs{leavevmode} to get \cs{everypar}
+% on blank lines.}
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1992/3/24}{Added \cs{interlinepenalty} to
+% \cs{par} from
+% verbatim.sty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \blank@linefalse \def\par{\ifblank@line
+ \leavevmode\fi
+ \blank@linetrue\@@par
+ \penalty\interlinepenalty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% What use is this definition of |\par|\,? We use the macro
+% |\obeylines| of \cite{book:KnuthA} which changes all |^^M|
+% to |\par| so that each can control its own indentation.
+% Next we must also ensure that all special signs are normalized;
+% that is, they must be given |\catcode| $12$.
+% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Changed to conform to new LaTeX verbatim,
+% which handles more ligatures.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \obeylines
+ \let\do\do@noligs \verbatim@nolig@list
+ \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.5t}{1989/11/07}{Common code added.}
+% \changes{v1.5w}{1990/02/05}{Skip of \cs{@totalleftmargin} added.} If
+% indexing by code lines is switched on the line number is incremented
+% and set appropriately. We also check whether the start of the next
+% line indicates a \texttt{docstrip} module directive and process it
+% appropriately if so using "\check@module".
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\@newlistfalse
+ \global\@minipagefalse
+ \ifcodeline@index
+ \everypar{\global\advance\c@CodelineNo\@ne
+ \llap{\theCodelineNo\ \hskip\@totalleftmargin}%
+ \check@module}%
+ \else \everypar{\check@module}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also initialize the cross-referencing feature by calling
+% |\init@crossref|. This will start the scanning mechanism
+% when encountering an escape character.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \init@crossref}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifblank@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\blank@linetrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\blank@linefalse}
+% |\ifblank@line| is the switch used in the definition above.
+% In the original \textsf{verbatim} environment the |\if@tempswa|
+% switch is used. This is dangerous because its value may change
+% while processing lines in the \textsf{macrocode} environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifblank@line
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endmacrocode}
+% Because we have begun a \textsf{trivlist} environment in the
+% \textsf{macrocode} environment, we must also end it. We must
+% also act on the value of the "pm@module" flag (see below) and
+% empty "\everypar".
+% \changes{v1.5r}{1989/11/04}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endmacrocode{%
+ \ifpm@module \endgroup \pm@modulefalse \fi
+ \everypar{}%
+ \global\@inlabelfalse
+ \endtrivlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Additionally |\close@crossref| is used to do anything needed
+% to end the cross-referencing mechanism.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \close@crossref}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MacroFont}
+% Here is the default definition for the |\MacroFont| macro.
+% With the new math font handling in NFSS2 it isn't any longer
+% correct to suppress the math font setup since this is now handled
+% differently. But to keep the font change fast we use only a
+% single |\selectfont| (in |\small|) and do the rest by hand.
+% \changes{v1.5x}{1990/02/17}{\cs{math@fontsfalse} added for NFSS.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/13}{Added \cs{reset@font} for NFSS.}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{NFSS standard}
+% \changes{v1.9t}{1995/05/26}{Removed \cs{math@fontsfalse} (different
+% math setup /pr1622}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{MacroFont}{%
+ \if@compatibility
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Despite the above statement we will call |\small| first if
+% somebody is using a \LaTeX2.09 document with doc. I wouldn't have
+% bothered since doc-sources should be up-to-date but since the
+% request came from someone called David Carlisle \ldots :-)
+% \changes{v1.9y}{1996/01/26}{Support compat mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\MacroFont{\small
+ \usefont\encodingdefault
+ \ttdefault
+ \mddefault
+ \updefault
+ }%
+ \else
+ \def\MacroFont{\fontencoding\encodingdefault
+ \fontfamily\ttdefault
+ \fontseries\mddefault
+ \fontshape\updefault
+ \small}%
+ \fi
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AltMacroFont}
+% \begin{macro}{\macro@font}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added to support distinction of modules.}
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1992/03/26}{Altered font change for OFSS.}
+% \changes{v1.7m}{1992/10/11}{Use sltt as default.}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{NFSS standard}
+% \changes{v1.9t}{1995/05/26}{Removed \cs{math@fontsfalse} (different
+% math setup /pr1622}
+% Although most of the macro code is set in "\MacroFont" we want to be
+% able to switch to indicate module code set in "\AltMacroFont".
+% "\macro@font" keeps track of which one we're using. We can't do the
+% same thing sensibly in OFSS as in NFSS.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{AltMacroFont}{%
+ \if@compatibility
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Again have |\small| first if we are in compat mode.
+% \changes{v1.9y}{1996/01/26}{Support compat mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\AltMacroFont{\small
+ \usefont\encodingdefault
+ \ttdefault
+ \mddefault
+ \sldefault
+ }%
+ \else
+ \def\AltMacroFont{\fontencoding\encodingdefault
+ \fontfamily\ttdefault
+ \fontseries\mddefault
+ \fontshape\sldefault
+ \small
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To allow changing the "\MacroFont" in the preamble we defer
+% defining the internally used "\macro@font" until after the
+% preamble.
+% \changes{v2.0a}{1998/05/16}{Support changing \cs{MacroFont} in
+% preamble}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\let\macro@font\MacroFont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@module}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifpm@module}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% This is inserted by "\everypar" at the start of each macrocode line to
+% check whether it starts with module information. (Such information is
+% of the form "%<"\meta{switch}">", where the "%" must be at the
+% start of the line and \meta{switch} comprises names with various
+% possible separators and a possible leading "+", "-", "*" or "/"
+% \cite{art:docstrip}. All that concerns us here is what the first
+% character of \meta{switch} is.) First it checks the "pm@module"
+% flag in case the previous line had a non-block module
+% directive i.e., not "%<*" or "%</"; if it did we need to close the
+% group it started and unset the flag. "\check@module" looks ahead at
+% the next token and then calls "\ch@percent" to take action depending
+% on whether or not it's a "%"; we don't want to expand the token at
+% this stage. This is all done conditionally so it can be turned off
+% if it causes problems with code that wasn't designed to be
+% \texttt{docstrip}ped.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check@module{%
+ \ifcheck@modules
+ \ifpm@module \endgroup \pm@modulefalse \fi
+ \expandafter\futurelet\expandafter\next\expandafter\ch@percent
+ \fi}
+\newif\ifpm@module
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\DontCheckModules}
+% \begin{macro}{\CheckModules}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifcheck@modules}
+% Here are two driver-file interface macros for turning the module
+% checking on and off using the "check@modules" switch.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DontCheckModules{\check@modulesfalse}
+\def\CheckModules{\check@modulestrue}
+\newif\ifcheck@modules \check@modulestrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ch@percent}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% If the lookahead token in "\next" is $"%"_{12}$ we go on to check
+% whether the following one is "<" and otherwise do nothing. Note the
+% "\expandafter" to get past the "\fi".
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ch@percent{%
+ \if \percentchar\next
+ \expandafter\check@angle
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@angle}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% Before looking ahead for the "<" the "%" is gobbled by the
+% argument here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check@angle#1{\futurelet\next\ch@angle}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ch@angle}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% \changes{v1.9k}{1994/02/22}{Have \texttt{<} active}
+% If the current lookahead token is "<" we are defined to be
+% processing a module directive can go on to look for "+" etc.;
+% otherwise we must put back the gobbled "%". With \LaTeXe{}
+% \texttt{<} is active so we have to be a bit careful.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\<\active
+\gdef\ch@angle{\ifx<\next
+ \expandafter\ch@plus@etc
+ \else \percentchar \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ch@plus@etc}
+% \begin{macro}{\check@plus@etc}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% We now have to decide what sort of a directive we're dealing with
+% and do the right thing with it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\ch@plus@etc<{\futurelet\next\check@plus@etc}
+\gdef\check@plus@etc{%
+ \if +\next
+ \let\next\pm@module
+ \else\if -\next
+ \let\next\pm@module
+ \else\if *\next
+ \let\next\star@module
+ \else\if /\next
+ \let\next\slash@module
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At some point in the past the \texttt{docstrip} program was
+% partly rewritten and at that time it also got support for a very
+% special directive of the form |%<<| followed by an arbitrary
+% string. This is used for ``verbatim'' inclusion in case of
+% certain problem. We do not really attempt to pretty print that
+% case but we need at least account for it since otherwise we get
+% an error message since this is the only case where we will not
+% have a closing |>|.
+% \changes{v2.0n}{2001/05/16}{Partly support docstrip's ``verbatim''
+% directive (pr/3331)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else\ifx <\next
+ \percentchar
+ \else
+ \let\next\pm@module
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \next}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\pm@module}
+% If we're not dealing with a block
+% directive ("*" or "/") i.e., it's a single special line, we set
+% everything up to the next ">" appropriately and then change to the
+% special macro font inside a group which will be ended at the start
+% of the next line. If the apparent module directive is missing the
+% terminating ">" this will lose, but then so will the \texttt{docstrip}
+% implementation. An alternative strategy would be to have
+% "\pm@module" make ">" active and clear a flag set here to indicate
+% processing the directive. Appropriate action could then be taken if
+% the flag was found still to be set when processing the next line.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% \changes{v1.7i}{1992/07/11}{Support for fonts depending on nesting.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\lccode`\~=`\>
+\lowercase{\gdef\pm@module#1~}{\pm@moduletrue
+ \Module{#1}\begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We switch to a special font as soon the nesting is higher than
+% the current value of "\c@StandardModuleDepth". We do a local
+% update to the "\guard@level" here which will be restored after
+% the current input line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\guard@level\@ne
+ \ifnum\guard@level>\c@StandardModuleDepth\AltMacroFont\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\star@module}
+% \begin{macro}{\slash@module}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% \changes{v1.7f}{1992/05/16}{Take account of nested guards.}
+% \changes{v1.7i}{1992/07/11}{Add counter to determine when to switch to
+% special font.}
+% If the start or end of a module {\em block\/} is indicated, after
+% setting the guard we have to check whether a change in the macrocode
+% font should be done. This will be the case if we are already inside
+% a block or are ending the outermost block. If so, we globally
+% toggle the font for subsequent macrocode sections between the normal
+% and special form, switching to the new one immediately.
+% \changes{v1.7i}{1992/07/17}{Support for fonts depending on module
+% nesting}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\lowercase{\gdef\star@module#1~}{%
+ \Module{#1}%
+ \global \advance \guard@level\@ne
+ \ifnum \guard@level>\c@StandardModuleDepth
+ \global\let\macro@font=\AltMacroFont \macro@font
+ \fi}
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\gdef\slash@module#1>{%
+ \Module{#1}%
+ \global \advance \guard@level\m@ne
+ \ifnum \guard@level=\c@StandardModuleDepth
+ \global\let\macro@font\MacroFont \macro@font
+ \fi
+}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@StandardModuleDepth}
+% \changes{v1.7i}{1992/07/11}{Counter added.}
+% Counter defining up to which level modules are considered part of
+% the main code. If, for example, the whole code is surrounded by
+% a |%<*package>| module we better set this counter to |1| to avoid
+% getting the whole code be displayed in typewriter italic.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{StandardModuleDepth}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\guard@level}
+% \changes{v1.7f}{1992/05/16}{Added.}
+% We need a counter to keep track of the guard nesting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount \guard@level
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\Module}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Added.}
+% \changes{v1.7d}{1992/04/25}{Use sans font for modules.}
+% This provides a hook to determine the way the module directive is
+% set. It gets as argument everything between the angle brackets.
+% The default is to set the contents in sans serif text between
+% $\langle\,\rangle$ with the special characters suitably "\mathcode"d
+% by "\mod@math@codes". (You can't just set it in a sans text font
+% because normally "|" will print as an em-dash.) This is done
+% differently depending on whether we have the NFSS or the old one. In
+% the latter case we can easily change "\fam" appropriately.
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{NFSS standard}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{Module}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% With NFSS what we probably {\em should\/} do is change to a new
+% "\mathversion" but I (Dave Love) haven't spotted an easy way to
+% do so correctly if the document uses a version other than
+% "normal". (We need to know in what font to set the other
+% groups.) This uses a new math alphabet rather than version and
+% consequently has to worry about whether we're using
+% \textsf{oldlfnt} or not. I expect there's a better
+% way\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\Module#1{\mod@math@codes$\langle\mathsf{#1}\rangle$}
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mod@math@codes}
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1992/03/26}{Added.} As well as `words', the module
+% directive text might contain any of the characters "*/+-,&|!()"
+% for the current version of \textsf{docstrip}. We only need
+% special action for two of them in the math code changing required
+% above: "|" is changed to a "\mathop" (it's normally |"026A|) and
+% "&" is also made a "\mathop", but in family 0. Remember that "&"
+% will not have a special catcode when it's encountered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mod@math@codes{\mathcode`\|="226A \mathcode`\&="2026}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathsf}
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1992/03/26}{Added.}
+% \changes{v1.7d}{1992/04/25}{Use sans font for modules.}
+% \changes{v1.7n}{1993/02/21}{\cs{sfmath} Renamed to \cs{mathsf}.}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{NFSS standard}
+% If NFSS is in use we need a new math alphabet which uses a sans serif
+% font. To support both the release one and two of NFSS the alphabet
+% was renamed to "\mathsf" which is defined in NFSS2.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\ifx\selectfont\undefined
+%\else
+% \ifx\mathsf\undefined
+% \newmathalphabet*{\mathsf}{\sfdefault}{m}{n}\fi
+%\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MacrocodeTopsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\MacroIndent}
+% In the code above, we have used two registers. Therefore we have
+% to allocate them. The default values might be overwritten with
+% the help of the |\DocstyleParms| macro.
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \changes{v1.5y}{1990/02/24}{Default changed.}
+% \changes{v1.6b}{1990/06/15}{\cs{rm} moved before \cs{scriptsize} to
+% avoid unnecessary fontwarning.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\MacrocodeTopsep \MacrocodeTopsep = 3pt plus 1.2pt minus 1pt
+\newdimen\MacroIndent
+\settowidth\MacroIndent{\rmfamily\scriptsize 00\ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\macrocode*}
+% \begin{macro}{\endmacrocode*}
+% Just as in the \textsf{verbatim} environment, there is also a
+% `star' variant of the \textsf{macrocode} environment in which a
+% space is shown by the symbol \verb*+ +. Until this moment, I
+% have not yet used it (it will be used in the description of the
+% definition of |\xmacro@code| below) but it's exactly on this one
+% occasion {\em here\/} that you can't use it (cf.\ M\"unchhausens
+% Marsh problem)\footnote{Karl Friedrich Hieronymus Frhr.\ v.\
+% M\"unchhausen (*1720, \dag1797). Several books were written
+% about fantastic adventures supposedly told by him (see
+% \cite{book:Raspe} or \cite{book:Buerger}). In one story he
+% escaped from the marsh by pulling himself out by his hair.}
+% directly. Because of this, on this one occasion we'll cheat
+% around the problem with an additional comment character. But now
+% back to |\macrocode*|. We start with the macro |\macro@code|
+% which prepares everything and then call the macro |\sxmacro@code|
+% whose argument is terminated by the string
+%\verb*+% \end{macrocode*}+.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{macrocode*}{\macro@code\sxmacro@code}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As we know, |\sxmacro@code| and then |\end{macrocode*}|
+% (the macro, not the string), will be executed, so that for a
+% happy ending we still need to define the macro
+% |\endmacrocode*|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\let\csname endmacrocode*\endcsname = \endmacrocode
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\xmacro@code}
+\catcode`\!=\catcode`\% ^^A In this section there must not be
+ ^^A any exclamation marks.
+ ^^A
+% As already mentioned, the macro |\xmacro@code| expects an
+% argument delimited by the string \verb*+% \end{macrocode}+. At
+% the moment that this macro is called, the |\catcode| of
+% \TeX's special characters are 12 (`other') or 13 (`active').
+% Because of this we need to utilize a different escape character
+% during the definition. This happens locally.
+% \begin{macrocode*}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\[=\@ne \catcode`\]=\tw@
+% \end{macrocode*}
+% Additionally, we need to ensure that the symbols in the above
+% string contain the |\catcode|$\,$s which are available
+% within the \textsf{macrocode} environment.
+% \begin{macrocode*}
+\catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
+\catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\ =\active \catcode`\\=\active
+!% \end{macrocode*}
+! Next follows the actual definition of |\macro@code|;
+! notice the
+! use of the new escape character. We manage to get the argument
+! surrounded by the string |\end{macrocode}|, but at the end
+! however, in spite of the actual characters used during the
+! definition of
+! this macro, |\end| with the argument |{macrocode}|
+! will be executed, to ensure a balanced environment.
+! \begin{macrocode*}
+|gdef|xmacro@code#1% \end{macrocode}[#1|end[macrocode]]
+!% \end{macrocode*}
+! \begin{macro}{\sxmacro@code}
+! The definition of |\sxmacro@code| is completely analogous,
+! only
+! here a slightly different terminating string will be used.
+! Note that the space is not active in this environment.
+! \begin{macrocode}
+|catcode`| =12
+|gdef|sxmacro@code#1% \end{macrocode*}[#1|end[macrocode*]]
+!% \end{macrocode}
+! because the |\catcode| changes have been made local by
+! commencing a
+! new group, there now follows the matching |\endgroup|
+! in a rather
+! unusual style of writing.
+! \begin{macrocode}
+|endgroup
+!% \end{macrocode}
+\catcode`\!=12
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Macros for the `documentation parts'}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DescribeMacro}
+% \begin{macro}{\Describe@Macro}
+% \changes{v1.5v}{1990/01/28}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{v1.5j}{1989/06/09}{\cs{ignorespaces} added as a temporary
+% fix}
+% \begin{macro}{\DescribeEnv}
+% \begin{macro}{\Describe@Env}
+% \changes{v1.5v}{1990/01/28}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{v1.5j}{1989/06/09}{\cs{ignorespaces} added as a temporary
+% fix}
+% The |\DescribeMacro| and |\DescribeEnv| macros should
+% print their arguments in the margin and produce an index entry.
+% We simply use |\marginpar| to get the desired result. This
+% is however not the best solution because the labels might be
+% slightly misplaced. One also might get a lot of `marginpar moved'
+% messages which are hard-wired into the \LaTeX{} output
+% routine.\footnote{It might be better to change these macros into
+% environments like the \textsf{macro} environment.} First we change
+% to horizontal mode if necessary. The \LaTeX{} macros
+% |\@bsphack| and |\@esphack| are used to make those
+% commands invisible (i.e.\ to normalize the surrounding space and
+% to make the |\spacefactor| transparent).
+% \changes{v1.5v}{1990/01/28}{\cs{MakePrivateLetters} added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DescribeMacro{\leavevmode\@bsphack
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When documenting the code for the \texttt{amstex.sty} option we
+% encountered a bug: the |\catcode| of |@| was active and
+% therefore couldn't be used in command names. So we first have to
+% make sure that we get all |\catcode|s right by calling
+% |\MakePrivateLetters| inside a group. Then we call
+% |\Describe@Macro| to do the work.
+% \changes{v2.0g}{1999/03/22}{Parse backslash as letter in argument
+% to \cs{DescribeMacro}.}
+% \changes{v2.0h}{1999/03/25}{Correct errors introduced in v2.0g.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup\MakePrivateLetters\Describe@Macro}
+\def\Describe@Macro#1{\endgroup
+ \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeMacro{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note the use of |\raggedleft| to place the output flushed
+% right. Finally we call a macro which produces the actual index
+% entry and finish with |\@esphack| to leave no
+% trace.\footnote{The whole mechanism won't work because
+% of the \texttt{\bslash leavevmode} in front.
+% As a temporary change \texttt{\bslash ignorespaces}
+% is added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \SpecialUsageIndex{#1}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\DescribeEnv| macro is completely analogous.
+% \changes{v1.5v}{1990/01/28}{\cs{MakePrivateLetters} added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DescribeEnv{\leavevmode\@bsphack\begingroup\MakePrivateLetters
+ \Describe@Env}
+\def\Describe@Env#1{\endgroup
+ \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeEnv{#1}}%
+ \SpecialEnvIndex{#1}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To put the labels in the left margin we have to use the
+% |\reversemarginpar| declaration. (This means that the
+% \texttt{doc.sty} can't be used with all classes or packages.)
+% We also
+% make the |\marginparpush| zero and |\marginparwidth| suitably
+% wide.
+% \changes{v1.5d}{1989/4/28}{\cs{marginparwidth} setting added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\reversemarginpar
+\setlength\marginparpush{0pt} \setlength\marginparwidth{8pc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bslash}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Moved \cs{bslash} documentation to `user
+% interface' part}
+% We start a new group in which to hide the alteration of
+% |\catcode|$\,$s, and make \verb+|+ introduce commands,
+% whilst |\| becomes an `other' character.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we are able to define |\bslash| (globally) to generate a
+% backslash of |\catcode| `other'. We then close this group,
+% restoring original |\catcode|$\,$s.
+% \SpecialEscapechar{\|}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+|gdef|bslash{\}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim*}
+% \changes{v1.7i}{1992/07/12}{Added changed definition for verbatim!*.}
+% The \textsf{verbatim} environment holds no secrets; it consists of
+% the normal \LaTeX{} environment. We also set the
+% |\@beginparpenalty| and change to the font given by
+% |\MacroFont|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim{\@beginparpenalty \predisplaypenalty \@verbatim
+ \MacroFont \frenchspacing \@vobeyspaces \@xverbatim}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We deal in a similar way with the star form of this environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{verbatim*}{\@beginparpenalty \predisplaypenalty \@verbatim
+ \MacroFont \@sxverbatim}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@verbatim}
+% Additionally we redefine the |\@verbatim| macro so that it
+% suppresses |%| characters at the beginning of the line. The
+% first lines are copied literally from \texttt{latex.tex}.
+% \changes{v1.7i}{1992/07/12}{Added \cs{@@par} to clear possible
+% \cs{parshape}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@verbatim{\trivlist \item[]\if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
+ \leftskip\@totalleftmargin\rightskip\z@
+ \parindent\z@\parfillskip\@flushglue\parskip\z@
+ \@@par
+ \@tempswafalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\@verbatim| sets |^^M|, the end of line character, to
+% be equal to |\par|. This control sequence is redefined
+% here; |\@@par| is the paragraph primitive of \TeX.
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1992/3/24}{Added \cs{interlinepenalty} to
+% \cs{par} from verbatim.sty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\par{\if@tempswa\hbox{}\fi\@tempswatrue\@@par
+ \penalty\interlinepenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We add a control sequence |\check@percent| to the definition
+% of |\par| whose task it is to check for a percent character.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \check@percent}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The rest is again copied literally from \texttt{latex.tex} (less
+% "\tt").
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Removed redundant \cs{tt}.}
+% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Changed to conform to new LaTeX verbatim,
+% which handles more ligatures.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \obeylines
+ \let\do\do@noligs \verbatim@nolig@list
+ \let\do\@makeother \dospecials}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@percent}
+% Finally we define |\check@percent|. Since this must compare a
+% character with a percent sign we must first (locally) change
+% percent's |\catcode| so that it is seen by \TeX. The definition
+% itself is nearly trivial: grab the following character, check if
+% it is a |%|, and insert it again if not. At the end of the
+% \textsf{verbatim} environment this macro will peek at the next
+% input line. In that case the argument to |\check@percent| might
+% be a |\par| or a macro with arguments. Therefore we make the
+% definition |\long| (|\par| allowed) and use the normal |\next|
+% mechanism to reinsert the argument after the |\fi| if necessary.
+% \changes{v1.5i}{1989/06/07}{Definition changed to `long'}
+% \changes{v1.5i}{1989/06/07}{Macro \cs{next} used to guard against
+% macro with arguments}
+% There is a subtle problem here, the equal sign between
+% |\next| and |#1| is actually necessary. Do you see why?
+% The omission of this token once caused a funny error.
+% \changes{v1.5u}{1989/11/14}{equal sign added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\%=12
+ \long\gdef\check@percent#1{\ifx #1%\let\next\@empty \else
+ \let\next=#1\fi \next}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verb}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Now warns about newlines (from
+% newdoc with `@noligs added).}
+% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Changed to conform to new LaTeX \cs{verb}}
+% We re-define "\verb" to check for newlines in its argument since a
+% missing delimiter is difficult to detect in \DOC{} source.
+% The code is the saem as in latex.tex of September 19, 1993.
+% Perhaps there should be a font-changing
+% hook rather than just using "\tt", but if so it probably should be
+% different from "\MacroFont" since that normally includes "\small"
+% and would look wrong inline.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/28}{Added math mode check (from verbatim.sty)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verb{\relax\ifmmode\hbox\else\leavevmode\null\fi
+ \bgroup \let\do\do@noligs \verbatim@nolig@list
+ \ttfamily \verb@eol@error \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
+ \@ifstar{\@sverb}{\@vobeyspaces \frenchspacing \@sverb}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verb@balance@group}
+% \begin{macro}{\verb@egroup}
+% \begin{macro}{\verb@eol@error}
+% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Renamed \cs{verb@err} to
+% \cs{verb@eol@error}, as in new LaTeX verbatim.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\verb@balance@group\@empty
+
+\def\verb@egroup{\global\let\verb@balance@group\@empty\egroup}
+
+\begingroup
+ \obeylines%
+ \gdef\verb@eol@error{\obeylines%
+ \def^^M{\verb@egroup\@latex@error{%
+ Text for \noexpand\verb command ended by end of line}\@ehc}}%
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sverb}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Added for \cs{verb} change.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/28}{Now same as in verbatim.sty.}
+% \changes{v1.8b}{1993/09/21}{Changed to conform to new LaTeX verbatim,
+% which has better error trapping.}
+% See \cite{art:verbatim} for commentary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sverb#1{%
+ \catcode`#1\active \lccode`\~`#1%
+ \gdef\verb@balance@group{\verb@egroup
+ \@latex@error{Illegal use of \noexpand\verb command}\@ehc}%
+ \aftergroup\verb@balance@group
+ \lowercase{\let~\verb@egroup}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@nolig@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@noligs}
+% These macros replace the old "\@noligs" mechanism by an
+% extensible version to allow more ligatures to be added.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\'\do\-}
+\def\do@noligs#1{%
+ \catcode`#1\active
+ \begingroup
+ \lccode`\~=`#1\relax
+ \lowercase{\endgroup\def~{\leavevmode\kern\z@\char`#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\m@cro@}
+% \changes{v1.5v}{1990/01/28}{\cs{macro@} renamed to \cs{m@cro@}
+% since AmSTeX
+% defines another macro of the same name.}
+% \begin{macro}{\macro@cnt}
+% \label{page:macro} The \textsf{macro} environment is implemented as
+% a \textsf{trivlist} environment, whereby in order that the macro
+% names can be placed under one another in the margin
+% (corresponding to the macro's nesting depth), the macro
+% |\makelabel| must be altered. In order to store the nesting
+% depth, we use a counter. We also need a counter to count the
+% number of nested \textsf{macro} environments.
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/08/17}{Fix for save stack problem.}
+% \changes{v1.9k}{1994/02/22}{Fix probably no longer necessary}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\macro@cnt \macro@cnt=0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The environment takes an argument---the macro name to be
+% described. Since this name may contain special `letters' we have
+% to re-|\catcode| them before scanning the argument. This is done
+% by the |\MakePrivateLetters| macro.
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/08/17}{Fix for save stack problem.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Catcode backslash to other (from newdoc).}
+% \changes{v1.9k}{1994/02/22}{Don't omit extra group}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macro{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\\12
+ \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iftrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\environment}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{Environment added}
+% The ``environment'' envrionment will be implemented just like the
+% ``macro'' environment flagging any differences in the code by
+% passing |\iffalse| or |\iftrue| to the |\m@cro@| environment
+% doing the actual work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\environment{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\\12
+ \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iffalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% After scanning the argument we close the group to get the normal
+% |\catcode|$\,$s back. Then we assign a special value to
+% |\topsep| and start a \textsf{trivlist} environment.
+% \changes{v1.5f}{1989/5/07}{MacroTopsep parameter added.}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/08/17}{Fix for save stack problem.}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1993/10/25}{Support ``environment'' env}
+% \changes{v1.9k}{1994/02/22}{Remove \cs{macro@level}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\m@cro@#1#2{\endgroup \topsep\MacroTopsep \trivlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also save the name being described in |\saved@macroname| for
+% use in conjunction with the |\changes| macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\saved@macroname{\string#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now there follows a variation of |\makelabel| which is used
+% should the environment not be nested, or should it lie between
+% two successive |\begin{macro}| instructions or explanatory
+% text. One can recognize this with the switch |\if@inlabel|
+% which will be |true| in the case of successive |\item|
+% commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\makelabel##1{\llap{##1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |@inlabel| is |true| and if $\verb=\macro@cnt= > 0$
+% then the above definition needs to be changed, because in this
+% case \LaTeX{} would otherwise put the labels all on the same line
+% and this would lead to them being overprinted on top of each
+% other. Because of this |\makelabel| needs to be redefined
+% in this case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@inlabel
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |\macro@cnt| has the value $1$, then we redefine
+% |\makelabel| so that the label will be positioned in the
+% second line of the margin. As a result of this, two macro names
+% appear correctly, one under the other. It's important whilst
+% doing this that the generated label box is not allowed to have
+% more depth than a normal line since otherwise the distance
+% between the first two text lines of \TeX{} will be incorrectly
+% calculated. The definition should then look like:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \def\makelabel##1{\llap{\vtop to \baselineskip
+% {\hbox{\strut}\hbox{##1}\vss}}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Completely analogous to this is the case where labels need to be
+% placed one under the other. The lines above are only an example
+% typeset with the \textsf{verbatim} environment. To produce the real
+% definition we save the value of |\macro@cnt| in
+% |\count@| and empty the temp macro |\@tempa| for later
+% use.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@tempa\@empty \count@\macro@cnt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the following loop we append for every already typeset label
+% an |\hbox{\strut}| to the definition of |\@tempa|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \loop \ifnum\count@>\z@
+ \edef\@tempa{\@tempa\hbox{\strut}}\advance\count@\m@ne \repeat
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now be put the definition of |\makelabel| together.
+% \changes{v1.5b}{1989/04/27}{vbox to vtop changed in makelabel (test)}
+% \changes{v1.5e}{1989/04/28}{ht strutbox changed to baselineskip
+% (test)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\makelabel##1{\llap{\vtop to\baselineskip
+ {\@tempa\hbox{##1}\vss}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next we increment the value of the nesting depth counter. This
+% value inside the \textsf{macro} environment is always at least one
+% after this point, but its toplevel definition is zero. Provided
+% this environment has been used correctly, $|\macro@cnt|=0$
+% should not occur when |@inlabel|=\textsf{true}. It is
+% however possible if this environment is used within other list
+% environments (but this would have little point).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance \macro@cnt \@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |@inlabel| is false we reset |\macro@cnt| assuming
+% that there is enough room to print the macro name without
+% shifting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else \macro@cnt\@ne \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now the label will be produced using |\item|. The following
+% line is only a hack saving the day until a better solution is
+% implemented. We have to face two problems: the argument might be
+% a |\par| which is forbidden in the argument of other macros
+% if they are not defined as |\long|, or it is something like
+% |\iffalse| or |\else|, i.e.\ something which will be
+% misinterpreted when \TeX{} is skipping conditional text. In both
+% cases |\item| will bomb, so we protect the argument by using
+% |\string|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\item[%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Depending on whether we are inside a ``macro'' or ``environment''
+% environment we use |\PrintMacroName| or |\PrintEnvName| to
+% display the name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #1%
+ \noexpand\PrintMacroName
+ \else
+ \noexpand\PrintEnvName
+ \fi
+ {\string#2}]}%
+ \@tempa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point we also produce an index entry. Because it is not
+% known which index sorting program will be used, we do not use the
+% command |\index|, but rather a command
+% |\SpecialMainIndex| after advancing the counter for indexing
+% by line number. This may be redefined by the user in
+% order to generate an index entry which will be understood by the
+% index program in use (note the definition of
+% |\SpecialMainIndex| for our installation).
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \changes{v1.9u}{1995/08/06}{Removed brace group which
+% killed \cs{DoNotIndex}}
+% We advance the current codeline number and after producing an
+% index entry revert to the original value
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\advance\c@CodelineNo\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Again the macro to call depends on the environment we are
+% actually in.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #1%
+ \SpecialMainIndex{#2}\nobreak
+ \DoNotIndex{#2}%
+ \else
+ \SpecialMainEnvIndex{#2}\nobreak
+ \fi
+ \global\advance\c@CodelineNo\m@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\nobreak| is needed to prevent a page break after the
+% |\write| produced by the |\SpecialMainIndex| macro. We
+% exclude the new macro in the cross-referencing feature, to
+% prevent spurious non-main entry references. Regarding possibly
+% problematic arguments, the implementation takes
+% care of |\par| and the conditionals are uncritical.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/02}{Removed redundant code checking for
+% \cs{par}.}^^A
+%
+% Because the space symbol should be ignored between the
+% |\begin{macro}{...}| and the following text we must take
+% care of this with |\ignorespaces|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endmacro}
+% \begin{macro}{\endenvironment}
+% Older releases of this environment omit the |\endgroup| token,
+% when being nested. This was done to avoid unnessary stack usage.
+% However it does not work if \textsf{macro} and
+% \textsf{environment} environments are mixed, therefore we now
+% use a simpler approach.
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/08/17}{Fix for save stack problem.}
+% \changes{v1.9k}{1994/02/22}{Don't checkfor nesting}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\endmacro \endtrivlist
+\let\endenvironment\endmacro
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MacroTopsep}
+% Here is the default value for the |\MacroTopsep| parameter
+% used above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\MacroTopsep \MacroTopsep = 7pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Formatting the margin}
+%
+% The following three macros should be user definable.
+% Therefore we define those macros only if they have not already
+% been defined.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintMacroName}
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintEnvName}
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintDescribeMacro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintDescribeEnv}
+% The formatting of the macro name in the left margin is done by
+% these macros. We first set a |\strut| to get the height and
+% depth of the normal lines. Then we change to the
+% |\MacroFont| using |\string| to |\catcode| the
+% argument to other (assuming that it is a macro name). Finally we
+% print a space. The font change remains local since this macro
+% will be called inside an |\hbox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{PrintMacroName}
+ {\def\PrintMacroName#1{\strut \MacroFont \string #1\ }}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use the same formatting conventions when describing a macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{PrintDescribeMacro}
+ {\def\PrintDescribeMacro#1{\strut \MacroFont \string #1\ }}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To format the name of a new environment there is no need to use
+% |\string|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{PrintDescribeEnv}
+ {\def\PrintDescribeEnv#1{\strut \MacroFont #1\ }}{}
+\@ifundefined{PrintEnvName}
+ {\def\PrintEnvName#1{\strut \MacroFont #1\ }}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Creating index entries by scanning `macrocode'}
+%
+% The following macros ensure that index entries are created for each
+% occurrence of a \TeX-like command (something starting with
+% `|\|') providing indexing has been turned on with "\PageIndex"
+% or "\CodelineIndex". With the default definitions of
+% |\SpecialMainIndex|, etc., the index file generated is
+% intended to be processed by Chen's \textsf{makeindex} program
+% \cite{art:Chen}.
+%
+%
+% Of course, in {\em this\/} package file itself we've sometimes had to
+% make \verb+|+ take the r\^ole of \TeX's escape character to
+% introduce command names at places where |\| has to belong to
+% some other category. Therefore, we may also need to recognize
+% \verb+|+ as the introducer for a command when setting the text
+% inside the \textsf{macrocode} environment. Other users may have the
+% need to make similar reassignments for their macros.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialEscapechar}\label{sect:specialescapechar}
+% \begin{macro}{\active@escape@char}
+% \begin{macro}{\special@escape@char}
+% The macro |\SpecialEscapechar| is used to denote a special escape
+% character for the next \textsf{macrocode} environment. It has one
+% argument---the new escape character given as a `single-letter'
+% control sequence. Its main purpose is defining
+% |\special@escape@char| to produce the chosen escape character
+% |\catcode|$\,$d to 12 and |\active@escape@char| to produce the
+% same character but with |\catcode| 13.
+%
+% The macro |\special@escape@char| is used to {\em print\/}
+% the escape character while |\active@escape@char| is needed
+% in the definition of |\init@crossref| to start the scanning
+% mechanism.
+%
+% In the definition of |\SpecialEscapechar| we need an
+% arbitrary character with |\catcode| 13. We use `\~{}' and
+% ensure that it is active. The |\begingroup| is used to make
+% a possible change local to the expansion of
+% |\SpecialEscapechar|.
+% \changes{v1.7g}{1992/6/19}{Making tilde active moved outside
+% definition}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\~\active
+\gdef\SpecialEscapechar#1{%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we are ready for the definition of
+% |\active@escape@char|. It's a little tricky: we first
+% define locally the uppercase code of `\~{}' to be the new escape
+% character.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \uccode`\~`#1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Around the definition of |\active@escape@char| we place an
+% |\uppercase| command. Recall that the expansion of
+% |\uppercase| changes characters according to their
+% |\uccode|, but leaves their |\catcode|$\,$s untouched
+% (cf.\ \TeX{}book page 41).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \uppercase{\gdef\active@escape@char{~}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The definition of |\special@escape@char| is easier, we use
+% |\string| to |\catcode| the argument of
+% |\SpecialEscapechar| to 12 and suppress the preceding
+% |\escapechar|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \escapechar\m@ne \xdef\special@escape@char{\string#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we close the group and end the definition: the value of
+% |\escapechar| as well as the |\uccode| and
+% |\catcode| of `\~{}' will be restored.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\init@crossref}
+% The replacement text of |\init@crossref| should fulfill the
+% following tasks:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \parindent4em
+% \item[1)]
+% |\catcode| all characters used in macro names to
+% 11 (i.e.\ `letter').
+% \item[2)]
+% |\catcode| the `|\|' character to 13
+% (i.e.\ `active').
+% \item[3a)]
+% |\let| the `|\|' equal |\scan@macro|
+% (i.e.\ start the macro scanning mechanism) if there is
+% no special escape character (i.e.\ the
+% |\special@escape@char| is `|\|').
+% \item[3b)]
+% Otherwise |\let| it equal |\bslash|, i.e.\
+% produce a printable |\|.
+% \item[4)]
+% Make the \meta{special escape character} active.
+% \item[5)]
+% |\let| the active version of the special escape
+% character
+% (i.e.\ the expansion of |\active@escape@char|) equal
+% |\scan@macro|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% The reader might ask why we bother to |\catcode| the
+% `|\|' first to 12 (at the end of |\macro@code|) then
+% re-|\catcode| it to 13 in order to produce a $|\|_{12}$
+% in case 3b) above. This is done because we have to ensure that
+% `|\|' has |\catcode| 13 within the \textsf{macrocode}
+% environment. Otherwise the delimiter for the argument of
+% |\xmacro@code| would not be found (parameter matching
+% depends on |\catcode|$\,$s).
+%
+% Therefore we first re-|\catcode| some characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup \catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=\active
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We carry out tasks 2) and 3b) first.
+% \SpecialEscapechar{\|}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+|gdef|init@crossref{|catcode`|\|active |let\|bslash
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Because of the popularity of the `|@|' character as a
+% `letter' in macros, we normally have to change its
+% |\catcode| here, and thus fulfill task 1). But the macro
+% designer might use other characters as private letters as well,
+% so we use a macro to do the |\catcode| switching.
+% \SpecialEscapechar\|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ |MakePrivateLetters
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we |\catcode| the special escape character to 13 and
+% |\let| it equal |\scan@macro|, i.e.\ fulfill tasks 4)
+% and 5). Note the use of |\expandafter| to insert the chosen
+% escape character saved in |\special@escape@char| and
+% |\active@escape@char|.
+% \SpecialEscapechar\|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ |catcode|expandafter`|special@escape@char|active
+ |expandafter|let|active@escape@char|scan@macro}
+|endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If there is no special escape character, i.e.\ if
+% |\SpecialEscapechar| is |\\|, the second last line will
+% overwrite the previous definition of $|\|_{13}$. In this
+% way all tasks are fulfilled.
+%
+% For happy documenting we give default values to
+% |\special@escape@char| and |\active@escape@char| with
+% the following line:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\SpecialEscapechar{\\}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakePrivateLetters}
+% Here is the default definition of this command, which makes just
+% the |@| into a letter. The user may change it if he/she
+% needs more or other characters masquerading as letters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{MakePrivateLetters}
+ {\let\MakePrivateLetters\makeatletter}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\close@crossref}
+% At the end of a cross-referencing part we prepare ourselves for
+% the next one by setting the escape character to `|\|'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\close@crossref{\SpecialEscapechar\\}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Macros for scanning macro names}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scan@macro}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Support for checksum added.}
+% \begin{macro}{\macro@namepart}
+% The |\init@crossref| will have made |\active| our
+% |\special@escape@char|, so that each
+% |\active@escape@char| will invoke |\scan@macro| when
+% within the \textsf{macrocode} environment. By this means, we can
+% automatically add index entries for every \TeX-like command which
+% is met whilst setting (in verbatim) the contents of
+% \textsf{macrocode} environments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scan@macro{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we output the character which triggered this macro. Its
+% version |\catcode|$\,$d to 12 is saved in
+% |\special@escape@char|. We also call |\step@checksum|
+% to generate later on a proper check-sum (see section
+% \ref{sec:checksum} for details).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \special@escape@char
+ \step@checksum
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the \textsf{macrocode} environment contains, for example, the
+% command |\\|, the second |\| should not start the
+% scanning mechanism. Therefore we use a switch to decide if
+% scanning of macro names is allowed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifscan@allowed
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro assembles the letters forming a \TeX\ command in
+% |\macro@namepart| so this is initially cleared; we then set
+% |\next| to the \textit{first\/} character following the
+% |\| and call |\macro@switch| to determine whether that
+% character is a letter or not.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\macro@namepart\@empty
+ \def\next{\futurelet\next\macro@switch}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As you recognize, we actually did something else, because we have
+% to defer the |\futurelet| call until after the final
+% |\fi|. If, on the other hand, the scanning is disabled we
+% simply |\let| |\next| equal `empty'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else \let\next\@empty \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we invoke |\next| to carry out what's needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifscan@allowed}
+% \begin{macro}{\scan@allowedtrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\scan@allowedfalse}
+% |\ifscan@allowed| is the switch used above to determine if
+% the |\active@escape@char|\SpecialIndex{\active@escape@char}
+% should start the macro scanning mechanism.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifscan@allowed \scan@allowedtrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\EnableCrossrefs}
+% \begin{macro}{\DisableCrossrefs}
+% At this point we might define two macros which allow the user to
+% disable or enable the cross-referencing mechanism. Processing of
+% files will be faster if only main index entries are generated
+% (i.e., if |\DisableCrossrefs| is in force).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DisableCrossrefs{\@bsphack\scan@allowedfalse\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro |\EnableCrossrefs| will also disable any
+% |\DisableCrossrefs| command encountered afterwards.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\EnableCrossrefs{\@bsphack\scan@allowedtrue
+ \def\DisableCrossrefs{\@bsphack\@esphack}\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\macro@switch}
+% Now that we have the character which follows the escape character
+% (in |\next|), we can determine whether it's a `letter'
+% (which probably includes |@|).
+%
+% If it is, we let |\next| invoke a macro which assembles the
+% full command name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macro@switch{\ifcat\noexpand\next a%
+ \let\next\macro@name
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, we have a `single-character' command name. For all
+% those single-character names, we use |\short@macro| to
+% process them into suitable index entries.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else \let\next\short@macro \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now that we know what macro to use to process the macro name, we
+% invoke it~\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\short@macro}
+% \changes{v1.5c}{1989/4/27}{Corrected bad bug by putting the
+% scan@allowedfalse macro before printing
+% the argument.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/10}{Ensure character stored in
+% \cs{macro@namepart} as `letter' so index exclusion works.}
+% This macro will be invoked (with a single character as parameter)
+% when a single-character macro name has been spotted whilst
+% scanning within the \textsf{macrocode} environment.
+%
+% First we take a look at the |\index@excludelist| to see
+% whether this macro name should produce an index entry. This is
+% done by the |\ifnot@excluded| macro which assumes that the
+% macro name is saved in |\macro@namepart|. The character
+% mustn't be stored with a special category code or exclusion from
+% the index won't work, so we employ the case-changing trick used
+% elsewhere. Since the argument might be an active character,
+% |\string| is used to normalize it.
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1998/12/28}{Correctly use the case-changing trick.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\&=12
+\gdef\short@macro#1{\begingroup
+ \uccode`\&=\expandafter`\string#1%
+ \uppercase{\def\x{\def\macro@namepart{&}}}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup\x
+ \ifnot@excluded
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If necessary the index entry is produced by the macro
+% |\produce@index|. Depending on the actual character seen,
+% this macro has to do different things, so we pass the character
+% as an argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \produce@index{#1}\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we disable the cross-referencing mechanism with
+% |\scan@allowedfalse| and print the actual character. The
+% index entry was generated first to ensure that no page break
+% intervenes (recall that a |^^M| will start a new line).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scan@allowedfalse#1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After typesetting the character we can safely enable the
+% cross-referencing feature again. Note that this macro won't be
+% called (since |\macro@switch| won't be called) if
+% cross-referencing is globally disabled.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scan@allowedtrue }
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\produce@index}
+% \changes{v1.4s}{1989/04/23}{Added noexpand to all
+% \cs{if} tests
+% to avoid garbage produced by new active chars}
+% \changes{v1.4s}{1989/04/23}{Used \texttt{\protect\bslash string} for
+% the same reason.}
+% \changes{v1.5c}{1989/4/27}{Corrected bad bug by placing the
+% scan@allowedfalse macro into short@macro}
+% This macro is supposed to generate a suitable |\SortIndex|
+% command for a given single-letter control sequence. We test
+% first for the cases which involve active characters (i.e.\ the
+% backslash, the special escape character (if any), the space and
+% the |^^M|). Using the |\if| test (testing for
+% character codes), we have to ensure that the argument isn't
+% expanded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\produce@index#1{%
+ \if\noexpand#1\special@escape@char
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the character is the special escape character (or the
+% `|\|' in case there was none) the |\it@is@a| macro is
+% used to produce the actual |\SortIndex| call.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \scan@allowedfalse \it@is@a\special@escape@char \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next comes the test for a `|\|' which must be the
+% $|\|_{13}$ expanding to |\bslash|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if\noexpand#1\bslash \it@is@a\bslash \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Another possibility is \verb*+ +$_{13}$. Recall that |\space|
+% produces a \verb*+ +$_{10}$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if\noexpand#1\space \it@is@a\space \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The last\footnote{Well, it isn't the last active character after
+% all. I added \texttt{\bslash @noligs} some days ago and now
+% \texttt{`} too is active. So we have to make sure that such
+% characters don't get expanded in the index.} possibility of an
+% active character is |^^M|\@. In this case we don't test for
+% character codes, since it is easier to look if the character is
+% equal to |\par|. (We are inside the \textsf{macrocode}
+% environment.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx#1\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we end up here we have just scanned a |\^^M| or something
+% similar. Since this will be treated like \verb*+\ + by \TeX{} we
+% produce a corresponding index entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \it@is@a\space \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If it is the token |\relax| we do nothing. This can't happen
+% when the `doc' package is used in the way described here, but was
+% added to allow extensions like the \texttt{idxverb} option.
+% \changes{v1.5t}{1989/11/14}{Added \cs{relax} as a possible token to
+% allow extensions.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx#1\relax \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next three branches are needed because of bugs in
+% our \textsf{makeindex} program. You can't produce unbalanced index
+% entries\footnote{This is possible for \TeX{} if you use
+% \texttt{\string{$_{12}$ \rmfamily or
+% \ttfamily\string}$_{12}$},
+% but \textsf{makeindex} will complain.}
+% and you have to double a percent character. To get around these
+% restrictions we use special macros to produce the |\index|
+% calls.\footnote{Brian \textsc{Hamilton Kelly} has written fixes for
+% all three
+% bugs. When they've found their way through all
+% installations,
+% the lines above will be removed. See
+% page~\pageref{bug:fixes} if you already have them.
+% (I'm not sure which versions incorporate these, but
+% 2.11 is OK. See also
+% \pageref{makeindex:version}.)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if\noexpand#1\bgroup \LeftBraceIndex \else
+ \if\noexpand#1\egroup \RightBraceIndex \else
+ \if\noexpand#1\percentchar \PercentIndex \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% All remaining characters are used directly to produce their index
+% entries. This is possible even for the characters which have
+% special meanings in the index program, provided we quote the
+% characters. (This is correctly done in |\it@is@a|.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \it@is@a{\string#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We now need a whole pile of |\fi|$\,$s to match up with
+% the |\if|$\,$s.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\macro@name}
+% We now come to the macro which assembles command names which
+% consist of one or more `letters' (which might well include
+% |@| symbols, or anything else which has a |\catcode| of
+% 11).
+%
+% To do this we add the `letter' to the existing definition of
+% |\macro@namepart| (which you will recall was originally set
+% to |\@empty|).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macro@name#1{\edef\macro@namepart{\macro@namepart#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we grab hold of the {\em next\/} single character and let
+% |\more@macroname| determine whether it belongs to the letter
+% string forming the command name or is a `non-letter'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \futurelet\next\more@macroname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\more@macroname}
+%
+% This causes another call of |\macro@name| to add in the next
+% character, if it is indeed a `letter'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\more@macroname{\ifcat\noexpand\next a%
+ \let\next\macro@name
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, it finishes off the index entry by invoking
+% |\macro@finish|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else \let\next\macro@finish \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here's where we invoke whatever macro was |\let| equal to
+% |\next|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\macro@finish}
+% When we've assembled the full `letter'-string which forms the
+% command name, we set the characters forming the entire command
+% name, and generate an appropriate |\index| command (provided
+% the command name is not on the list of exclusions). The
+% `|\|' is already typeset; therefore we only have to output
+% all `letters' saved in |\macro@namepart|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\macro@finish{%
+ \macro@namepart
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we call |\ifnot@excluded| to decide whether we have to
+% produce an index entry. The construction with |\@tempa| is
+% needed because we want the expansion of |\macro@namepart| in
+% the |\index| command.\footnote{The \texttt{\bslash index}
+% command will expand its argument in the \texttt{\bslash output}
+% routine. At this time \texttt{\bslash macro@namepart} might have a
+% new value.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnot@excluded
+ \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\SpecialIndex{\bslash\macro@namepart}}%
+ \@tempa \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection[The index exclude list]{The index exclude
+% list\footnotemark}
+% \footnotetext{Warning: the incomplete commentary on
+% \texttt{\bslash DoNotIndex} and the macros it calls
+% was written by Dave Love.}
+%
+% The internal form of the index exclude list is
+% \begin{quote}
+% \meta{macro name}|,|\meta{macro name}|,|
+% \ldots|,|
+% \end{quote}
+% where \meta{macro name} is a macro name like
+% $"\"_{12}"p"{_{11}}"@"_{11}$ or $"\"_{12}"$"_{11}$. Note that the "\"
+% has category `other' and the other characters in the name are all
+% `letter', regardless of their normal category.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DoNotIndex}
+% This macro is used to suppress macro names in the index. It
+% starts off with a new group because we have to change the
+% |\catcode|$\,$s of all characters which belong to `letters'
+% while macros are defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DoNotIndex{\begingroup \MakePrivateLetters
+ \catcode`\\12
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we call the macro which actually reads the argument given by
+% the user.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \do@not@index}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@not@index}
+% We make the |\do@not@index| macro |\long|
+% since the user might want to exclude the |\par|
+% macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\do@not@index#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It just adds to a token list after finishing the group in which
+% the catcodes were changed.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Replaced with newdoc version.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup
+ \addto@hook\index@excludelist{#1,}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addto@hook}
+% The code for adding tokens (the second argument) to a token list
+% (the first argument) is taken from~\cite{art:verbatim}, but it needs
+% to be "\long" in case "\par" is amongst the tokens.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\index@excludelist}
+% We need an initially-empty register for the excluded list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\index@excludelist
+\index@excludelist{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnot@excluded}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Replaced with newdoc version.}
+% \begin{macro}{\expanded@notin}
+% Now we take a look at the |\index@excludelist| to see
+% whether a macro name saved in |\macro@namepart| should
+% produce an index entry. This macro is a pseudo |\if|; it
+% should expand to |\iftrue| or |\iffalse| depending on
+% the contents of |\index@excludelist|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we change "\catcode"s so that "\" is `other' and "|" a
+% temporary for the escape character. This is necessary since our
+% macro names are stored that way in the "\index@excludelist".
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode`\|=0%
+\catcode`\\=12
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we define "\ifnot@excluded" to call "\expanded@notin" with
+% two arguments: the first is the string "\" followed by the
+% contents of "\macro@namepart" followed by a "," and the second is
+% "\the" followed by "\index@excludelist". To achieve the expansion
+% of "\macro@namepart", i.e.\ to pass its contents, we need a
+% suitable number of "\expandafter"s.
+% \SpecialEscapechar{\|}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+|gdef|ifnot@excluded{|expandafter
+ |expanded@notin|expandafter{|expandafter
+ \|macro@namepart,}{|the|index@excludelist}}
+|endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro "\expanded@notin" now does the dirty work. It first
+% defines a macro "\in@@" with a very special parameter text. If
+% you look closely "\in@@" has three arguments, the first one is
+% delimited by the first argument of "\expanded@notin" (i.e.\ by
+% the string starting with a "\" and ending with a "," above), the
+% second is undelimited (which means that it will get the next
+% token after our string, and the third is delimited again and will
+% get the rest up to the token "\in@@". In other words the token
+% "\in@@" is also used as a delimiter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\expanded@notin#1#2{%
+ \def\in@@##1#1##2##3\in@@{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now the replacement text simply compares the second argument
+% (i.e.\ the undelimited one after our string) to the token
+% "\expanded@notin". This is an unclosed "\ifx" statement which
+% means that this macro behaves similar to a normal \TeX{}
+% conditional.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\expanded@notin##2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After all these preparations we call "\in@@". First we expand the
+% token after "\in@@" (which is "\the" from the second argument to
+% "\expanded@notin"). As a result we get the contents of the
+% "\index@excludelist" inserted after "\in@@". After this contents
+% we add once more the string we are looking for, then the token
+% "\expanded@notin" and finally the token "\in@@".
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\in@@#2#1\expanded@notin\in@@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now what happens when the macro "\in@@" above gets called? The
+% first argument to "\in@@" is delimited by our string. In other
+% words it will get everything from the contents of
+% "\index@excludelist" before this string. If the string is not in
+% "\index@excludelist" then it gets the whole contents, since after
+% it we had inserted the string one more. In this case the next
+% token is "\expanded@notin" which gets assigned to the second
+% argument and the third argument will be empty. If, on the other
+% hand, the string was inside "\index@excludelist" then the second
+% argument will not be the token "\expanded@notin" and the third
+% argument will be all the garbage up to "\in@@". Therefore testing
+% the seconded argument, as done in the definition of "\in@@" will
+% tell us whether or not the string is in "\index@includelist" and
+% this was exactly what we wanted. (Deep breath.) You got
+% that?\footnote{\TeX{}book page 125. The code described above is
+% originally due to Michael Spivak who used a similar method within
+% the \AmSTeX{} macros.}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Macros for generating index entries}
+%
+% Here we provide default definitions for the macros invoked to create
+% index entries; these are either invoked explicitly, or automatically
+% by |\scan@macro|. As already mentioned, the definitions given
+% here presuppose that the |.idx| file will be processed by
+% Chen's \textsf{makeindex} program --- they may be redefined for use
+% with the user's favourite such program.
+%
+% To assist the reader in locating items in the index, all such
+% entries are sorted alphabetically {\em ignoring\/} the initial
+% `|\|'; this is achieved by issuing an |\index| command which
+% contains the `actual' operator for \textsf{makeindex}. The default
+% value for the latter operator is `|@|', but the latter character is
+% so popular in \LaTeX\ package files that it is necessary to substitute
+% another character. This is indicated to \textsf{makeindex} by means
+% of an `index style file'; the character selected for this function
+% is |=|, and therefore this character too must be specially treated
+% when it is met in a \TeX\ command. A suitable index style file is
+% provided amongst the supporting files for this style file in
+% \texttt{gind.ist} and is generated from this source by processing
+% with \texttt{docstrip} to extract the module \textbf{gind}. A
+% similar style file \texttt{gglo.ist} is supplied for sorting the
+% change information in the glossary file and is extracted as module
+% \textbf{gglo}. First of all we add some information to the front of
+% the \texttt{.ist} files. \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/11}{glo.ist and
+% gind.ist now derivable from doc.dtx with docstrip.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<+gind|gglo>%% This is a MAKEINDEX style file which should be used to
+%<+gind>%% generate the formatted index for use with the doc
+%<+gglo>%% generate the formatted change history for use with the doc
+%<+gind|gglo>%% package. The TeX commands used below are defined in
+%<+gind|gglo>%% doc.sty. The commands for MAKEINDEX like `level'
+%<+gind|gglo>%% `item_x1' are described in `` Makeindex, A General
+%<+gind|gglo>%% Purpose, Formatter-Independent Index Processor'' by
+%<+gind|gglo>%% Pehong Chen.
+%<+gind|gglo>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\actualchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\quotechar}
+% \begin{macro}{\levelchar}
+% First come the definitions of |\actualchar|,
+% |\quotechar| and |\levelchar|. Note, that our defaults
+% are not the ones used by the \textsf{makeindex} program without a
+% style file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\@ifundefined{actualchar}{\def\actualchar{=}}{}
+\@ifundefined{quotechar}{\def\quotechar{!}}{}
+\@ifundefined{levelchar}{\def\levelchar{>}}{}
+%</package>
+%<+gind|gglo>actual '='
+%<+gind|gglo>quote '!'
+%<+gind|gglo>level '>'
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\encapchar}
+% The \textsf{makeindex} default for the |\encapchar| isn't
+% changed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{encapchar}{\def\encapchar{|}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatimchar}
+% We also need a special character to be used as a delimiter for
+% the |\verb*| command used in the definitions below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{verbatimchar}{\def\verbatimchar{+}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialIndex}
+% The |\SpecialIndex| command creates index entries for
+% macros. If the argument is |\|$xyz$, the command produces
+% \verb|\indexentry{|$xyz$\verb|=\verb!*+\|$xyz$\verb|+}{|$n$\verb|}|
+% given the above defined defaults for |\actualchar|,
+% |\quotechar| and |\verbatimchar|. We first remove the
+% initial `|\|' to get a better index.
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble
+ \string#1\actualchar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then follows the actual entry. A |\quotechar| is placed
+% before the |*| to allow its use as a special \textsf{makeindex}
+% character. Again |\@bsphack| and |\@esphack| are used
+% to make the macros invisible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar}%
+ \@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialMainIndex}
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialMainEnvIndex}
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialUsageIndex}
+% The |\SpecialMainIndex| macro is used to cross-reference the
+% names introduced by the \textsf{macro} environment. The action is
+% as for |\SpecialIndex|, except that \textsf{makeindex} is
+% instructed to `encap'sulate the entry with the string
+% \verb=|main= to cause it to generate a call of the |\main|
+% macro.
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{1998/08/22}{Correctly handle single character
+% control sequences like \cs{<}.}
+%
+% |\SpecialMainIndex| passes the macro name to be indexed on to the
+% macro |\SpecialIndex@|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialMainIndex#1{\@bsphack\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar main}%
+ \@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialIndex@}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{1998/08/22}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{1999/02/27}{Temp fix to allow strange code in arg 1
+% (PR 2968)}
+% The macro |\SpecialIndex@| does the real work for |\SpecialMainIndex|
+% and |\SpecialUsageIndex|. It takes two arguments: the macro to be
+% indexed (as a control sequence or list of character tokens) and the
+% additional text for the index.
+% \changes{v2.0g}{1999/03/22}{Correct so-called temp fix. I'm not going to
+% explain this.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\|=0
+ \catcode`\\=12
+ |gdef|@SpecialIndexHelper@#1#2|@nil{%
+ |if |noexpand#1\%
+ |gdef|@gtempa{#2}%
+ |else
+ |begingroup
+ |escapechar|m@ne
+ |expandafter|gdef|expandafter|@gtempa|expandafter{|string#1#2}%
+ |endgroup
+ |fi}
+|endgroup
+\def\SpecialIndex@#1#2{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first thing it does is to convert the macro into a list of
+% characters. Note that a character token list remains (mostly) unchanged.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@SpecialIndexHelper@#1\@nil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro name \verb*|\ | has to handled in a special way. The reason
+% is that the space token is skipped when \TeX\ is scanning macro
+% parameters, so that the trick used below will not work.
+% So, we check whether the replacement text of |\@tempa| starts with
+% a space token and write the appropriate index entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@tempb{ }%
+ \ifcat \@tempb\@gtempa
+ \special@index{\quotechar\space\actualchar
+ \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+ \quotechar\bslash\quotechar\space\verbatimchar#2}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Having handled this special case we have to distinguish control
+% sequences consisting of one or more
+% letters and those that consists of exactly one nonletter. As character
+% tokens in the replacement text of the macro |\@gtempa| have all
+% category code $12$ (other), this is difficult. For simplicity, we treat
+% all single character control sequences alike, irregardless of whether
+% the character is a letter or not. This has the advantage that it works
+% even for strange settings of the category codes.
+%
+% We define a utility macro |\@tempb| with two arguments, the second
+% delimited by |\relax|.
+% It will be called later so that the first argument is the first character
+% of the macro name, and the second argument receives the rest of the
+% characters. So we distinguish the two cases above by checking whether
+% the second argument is empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@tempb##1##2\relax{\ifx\relax##2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If so, we define the helper macro |\@tempc| in a way that it
+% adds quotechars in critical places.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@tempc{\special@index{\quotechar##1\actualchar
+ \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+ \quotechar\bslash\quotechar##1\verbatimchar#2}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we write the characters as in |\SpecialIndex|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \def\@tempc{\special@index{##1##2\actualchar
+ \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+ \bslash##1##2\verbatimchar#2}}%
+ \fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now pass the list of characters to \@tempb and call \@tempc to do the
+% work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@tempb\@gtempa\relax
+ \@tempc
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Slightly simpler is the main entry for environments
+% \changes{v1.9e}{1994/02/03}{use \cs{ttfamily} with \cs{string}}
+% \changes{v1.9f}{1994/02/07}{should have used \cs{noexpand}, sigh}
+% \changes{v1.9i}{1994/02/11}{should have used \cs{protect}}
+% \changes{v1.9j}{1994/02/16}{Back to string:-)}
+% \changes{v1.9s}{1994/10/14}{Added missing percent and changed to
+% \cs{ttfamily}}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1998/12/20}{Correctly handle second index entry
+% by using \cs{special@index} not \cs{index} (PR/2928).}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1998/12/28}{Use \cs{string}, not \cs{protect} in argument to
+% \cs{special@index}.}
+% \changes{v2.1b}{2004/02/09}{environment names incorrectly sorted in
+% index (pr/3615)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{%
+ #1\actualchar
+ {\string\ttfamily\space#1}
+ (environment)%
+ \encapchar main}%
+ \special@index{environments:\levelchar#1\actualchar{%
+ \string\ttfamily\space#1}\encapchar
+ main}\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\SpecialUsageIndex| is similar to |\SpecialMainIndex|, except
+% that it uses the standard |\index| command.
+% \texttt{usage} instead of \texttt{main}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack
+ {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar usage}}%
+ \@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialEnvIndex}
+% Indexing environments is done a little bit differently; we produce
+% two index entries with the |\SpecialEnvIndex| macro:
+% \changes{v1.9e}{1994/02/03}{The index needs protecting}
+% \changes{v1.9g}{1994/02/08}{should have used \cs{noexpand}, sigh}
+% \changes{v1.9i}{1994/02/11}{should have used \cs{protect}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we sort the environment under its own name stating in the
+% actual entry that this is an environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}
+ (environment)\encapchar usage}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The second entry is sorted as a subitem under the key
+% `environments:'.
+% \changes{v2.1b}{2004/02/09}{environment names incorrectly sorted in
+% index (pr/3615)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \index{environments:#1\actualchar\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar
+ usage}\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Because both entries correspond to `descriptions' of the
+% environment, we encapsulate the page numbers with the
+% |\usage| macro.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SortIndex}
+% This macro is used to generate the index entries for any
+% single-character command that |\scan@macro| encounters. The
+% first parameter specifies the lexical order for the character,
+% whilst the second gives the actual characters to be printed in
+% the entry. It can also be used directly to generate index entries
+% which differ in sort key and actual entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SortIndex#1#2{\index{#1\actualchar#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\it@is@a}
+% This macro is supposed to produce a correct |\SortIndex|
+% entry for a given character. Since this character might be
+% recognised as a `command' character by the index program used,
+% all characters are quoted with the |\quotechar|.
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\it@is@a#1{\special@index{\quotechar #1\actualchar
+ \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+ \quotechar\bslash\quotechar#1\verbatimchar}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LeftBraceIndex}
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \begin{macro}{\RightBraceIndex}
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)} These
+% two macros fix the problems with \textsf{makeindex}. Note the
+% `hack' with |\iffalse}\fi| to satisfy both \TeX{} and the
+% \textsf{makeindex} program. When this is written to the
+% \texttt{.idx} file \TeX{} will see both braces (so we get a
+% balanced text). \textsf{makeindex} will also see balanced braces
+% but when the actual index entry is again processed by \TeX{} the
+% brace in between |\iffalse| |\fi| will vanish.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{LeftBraceIndex}{\def\LeftBraceIndex{%
+ \special@index{\bgroup\actualchar\string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+ \quotechar\bslash{\verbatimchar\string\iffalse}\string\fi}}}{}
+
+\@ifundefined{RightBraceIndex}{\def\RightBraceIndex{%
+ \special@index{\egroup\actualchar\string\iffalse{\string\fi\string\verb
+ \quotechar*\verbatimchar\quotechar\bslash}\verbatimchar}}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PercentIndex}
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1992/03/25}{Default now for bug-fixed makeindex}
+% By default we assume a version of \textsf{makeindex} without the
+% percent bug is being used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{PercentIndex}
+ {\def\PercentIndex{\it@is@a\percentchar}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\OldMakeindex}
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1992/03/26}{Replaced \cs{NewMakeIndex}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\percentchar}
+% Here is one solution for the percent bug in \textsf{makeindex}.
+% The macro |\percentchar| denotes a |%|$_{12}$. Calling this from
+% a package or the driver file sets things up
+% appropriately.\label{bug:fixes}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\OldMakeindex{\def\PercentIndex{%
+ \special@index{\quotechar\percentchar\actualchar\string\verb
+ \quotechar*\verbatimchar\quotechar\bslash
+ \percentchar\percentchar\verbatimchar}}}
+{\catcode`\%=12 \gdef\percentchar{%}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Redefining the \textsf{index} environment}
+%
+%\changes{v1.4r}{1989/04/22}{twocols env. placed into separate file}
+%\changes{v1.4?}{1989/04/19}{use DEK's algorithm and implement
+% a twocols env.}
+%\changes{v1.4?}{1989/04/16}{changes to the index env.}
+%\changes{v1.5a}{1989/04/26}{Now input multicol.sty instead of
+% multcols.sty}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifhave@multicol}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/04}{Added to support avoiding multicol.sty} By
+% default the index is set in three columns, and will start on the
+% same page as, and underneath, the last part of the text of the
+% documented package file, if possible. The last page will be
+% reformatted with balanced columns. This requires the
+% \textsf{multicols} environment which is described elsewhere. So
+% that \DOC{} can be run independently of
+% \texttt{multicol.sty} we first check for its existence and set
+% the "have@multicol" flag appropriately for use below.
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1993/12/02}{Use \cs{IfFileExists}}
+% \changes{v1.9m}{1994/04/28}{Use \cs{RequirePackage} to load multicol}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifhave@multicol
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we found \texttt{multicol.sty} we use it. It would be nice to
+% delay this (and the re-definition of "theindex") until we knew
+% whether an index was actually required \ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\IfFileExists{multicol.sty}{\have@multicoltrue
+ \RequirePackage{multicol}%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IndexMin}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@IndexColumns}
+% \changes{v1.4t}{1989/04/24}{Counter added.}
+% If \texttt{multicol} is in use,
+% when the index is started we compute the remaining space on the
+% current page; if it is greater than |\IndexMin|, the first
+% part of the index will then be placed in the available space.
+% The number of columns set is controlled by the counter
+% |\c@IndexColumns| which can be changed with a
+% |\setcounter| declaration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\IndexMin \IndexMin = 80pt
+\newcount\c@IndexColumns \c@IndexColumns = 3
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theindex}
+% Now we start the multi-column mechanism, if appropriate. We use the
+% \LaTeX{} counter |\c@IndexColumns| declared above to denote
+% the number of columns and insert the `index prologue' text (which
+% might contain a |\section| call, etc.). See the default
+% definition for an example.
+% \changes{v1.4t}{1989/04/24}{Incorporated new multicols env.}
+% \changes{v1.5a}{1989/04/26}{Call multicols first}
+% \changes{v1.6e}{1991/04/03}{Turned into env definition.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/04}{Include test for multicols.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifhave@multicol
+ \renewenvironment{theindex}
+ {\begin{multicols}\c@IndexColumns[\index@prologue][\IndexMin]%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we make a few last minute assignments to read the individual
+% index |\item|$\,$s and finish off by ignoring any initial
+% space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\endtheindex}
+% \changes{v1.4t}{1989/04/24}{Incorporated new multicols env.}
+% At the end of the index, we have only to end the \textsf{multicols}
+% environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\end{multicols}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we can't use \textsf{multicols} we warn the user and use an
+% environment that's basically the one from \texttt{article.sty}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \typeout{Can't find multicol.sty -- will use normal index layout if
+ necessary.}
+ \def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+ \columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[\index@prologue]%
+ \IndexParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
+ \def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% Here are the necessary \textsf{makeindex} declarations. We disable
+% scanning of macro names inside the index with "\scan@allowedfalse\n"
+% to avoid recursion.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<+gind>preamble
+%<+gind>"\n \\begin{theindex} \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
+%<+gind>postamble
+%<+gind>"\n\n \\end{theindex}\n"
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IndexPrologue}
+% \begin{macro}{\index@prologue}
+% \changes{v1.9w}{1995/12/27}{Text changed}
+% \changes{v1.9x}{1996/01/11}{Text depends on code lines used}
+% The |\IndexPrologue| macro is used to place a short message
+% into the document above the index. It is implemented by
+% redefining |\index@prologue|, a macro which holds the
+% default text. We'd better make it a |\long| macro to allow
+% |\par| commands in its argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\IndexPrologue#1{\@bsphack\def\index@prologue{#1}\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we test whether the default is already defined by another
+% package file. If not we define it.
+% \changes{v2.0j}{2000/05/22}{Less obscure wording? (CAR pr/3202)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{index@prologue}
+ {\def\index@prologue{\section*{Index}%
+ \markboth{Index}{Index}%
+ Numbers written in italic refer to the page
+ where the corresponding entry is described;
+ numbers underlined refer to the
+ \ifcodeline@index
+ code line of the
+ \fi
+ definition; numbers in roman refer to the
+ \ifcodeline@index
+ code lines
+ \else
+ pages
+ \fi
+ where the entry is used.
+ }}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IndexParms}
+% These are some last-minute assignments for formatting the index
+% entries. They are defined in a separate macro so that a user can
+% substitute different definitions. We start by defining the
+% various parameters controlling leading and the separation between
+% the two columns. The entire index is set in |\small| size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{IndexParms}
+ {\def\IndexParms{%
+ \parindent \z@
+ \columnsep 15pt
+ \parskip 0pt plus 1pt
+ \rightskip 15pt
+ \mathsurround \z@
+ \parfillskip=-15pt
+ \small
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@idxitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\subitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubitem}
+% Index items are formatted with hanging indentation for any items
+% which may require more than one line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 30pt}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Any sub-item in the index is formatted with a 15pt indentation
+% under its main heading.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\subitem{\@idxitem\hspace*{15pt}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Whilst sub-sub-items go in a further 10pt.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem\hspace*{25pt}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\indexspace}
+% The \textsf{makeindex} program generates an |\indexspace|
+% before each new alphabetic section commences. After this final
+% definition we end the |\@ifundefined| and the definition of
+% |\IndexParms|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\indexspace{\par\vspace{10pt plus 2pt minus 3pt}}%
+ }}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\efill}
+% This definition of |\efill| is intended to be used after index
+% items which have no following text (for example, ``\textit{
+% see\/}'' entries). It just ensures that the current line is
+% filled, preventing ``|Underfull \hbox|'' messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\efill{\hfill\nopagebreak}%
+%</package>
+%<+gind|gglo>item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem "
+%<+gglo>item_x2 "\\ "
+%<+gind>item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem "
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pfill}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotfil}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotfill}
+% The following definitions provide the |\pfill| command; if
+% this is specified in the index style file to \textsf{makeindex} as
+% the delimiter to appear after index items, then the intervening
+% space before the referenced page numbers will be filled with
+% dots, with a little white space interpolated at each end of the
+% dots. If the line is broken the dots will show up on both lines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dotfill{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hskip\z@ plus 1fill}%
+\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}%
+\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak
+ \dotfil~\ignorespaces}%
+%</package>
+%<+gind|gglo>delim_0 "\\pfill "
+%<+gind|gglo>delim_1 "\\pfill "
+%<+gind|gglo>delim_2 "\\pfill "
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\*}
+% Here is the definition for the |\*| macro. It isn't used in
+% this set of macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\*{\leavevmode\lower.8ex\hbox{$\,\widetilde{\ }\,$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\main}
+% The \textit{defining\/} entry for a macro name is flagged with
+% the string \texttt{\encapchar main}\footnote{With the current
+% definition of \texttt{\bslash encapchar} substituted for
+% \texttt{\encapchar}} in the |\index| command; \textsf{makeindex}
+% processes this so that the |\main| macro will be invoked to
+% underline the page number(s) on which the {\em definition\/} of
+% the macro will be found.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usage}
+% The |\usage| macro is used to indicate entries describing
+% the usage of a macro. The corresponding page number(s) will be
+% set in \textit{italics}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintIndex}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{\cs{printindex} changed to
+% \cs{PrintIndex}}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/26}{Documentation moved to interface section.}
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1994/02/10}{Use \cs{@input@} instead of \cs{@input}.}
+% \changes{v1.9w}{1995/12/29}{Turn the cmd into a noop after use.}
+% This is the same as "\printindex" in the \textsf{makeidx} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PrintIndex{\@input@{\jobname.ind}%
+ \global\let\PrintIndex\@empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
+% Since the above macro was called |\printindex| in older versions
+% of \texttt{doc.sty} the following definition was provided up to
+% version 1.9y.
+% \changes{v1.9z}{1996/04/17}{Commented out}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\printindex{\typeout{\string\printindex\space is obsolete!}%
+% \typeout{Please use \string\PrintIndex\space
+% if you are a macro implementor^^J
+% or get a newer version of the documented
+% software if you are a user}%
+% \PrintIndex}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We want headings in the index (and changes list) according to the
+% initial character of the next block of entries and have to instruct
+% \textsf{makeindex} appropriately. Unfortunately the specification
+% for this changed sometime between versions 2.4 and 2.11 of
+% \textsf{makeindex}. We provide both ways of doing it but
+% unfortunately this will always produce a warning message from
+% \textsf{makeindex}. This is for older versions:
+% \changes{v1.7h}{1992/07/01}{Turn off headings in gls file}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<+gind,gglo>% The next lines will produce some warnings when
+%<+gind,gglo>% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different
+%<+gind,gglo>% versions of the program:
+%<+gind,gglo>lethead_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil "
+%<+gind,gglo>lethead_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+%<+gind>lethead_flag 1
+%<+gglo>lethead_flag 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This works for newer ones:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+gind,gglo>heading_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil "
+%<+gind,gglo>heading_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+%<+gind>headings_flag 1
+%<+gglo>headings_flag 0
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection[Dealing with the change history]
+% {Dealing with the change history\footnotemark}
+% \footnotetext{The whole section was proposed by Brian \textsc{Hamilton
+% Kelly}. He also documented and debugged the macros as
+% well as many other parts of this package.}
+%
+% To provide a change history log, the |\changes| command has
+% been introduced. This takes three arguments, respectively, the
+% version number of the file, the date of the change, and some detail
+% regarding what change has been made. The first of these arguments
+% is otherwise ignored, but the others are written out and may be used
+% to generate a history of changes, to be printed at the end of the
+% document. However, note that older versions of Chen's standard
+% \textsf{makeindex}
+% program limit any textual field to just 64 characters; therefore,
+% is important that the number of characters in the second and third
+% parameters should not exceed 61 altogether (to allow for the
+% parentheses placed around the date).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\changes}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Documented \texttt{\protect\bslash changes}
+% command.}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Changed definition of
+% \texttt{\protect\bslash protect}.} The output of the |\changes|
+% command goes into the \meta{Glossary\_File} and therefore uses
+% the normal |\glossaryentry| commands.\footnote{Note that a recent
+% change in \LaTeX{} 2.09 changed the command name in the
+% \texttt{.glo} file from \texttt{\bslash indexentry} to
+% \texttt{\bslash glossaryentry}. It is therefore necessary to
+% have a special \textsf{makeindex} style file called
+% \texttt{gglo.ist} to process this file correctly.} Thus
+% \textsf{makeindex} or a similar program can be used to process
+% the output into a sorted ``glossary''. The |\changes| command
+% commences by taking the usual measures to hide its spacing, and
+% then redefines |\protect| for use within the argument of the
+% generated |\indexentry| command.
+%
+% We re-code nearly all chars found in |\sanitize| to letter
+% since the use of special package which make some characters
+% active might upset the |\changes| command when writing its
+% entries to the file. However we have to leave |%| as comment
+% and \verb*+ + as \meta{space} otherwise chaos will happen.
+% And, of course the |\| should be available as escape
+% character.
+% \changes{v1.5v}{1990/01/28}{`Re-code a lot of chars.}
+% \changes{v1.5m}{1989/09/20}{\cs{actualchar} in second level removed.}
+% \changes{v1.5o}{1989/09/24}{New sorting.}
+% \changes{v1.6c}{1990/06/29}{Again new sorting.}
+% \changes{v1.9u}{1995/08/06}{Use \cs{protected@edef}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\changes{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize
+ \catcode`\\\z@ \catcode`\ 10 \MakePercentIgnore
+ \changes@}
+\def\changes@#1#2#3{%
+ \protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{#1\levelchar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.9u}{1995/08/06}{Use value of \cs{saved@macroname} to
+% find out about change entries at outer level}
+% If the macro "\saved@macroname" doesn't contain any macro name
+% (ie is empty) the current changes entry was done at top-level.
+% In this case we preceed it by "\generalname".
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty
+ \space
+ \actualchar
+ \generalname
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@gobble
+ \saved@macroname
+ \actualchar
+ \string\verb\quotechar*%
+ \verbatimchar\saved@macroname
+ \verbatimchar
+ \fi
+ :\levelchar #3}}%
+ \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\saved@macroname}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Provided for sorting outside \textsf{macro}
+% environment} The entries are sorted for convenience by the name
+% of the most recently introduced macroname (i.e., that in the most
+% recent |\begin{macro}| command). We therefore provide
+% |\saved@macroname| to record that argument, and provide a default
+% definition in case |\changes| is used outside a \textsf{macro}
+% environment. (This is a {\em wicked\/} hack to get such entries
+% at the beginning of the sorted list! It works providing no macro
+% names start with "!" or |"|.) \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/02}{Changed
+% string used for better sorting.}
+% \changes{v1.9u}{1995/08/06}{Now empty by default}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\saved@macroname{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\generalname}
+% \changes{v1.9u}{1995/08/06}{Macro added}
+% This macro holds the string placed before changes entries on
+% top-level.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\generalname{General}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RecordChanges}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Renames former \texttt{\protect\bslash
+% PrintChanges} command.}
+% To cause the changes to be written (to a \texttt{.glo}) file, we
+% define |\RecordChanges| to invoke \LaTeX's usual
+% |\makeglossary| command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\RecordChanges\makeglossary
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GlossaryMin}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Added to support
+% \texttt{\protect\bslash changes}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@GlossaryColumns}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Added to support \texttt{\protect\bslash
+% changes}.} The remaining macros are all analogues of those used
+% for the \textsf{theindex} environment. When the glossary is
+% started we compute the space which remains at the bottom of the
+% current page; if this is greater than |\GlossaryMin| then the
+% first part of the glossary will be placed in the available space.
+% The number of columns set are controlled by the counter
+% |\c@GlossaryColumns| which can be changed with a |\setcounter|
+% declaration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\GlossaryMin \GlossaryMin = 80pt
+\newcount\c@GlossaryColumns \c@GlossaryColumns = 2
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theglossary}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Added to support
+% \texttt{\protect\bslash changes}.}
+% \changes{v1.5p}{1989/09/28}{Now call \cs{multicols} first.}
+% \changes{v1.6e}{1991/04/03}{Turned into env definition.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/10}{Changed to work without multicols if
+% necessary.}
+% \begin{macro}{\endglossary}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Added to support
+% \texttt{\protect\bslash changes}.}
+% The environment \textsf{theglossary} is defined in the same manner
+% as the \textsf{theindex} environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifhave@multicol
+ \newenvironment{theglossary}{%
+ \begin{multicols}\c@GlossaryColumns
+ [\glossary@prologue][\GlossaryMin]%
+ \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}%
+ {\end{multicols}}
+\else
+ \newenvironment{theglossary}{%
+ \@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+ \columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \twocolumn[\glossary@prologue]%
+ \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
+ {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% Here are the necessary \textsf{makeindex} declarations with scanning
+% disabled as for the index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<+gglo>preamble
+%<+gglo>"\n \\begin{theglossary} \n
+%<+gglo> \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
+%<+gglo>postamble
+%<+gglo>"\n\n \\end{theglossary}\n"
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This difference from \texttt{gind.ist} is necessary if you have an
+% up-to-date \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+gglo>keyword "\\glossaryentry"
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GlossaryPrologue}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Added to support
+% \texttt{\protect\bslash changes}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\glossary@prologue}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Added to support
+% \texttt{\protect\bslash changes}.}
+% The |\GlossaryPrologue| macro is used to place a short
+% message above the glossary into the document. It is implemented
+% by redefining |\glossary@prologue|, a macro which holds the
+% default text. We better make it a long macro to allow
+% |\par| commands in its argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\GlossaryPrologue#1{\@bsphack
+ \def\glossary@prologue{#1}%
+ \@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we test whether the default is already defined by another
+% package file. If not we define it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{glossary@prologue}
+ {\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change History}}%
+ \markboth{{Change History}}{{Change History}}%
+ }}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GlossaryParms}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Added to support
+% \texttt{\protect\bslash changes}.}
+% Unless the user specifies otherwise, we set the change history
+% using the same parameters as for the index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{GlossaryParms}{\let\GlossaryParms\IndexParms}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PrintChanges}
+% \changes{BHK}{1989/04/26}{Added to support
+% \texttt{\protect\bslash changes}.}
+% To read in and print the sorted change history, just put the
+% |\PrintChanges| command as the last (commented-out, and thus
+% executed during the documentation pass through the file) command
+% in your package file. Alternatively, this command may form one of
+% the arguments of the |\StopEventually| command, although a
+% change history is probably {\em not\/} required if only the
+% description is being printed.
+%
+% The command assumes that \textsf{makeindex} or some other program
+% has processed the \texttt{.glo} file to generate a sorted
+% \texttt{.gls} file.
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1994/02/10}{Use \cs{@input@} instead of \cs{@input}.}
+% \changes{v1.9w}{1995/12/29}{Turn the cmd into a noop after use.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PrintChanges{\@input@{\jobname.gls}%
+ \global\let\PrintChanges\@empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Bells and whistles}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\StopEventually}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Support for checksum.}
+% \begin{macro}{\Finale}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Support for checksum.}
+% \changes{v1.5z}{1990/04/22}{Define \cs{Finale} globally.}
+% \begin{macro}{\AlsoImplementation}
+% \changes{v1.9w}{1995/12/27}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\OnlyDescription}
+% If |\AlsoImplementation| is in force the whole documentation
+% including the code part will be typeset. This is the default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\AlsoImplementation{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To make this happen we have to define
+% |\StopEventually| in a way that its argument is typeset at the
+% very end or more exactly at |\Finale|. For this we
+% save its argument in the macro |\Finale|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \long\def\StopEventually##1{\@bsphack\gdef\Finale{##1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% But |\Finale| will be called at the very end of a file. This
+% is exactly the point were we want to know if the file is
+% uncorrupted. Therefore we also call |\check@checksum| at this
+% point.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \check@checksum}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% On the other hand: |\StopEventually| is more or less a
+% dividing point between description and code. So we start to look
+% for the check-sum of the documented file by calling
+% |\init@checksum|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \init@checksum
+ \@esphack}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Since |\AlsoImplementation| should be the default we execute it
+% and thus |\StopEventually| gets the desired meaning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AlsoImplementation
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the user places an |\OnlyDescription| declaration in
+% the driver file the document should only be typeset up to
+% |\StopEventually|. We therefore have to redefine this macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\OnlyDescription{\@bsphack\long\def\StopEventually##1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In this case the argument of |\StopEventually| should be set
+% and afterwards \TeX{} should stop reading from this file.
+% Therefore we finish this macro with
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ ##1\endinput}\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If no |\StopEventually| command is given we silently ignore a
+% |\Finale| issued.
+% \changes{v1.9n}{1994/04/28}{Ignore \cs{Finale} if no
+% \cs{StopEventually} is given}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\Finale\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\meta}
+% \changes{v1.4t}{1989/04/24}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{v1.5w}{1990/02/03}{Breaks at space allowed.}
+% \changes{v1.6a}{1990/05/24}{Extra space bug corrected.}
+% The |\meta| macro is a bit tricky. We want to allow line
+% breaks at blanks in the argument but we don't want a break
+% in between. In the past this was done by defining |\meta| in a way that a
+% \verb*+ + is active when the argument is scanned. Words are then
+% scanned into |\hbox|es. The active \verb*+ + will end the
+% preceding |\hbox| add an ordinary space and open a new
+% |\hbox|. In this way breaks are only possible at spaces. The
+% disadvantage of this method was that |\meta| was neither robust
+% nor could it be |\protect|ed. The new implementation fixes this
+% problem by defining |\meta| in a radically different way: we
+% prevent hypenation by defining a |\language| which has no
+% patterns associated with it and use this to typeset the words
+% within the angle brackets.
+% \changes{v2.0i}{2000/05/21}{New implementation (pr/3170)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\l@nohyphenation\undefined
+ \newlanguage\l@nohyphenation
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since the old implementation of |\meta| could be used in math we
+% better ensure that this is possible with the new one as
+% well. So we use |\ensuremath| around |\langle| and
+% |\rangle|. However this is not enough: if |\meta@font@select|
+% below expands to |\itshape| it will fail if used in math
+% mode. For this reason we hide the whole thing inside an
+% |\nfss@text| box in that case.
+% \changes{v2.0l}{2000/06/10}{Fixing changes for (pr/3170)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ensuremath\langle
+ \ifmmode \expandafter \nfss@text \fi
+ {%
+ \meta@font@select
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Need to keep track of what we changed just in case the user
+% changes font inside the argument so we store the font explicitly.
+% \changes{v2.0m}{2000/07/04}{More fixing changes for (pr/3170)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\meta@hyphen@restore
+ {\hyphenchar\the\font\the\hyphenchar\font}%
+ \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
+ \language\l@nohyphenation
+ #1\/%
+ \meta@hyphen@restore
+ }\ensuremath\rangle
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\meta@font@select}
+% \changes{v2.0k}{2000/05/26}{Macro added (pr/3170)}
+% Maske font used inside |\meta| customizable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\meta@font@select{\itshape}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IndexInput}
+% This next macro may be used to read in a separate file (possibly
+% a package file that is {\em not\/} documented by this means) and
+% set it verbatim, whilst scanning for macro names and indexing the
+% latter. This could be a useful first pass in preparing to
+% generate documentation for the file read.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\IndexInput#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We commence by setting up a group, and initializing a
+% |\trivlist| as is normally done by a
+% |\begin{macrocode}| command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup \macro@code
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also make spacing behave as in the \textsf{macrocode}
+% environment, because otherwise all the spaces will be shown
+% explicitly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \frenchspacing \@vobeyspaces
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then it only remains to read in the specified file, and finish
+% off the |\trivlist|.
+% \changes{v1.5t}{1989/11/07}{Call \cs{endmacrocode} instead
+% of \cs{endtrivlist}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \input{#1}\endmacrocode
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Of course, we need to finish off the group as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+% The macro to generate titles is easily altered in order that it
+% can be used more than once (an article with many titles). In the
+% original, diverse macros were concealed after use with
+% |\relax|. We must cancel anything that may have been put
+% into |\@thanks|, etc., otherwise {\em all\/} titles will
+% carry forward any earlier such setting!
+% \changes{v1.5j}{1989/06/09}{thispagestyle plain removed}
+% \changes{v1.9r}{1994/06/09}{Added new definitions of
+% \cs{@makefnmark} and \cs{@makefntext}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maketitle{\par
+ \begingroup \def \thefootnote {\fnsymbol {footnote}}%
+ \setcounter {footnote}\z@
+ \def\@makefnmark{\hbox to\z@{$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}}%
+ \long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent
+ \hbox to1.8em{\hss$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$}##1}%
+ \if@twocolumn \twocolumn [\@maketitle ]%
+ \else \newpage \global \@topnum \z@ \@maketitle \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Added \cs{ps@titlepage}}
+% For special formatting requirements (such as in TUGboat), we use
+% pagestyle |titlepage| for this; this is later defined to be
+% |plain|, unless already defined, as, for example, by
+% |ltugboat.sty|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \thispagestyle{titlepage}\@thanks \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the driver file documents many files, we don't want parts of a
+% title of one to propagate to the next, so we have to cancel
+% these:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setcounter {footnote}\z@
+ \gdef\@date{\today}\gdef\@thanks{}%
+ \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Added \texttt{\protect\bslash
+% ps@titlepage}} When a number of articles are concatenated into a
+% journal, for example, it is not usual for the title pages of such
+% documents to be formatted differently. Therefore, a class
+% such as \textsf{ltugboat} can define this macro in advance.
+% However, if no such definition exists, we use pagestyle
+% \texttt{plain} for title pages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ps@titlepage}
+ {\let\ps@titlepage=\ps@plain}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeShortVerb}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Added (from newdoc but now alters
+% \cs{dospecials}, \cs{@sanitize}).}
+% This arranges an abbreviation for "\verb" such that if you say
+% "\MakeShortVerb{\"\meta{c}"}" subsequently using
+% \meta{c}\meta{text}\meta{c} is equivalent to
+% "\verb"\meta{c}\meta{text}\meta{c}.\footnote{Warning:
+% the commentary in the rest of this section was written by Dave
+% Love.} In addition, the fact
+% that \meta{c} is made active is recorded for the benefit of the
+% \textsf{verbatim} and \textsf{macrocode} environments.
+% Note particularly that the definitions below are global.
+% The first thing we do (it needn't be first) is to record
+% the---presumably new---special character in "\dospecials" and
+% "\@sanitize" using "\add@special".
+%
+% \changes{v1.9e.2}{1994/02/07}{-js: Check if \protect\meta{c} is
+% already an
+% abbreviation for \cs{verb}.}
+% Some unwary user might issue "\MakeShortVerb" for a second time, we
+% better protect against this. We assume that this happened if a
+% control sequence "\cc\"\meta{c} is bound, the probability that this
+% name is used by another module is low. We will output a warning
+% below, so that a possible error might be noticed by the programmer
+% if he reads the "LOG" file. (Should have used module internal names,
+% 'though.)
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeShortVerb*}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{2003/12/09}{(HjG) Added \texttt{*} form}
+% This arranges an abbreviation for "\verb*" such that if you say
+% "\MakeShortVerb*{\"\meta{c}"}" subsequently using
+% \meta{c}\meta{text}\meta{c} is equivalent to
+% "\verb*"\meta{c}\meta{text}\meta{c}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<*package|shortvrb>
+\def\MakeShortVerb{%
+ \@ifstar
+ {\def\@shortvrbdef{\verb*}\@MakeShortVerb}%
+ {\def\@shortvrbdef{\verb}\@MakeShortVerb}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@MakeShortVerb#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.9v}{1995/11/03}{(DPC) Use \cs{@shortvrbinfo}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@shortvrbinfo{Made }{#1}\@shortvrbdef
+ \add@special{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then the character's current catcode is stored in "\cc\"\meta{c}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter
+ \xdef\csname cc\string#1\endcsname{\the\catcode`#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The character is spliced into the definition using the same trick as
+% used in "\verb" (for instance), having activated "~" in a group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\~\active \lccode`\~`#1%
+ \lowercase{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The character's old meaning is recorded in "\ac\"\meta{c} prior to
+% assigning it a new one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname ac\string#1\endcsname~%
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter~\expandafter{\@shortvrbdef~}}%
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally the character is made active.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\catcode`#1\active
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we suspect that \meta{c} is already a short reference, we tell
+% the user. Now he or she is responsible if anything goes wrong\,\dots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.9v}{1995/11/03}{(DPC) Use \cs{@shortvrbinfo}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@shortvrbinfo\@empty{#1 already}{\@empty\verb(*)}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeleteShortVerb}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Added (from newdoc but now alters
+% \cs{dospecials}, \cs{@sanitize}).}
+% Here's the means of undoing a "\MakeShortVerb", for instance in a
+% region where you need to use the character outside a verbatim
+% environment. It arranges for "\dospecials" and "\@sanitize" to be
+% altered appropriately, restores the saved catcode and, if necessary,
+% the character's meaning (as stored by
+% "\MakeShortVerb"). If the catcode wasn't stored in
+% "\cc\"\meta{c} (by "\MakeShortVerb") the command is silently
+% ignored.
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/28}{Check for previous matched
+% \cs{MakeShortVerb}
+% to avoid error.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeleteShortVerb#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{2003/12/10}{(HjG) Notify user
+% if it's not a short verb character}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@shortvrbinfo\@empty{#1 not}{\@empty\verb(*)}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.9v}{1995/11/03}{(DPC) Use \cs{@shortvrbinfo}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@shortvrbinfo{Deleted }{#1 as}{\@empty\verb(*)}%
+ \rem@special{#1}%
+ \global\catcode`#1\csname cc\string#1\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.9e.2}{1994/02/07}{-js: Reset `cc`\protect\meta{c} in
+% in \cs{DeleteShortVerb}}
+% We must not forget to reset "\cc\"\meta{c}, otherwise the check in
+% "\MakeShortVerb" for a repeated definition will not work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \expandafter\let \csname cc\string#1\endcsname \relax
+ \ifnum\catcode`#1=\active
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\~\active \lccode`\~`#1%
+ \lowercase{%
+ \global\expandafter\let\expandafter~%
+ \csname ac\string#1\endcsname}%
+ \endgroup \fi \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@shortvrbinfo}
+% \changes{v1.9v}{1995/11/03}{(DPC) Macro added}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{2003/12/10}{(HjG) Third argument added
+% on behalf of \cmd{\MakeShortVerb*}}
+% Helper function for info messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@shortvrbinfo#1#2#3{%
+%<shortvrb> \PackageInfo{shortvrb}{%
+%<!shortvrb> \PackageInfo{doc}{%
+ #1\expandafter\@gobble\string#2 a short reference
+ for \expandafter\string#3}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\add@special}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Added for short verb facility.}
+% This helper macro adds its argument to the
+% "\dospecials" macro which is conventionally used by verbatim macros
+% to alter the catcodes of the currently active characters. We need
+% to add "\do\"\meta{c} to the expansion of "\dospecials" after
+% removing the character if it was already there to avoid multiple
+% copies building up should "\MakeShortVerb" not be balanced by
+% "\DeleteShortVerb" (in case anything that uses "\dospecials" cares
+% about repetitions).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add@special#1{%
+ \rem@special{#1}%
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter
+ {\dospecials \do #1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Similarly we have to add "\@makeother\"\meta{c} to "\@sanitize"
+% (which is used in things like "\index" to re-catcode all special
+% characters except braces).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@sanitize\expandafter
+ {\@sanitize \@makeother #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\rem@special}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Added for short verb facility.}
+% The inverse of "\add@special" is slightly trickier. "\do" is
+% re-defined to expand to nothing if its argument is the character of
+% interest, otherwise to expand simply to the argument. We can then
+% re-define "\dospecials" to be the expansion of itself. The space
+% after "=`##1" prevents an expansion to "\relax"!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rem@special#1{%
+ \def\do##1{%
+ \ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\do\noexpand##1\fi}%
+ \xdef\dospecials{\dospecials}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Fixing "\@sanitize" is the same except that we need to re-define
+% "\@makeother" which obviously needs to be done in a group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\@makeother##1{%
+ \ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\@makeother\noexpand##1\fi}%
+ \xdef\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
+ \endgroup}
+%</package|shortvrb>
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeShortverb}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeleteShortverb}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/27}{Added (from newdoc).}
+% These commands from \textsf{newdoc} are now obsolete.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MakeShortverb{\typeout{*** Switch to \noexpand\MakeShortVerb
+ syntax, this is obsolete ***}\MakeShortVerb}
+\def\DeleteShortverb{\typeout{*** Switch to \noexpand\DeleteShortVerb
+ syntax, this is obsolete ***}\DeleteShortVerb}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection[Providing a checksum and character table]
+% {Providing a checksum and character table\footnotemark}
+% \footnotetext{Warning: the commentary in this section was
+% written by Dave Love. }
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\init@checksum}
+% The checksum mechanism works by counting backslashes in the
+% macrocode. This initialises the count (when called from
+% "\StopEventually").
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Macro added to support checksum.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\init@checksum{\relax
+ \global\bslash@cnt\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@checksum}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Macro added to support checksum.}
+% This reports the sum compared with the value ("\bslash@cnt") the
+% file advertises. It's called from "\Finale" (if that hasn't been
+% re-defined).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check@checksum{\relax
+ \ifnum\check@sum=\z@
+ \typeout{**********************************}%
+ \typeout{* This macro file has no checksum!}%
+ \typeout{* The checksum should be \the\bslash@cnt!}%
+ \typeout{**********************************}%
+ \else
+ \ifnum\check@sum=\bslash@cnt
+ \typeout{*******************}%
+ \typeout{* Checksum passed *}%
+ \typeout{*******************}%
+ \else
+ \PackageError{doc}{Checksum not passed
+ (\the\check@sum<>\the\bslash@cnt)}%
+ {The file currently documented seems to be wrong.^^J%
+ Try to get a correct version.}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \global\check@sum\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@sum}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Macro added to support checksum.}
+% \begin{macro}{\bslash@cnt}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Macro added to support checksum.}
+% We need to define counters, "\bslash@cnt" for the number of
+% backslashes counted and "\check@sum" for the value advertised by the
+% file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\check@sum \check@sum = \z@
+\newcount\bslash@cnt \bslash@cnt = \z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CheckSum}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Macro added to support checksum.}
+% This is the interface to setting "\check@sum".
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\CheckSum#1{\@bsphack\global\check@sum#1\relax\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\step@checksum}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1989/09/04}{Macro added to support checksum.}
+% This advances the count when a backslash is encountered in the
+% macrocode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\step@checksum{\global\advance\bslash@cnt\@ne}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CharacterTable}
+% The user interface to the character table-checking does some
+% "\catcode"ing and then compares the following table with the
+% stored version. We need to have "@" of type ``other'' within the
+% table since this is the way it is usually returned when reading
+% in a normal document. To nevertheless have a private letter we
+% use "~" for this purpose. "~" does no harm as a ``letter'' as it
+% comes last in the table and therefore will not gobble following
+% space.
+% \changes{v1.5m}{1989/09/20}{Macro added to check character translation
+% problems.}
+% \changes{v1.5q}{1989/11/01}{Made character table more readable.}
+% \changes{v1.5t}{1989/11/07}{Make \string\~{} letter in chartable
+% macros.}
+% \changes{v1.5u}{1989/11/14}{Made @ other in default table.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\CharacterTable{\begingroup \CharTableChanges \character@table}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \def\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`\~=11\makeatletter}
+% \begin{macro}{\character@table}
+% This does the work of comparing the tables and reporting the result.
+% Note that the following code is enclosed in a group
+% with "~" catcoded to letter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\~=11
+ \gdef\character@table#1{\def\used~table{#1}%
+ \ifx\used~table\default~table
+ \typeout{***************************}%
+ \typeout{* Character table correct *}%
+ \typeout{***************************}%
+ \else
+ \PackageError{doc}{Character table corrupted}
+ {\the\wrong@table}
+ \show\default~table
+ \show\used~table
+ \fi
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CharTableChanges}
+% When the character table is read in we need to scan it with a
+% fixed set of "\catcode"s. The reference table below was defined by
+% assuming the normal "\catcode"s of \TeX{}, i.e.\ "@" is of type
+% other and the only token of type ``letter'' are the usual letters
+% of the alphabet. If, for some reason, other characters are made
+% ``letters'' then their "\catcode"s need to be restored before
+% checking the table. Otherwise spaces in the table are gobbled and
+% we get the information that the tables are different, even if
+% they are actually equal. For this reason "\CharTableChanges" can
+% be set up to locally restore the "\catcode"s of such ``letters''
+% to ``other''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\CharTableChanges\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\default~table}
+% Here's what the table {\em should\/} look like (modulo spaces).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \makeatother
+ \gdef\default~table
+ {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+ Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+ Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+ Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+ Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+ Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+ Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+ Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+ Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+ Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+ Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+ Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+ Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+ Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \let\MakePrivateLetters=\makeatletter
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\wrong@table}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/28}{Moved to where the catcodes are right
+% so it works.}
+% We need a help message in case of problems.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newhelp\wrong@table{Some of the ASCII characters are corrupted.^^J
+ I now \string\show\space you both tables for comparison.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection[Attaching line numbers to code lines]
+% {Attaching line numbers to code lines\footnotemark}
+% \footnotetext{Warning: the commentary was written by Dave
+% Love.}
+%
+%
+% The code in this section allows index entries to refer to code line
+% numbers---the number of the first line of macrocode in the
+% \textsf{macro} environment.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\codeline@index}
+% Indexing by code line is controlled by the "codeline@index" switch.
+% \changes{v1.5s}{1989/11/05}{Support for code line no. (Undoc)}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/24}{Documented code line no. support.}
+% \begin{macro}{\CodelineNumbered}
+% \changes{v1.8a}{1993/05/19}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifcodeline@index \codeline@indexfalse
+\let\CodelineNumbered\codeline@indextrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\codeline@wrindex}
+% The code index entries are written out by "\special@index". If
+% indexing is by code line this is "\let" to "\codeline@wrindex";
+% if indexing is by page it is just "\index". However, if
+% "\nofiles" is given, we omit writing such an index entry at all.
+% \changes{v1.7j}{1992/08/14}{Added \cs{if@filesw}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\codeline@wrindex#1{\if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@indexfile
+ {\string\indexentry{#1}%
+ {\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\special@index}
+% By default no index entries are written out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\special@index = \@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\CodelineIndex}
+% \changes{v1.5u}{1989/11/14}{Added \cs{PageIndex} and
+% \cs{CodelineIndex} (Undoc)}
+% This switches on use of the index file with "\makeindex", sets the
+% switch to indicate code line numbering and defines "\special@index"
+% appropriately.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\CodelineIndex{\makeindex
+ \codeline@indextrue
+ \let\special@index\codeline@wrindex}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PageIndex}
+% "\PageIndex" is similar.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PageIndex{\makeindex
+ \codeline@indexfalse
+ \let\special@index\index}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@CodelineNo}
+% \changes{v1.5l}{1989/09/10}{Counter added to support code line
+% numbers}
+% \changes{v1.5y}{1990/02/24}{Default changed.}
+% \changes{v1.6b}{1990/06/15}{\cs{rm} moved before \cs{scriptsize} to
+% avoid unnecessary fontwarning.}
+% We need a counter to keep track of the line number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\c@CodelineNo \c@CodelineNo\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\theCodelineNo}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/02/25}{Existing definition not overwritten.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1992/03/12}{Use \cs{reset@font} for NFSS.}
+% This provides a hook to control the format of line numbers which may
+% be defined in a class file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{theCodelineNo}
+ {\ifx\selectfont\undefined
+ \def\theCodelineNo{\rmfamily\scriptsize\arabic{CodelineNo}}%
+ \else
+ \def\theCodelineNo{\reset@font\scriptsize\arabic{CodelineNo}}%
+ \fi}
+ {}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Layout Parameters for documenting package files}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tolerance}
+% People documenting package files would probably rather have things
+% ``sticking out'' in overfull |\hbox|es and poorish spacing,
+% because they probably don't want to spend a lot of time on making
+% all the line breaks perfect!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tolerance=1000\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\"}
+%
+% The following |\mathcode| definitions allow the characters
+% `|\|'
+% and `\texttt{@}' to appear in |\ttfamily| font when invoked in math
+% mode;\footnote{You may wonder why the definitions state that both
+% characters belong to the {\em variable family\/}
+% (i.e.\ the number 7 in front). The reason is this:
+% Originally the \texttt{\bslash mathcode} of
+% \texttt{\bslash} was defined to be \texttt{"075C},
+% i.e.\ ordinary character number 92 (hex 5C) in
+% math family number 7 which is the typewriter family in
+% standard \LaTeX.
+% But this file should not depend on this specific
+% setting, so I changed these
+% \texttt{\bslash mathcode}$\,$s
+% to work with any family assignments. For an example
+% see the article about the new font selection scheme.}
+% particularly for something like $|\@abc|=1$.
+%
+% If an {\em old\/} version of the \textsf{german} package is in
+% force, then the `|"|' character is active and would upset the
+% definition of the \meta{16-bit number} quantities below, therefore
+% we change the |\catcode| of |"| inside a group, and use
+% |\global|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{ \catcode`\"=12
+ \global\mathcode`\\="705C \global\mathcode`\@="7040 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\"}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DocstyleParms}
+% This macro can be used, for example, to assign new values to
+% |\MacrocodeTopsep| and |\MacroIndent| and some other internal
+% registers. If it is already defined, the default definition
+% won't be carried out. Note that it is necessary to assign new
+% values via this macro if it should be done in a class file (like
+% \texttt{ltugboat.cls} for example) since the registers are
+% undefined before \texttt{doc.sty} is read in. The default values
+% for the internal registers are scattered over this file.
+% \changes{v1.5u}{1989/11/14}{\cs{DocStyleParms} now empty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{DocstyleParms}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we allow overwriting the values by calling
+% |\DocstyleParms|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DocstyleParms \let\DocstyleParms\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AmSTeX}
+% \changes{v1.5j}{1989/06/09}{Macro AmsTeX renamed to AmSTeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\BibTeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\SliTeX}
+% Here are a few definitions which can usefully be employed when
+% documenting package files: now we can readily refer to \AmSTeX,
+% \BibTeX\ and \SliTeX, as well as the usual \TeX\ and \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{AmSTeX}
+ {\def\AmSTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\mathcal A\kern-.2em\lower.376ex%
+ \hbox{$\mathcal M$}\kern-.2em\mathcal S$-\TeX}}}{}
+\@ifundefined{BibTeX}
+ {\def\BibTeX{{\rmfamily B\kern-.05em%
+ \textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em%
+ T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}}{}
+\@ifundefined{SliTeX}
+ {\def\SliTeX{{\rmfamily S\kern-.06emL\kern-.18em\raise.32ex\hbox
+ {\scshape i}\kern -.03em\TeX}}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PlainTeX}
+% \changes{v1.5g}{1989/05/07}{space between plain and TeX changed.}
+% \begin{macro}{\Web}
+% There's even a \PlainTeX{} and a \Web.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{PlainTeX}{\def\PlainTeX{\textsc{Plain}\kern2pt\TeX}}{}
+\@ifundefined{Web}{\def\Web{\textsc{Web}}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Changing the \texttt{\protect\bslash catcode} of \%}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakePercentIgnore}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakePercentComment}
+% And finally the most important bit: we change the |\catcode|
+% of `|%|' so that it is ignored (which is how we are able to
+% produce this document!). We provide two commands to do the actual
+% switching.
+%^^A The |\MakePercentIgnore| is then called as the
+%^^A last command in this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MakePercentIgnore{\catcode`\%9\relax}
+\def\MakePercentComment{\catcode`\%14\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DocInput}
+% The two macros above are now used to define the |\DocInput| macro
+% which was introduced in version v1.5l (or so) of the \DOC{}
+% package. In older versions |\MakePercentIgnore| was placed
+% at the very end of \texttt{doc.sty}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DocInput#1{\MakePercentIgnore\input{#1}\MakePercentComment}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{GetFileInfo}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GetFileInfo}
+% \changes{v1.9o}{1994/05/08}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.9z}{1997/02/05}{Missing percent latex/2404}
+% Define |\filedate| and friends from info in the
+% |\ProvidesPackage| etc.\ commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GetFileInfo#1{%
+ \def\filename{#1}%
+ \def\@tempb##1 ##2 ##3\relax##4\relax{%
+ \def\filedate{##1}%
+ \def\fileversion{##2}%
+ \def\fileinfo{##3}}%
+ \edef\@tempa{\csname ver@#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\@tempb\@tempa\relax? ? \relax\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We can now finish the \texttt{docstrip} main module.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+% \PrintIndex \PrintChanges
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4f6c7b61bfb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,4349 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+\catcode`\{=1
+\catcode`\}=2
+\def\filename{docstrip.dtx}
+\def\fileversion{2.5c}
+\def\filedate{2003/09/18}
+\def\docdate {1999/03/31}
+% \CheckSum{2436}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%
+%\iffalse
+%
+%% The docstrip program for use with TeX.
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-1991 Frank Mittelbach
+%% Copyright (C) 1992-1995 Johannes Braams, Denys Duchier,
+%% Frank Mittelbach
+%% Copyright (C) 1995 Marcin Woli\'nski
+%% Copyright (C) 1996-1997 Mark Wooding, Marcin Woli\'nski
+%% Copyright (C) 1998-2003 LaTeX3 project and the above authors
+%% All rights are reserved.
+%%
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{2.0b}{1991/05/29}{Added bugfix from Denys}
+% \changes{2.0c}{1991/05/29}{Allow almost all characters in guard (DD)}
+% \changes{2.0d}{1991/05/31}{Started merging in some of Franks code}
+% \changes{2.0j}{1992/03/05}{Wrote introduction}
+% \changes{2.0m}{1992/04/21}{Renamed all macros that deal with the
+% parsing of boolean expressions}
+% \changes{2.0m}{1992/04/25}{Removed dependency from ltugboat,
+% incorporated driver file into source.}
+% \changes{2.0m}{1992/04/25}{Added some missing percents; corrected some
+% typos}
+% \changes{2.0m-DL}{1992/05/08}{Various small corrections to English and
+% typos}
+% \changes{2.0q}{1992/07/01}{Changed all dates to yy/mm/dd for better
+% sorting}
+% \changes{2.2a}{1993/12/02}{Update for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{2.2c}{1993/12/17}{Renamed texsys.tex to texsys.cfg.}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/17}{Swapped Primary with Secondary since
+% expressions are generally described bottom-up}
+% \changes{2.3b}{1995/08/22}{Completely changed expressions parser}
+% \changes{2.3b}{1995/08/23}{Removed mechanism for checking if previous
+% one-line guard is same as current (\cs{testOption},
+% \cs{closeOption})---this is not a common
+% case and testing complicates things unnecessarily}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/08/24}{When file is multiply listed in \cs{file}
+% clause it \emph{is} multiply read}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/09/04}{Changed some dirty tricks to be
+% less/more dirty---all uses of \cs{afterfi}}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/25}{Directories support}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/10/24}{added \cs{makepathname} to support
+% systems with bizzare pathnames}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/10/25}{batch files work by \cs{input}}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/10/02}{Introduced ``open lists''}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}{Add stream limits (MDW)}
+% \changes{2.4c}{1996/06/11}{Add initex support (DPC)}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\#,\$,\%,\&,\@,\\,\{,\},\^,\_,\~,\ }
+% \DoNotIndex{\@ne}
+% \DoNotIndex{\advance,\begingroup,\catcode,\closein,\closeout}
+% \DoNotIndex{\day,\def,\edef,\else,\empty,\endgroup,\errmessage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\futurelet,\gdef,\global,\if,\ifeof}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifx,\immediate,\let,\loop,\m@ne,\message,\month}
+% \DoNotIndex{\newcount}
+% \DoNotIndex{\newif,\newlinechar,\newread,\newtoks,\newwrite}
+% \DoNotIndex{\noexpand,\openin,\openout,\par,\read,\relax,\repeat}
+% \DoNotIndex{\space,\the,\undefined,\write,\xdef,\year,\z@}
+%
+% ^^A some definitions for this documentation
+%
+% \newcommand{\ds}{\textsf{DocStrip}} ^^A maybe?
+% \newcommand{\bsl}{\protect\bslash}
+% \newcommand{\note}[1]{\marginpar{\textbf{#1}}}
+% \newcommand{\netaddress}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% ^^A override the default in doc.sty
+% \makeatletter
+% \renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+% \glossary@prologue%
+% \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}%
+% {}
+% \makeatother
+%
+%
+% \changes{2.1c}{1993/02/25}{Added a setting for StandardModuleDepth}
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \title{The \ds{} program%
+% \thanks{This file has version number \fileversion,
+% last revised \filedate,
+% documentation dated \docdate.}}
+%
+% \changes{2.1b}{1993/02/23}{modified mailaddress of Johannes}
+% \changes{2.4i}{1998/01/18}{removed mail addresses as it is hopeless
+% to keep them uptodate}
+% \author{%
+% Frank Mittelbach
+% \and
+% Denys Duchier
+% \and
+% Johannes Braams
+% \and
+% Marcin Woli\'nski
+% \and
+% Mark Wooding
+% }
+%
+% \date{Printed \today}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% This document describes the implementation of the \ds{} program.
+% The original version of this program was developed by Frank
+% Mittelbach to accompany his \texttt{doc.sty} which enables literate
+% programming in \LaTeX\@. Denys Duchier rewrote it to run either
+% with \TeX\ or with \LaTeX, and to allow full boolean expressions in
+% conditional guards instead of just comma-separated lists.
+% Johannes Braams re-united the two implementations, documented and
+% debugged the code.
+%
+% In September 1995 Marcin Woli\'nski changed many parts of the
+% program to make use of \TeX's ability to write to multiple files
+% at the same time to avoid re-reading sources. The performance
+% improvement of version~2.3 came at a price of compatibility with
+% some more obscure operating systems which limit the number of
+% files a process can keep open. This was corrected in September
+% 1996 by Mark Wooding and his changes were ``creatively merged''
+% by Marcin Woli\'nski who made at the same time changes in batch
+% files processing, handling of preambles and introduced ``verbatim
+% mode''. After all that, David Carlisle merged the new version into
+% the \LaTeX\ sources, and made a few other changes, principally
+% making \ds{} work under initex, and removing the need for
+% batch files to say \verb|\def\batchfile{...}|.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% \subsection{Why the \ds{} program?} When Frank Mittelbach created
+% the \texttt{doc} package, he invented a way to combine \TeX\ code
+% and its documentation. From then on it was more or less possible
+% to do literate programming in \TeX.
+%
+% This way of writing \TeX\ programs obviously has great
+% advantages, especially when the program becomes larger than a
+% couple of macros. There is one drawback however, and that is
+% that such programs may take longer than expected to run because
+% \TeX\ is an interpreter and has to decide for each line of the
+% program file what it has to do with it. Therefore, \TeX\ programs
+% may be speeded up by removing all comments from them.
+%
+% By removing the comments from a \TeX\ program a new problem is
+% introduced. We now have two versions of the program and both of
+% them {\em have\/} to be maintained. Therefore it would be nice to
+% have a possibility to remove the comments automatically, instead
+% of doing it by hand. So we need a program to remove comments from
+% \TeX\ programs. This could be programmed in any high level
+% language, but maybe not everybody has the right compiler to
+% compile the program. Everybody who wants to remove comments from
+% \TeX\ programs has \TeX\@. Therefore the \ds{} program is
+% implemented entirely in \TeX.
+%
+% \subsection{Functions of the \ds{} program}
+%
+% Having created the \ds{} program to remove comment lines from
+% \TeX\ programs\footnote{Note that only comment lines, that is
+% lines that start with a single \texttt{\%} character, are removed;
+% all other comments stay in the code.} it became feasible to do more
+% than just strip comments.\\ Wouldn't it be nice to have a way to
+% include parts of the code only when some condition is set true?
+% Wouldn't it be as nice to have the possibility to split the
+% source of a \TeX\ program into several smaller files and combine
+% them later into one `executable'?\\ Both these wishes have been
+% implemented in the \ds{} program.
+%
+% \section{How to use the \ds{} program}
+% A number of ways exist to use the \ds{} program:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item The usual way to use \ds{} is to write a \emph{batch file}
+% in such a way that it can be directly processed by \TeX{}.
+% The batch file should contain the commands described below for
+% controlling the \ds{} program.
+% This allows you to set up a distribution where you can instruct
+% the user to simply run
+% \begin{quote}
+% \texttt{TEX} \meta{batch file}
+% \end{quote}
+% to generate the executable versions of your files from the
+% distribution sources.
+% Most of the \LaTeX\ distribution is packaged this way.
+% To produce such a batch file include a statement in your
+% `batch file' that
+% instructs \TeX\ to read \texttt{docstrip.tex}.
+% The beginning of such a file would look like:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \input docstrip
+% ...
+%\end{verbatim}
+% By convention the batch file should have extension |.ins|. But
+% these days \ds{} in fact work with any extension.
+%
+% \item Alternatively you can instruct \TeX\ to read the file
+% \texttt{docstrip.tex} and to see what happens. \TeX\ will ask
+% you a few questions about the file you would like to be
+% processed. When you have answered these questions it does
+% its job and strips the comments from your \TeX\ code.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \section{Configuring \ds}
+% \subsection{Selecting output directories}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/09/19}{Added documentation}
+% Inspired by a desire to simplify reinstallations of \LaTeXe{} and
+% to support operating systems which have an upper limit on the
+% number of files allowed in a directory, \ds\ now allows
+% installation scripts to specify output directories for files it
+% creates. We suggest using TDS (\TeX\ directory structure) names
+% of directories relative to \texttt{texmf} here. However these
+% names should be thought of as a labels rather than actual names
+% of directories. They get translated to actual system-dependent
+% pathnames according to commands contained in a configuration file
+% named \texttt{docstrip.cfg}.
+%
+% The configuration file is read by \ds{} just before it starts to
+% process any batch file commands.
+%
+% If this file is not present \ds{} uses some default settings which
+% ensure that files are only written to the current directory.
+% However by use of this configuration file, a site maintainer can
+% `enable' features of \ds{} that allow files to be written to
+% alternative directories.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\usedir}
+% Using this macro package author can tell where a file should be
+% installed. All |\file|s generated in the scope of that
+% declaration are written to a directory specified by its one
+% argument. For example in \LaTeXe{} installation following
+% declarations are used:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/base}
+% \usedir{makeindex}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% And standard packages use
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/tools}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/babel}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% etc.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\showdirectory}
+% Used to display directory names in messages. If some label is not
+% defined it expands to |UNDEFINED (label is ...)| otherwise to a
+% directory name. It is probably a good idea for every installation
+% script to display at startup list of all directories that would
+% be used and asking user to confirm that.
+%
+% The above macros are used by package/installation script
+% author. The following macros are used in a configuration file,
+% |docstrip.cfg|, by a system administrator to
+% describe her/his local directory structure.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\BaseDirectory} This macro is administrator's way of
+% saying ``yes, I want to use that directories support of
+% yours''. \ds{} will write only to current directory unless your
+% config has a call to this macro. (This means \ds{} won't write to
+% random directories unless you tell it to, which is nice.) Using
+% this macro you can specify a base directory for \TeX-related
+% stuff. E.g., for many Unix systems that would be
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \BaseDirectory{/usr/local/lib/texmf}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% and for standard em\TeX{} installation
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \BaseDirectory{c:/emtex}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareDir}
+% Having specified the base directory you should tell \ds{} how to
+% interpret labels used in |\usedir| commands. This is done with
+% |\DeclareDir| with two arguments. The first is the label and the
+% second is actual name of directory relative to base
+% directory. For example to teach \ds{} using standard em\TeX{}
+% directories one would say:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \BaseDirectory{c:/emtex}
+% \DeclareDir{tex/latex/base}{texinput/latex2e}
+% \DeclareDir{tex/latex/tools}{texinput/tools}
+% \DeclareDir{makeindex}{idxstyle}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This will cause base latex files and font descriptions to be
+% written to directory |c:\emtex\texinput\latex2e|, files of
+% \texttt{tools} package to |c:\emtex\texinput\tools| and makeindex
+% files to |c:\emtex\idxstyle|.
+%
+% Sometimes it is desirable to put some files outside of the base
+% directory. For that reason |\DeclareDir| has a star form
+% specifying absolute pathname. For example one could say
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareDir*{makeindex}{d:/tools/texindex/styles}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\UseTDS}
+% Users of systems conforming to TDS may well ask here ``do I
+% really need to put a dozen of lines like
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareDir{tex/latex/base}{tex/latex/base}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% in my config file''. The answer is |\UseTDS|. This macro causes
+% \ds{} to use labels themselves for any directory you haven't
+% overriden with |\DeclareDir|. The default behaviour is to raise
+% an error on undefined labels because some users may want to know
+% exactly where files go and not to allow \ds{} to write to random
+% places. However I (MW) think this is pretty cool and my
+% config says just (I'm running te\TeX{} under Linux)
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \BaseDirectory{/usr/local/teTeX/texmf}
+% \UseTDS
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% The important thing to note here is that it is impossible to create
+% a new directory from inside \TeX{}. So however you configure
+% \ds, you need to create all needed directories before running
+% the installation. Authors may want to begin
+% every installation script by displaying a list of directories
+% that will be used and asking user if he's sure all of them
+% exist.
+%
+% Since file name syntax is OS specific \ds{} tries to guess it
+% from the current directory syntax. It should succeed for Unix,
+% MSDOS, Macintosh and VMS. However \ds{} will only initially
+% know the current directory syntax if it is used with \LaTeX.
+% If used with plain\TeX\ or initex it will not have this
+% information\footnote{Except when processing the main
+% \texttt{unpack.ins} batch file for the \LaTeX\ distribution, which
+% takes special measures so that initex can learn the directory
+% syntax.}.
+% If you often use \ds{} with formats other than \LaTeX\ you should
+% \emph{start} the file |docstrip.cfg| with a definition of
+% |\WriteToDir|. E.g.,
+% |\def\WriteToDir{./}| on MSDOS/Unix,
+% |\def\WriteToDir{:}| on Macintosh,
+% |\def\WriteToDir{[]}| on VMS.
+%
+% If your system requires something
+% completely different you can define in |docstrip.cfg| macros
+% |\dirsep| and |\makepathname|. Check for their definition in the
+% implementation part. If you want some substantially different
+% scheme of translating |\usedir| labels into directory names try
+% redefining macro |\usedir|.
+%
+% \subsection{Setting maximum numbers of streams}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\maxfiles}
+% In support of some of the more obscure operating systems, there's
+% a limit on the number of files a program can have open. This can
+% be expressed to \ds\ through the |\maxfiles| macro. If the number
+% of streams \ds\ is allowed to open is $n$, your configuration file
+% can say |\maxfiles{|$n$|}|, and \ds\ won't try to open more files
+% than this. Note that this limit won't include files which are
+% already open. There'll usually be two of these: the installation
+% script which you started, and the file |docstrip.tex| which it
+% included; you must bear these in mind yourself. \ds\ assumes
+% that it can open at least four files before it hits some kind of
+% maximum: if this isn't the case, you have real problems.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\maxoutfiles}
+% Maybe instead of having a limit on the number of files \TeX\ can
+% have open, there's a limit on the number of files it can write
+% to (e.g., \TeX\ itself imposes a limit of 16~files being written
+% at a time). This can be expressed by saying |\maxoutfiles{|$m$|}|
+% in a configuration file. You must be able to have at least one
+% output file open at a time; otherwise \ds\ can't do anything at
+% all.
+%
+% Both these options would typically be put in the |docstrip.cfg|
+% file.
+%
+%
+% \section{The user interface}
+%
+% \subsection{The main program}
+% \DescribeMacro{\processbatchFile} The `main program' starts with
+% trying to process a batch file, this is accomplished by calling
+% the macro |\processbatchFile|. It counts the number of batch
+% files it processes, so that when the number of files processed is
+% still zero after the call to |\processbatchFile| appropriate
+% action can be taken.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\interactive} When no batch files have been processed
+% the macro |\interactive| is called. It prompts the user for
+% information. First the extensions of the input and output files
+% is determined. Then a question about optional code is asked and
+% finally the user can give a list of files that have to be
+% processed.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\ReportTotals} When the \texttt{stats} option is
+% included in the \ds{}-program it keeps a record of the number of
+% files and lines that are processed. Also the number of comments
+% removed and passed as well as the number of code lines that were
+% passed to the output are accounted. The macro |\ReportTotals|
+% shows a summary of this information.
+%
+% \subsection{Batchfile commands}
+%
+% The commands described in this section are available to build a
+% batch file for \TeX.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\input}
+% All \ds{} batch files should start with the line: |\input docstrip|
+%
+% Do not use the \LaTeX\ syntax |\input{docstrip}| as batch files may
+% be used with plain~\TeX\ or ini\TeX.
+% You may that old batch files always have a line
+% |\def\batchfile{|\meta{filename}|}|
+% just before the input.
+% Such usage is still supported but is now discouraged, as it causes
+% \TeX\ to re-input the same file, using up one of its limited number
+% of input streams.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\endbatchfile}
+% All batch files should end with this command. Any lines after this
+% in the file are ignored. In old files that start
+% |\def\batchfile{|\ldots\ this command is optional, but is a good
+% idea anyway. If this command is omitted from a batchfile then
+% normally \TeX\ will go to its interactive |*| prompt, so you may
+% stop \ds{} by typing |\endbatchfile| to this prompt.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\generate}
+% \DescribeMacro{\file}
+% \DescribeMacro{\from}
+% The main reason for constructing a \ds{} command file is to
+% describe what files should be generated, from what sources and
+% what optional (`guarded') pieces of code should be included. The
+% macro |\generate| is used to give \TeX\ this information. Its
+% syntax is:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\generate{|[|\file{|\meta{output}|}{|[|\from{|^^A
+% \meta{input}|}{|\meta{optionlist}|}|]*|}|]*|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% The \meta{output} and \meta{input} are normal file specifications
+% as are appropriate for your computer system. The
+% \meta{optionlist} is a comma separated list of `options' that
+% specify which optional code fragments in \meta{input} should be
+% included in \meta{output}. Argument to |\generate| may contain
+% some local declarations (e.g., the |\use...| commands described
+% below) that will apply to all |\file|s after them. Argument to
+% |\generate| is executed inside a group, so all local declarations
+% are undone when |\generate| concludes.
+%
+% It is possible to specify multiple input files, each with its own
+% \meta{optionlist}. This is indicated by the notation [\ldots]*.
+% Moreover there can be many |\file| specifications in one
+% |\generate| clause. This means that all these \meta{output} files
+% should be generated while reading each of \meta{input} files
+% once. Input files are read in order of first appearance in this
+% clause. E.g.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \generate{\file{p1.sty}{\from{s1.dtx}{foo,bar}}
+% \file{p2.sty}{\from{s2.dtx}{baz}
+% \from{s3.dtx}{baz}}
+% \file{p3.sty}{\from{s1.dtx}{zip}
+% \from{s2.dtx}{zip}}
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% will cause \ds{} to read files \texttt{s1.dtx}, \texttt{s2.dtx},
+% \texttt{s3.dtx} (in that order) and produce files
+% \texttt{p1.sty}, \texttt{p2.sty}, \texttt{p3.sty}.
+%
+% The restriction to at most 16 output streams open in a while
+% does not mean that you can produce at most 16 files with one
+% |\generate|. In the example above only 2 streams are needed,
+% since while \texttt{s1.dtx} is processed only \texttt{p1.sty} and
+% \texttt{p3.sty} are being generated; while reading
+% \texttt{s2.dtx} only \texttt{p2.sty} and \texttt{p3.sty}; and
+% while reading \texttt{s3.dtx} file \texttt{p2.sty} . However
+% example below needs 3 streams:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \generate{\file{p1.sty}{\from{s1.dtx}{foo,bar}}
+% \file{p2.sty}{\from{s2.dtx}{baz}
+% \from{s3.dtx}{baz}}
+% \file{p3.sty}{\from{s1.dtx}{zip}
+% \from{s3.dtx}{zip}}
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Although while reading \texttt{s2.dtx} file \texttt{p3.sty} is
+% not written it must remain open since some parts of
+% \texttt{s3.dtx} will go to it later.
+%
+% Sometimes it is not possible to create a file by reading all
+% sources once. Consider the following example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \generate{\file{p1.sty}{\from{s1.dtx}{head}
+% \from{s2.dtx}{foo}
+% \from{s1.dtx}{tail}}
+% \file{s1.drv}{\from{s1.dtx}{driver}}
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% To generate \texttt{p1.sty} file \texttt{s1.dtx} must be read
+% twice: first time with option \texttt{head}, then file
+% \texttt{s2.dtx} is read and then \texttt{s1.dtx} again this time
+% with option \texttt{tail}. \ds{} handles this case correctly: if
+% inside one |\file| declaration there are multiple |\from|es with
+% the same input file this file \emph{is} read multiple times.
+%
+% If the order of |\from|s specified in one of your |\file|
+% specifications does not match the order of input files
+% established by previous |\file|s, \ds{} will raise an error and
+% abort. Then you may either read one of next sections or give up
+% and put that file in separate |\generate| (but then sources will
+% be read again just for that file).
+%
+% \paragraph{For impatient.} Try following algorithm: Find
+% file that is generated from largest number of sources, start
+% writing |\generate| clause with this file and its sources in
+% proper order. Take other files that are to be generated and add
+% them checking if they don't contradict order of sources for the
+% first one. If this doesn't work read next sections.
+%
+% \paragraph{For mathematicians.} Relation ``file $A$ must be
+% read before file $B$'' is a partial order on the set of all your
+% source files. Each |\from| clause adds a chain to this order.
+% What you have to do is to perform a topological sort i.e. to
+% extend partial order to linear one. When you have done it just
+% list your source files in |\generate| in such a way that order of
+% their first appearance in the clause matches linear order. If
+% this cannot be achieved read next paragraph. (Maybe future
+% versions of \ds{} will perform this sort automatically, so all
+% these troubles will disappear.)
+%
+% \paragraph{For that who must know that all.} There is a
+% diverse case when it's not possible to achieve proper order of
+% reading source files. Suppose you have to generate two files,
+% first from \texttt{s1.dtx} and \texttt{s3.dtx} (in that order)
+% and second from \texttt{s2.dtx} and \texttt{s3.dtx}. Whatever
+% way you specify this the files will be read in either as
+% \texttt{s1 s3 s2} or \texttt{s2 s3 s1}. The key to solution is
+% magical macro |\needed| that marks a file as needed to be input
+% but not directing any output from it to current |\file|. In our
+% example proper specification is:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \generate{\file{p1.sty}{\from{s1.dtx}{foo}
+% \needed{s2.dtx}
+% \from{s3.dtx}{bar}}
+% \file{p2.sty}{\from{s2.dtx}{zip}
+% \from{s3.dtx}{zap}}
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\askforoverwritetrue}
+% \DescribeMacro{\askforoverwritefalse}
+% These macros specify what should happen if a file that is to be
+% generated already exists. If |\askforoverwritetrue| is active
+% (the default) the user is asked whether the file should be
+% overwritten. If however |\askforoverwritefalse| was issued
+% existing files will be overwritten silently. These switches are
+% local and can be issued in any place in the file even inside
+% |\generate| clause (between |\file|s however).
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\askonceonly}
+% You might not want to set |\askforoverwritefalse| in a batch file
+% as that says that it us always all right to overwrite other people's
+% files. However for large installations, such as the base \LaTeX\
+% distribution, being asked individually about hundreds of files
+% is not very helpful either. A batchfile may therefore specify
+% |\askonceonly|. This means that after the first time the batchfile
+% asks the user a question, the user is given an option of to change
+% the behaviour so that `yes' will be automatically assumed for all
+% future questions. This applies to any use of the \ds{} commamnd
+% |\Ask| including, but not restricted to, the file overwrite
+% questions controlled by |\askforoverwritetrue|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\preamble}
+% \DescribeMacro{\endpreamble}
+% \DescribeMacro{\postamble}
+% \DescribeMacro{\endpostamble}
+% It is possible to add a number of lines to the output of the
+% \ds{} program. The information you want to add to the start of
+% the output file should be listed between the |\preamble| and
+% |\endpreamble| commands; the lines you want to add to the end of
+% the output file should be listed between the |\postamble| and
+% |\endpostamble| commands. Everything that \ds{} finds for both
+% the pre- and postamble it writes to the output file, but preceded
+% with value of |\MetaPrefix| (default is two \%-characters). If
+% you include a |^^J| character in one of these lines, everything
+% that follows it on the same line is written to a new line in the
+% output file. This `feature' can be used to add a |\typeout| or
+% |\message| to the the stripped file.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\declarepreamble}
+% \DescribeMacro{\declarepostamble}
+% \DescribeMacro{\usepreamble}
+% \DescribeMacro{\usepostamble}
+% \DescribeMacro{\nopreamble}
+% \DescribeMacro{\nopostamble}
+% Sometimes it is desirable to have different preambles for different
+% files of a larger package (e.g., because some of them are
+% customisable configuration files and they should be marked as
+% such). In such a case one can say |\declarepreamble\somename|,
+% then type in his/her preamble, end it with |\endpreamble|,
+% and later on |\usepreamble\somename| to switch to this
+% preamble.
+% If no preamble should be used you can deploy the |\nopreamble|
+% command. This command is equivalent to saying |\usepreamble\empty|.
+% The same mechanism works for postambles, |\use...|
+% declarations are local and can appear inside |\generate|.
+%
+% Commands |\preamble| and |\postamble| define and activate
+% pre(post)ambles named |\defaultpreamble| and |\defaultpostamble|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\batchinput}
+% The batch file commands can be put into several batch files which
+% are then executed from a master batch file. This is, for example,
+% useful if a distribution consists of several distinct parts. You
+% can then write individual batch files for every part and in
+% addition a master file that simply calls the batch files for the
+% parts. For this, call the individual batch files from the master
+% file with the command |\batchinput{|\meta{file}|}|. Don't use
+% |\input| for this purpose, this command
+% should be used only for calling the \ds{} program as explained
+% above and is ignored when used for any other purpose.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\ifToplevel}
+% When batch files are nested you may want to suppress certain
+% commands in the lower-level batch files such as terminal
+% messages. For this purpose you can use the |\ifToplevel| command
+% which executes its argument only if the current batch file is the
+% outermost one. Make sure that you put the opening brace of the
+% argument into the same line as the command itself, otherwise the
+% \ds{} program will get confused.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\showprogress}
+% \DescribeMacro{\keepsilent}
+% When the option \texttt{stats} is included in \ds{} it can
+% write message to the terminal as each line of the input file(s) is
+% processed. This message consists of a single character, indicating
+% kind of that particular line. We use the
+% following characters:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\%}] Whenever an input line is a comment
+% \texttt{\%}-character is written to the terminal.
+% \item[\texttt{.}] Whenever a code line is encountered
+% a \texttt{.}-character is written on the terminal.
+% \item[\texttt{/}] When a number of empty lines appear in a row in the
+% input file, at most one of them is retained. The \ds{}
+% program signals the removal of an empty line with the
+% \texttt{/}-character.
+% \item[\texttt{<}] When a `guard line' is found in the input and it
+% starts a block of optionally included code, this is signalled
+% on the terminal by showing the \texttt{<}-character, together
+% with the boolean expression of the guard.
+% \item[\texttt{>}] The end of a conditionally included block of code is
+% indicated by showing the \texttt{>}-character.
+% \end{itemize}
+% This feature is turned on by default when the option
+% \texttt{stats} is included, otherwise it is turned off. The
+% feature can be toggled with the commands |\showprogress| and
+% |\keepsilent|.
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Supporting old interface}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\generateFile}
+% Here is the old syntax for specifing what files are to be
+% generated. It allows specification of just one output file.
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\generateFile{|\meta{output}|}{|\meta{ask}|}{|[|\from{|^^A
+% \meta{input}|}{|\meta{optionlist}|}|]*|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% The meaning of \meta{output}, \meta{input} and
+% \meta{optionslist} is just as for |\generate|. With
+% \meta{ask} you can instruct \TeX\ to either silently overwrite a
+% previously existing file (|f|) or to issue a warning and ask you
+% if it should overwrite the existing file (|t|) (it overrides the
+% |\askforoverwrite| setting).
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\include}
+% \DescribeMacro{\processFile}
+% The earlier version of the \ds{} program supported a
+% different kind of command to tell \TeX\ what to do. This command
+% is less powerful than |\generateFile|; it can be used when
+% \meta{output} is created from one \meta{input}. The syntax is:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\include{|\meta{optionlist}|}|
+%
+% |\processFile{|\meta{name}|}{|\meta{inext}^^A
+% |}{|\meta{outext}^^A
+% |}{|\meta{ask}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% This command is based on environments where filenames are
+% constructed of two parts, the name and the extension, separated
+% with a dot. The syntax of this command assumes that the
+% \meta{input} and \meta{output} share the same name and only
+% differ in their extension. This command is retained to be
+% backwards compatible with the older version of \ds{}, but its use
+% is not encouraged.
+%
+% \section{Conditional inclusion of code}
+%
+% When you use the \ds{} program to strip comments out of
+% \TeX\ macro files you have the possibility to make more than one
+% stripped macro file from one documented file. This is achieved by
+% the support for optional code. The optional code is marked
+% in the documented file with a `guard'.
+%
+% A guard is a boolean expression that is enclosed in |<| and |>|.
+% It also {\em has\/} to follow the |%| at the beginning of the line.
+% For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% ...
+% %<bool>\TeX code
+% ...
+%\end{verbatim}
+% In this example the line of code will be included in \meta{output}
+% if the option \texttt{bool} is present in the \meta{optionlist} of
+% the |\generateFile| command.
+%
+% The syntax for the boolean expressions is:
+%
+%\DeleteShortVerb\|
+% \begin{tabular}{lcl}
+% \meta{Expression} & $::=$ & \meta{Secondary}
+% [\{\texttt{|}, \texttt{,}\}
+% \meta{Secondary}]*\\
+% \meta{Secondary} & $::=$ &
+% \meta{Primary} [\texttt{\&}
+% \meta{Primary}]*\\
+% \meta{Primary} & $::=$ &
+% \meta{Terminal} $|$ \texttt{!}\meta{Primary}
+% $|$ \texttt{(}\meta{Expression}\texttt{)}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% The \texttt{|} stands for disjunction, the \texttt{\&} stands for
+% conjunction and the \texttt{!}\ stands for negation. The
+% \meta{Terminal} is any sequence of letters and evaluates to
+% \meta{true} iff\footnote{iff stands for `if and only if'} it
+% occurs in the list of options that have to be included.
+%\MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+% Two kinds of optional code are supported: one can either have
+% optional code that `fits' on one line of text, like the example
+% above, or one can have blocks of optional code.
+%
+% To distinguish both kinds of optional code the `guard modifier'
+% has been introduced. The `guard modifier' is one character that
+% immediately follows the |<| of the guard. It can be either |*|
+% for the beginning of a block of code, or |/| for the end of a
+% block of code\footnote{To be compatible with the earlier version
+% of \ds{} also \texttt{+} and \texttt{-} are supported as `guard
+% modifiers'. However, there is an incompatibility with the
+% earlier version since a line with a \texttt{+}-modified guard is
+% not included inside a block with a guard that evaluates to false,
+% in contrast to the previous behaviour.}. The beginning and
+% ending guards for a block of code have to be on a line by
+% themselves.
+%
+% When a block of code is {\em not\/} included, any guards that occur
+% within that block are {\em not\/} evaluated.
+%
+% \section{Those other languages}
+% Since \TeX\ is an open system some of \TeX\ packages include
+% non-\TeX\ files. Some authors use \ds\ to generate PostScript
+% headers, shell scripts or programs in other languages. For them
+% the comments-stripping activity of \ds\ may cause some
+% trouble. This section describes how to produce non-\TeX\ files
+% with \ds\ effectively.
+%
+% \subsection{Stuff \ds\ puts in every file}
+% First problem when producing files in ``other'' languages is that
+% \ds\ adds some bits to the begining and end of every generated
+% file that may not fit with the syntax of the language in
+% question. So we'll study carefully what exactly goes where.
+%
+% The whole text put on begining of file is kept in a macro defined
+% by |\declarepreamble|. Every line of input presented to
+% |\declarepreamble| is prepended with current value of
+% |\MetaPrefix|. Standard \ds\ header is inserted before your text,
+% and macros |\inFileName|, |\outFileName| and |\ReferenceLines|
+% are used as placeholders for information which will be filled in
+% later (specifically for each output file). Don't try to redefine
+% these macros. After
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \declarepreamble\foo
+% ____________________________
+% Package FOO for use with TeX
+% \endpreamble
+%\end{verbatim}
+% macro |\foo| is defined as
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% %%^^J
+% %% This is file `\outFileName ',^^J
+% %% generated with the docstrip utility.^^J
+% \ReferenceLines^^J
+% %% ____________________________^^J
+% %% Package FOO for use with TeX.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% You can play with it freely or even define it from scratch. To
+% embed the preamble in Adobe structured comments just use |\edef|:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \edef\foo{\perCent!PS-Adobe-3.0^^J%
+% \DoubleperCent\space Title: \outFileName^^J%
+% \foo^^J%
+% \DoubleperCent\space EndComments}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% After that use |\usepreamble\foo| to select your new preamble.
+% Everything above works as well for postambles.
+%
+% You may also prevent \ds\ from adding anything to your file, and
+% put any language specific invocations directly in your code:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \generate{\usepreamble\empty
+% \usepostamble\empty
+% \file{foo.ps}{\from{mypackage.dtx}{ps}}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% or alternatively |\nopreamble| and |\nopostamble|.
+%
+% \subsection{Meta comments}
+% You can change the prefix used for putting meta comments to
+% output files by redefining |\MetaPrefix|. Its default value is
+% |\DoubleperCent|. The preamble uses value of |\MetaPrefix|
+% current at time of |\declarepreamble| while meta comments in the
+% source file use value current at time of |\generate|. Note that
+% this means that you cannot produce concurrently two files using
+% different |\MetaPrefix|es.
+%
+% \subsection{Verbatim mode}
+% If your programming language uses some construct that can
+% interferes badly with \ds\ (e.g., percent in column one) you may
+% need a way for preventing it from being stripped off. For that
+% purpose \ds\ features `verbatim mode'.
+%
+% A `Guard expression' of the form |%<<|\meta{END-TAG} marks
+% the start of a section that will be copied verbatim upto a line
+% containing only a percent in column 1 followed by \meta{END-TAG}.
+% You can select any \meta{END-TAG} you want, but note that spaces
+% count here. Example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% %<*myblock>
+% some stupid()
+% #computer<program>
+% %<<COMMENT
+% % These two lines are copied verbatim (including percents
+% %% even if \MetaPrefix is something different than %%).
+% %COMMENT
+% using*strange@programming<language>
+% %</myblock>
+%\end{verbatim}
+% And the output is (when stripped with \texttt{myblock} defined):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% some stupid()
+% #computer<program>
+% % These two lines are copied verbatim (including percents
+% %% even if \MetaPrefix is something different than %%).
+% using*strange@programming<language>
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\StopEventually{%
+%^^A \section{Conclusion}
+% \PrintIndex
+% \PrintChanges
+%^^A \makesignature
+% }
+%
+% \section{Producing the documentation}
+%
+% We provide a short driver file that can be extracted by the
+% \ds{} program using the the conditional `\textsf{driver}'. To
+% allow the use of \texttt{docstrip.dtx} as a program at Ini\TeX{}
+% time (e.g., to strip
+% off its own comments) we need to add a bit of primitive code.
+% With this extra checking it is still possible to process this
+% file with \LaTeXe{} to typeset the documentation.
+% \changes{2.1b}{1993/02/23}{Added fontdefinitions for doc to the driver
+% file, in order to get the layout of the code
+% right; also added the layout definitions
+% that are in effect in \texttt{doc.drv}}
+% \changes{2.1c}{1993/02/23}{Remove definitions for fonts again}
+% \changes{2.2f}{1994/02/26}{Allow direct processing of source}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |\documentclass| is undefined, e.g., if Ini\TeX{} or plain
+% \TeX{} is used for formatting, we bypass the driver file.
+%
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/20}{Changed driver}
+% We use some trickery to avoid issuing |\end{document}| when
+% the |\ifx| construction is unfinished. If condition below is
+% true a |\fi| is constructed on the fly, the |\ifx| is completed,
+% and the real |\fi| will never be seen as it comes after
+% |\end{document}|. On the other hand if condition is false
+% \TeX\ skips over |\csname fi\endcsname| having no idea that
+% this could stand for |\fi|, driver is skipped and only then
+% the condition completed.
+%
+% Additional guard |gobble| prevents \ds\ from extracting
+% these tricks to real driver file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*gobble>
+\ifx\jobname\relax\let\documentclass\undefined\fi
+\ifx\documentclass\undefined
+\else \csname fi\endcsname
+%</gobble>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we process the following lines which will result in
+% formatting the documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \documentclass{ltxdoc}
+ \EnableCrossrefs
+ % \DisableCrossrefs
+ % use \DisableCrossrefs if the
+ % index is ready
+ \RecordChanges
+ % \OnlyDescription
+ \typeout{Expect some Under- and overfull boxes}
+ \begin{document}
+ \DocInput{docstrip.dtx}
+ \end{document}
+%<*gobble>
+\fi
+%</gobble>
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The implementation}
+%
+% \subsection{Initex initializations}
+% Allow this program to run with |initex|.
+% The |Z| trickery saves the need to worry about |\outer| stuff in
+% plain \TeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*initex>
+\catcode`\Z=\catcode`\%
+\ifnum13=\catcode`\~{\egroup\else
+ \catcode`\Z=9
+Z
+Z \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2
+Z \catcode`\#=6 \catcode`\^=7
+Z \catcode`\@=11 \catcode`\^^L=13
+Z \let\bgroup={ \let\egroup=}
+Z
+Z \dimendef\z@=10 \z@=0pt \chardef\@ne=1 \countdef\m@ne=22 \m@ne=-1
+Z \countdef\count@=255
+Z
+Z \def\wlog{\immediate\write\m@ne} \def\space{ }
+Z
+Z \count10=22 % allocates \count registers 23, 24, ...
+Z \count15=9 % allocates \toks registers 10, 11, ...
+Z \count16=-1 % allocates input streams 0, 1, ...
+Z \count17=-1 % allocates output streams 0, 1, ...
+Z
+Z \def\alloc@#1#2#3{\advance\count1#1\@ne#2#3\count1#1\relax}
+Z
+Z \def\newcount{\alloc@0\countdef} \def\newtoks{\alloc@5\toksdef}
+Z \def\newread{\alloc@6\chardef} \def\newwrite{\alloc@7\chardef}
+Z
+Z \def\newif#1{%
+Z \count@\escapechar \escapechar\m@ne
+Z \let#1\iffalse
+Z \@if#1\iftrue
+Z \@if#1\iffalse
+Z \escapechar\count@}
+Z \def\@if#1#2{%
+Z \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\@gobbletwo\string#1%
+Z \expandafter\@gobbletwo\string#2\endcsname
+Z {\let#1#2}}
+Z
+Z \def\@gobbletwo#1#2{}
+Z \def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{}
+Z
+Z \def\loop#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\iterate}
+Z \def\iterate{\body \let\next\iterate \else\let\next\relax\fi \next}
+Z \let\repeat\fi
+Z
+Z \def\empty{}
+Z
+Z \def\tracingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
+Z \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+Z \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+Z \showboxbreadth 10000 \showboxdepth 10000 \errorstopmode
+Z \errorcontextlines 10000 \tracingonline1 }
+Z
+\bgroup}\fi\catcode`\Z=11
+\let\bgroup={ \let\egroup=}
+%</initex>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Declarations and initializations}
+%
+% In order to be able to include the \texttt{@}-sign in control
+% sequences its category code is changed to \meta{letter}. The
+% `program' guard here allows most of the code to be excluded when
+% extracting the driver file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*program>
+\catcode`\@=11
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When we want to write multiple lines to the terminal with one
+% statement, we need a character that tells \TeX\ to break the lines.
+% We use \verb=^^J= for this purpose.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newlinechar=`\^^J
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Switches}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifGenerate}
+% The program will check if a
+% file of the same name as the file it would be creating already
+% exists. The switch |\ifGenerate| is used to indicate if the
+% stripped file has to be generated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifGenerate
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifContinue}
+% The switch |\ifContinue| is used in various places in the
+% program to indicate if a |\loop| has to end.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifContinue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifForlist}
+% \changes{2.0g}{1991/06/05}{Macro added.}
+% The program contains an implementation of a for-loop, based on
+% plain \TeX{}'s |\loop| macros. The implementation needs a
+% switch to terminate the loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifForlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifDefault}
+% The switch |\ifDefault| is used to indicate whether the
+% default batch file has to be used.
+% \changes{2.0f}{1991/06/04}{Macro added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifDefault
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifMoreFiles}
+% The switch |\ifMoreFiles| is used to decide if the user
+% wants more files to be processed. It is used only in interactive
+% mode; initially it evaluates to \meta{true}.
+% \changes{2.0h}{1991/06/19}{Macro added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMoreFiles \MoreFilestrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifaskforoverwrite}
+% The switch |\askforoverwrite| is used to decide if the user
+% should be asked when a file is to be overwritten.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifaskforoverwrite \askforoverwritetrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Count registers}
+% \begin{macro}{\blockLevel}
+% Optionally included blocks of code can be nested. The counter
+% |\blockLevel| will be used to keep track of the level of
+% nesting. Its initial value is zero.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\blockLevel \blockLevel\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\emptyLines}
+% The count register |\emptyLines| is used to count the number
+% of consecutive empty input lines. Only the first will be copied
+% to the output file.
+% \changes{2.0i}{1990/06/27}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\emptyLines \emptyLines \z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\processedLines}
+% \begin{macro}{\commentsRemoved}
+% \begin{macro}{\commentsPassed}
+% \begin{macro}{\codeLinesPassed}
+% To be able to provide the user with some statistics about the
+% stripping process four counters are allocated if the statistics
+% have been included when this program was \ds{}ped. The number of
+% lines processed is stored in the counter |\processedLines|.
+% The number of lines containing comments that are not written on
+% the output file is stored in the counter |\commentsRemoved|;
+% the number of comments copied to the output file is stored in the
+% counter |\commentsPassed|. The number of lines containing
+% macro code that are copied to the output file is stored in the
+% counter |\codeLinesPassed|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*stats>
+\newcount\processedLines \processedLines \z@
+\newcount\commentsRemoved \commentsRemoved \z@
+\newcount\commentsPassed \commentsPassed \z@
+\newcount\codeLinesPassed \codeLinesPassed \z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{2.0e}{1991/05/31}{Added counter allocation for the processing
+% of multiple files}
+% \begin{macro}{\TotalprocessedLines}
+% \begin{macro}{\TotalcommentsRemoved}
+% \begin{macro}{\TotalcommentsPassed}
+% \begin{macro}{\TotalcodeLinesPassed}
+% When more than one file is processed and when statistics have
+% been included we provide the user also with information about the
+% total amount of lines processed. For this purpose four more count
+% registers are allocated here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\TotalprocessedLines \TotalprocessedLines \z@
+\newcount\TotalcommentsRemoved \TotalcommentsRemoved \z@
+\newcount\TotalcommentsPassed \TotalcommentsPassed \z@
+\newcount\TotalcodeLinesPassed \TotalcodeLinesPassed \z@
+%</stats>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NumberOfFiles}
+% When more than one file is processed, the number of files is
+% stored in the count register |\NumberOfFiles|.
+% \changes{2.4h}{1997/07/07}{Declare counter always pr/2429}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\NumberOfFiles \NumberOfFiles\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{I/O streams}
+% \begin{macro}{\inFile}
+% For reading the file with documented \TeX-code, an input stream
+% |\inFile| is allocated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newread\inFile
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{No allocated streams for console}
+% \begin{macro}{\ttyin}
+% \begin{macro}{\ttyout}
+% Communication with the user goes through (nonexistent) stream 16.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\ttyin16
+\chardef\ttyout16
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\inputcheck}
+% This stream is only used for checking for existence of files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newread\inputcheck
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifToplevel}
+% Execute the argument if current batch file is the outermost one.
+% Otherwise suppress it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftopbatchfile \topbatchfiletrue
+\def\ifToplevel{\relax\iftopbatchfile
+ \expandafter\iden \else \expandafter\@gobble\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\batchinput}
+% \changes{2.0n}{1992/04/26}{Added macro}
+% \changes{2.1a}{1993/02/22}{Completely redefined (so that it works)}
+%
+% When the file \texttt{docstrip.tex} is read because of an
+% |\input| statement in a batch file we have to prevent an
+% endless loop (well, limited by \TeX's stack). Therefore we save
+% the original primitive |\input| and define a new macro with
+% an argument delimited by \verb*= = (i.e.\ a space) that just
+% gobbles the argument. Since the end-of-line character is
+% converted by \TeX{} to a space. This means that |\input| is not
+% available as a command within batch files.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@input}
+% \changes{2.1a}{1993/02/22}{Macro added}
+% We therefore keep a copy of the original under the name
+% |\@@input| for internal use. If \ds{} runs under \LaTeX{} this
+% command is already defined, so we make a quick test.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\@@input \let\@@input\input\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% To allow the nesting of batch files the |\batchinput| command is
+% provided it takes one argument, the name of the batch file to
+% switch to.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\batchinput#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We start a new group and locally redefine |\batchFile| to hold
+% the new batch file name. We toggle the |\iftopbatchfile| switch
+% since this definitely is not top batch file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\batchfile{#1}%
+ \topbatchfilefalse
+ \Defaultfalse
+ \usepreamble\org@preamble
+ \usepostamble\org@postamble
+ \let\destdir\WriteToDir
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After this we can simply call |\processbatchFile| which will
+% open the new batch file and read it until it
+% is exhausted. Note that if the batch file is not available, or
+% misspelled this routine will produce a warning and return.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \processbatchFile
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The value of |\batchfile| as well as local definitions of
+% preambles, directories etc. will be restored
+% at this closing |\endgroup|, so that further processing
+% continues in the calling batch file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\skip@input}
+% \changes{2.0j}{1992/03/03}{Added macro}
+% \changes{2.0n}{1992/04/26}{Argument delimited by space not \cs{relax}}
+% \changes{2.0n}{1992/04/26}{Macro renamed from \cs{skipinput}}
+% And here is the promised redefinition of |\input|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\skip@input#1 {}
+\let\input\skip@input
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Empty macros and macros that expand to a string}
+% \begin{macro}{\guardStack}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Renamed from \texttt{\bsl blockStack}}
+% Because blocks of code that will conditionally be included in the
+% output can be nested, a stack is maintained to keep track of
+% these blocks. The main reason for this is that we want to be able
+% to check if the blocks are properly nested. The stack itself is
+% stored in |\guardStack|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\guardStack{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\blockHead}
+% The macro |\blockHead| is used for storing and retrieving
+% the boolean expression that starts a block.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\blockHead{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\yes}
+% \begin{macro}{\y}
+% When the user is asked a question that he has to answer with either
+% \meta{yes} or \meta{no}, his response has to be evaluated. For this
+% reason the macros |\yes| and |\y| are defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\yes{yes}
+\def\y{y}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\n}
+% We also define |\n| for use in \ds{} command files.
+% \changes{2.1e}{1993/03/09}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\n{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Defaultbatchile}
+% \changes{2.0f}{1991/06/04}{Macro added.}
+% When the \ds{} program has to process a batch file it
+% can look for a batch file with a default name. This name
+% is stored in |\DefaultbatchFile|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DefaultbatchFile{docstrip.cmd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\perCent}
+% \begin{macro}{\DoubleperCent}
+% \begin{macro}{\MetaPrefix}
+% To be able to display percent-signs on the terminal, a
+% \texttt{\%} with category code 12 is stored in |\perCent| and
+% |\DoubleperCent|. The macro |\MetaPrefix| is put on begining of
+% every meta-comment line. It is defined indirect way since some
+% applications need redefining it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\%=12
+ \gdef\perCent{%}
+ \gdef\DoubleperCent{%%}
+}
+\let\MetaPrefix\DoubleperCent
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% In order to allow formfeeds in the input we define a one-character
+% control sequence \verb=^^L=.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def^^L{ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The only result of using |\Name| is slowing down execution since
+% its typical use (e.g., |\Name\def{foo bar}...|) has exactly the
+% same number of tokens as its expansion. However I think that it's
+% easier to read. The meaning of |\Name| as a black box is:
+% ``construct a name from second parameter and then pass it to your
+% first parameter as a parameter''.
+%
+% |\@stripstring| is used to get tokens building name of a macro
+% without leading backslash.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Name#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
+\def\@stripstring{\expandafter\@gobble\string}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Miscellaneous variables}
+% \begin{macro}{\sourceFileName}
+% The macro |\sourceFileName| is used to store the name of the
+% current input file.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\batchfile}
+% The macro |\batchfile| is used to store the name of the
+% batch file.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\inLine}
+% The macro |\inLine| is used to store the lines, read from
+% the input file, before further processing.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\answer}
+% When some interaction with the user is needed the macro
+% |\answer| is used to store his response.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\tmp}
+% Sometimes something has to be temporarily stored in a control
+% sequence. For these purposes the control sequence |\tmp| is
+% used.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Support macros}
+% \subsubsection{The stack mechanism}
+%
+% It is possible to have `nested guards'. This means that within a
+% block of optionally included code a subgroup is only included
+% when an additional option is specified. To keep track of the
+% nesting of the guards the currently `open' guard can be pushed on
+% the stack |\guardStack| and later popped off the stack again. The
+% macros that implement this stack mechanism are loosely based on
+% code that is developed in the context of the \LaTeX3 project.
+%
+% To be able to implement a stack mechanism we need a couple of
+% support macros.
+% \begin{macro}{\eltStart}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\eltEnd}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Macro added}
+% The macros |\eltStart| and |\eltEnd| are used to delimit a stack
+% element. They are both empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eltStart{}
+\def\eltEnd{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\qStop}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Macro added}
+% The macro |\qStop| is a so-called `quark', a macro that expands to
+% itself\footnote{The concept of `quarks' is developed for the
+% \LaTeX3 project.}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\qStop{\qStop}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pop}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Macro added} The macro
+% |\pop|\meta{stack}\meta{cs} `pops' the top element from the
+% stack. It assigns the value of the top element to \meta{cs} and
+% removes it from \meta{stack}. When \meta{stack} is empty a
+% warning is issued and \meta{cs} is assigned an empty value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pop#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1\empty
+ \Msg{Warning: Found end guard without matching begin}%
+ \let#2\empty
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To be able to `peel' off the first guard we use an extra macro
+% |\popX| that receives both the expanded and the unexpanded stack
+% in its arguments. The expanded stack is delimited with the quark
+% |\qStop|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\tmp{\expandafter\popX #1\qStop #1#2}%
+ \expandafter\tmp\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\popX}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Macro added} When the stack is expanded
+% the elements are surrounded with |\eltStart| and |\eltEnd|. The
+% first element of the stack is assigned to |#4|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\popX\eltStart #1\eltEnd #2\qStop #3#4{\def#3{#2}\def#4{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\push}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Macro added}
+% Guards can be pushed on the stack using the macro
+% |\push|\meta{stack}\meta{guard}. Again we need a secondary macro
+% (|\pushX|) that has both the expanded and the unexpanded stack as
+% arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\push#1#2{\expandafter\pushX #1\qStop #1{\eltStart #2\eltEnd}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\pushX}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Macro added}
+% The macro |\pushX| picks up the complete expansion of the stack as
+% its first argument and places the guard in |#3| on the `top'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pushX #1\qStop #2#3{\def #2{#3#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Programming structures}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\forlist}
+% \changes{2.0g}{1991/06/05}{Macro added.}
+% When the program is used in interactive mode the
+% user can supply a list of files that have to be processed.
+% In order to process this list a for-loop is needed. This
+% implementation of such a programming construct is based on the
+% use of the \verb=\loop{=\meta{body}\verb=}\repeat= macro that
+% is defined in plain \TeX\@. The syntax for this loop is:
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% |\for|\meta{control sequence} |:=| \meta{list}
+% |\do|\\
+% \meta{body}\\
+% |\od|
+% \end{flushleft}
+% The \meta{list} should be a comma separated list.
+%
+% The first actions that have to be taken are to set the switch
+% |\ifForlist| to \meta{true} and to store the loop condition
+% in the macro |\ListCondition|. This is done using an
+% |\edef| to allow for a control sequence that contains a
+% \meta{list}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\forlist#1:=#2\do#3\od{%
+ \edef\ListCondition{#2}%
+ \Forlisttrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we start the loop.
+% We store the first element from the |\ListCondition| in the
+% macro that was supplied as the first argument to |\forlist|.
+% This element is then removed from the |\ListCondition|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \loop
+ \edef#1{\expandafter\FirstElt\ListCondition,\empty.}%
+ \edef\ListCondition{\expandafter\OtherElts\ListCondition,\empty.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the first element from the \meta{list} is empty, we are done
+% processing, so we switch |\ifForlist| to \meta{false}.
+% When it is not empty we execute the third argument that should
+% contain \TeX\ commands to execute.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx#1\empty \Forlistfalse \else#3\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we test the switch |\ifForlist| to decide whether the
+% loop has to be continued.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifForlist
+ \repeat}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\FirstElt}
+% \changes{2.0g}{1991/06/05}{Macro added.}
+% The macro |\FirstElt| is used to get the first element from a
+% comma-separated list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\FirstElt#1,#2.{#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\OtherElts}
+% \changes{2.0g}{1991/06/05}{Macro added.}
+% The macro |\OtherElts| is used to get all elements {\em but\/}
+% the first element from a comma-separated list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\OtherElts#1,#2.{#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\whileswitch}
+% \changes{2.0h}{1991/06/19}{Macro added.} When the program is used in
+% interactive mode the user might want to process several files
+% with different options or extensions. This goal could be reached
+% by running the program several times, but it is more
+% user-friendly to ask if he would like to process more files when
+% we are done processing his last request. To accomplish this we
+% need the implementation of a \texttt{while}-loop. Again plain
+% \TeX's \verb=\loop{=\meta{body}\verb=}\repeat= is used to
+% implement this programming structure.
+%
+% The syntax for this loop is:
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% |\whileswitch|\meta{switch} \verb|\fi| \meta{list}
+% \verb={=\meta{body}\verb=}=\\
+% \end{flushleft}
+% The first argument to this macro has to be a switch, defined
+% using |\newif|; the second argument contains the statements
+% to execute while the switch evaluates to \meta{true}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\whileswitch#1\fi#2{#1\loop#2#1\repeat\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{New mechanism: output streams allocation}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Output streams allocator}
+%
+% For each of sixteen output streams available we have a macro
+% named |\s@0| through |\s@15| saying if the stream is assigned to a
+% file~(1) or not~(0). Initially all streams are not assigned.
+%
+% We also declare 16 counters which will be needed by the conditional
+% code inclusion algorithm.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@tempcnta\undefined \newcount\@tempcnta \fi
+\@tempcnta=0
+\loop
+\Name\chardef{s@\number\@tempcnta}=0
+\csname newcount\expandafter\endcsname%
+ \csname off@\number\@tempcnta\endcsname
+\advance\@tempcnta1
+\ifnum\@tempcnta<16\repeat
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We will use \emph{The \TeX book} style list to search through streams.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\s@do\relax
+\edef\@outputstreams{%
+ \s@do\Name\noexpand{s@0}\s@do\Name\noexpand{s@1}%
+ \s@do\Name\noexpand{s@2}\s@do\Name\noexpand{s@3}%
+ \s@do\Name\noexpand{s@4}\s@do\Name\noexpand{s@5}%
+ \s@do\Name\noexpand{s@6}\s@do\Name\noexpand{s@7}%
+ \s@do\Name\noexpand{s@8}\s@do\Name\noexpand{s@9}%
+ \s@do\Name\noexpand{s@10}\s@do\Name\noexpand{s@11}%
+ \s@do\Name\noexpand{s@12}\s@do\Name\noexpand{s@13}%
+ \s@do\Name\noexpand{s@14}\s@do\Name\noexpand{s@15}%
+ \noexpand\@nostreamerror
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nostreamerror}\begin{macro}{\@streamfound}
+% When |\@outputstreams| is executed |\s@do| is defined to do
+% something on condition of some test. If condition
+% always fails macro |\@nostreamerror| on the end of the list
+% causes an error. When condition succeeds |\@streamfound| is
+% called, which gobbles rest of the list including the ending
+% |\@nostreamerror|. It also gobbles |\fi| ending the condition, so
+% the |\fi| is reinserted.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nostreamerror{\errmessage{No more output streams!}}
+\def\@streamfound#1\@nostreamerror{\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% |\@stripstr| is auxiliary macro eating characters |\s@|
+% (backslash,s,@). It is defined in somewhat strange way since |\s@|
+% must have all category code 12 (other). This macro is used to
+% extract stream numbers from stream names.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bgroup\edef\x{\egroup
+ \def\noexpand\@stripstr\string\s@{}}
+\x
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\StreamOpen}\begin{macro}{\StreamPut}
+% \begin{macro}{\StreamClose}
+% Here is stream opening operator. Its parameter should be a macro
+% named the same as the external file being opened. E.g., to
+% write to file |foo.tex| use |\StreamOpen\foo|, then
+% |\StreamPut\foo| and |\StreamClose\foo|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\stream@closed=16
+\def\StreamOpen#1{%
+ \chardef#1=\stream@closed
+ \def\s@do##1{\ifnum##1=0
+ \chardef#1=\expandafter\@stripstr\string##1 %
+ \global\chardef##1=1 %
+ \immediate\openout#1=\csname pth@\@stripstring#1\endcsname %
+ \@streamfound
+ \fi}
+ \@outputstreams
+ }
+\def\StreamClose#1{%
+ \immediate\closeout#1%
+ \def\s@do##1{\ifnum#1=\expandafter\@stripstr\string##1 %
+ \global\chardef##1=0 %
+ \@streamfound
+ \fi}
+ \@outputstreams
+ \chardef#1=\stream@closed
+ }
+\def\StreamPut{\immediate\write}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Input and Output}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maybeMsg}
+% \begin{macro}{\showprogress}
+% \begin{macro}{\keepsilent}
+% When this program is used it can optionally show its progress on
+% the terminal. In that case it will write a special character to
+% the terminal (and the transcript file) for each input line. This
+% option is on by default when statistics are included in
+% \texttt{docstrip.tex}. It is off when statistics are excluded. The
+% commands |\showprogress| and |\keepsilent| can be used
+% to choose otherwise.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\showprogress{\let\maybeMsg\message}
+\def\keepsilent{\let\maybeMsg\@gobble}
+%<*stats>
+\showprogress
+%</stats>
+%<-stats>\keepsilent
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Msg}
+% For displaying messages on the terminal the macro |\Msg| is
+% defined to write {\em immediately\/} to |\ttyout|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Msg{\immediate\write\ttyout}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Ask}
+% The macro
+% \verb=\Ask{=\meta{cs}\verb=}{=\meta{string}\verb=}= is a
+% slightly modified copy of the \LaTeX\ macro |\typein|. It is
+% used to ask the user a question. The \meta{string} will be
+% displayed on his terminal and the response will be stored in the
+% \meta{cs}. The trailing space left over from the carriage return
+% is stripped off by the macro |\strip|. If the user just
+% types a carriage return, the result will be an empty macro.
+% \changes{2.0i}{1991/06/27}{Added check for just \protect\meta{CR}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\iden#1{#1}
+\def\strip#1#2 \@gobble{\def #1{#2}}
+\def\@defpar{\par}
+\def\Ask#1#2{%
+ \message{#2}\read\ttyin to #1\ifx#1\@defpar\def#1{}\else
+ \iden{\expandafter\strip
+ \expandafter#1#1\@gobble\@gobble} \@gobble\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\OriginalAsk}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/24}{macro added (was in unpack.ins) (DPC)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\OriginalAsk=\Ask
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\askonceonly}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/22}
+% {macro added (essentially from unpack.ins) (DPC)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\askonceonly{%
+ \def\Ask##1##2{%
+ \OriginalAsk{##1}{##2}%
+ \global\let\Ask\OriginalAsk
+ \Ask\noprompt{%
+ By default you will be asked this question for every file.^^J%
+ If you enter `y' now,^^J%
+ I will asssume `y' for all future questions^^J%
+ without prompting.}%
+ \ifx\y\noprompt\let\noprompt\yes\fi
+ \ifx\yes\noprompt\gdef\Ask####1####2{\def####1{y}}\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Miscellaneous}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \changes{2.0a}{1991/05/25}{Macro added.}
+% A macro that has an argument and puts it in the bitbucket.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gobble#1{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Endinput}
+% \changes{2.0f}{1991/06/04}{Macro added.} When a \texttt{doc} file
+% contains a \verb+\endinput+ on a line by itself this normally
+% means that anything following in this file should be ignored.
+% Therefore we need a macro containing |\endinput| as its
+% replacement text to check this against |\inLine| (the
+% current line from the current input file). Of course the
+% backslash has to have the correct |\catcode|. One way of
+% doing this is feeding \verb=\\= to the |\string| operation
+% and afterwards removing one of the |\| characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\Endinput{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\endinput}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeOther}
+% During the process of reading a file with \TeX\ code the category
+% code of all special characters has to be changed to \meta{other}.
+% The macro |\makeOther| serves this purpose.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makeOther#1{\catcode`#1=12\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\end}
+% \changes{2.0h}{1991/06/19}{Macro added.} For now we want the \ds{}
+% program to be compatible with both plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX\@.
+% \LaTeX\ hides plain \TeX{}'s |\end| command and
+% calls it |\@@end|. We unhide it here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\@@end\else\let\end\@@end\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addto}
+% A macro extending macro's definition. The trick with |\csname|
+% is necessary to get around |\newtoks| being outer in plain \TeX{}
+% and \LaTeX\ version 2.09.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@temptokena\undefined \csname newtoks\endcsname\@temptokena\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addto#1#2{%
+ \@temptokena\expandafter{#1}%
+ \edef#1{\the\@temptokena#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpresent}
+% This macro checks if its first argument is present on a
+% list passed as the second argument. Depending on the result
+% it executes either its third or fourth argument.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifpresent#1#2#3#4{%
+ \def\tmp##1#1##2\qStop{\ifx!##2!}%
+ \expandafter\tmp#2#1\qStop #4\else #3\fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tospaces}
+% This macro converts its argument delimited with |\secapsot| to
+% appropriate number of spaces. We need this for smart displaying
+% messages on the screen.
+%
+% |\@spaces| are used when we need many spaces in a row.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tospaces#1{%
+ \ifx#1\secapsot\secapsot\fi\space\tospaces}
+\def\secapsot\fi\space\tospaces{\fi}
+\def\@spaces{\space\space\space\space\space}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\uptospace}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/08/24}{Macro added}
+% This macro extracts from its argument delimited with |\qStop|
+% part up to first occurence of space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\uptospace#1 #2\qStop{#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\afterfi}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/09/04}{Macro added}
+% This macro can be used in conditionals to perform some actions
+% (its first parameter) after the condition is completed (i.e.
+% after reading the matching |\fi|. Second parameter is used to
+% gobble the rest of |\if ... \fi| construction (some |\else|
+% maybe). Note that this won't work in nested |\if|s!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\afterfi#1#2\fi{\fi#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/25}{Macro added}
+% This is one of \LaTeX's macros not defined by plain. My
+% devious definition differs from the standard one but
+% functionality is the same.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifnextchar#1#2#3{\bgroup
+ \def\reserved@a{\ifx\reserved@c #1 \aftergroup\@firstoftwo
+ \else \aftergroup\@secondoftwo\fi\egroup
+ {#2}{#3}}%
+ \futurelet\reserved@c\@ifnch
+ }
+\def\@ifnch{\ifx \reserved@c \@sptoken \expandafter\@xifnch
+ \else \expandafter\reserved@a
+ \fi}
+\def\@firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
+\def\@secondoftwo#1#2{#2}
+\iden{\let\@sptoken= } %
+\iden{\def\@xifnch} {\futurelet\reserved@c\@ifnch}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The evaluation of boolean expressions}
+%
+% For clarity we repeat here the syntax for the boolean expressions
+% in a somewhat changed but equivalent way:
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb\|
+% \begin{tabular}{lcl}
+% \meta{Expression} & $::=$ & \meta{Secondary} $|$
+% \meta{Secondary} \{\texttt{|}, \texttt{,}\}
+% \meta{Expression}\\
+% \meta{Secondary} & $::=$ & \meta{Primary} $|$
+% \meta{Primary} \texttt{\&}
+% \meta{Secondary}\\
+% \meta{Primary} & $::=$ &
+% \meta{Terminal} $|$ \texttt{!}\meta{Primary}
+% $|$
+% \texttt{(}\meta{Expression}\texttt{)}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% The \texttt{|} stands for disjunction, the \texttt{\&} stands for
+% conjunction and the \texttt{!}\ stands for negation. The
+% \meta{Terminal} is any sequence of letters and evaluates to
+% \meta{true} iff it occurs in the list of options that have to be
+% included.
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+% Since we can generate multiple output files from one input,
+% same guard expressions can be computed several times with
+% different options. For that reason we first ``compile'' the
+% expression to the form of one parameter macro |\Expr|
+% expanding to nested |\if|s that when given current list of
+% options produces 1 or 0 as a result. The idea is to say
+% |\if1\Expr{|\meta{current set of options}|}...\fi| for all
+% output files.
+%
+% Here is a table recursively defining translations for right
+% sides of the grammar. $\tau(X)$ denotes translation of~$X$.
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb\|
+% \MakeShortVerb\"
+% \begingroup
+% \addtolength\arraycolsep{-2.1pt}
+% \begin{eqnarray*}
+% \tau(\meta{Terminal})&=&"\t@<Terminal>,#1,<Terminal>,\qStop"\\
+% \tau(!\meta{Primary})&=&"\if1"\,\tau(\meta{Primary})\,"0\else1\fi"\\
+% \tau(\mbox{\texttt{(}\meta{Expression}\texttt{)}})
+% &=&\tau(\meta{Expression})\\
+% \tau(\mbox{\meta{Primary}\texttt{\&}\meta{Secondary}})
+% &=&"\if0"\,\tau(\meta{Primary})\,"0\else"
+% \,\tau(\meta{Secondary})\,"\fi"\\
+% \tau(\mbox{\meta{Secondary}\texttt{|}\meta{Expression}})
+% &=&"\if1"\,\tau(\meta{Secondary})\,"1\else"
+% \,\tau(\meta{Expression})\,"\fi"
+% \end{eqnarray*}
+% \endgroup
+% \DeleteShortVerb\"
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+% |\t@<Terminal>| denotes macro with name constructed from |t@|
+% with appended tokens of terminal. E.g., for terminal |foo| the
+% translation would be
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \t@foo,#1,foo,\qStop
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This will end up in definition of |\Expr|, so |#1| here will
+% be substituted by current list of options when |\Expr| is
+% called. Macro |\t@foo| would be defined as
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \def\t@foo#1,foo,#2\qStop{\ifx>#2>0\else1\fi}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% When called as above this will expand to |1| if |foo| is
+% present on current list of options and to |0| otherwise.
+%
+% Macros below work in ``almost expand-only'' mode i.e.
+% expression is analyzed only by expansion but we have to define
+% some macros on the way (e.g., |\Expr| and |\t@foo|).
+%
+% The first parameter of each of these macros is
+% ``continuation'' (in the sense similar to the language
+% \textsc{Scheme}). Continuation is a function of at least one
+% argument (parameter) being the value of previous steps of
+% computation. For example macro |\Primary| constructs
+% translation of \meta{Primary} expression. When it decides that
+% expression is completed it calls its continuation (its first
+% argument) passing to it whole constructed translation.
+% Continuation may expect more arguments if it wants to see what
+% comes next on the input.
+%
+% We will perform recursive descent parse, but definitions will
+% be presented in bottom-up order.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Terminal}
+%
+% \meta{Terminal}s are recognized by macro |\Terminal|. The
+% proper way of calling it is |\Terminal{|\meta{current
+% continuation}|}{}|. Parameters are: continuation,
+% \meta{Terminal} so far and next character from the input.
+% Macro checks if |#3| is one of terminal-ending characters and
+% then takes appropriate actions. Since there are 7 ending
+% chars and probably one |\csname| costs less than 7 nested
+% |\if|s we construct a name and check if it is defined.
+%
+% We must expand |\ifx| completely before taking next actions so
+% we use |\afterfi|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Terminal#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname eT@#3\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If condition is true |#3| belongs to current \meta{Terminal}
+% so we append it to \meta{Terminal}-so-far and call |\Terminal|
+% again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{\Terminal{#1}{#2#3}}\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When condition is false it's time to end the \meta{Terminal}
+% so we call macro |\TerminalX|. Next character is reinserted to
+% the input.
+%
+% In both cases continuation is passed unchanged.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{\TerminalX{#1}{#2}#3}\fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eT@}
+% Here we define macros marking characters that cannot appear
+% inside terminal. The value is not important as long as it is
+% different from |\relax|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\Name\let{eT@>}=1
+\Name\let{eT@&}=1 \Name\let{eT@!}=1
+\Name\let{eT@|}=1 \Name\let{eT@,}=1
+\Name\let{eT@(}=1 \Name\let{eT@)}=1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TerminalX}
+% This macro should end scanning of \meta{Terminal}. Parameters
+% are continuation and gathered tokens of \meta{Terminal}.
+%
+% Macro starts by issuing an error message if \meta{Terminal} is
+% empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TerminalX#1#2{%
+ \ifx>#2> \errmessage{Error in expression: empty terminal}\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then a macro is constructed for checking presence of
+% \meta{Terminal} in options list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Name\def{t@#2}##1,#2,##2\qStop{\ifx>##2>0\else1\fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And then current continuation is called with translation of
+% \meta{Terminal} according to formula
+% $$\tau(\meta{Terminal})=|\t@<Terminal>,#1,<Terminal>,\qStop|$$
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #1{\Name\noexpand{t@#2},##1,#2,\noexpand\qStop}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Primary}
+% Parameters are continuation and next character from the input.
+%
+% According to the syntax \meta{Primari}es can have three forms.
+% This makes us use even more dirty tricks than usual. Note the
+% |\space| after a series of |\ifx|s. This series produces an
+% one digit number of case to be executed. The number is given
+% to |\ifcase| and |\space| stops \TeX{} scanning for a
+% \meta{number}. Use of |\ifcase| gives possibility to have one
+% of three actions selected without placing them in nested
+% |\if|s and so to use |\afterfi|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Primary#1#2{%
+ \ifcase \ifx!#20\else\ifx(#21\else2\fi\fi\space
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First case is for |!| i.e. negated \meta{Primary}. In this
+% case we call |\Primary| recursively but we create new
+% continuation: macro |\NPrimary| that will negate result
+% passed by |\Primary| and pass it to current continuation
+% (|#1|).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{\Primary{\NPrimary{#1}}}\or
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When next character is |(| we call |\Expression| giving it as
+% continuation macro |\PExpression| which will just pass the
+% result up but ensuring first that a |)| comes next.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{\Expression{\PExpression{#1}}}\or
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we start a \meta{Terminal}. |#2| is not passed as
+% \meta{Terminal}-so-far but reinserted to input since we didn't
+% check if it can appear in a \meta{Terminal}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{\Terminal{#1}{}#2}\fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NPrimary}
+% Parameters are continuation and previously computed
+% \meta{Primary}.
+%
+% This macro negates result of previous computations according
+% to the rule
+% $$\tau(!\meta{Primary})
+% =|\if1|\,\tau(\meta{Primary})\,|0\else1\fi|$$
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NPrimary#1#2{%
+ #1{\noexpand\if1#20\noexpand\else1\noexpand\fi}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PExpression}
+% Parameters: continuation, \meta{Expression}, next character
+% from input. We are checking if character is |)| and then pass
+% unchanged result to our continuation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PExpression#1#2#3{%
+ \ifx)#3\else
+ \errmessage{Error in expression: expected right parenthesis}\fi
+ #1{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Secondary}
+% Each \meta{Secondary} expression starts with \meta{Primary}.
+% Next checks will be performed by |\SecondaryX|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Secondary#1{%
+ \Primary{\SecondaryX{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SecondaryX}
+% Parameters: continuation, translation of \meta{Primary}, next
+% character. We start by checking if next character is |&|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bgroup\catcode`\&=12
+\gdef\SecondaryX#1#2#3{%
+ \ifx&#3%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If it is we should parse next \meta{Secondary} and then
+% combine it with results so far. Note that |\SecondaryXX| will
+% have 3 parameters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{\Secondary{\SecondaryXX{#1}{#2}}}\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise \meta{Secondary} turned out to be just
+% \meta{Primary}. We call continuation passing to it translation
+% of that \meta{Primary} not forgetting to reinsert |#3| to the
+% input as it does not belong here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{#1{#2}#3}\fi
+ }
+\egroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SecondaryXX}
+% Parameters: continuation, translation of \meta{Primary},
+% translation of \meta{Secondary}. We construct translation of
+% whole construction according to the rule:
+% $$\tau(\mbox{\meta{Primary}\texttt{\&}\meta{Secondary}})
+% =|\if0|\,\tau(\meta{Primary})\,|0\else|
+% \,\tau(\meta{Secondary})\,|\fi| $$
+% and pass it to our continuation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SecondaryXX#1#2#3{%
+ #1{\noexpand\if0#20\noexpand\else#3\noexpand\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Expression}
+% Every \meta{Expression} starts with \meta{Secondary}. We
+% construct new continuation and pass it to |\Secondary|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Expression#1{%
+ \Secondary{\ExpressionX{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ExpressionX}
+% Parameters: continuation, translation of \meta{Secondary},
+% next character. We perform check if character is
+% \texttt{\char`\|} or |,|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ExpressionX#1#2#3{%
+ \if0\ifx|#31\else\ifx,#31\fi\fi0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If it is not \meta{Expression} is just a \meta{Secondary}. We
+% pass its translation to continuation and reinsert |#3|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{#1{#2}#3}\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we are dealing with complex \meta{Expression} we should
+% parse another |\Expression| now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \afterfi{\Expression{\ExpressionXX{#1}{#2}}}\fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ExpressionXX}
+% Parameters: continuation, translation of \meta{Secondary},
+% translation of \meta{Expression}.
+% We finish up translating of \meta{Expression} according to
+% the formula:
+% $$\tau(\mbox{\meta{Secondary}\texttt{\char`\|}\meta{Expression}})
+% =|\if1|\,\tau(\meta{Secondary})\,|1\else|
+% \,\tau(\meta{Expression})\,|\fi|$$
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ExpressionXX#1#2#3{%
+ #1{\noexpand\if1#21\noexpand\else#3\noexpand\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\StopParse}
+% Here is initial continuation for whole parse process. It will
+% be used by |\Evaluate|. Note that we assume that expression
+% has |>| on its end. This macro eventually defines |\Expr|.
+% Parameters: translation of whole \meta{Expression} and next
+% character from input.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\StopParse#1#2{%
+ \ifx>#2 \else\errmessage{Error in expression: spurious #2}\fi
+ \edef\Expr##1{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Evaluate}
+% This macro is used to start parsing. We call |\Expression|
+% with continuation defined above. On end of expression we
+% append a |>|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Evaluate#1{%
+ \Expression\StopParse#1>}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Processing the input lines}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalLine}
+% The macro |\normalLine| writes its argument (which has to be
+% delimited with |\endLine|) on all active output files i.e.
+% those with off-counters equal to zero.
+% If statistics are included, the counter
+% |\codeLinesPassed| is incremented by $1$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalLine#1\endLine{%
+%<*stats>
+ \advance\codeLinesPassed\@ne
+%</stats>
+ \maybeMsg{.}%
+ \def\inLine{#1}%
+ \let\do\putline@do
+ \activefiles
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\putline@do}
+% \changes{2.3b}{1995/08/22}{Change for pre-constructed
+% off-counters' names}
+% This is a value for |\do| when copying line to output files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\putline@do#1#2#3{%
+ \StreamPut#1{\inLine}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\removeComment}
+% The macro |\removeComment| throws its argument (which has to be
+% delimited with |\endLine|) away. When statistics are included
+% in the program the removed comment is counted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%
+\def\removeComment#1\endLine{%
+%<*stats>
+ \advance\commentsRemoved\@ne
+%</stats>
+ \maybeMsg{\perCent}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\putMetaComment}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/09/16}{Introduced \cs{MetaPrefix}}
+% If a line starts with two consecutive percent signs, it is
+% considered to be a {\em MetaComment\/}. Such a comment line is
+% passed on to the output file unmodified.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bgroup\catcode`\%=12
+\iden{\egroup
+\def\putMetaComment%}#1\endLine{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If statistics are included the line is counted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*stats>
+ \advance\commentsPassed\@ne
+%</stats>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro |\putMetaComment| has one argument, delimited with
+% |\endLine|. It brings the source line with |%%| stripped. We
+% prepend to it |\MetaPrefix| (which can be different from |%%|)
+% and send the line to all active files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\inLine{\MetaPrefix#1}%
+ \let\do\putline@do
+ \activefiles
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\processLine}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{Adaptation for concurrent version}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/20}{Trying to avoid assignments}
+% Each line that is read from the input stream has to be processed
+% to see if it has to be written on the output stream. This task
+% is performed by calling the macro |\processLine|.
+% In order to do
+% that, it needs to check whether the line starts with a
+% `\texttt{\%}'. Therefore the macro is globally defined within a
+% group. Within this group the category code of `\texttt{\%}' is
+% changed to 12 (other). Because a comment character is needed,
+% the category code of `\texttt{*}' is changed to 14 (comment
+% character).
+%
+% The macro increments counter |\processedLines| by $1$ if
+% statistics are included. We cannot include this line with
+% |%<*stats>| since the category of \texttt{\%} is changed and the
+% file must be loadable unstripped. So the whole definition is
+% repeated embedded in guards.
+%
+% The next token from the input stream is passed in |#1|. If it is
+% a `\texttt{\%}' further processing has to be done by
+% |\processLineX|; otherwise this is normal (not commented out)
+% line.
+%
+% In either case the character read is reinserted to the input
+% as it may have to be written out.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!stats>
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\*=14
+\gdef\processLine#1{*
+ \ifx%#1
+ \expandafter\processLineX
+ \else
+ \expandafter\normalLine
+ \fi
+ #1}
+\endgroup
+%</!stats>
+%<*stats>
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\*=14
+\gdef\processLine#1{*
+ \advance\processedLines\@ne
+ \ifx%#1
+ \expandafter\processLineX
+ \else
+ \expandafter\normalLine
+ \fi
+ #1}
+\endgroup
+%</stats>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\processLineX}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/20}{Trying to avoid assignments}
+% This macro is also defined within a group,
+% because it also has to check if the next
+% token in the input stream is a `\texttt{\%}' character.
+%
+% If the second token in the current line happens to be a
+% `\texttt{\%}', a \meta{MetaComment} has been found. This has to
+% be copied in its entirety to the output. Another possible second
+% character is `\texttt{<}', which introduces a guard expression.
+% The processing of such an expression is started by calling
+% |\checkOption|.
+%
+% When the token was neither a `\texttt{\%}' nor a `\texttt{<}',
+% the line contains a normal comment that has to be removed.
+%
+% We express conditions in such a way that all actions appear
+% on first nesting level of |\if|s. In such conditions just one
+% expandafter pushes us outside whole construction. A thing to
+% watch here is |\relax|. It stops search for numeric constant.
+% If it wasn't here \TeX\ would expand the first case of |\ifcase|
+% before knowing the value.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\%=12 \catcode`\*=14
+\gdef\processLineX%#1{*
+ \ifcase\ifx%#10\else
+ \ifx<#11\else 2\fi\fi\relax
+ \expandafter\putMetaComment\or
+ \expandafter\checkOption\or
+ \expandafter\removeComment\fi
+ #1}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The handling of options}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkOption}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{Adapted to concurrent version}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/20}{Trying to avoid assignments}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/09/16}{Verbatim mode}
+% When the macros that process a line have found that the line
+% starts with `\texttt{\%<}', a guard line has been encountered.
+% The first character of a guard can be an asterisk (\texttt{*}), a
+% slash (\texttt{/}) a plus (\texttt{+}), a minus (\texttt{-}), a
+% less-than sign (\texttt{<}) starting verbatim mode or
+% any other character that can be found in an option name. This
+% means that we have to peek at the next token and
+% decide what kind of guard we have.
+%
+% We reinsert |#1| as it may be needed by |\doOption|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkOption<#1{%
+ \ifcase
+ \ifx*#10\else \ifx/#11\else
+ \ifx+#12\else \ifx-#13\else
+ \ifx<#14\else 5\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax
+ \expandafter\starOption\or
+ \expandafter\slashOption\or
+ \expandafter\plusOption\or
+ \expandafter\minusOption\or
+ \expandafter\verbOption\or
+ \expandafter\doOption\fi
+ #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doOption}
+% When no guard modifier is found by |\checkOptions|, the
+% macro |\doOption| is called. It evaluates a boolean
+% expression. The result of this evaluation is stored in
+% |\Expr|. The guard only affects the current
+% line, so |\do| is defined in such a way that depending on the
+% result of the test |\if1\Expr{|\meta{options}|}|, the current
+% line is either copied to the output stream or removed. Then
+% the test is computed for all active output files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doOption#1>#2\endLine{%
+ \maybeMsg{<#1 . >}%
+ \Evaluate{#1}%
+ \def\do##1##2##3{%
+ \if1\Expr{##2}\StreamPut##1{#2}\fi
+ }%
+ \activefiles
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\plusOption}
+% When a `\texttt{+}' is found as a guard modifier,
+% |\plusOption| is called. This macro is very similar to
+% |\doOption|, the only difference being that displayed
+% message now contains `\texttt{+}'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\plusOption+#1>#2\endLine{%
+ \maybeMsg{<+#1 . >}%
+ \Evaluate{#1}%
+ \def\do##1##2##3{%
+ \if1\Expr{##2}\StreamPut##1{#2}\fi
+ }%
+ \activefiles
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minusOption}
+% When a `\texttt{-}' is found as a guard modifier,
+% |\minusOption| is called. This macro is very similar to
+% |\plusOption|, the difference is that condition is negated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minusOption-#1>#2\endLine{%
+ \maybeMsg{<-#1 . >}%
+ \Evaluate{#1}%
+ \def\do##1##2##3{%
+ \if1\Expr{##2}\else \StreamPut##1{#2}\fi
+ }%
+ \activefiles
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\starOption}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{Adapted to concurrent version}
+% When a `\texttt{*}' is found as a guard modifier,
+% |\starOption| is called. In this case a block of code will
+% be included in the output on the condition that the guard
+% expression evaluates to \meta{true}.
+%
+% The current line is gobbled as |#2|, because it only contains
+% the guard and possibly a comment.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\starOption*#1>#2\endLine{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we optionally write
+% a message to the terminal to indicate that a new option starts
+% here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \maybeMsg{<*#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we push the current contents of |\blockHead| on the
+% stack of blocks, |\guardStack| and increment the counter
+% |\blockLevel| to indicate that we are now one level of
+% nesting deeper.
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Use new stack mechanism}
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/09}{The macro that holds the guard needs to be
+% expanded}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\push\expandafter\guardStack\expandafter{\blockHead}%
+ \advance\blockLevel\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The guard for this block of code is now stored in
+% |\blockHead|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\blockHead{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we evaluate guard expression for all output files
+% updating off-counters. Then we create new list of active
+% output files. Only files that were active in the outer block
+% can remain active now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Evaluate{#1}%
+ \let\do\checkguard@do
+ \outputfiles
+ \let\do\findactive@do
+ \edef\activefiles{\activefiles}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkguard@do}
+% \changes{2.3b}{1995/08/22}{Change for pre-constructed
+% off-counters' names}
+% This form of |\do| updates off-counts according to the value of
+% guard expression.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkguard@do#1#2#3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this block of code occurs inside another block of code that is
+% {\em not\/} included in the output, we increment the off counter.
+% In that case the guard expression will not be
+% evaluated, because a block inside another block that is excluded
+% from the output will also be excluded, regardless of the
+% evaluation of its guard.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum#3>0
+ \advance#3\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the off count has value 0, we have
+% to evaluate the guard expression. If the result is \meta{false}
+% we increase the off-counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \if1\Expr{#2}\else
+ \advance#3\@ne\fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\findactive@do}
+% \changes{2.3b}{1995/08/22}{Change for pre-constructed
+% off-counters' names}
+% This form of |\do| picks elements of output files list which
+% have off-counters equal to zero.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\findactive@do#1#2#3{%
+ \ifnum#3=0
+ \noexpand\do#1{#2}#3\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\slashOption}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{Adapted for concurrent version}
+% The macro |\slashOption| is the counterpart to
+% |\starOption|. It indicates the end of a block of
+% conditionally included code. We store the argument in the
+% temporary control sequence |\tmp|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\slashOption/#1>#2\endLine{%
+ \def\tmp{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the counter |\blockLevel| has a value less than $1$,
+% this `end-of-block' line has no corresponding `start-of-block'.
+% Therefore we signal an error and ignore this end of block.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\blockLevel<\@ne
+ \errmessage{Spurious end block </\tmp> ignored}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next we compare the contents of |\tmp| with the contents
+% of |\blockHead|. The latter macro contains the last guard for
+% a block of code that was encountered. If the contents match, we
+% pop the previous guard from the stack.
+% \changes{2.0k}{1992/04/06}{Use new stack mechanism}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \ifx\tmp\blockHead
+ \pop\guardStack\blockHead
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the contents of the two macros don't match something is
+% amiss. We signal this to the user, but accept the `end-of-block'.
+%\note{Is this the desired behaviour??}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \errmessage{Found </\tmp> instead of </\blockHead>}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the end of a block of optionally included code is encountered
+% we optionally signal this on the terminal and decrement the counter
+% |\blockLevel|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \maybeMsg{>}%
+ \advance\blockLevel\m@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The last thing that has to be done is to decrement off-counters and
+% make new list of active files. Now whole list of output files has
+% to be searched since some inactive files could have been
+% reactivated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\do\closeguard@do
+ \outputfiles
+ \let\do\findactive@do
+ \edef\activefiles{\outputfiles}
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\closeguard@do}
+% \changes{2.3b}{1995/08/22}{Change for pre-constructed
+% off-counters' names}
+% This macro decrements non-zero off-counters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\closeguard@do#1#2#3{%
+ \ifnum#3>0
+ \advance#3\m@ne
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbOption}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/09/16}{Macro added}
+% \changes{2.4g}{1996/12/13}{Reset \cs{putline@do} for /2340}
+% This macro is called when a line starts with |%<<|. It reads a
+% bunch of lines in verbatim mode: the lines are passed unchanged
+% to the output without even checking for starting |%|. This way of
+% processing ends when a line containing only a percent sign
+% followed by stop mark given on the |%<<| line is found.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbOption<#1\endLine{{%
+ \edef\verbStop{\perCent#1}\maybeMsg{<<<}%
+ \let\do\putline@do
+ \loop
+ \ifeof\inFile\errmessage{Source file ended while in verbatim
+ mode!}\fi
+ \read\inFile to \inLine
+ \if 1\ifx\inLine\verbStop 0\fi 1% if not inLine==verbStop
+ \activefiles
+ \maybeMsg{.}%
+ \repeat
+ \maybeMsg{>}%
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Batchfile commands}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/10/02}{Added doc}
+% \ds{} keeps information needed to control inclusion of sources in
+% several list structures. Lists are macros expanding to a series
+% of calls to macro |\do| with two or three parameters.
+% Subsequently |\do| is redefined in various ways and list
+% macros sometimes are executed to perform some action on every
+% element, and sometimes are used inside an |\edef| to make new
+% list of elements having some properties. For every input file
+% \meta{infile} the following lists are kept:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\cs{b@}\meta{infile}] the ``open list''---names of all output
+% files such that their generation should start with
+% reading of \meta{infile},
+% \item[\cs{o@}\meta{infile}] the ``output list''---names of all
+% output files generated from that source together with
+% suitable sets of options (guards),
+% \item[\cs{e@}\meta{infile}] the ``close list''---names of all
+% output files that should be closed when this source is
+% read.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% For every output file name \meta{outfile} \ds{} keeps following
+% information:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\cs{pth@}\meta{outfile}] full pathname (including file name),
+% \item[\cs{ref@}\meta{outfile}] reference lines for the file,
+% \item[\cs{in@}\meta{outfile}] names of all source files separated
+% with spaces (needed by \cs{InFileName}),
+% \item[\cs{pre@}\meta{outfile}] preamble template (as defined with
+% |\declarepreamble|),
+% \item[\cs{post@}\meta{outfile}] postamble template.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\generate}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/20}{Messages changed}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}{Repeat processing of files until all
+% done (MDW)}
+% This macro executes its argument in a group. |\inputfiles| is
+% a list of files to be read, |\filestogenerate| list of names
+% of output files (needed for the message below). |\file|s
+% contained in |#1| define |\inputfiles| in such a way that all
+% that has to be done when the parameter is executed is to call
+% this macro. |\inputfiles| command is called over and over again
+% until no output files had to be postponed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\generate#1{\begingroup
+ \let\inputfiles\empty \let\filestogenerate\empty
+ \let\file\@file
+ #1
+ \ifx\filestogenerate\empty\else
+ \Msg{^^JGenerating file(s) \filestogenerate}\fi
+ \def\inFileName{\csname in@\outFileName\endcsname}%
+ \def\ReferenceLines{\csname ref@\outFileName\endcsname}%
+ \processinputfiles
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\processinputfiles}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/10/02}{Macro added (MW)}
+% This is a recurrent function which processes input files until
+% they are all gone.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\processinputfiles{%
+ \let\newinputfiles\empty
+ \inputfiles
+ \let\inputfiles\newinputfiles
+ \ifx\inputfiles\empty\else
+ \expandafter\processinputfiles
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\file}
+% The first argument is the file to produce, the second
+% argument contains the list of input files. Each entry should have
+% the format
+% \verb=\from{=\meta{filename.ext}\verb=}{=\meta{options}\verb=}=.
+%
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/20}{Messages changed}
+% ^^A The macro starts by displaying a message on the terminal to
+% ^^A indicate which file is going to be made.
+% The switch |\ifGenerate| is initially set to \meta{true}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\file#1#2{\errmessage{Command `\string\file' only allowed in
+ argument to `\string\generate'}}
+\def\@file#1{%
+ \Generatetrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next we construct full path name for output file and check if we
+% have to be careful about overwriting existing files. If the user
+% specified |\askforoverwritetrue| we will ask him if he wants to
+% overwrite an existing file. Otherwise we simply go ahead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \makepathname{#1}%
+ \ifaskforoverwrite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We try to open a file with the name of the output file for
+% reading. If this succeeds the file exists and we ask the user if
+% he wants to overwrite the file.
+% \changes{2.0p}{1992/06/26}{Added \cs{WriteToDir} (FMi).}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{Changed \cs{@empty} (which was undefined)
+% to \cs{empty}}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/25}{Changed \cs{WriteToDir} to \cs{destdir}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \immediate\openin\inFile\@pathname\relax
+ \ifeof\inFile\else
+ \Ask\answer{File \@pathname\space already exists
+ \ifx\empty\destdir somewhere \fi
+ on the system.^^J%
+ Overwrite it%
+ \ifx\empty\destdir\space if necessary\fi
+ ? [y/n]}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We set the switch |\ifGenerate| according to his answer. We
+% allow for both ``\texttt{y}'' and ``\texttt{yes}''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\y \answer \else
+ \ifx\yes\answer \else
+ \Generatefalse\fi\fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Don't forget to close the file just opened as we want to write
+% to it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \closein\inFile
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/25}{Destination directory handling}
+% If file is to be generated we save its destination pathname and
+% pass control to macro |\@fileX|.
+% Note that file name is turned into control sequence and |\else|
+% branch is skipped before calling |\@fileX|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifGenerate
+ \Name\let{pth@#1}\@pathname
+ \@addto\filestogenerate{\@pathname\space}%
+ \Name\@fileX{#1\expandafter}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In case we were not allowed to overwrite an existing file
+% we inform the user that we are {\em not\/} generating his file
+% and we gobble |\from| specifications.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Msg{Not generating file \@pathname^^J}%
+ \expandafter\@gobble
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fileX}
+% We put name of current output file in |\curout| and initialize
+% |\curinfiles| (the list of source files for this output file)
+% to empty---these will be needed by |\from|. Then we start
+% defining preamble for the current file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fileX#1#2{%
+ \chardef#1=\stream@closed
+ \def\curout{#1}%
+ \let\curinfiles\empty
+ \let\curinnames\empty
+ \def\curref{\MetaPrefix ^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space The original source files were:^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix ^^J}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next we execute second parameter. |\from|s will add reference
+% lines to the preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\from\@from \let\needed\@needed
+ #2%
+ \let\from\err@from \let\needed\err@needed
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We check order of input files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \checkorder
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Each |\from| clause defines |\curin| to be its first parameter.
+% So now |\curin| holds name of last input file for current output
+% file. This means that current output file should be closed after
+% processing |\curin|. We add |#1| to proper `close list'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Name\@addto{e@\curin}{\noexpand\closeoutput{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Last we save all the interesting information about current file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Name\let{pre@\@stripstring#1\expandafter}\currentpreamble
+ \Name\let{post@\@stripstring#1\expandafter}\currentpostamble
+ \Name\edef{in@\@stripstring#1}{\expandafter\iden\curinnames}
+ \Name\edef{ref@\@stripstring#1}{\curref}
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkorder}
+% This macro checks if the order of files in |\curinfiles|
+% agrees with that of |\inputfiles|. The coding is somewhat
+% clumsy.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkorder{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \checkorderX\expandafter\curinfiles
+ \expandafter\qStop\inputfiles\qStop
+ }
+\def\checkorderX(#1)#2\qStop#3\qStop{%
+ \def\tmp##1\readsource(#1)##2\qStop{%
+ \ifx!##2! \order@error
+ \else\ifx!#2!\else
+ \checkorderXX##2%
+ \fi\fi}%
+ \def\checkorderXX##1\readsource(#1)\fi\fi{\fi\fi
+ \checkorderX#2\qStop##1\qStop}%
+ \tmp#3\readsource(#1)\qStop
+ }
+\def\order@error#1\fi\fi{\fi
+ \errmessage{DOCSTRIP error: Incompatible order of input
+ files specified for file
+ `\iden{\expandafter\uptospace\curin} \qStop'.^^J
+ Read DOCSTRIP documentation for explanation.^^J
+ This is a serious problem, I'm exiting}\end
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\needed}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/08/24}{Macro added}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/09/12}{Forced expansion of argument to fix a bug
+% with filenames containing macros}
+% \begin{macro}{\@needed}
+% This macro uniquizes name of an input file passed as a
+% parameter and marks it as needed to be input. It is used
+% internally by |\from|, but can also be issued in argument to
+% |\file| to influence the order in which files are read.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\needed#1{\errmessage{\string\needed\space can only be used in
+ argument to \string\file}}
+\let\err@needed\needed
+\def\@needed#1{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{#1}%
+ \expandafter\@need@d\expandafter{\reserved@a}}
+\def\@need@d#1{%
+ \@ifpresent{(#1)}\curinfiles
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |#1| is present on list of input files for current output
+% file we add a space on end of its name and try again. The idea
+% is to construct a name that will look different for \TeX\ but
+% will lead to the same file when seen by operating system.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\@need@d{#1 }}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When it is not we check if |#1| is present in the list of
+% files to be processed. If not we add it and initialize list of
+% output files for that input and list of output files that
+% should be closed when this file closes. We also add
+% constructed name to |\curinfiles| and define |\curin| to be
+% able to access constructed name from |\@from|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\@ifpresent{\readsource(#1)}\inputfiles
+ {}{\@addto\inputfiles{\noexpand\readsource(#1)}%
+ \Name\let{b@#1}\empty
+ \Name\let{o@#1}\empty
+ \Name\let{e@#1}\empty}%
+ \@addto\curinfiles{(#1)}%
+ \def\curin{#1}}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\from}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/08/24}{part of code moved to \cs{needed}}
+% |\from| starts by adding a line to preamble for output file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\from#1#2{\errmessage{Command `\string\from' only allowed in
+ argument to `\string\file'}}
+\let\err@from\from
+\def\@from#1#2{%
+ \@addto\curref{\MetaPrefix\space #1 \if>#2>\else
+ \space (with options: `#2')\fi^^J}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we mark the file as needed input file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \needed{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/10/02}{Introduced ``open list''}
+% If this is the first |\from| in current |\file| (i.e. if the
+% |\curinnames| so far is empty) the file name is added to the
+% ``open list'' for the current input file.
+% And |\do|\meta{current output}|{|\meta{options}|}| is appended
+% to the list of output files for current input file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\curinnames\empty
+ \Name\@addto{b@\curin}{\noexpand\openoutput\curout}%
+ \fi
+ \@addto\curinnames{ #1}%
+ \Name\@addto{o@\curin}{\noexpand\do\curout{#2}}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\readsource}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}{Extensively hacked to honour stream
+% limits (MDW)}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{Renamed to \cs{readsource}; adaptation for
+% concurrent version}
+% \changes{2.0f}{1991/06/04}{Added check for lines with \texttt{\bsl
+% endinput}} This macro is called for each input file that
+% is to be processed.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\readsource(#1){%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We try to open the input file. If this doesn't succeed, we
+% tell the user so and nothing else happens.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \immediate\openin\inFile\uptospace#1 \qStop\relax
+ \ifeof\inFile
+ \errmessage{Cannot find file \uptospace#1 \qStop}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If statistics are included we nullify line counters
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*stats>
+ \processedLines\z@
+ \commentsRemoved\z@
+ \commentsPassed\z@
+ \codeLinesPassed\z@
+%</stats>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{2.3b}{1995/08/22}{Change for pre-constructed
+% off-counters' names}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/10/02}{Introduced ``open list''}
+% When the input file was successfully opened, we try to open all
+% needed output files by executing the ``open list''.
+% If any of files couldn't be opened because of number of streams
+% limits, their names are put into |\refusedfiles| list. This list
+% subsequently becomes the open list for the next pass.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\refusedfiles\empty
+ \csname b@#1\endcsname
+ \Name\let{b@#1}\refusedfiles
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now all output files that could be opened are open. So we go
+% through the ``output list'' and for every open file we display a
+% message and zero the off-counter, while closed files are appended
+% to |\refusedfiles|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Msg{} \def\@msg{Processing file \uptospace#1 \qStop}
+ \def\change@msg{%
+ \edef\@msg{\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space
+ \expandafter\tospaces\uptospace#1 \qStop\secapsot}
+ \let\change@msg\relax}
+ \let\do\showfiles@do
+ \let\refusedfiles\empty
+ \csname o@#1\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |\refusedfiles| is nonempty current source file needs reread,
+% so we append it to |\newinputfiles|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\refusedfiles\empty\else
+ \@addto\newinputfiles{\noexpand\readsource(#1)}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we define |\outputfiles| and construct off-counters
+% names. Now |\do|s will have 3 parameters! All output files become
+% active.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\do\makeoutlist@do
+ \edef\outputfiles{\csname o@#1\endcsname}%
+ \let\activefiles\outputfiles
+ \Name\let{o@#1}\refusedfiles
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we change the category code of a lot of characters to
+% \meta{other} and make sure that no extra spaces appear in the
+% lines read by setting the |\endlinechar| to $-1$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \makeOther\ \makeOther\\\makeOther\$%
+ \makeOther\#\makeOther\^\makeOther\^^K%
+ \makeOther\_\makeOther\^^A\makeOther\%%
+ \makeOther\~\makeOther\{\makeOther\}\makeOther\&%
+ \endlinechar-1\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we start a loop to process the lines in the file one by one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \loop
+ \read\inFile to\inLine
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first thing we check is whether the current line
+% contains an |\endinput|. To allow also real |\endinput|
+% commands in the source file, |\endinput| is only recognized
+% when it occurs directly at the beginning of a line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\inLine\Endinput
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In this case we output a message to inform the programmer (in
+% case this was a mistake) and end the loop immediately by setting
+% \verb=Continue= to \meta{false}. Note that |\endinput| is
+% not placed into the output file. This is important in cases where
+% the output file is generated from several \texttt{doc} files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Msg{File #1 ended by \string\endinput.}%
+ \Continuefalse
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{2.0j}{1992/03/03}{First check for end of file before check
+% for empty lines} When the end of the file is found we have to
+% interrupt the loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifeof\inFile
+ \Continuefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{2.0i}{1991/06/27}{Added check for consecutive empty lines}
+% If the file did not end we check if the input line is empty.
+% If it is, the counter |\emptyLines| is incremented.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \Continuetrue
+ \ifx\inLine\empty
+ \advance\emptyLines\@ne
+ \else
+ \emptyLines\z@
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the number of empty lines seen so far exceeds 1, we skip them.
+% If it doesn't, the expansion of |\inLine| is fed to |\processLine|
+% with |\endLine| appended to indicate the end of the line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \emptyLines<2
+ \expandafter\processLine\inLine\endLine
+ \else
+ \maybeMsg{/}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the processing of the line is finished, we check if there is
+% more to do, in which case we repeat the loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifContinue
+ \repeat
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The input file is closed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \closein\inFile
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We close output files for which this was the last input file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \csname e@#1\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the user was interested in statistics, we inform him of the
+% number of lines processed, the number of comments that were
+% either removed or passed and the number of codelines that were
+% written to the output file. Also the totals are updated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*stats>
+ \Msg{Lines \space processed: \the\processedLines^^J%
+ Comments removed: \the\commentsRemoved^^J%
+ Comments \space passed: \the\commentsPassed^^J%
+ Codelines passed: \the\codeLinesPassed^^J}%
+ \global\advance\TotalprocessedLines by \processedLines
+ \global\advance\TotalcommentsRemoved by \commentsRemoved
+ \global\advance\TotalcommentsPassed by \commentsPassed
+ \global\advance\TotalcodeLinesPassed by \codeLinesPassed
+%</stats>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\NumberOfFiles| need to be known even if no statistics are
+% gathered so we update it always.
+% \changes{2.4h}{1997/07/07}{update \cs{NumberOfFiles} even if stats are
+% not gathered pr/2429}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\advance\NumberOfFiles by \@ne
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showfiles@do}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/10/02}{Macro added (MW)}
+% A message is displayed on the terminal telling the user what we
+% are about to do. For each open output file we display one line
+% saying what options it is generated with and the off-counter
+% associated with the file is zeroed. First line contains also name
+% of input file.
+% Names of output files that are closed are appended to
+% |\refusedfiles|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\showfiles@do#1#2{%
+ \ifnum#1=\stream@closed
+ \@addto\refusedfiles{\noexpand\do#1{#2}}%
+ \else
+ \Msg{\@msg
+ \ifx>#2>\else\space(#2)\fi
+ \space -> \@stripstring#1}
+ \change@msg
+ \csname off@\number#1\endcsname=\z@
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeoutlist@do}
+% \changes{2.3b}{1995/08/22}{Macro added --- pre-constructed
+% off-counters' names}
+% This macro selects only open output files and constructs names for
+% off-counters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makeoutlist@do#1#2{%
+ \ifnum#1=\stream@closed\else
+ \noexpand\do#1{#2}\csname off@\number#1\endcsname
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\openoutput}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/10/02}{Change for ``open lists'' -- renamed from
+% \cs{ensureopen@do}}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}{Check whether there are streams left (MDW)}
+% This macro opens output streams if possible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\openoutput#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If both maxfile counters are non-zero\dots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if 1\ifnum\@maxfiles=\z@ 0\fi
+ \ifnum\@maxoutfiles=\z@ 0\fi1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \dots the stream may be opened and counters decremented. But if
+% that cannot be done\dots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\@maxfiles\m@ne
+ \advance\@maxoutfiles\m@ne
+ \StreamOpen#1%
+ \WritePreamble#1%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \dots the file is added to the ``refuse list''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@addto\refusedfiles{\noexpand\openoutput#1}%
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\closeoutput}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}
+% {Don't close the file if it's not open (MDW)}
+% This macro closes open output stream when it is no longer
+% needed and increments maxfiles counters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\closeoutput#1{%
+ \ifnum#1=\stream@closed\else
+ \WritePostamble#1%
+ \StreamClose#1%
+ \advance\@maxfiles\@ne
+ \advance\@maxoutfiles\@ne
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preamble and postamble}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ds@heading}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/09/16}{Macro added.}
+% This is a couple of lines, stating what file is being written and
+% how it was created.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ds@heading{%
+ \MetaPrefix ^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space This is file `\outFileName',^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space generated with the docstrip utility.^^J%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AddGenerationDate}
+% \changes{2.3d}{1995/11/17}{(DPC) Macro added.}
+% Older versions of \ds{} added the date that any file was generated
+% and the version number of \ds{}. This confused some people as they
+% mistook this for the version/date of the file that was being
+% written. So now this information is not normally written, but
+% a batch file may call this to get an old style header.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\AddGenerationDate{%
+ \def\ds@heading{%
+ \MetaPrefix ^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space This is file `\outFileName', generated %
+ on <\the\year/\the\month/\the\day> ^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space with the docstrip utility (\fileversion).^^J%
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\declarepreamble}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{renamed from \cs{preamble};
+% interface changed}
+% \changes{2.0e}{1991/06/01}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/25}
+% {Change for batchfiles working by \cs{input}}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1996/09/16}{Change to allow customization.}
+% When a batch file is used the
+% user can specify a preamble of his own that will be written to
+% each file that is created. This can be useful to include an extra
+% copyright notice in the stripped version of a file. Also a
+% warning that both versions of a file should {\em always\/} be
+% distributed together could be written to a stripped file by
+% including it in such a preamble.
+%
+% Every line that is written to |\outFile| that belongs to the
+% preamble is preceded by two percent characters. This will prevent
+% \ds{} from stripping these lines off the file.
+%
+% The preamble should be started with the macro
+% |\declarepreamble|; it is ended by |\endpreamble|. All
+% processing is done within a group in order to be able to locally
+% change some values.
+%
+% |\ReferenceLines| is let equal |\relax| to be unexpandable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\inFileName\relax
+\let\outFileName\relax
+\let\ReferenceLines\relax
+\def\declarepreamble{\begingroup
+\catcode`\^^M=13 \catcode`\ =12 %
+\declarepreambleX}
+{\catcode`\^^M=13 %
+\gdef\declarepreambleX#1#2
+\endpreamble{\endgroup%
+ \def^^M{^^J\MetaPrefix\space}%
+ \edef#1{\ds@heading%
+ \ReferenceLines%
+ \MetaPrefix\space\checkeoln#2\empty}}%
+\gdef\checkeoln#1{\ifx^^M#1\else\expandafter#1\fi}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\declarepostamble}
+% \changes{2.0e}{1991/06/01}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/25}
+% {Change for batchfiles working by \cs{input}}
+% Just as a preamble can be
+% specified in a batch file, the same can be done for a {\em
+% post\/}amble.
+%
+% The definition of |\declarepostamble| is very much like the
+% definition above of |\declarepreamble|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\declarepostamble{\begingroup
+\catcode`\ =12 \catcode`\^^M=13
+\declarepostambleX}
+{\catcode`\^^M=13 %
+\gdef\declarepostambleX#1#2
+\endpostamble{\endgroup%
+ \def^^M{^^J\MetaPrefix\space}%
+ \edef#1{\MetaPrefix\space\checkeoln#2\empty^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix ^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space End of file `\outFileName'.%
+ }}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usepreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\usepostamble}
+% Macros for selecting [pre/post]amble to be used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\usepreamble#1{\def\currentpreamble{#1}}
+\def\usepostamble#1{\def\currentpostamble{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nopreamble}
+% \changes{2.4i}{1998/01/18}{Macro added. pr/2726}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopostamble}
+% \changes{2.4i}{1998/01/18}{Macro added. pr/2726}
+% Shortcuts for disabling the writing of [pre/post]ambles.
+% This is not done by disabling |\WritePreamble| or |\WritePostamble|
+% since that wouldn't
+% revertable afterwards. Instead the empty [pre/post]ambles are handled
+% specially in those macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nopreamble{\usepreamble\empty}
+\def\nopostamble{\usepostamble\empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preamble}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/08/28}{Bug fixed: default preamble is now selected
+% not only defined}
+% \begin{macro}{\postamble}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/08/28}{As for \cs{preamble}}
+% For backward compatibility we provide these macros defining
+% default preamble and postamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\preamble{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+ \declarepreamble\defaultpreamble}
+\def\postamble{\usepostamble\defaultpostamble
+ \declarepostamble\defaultpostamble}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\org@preamble}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{Macro added}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/11/16}{With \cs{inFileName} again}
+% \begin{macro}{\org@postamble}
+% \changes{2.3a}{1995/08/18}{Macro added}
+% Default values to use if nothing different is provided.
+% \changes{2.2j}{1995/08/06}{Updated default preamble}
+% \changes{2.5a}{1998/04/03}{Updated default preamble}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\declarepreamble\org@preamble
+
+IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+
+For the copyright see the source file.
+
+Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+with new filenames distinct from \outFileName.
+
+For distribution of the original source see the terms
+for copying and modification in the file \inFileName.
+
+This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+in the same archive or directory.)
+\endpreamble
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\org@postamble{\string\endinput^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix ^^J%
+ \MetaPrefix\space End of file `\outFileName'.%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\defaultpreamble\org@preamble
+\let\defaultpostamble\org@postamble
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\originaldefault}
+% \changes{2.5a}{1998/04/03}{Macro added}
+% \changes{2.5b}{1998/04/28}{Macro renamed from \cs{orginaldefault}
+% to \cs{originaldefault}}
+% The default preamble header changed in v2.5 to allow distribution
+% of generated files as long as source also distributed. If you need
+% the original default, not allowing distribution of generated files
+% add |\usepreamble\originaldefault| to your .ins files.
+% Note then that your file can not be included in most TeX distributions
+% on CD which are distributed `pre-installed' with all \LaTeX\ files
+% extracted form th edocumented sources and moved to a suitable
+% directory in \TeX's search path.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\declarepreamble\originaldefault
+
+IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+
+For the copyright see the source file.
+
+You are *not* allowed to modify this file.
+
+You are *not* allowed to distribute this file.
+For distribution of the original source see the terms
+for copying and modification in the file \inFileName.
+
+\endpreamble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\WritePreamble}
+% \changes{2.0e}{1991/06/01}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/11/16}{Added definitions of \cs{inFileName} and
+% \cs{outFileName}}
+% \changes{2.3d}{1995/11/17}{(DPC) Macro added.}
+% \changes{2.4i}{1998/01/18}{Test for \cs{empty} postamble and
+% don't write it out. pr/2726}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\WritePreamble#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We write out only non-empty preambles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname pre@\@stripstring#1\endcsname\empty
+ \else
+ \edef\outFileName{\@stripstring#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then the reference lines that tell from what source file(s) the
+% stripped file was created and user supplied preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \StreamPut#1{\csname pre@\@stripstring#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\WritePostamble}
+% \changes{2.0e}{1991/06/01}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{2.3c}{1995/11/16}{Added defs of \cs{inFileName} and
+% \cs{outFileName}}
+% \changes{2.4i}{1998/01/18}{Test for \cs{empty} postamble and
+% don't write it out. pr/2726}
+% Postamble attributed to |#1| is written out. The
+% last line written identifies the file again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\WritePostamble#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We write out only non-empty postambles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname post@\@stripstring#1\endcsname\empty
+ \else
+ \edef\outFileName{\@stripstring#1}%
+ \StreamPut#1{\csname post@\@stripstring#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Support for writing to specified directories}
+%
+% As we've seen before every output file is written to directory
+% specifed by the value of |\destdir| current at the moment of
+% this file's |\file| declaration.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usedir}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/15}{Macro added}
+% This macro when called should translate its one argument into a
+% directory name and define |\destdir| to that value. The default
+% for |\usedir| is to ignore its argument and return name of
+% current directory (if known). This can be changed by commands
+% from |docstrip.cfg| file.
+%
+% |\showdirectory| is used just to display directory name for
+% user's information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\usedir#1{\edef\destdir{\WriteToDir}}
+\def\showdirectory#1{\WriteToDir}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BaseDirectory}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/15}{Macro added}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/22}{\cs{@setwritetodir} added (DPC)}
+% This is config file command for specifing root directory of the
+% \TeX{} hierarchy. It enables the whole directory
+% selecting mechanism by redefining |\usedir|.
+% First make sure that the directory syntax commands have been set
+% up by calling |\@setwritedir|, so that the value of |\dirsep|
+% used by the |\edef| is (hopefully) correct.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\BaseDirectory#1{%
+ \@setwritetodir
+ \let\usedir\alt@usedir
+ \let\showdirectory\showalt@directory
+ \edef\basedir{#1\dirsep}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\convsep}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/15}{Macro added}
+% This macro loops through slashes in its argument replacing them
+% with current |\dirsep|. It should be called
+% |\convsep some/directory/name/\qStop| (with slash on the end).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\convsep#1/#2\qStop{%
+ #1\ifx\qStop#2\qStop \pesvnoc\fi\convsep\dirsep#2\qStop}
+\def\pesvnoc#1\qStop{\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alt@usedir}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/15}{Macro added}
+% Directory name construction macro enabling writing to various
+% directories.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\alt@usedir#1{%
+ \Name\ifx{dir@#1}\relax
+ \undefined@directory{#1}%
+ \else
+ \edef\destdir{\csname dir@#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi}
+\def\showalt@directory#1{%
+ \Name\ifx{dir@#1}\relax
+ \showundef@directory{#1}%
+ \else\csname dir@#1\endcsname\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\undefined@directory}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/10/04}{Macro added (MW)}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/22}{Help text added (DPC)}
+% This macro comes into action when undefined label is spotted. The
+% action is to raise an error and define |\destdir| to point to the
+% current directory.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\undefined@directory#1{%
+ \errhelp{docstrip.cfg should specify a target directory for^^J%
+ #1 using \DeclareDir or \UseTDS.}%
+ \errmessage{You haven't defined the output directory for `#1'.^^J%
+ Subsequent files will be written to the current directory}%
+ \let\destdir\WriteToDir
+ }
+\def\showundef@directory#1{UNDEFINED (label is #1)}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\undefined@TDSdirectory}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/10/04}{Macro added (MW)}
+% This happens when label is undefined while using TDS. The label
+% is converted to use proper separators and appended to base
+% directory name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\undefined@TDSdirectory#1{%
+ \edef\destdir{%
+ \basedir\convsep#1/\qStop
+ }}
+\def\showundef@TDSdirectory#1{\basedir\convsep#1/\qStop}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\UseTDS}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/10/04}{Macro added (MW)}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/22}{\cs{@setwritetodir} added (DPC)}
+% Change of behaviour for undefined labels is done simply:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UseTDS{%
+ \@setwritetodir
+ \let\undefined@directory\undefined@TDSdirectory
+ \let\showundef@directory\showundef@TDSdirectory
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareDir}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/15}{Macro added}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/22}{\cs{@setwritetodir} added (DPC)}
+% This macro remaps some directory name to another.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareDir{\@ifnextchar*{\DeclareDirX}{\DeclareDirX\basedir*}}
+\def\DeclareDirX#1*#2#3{%
+ \@setwritetodir
+ \Name\edef{dir@#2}{#1#3}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Compatibility with older versions}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\generateFile}
+% Main macro of previous versions of \ds.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\generateFile#1#2#3{{%
+ \ifx t#2\askforoverwritetrue
+ \else\askforoverwritefalse\fi
+ \generate{\file{#1}{#3}}%
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% To support command files that were written for the first version
+% of \ds{} the commands |\include| and |\processFile|
+% are defined here. The use of this interface is not recommended
+% as it may be removed in a future release of \ds{}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\include}
+% \changes{2.0f}{1991/06/04}{Macro added} To provide the \ds{} program
+% with a list of options that should be included in the output the
+% command \verb=\include{=\meta{Options}\verb=}= can be used. This
+% macro is meant to be used in conjunction with the
+% |\processFile| command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\include#1{\def\Options{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\processFile}
+% \changes{2.0f}{1991/06/04}{Supply \texttt{\bsl generateFile} with
+% \texttt{\bsl Options}}
+%\DeleteShortVerb\|
+% The macro
+% \verb=\processFile{=\meta{filename}\verb=}{=\meta{inext}\verb=}{=%
+%\unskip\meta{outext}\verb=}{=\meta{t{\fontshape{n}\ttfamily|}f}\verb=}=
+% can be used when a single input file is used to produce
+% a single output file. The macro is also used in the interactive
+% mode of the \ds{} program.
+%\MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+% The arguments \meta{inext} and \meta{outext} denote the
+% extensions of the input and output files respectively. The fourth
+% argument can be used to specify if an existing file should be
+% overwritten without asking. If \meta{t} is specified the program
+% will ask for permission before overwriting an existing file.
+%
+% This macro is defined using the more generic macro |\generateFile|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\processFile#1#2#3#4{%
+ \generateFile{#1.#3}{#4}{\from{#1.#2}{\Options}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\processfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\generatefile}
+% \changes{2.0m}{1991/04/23}{Now issue a warning when \cs{processfile}
+% or \cs{generatefile} are used}
+% Early
+% versions of \ds{} defined |\processfile| and
+% |\generatefile| instead of the commands as they are defined in
+% this version. To remain upwards compatible, we still provide
+% these commands, but issue a warning when they are used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\processfile{\Msg{%
+ ^^Jplease use \string\processFile\space instead of
+ \string\processfile!^^J}%
+ \processFile}
+\def\generatefile{\Msg{%
+ ^^Jplease use \string\generateFile\space instead of
+ \string\generatefile!^^J}%
+ \generateFile}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Limiting open file streams}
+%
+% (This section was written by Mark Wooding)
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxfiles}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}{Macro added (MDW)}
+% Some operating systems with duff libraries or other restrictions
+% can't cope with all the files which \ds\ tries to output at once.
+% A configuration file can say |\maxfiles{|\meta{number}|}| to
+% describe the maximum limit for the environment.
+%
+% I'll need a counter for this value, so I'd better allocate one.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@maxfiles
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The configuration command |\maxfiles| is just slightly prettier than
+% an assignment, for \LaTeX\ people. It also gives me an opportunity
+% to check that the limit is vaguely sensible. I need at least 4
+% streams:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item A batch file.
+% \item A sub batch file, which \LaTeX's installation utility uses.
+% \item An input stream for reading an unstripped file.
+% \item An output stream for writing a stripped file.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maxfiles#1{%
+ \@maxfiles#1\relax
+ \ifnum\@maxfiles<4
+ \errhelp{I'm not a magician. I need at least four^^J%
+ streams to be able to work properly, but^^J%
+ you've only let me use \the\@maxfiles.}%
+ \errmessage{\noexpand\maxfiles limit is too strict.}%
+ \@maxfiles4
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/10/03}{No default limit since batchfiles are now
+% \cs{input} (MW)}
+% Since batchfiles are now |\input|ed there should be no default limit
+% here. I'll just use some abstract large number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\maxfiles{1972} % year of my birth (MW)
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxoutfiles}
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}{Macro added (MDW)}
+%
+% Maybe there's a restriction on just output streams. (Well, there is:
+% I know, because \TeX\ only allows 16.) I may as well allow the
+% configuration to set this up.
+%
+% Again, I need a counter.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@maxoutfiles
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And now the macro. I need at least one output stream which I think is
+% reasonable.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maxoutfiles#1{%
+ \@maxoutfiles=#1\relax
+ \ifnum\@maxoutfiles<1
+ \@maxoutfiles1
+ \errhelp{I'm not a magician. I need at least one output^^J%
+ stream to be able to do anything useful at all.^^J%
+ Please be reasonable.}%
+ \errmessage{\noexpand\maxoutfiles limit is insane}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The default limit is 16, because that's what \TeX\ says.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\maxoutfiles{16}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\checkfilelimit}
+%
+% This checks the file limit when a new batch file is started. If
+% there's fewer than two files left here, we're not going to be able
+% to strip any files. The file limit counter is local to the group
+% which is set up around |\batchinput|, so that's all pretty cool.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\checkfilelimit{%
+ \advance\@maxfiles\m@ne
+ \ifnum\@maxfiles<2 %
+ \errhelp{There aren't enough streams left to do any unpacking.^^J%
+ I can't do anything about this, so complain at the^^J%
+ person who made such a complicated installation.}%
+ \errmessage{Too few streams left.}%
+ \end
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Interaction with the user}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\strip@meaning}
+% Throw away the first part of |\meaning| output.
+% \changes{2.4c}{1996/06/11}{Macro added (DPC)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\strip@meaning#1>{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\processbatchFile}
+% \changes{2.0f}{1991/06/04}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/09/25}{Batch file is \cs{input}ed not \cs{read}}
+% When \ds{} is run it always tries to use a batch file.
+%
+% For this purpose it calls the macro |\processbatchFile|.
+%
+% \changes{2.4a}{1996/06/06}
+% {Added check for file limits (MDW)}
+% \changes{2.4c}{1996/06/11}
+% {Add \cs{jobname} checks (DPC)}
+% \changes{2.4d}{1996/06/17}
+% {Move \cs{jobname} checks to top level (DPC)}
+% The first thing is to check if there are any input streams left.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\processbatchFile{%
+ \checkfilelimit
+ \let\next\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we try to open the batch file for reading.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \openin\inputcheck \batchfile\relax
+ \ifeof\inputcheck
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we didn't succeed in opening the file, we assume that it does
+% not exist. If we tried the default filename, we silently
+% continue; the \ds{} program will switch to interactive mode in
+% this case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifDefault
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{2.4d}{1996/10/17}{Missing batchfile an error (DPC)}
+% If we failed to open the user-supplied file, something is wrong
+% and we warn him about it. This will also result in a switch to
+% interactive mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \errhelp
+ {A batchfile specified in \batchinput could not be found.}%
+ \errmessage{^^J%
+ **************************************************^^J%
+ * Could not find your \string\batchfile=\batchfile.^^J%
+ **************************************************}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we were successful in opening a file, we again have to check
+% whether it was the default file. In that case we tell the user
+% we found that file and ask him if he wants to use it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifDefault
+ \Msg{**************************************************^^J%
+ * Batchfile \DefaultbatchFile\space found Use it? (y/n)?}%
+ \Ask\answer{%
+ **************************************************}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When it was the user-supplied file we can safely assume he wants
+% to use it so we set |\answer| to \texttt{y}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\answer\y
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the macro |\answer| contains a \texttt{y} we can read in the
+% batchfile. We do it in an indirect way---after completing |\if|s.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\answer\y
+ \closein\inputcheck
+ \def\next{\@@input\batchfile\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ReportTotals}
+% \changes{2.0g}{1991/06/05}{Macro added.} The macro
+% |\ReportTotals| can be used to report total statistics for
+% all files processed. This code is only included in the program if
+% the option \texttt{stats} is included.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*stats>
+\def\ReportTotals{%
+ \ifnum\NumberOfFiles>\@ne
+ \Msg{Overall statistics:^^J%
+ Files \space processed: \the\NumberOfFiles^^J%
+ Lines \space processed: \the\TotalprocessedLines^^J%
+ Comments removed: \the\TotalcommentsRemoved^^J%
+ Comments \space passed: \the\TotalcommentsPassed^^J%
+ Codelines passed: \the\TotalcodeLinesPassed}%
+ \fi}
+%</stats>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SetFileNames}
+% The macro |\SetFileNames| is used when the program runs in
+% interactive mode and the user was asked to supply extensions and
+% a list of filenames.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetFileNames{%
+ \edef\sourceFileName{\MainFileName.\infileext}%
+ \edef\destFileName{\MainFileName.\outfileext}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CheckFileNames}
+% In interactive mode, the user gets asked for the extensions for
+% the input and output files. Also the name or names of the input
+% files (without extension) is asked for. Then the names of the
+% input and output files are constructed from this information by
+% |\SetFileNames|. This assumes that the name of the input file is
+% the same as the name of the output file. But we should not write
+% to the same file we're reading from so the extensions should
+% differ.
+%
+% The macro |\CheckFileNames| makes sure that the output goes to a
+% different file to the one where the input comes from.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\CheckFileNames{%
+ \ifx\sourceFileName\destFileName
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If input and output files are the same we signal an error and stop
+% processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Msg{^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J%
+ ! It is not possible to read from and write to the same file !^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J}%
+ \Continuefalse
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If they are not the same we check if the input file exists by
+% trying to open it for reading.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Continuetrue
+ \immediate\openin\inFile \sourceFileName\relax
+ \ifeof\inFile
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If an end of file was found, the file couldn't be opened, so we
+% signal an error and stop processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Msg{^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J%
+ ! Your input file `\sourceFileName' was not found !^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J}%
+ \Continuefalse
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The last check we have to make is if the output file already
+% exists. Therefore we try to open it for reading.
+% As a precaution we first close the input stream.
+% \changes{2.0p}{1992/06/26}{Added \cs{WriteToDir} (FMi).}
+% \changes{2.0r}{1992/08/17}{Use \cs{inFile} for reading}
+% \changes{2.0r}{1992/08/17}{Moved \cs{closein} statements}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \immediate\closein\inFile
+ \immediate\openin\inFile\destdir \destFileName\relax
+ \ifeof\inFile
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this fails, it didn't exist and all is well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Continuetrue
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If opening of the output file for reading succeeded we have to
+% ask the user if he wants to overwrite it. We assume he doesn't
+% want to overwrite it, so the switch |\ifContinue| is initially
+% set to \meta{false}. Only if he answers the question positively
+% with `\texttt{y}' or `\texttt{yes}' we set the switch back to
+% \meta{true}.
+% \changes{2.0p}{1992/06/26}{Changed question about overwriting.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Continuefalse
+ \Ask\answer{File \destdir\destFileName\space already
+ exists
+ \ifx\empty\destdir somewhere \fi
+ on the system.^^J%
+ Overwrite it%
+ \ifx\empty\destdir\space if necessary\fi
+ ? [y/n]}%
+ \ifx\y \answer \Continuetrue \else
+ \ifx\yes\answer \Continuetrue \else
+ \fi\fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% All checks have been performed now, so we can close any file that
+% was opened just for this purpose.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \closein\inFile}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interactive}
+% The macro |\interactive| implements the interactive mode of the
+% \ds{} program. The macro is implemented using the
+% \meta{while} construction. While the switch |\ifMoreFiles| remains
+% true, we continue processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\interactive{%
+ \whileswitch\ifMoreFiles\fi%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To keep macro redefinitions local we start a group and ask the
+% user some questions about what he wants us to do.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\begingroup
+ \AskQuestions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The names of the files that have to be processed are stored as a
+% comma-separated list in the macro |\filelist| by |\AskQuestions|.
+% We use a \meta{for} loop to process the files one by one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \forlist\MainFileName:=\filelist
+ \do
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First the names of the input and output files are constructed
+% and a check is made if all filename information is correct.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \SetFileNames
+ \CheckFileNames
+ \ifContinue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If everything was well, produce output file.
+% \changes{2.0q}{1992/07/01}{Preceded filename by \cs{WriteToDir}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \generateFile{\destFileName}{f}%
+ {\from{\sourceFileName}{\Options}}
+ \fi%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This process is repeated until |\filelist| is exhausted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \od
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Maybe the user wants more files to be processed, possibly with
+% another set of options, so we give him the opportunity.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Ask\answer{More files to process (y/n)?}%
+ \ifx\y \answer\MoreFilestrue \else
+ \ifx\yes\answer\MoreFilestrue \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If he didn't want to process any more files, the switch
+% |\ifMoreFiles| is set to \meta{false} in order to interrupt the
+% \meta{while} loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \MoreFilesfalse\fi\fi
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AskQuestions}
+% \changes{2.0e}{1991/06/01}{Macro added.}
+% The macro |\AskQuestions| is called by |\interactive| to get
+% some information from the user concerning the files that need
+% to be processed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\AskQuestions{%
+ \Msg{^^J%
+ ****************************************************}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We want to know the extension of the input files,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Ask\infileext{%
+ * First type the extension of your input file(s): \space *}%
+ \Msg{****************************************************^^J^^J%
+ ****************************************************}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% the extension of the output files,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Ask\outfileext{%
+ * Now type the extension of your output file(s) \space: *}%
+ \Msg{****************************************************^^J^^J%
+ ****************************************************}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% if options are to be included and
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Ask\Options{%
+ * Now type the name(s) of option(s) to include \space\space: *}%
+ \Msg{****************************************************^^J^^J%
+ ****************************************************^^J%
+ * Finally give the list of input file(s) without \space\space*}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% the name of the input file or a list of names, separated by commas.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \Ask\filelist{%
+ * extension seperated by commas if necessary %
+ \space\space\space\space: *}%
+ \Msg{****************************************************^^J}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The main program}
+% When \TeX\ processes the \ds{} program it displays
+% a message about the version of the program and its function
+% on the terminal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\Msg{Utility: `docstrip' \fileversion\space <\filedate>^^J%
+ English documentation \space\space\space <\docdate>}%
+\Msg{^^J%
+ **********************************************************^^J%
+ * This program converts documented macro-files into fast *^^J%
+ * loadable files by stripping off (nearly) all comments! *^^J%
+ **********************************************************^^J}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\WriteToDir}
+% Macro |\WriteToDir| is either empty or holds the prefix
+% necessary to read a file from the current directory. Under UNIX
+% this is |./| but a lot of other systems addopted this concept.
+% This macro is a default value for |\destdir|.
+%
+% The definition of this macro is now delayed until |\@setwritedir|
+% is called.
+% \changes{2.0p}{1992/06/26}{Macro added (FMi).}
+% \changes{2.2a}{1993/12/02}{check texsys file}
+% \changes{2.2d}{1994/01/20}{do not read dircheck/texsys file}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/22}{set in \cs{@setwritedir} (DPC)}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makepathname}
+% \changes{2.3e}{1995/10/24}{Macro added}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/22}{set in \cs{@setwritedir} (DPC)}
+% This macro should define |\@pathname| to full path name made by
+% combining current value of |\destdir| with its one argument being
+% a file name. Its default value defined here is suitable for
+% \textsc{unix, ms-dos} and Macintosh, but for some systems it may
+% be needed to redefine this in \texttt{docstrip.cfg} file. We
+% provide such redefinition for VMS here.
+%
+% Macro |\dirsep| holds directory separator specific for a
+% system. Default value suitable for UNIX and DOS is slash. It
+% comes in action when |\usedir| labels are used directly.
+%
+% The definition of this macro is now delayed until |\@setwritedir|
+% is called.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setwritedir}
+% \changes{2.4e}{1996/10/22}{macro added (DPC)}
+% The following tests try to automatically set |\WriteToDir|,
+% |\dirname| and |\makepathname| in Unix, Mac, or VMS style.
+% The tests are not run at the top level but held in this macro
+% so that a configuration file has a chance to define |\WriteToDir|
+% which allows the other two to be set automatically. The tests could
+% more simply be run after the configuration file is read, but the
+% configuration commands like |\BaseDirectory| need (at least at
+% present) to have |\dirsep| correctly defined. It does not define
+% any command that is already defined, so by defining these commands
+% a configuration file can produce different effects for special needs.
+% So this command is called by |BaseDirectory|, |\UseTDS|,
+% |\DeclareDir| and finally at the top level after the cfg is run.
+% It begins by redefining itself to be a no-op so it effectively is
+% only called once.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setwritetodir{%
+ \let\setwritetodir\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\WriteToDir\@undefined
+ \ifx\@currdir\@undefined
+ \def\WriteToDir{}%
+ \else
+ \let\WriteToDir\@currdir
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\destdir\WriteToDir
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% VMS Style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\tmp{[]}%
+ \ifx\tmp\WriteToDir
+ \ifx\dirsep\@undefined
+ \def\dirsep{.}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\makepathname\@undefined
+ \def\makepathname##1{%
+ \edef\@pathname{\ifx\WriteToDir\destdir
+ \WriteToDir\else[\destdir]\fi##1}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Unix and Mac styles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\dirsep\@undefined
+ \def\dirsep{/}%
+ \def\tmp{:}%
+ \ifx\tmp\WriteToDir
+ \def\dirsep{:}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\makepathname\@undefined
+ \def\makepathname##1{%
+ \edef\@pathname{\destdir\ifx\empty\destdir\else
+ \ifx\WriteToDir\destdir\else\dirsep\fi\fi##1}}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% If the user has a |docstrip.cfg| file, use it now.
+% \changes{2.4d}{1995/10/17}{Move config file test to outer level (DPC)}
+% This macro tries to read \texttt{docstrip.cfg} file. If this
+% succeeds executes its first argument, otherwise the second.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\openin\inputcheck=docstrip.cfg\relax
+\ifeof\inputcheck
+ \Msg{%
+ ********************************************************^^J%
+ * No Configuration file found, using default settings. *^^J%
+ ********************************************************^^J}%
+\else
+ \Msg{%
+ ******************************************^^J%
+ * Using Configuration file docstrip.cfg. *^^J%
+ ******************************************^^J}%
+ \closein\inputcheck
+ \afterfi{\@@input docstrip.cfg\relax}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now run |\@setwritedir| in case it has not already been run
+% by a command in a configuration file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@setwritetodir
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\process@first@batchfile}
+% \changes{2.4d}{1996/10/17}
+% {Macro added (DPC)}
+% Process the batch file, and then terminate cleanly.
+% This may be set to |\relax| for `new style' batch files that
+% do not start with |\def\batchfile{|\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\process@first@batchfile{%
+ \processbatchFile
+ \ifnum\NumberOfFiles=\z@
+ \interactive
+ \fi
+ \endbatchfile}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endbatchfile}
+% \changes{2.4d}{1996/10/17}
+% {Macro added (DPC)}
+% User level command to end batch file processing.
+% At the top level, returns totals and then stops \TeX.
+% At nested levels just does |\endinput|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endbatchfile{%
+ \iftopbatchfile
+%<*stats>
+ \ReportTotals
+%</stats>
+ \expandafter\end
+ \else
+ \endinput
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now we see whether to process a batch file.
+% \changes{2.4d}{1996/10/17}
+% {Move default batchfile check to outer level (DPC)}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@jobname}
+% \changes{2.4d}{1996/10/17}
+% {Macro added (DPC)}
+% Jobname (catcode 12)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\@jobname{\lowercase{\def\noexpand\@jobname{\jobname}}}%
+\@jobname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@docstrip}
+% \changes{2.4d}{1996/10/17}
+% {Macro added (DPC)}
+% docstrip (catcode 12)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@docstrip{docstrip}%
+\edef\@docstrip{\expandafter\strip@meaning\meaning\@docstrip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% First check whether the user has
+% defined the control sequence |\batchfile|. If he did, it should
+% contain the name of the file to process.
+% If he didn't, try the current file, unless that is |docstrip.tex|
+% in which case a default name is tried.
+% Whether or not the default batch file is used is
+% remembered by setting the switch |\ifDefault| to \meta{true} or
+% \meta{false}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\Defaultfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\batchfile
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\@jobname| is lowercase jobname (catcode 12)\\
+% |\@docstrip| is docstrip (catcode 12)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@jobname\@docstrip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set the batchfile to the default
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\batchfile\DefaultbatchFile
+ \Defaulttrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Else don't process a new batchfile, just carry on with past the end
+% of this file. In this case processing will move to the initial
+% batchfile which \emph{must} then be terminated by |\endbatchfile| or
+% \TeX\ will fall to the star prompt.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \let\process@first@batchfile\relax
+ \fi
+\fi
+\process@first@batchfile
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</program>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..90239d90df0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/docstrip.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+% If the top level file is docstrip.ins, most TeXs set \jobname to
+% docstrip which would make docstrip program think it should run
+% in interactive mode. So redefine \jobname in this install file.
+
+\let\jobname\relax
+\input docstrip.dtx
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+
+
+\declarepostamble\istpost
+\endpostamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+% programs and packages
+
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{\file{docstrip.tex}{\from{docstrip.dtx}{initex,program,stats}}
+ }
+
+
+\generate{\file{doc.sty}{\from{doc.dtx}{package}}
+ \file{shortvrb.sty}{\from{doc.dtx}{shortvrb}}
+ \usepostamble\istpost
+ \file{gind.ist}{\from{doc.dtx}{gind}}
+ \file{gglo.ist}{\from{doc.dtx}{gglo}}
+ }
+
+\generate{\file{ltxdoc.cls}{\from{ltxdoc.dtx}{class}}
+ }
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space doc.sty}
+\Msg{* \space\space shortvrb.sty}
+\Msg{* \space\space docstrip.tex}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Also move the following files into a directory searched}
+\Msg{* by MakeIndex:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space gind.ist}
+\Msg{* \space\space gglo.ist}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.dtx' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..58235d5d6fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ec.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
+this file to serve the needs of your installation.
+
+However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
+of this file under its original name.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating font defs for Cork encoded
+ and Text Companion fonts ***}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{t1cmfib.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmfib,ec}}
+ \file{t1cmfr.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmfr,ec}}
+ \file{t1cmdh.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmdh,ec}}
+ \file{t1cmr.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmr,ec}}
+ \file{t1cmss.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmss,ec}}
+ \file{t1cmtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmtt,tt,ec,nowarn}}
+ \file{t1cmvtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmvtt,tt,ec}}
+ \file{ts1cmr.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,TS1cmr,ec}}
+ \file{ts1cmss.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,TS1cmss,ec}}
+ \file{ts1cmtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,TS1cmtt,ec,tt}}
+ \file{ts1cmvtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,TS1cmvtt,ec,tt}}
+}
+
+
+\generate{
+ \file{t1lcmss.fd}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{lcmss,fd,ec}}
+ \file{t1lcmtt.fd}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{lcmtt,fd,ec}}
+ }
+
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8728a43a87d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% File: exscale.dtx
+%% Copyright (C) 1992-1997 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+%% all rights reserved.
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{exscale}
+%<fd, >\ProvidesFile{OMXcmex.fd}
+%<package,fd> [1997/06/16 v2.1g
+%<package> Standard LaTeX package exscale]
+%<fd, > exscale package font definitions]
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage{exscale}
+\GetFileInfo{exscale.sty}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \texttt{exscale} package\thanks
+ {This file has version number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}\\
+ for use with \LaTeX2e}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \maketitle
+ \DocInput{exscale.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{39}
+%
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1997/06/16}{Documentation fix.}
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1994/05/09}{Added setting \cs{big}... sizes.}
+% \changes{v2.1c}{1994/05/08}{Changed to new documentation standards.}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/12/12}{Update for \LaTeXe}
+%
+% \def\MF{\textsf{Metafont}}
+% \def\dst{{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+%
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% On popular request, this package implements scaling of the
+% math extension font `cmex'. If this package is used the site needs
+% scaled versions of the \texttt{cmex10} in the sizes 10.95pt, 12pt,
+% 14.4pt , 17.28pt, 20.74pt, and 24.88pt which corresponds to standard
+% magsteps using |\magstephalf|, and |\magstep1| through |\magstep5|.
+% Additionally `cmex' variants for the sizes 7pt to 9pt are necessary.
+% These fonts are part of the AMS font package and can be found on
+% many servers.
+%
+% We don't think that using a scalable `cmex' font improves the
+% appearance of the document very much because the linear scaling of
+% the font introduces changes to font dimen parameters of the font
+% that are used all over the place in \TeX's math placement routines
+% and definitely shouldn't be scaled linearly. As a positive result,
+% however, symbols from this font will come out in approximately the
+% right size when used with a large basis font size.
+%
+% We therefore strongly recommend the generation of designed fonts for
+% the larger sizes and hope that the corresponding \MF{} sources will
+% be available in the near future.
+%
+%
+% \section{Usage}
+%
+% This file can be used either as a package by placing its name
+% in the argument of
+% |\usepackage|, or by generating from it a |.fd| file which then
+% replaces the normally used |.fd| file |OMXcmex.fd|.
+%
+% For the second solution you should prepare a small \dst{} command
+% file containing the following statements:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\def\batchfile{|\meta{name-of-your-command-file}|}| \\
+% |\input docstrip.tex| \\
+% |\generateFile{OMXcmex.fd}{t}{\from{exscale.dtx}{fd}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% and then run this file through \LaTeX.
+% This would mean however, that your documents may look different if
+% they are printed on another installation whereas when using the
+% package file they would come out the same on both sites.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+%
+% In case this should produce a font definition file we write
+% a message to the transcript file only.
+% The explicit spaces are necessary in an
+% |.fd| file and the |\string| guards against situations where |`|,
+% |<| or |>| is active.
+% \changes{v2.1f}{1995/11/27}{Use \cs{ProvidesFile}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\ProvidesFile{OMXcmex.fd}[]% moved to top of the file
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We now define to which external fonts the font/shape Computer Modern
+% Extension Medium Normal. For the sizes 7--10pt we use fonts that are
+% designed for the corresponding size and for the higher sizes we use
+% scaled versions of the 10pt font since for these sizes no designed
+% fonts are easily available.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fd|package>
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% According to Michael Downes `cmex5' and `cmex6' are not
+% distributed currently. Therefore we use `cmex7' in those size but
+% we omit a warning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ <-8>sfixed * cmex7
+ <8> cmex8
+ <9> cmex9
+ <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88>cmex10
+ }{}
+%</fd|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We also redeclare the symbol font for large symbols. This is
+% already done when the base format also uses CM math fonts, but it
+% doesn't hurt either.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Finally we redefine the primitive commands |\big|, |\Big|, |\bigg|
+% and |\Bigg| to change size with main size changes. To this end we
+% need a new dimen register |\big@size|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\big@size
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This dimen is set with every size change to $1.2$ times the height
+% of a left parenthesis.
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/11/06}{Renamed \cs{every@size} to
+% \cs{every@math@size}}
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/11/06}{Update \cs{big@size} globally}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\addto@hook\every@math@size{\setbox\z@\vbox{\hbox{$($}\kern\z@}%
+ \global\big@size 1.2\ht\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can define the macros. Note: |\n@space| sets the internal
+% variables |\nulldelimiterspace| and |\mathsurropund| to zero length.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bBigg@#1#2{%
+ {\hbox{$\left#2\vcenter to#1\big@size{}\right.\n@space$}}}
+\def\big{\bBigg@\@ne}
+\def\Big{\bBigg@{1.5}}
+\def\bigg{\bBigg@\tw@}
+\def\Bigg{\bBigg@{2.5}}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..04ac8b87ec3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/exscale.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generateFile{exscale.sty}{t}{%
+ \from{exscale.dtx}{package}}
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space exscale.sty}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.dtx' through LaTeX2e.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a55e295fcac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1791 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%
+%<*dtx>
+ \ProvidesFile{fixltx2e.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<fixltx2e,fix-cm>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<fixltx2e>\ProvidesPackage{fixltx2e}
+%<fix-cm>\ProvidesPackage{fix-cm}
+%<driver>\ProvidesFile{fixltx2e.drv}
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{fixltx2e.dtx}
+ [2004/02/13 v1.1h fixes to LaTeX]
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+ \documentclass{ltxdoc}
+ \newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+ \let\Lpack\Lopt
+ \providecommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+ \providecommand{\MF}{\textsf{Metafont}}
+ \providecommand{\danger}{\marginpar[\hfill\protect\Huge!!]{\protect\Huge!!\hfill}}
+ \begin{document}
+ \DocInput{fixltx2e.dtx}
+ \end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{896}
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+%
+%
+% \let\package\textsf
+%
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{fixltx2e.dtx}
+%
+% \title{The \Lpack{fixltx2e} and \Lpack{fix-cm} packages\thanks{This file
+% has version number \fileversion, last
+% revised \filedate.}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach, David Carlisle, Chris Rowley, Walter
+% Schmidt\thanks{Walter wrote \Lpack{fix-cm}}}
+% \date{\filedate}
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% These packages provides fixes to \LaTeXe{} which are desirable
+% but cannot be integrated into the \LaTeXe{} kernel or the
+% font definition files directly as they would produce a version
+% incompatible to earlier releases (either in formatting or
+% functionality).
+%
+% By providing these fixes in the form of packages, users can benefit
+% from them without the danger that their documents will fail or
+% produce unexpected results at other sites since the documents
+% contain a clear indication (the |\usepackage| line, preferably
+% with a required date) that the fixes are needed.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \newpage
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% In the newsletter \texttt{ltnews07.tex}, which accompanied the
+% \LaTeXe{} maintenance release of June 1997, we wrote:
+% \begin{quote}
+% Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard
+% classes are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or
+% less politely, that the design decisions embodied in them are
+% `not optimal' and asking us to modify them.
+%
+% There are several reasons why we have decided not to make such
+% changes to these files.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what
+% was intended when these classes were designed. \item It is not
+% good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes'
+% because many people will be relying on them.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% We have therefore decided not to even consider making such
+% modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision. This
+% does not mean that we do not agree that there are many
+% deficiencies in the design of these classes, but we have many
+% tasks with higher priority than continually explaining why the
+% standard classes for \LaTeX{} cannot be changed.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Back then we probably should have said that this decision also
+% covers changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel and font definitions,
+% if the change results in
+% noticeable differences in the formatting of documents or otherwise
+% produces severe incompatibilities between releases. The important
+% point to stress here is that ``people rely on the fact that a
+% document formatted at one site produces identical output at a
+% different site''. By fixing a certain problem in version
+% \meta{date}, people making use of the fix will get incorrectly
+% formatted documents if they send them to others who still run on a
+% version prior to \meta{date}.
+%
+% In theory one could get around this by adding a line like
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\NeedsTeXFormat{latex2e}[|\meta{date}|]|
+% \end{quote}
+% on top of the document. However, this fails for two reasons. Firstly,
+% most people will not be aware that they make use of a feature or fix
+% that is only available in their version of \LaTeX{}; and thus do not
+% add such a line in their documents. Secondly, even if there is such a
+% line the receiving site might not be able to upgrade their \LaTeX{}
+% in time to process the document properly (the latter is a sad fact
+% of life).
+%
+% By providing the \Lpack{fixltx2e} and \Lpack{fix-cm} packages
+% we hope to help people in this respect since, when they
+% are used, a document will contain a clear
+% indication that special features/fixes are needed and if the
+% receiving site does not have the packages available (or not available
+% with the right version) it is far easier to download and install them
+% from some archive than to upgrade \LaTeX{} in a rush.
+%
+% The packages are independent from each other and deal with different
+% subjects:
+% \Lpack{fixltx2e} provides general changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel,
+% while \Lpack{fix-cm} improves the definitions of the Computer Modern
+% font families.
+%
+% We will try to maintain the packages in such a way that they can be used
+% with all maintenance releases of \LaTeXe{} so that, if urgently
+% needed, people can simply add them to the current directory in case
+% they cannot upgrade their \LaTeX{} for whatever reason.
+%
+% The packages are \textbf{NOT} provided so that people can stop
+% upgrading their \LaTeX{} system. They will contain only fixes of a
+% certain nature, others will still go into the kernel and extensions
+% in form of packages, and support files will still be added to the
+% base system at regular intervals.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Using \Lpack{fixltx2e}}
+%
+% To use the \Lpack{fixltx2e} package include the line
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\usepackage{fixltx2e}[|\meta{date}|]|
+% \end{quote}
+% into the preamble of your document, where \meta{date} is the date of
+% the \Lpack{fixltx2e} package that you are using.
+% This way your document will produce a warning if processed at a site
+% that only has an older version of of this package.
+%
+% \subsection{Using \Lpack{fix-cm}}
+%
+% \begin{sloppypar}
+% To use the \Lpack{fix-cm} package,
+% load \danger it \emph{before} \cmd{\documentclass},
+% and use the command \cmd{\RequirePackage} to do so, rather than the
+% normal \cmd{\usepackage}:
+% \end{sloppypar}
+% \begin{verse}
+% |\RequirePackage{fix-cm}|\\
+% |\documentclass| \dots
+% \end{verse}
+% \textbf{Do not to load any other package before the document class},
+% unless you have a thorough understanding of the \LaTeX{} internals
+% and know exactly what you are doing!
+%
+%
+% \section{Fixes added}
+%
+% This section describes all the fixes/features that have been added
+% to the initial release of the package. If applicable the bug report
+% info (see \texttt{bugs.txt}) is given.
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{2-col: 1-col fig can come before earlier 2-col fig
+% (pr/2346)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number: 2346
+% >Category: latex
+% >Synopsis: 2-col: 1-col fig can come before earlier 2-col fig
+% >Arrival-Date: Wed Dec 18 15:41:07 1996
+% >Originator: w.l.kleb@larc.nasa.gov (bil kleb)
+% >Description:
+% as documented in lamport's book, p. 198, concerning figure
+% placement, "a figure will not be printed before an earlier
+% figure, and a table will not be printed before an earlier
+% table." however, there is a footnote stating, "However,
+% in two-column page style, a single-column figure can come before
+% an earlier double-column figure, and vice versa."
+%
+% this twocolumn behavior is undesireable---at least by me and
+% most professional organizations i publish in. ed snyzter developed
+% a hack fix for 2.09 several years ago which links the two
+% counters, but i have not run across a similar "fix" for 2e...
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Originally fixed in package \Lpack{fix2col} which was merged into
+% this package. Documentation and code from this package have been
+% merged into this file.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Notes on the Implementation Strategy}
+%
+% The standard output routine maintains two lists of floats that have
+% been `deferred' for later consideration. One list for single column
+% floats, and one for double column floats (which are always
+% immediately put onto their deferred list). This mechanism means
+% that \LaTeX\ `knows' which type of float is contained in each box
+% by the list that it is processing, but having two lists means
+% that there is no mechanism for preserving the order between the
+% floats in each list.
+%
+% The solution to this problem consists of two small changes to
+% the output routine.
+%
+% Firstly, abandon the `double column float list' |\@dbldeferlist|
+% and change every command where it is used so that instead the
+% same |\@deferlist| is used as for single column floats.
+% That one change ensures that double and single column floats
+% stay in the same sequence, but as \LaTeX\ no longer `knows'
+% whether a float is double or single column, it will happily
+% insert a double float into a single column, overprinting the
+% other column, or the margin.
+%
+% The second change is to provide an alternative mechanism for
+% recording the two column floats. \LaTeX\ already has a compact
+% mechanism for recording float information, an integer count register
+% assigned to each float records information about the `type' of float
+% `figure', `table' and the position information `htp' etc.
+%
+% The type information is stored in the `high' bits, one bit position
+% (above `32') allocated to each float type. The `low' bits store
+% information about the allowed positions, one bit each allocated for
+% |h t b p|. In the \LaTeX2.09 system, the bit corresponding to `16'
+% formed a `boundary' between these two sets of information, and it
+% was never actually used by the system. Ed Sznyter's
+% \package{fixfloats} package not unreasonably used this position to
+% store the double column information, setting the bit for double
+% column floats. Then at each point in the output routine at which a
+% float is committed to a certain region, an additional check must be
+% made to check that the float is (or is not) double column. If it
+% spans the wrong number of columns it is deferred rather than being
+% added.
+%
+% Unfortunately the bit `16' is not available in \LaTeXe. It is used
+% to encode the extra float position possibility `|!|' that was added
+% in that system. It would be possible to use position `32' and to
+% move the flags for `table', `figure',\ldots\ up one position, to
+% start at 64, but this would mean that in principle one less float
+% type would be supported, and more importantly is likely to break
+% any other packages that assume anything about the output routine
+% internals. So here I instead use another mechanism for flagging
+% double column floats: By default all floats have depth 0pt.
+% This package arranges that double column ones have depth 1sp.
+% This information may then be used in the same manner as in
+% the \package{fixfloats} package, to defer any floats that are not of
+% the correct column spanning type.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Wrong header for twocolumn (pr/2613)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number: 2613
+% >Category: latex
+% >Synopsis: wrong headline for twocolumn
+% >Arrival-Date: Mon Sep 22 16:41:09 1997
+% >Originator: daniel@cs.uni-bonn.de (Daniel Reischert)
+% >Description:
+% When setting the document in two columns
+% the headline shows the top mark of the second column,
+% but it should show the top mark of the first column.
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Originally fixed in package \Lpack{fix2col} which was merged into
+% this package. Documentation and code from this package have been
+% merged into this file.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Notes on the Implementation Strategy}
+%
+% The standard \LaTeX\ twocolumn system works internally by making
+% each column a separate `page' that is passed independently to \TeX's
+% pagebreaker. (Unlike say the \package{multicol} package, where all
+% columns are gathered together and then split into columns later,
+% using |\vsplit|.) This means that the primitive \TeX\ marks that are
+% normally used for header information, are globally reset after the
+% first column. By default \LaTeX\ does nothing about this.
+% A good solution is provided by Piet van Oostrum (building on earlier
+% work of Joe Pallas) in his \package{fixmarks} package.
+%
+% After the first column box has been collected the mark information
+% for that box is saved, so that any |\firstmark| can be
+% `artificially' used to set the page-level marks after the second
+% column has been collected. (The second column |\firstmark| is not
+% normally required.) Unfortunately \TeX\ does not provide a direct
+% way of knowing if any marks are in the page, |\firstmark| always has a
+% value from previous pages, even if there is no mark in this page.
+% The solution is to make a copy of the box and then |\vsplit| it
+% so that any marks show up as |\splitfirstmark|.
+%
+% The use of |\vsplit| does mean that the output routine will globally
+% change the value of |\splitfirstmark| and
+% |\splitbotmark|. The \package{fixmarks} package goes to some trouble
+% to save and restore these values so that the output routine does
+% \emph{not} change the values. This part of \package{fixmarks} is not
+% copied here as it is quite costly (having to be run on every page) and
+% there is no reason why anyone writing code using |\vsplit| should
+% allow the output routine to be triggered before the split marks have
+% been accessed.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash @} discards spaces when moving
+% (pr/3039)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number: 3039
+% >Category: latex
+% >Synopsis: \@ discards spaces when moving
+% >Arrival-Date: Sat May 22 09:01:06 1999
+% >Originator: asnd@triumf.ca (Donald Arseneau)
+% >Description:
+% The \@ command expands to \spacefactor\@m in auxiliary files,
+% which then ignores following spaces when it is reprocessed.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash setlength} produces error if
+% used with registers like \texttt{\textbackslash dimen0} (pr/3066)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number: 3066
+% >Category: latex
+% >Synopsis: \setlength{\dimen0}{10pt}
+% >Arrival-Date: Tue Jul 6 15:01:06 1999
+% >Originator: oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de (Heiko Oberdiek)
+% >Description:
+% The current implementation of \setlength causes an error,
+% because the length specification isn't terminated properly.
+% More safe:
+% \def\setlength#1#2{#1=#2\relax}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash addpenalty} ruins flush-bottom (pr/3073)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number: 3073
+% >Category: latex
+% >Synopsis: \addpenalty ruins flush-bottom
+% >Arrival-Date: Sat Jul 17 05:11:05 1999
+% >Originator: asnd@triumf.ca (Donald Arseneau)
+% >Description:
+% Just to keep in mind for further development eh?
+% A page break at an \addpenalty after \vspace does *not*
+% give a flush-bottom page. (The intent of \addpenalty is
+% apparently just to preserve the flush bottom by putting
+% the breakpoint `above' the skip.)
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Fixes added for 2003/06/01}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash fnsymbol} should use text symbols
+% if possible (pr/3400)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number: 3400
+% >Category: latex
+% >Synopsis: \fnsymbol should use text symbols if possible
+% >Arrival-Date: Fri Jan 04 20:41:00 CET 2002
+% >Originator: was@VR-Web.de ( Walter Schmidt )
+%
+% The \fnsymbol command can be used in both text and math
+% mode. The symbols produced are, however, always taken from
+% the math fonts. As a result, they may not match the text
+% fonts, even if the symbols are actually available, for
+% instance from the TS1 encoding. Since \fnsymbol is
+% primarily used for footnotes in text, this should be fixed,
+% IMO.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{No hyphenation in first word after float environment(pr/3498)}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% >Number: 3498
+% >Category: latex
+% >Synopsis: No hyphenation in first word after float environment
+% >Arrival-Date: Thu Jan 30 13:21:00 CET 2003
+% >Originator: h.harders@tu-bs.de (Harald Harders)
+%
+% If a float environment (figure, table) is written within a paragraph,
+% the first word after the environment is not hyphenated.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Allowing \texttt{\textbackslash emph} to produce small
+% caps, etc}
+%
+% By default |\em| or |\emph| switches to roman in an italic
+% context but some designers prefer a switch to small caps in that
+% case. This can be achieved by setting |\eminnershape|, e.g.,
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\renewcommand\eminnershape{\scshape}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Using EC fonts (T1 encoding) makes my documents look
+% bl**dy horrible (from c.t.t.)\\
+% I can't use arbitrary sizes with CM fonts (from c.t.t.)}
+%
+% No I'm not trying to collect any cites from the news group
+% discussion on this topic. In a nutshell, if one adds
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% to a document that uses the Computer Modern typefaces,
+% then not only the T1 encoding is used but the fonts
+% used in the document look noticeably different. This is due to the fact
+% that the EC fonts have more font series designs, e.g.\ a 14.4\,pt bold
+% etc and those get used in the standard \texttt{.fd} files, while
+% with Computer Modern (in OT1 encoding) such sizes were scaled
+% versions of smaller sizes---with a noticeable different look and
+% feel.
+%
+% So we provide a package \Lpack{fix-cm} to ensure that comparable
+% definitions are used. In addition to that, the package
+% \Lpack{fix-cm} also enables continuous scaling of the CM fonts.
+% This package was written by Walter Schmidt.
+%
+%
+%
+%^^A \section{The macro package \textsf{fix-cm} for \LaTeXe}
+%
+%^^A The documentation in this section was prepared by Walter Schmidt.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{What \Lpack{fix-cm} does}
+%
+% ^^A Are you bothered by the T1 and TS1 encoded Computer Modern fonts,
+% ^^A which look partially worse than the traditional ones? Would you
+% ^^A like to use the CM fonts with arbitrary sizes? If so, the macro
+% ^^A package \Lpack{fix-cm} can help you.
+%
+% Loading the package \Lpack{fix-cm} changes the font definitions of the
+% Computer Modern fonts, in order to achieve the following effects:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% The appearance of the T1 and TS1 encoded CM fonts (aka `EC') is
+% made as similar as possible to the traditional (OT1 encoded) ones.
+% Particularly, a number of broken or ugly design sizes are no
+% longer used, the look of the bold sans serif typeface at large
+% sizes is considerably improved, and mismatches between the text
+% fonts and the corresponding math fonts are avoided. As a side
+% effect, PostScript and PDF documents may become smaller, because
+% fewer fonts need to be embedded.
+% \item
+% The Computer Modern fonts are made available with arbitrary sizes.
+% \item
+% Only those design sizes of the fonts will be used, that are
+% normally available in Type1 format, too. You need not load the
+% extra package \Lpack{cmmib57} for this purpose.
+% \end{itemize}
+% The package acts on the following font families:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% The text font families \file{cmr}, \file{cmss}, \file{cmtt} and
+% \file{cmvtt} with OT1, T1 and TS1 encoding.
+% \item
+% The default math fonts used by \LaTeX, i.e., the font families
+% \file{cmm} with encoding OML and \file{cms} with encoding OMS.
+% \item
+% The symbols used by the package \Lpack{latexsym}, i.e., the font
+% family \file{lasy}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% Note that the package does \emph{not} act on:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Font families such as CM~Fibonacci, CM~Dunhill etc.,
+% which are provided for experimental purposes or for fun only.
+% \item
+% CM text fonts with character sets other than Latin, e.g.,
+% Cyrillic. Loading of the required font and encoding definitions
+% while the fonts are not actually used, would not be a good idea.
+% This should be addressed by particular packages or by changing the
+% standard FDs of these fonts.
+% \item
+% Extra math fonts such as the AMS symbol fonts. While
+% they match the style of Computer Modern, they are frequently used
+% in conjunction with other font families, too. Thus,
+% \Lpack{fix-cm} is obviously not the right place to make sure that
+% they can be scaled continuously. Ask the maintainers of these
+% fonts to provide this feature, which is badly needed!
+% \item
+% The math extension font \file{cmex}. Whether or not this font
+% should be scaled is a question of its own, and there are other
+% packages (\Lpack{exscale}, \Lpack{amsmath}, \Lpack{amsfonts}) to
+% take care of it.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsubsection{How to load the package}
+% \begin{sloppypar}
+% The package should be loaded \danger \emph{before} \cmd{\documentclass},
+% using the command |\RequirePackage{fix-cm}|, rather than the
+% normal \cmd{\usepackage}.
+% Rationale:
+% If the package is loaded in the preamble, a preceding package or
+% even the code of the document class may have used any of the CM
+% fonts already. However, the definitions of those fonts, that are
+% already in use, cannot be changed any more.
+% \end{sloppypar}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Usage notes}
+% In contrast to what you may expect, \Lpack{fix-cm} does \emph{not}
+% ensure that line and page breaks stay the same, when you switch an
+% existing document from OT1 to T1 encoding. The package does not
+% turn off all of the additional design sizes in the EC fonts
+% collection: Those, that contribute considerably to the typographical
+% quality and do not conflict with the math fonts,
+% are---indeed---used.
+%
+% Be careful when using arbitrary, non-standard font sizes with
+% applications that need bitmap fonts: You may end up \danger with
+% lots of possibly huge \file{.pk} files. Also, \MF{} chokes
+% sometimes on extremely small or large sizes, because of arithmetic
+% problems.
+%
+% \Lpack{fix-cm} supersedes the experimental packages \Lpack{cmsd} and
+% \Lpack{fix-ec}, which are no longer distributed.
+%
+% The packages \Lpack{type1cm} and \Lpack{type1ec} must not be loaded
+% additionally; they enable only continuous scaling.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+% We require at least a somewhat sane version of \LaTeXe{}. Earlier
+% ones where really quite different from one another.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fixltx2e>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{2-col: 1-col fig can come before earlier 2-col fig
+% (pr/2346) \\
+% Wrong headline for twocolumn (pr/2613)}
+%
+% Originally fixed in package \Lpack{fix2col} which was merged into
+% this package. Code and documentation are straight copies from that
+% package.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preserving Marks}
+%
+% This is just a change to the single command |\@outputdblcol|
+% so that it saves mark information for the first column and restores
+% it in the second column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@outputdblcol{%
+ \if@firstcolumn
+ \global\@firstcolumnfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Save the left column
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\setbox\@leftcolumn\copy\@outputbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Remember the marks from the first column
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \splitmaxdepth\maxdimen
+ \vbadness\maxdimen
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vsplit\@outputbox to\maxdimen
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% One minor difference from the current \package{fixmarks}, pass the
+% marks through a token register to stop any |#| tokens causing an
+% error in a |\def|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \toks@\expandafter{\topmark}%
+ \xdef\@firstcoltopmark{\the\toks@}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\splitfirstmark}%
+ \xdef\@firstcolfirstmark{\the\toks@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This test does not work if truly empty marks have been inserted, but
+% \LaTeX\ marks should always have (at least) two brace groups.
+% (Except before the first mark is used, when the marks are empty,
+% but that is OK here.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@firstcolfirstmark\@empty
+ \global\let\@setmarks\relax
+ \else
+ \gdef\@setmarks{%
+ \let\firstmark\@firstcolfirstmark
+ \let\topmark\@firstcoltopmark}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of change
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \global\@firstcolumntrue
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+ \hb@xt@\textwidth{%
+ \hb@xt@\columnwidth{\box\@leftcolumn \hss}%
+ \hfil
+ \vrule \@width\columnseprule
+ \hfil
+ \hb@xt@\columnwidth{\box\@outputbox \hss}}}%
+ \@combinedblfloats
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Override current first and top with those of first column if necessary
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@setmarks
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of change
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@outputpage
+ \begingroup
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+ \@startdblcolumn
+ \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@outputpage\@startdblcolumn}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preserving Float Order}
+%
+% Changes |\@dbldeferlist| to |\@deferlist| are not explicitly noted
+% but are flagged by blank comment lines around the changed line.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end@dblfloat{%
+\if@twocolumn
+ \@endfloatbox
+ \ifnum\@floatpenalty <\z@
+ \@largefloatcheck
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Force the depth of two column float boxes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\dp\@currbox1sp %
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1d}{2000/09/24}{FMi: use output routine to
+% defer float}
+% Next line assumes that first token of |\end@float| is
+% |\@endfloatbox| so we gobble that.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+ \expandafter\@gobble\end@float
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\@Esphack| is then added by |\@endfloat| above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fi
+% \ifnum \@floatpenalty =-\@Mii \@Esphack\fi
+\else
+ \end@float
+\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Test if the float box has the wrong width. (Actually as noted above
+% the test is for a conventional depth setting rather than for the
+% width of the float).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@testwrongwidth #1{%
+ \ifdim\dp#1=\f@depth
+ \else
+ \global\@testtrue
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Normally looking for single column floats, which have zero depth.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\f@depth\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% but when making two column float area, look for floats with 1sp
+% depth.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dblfloatplacement{\global\@dbltopnum\c@dbltopnumber
+ \global\@dbltoproom \dbltopfraction\@colht
+ \@textmin \@colht
+ \advance \@textmin -\@dbltoproom
+ \@fpmin \dblfloatpagefraction\textheight
+ \@fptop \@dblfptop
+ \@fpsep \@dblfpsep
+ \@fpbot \@dblfpbot
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\f@depth{1sp}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% All the remaining changes are replacing the double column defer list
+% or insering the extra test |\@testwrongwidth|\marg{box} at suitable
+% places. That is at plces where a box is taken off the deferlist.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@doclearpage {%
+ \ifvoid\footins
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\@cclv to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv
+ \xdef\@deferlist{\@toplist\@botlist\@deferlist}%
+ \global \let \@toplist \@empty
+ \global \let \@botlist \@empty
+ \global \@colroom \@colht
+ \ifx \@currlist\@empty
+ \else
+ \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
+ \global \let \@currlist \@empty
+ \fi
+ \@makefcolumn\@deferlist
+ \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@opcol\@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \if@firstcolumn
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\@deferlist{\@dbltoplist\@deferlist}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \let \@dbltoplist \@empty
+ \global \@colht \textheight
+ \begingroup
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@makefcolumn\@deferlist
+ \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@outputpage
+ \@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \vbox{}\clearpage
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% the next line is needed to avoid loosing floats in certain
+% circumstances a single call to the original |\doclearpage|
+% will now no longer output all floats.
+% \changes{v1.1d}{2000/09/24}{FMi: ensure \cs{doclearpage}
+% is called again until all floats are output.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@deferlist\@empty \else\clearpage \fi
+ \else
+ \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\box\@cclv\vfil}%
+ \@makecol\@opcol
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@startdblcolumn {%
+ \@tryfcolumn \@deferlist
+ \if@fcolmade
+ \else
+ \begingroup
+ \let \reserved@b \@deferlist
+ \global \let \@deferlist \@empty
+ \let \@elt \@sdblcolelt
+ \reserved@b
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtonextcol{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@insertfalse
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=8
+ \else
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=24
+ \else
+ \@flsettextmin
+ \@reqcolroom \ht\@currbox
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \@textmin
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \@flsetnum \@colnum
+ \ifnum\@colnum>\z@
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@deferlist
+ \@testwrongwidth\@currbox
+ \if@test
+ \else
+ \@addtotoporbot
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+ \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtodblcol{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@insertfalse
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \@getfpsbit \tw@
+ \ifodd\@tempcnta
+ \@flsetnum \@dbltopnum
+ \ifnum \@dbltopnum>\z@
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \ifdim \@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \else
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+ \advance \@dbltoproom \@textmin
+ \ifdim \@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \fi
+ \advance \@dbltoproom -\@textmin
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+ \@bitor \@currtype \@deferlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% not in fixfloats?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@testwrongwidth\@currbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@test
+ \else
+ \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+ \advance\@tempdima
+ -\ifx \@dbltoplist\@empty \dbltextfloatsep \else
+ \dblfloatsep \fi
+ \global \advance \@dbltoproom \@tempdima
+ \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
+ \global \advance \@dbltopnum \m@ne
+ \@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
+ \@inserttrue
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+ \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@addtocurcol {%
+ \@insertfalse
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=8
+ \else
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=24
+ \else
+ \@flsettextmin
+ \advance \@textmin \@textfloatsheight
+ \@reqcolroom \@pageht
+ \ifdim \@textmin>\@reqcolroom
+ \@reqcolroom \@textmin
+ \fi
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \ht\@currbox
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \@flsetnum \@colnum
+ \ifnum \@colnum>\z@
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@deferlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need to defer the float also if its width
+% doesn't fit.
+% \changes{v1.1d}{2000/09/24}{FMi: test for wide float was
+% in wrong place}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@testwrongwidth\@currbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@test
+ \else
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@botlist
+ \if@test
+ \@addtobot
+ \else
+ \ifodd \count\@currbox
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \intextsep
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \global \advance \@colnum \m@ne
+ \global \advance \@textfloatsheight \ht\@currbox
+ \global \advance \@textfloatsheight 2\intextsep
+ \@cons \@midlist \@currbox
+ \if@nobreak
+ \nobreak
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty \interlinepenalty
+ \fi
+ \vskip \intextsep
+ \box\@currbox
+ \penalty\interlinepenalty
+ \vskip\intextsep
+ \ifnum\outputpenalty <-\@Mii \vskip -\parskip\fi
+ \outputpenalty \z@
+ \@inserttrue
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+ \@addtotoporbot
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+ \@resethfps
+ \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xtryfc #1{%
+ \@next\reserved@a\@trylist{}{}%
+ \@currtype \count #1%
+ \divide\@currtype\@xxxii
+ \multiply\@currtype\@xxxii
+ \@bitor \@currtype \@failedlist
+ \@testfp #1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@testwrongwidth #1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \ht #1>\@colht
+ \@testtrue
+ \fi
+ \if@test
+ \@cons\@failedlist #1%
+ \else
+ \@ytryfc #1%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ztryfc #1{%
+ \@tempcnta\count #1%
+ \divide\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+ \multiply\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+ \@bitor \@tempcnta {\@failedlist \@flfail}%
+ \@testfp #1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% not in fixfloats?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@testwrongwidth #1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempdimb\@tempdima
+ \advance\@tempdimb\ht #1%
+ \advance\@tempdimb\@fpsep
+ \ifdim \@tempdimb >\@colht
+ \@testtrue
+ \fi
+ \if@test
+ \@cons\@flfail #1%
+ \else
+ \@cons\@flsucceed #1%
+ \@tempdima\@tempdimb
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash @} discards spaces when moving
+% (pr3039)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@}
+% Ensure that |\@m| can't eat spaces. Alternative would be to make
+% |\@| robust but that takes more space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@{\spacefactor\@m{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash setlength} produces error if
+% used with registers like \texttt{\textbackslash dimen0} (pr/3066)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
+% Add space after register (|#1|) but only if this is still the
+% original definition. When, for example, \Lpack{calc} was already
+% loaded this wouldn't be a good idea any more.
+% \changes{v1.0c}{2000/09/21}{Don't change if definition was
+% modified already}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tempa#1#2{#1#2\relax}
+\ifx\setlength\@tempa
+ \def\setlength#1#2{#1 #2\relax}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash addpenalty} ruins flush-bottom
+% (pr/3073)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addpenalty}
+% Fix provided by Donald (though the original fix was not good enough).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addpenalty#1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \if@minipage
+ \else
+ \if@nobreak
+ \else
+ \ifdim\lastskip=\z@
+ \penalty#1\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempskipb\lastskip
+ \advance \@tempskipb
+ \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth\maxdepth\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |\prevdepth| is -1000pt due to |\nointerlineskip| we better
+% not add it!
+% \changes{v1.0c}{2000/09/21}{Don't add \cs{prevdepth} if it is a
+% senile value!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \prevdepth = -\@m\p@ \z@ \else \prevdepth \fi
+ \fi
+ \vskip -\@tempskipb
+ \penalty#1%
+ \vskip\@tempskipb
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@noitemerr
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash fnsymbol} should use text symbols
+% if possible (pr/3400)}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\@fnsymbol}[1]{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \ifcase#1\or *\or\dagger\or \ddagger\or
+ \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or
+ \dagger\dagger
+ \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi
+ \else
+ \ifcase#1\or \textasteriskcentered\or \textdagger\or
+ \textdaggerdbl\or \textsection\or \textparagraph\or
+ \textbardbl\or \textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered\or
+ \textdagger\textdagger\or \textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl
+ \else\@ctrerr\fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{No hyphenation in first word after float environment(pr/3498)}
+%
+% Fix suggested by Donald Arseneau.
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2003/09/19}{Fix for \cs{@esphack} (pr/3498)}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{2004/02/13}{Fix for \cs{@Esphack} (pr/3498)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@esphack{%
+ \relax
+ \ifhmode
+ \spacefactor\@savsf
+ \ifdim\@savsk>\z@
+ \nobreak \hskip\z@skip % <------
+ \ignorespaces
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Esphack{%
+ \relax
+ \ifhmode
+ \spacefactor\@savsf
+ \ifdim\@savsk>\z@
+ \nobreak \hskip\z@skip % <------
+ \@ignoretrue
+ \ignorespaces
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Allowing \texttt{\textbackslash emph} to produce small
+% caps, etc}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2003/09/19}{Allow \cs{emph} to produce small caps}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\em
+ {\@nomath\em \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font >\z@
+ \eminnershape \else \itshape \fi}
+\def\eminnershape{\upshape}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</fixltx2e>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Using EC fonts (T1 encoding) makes my documents look
+% bl**dy horrible}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preliminaries}
+% The \LaTeX{} kernel does not declare the font encoding TS1.
+% However, we are going to set up font definitions for this encoding,
+% so we have to declare it now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fix-cm>
+\input{ts1enc.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In case the package is loaded in the preamble, any of the CM fonts may
+% have been used already and cannot be redefined. Yet we try to
+% intercept at least the problem that is most likely to occur, i.e.,
+% a hidden \cmd{\normalfont}. Most of the standard definitions
+% are ok, but those for T1 encoding and 10.95\,pt need to be removed:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter \let \csname T1/cmr/m/n/10.95\endcsname \relax
+\expandafter \let \csname T1/cmss/m/n/10.95\endcsname \relax
+\expandafter \let \csname T1/cmtt/m/n/10.95\endcsname \relax
+\expandafter \let \csname T1/cmvtt/m/n/10.95\endcsname \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Lpack{fix-cm} may still fail, if the EC fonts are preloaded in the
+% \LaTeX{} format file. This situation is, however, very unlikely and could occur
+% only with a customized format.
+%
+% The remainder of the package is enclosed in a group, where the catcodes
+% are guaranteed to be appropriate for the processing of font definitions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\nfss@catcodes
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{T1 encoding}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Roman}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmr}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}{
+ <-6> ecrm0500
+ <6-7> ecrm0600
+ <7-8> ecrm0700
+ <8-9> ecrm0800
+ <9-10> ecrm0900
+ <10-12> ecrm1000
+ <12-17> ecrm1200
+ <17-> ecrm1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{
+ <-6> ecsl0500
+ <6-7> ecsl0600
+ <7-8> ecsl0700
+ <8-9> ecsl0800
+ <9-10> ecsl0900
+ <10-12> ecsl1000
+ <12-17> ecsl1200
+ <17-> ecsl1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{it}{
+ <-8> ecti0700
+ <8-9> ecti0800
+ <9-10> ecti0900
+ <10-12> ecti1000
+ <12-17> ecti1200
+ <17-> ecti1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{sc}{
+ <-6> eccc0500
+ <6-7> eccc0600
+ <7-8> eccc0700
+ <8-9> eccc0800
+ <9-10> eccc0900
+ <10-12> eccc1000
+ <12-17> eccc1200
+ <17-> eccc1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{
+ <-8> ecui0700
+ <8-9> ecui0800
+ <9-10> ecui0900
+ <10-12> ecui1000
+ <12-17> ecui1200
+ <17-> ecui1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{b}{n}{
+ <-6> ecrb0500
+ <6-7> ecrb0600
+ <7-8> ecrb0700
+ <8-9> ecrb0800
+ <9-10> ecrb0900
+ <10-12> ecrb1000
+ <12-17> ecrb1200
+ <17-> ecrb1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{
+ <-6> ecbx0500
+ <6-7> ecbx0600
+ <7-8> ecbx0700
+ <8-9> ecbx0800
+ <9-10> ecbx0900
+ <10-12> ecbx1000
+ <12-> ecbx1200
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}{
+ <-6> ecbl0500
+ <6-7> ecbl0600
+ <7-8> ecbl0700
+ <8-9> ecbl0800
+ <9-10> ecbl0900
+ <10-12> ecbl1000
+ <12-> ecbl1200
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{it}{
+ <-8> ecbi0700
+ <8-9> ecbi0800
+ <9-10> ecbi0900
+ <10-12> ecbi1000
+ <12-> ecbi1200
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sc}{
+ <-6> ecxc0500
+ <6-7> ecxc0600
+ <7-8> ecxc0700
+ <8-9> ecxc0800
+ <9-10> ecxc0900
+ <10-12> ecxc1000
+ <12-> ecxc1200
+ }{}
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Sans}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmss}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{m}{n}{
+ <-9> ecss0800
+ <9-10> ecss0900
+ <10-12> ecss1000
+ <12-17> ecss1200
+ <17-> ecss1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{m}{sl}{
+ <-9> ecsi0800
+ <9-10> ecsi0900
+ <10-12> ecsi1000
+ <12-17> ecsi1200
+ <17-> ecsi1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{m}{it}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{m}{sc}
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/sc}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{sbc}{n}{
+ <-> ecssdc10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{bx}{n}{
+ <-10> ecsx0900
+ <10-> ecsx1000
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{bx}{sl}{
+ <-10> ecso0900
+ <10-> ecso1000
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{bx}{it}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/bx/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following substitutions are not provided in the default
+% \file{.fd} files. I have included them, so that you can
+% easily use the EC fonts with the default bold series being
+% \file{b} rather than \file{bx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{b}{n}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/bx/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{b}{sl}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/bx/sl}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmss}{b}{it}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/bx/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Typewriter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{
+ <-9> ectt0800
+ <9-10> ectt0900
+ <10-12> ectt1000
+ <12-17> ectt1200
+ <17-> ectt1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{m}{it}{
+ <-9> ecit0800
+ <9-10> ecit0900
+ <10-12> ecit1000
+ <12-17> ecit1200
+ <17-> ecit1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{
+ <-9> ecst0800
+ <9-10> ecst0900
+ <10-12> ecst1000
+ <12-17> ecst1200
+ <17-> ecst1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{m}{sc}{
+ <-9> ectc0800
+ <9-10> ectc0900
+ <10-12> ectc1000
+ <12-17> ectc1200
+ <17-> ectc1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{bx}{sl}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Substitutions not provided in the default \file{.fd} files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{b}{n}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{b}{it}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmtt}{b}{sl}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Typewiter (var.)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmvtt}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}{
+ <-9> ecvt0800
+ <9-10> ecvt0900
+ <10-12> ecvt1000
+ <12-17> ecvt1200
+ <17-> ecvt1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmvtt}{m}{it}{
+ <-9> ecvi0800
+ <9-10> ecvi0900
+ <10-12> ecvi1000
+ <12-17> ecvi1200
+ <17-> ecvi1728
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{TS1 encoding}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Roman}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{TS1}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmr}{m}{n}{
+ <-6> tcrm0500
+ <6-7> tcrm0600
+ <7-8> tcrm0700
+ <8-9> tcrm0800
+ <9-10> tcrm0900
+ <10-12> tcrm1000
+ <12-17> tcrm1200
+ <17-> tcrm1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{
+ <-6> tcsl0500
+ <6-7> tcsl0600
+ <7-8> tcsl0700
+ <8-9> tcsl0800
+ <9-10> tcsl0900
+ <10-12> tcsl1000
+ <12-17> tcsl1200
+ <17-> tcsl1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmr}{m}{it}{
+ <-8> tcti0700
+ <8-9> tcti0800
+ <9-10> tcti0900
+ <10-12> tcti1000
+ <12-17> tcti1200
+ <17-> tcti1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{
+ <-8> tcui0700
+ <8-9> tcui0800
+ <9-10> tcui0900
+ <10-12> tcui1000
+ <12-17> tcui1200
+ <17-> tcui1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmr}{b}{n}{
+ <-6> tcrb0500
+ <6-7> tcrb0600
+ <7-8> tcrb0700
+ <8-9> tcrb0800
+ <9-10> tcrb0900
+ <10-12> tcrb1000
+ <12-17> tcrb1200
+ <17-> tcrb1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{
+ <-6> tcbx0500
+ <6-7> tcbx0600
+ <7-8> tcbx0700
+ <8-9> tcbx0800
+ <9-10> tcbx0900
+ <10-12> tcbx1000
+ <12-> tcbx1200
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}{
+ <-6> tcbl0500
+ <6-7> tcbl0600
+ <7-8> tcbl0700
+ <8-9> tcbl0800
+ <9-10> tcbl0900
+ <10-12> tcbl1000
+ <12-> tcbl1200
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmr}{bx}{it}{
+ <-8> tcbi0700
+ <8-9> tcbi0800
+ <9-10> tcbi0900
+ <10-12> tcbi1000
+ <12-> tcbi1200
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Sans}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{TS1}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{m}{n}{
+ <-9> tcss0800
+ <9-10> tcss0900
+ <10-12> tcss1000
+ <12-17> tcss1200
+ <17-> tcss1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{m}{it}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{m}{sl}{
+ <-9> tcsi0800
+ <9-10> tcsi0900
+ <10-12> tcsi1000
+ <12-17> tcsi1200
+ <17-> tcsi1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{sbc}{n}{
+ <-> tcssdc10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{bx}{n}{
+ <-10> tcsx0900
+ <10-> tcsx1000
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{bx}{sl}{
+ <-10> tcso0900
+ <10-> tcso1000
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{bx}{it}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/bx/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Substitutions not provided in the default \file{.fd} files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{b}{n}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/bx/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{b}{sl}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/bx/sl}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmss}{b}{it}
+ {<->ssub*cmss/bx/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Typewriter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{TS1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{
+ <-9> tctt0800
+ <9-10> tctt0900
+ <10-12> tctt1000
+ <12-17> tctt1200
+ <17-> tctt1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{m}{it}{
+ <-9> tcit0800
+ <9-10> tcit0900
+ <10-12> tcit1000
+ <12-17> tcit1200
+ <17-> tcit1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{
+ <-9> tcst0800
+ <9-10> tcst0900
+ <10-12> tcst1000
+ <12-17> tcst1200
+ <17-> tcst1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{bx}{sl}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Substitutions not provided in the default \file{.fd} files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{b}{n}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{b}{it}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmtt}{b}{sl}
+ {<->sub * cmtt/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Typewriter (var.)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{TS1}{cmvtt}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}{
+ <-9> tcvt0800
+ <9-10> tcvt0900
+ <10-12> tcvt1000
+ <12-17> tcvt1200
+ <17-> tcvi1728
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{TS1}{cmvtt}{m}{it}{
+ <-9> tcvi0800
+ <9-10> tcvi0900
+ <10-12> tcvi1000
+ <12-17> tcvi1200
+ <17-> tcvi1728
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{OT1 encoding}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Roman}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{
+ <-6> cmr5
+ <6-7> cmr6
+ <7-8> cmr7
+ <8-9> cmr8
+ <9-10> cmr9
+ <10-12> cmr10
+ <12-17> cmr12
+ <17-> cmr17
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{
+ <-9> cmsl8
+ <9-10> cmsl9
+ <10-12> cmsl10
+ <12-> cmsl12
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{it}{
+ <-8> cmti7
+ <8-9> cmti8
+ <9-10> cmti9
+ <10-12> cmti10
+ <12-> cmti12
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sc}{
+ <-> cmcsc10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{ui}{
+ <-> cmu10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{b}{n}{
+ <-> cmb10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{
+ <-6> cmbx5
+ <6-7> cmbx6
+ <7-8> cmbx7
+ <8-9> cmbx8
+ <9-10> cmbx9
+ <10-12> cmbx10
+ <12-> cmbx12
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{sl}{
+ <-> cmbxsl10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{it}{
+ <-> cmbxti10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Sans}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}{
+ <-9> cmss8
+ <9-10> cmss9
+ <10-12> cmss10
+ <12-17> cmss12
+ <17-> cmss17
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}
+ {<->sub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{sl}{
+ <-9> cmssi8
+ <9-10> cmssi9
+ <10-12> cmssi10
+ <12-17> cmssi12
+ <17-> cmssi17
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{sc}
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/sc}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{ui}
+ {<->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{sbc}{n}{
+ <-> cmssdc10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{bx}{n}{
+ <-> cmssbx10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->sub*cmr/bx/ui}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Typewriter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{
+ <-9> cmtt8
+ <9-10> cmtt9
+ <10-12> cmtt10
+ <12-> cmtt12
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{it}{
+ <-> cmitt10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{sl}{
+ <-> cmsltt10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{sc}{
+ <-> cmtcsc10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{ui}
+ {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
+ {<->ssub*cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
+ {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{ui}
+ {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{CM Typewriter (var.)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{cmvtt}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmvtt}{m}{n}{
+ <-> cmvtt10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmvtt}{m}{it}{
+ <-> cmvtti10
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{OML and OMS encoded math fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{cmm}{\skewchar\font127 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}{
+ <-6> cmmi5
+ <6-7> cmmi6
+ <7-8> cmmi7
+ <8-9> cmmi8
+ <9-10> cmmi9
+ <10-12> cmmi10
+ <12-> cmmi12
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmm}{b}{it}{<-6>cmmib5<6-8>cmmib7<8->cmmib10}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{cmm}{bx}{it}
+ {<->ssub*cmm/b/it}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmsy}{\skewchar\font48 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}{
+ <-6> cmsy5
+ <6-7> cmsy6
+ <7-8> cmsy7
+ <8-9> cmsy8
+ <9-10> cmsy9
+ <10-> cmsy10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}{<-6>cmbsy5<6-8>cmbsy7<8->cmbsy10}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\LaTeX{} symbols}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{lasy}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{lasy}{m}{n}{
+ <-6> lasy5
+ <6-7> lasy6
+ <7-8> lasy7
+ <8-9> lasy8
+ <9-10> lasy9
+ <10-> lasy10
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{lasy}{b}{n}{
+ <-10> ssub * lasy/m/n
+ <10-> lasyb10
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endgroup
+%</fix-cm>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5249b421a9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fixltx2e.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generateFile{fixltx2e.sty}{t}{%
+ \from{fixltx2e.dtx}{fixltx2e}}
+
+\generateFile{fix-cm.sty}{t}{%
+ \from{fixltx2e.dtx}{fix-cm}}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4d9f5b35cd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/fontdef.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1337 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: fontdef.dtx
+%<*dtx>
+ \ProvidesFile{fontdef.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<text, >\ProvidesFile{fonttext.ltx}
+%<math, >\ProvidesFile{fontmath.ltx}
+%<+cfgtext>\ProvidesFile{fonttext.cfg}
+%<+cfgmath>\ProvidesFile{fontmath.cfg}
+%<+cfgprel>\ProvidesFile{preload.cfg}
+%<driver, >\ProvidesFile{fontdef.drv}
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{fontdef.dtx}
+ [2004/02/04 v2.3a LaTeX Kernel
+% \iftrue (\else
+%<text, >(Text
+%<math, >(Math
+%<+cfgtext>(Uncustomised text
+%<+cfgmath>(Uncustomised math
+%<+cfgprel>(Uncustomised preload
+% \fi
+ font setup)]
+%
+% \CheckSum{1463}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+%\iffalse This is a META comment
+%
+% File `fontdef.dtx'.
+% Copyright (C) 1989-1999 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+% All rights reserved.
+%
+%\fi
+%
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/12/01}{Update for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1994/10/14}{New coding}
+% \changes{v2.2i}{1994/12/02}{Commented out \cs{ldots}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v2.2j}{1995/05/11}{Updates to some plain macros}
+% \changes{v2.2l}{1995/10/03}{\cs{@@sqrt} from patch file for /1701}
+% \changes{v2.2o}{1996/05/17}{\cs{@@sqrt} removed, at last}
+% \changes{v2.2p}{1996/11/20}{lowercase fd and enc.def file names /1044}
+% \changes{v2.2x}{1999/01/05}{Need special protection for character
+% \texttt{\char62} in \cs{changes} entry.}
+%
+% \title{The \texttt{fontdef.dtx} file\thanks
+% {This file has version number \fileversion, dated \filedate}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \def\dst{{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file is used to generate the files \texttt{fonttext.ltx} (text
+% font declarations) and \texttt{fontmath.ltx} (math font
+% declarations), which are used during the format generation. It
+% contains the declaration of the standard text encodings used at the
+% site as well as a minimal subset of font shape groups that NFSS will
+% look at to ensure that the specified encodings are valid.
+%
+% The math part contains the setup for math encodings as well as the
+% default math symbol declarations that belong to the encoding.
+%
+% It is possible to change this setup (by using other fonts, or
+% defaults) without losing the ability to
+% process documents written at other sites. Portability in this sense
+% means that a document will compile without errors. It does not mean,
+% however, that identical output will be produced. For this it is
+% necessary that the distributed setup is used at both installations.
+%
+% \section{Customization}
+%
+% You are not allowed to change this source file! If you want to
+% change the default encodings and/or the font shape groups preloaded
+% you should should create a copy of \texttt{fonttext.ltx}
+% under the name \texttt{fonttext.cfg} and change this copy. If
+% \LaTeXe{} finds a file of this name it will use it, otherwise it
+% uses the standard file which is \texttt{fontdef.ltx}.
+%
+% If you don't plan to use Computer Modern much or at all, it might
+% (!) be a good idea to make your own \texttt{fonttext.cfg}. Look at
+% the comments below (docstrip module `text') to see what should
+% should go into such a file.
+%
+% To change the math font setup use a copy of \texttt{fontmath.ltx}
+% under the name \texttt{fontmath.cfg} and change this copy. However,
+% dealing with this interface is even more a job for an expert than
+% changing the text font setup --- in short, we don't encourage either.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \textbf{Warning:} please note that we don't support customised
+% \LaTeX{} versions. Thus, before sending in a bug report please try
+% your test file with a \LaTeX{} format which is not customised and
+% send in the log from that version (unless the problem goes away).
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Please note: the following standard encodings have to
+% be defined in all local variants of \texttt{font....cfg} to guarantee
+% that all \LaTeX{} installations behave in the same way.
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% |T1| & Cork \TeX{} text encoding \\
+% |OT1| & old \TeX{} text encoding \\
+% |U| & unknown encoding \\
+% |OML| & old \TeX{} math letters encoding \\
+% |OMS| & old \TeX{} math symbols encoding \\
+% |OMX| & old \TeX{} math extension symbols encoding
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% Notice that some of these encodings are `old' in the sense that we
+% hope that they will be superseded soon by encoding standards defined
+% by the \TeX{} user community. Therefore this set of default encodings
+% may change in the future.
+%
+% The first candidate is |OT1| which will soon be replaced by |T1|, the
+% official \TeX{} text encoding.
+%
+% \begin{quote}\textbf{Warning:}
+% If you add additional encodings to this file there is no guarantee
+% any longer that files processable at your installation will also be
+% processable at other installations. Thus, if you make use of
+% such an encoding in your document, e.g.~if you intend to typeset in
+% Cyrillic (|OT2| encoding), you need to specify this encoding in the
+% preamble of your document prior to sending it to another
+% installation. Once the encoding is specified in that place in your
+% document, the document is processable at all \LaTeX{} installations
+% (provided they have suitable fonts installed).
+%
+% For this reason we suggest that you define a short package file that
+% sets up an additional encoding used at your site (rather than
+% putting the encoding into this file) since this package can easily
+% be shipped with your document.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{The \texttt{docstrip} modules}
+%
+% The following modules are used to direct \texttt{docstrip} in
+% generating external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% text & produce the file \texttt{fonttext.ltx}\\
+% math & produce the file \texttt{fontmath.ltx}\\
+% cfgtext & produce a dummy \texttt{fonttext.cfg} file\\
+% cfgmath & produce a dummy \texttt{fontmath.cfg} file\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% A typical \texttt{docstrip} command file would then have entries like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\generateFile{fonttext.ltx}{t}{\from{fontdef.dtx}{text}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \section{A driver for this document}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e.~the file that will produce the documentation you are
+% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the
+% \dst{} program.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{fontdef.dtx}
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{fontdef.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{The \texttt{fonttext.ltx} file}
+%
+% The identification is done earlier on with a |\ProvidesFile|
+% declaration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*text>
+\typeout{=== Don't modify this file, use a .cfg file instead ===^^J}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Encodings}
+%
+% This file declares the standard encodings for text and math
+% fonts. All others should be declared in packages or in the
+% documents directly.
+%
+% For every text encoding there are normally a number of encoding
+% specific commands, e.g.~accents, special characters, etc. (The
+% definition for such a command might have to change when the
+% encoding is changed, because the character is in a different
+% position, or not available at all, or the accent is produced in a
+% different way.) This is handled by a general mechanism which is
+% described in \texttt{ltoutenc.dtx}.
+%
+% By convention, text encoding specific declarations, including the
+% declaration |\DeclareFontEncoding|, are kept in separate file of
+% the form \meta{enc}\texttt{enc.def}, e.g.~\texttt{ot1enc.def}. This
+% allows other applications to make use of the declarations as
+% well.
+%
+% Similar to the default encoding, the loading of the encoding
+% files for the two major text encodings shouldn't be changed.
+% In particular, the \texttt{inputenc} package depends on this.
+% \changes{v2.2s}{1997/12/20}{Added documentation}
+%
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1994/01/05}{Removed nf prefix from file names.}
+% \changes{v2.1f}{1994/05/14}{Removed .def files.}
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1994/05/1g}{Removed \cs{DeclareFontEncoding} for ot1
+% and t1 and input .def files instead}
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1994/10/25}{Added OMSenc.def}
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1994/10/31}{Added OMLenc.def ...}
+% \changes{v2.2e}{1994/10/31}{... and moved further down}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{1994/11/07}{(DPC) Updated to use \cs{ProvidesFile}}
+% \changes{v2.2h}{1994/11/16}{(DPC) Removed \cmd\{ and \cmd\}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\input {omlenc.def}
+\input {t1enc.def}
+\input {ot1enc.def} % <- should come after T1 for speed
+\input {omsenc.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We then set set the default text font encoding. This will
+% hopefully change some day to |T1|. This setting should \emph{not}
+% be changed to produce a portable format.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fontencoding{OT1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If different encodings for text fonts are in use one could put
+% the common setup into |\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults|. There is
+% now a better mechanism so using this interface is discouraged!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then we define the default substitution for every encoding.
+% This release of \LaTeXe{} assumes that the ec fonts are
+% available. It is possible to change this to point to some other
+% font family (e.g., Times with the appropriate encoding if it is
+% available) without making documents non-portable. However, in
+% such a case documents will produce different page breaks at other
+% sites. The substitution defaults can all be changed without
+% losing portability as long as there are font shape definitions
+% for the selected substitutions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For every encoding declaration, \LaTeXe{} will try to verify that
+% the given substitution information makes sense, i.e.~that it is
+% impossible to go into an endless loop if font substitution
+% happens. This is done at the moment the |\begin{document}| is
+% encountered. \LaTeXe{} will then check that for every encoding the
+% substitution defaults form a valid font shape group, which means
+% that it will check if there is a |\DeclareFontShape| declaration
+% for this combination. We will therefore load the corresponding
+% |.fd| files now. If we don't do this they would be loaded at
+% verification time (i.e.~at |\begin{document}| which would delay
+% processing unnecessarily.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \textbf{Warning:} Please note that this means that you have to
+% regenerate the format whenever you change any of these
+% \texttt{.fd} files since \LaTeXe{} will not read \texttt{.fd}
+% files if it already knows about the encoding/family
+% combination.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2m}{1995/11/01}{add \cs{nfss@catcodes} for internal/1932}
+% The |\nfss@catcodes| ensures that white space is ignored in any
+% definitions made in the fd files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\nfss@catcodes
+\input {t1cmr.fd}
+\input {ot1cmr.fd}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We also load some other font definition files which are normally
+% needed in a document. This is only done for processing speed and
+% you can comment the next two lines out to save some memory. If
+% necessary these files are then loaded when your document is
+% processed. (Loading |.fd| files is a less drastic step compared
+% to preloading fonts because the number of fonts is limited 255 at
+% (nearly) every \TeX{} installation, while the amount of main memory
+% is not a limiting factor at most installations.)
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\nfss@catcodes
+\input {ot1cmss.fd}
+\input {ot1cmtt.fd}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Even with all the precautions it is still possible that NFSS will
+% run into problems, for example, when a |.fd| file contains
+% corrupted data. To guard against such cases NFSS has a very
+% low-level fallback font that is installed with the following line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This means, ``if everything else fails use Computer Modern Roman
+% normal shape at 10pt in the old text encoding''.
+% You can change the font used but the encoding should be the same
+% as the one specified with |\fontencoding| above.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Defaults}
+%
+% To allow the use of |\rmfamily|, |\sffamily|, etc.\ in documents
+% even if non-standard families are used we provide nine macros
+% which hold the name of the corresponding families, series, and so
+% on. This makes it easy to use other font families (like Times
+% Roman, etc.). One simply has to redefine these defaults.
+%
+% All these hooks have to be defined in this file but you can
+% change their meaning (except for |\encodingdefault|) without
+% making documents non-portable.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rmdefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\sfdefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\ttdefault}
+% The following three definitions set up the meaning for
+% |\rmfamily|, |\sffamily|, and |\ttfamily|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\rmdefault{cmr}
+\newcommand\sfdefault{cmss}
+\newcommand\ttdefault{cmtt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bfdefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\mddefault}
+% Series changing commands are influenced by the following hooks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bfdefault{bx}
+\newcommand\mddefault{m}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itdefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\sldefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\scdefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\updefault}
+% Shape changing commands use the following hooks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\itdefault{it}
+\newcommand\sldefault{sl}
+\newcommand\scdefault{sc}
+\newcommand\updefault{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\encodingdefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\familydefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\seriesdefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\shapedefault}
+% Finally we have the hooks that describe the behaviour of
+% the |\normalfont| command. To stay portable, the definition of
+% |\encodingdefault| should \emph{not} be changed and should match
+% the setting above for |\fontencoding|. All other values can be
+% set according to your taste.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\encodingdefault{OT1}
+\newcommand\familydefault{\rmdefault}
+\newcommand\seriesdefault{\mddefault}
+\newcommand\shapedefault{\updefault}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% This finishes the low-level setup in \texttt{fonttext.ltx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</text>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{The \texttt{fontmath.ltx} file}
+%
+% The identification is done earlier on with a |\ProvidesFile|
+% declaration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*math>
+\typeout{=== Don't modify this file, use a .cfg file instead ===^^J}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The font encodings used}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OML}{}{}
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OMS}{}{}
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OMX}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally a declaration for |U| encoding which serves for all fonts
+% that do not fit standard encodings. For math this sets up
+% |\noaccents@| providing for AMS-\LaTeX{}. This macro is used
+% therein to handle accented characters if they are not supported
+% by the font. In other words, if fonts with |U| encoding are used
+% in math, all accents (like from |\breve|) are obtained from some
+% other font that has them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontEncoding{U}{}{\noaccents@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The encodings for math are next:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{U}{cmr}{m}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\nfss@catcodes
+\input {omlcmm.fd}
+\input {omscmsy.fd}
+\input {omxcmex.fd}
+\input {ucmr.fd}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Symbolfont and Alphabet declarations}
+%
+% We now define the basic symbol fonts used by \LaTeX{}.
+% These four symbol fonts must be defined by this file.
+%
+% It is possible to make the symbol fonts point to other external
+% fonts without losing the ability to process documents written
+% at other sites, as long as one defines the same symbol font names
+% with the same encodings, e.g.~|operators| with |OT1| etc.
+% If other encodings are used documents become non-portable.
+% Such a change should therefore be done in a package file.
+%
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/01/19}{Added missing setting for symbols in
+% bold version.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{operators} {OT1}{cmr} {m}{n}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{letters} {OML}{cmm} {m}{it}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{symbols} {OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{cmr} {bx}{n}
+\SetSymbolFont{letters} {bold}{OML}{cmm} {b}{it}
+\SetSymbolFont{symbols} {bold}{OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Below are the seven math alphabets which are defined by NFSS.
+% Again they must be defined by this file.
+% However, as before you can change the fonts used without losing
+% portability, but you should be careful when changing the encoding
+% since that may make documents come out wrong.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathrm} {operators}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathnormal}{letters}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathcal} {symbols}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet {\mathbf}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet {\mathsf}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet {\mathit}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{it}
+\DeclareMathAlphabet {\mathtt}{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Given the currently available fonts we cannot bold-en |\mathbf|
+% and |\mathtt| but in principle one could use `ultra bold' or
+% something. The alphabets defined via |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|
+% will change automatically in a new math version if the
+% corresponding symbol font changes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{OT1}{cmss}{bx}{n}
+\SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{it}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Math font sizes}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{1994/11/07}
+% {(DPC) Add \cs{DeclareMathSizes} declarations}
+%
+% The declarations below declare the text, script and scriptscript
+% size to be used for each text font size.
+%
+% All occurences of sizes longer than a single character are replaced
+% with the macro name that holds them, saving a number of
+% tokens (but losing a bit of speed, so this may not stay this way).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{5}{5}{5}{5}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{6}{6}{5}{5}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{7}{7}{5}{5}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{8}{8}{6}{5}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{9}{9}{6}{5}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{\@xpt}{\@xpt}{7}{5}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{\@xipt}{\@xipt}{8}{6}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{\@xiipt}{\@xiipt}{8}{6}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{\@xivpt}{\@xivpt}{\@xpt}{7}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{\@xviipt}{\@xviipt}{\@xiipt}{\@xpt}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{\@xxpt}{\@xxpt}{\@xivpt}{\@xiipt}
+ \DeclareMathSizes{\@xxvpt}{\@xxvpt}{\@xxpt}{\@xviipt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The math symbol assignments}
+%
+% We start by setting up math codes for most of the characters
+% typed in directly from the keyboard. Most of them are normally
+% already setup up in the same way by Ini\TeX{}. However, we repeat
+% them here to have a complete setup which can be exchanged with
+% another if desired.
+%
+% \subsubsection{The letters}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{a}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`a}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{b}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`b}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{c}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`c}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{d}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`d}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{e}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`e}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{f}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`f}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{g}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`g}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{h}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`h}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{i}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`i}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{j}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`j}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{k}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`k}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{l}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`l}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{m}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`m}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{n}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`n}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{o}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`o}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{p}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`p}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{q}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`q}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{r}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`r}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{s}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`s}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{t}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`t}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{u}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`u}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{v}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`v}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{w}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`w}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{x}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`x}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{y}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`y}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{z}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{A}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{B}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{C}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{D}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{E}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{F}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{G}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`G}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{H}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`H}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{I}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`I}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{J}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`J}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{K}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`K}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{L}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`L}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{M}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`M}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{N}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`N}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{O}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`O}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{P}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`P}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{Q}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`Q}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{R}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`R}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{S}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`S}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{T}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`T}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{U}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`U}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{V}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`V}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{W}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`W}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{X}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`X}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{Y}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`Y}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{Z}{\mathalpha}{letters}{`Z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The digits}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{0}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`0}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{1}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`1}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{2}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`2}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{3}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`3}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{4}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`4}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{5}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`5}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{6}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`6}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{7}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`7}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{8}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`8}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{9}{\mathalpha}{operators}{`9}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Punctuation, brace, etc. keys}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{!}{\mathclose}{operators}{"21}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{*}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"03} % \ast
+\DeclareMathSymbol{+}{\mathbin}{operators}{"2B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{,}{\mathpunct}{letters}{"3B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{-}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"00}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{.}{\mathord}{letters}{"3A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{:}{\mathrel}{operators}{"3A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{;}{\mathpunct}{operators}{"3B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{=}{\mathrel}{operators}{"3D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{?}{\mathclose}{operators}{"3F}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following symbols are defined as delimiters below
+% which automatically defines them as math symbols.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{(}{\mathopen}{operators}{"28}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{)}{\mathclose}{operators}{"29}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{/}{\mathord}{letters}{"3D}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{[}{\mathopen}{operators}{"5B}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{]}{\mathclose}{operators}{"5D}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{|}{\mathord}{symbols}{"6A}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{<}{\mathrel}{letters}{"3C}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{>}{\mathrel}{letters}{"3E}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Should all of the following being activated by default? Probably
+% not.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{`\{}{\mathopen}{symbols}{"66}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{`\}}{\mathclose}{symbols}{"67}
+%\DeclareMathSymbol{`\\}{\mathord}{symbols}{"6E} % \backslash
+\mathcode`\ ="8000 % \space
+\mathcode`\'="8000 % ^\prime
+\mathcode`\_="8000 % \_
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Delimitercodes for characters}
+% \changes{v2.2q}{1997/01/08}
+% {Use \cs{DeclareMathDelimiter} to set delimiter codes}
+% \changes{v2.2u}{1998/04/15}
+% {Use new syntax for \cs{DeclareMathDelimiter}}
+% [to be completed]
+%
+% Finally, Ini\TeX{} sets all |\delcode| values to -1, except
+% |\delcode`.=0|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{(}{\mathopen} {operators}{"28}{largesymbols}{"00}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{)}{\mathclose}{operators}{"29}{largesymbols}{"01}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{[}{\mathopen} {operators}{"5B}{largesymbols}{"02}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{]}{\mathclose}{operators}{"5D}{largesymbols}{"03}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The next two are considered to be relations when not used in the context
+% of a delimiter! And worse, they do even represent different glyphs when
+% being used as delimiter and not as delimiter. This is a user level syntax
+% inherited from plain \TeX{}. Therefore we explicitly redefine the math
+% symbol definitions for these symbols afterwards.
+% \changes{v2.2v}{1998/04/17}
+% {Reinsert symbol defs for \texttt{<} and \texttt{\char62} chars.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{<}{\mathopen}{symbols}{"68}{largesymbols}{"0A}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{>}{\mathclose}{symbols}{"69}{largesymbols}{"0B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{<}{\mathrel}{letters}{"3C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{>}{\mathrel}{letters}{"3E}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And here is another case where the non-delimiter version produces a
+% glyph different from the delimiter version.
+% \changes{v2.2w}{1998/04/18}
+% {Reinsert symbol def for \texttt{/} char.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{/}{\mathord}{operators}{"2F}{largesymbols}{"0E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{/}{\mathord}{letters}{"3D}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{|}{\mathord}{symbols}{"6A}{largesymbols}{"0C}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\DeclareMathDelimiter\@backslashchar
+ {\mathord}{symbols}{"6E}{largesymbols}{"0F}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% N.B. |{| and |}| should NOT get delcodes;
+% otherwise parameter grouping fails!
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Symbols accessed via control sequences}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Greek letters}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\alpha}{\mathord}{letters}{"0B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\beta}{\mathord}{letters}{"0C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\gamma}{\mathord}{letters}{"0D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\delta}{\mathord}{letters}{"0E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\epsilon}{\mathord}{letters}{"0F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\zeta}{\mathord}{letters}{"10}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\eta}{\mathord}{letters}{"11}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\theta}{\mathord}{letters}{"12}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\iota}{\mathord}{letters}{"13}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\kappa}{\mathord}{letters}{"14}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\lambda}{\mathord}{letters}{"15}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\mu}{\mathord}{letters}{"16}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\nu}{\mathord}{letters}{"17}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\xi}{\mathord}{letters}{"18}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\pi}{\mathord}{letters}{"19}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\rho}{\mathord}{letters}{"1A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\sigma}{\mathord}{letters}{"1B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\tau}{\mathord}{letters}{"1C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\upsilon}{\mathord}{letters}{"1D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\phi}{\mathord}{letters}{"1E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\chi}{\mathord}{letters}{"1F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\psi}{\mathord}{letters}{"20}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\omega}{\mathord}{letters}{"21}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\varepsilon}{\mathord}{letters}{"22}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\vartheta}{\mathord}{letters}{"23}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\varpi}{\mathord}{letters}{"24}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\varrho}{\mathord}{letters}{"25}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\varsigma}{\mathord}{letters}{"26}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\varphi}{\mathord}{letters}{"27}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Gamma}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"00}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Delta}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"01}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Theta}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"02}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Lambda}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"03}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Xi}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"04}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Pi}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"05}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Sigma}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"06}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Upsilon}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"07}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Phi}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"08}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Psi}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"09}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Omega}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"0A}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Ordinary symbols}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\aleph}{\mathord}{symbols}{"40}
+\def\hbar{{\mathchar'26\mkern-9muh}}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\imath}{\mathord}{letters}{"7B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\jmath}{\mathord}{letters}{"7C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\ell}{\mathord}{letters}{"60}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\wp}{\mathord}{letters}{"7D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Re}{\mathord}{symbols}{"3C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Im}{\mathord}{symbols}{"3D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\partial}{\mathord}{letters}{"40}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\infty}{\mathord}{symbols}{"31}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\prime}{\mathord}{symbols}{"30}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\emptyset}{\mathord}{symbols}{"3B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\nabla}{\mathord}{symbols}{"72}
+\def\surd{{\mathchar"1270}}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\top}{\mathord}{symbols}{"3E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bot}{\mathord}{symbols}{"3F}
+\def\angle{{\vbox{\ialign{$\m@th\scriptstyle##$\crcr
+ \not\mathrel{\mkern14mu}\crcr
+ \noalign{\nointerlineskip}
+ \mkern2.5mu\leaders\hrule \@height.34pt\hfill\mkern2.5mu\crcr}}}}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\triangle}{\mathord}{symbols}{"34}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\forall}{\mathord}{symbols}{"38}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\exists}{\mathord}{symbols}{"39}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\neg}{\mathord}{symbols}{"3A}
+ \let\lnot=\neg
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\flat}{\mathord}{letters}{"5B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\natural}{\mathord}{letters}{"5C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\sharp}{\mathord}{letters}{"5D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\clubsuit}{\mathord}{symbols}{"7C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\diamondsuit}{\mathord}{symbols}{"7D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\heartsuit}{\mathord}{symbols}{"7E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\spadesuit}{\mathord}{symbols}{"7F}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Large Operators}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\coprod}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"60}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigvee}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"57}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigwedge}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"56}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\biguplus}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"55}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigcap}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"54}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigcup}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"53}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\intop}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"52}
+ \def\int{\intop\nolimits}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\prod}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"51}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\sum}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"50}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigotimes}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"4E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigoplus}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"4C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigodot}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"4A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\ointop}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"48}
+ \def\oint{\ointop\nolimits}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigsqcup}{\mathop}{largesymbols}{"46}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\smallint}{\mathop}{symbols}{"73}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Binary symbols}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3a}{2004/02/04}
+% {Added bigtriangle synonyms for stmaryrd}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\triangleleft}{\mathbin}{letters}{"2F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\triangleright}{\mathbin}{letters}{"2E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigtriangleup}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"34}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigtriangledown}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"35}
+ \let \varbigtriangledown \bigtriangledown
+ \let \varbigtriangleup \bigtriangleup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% These last two synonyms are needed because the \textsf{stamryrd}
+% package redefines them as Operators.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\wedge}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"5E}
+ \let\land=\wedge
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\vee}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"5F}
+ \let\lor=\vee
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\cap}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"5C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\cup}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"5B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\ddagger}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"7A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\dagger}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"79}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\sqcap}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"75}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\sqcup}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"74}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\uplus}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"5D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\amalg}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"71}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\diamond}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"05}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bullet}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"0F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\wr}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"6F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\div}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"04}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\odot}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"0C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\oslash}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"0B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\otimes}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"0A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\ominus}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"09}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\oplus}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"08}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\mp}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"07}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\pm}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"06}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\circ}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"0E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bigcirc}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"0D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\setminus}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"6E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\cdot}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"01}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\ast}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"03}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\times}{\mathbin}{symbols}{"02}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\star}{\mathbin}{letters}{"3F}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Relations}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\propto}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"2F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\sqsubseteq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"76}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\sqsupseteq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"77}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\parallel}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"6B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\mid}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"6A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\dashv}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"61}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\vdash}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"60}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\nearrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"25}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\searrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"26}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\nwarrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"2D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\swarrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"2E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Leftrightarrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"2C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Leftarrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"28}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Rightarrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"29}
+\def\neq{\not=} \let\ne=\neq
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\leq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"14}
+ \let\le=\leq
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\geq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"15}
+ \let\ge=\geq
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\succ}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"1F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\prec}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"1E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\approx}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"19}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\succeq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"17}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\preceq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"16}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\supset}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"1B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\subset}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"1A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\supseteq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"13}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\subseteq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"12}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\in}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"32}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\ni}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"33}
+ \let\owns=\ni
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\gg}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"1D}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\ll}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"1C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\not}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"36}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\leftrightarrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"24}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\leftarrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"20}
+ \let\gets=\leftarrow
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\rightarrow}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"21}
+ \let\to=\rightarrow
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\mapstochar}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"37}
+ \def\mapsto{\mapstochar\rightarrow}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\sim}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"18}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\simeq}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"27}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\perp}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"3F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\equiv}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"11}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\asymp}{\mathrel}{symbols}{"10}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\smile}{\mathrel}{letters}{"5E}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\frown}{\mathrel}{letters}{"5F}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\leftharpoonup}{\mathrel}{letters}{"28}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\leftharpoondown}{\mathrel}{letters}{"29}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\rightharpoonup}{\mathrel}{letters}{"2A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\rightharpoondown}{\mathrel}{letters}{"2B}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here cometh much profligate robustification of math constructs.
+% Warning: some of these commands may become non-robust if an
+% AMS package is loaded.
+%
+% Further potential problems: some math font packages may make
+% unfortunate assumptions about some of these definitions that are
+% not true of the robust versions we need.
+% \changes{v2.3}{2004/02/02}
+% {Many things from here on made robust}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \cong{\mathrel{\mathpalette\@vereq\sim}} % congruence sign
+\def\@vereq#1#2{\lower.5\p@\vbox{\lineskiplimit\maxdimen\lineskip-.5\p@
+ \ialign{$\m@th#1\hfil##\hfil$\crcr#2\crcr=\crcr}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \notin{\mathrel{\m@th\mathpalette\c@ncel\in}}
+\def\c@ncel#1#2{\m@th\ooalign{$\hfil#1\mkern1mu/\hfil$\crcr$#1#2$}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \rightleftharpoons{\mathrel{\mathpalette\rlh@{}}}
+\def\rlh@#1{\vcenter{\m@th\hbox{\ooalign{\raise2pt
+ \hbox{$#1\rightharpoonup$}\crcr
+ $#1\leftharpoondown$}}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \doteq{\buildrel\textstyle.\over=}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Arrows}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \joinrel{\mathrel{\mkern-3mu}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \relbar{\mathrel{\smash-}} % \smash, because -
+ % has the same height as +
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In contrast to \texttt{plain.tex} |\Relbar| got braces around the
+% equal sign to guard against it being ``math active'' expanding to
+% |\futurelet...|. This might be the case when packages are
+% implementing shorthands for math, e.g. |=>| meaning |\Rightarrow|
+% etc. It would actually be better not to use |=| in such
+% definitions but instead define something like |\mathequalsign|
+% and use this. However we can't do this now as it would break
+% other math layouts where characters are in different places
+% (since those wouldn't know about the need for a new command name).
+% \changes{v2.2z}{2001/06/04}{Guard against math active equal sign in
+% \cs{Relbar} (pr/3333)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \Relbar{\mathrel{=}}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\lhook}{\mathrel}{letters}{"2C}
+ \def\hookrightarrow{\lhook\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\rhook}{\mathrel}{letters}{"2D}
+ \def\hookleftarrow{\leftarrow\joinrel\rhook}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \bowtie{\mathrel\triangleright\joinrel\mathrel\triangleleft}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2z}{2001/06/04}{Guard against math active equal and pipe
+% sign in \cs{models} (pr/3333)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \models{\mathrel{|}\joinrel\Relbar}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \Longrightarrow{\Relbar\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% LaTeX Change: |\longrightarrow| and |\longleftarrow| redefined to make
+% then robust.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\longrightarrow
+ {\relbar\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\longleftarrow
+ {\leftarrow\joinrel\relbar}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \Longleftarrow{\Leftarrow\joinrel\Relbar}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \longmapsto{\mapstochar\longrightarrow}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \longleftrightarrow{\leftarrow\joinrel\rightarrow}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \Longleftrightarrow{\Leftarrow\joinrel\Rightarrow}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \iff{\;\Longleftrightarrow\;}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Punctuation symbols}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\ldotp}{\mathpunct}{letters}{"3A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\cdotp}{\mathpunct}{symbols}{"01}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\colon}{\mathpunct}{operators}{"3A}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% This is commented out, since |\ldots| is now defined in ltoutenc.dtx.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@ldots{\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}}
+%\DeclareRobustCommand\ldots
+% {\relax\ifmmode\@ldots\else\mbox{$\m@th\@ldots\,$}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \cdots{\mathinner{\cdotp\cdotp\cdotp}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \vdots{\vbox{\baselineskip4\p@ \lineskiplimit\z@
+ \kern6\p@\hbox{.}\hbox{.}\hbox{.}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand
+ \ddots{\mathinner{\mkern1mu\raise7\p@
+ \vbox{\kern7\p@\hbox{.}}\mkern2mu
+ \raise4\p@\hbox{.}\mkern2mu\raise\p@\hbox{.}\mkern1mu}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Math accents}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\acute}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"13}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\grave}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"12}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\ddot}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"7F}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\tilde}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"7E}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\bar}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"16}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\breve}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"15}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\check}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"14}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\hat}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"5E}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\vec}{\mathord}{letters}{"7E}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\dot}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"5F}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\widetilde}{\mathord}{largesymbols}{"65}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\widehat}{\mathord}{largesymbols}{"62}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For some reason plain \TeX{} never bothered to provide
+% a ring accent in math (although it is available in the fonts),
+% but since we got a request for it here we go:
+% \changes{v2.2t}{1998/04/11}{Added \cs{mathring} accent (pr2785)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathAccent{\mathring}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"17}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Radicals}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2o}{1996/05/17}{\cs{@@sqrt} removed, at last}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathRadical{\sqrtsign}{symbols}{"70}{largesymbols}{"70}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Over and under something, etc}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\overrightarrow#1{\vbox{\m@th\ialign{##\crcr
+ \rightarrowfill\crcr\noalign{\kern-\p@\nointerlineskip}
+ $\hfil\displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\crcr}}}
+\def\overleftarrow#1{\vbox{\m@th\ialign{##\crcr
+ \leftarrowfill\crcr\noalign{\kern-\p@\nointerlineskip}%
+ $\hfil\displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\crcr}}}
+\def\overbrace#1{\mathop{\vbox{\m@th\ialign{##\crcr\noalign{\kern3\p@}%
+ \downbracefill\crcr\noalign{\kern3\p@\nointerlineskip}%
+ $\hfil\displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\crcr}}}\limits}
+\def\underbrace#1{\mathop{\vtop{\m@th\ialign{##\crcr
+ $\hfil\displaystyle{#1}\hfil$\crcr
+ \noalign{\kern3\p@\nointerlineskip}%
+ \upbracefill\crcr\noalign{\kern3\p@}}}}\limits}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% (quite a waste of tokens, IMHO --- Frank)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\skew#1#2#3{{\muskip\z@#1mu\divide\muskip\z@\tw@ \mkern\muskip\z@
+ #2{\mkern-\muskip\z@{#3}\mkern\muskip\z@}\mkern-\muskip\z@}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2n}{1995/11/21}{Incorporate changed figures,
+% as in plain.tex}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rightarrowfill{$\m@th\smash-\mkern-7mu%
+ \cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu\smash-\mkern-2mu$}\hfill
+ \mkern-7mu\mathord\rightarrow$}
+\def\leftarrowfill{$\m@th\mathord\leftarrow\mkern-7mu%
+ \cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu\smash-\mkern-2mu$}\hfill
+ \mkern-7mu\smash-$}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\braceld}{\mathord}{largesymbols}{"7A}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bracerd}{\mathord}{largesymbols}{"7B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\bracelu}{\mathord}{largesymbols}{"7C}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\braceru}{\mathord}{largesymbols}{"7D}
+\def\downbracefill{$\m@th \setbox\z@\hbox{$\braceld$}%
+ \braceld\leaders\vrule \@height\ht\z@ \@depth\z@\hfill\braceru
+ \bracelu\leaders\vrule \@height\ht\z@ \@depth\z@\hfill\bracerd$}
+\def\upbracefill{$\m@th \setbox\z@\hbox{$\braceld$}%
+ \bracelu\leaders\vrule \@height\ht\z@ \@depth\z@\hfill\bracerd
+ \braceld\leaders\vrule \@height\ht\z@ \@depth\z@\hfill\braceru$}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Delimiters}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\lmoustache} % top from (, bottom from )
+ {\mathopen}{largesymbols}{"7A}{largesymbols}{"40}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\rmoustache} % top from ), bottom from (
+ {\mathclose}{largesymbols}{"7B}{largesymbols}{"41}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\arrowvert} % arrow without arrowheads
+ {\mathord}{symbols}{"6A}{largesymbols}{"3C}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\Arrowvert} % double arrow without arrowheads
+ {\mathord}{symbols}{"6B}{largesymbols}{"3D}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\Vert}
+ {\mathord}{symbols}{"6B}{largesymbols}{"0D}
+\let\|=\Vert
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\vert}
+ {\mathord}{symbols}{"6A}{largesymbols}{"0C}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\uparrow}
+ {\mathrel}{symbols}{"22}{largesymbols}{"78}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\downarrow}
+ {\mathrel}{symbols}{"23}{largesymbols}{"79}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\updownarrow}
+ {\mathrel}{symbols}{"6C}{largesymbols}{"3F}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\Uparrow}
+ {\mathrel}{symbols}{"2A}{largesymbols}{"7E}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\Downarrow}
+ {\mathrel}{symbols}{"2B}{largesymbols}{"7F}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\Updownarrow}
+ {\mathrel}{symbols}{"6D}{largesymbols}{"77}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\backslash} % for double coset G\backslash H
+ {\mathord}{symbols}{"6E}{largesymbols}{"0F}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\rangle}
+ {\mathclose}{symbols}{"69}{largesymbols}{"0B}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\langle}
+ {\mathopen}{symbols}{"68}{largesymbols}{"0A}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\rbrace}
+ {\mathclose}{symbols}{"67}{largesymbols}{"09}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\lbrace}
+ {\mathopen}{symbols}{"66}{largesymbols}{"08}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\rceil}
+ {\mathclose}{symbols}{"65}{largesymbols}{"07}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\lceil}
+ {\mathopen}{symbols}{"64}{largesymbols}{"06}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\rfloor}
+ {\mathclose}{symbols}{"63}{largesymbols}{"05}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\lfloor}
+ {\mathopen}{symbols}{"62}{largesymbols}{"04}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lgroup}
+% \begin{macro}{\rgroup}
+% \begin{macro}{\bracevert}
+% There are three plain \TeX{} delimiters which are not fully
+% supported by NFSS, since they partly point into a bold cmr font.
+% Allocating a full symbol font, just to have three delimiters
+% seems a bit too much given the limited space available. For this
+% reason only the extensible sizes are supported. If this is not
+% desired one can use, without losing portability, define |\mathbf|
+% and |\mathtt| as font symbol alphabet (setting up
+% \texttt{cmr/bx/n} and \texttt{cmtt/m/n} as symbol fonts first)
+% and modify the delimiter declarations to point with their
+% small variant to those symbol fonts. (This is done in
+% \texttt{oldlfont.dtx} so look there for examples.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\lgroup} % extensible ( with sharper tips
+ {\mathopen}{largesymbols}{"3A}{largesymbols}{"3A}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\rgroup} % extensible ) with sharper tips
+ {\mathclose}{largesymbols}{"3B}{largesymbols}{"3B}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\bracevert} % the vertical bar that extends braces
+ {\mathord}{largesymbols}{"3E}{largesymbols}{"3E}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Math versions of text commands}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2k}{1995/06/05}{Moved math commands from ltoutenc.dtx.}
+%
+% The |\mathunderscore| here is really a text definition, so it has
+% been put back into |ltoutenc.dtx| (by Chris, 30/04/97) and should
+% be removed from here.
+%
+% These symbols are the math versions of text commands such as |\P|,
+% |\$|, etc.
+% \begin{macro}{\mathparagraph}
+% \changes{v2.2q}{1997/01/08}
+% {Define using \cs{DeclareMathSymbol}}
+% \begin{macro}{\mathsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\mathdollar}
+% \begin{macro}{\mathsterling}
+% \begin{macro}{\mathunderscore}
+% These math symbols are not in plain \TeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\mathparagraph}{\mathord}{symbols}{"7B}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\mathsection}{\mathord}{symbols}{"78}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\mathdollar}{\mathord}{operators}{"24}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathsterling{\mathit{\mathchar"7024}}
+\def\mathunderscore{\kern.06em\vbox{\hrule\@width.3em}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathellipsis}
+% This is plain \TeX's |\ldots|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathellipsis{\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Other special functions and parameters}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Biggggg}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\big#1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to8.5\p@{}\right.\n@space$}}}
+\def\Big#1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to11.5\p@{}\right.\n@space$}}}
+\def\bigg#1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to14.5\p@{}\right.\n@space$}}}
+\def\Bigg#1{{\hbox{$\left#1\vbox to17.5\p@{}\right.\n@space$}}}
+\def\n@space{\nulldelimiterspace\z@ \m@th}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{The log-like functions}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\operator@font}
+% The |\operator@font| determines the symbol font used for log-like
+% functions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\operator@font{\mathgroup\symoperators}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Parameters}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\thinmuskip=3mu
+\medmuskip=4mu plus 2mu minus 4mu
+\thickmuskip=5mu plus 5mu
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% This finishes the low-level setup in \texttt{fontmath.ltx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</math>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Default cfg files}
+%
+% We provide default \texttt{cfg} files here to ensure that
+% on installations that search large file trees we do not pick up
+% some strange customisation files from somewhere.
+% \changes{v2.2y}{2001/06/02}{Provide default cfg files (pr/3264)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cfgtext|cfgmath|cfgprel>
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% Load the standard setup:
+%%
+%<+cfgtext>\input{fonttext.ltx}
+%<+cfgmath>\input{fontmath.ltx}
+%<+cfgprel>\input{preload.ltx}
+%%
+%% Small changes could go here; see documentation in cfgguide.tex for
+%% allowed modifications.
+%%
+%% In particular it is not allowed to misuse this configuration file
+%% to modify internal LaTeX commands!
+%%
+%% If you use this file as the basis for configuration please change
+%% the \ProvidesFile lines to clearly identify your modification, e.g.,
+%%
+%<+cfgtext>%% \ProvidesFile{fonttext.cfg}[2001/06/01
+%<+cfgmath>%% \ProvidesFile{fonttext.cfg}[2001/06/01
+%<+cfgprel>%% \ProvidesFile{preload.cfg}[2001/06/01
+%% Customised local font setup]
+%%
+%%
+%</cfgtext|cfgmath|cfgprel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d05e13d3af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/format.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+\input docstrip
+\keepsilent
+
+\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\declarepreamble\cfgpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+Details of how to use a configuration file to modify this part of
+the system are in the document `cfgguide.tex'.
+
+
+\endpreamble
+
+
+\usepreamble\mainpreamble
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{%
+ \file{latex.ltx}{%
+ \from{ltdirchk.dtx}{initex,2ekernel,dircheck}
+ \from{ltplain.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltvers.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltdefns.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltalloc.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltcntrl.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{lterror.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltpar.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltspace.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltlogos.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfiles.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltcounts.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltlength.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfssbas.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfsstrc.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfsscmp.dtx}{compat,2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfssdcl.dtx}{compat,2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfssini.dtx}{compat}
+ \from{ltfntcmd.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltpageno.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltxref.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltmiscen.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltmath.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltlists.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltboxes.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{lttab.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltpictur.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltthm.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltsect.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfloat.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltidxglo.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltbibl.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltpage.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltoutput.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltclass.dtx}{2ekernel}
+ \from{ltfinal.dtx}{2ekernel}}
+ \file{tracefnt.sty}{%
+ \from{ltfsstrc.dtx}{package,trace}}
+ \file{flafter.sty}{%
+ \from{ltoutput.dtx}{flafter}}
+%%% generate general option files modifying the kernel behavior
+ \file{fleqn.clo}{%
+ \from{ltmath.dtx}{fleqn}}
+ \file{leqno.clo}{%
+ \from{ltmath.dtx}{leqno}}
+ }
+
+
+
+
+% \generateFile{fltrace.sty}{t}{% %%% not yet finished
+% \from{ltoutput.dtx}{fltrace,trace}
+% }
+
+
+\generateFile{oldlfont.sty}{t}{%
+ \from{oldlfont.dtx}{package}
+}
+
+\generateFile{newlfont.sty}{t}{%
+ \from{newlfont.dtx}{package}
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% CUSTOMISABLE FILES
+
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\usepreamble\cfgpreamble
+
+\generateFile{hyphen.ltx}{t}{%
+ \from{lthyphen.dtx}{default}
+}
+
+
+\generate{
+ \file{fonttext.ltx}{
+ \from{fontdef.dtx}{text}}
+ \file{fontmath.ltx}{
+ \from{fontdef.dtx}{math}}
+ \file{fonttext.cfg}{
+ \from{fontdef.dtx}{cfgtext}}
+ \file{fontmath.cfg}{
+ \from{fontdef.dtx}{cfgmath}}
+ \file{preload.cfg}{
+ \from{fontdef.dtx}{cfgprel}}
+ }
+
+\generateFile{preload.ltx}{t}{%
+ \from{preload.dtx}{preload,cm,xpt,tex}}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e16442017dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%
+%% File `graphpap.dtx'.
+%% Copyright (C) 1994 by Leslie Lamport
+%% all rights reserved.
+%%
+%
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{graphpap}
+%<package> [1994/08/09 v1.0c Standard LaTeX graphpap package (LL)]
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage{graphpap}
+\GetFileInfo{graphpap.sty}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \textsf{graphpap} package\thanks{This file
+ has version number \fileversion, last
+ revised \filedate.}}
+\author{Leslie Lamport}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \maketitle
+ \DocInput{graphpap.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{114}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/04/28}{(DPC) convert to doc format}
+%
+%
+% |\graphpaper|\oarg{N}\parg{X,Y}\parg{DX,DY}
+% Makes a grid with left-hand corner at \parg{X,Y}, extending
+% \parg{DX,DY} units in the X and Y directions, where the lines are
+% \emph{N} units apart. Every fifth line is thick and is numbered.
+% The default value of \emph{N} is 10.
+% The arguments must all be integers.
+%
+% \StopEventually
+%
+% First, we define three counters. The first two are defined
+% as raw TeX counters since multiplication and division must be
+% performed in them.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/04/28}{(DPC) Remove allocations.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \newcount\@gridx% now (\@tempcnta)
+% \newcount\@gridy% now (\@tempcntb)
+% \newcounter{@grid}
+\let\c@@grid\count@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Next we define the following commands to draw vertical and horizontal
+% grids. The ``nonum'' commands just draw the grids; the other commands
+% also print numbers. All the arguments must be integers.
+%
+% VERTICAL GRIDS
+%
+% |\@vgrid|\parg{xpos,ypos}\marg{xincrement}^^A
+% \marg{number-of-lines}\marg{length-of-lines}\\
+% |\@nonumvgrid|\parg{xpos,ypos}\marg{xincrement}^^A
+% \marg{number-of-lines} \marg{length-of-lines}
+%
+% HORIZONTAL GRIDS
+%
+% |\@hgrid|\parg{xpos,ypos}\marg{yincrement}^^A
+% \marg{number-of-lines}\marg{length-of-lines}\\
+% |\@nonumhgrid| same as |\@hgrid| but no numbers drawn
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vgrid(#1,#2)#3#4#5{%
+ \setcounter{@grid}{#1}%
+ \multiput(#1,#2)(#3,0){#4}{\line(0,1){#5}}%
+ \multiput(#1,#2)(#3,0){#4}{\@vgridnumber{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vgridnumber#1{%
+ \makebox(0,0)[t]{%
+ \shortstack{\rule{0pt}{10pt}\\\arabic{@grid}}}%
+ \addtocounter{@grid}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nonumvgrid(#1,#2)#3#4#5{%
+ \multiput(#1,#2)(#3,0){#4}{\line(0,1){#5}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@hgrid(#1,#2)#3#4#5{%
+ \setcounter{@grid}{#2}%
+ \multiput(#1,#2)(0,#3){#4}{\line(1,0){#5}}%
+ \multiput(#1,#2)(0,#3){#4}{\@hgridnumber{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@hgridnumber#1{%
+ \makebox(0,0)[r]{\arabic{@grid}\hspace{10pt}}%
+ \addtocounter{@grid}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nonumhgrid(#1,#2)#3#4#5{%
+ \multiput(#1,#2)(0,#3){#4}{\line(1,0){#5}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Finally, |\graphpaper| is defined in a straightforward way in terms of
+% the commands above.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\graphpaper}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/08/09}{(DPC) add \cs{leavevmode}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\graphpaper[1][10]{\leavevmode\@grid{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@grid}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/04/28}
+% {(DPC) convert ignore spaces between arguments}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@grid#1(#2,#3)#4{\@grid@i{#1}{#2}{#3}(}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@grid@i}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/04/28}
+% {(DPC) macro introduced}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@grid@i#1#2#3(#4,#5){%
+ \@tempcnta=#4\relax
+ \divide\@tempcnta#1\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta1\relax
+ {\thinlines\@nonumvgrid(#2,#3){#1}{\@tempcnta}{#5}
+ \@tempcnta#4\relax
+ \divide\@tempcnta5\relax
+ \divide\@tempcnta#1\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta1\relax
+ \@tempcntb5\relax
+ \multiply\@tempcntb#1\relax
+ \thicklines\@vgrid(#2,#3){\@tempcntb}{\@tempcnta}{#5}
+ \@tempcnta#5\relax
+ \divide\@tempcnta #1\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta1\relax
+ \thinlines\@nonumhgrid(#2,#3){#1}{\@tempcnta}{#4}
+ \@tempcnta#5\relax
+ \divide\@tempcnta5\relax
+ \divide\@tempcnta#1\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta1\relax
+ \thicklines\@hgrid(#2,#3){\@tempcntb}{\@tempcnta}{#4}}%
+ \ignorespaces}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..93a347633e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/graphpap.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generateFile{graphpap.sty}{t}{\from{graphpap.dtx}{package}}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..18c24bd6631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,527 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%
+%% File `ifthen.dtx'.
+%% Copyright (C) 1991 by Leslie Lamport
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-2001 LaTeX3 project, David Carlisle
+%% all rights reserved.
+%%
+%
+%<*dtx>
+ \ProvidesFile{ifthen.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{ifthen}
+%<driver>\ProvidesFile{ifthen.drv}
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{ifthen.dtx}
+ [2001/05/26 v1.1c Standard LaTeX ifthen package (DPC)]
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{ifthen.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ifthen.dtx}
+%
+% \title{The \textsf{ifthen} package\thanks{This file
+% has version number \fileversion, last
+% revised \filedate.}}
+% \author{David Carlisle}
+% \date{\filedate}
+% \author{David Carlisle}
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \CheckSum{306}
+%
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% This file implements an |\ifthenelse| command for \LaTeXe.
+% The algorithm used is compatible with that used in the \LaTeX~2.09
+% |ifthen| style option. It has been recoded, making the resulting
+% definitions somewhat more compact and efficient.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1993/10/15}{New implementation}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1993/12/17}{Upgrade to LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/02/11}{Improve documentation}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/03/02}{Remove need for dtx file}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/03/14}{Modify for the new ltxdoc.cls}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1995/04/25}{Fix `driver' docstrip guards.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1997/11/03}{Documentation fix.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1998/08/17}{Documentation fix.}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\ifthenelse}
+% |\ifthenelse{|^^A
+% \meta{test}|}{|\meta{then clause}|}{|\meta{else clause}|}|
+%
+% Evaluates \meta{test} as a boolean function, and then executes
+% either \meta{then clause} or \meta{else clause}.
+%
+% \meta{test} is a boolean expression using the infix connectives,
+% |\and|, |\or|, the unary |\not| and parentheses |\( \)|.
+%
+% As an alternative notation |\AND|, |\OR| and |\NOT| can be
+% used. This is safer since it can't be misinterpreted
+% when appearing inside a \TeX-conditional in which |\or| has a
+% different meaning.
+%
+% The atomic propositions are:\\
+% \meta{number} |<| \meta{number} \\
+% \meta{number} |=| \meta{number} \\
+% \meta{number} |>| \meta{number} \\
+% |\isodd{| \meta{number} |}|\\
+% |\isundefined{| \meta{command name} |}|\\
+% |\equal{|\meta{string}|}{|\meta{string}|}|\\
+% |\lengthtest{|\meta{dimen}|<|\meta{dimen}|}|\\
+% |\lengthtest{|\meta{dimen}|=|\meta{dimen}|}|\\
+% |\lengthtest{|\meta{dimen}|>|\meta{dimen}|}|\\
+% |\boolean{|\meta{name}|}|
+%
+% The \meta{string}s tested by |\equal| may be any sequence of commands
+% that expand to a list of tokens. If these expansions are equal, then
+% the proposition is true.
+%
+% |\isodd| is true if the \meta{number} is odd, and false otherwise
+% (even if the argument is not a number).
+%
+% |\isundefined{\cmd}| is true if |\cmd| is not defined.
+%
+% |\boolean{xyz}| returns the truth value contained in the primitive
+% \TeX\ |\if|, |\ifxyz|. This is usually used with boolean flags
+% created with |\newboolean| and |\provideboolean| described below.
+% It can also be used with the names of |\newif| created tokens, and
+% primitive \TeX\ |\if| constructs, for example |\boolean{true}|
+% (|\iftrue|), |\boolean{mmode}| (|\ifmmode|) etc.
+%
+%
+% The commands:\\
+% |\newboolean|\marg{name}\DescribeMacro{\newboolean}\ and\
+% |\provideboolean|\marg{name}\DescribeMacro{\provideboolean}\
+% are provided so the user can easily create new boolean flags.
+% As for |\newcommand|, |\newboolean| generates an error if the
+% command name is not new. |\provideboolean| silently does nothing in
+% that case.
+%
+% The boolean flags may be set with:\\
+% |\setboolean|\marg{name}\marg{value}\DescribeMacro{\setboolean}\\
+% \meta{value} may be either |true| or |false| (any CaSe).
+%
+% Note that there is no precedence between |\and| and |\or|.
+% The proposition is evaluated in a left right manner. |\not| only
+% applies to the immediately following proposition. (This is consistent
+% with Lamport's |ifthen.sty|.) In this style, though the test is
+% `lazily' evaluated, so for instance if the first proposition in an
+% |\or| is true, the second one is skipped. (On the second pass---the
+% first pass in an |\edef| expands clauses in all propositions.)
+%
+% Apart from the addition of the extra atomic propositions |\isodd|,
+% |\boolean|, |\lengthtest| and |\isundefined|,
+% the only known incompatibility is that
+% in this package the expression|\not\not|\meta{P} is equivalent to
+% \meta{P}.
+% However in the original style it was equivalent to |\not|\meta{P}.
+% This is intentional (bug fix:-).
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\whiledo}
+% The command |\whiledo| is also defined (copied directly from
+% the \LaTeX2.09 definition).
+%
+% |\whiledo{|\meta{test}|}{|\meta{while clause}|}|
+%
+% With \meta{test} as above, repeatedly executes \meta{while clause}
+% while the test remains true.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@throw}
+% In order to support the syntax of |ifthen.sty|, which allows access
+% to the primitive \TeX\ syntax for a numeric test, rather than a |{}|
+% delimited argument form, it is most convenient to work `within' an
+% |\ifnum|. |\ift@throw| `throws' you out of the current |\ifnum| so
+% that you can (eg) start an |\ifdim| for the length tests.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@throw{\@ne=\@ne\noexpand\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\boolean}
+% A non-standard extension to |ifthen|, supporting boolean was
+% previously available, this is a simpler implementation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\boolean#1#2{%
+ \TE@throw\expandafter\noexpand\csname if#1\endcsname#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@length}
+% Testing lengths. |#1| is the test. The extra argument gobbles spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@length#1#2{\TE@throw\noexpand\ifdim#1#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@odd}
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@@odd}
+% Testing odd/even. This is true if |#1| is an odd number, and false
+% otherwise (even if |#1| is not a number at all).
+%
+% It is hard to make this completely reliable. Here I have erred on the
+% side of safety. This should not generate a \TeX\ error if given any
+% robust commands as its argument. However it returns true on any
+% argument that \emph{starts} with an odd number |11xx| which is bad,
+% and it can not deal with \TeX's count registers, although \LaTeX\
+% counters work (via |\value|).
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1993/12/17}{Improve \cs{isodd}.}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/01/20}{Improve \cs{isodd} again.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@odd#1#2{%
+ \TE@throw\noexpand\TE@@odd#1\noexpand\@nil\noexpand\ifodd\count@#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% |\TE@@odd| is not expanded on the first pass.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@@odd#1#2\@nil{%
+ \@defaultunits
+ \count@\if-#1-0\else0\expandafter#1\fi#2\relax\@nnil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@repl}
+% |\TE@repl| replaces the single token |#1| by |#2|. (Not within |{}|
+% groups.) It is used to replace |\or| by |\TE@or| without the need to
+% redefine |\or|. Earlier versions just |\let\or\TE@or| but this has a
+% bad effect on the expansion of commands which use the primitive
+% |\or| internally, eg |\alph|, and so caused surprising results if
+% these commands were used inside |\equal|.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/14}{macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@repl#1#2{%
+ \long\def\@tempc##1#1##2{%
+ \def\@tempa{##2}\def\@tempb{\@tempc}%
+ \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+ \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@##1}%
+ \expandafter\@gobble
+ \else
+ \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@##1#2}%
+ \expandafter\@tempc
+ \fi
+ ##2}%
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\expandafter}%
+ \expandafter\@tempc\the\toks@#1\@tempc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifthenelse}
+% The remaining macros in this file are derived from the ones in
+% |ifthen.sty| but recoded and simplified. The main simplification is
+% that the original style (and the |\boolean| extensions) expressed
+% logical values always in terms of |\ifnum|. As |\fi| is `untyped' this
+% is not necessary, so for example the length tests can return values
+% via |\ifdim|, the trailing |\fi| will not complain, even though it was
+% `expecting' an |\ifnum|. Also the system of passing information via
+% macros expanding to |T| or |F| has been completely replaced by a
+% simpler system using |\iftrue|, which furthermore allows lazy
+% evaluation on the second pass.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\ifthenelse#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/14}{Use \cs{TE@repl}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \toks@{#1}%
+ \TE@repl\or\TE@or
+ \TE@repl\and\TE@and
+ \TE@repl\not\TE@neg
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1c}{2001/05/25}{Added \cs{AND}, \cs{OR} and \cs{NOT} as
+% boolean operators as alternative to the lower case versions
+% (pr/3297)}
+% Support alternate names for the boolean operators (strictly
+% speaking only |\OR| would be necessary).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \TE@repl\OR\TE@or
+ \TE@repl\AND\TE@and
+ \TE@repl\NOT\TE@neg
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The original |ifthen.sty| processed everything inside a box
+% assignment, to catch any extra spaces before they appeared in the
+% output. Instead I have added extra arguments to the commands so they
+% each remove any following space.
+%
+% Set up the user level names |\not| etc.
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/01/20}{Modify \cs{protect} and \cs{value}}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/11/15}{Modify \cs{protect} add \cs{@setref}}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1996/03/22}
+% {Use \cs{begingroup} not \cs{bgroup} for latex/2105}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1999/01/07}{\cs{isundefined} added for /2824}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \def\@setref##1##2##3{%
+ \ifx##1\relax\z@\else\expandafter##2##1\fi}%
+ \def\value##1{\the\csname c@##1\endcsname}%
+ \let\equal\TE@equal \let\(\TE@lparen \let\)\TE@rparen
+ \let\isodd\TE@odd \let\lengthtest\TE@length
+ \let\isundefined\TE@undef
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For the first pass, in a group, make various tokens non-expandable.
+%
+% It is unfortunate that in order to remain compatible with |ifthen|
+% syntax, it is necessary to have a two pass system. The first pass
+% inside an |\edef| `exposes' the |\if|\ldots\ |\fi| tokens, so the
+% corect clauses may be skipped on the second pass. This means that the
+% whole |\ifthenelse| command does not work by expansion, and so
+% possibly has only limited usefulness for macro code writers.
+% The main problem with the |ifthen:| syntax is that (unique for \LaTeX)
+% it does not uses a brace delimited argument form, and exposes the
+% primitive \TeX\ syntax for \meta{number}. Pretty much the only way of
+% parsing |1 > 2 \or 2 < 1| is to actually evaluate the primitive
+% |\ifnum|s. A syntax such as:\\%
+% |\or{\numtest{1<2}}{\lengthtest{1pt<1in}}|\\
+% could easily be evaluated in a one pass way, operating directly via
+% expansion, and leaving no extra tokens in the token stream.
+%
+% Still, on with the code\ldots\ make |\@tempa| and |\@tempb| tokens
+% non-expandable on the first pass.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1996/03/22}
+% {Use \cs{begingroup} not \{ for latex/2105}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@tempa\relax\let\@tempb\relax
+ \xdef\@gtempa{\expandafter\TE@eval\the\toks@\TE@endeval}%
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now outside the group, execute |\@gtempa| which causes all the
+% |\if|s etc., to be evaluated, the final truth value is contained in
+% the |\newif| token |\ifTE@val|. Finally this is tested and either the
+% first or second following argument is chosen accordingly.
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/01/24}
+% {Use \cs{@firstoftwo} not \cs{@leftmark}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@gtempa
+ \expandafter\endgroup\ifTE@val
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@eval}
+% Initialise a term. (Expanded on the first pass).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@eval{\noexpand\TE@negatefalse\noexpand\iftrue\noexpand\ifnum}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifTE@val}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifTE@negate}
+% Two |\newif|s the first holds the current truth value of the
+% expression. The second is a temporary flag which is true if we need to
+% negate the current proposition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifTE@val
+\newif\ifTE@negate
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@endeval}
+% Finalise a term. (Expanded on the first pass).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@endeval{\relax
+ \noexpand\TE@setvaltrue\noexpand
+ \else
+ \noexpand\TE@setvalfalse\noexpand
+ \fi
+ \noexpand\TE@negatefalse\noexpand
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@setvaltrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@setvalfalse}
+% Set the |\ifTE@val| to true or false depending on the value of the
+% current proposition, and the negate flag. (Not expanded on the first
+% pass.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@setvaltrue{%
+ \ifTE@negate\TE@valfalse\else\TE@valtrue\fi}
+\def\TE@setvalfalse{\let\ifTE@val\ifTE@negate}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@or}
+% The internal version of |\or|. Ends the current term.
+% If true skip the remaining terms.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@or{\TE@endeval\noexpand\ifTE@val\noexpand\else\noexpand\ifnum}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@and}
+% The internal version of |\and|. If false skip the remaining terms.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@and{\TE@endeval\noexpand\ifTE@val\noexpand\ifnum}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@neg}
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@negswitch}
+% |\not|. Throw the current context, set a negate flag, then restart
+% the |\ifnum|. |\TE@negswitch| is not expanded on the first pass.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@neg{\TE@throw\noexpand\TE@negswitch\noexpand\ifnum}
+\def\TE@negswitch{\ifTE@negate\TE@negatefalse\else\TE@negatetrue\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@lparen}
+% |\(|. Throw the current context, then restart a term inside a group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@lparen#1{\TE@throw\begingroup\TE@eval#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@rparen}
+% |\)| end the current term, and the local group started by |\(|, but
+% pass on the boolean value in |\if\@val T|. The |\noexpand| stops the
+% |\expandafter| from expanding on the first pass.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@rparen#1{%
+ \TE@endeval
+ \noexpand\expandafter\endgroup\noexpand\ifTE@val#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@equal}
+% |\equal| greatly simplified from the original. |\def| may be used
+% rather than |\edef| as the whole thing is expanded anyway in the
+% first pass. The boolean can be directly encoded with the |\ifx|,
+% there is no need to start an equivalent |\ifnum|.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/14}{make long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\TE@equal#1#2#3{\TE@throw
+ \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{#2}%
+ \noexpand\ifx\@tempa\@tempb#3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setboolean}
+% |\setboolean| takes |true| or |false|, as |#2|, and sets |#1|
+% accordingly.
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/05/27}{New style error commands}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setboolean#1#2{%
+ \lowercase{\def\@tempa{#2}}%
+ \@ifundefined{@tempswa\@tempa}%
+ {\PackageError{ifthen}%
+ {You can only set a boolean to `true' or `false'}\@ehc}%
+ {\@ifundefined{#1\@tempa}%
+ {\PackageError{ifthen}{Boolean #1 undefined}\@ehc}%
+ {\csname#1\@tempa\endcsname}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newboolean}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1996/08/02}{Add \cs{@ifdefinable} test for latex/2220}
+% Define a new `boolean'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newboolean#1{%
+ \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname if#1\endcsname{%
+ \expandafter\newif\csname if#1\endcsname}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\provideboolean}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1996/08/02}{Macro added for latex/2220}
+% Define a new `boolean' if it is not already defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\provideboolean#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{if#1}{%
+ \expandafter\newif\csname if#1\endcsname}\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\whiledo}
+% |\whiledo| copied directly from the original.\\
+% |\whiledo{|\meta{test}|}{|\meta{body}|}|\\
+% repeatedly evaluates \meta{body} until \meta{test} is true.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\whiledo#1#2{%
+ \ifthenelse{#1}%
+ {\@whiledotrue
+ \@whilesw\if@whiledo\fi
+ {#2%
+ \ifthenelse{#1}\@whiledotrue\@whiledofalse}}%
+ {}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TE@undef}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1999/01/07}{Macro added for /2824}
+% test if csname is defined. |\ifx| test.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\TE@undef#1#2{%
+ \TE@throw\noexpand\ifx\noexpand\@undefined\noexpand#1#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@whiledo}
+% Internal switch for |\whiledo|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@whiledo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..22d40efbb6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ifthen.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generateFile{ifthen.sty}{t}{\from{ifthen.dtx}{package}}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2ebd81f6288
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,2745 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage[ascii]{inputenc}
+\GetFileInfo{inputenc.sty}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\fileversion\space\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Frank Mittelbach}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \setlength\hfuzz{20pt}
+ \DocInput{inputenc.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{3415}
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \changes{v0.01}{1994/03/09}{Created file.}
+% \changes{v0.02}{1994/07/14}{Replaced \cs{Dh} by \cs{DH} and \cs{Th}
+% by \cs{TH}.}
+% \changes{v0.02}{1994/07/14}{Added \cs{ensuremath} to some math
+% commands.}
+% \changes{v0.02}{1994/07/14}{Added \cs{inputencoding}.}
+% \changes{v0.03}{1994/09/04}{Added \cs{DeclareInputComposite} and the
+% \cs{ProvidesCommand}s to the encoding files.}
+% \changes{v0.03}{1994/09/04}{Removed the definition of the accent slots
+% in Latin-1.}
+% \changes{v0.04}{1994/10/20}{Replaced \cs{DeclareInputCharacter} by
+% \cs{DeclareInputText} and \cs{DeclareInputMath}.}
+% \changes{v0.04}{1994/10/20}{Removed \cs{DeclareInputComposite}.}
+% \changes{v0.04}{1994/10/20}{Made many Latin-1 characters math-only.}
+% \changes{v0.05}{1994/10/27}{Updated for the new version of ltoutenc.}
+% \changes{v0.06}{1994/11/21}{Added \cs{textregistered}.}
+% \changes{v0.06}{1994/11/21}{Added slot hex A0 to Latin-1.}
+% \changes{v0.07}{1994/11/22}{Fixed typo A1 rather than A0.}
+% \changes{v0.07}{1994/11/28}{Fixed where docstrip option had moved a
+% line.}
+% \changes{v0.09}{1994/12/10}{Added `beta test' message.}
+% \changes{v0.09}{1994/12/10}{Made letters active and undefined by
+% default, rather than illegal.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9b}{1995/05/23}{Added Mac encoding, applemac.def}
+% \changes{v0.9d}{1995/06/06}{Added cp437}
+% \changes{v0.9f}{1995/09/21}{Added Next encoding, next.def}
+% \changes{v0.9h}{1995/10/22}{Added Windows 3.1 ANSI encoding,
+% ansinew.def}
+% \changes{v0.9i}{1995/11/02}{Wrapped long lines}
+% \changes{v0.9i}{1995/11/02}{Changed internal name \cs{a} to
+% \cs{@tabacckludge} to protect against redefinition by malicious
+% users.}
+% \changes{v0.9j}{1995/11/14}{Remove \cs{endinput} so docstrip reaches
+% ansinew encoding}
+% \changes{v0.9k}{1995/11/29}{Replaced uses of \cs{textsterling} with
+% \cs{pounds}.}
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1995/12/04}{Added German version}
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1995/12/04}{Replaced \cs{textasciitilde} by
+% \cs{nobreakspace}.}
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1995/12/04}{Made bullet and periodcentered text
+% glyphs rather than math glyphs.}
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1995/12/04}{Added \cs{@tabacckludge} hacks.}
+% \changes{v0.9o}{1996/02/14}
+% {Cedilla (\cs{c}\cs{ }) rather than (\cs{c}\{\}) latex/2077,
+% finished on 1996/10/28}
+% \changes{v0.9o}{1996/02/14}
+% {0F0 corrected in cp850 latex/2080}
+% \changes{v0.9o}{1996/02/14}
+% {0B2 corrected in latin2 latex/2079}
+% \changes{v0.9r}{1996/05/10}{Added cp852.def}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Added cp865.def}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}
+% {Changed \cs{aa} and \cs{AA} to \cs{r} a and \cs{r} A}
+% \changes{v0.9u}{1996/10/29}{Added more to cp865.def}
+% \changes{v0.9y}{1997/04/30}{Added latin5.def (provided by
+% H. Turgut Uyar: uyar@cs.itu.edu.tr)}
+% \changes{v0.9z}{1997/05/10}{Added latin3.def (provided by
+% J\"org Knappen and modified by Chris Rowley)}
+% \changes{v0.91}{1997/08/19}{Put
+% \cs{makeatletter}\ldots\cs{makeatother} around all .def files.}
+% \changes{v0.92}{1997/09/08}{Added decmulti.def
+% provided by M.Y. Chartoire. pr/2599}
+% \changes{v0.93}{1997/11/23}{\cs{textperthousand} not
+% \cs{textpermill}. pr/2673}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Made degree a text glyph}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Added to and tidied documentation}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Ogonek: changed
+% \cs{k}\{\} to \cs{k}\cs{ }}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{NOTE: for consistency, when available
+% the robust text-or-math internal form is always used --
+% THIS MAY CHANGE}
+% \changes{v0.95}{1997/12/20}{Updated documentation}
+% \changes{v0.97}{1998/03/05}{Spanish ords changed to text chars, pr/2579}
+%
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This package allows the user to specify an input encoding (for
+% example, ASCII, ISO Latin-1 or Macintosh) by saying:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\usepackage[|\emph{encoding name}|]{inputenc}|
+% \end{quote}
+% The encoding can also be selected in the document with:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\inputencoding{|\emph{encoding name}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% Originally this command was only to be used in vertical mode (with
+% the idea that it should be only within a document when
+% using text from several documents to build up a composite work such
+% as a volume of journal articles. However, usages in certain
+% languages suggested that it might be preferable to allow changing
+% the input encoding at any time, which is what is possible now
+% (though that is quite computing resource intensive).
+%
+% The encodings provided by this package are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |ascii| ASCII encoding for the range 32--127.
+% \item |latin1| ISO Latin-1 encoding.
+% \item |latin2| ISO Latin-2 encoding.
+% \item |latin3| ISO Latin-3 encoding.
+% \item |latin4| ISO Latin-4 encoding.
+% \item |latin5| ISO Latin-5 encoding.
+% \item |latin9| ISO Latin-9 encoding.
+% \item |latin10| ISO Latin-10 encoding.
+% \item |decmulti| DEC Multinational Character Set encoding.
+% \item |cp850| IBM 850 code page.
+% \item |cp852| IBM 852 code page.
+% \item |cp858| IBM 858 code page (this is 850 with euro symbol).
+% \item |cp437| IBM 437 code page.
+% \item |cp437de| IBM 437 code page (German version).
+% \item |cp865| IBM 865 code page.
+% \item |applemac| Macintosh encoding.
+% \item |macce| Macintosh Central European codepage.
+% \item |next| Next encoding.
+% \item |cp1250| Windows 1250 (central and eastern Europe) code page.
+% \item |cp1252| Windows 1252 (Western Europe) code page.
+% \item |cp1257| Windows 1257 (Baltic) code page.
+% \item |ansinew| Windows 3.1 ANSI encoding, extension of Latin-1
+% (synonym\footnote{It is now generated using the guards
+% \texttt{cp1252,ansinew} the latter only used for the provides
+% file line.} for |cp1252|).
+% \end{itemize}
+% Each encoding has an associated |.def| file, for example
+% |latin1.def| which defines the behaviour of each input character,
+% using the commands:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareInputText{|\emph{slot}|}{|\emph{text}|}| \\
+% |\DeclareInputMath{|\emph{slot}|}{|\emph{math}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% This defines the input character \emph{slot} to be the
+% \emph{text} material or \emph{math} material respectively.
+% For example, |latin1.def| defines slots |"D6| (\AE)
+% and |"B5| ($\mu$) by saying:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareInputText{214}{\AE}
+% \DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Note that the \emph{commands} should be robust, and should not be
+% dependent on the output encoding. The same \emph{slot} should not
+% have both a text and a math declaration for it. (This restriction
+% may be removed in future releases of inputenc).
+%
+% The |.def| file may also define
+% commands using the declarations:\\
+% |\providecommand| or |\ProvideTextCommandDefault|.
+% For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}}
+% \DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The use of the `provide' forms here will ensure that a
+% better definition will not be over-written; their use is
+% recommended since, in general, the best definition depends on the
+% fonts available.
+%
+% See the documentation in |fntguide.tex| and |ltoutenc.dtx| for
+% details of how to declare text commands.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Announcing the files}
+%
+% We announce the files:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{inputenc}
+%<ascii> \ProvidesFile{ascii.def}
+%<latin1> \ProvidesFile{latin1.def}
+%<latin2> \ProvidesFile{latin2.def}
+%<latin3> \ProvidesFile{latin3.def}
+%<latin4> \ProvidesFile{latin4.def}
+%<latin5> \ProvidesFile{latin5.def}
+%<latin9> \ProvidesFile{latin9.def}
+%<latin10> \ProvidesFile{latin10.def}
+%<decmulti> \ProvidesFile{decmulti.def}
+%<cp850> \ProvidesFile{cp850.def}
+%<cp852> \ProvidesFile{cp852.def}
+%<cp858> \ProvidesFile{cp858.def}
+%<cp437> \ProvidesFile{cp437.def}
+%<cp437de> \ProvidesFile{cp437de.def}
+%<cp865> \ProvidesFile{cp865.def}
+%<applemac> \ProvidesFile{applemac.def}
+%<applemacce> \ProvidesFile{macce.def}
+%<next> \ProvidesFile{next.def}
+%<ansinew> \ProvidesFile{ansinew.def}
+%<cp1252&!ansinew> \ProvidesFile{cp1252.def}
+%<cp1250> \ProvidesFile{cp1250.def}
+ [2004/02/05 v1.0d Input encoding file]
+%<cp850>%%
+%<cp850>%% If you need a euro symbol, try cp858 instead.
+%<cp850>%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now we insert a |\makeatletter| at the beginning of all .def files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<-package>\makeatletter
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The package}
+%
+% \changes{v0.99c}{2002/11/11}{Added cp858 (pr/3464)}
+%
+% \changes{v0.04}{1994/10/20}{Improved coding of \cs{DeclareInputText}
+% and changed name from \cs{DeclareInputCharacter}.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9g}{1995/10/19}{Replaced \cs{'} \cs{`} \cs{!=} by
+% \cs{a'} \cs{a`} \cs{a!=} in order to get correct accents in
+% a tabbing environment.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9w}{1996/11/23}{Correct documentation
+% of \cs{@tabacckludge}}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9x}{1997/03/21}{Use decimal rather than hex
+% to avoid active character problems. latex/2451.}
+%
+% Before we start with the code, an important comment is in order:
+% as you may or may not know, the |tabbing| environment changes the
+% definition of the commands |\'|, |\`|, and |\=|. Outside such an
+% environment these commands produce the corresponding accents, inside
+% they are used for special text positioning, and the accents can be
+% accessed using |\a'|, |\a`|, and |\a=|. Therefore we \emph{must} use
+% the latter instead of the former in the second argument to
+% |\DeclareInputText|, e.g. (from |latin1.def|):
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The command |\@tabacckludge| is defined (in |ltoutenc.dtx|) in such
+% a way that |\@tabacckludge'| will expand to the internal form of |\'|.
+% Thus it is |\'| that is carried around \emph{internally} (the
+% same applies to the other two accent commands).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareInputText}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareInputMath}
+% \begin{macro}{\IeC}
+% These commands declare the expansion of an active character. The
+% math declaration is the usual trick with |\uppercase|.
+% The text declaration is sneakier, since in text space matters.
+% We look to see if the definition ends in a macro, by checking
+% whether it's |\meaning| ends in a space. If it does, then we
+% add an irrelevant |\IeC| and braces around the definition, in
+% order to avoid any space after the active char being gobbled up
+% once the text is written out to an auxiliary file.
+%
+% The definition should contain only robust commands (and, for
+% correct ligatures and kerning, they must be defined via the
+% interfaces in the fontenc package).
+%
+% \changes{v0.9b}{1995/05/23}{Added hackery with \cs{IeC} in order to
+% avoid space being gobbled.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\DeclareInputMath#1{%
+ \@inpenc@test
+ \bgroup
+ \uccode`\~#1%
+ \uppercase{%
+ \egroup
+ \def~%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{2003/01/17}{Now coding according to suggestion by David (pr/2004)}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{2003/12/29}{but better do it properly}
+% \changes{v1.0?}{2004/01/19}{or even correctly}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareInputText#1#2{%
+ \def\reserved@a##1 ${}%
+ \def\reserved@b{#2}%
+ \ifcat_\expandafter\reserved@a\meaning\reserved@b$ $_%
+ \DeclareInputMath{#1}{#2}%
+ \else
+ \DeclareInputMath{#1}{\IeC{#2}}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The definition of |\IeC| was modified not to insert a |\protect|
+% unless it is needed, this means it works in |\hyphenation|
+% commands, and other such delicate places. It was then further
+% changed to never insert a |\protect| as one is never needed; this
+% makes it work in even more places.
+%
+% This still needs some attention.
+%
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1995/12/12}{Modified \cs{IeC} in order to
+% work in \cs{hyphenation} latex/2004.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed non-typeset case from
+% \cs{protect} to \cs{noexpand}: temporary fix.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\IeC{%
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \noexpand\IeC
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\inputencoding}
+% \changes{v0.9q}{1996/05/09}
+% {Allow characters below 32 for latex/2071}
+% \changes{v0.9q}{1996/05/09}
+% {Check the def file was reasonable for latex/2136}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed to work only in outer vmode, see
+% latex/2608}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Warning message reworded and line
+% number added, also for latex/2608}
+% \changes{v0.95}{1997/12/20}{Changed to work in any vmode, for David}
+%
+% This sets the encoding to be |#1|. It first sets all the
+% characters 128--255 to be active (and sets their initial
+% definition to be |\@inpenc@undefined|).
+% It now also does this for some `low' codes below 32, but
+% misses out Null, control-I, control-J, control-L and control-M.
+%
+% It then inputs |#1.def|. But it first sets up a test that
+% produces a warning message if no suitable definitions get read.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\inputencoding#1{%
+ \gdef\@inpenc@test{\global\let\@inpenc@test\relax}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Keyboard characters which don't get a definition will be mapped to
+% |\@inpenc@undefined| which gets a definition producing an error
+% message indicating in which input encoding the current keyboard
+% character is undefined:
+% \changes{v0.98}{1998/07/04}{Give better error message if key used
+% is undefined (pr/2845)}
+% \changes{v0.993}{2000/01/24}{Fix error message for undefined chars
+% (pr/3158)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\@inpenc@undefined{\noexpand\@inpenc@undefined@{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\edef| in the above definition is essential as |#1| may be
+% |\CurrentOption| in which case a later use would return incorrect
+% information (at best nothing).
+%
+% Now we make all potential input characters active.
+% \changes{v0.994}{2000/01/27}{Allow change also in horizontal mode
+% (pr/2888)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@inpenc@loop\^^A\^^H%
+ \@inpenc@loop\^^K\^^K%
+ \@inpenc@loop\^^N\^^_%
+ \@inpenc@loop\^^?\^^ff%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% To be able to process the input encoding file in horizontal mode
+% we need to ensure that we don't get any stray spaces into the
+% horizontal mode or else we end up with extra space in the
+% paragraph.
+% \changes{v0.998}{2001/05/25}{suppress all spaces for horizontal mode
+% (pr/3273)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\endlinechar\@M
+ \xdef\saved@space@catcode{\the\catcode`\ }%
+ \input{#1.def}%
+ \advance\endlinechar-\@M
+ \catcode`\ \saved@space@catcode\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If there have been no |\DeclareInputText| or |\DeclareInputMath|
+% commands read then something is amiss.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@inpenc@test\relax\else
+ \PackageWarning{inputenc}%
+ {No characters defined\MessageBreak
+ by input encoding change to `#1'\MessageBreak}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@inpenc@undefined@}
+% This command will assigned to any active character unless it
+% get a proper definition by the encoding. The argument is the
+% current encoding name.
+% \changes{v0.993}{2000/01/24}{Fix error message for undefined chars
+% (pr/3158)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@inpenc@undefined@#1{\PackageError{inputenc}%
+ {Keyboard character used is undefined\MessageBreak
+ in inputencoding `#1'}%
+ {You need to provide a definition with
+ \noexpand\DeclareInputText\MessageBreak or
+ \noexpand\DeclareInputMath before using this key.}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@inpenc@loop}
+% \changes{v0.9q}{1996/05/09}
+% {Macro added}
+% \changes{v0.9v}{1996/11/07}
+% {Exit from the top of loop fixed for latex/2257}
+% Make characters |#1| to |#2| inclusive active and undefined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@inpenc@loop#1#2{%
+ \@tempcnta`#1\relax
+ \loop
+ \catcode\@tempcnta\active
+ \bgroup
+ \uccode`\~\@tempcnta
+ \uppercase{%
+ \egroup
+ \let~\@inpenc@undefined
+ }%
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta<`#2\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \repeat}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Then for each option, we input that encoding file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption*{\inputencoding{\CurrentOption}}
+\ProcessOptions
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Default definitions for characters}
+%
+% Some input characters map to internal functions which are not in
+% either the |T1| or |OT1| font encoding. For this reason default
+% definitions are provided in the encoding file: these will be
+% used unless some other output encoding is used which supports
+% those glyphs. In some cases this default definition has to be
+% simply an error message.
+%
+% Note that this works reasonably well only because the encoding
+% files for both |OT1| and |T1| are loaded in the standard LaTeX
+% format.
+%
+% \changes{v0.9a}{1995/04/23}{Default settings moved to own section}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9b}{1995/05/23}{Corrected ordmasc and ordfem which had
+% been switched by mistake.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9k}{1995/11/29}{Moved \cs{textregistered} and
+% \cs{texttrademark} to the kernel.}
+% \changes{v0.9k}{1995/11/29}{Added default commands for Next input
+% encoding.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1995/12/04}{Added \cs{ensuremath} to definitions of
+% the fraction glyphs.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}
+% {Added \cs{textblacksquare}}
+% \changes{v0.9u}{1996/10/29}
+% {Corrected code for \cs{textblacksquare}}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9u}{1996/10/29}
+% {Added cp865 and corrected cp850, cp852 and cp437 guards}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Removed entries that were solely in
+% next.def}
+% \changes{v0.995}{2000/05/22}{Added latin2 option for textdegree
+% (pr/3207) CAR}
+%
+% The name |\textblacksquare| is derived from the AMS symbol name since
+% Adobe seem not to want this symbol. The default definition, as a
+% rule, makes no claim to being a good design.
+%
+% Some entries are repeated in case guards must all be on one line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin2|latin3|latin4|latin5|latin9|applemacce|latin10>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}}
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin2|latin3|latin4|latin5|latin9|applemacce|latin10>
+%<*cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865|cp437|cp437de|applemac|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257|next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}}
+%</cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865|cp437|cp437de|applemac|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257|next>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}}
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}}
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+%<*latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textthreequarters}{\ensuremath{\frac34}}
+%</latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|next>
+%<*applemac|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de|cp1252|next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}{\textit{f}}
+%</applemac|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de|cp1252|next>
+%<*cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textpeseta}{Pt}
+%</cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+%<*cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textblacksquare}
+{\vrule \@width .3em \@height .4em \@depth -.1em\relax}
+%</cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9k}{1995/11/29}{Added error messages for unavailable
+% characters.}
+%
+% Some commands can't be faked, so we have them generate an error
+% message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen}
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+%<*applemac|cp1252|next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen}
+%</applemac|cp1252|next>
+%<*latin9|cp1252|latin10>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\texteuro}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\texteuro}
+%</latin9|cp1252|latin10>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin2|latin3|latin4|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcurrency}
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin2|latin3|latin4|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp865>
+%<*applemac|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257|next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcurrency}
+%</applemac|cp1252|cp1250|cp1257|next>
+%<*latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1250>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textbrokenbar}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textbrokenbar}
+%</latin1|latin5|cp850|cp858|cp852|cp1252|cp1250>
+%<*latin3>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textmalteseH}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textmalteseH}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textmalteseh}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textmalteseh}
+%</latin3>
+%<*latin4>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textkra}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textkra}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textTstroke}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textTstroke}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\texttstroke}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\texttstroke}
+%</latin4>
+%<*next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textquotesingle}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textquotesingle}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\capitalogonek}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\capitalogonek}
+%</next>
+%<*cp1250|cp1252|applemac|next>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textperthousand}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textperthousand}
+%</cp1250|cp1252|applemac|next>
+%<*applemacce>
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdiv}
+ {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textdiv}
+%</applemacce>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9l}{1995/12/01}{Removed extraneous braces from the
+% `superior' glyphs.}
+% \changes{v0.97}{1998/03/05}{Removed ords:
+% changed to text chars, pr/2579}
+%
+% Characters that are supposed to be used only in math will be defined
+% by |\providecommand| because \LaTeXe{} assumes that the font
+% encoding for math fonts is static.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|next>
+\providecommand{\mathonesuperior}{{^1}}
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|next>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|next>
+\providecommand{\maththreesuperior}{{^3}}
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp1252|next>
+%<*latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}}
+%</latin1|decmulti|latin3|latin5|latin9|cp850|cp858|cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+%<*cp1252|next>
+\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}}
+%</cp1252|next>
+%<*cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+\providecommand{\mathnsuperior}{{^n}}
+%</cp865|cp437|cp437de>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The ASCII encoding}
+%
+% The ASCII encoding only allows characters in the range 32--127, so
+% we only need to provide an empty |.def| file.
+%
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Merged latin1 with ansinew/cp1252}
+%
+% \section{The ISO Latin-2 encoding}
+%
+% The ISO Latin-2 encoding file defines the characters
+% in the ISO 8859-2 encoding. It was contributed by
+% Petr Sojka (\texttt{sojka@muni.cz}) with small technical
+% updates by Frank Mittelbach.
+%
+% \changes{v0.9e}{1995/08/31}{Redeclared "AD to be soft hyphen.}
+% \changes{v0.91}{1997/08/19}{Replaced \cs{dh}/\cs{DH} by
+% \cs{dj}/\cs{DJ}.}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed 176 to \cs{textdegree}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin2>
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\k A}
+\DeclareInputText{177}{\k a}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\u{}}
+\DeclareInputText{178}{\k\ }
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\L}
+\DeclareInputText{179}{\l}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\v L}
+\DeclareInputText{181}{\v l}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\@tabacckludge'S}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\@tabacckludge's}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\v{}}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputText{185}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\c S}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\c s}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\v T}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\v t}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\@tabacckludge'Z}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\@tabacckludge'z}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\H{}}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\.Z}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\.z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge'R}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\DJ}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\@tabacckludge'N}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\v N}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\u A}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\@tabacckludge'L}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\H O}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\@tabacckludge'C}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputMath{215}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\v C}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\v R}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\r U}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\k E}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\H U}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\v E}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\@tabacckludge'Y}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\c T}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\v D}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge'r}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\dj}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\@tabacckludge'n}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\v n}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\u a}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\@tabacckludge'l}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\H o}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\@tabacckludge'c}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputMath{247}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\v c}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\v r}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\r u}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\k e}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\H u}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\v e}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\@tabacckludge'y}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\c t}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\v d}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\.{}}
+%</latin2>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The ISO Latin-3 encoding}
+%
+% The ISO Latin-3 encoding file defines the characters
+% in the ISO 8859-3 encoding. It was contributed by
+% by J\"org Knappen (\texttt{joerg.knappen@uni-mainz.de}) and
+% adapted by Chris Rowley.
+%
+% It can be used for general purpose applications in
+% typical office environments in the following languages:
+% Afrikaans, Catalan, English, Esperanto, French, Gallician, German,
+% Italian, Maltese, and Turkish.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin3>
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\textmalteseH}
+\DeclareInputText{177}{\textmalteseh}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\u{}}
+\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+% \DeclareInputText{165}{\notdef}
+\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\^H}
+% NOT: \DeclareInputText{182}{h\llap{\^{}}} % \^h would be too tall
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\^h}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\.I}
+\DeclareInputText{185}{\i}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\c S}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\c s}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\u G}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\u g}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\^J}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\^\j}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf}
+% \DeclareInputText{174}{\notdef}
+% \DeclareInputText{190}{\notdef}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\.Z}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\.z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+% \DeclareInputText{208}{\notdef}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\~N}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+% \DeclareInputText{195}{\notdef}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\.C}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\.G}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\^C}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputMath{215}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\^G}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\^E}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\u U}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\^S}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\"I}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+% \DeclareInputText{240}{\notdef}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\~n}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+% \DeclareInputText{227}{\notdef}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\.c}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\.g}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\^c}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputMath{247}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\^g}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\u u}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\^s}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\"\i}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\.{}}
+%</latin3>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The ISO Latin-4 encoding}
+%
+% The ISO Latin-4 encoding file defines the characters in the ISO
+% 8859-4 encoding. It was contributed by Hana Skoumalov\'a
+% (\texttt{hana.skoumalova@ff.cuni.cz}).
+%
+% It was created for Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Finnish, Lappish,
+% Swedish, Norvegian, Danish, Icelandic and Greenlandic Inuit. Some
+% alphabets, however, are incomplete (Greenlandic, Icelandic and Lappish).
+% Some glyphs are not available in the fonts. For example, the
+% Greenlandic character `kra' is not available at all;
+% the Latvian and Lithuanian characters not
+% contained in other encodings are constructed from components and
+% they do not look good.
+%
+% \changes{v0.999}{2001/06/04}{Added \cs{textkra}, \cs{texttstroke} and
+% \cs{textTstroke} (pr/3336)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin4>
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\k A}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\textkra}%% Greenlandic Inuit
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\c R}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\~I}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\c L}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\"\ }
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\@tabacckludge=E}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\c G}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\textTstroke}%% Northern Sami
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{177}{\k a}
+\DeclareInputText{178}{\k\ }
+\DeclareInputText{179}{\c r}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{181}{\~\i}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\c l}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\v\ }
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{185}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\@tabacckludge=e}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\c g}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\texttstroke}%% Northern Sami
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\NG}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\ng}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge=A}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\k I}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\v C}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\k E}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\.{E}}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\@tabacckludge=I}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\DJ}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\c N}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\@tabacckludge=O}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\c K}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\~O}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputMath{215}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\O}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\k U}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\~U}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\@tabacckludge=U}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge=a}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\k i}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\v c}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\k e}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\.{e}}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\@tabacckludge=\i}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\dj}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\c n}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\@tabacckludge=o}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\c k}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\~o}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputMath{247}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\o}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\k u}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\~u}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\@tabacckludge=u}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\.\ }
+%</latin4>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The ISO Latin-5 encoding}
+%
+% \changes{v0.991}{1999/08/23}{Corrected description for Latin-5.}
+% The ISO Latin-5 encoding file defines the characters
+% in the ISO 8859-9 encoding, which describes Latin Alphabet No. 5.
+% It was contributed by H.~Turgut Uyar (\texttt{uyar@cs.itu.edu.tr});
+% it is used for Turkish.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin5>
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\textexclamdown}
+\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
+\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen}
+\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\copyright}
+\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\textordfeminine}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\textordmasculine}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\textquestiondown}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\u G}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\~N}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\~O}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputMath{215}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\O}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\^E}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\.I}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\c S}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\"I}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\u g}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\~n}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\~o}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputMath{247}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\o}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\i }
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\c s}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\"\i}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\"y}
+%</latin5>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{DEC Multinational Character Set}
+%
+% The DECMultinational character set, used by the OpenVMS operating
+% system, is slightly different from the ISO Latin 1 character set.
+%
+% Reference: Digital Equipment Corporation VT330/VT340 Programmer
+% Reference Manual, Volume 1: Text Programming, page 22.
+%
+% This encoding was provided by M.Y. Chartoire IPNL-IN2P3 \\
+% \texttt{m.chartoire@ipnl.in2p3.fr}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*decmulti>
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\textexclamdown}
+\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
+\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen}
+\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\copyright}
+\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\textordfeminine}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\textordmasculine}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\textquestiondown}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\~N}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\~O}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputText{215}{\OE}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\O}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\^E}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\"Y}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\"I}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\~n}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\~o}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputText{247}{\oe}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\o}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\"y}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\"\i}
+%</decmulti>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The IBM code pages 850 and 858}
+%
+% This input encoding was contributed by
+% Timo Knuutila (\texttt{knuutila@\linebreak[0]cs.utu.fi}),
+% and edited by Christian Bartels
+% (\texttt{ii140ba@\linebreak[0]vm1.rz.rwth-aachen.de}).
+%
+% The DOS graphics `letters' and a few
+% other positions are ignored (left undefined).
+%
+% The 858 code page is identical to the 850 except that
+%
+% \changes{v0.9d}{1995/06/06}{Made changes to cp850 suggested by
+% Christian Bartels}
+% \changes{v0.9s}{1995/08/31}
+% {Swapped ordfeminine and masculine. /2203}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cp850|cp858>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputText{144}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{129}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{145}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{130}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{146}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{131}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{147}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{148}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+\DeclareInputText{149}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{150}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{136}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{152}{\"y}
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{154}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\"\i}
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\o}
+\DeclareInputText{140}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{156}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputText{141}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{157}{\O}
+\DeclareInputText{142}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputMath{158}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{143}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{159}{\textflorin}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\~n} %% "B0-"B4: DG
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\~N}
+\DeclareInputText{181}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\textordfeminine}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\textordmasculine}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\textquestiondown}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\copyright}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\textregistered}
+\DeclareInputMath{170}{\lnot}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\textonehalf}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\textonequarter} %% "B9-"BC: DG
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\textexclamdown}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\textcent}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\textyen}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\guillemotright}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% "BF-"C5: DG
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\dh}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\DH}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\^E}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here is the only point in which the two code pages differ!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<-cp858>\DeclareInputText{213}{\i}
+%<-cp850>\DeclareInputText{213}{\texteuro}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{215}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\"I}
+% "C8-"CE: DG
+% "D9-"DC: DG
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\textbrokenbar}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\textcurrency} %% "DF: DG
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\ss}
+\DeclareInputMath{241}{\pm}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^O}
+% "F2: DG (not double underline, or equals?)
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\textthreequarters}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\~o}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\~O}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\S}
+\DeclareInputMath{230}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputMath{246}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\th}
+\DeclareInputText{247}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\TH}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+\DeclareInputMath{251}{\mathonesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge'y}
+\DeclareInputMath{252}{\maththreesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'Y}
+\DeclareInputMath{253}{\mathtwosuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\textblacksquare} % right name?
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\nobreakspace}
+%</cp850|cp858>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The IBM code page 852}
+%
+% This input encoding was contributed by
+% Petr Sojka (\texttt{sojka@\linebreak[0]Muni.cz}).
+%
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Added extra \cs{nobreakspace}: OK?}
+% \changes{v0.9z}{1997/05/10}{Corrected typo in slot 213}
+% \changes{v0.91}{1997/08/19}{Replaced \cs{dh}/\cs{DH} by
+% \cs{dj}/\cs{DJ}.}
+% \changes{v0.99}{1999/04/14}{Changed 212, see pr/2992}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cp852>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputText{144}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{129}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{145}{\@tabacckludge'L}
+\DeclareInputText{130}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{146}{\@tabacckludge'l}
+\DeclareInputText{131}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{147}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{148}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\r u}
+\DeclareInputText{149}{\v L}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\@tabacckludge'c}
+\DeclareInputText{150}{\v l}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\@tabacckludge'S}
+\DeclareInputText{136}{\l}
+\DeclareInputText{152}{\@tabacckludge's}
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\H O}
+\DeclareInputText{154}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\H o}
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\v T}
+\DeclareInputText{140}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{156}{\v t}
+\DeclareInputText{141}{\@tabacckludge'Z}
+\DeclareInputText{157}{\L}
+\DeclareInputText{142}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputMath{158}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{143}{\@tabacckludge'C}
+\DeclareInputText{159}{\v c}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\k A}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\k a}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\k E}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\k e}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\nobreakspace} % or empty??
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\@tabacckludge'z}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\v C}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\c s}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputText{181}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\v E}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\c S}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\.Z}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\.z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\u A}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\u a}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\dj}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\DJ}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\v D}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\v d} % d caron
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\v N}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{215}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\v e}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\c T}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\r U}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\ss}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\H{}}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\k\ }
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\@tabacckludge'N}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\v{}}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\@tabacckludge'n}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\u{}}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\v n}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputMath{246}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{247}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\@tabacckludge'R}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\@tabacckludge'r}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\.{}}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\H U}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\H u}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge'y}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\v R}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'Y}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\v r}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\c t}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\textblacksquare} % right name?
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\nobreakspace}
+%</cp852>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The IBM code pages 437 and 865}
+%
+% This input encoding is based on work by\\
+% Volker Kunert
+% (\texttt{volker@\linebreak[0]numsun1.mathematik.uni-halle.de})\\
+% and \texttt{bontus@\linebreak[0]al6000.physik.uni-siegen.de}.\\
+% The changes for cp865 are based on work by S\o ren Sandmann
+% (\texttt{sandmann@\linebreak[0]daimi.aau.dk}), with thanks to
+% them all.
+%
+% The DOS graphics `letters' and a few
+% other positions are ignored (left undefined).
+%
+% Unfortunately, in cp437 there is no agreement as to whether slot E1
+% should be `$\beta$' or `\ss', so we provide two variants,
+% one (cp437) with `$\beta$' and one (cp437de) with `\ss'.
+%
+% \changes{v0.9e}{1995/08/31}{Added a 0 to all character codes}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1995/12/04}{Made uumlaut and pounds text characters}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Added \cs{textflorin} and \cs{textpeseta}}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Removed \cs{textbrokenbar}}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Removed \cs{textendash}}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Changed \cs{Theta} to \cs{Phi}}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Changed \cs{Pi} to \cs{pi}, perhaps}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Changed \cs{emptyset} to \cs{phi}}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1996/10/28}{Changed \cs{maththreesuperior} to
+% \cs{mathnsuperior}}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed 158 to \cs{DeclareInputText}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cp437|cp437de|cp865>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{{\c C}}
+\DeclareInputText{129}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{130}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{131}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{{\c c}}
+\DeclareInputText{136}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\"\i}
+\DeclareInputText{140}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{141}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{142}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{143}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{144}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{145}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{146}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{147}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{148}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{149}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+\DeclareInputText{150}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{152}{\"y}
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{154}{\"U}
+%</cp437|cp437de|cp865>
+%<*cp437|cp437de>
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\textcent}
+\DeclareInputText{156}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputText{157}{\textyen}
+%</cp437|cp437de>
+%<*cp865>
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\o}
+\DeclareInputText{156}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputText{157}{\O}
+%</cp865>
+%<*cp437|cp437de|cp865>
+\DeclareInputText{158}{\textpeseta} % Pt
+\DeclareInputText{159}{\textflorin}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\@tabacckludge'a} % 160
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\~n}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\~N}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\textordfeminine}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\textordmasculine}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\textquestiondown}
+%\DeclareInputText{169}{} % left upper corner
+\DeclareInputMath{170}{\lnot}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\textonehalf}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\textonequarter}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\textexclamdown}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\guillemotleft}
+%<cp437|cp437de>\DeclareInputText{175}{\guillemotright}
+%<cp865>\DeclareInputText{175}{\textcurrency}
+%\DeclareInputText{176}{\textlightgraybox}
+%\DeclareInputText{177}{\textgraybox}
+%\DeclareInputText{178}{\textdarkgraybox}
+%\DeclareInputMath{179}{} % vertical bar
+%\DeclareInputText{180}{} % vertical bar with branch to left
+%\DeclareInputText{181}{} % vertical bar with double branch to left
+%\DeclareInputText{182}{} % double bar with single branch to left
+%\DeclareInputText{183}{} % graphic
+%\DeclareInputText{184}{} % graphic
+%\DeclareInputMath{185}{} % vertical double bar with branch to left
+%\DeclareInputMath{186}{} % vertical double bar
+%\DeclareInputText{187}{} % double upper right corner
+%\DeclareInputMath{188}{} % double lower right corner
+%\DeclareInputText{189}{} % graphic
+%\DeclareInputText{190}{} % graphic
+%\DeclareInputMath{191}{\ensuremath{\rceil}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareInputMath{192}{\ensuremath{\lfloor}}
+%\DeclareInputText{193}{} % dash with branch up
+%\DeclareInputText{194}{} % dash with branch down
+%\DeclareInputText{195}{} % vertical bar with branch to right
+%\DeclareInputText{196}{} % horizontal bar, not endash
+%\DeclareInputText{197}{} % vertical bar crossed with dash
+%\DeclareInputText{198}{} % graphic
+%\DeclareInputText{199}{} % graphic
+%\DeclareInputText{200}{} % double lower left corner
+%\DeclareInputText{201}{} % double upper left corner
+%\DeclareInputText{202}{} % double dash with branch up
+%\DeclareInputText{203}{} % double dash with branch down
+%\DeclareInputText{204}{} % double bar with branch right
+%\DeclareInputText{205}{=} % double dash
+%\DeclareInputText{206}{} % double bar crossing double dash
+%\DeclareInputText{207}{} % graphic
+%\DeclareInputMath{208}{}
+%\DeclareInputText{209}{}
+%\DeclareInputText{210}{}
+%\DeclareInputText{211}{}
+%\DeclareInputText{212}{}
+%\DeclareInputText{213}{}
+%\DeclareInputText{214}{}
+%\DeclareInputText{215}{}
+%\DeclareInputText{216}{}
+%\DeclareInputMath{217}{\ensuremath{\rfloor}} % lower right corner
+%\DeclareInputMath{218}{\ensuremath{\lceil}} % upper left corner
+%\DeclareInputText{219}{} % black box
+%\DeclareInputText{220}{} % lower half of black box
+%\DeclareInputText{221}{} % left bar
+%\DeclareInputText{222}{} % right bar
+%\DeclareInputText{223}{} % upper half of black box
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputMath{224}{\alpha}
+%</cp437|cp437de|cp865>
+%<cp437|cp865>\DeclareInputMath{225}{\beta}
+%<cp437de>\DeclareInputText{225}{\ss}
+%<*cp437|cp437de|cp865>
+\DeclareInputMath{226}{\Gamma}
+\DeclareInputMath{227}{\pi}
+\DeclareInputMath{228}{\Sigma}
+\DeclareInputMath{229}{\sigma}
+\DeclareInputMath{230}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputMath{231}{\gamma}
+\DeclareInputMath{232}{\Phi}
+\DeclareInputMath{233}{\theta}
+\DeclareInputMath{234}{\Omega}
+\DeclareInputMath{235}{\delta}
+\DeclareInputMath{236}{\infty}
+\DeclareInputMath{237}{\phi}
+\DeclareInputMath{238}{\varepsilon}
+\DeclareInputMath{239}{\cap}
+\DeclareInputMath{240}{\equiv}
+\DeclareInputMath{241}{\pm}
+\DeclareInputMath{242}{\ge}
+\DeclareInputMath{243}{\le}
+%\DeclareInputMath{244}{} % upper part of integral sign
+%\DeclareInputMath{245}{} % lower part of integral sign
+\DeclareInputMath{246}{\div}
+\DeclareInputMath{247}{\approx}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\textbullet}
+\DeclareInputMath{251}{\surd}
+\DeclareInputMath{252}{\mathnsuperior}
+\DeclareInputMath{253}{\mathtwosuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\textblacksquare} % right name?
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\nobreakspace}
+%</cp437|cp437de|cp865>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The Macintosh encodings}
+%
+% This input encoding was contributed by
+% Constantin Kahn (\texttt{kahn@\linebreak[0]math.toronto.edu}),
+% with minor modifications by Alan Jeffrey.
+%
+% \changes{v0.09c}{1995/05/30}{Made mac encoding `active german quote
+% safe', and added the correct docstrip magic.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*applemac>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{129}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{130}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputText{131}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\~N}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{136}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{140}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{141}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputText{142}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{143}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{144}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{145}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{146}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{147}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{148}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{149}{\"\i}
+\DeclareInputText{150}{\~n}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{152}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{154}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\~o}
+\DeclareInputText{156}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{157}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{158}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{159}{\"u}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\dag}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\textbullet}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\ss}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\textregistered}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\copyright}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\texttrademark}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputMath{173}{\neq}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\O}
+\DeclareInputMath{176}{\infty}
+\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}
+\DeclareInputMath{178}{\leq}
+\DeclareInputMath{179}{\geq}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\textyen}
+\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputMath{182}{\partial}
+\DeclareInputMath{183}{\Sigma}
+\DeclareInputMath{184}{\Pi}
+\DeclareInputMath{185}{\pi}
+\DeclareInputMath{186}{\int}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\textordfeminine}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\textordmasculine}
+\DeclareInputMath{189}{\Omega}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\o}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\textquestiondown}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\textexclamdown}
+\DeclareInputMath{194}{\lnot}
+\DeclareInputMath{195}{\surd}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\textflorin}
+\DeclareInputMath{197}{\approx}
+\DeclareInputMath{198}{\Delta}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\dots}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\~O}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\OE}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\oe}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\textemdash}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\textquotedblleft}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\textquotedblright}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\textquoteleft}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\textquoteright}
+\DeclareInputMath{214}{\div}
+\DeclareInputMath{215}{\diamond}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\"y}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\"Y}
+\DeclareInputMath{218}{/}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\guilsinglleft}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\guilsinglright}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{fi}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{fl}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\ddag}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\quotesinglbase}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\quotedblbase}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\textperthousand}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\^E}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\"I}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\textapplelogo}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\i}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\^{}}
+\DeclareInputText{247}{\~{}}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\u{}}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\.{}}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\r{}}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\H{}}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\k\ }
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\v{}}
+%</applemac>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This input encoding for the Apple Central European Codepage was
+% contributed by Radek Tryc and Marcin Wolinski
+% \verb=<wolinski@mimuw.edu.pl>=.
+%
+% \changes{v0.99b}{2002/06/16}{Added macce encoding (pr/3433)}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{2004/02/05}{Reordered code}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*applemacce>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{131}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\k A}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{136}{\k a}
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\v C}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\" a}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\v c}
+\DeclareInputText{140}{\@tabacckludge'C}
+\DeclareInputText{141}{\@tabacckludge'c}
+\DeclareInputText{143}{\@tabacckludge'Z}
+\DeclareInputText{144}{\@tabacckludge'z}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{159}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{154}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\^o}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\textdagger}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\k E}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\textsection}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\textbullet}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\textparagraph}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\SS}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\textregistered}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\k e}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'N}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\l}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\@tabacckludge'n}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\textellipsis}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\textemdash}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\textquotedbleft}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\textquotedblright}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\textquoteleft}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\textquoteright}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\textdiv}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\guilsinglleft}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\guilsinglright}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\v r}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\quotesinglbase}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\quotedblbase}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\@tabacckludge'S}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\@tabacckludge's}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\.Z}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\L}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\.z}
+%</applemacce>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The Next encoding}
+%
+% This input encoding is based on work by Stefan Ried
+% (\texttt{stef@\linebreak[0]theo-phys.uni-essen.de} and Holger Uhr
+% (\texttt{huhr@\linebreak[0]uni-paderborn.de}).
+%
+% Further extended by
+% Jens Heise (\texttt{heisbeee@calvados.zrz.TU-Berlin.DE}).
+%
+% \changes{v0.9k}{1995/11/29}{Tidied up this encoding.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1995/12/04}{Made fraction a math character.}
+% \changes{v0.9n}{1995/12/10}{Made fraction a text character.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textellipsis} to \cs{dots}
+% for consistency.}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textquotesinglbase} to
+% \cs{quotesinglbase}: this may be temporary.}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textquotedblbase} to
+% \cs{quotedblbase}: this may be temporary.}
+% \changes{v0.96}{1998/03/02}{Fixed typo in slot 159.}
+% \changes{v0.997}{2000/12/02}{Added all missing chars. (pr/3281)}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*next>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{129}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+\DeclareInputText{130}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{131}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputText{136}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\^E}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{140}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+\DeclareInputText{141}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{142}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{143}{\"I}
+\DeclareInputText{144}{\DH}
+\DeclareInputText{145}{\~N}
+\DeclareInputText{146}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+\DeclareInputText{147}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{148}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{149}{\~O}
+\DeclareInputText{150}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+\DeclareInputText{152}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{154}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\@tabacckludge'Y}
+\DeclareInputText{156}{\TH}
+\DeclareInputMath{157}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputMath{158}{\times}
+\DeclareInputMath{159}{\div}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\copyright}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\textexclamdown}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputMath{164}{/}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\textflorin}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\textquotesingle}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\textquotedblleft}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\guilsinglleft}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\guilsinglright}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{fi}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{fl}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textregistered}
+\DeclareInputText{177}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{178}{\dag}
+\DeclareInputText{179}{\ddag}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{181}{\textbar}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\textbullet}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\quotesinglbase}
+\DeclareInputText{185}{\quotedblbase}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\textquotedblright}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\dots}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\textperthousand}
+\DeclareInputMath{190}{\lnot}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\textquestiondown}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputMath{192}{\mathonesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge`{}}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\^{}}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\~{}}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\u{}}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\.{}}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputMath{201}{\mathtwosuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputMath{204}{\maththreesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\H{}}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\capitalogonek{}}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\v{}}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\textemdash}
+\DeclareInputMath{209}{\pm}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\textonequarter}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\textonehalf}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\textthreequarters}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{215}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\"e}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\textordfeminine}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\"\i}
+\DeclareInputMath{230}{\eth}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\~n}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\L}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\O}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\OE}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\textordmasculine}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\~o}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\i}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{247}{\@tabacckludge'y}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\l}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\o}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\oe}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\ss}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\th}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\"y}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{}
+%</next>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \changes{v0.9a}{1995/04/23}{\cs{textonequarter} and friends should
+% be declared with \cs{DeclareInputText}}
+% \section{The MS Windows ANSI encoding cp1252,\\
+% and the ISO Latin-1 and Latin-9 encodings}
+%
+% The MS Windows ANSI, cp 1252, input encoding was contributed by
+% Berthold K.P. Horn (\texttt{bkph@\linebreak[0]ai.mit.edu}).
+%
+% It has two very different names so the same code produces two files.
+% These encoding files both define the characters in the
+% MS Windows 3.1 ANSI encoding (Western Europe), also known as code
+% page 1252, which is based on ISO Latin-1 but has important additions
+% in the 128--159 range.
+%
+% Designed for:
+% Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Icelandic,
+% Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, and Swedish.
+%
+% Note: Windows ANSI --- like Macintosh standard roman encoding ---
+% has quotesingle at 39, and grave at 96 --- which is here
+% ignored.
+%
+% The ISO Latin-1 encoding file defines only the restricted range of
+% characters available in the ISO~8859-1 encoding.
+%
+% The ISO~Latin-9 encoding file defines the characters in the
+% ISO~8859-15 encoding. It was contributed by Karsten Tinnefeld
+% (\texttt{karsten@tinnefeld.com}).
+% It differs only a small amount from ISO~Latin-1 and is a
+% replacement for it that contains a few characters that are needed for
+% French and Finnish. Further, a slot for the Euro currency sign has
+% been added and this could be the killer argument for many 8-bit
+% texts to be written in Latin-9 in the future.
+%
+% According to a Linux manpage, ISO~Latin-9 supports Albanian, Basque,
+% Breton, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
+% English, Estonian, Faroese, Finnish, French, Frisian, Galician, German,
+% Greenlandic, Icelandic, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Latin, Luxemburgish,
+% Norwegian, Portuguese, Rhaeto-Romanic, Scottish Gaelic, Spanish and
+% Swedish.
+%
+% The characters added in |latin9.def| are (in \LaTeX{} notation):
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \texteuro, \v S \v s \v Z \v z \OE \oe \" Y
+% \end{verbatim}
+% They displace the following characters from |latin1.def|:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \textcurrency \textbrokenbar \"{} \'{} \c{}
+% \textonequarter \textonehalf \textthreequarters
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9e}{1995/08/31}{Redeclared "AD to be soft hyphen.}
+% \changes{v0.9e}{1995/08/31}{Swapped ordfeminine and ordmasculine.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9p}{1996/04/11}{ansinew 09f is \"Y not \"y, latex/2119}
+%
+% \changes{v0.91}{1997/08/19}{Exchanged codes for
+% \cs{textendash} and \cs{textemdash}.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Added cp1252 and merged latin1}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{ldots} to \cs{dots}, this
+% should be undetectable since \cs{ldots} is not robust.}
+%
+% \changes{v0.99a}{2001/07/10}{Added latin9 (from Karsten Tinnefeld)}
+% \changes{v0.99b}{2002/06/16}{Added code points 142,158 for cp1252 (pr/3441)}
+% \changes{v0.99b}{2002/07/08}{Added code 128 (texteuro) for cp1252 (pr/3423)}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cp1252>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\texteuro}
+\DeclareInputText{130}{\quotesinglbase}
+\DeclareInputText{131}{\textflorin}
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\quotedblbase}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\dots}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\dag}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{\ddag}
+\DeclareInputText{136}{\^{}}
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\textperthousand}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\guilsinglleft}
+\DeclareInputText{140}{\OE}
+\DeclareInputText{142}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{145}{\textquoteleft}
+\DeclareInputText{146}{\textquoteright}
+\DeclareInputText{147}{\textquotedblleft}
+\DeclareInputText{148}{\textquotedblright}
+\DeclareInputText{149}{\textbullet}
+\DeclareInputText{150}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\textemdash}
+\DeclareInputText{152}{\~{}}
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\texttrademark}
+\DeclareInputText{154}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\guilsinglright}
+\DeclareInputText{156}{\oe}
+\DeclareInputText{158}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{159}{\"Y}
+%</cp1252>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This (somewhat confused) table is now even more disordered: first
+% we deal with those few characters that are different in latin9,
+% then with the rest.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cp1252|latin1>
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters}
+%</cp1252|latin1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin9>
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\texteuro}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\OE}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\oe}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\"Y}
+%</latin9>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cp1252|latin1|latin9>
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\textexclamdown}
+\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
+\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
+\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen}
+\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\copyright}
+\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\textordfeminine}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\textordmasculine}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\textquestiondown}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\DH}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\~N}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\~O}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputMath{215}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\O}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\^E}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\@tabacckludge'Y}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\TH}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\"I}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\dh}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\~n}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\~o}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputMath{247}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\o}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\@tabacckludge'y}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\th}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\"\i}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\"y}
+%</cp1252|latin1|latin9>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%\section{The ISO 8859-16 (Latin10) encoding}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{2004/02/04}{Added ISO 8859-16 Latin10 (pr/3568)}
+%
+% This set of coded graphic characters is intended for use in data and
+% text processing applications and also for information interchange. The
+% set contains graphic characters used for general purpose applications in
+% typical office environments in at least the following languages:
+% Albanian, Croatian, English, Finnish, French, German, Hungarian, Irish
+% Gaelic (new orthography), Italian, Latin, Polish, Romanian, and
+% Slovenian. This set of coded graphic characters may be regarded as a
+% version of an 8-bit code according to ISO/IEC 2022 or ISO/IEC 4873 at
+% level 1. [ISO 8859-16:2001(E), p. 1]
+%
+% ISO 8859-16 was primarily designed for single-byte encoding the Romanian
+% language. The UTF-8 charset is the preferred and in today's MIME software
+% more widely implemented encoding suitable for Romanian.
+%
+% Data for the \LaTeX{} support was mainly provided by Ionel Ciob\^{i}c\u{a}
+% with additions and corrections taken from\\
+% \texttt{http://www.unicode.org/Public/MAPPINGS/ISO8859/8859-16.TXT}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin10>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The ``comma below'' accent is provided here in a crude (better
+% than nothing) version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault\textcommabelow[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup\ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth
+ \raise-.31ex\hbox{\check@mathfonts
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use |\sf@size| instead of |\ssf@size| if the comma looks too small:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fontsize\ssf@size\z@
+ \math@fontsfalse\selectfont,}\hidewidth}\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault\textpm{\ensuremath\pm}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\k A}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\k a}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\L}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\texteuro}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\quotedblbase}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\textcommabelow S}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputText{172}{\@tabacckludge'Z}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\@tabacckludge'z}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\.Z}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{177}{\textpm}
+\DeclareInputText{178}{\v C}
+\DeclareInputText{179}{\l}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{181}{\textquotedblright}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{185}{\v c}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\textcommabelow s}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\OE}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\oe}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\"Y}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\.z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\u A}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\@tabacckludge'C}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\^E}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\"I}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\DJ}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\@tabacckludge'N}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\H O}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputText{215}{\@tabacckludge'S}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\H U}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\^U}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\k E}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\textcommabelow T}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\u a}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\@tabacckludge'c}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\^e}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\"\i}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\dj}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\@tabacckludge'n}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\H o}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputText{247}{\@tabacckludge's}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\H u}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\^u}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\k e}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\textcommabelow t}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\"y}
+%</latin10>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\section{The MS Windows encoding cp1250}
+%
+% This is an MS Windows encoding for Central and Eastern Europe,
+% known as Code Page 1250; it was provided by Marcin Woli\'nski
+% \texttt{wolinski@melkor.mimuw.edu.pl} and edited by Chris Rowley
+% (see v0.94 below) to make it consistent with other files.
+%
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textellipsis} to \cs{dots}
+% for consistency.}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textdagger} to \cs{dag}
+% for consistency.}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textdagger} to \cs{dag}
+% for consistency.}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textparagraph} to \cs{P}
+% for consistency.}
+% \changes{v0.94}{1997/12/17}{Changed \cs{textsection} to \cs{S}
+% for consistency.}
+% \changes{v0.99b}{2002/07/28}{Added code 128 (texteuro) for cp1250}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cp1250>
+\DeclareInputText{128}{\texteuro}
+%\DeclareInputText{129}{} % n/u
+\DeclareInputText{130}{\quotesinglbase}
+%\DeclareInputText{131}{} % n/u
+\DeclareInputText{132}{\quotedblbase}
+\DeclareInputText{133}{\dots}
+\DeclareInputText{134}{\dag}
+\DeclareInputText{135}{\ddag}
+%\DeclareInputText{136}{} % n/u
+\DeclareInputText{137}{\textperthousand}
+\DeclareInputText{138}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputText{139}{\guilsinglleft}
+\DeclareInputText{140}{\@tabacckludge'S}
+\DeclareInputText{141}{\v T}
+\DeclareInputText{142}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{143}{\@tabacckludge'Z}
+%\DeclareInputText{144}{} % n/u
+\DeclareInputText{145}{\textquoteleft}
+\DeclareInputText{146}{\textquoteright}
+\DeclareInputText{147}{\textquotedblleft}
+\DeclareInputText{148}{\textquotedblright}
+\DeclareInputText{149}{\textbullet}
+\DeclareInputText{150}{\textendash}
+\DeclareInputText{151}{\textemdash}
+%\DeclareInputText{152}{} % n/u
+\DeclareInputText{153}{\texttrademark}
+\DeclareInputText{154}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{155}{\guilsinglright}
+\DeclareInputText{156}{\@tabacckludge's}
+\DeclareInputText{157}{\v t} % t caron (t') ?
+\DeclareInputText{158}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{159}{\@tabacckludge'z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\v{}}
+\DeclareInputText{162}{\u{}}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\L}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\k A}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\copyright}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\c S}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
+\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}% soft hyphen
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\.Z}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}% plus-minus
+\DeclareInputText{178}{\k\ }
+\DeclareInputText{179}{\l}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}% micro sign
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{185}{\k a}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\c s}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
+\DeclareInputText{188}{\v L}% L caron (L') ?
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\H{}}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\v l}% l caron (l') ?
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\. z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge'R}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\^A}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\u A}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\@tabacckludge'L}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\@tabacckludge'C}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\c C}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\v C}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\k E}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\v E}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\^I}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\v D}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\DJ} % D stroke
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\@tabacckludge'N}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\v N}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\H O}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputMath{215}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\v R}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\r U}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\H U}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\" U}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\@tabacckludge'Y}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\c T}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge'r}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\^a}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\u a}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\" a}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\@tabacckludge'l}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\@tabacckludge'c}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\c c}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\v c}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\k e}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\v e}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\^\i}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\v d} % d caron (d') ?
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\dj} % d stroke
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\@tabacckludge'n}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\v n}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\H o}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputMath{247}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\v r}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\r u}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\H u}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\@tabacckludge'y}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\c t}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\.{}}
+%</cp1250>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%\section{The MS Windows encoding cp1257}
+%
+% This is an MS Windows encoding for Baltic languages,
+% known as Code Page 1257; it was provided on the web at
+% \texttt{http://nad.datapro.lv/LaTeX} and edited by Frank
+% to make it consistent with other files.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cp1257>
+\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
+\DeclareInputText{161}{\k A}
+\DeclareInputText{163}{\c R}
+\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
+\DeclareInputText{165}{\~I}
+\DeclareInputText{166}{\c L}
+\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
+\DeclareInputText{168}{\"\ }
+\DeclareInputText{169}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputText{170}{\@tabacckludge=E}
+\DeclareInputText{171}{\c G}
+\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
+\DeclareInputText{174}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}}
+\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
+\DeclareInputText{177}{\k a}
+\DeclareInputText{178}{\k\ }
+\DeclareInputText{179}{\c r}
+\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
+\DeclareInputText{181}{\~\i}
+\DeclareInputText{182}{\c l}
+\DeclareInputText{183}{\v\ }
+\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
+\DeclareInputText{185}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{186}{\@tabacckludge=e}
+\DeclareInputText{187}{\c g}
+\DeclareInputText{189}{\NG}
+\DeclareInputText{190}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{191}{\ng}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{192}{\@tabacckludge=A}
+\DeclareInputText{193}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+\DeclareInputText{194}{\=A}
+\DeclareInputText{195}{\~A}
+\DeclareInputText{196}{\"A}
+\DeclareInputText{197}{\r A}
+\DeclareInputText{198}{\AE}
+\DeclareInputText{199}{\=E}
+\DeclareInputText{200}{\v C}
+\DeclareInputText{201}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+\DeclareInputText{202}{\k E}
+\DeclareInputText{203}{\"E}
+\DeclareInputText{204}{\c G}
+\DeclareInputText{205}{\c K}
+\DeclareInputText{206}{\@tabacckludge=I}
+\DeclareInputText{207}{\c L}
+\DeclareInputText{208}{\v S}
+\DeclareInputText{209}{\c N}
+\DeclareInputText{210}{\c N}
+\DeclareInputText{211}{\c N}
+\DeclareInputText{212}{\^O}
+\DeclareInputText{213}{\~O}
+\DeclareInputText{214}{\"O}
+\DeclareInputMath{215}{\times}
+\DeclareInputText{216}{\O}
+\DeclareInputText{217}{\k U}
+\DeclareInputText{218}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+\DeclareInputText{219}{\@tabacckludge=U}
+\DeclareInputText{220}{\"U}
+\DeclareInputText{221}{\~U}
+\DeclareInputText{222}{\v Z}
+\DeclareInputText{223}{\ss}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareInputText{224}{\@tabacckludge=a}
+\DeclareInputText{225}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+\DeclareInputText{226}{\@tabacckludge=a}
+\DeclareInputText{227}{\~a}
+\DeclareInputText{228}{\"a}
+\DeclareInputText{229}{\r a}
+\DeclareInputText{230}{\ae}
+\DeclareInputText{231}{\@tabacckludge=e}
+\DeclareInputText{232}{\v c}
+\DeclareInputText{233}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+\DeclareInputText{234}{\k e}
+\DeclareInputText{235}{\"e}
+\DeclareInputText{236}{\k g}
+\DeclareInputText{237}{\c k}
+\DeclareInputText{238}{\@tabacckludge=\i}
+\DeclareInputText{239}{\k l}
+\DeclareInputText{240}{\v s}
+\DeclareInputText{241}{\c n}
+\DeclareInputText{242}{\k n}
+\DeclareInputText{243}{\c k}
+\DeclareInputText{244}{\^o}
+\DeclareInputText{245}{\~o}
+\DeclareInputText{246}{\"o}
+\DeclareInputMath{247}{\div}
+\DeclareInputText{248}{\o}
+\DeclareInputText{249}{\k u}
+\DeclareInputText{250}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+\DeclareInputText{251}{\@tabacckludge=u}
+\DeclareInputText{252}{\"u}
+\DeclareInputText{253}{\~u}
+\DeclareInputText{254}{\v z}
+\DeclareInputText{255}{\.\ }
+%</cp1257>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Finally, we reset the category code of the at sign at the end of all
+% .def files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<-package>\makeatother
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..245b96995f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/inputenc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating input encoding files ***}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{inputenc.sty}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{package}}
+ \file{latin1.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{latin1}}
+ \file{latin2.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{latin2}}
+ \file{latin3.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{latin3}}
+ \file{latin4.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{latin4}}
+ \file{latin5.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{latin5}}
+ \file{latin9.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{latin9}}
+ \file{latin10.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{latin10}}
+ }
+
+
+
+ \generate{
+ \file{cp850.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp850}}
+ \file{cp852.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp852}}
+ \file{cp858.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp858}}
+ \file{cp865.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp865}}
+ \file{cp437.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp437}}
+ \file{cp437de.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp437de}}
+ \file{decmulti.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{decmulti}}
+ }
+
+ \generate{
+ \file{ascii.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{ascii}}
+ \file{applemac.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{applemac}}
+ \file{macce.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{applemacce}}
+ \file{next.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{next}}
+ \file{ansinew.def}{% synonym for cp1252
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp1252,ansinew}}
+ \file{cp1250.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp1250}}
+ \file{cp1252.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp1252}}
+ \file{cp1257.def}{
+ \from{inputenc.dtx}{cp1257}}
+ }
+
+\Msg{*** Generating utf8 input encoding files ***}
+
+\generate{\file{utf8.def}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{utf8}}
+ \file{utf8-test.tex}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{test}}
+ \file{lcyenc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{lcy}}
+ \file{ly1enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{ly1}}
+ \file{omsenc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{oms}}
+ \file{ot1enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{ot1}}
+ \file{ot2enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{ot2}}
+ \file{t1enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t1}}
+ \file{t2aenc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t2a}}
+ \file{t2benc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t2b}}
+ \file{t2cenc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{t2c}}
+ \file{ts1enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{ts1}}
+ \file{x2enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{x2}}
+ \file{utf8enc.dfu}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{all}}
+ \file{utf8test.tex}{\from{utf8ienc.dtx}{test}}
+ }
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space *.def *.dfu *.sty }
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run inputenc.dtx and }
+\Msg{* through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..323a275dfa3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1147 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \title{Compatibility mode for \LaTeXe{} emulating \LaTeX~2.09}
+% \author{Alan Jeffrey and Frank Mittelbach}
+% \date{1995/12/27}
+%
+% \CheckSum{717}
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \changes{v0.01}{1993/12/11}{Created the file, including:
+% setting the compatibility flag,
+% inputting oldlfont.sty,
+% setting the default encoding to be OT1, and
+% inputting the latex209.rc file}
+% \changes{v0.02}{1993/12/12}{Changed the package filename to
+% latex209.sty, and added the provides-package command.}
+% \changes{v0.03}{1993/12/16}{Added an empty mark, replaced
+% provides-package with provides-file, added the compatibility hook.}
+% \changes{v0.04}{1993/12/16}{Moved oldlfont.sty out of the
+% compatibility hook and back into latex209.cmp. Redefined
+% newfontswitch to ignore redefinitions. Set the LaTeX 2e commands
+% to be errors.}
+% \changes{v0.05}{1993/12/17}
+% {Removed the \cs{mark}, since it is now in the kernel.}
+% \changes{v0.06}{1993/12/18}{Replaced the redefinition of
+% \cs{@newfontswitch} to a redefinition of \cs{@renewfontswitch}.
+% Added \cs{sloppy.}}
+% \changes{v0.07}{1993/12/18}{Fixed a bug with \cs{@missingfileerror}.}
+% \changes{v0.08}{1993/12/18}{Added the obsolete .sty files.}
+% \changes{v0.09}{1993/12/20}{Removed art10.sty and friends.}
+% \changes{v0.10}{1994/01/14}{Replaced latex209.rc by latex209.cfg.}
+% \changes{v0.11}{1994/01/21}{Replaced latex209.cmp by latex209.def.
+% Moved half of oldlfont.dtx to here. Split the package dst option
+% into head and tail.}
+% \changes{v0.12}{1994/01/24}
+% {Added \cs{normalshape} and \cs{mediumseries}, and
+% declared the `oldlfont' option to stop oldlfont.sty from being
+% loaded.}
+% \changes{v0.13}{1994/01/31}{removed setting of \cs{normalsize}. FMi}
+% \changes{v0.14}{1994/02/07}{Added it back again.}
+% \changes{v0.15}{1994/02/10}{Renamed \cs{@compatibility} to
+% \cs{@documentclasshook}. Added the check for whether
+% \cs{normalsize} or \cs{@normalsize} needs defined.}
+% \changes{v0.16}{1994/02/11}{Replaced the allocation of temporary
+% dimens for \cs{footheight}, \cs{@maxsep} and \cs{@dblmaxsep}
+% by real dimen variables.}
+% \changes{v0.17}{1994/03/02}{Moved the documentation to the front, so
+% this file can be processed directly without a driver file.
+% Added \cs{@ptscale}, \cs{@halfmag}, \cs{@magscale}, and set the
+% default font to be CMR at 10pt.}
+% \changes{v0.18}{1994/03/11}{Restored the old definition of \cs{verb}.
+% Set the catcodes of the non-alphanumerics.}
+% \changes{v0.19}{1994/04/05}{Switched off more 2e features: \cs{lrbox},
+% \cs{width}, \cs{height}, \cs{depth} in box dimensions, and the new
+% optional arguments to \cs{parbox}, \cs{minipage} and
+% \cs{newcommand}. The code was provided by DPC. Fixed a misplaced
+% </head!>. Made the \cs{ProvidesPackage} and \cs{ProvidesClass}
+% warnings log messages. Removed \cs{filedate}.}
+% \changes{v0.20}{1994/04/20}
+% {Restored the 2.09 definition of \cs{@noligs}.}
+% \changes{v0.21}{1994/04/24}
+% {Restored the 2.09 definition of \cs{@lquote}.}
+% \changes{v0.22}{1994/05/02}{Added \cs{@latex@e@command}.}
+% \changes{v0.23}{1994/05/11}{Added bezier.sty.}
+% \changes{v0.24}{1994/05/14}{Removed \cs{@@@} and switched the box
+% commands back on, for use in packages.}
+% \changes{v0.24}{1994/05/14}{Changed the 2e command error help.}
+% \changes{v0.24}{1994/05/14}{Removed date from announcement of
+% 2.09 mode.}
+% \changes{v0.25}{1994/05/14}{Added the newlfont option, and rewrote the
+% oldlfont option.}
+% \changes{v0.26}{1994/05/15}{Added the margid and nomargid options.}
+% \changes{v0.27}{1994/05/16}{Fixed a bug with the margid option.}
+% \changes{v0.28}{1994/05/16}{Fixed a bug with \cs{mediumseries}.}
+% \changes{v0.29}{1994/05/17}{Fixed a bug with \cs{newlfont}.}
+% \changes{v0.29}{1994/05/17}{Removed extra spaces from the missing
+% file error.}
+% \changes{v0.29}{1994/05/17}{Made the bezier package use \cs{iffalse}
+% to comment itself out, rather than \%\%, which caused it to
+% appear in every 2.09 file.}
+% \changes{v0.30}{1994/05/18}{Added \cs{@finalstrut}.}
+% \changes{v0.31}{1994/05/20}{New definition of \cs{@finalstrut}.}
+% \changes{v0.31}{1994/05/20}{Added the t1enc package.}
+% \changes{v0.32}{1994/05/20}{Added SLiTeX.}
+% \changes{v0.33}{1994/06/01}{Fixed bug with SLiTeX.}
+% \changes{v0.34}{1994/08/22}{Replaced l2euser by usrguide.}
+% \changes{v0.34}{1994/08/22}{Added a default definition for \cs{+}.}
+% \changes{v0.35}{1994/09/23}
+% {Added spaces to the old font scale commands.}
+% \changes{v0.36}{1994/10/17}{Added an empty \cs{mark} back again.}
+% \changes{v0.37}{1994/10/20}{Corrected a typo.}
+% \changes{v0.38}{1994/11/16}{Removed \cs{LaTeXe} from this list}
+% \changes{v0.39}{1994/11/28}{Added old behaviour of floats and space.}
+% \changes{v0.40}{1995/05/05}{Make \cs{verb} use \cs{tt} font in
+% math mode.}
+% \changes{v0.49}{1995/10/26}{Added code for fleqn.sty, leqno.sty,
+% openbib.sty.}
+% \changes{v0.50}{1995/12/08}{Switched of \cs{@inmathwarn}.}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% The file |latex209.def| is read in by \LaTeXe{} whenever it finds a
+% |\documentstyle| rather than |\documentclass| command at the
+% beginning of the file. This indicates a \LaTeX~2.09 document, which
+% should be processed in {\em compatibility mode}.
+%
+% Any document which compiled under \LaTeX~2.09 should compile under
+% compatibility mode, unless it uses low-level commands such as
+% |\tenrm|.
+%
+% \section{The docstrip modules}
+%
+% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
+% docstrip in generating the external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% head & produce the beginning of |latex209.def| \\
+% tail & produce the end of |latex209.def| \\
+% article & produce |article.sty| \\
+% book & produce |book.sty| \\
+% report & produce |report.sty| \\
+% slides & produce |slides.sty| \\
+% letter & produce |letter.sty| \\
+% bezier & produce |bezier.sty| \\
+% fleqn & produce |fleqn.sty| \\
+% leqno & produce |leqno.sty| \\
+% openbib & produce |openbib.sty|
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% Between the |head| and |tail| of |latex209.def|, the code for
+% |oldlfont.sty| is included, so \LaTeX~2.09 documents will
+% automatically be run simulating the OFSS.
+% \changes{v0.09}{1993/12/20}{Removed artN.sty, bkN.sty and repN.sty.}
+% \changes{v0.11}{1994/01/21}{Split package into head and tail.}
+% \changes{v0.23}{1994/05/11}{Added bezier option.}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Driver}
+%
+% This section contains the driver for this documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\DisableCrossrefs
+% \OnlyDescription
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{latex209.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Beginning of latex209.def}
+%
+% \changes{v0.11}{1994/01/21}{oldlfont.dtx is now also used to generate
+% latex209.dtx.}
+%
+% This section describes the beginning of the file |latex209.def|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*head>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Identification}
+%
+% This file needs to be run with \LaTeXe.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Describe the file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesFile{latex209.def}[1998/05/13 v0.52 Standard LaTeX file]
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.24}{1994/05/14}{Removed date.}
+% \changes{v0.40}{1995/03/21}
+% {(DPC) Do not execute this file twice latex/1460}
+% Announce compatibility mode to the user.
+% \changes{v0.52}{1998/05/13}{Added experimental
+% long typeout to possibly avoid prs like 2807}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \expandafter\endinput
+\else
+ \typeout{^^J\space
+\@spaces\@spaces\space Entering LaTeX 2.09 COMPATIBILITY MODE^^J\space
+ *************************************************************^^J\space
+ \space\space\space!!WARNING!!\space
+ \space\space\space!!WARNING!!\space
+ \space\space\space!!WARNING!!\space
+ \space\space\space!!WARNING!!\space\space\space ^^J\space
+ ^^J\space
+ This mode attempts to provide an emulation of the LaTeX 2.09^^J\space
+ author environment so that OLD documents can be successfully^^J\space
+ processed. It should NOT be used for NEW documents!^^J\space
+ ^^J\space
+ New documents should use Standard LaTeX conventions and start^^J\space
+ with the \string\documentclass\space command.^^J\space
+ ^^J\space
+ Compatibility mode is UNLIKELY TO WORK with LaTeX 2.09 style^^J\space
+ files that change any internal macros, especially not with^^J\space
+ those that change the FONT SELECTION or OUTPUT ROUTINES.^^J\space
+^^J\space
+ Therefore such style files MUST BE UPDATED to use^^J\space
+\@spaces\@spaces\space Current Standard LaTeX: LaTeX2e.^^J\space
+ If you suspect that you may be using such a style file, which^^J\space
+ is probably very, very old by now, then you should attempt to^^J\space
+ get it updated by sending a copy of this error message to the^^J\space
+ author of that file.^^J\space
+ *************************************************************^^J}
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Compatibility flag}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@compatibilitytrue}
+% \LaTeXe{} has a flag |\if@compatibility| which can be used by
+% document classes or packages to determine whether they are running
+% in compatibility mode or not. This flag is set true by this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@compatibilitytrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Removing features}
+%
+% \changes{v0.22}{1994/05/02}{Added \cs{latex@e@command}.}
+% \changes{v0.36}{1994/10/17}{Redid switching off commands.}
+% \changes{v0.38}{1994/11/16}{Removed \cs{LaTeXe} from this list}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usepackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\listfiles}
+% \begin{macro}{\ensuremath}
+% \begin{macro}{\lrbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcommand}
+% These \LaTeXe{} commands are switched off in compatibility mode.
+% This is done by saving the old definition, and redefining the
+% command to call |\@latex@e@error| before executing the old version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tempa#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname @@\string#1\endcsname#1%
+ \edef#1{%
+ \noexpand\@latex@e@error{\noexpand#2}%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname @@\string#1\endcsname
+ }%
+}
+\@tempa\usepackage\usepackage
+\@tempa\listfiles\listfiles
+\@tempa\ensuremath\ensuremath
+\@tempa\lrbox{\begin{lrbox}}%
+\@tempa\@xargdef{\newcommand{cmd}[args][def]}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v0.22}{1994/05/02}
+% {Added \cs{if@latex@e@errors} and \cs{@@@}.}
+% \changes{v0.24}
+% {1994/05/14}{Removed \cs{if@latex@e@errors} and \cs{@@@}.}
+% \changes{v0.24}{1994/05/14}{Changed the error help.}
+% \changes{v0.36}{1994/10/17}{Initialized \cs{@latex@e@error} to do
+% nothing, and switched it on at the begin document.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@latex@e@error}
+% \begin{macro}{\@latex@e@error@}
+% This error is produced if a user uses a \LaTeXe{} command in
+% compatibility mode. This is to encourage users to move over to
+% using |\documentclass| as quickly as possible. During the preamble
+% the error does nothing (so that packages can use \LaTeXe{} commands)
+% but it is redefined to be an error message at |\begin{document}|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@latex@e@error\@gobble
+\def\@latex@e@error@#1{%
+ \@latexerr{%
+ LaTeX2e command \string#1\space in LaTeX 2.09 document%
+ }{%
+ This is a LaTeX 2.09 document, but it contains
+ \string#1.^^J%
+ If you want to use the new features of LaTeX2e,
+ your document^^J%
+ should begin with \string\documentclass\space
+ rather than \string\documentstyle
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v0.36}{1994/10/17}
+% {Allow 2e commands to be redefined once with \cs{newcommand}.}
+% \changes{v0.40}{1995/03/21}{
+% (DPC) Add \cs{r} to the list of 2e commands latex/1424}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifdefinable}
+% \begin{macro}{\@old@ifdefinable}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@ifdefinable}
+% \begin{macro}{\@latex@e@commands}
+% We trap the |\@notdefinable| error message to check to see if the
+% command is a \LaTeXe{} command, in which case we allow the
+% definition to happen. We keep a list of commands which are
+% allowed to be redefined this way in |\@latex@e@commands|, and
+% remove an entry each time it is defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@old@ifdefinable\@ifdefinable
+\long\def\@ifdefinable#1{%
+ \def\@tempa##1#1##2#1##3#1##4\@tempa{%
+ \def\@latex@e@commands{##1##2}%
+ ##3% ##3 will either be \iftrue or \iffalse
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@old@ifdefinable\expandafter#1%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \expandafter\@tempa\@latex@e@commands#1\iftrue#1\iffalse#1\@tempa%
+}
+\let\@@ifdefinable\@ifdefinable
+\def\@latex@e@commands{%
+ \usepackage\listfiles\ensuremath\LaTeXe\lrbox
+ \th\dh\ng\dj\TH\DH\NG\DJ\k\r\SS
+ \guillemotleft\guillemotright\guilsinglleft
+ \guilsinglright\quotedblbase\quotesinglbase
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@begin@tempboxa}
+% \changes{v0.22}{1994/05/02}{Commented out the redefinition of
+% \cs{@begin@tempboxa}.}
+% If we were to switch off the new |\width|, |\height| and |\depth|
+% commands, this is how to do it. This isn't done, since these
+% commands may be used in packages.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\long\def\@begin@tempboxa#1#2{%
+% \begingroup
+% \setbox\@tempboxa#1{{#2}}}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Document class hook}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@documentclasshook}
+% \changes{v0.15}{1994/02/10}{Renamed from \cs{@compatibility} to
+% \cs{@documentclasshook}. Added the check for \cs{@normalsize} and
+% \cs{normalsize} being defined.}
+% \changes{v0.22}{1994/05/02}{Moved switching off commands into the
+% document class hook.}
+% \changes{v0.24}{1994/05/14}{Switched the box commands back on, for use
+% in packages.}
+% \changes{v0.36}{1994/10/17}{Changed the way the 2e command error is
+% activated.}
+% \changes{v0.51}{1996/05/24}{(DPC) Reimplemented for /2153.}
+% This macro is called by each use of |\documentclass|. We define
+% it to define |\@normalsize| and |\normalsize| if necessary,
+% to input each unused option as a package, and to switch off the new
+% \LaTeXe{} commands. However, we leave on the commands
+% |\settoheight|, |\settowidth| and the new options to |\parbox| and
+% |\minipage|, since these are likely to be used in packages.
+%
+% The intention of the strange |\normalsize| tests below is that after
+% the |\documentstyle| command has completed, if neither |\normalsize|
+% nor |\@normalsize| was defined by the main style or one of its
+% `substyles' or `options', then |\@normalsize| will be undefined and
+% |\normalsize| will generate an error saying it hasn't been defined.
+%
+% If the style defined either |\normalsize| or \@|normalsize| then
+% these two commands will be |\let| equal to each other, with the
+% definition given by the style file.
+%
+% If the style defines both |\normalsize| and |\@normalsize| then
+% those two definitions are kept.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@documentclasshook{%
+ \RequirePackage\@unusedoptionlist
+ \let\@unusedoptionlist\@empty
+ \def\@tempa{\@normalsize}%
+ \ifx\normalsize\@tempa
+ \let\normalsize\@normalsize
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@normalsize\@undefined
+ \let\@normalsize\normalsize
+ \fi
+ \ifx\normalsize\@undefined
+ \let\normalsize\original@normalsize
+ \fi
+ \let\@latex@e@error\@latex@e@error@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\original@normalsize}
+% \changes{v0.51}{1996/05/24}{(DPC) Macro added /2153.}
+% Save the original definition of |\normalsize| (which generates an
+% error)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\original@normalsize\normalsize
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
+% \changes{v0.14}{1994/02/07}{Added \cs{normalsize}.}
+% Some styles don't define |\normalsize|, just |\@normalsize|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{\@normalsize}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Compatibility with \LaTeX~2.09 document styles}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@missingfileerror}
+% If a |.cls| file is missing, we look to see if there is
+% a file of the same name with a |.sty| extension.
+% \changes{v0.06}{1993/12/18}{Corrected a typo
+% \cs{@saved@missingfileerror}
+% should have been \cs{saved@missingfileerror}.}
+% \changes{v0.07}{1993/12/18}{Corrected a typo, I'd forgotten to pass
+% the arguments of \cs{@missingfileerror} on to
+% \cs{saved@missingfileerror}.}
+% \changes{v0.29}{1994/05/17}{Removed extraneous spaces.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{saved@missingfileerror}{
+ \let\saved@missingfileerror=\@missingfileerror
+}{}
+\def\@missingfileerror#1#2{%
+ \ifx#2\@clsextension
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1.\@pkgextension}{%
+ \wlog{Compatibility mode: loading #1.\@pkgextension
+ \space rather than #1.#2.}%
+ }{%
+ \saved@missingfileerror{#1}{#2}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \saved@missingfileerror{#1}{#2}%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@obsoletefile}
+% For compatibility with the document styles which |\input| the
+% standard \LaTeX~2.09 document styles, we distribute
+% files called |article.sty|, |book.sty|, |report.sty|,
+% |slides.sty| and |letter.sty|. These use the command
+% |\@obsoletefile|, which the \LaTeXe{} kernel defines to produce a
+% warning message. We redefine it to just produce a message in the
+% log file, and to pass any options from the old filename to the
+% new filename.
+% \changes{v0.08}{1993/12/19}{Added this command.}
+% \changes{v0.10}{1994/01/14}{Added the option-passing.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@obsoletefile#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname opt@#1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname opt@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname
+ \wlog{Compatibility mode: inputting `#1'
+ instead of obsolete `#2'.}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\@maxsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblmaxsep}
+% \LaTeX~2.09 supported these parameters, so for compatibility with
+% old document styles we allocate them.
+% \changes{v0.16}{1994/02/11}{Replaced the allocation of temporary
+% dimens for \cs{footheight}, \cs{@maxsep} and \cs{@dblmaxsep} by
+% real dimen variables.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\footheight
+\newdimen\@maxsep
+\newdimen\@dblmaxsep
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v0.36}{1994/10/17}{Added an empty \cs{mark}.}
+% \changes{v0.37}
+% {1994/10/20}{Corrected a type with the empty \cs{mark}.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mark}
+% \LaTeX~2.09 initialized an empty mark. Who knows, someone may have
+% relied on it:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mark{{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Layout}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sloppy}
+% \changes{v0.06}{1993/12/18}{Added \cs{sloppy}}
+% There is a new version of |\sloppy| in \LaTeXe, so we restore the
+% old one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sloppy{\tolerance \@M \hfuzz .5\p@ \vfuzz .5\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@finalstrut}
+% \changes{v0.30}{1994/05/18}{Added \cs{@finalstrut}.}
+% \changes{v0.31}{1994/05/20}{New definition of \cs{@finalstrut}.}
+% The strut which is used in a footnote has changed. This restores
+% the old definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@finalstrut#1{\unskip\strut}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@marginparreset}
+% \begin{macro}{\@floatboxreset}
+% \changes{v0.39}{1994/11/28}{Added old behaviour of floats and space.}
+% \changes{v0.45}{1995/05/25}{(CAR) Changed method of restoring
+% old behaviour of floats and space.}
+% Restore the old spacing around floats.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let \@marginparreset \@empty
+\let \@floatboxreset \@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\proclaim}
+% \changes{v0.41}{1995/04/24}
+% {Move here from ltplain.dtx}
+% From plain \TeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\outer\def\proclaim #1. #2\par{%
+ \medbreak
+ \noindent{\bfseries#1.\enspace}{\slshape#2\par}%
+ \ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty55\medskip
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hang}
+% \begin{macro}{\textindent}
+% \changes{v0.42}{1995/04/27}
+% {Move here from ltplain.dtx}
+% From plain \TeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hang{\hangindent\parindent}
+\def\textindent#1{\indent\llap{#1\enspace}\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ttraggedright}
+% \changes{v0.41}{1995/04/24}
+% {Move here from ltplain.dtx}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ttraggedright{\reset@font\ttfamily\rightskip\z@ plus2em\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotemark}
+% \changes{v0.43}{1995/05/12}
+% {macro added}
+% \LaTeXe\ version has |\nobreak| to allow hyphenation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@footnotemark{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\fi
+ \@makefnmark
+ \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
+ \relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@textsuperscript}
+% \changes{v0.48}{1995/07/07}
+% {macro added for latex/1722}
+% Fudge this command to remove the text font command which
+% is always the first thing in the argument. This is needed
+% as in compatibility mode footnotes are processed in math mode,
+% but the standard classes call |\@textsuperscript| in the definition
+% of |\thanks|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@textsuperscript#1{$\m@th^{\@gobble#1}$}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
+% \changes{v0.44}{1995/05/20}{macro added}
+% \LaTeXe\ version uses |\textsuperscript| rather than
+% math mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{$^{\@thefnmark}\m@th$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thempfootnote}
+% \changes{v0.44}{1995/05/20}{macro added}
+% \LaTeXe\ version has an additional |\itshape| which would not
+% work (and would not make sense) in math mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thempfootnote{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+% \changes{v0.46}{1995/06/30}{macro added}
+% \LaTeX\ version uses |\ensuremath| which does not work in
+% compatibility mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
+ \mathchar "278\or \mathchar "27B\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger
+ \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@inmathwarn}
+% \changes{v0.50}{1995/12/08}{Switched off \cs{@inmathwarn}}
+% \LaTeX\ (1995/12/01) checks for text commands being used in math
+% mode. We switch this off in compatibility mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@inmathwarn\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v0.18}{1994/03/11}{Added the changes to \cs{verb}}
+% \changes{v0.40}{1995/05/05}{Make \cs{verb} use \cs{tt} font in
+% math mode.}
+% \begin{macro}{\verb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sverb}
+% We restore the old definition of |\verb|, but using
+% |\verbatim@font| rather than |\tt|. The use of |\bgroup| and
+% |\egroup| allows us to prefix it with |\hbox| in math mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verb{%
+ \relax\ifmmode\hbox\fi\bgroup
+ \@noligs
+ \verbatim@font
+ \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
+ \@ifstar{\@sverb}{\@verb}%
+}
+\def\@sverb#1{%
+ \def\@tempa ##1#1{\leavevmode\null##1\egroup}%
+ \@tempa
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@nolig@list}
+% \changes{v0.20}{1994/04/20}{Added the redefinition of
+% \cs{verbatim@nolig@list}.}
+% The only ligatures which should be switched off in 2.09 mode are
+% the Spanish punctuation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lquote}
+% \changes{v0.21}{1994/04/24}{Added the definition of \cs{@lquote}.}
+% We restore the old definition of |\@lquote| in case any packages
+% use it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@lquote{\leavevmode{\kern\z@}`}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Character codes}
+%
+% \changes{v0.18}{1994/03/11}{Added the catcode changes}
+%
+% By default, \LaTeXe{} makes the input charactes 0--8, 11, 14--31 and
+% 128--255 illegal. In compatibility mode, we restore their old
+% meanings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode0=9
+\@tempcnta=1
+\loop\ifnum\@tempcnta<32
+ \catcode\@tempcnta=12
+ \advance\@tempcnta by 1
+\repeat%
+\catcode`\^^I=10\relax%
+\catcode`\^^L=13\relax%
+\catcode`\^^M=5\relax%
+\catcode127=15
+\@tempcnta=128
+\loop\ifnum\@tempcnta<256
+ \catcode\@tempcnta=12
+ \advance\@tempcnta by 1
+\repeat
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Miscellaneous commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SLiTeX}
+% The \textsc{Sli\TeX} logo.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\SLiTeX}{{%
+ \normalfont S\kern -.06em
+ {\scshape l\kern -.035emi}\kern -.06em
+ \TeX}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\+}
+% The |\+| command should be defined, so that it can be used in
+% |\renewcommand|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\+\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cla}
+% \begin{macro}{\@clb}
+% \changes{v0.47}{1995/09/25}
+% {(DPC) Declare old \cs{cline} registers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mscount}
+% \LaTeX2.09 (and early versions of \LaTeXe) used these count registers
+% in the definition of |\cline| and |\multispan|.
+% Declare them here in case they were used for any other purposes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@cla
+\newcount\@clb
+\newcount\mscount
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@imakepicbox}
+% \changes{v0.48}{1995/10/16}
+% {(DPC) emulate old behaviour of picture mode makebox}
+% picture mode version
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@imakepicbox(#1,#2)[#3]#4{%
+ \vbox to#2\unitlength
+ {\let\mb@b\vss \let\mb@l\hss\let\mb@r\hss
+ \let\mb@t\vss
+ \@tfor\reserved@a :=#3\do{%
+ \if s\reserved@a
+ \let\mb@l\relax\let\mb@r\relax
+ \else
+ \expandafter\let\csname mb@\reserved@a\endcsname\relax
+ \fi}%
+ \mb@t
+ \hb@xt@ #1\unitlength{\mb@l #4\mb@r}%
+ \mb@b
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This kern ensures that a |b| option aligns on the bottom of the
+% text rather than the baseline. this is the documented behaviour in
+% the \LaTeX Book. The kern is removed in compatibility mode.
+%
+% Remove kern for bug compatibility with 2.09.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \kern\z@
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\supereject}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty-\@MM}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nofiles}
+% \changes{v0.51}{1996/05/24}{(DPC) Old definition, without \cs{write}
+% added to \cs{protected@write}, for latex/2146}
+% This old version might change the vertical spacing when it is used.
+% Some old document might depend on that changed spacing so\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nofiles{%
+ \@fileswfalse
+ \typeout{No auxiliary output files.^^J}%
+ \long\def\protected@write##1##2##3{}%
+ \let\makeindex\relax
+ \let\makeglossary\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Packages and classes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesClass}
+% We redefine |\ProvidesPackage| and |\ProvidesClass| to produce a
+% log message rather than a warning if they find an unexpected
+% file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ProvidesPackage#1{%
+ \xdef\@gtempa{#1}%
+ \ifx\@gtempa\@currname\else
+ \wlog{Compatibility mode: \@cls@pkg\space`\@currname' requested,
+ but `#1' provided.}%
+ \fi
+ \@ifnextchar[\@pr@videpackage{\@pr@videpackage[]}}%]
+\let\ProvidesClass=\ProvidesPackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% That ends the head of |latex209.def|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</head>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Middle of latex209.def}
+%
+% At this point, the code for |oldlfont.sty| is read in by the
+% installation script.
+%
+% \section{End of latex209.def}
+%
+% This section describes the end of |latex209.def|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tail>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Font commands}
+%
+% \changes{v0.12}{1994/01/24}{Added the oldlfont option.}
+% \changes{v0.25}{1994/05/14}{Added the newlfont option, rewrote the
+% oldlfont option to change math grouping.}
+% \changes{v0.26}{1994/05/15}{Added the margid and nomargid options.}
+% \changes{v0.27}{1994/05/16}{Replaced \# by \#\# in margid.}
+% \changes{v0.28}{1994/05/17}{Replaced \cs{input} newlfont.sty by
+% \cs{OptionNotUsed} in \cs{ds@newlfont}.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ds@oldlfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ds@newlfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ds@margid}
+% \begin{macro}{\ds@nomargid}
+% We declare |oldlfont|, |newlfont|, |margid| and |nomargid|
+% options to mimic the \LaTeX~2.09 NFSS1 options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ds@oldlfont{%
+ \@no@font@optfalse
+ \let\math@bgroup\@empty
+ \let\math@egroup\@empty
+ \let\@@math@bgroup\math@bgroup
+ \let\@@math@egroup\math@egroup
+}
+\def\ds@newlfont{%
+ \@no@font@optfalse
+ \OptionNotUsed
+}
+\def\ds@margid{%
+ \@no@font@optfalse
+ \let\math@bgroup\bgroup
+ \def\math@egroup##1{##1\egroup}%
+ \let \@@math@bgroup \math@bgroup
+ \let \@@math@egroup \math@egroup
+}
+\let\ds@nomargid\ds@oldlfont
+\@onlypreamble\ds@oldfont
+\@onlypreamble\ds@newfont
+\@onlypreamble\ds@margid
+\@onlypreamble\ds@nomargid
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\encodingdefault}
+% The default encoding for old documents is OT1 rather than T1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\encodingdefault}{OT1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cmex/m/n/10}
+% Just in case a document style relies on |\cmex/m/n/10| to exist
+% (which may have been hard-wired to |\fam3|) we load the font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\font\csname cmex/m/n/10\endcsname=cmex10
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v0.12}{1994/01/24}
+% {Added \cs{normalshape} and \cs{mediumseries}.}
+% \changes{v0.28}{1994/05/16}{\cs{mediumseries} was using
+% \cs{fontshape} rather than \cs{fontseries}.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalshape}
+% \begin{macro}{\mediumseries}
+% These commands were used in older versions of NFSS.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalshape{\fontshape\shapedefault\selectfont}
+\def\mediumseries{\fontseries\seriesdefault\selectfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOldFontCommand}
+% We redefine |\DeclareOldFontCommand| to do nothing. This means
+% that any new document classes will have their redefinitions of
+% |\rm|, |\bf| etc.~ignored.
+% \changes{v0.06}{1993/12/18}{Replaced \cs{@newfontswitch} by
+% \cs{@renewfontswitch}.}
+% \changes{v0.11}{1994/01/21}{Removed \cs{RequirePackage}{oldlfont}.}
+% \changes{v0.19}{1994/04/05}{Replaced \cs{@renewfontswitch} by
+% \cs{DeclareOldFontCommand}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \DeclareOldFontCommand #1#2#3{%
+ \wlog{Compatibility mode: definition
+ of \string#1\space ignored.}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v0.17}
+% {1994/03/02}{Added \cs{@halfmag}, \cs{@magscale} and \cs{@ptscale}}
+% \changes{v0.35}
+% {1994/09/23}{Added spaces to the old font scale commands.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@halfmag}
+% \begin{macro}{\@magscale}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ptscale}
+% Some font-specifying commands from \LaTeX~2.09.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@halfmag{ scaled \magstephalf}
+\def\@magscale#1{ scaled \magstep#1 }
+\def\@ptscale#1{ scaled #100 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\font}
+% The current font is set to be CMR 10pt, to match \LaTeX~2.09.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fontencoding{OT1} \fontfamily{cmr}
+\fontsize{10}{12} \fontseries{m} \fontshape{n}
+\selectfont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v0.11}{1994/01/21}{Added the rest of this subsection, which
+% used to be in oldlfont.dtx.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\load}
+% The |\load| command is no longer needed, it is therefore
+% defined to do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\load\@gobbletwo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here are three delimiters which have be partly disabled by
+% NFSS2 (the small variants) since the corresponding fonts are
+% normally not preloaded as math symbol fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\lgroup} % extensible ( with sharper tips
+ {\mathopen}{bold}{"28}{largesymbols}{"3A}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\rgroup} % extensible ) with sharper tips
+ {\mathclose}{bold}{"29}{largesymbols}{"3B}
+\DeclareMathDelimiter{\bracevert} % the vertical bar that extends braces
+ {\mathord}{typewriter}{"7C}{largesymbols}{"3E}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In old documents we might find some usages of |\bffam| etc. Thus
+% we add the following code:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bffam\symbold
+\let\sffam\symsans
+\let\itfam\symitalic
+\let\ttfam\symtypewriter
+\let\scfam\symsmallcaps
+\let\slfam\symslanted
+\let\rmfam\symoperators
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Below are the |\..pt| commands with hopefully the same
+% functionality as in the old \texttt{lfonts.tex}. Notice that the
+% |\baselineskip| parameter wasn't set by these commands so that
+% using them now shouldn't set this either. Thus we go low-level.
+% This means that the commands are now fragile but I think they
+% have been fragile before.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\vpt {\edef\f@size{\@vpt}\rm}
+\newcommand\vipt {\edef\f@size{\@vipt}\rm}
+\newcommand\viipt {\edef\f@size{\@viipt}\rm}
+\newcommand\viiipt{\edef\f@size{\@viiipt}\rm}
+\newcommand\ixpt {\edef\f@size{\@ixpt}\rm}
+\newcommand\xpt {\edef\f@size{\@xpt}\rm}
+\newcommand\xipt {\edef\f@size{\@xipt}\rm}
+\newcommand\xiipt {\edef\f@size{\@xiipt}\rm}
+\newcommand\xivpt {\edef\f@size{\@xivpt}\rm}
+\newcommand\xviipt{\edef\f@size{\@xviipt}\rm}
+\newcommand\xxpt {\edef\f@size{\@xxpt}\rm}
+\newcommand\xxvpt {\edef\f@size{\@xxvpt}\rm}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{User customization}
+%
+% For sites which customized their version of \LaTeX~2.09, we provide
+% a file |latex209.cfg|, which is loaded every time we enter
+% compatibility mode. If the file doesn't exist, we don't do
+% anything.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{latex209.cfg}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% That ends the file |latex209.def|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</tail>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Obsolete style files}
+%
+% \changes{v0.08}{1993/12/19}{Added this section.}
+% \changes{v0.09}{1993/12/20}{Removed artN.sty, bkN.sty and repN.sty.}
+% \changes{v0.23}{1994/05/11}{Added bezier.sty.}
+% \changes{v0.31}{1994/05/20}{Added t1enc.sty.}
+%
+% For each of the standard \LaTeX~2.09 document styles, we produce a
+% file which points to the appropriate \LaTeXe{} document class file.
+% This means that any styles which say |\input article.sty| should
+% still work.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*article|book|report|letter|slides>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%</article|book|report|letter|slides>
+%<*article>
+\@obsoletefile{article.cls}{article.sty}
+\LoadClass{article}
+%</article>
+%<*book>
+\@obsoletefile{book.cls}{book.sty}
+\LoadClass{book}
+%</book>
+%<*report>
+\@obsoletefile{report.cls}{report.sty}
+\LoadClass{report}
+%</report>
+%<*letter>
+\@obsoletefile{letter.cls}{letter.sty}
+\LoadClass{letter}
+%</letter>
+%<*slides>
+\@obsoletefile{slides.cls}{slides.sty}
+\LoadClass{slides}
+%</slides>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also produce empty |fleqn.sty| and |leqno.sty| files in case
+% anyone has |\input| one of them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fleqn>
+\@obsoletefile{fleqn.clo}{fleqn.sty}
+\input{fleqn.clo}
+%</fleqn>
+%<*leqno>
+\@obsoletefile{leqno.clo}{leqno.sty}
+\input{leqno.clo}
+%</leqno>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also produce an empty |openbib.sty| in case anyone has |\input|
+% |openbib.sty|. The |openbib| class option is now part of the kernel.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*openbib>
+\iffalse
+
+The openbib option is now part of LaTeX thus this package is no
+longer necessary. It is only retained for upward compatibility.
+See the 2nd edition of the LaTeX book, or the file usrguide.tex
+which comes with the LaTeX distribution, for more details.
+
+\fi
+%</openbib>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also produce an empty |bezier.sty| in case anyone has |\input|
+% |bezier.sty|. The |\bezier| command is now part of the kernel.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bezier>
+\iffalse
+
+The \bezier command is now part of LaTeX thus this package is no
+longer necessary. It is only retained for upward compatibility.
+Also, please note that LaTeX now offers an extended bezier command
+which automatically calculates the number of points needed for the
+plot. See the 2nd edition of the LaTeX book, or the file
+usrguide.tex which comes with the LaTeX distribution, for more
+details.
+
+\fi
+%</bezier>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also produce a |t1enc| package, for compatibility with the
+% Companion. This has been replaced by the |fontenc| package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*t1enc>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{t1enc}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX package]
+\renewcommand{\encodingdefault}{T1}
+\fontencoding{T1}\selectfont
+%</t1enc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..74801ea7029
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latex209.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating compatibility mode files ***}
+
+\generate{
+ \usedir{tex/latex/base}
+ \file{latex209.def}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{head}
+ \from{oldlfont.dtx}{latex209}
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{tail}}
+ \file{article.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{article}}
+ \file{book.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{book}}
+ \file{report.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{report}}
+ \file{letter.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{letter}}
+ \file{slides.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{slides}}
+ \file{fleqn.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{fleqn}}
+ \file{leqno.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{leqno}}
+ \file{openbib.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{openbib}}
+ \file{bezier.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{bezier}}
+ \file{t1enc.sty}{
+ \from{latex209.dtx}{t1enc}}
+ }
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space latex209.def *.sty }
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.drv' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexbug.el b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexbug.el
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..492f0d18f67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexbug.el
@@ -0,0 +1,502 @@
+;;; latexbug.el
+;;;
+;;; Version 0: `test of concept'
+;;; Don't look to closely at my lisp coding style...
+;;;
+;;; David Carlisle
+;;; Version 0.1 1994/11/23
+;;; Version 0.2 1994/12/12
+;;; Version 0.3 1995/03/17
+;;; Version 0.4 1995/09/21
+;;; Version 0.5 1995/10/17
+;;; Version 0.6 1997/07/16
+;;; Version 0.7 1997/12/17
+;;; Version 0.8 1999/01/07
+;;;
+;;;
+;;; LOADING
+;;;;;;;;;;;
+;;;
+;;; To use this code, place the file in a directory searched by lisp
+;;; Add
+;;;
+;;; (autoload 'report-latex-bug "latexbug"
+;;; "LaTeX bug report generator" t)
+;;;
+;;; to your .emacs file (without the ;;;).
+;;;
+;;; Then if the impossible happens and you discover a bug in LaTeX,
+;;; or wish to suggest a change to LaTeX, type
+;;; M-x report-latex-bug
+;;;
+;;; and follow the instructions.
+;;;
+;;; A file latexbug.cfg can be used to customise
+;;; latexbug.tex as described in the comments in latexbug.tex.
+;;; or you can customise in your .emacs, as shown below.
+;;;
+;;; CUSTOMISATION
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;;;
+;;; The following variables may be set in your .emacs to customise this
+;;; file.
+;;;
+;;; (setq ltxbug-name "David Carlisle") ; your name
+;;; (setq ltxbug-address "dpc@,,,") ; your email address
+;;; If these two are not set here, or in the latexbug.cfg
+;;; file. emacs will prompt for the values. The prompt
+;;; will suggest default values based on standard emacs variables
+;;; user-full-name and user-mail-address.
+;;;
+;;; (setq ltxbug-mail-headers "...") ; additional mail headers.
+;;; For example (setq ltxbug-mail-headers "FCC: ~/Mail/sent")
+;;; To log outgoing mail in a `sent' file.
+;;;
+;;; (setq ltxbug-latex-command "...") ; latex command
+;;; Set this if LaTeX is not called latex, eg it may be latex2e.
+;;;
+;;;
+;;; Perhaps I should have based this on gnat's send-pr.el but it seemed
+;;; easier to write it from scratch to work in latexbug.tex at the
+;;; required points.
+;;;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+(require 'sendmail)
+
+(defvar ltxbug-latex-command "latex"
+ "Command name for Standard LaTeX (LaTeX2e)")
+
+(defvar ltxbug-directory nil
+"Directory in which to run LaTeX, should end with slash.
+Default, nil, means inherit directory from current buffer.")
+
+(defvar user-full-name nil); just needed on ancient emacs
+(defvar ltxbug-name nil
+"Your name.
+If this is nil, will be prompted if not set in latexbug.cfg.")
+
+(defvar user-mail-address nil); just needed on ancient emacs
+(defvar ltxbug-address nil
+"Your email-address.
+If this is nil, will be prompted if not set in latexbug.cfg.")
+
+(defvar ltxbug-mail-headers ""
+"Extra mail headers that will be added to the mail message.
+This is in addition to `To' and `Subject'.")
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+(defvar ltxbug-categories
+'(("latex") ("tools") ("graphics")
+ ("mfnfss") ("psnfss") ("amslatex") ("babel") ("expl3") ("cyrillic"))
+"Valid GNATS categories")
+
+
+(defun report-latex-bug ()
+"LaTeX bug report generator"
+ (interactive)
+;;
+;; Locally turn off transient mark mode.
+ (let ((transient-mark-mode nil)
+ (current-default-directory default-directory))
+;;
+;; First produce one large window for the main message
+;; and a smaller help window below.
+ (delete-other-windows)
+;; (setq ltxbug-msg (switch-to-buffer "*latex-bugs*")); not emacs18
+ (switch-to-buffer
+ (setq ltxbug-msg (get-buffer-create "*latex-bugs*")))
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (setq default-directory
+ (or ltxbug-directory current-default-directory))
+ (setq major-mode 'ltxbug)
+ (setq mode-name "LaTeX Bug Report")
+ (use-local-map ltxbug-map)
+ (message "Running latex on latexbug.tex ....")
+ (split-window-vertically
+;; -13 ;; old emacs's can't do this
+ (- (window-height) 13))
+ (switch-to-buffer-other-window
+ (setq ltxbug-help (get-buffer-create "latexbugs help")))
+;;
+;; Initially fill the message buffer with the output from running
+;; latexbug.tex.
+ (erase-buffer)
+;;
+;; Use shell-command not start-process here so shell variables are
+;; initialised before calling LaTeX.
+;; Hope that is enough \\ to keep all the different shells happy...
+;; {} replaced by \\{\\} in version 0.4 (fix for latex/1675)
+;; Use \@@input (v0.5)
+ (shell-command (concat
+ ltxbug-latex-command
+ " \\\\nonstopmode\\\\makeatletter\
+ \\\\def\\\\batch\\{\\}\\\\@@input latexbug ") t)
+ (switch-to-buffer-other-window ltxbug-msg)
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+;;
+;; Change header to mention this latexbug.el file.
+ (if (re-search-forward "!" (point-max) t)
+ (ltxbug-error)
+;; else
+ (ltxbug-do-report))))
+
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-do-report ()
+ (erase-buffer)
+;;
+;; Grab the template produced by latexbug.tex
+ (insert-file "latexbug.msg")
+;;
+;; Change header to mention this latexbug.el file.
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (re-search-forward "\\(by latexbug.\\)\\(tex\\)" (point-max) t)
+ (replace-match "\\1el")
+;;
+;; Grab email address into mail field.
+ (re-search-forward "Re.*email to \\(.*\\)[^Z]*=$" (point-max) t)
+;;
+;; Put the synopsis template into the Subject field.
+;; Add the delimiter used by the mail-send function.
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (let ((temp
+ (concat "To: "
+ (buffer-substring (match-beginning 1) (match-end 1)) "
+Subject: < SYNOPSIS >
+"
+ ltxbug-mail-headers
+ (if (not (equal "" ltxbug-mail-headers)) "
+")
+ "--text follows this line--
+" )))
+;;
+;; Remove the rest of the banner from latexbug.tex
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (delete-region (match-beginning 0) (match-end 0))
+;;
+;; insert the mail headers
+ (insert temp))
+;;
+;;
+;; Get the required category using minibuffer completion.
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+Several categories of files are supported,
+corresponding to directories in the standard LaTeX distribution:
+
+ latex: The `base' format, and standard classes only (base).
+ tools: Packages supported by the LaTeX3 project team (tools).
+ graphics: The color and graphics packages (graphics).
+ mfnfss: Packages for using some MetaFont fonts (mfnfss).
+ psnfss: Packages for using PostScript fonts LaTeX (psnfss).
+ amslatex: AMS supported Classes and Packages (amsfonts and amslatex).
+ babel: Packages supporting many different languages (babel).
+ expl3: Experimental packages for TeX programmers (expl3).
+ cyrillic: Packages for using Cyrillic fonts (cyrillic).
+")
+ (let* ((completion-ignore-case t)
+ (cat (completing-read "Which Category ? "
+ ltxbug-categories nil t )))
+ (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*")
+ (ltxbug-replace "< CATEGORY >" (if (equal cat "") "latex" cat)))
+;;
+;; Get the synopsis, make sure it is non empty, and not too long.
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+ Please enter a One line Synopsis of the report.
+ This should be < 50 characters.
+
+ This text will be used as the mail header on all
+ subsequent correspondence. Please use informative strings.
+ For example: \\mathit generates error in foobar environmenent
+ rather than just `LaTeX Bug' or similar strings.
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let ((syn (read-from-minibuffer "Synopsis ? " )))
+ (while (or (equal syn "") (> (length syn) 50))
+ (setq syn
+ (read-from-minibuffer "Synopsis (0 < length < 50) ? " syn)))
+ (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*")
+ (ltxbug-replace "< SYNOPSIS >" syn))
+;;
+;; If latexbug.cfg has not already defined the name
+;; grab it from minibuffer
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (if (re-search-forward "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" (point-max) t)
+ (if ltxbug-name
+ (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" ltxbug-name)
+;; else
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+ Please enter Your Name
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let ((temp (read-from-minibuffer "Your Name ? " user-full-name)))
+ (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*")
+ (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR NAME >" temp))))
+;;
+;; If latexbug.cfg has not already defined the email address
+;; grab it from minibuffer
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (if (re-search-forward "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" (point-max) t)
+ (if ltxbug-address
+ (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" ltxbug-address)
+;; else
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+ Please enter Your email address.
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let ((temp (read-from-minibuffer "Your email address ? "
+ user-mail-address)))
+ (set-buffer "*latex-bugs*")
+ (ltxbug-replace "< ENTER YOUR EMAIL ADDRESS >" temp))))
+;;
+;; Grab file name.
+;; If this is empty, suggest changing the >Class
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+A bug report should be accompanied by a test file
+and a the log that the test generates.
+
+If a test file is not appropriate for this report
+Just hit <return>
+
+Otherwise please specify the file to include.
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let ((temp (read-file-name "Test file ? " nil "" t)))
+ (if (equal temp "")
+ (progn
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Class"
+ '(("sw-bug")("doc-bug")("change-request"))
+ "
+You have not offered a test file.
+
+Perhaps that this is not a bug report.
+The default class for messages is sw-bug.
+
+Possible classes of messages are:
+ sw-bug: Message reporting a Bug in the software.
+ doc-bug: Message reporting an error in the documentation.
+ change-request: Message requesting a change to some LaTeX feature.")
+ (re-search-forward ">How-to-repeat")
+ (delete-region (match-beginning 0) (point-max)))
+;; else
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (ltxbug-replace " < TEST FILE HERE " "")
+ (insert-file temp)
+ (let ((lines 0))
+ (while (re-search-forward "\n" (mark) t)
+ (setq lines (+ lines 1)))
+ (if (> lines 60)
+ (progn
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert
+(format "%s%d%s" "
+!!!!
+Your test file is " lines " lines long!!!
+
+Test files should be as short as possible, while still showing
+the behaviour. Please try to keep the file below 60 lines.
+"))
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg))))
+ (let* ((log1
+ (concat
+ (substring temp 0 (string-match "\\.[^\\.]*$" temp))
+ ".log"))
+ (log (read-file-name "Log file ? " "" log1 t log1)))
+ (if (equal log "")
+ (message "WHY NO LOG ???")
+ (ltxbug-replace " < LOG FROM TEST FILE HERE >" "")
+ (insert-file log)))))
+;;
+;; Prompt for the message text.
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+Complete your bug report by giving the full descripition
+below the `Description of bug:' header.
+
+There are other database fields you may wish to add,
+type C-c C-f to change or add an additional field.
+
+Once the report is complete, type C-c C-c to send the message.
+
+A saved copy of the report will be in the file
+latexbug.msg.
+")
+ (switch-to-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (ltxbug-replace " < ENTER BUG REPORT HERE >" "")
+ (auto-fill-mode 1)
+ (setq fill-column 72))
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-error ()
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+LaTeX did not succesfully produce a bug report template."))
+
+(defun ltxbug-save-and-send ()
+ (interactive)
+ (write-file "latexbug.msg")
+ (mail-send-and-exit nil))
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-replace (a b)
+ "Replace the regexp a by the string b everywhere in the current buffer"
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (while (re-search-forward a (point-max) t)
+ (replace-match b t t)))
+
+(defvar ltxbug-map (make-sparse-keymap)
+ "Local keymap used in LaTeX bug buffer.")
+
+(define-key ltxbug-map "\C-c\C-c" 'ltxbug-save-and-send)
+(define-key ltxbug-map "\C-c\C-f" 'ltxbug-oneline-field)
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-update-field (field values help)
+"Update FIELD using completion list VALUES and help text HELP.
+ First entry in VALUES is the default."
+ (interactive)
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-help)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert help)
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (goto-char (point-min))
+ (let ((temp ""))
+ (if (re-search-forward
+ (concat"\n>" field ":\\( *\\)\\(.*\\)$") (point-max) t)
+;; if field already there
+ (progn
+ (setq temp (buffer-substring (match-beginning 2) (match-end 2)))
+ (delete-region (match-beginning 1) (match-end 2)))
+;; else
+ (re-search-forward ">Category:.*$")
+ (insert (concat "\n>" field ":")))
+ (insert " ")
+ (let ((temp2
+ (completing-read (concat field " ? ") values nil t temp)))
+ (insert (if (equal temp2 "")
+ (car(car values)) temp2)))))
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-responsible ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Responsible"
+;; Alphabetical order, which makes Alan the default...
+ '(("alan")("chris")("david")("frank")("johannes")
+ ("michael")("rainer"))
+"
+ You may set the >Responsible field to a particular person.
+ **Do not do this unless you have very good reason.**
+ We may not appreciate having jobs allocated to us in this way:-)
+ The possible values are:
+ alan (Alan Jeffrey)
+ chris (Chris Rowley)
+ david (David Carlisle)
+ frank (Frank Mittelbach)
+ johannes (Johannes Braams)
+ michael (Michael Downes)
+ rainer (Rainer Schoepf)
+"))
+
+(defun ltxbug-confidential ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Confidential"
+ '(("no")("yes"))
+"
+ You may set the >Confidential field to yes.
+
+ The report database is publicly searchable.
+ See bugs.txt for details.
+ Reports marked Confidential will not be made public.
+ Possible values:
+ no The default. Report may be made public.
+ yes Report should only be seen by LaTeX maintainers.
+"))
+
+
+(defun ltxbug-priority ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Priority"
+ '(("low")("medium")("high"))
+"
+ Change the priority of the report from `high'
+ Possible values:
+ low
+ medium
+ high
+"))
+
+(defun ltxbug-severity ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Severity"
+ '(("non-critical")("serious")("critical"))
+"
+ Classify the severity of the problem.'
+ Possible values:
+ non-critical
+ serious
+ critical
+"))
+
+(defun ltxbug-class ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-update-field
+ "Class"
+ '(("sw-bug")("doc-bug")("change-request"))
+"
+ Classify the type of report.
+ Possible values:
+ sw-bug: Message reporting a bug in the software.
+ doc-bug: Message reporting an error in the documentation.
+ change-request: Message requesting a change to some LaTeX feature.
+"))
+
+(defun ltxbug-window-setup ()
+ (interactive)
+ (delete-other-windows)
+ (split-window-vertically -13)
+ (switch-to-buffer-other-window ltxbug-help))
+
+(defun ltxbug-oneline-field ()
+ (interactive)
+ (ltxbug-window-setup)
+ (erase-buffer)
+ (insert "
+ You may wish to add or alter the following fields:
+ Class Class of this report.
+ Confidential Confidential (or not).
+ Responsible Assign to a member of the LaTeX maintenance team
+ Severity Severity of the bug.
+ Priority Priority of the report.
+")
+ (set-buffer ltxbug-msg)
+ (let* ((completion-ignore-case t)
+ (field (completing-read "Which field ? "
+ '(("Class")("Confidential")("Priority")("Severity")
+ ("Responsible"))
+ nil t)))
+ (cond
+ ((equal field "Class") (ltxbug-class))
+ ((equal field "Confidential") (ltxbug-confidential))
+ ((equal field "Responsible") (ltxbug-responsible))
+ ((equal field "Severity") (ltxbug-severity))
+ ((equal field "Priority") (ltxbug-priority)))))
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4072447c3b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{82}
+%
+% \iffalse % this is a METACOMMENT !
+%
+% File `latexsym.dtx'.
+% Copyright 1994-1998 by Frank Mittelbach. All rights reserved.
+%
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{latexsym}
+%<fd>\ProvidesFile{ulasy.fd}
+%<-driver> [1998/08/17 v2.2e
+%<package> Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)]
+%<fd> LaTeX symbol font definitions]
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage{latexsym}
+\GetFileInfo{latexsym.sty}
+\providecommand\dst{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+\title{The \LaTeX{} symbol fonts for use with
+ \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
+ number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{latexsym.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{v2.2e}{1998/08/17}{Documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file defines the package |latexsym| which makes the few
+% additional characters available that come from the |lasy| fonts
+% (\LaTeX's symbol fonts). These fonts are not automatically
+% included in the NFSS2/\LaTeXe{} since they take up important
+% space and aren't necessary if one makes use of the packages
+% \texttt{amsfonts} or \texttt{amssymb}.
+%
+% The commands defined by the \texttt{latexsym} package are:
+% \begin{quote}\raggedright
+% |\mho|~$\mho$ \quad
+% |\Join|~$\Join$ \quad
+% |\Box|~$\Box$ \quad
+% |\Diamond|~$\Diamond$ \quad
+% |\leadsto|~$\leadsto$ \quad
+% |\sqsubset|~$\sqsubset$ \quad
+% |\sqsupset|~$\sqsupset$ \quad
+% |\lhd|~$\lhd$ \quad
+% |\unlhd|~$\unlhd$ \quad
+% |\rhd|~$\rhd$ \quad
+% |\unrhd|~$\unrhd$
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{The \dst{} modules}
+%
+% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
+% \dst{} in generating the external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% package & produce a package file \\
+% fd & produce a font definition file
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% The individual files generated from this code are identified at the
+% very top of this file by a couple of lines looking like this:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% %<fd>\ProvidesFile{Ulasy.fd}
+% %<-driver> [????/??/?? v2.2?
+% %<package> Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols)]
+% %<fd> LaTeX symbol font definitions]
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\symlasy}
+%
+% It is possible to detect whether or not the \LaTeX{} symbols are
+% already defined by checking for the math group number with the
+% name |\symlasy|.
+%
+% In that case we exit but write a message to the transcript file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\symlasy\undefined \else
+ \wlog{Package latexsym: nothing to set up^^J}%
+ \endinput \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we define the new symbol font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareSymbolFont{lasy}{U}{lasy}{m}{n}
+ \SetSymbolFont{lasy}{bold}{U}{lasy}{b}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Because the lasy symbols are made an error in the format we have
+% to undefine them before we can set them anew with
+% |\DeclareMathSymbol|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\mho\undefined \let\sqsupset\undefined
+ \let\Join\undefined \let\lhd\undefined
+ \let\Box\undefined \let\unlhd\undefined
+ \let\Diamond\undefined \let\rhd\undefined
+ \let\leadsto\undefined \let\unrhd\undefined
+ \let\sqsubset\undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1995/03/18}{\cs{lhd} and friends should be bin ops.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\mho {\mathord}{lasy}{"30}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\Join {\mathrel}{lasy}{"31}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\Box {\mathord}{lasy}{"32}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\Diamond {\mathord}{lasy}{"33}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\leadsto {\mathrel}{lasy}{"3B}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\sqsubset{\mathrel}{lasy}{"3C}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\sqsupset{\mathrel}{lasy}{"3D}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\lhd {\mathbin}{lasy}{"01}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\unlhd {\mathbin}{lasy}{"02}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\rhd {\mathbin}{lasy}{"03}
+ \DeclareMathSymbol\unrhd {\mathbin}{lasy}{"04}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To save some space we can remove the definition of |\not@base|
+% since it isn't any longer needed. (We use |\@undefined| so that
+% gives an error and not a recursive definition
+% if it is still used somewhere.)
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1995/07/03}{Free space for \cs{not@base}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\not@base\@undefined
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{\LaTeX{} symbols fonts}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1996/11/20}{lowercase ulasy.fd /1044}
+% The rest of this file defines the the font shape declarations
+% that have to go into the corresponding |.fd| file.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fd>
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{lasy}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{lasy}{m}{n}{ <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> gen * lasy
+ <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88>lasy10 }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since there are no bold lasy symbols below 10pt we silently
+% substitute them by the medium ones to avoid terminal warnings if
+% |\boldmath| is selected.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{lasy}{b}{n}{ <-10> ssub * lasy/m/n
+ <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88>lasyb10 }{}
+%</fd>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The next line goes into all files and in addition prevents \dst{}
+% from adding any further code from the main source file (such as a
+% character table).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \Finale
+%
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..671202d7a7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/latexsym.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
+this file to serve the needs of your installation.
+
+However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
+of this file under its original name.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{latexsym.sty}{%
+ \from{latexsym.dtx}{package}}
+ \usepreamble\fdpreamble
+ \file{ulasy.fd}{
+ \from{latexsym.dtx}{fd}}
+ }
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space latexsym.sty}
+\Msg{* \space\space *.fd}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.dtx' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..89e8579ecb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1918 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{980}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% \section{Identification}
+%
+%
+% This document class can only be used with \LaTeXe, so we make
+% sure that an appropriate message is displayed when another \TeX{}
+% format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+letter>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Announce the Class name and its version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+letter>\ProvidesClass{letter}
+%<*driver>
+ \ProvidesFile{letter.drv}
+%</driver>
+ [1999/04/29 v1.2z
+%<+letter> Standard LaTeX document class]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The documentation driver file}
+%
+% We have our own document class to format the \LaTeXe{}
+% documentation.
+% \fi
+% \changes{v1.0}{1993/12/07}{Use class ltxdoc document class}
+% \iffalse
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We don't want everything to appear in the index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DoNotIndex{\@Alph,\@alph,\@arabic,\@badmath}
+\DoNotIndex{\@centercr}
+\DoNotIndex{\@empty,\@ignoretrue}
+\DoNotIndex{\@ixpt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@M,\@minus,\@ne,\@plus}
+\DoNotIndex{\\,\addtolength}
+\DoNotIndex{\advance}
+\DoNotIndex{\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
+\DoNotIndex{\bullet}
+\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
+\DoNotIndex{\def,\DocInput,\documentclass}
+\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifx,\else,\fi,\endtrivlist}
+\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end@dblfloat,\end@float,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\ExecuteOptions}
+\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion}
+\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\ifcase,\or,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifvmode,\fi,\ifnum,\fi,\input}
+\DoNotIndex{\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark}
+\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th,\mark}
+\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
+\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\number}
+\DoNotIndex{\p@}
+\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par}
+\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
+\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright}
+\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand,\reset@font}
+\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rlap,\rmfamily}
+\DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
+\DoNotIndex{\skip,\slshape,\space}
+\DoNotIndex{\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@}
+\DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\year,\z@}
+%
+\CodelineNumbered
+\CodelineIndex
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\RecordChanges
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use so many \file{docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from the file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\GetFileInfo{letter.drv}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some commonly used abbreviations
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}
+\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}
+\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}
+\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also want the full details.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{letter.dtx}
+\PrintIndex
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{v1.1}{1993/12/18}{Changes to make it work with
+% compatibility mode.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1993/12/19}{Removed float parms}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/01/17}{Moved definition of \cs{@textop} to
+% initialization section, to counteract setting of \cs{@texttop} in
+% \cs{raggedbottom}.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/01/20}{Corrected margins: Now computed from
+% \cs{paperwidth} and \cs{textwidth}, so that the text is
+% horizontally centered.}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1994/02/03}{Corrected checksum}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/02/12}{Removed onecolumn and twocolumn options.}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/02/12}{Changed label producing commands in .aux
+% file.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1994/02/28}{Moved driver further up.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/03/08}{Always write .aux file.}
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1994/04/29}{Use LaTeX instead of LaTeX2e in messages}
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1994/04/29}{Removed \cs{typeout} message}
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1994/05/01}{Removed the use of \cs{fileversion}
+% c.s.}
+% \changes{v1.2j}{1994/06/01}{Corrected driver code.}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1994/06/17}{Various documentation enhancements}
+% \changes{v1.2p}{1994/12/11}{Use \cs{newcommand*} to define
+% user-level commands that take an argument}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/05/17}{cleaned up \cs{changes entries}}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/05/18}{replaced \cs{hbox to} by \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \changes{v1.2r}{1995/05/23}{removed a superfluous brace}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% Copyright (C) 1994 LaTeX3 project, Frank Mittelbach
+% and Rainer Sch\"opf, all rights reserved.
+% \fi
+%
+% \author{Leslie Lamport and Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \title{Standard Letter Document Class for \LaTeX{} version 2e}
+%
+%
+% \maketitle
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \StopEventually
+%
+%
+% \section{Initial Code}
+%
+% In this part we define a few commands that are used later on.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ptsize}
+% This control sequence is used to store the second digit of the
+% pointsize we are typesetting in. So, normally, it's value is one
+% of 0, 1 or 2.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*letter>
+\newcommand\@ptsize{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}
+%
+% The variables |\paperwidth| and |\paperheight| should reflect the
+% physical paper size after trimming. For desk printer output this
+% is usually the real paper size since there is no post-processing.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1993/12/14}{Corrected typo, A4 is not 279 mm high}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {297mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {210mm}}
+\DeclareOption{a5paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {210mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {148mm}}
+\DeclareOption{b5paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {250mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {176mm}}
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {11in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {8.5in}}
+\DeclareOption{legalpaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {14in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {8.5in}}
+\DeclareOption{executivepaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {10.5in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {7.25in}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2o}{1994/08/26}{Added the option \textsf{landscape}}
+% The option \Lopt{landscape} switches the values of |\paperheight|
+% and |\paperwidth|, assuming the dimensions were given for portrait
+% paper.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{landscape}
+ {\setlength\@tempdima {\paperheight}%
+ \setlength\paperheight {\paperwidth}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {\@tempdima}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Choosing the type size}
+%
+% The type size options are handled by defining |\@ptsize| to
+% contain the last digit of the size in question and branching on
+% |\ifcase| statements. This is done for historical reasons to stay
+% compatible with other packages that use the |\@ptsize| variable
+% to select special actions. It makes the declarations of size
+% options less than 10pt difficult, although one can probably use
+% \texttt{9} and \texttt{8} assuming that a class wont define both
+% \Lopt{8pt} and \Lopt{18pt} options.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{0}}
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{1}}
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand\@ptsize{2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}
+%
+% Two-sided printing was not supported in the \LaTeX~2.09 version
+% of this document class.
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/28}{Added oneside option and twoside option
+% in native mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@latexerr{No `twoside' layout for letters}%
+ \@eha}
+\else
+ \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue \@mparswitchtrue}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse \@mparswitchfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Draft option}
+%
+% If the user requests \Lopt{draft} we show any overfull boxes.
+% We could probably add some more interesting stuff to this option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}}
+\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength\overfullrule{0pt}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Equation numbering on the left}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{leqno} can be used to get the equation numbers
+% on the left side of the equation.
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/01/17}{Option leqno now read from
+% \file{leqno.clo}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{leqno}{\input{leqno.clo}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Flush left displays}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{fleqn} redefines the displayed math environments
+% in such a way that they come out flush left, with an indentation
+% of |\mathindent| from the prevailing left margin.
+% \changes{v1.1}{1993/12/18}{Corrected typo in \cs{renewcommand},
+% doubled hash marks.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/01/17}{Option fleqn now read from
+% \file{fleqn.clo}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Executing Options}
+%
+% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
+% variables.
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/28}{Added execution of `oneside' option}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,oneside,onecolumn,final}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code
+% for every option \Lopt{foo} which is declared and for which the
+% user typed the \Lopt{foo} option in his |\documentclass| command.
+% For every option \Lopt{bar} he typed, which is not declared, the
+% option is assumed to be a global option. All options will be
+% passed as document options to any |\usepackage| command in the
+% document preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now that all the options have been executed we can load the
+% chosen class option file that contains all size dependant code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\input{size1\@ptsize.clo}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Loading Packages}
+%
+% The standard class files do not load additional packages.
+%
+%
+% \section{Document Layout}
+% \label{sec:maincode}
+%
+% In this section we are finally dealing with the nasty typographical
+% details.
+%
+% \subsection{Paragraphing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
+% These parameters control \TeX's behavior when two lines tend to
+% come too close together.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}
+\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
+% This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|. The default is
+% to {\em not\/} stretch the baselines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\baselinestretch{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
+% |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
+% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation.
+% Letters are typeset without paragraph indentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\parskip{0.7em}
+\setlength\parindent{0\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}
+% The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties
+% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
+% They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|,
+% dependant on their argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@lowpenalty 51
+\@medpenalty 151
+\@highpenalty 301
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
+% These penalties are used to discourage club and widow lines.
+% Because we use their default values we only show them here,
+% commented out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \clubpenalty 150
+% \widowpenalty 150
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
+% Discourage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display
+% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
+% after a display without a penalty. Again the default values are
+% used, therefore we only show them here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \displaywidowpenalty 50
+% \predisplaypenalty 10000
+% \postdisplaypenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
+% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \interlinepenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
+% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \brokenpenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Page Layout}
+%
+% All margin dimensions are measured from a point one inch from the
+% top and lefthand side of the page.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
+% The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the
+% running head. The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom
+% of the running head and the top of the text. |\topskip| is the
+% |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page, its value depends
+% on the size option that was specified. Therefore it is
+% initialized in one of the \file{size1x.clo} files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\headheight{12\p@}
+\setlength\headsep {45\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footskip}
+% The distance from the baseline of the box which contains the
+% running footer to the baseline of last line of text is controlled
+% by the |\footskip|.
+% Bottom of page:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\footskip{25\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2n}{1994/07/13}{Setting of \cs{maxdepth} and
+% \cs{@maxdepth} already happens in the size.. files, removed
+% here}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The dimension of text}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
+% When we are in compatibility mode we have to make sure that the
+% dimensions of the printed area are not different from what the
+% user was used to see.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2n}{1994/07/13}{Setting \cs{textwidth} to a fixed value
+% should only happen in compatibility mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\textwidth{365\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
+% Now that we have computed the width of the text, we have to take
+% care of the height. The |\textheight| is the height of text
+% (including footnotes and figures, excluding running head and
+% foot).
+% \changes{v1.2n}{1994/07/13}{Setting \cs{textheight} to a fixed value
+% should only happen in compatibility mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\textheight{505\p@}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In native mode we use the dimensions as they were computed by one
+% of the \Lopt{xxpt} options, together with one of the
+% \Lopt{..paper} options.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Margins}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/01/20}{Corrected margins: Now computed from
+% \cs{paperwidth} and \cs{textwidth}.} The values of
+% |\oddsidemargin| and |\evensidemargin| are computed from those of
+% |\paperwidth| and |\textwidth|.
+% \changes{v1.2n}{1994/07/13}{Added fixed values for these parameters
+% in compatibillity mode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\oddsidemargin{53pt}
+ \setlength\evensidemargin{53pt}
+ \setlength\marginparwidth{90pt}
+\else
+ \setlength\@tempdima{\paperwidth}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima{-\textwidth}
+ \setlength\oddsidemargin {.5\@tempdima}
+ \setlength\evensidemargin {\oddsidemargin}
+ \setlength\marginparwidth {90\p@}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
+% The horizontal space between the main text and marginal notes is
+% determined by |\marginparsep|, the minimum vertical separation
+% between two marginal notes is controlled by |\marginparpush|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\marginparsep {11\p@}
+\setlength\marginparpush{5\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
+% The |\topmargin| is the distance between the top of `the
+% printable area' --which is 1 inch below the top of the paper--
+% and the top of the box which contains the running head.
+%
+% It can now be computed from the values set above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\topmargin{27pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
+% |\footnotesep| is the height of the strut placed at the beginning
+% of every footnote. It equals the height of a normal
+% |\footnotesize| strut in this
+% class, thus no extra space occurs between footnotes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\footnotesep{12\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footins}
+% |\skip\footins| is the space between the last line of the main
+% text and the top of the first footnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\skip\footins}{10\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Page Styles}
+%
+% The page style \pstyle{foo} is defined by defining the command
+% |\ps@foo|. This command should make only local definitions.
+% There should be no stray spaces in the definition, since they
+% could lead to mysterious extra spaces in the output (well, that's
+% something that should be always avoided).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@evenhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\@oddhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\@evenfoot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@oddfoot}
+% The |\ps@...| command defines the macros |\@oddhead|,
+% |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|, and |\@evenfoot| to define the running
+% heads and feet---e.g., |\@oddhead| is the macro to produce the
+% contents of the heading box for odd-numbered pages. It is called
+% inside an |\hbox| of width |\textwidth|.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Marking conventions}
+%
+% To make headings determined by the sectioning commands, the page
+% style defines the commands |\chaptermark|, |\sectionmark|,
+% \ldots, where |\chaptermark{|\meta{text}|}| is called by
+% |\chapter| to set a mark, and so on.
+%
+% The |\...mark| commands and the |\...head| macros are defined
+% with the help of the following macros. (All the |\...mark|
+% commands should be initialized to no-ops.)
+%
+% \LaTeX{} extends \TeX's |\mark| facility by producing two kinds
+% of marks, a `left' and a `right' mark, using the following
+% commands:
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% |\markboth{|\meta{left}|}{|\meta{right}|}|: Adds both marks.
+%
+% |\markright{|\meta{right}|}|: Adds a `right' mark.
+%
+% |\leftmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
+% or |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current `left'
+% mark. |\leftmark| works like \TeX's |\botmark|
+% command.
+%
+% |\rightmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
+% or |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current
+% `right' mark. |\rightmark| works like \TeX's
+% |\firstmark| command.
+% \end{flushleft}
+%
+% The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks
+% `numbered within' left marks--e.g., the left mark is changed by a
+% |\chapter| command and the right mark is changed by a |\section|
+% command. However, it does produce somewhat anomalous results if
+% two |\markboth|'s occur on the same page.
+%
+%
+% Commands like |\tableofcontents| that should set the marks in some
+% page styles use a |\@mkboth| command, which is |\let| by the
+% pagestyle command (|\ps@...|) to |\markboth| for setting the
+% heading or to |\@gobbletwo| to do nothing.
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Defining the page styles}
+% \label{sec:pagestyle}
+%
+% The pagestyles \pstyle{empty} and \pstyle{plain} are defined in
+% the \LaTeX{} kernel (\file{ltpage.dtx}), but these definitions
+% are changed to a simpler version for this document class.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
+% The definition of the page style \pstyle{headings} has to be
+% different for two sided printing than it is for one sided
+% printing.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/28}{Added twoside support}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@twoside
+ \def\ps@headings{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The running feet are empty in this page style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The running head contains some information about this letter. The
+% head is the same for even and odd pages.
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1994/05/12}{Made running heads the same on odd and
+% even pages}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1994/06/17}{Added a missing brace}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{} \ignorespaces\toname
+ \hfil \@date
+ \hfil \pagename{} \thepage}%
+ \let\@evenhead\@oddhead}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For one sided printing we don't need to define |\@evenhead| so
+% the definition is somewhat simpler.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \def\ps@headings{%
+ \let\@oddfoot\@empty
+ \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{} \ignorespaces\toname
+ \hfil \@date
+ \hfil \pagename{} \thepage}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@empty}
+% The definition of the page style \pstyle{empty} is simple:
+% No running head or foot at all.
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/28}{Also make even feet and head empty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@empty{%
+ \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@oddhead\@empty
+ \let\@evenfoot\@empty\let\@evenhead\@empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@firstpage}
+% The page style \pstyle{firstpage} puts the telephone number
+% in the proper place for the letterhead. It should be adapted
+% to site conventions. The size of the number is determined
+% depending on the main size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@firstpage{%
+ \let\@oddhead\@empty
+ \def\@oddfoot{\raisebox{-45\p@}[\z@]{%
+ \hb@xt@\textwidth{\hspace*{100\p@}%
+ \ifcase \@ptsize\relax
+ \normalsize
+ \or
+ \small
+ \or
+ \footnotesize
+ \fi
+ \fromlocation \hfill \telephonenum}}\hss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
+% The definition of the page style \pstyle{plain} is again simple.
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/28}{Added definition of \cs{@evenfoot}
+% because of twoside option}
+% \changes{v1.2s}{1995/05/25}{replace \cs{rmfamily} with
+% \cs{normalfont} (PR 1578)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@plain{%
+ \let\@oddhead\@empty
+ \def\@oddfoot{\normalfont\hfil\thepage\hfil}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\normalfont\hfil\thepage\hfil}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Document Markup}
+%
+% \subsection{Global Declarations}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\name}
+% \begin{macro}{\signature}
+% \begin{macro}{\address}
+% \begin{macro}{\location}
+% \begin{macro}{\telephone}
+% The following declarations, shown with examples, give information
+% about the sender:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\name{Dr. L. User}| : to be used for the return address on
+% the envelope.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\name}[1]{\def\fromname{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \item |\signature{Larry User}| : goes after the closing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\signature}[1]{\def\fromsig{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \item |\address{3245 Foo St.\\Gnu York}| : used as the return
+% address in the
+% letter and on the envelope. If not declared, then an
+% institutional standard address is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\address}[1]{\def\fromaddress{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \item |\location{Room 374}| : Acts as modifier to the standard
+% institutional address.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\location}[1]{\def\fromlocation{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \item |\telephone{(415)123-4567}| : Just in case some style puts it
+% on the letter.
+% \changes{v1.2m}{1994/06/23}{Removed typo (\#[] instead of [1])}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\telephone}[1]{\def\telephonenum{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fromname}
+% \begin{macro}{\fromsig}
+% \begin{macro}{\fromaddress}
+% \begin{macro}{\fromlocation}
+% \begin{macro}{\telephonenum}
+% We make sure that the internal control sequences that are used to
+% store the information exist and are empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\name{}
+\signature{}
+\address{}
+\location{}
+\telephone{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makelabels}
+% The |\makelabels| declaration causes mailing labels to be made.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\makelabels}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At the beginning of the document, we need to activate the
+% |\@mlabel| and |\@startlabels| commands, as well as write
+% |\@startlabels| to the |.aux| file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\@startlabels\startlabels
+ \let\@mlabel\mlabel
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@startlabels}\fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At the end of the document we need to write |\clearpage| to the
+% |.aux| file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtEndDocument{%
+ \if@filesw\immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\clearpage}\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\makelabels| is allowed only before the |\begin{document}|
+% command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\makelabels
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The generic letter commands}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{letter}
+% The letter environment creates a new letter, starting from page
+% $1$, with footnotes starting from $1$ as well.
+% (The first page is unnumbered.) It has a single argument, which
+% is the addressee and his address, as in
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{letter}{Sam Jones \\
+% Institute for Retarded Study\\
+% Princeton, N.J.}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Local declarations, such as |\address|, can follow the
+% |\begin{letter}|.
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/04/28}{When printing twosided a new letter
+% shouldn't start on the back of the previous one. Added insertion
+% of a blank page when necessary.}
+% \changes{v1.2z}{1999/04/29}{Reset footnote counter to 0, (PR 2957).}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{letter}[1]
+ {\newpage
+ \if@twoside \ifodd\c@page
+ \else\thispagestyle{empty}\null\newpage\fi
+ \fi
+ \c@page \@ne
+ \c@footnote \z@
+ \interlinepenalty=200 % smaller than the TeXbook value
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\leavevmode| and |\ignorespaces| commands are there for
+% protecting against an empty argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@processto{\leavevmode\ignorespaces #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The end of the environment possibly writes the address
+% information on the \file{.aux} file.
+% \changes{v1.2p}{1994/12/11}{No longer redefine \cs{protect} but use
+% one of the available settings}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\stopletter\@@par\pagebreak\@@par
+ \if@filesw
+ \begingroup
+ \let\\=\relax
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{%
+ \string\@mlabel{\returnaddress}{\toname\\\toaddress}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@processto}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xproc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yproc}
+% |\@processto| gets the |\toname| and |\toaddress| from the letter
+% environment's macro argument. |\@xproc| and |\@yproc| are auxiliary
+% macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@processto#1{%
+ \@xproc #1\\@@@%
+ \ifx\toaddress\@empty
+ \else
+ \@yproc #1@@@%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@xproc #1\\#2@@@{\def\toname{#1}\def\toaddress{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@yproc #1\\#2@@@{\def\toaddress{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Page breaking control}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stopbreaks}
+% When the command |\stopbreaks| is issued no page breaks should
+% occur until |\startbreaks| is called.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\stopbreaks}{%
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \def\par{\@@par\nobreak}%
+ \let\\\@nobreakcr
+ \let\vspace\@nobreakvspace}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nobreakvspace}
+% \changes{v1.2t}{1996/01/20}{Made robust pr/2049}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nobreakvspacex}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nobreakcr}
+% These are needed by |\stopbreaks|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\@nobreakvspace
+ {\@ifstar\@nobreakvspacex\@nobreakvspacex}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nobreakvspacex#1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \nobreak\vskip #1\relax
+ \else
+ \@bsphack\vadjust{\nobreak\vskip #1}\@esphack
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2w}{1997/01/07}
+% {Simplify definition, for ltspace 1.2u. /2341}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nobreakcr{\@ifstar{\@normalcr*}{\@normalcr*}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\startbreaks}
+% This cancels the effect of |\stopbreaks|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\startbreaks}{%
+ \let\\\@normalcr
+ \interlinepenalty 200%
+ \def\par{\@@par\penalty 200\relax}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\longindentation}
+% The size of the indent to use before the closing of the letter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\longindentation
+\longindentation=.5\textwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indentedwidth}
+% The width of the closing of the letter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\indentedwidth
+\indentedwidth=\textwidth
+\advance\indentedwidth -\longindentation
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\opening}
+% Text is begun with the |\opening| command, whose argument
+% generates the salutation, as in
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \opening{Dear Henry,}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This should produce everything up to and including the
+% `Dear Henry,' and a |\par| command that follows.
+% Since there's a |\vfil| at the bottom of every page,
+% it can add vertical fill to position a short letter.
+% It should use the following commands:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\toname| : name part of `to' address.
+% Will be one line long.
+% \item |\toaddress| : address part of `to' address.
+% The lines separated by |\\|.
+% \item |\fromname| : name of sender.
+% \item |\fromaddress| : argument of current |\address|
+% declaration-- null if none. Should use standard institutional
+% address if null.
+% \item |\fromlocation| : argument of current |\location|
+% declaration--null if none.
+% \item |\telephonenum| : argument of current |\telephone|
+% declaration--null if none.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\opening}[1]{\ifx\@empty\fromaddress
+ \thispagestyle{firstpage}%
+ {\raggedleft\@date\par}%
+ \else % home address
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.2y}{1998/05/10}{Avoid space at right of tabular
+% (pr2794)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\raggedleft\begin{tabular}{l@{}}\ignorespaces
+ \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]%
+ \@date \end{tabular}\par}%
+ \fi
+ \vspace{2\parskip}%
+ {\raggedright \toname \\ \toaddress \par}%
+ \vspace{2\parskip}%
+ #1\par\nobreak}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\closing}
+% The body of the letter follows, ended by a |\closing| command,
+% as in
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \closing{Yours truly,}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This command generates the closing matter, and the signature.
+% An obvious thing to do is to use a |\parbox| for the closing
+% and the signature. Should use the following:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\fromsig| : argument of current |\signature| declaration
+% or, if null, the |\fromname|.
+% \item |\stopbreaks| : a macro that inhibits page breaking.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\closing}[1]{\par\nobreak\vspace{\parskip}%
+ \stopbreaks
+ \noindent
+ \ifx\@empty\fromaddress\else
+ \hspace*{\longindentation}\fi
+ \parbox{\indentedwidth}{\raggedright
+ \ignorespaces #1\\[6\medskipamount]%
+ \ifx\@empty\fromsig
+ \fromname
+ \else \fromsig \fi\strut}%
+ \par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\mdeskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% Of these three, only |\medskipmount| is actually used above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\smallskipamount=.5\parskip
+\medskipamount=\parskip
+%\bigskipamount=2\parskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cc}
+% \begin{macro}{\encl}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps}
+% After the |\closing| you can put arbitrary stuff, which is typeset
+% with zero |\parindent| and no page breaking. Commands designed
+% for use after the closing are:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \cc{Tinker\\Evers\\Chance}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% which produces:\\
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% cc: & Tinker\\
+% & Evers\\
+% & Chance
+% \end{tabular}\\
+% Note the obvious use of |\parbox|.
+% \changes{v1.2s}{1995/05/25}{replace \cs{reset@font} with
+% \cs{normalfont}; remove \cs{rm}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\cc}[1]{%
+ \par\noindent
+ \parbox[t]{\textwidth}{%
+ \@hangfrom{\normalfont\ccname: }%
+ \ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \encl{Foo(2)\\Bar}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% which produces:\\
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% encl: & Foo(2)\\
+% & Bar
+% \end{tabular}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\encl}[1]{%
+ \par\noindent
+ \parbox[t]{\textwidth}{%
+ \@hangfrom{\normalfont\enclname: }%
+ \ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The only thing |\ps| needs to do is call |\startbreaks|,
+% which allows page breaking again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ps}{\par\startbreaks}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stopletter}
+% The |\stopletter| command is called by |\endletter| to do the
+% following:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Add any desired fill or other material at the end of the
+% letter.
+% \item Define |\returnaddress| to be the return address for the
+% mailing label.
+% More precisely, it is the first argument of the |\mlabel|
+% command described below. It should be defined to null if the
+% return address doesn't appear on the labels. Any command,
+% other than |\\|, that should not be expanded until the |\mlabel|
+% command is actually executed must be preceded by |\protect|.
+% Whenever possible, |\protect| commands in the definition of
+% |\returnaddress|---it's much more efficient that way. In
+% particular, when the standard return address is used, you
+% should define |\returnaddress| to something like
+% |\protect\standardreturnaddress|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\stopletter}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Customizing the labels}
+%
+% Commands for generating the labels are put on the \file{.aux} file,
+% which is read in and processed by the |\end{document}| command.
+% You have to define the following two commands:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\startlabels| : Should reset the page layout parameters if
+% necessary.
+% \item |\mlabel|\marg{return address}\marg{to adress} : Command to
+% generate a single label.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\returnaddress}
+% The return address for the mailing labels can be stored in this
+% macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\returnaddress}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelcount}
+% A register to count the labels
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\labelcount
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\startlabels}
+% The following |\startlabels| command sets things up for
+% producing labels in two columns of five 2" $\times$ 4-1/4"
+% labels each, suitable for reproducing onto Avery brand number
+% 5352 address labels.
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/03/14}{changed value of \cs{columnsep} by 1pt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\startlabels}{\labelcount\z@
+ \pagestyle{empty}%
+ \let\@texttop\relax
+ \topmargin -50\p@
+ \headsep \z@
+ \oddsidemargin -35\p@
+ \evensidemargin -35\p@
+ \textheight 10in
+ \@colht\textheight \@colroom\textheight \vsize\textheight
+ \textwidth 550\p@
+ \columnsep 26\p@
+ \ifcase \@ptsize\relax
+ \normalsize
+ \or
+ \small
+ \or
+ \footnotesize
+ \fi
+ \baselineskip \z@
+ \lineskip \z@
+ \boxmaxdepth \z@
+ \parindent \z@
+ \twocolumn\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startlabels}
+% |\@startlabels| is the command name that is written to the |.aux|
+% file. It is a no-op at first, and defined to be the same as
+% |\startlabels| in the |\begin{document}| hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@startlabels=\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mlabel}
+% This command prints an address label; it is used when the user
+% specified |\makelabels| in the preamble of his document. The
+% command |\mlabel| takes two arguments; the second argument is
+% supposed to be the address; the first argument can be used to
+% print a return address. In this document class we ignore the
+% first argument. Also the labels are supposed to be 2~inch high
+% and 3.6~inch wide. When your address labels have a different you
+% will have to define your own |\mlabel| command.
+% \changes{v1.2p}{1994/12/11}{Redefined \cs{mlabel} to not use the
+% \cs{setbox} primitive}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/03/14}{changed width of the labels slightly to
+% prevent \LaTeX\ stuffing two on each line}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\mlabel}[2]{%
+ \parbox[b][2in][c]{262\p@}{\strut\ignorespaces #2}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mlabel}
+% The macro |\@mlabel| is written to the \file{.aux} file instead
+% of |\mlabel|. This allows us to make it a no-op by default,
+% and then activate it in the |\begin{document}| hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@mlabel=\@gobbletwo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Lists}
+%
+% \subsubsection{General List Parameters}
+%
+% The following commands are used to set the default values for the
+% list environment's parameters. See the \LaTeX{} manual for an
+% explanation of the meanings of the parameters. Defaults for the
+% list environment are set as follows. First, |\rightmargin|,
+% |\listparindent| and |\itemindent| are set to 0pt. Then, for a
+% \texttt{K}th level list, the command |\@listK| is called, where
+% `\texttt{K}' denotes `\texttt{i}', `\texttt{ii}', ... ,
+% `\texttt{vi}'. (I.e., |\@listiii| is called for a third-level
+% list.) By convention, |\@listK| should set |\leftmargin| to
+% |\leftmarginK|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargini}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginvi}
+% For efficiency, level-one list's values are defined at top level, and
+% |\@listi| is defined to set only |\leftmargin|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\leftmargini {2.5em}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following three are calculated so that they are larger than
+% the sum of |\labelsep| and the width of the default labels (which
+% are `(m)', `vii.' and `M.').
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\leftmarginii {2.2em}
+\setlength\leftmarginiii {1.87em}
+\setlength\leftmarginiv {1.7em}
+\setlength\leftmarginv {1em}
+\setlength\leftmarginvi {1em}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we set the top level leftmargin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\leftmargin {\leftmargini}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelwidth}
+% |\labelsep| is the distance between the label and the text of an
+% item; |\labelwidth| is the width of the label.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength \labelsep {5\p@}
+\setlength \labelwidth{\leftmargini}
+\addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partopsep}
+% When the user leaves a blank line before the environment an extra
+% vertical space of |\partopsep| is inserted, in addition to
+% |\parskip| and |\topsep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\partopsep{0\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@beginparpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endparpenalty}
+% These penalties are inserted before and after a list or paragraph
+% environment. They are set to a bonus value to encourage page
+% breaking at these points.
+% \begin{macro}{\@itempenalty}
+% This penalty is inserted between list items.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
+\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
+\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listI}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
+% |\@listI| defines top level and |\@listi| values of
+% |\leftmargin|, |\parsep|, |\topsep|, and |\itemsep|
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listI{\setlength\leftmargin{\leftmargini}%
+ \setlength\parsep {0\p@}%
+ \setlength\topsep {.4em}%
+ \setlength\itemsep{.4em}}
+\let\@listi\@listI
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have to initialize these parameters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@listi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listvi}
+% Here are the same macros for the higher level lists.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listii {\setlength \leftmargin{\leftmarginii}%
+ \setlength \labelwidth{\leftmarginii}%
+ \addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}}
+\def\@listiii{\setlength \leftmargin{\leftmarginiii}%
+ \setlength \labelwidth{\leftmarginiii}%
+ \addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}%
+ \setlength \topsep {.2em}%
+ \setlength \itemsep {\topsep}}
+\def\@listiv {\setlength \leftmargin{\leftmarginiv}%
+ \setlength \labelwidth{\leftmarginiv}%
+ \addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}}
+\def\@listv {\setlength \leftmargin{\leftmarginv}%
+ \setlength \labelwidth{\leftmarginv}%
+ \addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}}
+\def\@listvi {\setlength \leftmargin{\leftmarginvi}%
+ \setlength \labelwidth{\leftmarginvi}%
+ \addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Enumerate}
+%
+% The enumerate environment uses four counters: \Lcount{enumi},
+% \Lcount{enumii}, \Lcount{enumiii} and \Lcount{enumiv}, where
+% \Lcount{enumN} controls the numbering of the Nth level
+% enumeration.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
+% The counters are already defined in the \LaTeX{} kernel
+% (\file{ltlists.dtx}), but their representation is changed here.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\theenumi{\@arabic\c@enumi}
+\renewcommand\theenumii{\@alph\c@enumii}
+\renewcommand\theenumiii{\@roman\c@enumiii}
+\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiv}
+% The commands |\labelenumi| ... |\labelenumiv| generate the label
+% for each item.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
+\newcommand\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
+\newcommand\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
+\newcommand\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiv}
+% The expansion of |\p@enumN||\theenumN| defines the output of a
+% |\ref| command when referencing an item of the Nth level of an
+% enumerated list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+\renewcommand\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\renewcommand\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemi}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemii}
+% \changes{v1.2h}{1994/05/06}{Inserted \cs{normalfont}}
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1996/08/25}{replaced -{}- with \cs{textendash}}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiv}
+% Itemization is controlled by |\labelitemi|,
+% |\labelitemii|, |\labelitemiii|, and |\labelitemiv|, which define
+% the labels of the various itemization levels: the symbols used are
+% bullet, bold en-dash, asterisk and centered dot.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2n}{1994/07/11}{renamed \cs{labelitemiiii} to
+% \cs{labelitemiii}}
+% \changes{v1.2x}{1997/04/16}{Changed to \cs{textbullet},
+% \cs{textasteriskcentered} and \cs{textperiodcentered}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\labelitemi{\textbullet}
+\newcommand\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries \textendash}
+\newcommand\labelitemiii{\textasteriskcentered}
+\newcommand\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Description}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{description}
+% The description environment is defined here -- while the itemize
+% and enumerate environments are defined in the \LaTeX{} kernel
+% (\file{ltlists.dtx}).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{description}
+ {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+ \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel}
+% To change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
+% |\descriptionlabel|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/03/14}{made command short}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
+ \normalfont\bfseries #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Defining new environments}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Verse}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{verse}
+% The verse environment is defined by making clever use of the
+% list environment's parameters. The user types |\\| to end a line.
+% This is implemented by |\let|'ing |\\| equal |\@centercr|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{verse}
+ {\let\\=\@centercr
+ \list{}{\setlength\itemsep{\z@}%
+ \setlength\itemindent{-15\p@}%
+ \setlength\listparindent{\itemindent}%
+ \setlength\rightmargin{\leftmargin}%
+ \addtolength\leftmargin{15\p@}}%
+ \item[]}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Quotation}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quotation}
+% The quotation environment is also defined by making clever use of
+% the list environment's parameters. The lines in the environment
+% are set smaller than |\textwidth|. The first line of a paragraph
+% inside this environment is indented.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quotation}
+ {\list{}{\setlength\listparindent{1.5em}%
+ \setlength\itemindent{\listparindent}%
+ \setlength\rightmargin{\leftmargin}}%
+ \item[]}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Quote}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quote}
+% The quote environment is like the quotation environment except
+% that paragraphs are not indented.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quote}
+ {\list{}{\setlength\rightmargin{\leftmargin}}%
+ \item[]}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Theorem}
+%
+% This document class does not define it's own theorem environments,
+% the defaults, supplied by the \LaTeX{} kernel (\file{ltthm.dtx})
+% are available.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Setting parameters for existing environments}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Array and tabular}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arraycolsep}
+% The columns in an array environment are separated by
+% 2|\arraycolsep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arraycolsep{5\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabcolsep}
+% The columns in an tabular environment are separated by
+% 2|\tabcolsep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\tabcolsep{6\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulewidth}
+% The width of vertical rules in the array and tabular environments
+% is given by |\arrayrulewidth|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.4\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesep}
+% The space between adjacent rules in the array and tabular
+% environments is given by |\doublerulesep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\doublerulesep{2\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Tabbing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabbingsep}
+% This controls the space that the |\'| command puts in. (See
+% \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Minipage}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
+% The macro |\@minipagerestore| is called upon entry to a minipage
+% environment to set up things that are to be handled differently
+% inside a minipage environment. In the current styles, it does
+% nothing.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootins}
+% Minipages have their own footnotes; |\skip||\@mpfootins| plays
+% same r\^ole for footnotes in a minipage as |\skip||\footins| does
+% for ordinary footnotes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Framed boxes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxsep}
+% The space left by |\fbox| and |\framebox| between the box and the
+% text in it.
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxrule}
+% The width of the rules in the box made by |\fbox| and |\framebox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\fboxsep{3\p@}
+\setlength\fboxrule{.4\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Equation and eqnarray}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
+% The equation counter will be typeset using arabic numbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\theequation{\@arabic\c@equation}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\jot}
+% |\jot| is the extra space added between lines of an eqnarray
+% environment. The default value is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \setlength\jot{3pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
+% The macro |\@eqnnum| defines how equation numbers are to appear in
+% equations. Again the default is used.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@eqnnum{(\theequation)}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Font changing}
+%
+% Here we supply the declarative font changing commands that were
+% common in \LaTeX\ version 2.09 and earlier. These commands work
+% in text mode \emph{and} in math mode. They are provided for
+% compatibility, but one should start using the |\text...| and
+% |\math...| commands instead. These commands are redefined using
+% |\@renewfontswitch|, a command with three arguments: the user
+% command to be defined; \LaTeX\ commands to execute in text mode
+% and \LaTeX\ commands to execute in math mode.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rm}
+% \begin{macro}{\tt}
+% \begin{macro}{\sf}
+% The commands to change the family.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1993/12/14}{Added compatibility mode support.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1993/12/18}{Changed \cs{@newfontswitch} to
+% \cs{@renewfontswitch}, removed switch.}
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1994/04/14}{\cs{@renewfontswitch} has become
+% \cs{DeclareOldFontCommand}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bf}
+% The command to change to the bold series. One should use
+% |\mdseries| to explicitly switch back to medium series.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1993/12/14}{Added compatibility mode support.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1993/12/18}{Changed \cs{@newfontswitch} to
+% \cs{@renewfontswitch}, removed switch.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sl}
+% \begin{macro}{\it}
+% \begin{macro}{\sc}
+%
+% And the commands to change the shape of the font. The slanted and
+% small caps shapes are not available by default as math alphabets,
+% so those changes do nothing in math mode. One should use
+% |\upshape| to explicitly change back to the upright shape.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1993/12/14}{Added compatibility mode support.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1993/12/18}{Changed \cs{@newfontswitch} to
+% \cs{@renewfontswitch}, removed switch.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1993/12/20}{Added forgotten re.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\relax}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cal}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1993/12/14}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\mit}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1993/12/14}{Macro added}
+%
+% The commands |\cal| and |\mit| should only be used in math mode,
+% outside math mode they have no effect. Currently the New Font
+% Selection Scheme defines these commands to generate warning
+% messages. Therefore we have to define them `by hand'.
+% \changes{v1.2p}{1994/12/11}{Now define \cs{cal} and \cs{mit} using
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand*}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\cal}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathcal}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mit}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathnormal}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
+% Usually, footnotes are separated from the main body of the text
+% by a small rule. This rule is drawn by the macro |\footnoterule|.
+% We have to make sure that the rule takes no vertical space (see
+% \file{plain.tex}) so we compensate for the natural height of the
+% rule of 0.4pt by adding the right amount of vertical skip.
+%
+% To prevent the rule from colliding with the footnote we first add
+% a little negative vertical skip, then we put the rule and make
+% sure we end up at the same point where we begun this operation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
+ \kern-\p@
+ \hrule \@width .4\columnwidth
+ \kern .6\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@footnote}
+% A counter for footnotes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \newcounter{footnote}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/03/08}{Always call \cs{@makefnmark}.}
+% The footnote mechanism of \LaTeX{} calls the macro |\@makefntext|
+% to produce the actual footnote. The macro gets the text of the
+% footnote as its argument and should use |\@makefnmark| to produce
+% the mark of the footnote. The macro |\@makefntext| is called when
+% effectively inside a |\parbox| of width |\columnwidth| (i.e.,
+% with |\hsize| = |\columnwidth|).
+%
+% An example of what can be achieved is given by the following piece
+% of \TeX\ code.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+% \@setpar{\@@par
+% \@tempdima = \hsize
+% \advance\@tempdima-10pt
+% \parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}%
+% \par
+% \parindent 1em\noindent
+% \hb@xt@\z@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% The effect of this definition is that all lines of the footnote
+% are indented by 10pt, while the first line of a new paragraph is
+% indented by 1em. To change these dimensions, just substitute the
+% desired value for `10pt' (in both places) or `1em'. The mark is
+% flush right against the footnote.
+%
+% In this document class we use a simpler macro, in which the
+% footnote text is set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no
+% indentation except on the first line of a paragraph, and the
+% first line of the footnote. Thus, all the macro must do is set
+% |\parindent| to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs
+% and put the proper indentation before the mark.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \noindent
+ \hangindent 5\p@
+ \hb@xt@5\p@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
+% The footnote markers that are printed in the text to point to the
+% footnotes should be produced by the macro |\@makefnmark|. We use
+% the default definition for it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{$^{\@thefnmark}\m@th$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Words}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ccname}
+% \begin{macro}{\enclname}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagename}
+% \begin{macro}{\headtoname}
+% This document class is for documents prepared in the English
+% language. To prepare a version for another language, various
+% English words must be replaced. All the English words that
+% require replacement are defined below in command names.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ccname}{cc}
+\newcommand*{\enclname}{encl}
+\newcommand*{\pagename}{Page}
+\newcommand*{\headtoname}{To}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Date}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% This macro uses the \TeX\ primitives |\month|, |\day| and |\year|
+% to provide the date of the \LaTeX-run.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\today}{\ifcase\month\or
+ January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+ July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+ \space\number\day, \number\year}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Two column mode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
+% This gives the distance between two columns in two column mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\columnsep{10\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\columnseprule}
+% This gives the width of the rule between two columns in two
+% column mode. We have no visible rule.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The page style}
+% We have \pstyle{plain} pages in this document class by
+% default. We use arabic page numbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pagestyle{plain}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Single or double sided printing}
+%
+% We don't try to make each page as long as all the others.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\raggedbottom
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@texttop}
+% The document class letter sets |\@texttop| to |\vskip| 0pt
+% \texttt{plus} .00006fil on the first page of a letter, which
+% centers a short letter on the page. This fil value may have to be
+% changed for other letterheads. This setting has to be done after
+% |\raggedbottom| is executed, since the latter sets |\@texttop| to
+% |\relax|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@texttop{\ifnum\c@page=1\vskip \z@ plus.00006fil\relax\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We always start in one column mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\onecolumn
+%</letter>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c85d5ebdf77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/letter.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating letter class file ***}
+
+\generateFile{letter.cls}{t}{
+ \from{letter.dtx}{letter}}
+
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space letter.cls}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file `letter.dtx'}
+\Msg{* through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..62082152aa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltalloc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltalloc.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltalloc.dtx}
+ [1996/07/26 v1.1c LaTeX Kernel (allocation)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltalloc.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{33}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/16}{(ASAJ) Split from ltinit.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/10/25}{General doc improvements}
+%
+% \section{Counters}
+%
+% This section deals with counter and other variable allocation.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following are from plain \TeX:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{z@}] A zero dimen or number. It's more efficient to write
+% |\parindent\z@| than |\parindent 0pt|.
+% \item[\cs{@ne}] The number 1.
+% \item[\cs{m@ne}] The number $-1$.
+% \item[\cs{tw@}] The number 2.
+% \item[\cs{sixt@@n }] The number 16.
+% \item[\cs{@m}] The number 1000.
+% \item[\cs{@MM}] The number 20000.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xxxii}
+% The constant $32$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\@xxxii=32
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@Mi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Mii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Miii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@miv}
+% Constants $1001$--$1004$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\@Mi=10001
+\mathchardef\@Mii=10002
+\mathchardef\@Miii=10003
+\mathchardef\@Miv=10004
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/03/28}
+% {Redefinition of `new' allocations removed.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempcnta}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempcntb}
+% Scratch count registers used by \LaTeX\ kernel commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@tempcnta
+\newcount\@tempcntb
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@tempswa}
+% General boolean switch used by \LaTeX\ kernel commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempdima}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempdimb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempdimc}
+% Scratch dimen registers used by \LaTeX\ kernel commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@tempdima
+\newdimen\@tempdimb
+\newdimen\@tempdimc
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempboxa}
+% Scratch box register used by \LaTeX\ kernel commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\@tempboxa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempskipa}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempskipb}
+% Scratch skip registers used by \LaTeX\ kernel commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\@tempskipa
+\newskip\@tempskipb
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@temptokena}
+% Scratch token register used by \LaTeX\ kernel commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\@temptokena
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@flushglue}
+% Glue used for |\right|- \& |\leftskip| = 0pt plus 1fil
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\@flushglue \@flushglue = 0pt plus 1fil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d4957026a72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltbibl.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,407 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltbibl.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltbibl.dtx}
+ [2004/02/15 v1.1q LaTeX Kernel (Bibliography)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltbibl.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{174}
+%
+% \section{Bibliography Generation}
+%
+% A bibliography is created by the |thebibliography| environment, which
+% generates a title such as ``References'', and a list of entries.
+% The BIB\TeX{} program will create a file containing such an
+% environment, which will be read in by the |\bibliography| command.
+% With BIB\TeX, the following commands will be used.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\bibliography}
+% |\bibliography|\marg{file1,file2, \ldots ,filen} : specifies
+% the bibdata files. Writes a |\bibdata| entry on the |.aux| file
+% and tries to read in |mainfile.bbl|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\bibliographystyle}
+% |\bibliographystyle|\marg{style} :
+% Writes a |\bibstyle| entry on the |.aux| file.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{thebibliography}
+% The |thebibliography| environment is a list environment. To save the
+% use of an extra counter, it should use |enumiv| as the item
+% counter.
+% Instead of using |\item|, items in the bibliography are produced by
+% the following commands:\\
+% |\bibitem|\marg{name} : Produces a numbered entry cited as
+% \meta{name}.\\
+% |\bibitem|\oarg{label}\marg{name} : Produces an entry labeled by
+% \meta{Label} and cited by \meta{name}.
+%
+% The former is used for bibliographies with citations like [1], [2],
+% etc.;
+% the latter is used for citations like [Knuth82].
+%
+% The document class must define the thebibliography environment. This
+% environment has a single argument, which is the widest bibliography
+% label-- e.g., if the [Knuth67] is the widest entry, then this
+% argument will be Knuth67. The |\thebibliography| command must begin
+% a list environment, which the |\endthebibliography| command ends.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\cite}
+% Entries are cited by the command |\cite|\marg{name}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\nocite}
+% |\nocite|\marg{citations}
+% puts information on the |.aux| file that causes
+% \BibTeX{} to include the \marg{citations} list in the bibliography,
+% but puts nothing in the text.
+%
+% |\nocite{*}| is special: it tells \BibTeX{} to put the whole of a
+% collection of references into the bibiography.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/31}{Initial version of ltidxbib.dtx,
+% split from ltherest.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/19}{Initial version of ltbibl.dtx,
+% split from ltidxbib.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/21}{Use new warning commands}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/10}{Fix \cs{nocite\{*\}}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{bibliography,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% PARAMETERS
+%
+% \@cite : A macro such that \@cite{LABEL1,LABEL2}{NOTE}
+% produces the output for a \cite[NOTE]{FOO1,FOO2} command,
+% where entry FOOi is defined by \bibitem[LABELi]{FOOi}.
+% The switch @tempswa is true if the optional NOTE argument
+% is present.
+% The default definition is :
+% \@cite{LABELS}{NOTE} ==
+% BEGIN [LABELS
+% IF @tempswa = T THEN , NOTE FI
+% ]
+% END
+%
+% \@biblabel : A macro to produce the label in the bibliography
+% entry. For \bibitem[LABEL]{NAME}, the label is
+% generated by \@biblabel{LABEL}. It has the default
+% definition \@biblabel{LABEL} -> [LABEL].
+% CONVENTION
+%
+% \b@FOO : The name or number of the reference created by \cite{FOO}
+% E.g., if \cite{FOO} -> [17] , then \b@FOO -> 17.
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibitem}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1995/05/08}{Removed unnecessary braces}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibitem{\@ifnextchar[\@lbibitem\@bibitem}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lbibitem}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/02/26}{Added \cs{hfill} to restore
+% left-alignment of bibliography labels in alpha style}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[\@biblabel{#1}\hfill]\if@filesw
+ {\let\protect\noexpand
+ \immediate
+ \write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}}\fi\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibitem}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/11/13}{Changed counter enumi to enumiv,
+% as it says in the comment above}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/01/10}{Changed \cs{c@enumiv} to \cs{value}
+% of \cs{@listctr}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bibitem#1{\item\if@filesw \immediate\write\@auxout
+ {\string\bibcite{#1}{\the\value{\@listctr}}}\fi\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcite}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1995/04/24}
+% {Make \cs{@onlypreamble} /1388.}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1995/06/19}
+% {Call \cs{@newl@bel} so repeated keys produce better warning.}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1995/07/14}
+% {Remove \cs{@onlypreamble} so still defined in new \cs{enddocument}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibcite{\@newl@bel b}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\citation}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\citation\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cite}
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Make robust}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cite{%
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citex}{\@tempswafalse\@citex[]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@citex}
+% |\penalty\@m| added to definition of |\@citex| to allow a line
+% break after the `,' in citations like [Jones80,Smith77]
+% (Added 23 Oct 86)
+%
+% space added after the `,' (21 Nov 87)
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/10/25}
+% {added \cs{reset@font}, suggested by Bernd Raichle.}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/11/06}
+% {added code to remove a leading blank}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/08/14}
+% {added missing argument braces around \cs{hbox},
+% found by Ed Sznyter}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/08/17}
+% {simplified code for removing leading blanks in
+% citation key (proposed by Frank Jensen and
+% Kresten Krab Thorup)}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/08/06}
+% {Moved writing to .aux file in loop over citation keys
+% so that leading blanks are removed there as well.}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/05}{Set switch for warning and end of run.}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1995/04/24}
+% {Add \cs{mbox} to undefined case: latex/1239.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1995/05/08}{Use \cs{@firstofone}}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1995/10/20}{Removed refundefined flag}
+% \changes{v1.1l}{1995/12/07}{Restored name of \cs{G@refundefinedtrue}}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1997/04/24}{\cs{\@empty} to avoid primitive
+% error on empty cite keys. latex/2432}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{2002/12/13}{Added \cs{leavevmode} in case citation
+% is at start of paragraph (pr/3486)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@citex[#1]#2{\leavevmode
+ \let\@citea\@empty
+ \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
+ {\@citea\def\@citea{,\penalty\@m\ }%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
+ \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Using |\hbox| instead of |\mbox| is fine because of the
+% |\leavevmode| above. In fact the use of a box around the citation
+% contents is more than questionable in my view (FMi), but within
+% 2e I have to keep that for compatibility reasons as it would
+% probably change too many existing documents. Its main reason is
+% to avoid hyphenation of labels such as [FOOB89] into [FOO- B89]
+% so in certain styles it makes sense; but, for example, in author
+% year citations it becomes more than questionable.
+%
+% So Chris added yet another hook here, as suggested by, at least,
+% Donald Arsenau. Note that this one is inside the first argument
+% of the |\@cite| hook.
+% This decouples the top-level typesetting of the citation from
+% the details of the other business conducted here. All this really
+% needs a complete rethink to get the right modularity.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1q}{2004/02/15}{Changed to use a hook with default
+% value \cs{hbox}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\hbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
+ \G@refundefinedtrue
+ \@latex@warning
+ {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
+ {\@cite@ofmt{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibdata}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibdata=\@gobble
+\let\bibstyle=\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/01/18}
+% {Use \cs{@input@} so include files are listed.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibliography#1{%
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\bibdata{#1}}%
+ \fi
+ \@input@{\jobname.bbl}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/12/09}{(DPC) Allow use in preamble.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bibliographystyle#1{%
+ \ifx\@begindocumenthook\@undefined\else
+ \expandafter\AtBeginDocument
+ \fi
+ {\if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\bibstyle{#1}}%
+ \fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nocite}
+% (Added 14 Jun 85)
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/10}{Fix \cs{nocite\{*\}}}
+%
+% This puts information on the |.aux| file that causes
+% \BibTeX{} to include the citation list in the bibliography,
+% but puts nothing in the text.
+%
+% RmS 93/08/06: Made loop for |\nocite| like that for |\@citex|,
+% to get rid of leading spaces.
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/05/03}{Make \cs{nocite} issue a warning
+% for an undefined citation key.}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/05}{Do not write page number in
+% \cs{nocite} warning message.}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/05}{Set switch for warning and end of run.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1995/05/08}{Use \cs{@firstofone}}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1995/10/20}{Removed refundefined flag}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nocite#1{\@bsphack
+% \end{macrocode}
+% With the implementation designed already in \LaTeX\,2.09 the
+% |\nocite| command will not work before |\begin{document}| since
+% it tries to write to the |.aux| file which is not open before
+% that point. As a result the ``reference'' will appear on the
+% terminal and nothing else will happen.
+%
+% This would be easy to fix, but then a document using the fix will
+% silently fail on an older release of \LaTeX{}, missing all
+% citations done with |\nocite|. Thus we do only generate an error
+% message and leave the fix for a \LaTeXe{} successor.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1o}{2003/05/18}{Check if we are after \cs{document}}
+% \changes{v1.1p}{2004/01/04}{Changed error message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@onlypreamble\document
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since we are after |\begin{document}| we can do the citations:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{%
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+ \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\G@refundefinedtrue
+ \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}}{}}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% But before |\begin{document}| we raise an error message:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@latex@error{Cannot be used in preamble}\@eha
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Without the compatibility problems we could fix the problem as follows:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ % \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}}
+ \fi
+ \@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since |\nocite{*}| should not produce a warning about undefined
+% citation keys (seee PR 557), we need to set the control sequence
+% `|\b@*|' to something other than |\relax|. As a result |\cite{*}|
+% will not warn either (but that never worked with \BibTeX{} in the
+% first place).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\let\csname b@*\endcsname\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Default definitions}
+%
+% This hook determines the `relative formatting' of the two logical
+% parts of a citation with comment.
+% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cite#1#2{[{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cite@ofmt}
+% \changes{v1.1q}{2004/02/15}{Added hook with default value \cs{hbox}}
+% This is, in general, a command that appears to have one argument
+% whose value is, in the kernel, a single cs whose name is the
+% expansion of |b@\@citeb|; the expansion of this cs will
+% typically be some hmode material that produces the detailed
+% typeset form of just the citations themselves.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@cite@ofmt\hbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/01/14}{removed \cs{hfill}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b838ef47684
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltboxes.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1174 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltboxes.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltboxes.dtx}
+ [1999/04/27 v1.1f LaTeX Kernel (Box Commands)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltboxes.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{David Carlisle\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{757}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor Documentation fixes.}
+% \section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\makebox
+% |\makebox[|\meta{wid}|][|\meta{pos}|]{|\meta{obj}|}|\\
+% Puts \meta{obj} in an |\hbox| of width \meta{wid}, positioned by
+% \meta{pos}.
+%
+% The possible \meta{pos} are:\\
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% |s| stretched,\\
+% |l| flushleft,\\
+% |r| flushright,\\
+% |c| (default) centred.
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% If \meta{wid} is missing, then \meta{pos} is also missing and
+% \meta{obj} is put in an |\hbox| of its natural width.
+%
+% |\makebox(|\meta{x}|,|\meta{y}|)[|\meta{pos}|]{|\meta{obj}|}|\\
+% Puts \meta{obj} in an |\hbox| of width $x * |\unitlength|$
+% and height $y * |\unitlength|$.
+% \meta{pos} arguments are
+% |s|, |l|, |r| or |c| (default) for stretched, flushleft, flushright
+% or centred, and |t| or |b|
+% for top, bottom -- or combinations like |tr| or |rb|.
+% Default for horizontal and vertical are centered.
+% Note that in this picture mode version of |\makebox| a [b] aligns on
+% the \emph{bottom} of the text as documented. If you want to align on
+% the \emph{baseline} use
+% |\makebox( , )[b]{\raisebox{0pt}[\height][0pt]{xyz}}}|
+% or |\makebox( , )[b]{\smash{xyz}}|
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\mbox
+% |\mbox{|\meta{obj}|}| The same as |\makebox{|\meta{obj}|}|, but is
+% more efficient as no checking for optional arguments is done.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\newsavebox
+% |\newsavebox{\cmd}| : If |\cmd| is undefined, then defines it
+% to be a \TeX\ box register.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\savebox
+% |\savebox{\cmd}| ... : |\cmd| is defined to be a \TeX\ box register,
+% and the '...' are any |\makebox| arguments. It is
+% like |\makebox|, except it doesn't produce text but
+% saves the value in |\box| |\cmd|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\sbox
+% |\sbox{|\meta{cmd}|}{|\meta{obj}|}| is an efficient abbreviation for\\
+% |\savebox{|\meta{cmd}|}{|\meta{obj}|}|.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{lrbox}
+% |\begin{lrbox}{|\meta{cmd}|}|\meta{text}|\end{lrbox}| is equivalent
+% to\\
+% |\sbox{|\meta{cmd}|}{|\meta{text}|}|\\
+% except that any white space at the beginning and end of \meta{text}
+% is ignored.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\framebox
+% |\framebox| ... : like |\makebox|, except it puts a `frame' around
+% the box. The frame is made of lines of thickness
+% |\fboxrule|, separated by space |\fboxsep| from the
+% text -- except for |\framebox(X,Y)| ... , where the
+% thickness of the lines is as for the picture environment,
+% and there is no separation added.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\fbox
+% |\fbox{|\meta{obj}|}| is an abbreviation for
+% |\framebox{|\meta{obj}|}|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\parbox
+% |\parbox[|\meta{pos}|][|\meta{height}|][|\meta{inner-pos}|]{|^^A
+% \meta{width}|}{|\meta{text}|}| :
+% Makes a box with |\hsize| \meta{width}, positioned by \meta{pos} as
+% follows:
+% c : |\vcenter| (placed in |$...$| if not in math mode)
+% b : |\vbox|
+% t : |\vtop|
+% default value is c.
+% Sets |\hsize| := \meta{width} and calls |\@parboxrestore|, which
+% does the following:
+% Restores the original definitions of:
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{l}
+% |\par|\\
+% |\\|\\
+% |\-|\\
+% |\'|\\
+% | \`|\\
+% |\=|
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% Resets the following parameters:
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{l@{\quad=\quad}ll}
+% |\parindent| & 0pt \\
+% |\parskip| & 0pt & added 20 Jan 87\\
+% |\linewidth| & |\hsize|\\
+% |\@totalleftmargin| & 0pt\\
+% |\leftskip| & 0pt\\
+% |\rightskip| & 0pt\\
+% |\@rightskip| & 0pt\\
+% |\parfillskip| & 0pt plus 1fil\\
+% |\lineskip| & |\normallineskip|\\
+% |\baselineskip| & |\normalbaselineskip|
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% Calls |\sloppy|
+%
+% Note: |\@arrayparboxrestore| same as |\@parboxrestore|
+% but it doesn't restore |\\|.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{minipage}
+% |minipage| : Similar to |\parbox|, except it also
+% makes this look like a page by setting
+%
+% |\textwidth| == |\columnwidth| == box width
+%
+% changes footnotes by redefining:\\%
+% |\@mpfn| == mpfootnote \\
+% |\thempfn| == |\thempfootnote|\\
+% |\@footnotetext| == |\@mpfootnotetext|
+%
+% resets the following list environment parameters:\\
+% |\@listdepth| == |\@mplistdepth|\\
+% where |\@mplistdepth| is initialized to zero,
+%
+% and executes |\@minipagerestore| to allow the document
+% style to reset any other parameters it desires.
+% It sets |@minipage| true, and resets |\everypar| to set
+% it false. This switch keeps |\addvspace| from putting space
+% at the top of a minipage.
+%
+% Change added 24 May 89: |\minipage| sets |@minipage| globally;
+% |\endminipage| resets it false.
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\rule
+% |\rule[|\meta{raised}|]{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{height}|}| :
+% Makes a $\meta{width}*\meta{height}$ rule, raised \meta{raised}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\underline
+% |\underline{|\meta{text}|}| : Makes an underlined hbox with
+% \meta{text} in it.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\raisebox
+% |\raisebox{|\meta{distance}|}[|\meta{height}|][|\meta{depth}^^A
+% |]{|\meta{box}|}| :\\
+% Raises \meta{box} up by \meta{distance} length (down if
+% \meta{distance} negative). Makes \TeX\ think that the new box extends
+% \meta{height} above the line and \meta{depth} below, for a total
+% vertical length of \meta{height}+\meta{depth}. Default values of
+% \meta{height} \& \meta{depth} = actual height and depth of box in new
+% position.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \changes{v0.1e}{1994/03/02}{Remove need for drv file}
+% \changes{v0.1e}{1994/03/02}{Add 2ekernel module}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{Unify format with other Kernel files}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
+% {Superfluous braces removed from several commands}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
+% {stuff from ltpatch done}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/11/09}
+% {more colour changes\ldots}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/07}{Use \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \changes{v1.0w}{1995/10/16}{Clarify makebox description}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{boxes,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makebox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {modified}
+% |\makebox| User level command just looks for optional |[| or |(|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makebox{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \@ifnextchar(%)
+ \@makepicbox
+ {\@ifnextchar[\@makebox\mbox}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {extra group}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
+% {\cs{long} added}
+% The basic horizontal box command for \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\mbox#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makebox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {default changed from x to c}
+% Look for a possible second optional argument (defaults to |c|).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makebox[#1]{%
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@imakebox[#1]}{\@imakebox[#1][c]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@begin@tempboxa}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macro added}
+% \changes{v0.1b}{1993/12/08}
+% {Extra braces for color support
+% (braces removed from other macros)}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
+% {Use new \cs{color@setgroup} concept.}
+% Helper macro for supporting |\height|, |\width| etc. Grab |#1| into
+% |\@tempboxa| and measure it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@begin@tempboxa#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox\@tempboxa#1{\color@begingroup#2\color@endgroup}%
+ \def\width{\wd\@tempboxa}%
+ \def\height{\ht\@tempboxa}%
+ \def\depth{\dp\@tempboxa}%
+ \let\totalheight\@ovri
+ \totalheight\height
+ \advance\totalheight\depth}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@end@tempboxa}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macro added}
+% End the group started by |\@begin@tempboxa|, so that the scope of
+% |\height| only includes the `length' argument to the user-command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@end@tempboxa\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bm@c}
+% \begin{macro}{\bm@l}
+% \begin{macro}{\bm@r}
+% \begin{macro}{\bm@s}
+% \begin{macro}{\bm@t}
+% \begin{macro}{\bm@b}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macros added}
+% Set up spacing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bm@c{\hss\unhbox\@tempboxa\hss}
+\def\bm@l{\unhbox\@tempboxa\hss}\let\bm@t\bm@l
+\def\bm@r{\hss\unhbox\@tempboxa}\let\bm@b\bm@r
+\def\bm@s{\unhbox\@tempboxa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@imakebox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macro modified}
+% Internal form of |\makebox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@imakebox[#1][#2]#3{%
+ \@begin@tempboxa\hbox{#3}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{#1}% support calc
+ \hb@xt@\@tempdima{\csname bm@#2\endcsname}%
+ \@end@tempboxa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makepicbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macro modified}
+% Picture mode form of |\makebox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makepicbox(#1,#2){%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@imakepicbox(#1,#2)}{\@imakepicbox(#1,#2)[]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@imakepicbox}
+% picture mode version
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@imakepicbox(#1,#2)[#3]#4{%
+ \vbox to#2\unitlength
+ {\let\mb@b\vss \let\mb@l\hss\let\mb@r\hss
+ \let\mb@t\vss
+ \@tfor\reserved@a :=#3\do{%
+ \if s\reserved@a
+ \let\mb@l\relax\let\mb@r\relax
+ \else
+ \expandafter\let\csname mb@\reserved@a\endcsname\relax
+ \fi}%
+ \mb@t
+ \hb@xt@ #1\unitlength{\mb@l #4\mb@r}%
+ \mb@b
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This kern ensures that a |b| option aligns on the bottom of the
+% text rather than the baseline. this is the documented behaviour in
+% the \LaTeX Book. The kern is removed in compatibility mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \kern\z@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@color}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macro added}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {color support}
+% This macro is initialy a no-op, but the colour package will redefine
+% it to insert a |\special|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\set@color\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\color@begingroup}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
+% {macro added for colour support}
+% \begin{macro}{\color@endgroup}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
+% {macro added for colour support}
+% \begin{macro}{\color@setgroup}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
+% {macro added for colour support}
+% \begin{macro}{\normalcolor}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/12}
+% {macro added for colour support}
+% \begin{macro}{\color@hbox}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/05}
+% {macro added for colour support}
+% \begin{macro}{\color@vbox}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1994/11/18}
+% {macro added for colour support}
+% \begin{macro}{\color@endbox}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/05}
+% {macro added for colour support}
+% These macros are initialy a no-op, but the colour package will
+% redefine them to be |\begingroup|, |\endgroup|,
+% |\begingroup\set@color|,\\ |\hbox\bgroup\color@begingroup|,
+% |\color@endgroup\egroup|.
+% and \meta{set to main document colour} respectively.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\color@begingroup\relax
+\let\color@endgroup\relax
+\let\color@setgroup\relax
+\let\normalcolor\relax
+\let\color@hbox\relax
+\let\color@vbox\relax
+\let\color@endbox\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newsavebox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {Pass the whole of arg 1 to \cs{@ifdefinable}}
+% Allocate a new `savebox'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newsavebox#1{\@ifdefinable{#1}{\newbox#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\savebox}
+% Save |#1| in a box register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savebox#1{%
+ \@ifnextchar(%)
+ {\@savepicbox#1}{\@ifnextchar[{\@savebox#1}{\sbox#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {extra group}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {color support}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
+% {Use \cs{color@setgroup}}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
+% {\cs{long} added}
+% Save |#1| in a box register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\sbox#1#2{\setbox#1\hbox{%
+ \color@setgroup#2\color@endgroup}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@savebox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {default c not x}
+% Look for second optional argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@savebox#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@isavebox#1[#2]}{\@isavebox#1[#2][c]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@isavebox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {extra group}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {color support}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
+% {Use \cs{color@setgroup}}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/15}
+% {Added missing precent character.}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1995/07/20}
+% {Use \cs{sbox}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@isavebox#1[#2][#3]#4{%
+ \sbox#1{\@imakebox[#2][#3]{#4}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@savepicbox}
+% Picture mode version of |\savebox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@savepicbox#1(#2,#3){%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@isavepicbox#1(#2,#3)}{\@isavepicbox#1(#2,#3)[]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@isavepicbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {extra group}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
+% {Use \cs{color@setgroup}}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/10/25}
+% {missing percent (moved from ltpatch)}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1995/07/20}
+% {Use \cs{sbox}}
+% Picture mode version of |\savebox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@isavepicbox#1(#2,#3)[#4]#5{%
+ \sbox#1{\@imakepicbox(#2,#3)[#4]{#5}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lrbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macro added}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {color support}
+% \changes{v0.1b}{1993/12/08}
+% {move \cs{@endpefalse} out of the inner group}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/14}
+% {Use \cs{color@setgroup}}
+% |lrbox|: the new environment form of |\sbox|. Use |\aftergroup| tricks
+% to enable a \emph{local} assignment to be made to the box, in a way
+% that it still has an effect \emph{outside} the |lrbox| environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lrbox#1{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \endgroup
+ \setbox#1\hbox{%
+ \begingroup\aftergroup}%
+ \def\noexpand\@currenvir{\@currenvir}%
+ \def\noexpand\@currenvline{\on@line}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \@endpefalse
+ \color@setgroup
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endlrbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macro added}
+% End the |lrbox| environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endlrbox{\unskip\color@endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usebox}
+% unchanged
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\usebox#1{\leavevmode\copy #1\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frame}
+%
+% The following definition of |\frame| was written by Pavel Curtis
+% (Extra space removed 14 Jan 88)
+% RmS 92/08/24: Replaced occurence of |\@halfwidth| by |\@wholewidth|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frame#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox{%
+ \hskip-\@wholewidth
+ \vbox{%
+ \vskip-\@wholewidth
+ \hrule \@height\@wholewidth
+ \hbox{%
+ \vrule\@width\@wholewidth
+ #1%
+ \vrule\@width\@wholewidth}%
+ \hrule\@height\@wholewidth
+ \vskip-\@wholewidth}%
+ \hskip-\@wholewidth}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxsep}
+% user level parameters,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\fboxrule
+\newdimen\fboxsep
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fbox}
+% Abbreviated framed box command.
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {extra group}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/12}
+% {New definition, merged with \cs{framebox}}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/06/01}
+% {New version, using \cs{@frameb@x}}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
+% {\cs{long} added}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/10/24}
+% {Inner braces added (to fix latex/1061)}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/04/27}
+% {Move \cs{leavevmode} for graphics/1512}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\fbox#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \kern\fboxsep{#1}\kern\fboxsep
+ \color@endgroup}%
+ \@frameb@x\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\framebox}
+% Framed version of |\makebox|.
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/12}
+% {Merged \cs{fbox} and \cs{framebox}}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/06/01}
+% {New version, so \cs{width} is correct in \cs{framebox}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\framebox{%
+ \@ifnextchar(%)
+ \@framepicbox{\@ifnextchar[\@framebox\fbox}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@framebox}
+% Deal with optional arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@framebox[#1]{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@iframebox[#1]}%
+ {\@iframebox[#1][c]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iframebox}
+% The handling the optional arguments.
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/06/01}
+% {New version, so \cs{width} is correct in \cs{framebox}}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
+% {\cs{leavevmode} moved to \cs{@frameb@x}}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/04/27}
+% {Move \cs{leavevmode} for graphics/1512}
+% In order to set the whole box, including the frame to the
+% specified dimension, we first determine that dimension
+% from the natural size of the text, |#3|.
+% calculated width.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@iframebox[#1][#2]#3{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \@begin@tempboxa\hbox{#3}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{#1}%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hb@xt@\@tempdima
+ {\kern\fboxsep\csname bm@#2\endcsname\kern\fboxsep}%
+ \@frameb@x{\kern-\fboxrule}%
+ \@end@tempboxa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@frameb@x}
+% Common part of |\framebox| and |\fbox|. |#1| is a negative kern
+% in the |\framebox| case so that the vertical rules do not add to the
+% width of the box.
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/06/01}
+% {Macro added.}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
+% {\cs{leavevmode} added}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/04/27}
+% {Move \cs{leavevmode} for graphics/1512}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@frameb@x#1{%
+ \@tempdima\fboxrule
+ \advance\@tempdima\fboxsep
+ \advance\@tempdima\dp\@tempboxa
+ \hbox{%
+ \lower\@tempdima\hbox{%
+ \vbox{%
+ \hrule\@height\fboxrule
+ \hbox{%
+ \vrule\@width\fboxrule
+ #1%
+ \vbox{%
+ \vskip\fboxsep
+ \box\@tempboxa
+ \vskip\fboxsep}%
+ #1%
+ \vrule\@width\fboxrule}%
+ \hrule\@height\fboxrule}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@framepicbox}
+% Picture mode version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@framepicbox(#1,#2){%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@iframepicbox(#1,#2)}{\@iframepicbox(#1,#2)[]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iframepicbox}
+% Picture mode version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@iframepicbox(#1,#2)[#3]#4{%
+ \frame{\@imakepicbox(#1,#2)[#3]{#4}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {Redefined to support extra optional arguments}
+% \changes{v0.1d}{1993/12/15}
+% {Changed default from `c' to `s'}
+% The main vertical-box command for \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\parbox{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ \@iparbox
+ {\@iiiparbox c\relax[s]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iparbox}
+% \changes{v0.1d}{1993/12/15}
+% {Changed default from `c' to `s'}
+% Optional argument handling.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@iparbox[#1]{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@iiparbox{#1}}%
+ {\@iiiparbox{#1}\relax[s]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iiparbox}
+% Optional argument handling.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@iiparbox#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@iiiparbox{#1}{#2}}%
+ {\@iiiparbox{#1}{#2}[#1]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iiiparbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\@parboxto}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
+% {Macro added to remove misuse of \cs{@empty}}
+% \changes{v0.1b}{1993/12/08}
+% {\cs{endgraf} added due to extra group in \cs{@begin@tempboxa}}
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1996/06/10}
+% {(DPC) Changed \cs{endgraf} to \cs{@@par}}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1999/04/27}
+% {(CAR) Changed \cs{@empty} to \cs{relax} as flag for natural
+% width: pr/2975}
+% The internal version of |\parbox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@parboxto\@empty
+\long\def\@iiiparbox#1#2[#3]#4#5{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \@pboxswfalse
+ \setlength\@tempdima{#4}%
+ \@begin@tempboxa\vbox{\hsize\@tempdima\@parboxrestore#5\@@par}%
+ \ifx\relax#2\else
+ \setlength\@tempdimb{#2}%
+ \def\@parboxto{to\@tempdimb}%
+ \fi
+ \if#1b\vbox
+ \else\if #1t\vtop
+ \else\ifmmode\vcenter
+ \else\@pboxswtrue $\vcenter
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ \@parboxto{\let\hss\vss\let\unhbox\unvbox
+ \csname bm@#3\endcsname}%
+ \if@pboxsw \m@th$\fi
+ \@end@tempboxa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/04/12}
+% {Remove \cs{@acci}, now defined in ltplain.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/04/12}
+% {Remove \cs{@dischyph}, now defined in ltinit.dtx}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayparboxrestore}
+% Restore various paragraph parameters.
+%
+% The rational for allowing two normally global flags to be set
+% locally here was stated originally by
+% Donald Arsenau and extended by Chris Rowley.
+% It is because these flags are only set globally to
+% true by section commands, and these should never appear within
+% boxes or, indeed, in any group; and they are only ever
+% set globally to false when they are definitely true.
+%
+% If anyone is unhappy with this argument then both flags should be
+% treated as in |\set@nobreak|; otherwise this command will be
+% redundant.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1996/10/24}{Added local settings of flags: dangerous!!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayparboxrestore{%
+ \let\if@nobreak\iffalse
+ \let\if@noskipsec\iffalse
+ \let\par\@@par
+ \let\-\@dischyph
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Redefined accents to allow changes in font encoding
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/13}
+% {New accent system, use \cs{let} not \cs{def}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\'\@acci\let\`\@accii\let\=\@acciii
+ \parindent\z@ \parskip\z@skip
+ \everypar{}%
+ \linewidth\hsize
+ \@totalleftmargin\z@
+ \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \@rightskip\z@skip
+ \parfillskip\@flushglue \lineskip\normallineskip
+ \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip
+ \sloppy}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parboxrestore}
+% Restore various paragraph parameters, and also |\\|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@parboxrestore{\@arrayparboxrestore\let\\\@normalcr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minipage}
+% Switch that is true at the start of a minipage.
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1996/07/26}{put \cs{global} into definition}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@minipagefalse{\global\let\if@minipage\iffalse}
+\def\@minipagetrue {\global\let\if@minipage\iftrue}
+\@minipagefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minipage}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {Redefined to support extra optional arguments}
+% \changes{v0.1d}{1993/12/15}
+% {extra space removed.}
+% \changes{v0.1d}{1993/12/15}
+% {Changed default from `c' to `s'}
+% Essentially an environment form of |\parbox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minipage{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ \@iminipage
+ {\@iiiminipage c\relax[s]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iminipage}
+% \changes{v0.1d}{1993/12/15}
+% {Changed default from `c' to `s'}
+% Optional argument handling.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@iminipage[#1]{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@iiminipage{#1}}%
+ {\@iiiminipage{#1}\relax[s]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iiminipage}
+% Optional argument handling.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@iiminipage#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@iiiminipage{#1}{#2}}%
+ {\@iiiminipage{#1}{#2}[#1]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iiiminipage}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/21}
+% {Extra \cs{bgroup} for colour}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
+% {Use new \cs{color@setgroup} concept.}
+% Internal form of |minipage|.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1996/10/24}{Use it or lose it (@setminpage): Frank
+% will want to lose it}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@iiiminipage#1#2[#3]#4{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \@pboxswfalse
+ \setlength\@tempdima{#4}%
+ \def\@mpargs{{#1}{#2}[#3]{#4}}%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
+ \color@begingroup
+ \hsize\@tempdima
+ \textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c@mpfootnote\z@
+ \let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
+ \let\@listdepth\@mplistdepth \@mplistdepth\z@
+ \@minipagerestore
+ \@setminipage}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
+% Hook so that other styles can reset other commands in a minipage.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@minipagerestore=\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endminipage}
+% \changes{LaTeX209}{1992/08/14}
+% {(RmS) replaced \cs{vskip}-\cs{lastskip} by \cs{unskip}
+% (proposed by FMi)}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/21}
+% {Extra \cs{egroup} for colour}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
+% {Use new \cs{color@setgroup} concept.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/05}
+% {Colour resetting for footnotes moved to here: as for main
+% page.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endminipage{%
+ \par
+ \unskip
+ \ifvoid\@mpfootins\else
+ \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+ \normalcolor
+ \footnoterule
+ \unvbox\@mpfootins
+ \fi
+ \@minipagefalse %% added 24 May 89
+ \color@endgroup
+ \egroup
+ \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mplistdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootins}
+% Versions of |\@listdepth| and |\footins| local to minipage.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@mplistdepth
+\newinsert\@mpfootins
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
+% Minipage version of |\@footnotetext|.
+%
+% Final |\strut| added 27 Mar 89, on suggestion by Don Hosek
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/09/29}{(RmS) added \cs{reset@font}}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/11/26}{(RmS) added protection for \cs{edef}}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{Extra group for colour}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/21}
+% {Extra \cs{endgraf} for colour}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
+% {Use new \cs{color@setgroup} concept.}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/11}
+% {Use new \cs{normalcolor} and \cs{@finalstrut}.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/11/04}
+% {Added \cs{protected@edef}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/05}
+% {Colour resetting for footnotes moved to endminipage: as for main
+% page.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/11/05}
+% {Colour groups restored here.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
+ \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+ \unvbox\@mpfootins
+ \reset@font\footnotesize
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+ {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \@makefntext{%
+ \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+ \color@endgroup}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@pboxsw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rule}
+% Draw a rule of the specified size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rule{\@ifnextchar[\@rule{\@rule[\z@]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@rule}
+% Internal form of |\rule|.
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1998/06/04}{Support calc-expressions}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@rule[#1]#2#3{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox{%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{#1}%
+ \setlength\@tempdimb{#2}%
+ \setlength\@tempdimc{#3}%
+ \advance\@tempdimc\@tempdima
+ \vrule\@width\@tempdimb\@height\@tempdimc\@depth-\@tempdima}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@underline}
+% Saved primitive |\underline|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@underline\underline
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\underline}
+% \LaTeX\ version works outside math.
+% \task{???}{why the second `relax in `underline ?}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\underline#1{%
+ \relax
+ \ifmmode\@@underline{#1}%
+ \else $\@@underline{\hbox{#1}}\m@th$\relax\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\raisebox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {redefined to support \cs{height}}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/04/27}
+% {Move \cs{leavevmode} for graphics/1512}
+% Raise a box, and change its vertical dimensions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\raisebox#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@rsbox{#1}}{\@irsbox{#1}[]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@rsbox}
+% Optional argument handling.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@rsbox#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@iirsbox{#1}[#2]}{\@irsbox{#1}[#2]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@argrsbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {macro removed}
+% ...
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@irsbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {redefined to support \cs{height}}
+% \changes{v0.1b}{1993/12/08}
+% {fix typo}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1993/12/09}
+% {fix another typo}
+% \changes{v0.1f}{1994/03/03}
+% {Replaced a missing \cs{else}}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/04/27}
+% {Move \cs{leavevmode} for graphics/1512}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1995/05/17}
+% {Removed surplus braces}
+% Internal version of |\raisebox| (less than two optional args).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@irsbox#1[#2]#3{%
+ \@begin@tempboxa\hbox{#3}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{#1}%
+ \ifx\\#2\\\else\setlength\@tempdimb{#2}\fi
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\raise\@tempdima\box\@tempboxa}%
+ \ifx\\#2\\\else\ht\@tempboxa\@tempdimb\fi
+ \box\@tempboxa
+ \@end@tempboxa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iirsbox}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/12/03}
+% {redefined to support \cs{height}}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/04/27}
+% {Move \cs{leavevmode} for graphics/1512}
+% Internal version of |\raisebox| (two optional args).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@iirsbox#1[#2][#3]#4{%
+ \@begin@tempboxa\hbox{#4}%
+ \setlength\@tempdima{#1}%
+ \setlength\@tempdimb{#2}%
+ \setlength\dimen@{#3}%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\raise\@tempdima\box\@tempboxa}%
+ \ht\@tempboxa\@tempdimb
+ \dp\@tempboxa\dimen@
+ \box\@tempboxa
+ \@end@tempboxa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@finalstrut}
+% This macro adds a special strut the \emph{depth} of the box given as
+% |#1|, and height and width 0pt. It is used for ensuring that the
+% last line of a paragraph has the correct depth in `p' columns of
+% tables and in footnotes. In vertical mode nothing is done, as adding
+% the strut (as done in 2.09) would start a new paragraph. It would be
+% possible to inspect |\prevdepth| to check the depth of the
+% just-completed paragraph, but we do not do that here.
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/12}
+% {macro added}
+% Actually we do even less now, skip the vmode test as it broke tabular
+% `p' columns.
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/11/09}
+% {Revert \cs{finalstrut} to 2.09 equivalent (from ltpatch)}.
+% \changes{v1.0x}{1995/10/31}
+% {Add \cs{nobreak} in horiz mode to allow hyphenation.
+% internal/1931}
+%
+% The |\nobreak| was added (1995/10/31) to allow hyphenation of the
+% final word of the paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@finalstrut#1{%
+ \unskip\ifhmode\nobreak\fi\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth\dp#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Some low-level constructs}
+%
+% The following commands are basically inherited from plain \TeX.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftline}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightline}
+% \begin{macro}{\centerline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@line}
+% These macros place text on a full line either centred or left or
+% right adjusted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@line{\hb@xt@\hsize}
+\def\leftline#1{\@@line{#1\hss}}
+\def\rightline#1{\@@line{\hss#1}}
+\def\centerline#1{\@@line{\hss#1\hss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rlap}
+% \begin{macro}{\llap}
+% These macros place text to the left or right of the current
+% reference point without taking up space.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rlap#1{\hb@xt@\z@{#1\hss}}
+\def\llap#1{\hb@xt@\z@{\hss#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6b4c5a20626
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltclass.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1694 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltclass.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltclass.dtx}
+ [2004/01/28 v1.1g LaTeX Kernel (Class & Package Interface)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltclass.dtx}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The main structure of documents}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach\and Chris Rowley\and Alan Jeffrey\and
+ David Carlisle}
+\date{\filedate}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+% (C) Copyright Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley,
+% Alan Jeffrey and David Carlisle 1993-1998.
+% All rights reserved.
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1194}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/22}{Use new warning and error commands}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/11/17}{\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1998/03/21}{Added to documentation of filecontents}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file implements the following declarations, which replace
+% |\documentstyle| in \LaTeXe\ documents.
+%
+% Note that old documents containing |\documentstyle| will be run using
+% a compatibility option---thus keeping everyone happy, we hope!
+%
+% The overall idea is that there are two types of `style files':
+% `class files' which define elements and provide a default formatting
+% for them; and `packages' which provide extra functionality. One
+% difference between \LaTeXe\ and \LaTeX2.09 is that \LaTeXe\ packages
+% may have options. Note that options to classes packages may be
+% implemented such that they input files, but these file names are not
+% necessarily directly related to the option name.
+%
+% \section{User interface}
+%
+% |\documentclass[|\meta{main-option-list}|]{|^^A
+% \meta{class}|}[|\meta{version}|]|
+%
+% There must be exactly one such declaration, and it must come first.
+% The \meta{main-option-list} is a list of options which can modify the
+% formatting of elements which are defined in the \meta{class} file
+% as well as in all following |\usepackage| declarations (see below).
+% The \meta{version} is a version number, beginning with a date in the
+% format |YYYY/MM/DD|. If an older version of the class is found, a
+% warning is issued.
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% |\documentstyle[|\meta{main-option-list}|]{|^^A
+% \meta{class}|}[|\meta{version}|]|
+%
+% The |\documentstyle| declaration is kept in order to maintain upward
+% compatibility with \LaTeX2.09 documents. It is similar to
+% |\documentclass|, but it causes all options in
+% \meta{main-option-list} that the \meta{class} does not use to be
+% passed to |\RequirePackage| after the options have been processed.
+% This maintains compatibility with the 2.09 behaviour. Also a flag is
+% set to indicate that the document is to be processed in \LaTeX2.09
+% compatibility mode. As far as most packages are concerned, this
+% only affects the warnings and errors \LaTeX\ generates. This flag
+% does affect the definition of font commands, and |\sloppy|.
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% |\usepackage[|\meta{package-option-list}|]{|^^A
+% \meta{package-list}|}[|\meta{version}|]|
+%
+% There can be any number of these declarations. All packages in
+% \meta{package-list} are called with the same options.
+%
+% Each \meta{package} file defines new elements (or modifies those
+% defined in the \meta{class}), and thus extends the range of documents
+% which can be processed.
+% The \meta{package-option-list} is a list of options which can modify
+% the formatting of elements defined in the \meta{package} file.
+% The \meta{version} is a version number, beginning with a date in the
+% format |YYYY/MM/DD|. If an older version of the package is found, a
+% warning is issued.
+%
+% Each package is loaded only once. If the same package is requested
+% more than once, nothing happens, unless the package has been requested
+% with options that were not given the first time it was loaded, in
+% which case an error is produced.
+%
+% As well as processing the options given in the
+% \meta{package-option-list}, each package processes the
+% \meta{main-option-list}. This means that options that affect all
+% of the packages can be given globally, rather than repeated for every
+% package.
+%
+% Note that class files have the extension |.cls|, packages have the
+% extension |.sty|.
+%
+% \DescribeEnv{filecontents}
+% The environment |filecontents| is intended for passing the contents
+% of packages, options, or other files along with a document in a
+% single file.
+% It has one argument, which is the name of the file to create. If that
+% file already exists (maybe only in the current directory if the OS
+% supports a notion of a `current directory' or `default directory')
+% then nothing happens
+% (except for an information message) and the body of the environment
+% is bypassed. Otherwise, the body of the environment is written
+% verbatim to the file name given as the first argument, together with
+% some comments about how it was produced.
+%
+% The environment is allowed only before |\documentclass| to ensure
+% that all packages or options necessary for this particular run are
+% present when needed. The begin and end tags should each be on a
+% line by itself. There is also a star-form; this does not write
+% extra comments into the file.
+%
+% \subsection{Option processing}
+%
+% When the options are processed, they are divided into two types: {\em
+% local\/} and {\em global}:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item For a class, the options in the |\documentclass| command are
+% local.
+%
+% \item For a package, the options in the |\usepackage| command are
+% local, and the options in the |\documentclass| command are global.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+% The options for |\documentclass| and |\usepackage|
+% are processed in the following way:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+%
+% \item The local and global options that have been declared
+% (using |\DeclareOption| as described below) are processed
+% first.
+%
+% In the case of |\ProcessOptions|, they are processed in the order
+% that they were declared in the class or package.
+%
+% In the case of |\ProcessOptions*|, they are processed in the order
+% that they appear in the option-lists. First the global options, and
+% then the local ones.
+%
+% \item Any remaining local options are dealt with using the default
+% option (declared using the |\DeclareOption*| declaration described
+% below). For document classes, this usually does nothing, but
+% records the option on a list of unused options.
+% For packages, this usually produces an error.
+%
+% \end{enumerate}
+% Finally, when |\begin{document}| is reached, if there are any global
+% options which have not been used by either the class or any package,
+% the system will produce a warning.
+%
+%
+% \section{Class and Package interface}
+%
+% \subsection{Class name and version}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\ProvidesClass
+% A class can identify itself with the
+% |\ProvidesClass{|\meta{name}|}[|\meta{version}|]| command. The
+% \meta{version} should begin with a date in the format |YYYY/MM/DD|.
+%
+% \subsection{Package name and version}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\ProvidesPackage
+% A package can identify itself with the
+% |\ProvidesPackage|\marg{name}\oarg{version} command. The
+% \meta{version} should begin with a date in the format |YYYY/MM/DD|.
+%
+% \subsection{Requiring other packages}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\RequirePackage
+% Packages or classes can load other packages using\\
+% |\RequirePackage|\oarg{options}\marg{name}\oarg{version}.\\
+% If the package has already been loaded, then nothing happens unless
+% the requested options are not a subset of the options with which it
+% was loaded, in which case an error is called.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\LoadClass
+% Similar to |\RequirePackage|, but for classes, may not be used in
+% package files.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\PassOptionsToPackage
+% Packages can pass options to other packages using:\\
+% |\PassOptionsToPackage{|\meta{options}|}{|\meta{package}|}|.\\
+% \DescribeMacro\PassOptionsToClass
+% This adds the \meta{options} to the options list of any future
+% |\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage| command. For example:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \PassOptionsToPackage{foo,bar}{fred}
+% \RequirePackage[baz]{fred}\end{verbatim}
+% is the same as:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \RequirePackage[foo,bar,baz]{fred}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\LoadClassWithOptions
+% |\LoadClassWithOptions|\marg{name}\oarg{version}:\\
+% This is similar to
+% |\LoadClass|, but it always calls class \meta{name} with
+% exactly the same option list that is being used by the current class,
+% rather than an option explicitly supplied or passed on by
+% |\PassOptionsToClass|.
+% \DescribeMacro\RequirePackageWithOptions
+% |\RequirePackageWithOptions| is the analogous command for packages.
+%
+% This is mainly intended to allow one class to simply build on another,
+% for example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% This should be contrasted with the slightly different construction
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+% \ProcessOptions
+% \LoadClass{article}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% As used here, the effects are more or less the same, but the
+% version using |\LoadClassWithOptions| is slightly quicker
+% (and less to type).
+% If, however, the class declares options of its own then
+% the two constructions are different; compare, for example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareOption{landscape}{...}
+% \ProcessOptions
+% \LoadClassWithOptions{article}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% with:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareOption{landscape}{...}
+% \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+% \ProcessOptions
+% \LoadClass{article}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% In the first case, the \textsf{article} class will be called with
+% option |landscape| precisely when the current class is called with
+% this option; but in the second example it will
+% not as in that case \textsf{article} is only passed options by the
+% default option handler, which is not used for |landscape| as that
+% option is explicitly declared.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\@ifpackageloaded
+% To find out if a package has already been loaded, use\\
+% \DescribeMacro\@ifclassloaded
+% |\@ifpackageloaded{|\meta{package}|}{|\meta{true}|}{|\meta{false}|}|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\@ifpackagelater
+% To find out if a package has already been loaded with a version more
+% recent than \meta{version}, use
+% \DescribeMacro\@ifclasslater
+% |\@ifpackagelater{|\meta{package}|}{|\meta{version}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{true}|}{|\meta{false}|}|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\@ifpackagewith
+% To find out if a package has already been loaded with at least the
+% options \meta{options}, use
+% \DescribeMacro\@ifclasswith
+% |\@ifpackagewith{|\meta{package}|}{|\meta{options}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{true}|}{|\meta{false}|}|.
+%
+% There exists one package that can't be tested with the above
+% commands: the \texttt{fontenc} package pretends that it was never
+% loaded to allow for repeated reloading with different options (see
+% \texttt{ltoutenc.dtx} for details).
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Declaring new options}
+%
+% Options for classes and packages are built using the same macros.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\DeclareOption To define a builtin option, use
+% |\DeclareOption{|\meta{name}|}{|\meta{code}|}|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareOption*} To define the default action to
+% perform for local options which have not been declared, use
+% |\DeclareOption*{|\meta{code}|}|.
+%
+% {\em Note\/}: there should be no use of\\
+% |\RequirePackage|, |\DeclareOption|, |\DeclareOption*| or
+% |\ProcessOptions|\\
+% inside |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|.
+%
+% Possible uses for |\DeclareOption*| include:
+%
+% |\DeclareOption*{}|\\
+% Do nothing. Silently accept unknown options. (This suppresses the
+% usual warnings.)
+%
+% |\DeclareOption*{\@unkownoptionerror}|\\
+% Complain about unknown local options. (The initial setting for
+% package files.)
+%
+% |\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}|^^A
+% |{|\meta{pkg-name}|}|\\
+% Handle the the current option by passing it on to the package
+% \meta{pkg-name}, which will presumably be loaded via
+% |\RequirePackage| later in the file. This is useful for building
+% `extension' packages, that perhaps handle a couple of new options,
+% but then pass everything else on to an existing package.
+%
+% |\DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{xx-\CurrentOption.yyy}%|\\
+% | {}%|\\
+% | {\OptionNotUsed}}|\\
+% Handle the option foo by loading the file |xx-foo.yyy| if it
+% exists, otherwise do nothing, but declare that the option was not
+% used.
+% Actually the |\OptionNotUsed| declaration is only needed if this is
+% being used in class files, but does no harm in package files.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Safe Input Macros}
+% \DescribeMacro{\InputIfFileExists}
+% |\InputIfFileExists{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{then}|}{|\meta{else}|}|\\
+% Inputs \meta{file} if it exists. Immediately before the input,
+% \meta{then} is executed. Otherwise \meta{else} is executed.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\IfFileExists}
+% As above, but does not input the file.
+%
+% One thing you might like to put in the \meta{else} clause is
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@missingfileerror}
+% This starts an interactive request for a filename, supplying default
+% extensions. Just hitting return causes the whole input to be skipped
+% and entering |x| quits the current run,
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\input}
+% This has been redefined from the \LaTeX2.09 definition, in terms of
+% the new commands |\InputIfFileExists| and |\@missingfileerror|.
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\listfiles} Giving this declaration in the preamble
+% causes a list of all files input via the `safe input' commands to be
+% listed at the end. Any strings specified in the optional argument to
+% |\ProvidesPackage| are listed alongside the file name. So files in
+% standard (and other non-standard) distributions can put informative
+% strings in this argument.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v0.2g}{1993/11/23}
+% {Various macros now moved to latex.tex.}
+% \changes{v0.2g}{1993/11/23}
+% {Warnings and errors now directly coded.}
+% \changes{v0.2h}{1993/11/28}
+% {Primitive filenames now terminated by space not \cs{relax}.}
+% \changes{v0.2h}{1993/11/28}
+% {Directory syntax checing moved to dircheck.dtx}
+% \changes{v0.2h}{1993/11/28}
+% {Assorted commands now in the kernel removed.}
+% \changes{v0.2i}{1993/12/03}
+% {\cs{@onlypreamble}: Many commands declared.}
+% \changes{v0.2i}{1993/12/03}
+% {Removed obsolete \cs{@documentclass}}
+% \changes{v0.2o}{1993/12/13}
+% {Removed setting \cs{errorcontextlines}\ (now in latex.tex)}
+% \changes{v0.2p}{1993/12/15}
+% {Removed extra `.'s from \cs{@@warning}s}
+% \changes{v0.2s}{1994/01/17}
+% {Added many more \cs{@onlypreamble} commands}
+% \changes{v0.2s}{1994/01/17}
+% {Wrapped long lines to column 72}
+% \changes{v0.3a}{1994/03/02}
+% {Remove need for driver file}
+% \changes{v0.3b}{1994/03/08}
+% {Modify driver code into `new style'}
+% \changes{v0.3c}{1994/03/12}
+% {Change name from docclass to ltclass}
+% \changes{v0.3h}{1994/04/25}
+% {Removed spurious extra `.'s at the end of error messages}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/04/29}
+% {Change version number to 1 (no other change)}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/11/03}
+% {Move \cs{@missingfileerror} to ltfiles}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@compatibility}
+% The flag for compatibilty mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@compatibility
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@documentclasshook}
+% The hook called after the first |\documentclass| command. By
+% default this checks to see if |\@normalsize| is undefined, and if
+% so, sets it to |\normalsize|.
+% \changes{v0.2q}{1993/12/17}
+% {Macro added}
+% \changes{v0.2z}{1994/02/10}
+% {Changed the name from \cs{@compatibility} to
+% \cs{@documentclasshook}, and added the check for whether
+% \cs{@normalsize} has been defined. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@documentclasshook{%
+ \ifx\@normalsize\@undefined
+ \let\@normalsize\normalsize
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@declaredoptions}
+% This list is automatically built by |\DeclareOption|.
+% It is the list of options (separated by commas) declared in
+% the class or package file and it defines the order in which the
+% the corresponding |\ds@|\meta{option} commands are executed.
+% All local \meta{option}s which are not declared will be processed
+% in the order defined by the optional argument of |\documentclass|
+% or |\usepackage|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@declaredoptions\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classoptionslist}
+% List of options of the main class.
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1996/07/26}{made only preamble}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@classoptionslist\relax
+\@onlypreamble\@classoptionslist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@unusedoptionlist}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1996/07/26}{made only preamble}
+% List of options of the main class that haven't been declared or
+% loaded as class option files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@unusedoptionlist\@empty
+\@onlypreamble\@unusedoptionlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CurrentOption}
+% Name of current package or option.
+% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
+% {Name changed from \cs{@curroption}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\CurrentOption\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@currname}
+% Name of current package or option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@currname\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@currext}
+% The current file extension.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}{Name changed from \cs{@currextension}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\global\let\@currext=\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@clsextension}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pkgextension}
+% The two possible values of |\@currext|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@clsextension{cls}
+\def\@pkgextension{sty}
+\@onlypreamble\@clsextension
+\@onlypreamble\@pkgextension
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pushfilename}
+% \begin{macro}{\@popfilename}
+% \begin{macro}{\@currnamestack}
+% Commands to push and pop the file name and extension. \\
+% |#1| current name. \\
+% |#2| current extension. \\
+% |#3| current catcode of |@|. \\
+% |#4| Rest of the stack.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pushfilename{%
+ \xdef\@currnamestack{%
+ {\@currname}%
+ {\@currext}%
+ {\the\catcode`\@}%
+ \@currnamestack}}
+\@onlypreamble\@pushfilename
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@popfilename{\expandafter\@p@pfilename\@currnamestack\@nil}
+\@onlypreamble\@popfilename
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@p@pfilename#1#2#3#4\@nil{%
+ \gdef\@currname{#1}%
+ \gdef\@currext{#2}%
+ \catcode`\@#3\relax
+ \gdef\@currnamestack{#4}}
+\@onlypreamble\@p@pfilename
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@currnamestack{}
+\@onlypreamble\@currnamestack
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ptionlist}
+% Returns the option list of the file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ptionlist#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{opt@#1}\@empty{\csname opt@#1\endcsname}}
+\@onlypreamble\@ptionlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% |\@ifpackageloaded{|\meta{name}|}|
+% Checks to see whether a file has been loaded.
+% \changes{v0.2t}{1994/01/18}
+% {Fix typo \cs{@pkgetension}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifpackageloaded{\@ifl@aded\@pkgextension}
+\def\@ifclassloaded{\@ifl@aded\@clsextension}
+\@onlypreamble\@ifpackageloaded
+\@onlypreamble\@ifclassloaded
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifl@aded#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@#2.#1\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\@ifl@aded
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagelater}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclasslater}
+% |\@ifpackagelater{|\meta{name}|}{YYYY/MM/DD}|
+% Checks that the package loaded is more recent than the given date.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifpackagelater{\@ifl@ter\@pkgextension}
+\def\@ifclasslater{\@ifl@ter\@clsextension}
+\@onlypreamble\@ifpackagelater
+\@onlypreamble\@ifclasslater
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifl@ter#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\@ifl@t@r
+ \csname ver@#2.#1\endcsname}
+\@onlypreamble\@ifl@ter
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This internal macro is also used in |\NeedsTeXFormat|.
+% \changes{v0.2f}{1993/11/22}
+% {Added //00 so parsing never produces a runaway argument.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifl@t@r#1#2{%
+ \ifnum\expandafter\@parse@version#1//00\@nil<%
+ \expandafter\@parse@version#2//00\@nil
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\@ifl@t@r
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@parse@version#1/#2/#3#4#5\@nil{#1#2#3#4 }
+\@onlypreamble\@parse@version
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclasswith}
+% |\@ifpackagewith{|\meta{name}|}{|\meta{option-list}|}|
+% Checks that \meta{option-list} is a subset of the options
+% \textbf{with} which \meta{name} was loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifpackagewith{\@if@ptions\@pkgextension}
+\def\@ifclasswith{\@if@ptions\@clsextension}
+\@onlypreamble\@ifpackagewith
+\@onlypreamble\@ifclasswith
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@if@ptions#1#2{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\@if@pti@ns{\@ptionlist{#2.#1}}}
+\@onlypreamble\@if@ptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Probably shouldnt use |\CurrentOption| here\ldots (changed to
+% |\reserved@b|.)
+% \changes{v0.2y}{1994/02/07}
+% {Add extra ,s so `two' is not matched with `twocolumn'}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@if@pti@ns#1#2{%
+ \let\reserved@a\@firstoftwo
+ \@for\reserved@b:=#2\do{%
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter{\expandafter,\reserved@b,}{,#1,}%
+ \ifin@\else\let\reserved@a\@secondoftwo\fi}%
+ \reserved@a}
+\@onlypreamble\@if@pti@ns
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage}
+% Checks that the current filename is correct, and defines
+% |\ver@filename|.
+% \changes{v0.3c}{1994/03/12}
+% {Add \cs{wlog}}
+% \changes{v0.3c}{1994/03/12}
+% {use \cs{@gtempa}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ProvidesPackage#1{%
+ \xdef\@gtempa{#1}%
+ \ifx\@gtempa\@currname\else
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{You have requested
+ \@cls@pkg\space`\@currname',\MessageBreak
+ but the \@cls@pkg\space provides `#1'}%
+ \fi
+ \@ifnextchar[\@pr@videpackage{\@pr@videpackage[]}}%]
+\@onlypreamble\ProvidesPackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pr@videpackage[#1]{%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname{#1}%
+ \ifx\@currext\@clsextension
+ \typeout{Document Class: \@gtempa\space#1}%
+ \else
+ \wlog{Package: \@gtempa\space#1}%
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\@pr@videpackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesClass}
+% Like |\ProvidesPackage|, but for classes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ProvidesClass\ProvidesPackage
+\@onlypreamble\ProvidesClass
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesFile}
+% Like |\ProvidesPackage|, but for arbitrary files. Do not apply
+% |\@onlypreamble| to these, as we may want to label files input
+% during the document.
+% \changes{v0.2l}{1993/12/07}
+% {Macro added}
+% \changes{v0.3c}{1994/03/12}
+% {Add \cs{wlog}}
+% \changes{v0.3g}{1994/04/11}
+% {Protect against weird catcodes.}
+% \begin{macro}{\@providesfile}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/10/17}
+% {Delay definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} till ltfinal}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1998/03/21}
+% {Allow \&. Internal/2702}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{2001/05/25}{Explicitly set catcode of
+% \cs{endlinechar} to 10 (pr/3334)}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{2001/06/04}{But only if it is a char (pr/3334)}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{2001/08/26}{Readded setting of space char (pr/3353)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ProvidesFile#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\ 10 %
+ \ifnum \endlinechar<256 %
+ \ifnum \endlinechar>\m@ne
+ \catcode\endlinechar 10 %
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \@makeother\/%
+ \@makeother\&%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2004/01/28}{Use kernel version of
+% \cs{@ifnextchar} (pr/3501)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \kernel@ifnextchar[{\@providesfile{#1}}{\@providesfile{#1}[]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% During initex a special version of |\@providesfile| is used.
+% The real definition is installed right at the end, in |ltfinal.dtx|.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@providesfile#1[#2]{%
+% \wlog{File: #1 #2}%
+% \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1\endcsname{#2}%
+% \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PassOptionsToPackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\PassOptionsToClass}
+% If the package has been loaded, we check that it was first loaded with
+% the options. Otherwise we add the option list to that of the package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pass@ptions#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname opt@#3.#1\endcsname{%
+ \@ifundefined{opt@#3.#1}\@empty
+ {\csname opt@#3.#1\endcsname,}%
+ \zap@space#2 \@empty}}
+\@onlypreamble\@pass@ptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PassOptionsToPackage{\@pass@ptions\@pkgextension}
+\def\PassOptionsToClass{\@pass@ptions\@clsextension}
+\@onlypreamble\PassOptionsToPackage
+\@onlypreamble\PassOptionsToClass
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption*}
+% Adds an option as a |\ds@| command, or the default |\default@ds|
+% command.
+% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
+% {Error checking added}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1995/04/21}
+% {Made long /1498}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1995/05/12}
+% {Use \cs{toks@} to remove need to double hash /1557}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareOption{%
+ \let\@fileswith@pti@ns\@badrequireerror
+ \@ifstar\@defdefault@ds\@declareoption}
+\long\def\@declareoption#1#2{%
+ \xdef\@declaredoptions{\@declaredoptions,#1}%
+ \toks@{#2}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname ds@#1\endcsname{\the\toks@}}
+\long\def\@defdefault@ds#1{%
+ \toks@{#1}%
+ \edef\default@ds{\the\toks@}}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareOption
+\@onlypreamble\@declareoption
+\@onlypreamble\@defdefault@ds
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\OptionNotUsed}
+% If we are in a class file, add |\CurrentOption| to the list of
+% unused options. Otherwise, in a package file do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\OptionNotUsed{%
+ \ifx\@currext\@clsextension
+ \xdef\@unusedoptionlist{%
+ \ifx\@unusedoptionlist\@empty\else\@unusedoptionlist,\fi
+ \CurrentOption}%
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\OptionNotUsed
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\default@ds}
+% The default default option code.
+% Set by |\@onefilewithoptions| to either |\OptionNotUsed| for
+% classes, or |\@unknownoptionerror| for packages. This may be reset
+% in either case with |\DeclareOption*|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \let\default@ds\OptionNotUsed
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions*}
+% |\ProcessOptions| calls |\ds@option| for each known package option,
+% then calls |\default@ds| for each option on the local options list.
+% Finally resets all the declared options to |\relax|. The empty option
+% does nothing, this has to be reset on the off chance it's set to
+% |\relax| if an empty element gets into the |\@declaredoptions| list.
+%
+% The star form is similar but executes options given in the order
+% specified in the document, not the order they are declared in the
+% file. In the case of packages, global options are executed before
+% local ones.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}
+% {Stop adding the global option list inside class files.}
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}
+% {Optimise `empty option' code.}
+% \changes{v0.2b}{1993/11/15}
+% {Star form added.}
+% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
+% {restoring \cs{@fileswith@pti@ns} added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ProcessOptions{%
+ \let\ds@\@empty
+ \edef\@curroptions{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \@ifstar\@xprocess@ptions\@process@ptions}
+\@onlypreamble\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v0.2y}{1994/02/07}
+% {Add extra ,s so `two' is not matched with `twocolumn'}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@process@ptions{%
+ \@for\CurrentOption:=\@declaredoptions\do{%
+ \ifx\CurrentOption\@empty\else
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\CurrentOption,}{%
+ ,\ifx\@currext\@clsextension\else\@classoptionslist,\fi
+ \@curroptions,}%
+ \ifin@
+ \@use@ption
+ \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
+ \fi
+ \fi}%
+ \@process@pti@ns}
+\@onlypreamble\@process@ptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v0.2y}{1994/02/07}
+% {Add extra ,s so `two' is not matched with `twocolumn'}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xprocess@ptions{%
+ \ifx\@currext\@clsextension\else
+ \@for\CurrentOption:=\@classoptionslist\do{%
+ \ifx\CurrentOption\@empty\else
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\CurrentOption,}{,\@declaredoptions,}%
+ \ifin@
+ \@use@ption
+ \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
+ \fi
+ \fi}%
+ \fi
+ \@process@pti@ns}
+\@onlypreamble\@xprocess@ptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The common part of |\ProcessOptions| and |\ProcessOptions*|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@process@pti@ns{%
+ \@for\CurrentOption:=\@curroptions\do{%
+ \@ifundefined{ds@\CurrentOption}%
+ {\@use@ption
+ \default@ds}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There should not be any non-empty definition of |\CurrentOption| at
+% this point, as all the declared options were executed earlier. This is
+% for compatibility with 2.09 styles which use |\def\ds@|\ldots\
+% directly, and so have options which do not appear in
+% |\@declaredoptions|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@use@ption}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Clear all the definitions for option code. First set all the declared
+% options to |\relax|, then reset the `default' and `empty' options. and
+% the lst of declared options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\CurrentOption:=\@declaredoptions\do{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\relax}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/10/17}
+% {Reset \cs{CurrentOption} for graphics/1873}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\CurrentOption\@empty
+ \let\@fileswith@pti@ns\@@fileswith@pti@ns
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\let\@unprocessedoptions\relax}}
+\@onlypreamble\@process@pti@ns
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@options}
+% |\@options| is a synonym for |\ProcessOptions*| for upward
+% compatibility with \LaTeX2.09 style files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@options{\ProcessOptions*}
+\@onlypreamble\@options
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@use@ption}
+% Execute the code for the current option.
+% \changes{v0.2g}{1993/11/23}
+% {Name changed from \cs{@executeoption}}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/05/17}
+% {Execute option after removing from list, not before}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@use@ption{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\@removeelement\CurrentOption
+ \@unusedoptionlist\@unusedoptionlist
+ \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname}
+\@onlypreamble\@use@ption
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ExecuteOptions}
+% |\ExecuteOptions{|\meta{option-list}|}| executes the code declared
+% for each option.
+% \changes{v0.2d}{1993/11/18}
+% {Use \cs{CurrentOption} not \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v0.2k}{1993/12/06}
+% {Preserve \cs{CurrentOption}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ExecuteOptions#1{%
+ \def\reserved@a##1\@nil{%
+ \@for\CurrentOption:=#1\do{\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname}%
+ \edef\CurrentOption{##1}}%
+ \expandafter\reserved@a\CurrentOption\@nil}
+\@onlypreamble\ExecuteOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The top-level commands, which just set some parameters then call
+% the internal command, |\@fileswithoptions|.
+% \begin{macro}{\documentclass}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1995/06/19}
+% {Dont redefine \cs{usepackage} in compat mode for /1634}
+% The main new-style class declaration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\documentclass{%
+ \let\documentclass\@twoclasseserror
+ \if@compatibility\else\let\usepackage\RequirePackage\fi
+ \@fileswithoptions\@clsextension}
+\@onlypreamble\documentclass
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\documentstyle}
+% 2.09 style class `style' declaration.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}
+% {Added \cs{RequirePackage} \cs{@unusedoptionlist} stuff.}
+% \changes{v0.2b}{1993/11/15}
+% {Modified to match \cs{ProcessOption*}}
+% \changes{v0.2d}{1993/11/18}
+% {Modified \cs{RequirePackage} stuff.}
+% \changes{v0.2n}{1993/12/09}
+% {input 209 compatibility file.}
+% \changes{v0.2o}{1993/12/13}
+% {compatibility file now latex209.sty.}
+% \changes{v0.2q}{1993/12/17}
+% {Match Alan's new code.}
+% \changes{v0.2u}{1994/01/21}
+% {compatibility file now latex209.def.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\documentstyle{%
+ \makeatletter\input{latex209.def}\makeatother
+ \documentclass}
+\@onlypreamble\documentstyle
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
+% Load package if not already loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\RequirePackage{%
+ \@fileswithoptions\@pkgextension}
+\@onlypreamble\RequirePackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LoadClass}
+% Load class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LoadClass{%
+ \ifx\@currext\@pkgextension
+ \@latex@error
+ {\noexpand\LoadClass in package file}%
+ {You may only use \noexpand\LoadClass in a class file.}%
+ \fi
+ \@fileswithoptions\@clsextension}
+\@onlypreamble\LoadClass
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@loadwithoptions}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/11/14}{macro added}
+% Pass the current option list on to a class or package.
+% |#1| is |\@|\emph{cls-or-pkg}|extension|,
+% |#2| is |\RequirePackage| or |\LoadClass|,
+% |#3| is the class or package to be loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@loadwithoptions#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname opt@#3.#1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname opt@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname
+ #2{#3}}
+\@onlypreamble\@loadwithoptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LoadClassWithOptions}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/11/14}{macro added}
+% Load class `|#1|' with the current option list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LoadClassWithOptions{%
+ \@loadwithoptions\@clsextension\LoadClass}
+\@onlypreamble\LoadClassWithOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackageWithOptions}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/11/14}{macro added}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1996/10/04}{Reset \cs{@unprocessedoptions} for /2269}
+% Load package `|#1|' with the current option list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\RequirePackageWithOptions{%
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\let\@unprocessedoptions\relax}%
+ \@loadwithoptions\@pkgextension\RequirePackage}
+\@onlypreamble\RequirePackageWithOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usepackage}
+% To begin with, |\usepackage| produces an error. This is reset by
+% |\documentclass|.
+% \changes{v0.2o}{1993/12/13}
+% {Fixed error handling}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/23}{Remove argument if possible}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\usepackage#1#{%
+ \@latex@error
+ {\noexpand \usepackage before \string\documentclass}%
+ {\noexpand \usepackage may only appear in the document
+ preamble, i.e.,\MessageBreak
+ between \noexpand\documentclass and
+ \string\begin{document}.}%
+ \@gobble}
+\@onlypreamble\usepackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat}
+% Check that the document is running on the correct system.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}
+% {made more robust for alternative syntax for other formats.}
+% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
+% {Name changed from \cs{NeedsFormat}}
+% \changes{v0.2d}{1993/11/18}
+% {\cs{fmtname} \cs{fmtversion} not \cs{@}\ldots}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\NeedsTeXFormat#1{%
+ \def\reserved@a{#1}%
+ \ifx\reserved@a\fmtname
+ \expandafter\@needsformat
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{This file needs format `\reserved@a'%
+ \MessageBreak but this is `\fmtname'}{%
+ The current input file will not be processed
+ further,\MessageBreak
+ because it was written for some other flavor of
+ TeX.\MessageBreak\@ehd}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the file is not meant to be processed by \LaTeXe{} we stop
+% inputting it, but we do not end the run. We just end inputting
+% the current file.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/23}
+% {Don't stop completely when format is wrong}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endinput \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\NeedsTeXFormat
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@needsformat{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ \@needsf@rmat
+ {}}
+\@onlypreamble\@needsformat
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/05/04}
+% {Changed wording of the warning}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@needsf@rmat[#1]{%
+ \@ifl@t@r\fmtversion{#1}{}%
+ {\@latex@warning@no@line
+ {You have requested release `#1' of LaTeX,\MessageBreak
+ but only release `\fmtversion' is available}}}
+\@onlypreamble\@needsf@rmat
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\zap@space}
+% |\zap@space foo|\meta{space}|\@empty| removes all spaces from |foo|
+% that are not protected by |{ }| groups.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\zap@space#1 #2{%
+ #1%
+ \ifx#2\@empty\else\expandafter\zap@space\fi
+ #2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fileswithoptions}
+% The common part of |\documentclass| and |\usepackage|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fileswithoptions#1{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@fileswith@ptions#1}%
+ {\@fileswith@ptions#1[]}}
+\@onlypreamble\@fileswithoptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v0.2f}{1993/11/22}
+% {Made the default [] not [\cs{@unknownversion}]}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fileswith@ptions#1[#2]#3{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@fileswith@pti@ns#1[#2]#3}%
+ {\@fileswith@pti@ns#1[#2]#3[]}}
+\@onlypreamble\@fileswith@ptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we do some work.
+%
+% First of all, we define the global variables.
+% Then we look to see if the file has already been loaded.
+% If it has, we check that it was first loaded with at least the current
+% options.
+% If it has not, we add the current options to the package options,
+% set the default version to be |0000/00/00|, and load the file if we
+% can find it.
+% Then we check the version number.
+%
+% Finally, we restore the old file name, reset the default option,
+% and we set the catcode of |@|.
+%
+% For classes, we can immediately process the file. For other types,
+% |#2| could be a comma separated list, so loop through, processing
+% each one separately.
+% \changes{v0.2q}{1993/12/17}
+% {Add \cs{@compatibility} hook}
+% \changes{v0.2s}{1994/01/17}
+% {Modify to reduce parameter stack usage}
+% \changes{v0.2y}{1994/02/07}
+% {Run \cs{@compatibility} on the first class to start
+% (not the first to finish) }
+% \changes{v0.2z}{1994/02/10}
+% {Renamed \cs{@compatibility} to \cs{@documentclasshook}.
+% ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fileswith@pti@ns#1[#2]#3[#4]{%
+ \ifx#1\@clsextension
+ \ifx\@classoptionslist\relax
+ \xdef\@classoptionslist{\zap@space#2 \@empty}%
+ \def\reserved@a{%
+ \@onefilewithoptions#3[#2][#4]#1%
+ \@documentclasshook}%
+ \else
+ \def\reserved@a{%
+ \@onefilewithoptions#3[#2][#4]#1}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% build up a list of calls to |\@onefilewithoptions|
+% (one for each package) without thrashing the parameter stack.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@b##1,{%
+ \ifx\@nil##1\relax\else
+ \ifx\relax##1\relax\else
+ \noexpand\@onefilewithoptions##1[#2][#4]\noexpand\@pkgextension
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\reserved@b
+ \fi}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{\zap@space#3 \@empty}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{\expandafter\reserved@b\reserved@a,\@nil,}%
+ \fi
+ \reserved@a}
+\@onlypreamble\@fileswith@pti@ns
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Have the main argument as |#1|, so we only need one |\expandafter|
+% above.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}
+% {Moved reseting of \cs{default@ds}, \cs{ds@} and
+% \cs{@declaredoptions} here, from the end of
+% \cs{ProcessOptions}.}
+% \changes{v0.2f}{1993/11/22}
+% {Made the initial version [] not [\cs{@unknownversion}]}
+% \changes{v0.2m}{1993/12/07}
+% {Reset \cs{CurrentOption}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@onefilewithoptions#1[#2][#3]#4{%
+ \@pushfilename
+ \xdef\@currname{#1}%
+ \global\let\@currext#4%
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@currname.\@currext-h@@k\endcsname\@empty
+ \let\CurrentOption\@empty
+ \@reset@ptions
+ \makeatletter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Grab everything in a macro, so the parameter stack is popped before
+% any processing begins.
+% \changes{v0.2s}{1994/01/17}
+% {Modify to reduce parameter stack usage}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1998/05/07}
+% {Modify help message for latex/2805}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@a{%
+ \@ifl@aded\@currext{#1}%
+ {\@if@ptions\@currext{#1}{#2}{}%
+ {\@latex@error
+ {Option clash for \@cls@pkg\space #1}%
+ {The package #1 has already been loaded
+ with options:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space[\@ptionlist{#1.\@currext}]\MessageBreak
+ There has now been an attempt to load it
+ with options\MessageBreak
+ \space\space[#2]\MessageBreak
+ Adding the global options:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space
+ \@ptionlist{#1.\@currext},#2\MessageBreak
+ to your \noexpand\documentclass declaration may fix this.%
+ \MessageBreak
+ Try typing \space <return> \space to proceed.}}}%
+ {\@pass@ptions\@currext{#2}{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.3c}{1994/03/12}
+% {Do not use \cs{@pr@videpackage} to avoid typeout}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\expandafter
+ \let\csname ver@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname\@empty
+ \InputIfFileExists
+ {\@currname.\@currext}%
+ {}%
+ {\@missingfileerror\@currname\@currext}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\@unprocessedoptions| will generate an error for each specified
+% option in a package unless a |\ProcessOptions| has appeared in the
+% package file.
+% \changes{v0.2v}{1994/01/29}
+% {All options raise error if no \cs{ProcessOptions} appears}
+% \changes{v0.2x}{1994/02/02}
+% {Only run the hook and options check if the file was loaded.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@unprocessedoptions\@@unprocessedoptions
+ \csname\@currname.\@currext-h@@k\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname\@currname.\@currext-h@@k\endcsname
+ \@undefined
+ \@unprocessedoptions}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifl@ter\@currext{#1}{#3}{}%
+ {\@latex@warning@no@line
+ {You have requested,\on@line,
+ version\MessageBreak
+ `#3' of \@cls@pkg\space #1,\MessageBreak
+ but only version\MessageBreak
+ `\csname ver@#1.\@currext\endcsname'\MessageBreak
+ is available}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
+% {Added trap for two \cs{LoadClass} commands.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@currext\@clsextension\let\LoadClass\@twoloadclasserror\fi
+ \@popfilename
+ \@reset@ptions}%
+ \reserved@a}
+\@onlypreamble\@onefilewithoptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@fileswith@pti@ns}
+% Save the definition (for error checking).
+% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
+% {Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@fileswith@pti@ns\@fileswith@pti@ns
+\@onlypreamble\@@fileswith@pti@ns
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@reset@ptions}
+% Reset the default option, and clear lists of declared options.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}{macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@reset@ptions{%
+ \global\ifx\@currext\@clsextension
+ \let\default@ds\OptionNotUsed
+ \else
+ \let\default@ds\@unknownoptionerror
+ \fi
+ \global\let\ds@\@empty
+ \global\let\@declaredoptions\@empty}
+\@onlypreamble\@reset@ptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Hooks}
+%
+% Allow code do be saved to be executed at specific later times.
+%
+% Save things in macros, I considered using toks registers, (and
+% |\addto@hook| from the NFSS code, that would require stacking the
+% contents in the case of required packages, so just generate a new
+% macro for each package.
+% \begin{macro}{\@begindocumenthook}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/10/20}
+% {Make setting conditional, for autoload version}
+% \begin{macro}{\@enddocumenthook}
+% Stuff to appear at the begining or end of the document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@begindocumenthook\@undefined
+ \let\@begindocumenthook\@empty
+\fi
+\let\@enddocumenthook\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\g@addto@macro}
+% Globally add to the end of a macro.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}{Made global}
+% \changes{v0.2w}{1994/01/31}
+% {Use toks register to avoid `hash' problems}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1995/05/17}
+% {Make long for latex/1522}
+% \changes{v1.0w}{1996/12/17}
+% {Use \cs{begingroup} to save making a mathord}
+% \changes{v1.0x}{1997/02/05}
+% {missing percent /2402}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\g@addto@macro#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \toks@\expandafter{#1#2}%
+ \xdef#1{\the\toks@}%
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndOfPackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndOfClass}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% The access functions.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/11/14}
+% {Included extension in the generated macro name for package
+% and class hooks.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \expandafter\g@addto@macro\csname\@currname.\@currext-h@@k\endcsname}
+\let\AtEndOfClass\AtEndOfPackage
+\@onlypreamble\AtEndOfPackage
+\@onlypreamble\AtEndOfClass
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\AtBeginDocument{\g@addto@macro\@begindocumenthook}
+\def\AtEndDocument{\g@addto@macro\@enddocumenthook}
+\@onlypreamble\AtBeginDocument
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cls@pkg}
+% The current file type.
+% \changes{v0.2i}{1993/12/03}
+% {Name changed to avoid clash with output routine.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cls@pkg{%
+ \ifx\@currext\@clsextension
+ document class%
+ \else
+ package%
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\@cls@pkg
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@unknownoptionerror}
+% Bad option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@unknownoptionerror{%
+ \@latex@error
+ {Unknown option `\CurrentOption' for \@cls@pkg\space`\@currname'}%
+ {The option `\CurrentOption' was not declared in
+ \@cls@pkg\space`\@currname', perhaps you\MessageBreak
+ misspelled its name.
+ Try typing \space <return>
+ \space to proceed.}}
+\@onlypreamble\@unknownoptionerror
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@unprocessedoptions}
+% Declare an error for each option, unless a |\ProcessOptions| occured.
+% \changes{v0.2v}{1994/01/29}
+% {Macro added.}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/11/14}{Allow empty option}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@unprocessedoptions{%
+ \ifx\@currext\@pkgextension
+ \edef\@curroptions{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
+ \@for\CurrentOption:=\@curroptions\do{%
+ \ifx\CurrentOption\@empty\else\@unknownoptionerror\fi}%
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\@unprocessedoptions
+\@onlypreamble\@@unprocessedoptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@badrequireerror}
+% |\RequirePackage| or |\LoadClass| occurs in the options section.
+% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
+% {Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@badrequireerror#1[#2]#3[#4]{%
+ \@latex@error
+ {\noexpand\RequirePackage or \noexpand\LoadClass
+ in Options Section}%
+ {The \@cls@pkg\space `\@currname' is defective.\MessageBreak
+ It attempts to load `#3' in the options section, i.e.,\MessageBreak
+ between \noexpand\DeclareOption and \string\ProcessOptions.}}
+\@onlypreamble\@badrequireerror
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@twoloadclasserror}
+% Two |\LoadClass| in a class.
+% \changes{v0.2c}{1993/11/17}
+% {Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@twoloadclasserror{%
+ \@latex@error
+ {Two \noexpand\LoadClass commands}%
+ {You may only use one \noexpand\LoadClass in a class file}}
+\@onlypreamble\@twoloadclasserror
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@twoclasseserror}
+% Two |\documentclass| or |\documentstyle|.
+% \changes{v0.2h}{1993/11/28}
+% {Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@twoclasseserror#1#{%
+ \@latex@error
+ {Two \noexpand\documentclass or \noexpand\documentstyle commands}%
+ {The document may only declare one class.}\@gobble}
+\@onlypreamble\@twoclasseserror
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Providing shipment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\two@digits}
+% Prefix a number less than 10 with `0'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\two@digits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi\number#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\filecontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\endfilecontents}
+% This environment implements inline files.
+% The star-form does not write extra comments into the file.
+%
+% \changes{v0.2h}{1993/11/28}
+% {Don't globally allocate a write stream (always use 15)}
+% \changes{v0.2r}{1993/12/19}{Different message when ignoring a file}
+% \changes{v0.3g}{1994/04/11}
+% {Add star form,
+% dont write \cs{endinput} at the end of the file.}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/11}
+% {Add checks for form feed and tab}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1995/04/21}
+% {Close input check stream: latex/1487}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1995/05/25}{Delete \cs{filec@ntents} after preamble}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup%
+\catcode`\*=11 %
+\catcode`\^^M\active%
+\catcode`\^^L\active\let^^L\relax%
+\catcode`\^^I\active%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\filecontents{\@tempswatrue\filec@ntents}%
+\gdef\filecontents*{\@tempswafalse\filec@ntents}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\filec@ntents#1{%
+ \openin\@inputcheck#1 %
+ \ifeof\@inputcheck%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line%
+ {Writing file `\@currdir#1'}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1997/10/10}
+% {\cs{reserved@c} not \cs{verbatim@out} to save a csname}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \chardef\reserved@c15 %
+ \ch@ck7\reserved@c\write%
+ \immediate\openout\reserved@c#1\relax%
+ \else%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1997/10/10}
+% {Use \cs{@gobbletwo}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \closein\@inputcheck%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line%
+ {File `#1' already exists on the system.\MessageBreak%
+ Not generating it from this source}%
+ \let\write\@gobbletwo%
+ \let\closeout\@gobble%
+ \fi%
+ \if@tempswa%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1997/10/10}
+% {\cs{@currenvir} in banner}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \immediate\write\reserved@c{%
+ \@percentchar\@percentchar\space%
+ \expandafter\@gobble\string\LaTeX2e file `#1'^^J%
+ \@percentchar\@percentchar\space generated by the %
+ `\@currenvir' \expandafter\@gobblefour\string\newenvironment^^J%
+ \@percentchar\@percentchar\space from source `\jobname' on %
+ \number\year/\two@digits\month/\two@digits\day.^^J%
+ \@percentchar\@percentchar}%
+ \fi%
+ \let\do\@makeother\dospecials%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1997/10/10}
+% {Check for text before or after \cs{end} environment. latex/2636}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\E{\@backslashchar end\string{\@currenvir\string}}%
+ \edef\reserved@b{%
+ \def\noexpand\reserved@b%
+ ####1\E####2\E####3\relax}%
+ \reserved@b{%
+ \ifx\relax##3\relax%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There was no |\end{filecontents}|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \immediate\write\reserved@c{##1}%
+ \else%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There was a |\end{filecontents}|, so stop this time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef^^M{\noexpand\end{\@currenvir}}%
+ \ifx\relax##1\relax%
+ \else%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Text before the |\end|, write it with a warning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@latex@warning{Writing text `##1' before %
+ \string\end{\@currenvir}\MessageBreak as last line of #1}%
+ \immediate\write\reserved@c{##1}%
+ \fi%
+ \ifx\relax##2\relax%
+ \else%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Text after the |\end|, ignore it with a warning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@latex@warning{%
+ Ignoring text `##2' after \string\end{\@currenvir}}%
+ \fi%
+ \fi%
+ ^^M}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \catcode`\^^L\active%
+ \let\L\@undefined%
+ \def^^L{\@ifundefined L^^J^^J^^J}%
+ \catcode`\^^I\active%
+ \let\I\@undefined%
+ \def^^I{\@ifundefined I\space\space}%
+ \catcode`\^^M\active%
+ \edef^^M##1^^M{%
+ \noexpand\reserved@b##1\E\E\relax}}%
+\endgroup%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`|=\catcode`\%
+\catcode`\%=12
+\catcode`\*=11
+\gdef\@percentchar{%}
+\gdef\endfilecontents{|
+ \immediate\closeout\reserved@c
+ \def\T##1##2##3{|
+ \ifx##1\@undefined\else
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{##2 has been converted to Blank ##3e}|
+ \fi}|
+ \T\L{Form Feed}{Lin}|
+ \T\I{Tab}{Spac}|
+ \immediate\write\@unused{}}
+\global\let\endfilecontents*\endfilecontents
+\@onlypreamble\filecontents
+\@onlypreamble\endfilecontents
+\@onlypreamble\filecontents*
+\@onlypreamble\endfilecontents*
+\endgroup
+\@onlypreamble\filec@ntents
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v0.2f}{1993/11/22}
+% {\cs{@unknownversion} removed}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/10/18}
+% {Move \cs{listfiles} to ltfiles.dtx}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{After Preamble}
+% Finally we declare a package that allows all the commands declared
+% above to be |\@onlypreamble| to be used after |\begin{document}|.
+% \changes{v0.3f}{1994/03/16}
+% {Add pkgindoc package}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1998/03/21}
+% {Correct to new onlypreamble command list}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*afterpreamble>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{pkgindoc}
+ [1994/10/20 v1.1 Package Interface in Document (DPC)]
+\def\reserved@a#1\do\@classoptionslist#2\do\filec@ntents#3\relax{%
+ \gdef\@preamblecmds{#1#3}}
+\expandafter\reserved@a\@preamblecmds\relax
+%</afterpreamble>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..304609d4523
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcntrl.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltcntrl.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltcntrl.dtx}
+ [1995/08/16 v1.0g LaTeX Kernel (program control)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltcntrl.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{175}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/05/16}{(ASAJ) Split from ltinit.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/11/28}
+% {Documentation improvements}
+%
+% \section{Program control structure}
+%
+% This section defines a number of control structure macros, such as
+% while-loops and for-loops.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{control,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \@whilenum TEST \do {BODY}
+% \@whiledim TEST \do {BODY} : These implement the loop
+% while TEST do BODY od
+% where TEST is a TeX \ifnum or \ifdim test, respectively.
+% They are optimized for the normal case of TEST initially false.
+%
+% \@whilesw SWITCH \fi {BODY} : Implements the loop
+% while SWITCH do BODY od
+% Optimized for normal case of SWITCH initially false.
+%
+% \@for NAME := LIST \do {BODY} : Assumes that LIST expands to A1,A2,
+% ... ,An .
+% Executes BODY n times, with NAME = Ai on the i-th iteration.
+% Optimized for the normal case of n = 1. Works for n=0.
+%
+% \@tfor NAME := LIST \do {BODY}
+% if, before expansion, LIST = T1 ... Tn where each Ti is a
+% token or {...}, then executes BODY n times, with NAME = Ti
+% on the i-th iteration. Works for n=0.
+%
+% NOTES: 1. These macros use no \@temp sequences.
+% 2. These macros do not work if the body contains anything that
+% looks syntactically to TeX like an improperly balanced \if
+% \else \fi.
+%
+% \@whilenum TEST \do {BODY} ==
+% BEGIN
+% if TEST
+% then BODY
+% \@iwhilenum{TEST \relax BODY}
+% END
+%
+% \@iwhilenum {TEST BODY} ==
+% BEGIN
+% if TEST
+% then BODY
+% \@nextwhile = def(\@iwhilenum)
+% else \@nextwhile = def(\@whilenoop)
+% fi
+% \@nextwhile {TEST BODY}
+% END
+%
+% \@whilesw SWITCH \fi {BODY} ==
+% BEGIN
+% if SWITCH
+% then BODY
+% \@iwhilesw {SWITCH BODY}\fi
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@iwhilesw {SWITCH BODY} \fi ==
+% BEGIN
+% if SWITCH
+% then BODY
+% \@nextwhile = def(\@iwhilesw)
+% else \@nextwhile = def(\@whileswnoop)
+% fi
+% \@nextwhile {SWITCH BODY} \fi
+% END
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@whilenoop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@whilenum}
+% \begin{macro}{\@iwhilenum}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1995/07/09}{Reimplemented using Kabelschacht method}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Removed \cs{@whilenoop}}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Made defs long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@whilenum#1\do #2{\ifnum #1\relax #2\relax\@iwhilenum{#1\relax
+ #2\relax}\fi}
+\long\def\@iwhilenum#1{\ifnum #1\expandafter\@iwhilenum
+ \else\expandafter\@gobble\fi{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@whiledim}
+% \begin{macro}{\@iwhiledim}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1995/07/09}{Reimplemented using Kabelschacht method}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Removed \cs{@whilenoop}}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Made defs long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@whiledim#1\do #2{\ifdim #1\relax#2\@iwhiledim{#1\relax#2}\fi}
+\long\def\@iwhiledim#1{\ifdim #1\expandafter\@iwhiledim
+ \else\expandafter\@gobble\fi{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@whileswnoop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@whilesw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@iwhilesw}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1995/07/09}{Reimplemented using Kabelschacht method}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Removed \cs{@whileswnoop}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@whilesw#1\fi#2{#1#2\@iwhilesw{#1#2}\fi\fi}
+\long\def\@iwhilesw#1\fi{#1\expandafter\@iwhilesw
+ \else\@gobbletwo\fi{#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% \@for NAME := LIST \do {BODY} ==
+% BEGIN \@forloop expand(LIST),\@nil,\@nil \@@ NAME {BODY} END
+%
+% \@forloop CAR, CARCDR, CDRCDR \@@ NAME {BODY} ==
+% BEGIN
+% NAME = CAR
+% if def(NAME) = def(\@nnil)
+% else BODY;
+% NAME = CARCDR
+% if def(NAME) = def(\@nnil)
+% else BODY
+% \@iforloop CDRCDR \@@ NAME \do {BODY}
+% fi
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@iforloop CAR, CDR \@@ NAME {BODY} =
+% NAME = CAR
+% if def(NAME) = def(\@nnil)
+% then \@nextwhile = def(\@fornoop)
+% else BODY ;
+% \@nextwhile = def(\@iforloop)
+% fi
+% \@nextwhile name cdr {body}
+%
+% \@tfor NAME := LIST \do {BODY}
+% = \@tforloop LIST \@nil \@@ NAME {BODY}
+%
+% \@tforloop car cdr \@@ name {body} =
+% name = car
+% if def(name) = def(\@nnil)
+% then \@nextwhile == \@fornoop
+% else body ;
+% \@nextwhile == \@forloop
+% fi
+% \@nextwhile name cdr {body}
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nnil}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nnil{\@nil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@empty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@empty{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fornoop}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Made defs long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fornoop#1\@@#2#3{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@for}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1995/04/24}
+% {Dont expand second argument with \cs{edef}: /1317 (DPC)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@for#1:=#2\do#3{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}%
+ \ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else
+ \expandafter\@forloop#2,\@nil,\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@forloop}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Made defs long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@forloop#1,#2,#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else
+ #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforloop #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iforloop}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1995/07/09}{Reimplemented using Kabelschacht method}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Made defs long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@iforloop#1,#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
+ \expandafter\@fornoop \else
+ #4\relax\expandafter\@iforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tfor}
+% \changes{LaTeX209}{1991/10/17}
+% {(Rms) \cs{xdef} replaced by \cs{def}
+% (See FMi's array.doc)}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/13}
+% {(DPC) Add \cs{@tf@r} so a single group is
+% correctly treated.}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1995/07/09}{Reimplemented using Kabelschacht method}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Made defs long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tfor#1:={\@tf@r#1 }
+\long\def\@tf@r#1#2\do#3{\def\@fortmp{#2}\ifx\@fortmp\space\else
+ \@tforloop#2\@nil\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}
+\long\def\@tforloop#1#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
+ \expandafter\@fornoop \else
+ #4\relax\expandafter\@tforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@break@tfor}
+% Break out of a |\@tfor| loop. This should be called \emph{inside}
+% the scope of an |\if|. See |\@iffileonpath| for an example.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/05/02}{Macro added (from ltfiles.dtx)}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/08/16}{Made long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@break@tfor#1\@@#2#3{\fi\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@removeelement}
+% Removes an element from a comma-separated list and puts it into
+% a control sequence, called as
+% |\@removeelement{|\meta{element}|}{|\meta{list}|}{|\meta{cs}|}|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@removeelement#1#2#3{%
+ \def\reserved@a##1,#1,##2\reserved@a{##1,##2\reserved@b}%
+ \def\reserved@b##1,\reserved@b##2\reserved@b{%
+ \ifx,##1\@empty\else##1\fi}%
+ \edef#3{%
+ \expandafter\reserved@b\reserved@a,#2,\reserved@b,#1,\reserved@a}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1995/04/29}{Removed unused defs for
+% \cs{@setprotect} and \cs{@resetprotect}}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1995/04/29}{Moved init of \cs{protect}
+% to ltdefns.dtx}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..23acbc10dee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltcounts.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,434 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltcounts.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltcounts.dtx}
+ [1998/05/16 v1.1g LaTeX Kernel (Counters)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltcounts.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{256}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/29}
+% {Create file from parts of ltmiscen and ltherest.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/19}{Extracted file from ltcntlen.}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1996/04/23}{Documentation improvements}
+%
+% \section{Counters and Lengths}
+% Commands for defining and using counters. This file defines:
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\newcounter}
+% To define a new counter.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\setcounter}
+% To set the value of counters.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\addtocounter}
+% Increase the counter |#1| by the number |#2|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\stepcounter}
+% Increase a counter by one.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\refstepcounter}
+% Increase a counter by one, also setting the value used by |\label|.
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\value}
+% For accessing the value of the counter as a \TeX\ number (as opposed
+% to |\the|\meta{counter} which expands to the \emph{printed}
+% representation of \meta{counter})
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\arabic
+% |\arabic|\marg{counter}: 1, 2, 3, \ldots
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\roman
+% |\roman|\marg{counter}: i, ii, iii, \ldots
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\Roman
+% |\Roman|\marg{counter}: I, II, III, \ldots
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\alph
+% |\alph|\marg{counter}: a, b, c, \ldots
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\Alph
+% |\Alph|\marg{counter}: A, B, C, \ldots
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\fnsymbol
+% |\fnsymbol|\marg{counter}: $*$, $\dagger$, $\ddagger$, \ldots
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Environment Counter Macros}
+%
+% An environment foo has an associated counter defined by the
+% following control sequences:
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{lp{.75\textwidth}}
+% |\c@foo| & Contains the counter's numerical value.
+% It is defined by |\newcount\foocounter|.\\
+% |\thefoo| & Macro that expands to the printed value of |\foocounter|.
+% For example, if sections are numbered within chapters,
+% and section headings look like
+%
+% Section II-3. The Nature of Counters
+%
+% then |\thesection| might be defined by:\newline
+% |\def\thesection|\newline\hspace*{2em}
+% |{\@Roman{\c@chapter}-\@arabic{\c@section}}|\\
+%
+% |\p@foo| & Macro that expands to a printed `reference prefix' of
+% counter foo. Any |\ref| to a value created by counter
+% foo will produce the expansion of |\p@foo\thefoo| when
+% the |\label| command is executed. See file \texttt{ltxref.dtx}
+% for an extension of this mechanism.\\
+% |\cl@foo| & List of counters to be reset when foo stepped.
+% Has format
+% |\@elt{countera}\@elt{counterb}\@elt{counterc}|.
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% \textbf{NOTE:}\\
+% |\thefoo| and |\p@foo| \emph{must} be defined in such a way that
+% |\edef\bar{\thefoo}| or |\edef\bar{\p@foo}|
+% defines |\bar| so that it will evaluate to the counter value at the
+% time of the |\edef|, even after |\foocounter| and any other counters
+% have been changed. This will happen if you use the standard commands
+% |\@arabic|, |\@Roman|, etc.
+%
+%
+% The following commands are used to define and modify counters.
+%
+% |\refstepcounter|\marg{foo}\\
+% Same as |\stepcounter|, but it also defines
+% |\@currentreference| so that a subsequent
+% |\label|\marg{bar} command causes |\ref|\marg{bar} to
+% generate the current value of counter \meta{foo}.
+%
+% |\@definecounter|\marg{foo}\\
+% Initializes counter \marg{foo} (with empty reset list), defines
+% |\p@foo| and |\thefoo| to be null. Also adds \meta{foo}
+% to |\cl@@ckpt| --
+% the reset list of a dummy counter |@ckpt| used for taking
+% checkpoints for the |\include| system.
+%
+% |\@addtoreset|\marg{foo}\marg{bar} :
+% Adds counter \meta{foo} to the list of counters
+% |\cl@bar| to be reset when counter \meta{bar} is stepped.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/09}
+% {\cs{@nocnterr} now has counter name argument}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/17}
+% {Use \cs{@nocounterr} instead of \cs{@nocnterr}}
+% |\setcounter|\marg{foo}\marg{val} :
+% Globally sets |\foocounter| equal to \meta{val}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setcounter#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#1}%
+ {\@nocounterr{#1}}%
+ {\global\csname c@#1\endcsname#2\relax}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/09}
+% {\cs{@nocnterr} now has counter name argument}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/17}
+% {Use \cs{@nocounterr} instead of \cs{@nocnterr}}
+% |\addtocounter|\marg{foo}\marg{val}
+% Globally increments |\foocounter| by \meta{val}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addtocounter#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#1}%
+ {\@nocounterr{#1}}%
+ {\global\advance\csname c@#1\endcsname #2\relax}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% |\newcounter|\marg{newctr}\oarg{oldctr}
+% Defines \meta{newctr} to be a counter, which is reset when counter
+% \meta{oldctr} is stepped. If \meta{newctr} already defined
+% produces
+% `|c@newctr already defined|' error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newcounter#1{%
+ \expandafter\@ifdefinable \csname c@#1\endcsname
+ {\@definecounter{#1}}%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@newctr{#1}}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\value}
+% |\value|\marg{ctr}
+% produces the value of counter \meta{ctr}, for use with
+% a |\setcounter| or |\addtocounter| command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\value#1{\csname c@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@newctr}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/09}
+% {\cs{@nocnterr} now has counter name argument}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/17}
+% {Use \cs{@nocounterr} instead of \cs{@nocnterr}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@newctr#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\@nocounterr{#2}}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \changes{LaTeX209}{1992/11/23}{Replaced \{\} in \cs{stepcounter} by
+% \cs{begingroup} \cs{endgroup} to avoid adding an empty ord in
+% math mode}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/09}
+% {Use \cs{addtocounter} to have name checked}
+% |\stepcounter|{foo}
+% Globally increments counter |\c@FOO|
+% and resets all subsidiary counters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stepcounter#1{%
+ \addtocounter{#1}\@ne
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@elt\@stpelt
+ \csname cl@#1\endcsname
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@stpelt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@stpelt#1{\global\csname c@#1\endcsname \z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cl@@ckpt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cl@@ckpt{\@elt{page}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@definecounter}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/05/20}{Streamlined code}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1995/05/20}{And do it right}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@definecounter#1{\expandafter\newcount\csname c@#1\endcsname
+ \setcounter{#1}\z@
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname cl@#1\endcsname\@empty
+ \@addtoreset{#1}{@ckpt}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname p@#1\endcsname\@empty
+ \expandafter
+ \gdef\csname the#1\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter
+ {\expandafter\@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtoreset}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtoreset#1#2{\expandafter\@cons\csname cl@#2\endcsname {{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Numbering commands for definitions of |\theCOUNTER| and |\list|
+% arguments.
+%
+% All commands can now be used in text and math mode.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% Representation of\meta{counter} as arabic numerals.
+% Changed 29 Apr 86 to make it print the obvious thing
+% it COUNTER not positive.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\arabic#1{\expandafter\@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\roman}
+% Representation of \meta{counter} as lower-case
+% Roman numerals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\roman#1{\expandafter\@roman\csname c@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
+% Representation of \meta{counter} as upper-case
+% Roman numerals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Roman#1{\expandafter\@Roman\csname c@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alph}
+% Representation of \meta{counter} as a lower-case
+% letter: 1 = a, 2 = b, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\alph#1{\expandafter\@alph\csname c@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Alph}
+% Representation of \meta{counter} as an upper-case
+% letter: 1 = A, 2 = B, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Alph#1{\expandafter\@Alph\csname c@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fnsymbol}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/05/20}{Streamlined code}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1997/03/21}
+% {Use \cs{mathsection} and \cs{mathparagraph}. latex/2445}
+%
+% Representation of \meta{COUNTER} as a footnote
+% symbol: 1 = $*$, 2 = $\dagger$, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fnsymbol#1{\expandafter\@fnsymbol\csname c@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/13}{Removed \cs{@ialph}}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/13}{Removed \cs{@Ialph}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arabic}
+% |\@arabic\FOOcounter|
+% Representation of |\FOOcounter| as arabic numerals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arabic#1{\number #1} %% changed 29 Apr 86
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@roman}
+% |\@roman\FOOcounter|
+% Representation of |\FOOcounter| as lower-case
+% Roman numerals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@roman#1{\romannumeral #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@Roman}
+% |\@Roman\FOOcounter|
+% Representation of |\FOOcounter| as upper-case
+% Roman numerals.
+
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1997/10/06}{Change \cs{@Roman} to be fully
+% expandable, so that the result is written properly to files.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Roman#1{\expandafter\@slowromancap\romannumeral #1@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@slowromancap}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1997/10/06}{Macro added.}
+% Fully expandable macro to change a roman number to uppercase.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@slowromancap#1{\ifx @#1% then terminate
+ \else
+ \if i#1I\else\if v#1V\else\if x#1X\else\if l#1L\else\if
+ c#1C\else\if d#1D\else \if m#1M\else#1\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \expandafter\@slowromancap
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@alph}
+% |\@alph\FOOcounter|
+% Representation of |\FOOcounter| as a lower-case
+% letter: 1 = a, 2 = b, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@alph#1{%
+ \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
+ k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or
+ y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@Alph}
+% |\@Alph\FOOcounter|
+% Representation of |\FOOcounter| as an upper-case
+% letter: 1 = A, 2 = B, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Alph#1{%
+ \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or
+ K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or
+ Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/05/20}{Allowing both text and math}
+% Typesetting old fashioned footnote symbols.
+% This can be done both in text or math mode now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
+ \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger
+ \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f3ef0b05149
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdefns.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1455 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltdefns.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltdefns.dtx}
+ [2004/02/20 v1.3g LaTeX Kernel (definition commands)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltdefns.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{746}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/05/10}{(ASAJ) Added
+% \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/05/12}{(ASAJ) Fixed a bug with \cs{relax}
+% which was
+% using \cs{@gobble} before defining it.}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/05/13}{(ASAJ) Renamed
+% \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand} to
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}. Removed \cs{@if@short@command}.}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/05/13}{(ASAJ) Replaces \cs{space} by `~' in
+% \cs{csname}.}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1994/05/13}{(ASAJ) Added logging message to
+% \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1994/05/13}{(ASAJ) Added \cs{@backslashchar}.}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1994/05/13}{(ASAJ) Coded \cs{@ifdefinable} more
+% efficiently.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/16}{(ASAJ) Split from ltinit.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/17}{(ASAJ) Removed warnings and logging to
+% lterror.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/17}{(ASAJ) Added definitions for protect.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/05/17}{(ASAJ) Redid definitions for protect.}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/05/19}{(RmS) Added definitions for
+% \cs{@namedef} and \cs{@nameuse} again.}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1994/05/20}{Changed command name from
+% \cs{@checkcommand} to \cs{CheckCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/05/22}{Use new warning and error cmds}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/10/18}{Add star-forms for all commands}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/10/18}{Add extra test for \cs{endgraf}}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1994/10/25}{Documentation improvements}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/10/30}{(CAR)\cs{@onelevel@sanitize} added}
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1994/10/30}{(DPC)\cs{newwrite}'s moved to ltfiles}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1995/07/13}{Updates to documentation}
+%
+% \section{Definitions}
+%
+% This section contains commands used in defining other macros.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Initex initialisations}
+%
+% \task{???}{This section needs extension}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\two@digits}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro added}
+% Prefix a number less than 10 with `0'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\two@digits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi\number#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{set@display@protect} to
+% \cs{typeout}. ASAJ.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\typeout}
+% Display something on the terminal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\typeout#1{\begingroup\set@display@protect
+ \immediate\write\@unused{#1}\endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newlinechar}
+% A char to be used as new-line in output to files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newlinechar`\^^J
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Saved versions of \TeX{} primitives}
+%
+% The TeX primitive |\foo| is saved as |\@@foo|.
+% The following primitives are handled in this way:
+% \begin{macro}{\@@par}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@par=\par
+%\let\@@input=\input %%% moved earlier
+%\let\@@end=\end %%%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@hyph}
+% \begin{macro}{\-}
+% \changes{1.2x}{1995/12/13}{Documentation changed.}
+% The following comment was added when these commands were first set
+% up, 19 April 1986:
+% the |\-| command is redefined to allow it to work in the |\ttfamily|
+% type style, where automatic hyphenation is suppressed by setting
+% |\hyphenchar| to~$-1$. The original primitive \TeX{} definition is
+% saved as |\@@hyph| just in case anyone needs it.
+%
+% There is a need for a robust command for a discretionary hyphen
+% since its exact representation depends on the glyphs available in
+% the current font. For example, with suitable fonts and the
+% \texttt{T1} font encoding it is possible to use hanging hyphens.
+%
+% A suitable robust definition that allows for many possible types of
+% font and encoding may be as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareRobustCommand {\-}{%
+% \discretionary {%
+% \char \ifnum\hyphenchar\font<\z@
+% \defaulthyphenchar
+% \else
+% \hyphenchar\font
+% \fi
+% }{}{}%
+% }
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The redefinition (via |\let|) of |\-| within tabbing also makes the
+% use of a robust command advisable since then any redefinition
+% of |\-| via |\DeclareRobustCommand| will not cause a conflict.
+%
+% Therefore, macro writers should be hereby warned that
+% these internals will probably change! It is likely that a future
+% release of \LaTeX{} will make |\-| effectively an encoding specific
+% text command.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@hyph=\- % Save original primitive definition
+\def\-{\discretionary{-}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dischyph}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/04/12}
+% {Define \cs{@dischyph}, was previously in ltboxes.dtx}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@dischyph=\-
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@italiccorr}
+% Save the original italic correction.
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@italiccorr=\/
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@height}
+% \begin{macro}{\@depth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@width}
+% \begin{macro}{\@minus}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@plus}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+%
+% The following definitions save token space. E.g., using
+% |\@height| instead of height saves 5 tokens at the cost in time
+% of one macro expansion.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@height{height} \def\@depth{depth} \def\@width{width}
+\def\@minus{minus}
+\def\@plus{plus}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\hb@xt@}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1995/05/07}{Macro added}
+% The next one is another 100 tokens worth.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hb@xt@{\hbox to}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{hacks,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Command definitions}
+%
+% This section defines the following commands:
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% {\@namedef}\marg{NAME}\\ Expands to |\def\|\marg{NAME},
+% except name can contain any characters.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% {\@nameuse}\marg{NAME}\\
+% Expands to |\|\marg{NAME}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% {\@ifnextchar} X\marg{YES}\marg{NO}\\
+% Expands to \meta{YES} if next character is an `X',
+% and to \meta{NO} otherwise.
+% (Uses |\reserved@a|--|\reserved@c|.)
+% NOTE: GOBBLES ANY SPACE FOLLOWING IT.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% {\@ifstar}\marg{YES}\marg{NO}\\
+% Gobbles following spaces and then tests if next the
+% character is a '*'. If it is, then it gobbles the
+% `*' and expands to \meta{YES}, otherwise it expands to \meta{NO}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% {\@dblarg}\marg{CMD}\marg{ARG}\\
+% Expands to |\|\marg{CMD}\oarg{ARG}\marg{ARG}. Use
+% |\@dblarg\CS| when |\CS| takes arguments |[ARG1]{ARG2}|,
+% where default is| ARG1| = |ARG2|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% {\@ifundefined}\marg{NAME}\marg{YES}\marg{NO}\\
+% : If \cs{NAME} is undefined then it executes \meta{YES},
+% otherwise it executes \meta{NO}. More precisely,
+% true if \cs{NAME} either undefined or = |\relax|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% {\@ifdefinable}|\NAME|\marg{YES}
+% Executes \meta{YES} if the user is allowed to define |\NAME|,
+% otherwise it gives an error. The user can define |\NAME|
+% if |\@ifundefined{NAME}| is true, '|NAME|' $\neq$ '|relax|'
+% and the first three letters of '|NAME|' are not
+% '|end|', and if |\endNAME| is not defined.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% \newcommand|*|\marg{\cs{FOO}}\oarg{i}\marg{TEXT}\\
+% User command to define |\FOO| to be a macro with
+% i arguments (i = 0 if missing) having the definition
+% \meta{TEXT}. Produces an error if |\FOO| already
+% defined.
+%
+% Normally the command is defined to be |\long| (ie it may
+% take multiple paragraphs in its argument). In the
+% star-form, the command is not defined as |\long| and a
+% blank line in any argument to the command would generate
+% an error.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% \renewcommand|*|\marg{\cs{FOO}}\oarg{i}\marg{TEXT}\\
+% Same as |\newcommand|, except it checks if |\FOO| already defined.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% \newenvironment|*|\marg{FOO}\oarg{i}\marg{DEF1}\marg{DEF2}\\
+% equivalent to:\\
+% |\newcommand{\FOO}[i]{DEF1}| |\def{\endFOO}{DEF2}|\\
+% (or the appropriate star forms).
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% \renewenvironment\\ Obvious companion to |\newenvironment|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% \@cons : See description of |\output| routine.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@car}
+% |\@car T1 T2 ... Tn\@nil| == |T1| (unexpanded)
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@cdr}
+% |\@cdr T1 T2 ... Tn\@ni|l == |T2 ... Tn| (unexpanded)
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% \typeout\marg{message}\\ Produces a warning message on the terminal.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% \typein\marg{message}\\
+% Types message, asks the user to type in a command, then
+% executes it
+%
+% \DescribeMacro
+% \typein\oarg{\cs{CS}}\marg{MSG}\\
+% Same as above, except defines |\CS| to be the input
+% instead of executing it.
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX209}{1992/03/18}
+% {(RMS) changed input channel from 0 to \cs{@inputcheck} to avoid
+% conflicts with other channels allocated by \cs{newread}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\typein}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1995/05/08}{Use \cs{@firstofone}}
+% \changes{v1.2l}{1995/05/08}{Remove unnecessary braces}
+% \changes{v1.2l}{1995/05/08}{Replace \cs{def} by \cs{let}}
+% \changes{v1.2m}{1995/05/24}{(DPC) New implementation}
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Use \cs{@testopt} /1911}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\typein{%
+ \let\@typein\relax
+ \@testopt\@xtypein\@typein}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2r}{1995/10/03}
+% {Add missing \cs{@typein} for /1710 (from patch file)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xtypein[#1]#2{%
+ \typeout{#2}%
+ \advance\endlinechar\@M
+ \read\@inputcheck to#1%
+ \advance\endlinechar-\@M
+ \@typein}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@namedef#1{\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nameuse#1{\csname #1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cons}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cons#1#2{\begingroup\let\@elt\relax\xdef#1{#1\@elt #2}\endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@car}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cdr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@car#1#2\@nil{#1}
+\def\@cdr#1#2\@nil{#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@carcube}
+% |\@carcube T1 ... Tn\@nil| = |T1| |T2| |T3| , $n > 3$
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@carcube#1#2#3#4\@nil{#1#2#3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@onlypreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\@preamblecmds}
+% This macro adds its argument to the list of commands stored in
+% |\@preamblecmds| to be
+% disabled after |\begin{document}|. These commands are redefined
+% to generate |\@notprerr| at this point.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@preamblecmds{}
+\def\@onlypreamble#1{%
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@preamblecmds\expandafter{%
+ \@preamblecmds\do#1}}
+\@onlypreamble\@onlypreamble
+\@onlypreamble\@preamblecmds
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@star@or@long}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/10/18}{macro added}
+% Look ahead for a |*|. If present reset |\l@ngrel@x| so that
+% the next definition, |#1|, will be non-long.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@star@or@long#1{%
+ \@ifstar
+ {\let\l@ngrel@x\relax#1}%
+ {\let\l@ngrel@x\long#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+
+% \begin{macro}{\l@ngrel@x}
+% This is either |\relax| or |\long| depending on whether the |*|-form
+% of a definition command is being executed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\l@ngrel@x\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newcommand}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro reimplemented and extended}
+% User level |\newcommand|.%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newcommand{\@star@or@long\new@command}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@command}
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Use \cs{@testopt} /1911}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\new@command#1{%
+ \@testopt{\@newcommand#1}0}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@newcommand}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@argdef}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xargdef}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro interface changed}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2004/01/23}{Use kernel version of
+% \cs{@ifnextchar} (pr/3501)}
+% Handling arguments for |\newcommand|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@newcommand#1[#2]{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar [{\@xargdef#1[#2]}%
+ {\@argdef#1[#2]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define |#1| if it is definable.
+%
+% Both here and in |\@xargdef| the replacement text is absorbed as
+% an argument because this removes any space-token that may appear
+% after the optional argument(s).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@argdef#1[#2]#3{%
+ \@ifdefinable #1{\@yargdef#1\@ne{#2}{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {New implementation, using \cs{@test@opt}}
+% Handle the second optional argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@xargdef#1[#2][#3]#4{%
+ \@ifdefinable#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define the actual command to be:\\
+% |\def\foo{\@protected@testopt\foo\\foo{default}}|\\
+% where |\\foo| is a csname generated from applying |\csname| and
+% |\string| to |\foo|, ie the actual name contains a backslash and
+% therefore can't clash easily with exisiting command names.
+% ``Default'' is the contents of the second optional argument of
+% |(re)newcommand|.
+%
+% The |\aut@global| command below is only used in the autoload
+% format. If it is |\global| then a global definition will be made.
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Add \cs{aut@global} in autoload version}
+% \changes{v1.2z2}{1998/03/04}
+% {Unnecessary \cs{expandafter} removed: pr/2758}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\aut@global
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter
+ \@protected@testopt
+ \expandafter
+ #1%
+ \csname\string#1\endcsname
+ {#3}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we define the internal macro ie |\\foo| which is supposed to
+% pick up all arguments (optional and mandatory).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@yargdef
+ \csname\string#1\endcsname
+ \tw@
+ {#2}%
+ {#4}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@testopt}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{1999/01/07}
+% {made long and brace optional arg. latex/2896}
+% This macro encapsulates the most common call to |\@ifnextchar|, saving
+% several tokens each time it is used in the definition of a command
+% with an optional argument.
+% |#1| The code to execute in the case that there is a |[| need not be
+% a single token but can be any sequence of commands that `expects' to
+% be followed by |[|. If this command were only used in |\newcommand|
+% definitions then |#1| would be a single token and the braces could
+% be omitted from |{#1}| in the definition below, saving a bit of
+% memory.
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2004/01/23}{Use kernel version of
+% \cs{@ifnextchar} (pr/3501)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@testopt#1#2{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar[{#1}{#1[{#2}]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@protected@testopt}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Macro added}
+% Robust version of |\@testopt|. The extra argument (|#1|) must be a
+% single token. If protection is needed the call expands to |\protect|
+% applied to this token, and the 2nd and 3rd arguments are
+% discarded (by |\@x@protect|). Otherwise |\@testopt| is called on
+% the 2nd and 3rd arguments.
+%
+% This method of making commands robust avoids the need for using up
+% two csnames per command, the price is the extra expansion time
+% for the |\ifx| test.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@protected@testopt#1{%%
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+ \expandafter\@testopt
+ \else
+ \@x@protect#1%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@yargdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yargd@f}
+% \changes{v1.3f}{1999/04/29}{New macro added}
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro interface changed}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Avoid \cs{@?@?} token}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}{Name changed from \cs{XXX@argdef}}
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1999/01/18}{New implementation DPC /2942}
+% \changes{v1.3d}{1999/02/09}{catch bad argument forms by re-inserting \#3}
+% \changes{v1.3f}{1999/04/29}{Full expansion and conversion needed
+% for digit in new version, see pr/3013}
+%
+% These generate a primitive argument specification, from a
+% \LaTeX\ |[|\meta{digit}|]| form; in fact \meta{digit} can be
+% anything such that |\number|~\meta{digit} is single digit.
+%
+% Reorganised slightly so that |\renewcommand{\reserved@a}[1]{foo}|
+% works. I am not sure this is worth it, as a following
+% |\newcommand| would over-write the definition of |\reserved@a|.
+%
+% Recall that \LaTeX2.09 goes into an infinite loop with
+% |\renewcommand[1]{\@tempa}{foo}| (DPC 6 October 93).
+%
+% Reorganised again (DPC 1999). Rather than make a loop to
+% construct the argument spec by counting, just extract the
+% required argument spec by using a delimited argument (delimited
+% by the digit). This is faster and uses less tokens. The coding
+% is slightly odd to preserve the old interface (using |#2| =
+% |\tw@| as the flag to surround the first argument with |[]|. But
+% the new method did not allow for the number of arguments |#3| not
+% being given as an explicit digit; hence (further expansion of
+% this argument and use of) |\number| was added later in 1999.
+%
+% It is not clear why these are still |\long|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long \def \@yargdef #1#2#3{%
+ \ifx#2\tw@
+ \def\reserved@b##11{[####1]}%
+ \else
+ \let\reserved@b\@gobble
+ \fi
+ \expandafter
+ \@yargd@f \expandafter{\number #3}#1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\aut@global| command below is only used in the autoload
+% format. If it is |\global| then a global definition will be made.
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Add \cs{aut@global} in autoload version}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long \def \@yargd@f#1#2{%
+ \def \reserved@a ##1#1##2##{%
+%<autoload>\aut@global
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\reserved@b ##1#1%
+ }%
+ \l@ngrel@x \reserved@a 0##1##2##3##4##5##6##7##8##9###1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@reargdef}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/20}
+% {Kept old version of \cs{@reargdef}, for array.sty}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}{New defn, in terms of \cs{@yargdef}}
+% \changes{v1.2y}{1996/07/26}{third arg picked up by \cs{@yargdef}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@reargdef#1[#2]{%
+ \@yargdef#1\@ne{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand}
+% Check the command name is already used. If not give an error
+% message. Then temporarily
+% disable |\@ifdefinable| then call |\newcommand|. (Previous
+% version |\let#1=\relax| but this does not work too well if |#1|
+% is |\@temp|\emph{a--e}.)
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro reimplemented and extended}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/05/2}{Removed surplus \cs{space} in error}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\renewcommand{\@star@or@long\renew@command}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\renew@command}
+% \changes{v1.2y}{1996/07/26}{use \cs{relax} in place of empty arg}
+% \changes{v1.2y}{1996/07/26}{use \cs{noexpand} instead of \cs{string}}
+% \changes{v1.2z1}{1997/10/21}{Use \cs{begingroup}/\cs{endgroup} rather
+% than braces for grouping, to avoid generating empty math atom.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\renew@command#1{%
+ \begingroup \escapechar\m@ne\xdef\@gtempa{{\string#1}}\endgroup
+ \expandafter\@ifundefined\@gtempa
+ {\@latex@error{\noexpand#1undefined}\@ehc}%
+ \relax
+ \let\@ifdefinable\@rc@ifdefinable
+ \new@command#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/05/10}{Removed braces around \cs{@ifundefined}
+% argument. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1994/05/13}{Coded more efficiently, thanks to FMi.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifdefinable}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@ifdefinable}
+% \begin{macro}{\@rc@ifdefinable}
+% Test is user is allowed to define a command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ifdefinable #1#2{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{\expandafter\@gobble\string #1}%
+ \@ifundefined\reserved@a
+ {\edef\reserved@b{\expandafter\@carcube \reserved@a xxx\@nil}%
+ \ifx \reserved@b\@qend \@notdefinable\else
+ \ifx \reserved@a\@qrelax \@notdefinable\else
+ #2%
+ \fi
+ \fi}%
+ \@notdefinable}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Saved definition of |\@ifdefinable|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@ifdefinable\@ifdefinable
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Version of |\@ifdefinable| for use with |\renewcommand|. Does
+% not do the check this time, but restores the normal definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@rc@ifdefinable#1#2{%
+ \let\@ifdefinable\@@ifdefinable
+ #2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newenvironment}
+% Define a new user environment.
+% |#1| is the environment name. |#2#| Grabs all the tokens up to
+% the first |{|. These will be any optional arguments. They are not
+% parsed at this point, but are just passed to |\@newenv| which
+% will eventually call |\newcommand|. Any optional arguments will
+% then be parsed by |\newcommand| as it defines the command that
+% executes the `begin code' of the environment.
+%
+% This |#2#| trick removed with version 1.2i as it fails if a |{|
+% occurs in the optional argument. Now use |\@ifnextchar| directly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newenvironment{\@star@or@long\new@environment}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@environment}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1995/04/25}{Parse arguments slowly but safely /1507}
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Use \cs{@testopt} /1911}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\new@environment#1{%
+ \@testopt{\@newenva#1}0}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@newenva}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2004/01/23}{Use kernel version of
+% \cs{@ifnextchar} (pr/3501)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@newenva#1[#2]{%
+ \kernel@ifnextchar [{\@newenvb#1[#2]}{\@newenv{#1}{[#2]}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@newenvb}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{1999/01/07}
+% {made long and brace optional arg. latex/2896}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@newenvb#1[#2][#3]{\@newenv{#1}{[#2][{#3}]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\renewenvironment}
+% Redefine an environment.
+% For |\renewenvironment| disable |\@ifdefinable| and then call
+% |\newenvironment|. It is OK to |\let| the argument to |\relax|
+% here as there should not be a |@temp|\ldots\ environment.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro reimplemented and extended}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/05/2}{Removed surplus \cs{space} in error}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\renewenvironment{\@star@or@long\renew@environment}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\renew@environment}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/10/18}{reset end command}
+% \changes{v1.2y}{1996/07/26}{use \cs{relax} in place of empty arg}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\renew@environment#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{#1}%
+ {\@latex@error{Environment #1 undefined}\@ehc
+ }\relax
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Add \cs{aut@global} in autoload version}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\aut@global
+ \expandafter\let\csname end#1\endcsname\relax
+ \new@environment{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@newenv}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Macro interface changed}
+% \changes{v1.2h}{1994/11/24}{Added test for \cs{endgraf}}
+% The internal version of |\newenvironment|.
+%
+% Call |\newcommand| to define the \meta{begin-code} for the
+% environment. |\def| is used for the \meta{end-code} as it does
+% not take arguments. (but may contain |\par|s)
+%
+% Make sure that an attempt to define a `graf' or `group' environment
+% fails.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@newenv#1#2#3#4{%
+ \@ifundefined{#1}%
+ {\expandafter\let\csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname end#1\endcsname}%
+ \relax
+ \expandafter\new@command
+ \csname #1\endcsname#2{#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Add \cs{aut@global} in autoload version}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\aut@global
+ \l@ngrel@x\expandafter\def\csname end#1\endcsname{#4}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newif}
+% \changes{v1.1l}{1995/05/24}{(DPC) New implementation}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Add \cs{aut@global} in autoload version}
+% And here's a different sort of allocation:
+% For example,
+% |\newif\iffoo| creates |\footrue|, |\foofalse| to go with |\iffoo|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newif#1{%
+ \count@\escapechar \escapechar\m@ne
+%<autoload>\aut@global
+ \let#1\iffalse
+ \@if#1\iftrue
+ \@if#1\iffalse
+ \escapechar\count@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@if}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Add \cs{aut@global} in autoload version}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@if#1#2{%
+%<autoload>\aut@global
+ \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\@gobbletwo\string#1%
+ \expandafter\@gobbletwo\string#2\endcsname
+ {\let#1#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
+% |\providecommand| takes the same arguments as |\newcommand|, but
+% discards them if |#1| is already defined, Otherwise it just acts like
+% |\newcommand|. This implementation currently leaves any discarded
+% definition in |\reserved@a| (and possibly |\\reserved@a|) this
+% wastes a bit of space, but it will be reclaimed as soon as these
+% scratch macros are redefined.
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\providecommand{\@star@or@long\provide@command}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\provide@command}
+% \changes{v1.2z}{1997/09/09}{Use \cs{begingroup} to avoid generating
+% math ords if used in math mode. pr/2573}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\provide@command#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar\m@ne\xdef\@gtempa{{\string#1}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \expandafter\@ifundefined\@gtempa
+ {\def\reserved@a{\new@command#1}}%
+ {\def\reserved@a{\renew@command\reserved@a}}%
+ \reserved@a}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CheckCommand}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1994/05/20}{Changed name from \cs{@checkcommand} to
+% \cs{CheckCommand}.}
+% |\CheckCommand| takes the same arguments as |\newcommand|. If
+% the command already exists, with the same definition, then
+% nothing happens, otherwise a warning is issued. Useful for
+% checking the current state befor a macro package starts
+% redefining things. Currently two macros are considered to have
+% the same definition if they are the same except for different
+% default arguments. That is, if the old definition was:
+% |\newcommand\xxx[2][a]{(#1)(#2)}| then
+% |\CheckCommand\xxx[2][b]{(#1)(#2)}| would \emph{not} generate a
+% warning, but, for instance |\CheckCommand\xxx[2]{(#1)(#2)}|
+% would.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\CheckCommand{\@star@or@long\check@command}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\CheckCommand| is only available in the preamble part of the
+% document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\CheckCommand
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@command}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check@command#1#2#{\@check@c#1{#2}}
+\@onlypreamble\check@command
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@check@c}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1995/04/25}{Make \cs{long} for latex/1346}
+% |\CheckCommand| itself just grabs all the arguments we need,
+% without actually looking for |[| optional argument forms. Now
+% define |\reserved@a|. If |\\reserved@a| is then defined, compare it
+% with the ``|\#1|' otherwise compare |\reserved@a| with |#1|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@check@c#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname\string\reserved@a\endcsname\relax
+ \renew@command\reserved@a#2{#3}%
+ \@ifundefined{\string\reserved@a}%
+ {\@check@eq#1\reserved@a}%
+ {\expandafter\@check@eq
+ \csname\string#1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname\string\reserved@a\endcsname}}
+\@onlypreamble\@check@c
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@check@eq}
+% Complain if |#1| and |#2| are not |\ifx| equal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@check@eq#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1#2\else
+ \@latex@warning@no@line
+ {Command \noexpand#1 has
+ changed.\MessageBreak
+ Check if current package is valid}%
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\@check@eq
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobblefour}
+% \changes{v1.2n}{1995/05/26}{(CAR) Added \cs{long}s}
+% The |\@gobble| macro is used to get rid of its argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \@gobble #1{}
+\long\def \@gobbletwo #1#2{}
+\long\def \@gobblefour #1#2#3#4{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@firstofone}
+% \begin{macro}{\@firstoftwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\@secondoftwo}
+% Some argument-grabbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@firstofone#1{#1}
+\long\def\@firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
+\long\def\@secondoftwo#1#2{#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@iden}
+% |\@iden| is another name for |\@firstofone| for
+% compatibility reasons.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@iden\@firstofone
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@thirdofthree}
+% Another grabber now used in the encoding specific
+% section.
+% \changes{v1.2z3}{1998/03/20}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@thirdofthree#1#2#3{#3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@expandtwoargs}
+% A macro to totally expand two arguments to another macro
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@expandtwoargs#1#2#3{%
+\edef\reserved@a{\noexpand#1{#2}{#3}}\reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@backslashchar}
+% A category code 12 backslash.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\@backslashchar{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/05/10}{Added \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/05/12}{Fixed a bug with \cs{relax } which was
+% using \cs{@gobble} before defining it.}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/05/13}{Renamed \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand} to
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}. Removed \cs{@if@short@command}.
+% Moved to after the definition of \cs{@gobble}.}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1994/05/13}{Added logging message to
+% \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}.}
+%
+% \subsection{Robust commands and protect}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/17}{Added the discussion of protected
+% commands, defined the values that \cs{protect} should have.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/05/18}{Redid the discussion and definitions, in
+% line with the proposed new setting of \cs{protect} in the output
+% routine.}
+%
+% Fragile and robust commands are one of the thornier issues in
+% \LaTeX's commands. Whilst typesetting documents, \LaTeX{} makes use
+% of many of \TeX's features, such as arithmetic, defining macros, and
+% setting variables. However, there are (at least) three different
+% ocassions when these commands are not safe. These are called
+% `moving arguments' by \LaTeX, and consist of:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item writing information to a file, such as indexes or tables of
+% contents.
+% \item writing information to the screen.
+% \item inside an |\edef|, |\message|, |\mark|, or other command which
+% evaluates its argument fully.
+% \end{itemize}
+% The method \LaTeX{} uses for making fragile commands robust is to
+% precede them with |\protect|. This can have one of five possible
+% values:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\relax|, for normal typesetting. So |\protect\foo| will
+% execute |\foo|.
+% \item |\string|, for writing to the screen. So |\protect\foo| will
+% write |\foo|.
+% \item |\noexpand|, for writing to a file. So |\protect\foo| will
+% write |\foo| followed by a space.
+% \item |\@unexpandable@protect|, for writing a moving argument to a
+% file. So |\protect\foo| will write |\protect\foo| followed by a
+% space. This value is also used inside |\edef|s, |\mark|s and
+% other commands which evaluate their arguments fully.
+% \item |\@unexpandable@noexpand|, for performing a deferred write
+% inside an |\edef|. So |\protect\foo| will write |\foo| followed
+% by a space. If you want |\protect\foo| to be written, you should
+% use |\@unexpandable@protect|. (Removed as never used).
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \changes{1.1b}{1994/05/17}
+% {(ASAJ) Added the \cs{@protect@...} commands.}
+% \changes{1.1c}{1994/05/18}
+% {(ASAJ) Renamed the commands, and removed
+% one which is no longer needed.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@unexpandable@protect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@unexpandable@noexpand}
+% \changes{1.2w}{1995/12/05}{Removed as never used. internal/1733}
+% These commands are used for setting |\protect| inside |\edef|s.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@unexpandable@protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}
+%\def\@unexpandable@noexpand{\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/11/04}{Rewrote protected short commands
+% using \cs{x@protect}. ASAJ.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\declare@robustcommand}
+% This is a package-writers command, which has the same syntax as
+% |\newcommand|, but which declares a protected command. It does
+% this by having\\
+% |\DeclareRobustCommand\foo|\\
+% define |\foo| to be
+% |\protect\foo<space>|,\\
+% and then use |\newcommand\foo<space>|.\\
+% Since the internal command is |\foo<space>|, when it is written
+% to an auxiliary file, it will appear as |\foo|.
+%
+% We have to be a
+% bit cleverer if we're defining a short command, such as |\_|, in
+% order to make sure that the auxiliary file does not include a
+% space after the command, since |\_ a| and |\_a| aren't the same.
+% In this case we define |\_| to be:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \x@protect\_\protect\_<space>
+%\end{verbatim}
+% which expands to:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect\else
+% \@x@protect@\_
+% \fi
+% \protect\_<space>
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Then if |\protect| is |\@typeset@protect| (normally |\relax|)
+% then we just perform |\_<space>|, and otherwise
+% |\@x@protect@| gobbles everything up and expands to
+% |\protect\_|.
+%
+% \emph{Note}: setting |\protect| to any value other than |\relax|
+% whilst in `typesetting' mode will cause commands to go into an
+% infinite loop! In particular, setting |\relax| to |\@empty| will
+% cause |\_| to loop forever. It will also break lots of other
+% things, such as protected |\ifmmode|s inside |\halign|s. If you
+% really really have to do such a thing, then please set
+% |\@typeset@protect| to be |\@empty| as well. (This is what the
+% code for |\patterns| does, for example.)
+%
+% More fun with |\expandafter| and |\csname|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareRobustCommand{\@star@or@long\declare@robustcommand}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\declare@robustcommand#1{%
+ \ifx#1\@undefined\else\ifx#1\relax\else
+ \@latex@info{Redefining \string#1}%
+ \fi\fi
+ \edef\reserved@a{\string#1}%
+ \def\reserved@b{#1}%
+ \edef\reserved@b{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\reserved@b}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.2s}{1995/10/06}
+% {Add \cs{aut@global} in autoload version}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\aut@global
+ \edef#1{%
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b
+ \noexpand\x@protect
+ \noexpand#1%
+ \fi
+ \noexpand\protect
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname
+ \expandafter\@gobble\string#1 \endcsname
+ }%
+ \let\@ifdefinable\@rc@ifdefinable
+ \expandafter\new@command\csname
+ \expandafter\@gobble\string#1 \endcsname
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@x@protect}
+% \begin{macro}{\x@protect}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\x@protect#1{%
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect\else
+ \@x@protect#1%
+ \fi
+}
+\def\@x@protect#1\fi#2#3{%
+ \fi\protect#1%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@typeset@protect}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@typeset@protect\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/11/04}{Added commands for setting and restoring
+% \cs{protect}. ASAJ.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@display@protect}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@typeset@protect}
+% These macros set |\protect| appropriately for typesetting or
+% displaying.
+% \changes{v1.2o}{1995/07/03}{Use \cs{@typeset@protect} for init}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@display@protect{\let\protect\string}
+\def\set@typeset@protect{\let\protect\@typeset@protect}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\protected@edef}
+% \begin{macro}{\protected@xdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\unrestored@protected@xdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\restore@protect}
+% The commands |\protected@edef| and |\protected@xdef| perform
+% `safe' |\edef|s and |\xdef|s, saving and restoring |\protect|
+% appropriately. For cases where restoring |\protect| doesn't
+% matter, there's an `unsafe' |\unrestored@protected@xdef|, useful
+% if you know what you're doing!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\protected@edef{%
+ \let\@@protect\protect
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \afterassignment\restore@protect
+ \edef
+}
+\def\protected@xdef{%
+ \let\@@protect\protect
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \afterassignment\restore@protect
+ \xdef
+}
+\def\unrestored@protected@xdef{%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \xdef
+}
+\def\restore@protect{\let\protect\@@protect}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\protect}
+% The normal meaning of |\protect|
+% \changes{v1.2j}{1995/04/29}{Init \cs{protect} here}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\set@typeset@protect
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Internal defining commands}
+%
+% These commands are used internally to define other \LaTeX{}
+% commands.
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/23}{Redefined to remove a trailing \cs{fi}}
+% Check if first arg is undefined or \cs{relax} and execute second or
+% third arg depending,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifundefined#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@qend}
+% \begin{macro}{\@qrelax}
+% The following define |\@qend| and |\@qrelax| to be the strings
+% `|end|' and `|relax|' with the characters |\catcode|d 12.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\@qend{\expandafter\@cdr\string\end\@nil}
+\edef\@qrelax{\expandafter\@cdr\string\relax\@nil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \changes{LaTeX209}{1992/08/24}
+% {(Rms) \cs{@ifnextchar} didn't work if its
+% first argument was an equal sign.}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Use \cs{@let@token} }
+% \changes{v1.3a}{1999/01/07}
+% {made long}
+% \changes{v1.3b}{1999/01/07}
+% {extra \cs{long}. latex/2902}
+% \changes{v1.3e}{1999/03/01}
+% {remove extra \cs{long}. internal/2967}
+% |\@ifnextchar| peeks at the following character and compares it
+% with its first argument. If both are the same it executes its
+% second argument, otherwise its third.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ifnextchar#1#2#3{%
+ \let\reserved@d=#1%
+ \def\reserved@a{#2}%
+ \def\reserved@b{#3}%
+ \futurelet\@let@token\@ifnch}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\kernel@ifnextchar}
+% \changes{v1.3g}{2004/01/23}{Added macro (pr/3501)}
+% This macro is the kernel version of |\@ifnextchar| which is used
+% in a couple of places to prevent the AMS variant from being used
+% since in some places this produced chaos (for example
+% if an \texttt{fd} file
+% is loaded in a random place then the optional argument to
+% |\ProvidesFile| could get printed there instead of being written
+% only in the log file. This happened
+% when there was a space or a newline between the mandatory and
+% optional arguments! It should really be fixed in the
+% \texttt{amsmath} package one day, but\ldots
+%
+% Note that there may be other places in the kernel where this version
+% should be used rather than the original, but variable, version.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\kernel@ifnextchar\@ifnextchar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnch}
+% |\@ifnch| is a tricky macro to skip any space tokens that may
+% appear before the character in question. If it encounters a space
+% token, it calls \@xifnch.
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Use \cs{@let@token} for internal/924, save \cs{reserved@e}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifnch{%
+ \ifx\@let@token\@sptoken
+ \let\reserved@c\@xifnch
+ \else
+ \ifx\@let@token\reserved@d
+ \let\reserved@c\reserved@a
+ \else
+ \let\reserved@c\reserved@b
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \reserved@c}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sptoken}
+% The following code makes |\@sptoken| a space token. It is
+% important here that the control sequence |\:| consists of
+% a non-letter only, so that the following whitespace is
+% significant. Together with the fact that the equal sign
+% in a |\let| may be followed by only one optional space
+% the desired effect is achieved.
+% NOTE: the following hacking must precede the definition of |\:|
+% as math medium space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\:{\let\@sptoken= } \: % this makes \@sptoken a space token
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xifnch}
+% In the following definition of |\@xifnch|, |\:| is again used
+% to get a space token as delimiter into the definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\:{\@xifnch} \expandafter\def\: {\futurelet\@let@token\@ifnch}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/05/10}{Added \cs{makeatletter} and
+% \cs{makeatother} ASAJ.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeatletter}
+% \begin{macro}{\makeatother}
+% Make internal control sequences accessible or inaccessible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makeatletter{\catcode`\@11\relax}
+\def\makeatother{\catcode`\@12\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifstar}
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) New implementation, for /1910}
+% The new implementation below avoids passing the \meta{true code}
+% Through one more |\def| than the \meta{false code}, which previously
+% meant that |#| had to be written as |####| in one argument, but |##|
+% in the other. The |*| is gobbled by |\@firstoftwo|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ifstar#1{\@ifnextchar *{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xdblarg}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{2004/01/23}{Use kernel version of
+% \cs{@ifnextchar} (pr/3501)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@dblarg#1{\kernel@ifnextchar[{#1}{\@xdblarg{#1}}}
+\long\def\@xdblarg#1#2{#1[{#2}]{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sanitize}
+% The command |\@sanitize| changes the catcode of all special characters
+% except for braces to `other'. It can be used for commands like
+% |\index| that want to write their arguments verbatim. Needless to
+% say, this command should only be executed within a group, or chaos
+% will ensue.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sanitize{\@makeother\ \@makeother\\\@makeother\$\@makeother\&%
+\@makeother\#\@makeother\^\@makeother\_\@makeother\%\@makeother\~}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@onelevel@sanitize}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/10/30}{Macro added}
+%
+% This makes the whole ``meaning'' of |#1| (its one-level
+% expansion) into catcode 12 tokens: it could be used in
+% |\DeclareRobustCommand|.
+%
+% If it is to be used on default float specifiers, this should be
+% done when they are defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@onelevel@sanitize #1{%
+ \edef #1{\expandafter\strip@prefix
+ \meaning #1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Commands for Autoloading}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aut@global}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Macro added}
+% This command is only defined in the `autoload' format. It is
+% normally |\relax| but may be set to |\global|, in which case
+% |\newif| and the commands based on |\newcommand| will all make
+% global definitions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\aut@global\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@autoload}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1995/10/02}
+% {Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.2t}{1995/10/09}
+% {Use \cs{@@input} not \cs{input} to save string space and
+% stops autoload files appearing in \cs{listfiles}}
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1995/10/24}{ignore end-of-line}
+% This macro is only defined in the `autoload' format. It inputs a
+% package `|auto#1.sty|' within a local group, and with normalised
+% catcodes. |\aut@global| is set to |\global| so that |\newif|
+% |\newcommand| and related commands make global definitions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@autoload#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\aut@global\global
+ \nfss@catcodes
+ \catcode`\ =10
+ \let\@latex@e@error\@gobble
+ \@@input auto#1.sty\relax
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ce899b0d361
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltdirchk.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,911 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \ProvidesFile{ltdirchk.dtx}
+% [2001/06/04 v1.0y LaTeX Kernel (System Dependent Parts)]
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltdirchk.dtx
+%
+%<*unstripped>
+\ifx\documentclass\undefined\let\next\relax\else\def\next{%
+%</unstripped>
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltdirchk.dtx}
+ [2001/06/04 v1.0y LaTeX Kernel (System Dependent Parts)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltdirchk.dtx}
+\title{\filename\thanks{%
+ this document also includes the source for
+ texsys.cfg and ltxcheck.tex}}
+\author{David Carlisle}
+\date{\filedate}
+\begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%<*unstripped>
+}\fi\next
+%</unstripped>
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{v0.2j}{1994/02/25}
+% {Remove need for drv file}
+% \changes{v0.2k}{1994/03/01}
+% {Add unstripped module,
+% so that dircheck.dtx may be used with initex}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/08}
+% {Reorganise driver module into `new style'}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}
+% {Change name from dircheck.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}
+% {Minor edits to the typeouts in ltxcheck}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/03/28}
+% {Improve documentation}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/11/03}
+% {Generate an error if latex.ltx not used with clean initex}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1996/06/13}
+% {documentation improvements mainly from internal/2174}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1997/06/16}
+% {documentation improvements mainly from internal/2520}
+% \changes{v1.0w}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Documentation improvements.}
+%
+% \CheckSum{595}
+%
+% \section{\LaTeX\ System Dependent Initialisations}
+%
+% \changes{v0.2g}{1994/01/21}
+% {Improve documentation, reorganise docstrip module}
+%
+% This file implements the semi-automatic determination of various
+% system dependent parts of the initialisation. The actual definitions
+% may be placed in a file |texsys.cfg|. Thus for operating systems for
+% which the tests here do not result in acceptable settings, a `hand
+% written' |texsys.cfg| may be produced.
+%
+% The macros that must be defined are:
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@currdir}
+% |\@currdir|\meta{filename}\meta{space} should expand to a form of the
+% filename that uniquely refers to the `current directory' if this is
+% possible. (The expansion should also end with a space.) on UNIX,
+% this is |\def\@currdir{./}|. For more exotic operating systems you may
+% want to make |\@currdir| a macro with arguments delimited by |.|
+% and/or \meta{space}. If the operating system has no concept of
+% directory structure, this macro should be defined to be empty.
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\input@path}
+% If the primitive |\openin| searches the same directories as the
+% primitive |\input|, then it is possible to tell (using |\ifeof|)
+% whether a file exists before trying to input it. For systems like
+% this, |\input@path| should be left undefined.
+%
+% If |\openin| does not `follow' |\input| then |\input@path| must be
+% defined to be a list of directories to search for input files. The
+% format for each directory is as for |\@currdir|, normally just a
+% prefix is required, but it may be a macro with space-delimited
+% argument. That is, if \meta{dir} is an entry in the input path,
+% \TeX\ will try to load the expansion of
+% \meta{dir}\meta{filename}\meta{space}
+%
+% So either \meta{dir} should be defined as a macro with argument
+% delimited by space, or it should just expand to a directory name,
+% including the final directory separator, so that it may be
+% concatenated with the \meta{filename}. This means that for UNIX-like
+% syntax, each \meta{dir} should end with a slash, |/|.
+%
+% |\input@path| should expand to a list of such directories, each in a
+% |{}| group.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\filename@parse}
+% After a call of the form: |\filename@parse{|\meta{filename}|}|, the
+% three macros |\filename@area|,|\filename@base|,|\filename@ext| should
+% be defined to be the `area' (or directory), basename and
+% extension respectively. If there was no extension specified in
+% \meta{filename}, |\filename@ext| should be |\let| to |\relax| (so this
+% case may be tested with |\@ifundefined{filename@ext}| and, perhaps a
+% default extension substituted).
+%
+% Normally one would not need to define this macro in |texsys.cfg| as
+% the automatic tests can supply parsers that work with UNIX and VMS and
+% Macintosh syntax, as well as a basic parser that will cover many other
+% cases. However some operating systems may need a `hand produced'
+% parser in which case it should be defined in this file.
+%
+% The UNIX parser also works for most MSDOS \TeX\ versions.
+% Currently if the UNIX, VMS or Macintosh parser is not used,
+% |\filename@parse| is defined to always return an empty area, and to
+% split the argument into basename and extension at the first `|.|'
+% that occurs in the name.
+% Parsers for other formats may be defined in |texsys.cfg|,
+% in which case they will be used in preference to the default
+% definitions.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@TeXversion}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/23}{Document \cs{@TeXversion}}
+% |\@TeXversion| is now set automatically by the initialisation tests
+% in this file. You should not need to set it in |texsys.cfg|, however
+% the following documentation is left for information. \LaTeX\ does
+% not set this variable exactly, the automatic tests set it to:\\
+% |2| for any version, $v$, $v < 3.0$\\
+% |3| for any version, $v$, $3.0 \leq v \leq 3.14$\\
+% \meta{undefined} otherwise.\\
+% However these values are accurate enough for \LaTeX\ to take
+% appropriate action for these old \TeX{}s.
+%
+% If your \TeX\ is older than version 3.141, then you should define
+% |\@TeXversion| (using |\def|) to be the version number. If you do not
+% do this\footnote
+% {Actually if your \TeX\ is really old, version~2, \LaTeX\ can
+% detect this, and sets \cs{@TeXversion} to~2 if it is not set in
+% the \texttt{cfg} file.}
+%, \LaTeX\ will not work around a bug in old \TeX\ versions, and
+% so error messages will appear in a very strange format, with |^^J|
+% appearing instead of line breaks:
+% \begingroup\catcode`\==\active \def=#1#2{}\hfuzz\maxdimen
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%! LaTeX Error: \rubbish undefined.^^J^^JSee the LaTeX manual or LaTeX=
+% Companion
+% for explanation.^^JType H <return> for immediate help.
+% ...
+%
+%l.3 \renewcommand{\rubbish}
+% {}
+%?
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \endgroup\noindent
+% However if you put |\def\@TeXversion{3.14}| in \texttt{texsys.cfg}
+% the following format will be used:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%! LaTeX Error: \rubbish undefined.
+%
+%See the LaTeX manual or LaTeX Companion for explanation.
+%Type H <return> for immediate help.
+%! .
+% ...
+%
+%l.3 \renewcommand{\rubbish}
+% {}
+%?
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Note that this has an extra line |! .| which does not appear in
+% error messages that use the default settings with a current version of
+% \TeX, but this should not cause any confusion we hope.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Initialisation}
+% As this file is read at a very early stage, some definitions that
+% are normally considered to be part of the format must be made here.
+%
+% \subsection{INITEX}
+% \changes{v0.2i}{1994/01/25}
+% {Protect against looping on \cs{@@input} and \cs{@@end}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*dircheck>
+%<*initex>
+%<initex>\ifnum\catcode`\{=1
+%<initex> \errmessage
+%<initex> {LaTeX must be made using an initex with no format preloaded}
+%<initex>\fi
+\catcode`\{=1
+\catcode`\}=2
+\catcode`\#=6
+\catcode`\^=7
+\chardef\active=13
+\catcode`\@=11
+\countdef\count@=255
+\let\bgroup={ \let\egroup=}
+\ifx\@@input\@undefined\let\@@input\input\fi
+\ifx\@@end\@undefined\let\@@end\end\fi
+\chardef\@inputcheck0
+\chardef\sixt@@n=16
+\newlinechar`\^^J
+\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}
+\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+ \do\#\do\^\do\_\do\%\do\~}
+\def\@makeother#1{\catcode`#1=12\relax}
+\def\space{ }
+\def\@tempswafalse{\let\if@tempswa\iffalse}
+\def\@tempswatrue{\let\if@tempswa\iftrue}
+\let\if@tempswa\iffalse
+\def\loop#1\repeat{\def\iterate{#1\relax\expandafter\iterate\fi}%
+ \iterate \let\iterate\relax}
+\let\repeat\fi
+%</initex>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Some bits of 2e}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\def\two@digits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi\number#1}
+\long\def\@firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
+\long\def\@secondoftwo#1#2{#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/05/11}
+% {Add \cs{ProvidesFile} as used in fd files.}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1995/10/17}
+% {Modify initex version of \cs{ProvidesFile}}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1995/11/01}
+% {Initialise \cs{@addtofilelist} to \cs{@gobble}}
+% This is a special version of |\ProvidesFile| for initex use.
+% \changes{v1.0x}{2001/05/25}{Explicitly set catcode of
+% \cs{endlinechar} to 10 (pr/3334)}
+% \changes{v1.0y}{2001/06/04}{But only if it is a char (pr/3334)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ProvidesFile#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\ 10 %
+ \ifnum \endlinechar<256 %
+ \ifnum \endlinechar>\m@ne
+ \catcode\endlinechar 10 %
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \@makeother\/%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@providesfile{#1}}{\@providesfile{#1}[]}}
+\def\@providesfile#1[#2]{%
+ \wlog{File: #1 #2}%
+ \@addtofilelist{ #2}%
+ \endgroup}
+\long\def\@addtofilelist#1{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@empty{}
+\catcode`\%=12
+\def\@percentchar{%}
+\catcode`\%=14
+\let\@currdir\@undefined
+\let\input@path\@undefined
+\let\filename@parse\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\strip@prefix}
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/12/13}
+% {modified, name changed from \cs{stripmeaning}.}
+% \changes{v0.2e}{1994/01/19}
+% {name changed from \cs{strip@meaning}, to match NFSS.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\strip@prefix#1>{}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{texsys.cfg}
+% As mentioned above, any site specific definitions required to describe
+% the filename handling must be entered into a file |texsys.cfg|. If
+% |texsys.cfg| can not be located by |\openin|, we write a default
+% version out. The default version only contains comments, so we do not
+% actually input the file in that case. The automatic tests later will,
+% hopefully, correctly define the required macros.
+%
+% The tricky code below checks to see if |texsys.cfg| exists. If it does
+% not, all the text in this file between START and END is copied
+% verbatim to a new file |texsys,cfg|. If |texsys.cfg| is found, then it
+% is simply input. This is only done when this file is being used
+% unstripped.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*docstrip>
+\openin15=texsys.cfg
+\ifeof15
+\typeout{** Writing a default texsys.cfg}
+\immediate\openout15=texsys.cfg
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\^^M\active%
+\let^^M\par%
+\def\reserved@a#1^^M{%
+ \def\reserved@b{#1}%
+ \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c\endgroup\else%
+ \immediate\write15{#1}%
+ \expandafter\reserved@a\fi}%
+\def\reserved@d#1START^^M{\let\do\@makeother\dospecials\reserved@a}%
+\catcode`\%=12
+\def\reserved@c{%END}
+\reserved@d
+% \end{macrocode}
+%START
+% \subsection{texsys.cfg}
+%
+% This file contains the site specific definitions of the four macros\\
+% |\@currdir|, |\input@path|, |\filename@parse| and |\@TeXversion|.
+%
+% As distributed it only contains comments, however this `empty'
+% file will work on many systems because of the automatic tests built
+% into |ltdirchk.dtx|. You \emph{are} allowed to edit this file to add
+% definitions of these macros appropriate to your system.
+%
+%
+% The macros that must be defined are:
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@currdir}
+% |\@currdir|\meta{filename}\meta{space} should expand to a form of the
+% filename that uniquely refers to the `current directory' if this is
+% possible. (The expansion should also end with a space.) on UNIX,
+% this is |\def\@currdir{./}|. For more exotic operating systems you may
+% want to make |\@currdir| a macro with arguments delimited by |.|
+% and/or \meta{space}. If the operating system has no concept of
+% directory structure, this macro should be defined to be empty.
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\input@path}
+% If the primitive |\openin| searches the same directories as the
+% primitive |\input|, then it is possible to tell (using |\ifeof|)
+% whether a file exists before trying to input it. For systems like
+% this, |\input@path| should be left undefined.
+%
+% If |\openin| does not `follow' |\input| then |\input@path| must be
+% defined to be a list of directories to search for input files. The
+% format for each directory is as for |\@currdir|, normally just a
+% prefix is required, but it may be a macro with space-delimited
+% argument. That is, if \meta{dir} is an entry in the input path,
+% \TeX will try to load the expansion of
+%
+% \meta{dir}\meta{filename}\meta{space}
+%
+% So either \meta{dir} should be defined as a macro with argument
+% delimited by space, or it should just expand to a directory name,
+% including the final directory separator, so that it may be
+% concatenated with the \meta{filename}. This means that for UNIX-like
+% syntax, each \meta{dir} should end with a slash, |/|. One exception to
+% this rule is that the input path should \emph{always} contain the
+% empty directory |{}| as this will allow `full pathnames' to be used,
+% and the `current directory' to be searched.
+%
+% |\input@path| should expand to a list of such directories, each in a
+% |{}| group.
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\filename@parse}
+% After a call of the form: |\filename@parse{|\meta{filename}|}|, the
+% three macros |\filename@area|,|\filename@base|,|\filename@ext| should
+% be defined to be the `area' (or directory), basename and
+% extension respectively. If there was no extension specified in
+% \meta{filename}, |\filename@ext| should be |\let| to |\relax| (so this
+% case may be tested with |\@ifundefined{filename@ext}| and, perhaps a
+% default extension substituted).
+%
+% Normally one would not need to define this macro in |texsys.cfg| as
+% the automatic tests can supply parsers that work with UNIX and VMS
+% syntax, as well as a basic parser that willcover many other cases.
+% However some operating systems may need a `hand produced' parser
+% in which case it should be defined in this file.
+%
+% The UNIX parser also works for most MSDOS \TeX\ versions.
+% Currently if the UNIX or VMS parser is not used, |\filename@parse| is
+% defined to always return an empty area, and to split the argument into
+% basename and extension at the first `|.|' that occurs in the name.
+% Parsers for other formats may be defined in |texsys.cfg|,
+% in which case they will be used in preference to the default
+% definitions.
+%
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@TeXversion}
+% You should not need to set this macro in |texsys.cfg|. \LaTeX\
+% tests to set this automatically. See the comments in the opening
+% section of \texttt{ltdirchk.dtx}.
+%
+%
+% The following sections give examples of definitions which might
+% work on various systems. These are currently mainly untested as I only
+% have access to a few systems, all of which do not need this file as
+% the automatic tests work. All the code is commented out.
+%
+% \subsection{UNIX (web2c)}
+% This implementation does make |\openin| and |\input| look in the same
+% places. Acceptable settings are made by |ltdirchk.dtx|, and so this
+% file may be empty. The definitions below are therefore just for
+% information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@currdir{./}
+%\let\input@path\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{UNIX (other)}
+% Apparently some commercial UNIX implementations have different paths
+% for |\openin| and |\input|. For these one could use definitions like
+% the following (with whatever directories are used at your site):
+% note that the directory names should end with |/|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@currdir{./}
+% \def\input@path{%
+% {/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/distrib/}%
+% {/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/contrib/}%
+% {/usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/local/}%
+% }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{MSDOS (emtex)}
+% This implementation does make |\openin| and |\input| look in the same
+% places. Acceptable settings are made by |ltdirchk.dtx|, and so this
+% file may be empty. The definitions below are therefore just for
+% information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@currdir{./}
+% \let\input@path\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{MSDOS (other)}
+% Some PC implementations have different paths
+% for |\openin| and |\input|. For these one could use definitions like
+% the following (with whatever directories are used at your site):
+% note that the directory names should end with |/|.
+% This assumes the implementation uses UNIX style |/| as the directory
+% separator.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@currdir{./}
+% \def\input@path{%
+% {c:/tex/inputs/distrib/}%
+% {c:/tex/inputs/contrib/}%
+% {c:/tex/inputs/local/}%
+% }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{VMS (DECUS \TeX, PD VMS 3.6)}
+% This implementation does make |\openin| and |\input| look in the same
+% places. Acceptable settings are made by |ltdirchk.dtx|, and so this
+% file may be empty. The definitions below are therefore just for
+% information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@currdir{[]}
+% \let\input@path\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{VMS (???)}
+% Some VMS implementations have different paths
+% for |\openin| and |\input|. For these one could use definitions like
+% the following:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@currdir{[]}
+% \def\input@path{%
+% {tex_inputs:}%
+% {SOMEDISK:[SOME.TEX.DIRECTORY]}%
+% }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{MACINTOSH (OzTeX 1.6)}
+% This implementation does make |\openin| and |\input| look in the same
+% places. Acceptable settings are made by |ltdirchk.dtx|, and so this
+% file may be empty. The definitions below are therefore just for
+% information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@currdir{:}
+% \let\input@path\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{MACINTOSH (other)}
+% Some Macintosh implementations have different paths
+% for |\openin| and |\input|. For these one could use definitions like
+% the following (with whatever folders are used on your machine):
+% note that the directory names should end with |:|, and they should
+% contain {\em no\/} spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@currdir{:}
+% \def\input@path{%
+% {Hard-Disk:Applications:TeX:TeX-inputs:}%
+% {Hard-Disk:Applications:TeX:My-inputs:}%
+% }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{FAKE EXAMPLE}
+% This example is for an operating system that has filenames of the
+% form |<area>name| For maximum compatability with macro sets,
+% you want |name.ext| to be mapped to |<ext>name|.
+% and |<area>name.ext| to be mapped to |<area.ext>name|.
+% |\input| does this mapping automatically, but |\openin| does not, and
+% does not look in the same places as |\input|.
+% |<>name| is the desired `current directory' syntax.
+%
+% the following code would possibly work:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@dir#1#2 {%
+% \@d@r{#1}#2..\@nil}
+% \def\@d@r#1#2.#3.#4\@nil{%
+% <\ifx\@dir#1\@dir\else#1\ifx\@dir#3\@dir\else.\fi\fi#3>#2 }
+%
+% \def\@currdir{\@dir{}}
+% \def\input@path{%
+% {\@dir{area.one}}%
+% {\@dir{area.two}}%
+% }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%END
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\closeout15
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |texsys.cfg| did exist, then input it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+\typeout{** Using the existing texsys.cfg}
+\closein15
+\input texsys.cfg
+\fi
+%</docstrip>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If the stripped version of this file is being used (in latex2e.ltx)
+% then texsys.cfg should be there, so just input it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<dircheck>\input texsys.cfg
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v0.2f}{1994/01/20}
+% {\cs{@copytexsys} and the texsys.new file removed}
+%
+% \section{Setting \texttt{\cs{@currdir}}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@currdir}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \changes{v0.2e}{1994/01/19}
+% {name changed from \cs{test}}
+% This is a local definition of |\IfFileExists|. It tries to relocate
+% |texsxys.aux|. If it succeeds, then the |\@currdir| syntax has been
+% determined. If all the tests fail then |\@currdir| will be set to
+% |\@empty|, and |ltxcheck| will warn of this when it checks the format.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\count@\time
+\divide\count@ 60
+\count2=-\count@
+\multiply\count2 60
+\advance\count2 \time
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% The current date and time stamp.
+% \changes{v0.2g}{1994/01/21}
+% {Name changed from \cs{stamp}, to save memory}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\today{%
+ \the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day}:%
+ \two@digits{\the\count@}:\two@digits{\the\count2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Create a file |texsys.aux| (hopefully in the current directory),
+% then try to locate it again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\openout15=texsys.aux
+\immediate\write15{\today^^J}
+\immediate\closeout15 %
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% |#1| is the file to try, |#2| is what to do on success, |#3| on
+% failure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\IfFileExists#1#2#3{%
+ \openin\@inputcheck#1 %
+ \ifeof\@inputcheck
+ #3\relax
+ \else
+ \read\@inputcheck to \reserved@a
+ \ifx\reserved@a\today
+ \typeout{#1 found}#2\relax
+ \else
+ \typeout{BAD: old file \reserved@a (should be \today)}%
+ #3\relax
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \closein\@inputcheck}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endlinechar=-1
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If |\@currdir| has not been pre-defined in |texsys.cfg| then test for
+% UNIX, VMS and Oz-\TeX-Mac. syntax.
+% \changes{v0.2h}{1994/01/24}
+% {Stop testing once texsys.aux has been found}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@currdir\@undefined
+ \IfFileExists{./texsys.aux}{\gdef\@currdir{./}}%
+ {\IfFileExists{[]texsys.aux}{\gdef\@currdir{[]}}%
+ {\IfFileExists{:texsys.aux}{\gdef\@currdir{:}}{}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If it is still undefined at this point, all the above tests failed.
+% Earlier versions interactively prompted for a definition at this
+% point, but it seems impossible to reliably obtain information from
+% users at this point in the installation. This version of the file
+% produces a format with no user-interaction. Later if the format is not
+% suitable for the system, |texsys.cfg| may be edited and the format
+% re-made.
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/12/13}
+% {Removed interactive prompting for current directory syntax}
+% \changes{v0.2f}{1994/01/20}
+% {\cs{@copytexsys} removed}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1996/12/06}
+% {*** removed from various messages for GNU Make.
+% internal/2338}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@currdir\@undefined
+ \global\let\@currdir\@empty
+ \typeout{^^J^^J%
+ !! No syntax for the current directory could be found^^J%
+ }%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise |\@currdir| was defined in |texsys.cfg|. In this case check
+% that the syntax specified works on this system. (In case a complete
+% \LaTeX\ system has been copied from one system to another.) If the
+% test fails, give up. The installer should remove or correct the
+% offending |texsys.cfg| and try again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \IfFileExists{\@currdir texsys.aux}{}{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{\errhelp{%
+ texsys.cfg specifies the current directory syntax to be^^J%
+ \meaning\@currdir^^J%
+ but this does not work on this system.^^J%
+ Remove texsys.cfg and restart.}}\reserved@a
+ \errmessage{Bad texsys.cfg file: \noexpand\@currdir}\@@end}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The version of |\@currdir| in |texsys.cfg| looks OK.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.2d}{1994/01/14}
+% {Close the texsys.aux output stream}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\closeout15 %
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\typeout{^^J^^J%
+ \noexpand\@currdir set to:
+ \expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@currdir.^^J%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v0.2a}{1993/12/13}
+% {on the `docstrip' pass, do not check openin path}
+%
+% Stop here if the file is being used unstripped.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*docstrip>
+\relax\endinput
+%</docstrip>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Setting \texttt{\cs{input@path}}}
+%
+% Earlier versions of this file attempted to automatically test whether
+% |\input@path| was required, and interactively prompt for a path if
+% necessary. This was not found to be very reliable The first-time
+% installer of \LaTeXe\ can not be expected to have enough information
+% to supply the correct information to the prompts. Now the interaction
+% is omitted. After the format is made the installer can attempt to run
+% the test document |ltxcheck.tex| through \LaTeXe. This will check,
+% amongst other things, whether |texsys.cfg| will need to be edited and
+% the format remade.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\input@path}
+% Now set up the |\input@path|.
+%
+% |\input@path| should either be undefined, or a list of directories as
+% described in the introduction.
+% \changes{v0.2e}{1994/01/19}
+% {No longer check that an empty group is in the path}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^J%
+ Assuming \noexpand\openin and \noexpand\input^^J%
+ \ifx\input@path\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\input@path| has not been pre-defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ have the same search path.^^J%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\input@path| has been defined in |texsys.cfg|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ have different search paths.^^J%
+ LaTeX will use the path specified by \noexpand\input@path:^^J%
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Filename Parsing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\filename@parse}
+% Split a filename into its components.
+% \changes{v0.2g}{1994/01/21}
+% {Minor changes, and add Mac version (:)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\filename@parse\@undefined
+ \def\reserved@a{./}\ifx\@currdir\reserved@a
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\filename@parse| was not specified in |texsys.cfg|, but |\@currdir|
+% looks like UNIX\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^JDefining UNIX/DOS style filename parser.^^J}
+ \def\filename@parse#1{%
+ \let\filename@area\@empty
+ \expandafter\filename@path#1/\\}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Search for the last |/|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\filename@path#1/#2\\{%
+ \ifx\\#2\\%
+ \def\reserved@a{\filename@simple#1.\\}%
+ \else
+ \edef\filename@area{\filename@area#1/}%
+ \def\reserved@a{\filename@path#2\\}%
+ \fi
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else\def\reserved@a{[]}\ifx\@currdir\reserved@a
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\filename@parse| was not specified in |texsys.cfg|, but |\@currdir|
+% looks like VMS\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^JDefining VMS style filename parser.^^J}
+ \def\filename@parse#1{%
+ \let\filename@area\@empty
+ \expandafter\filename@path#1]\\}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Search for the last |]|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\filename@path#1]#2\\{%
+ \ifx\\#2\\%
+ \def\reserved@a{\filename@simple#1.\\}%
+ \else
+ \edef\filename@area{\filename@area#1]}%
+ \def\reserved@a{\filename@path#2\\}%
+ \fi
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else\def\reserved@a{:}\ifx\@currdir\reserved@a
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\filename@parse| was not specified in |texsys.cfg|, but |\@currdir|
+% looks like Macintosh\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^JDefining Mac style filename parser.^^J}
+ \def\filename@parse#1{%
+ \let\filename@area\@empty
+ \expandafter\filename@path#1:\\}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Search for the last |:|.
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/25}
+% {Mac parser had " typo for :}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\filename@path#1:#2\\{%
+ \ifx\\#2\\%
+ \def\reserved@a{\filename@simple#1.\\}%
+ \else
+ \edef\filename@area{\filename@area#1:}%
+ \def\reserved@a{\filename@path#2\\}%
+ \fi
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\filename@parse| was not specified in |texsys.cfg|.
+% So just make a simple parser that always sets |\filename@area| to
+% empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^JDefining generic filename parser.^^J}
+ \def\filename@parse#1{%
+ \let\filename@area\@empty
+ \expandafter\filename@simple#1.\\}
+ \fi\fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% |\filename@simple| is used by all three versions.
+% Finally we can split off the extension.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\filename@simple#1.#2\\{%
+ \ifx\\#2\\%
+ \let\filename@ext\relax
+ \else
+ \edef\filename@ext{\filename@dot#2\\}%
+ \fi
+ \edef\filename@base{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Remove a final dot, added earlier.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\filename@dot#1.\\{#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, |\filename@parse| was specified in |texsys.cfg|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \typeout{^^J^^J%
+ \noexpand\filename@parse was defined in texsys.cfg:^^J%
+ \expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\filename@parse.^^J%
+ }
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{\TeX\ Versions}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@TeXversion}
+% \TeX\ versions older than than 3.141 require |\@TeXversion| to be
+% set. This can be determined automatically due to a trick suggested
+% by Bernd Raichle. (Actually this will not always get the correct
+% version number, eg \TeX3.14 would be detected as \TeX3, but \LaTeX\
+% only needs to take account of \TeX's older than 3, or between 3 and
+% 3.14.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/10/11}
+% {Check for TeX3.14}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@TeXversion\@undefined
+ \ifx\@undefined\inputlineno
+ \def\@TeXversion{2}
+ \else
+ {\catcode`\^^J=\active
+ \def\reserved@a#1#2\@@{\if#1\string^3\fi}
+ \edef\reserved@a{\expandafter\reserved@a\string^^J\@@}
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@empty\else\gdef\@TeXversion{3}\fi}
+ \fi
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</dircheck>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{ltxcheck.tex}
+% After the format has been made, and article.cls moved with the
+% other files to the `standard input directory' as specified in
+% |install.txt|, the format may be checked by running the file
+% |ltxcheck.tex|.
+% \changes{v0.2f}{1994/01/20}
+% {Modify all of ltxcheck}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/10/11}
+% {Modify all of ltxcheck again}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1996/09/25}
+% {Move ltxcheck to separate file}
+%
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..98d3304df45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lterror.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,821 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: lterror.dtx
+%<def>\ProvidesFile{autoerr.sty}
+%<def> [1995/11/28 v1.2l LaTeX error autoload file]
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{lterror.dtx}
+ [1998/05/28 v1.2n LaTeX Kernel (errors)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{lterror.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{442}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/16}{(ASAJ) Split from ltinit.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/16}{(ASAJ) Completely new error interface.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/17}{(ASAJ) Moved error stuff from
+% ltdefns.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/05/20}{(ASAJ) Added \cs{@latex@info@no@line}.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/05/20}{(ASAJ) Added missing full stops.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/05/20}{(ASAJ) Fixed a bug with
+% \cs{@inmatherr}.}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/05/21}{(ASAJ) Made the error commands robust.}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1994/05/22}{(ASAJ) Replaced bgroup by begingroup in
+% error messages, to stop extra mathords creeping into math mode.}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/05/22}{(ASAJ) Replaced \cs{@generic@message} and
+% \cs{@generic@error} by \cs{GenericError}, \cs{GenericWarning} and
+% \cs{GenericInfo}.}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/05/22}{(ASAJ) Made \cs{GenericError},
+% \cs{GenericWarning} and \cs{GenericInfo} robust.}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/05/22}{(ASAJ) Replaced \cmd\\ and tilde by
+% \cs{MessageBreak} and \cs{space}.}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/05/22}{(ASAJ) Replaces \cs{string} by
+% \cs{protect} in some messages.}
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1994/05/24}{(DPC) wrap long lines}
+% \changes{v1.2h}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1995/09/01}
+% {Add autoload support}
+% \changes{v1.2j}{1995/10/09}
+% {Modify autoload support}
+%
+% \section{Error handling}
+%
+% This section defines \LaTeX's error commands.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% The `2ekernel' code ensures that a |\usepackage{autoerr}| is
+% essentially ignored if a `full' format is being used that has
+% the error messages already in the format.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<2ekernel>\expandafter\let\csname ver@autoerr.sty\endcsname\fmtversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{General commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak}
+% This command prints a new-line inside a message, followed by a
+% continuation line begun with |\@msg@continuation|. Normally it is
+% defined to be |\relax|, but inside messages, it is let to
+% |\@message@break|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MessageBreak\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{set@display@protect} to
+% \cs{Generic*} commands. ASAJ.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GenericInfo}
+% This takes two arguments: a continuation and a message, and sends
+% the result to the log file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\GenericInfo}[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\MessageBreak{^^J#1}%
+ \set@display@protect
+ \immediate\write\m@ne{#2\on@line.}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GenericWarning}
+% This takes two arguments: a continuation and a message, and sends
+% the result to the screen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\GenericWarning}[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\MessageBreak{^^J#1}%
+ \set@display@protect
+ \immediate\write\@unused{^^J#2\on@line.^^J}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\GenericError}
+% This macro takes four arguments: a continuation,
+% an error message, where to go for further information, and the help
+% information. It displays the error message, and sets the error help
+% (the result of typing |h| to the prompt), and does a horrible hack
+% to turn the last context line (which by default is the only context
+% line) into just three dots. This could be made more efficient.
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1994/05/22}
+% {(DPC) New version using long command name.}
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1994/05/22}
+% {(DPC) Alternative version added for old TeXs}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\def\GenericError{\@autoerr\GenericError}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\bgroup
+\lccode`\@=`\ %
+\lccode`\~=`\ %
+\lccode`\}=`\ %
+\lccode`\{=`\ %
+\lccode`\T=`\T%
+\lccode`\H=`\H%
+\catcode`\ =11\relax%
+\lowercase{%
+\egroup%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Unfortunately \TeX\ versions older than 3.141 have a bug which means
+% that |^^J| does not force a linebreak in |\message| and |\errmessage|
+% commands. So for these old \TeX's we use |\typeout| to produce the
+% message, and then have an empty |\errmessage| command. This causes an
+% extra line of the form
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%! .
+%\end{verbatim}
+% To appear on the terminal, but if you do not like it, you can always
+% upgrade your \TeX! In order for your format to use this version, you
+% must define the macro |\@TeXversion| to be the version number, e.g.,
+% 3.14 of the underlying \TeX. See the comments in
+% \texttt{ltdircheck.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\dimen@\ifx\@TeXversion\@undefined4\else\@TeXversion\fi\p@%
+\ifdim\dimen@>3.14\p@%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% First the `standard case'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\GenericError}[4]{%
+\begingroup%
+\immediate\write\@unused{}%
+\def\MessageBreak{^^J}%
+\set@display@protect%
+\edef%
+% %<-------------------do not delete this space!------------------->%
+\@err@ %
+{{#4}}%
+\errhelp
+% %<-------------------do not delete this space!------------------->%
+\@err@ %
+\let
+% %<-------------------do not delete this space!------------------->%
+\@err@ %
+\@empty
+\def\MessageBreak{^^J#1}%
+\def~{\errmessage{%
+#2.^^J^^J%
+#3^^J%
+Type H <return> for immediate help%
+% %<-------------------do not delete this space!------------------->%
+\@err@ %
+}}%
+~%
+\endgroup}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Secondly the version for old \TeX's.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\GenericError}[4]{%
+\begingroup%
+\immediate\write\@unused{}%
+\def\MessageBreak{^^J}%
+\set@display@protect%
+\edef%
+% %<-------------------do not delete this space!------------------->%
+\@err@ %
+{{#4}}%
+\errhelp
+% %<-------------------do not delete this space!------------------->%
+\@err@ %
+\let
+% %<-------------------do not delete this space!------------------->%
+\@err@ %
+\errmessage
+\def\MessageBreak{^^J#1}%
+\def~{\typeout{! %
+#2.^^J^^J%
+#3^^J%
+Type H <return> for immediate help.}%
+% %<-------------------do not delete this space!------------------->%
+\@err@ %
+{}}%
+~%
+\endgroup}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi}%
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageError}
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarning}
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarningNoLine}
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageInfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\ClassError}
+% \begin{macro}{\ClassWarning}
+% \begin{macro}{\ClassWarningNoLine}
+% \begin{macro}{\ClassInfo}
+% These commands are intended for use by package and class writers, to
+% give information to authors. The syntax is:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\PackageError{|\meta{package}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{error}|}{|\meta{help}|}| \\
+% |\PackageWarning{|\meta{package}|}{|\meta{warning}|}| \\
+% |\PackageWarningNoLine{|\meta{package}|}{|\meta{warning}|}| \\
+% |\PackageInfo{|\meta{package}|}{|\meta{info}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% and similarly for classes. The |Error| commands print the
+% \meta{error} message, and present the interactive prompt; if the
+% author types |h|, then the \meta{help} information is displayed.
+% The |Warning| commands produce a warning but do not present the
+% interactive prompt. The |WarningNoLine| commands do the same,
+% but don't print the input line number. The |Info| commands write
+% the message to the
+% |log| file. Within the messages, the command
+% |\MessageBreak| can be used to
+% break a line, |\protect| can be used to protect command names,
+% and |\space| is a space, for example:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand{\foo}{FOO}
+% \PackageWarning{ethel}{%
+% Your hovercraft is full of eels,\MessageBreak
+% and \protect\foo\space is \foo}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% produces:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% Package ethel warning: Your hovercraft is full of eels,
+% (ethel) and \foo is FOO on input line 54.
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\def\PackageError{\@autoerr\PackageError}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\gdef\PackageError#1#2#3{%
+ \GenericError{%
+ (#1)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ Package #1 Error: #2%
+ }{%
+ See the #1 package documentation for explanation.%
+ }{#3}%
+}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\PackageWarning#1#2{%
+ \GenericWarning{%
+ (#1)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ Package #1 Warning: #2%
+ }%
+}
+\def\PackageWarningNoLine#1#2{%
+ \PackageWarning{#1}{#2\@gobble}%
+}
+\def\PackageInfo#1#2{%
+ \GenericInfo{%
+ (#1) \@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ Package #1 Info: #2%
+ }%
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2l}{1995/11/28}
+% {Typo in autoload code /1985}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\def\ClassError{\@autoerr\ClassError}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\gdef\ClassError#1#2#3{%
+ \GenericError{%
+ (#1) \space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ Class #1 Error: #2%
+ }{%
+ See the #1 class documentation for explanation.%
+ }{#3}%
+}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\ClassWarning#1#2{%
+ \GenericWarning{%
+ (#1) \space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ Class #1 Warning: #2%
+ }%
+}
+\def\ClassWarningNoLine#1#2{%
+ \ClassWarning{#1}{#2\@gobble}%
+}
+\def\ClassInfo#1#2{%
+ \GenericInfo{%
+ (#1) \space\space\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ Class #1 Info: #2%
+ }%
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@latex@error}
+% \begin{macro}{\@latex@warning}
+% \begin{macro}{\@latex@warning@no@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\@latex@info}
+% \begin{macro}{\@latex@info@no@line}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1994/05/24}{Macro added}
+% Errors and other info, for use in the \LaTeX{} core.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\def\@latex@error{\@autoerr\@latex@error}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\gdef\@latex@error#1#2{%
+ \GenericError{%
+ \space\space\space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ LaTeX Error: #1%
+ }{%
+ See the LaTeX manual or LaTeX Companion for explanation.%
+ }{#2}%
+}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\@latex@warning#1{%
+ \GenericWarning{%
+ \space\space\space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ LaTeX Warning: #1%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@latex@warning@no@line#1{%
+ \@latex@warning{#1\@gobble}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@latex@info#1{%
+ \GenericInfo{%
+ \@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+ }{%
+ LaTeX Info: #1%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@latex@info@no@line#1{%
+ \@latex@info{#1\@gobble}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% |\@font@warning| and |\@font@info| are defined later since they
+% have to be redefined by the \texttt{tracefnt} package.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@font@warning#1{%
+% \GenericWarning{%
+% {(font)\@spaces\@spaces}%
+% {Font Warning: #1}%
+% }
+%\def\@font@info#1{%
+% \GenericInfo{%
+% (font)\space\@spaces
+% }{%
+% Font Info: #1%
+% }%
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@errorcontextlines}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% |\errorcontextlines| as a \LaTeX\ counter, so that it may be be
+% manipulated with |\setcounter| (once it is defined :-)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\c@errorcontextlines\errorcontextlines
+\c@errorcontextlines=-1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/03/28}
+% {Remove test for \cs{inputlineno} undefined.}
+% \begin{macro}{\on@line}
+% The message ` on input line~$n$', if possible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne
+ \let\on@line\@empty
+\else
+ \def\on@line{ on input line \the\inputlineno}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@warning}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@warning}
+% \begin{macro}{\@latexerr}
+% Older \LaTeX{} messages. For the moment, these
+% |\let| to the new message commands. They may be changed later,
+% once only obsolete packages and classes contain them.
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1993/12/03}{Set \cs{c@errorcontextlines} to -1}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1993/04/09}{Mention The Companion}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/04/11}{Remove setting of errorcontextlines}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/05/01}{(CAR) Added draft \cs{@latexinfo}.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/05/10}{(ASAJ) Added extra blank lines to
+% \cs{@latexerr}.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/05/11}
+% {(ASAJ) Removed one of the extra blank lines to \cs{@latexerr}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@warning\@latex@warning
+\let\@@warning\@latex@warning@no@line
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+\global\let\@latexerr\@latex@error
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@spaces}
+% Four spaces.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\@spaces{\space\space\space\space}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Specific errors}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@eha}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ehb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ehc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ehd}
+% The more common error help messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\gdef\@eha{%
+ Your command was ignored.\MessageBreak
+ Type \space I <command> <return> \space to replace it %
+ with another command,\MessageBreak
+ or \space <return> \space to continue without it.}
+\gdef\@ehb{%
+ You've lost some text. \space \@ehc}
+\gdef\@ehc{%
+ Try typing \space <return> %
+ \space to proceed.\MessageBreak
+ If that doesn't work, type \space X <return> \space to quit.}
+\gdef\@ehd{%
+ You're in trouble here. \space\@ehc}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As |\latex@error| triggers the autoload, these definitions
+% should not be needed in the autoload format, but just to be safe\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*autoload>
+\let\@eha\@empty\let\@ehb\@empty\let\@ehc\@empty\let\@ehd\@empty
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here are most of the error message-generating commands of \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macro}{\@autoerr}
+% Make this autoload command robust, as it may be read in at
+% unpredicatble times.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\def\@autoerr{\protect\@autoload{err}\protect}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@notdefinable}
+% Error message generated in |\@ifdefinable| from calls
+% to one of the commands |\newcommand|, |\newlength| or |\newtheorem|
+% specifying an already-defined command name or one that begins
+% |\end...|.
+% \changes{v1.2n}{1998/05/28}{Added message re `end...' pr/1555}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@notdefinable{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{%
+%<!autoload> Command \@backslashchar\reserved@a\space
+%<!autoload> already defined.\MessageBreak
+%<!autoload> Or name \@backslashchar\@qend... illegal,
+%<!autoload> see p.192 of the manual}\@eha}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@notdefinable}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nolnerr}
+% Generated by |\newline| and |\\| when called in vertical mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@nolnerr{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{There's no line here to end}\@eha}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@nolnerr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nocounterr}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/04/17}{New name for error message,
+% old error message (without arg) kept}
+% Generated by |\setcounter|, |\addtocounter| or
+% |\newcounter| if applied to an undefined counter \meta{cnt}.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nocnterr}
+% Obsolete error message generated in \LaTeX2.09 by
+% |\setcounter|, |\addtocounter| or |\newcounter|
+% for undefined counter.
+% DO NOT use for \LaTeXe\ it MIGHT vanish!
+% Use |\@nocounterr|\marg{cnt} instead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@nocounterr#1{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{No counter '#1' defined}\@eha}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@nocounterr}
+\gdef\@nocnterr{\@nocounterr?}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ctrerr}
+% Called when trying to print the value of a counter
+% numbered by letters that's greater than 26.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@ctrerr{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Counter too large}\@ehb}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@ctrerr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nodocument}
+% Error produced if paragraphs are typeset in the preamble.
+% \changes{v1.2m}{1996/11/04}{Always define \cs{@nodocument}
+% in kernel, so that it can be cleared by \cs{document}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!def>\gdef\@nodocument{%
+%<!def> \@latex@error{Missing \protect\begin{document}}\@ehd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@badend}
+% Called by |\end| that doesn't match its |\begin|.
+% RmS 1992/08/24: added code to |\@badend| to display position of
+% non-matching |\begin|.
+% FMi 1993/01/14: missing space added.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@badend#1{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{\protect\begin{\@currenvir}\@currenvline
+%<!autoload> \space ended by \protect\end{#1}}\@eha}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@badend}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@badmath}
+% Called by |\[|, |\]|, |\(| or |\)| when used in wrong mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@badmath{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Bad math environment delimiter}\@eha}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@badmath}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@toodeep}
+% Called by a list environment nested more than six levels
+% deep, or an enumerate or itemize nested more than four levels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@toodeep{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Too deeply nested}\@ehd}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@toodeep}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@badpoptabs}
+% Called by |\endtabbing| when not enough |\poptabs| have
+% occurred, or by |\poptabs| when too many have occurred.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@badpoptabs{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{\protect\pushtabs\space and \protect\poptabs
+%<!autoload> \space don't match}\@ehd}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@badpoptabs}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@badtab}
+% Called by |\>|, |\+| , |\-| or |\<| when stepping to an undefined tab.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@badtab{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Undefined tab position}\@ehd}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@badtab}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@preamerr}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1995/10/24}
+% {Modify autoload support}
+% This error is special: it appears in places where we normally have
+% to |\protect| expansions. However, to prevent a protection of
+% the error message itself (which would result in the message
+% getting printed not issued on the terminal) we need to locally
+% reset |\protect| to |\relax|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@preamerr#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\protect\relax
+%<*!autoload>
+ \@latex@error{\ifcase #1 Illegal character\or
+ Missing @-exp\or Missing p-arg\fi\space
+ in array arg}\@ehd
+%</!autoload>
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@preamerr{#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@badlinearg}
+% Occurs in |\line| and |\vector| command when a bad slope
+% argument is encountered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@badlinearg{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{%
+%<!autoload> Bad \protect\line\space or \protect\vector
+%<!autoload> \space argument}\@ehb}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@badlinearg}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@parmoderr}
+% Occurs in a float environment or a |\marginpar| when
+% encountered in inner vertical mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@parmoderr{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Not in outer par mode}\@ehb}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@parmoderr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fltovf}
+% Occurs in float environment or |\marginpar| when there
+% are no more free boxes for storing floats.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@fltovf{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Too many unprocessed floats}\@ehb}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@fltovf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@latexbug}
+% Occurs in output routine. This is bad news.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@latexbug{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{This may be a LaTeX bug}{Call for help}}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@latexbug}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@badcrerr}
+% This error was removed and replaced by |\@nolnerr|.
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/05/04}{Error message removed}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@badcrerr {\@latex@error{Bad use of \protect\\}\@ehc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@noitemerr}
+% |\addvspace| or |\addpenalty| was called when not in
+% vmode. Probably caused by a missing |\item|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@noitemerr{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Something's wrong--perhaps a missing %
+%<!autoload> \protect\item}\@ehc}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@noitemerr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@notprerr}
+% A command that can be used only in the preamble
+% appears after the command |\begin{document}|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@notprerr{%
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Can be used only in preamble}\@eha}
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@notprerr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@inmatherr}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/04/28}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/04/28}{Replaced \cs{noexpand} with \cs{protect}.}
+% Issued by commands that don't work correctly within math (like
+% |\item|). There is no real error recovery happening, e.g., the
+% user might get additional errors afterwards.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@inmatherr#1{%
+ \relax
+ \ifmmode
+%<!autoload> \@latex@error{Command \protect#1 invalid in math mode}\@ehc
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\@inmatherr#1%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@invalidchar}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/09/19}
+% {(RmS) Error message for invalid input characters.}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/03/28}
+% {(DPC) Comment out (use catcode15 instead)}
+% An error for use with invalid characters. This is commented
+% out, since we decided to use chatcode 15 instead.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@invalidchar{\@latex@error{Invalid character in input}\@ehc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% As well as the above error commands some error messages are directly
+% coded to save space. The Messages alrerady present in \LaTeX2.09
+% included:
+%
+% |Environment --- undefined|\\
+% Issued by |\begin| for undefined environment.
+%
+% |tab overflow|\\
+% Occurs in |\= when| maximum number of tabs exceeded.
+%
+% |\< in mid line|\\
+% Occurs in |\<| when it appears in middle of line.
+%
+% |Float(s) lost|\\
+% In output routine, caused by a float environment or
+% |\marginpar| occurring in inner vertical mode.
+%
+%\Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4df0e8dc266
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfiles.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,862 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfiles.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltfiles.dtx}
+ [1997/10/06 v1.1l LaTeX Kernel (File Handling)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltfiles.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{572}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/21}{Use new error commands}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1995/07/13}{Updates to docu}
+%
+% \section{File Handling}
+%
+% The following user commands are defined in this part:
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\document} (ie |\begin{document}|)\\
+% Reads in the .AUX files and |\catcode|'s |@| to 12.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\nofiles}\\
+% Suppresses all file output by setting |\@filesw| false.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\includeonly}\marg{NAME1, ... ,NAMEn}\\
+% Causes only parts NAME1, ... ,NAMEn to be read by
+% their |\include| commands. Works by setting \@partsw true
+% and setting |\@partlist| to NAME1, ... ,NAMEn.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\include}\marg{NAME}\\
+% Does an |\input| NAME unless |\@partsw| is true and
+% NAME is not in |\@partlist|. If |\@filesw| is true, then
+% it directs .AUX output to NAME.AUX, including a
+% checkpoint at the end.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\input}\marg{NAME}\\
+% The same as TeX's |\input|, except it allows optional
+% braces around the file name. In \LaTeXe, it also avoids
+% the primitive `missing file' error, if the file can not be
+% found.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\IfFileExists}\marg{NAME}\marg{then}\marg{else}\\
+% If the file exists on the system, execute \emph{then} otherwise
+% execute \emph{else}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\InputIfFileExists}\marg{NAME}\marg{then}\marg{else}\\
+% If the file exists on the system, execute \emph{then} and input
+% \emph{NAME} otherwise execute \emph{else}.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{Long lines wrapped to 72 columns}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\message{files,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% VARIABLES, SWITCHES AND INTERNAL COMMANDS:
+% \@mainaux : Output file number for main .AUX file.
+% \@partaux : Output file number for current part's .AUX file.
+% \@auxout : Either \@mainout or \@partout, depending on
+% which .AUX file output goes to.
+% \@input{foo} : If file foo exists, then \input's it,
+% otherwise types a warning message.
+% @filesw : Switch -- set false if no .AUX, .TOC, .IDX etc
+% files are to be written
+% @partsw : Set true by a \includeonly command.
+% \@partlist : Set to the argument of the \includeonly command.
+%
+% \cp@FOO : The checkpoint for \include'd file FOO.TEX, written
+% by \@writeckpt at the end of file FOO.AUX
+%
+%
+% \includeonly{FILELIST} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@partsw := T
+% \@partlist := FILELIST
+% END
+%
+% \include{FILE} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \clearpage
+% if \@filesw = T
+% then \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{FILE.AUX}}
+% fi
+% if \@partsw = T
+% then \@tempswa := F
+% \reserved@b == FILE
+% for \reserved@a := \@partlist
+% do if eval(\reserved@a) = eval(\reserved@b)
+% then \@tempswa := T fi
+% od
+% fi
+%
+% if \@tempswa = T
+% then \@auxout := \@partaux
+% if \@filesw = T
+% then \immediate\openout\@partaux{FILE.AUX}
+% \immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}
+% fi
+% \@input{FILE.TEX}
+% \clearpage
+% \@writeckpt{FILE}
+% if @filesw then \closeout \@partaux fi
+% \@auxout := \@mainaux
+% else \cp@FILE
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@writeckpt{FILE} ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@filesw = T
+% \immediate\write on file \@partaux:
+% \@setckpt{FILE}{ %% }
+% for \reserved@a := \cl@@ckpt
+% do \immediate\write on file \@partaux:
+% \global\string\setcounter
+% {eval(\reserved@a)}{eval(\c@eval(\reserved@a))}
+% od %% {
+% \immediate\write on file \@partaux: }
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@setckpt{FILE}{LIST} ==
+% BEGIN
+% G \cp@FILE := LIST
+% END
+%
+% INITIALIZATION
+% \@tempswa := T
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+%
+% \task{???}{Do we use @unused or mainaux?}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\@unused}
+% Allocate read stream for testing and output stream.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/11/07}
+% {move here from ltdefns, remove duplicate \cs{@mainaux}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newread\@inputcheck
+\newwrite\@unused
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mainaux}
+% \begin{macro}{\@partaux}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newwrite\@mainaux
+\newwrite\@partaux
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partsw}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@filesw \@fileswtrue
+\newif\if@partsw \@partswfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@clubpenalty}
+% This stores the current normal (non-infinite) value of
+% \cs{clubpenalty}; it should therefore be reset whenever the
+% normal value is changed (as in the bibliography in the standard
+% styles).
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1996/10/05}{Added setting its value}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@clubpenalty
+\@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\document}
+% \changes{v0.9e}{1993/12/09}{Hook added}
+% Cancel the |\begingroup| from |\begin|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\document{\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If some options on |\documentclass| haven't been used by any
+% package we will now give a warning since this is most certainly a
+% misspelling.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@unusedoptionlist\@empty\else
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{Unused global option(s):^^J%
+ \@spaces[\@unusedoptionlist]}%
+ \fi
+ \@colht\textheight
+ \@colroom\textheight \vsize\textheight
+ \columnwidth\textwidth
+ \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \advance\columnwidth -\columnsep
+ \divide\columnwidth\tw@ \hsize\columnwidth \@firstcolumntrue
+ \fi
+ \hsize\columnwidth \linewidth\hsize
+ \begingroup\@floatplacement\@dblfloatplacement
+ \makeatletter\let\@writefile\@gobbletwo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1995/10/24}
+% {Removed multiplelabels switch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \let \@multiplelabels \relax
+ \@input{\jobname.aux}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\openout\@mainaux\jobname.aux
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux{\relax}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Dateline 1991/03/26: FMi added |\process@table| to support NFSS;
+% This will also work with old lfonts if no other style defines
+% |\process@table|. The following line forces the initialization of
+% the math fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \process@table
+ \let\glb@currsize\@empty %% Force math initialization.
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.9t}{1994/01/31}
+% {set \cs{@normalsize} or \cs{normalsize} if necessary}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/03/28}
+% {(DPC) remove \cs{@normalsize check}}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/03/28}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{normalsize} not \cs{@normalsize}}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/13}{Added execution of \cs{every@size}}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/11/07}{Renamed \cs{every@size} to
+% \cs{every@math@size}.}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1995/04/25}
+% {Removed execution of \cs{every@size} latex/1407}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \normalsize
+ \everypar{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% So that punctuation in headings is not disturbed by verbatim
+% or other local changes to the space factor codes, save the document
+% default here. This will be locally reset by the output routine.
+% For special cases a class may want to define |\normalsfcodes|
+% directly, in case that definition will be used.
+% (This is an old bug, problem existed in \LaTeX2.0x and plain \TeX.)
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1997/04/14}
+% {Set the document space factor defaults. latex/2404}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\normalsfcodes\@empty
+ \ifnum\sfcode`\.=\@m
+ \let\normalsfcodes\frenchspacing
+ \else
+ \let\normalsfcodes\nonfrenchspacing
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Way back in 1991 (08/26) FMi \& RmS set the |\@noskipsec| switch
+% to true in the preamble and to false here.
+% This was done to trap lists and related text in the preamble but it
+% does not catch everything; hence Change 1.1g was introduced.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@noskipsecfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1995/10/24}
+% {Removed refundefined switch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \@refundefined \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Just before disabling the preamble commands we execute the begin
+% document hook which contains any code contributed by
+% |\AtBeginDocument|. Also disable the gathering of the file list,
+% if no |\listfiles| has been issued. |\AtBeginDocument| is redefined
+% at this point so that and such commands that get into the hook do
+% not chase their tail\ldots
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1996/04/24}
+% {(DPC) Reset \cs{AtBeginDocument} eg for latex/1297}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AtBeginDocument\@firstofone
+ \@begindocumenthook
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Most of the following assignments will be done globally in case
+% the user adds something like |\begin{multicols}| to the document
+% hook, i.e. starts are group in |\begin{document}|.
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/04/27}
+% {Added \cs{global} to support groups in hook}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/16}
+% {(DPC) directly add file list settings}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1995/08/16}{set \cs{topskip} globally}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1995/08/16}{set \cs{@maxdepth}}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/05/25}
+% {Added check for \cs{topskip} zero}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/25}
+% {Corrected typo}
+% Since a value of exactly 0pt for \cs{topskip} causes
+% \cs{twocolumn[]} to misbehave, we add this check, hoping
+% that it will not cause any problems elsewhere.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\topskip<1sp\global\topskip 1sp\relax\fi
+ \global\@maxdepth\maxdepth
+ \global\let\@begindocumenthook\@undefined
+ \ifx\@listfiles\@undefined
+ \global\let\@filelist\relax
+ \global\let\@addtofilelist\@gobble
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At the very end we disable all preamble commands. This has to
+% happen after the begin document hooks was executed so that this
+% hook can still use such commands.
+% \changes{v0.9o}{1994/01/15}
+% {move \cs{@preamblecmds} after document hook}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1995/08/16}{set \cs{do} globally}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\do##1{\global\let ##1\@notprerr}%
+ \@preamblecmds
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next line saves tokens and also allows |\@nodocument| to be
+% used directly to trap preamble errors.
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1996/09/29}{Added disabling of \cs{@nodocument}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let \@nodocument \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next line is a pure safety measure in case a do list is ever
+% expanded at the wrong place. In addition it will save a few
+% tokens to get rid of the above definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\do\noexpand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1995/12/05}{\cs{ignorespaces} added for latex/1933}
+% Use of |\AtBeginDocument| hook might mean that we are already in
+% horizontal mode, so ignore the space after |\begin{document}|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\document
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalsfcodes}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1997/04/14}
+% {Macro added (from patch file) latex/2404}
+% The setting of |\@empty| is just a flag. This command may be defined
+% in a class or package file. If it is still |\@empty| at
+% |\begin{document}| it will be defined to be |\frenchspacing| or
+% |\nonfrenchspacing|, depending on which of those appears to be in
+% effect at that point.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\normalsfcodes\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nofiles}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/11/04}
+% {Added setting of \cs{protected@write},
+% \cs{makeindex} and \cs{makeglossary} to \cs{nofiles}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/11/30}
+% {There is no \cs{@gobblethree}\ldots}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/25}
+% {(CAR) added \cs{long}}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1996/05/17}
+% {added \cs{write} to \cs{protected@write} for latex/2146}
+% Set |\@fileswfalse| which suppresses the places where \LaTeX\ makes
+% |\immediate| writes. The |\makeindex| and |\makeglossary| are
+% disabled. |\protected@write| is redefined not to write to the file
+% specified, but rather to write a blank line to the log file. This
+% ensures that a \meta{whatsit} node is still created, and so spacing
+% is not affected by the |\nofiles| command; to ensure this more
+% generally, the |\if@nobreak| test is needed.
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1996/11/05}
+% {Standard \cs{if@nobreak} test added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nofiles{%
+ \@fileswfalse
+ \typeout{No auxiliary output files.^^J}%
+ \long\def\protected@write##1##2##3%
+ {\write\m@ne{}\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
+ \let\makeindex\relax
+ \let\makeglossary\relax}
+\@onlypreamble\nofiles
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\protected@write}
+% This takes three arguments: an output stream, some initialization
+% code, and some text to write. It then writes this, with
+% appropriate handling of |\protect| and |\thepage|.
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/11/04}{Macro added ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/25}
+% {(CAR) added \cs{long}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \protected@write#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\thepage\relax
+ #2%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@auxout=\@mainaux
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\includeonly}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1995/04/22}{Allow blanks in argument}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\includeonly#1{%
+ \@partswtrue
+ \edef\@partlist{\zap@space#1 \@empty}}
+\@onlypreamble\includeonly
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\include}
+% \changes{v0.9p}{1994/01/18}
+% {Use \cs{@input@} so include files are listed.}
+% In the definition of |\include|, |\def\reserved@b| changed to
+% |\edef\reserved@b| to be consistent with the |\edef| in
+% |\includeonly|.
+% (Suggested by Rainer Sch\"opf \& Frank Mittelbach.
+% Change made 20 Jul 88.)
+%
+% Changed definition of |\include| to allow space at end of file name
+% --- otherwise, typing |\include{foo }| would cause \LaTeX\ to
+% overwrite |foo.tex|. Change made 24 May 89, suggested by Rainer
+% Sch\"opf and Frank Mittelbach
+%
+% Made |\include| check for being used inside an |\include|'d file, as
+% this will not work and cause surprising results.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\include#1{\relax
+ \ifnum\@auxout=\@partaux
+ \@latex@error{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha
+ \else \@include#1 \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@include}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@include#1 {%
+ \clearpage
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}%
+ \fi
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \if@partsw
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
+ \@for\reserved@a:=\@partlist\do
+ {\ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\@tempswatrue\fi}%
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+ \let\@auxout\@partaux
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux
+ \immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \@input@{#1.tex}%
+ \clearpage
+ \@writeckpt{#1}%
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\closeout\@partaux
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the file is not included, reset |\deadcycles|, so that a long
+% list of non-included files does not generate an `Output loop'
+% error.
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1997/01/08}{reset \cs{deadcycles} latex/2365}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \deadcycles\z@
+ \@nameuse{cp@#1}%
+ \fi
+ \let\@auxout\@mainaux}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@writeckpt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@writeckpt#1{%
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@partaux{\string\@setckpt{#1}\@charlb}%
+ {\let\@elt\@wckptelt \cl@@ckpt}%
+ \immediate\write\@partaux{\@charrb}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wckptelt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@wckptelt#1{%
+ \immediate\write\@partaux{%
+ \string\setcounter{#1}{\the\@nameuse{c@#1}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setckpt}
+% RmS 93/08/31: introduced |\@setckpt|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setckpt#1{\global\@namedef{cp@#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@charlb}
+% \begin{macro}{\@charrb}
+% The following defines |\@charlb| and |\@charrb| to be |{| and |}|,
+% respectively with |\catcode| 11.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
+\catcode`{=11 \catcode`}=11
+\gdef\@charlb[{]
+\gdef\@charrb[}]
+]% }brace matching
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Safe Input Macros}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \changes{v0.9b}{1993/12/04}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v0.9p}{1994/01/18}{New Definition}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/25}
+% {(CAR) added \cs{long}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \IfFileExists#1#2#3{%
+ \openin\@inputcheck#1 %
+ \ifeof\@inputcheck
+ \ifx\input@path\@undefined
+ \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+ \else
+ \def\reserved@a{\@iffileonpath{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \closein\@inputcheck
+ \edef\@filef@und{#1 }%
+ \def\reserved@a{#2}%
+ \fi
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iffileonpath}
+% If the file is not found by |\openin|, and |\input@path| is defined,
+% look in all the directories specified in |\input@path|.
+% \changes{v0.9p}{1994/01/18}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/02}
+% {\cs{@break@loop} renamed to \cs{@break@tfor}}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/25}
+% {(CAR) added \cs{long}}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1996/01/10}
+% {Change argument handling to not require doubled hash. latex/2024}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@iffileonpath#1{%
+ \let\reserved@a\@secondoftwo
+ \expandafter\@tfor\expandafter\reserved@b\expandafter
+ :\expandafter=\input@path\do{%
+ \openin\@inputcheck\reserved@b#1 %
+ \ifeof\@inputcheck\else
+ \edef\@filef@und{\reserved@b#1 }%
+ \let\reserved@a\@firstoftwo%
+ \closein\@inputcheck
+ \@break@tfor
+ \fi}%
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists}
+% \changes{v0.9b}
+% {1993/12/04}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v0.9p}
+% {1994/01/18}{New Definition}
+% \changes{v0.3b}{1994/03/13}
+% {Use new cmd \cs{@addtofilelist}}
+% Now define |\InputIfFileExists| to input |#1| if it seems to exist.
+% Immediately prior to the input, |#2| is executed.
+% If the file |#1| does not exist, execute `|#3|'.
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/05/25}
+% {(CAR) added \cs{long}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \InputIfFileExists#1#2{%
+ \IfFileExists{#1}%
+ {#2\@addtofilelist{#1}\@@input \@filef@und}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\input}
+% Input a file: if the argument is given in braces use safe input
+% macros, otherwise use \TeX's primitive |\input| command (which is
+% called |\@@input| in \LaTeX).
+% \changes{v0.9b}{1993/12/04}{Macro reimplemented}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\input{\@ifnextchar\bgroup\@iinput\@@input}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@iinput}
+% Define |\@iinput| (i.e., |\input|) in terms of
+% |\InputIfIfileExists|.
+% \changes{v0.9b}{1993/12/04}{Macro reimplemented}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@iinput#1{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1}{}%
+ {\filename@parse{#1}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\@missingfileerror
+ {\filename@area\filename@base}%
+ {\ifx\filename@ext\relax tex\else\filename@ext\fi}}%
+ \reserved@a}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \changes{v0.9b}{1993/12/04}{Macro reimplemented}
+% \changes{v0.9p}{1994/01/18}%
+% {do not use a different definition for \cs{input@path}}
+% Define |\@input| in terms of |\IfIfileExists|.
+% So this is a `safe input' command, but the files input are not
+% listed by |\listfiles|.
+%
+% We don't want |.aux|, |.toc| files etc be listed by |\listfiles|.
+% However, something like |.bbl| probably should be listed and thus
+% should be implemented not by |\@input|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@input#1{%
+ \IfFileExists{#1}{\@@input\@filef@und}{\typeout{No file #1.}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@input@}
+% \changes{v0.9p}{1994/01/18}{Macro added}
+% \task{???}{share code with `@input ?}
+% Version of |\@input| that does add the file to |\@filelist|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@input@#1{\InputIfFileExists{#1}{}{\typeout{No file #1.}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@missingfileerror}
+% This `error' command avoids \TeX's primitive missing file loop.
+%
+% Missing file error. Prompt for a new filename, offering a default
+% extension.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/21}
+% {Stop infinite looping on \cs{@er@ext}}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/28}
+% {Use filename parser from dircheck}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/03/15}
+% {Quit on x or X just like a real error}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/05/26}
+% {Modify message format}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/11/03}
+% {Move here from ltclass}
+% \changes{v1.0w}{1995/10/06}
+% {Autoload error}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<autoload>\def\@missingfileerror{\@autoerr\@missingfileerror}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+%<*2ekernel|autoerr>
+\gdef\@missingfileerror#1#2{%
+ \typeout{^^J! LaTeX Error: File `#1.#2' not found.^^J^^J%
+ Type X to quit or <RETURN> to proceed,^^J%
+ or enter new name. (Default extension: #2)^^J}%
+ \message{Enter file name: }%
+ {\endlinechar\m@ne
+ \global\read\m@ne to\@gtempa}%
+ \ifx\@gtempa\@empty
+ \else
+ \def\reserved@a{x}\ifx\reserved@a\@gtempa\batchmode\@@end\fi
+ \def\reserved@a{X}\ifx\reserved@a\@gtempa\batchmode\@@end\fi
+ \filename@parse\@gtempa
+ \edef\filename@ext{%
+ \ifx\filename@ext\relax#2\else\filename@ext\fi}%
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\InputIfFileExists
+ {\filename@area\filename@base.\filename@ext}%
+ {}%
+ {\noexpand\@missingfileerror
+ {\filename@area\filename@base}{\filename@ext}}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \fi}
+%</2ekernel|autoerr>
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@obsoletefile}
+% For compatibility with \LaTeX~2.09 document styles, we distribute
+% files called |article.sty|, |book.sty|, |report.sty|,
+% |slides.sty| and |letter.sty|. These use the command
+% |\@obsoletefile|, which produces a warning message.
+% \changes{v0.9m}{1993/12/20}{Added this command, removed
+% @oldfilewarning}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/02}{Make \cs{@onlypreamble}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@obsoletefile#1#2{%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{inputting `#1' instead of obsolete `#2'}}
+\@onlypreamble\@obsoletefile
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Listing files}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@filelist}
+% A list of files input so far. The initial value of |\@gobble| eats
+% the comma before the first file name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@filelist\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtofilelist}
+% Add to the list of files input so far.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/03/13}
+% {Macro added}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1995/10/01}
+% {Macro added}
+% This `real' definition is only used for `cfg' files during initex.
+% An initial definition of |\@gobble| has already been set.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@addtofilelist#1{\xdef\@filelist{\@filelist,#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listfiles}
+% A preamble command to cause |\end{document}| to list files input
+% from the main file.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}
+% {Removed checking for \cs{@unknownversion}}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/01/17}
+% {New Version, adds `.tex' if needed, and lines up columns}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/05/13}
+% {Stop \cs{listfiles} being run twice}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/10/18}
+% {code moved here from ltclass}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listfiles{%
+ \let\listfiles\relax
+ \def\@listfiles##1##2##3##4##5##6##7##8##9\@@{%
+ \def\reserved@d{\\}%
+ \@tfor\reserved@c:=##1##2##3##4##5##6##7##8\do{%
+ \ifx\reserved@c\reserved@d
+ \edef\filename@area{ \filename@area}%
+ \fi}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/11/30}
+% {Use \cs{@dofilelist}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@dofilelist{%
+ \typeout{^^J *File List*}%
+ \@for\@currname:=\@filelist\do{%
+ \filename@parse\@currname
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \filename@base.%
+ \ifx\filename@ext\relax tex\else\filename@ext\fi}%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@b
+ \csname ver@\reserved@a\endcsname
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@listfiles\expandafter
+ \filename@area\filename@base\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\@@
+ \typeout{%
+ \filename@area\reserved@a
+ \ifx\reserved@b\relax\else\@spaces\reserved@b\fi}}%
+ \typeout{ ***********^^J}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/03/13}
+% {Reset \cs{@addtofilelist} at begin document}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/03/16}
+% {Move this code directly into \cs{document}}
+% The |\@filelist| will be de-activated if |\listfiles| does not
+% appear in the preamble. |\begin{document}| contains code equivalent
+% to the following:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \AtBeginDocument{%
+% \ifx\@listfiles\@undefined
+% \let\@filelist\relax
+% \let\@addtofilelist\@gobble
+% \fi}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\listfiles
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dofilelist}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/11/30}
+% {Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@dofilelist\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3512b42a309
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfinal.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,631 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfinal.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltfinal.dtx}
+ [2003/10/13 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Final Settings)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltfinal.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{ltfinal.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{472}
+%
+% \section{Final settings}
+% This section contains the final settings for \LaTeX. It initialises
+% some debugging and typesetting parameters, sets the default
+% |\catcode|s and uc/lc codes, and inputs the hyphenation file.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{Remove oldcomments environment}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1994/04/21}{Added comments, set the catcodes of
+% 128--255.}
+% \changes{v0.1d}{1994/04/23}{Check that \cs{font@submax} is still zero}
+% \changes{v0.1e}{1994/05/02}{Set all the catcodes}
+% \changes{v0.1f}{1994/05/03}{Set the catcode of control-J to be
+% `other', for use in messages.}
+% \changes{v0.1g}{1994/05/05}{Added empty errhelp.}
+% \changes{v0.1h}{1994/05/13}{Added package ot1enc, and defined
+% \cs{@acci}, \cs{@accii} and \cs{@acciii}.}
+% \changes{v0.1j}{1994/05/18}{Corrected the lccode for d-bar.}
+% \changes{v0.1k}{1994/05/19}{Removed \cs{makeat...}}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/05/31}{Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/12/01}
+% {Renamed lthyphen.* to hyphen.*.}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/06/05}
+% {Added \cs{MakeUppercase} and \cs{MakeLowercase}.}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/06/06}
+% {Made \cs{MakeUppercase} and \cs{MakeLowercase} brace their
+% argument.}
+%
+% \subsection{Debugging}
+%
+% By default, \LaTeX{} shows statistics:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\tracingstats1
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Typesetting parameters}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}
+% These are penalties used internally.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@lowpenalty
+\newcount\@medpenalty
+\newcount\@highpenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% The default values of the picture and |\fbox| parameters:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\unitlength = 1pt
+\fboxsep = 3pt
+\fboxrule = .4pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The saved value of \TeX's |\maxdepth|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@maxdepth = \maxdepth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\vsize| initialized because a |\clearpage| with |\vsize < \topskip|
+% causes trouble.
+% |\@colroom| and |\@colht| also initialized because |\vsize| may be
+% set to them if a |\clearpage| is done before the |\begin{document}|
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\vsize = 1000pt
+\@colroom = \vsize
+\@colht = \vsize
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Initialise |\textheight| |\textwidth| and page style, to avoid
+% internal errors if they are not set by the class.
+% \changes{v0.1b}{1994/04/18}
+% {Initialise \cs{textheight}, \cs{textwidth} and page style}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\textheight=.5\maxdimen
+\textwidth=\textheight
+\ps@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Lccodes for hyphenation}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1998/05/20}{Set up lccodes before loading
+% hyphenation files: pr/2639}
+% We set things up so that hypehnation files can assume that the
+% default (T1) lccodes are in use (at present this also sets up the
+% uccodes).
+% We temporarily define |\reserved@a| to apply |\reserved@c| to
+% all the numbers in the range of its arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
+ \@tempcnta#1\relax
+ \@tempcntb#2\relax
+ \reserved@b
+}
+\def\reserved@b{%
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta>\@tempcntb\else
+ \reserved@c\@tempcnta
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \expandafter\reserved@b
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Depending on the \TeX{} version, we might not be allowed to do
+% this for non-ASCII characters.
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/06/09}{For \TeX2, do not set codes for higher
+% half of character table.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@c#1{%
+ \count@=#1\advance\count@ by -"20
+ \uccode#1=\count@
+ \lccode#1=#1
+}
+\reserved@a{`\a}{`\z}
+\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne\else
+ \reserved@a{"A0}{"BC}
+ \reserved@a{"E0}{"FF}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The upper case characters need their |\uccode| and |\lccode| values
+% set, and their |\sfcode| set to 999.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@c#1{%
+ \count@=#1\advance\count@ by "20
+ \uccode#1=#1
+ \lccode#1=\count@
+ \sfcode#1=999
+}
+\reserved@a{`\A}{`\Z}
+\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne\else
+ \reserved@a{"80}{"9C}
+ \reserved@a{"C0}{"DF}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Well, it would be nice if that were correct, but unfortunately, the
+% Cork encoding contains some odd slots whose uccode or lccode isn't
+% quite what you'd expect.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\uccode`\^^Y=`\I % dotless i
+\lccode`\^^Y=`\^^Y % dotless i
+\uccode`\^^Z=`\J % dotless j, ae in OT1
+\lccode`\^^Z=`\^^Z % dotless j, ae in OT1
+\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne\else
+ \lccode`\^^9d=`\i % dotted I
+ \uccode`\^^9d=`\^^9d % dotted I
+ \lccode`\^^9e=`\^^9e % d-bar
+ \uccode`\^^9e=`\^^d0 % d-bar
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally here is one that helps hyphenation in the OT1 encoding.
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1996/10/31}
+% {Added extra \cs{lcode}, hoping it does no harm in T1 (pr/1969)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\lccode`\^^[=`\^^[ % oe in OT1
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And we also set the |\lccode| of |\-| and |\textcompwordmark| so
+% that they do not prevent hyphenation in the remainder of the word
+% (as suggested by Lars Helstr\"om).
+% \changes{v1.1e}{2003/10/13}
+% {Added extra \cs{lccode} for \cs{-} and \cs{textcompwordmark}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\lccode`\- =`\- % default hyphen char
+\lccode 127=127 % alternate hyphen char
+\lccode 23 =23 % textcompwordmark in T1
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Hyphenation}
+%
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{move code here from lhyphen.dtx}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}
+% {use \cs{InputIfFileExists} not \cs{IfFileExists}}
+% \changes{v1.0x}{1995/11/01}
+% {(DPC) Switch meaning of \cs{@addtofilelist} for cfg files}%
+% The following code will be compiled into the format file. It checks
+% for the existance of \texttt{hyphen.cfg} in inputs that file if
+% found. Otherwise it inputs \texttt{hyphen.ltx}. Note that these
+% are loaded in \emph{before} the |\catcode|s are set, so local
+% hyphenation files can use 8-bit input.
+%
+% We try to load the customized hyphenation description file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{hyphen.cfg}
+ {\typeout{===========================================^^J%
+ Local configuration file hyphen.cfg used^^J%
+ ===========================================}%
+ \def\@addtofilelist##1{\xdef\@filelist{\@filelist,##1}}%
+ }
+ {\input{hyphen.ltx}}
+\let\@addtofilelist\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Font loading}
+% Fonts loaded during the formatting process might already have
+% changed the |\font@submax| from |0pt| to something higher.
+% If so, we put out a bold warning.
+% \changes{v0.1l}{1994/05/20}{Use new font warning commands}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{2000/08/23}{Fix typo in warning}
+\ifdim \font@submax >\z@
+ \@font@warning{Size substitutions with differences\MessageBreak
+ up to \font@submax\space have occurred.\MessageBreak
+ \MessageBreak
+ Please check the transcript file
+ carefully\MessageBreak
+ and redo the format generation if necessary!
+ \@gobbletwo}%
+ \errhelp{Only stopped, to give you time to
+ read the above message.}
+ \errmessage{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We reset the macro. Otherwise every user will get a warning on
+% every job.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\font@submax{0pt}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Input encoding}
+%
+% We temporarily define |\reserved@a| to apply |\reserved@c| to all the
+% numbers in the range of its arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
+ \@tempcnta#1\relax
+ \@tempcntb#2\relax
+ \reserved@b
+}
+\def\reserved@b{%
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta>\@tempcntb\else
+ \reserved@c\@tempcnta
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \expandafter\reserved@b
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.1e}{1994/05/02}{Added setting the special catcodes.}
+% \changes{v0.1f}{1994/05/02}{Set the catcode of control-J.}
+% Set the special catcodes (although some of these are useless, since an
+% error will have occurred if the catcodes have changed). Note that
+% |^^J| has catcode `other' for use in warning messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode`\ =10
+\catcode`\#=6
+\catcode`\$=3
+\catcode`\%=14
+\catcode`\&=4
+\catcode`\\=0
+\catcode`\^=7
+\catcode`\_=8
+\catcode`\{=1
+\catcode`\}=2
+\catcode`\~=13
+\catcode`\@=11
+\catcode`\^^I=10
+\catcode`\^^J=12
+\catcode`\^^L=13
+\catcode`\^^M=5
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.1e}{1994/05/02}{Added setting the `other' catcodes.}
+% Set the `other' catcodes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@c#1{\catcode#1=12\relax}
+\reserved@c{`\!}
+\reserved@c{`\"}
+\reserved@a{`\'}{`\?}
+\reserved@c{`\[}
+\reserved@c{`\]}
+\reserved@c{`\`}
+\reserved@c{`\|}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.1e}{1994/05/02}{Added setting the `letter' catcodes.}
+% Set the `letter' catcodes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@c#1{\catcode#1=11\relax}
+\reserved@a{`\A}{`\Z}
+\reserved@a{`\a}{`\z}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v0.1e}{1994/05/02}{Made slot 127 illegal}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/11/18}
+% {re-allow slots 127--255}
+% All the characters in the range 0--31 and 127--255 are illegal,
+% \emph{except} tab (|^^I|), nl (|^^J|), ff (|^^L|) and cr (|^^M|).
+%
+% Now allow 8-bit characters, although their use in this way is
+% strongly discouraged. See |inputenc.dtx| for a supported mechanism
+% for 8-bit input.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@c#1{\catcode#1=15\relax}
+\reserved@a{0}{`\^^H}
+\reserved@c{`\^^K}
+\reserved@a{`\^^N}{31}
+%\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne
+ \catcode"7F=15
+%\else
+% \reserved@a{"7F}{"FF}
+%\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Lccodes and uccodes}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1998/05/20}{Set up uc/lccodes after loading
+% hyphenation files: pr/2639}
+% We now again set up the default (T1) uc/lccodes.
+% The lower case characters need their |\uccode| and |\lccode| values
+% set. Some of this is a repeat of the set-up before loading
+% hyphenation files.
+% Depending on the \TeX{} version, we might not be allowed to do
+% this for non-ASCII characters.
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/06/09}{For \TeX2, do not set codes for higher
+% half of character table.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@c#1{%
+ \count@=#1\advance\count@ by -"20
+ \uccode#1=\count@
+ \lccode#1=#1
+}
+\reserved@a{`\a}{`\z}
+\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne\else
+ \reserved@a{"A0}{"BC}
+ \reserved@a{"E0}{"FF}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The upper case characters need their |\uccode| and |\lccode| values
+% set, and their |\sfcode| set to 999.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reserved@c#1{%
+ \count@=#1\advance\count@ by "20
+ \uccode#1=#1
+ \lccode#1=\count@
+ \sfcode#1=999
+}
+\reserved@a{`\A}{`\Z}
+\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne\else
+ \reserved@a{"80}{"9C}
+ \reserved@a{"C0}{"DF}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Well, it would be nice if that were correct, but unfortunately, the
+% Cork encoding contains some odd slots whose uccode or lccode isn't
+% quite what you'd expect.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\uccode`\^^Y=`\I % dotless i
+\lccode`\^^Y=`\^^Y % dotless i
+\uccode`\^^Z=`\J % dotless j, ae in OT1
+\lccode`\^^Z=`\^^Z % dotless j, ae in OT1
+\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne\else
+ \lccode`\^^9d=`\i % dotted I
+ \uccode`\^^9d=`\^^9d % dotted I
+ \lccode`\^^9e=`\^^9e % d-bar
+ \uccode`\^^9e=`\^^d0 % d-bar
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally here is one that helps hyphenation in the OT1 encoding.
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1996/10/31}
+% {Added extra \cs{lcode}, hoping it does no harm in T1 (pr/1969)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\lccode`\^^[=`\^^[ % oe in OT1
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
+% \begin{macro}{\@uclclist}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1997/10/20}{Removed \cs{aa} and \cs{AA} from
+% \cs{@uclclist} as these are macros.}
+%
+% And whilst we're doing things with uc/lc tables, here are two
+% commands to upper- and lower-case a string.
+%
+% \emph{Note} that this implementation is subject to change! At
+% the moment we're not providing any way to extend the list of
+% uc/lc commands, since finding a good interface is difficult.
+% These commands have some nasty features, such as uppercasing
+% mathematics, environment names, labels, etc. A much better
+% long-term solution is to use all-caps fonts, but these aren't
+% generally available.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\MakeUppercase}[1]{{%
+ \def\i{I}\def\j{J}%
+ \def\reserved@a##1##2{\let##1##2\reserved@a}%
+ \expandafter\reserved@a\@uclclist\reserved@b{\reserved@b\@gobble}%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{\uppercase{#1}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ }}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\MakeLowercase}[1]{{%
+ \def\reserved@a##1##2{\let##2##1\reserved@a}%
+ \expandafter\reserved@a\@uclclist\reserved@b{\reserved@b\@gobble}%
+ \protected@edef\reserved@a{\lowercase{#1}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ }}
+\def\@uclclist{\oe\OE\o\O\ae\AE
+ \dh\DH\dj\DJ\l\L\ng\NG\ss\SS\th\TH}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The above code works, but has the nasty side-effect that if you
+% say something like:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \markboth{\MakeUppercase\contentsname}
+% {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% then the uppercasing is only done to the first letter of the
+% contents name, since the mark expands out to:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \mark{\protect\MakeUppercase Table of Contents}
+% {\protect\MakeUppercase Table of Contents}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% In order to get round this, we redefine |\MakeUppercase| and
+% |\MakeLowercase| to grab their argument and brace it. This is a
+% very low-level hack, and is \emph{not} recommended practice!
+% This is an instance of a general problem that makes it unsafe to
+% grab arguments unbraced, and probably needs a more general
+% solution. For the moment though, this hack will do:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\protected@edef\MakeUppercase#1{\MakeUppercase{#1}}
+\protected@edef\MakeLowercase#1{\MakeLowercase{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/13}{Added output enc stuff}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/05/16}{moved output enc stuff to lfonts}
+%
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{Add code from the old dump.dtx}
+%
+% \subsection{Applying Patch files}
+% Between major releases, small patches will be distributed in
+% files |ltpatch.ltx| which must be added at this point.
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/06/08}{Add patch file system}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\IfFileExists{ltpatch.ltx}
+ {\typeout{=================================^^J%
+ Applying patch file ltpatch.ltx^^J%
+ =================================}
+ \def\fmtversion@topatch{unknown}
+ \input{ltpatch.ltx}
+ \ifx\fmtversion\fmtversion@topatch
+ \ifx\patch@level\@undefined
+ \typeout{^^J^^J^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J%
+ !! Patch file `ltpatch.ltx' not suitable for this^^J%
+ !! version of LaTeX.^^J^^J%
+ !! Please check if initex found an old patch file:^^J%
+ !! --- if so, rename it or delete it, and redo the^^J%
+ !! initex run.^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J}%
+ \batchmode \@@end
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1995/04/21}
+% {Allow initial patch level 0}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/06/13}
+% {Add patch level string more carefully}
+% The code below adds the `patch level' string to the first |\typeout|
+% in the startup banner.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\fmtversion@topatch{0}%
+ \ifx\fmtversion@topatch\patch@level\else
+ \def\reserved@a\typeout##1##2\reserved@a{%
+ \typeout{##1 patch level \patch@level}##2}
+ \everyjob\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\reserved@a\the\everyjob\reserved@a}
+ \let\reserved@a\relax
+ \the\everyjob
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \typeout{^^J^^J^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J%
+ !! Patch file `ltpatch.ltx' (for version <\fmtversion@topatch>)^^J%
+ !! is not suitable for version <\fmtversion> of LaTeX.^^J^^J%
+ !! Please check if initex found an old patch file:^^J%
+ !! --- if so, rename it or delete it, and redo the^^J%
+ !! initex run.^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J}%
+ \batchmode \@@end
+ \fi
+ \let\fmtversion@topatch\relax
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Freeing Memory}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\reserved@a}
+% \begin{macro}{\reserved@b}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1995/10/17}{reset here after the \cs{input} above}
+% And just to make sure nobody relies on those definitions of
+% |\reserved@b| and friends.
+% These macros are reserved for use in the kernel. \emph{Do not use
+% them as general scratch macros}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\reserved@a\@filelist
+\let\reserved@b=\@undefined
+\let\reserved@c=\@undefined
+\let\reserved@d=\@undefined
+\let\reserved@e=\@undefined
+\let\reserved@f=\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\toks}
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1996/07/10}
+% {Free up memory from scratch registers /2213}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\toks0{}
+\toks2{}
+\toks4{}
+\toks6{}
+\toks8{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\errhelp}
+% \changes{v0.1g}{1994/05/05}{Set error help empty.}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{2000/09/01}{Set error help empty at very end
+% (pr/449 done correctly).}
+% Empty the error help message, which may have some rubbish:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\errhelp{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Initialise file list}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@providesfile}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1995/10/17}{reset macro}
+% Initialise for use in the document. During initex a modified version
+% has been used which leaves debugging information for |latexbug.tex|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@providesfile#1[#2]{%
+ \wlog{File: #1 #2}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1\endcsname{#2}%
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@filelist}
+% \changes{v1.0w}{1995/10/19}{Move after \cs{reserved@a} setting:-)}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtofilelist}
+% Reset |\@filelist| so files input while making the format are not
+% listed. The list built up so far may take up a lot of memory and so
+% it is moved to |\reserved@a| where it will be overwritten as soon
+% as almost any \LaTeX\ command is issued in a class file.
+% However the |latexbug.tex| program will be able to access this
+% information and insert it into a bug report.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@filelist\@gobble
+\def\@addtofilelist#1{\xdef\@filelist{\@filelist,#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Dumping the format}
+% Finally we make |@| into a letter, ensure the format will
+% be in the `normal' error mode, and dump everything into the
+% format file.
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/06/13}
+% {Call \cs{errorstopmode}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatother
+\errorstopmode
+\dump
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d10264e56fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfloat.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1314 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfloat.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltfloat.dtx}[2002/10/01 v1.1v LaTeX Kernel (Floats)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltfloat.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{636}
+%
+% \section{Floats}
+%
+% The different types of floats are identified by a \meta{type} name,
+% which is the name of the counter for that kind of float. For
+% example, figures are of type `figure' and tables are of type `table'.
+% Each \meta{type} has associated a positive \meta{type number}, which
+% is a power of two. E.g.,\\
+% figures might be have type number~1, tables type number~2, programs
+% type number~4, etc.
+%
+% The locations where a float can go are specified by a
+% \meta{placement specifier}, which is a list of the possible
+% locations, each denoted by a letter as follows:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{l@{ : }l@{ --- }l}
+% h & here & at the current location in the text.\\
+% t & top & at the top of a text page.\\
+% b & bottom & at the bottom of a text page.\\
+% p & page & on a separate float page
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% In addition, in conjunction with these, you can use `!' which means
+% that the current values of the float positioning parameters are
+% ignored for this float. (Has no effect on `p', float page
+% positioning.)
+% For example, `pht' specifies that the float can appear in any of
+% three locations: page, here or top.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/04}{Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/28}{Split further from ltherest.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/25}{Changed warning messages}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/25}{Removed obsolete tracing code}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/03}
+% {(CAR) Added \cs{@largefloatcheck}}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/03}{Removed unnecessary braces from
+% arguments of \cs{@ifnextchar}}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/05/22}{Use new warning commands}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Some temps reinserted temporarily}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/11/28}{documentation fixes}
+% \changes{v1.1s}{1997/06/16}{documentation fixes}
+%
+% \subsection{Floating Environments}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{floats,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% Where floats may appear on a page, and how many may appear there
+% are specified by the following float placement parameters. The
+% numbers are named like counters so the user can set them with
+% the ordinary counter-setting commands.
+%
+% \c@topnumber : Number of floats allowed at the top of a column.
+% \topfraction : Fraction of column that can be devoted to floats.
+% \c@dbltopnumber, \dbltopfraction
+% : Same as above, but for double-column floats.
+% \c@bottomnumber, \bottomfraction
+% : Same as above for bottom of page.
+% \c@totalnumber : Number of floats allowed in a single column,
+% including in-text floats.
+% \textfraction :Minimum fraction of column that must contain text.
+% \floatpagefraction: Minimum fraction of page that must be taken
+% up by float page.
+% \dblfloatpagefraction
+% : Same as above, for double-column floats.
+%
+% The document style must define the following.
+%
+% \fps@TYPE : The default placement specifier for floats of type
+% TYPE.
+%
+% \ftype@TYPE : The type number for floats of type TYPE.
+%
+% \ext@TYPE : The file extension indicating the file on which the
+% contents list for float type TYPE is stored.
+% For example, \ext@figure = 'lof'.
+%
+% \fnum@TYPE : A macro to generate the figure number for a caption.
+% For example, \fnum@TYPE == Figure \thefigure.
+%
+% \@makecaption{NUM}{TEXT} :
+% A macro to make a caption, with NUM the value
+% produced by \fnum@... and TEXT the text of the caption.
+% It can assume it's in a \parbox of the appropriate width.
+%
+% \@float{TYPE}[PLACEMENT] : This macro begins a float environment for a
+% single-column float of type TYPE with PLACEMENT as the placement
+% specifier. The default value of PLACEMENT is defined by
+% \fps@TYPE. The environment is ended by \end@float.
+% E.g., \figure == \@float{figure}, \endfigure == \end@float.
+%
+% \@float{TYPE}[PLACEMENT] ==
+% BEGIN
+% if hmode then \@bsphack
+% \@floatpenalty := -10002
+% else \@floatpenalty := -10003
+% fi
+% \@captype ==L TYPE
+% \@dblflset
+% \@fps ==L PLACEMENT
+% \@onelevel@sanitize \@fps
+% add default PLACEMENT if at most ! in PLACEMENT == \@fpsadddefault
+% if inner
+% then LaTeX Error: 'Not in outer paragraph mode.'
+% \@floatpenalty := 0
+% else if \@freelist nonempty
+% then \@currbox :=L head of \@freelist
+% \@freelist :=G tail of \@freelist
+% \count\@currbox :=G 32*\ftype@TYPE +
+% bits determined by PLACEMENT
+% else \@floatpenalty := 0
+% LaTeX Error: 'Too many unprocessed floats'
+% fi
+% fi
+% \@currbox :=G \color@vbox
+% \normalcolor
+% \vbox{
+% %% 15 Dec 87 --
+% %% removed \boxmaxdepth :=L 0pt
+% %% that made box 0 depth because it screwed
+% %% things up. Instead, added \vskip0pt at end
+% \hsize = \columnwidth
+% \@parboxrestore
+% \@floatboxreset
+% END
+%
+% \caption ==
+% BEGIN
+% \refstepcounter{\@captype}
+% \@dblarg{\@caption{\@captype}}
+% END
+%
+% In following definition, \par moved from after \addcontentsline to
+% before \addcontentsline because the \write could cause
+% an extra blank line to be added to the paragraph above the
+% caption. (Change made 12 Jun 87)
+%
+% \@caption{TYPE}[STEXT]{TEXT} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \par
+% \addcontentsline{\ext@TYPE}{TYPE}{\numberline{\theTYPE}{STEXT}}
+% \begingroup
+% \@parboxrestore
+% \@normalsize
+% \@makecaption{\fnum@TYPE}{TEXT}
+% \par
+% \endgroup
+% END
+%
+%
+% \@dblfloat{TYPE}[PLACEMENT] : Macro to begin a float environment for
+% a double-column float of type TYPE with PLACEMENT as the placement
+% specifier. The default value of PLACEMENT is 'tp'
+% The environment is ended by \end@dblfloat.
+% E.g., \figure* == \@dblfloat{figure},
+% \endfigure* == \end@dblfloat.
+%
+% \@dblfloat{TYPE}[PLACEMENT] ==
+% Identical to \@float{TYPE}[PLACEMENT] except \hsize and \linewidth
+% are set to \textwidth.
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@floatpenalty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@floatpenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\caption}
+%
+% This is set to be an error message outside a float since no
+% captype is defined there; this may need to be changed by some
+% classes.
+% \changes{v1.1u}{1999/04/19}
+% {Made caption an error oustside a float: latex/2815}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\caption{%
+ \ifx\@captype\@undefined
+ \@latex@error{\noexpand\caption outside float}\@ehd
+ \expandafter\@gobble
+ \else
+ \refstepcounter\@captype
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \fi
+ {\@dblarg{\@caption\@captype}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/28}
+% {Use \cs{normalsize} not \cs{@normalsize}}
+% \changes{v1.1r}{1996/12/06}
+% {Call \cs{@setminpage} if needed. latex/2318}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{%
+ \par
+ \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}%
+ {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The paragraph setting parameters are normalised at this point, however
+% |\@parboxrestore| resets |\everypar| which is not correct in this
+% context so |\@setminipage| is called if needed.
+%
+% The float mechanism, like minipage, sets the flag |@minipage| true
+% before executing the user-supplied text. Many \LaTeX\ constructs
+% test for this flag and do not add vertical space when it is true.
+% The intention is that this emulates \TeX's `top of page' behaviour.
+% The flag must be set false at the start of the first paragraph. This
+% is achieved by a redefinition of |\everypar|, but the call to
+% |\@parboxrestore| removes that redefinition, so it is re-inserted
+% if needed. If the flag is already false then the |\caption| was not
+% the first entry in the float, and so some other paragraph has already
+% activated the special |\everypar|. In this case no further action is
+% needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \if@minipage
+ \@setminipage
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \normalsize
+ \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblflset}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Macro removed temporarily}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {Major changes to parameter parsing, setting of local variables,
+% etc; two-column and one-column cases merged; space hacks moved}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Add compatibility with old version of \cs{@xfloat}.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Old version reinstated temporarily}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@float#1{%
+ \@ifnextchar[%
+ {\@xfloat{#1}}%
+ {\edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\@xfloat{#1}[\csname fps@#1\endcsname]}%
+ \reserved@a}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfloat}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {Major changes since two-column and one-column cases merged}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Old version reinstated temporarily}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dblfloat{%
+ \if@twocolumn\let\reserved@a\@dbflt\else\let\reserved@a\@float\fi
+ \reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@dbl}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Macro removed temporarily}
+% Note that all double floats have default fps `tp'.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setfps}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Add compatibility with old version of \cs{@xfloat}.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Macro removed temporarily}
+% This sets the fps, dealing with error conditions by adding
+% the default.
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/01/21}{Added missing percent characters.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {Major changes, removing setting of local variables, space hacks
+% etc; two-column and one-column cases merged}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Add compatibility with old version of \cs{@xfloat}: but the
+% arguments, provided at exorbitant cost, are now completely
+% ignored}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}
+% {Missing percents reinserted after 4, 8: these are not numbers.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Old version reinstated temporarily}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Sanitisation added temporarily}
+% The first part of this sets the count register that stores all
+% the information about the type and fps of the float.
+%
+% We assume here that the default specifiers already contain no
+% active characters.
+%
+% It may be better to store the defaults as numbers, rather than
+% symbol strings.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1p}{1996/10/24}{Added \cs{@nodocument} to trap
+% floats in the preamble}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xfloat #1[#2]{%
+ \@nodocument
+ \def \@captype {#1}%
+ \def \@fps {#2}%
+ \@onelevel@sanitize \@fps
+ \def \reserved@b {!}%
+ \ifx \reserved@b \@fps
+ \@fpsadddefault
+ \else
+ \ifx \@fps \@empty
+ \@fpsadddefault
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifhmode
+ \@bsphack
+ \@floatpenalty -\@Mii
+ \else
+ \@floatpenalty-\@Miii
+ \fi
+ \ifinner
+ \@parmoderr\@floatpenalty\z@
+ \else
+ \@next\@currbox\@freelist
+ {%
+ \@tempcnta \sixt@@n
+ \expandafter \@tfor \expandafter \reserved@a
+ \expandafter :\expandafter =\@fps
+ \do
+ {%
+ \if \reserved@a h%
+ \ifodd \@tempcnta
+ \else
+ \advance \@tempcnta \@ne
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if \reserved@a t%
+ \@setfpsbit \tw@
+ \fi
+ \if \reserved@a b%
+ \@setfpsbit 4%
+ \fi
+ \if \reserved@a p%
+ \@setfpsbit 8%
+ \fi
+ \if \reserved@a !%
+ \ifnum \@tempcnta>15
+ \advance\@tempcnta -\sixt@@n\relax
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \@tempcntb \csname ftype@\@captype \endcsname
+ \multiply \@tempcntb \@xxxii
+ \advance \@tempcnta \@tempcntb
+ \global \count\@currbox \@tempcnta
+ }%
+ \@fltovf
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The remainder sets up the box in which the float is typeset, and
+% the typesetting environment to be used. It is essential to have
+% the extra box to avoid the unwanted space that would otherwise
+% often be put at the top of the float.
+%
+% It ends with a hook; not sure how useful this is but it is needed
+% at present to deal with double-column floats.
+% \task{CAR?}{Sort out hooks}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}
+% {(DPC) Extra group for colour}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/14}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{color@begingroup}}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/13}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{normalcolor}}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Extra box added to remove colour resetting from vmode}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}{Reset hook added}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Use new \cs{color@hbox} concept.}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}
+% {Changed to \cs{color@vbox} so that large floats overflow
+% at the bottom}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Use \cs{@setnobreak}}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Added \cs{@setminipage}}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Added resetting of size and font}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1995/05/25}{(CAR) Resettings moved to hook}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \setbox\@currbox
+ \color@vbox
+ \normalcolor
+ \vbox \bgroup
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \@floatboxreset
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@floatboxreset}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}{Macro added}
+%
+% The rational for allowing these normally global flags to be set
+% locally here, via |\@parboxrestore|, was stated originally by
+% Donald Arseneau and extended by Chris Rowley.
+% It is because these flags are only set globally to
+% true by section commands, and these should never appear within
+% marginals or floats or, indeed, in any group; and they are only ever
+% set globally to false when they are definitely true.
+%
+% If anyone is unhappy with this argument then both flags should be
+% treated as in |\set@nobreak|; otherwise this command will be
+% redundant.
+% \changes{v1.1p}{1996/10/24}
+% {Added local settings of flags: dangerous!!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@floatboxreset {%
+ \reset@font
+ \normalsize
+ \@setminipage
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setnobreak}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \cs{@nobreak...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@setnobreak{%
+ \if@nobreak
+ \let\outer@nobreak\@nobreaktrue
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setminipage}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \cs{@minipage...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@setminipage{%
+ \@minipagetrue
+ \everypar{\@minipagefalse\everypar{}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\end@float}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/03}
+% {(CAR) Added \cs{@largefloatcheck}}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/10/25}{(CAR) unify code for double and
+% single versions}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end@float{%
+ \@endfloatbox
+ \ifnum\@floatpenalty <\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We make sure that we never exceed |\textheight|, otherwise float
+% will never get typeset (91/03/15 FMi).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@largefloatcheck
+ \@cons\@currlist\@currbox
+ \ifnum\@floatpenalty <-\@Mii
+ \penalty -\@Miv
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Saving and restoring |\prevdepth| added 26 May 87 to prevent extra
+% vertical space when used in vertical mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempdima\prevdepth
+ \vbox{}%
+ \prevdepth\@tempdima
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \penalty\@floatpenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/03/18}
+% {(RmS) changed \cs{@esphack} to \cs{@Esphack}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \vadjust{\penalty -\@Miv \vbox{}\penalty\@floatpenalty}\@Esphack
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\end@dblfloat}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/03}{\cs{@largefloatcheck} added}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/10/25}{(CAR) unify code for double and
+% single versions}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end@dblfloat{%
+\if@twocolumn
+ \@endfloatbox
+ \ifnum\@floatpenalty <\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We make sure that we never exceed |\textheight|, otherwise float
+% will never get typeset (91/03/15 FMi).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@largefloatcheck
+ \@cons\@dbldeferlist\@currbox
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% RmS 92/03/18 changed |\@esphack| to |\@Esphack|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \@floatpenalty =-\@Mii \@Esphack\fi
+\else
+ \end@float
+\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endfloatbox}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/10/25}{(CAR) macro added: to unify code for
+% double and single versions}
+% This macro is not intended to be a hook; it is designed to help
+% maintain the integrity of this code, which is used twice and, as
+% can be seen, is subject to frequent changes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@endfloatbox{%
+ \par\vskip\z@skip %% \par\vskip\z@ added 15 Dec 87
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0a}
+% {1994/03/07}{(DPC) Extra group for colour}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/14}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{color@endgroup}}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/20}{Restore outer value of @nobreak switch.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Extra box added to remove colour resetting from vmode}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Use new \cs{color@hbox} concept.}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Corrected position of \cs{outer@nobreak}}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Added reset of minipage flag}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \cs{@minipage...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@minipagefalse
+ \outer@nobreak
+ \egroup %% end of vbox
+ \color@endbox
+}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\outer@nobreak}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/20}{Macro added: default is to do nothing.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\outer@nobreak\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@largefloatcheck}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/25}{Command added}
+%
+% This calculates by how much a float is oversize for the page and
+% prints this in a warning message.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@largefloatcheck{%
+ \ifdim \ht\@currbox>\textheight
+ \@tempdima -\textheight
+ \advance \@tempdima \ht\@currbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/25}{Changed warning message to give more
+% info}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@latex@warning {Float too large for page by \the\@tempdima}%
+ \ht\@currbox \textheight
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dbflt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xdblfloat}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {Macros removed: \cs{@dbflt}, \cs{@xdblfloat}}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/10}{Macros reinserted temporarily}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dbflt#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@xdblfloat{#1}}{\@xdblfloat{#1}[tp]}}
+\def\@xdblfloat#1[#2]{%
+ \@xfloat{#1}[#2]\hsize\textwidth\linewidth\textwidth}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Moved to ltoutput 93/12/16
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\newcount\c@topnumber
+%\newcount\c@dbltopnumber
+%\newcount\c@bottomnumber
+%\newcount\c@totalnumber
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% An analysis of |\@floatplacement|:
+%
+% This should be called whenever |\@colht| has been set.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@floatplacement{\global\@topnum\c@topnumber
+ % Textpage bit, global:
+ \global\@toproom \topfraction\@colht
+ \global\@botnum \c@bottomnumber
+ \global\@botroom \bottomfraction\@colht
+ \global\@colnum \c@totalnumber
+ % Floatpage bit, local:
+ \@fpmin \floatpagefraction\@colht}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfloatplacement}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+%
+% This should be called only within a group. Now changed to
+% provide extra checks in |\@addtodblcol|, needed when processing a
+% BANG float.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@dblfloatplacement {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Textpage bit: global, but need not be.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \@dbltopnum \c@dbltopnumber
+ \global \@dbltoproom \dbltopfraction\@colht
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This new bit uses |\@textmin| to locally store the amount of extra
+% room in the column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@textmin \@colht
+ \advance \@textmin -\@dbltoproom
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Floatpage bit: must be local.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@fpmin \dblfloatpagefraction\textheight
+ \@fptop \@dblfptop
+ \@fpsep \@dblfpsep
+ \@fpbot \@dblfpbot
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% MARGINAL NOTES:
+%
+% Marginal notes use the same mechanism as floats to communicate
+% with the \output routine. Marginal notes are distinguished from
+% floats by having a negative placement specification. The command
+% \marginpar [LTEXT]{RTEXT} generates a marginal note in a parbox,
+% using LTEXT if it's on the left and RTEXT if it's on the right.
+% (Default is RTEXT = LTEXT.) It uses the following parameters.
+%
+% \marginparwidth : Width of marginal notes.
+% \marginparsep : Distance between marginal note and text.
+% the page layout to determine how to move the marginal
+% note into the margin. E.g., \@leftmarginskip ==
+% \hskip -\marginparwidth \hskip -\marginparsep .
+% \marginparpush : Minimum vertical separation between \marginpar's
+%
+% Marginal notes are normally put on the outside of the page
+% if @mparswitch = true, and on the right if @mparswitch = false.
+% The command \reversemarginpar reverses the side where they
+% are put. \normalmarginpar undoes \reversemarginpar.
+% These commands have no effect for two-column output.
+%
+% SURPRISE: if two marginal notes appear on the same line of
+% text, then the second one could appear on the next page, in
+% a funny position.
+%
+%
+% \marginpar [LTEXT]{RTEXT} ==
+% BEGIN
+% if hmode then \@bsphack
+% \@floatpenalty := -10002
+% else \@floatpenalty := -10003
+% fi
+% if inner
+% then LaTeX Error: 'Not in outer paragraph mode.'
+% \@floatpenalty := 0
+% else if \@freelist has two elements:
+% then get \@marbox, \@currbox from \@freelist
+% \count\@marbox :=G -1
+% else \@floatpenalty := 0
+% LaTeX Error: 'Too many unprocessed floats'
+% \@currbox, \@marbox := \@tempboxa %%use \def
+% fi
+% fi
+% if optional argument
+% then %% \@xmpar ==
+% \@savemarbox\@marbox{LTEXT}
+% \@savemarbox\@currbox{RTEXT}
+% else %% \@ympar ==
+% \@savemarbox\@marbox{RTEXT}
+% \box\@currbox :=G \box\@marbox
+% fi
+% \@xympar
+% END
+%
+% \reversemarginpar == BEGIN \@mparbottom :=G 0
+% @reversemargin :=G true
+% END
+%
+% \normalmarginpar == BEGIN \@mparbottom :=G 0
+% @reversemargin :=G false
+% END
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marginpar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\marginpar{%
+ \ifhmode
+ \@bsphack
+ \@floatpenalty -\@Mii
+ \else
+ \@floatpenalty-\@Miii
+ \fi
+ \ifinner
+ \@parmoderr
+ \@floatpenalty\z@
+ \else
+ \@next\@currbox\@freelist{}{}%
+ \@next\@marbox\@freelist{\global\count\@marbox\m@ne}%
+ {\@floatpenalty\z@
+ \@fltovf\def\@currbox{\@tempboxa}\def\@marbox{\@tempboxa}}%
+ \fi
+ \@ifnextchar [\@xmpar\@ympar}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xmpar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@xmpar[#1]#2{%
+ \@savemarbox\@marbox{#1}%
+ \@savemarbox\@currbox{#2}%
+ \@xympar}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ympar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ympar#1{%
+ \@savemarbox\@marbox{#1}%
+ \global\setbox\@currbox\copy\@marbox
+ \@xympar}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@savemarbox}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}
+% {(DPC) Extra group for colour}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/14}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{color@begingroup}}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/18}
+% {(DPC) Remove Colour support}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Extra box added for colour}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Use new \cs{color@hbox} concept.}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Changed to \cs{color@vbox} }
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Use \cs{@setnobreak} etc}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Added \cs{@setminipage} etc}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Added resetting of size and font}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1995/05/25}{(CAR) Resettings moved to hook}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1996/07/26}{remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \cs{@minipage...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \@savemarbox #1#2{%
+ \global\setbox #1%
+ \color@vbox
+ \vtop{%
+ \hsize\marginparwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \@marginparreset
+ #2%
+ \@minipagefalse
+ \outer@nobreak
+ }%
+ \color@endbox
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@marginparreset}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Macro added}
+%
+% The rational for allowing these normally global flags to be set
+% locally here, via |\@parboxrestore| was stated originally by
+% Donald Arsenau and extended by Chris Rowley.
+% It is because these flags are only set globally to
+% true by section commands, and these should never appear within
+% marginals or floats or, indeed, in any group; and they are only ever
+% set globally to false when they are definitely true.
+%
+% If anyone is unhappy with this argument then both flags should be
+% treated as in |\set@nobreak|; otherwise this command will be
+% redundant.
+% \changes{v1.1p}{1996/10/24}
+% {Added local settings of flags: dangerous!!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@marginparreset {%
+ \reset@font
+ \normalsize
+% \let\if@nobreak\iffalse
+% \let\if@noskipsec\iffalse
+% \@setnobreak
+ \@setminipage
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xympar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/03/18}
+% {(RmS) added \cs{global}\cs{@ignorefalse}}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}
+% {(DPC) Extra bgroup for colour}
+% \changes{1.0c}{1994/03/14}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{color@begingroup}}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Extra box added since needed for floats}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Use new \cs{color@hbox} concept.}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/21}{Changed to \cs{color@vbox} }
+% Setting the box here is done only because the code
+% uses \cs{end@float}; it will be empty and gets discarded.
+% \changes{v1.1o}{1996/08/02}{Remove \cs{global} before \cs{@ignore...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@xympar{%
+ \ifnum\@floatpenalty <\z@\@cons\@currlist\@marbox\fi
+ \setbox\@tempboxa
+ \color@vbox
+ \vbox \bgroup
+ \end@float
+ \@ignorefalse
+ \@esphack
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\reversemarginpar}
+% \begin{macro}{\normalmarginpar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reversemarginpar{\global\@mparbottom\z@ \@reversemargintrue}
+\def\normalmarginpar{\global\@mparbottom\z@ \@reversemarginfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{footnotes,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% \footnote{NOTE} : User command to insert a footnote.
+%
+% \footnote[NUM]{NOTE}: User command to insert a footnote numbered
+% NUM, where NUM is a number -- 1, 2,
+% etc. For example, if footnotes are numbered
+% *, **, etc. within pages, then \footnote[2]{...}
+% produces footnote '**'. This command does not
+% step the footnote counter.
+%
+% \footnotemark[NUM] : Command to produce just the footnote mark in
+% the text, but no footnote. With no argument,
+% it steps the footnote counter before generating
+% the mark.
+%
+% \footnotetext[NUM]{TEXT} : Command to produce the footnote but
+% no mark. \footnote is equivalent to
+% \footnotemark \footnotetext .
+%
+% As in PLAIN, footnotes use \insert\footins, and the following
+% parameters:
+%
+% \footnotesize : Size-changing command for footnotes.
+%
+% \footnotesep : The height of a strut placed at the beginning of
+% every footnote.
+% \skip\footins : Space between main text and footnotes. The rule
+% separating footnotes from text occurs in this
+% space. This space lies above the strut of height
+% \footnotesep which is at the beginning of the
+% first footnote.
+% \footnoterule : Macro to draw the rule separating footnotes from
+% text. It is executed right after a \vspace of
+% \skip\footins. It should take zero vertical
+% space--i.e., it should to a negative skip to
+% compensate for any positive space it occupies.
+% (See PLAIN.TEX.)
+%
+% \interfootnotelinepenalty : Interline penalty for footnotes.
+%
+% \thefootnote : In usual LaTeX style, produces the footnote number.
+% If footnotes are to be numbered within pages, then
+% the document style file must include an \@addtoreset
+% command to cause the footnote counter to be reset
+% when the page counter is stepped. This is not a good
+% idea, though, because the counter will not always be
+% reset in time to ensure that the first footnote on a
+% page is footnote number one.
+%
+% \@thefnmark : Holds the current footnote's mark--e.g., \dag or '1'
+% or 'a'.
+%
+% \@mpfnnumber : A macro that generates the numbers for \footnote
+% and \footnotemark commands. It == \thefootnote
+% outside a minipage environment, but can be
+% changed inside to generate numbers for
+% \footnote's.
+%
+% \@makefnmark : A macro to generate the footnote marker from
+% \@thefnmark The default definition was
+% \hbox{$^\@thefnmark$}.
+%
+% This is now replaced by
+% \textsuperscript{\@thefnmark}
+%
+% \@makefntext{NOTE} :
+% Must produce the actual footnote, using \@thefnmark as the mark
+% of the footnote and NOTE as the text. It is called when
+% effectively inside a \parbox, with \hsize = \columnwidth.
+% For example, it might be as simple as
+% $^{\@thefnmark}$ NOTE
+%
+% In a minipage environment, \footnote and \footnotetext are redefined
+% so that
+% (a) they use the counter mpfootnote
+% (b) the footnotes they produce go at the bottom of the minipage.
+% The switch is accomplished by letting \@mpfn == footnote or mpfootnote
+% and \thempfn == \thefootnote or \thempfootnote, and by redefining
+% \@footnotetext to be \@mpfootnotetext in the minipage.
+%
+% \footnote{NOTE} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \stepcounter{\@mpfn}
+% begingroup
+% \protect == \noexpand
+% \@thefnmark :=G eval (\thempfn)
+% endgroup
+% \@footnotemark
+% \@footnotetext{NOTE}
+% END
+%
+% \footnote[NUM]{NOTE} ==
+% BEGIN
+% begingroup
+% \protect == \noexpand
+% counter \@mpfn :=L NUM
+% \@thefnmark :=G eval (\thempfn)
+% endgroup
+% \@footnotemark
+% \@footnotetext{NOTE}
+% END
+%
+% \footnotemark ==
+% BEGIN \stepcounter{footnote}
+% begingroup
+% \protect == \noexpand
+% \@thefnmark :=G eval(\thefootnote)
+% endgroup
+% \@footnotemark
+% END
+%
+% \footnotemark[NUM] ==
+% BEGIN
+% begingroup
+% footnote counter :=L NUM
+% \protect == \noexpand
+% \@thefnmark :=G eval(\thefootnote)
+% endgroup
+% \@footnotemark
+% END
+%
+% \@footnotemark ==
+% BEGIN
+% \leavevmode
+% IF hmode THEN \@x@sf := \the\spacefactor FI
+% \@makefnmark % put number in main text
+% IF hmode THEN \spacefactor := \@x@sf FI
+% END
+%
+% \footnotetext ==
+% BEGIN begingroup \protect == \noexpand
+% \@thefnmark :=G eval (\thempfn)
+% endgroup
+% \@footnotetext
+% END
+%
+% \footnotetext[NUM] ==
+% BEGIN begingroup counter \@mpfn :=L NUM
+% \protect == \noexpand
+% \@thefnmark :=G eval (\thempfn)
+% endgroup
+% \@footnotetext
+% END
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.1l}{1995/05/24}{Moved definition of \cs{footins}
+% and \cs{footnoterule} from ltplain.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footins}
+% \LaTeX\ does use the same insert for footnotes as PLAIN.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newinsert\footins
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ leaves these initializations for the |\footins| insert.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\footins=\bigskipamount % space added when footnote is present
+\count\footins=1000 % footnote magnification factor (1 to 1)
+\dimen\footins=8in % maximum footnotes per page
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
+% \LaTeX\ keeps PLAIN \TeX's |\footnoterule| as the default.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@
+ \hrule \@width 2in \kern 2.6\p@} % the \hrule is .4pt high
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thefootnote}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1995/05/16}{Streamlined parts of code.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@definecounter{footnote}
+\def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thempfootnote}
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1995/05/18}{Added \cs{itshape}.}
+% \changes{v1.1v}{2002/10/01}{Use braces around \cs{itshape}
+% to keep font change local (pr/3460).}
+% The default display for the footnote counter in minipages is to
+% use italic letters. We use |\itshape| not |\textit| as the latter
+% would add an italic correction.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@definecounter{mpfootnote}
+\def\thempfootnote{{\itshape\@alph\c@mpfootnote}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1995/05/16}{Now use \cs{textsuperscript}.}
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1995/05/18}{Added \cs{normalfont}.}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1995/05/20}{Moved \cs{normalfont} to
+% \cs{textsuperscript}}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1995/05/20}{Moved \cs{normalfont} back
+% and use \cs{@textsuperscript}}
+% Default definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{$^{\@thefnmark}\m@th$}}
+\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textsuperscript}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1995/05/16}{Command added./pr1503}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1995/05/20}{Use \cs{normalfont}.}
+% \changes{v1.1l}{1995/05/24}{Use \cs{@textsuperscript}}
+% This command provides superscript characters in the current text
+% font. It's implementation might change!!!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\textsuperscript[1]{%
+ \@textsuperscript{\selectfont#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@textsuperscript}
+% \changes{v1.1l}{1995/05/24}{Command added.}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/12/05}{Use \cs{ensuremath} for latex/1984.}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1995/12/07}
+% {Move \cs{m@th} out of the \cs{ensuremath} for latex/1984.}
+% This command should not be used directly, but may be used to define
+% other commands |\textsuperscript|, |\@makefnmark|. |#1| should
+% always start with a font selection command, to activate the font
+% size switch.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@textsuperscript#1{%
+ {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\footnotesep
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnote}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/11/01}
+% {(RmS) Added \cs{let}\cs{protect}\cs{noexpand} in
+% \cs{footnote}, \cs{footnotemark},
+% and \cs{footnotetext}, since \cs{xdef} is used}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/11/22}
+% {(RmS) Added \cs{let}\cs{protect}\cs{noexpand} in
+% \cs{@xfootnote}, \cs{@xfootnotemark},
+% and \cs{@xfootnotetext}}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/11/26}
+% {(RmS) Changed all to
+% `def`protect\string{`noexpand`protect`noexpand\string}}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/26}
+% {(ASAJ) Added \cs{protected@xdef}.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
+ \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfootnote}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xfootnote[#1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/09/29}
+% {(RmS) added \cs{reset@font}}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/11/26}
+% {(RmS) added protection for \cs{edef}}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}
+% {(DPC) Extra group for colour}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/14}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{color@begingroup}, add \cs{endgraf}}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/18}
+% {(DPC) Remove Colour support}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/13}
+% {(DPC) Add new style colour support: \cs{normalcolor}}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/13}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{@finalstrut}}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Move colour setting to output routine}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/04}
+% {(ASAJ) Added \cs{protected@edef}.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Removed \cs{normalcolor} (again)}
+% \changes{v1.1t}{1997/11/19}
+% {Missing percent, again}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@footnotetext#1{\insert\footins{%
+ \reset@font\footnotesize
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep
+ \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+ \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+ \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+ }%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \@makefntext{%
+ \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+ \color@endgroup}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotemark}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{protected@xdef} to
+% \cs{footnotemark}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotemark{%
+ \@ifnextchar[\@xfootnotemark
+ {\stepcounter{footnote}%
+ \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
+ \@footnotemark}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfootnotemark}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xfootnotemark[#1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \c@footnote #1\relax
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@footnotemark}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotemark}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1995/05/12}
+% {Add \cs{nobreak} to allow hyphenation. latex/1605}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@footnotemark{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
+ \@makefnmark
+ \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
+ \relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotetext}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotetext{%
+ \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext
+ {\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \@footnotetext}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfootnotenext}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xfootnotenext[#1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@footnotetext}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thempfn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfn}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mpfn{footnote}
+\def\thempfn{\thefootnote}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f6850793662
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfntcmd.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,777 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfntcmd.dtx
+%%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltfntcmd.dtx}
+ [2003/01/01 v3.3z LaTeX Kernel (Font commands)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltfntcmd.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{256}
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% Copyright (C) 1994-1995 Frank Mittelbach and Chris Rowley
+% all rights reserved.
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1993/05/05}{Removed all LaTeX related cmds}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Complete reworking of all text commands,
+% using just one creator function}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{newfontswitch command corrected and
+% changed}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{newcommands replaced by defs}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{italic correction now put in front of
+% penalty before glue}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{\cs{@pdef} comand added}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{Other tidying}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{Made \cs{@newfontswitch} produce an
+% error if command already exists, and added \cs{@renewfontswitch},
+% ASAJ}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{Untidying added, so this is now a
+% TEMPORARY version.}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{Some more tidying done}
+% \changes{v3.1b}{1994/01/31}{\cs{@normalsize} no longer defined}
+% \changes{v3.2a}{1994/03/15}{Adapted to mass formatting}
+% \changes{v3.2a}{1994/03/15}{Removed defs of short-forms and all
+% sizes except \cs{normalize}}
+% \changes{v3.2a}{1994/03/15}{Removed \cs{@renewfontswitch}}
+% \changes{v3.2a}{1994/03/15}{Changed \cs{/} to \cs{@@italiccorr}}
+% \changes{v3.2b}{1994/04/14}{Macros renamed to non-private forms, JB}
+% \changes{v3.3a}{1994/04/20}{New implementation of \cs{\nocorr}}
+% \changes{v3.3a}{1994/04/20}{Documentation up-dated}
+% \changes{v3.3b}{1994/04/30}{Documentation up-dated and tidied}
+% \changes{v3.3b}{1994/04/30}{Title changed}
+% \changes{v3.3b}{1994/04/30}{Prefix frag@ changed to frag in
+% \cs{@protecteddef}}
+% \changes{v3.3b}{1994/04/30}{Warning changed to info message in
+% \cs{@protecteddef}}
+% \changes{v3.3c}{1994/05/05}{Corrected \cs{@fontswitch}}
+% \changes{v3.3d}{1994/05/08}{Removed \cs{@undefinedfonterror}}
+% \changes{v3.3f}{1994/05/09}{Replaced all \cs{next} by
+% \cs{@let@token} and undo change 3.3e,
+% whatever that was.}
+% \changes{v3.3g}{1994/05/13}{Replaced \cs{@protecteddef} by
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}}
+% \changes{v3.3h}{1994/05/20}{Use new error commands}
+% \changes{v3.3i}{1994/05/24}{Tidying and typos fixed}
+% \changes{v3.3j}{1994/05/25}{Insertion of \cs{aftergroup}s to
+% implement \cs{nocorr} moved to the end of the group}
+% \changes{v3.3k}{1994/06/09}{Tidying and typos fixed in documentation}
+% \changes{v3.3l}{1994/06/18}{Added check for empty text}
+% \changes{v3.3m}{1994/06/22}{Removed space from \cs{nfss@text}}
+% \changes{v3.3m}{1994/06/22}{Renamed \cs{check@nocorr}}
+% \changes{v3.3p}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v3.3v}{1997/06/16}{Fix typo in documentation.}
+% \changes{v3.3x}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \def \ie {i.e.~}
+% \def \eg {e.g.~}
+%
+% \def \dst {{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+% \def \NFSS {\textsf{NFSS}}
+%
+%
+% \begin{abstract}
+% The commands defined in this file \texttt{ltfntcmd} are
+% part of the kernel code for \LaTeXe/NFSS2.
+%
+% It is also meant to serve as documentation for package writers since
+% it demonstrates how to define high-level font changing commands
+% using a small number of creator functions.
+% \end{abstract}
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% Font changes such as |\bfseries|, |\sffamily|, etc.\ are
+% declarations; this means that their scope is delimited by the
+% grouping structure, either by the next |\end| of some environment or
+% by explicitly using a group, e.g., writing something like
+% |{\bfseries...}| in the source. If you make the mistake of writing
+% |\bfseries{...}| (thinking of |\bfseries| as a command with one
+% argument) then the result is rather striking.
+%
+% Font declarations are an artifact of the \TeX{} system and for
+% several reasons it is better to avoid them on the user level
+% whenever possible. In \LaTeX3 they will probably all be
+% replaced by environments and by font commands taking one argument.
+%
+% This file defines a creator function for such declarative font
+% switches. This function creates commands which can be used in
+% both math and text.
+%
+% This file also defines a number of high-level commands (all
+% starting with |\text..|) that have one argument and typeset this
+% argument in the requested way. Thus these commands are for
+% typesetting short pieces of text in a specific family, series or
+% shape. These are all produced as examples of the use of a creator
+% function which is itself also defined in this file.
+%
+% Table~\ref{tab:fontcmds} shows all these high-level commands in
+% action. A further advantage of using these commands is that they
+% automatically take care of any necessary italic correction on either
+% side of their argument.
+% \begin{table}[t]
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{lll}
+% \textit{Command} & \textit{Corresponds to }& \textit{Action} \\[4pt]
+% |\textrm{..}| & |\rmfamily| &
+% Typeset argument in roman family \\
+% |\textsf{..}| & |\sffamily| &
+% Typeset argument in \textsf{sans serif} family \\
+% |\texttt{..}| & |\ttfamily| &
+% Typeset argument in \texttt{typewriter} family
+% \\[2pt]
+% |\textmd{..}| & |\mdseries| &
+% Typeset argument in medium series \\
+% |\textbf{..}| & |\bfseries| &
+% Typeset argument in \textbf{bold} series \\[2pt]
+% |\textup{..}| & |\upshape| &
+% Typeset argument in normal shape \\
+% |\textit{..}| & |\itshape| &
+% Typeset argument in \textit{italic} shape \\
+% |\textsl{..}| & |\slshape| &
+% Typeset argument in \textsl{slanted} shape \\
+% |\textsc{..}| & |\scshape| &
+% Typeset argument in \textsc{small caps} shape
+% \\[2pt]
+% |\emph{..}| & |\em| &
+% Typeset argument \emph{emphasized}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \caption{Font-change commands with arguments}
+% \label{tab:fontcmds}
+% \begin{quote}
+% The font change commands provided here
+% all start with |\text..| to emphasize that they
+% are for use in normal text and to be easily memorable. They
+% automatically take care of any necessary italic correction on either
+% side of the argument.
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{table}
+%
+% Thus, when using such commands, one does not have to worry about
+% forgetting the italic correction when changing fonts. Only in very
+% few situations is this additional space wrong but, for example, most
+% typographers recommend omitting the italic correction if a small
+% punctuation character, like a comma, directly follows the font
+% change. Since the amount of correction required is partly a matter
+% of taste, you can define in what situations the italic correction
+% should be suppressed. This is done by putting the characters that
+% should cancel a preceding italic correction in the list
+% |\nocorrlist|.\footnote{Any package that changes the
+% \texttt{\string\catcode} of a character inside
+% \texttt{\string\nocorrlist} must then explicitly reset the list.
+% Otherwise the changed character will no longer be recognized
+% by the suppression algorithm.}
+% The default definition for this list is produced by the following.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newcommand \nocorrlist {,.}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% It is best to declare the most often used characters first, because
+% this will make the processing slightly faster. For example,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \emph{When using the \NFSS{} high-level commands,
+% the \emph{proper} use of italic corrections is
+% automatically taken care of}. Only
+% \emph{sometimes} one has to help \LaTeX{} by
+% adding a \verb=\nocorr= command.
+% \end{verbatim}
+% which results in:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \emph{When using the \NFSS{} high-level commands,
+% the \emph{proper} use of italic corrections is
+% automatically taken care of}. Only
+% \emph{sometimes} one has to help \LaTeX{} by
+% adding a \verb=\nocorr= command.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% In contrast, the use of the declaration forms is often more
+% appropriate when you define your own commands or environments.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \newenvironment{bfitemize}{\begin{itemize}\normalfont\bfseries}
+% {\end{itemize}}
+% \begin{bfitemize}
+% \item This environment produces boldface items.
+% \item It is defined in terms of \LaTeX's
+% \texttt{itemize} environment and NFSS
+% declarations.
+% \end{bfitemize}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% This gives:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \newenvironment{bfitemize}
+% {\begin{itemize}\normalfont\bfseries}
+% {\end{itemize}}
+% \begin{bfitemize}
+% \item This environment produces boldface items.
+% \item It is defined in terms of \LaTeX's
+% \texttt{itemize} environment and NFSS
+% declarations.
+% \end{bfitemize}
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% In addition to global customization of when to insert the italic
+% correction, it is of course sometimes necessary to explicitly insert
+% one with |\/|.
+%
+% It is also possible to suppress the italic correction
+% in individual instances. For this, the command |\nocorr| is provided.
+%
+% The |\nocorr| must appear as the first or last token inside the
+% braces of the argument of the |\text...| commands, at that end of
+% the text where you wish to suppress the italic correction.
+%
+%
+% It is worth pointing out here that inserting a |\/| in places where
+% it can have no function (\ie anywhere except immediately after a
+% slanted letter) is not an error---it will just be silently ignored.
+% Unfortunately this is not true if the redefinition of |\/| in {\tt
+% amstex.sty} is used as this version can cause space to be removed
+% immediately before the |\/|.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \section{The implementation}
+%
+% \changes{v3.3z}{2003/01/01}{Code checked and documentation extended
+% by Chris}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextFontCommand}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Macro changed}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Macro changed}
+% This is the creator function for |\text..| commands.
+% It gives a warning if |\foo| or |\fragfoo| is already defined.
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{Corrected and tidied}
+%
+% In math mode it simply puts the font declaration and text into a
+% box (possibly an automagically sized one).
+%
+% Otherwise it first scans the text to see where |\nocorr| occurs
+% within it. This sets the |\check@ic| commands to do what is
+% necessary concerning the italic correction at both ends.
+%
+% The algorithm for deciding whether to put in an italic correction
+% is not very subtle: one is added whenever the newly current font
+% is not itself positively sloped, unless the next token is a
+% character in the `nocorr' list. At the end of the text this
+% is done after closing the group so as to check the `outer font'.
+% Note that this
+% will often result in adding an italic correction token after a
+% character in an unsloped font; we believe (in early 2003) that
+% this is perhaps inefficient but not dangerous.
+%
+% It also now checks for empty contents of the text command and optimises
+% this case. Some care is also taken to check that doing dangerous
+% things in vertical mode is avoided.
+%
+% The italic correction token is added to the horizontal list
+% before (in the list) an immediately prceding non-zero glob of
+% glue (skip) and any non-zero penalty preceding that since, in
+% the typical case, this puts it immediately
+% after the last character in the preceding word.
+%
+%
+% \changes{v3.3j}{1994/05/25}{Insertion of \cs{aftergroup}s moved}
+% \changes{v3.3j}{1994/05/25}{\cs{expandafter} inserted}
+% \changes{v3.3m}{1994/06/22}{Removed space from \cs{nfss@text}}
+% \changes{v3.3u}{1996/10/08}{Removed \cs{check@icr} when in vmode
+% since it causes various errors (see pr/2157)}
+% \changes{v3.3w}{1997/10/17}{Reinstalled \cs{check@icr} as check is
+% now done in \cs{check@nocorr@} (see PR/2646).}
+% \changes{v3.3y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} now (pr/3160)}
+%
+% Note that it is necessary to put in the |\aftergroup\maybe@ic| at
+% the end of the group so that it comes after any other aftergroup
+% tokens and immediately before the following tokens.
+% It is also necessary to remove the |\fi| from the token list before
+% the group ends; this is done by adding an |\expandafter| just
+% before the closing brace.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\def \DeclareTextFontCommand #1#2{%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand#1[1]{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \nfss@text{#2##1}%
+ \else
+ \hmode@bgroup
+ \text@command{##1}%
+ #2\check@icl ##1\check@icr
+ \expandafter
+ \egroup
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textrm}
+% \begin{macro}{\textsf}
+% \begin{macro}{\texttt}
+% \begin{macro}{\textnormal}
+% Now we define the |\text|\meta{family} commands in terms of the
+% above; |\texttt| does not look very nice!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textrm}{\rmfamily}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textsf}{\sffamily}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\texttt}{\ttfamily}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textnormal}{\normalfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textbf}
+% \begin{macro}{\textmd}
+% For the series attribute:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textbf}{\bfseries}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textmd}{\mdseries}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textit}
+% \begin{macro}{\textsl}
+% \begin{macro}{\textsc}
+% \begin{macro}{\textup}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Macros changed}
+% And for the shapes:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textit}{\itshape}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textsl}{\slshape}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textsc}{\scshape}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textup}{\upshape}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\emph}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Macro changed}
+% Finally we have the |\em| font change declaration of \LaTeX. The
+% corresponding definition with argument is
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextFontCommand{\emph}{\em}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nocorr}
+% This is just a label, so it does nothing; it should also be
+% unexpandable.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let \nocorr \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@icl}
+% \begin{macro}{\check@icr}
+% \changes{v3.3j}{1994/05/25}{Macros added}
+% \changes{v3.3t}{1996/05/09}{Default definitions added}
+% We define these defaults in case some error causes them to be
+% expanded at the wrong time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let \check@icl \@empty
+\let \check@icr \@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\text@command}
+% \begin{macro}{\check@nocorr@}
+% \changes{v3.3a}{1994/04/20}{Macros added}
+% \changes{v3.3m}{1994/06/22}{Renamed \cs{check@nocorr} to
+% \cs{text@command} to improve \cs{long} error message}
+% \changes{v3.3j}{1994/05/25}{Insertion of \cs{aftergroup}s moved
+% and defaults set up for efficiency}
+% This checks for a |\nocorr| as the first token in its argument
+% and also for one in any other position not protected within
+% braces (the latter is treated as if it were at the end of the
+% argument).
+%
+% Is this the correct action in the `empty' case? It is efficient but
+% typographically it is, strictly, incorrect!
+% \changes{v3.3l}{1994/06/18}{Added check for empty text}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \text@command #1{%
+ \def \reserved@a {#1}%
+ \ifx \reserved@a \@empty
+ \let \check@icl \@empty
+ \let \check@icr \@empty
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\space| is a reserved word in \LaTeX{} or actually already in
+% plain \TeX. If somebody really redefines it so many things will
+% break that I don't see any reason to make this routine here
+% slower than necessary.
+% \changes{v3.3q}{1994/12/10}{Use \cs{space} command for comparison}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def \reserved@b { }%
+% \ifx \reserved@a \reserved@b
+ \ifx \reserved@a \space
+ \let \check@icl \@empty
+ \let \check@icr \@empty
+ \else
+ \check@nocorr@ #1\nocorr\@nil
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def \check@nocorr@ #1#2\nocorr#3\@nil {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The two checks are initialised here to their values in
+% the normal case.
+% \changes{v3.3w}{1997/10/17}{Check for vertical mode moved here, from
+% \cs{DeclareTextFontCommand} (see PR/2646).}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \check@icl \maybe@ic
+ \def \check@icr {\ifvmode \else \aftergroup \maybe@ic \fi}%
+ \def \reserved@a {\nocorr}%
+ \def \reserved@b {#1}%
+ \def \reserved@c {#3}%
+ \ifx \reserved@a \reserved@b
+ \ifx \reserved@c \@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In this case there is a |\nocorr| at the start but not at the
+% end, so |\check@icl| should be empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \check@icl \@empty
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise there is a |\nocorr| both at the start and
+% elsewhere, so no italic corrections should be added.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \check@icl \@empty
+ \let \check@icr \@empty
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifx \reserved@c \@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In this case there is no |\nocorr| anywhere, so we need to check
+% for an italic correction at both the beginning and the end. This
+% has been set up as the default so no code is needed here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In this case there is no |\nocorr| at the start but there is one
+% elsewhere, so no |\aftergroup| is needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \check@icr \@empty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maybe@ic}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Macro name changed}
+% \begin{macro}{\maybe@ic@}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Macro and name changed}
+% \task{CAR}{Make this more efficient by checking for non-characters
+% first and using \cs{if} test?}
+% These macros implement the italic correction.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \maybe@ic {\futurelet\@let@token\maybe@ic@}
+\def \maybe@ic@ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We first check to see if the current font is positively sloped.
+% (But do not forget the message Rainer sent about an upright font
+% with non-zero slope! Or is this an urban myth?) It has been
+% suggested that this should test against a small positive value,
+% but what?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font>\z@
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It would be possible, but probably not worthwhile, to continue the
+% forward scan beyond any closing braces.
+%
+% \changes{v3.3a}{1994/04/20}{\cs{nocorr} etc removed from list of
+% tokens to check, leaving only punctuation characters}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@tfor\expandafter\reserved@a\expandafter:\expandafter=%
+ \nocorrlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have to hide the |\@let@token| in the macro |\t@st@ic| rather
+% than testing it directly in the loop since it might be |\let|
+% to a |\fi| or |\else|, which would result in chaos.
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/11/24}{Use \cs{t@st@ic}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \do \t@st@ic
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Frank thinks that the next bit it is inefficient if done after
+% the second change. Chris thinks that most all of this is
+% inefficient for the commonest cases: but that is the price of a
+% cleverer algorithm. It is certainly needed to deal with the use
+% of |\nolinebreak|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@tempswa \sw@slant \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\t@st@ic}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/11/24}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v3.3s}{1995/07/05}{Renamed from \cs{test@next}}
+% The next token in the input stream is stored in |\@let@token| via a
+% |\let|, the current token from |\nocorrlist| is stored via |\def|
+% in |\reserved@a|. To compare them we have to fiddle around a bit.
+%
+% If the only things to check were characters then this could be
+% done via an |\if| thus their catcodes would not matter; but this
+% will not work whilst |\futurelet| is used above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \t@st@ic {%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@b\expandafter=\reserved@a\relax
+ \ifx\reserved@b\@let@token
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If they are the same we record the fact and jump out of the loop.
+% \changes{v3.3s}{1995/07/03}{Use clean interface for jump}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \@break@tfor
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sw@slant}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Macro changed}
+% \begin{macro}{\fix@penalty}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1993/12/11}{Macro added}
+% The definition of the mysterious |\sw@slant| command is as follows.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \sw@slant {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It is surely correct to put in an italic correction when there
+% is no skip. If the last thing on the list is actually a zero
+% skip (including things whose dimension part is zero, such as
+% |\hfill|), or anything other than a character, then the
+% italic correction will have no effect.
+%
+% In order to work correctly with unbreakable spaces from |~|
+% (and other common forms of line-breaking control) we also move
+% back across a penalty before the glue.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \lastskip=\z@
+ \fix@penalty
+ \else
+ \skip@ \lastskip
+ \unskip
+ \fix@penalty
+ \hskip \skip@
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The above code means: ``If there is a non-zero space just before
+% the current position (|\ifdim...|) save the amount of that space
+% (|\skip@\lastskip|), remove it (|\unskip|), then do a similar
+% thing if there is a penalty just before the skip,
+% and finally put the space back in.''
+%
+% Since zero glue cannot be distinguished in this context from no
+% glue, we dare not put in an |\hskip| in this case as this may
+% produce an unwanted breakpoint. This is not satisfactory.
+%
+% The penalty before the glue is handled similarly, with the same
+% caveats concerning the zero case. Is this the first recorded
+% use of |\unpenalty| in standard \LaTeX{} code?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \fix@penalty {%
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=\z@
+ \@@italiccorr
+ \else
+ \count@ \lastpenalty
+ \unpenalty
+ \@@italiccorr
+ \penalty \count@
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nocorrlist}
+% This holds the list of characters that should prevent italic
+% correction. They should be ordered by decreasing frequency of
+% use. If any such character is made active later on one needs
+% to redefine the list so that the active character becomes part
+% of it.
+% \changes{v3.1a}{1994/01/27}{Only ., used as default for cm fonts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \nocorrlist {,.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nfss@text}
+% This command will by default behave like a \LaTeX{} |\mbox| but
+% may be redefined by packages such as |amstext.sty| to be a bit
+% cleverer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx \nfss@text\@undefined
+ \def \nfss@text {\leavevmode\hbox}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOldFontCommand}
+% \changes{v3.2b}{1994/04/14}{Renamed from \cs{@newfontswitch}}
+% This is the function used to create declarative font-changing
+% commands that can also be used to change alphabets in math-mode.
+%
+% Usage: |\DeclareOldFontCommand \fn{|\meta{font-change decls}|}|
+% \meta{math-alphabet}
+%
+% Here |\fn| is the font-declaration command being defined,
+% \meta{font-change decls} is the declaration it will expand to in
+% text-mode, and \meta{math-alphabet} is the (single) math alphabet
+% specifier which is to be used in math-mode.
+%
+% It does not care whether the command being defined already
+% exists but it does give a warning if it redefines anything.
+%
+% Here are some typical examples of its use in conjunction with
+% more basic NFSS2 font commands.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+% \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+% \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{Corrected and tidied}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \DeclareOldFontCommand #1#2#3{%
+ \DeclareRobustCommand #1{\@fontswitch {#2}{#3}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fontswitch}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@math@egroup}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@math@egroup}
+% These two commands actually do the necessary tests and
+% declarative \mbox{font-} or alphabet-changing.
+%
+% \changes{v3.3c}{1994/05/05}{Corrected \cs{@fontswitch} and added
+% saved versions}
+% \changes{v3.3q}{1994/12/10}{Don't read arguments}
+% \changes{v3.3r}{1995/04/02}{Read them again to be able to add \cs{relax}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@fontswitch #1#2{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \let \math@bgroup \relax
+ \def \math@egroup {\let \math@bgroup \@@math@bgroup
+ \let \math@egroup \@@math@egroup}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need to have a |\relax| in the following line in case the |#2|
+% is something like |\mathsf| grabbing the next token as an
+% argument. For this reason the code also uses explicit arguments
+% again (see pr/1275).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #2\relax
+ \else
+ #1%
+ \fi
+}
+\let \@@math@bgroup \math@bgroup
+\let \@@math@egroup \math@egroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1993/12/08}{Macros \cs{rm}, \cs{bf} and \cs{sf}
+% moved to classes.dtx}
+%
+% These commands are available only in the preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble \DeclareTextFontCommand
+\@onlypreamble \DeclareOldFontCommand
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Initialization}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{Added by ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1993/12/19}{Wording changes by CAR.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
+% \changes{v3.3d}{1994/05/08}{Removed \cs{@undefinedfonterror}}
+% \changes{v3.3o}{1994/11/12}{Added \cs{MessageBreak}}
+% This is defined to produce an error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{%
+ \@latex@error {The font size command \protect\normalsize\space
+ is not defined:\MessageBreak
+ there is probably something wrong with
+ the class file}\@eha
+}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4adafd0cea4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssbas.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1910 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfssbas.dtx
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-2002 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf
+%
+%<def1>\ProvidesFile{autofss1.sty}
+%<def1> [2002/10/02 v3.0x NFSS autoload file 1]
+%<def2>\ProvidesFile{autofss2.sty}
+%<def2> [2002/10/02 v3.0x NFSS autoload file 2]
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+%
+%
+\ProvidesFile{ltfssbas.dtx}
+ [2002/10/02 v3.0x LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Basic Macros)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{ltfssbas.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<+checkmem>\def\CHECKMEM{\tracingstats=2
+%<+checkmem> \newlinechar=`\^^J
+%<+checkmem> \message{^^JMemory usage: \filename}\shipout\hbox{}}
+%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1089}
+%
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltfssbas.dtx}
+% \title{A new font selection scheme for \TeX{} macro packages\\
+% (Basic Macros)\thanks
+% {This file has version number
+% \fileversion\ dated \filedate}}
+%
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% This file contains the main implementation of the `low level' font
+% selection commands. See other parts of the \LaTeX\
+% distribution, or \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} for higher level
+% documentation of the \LaTeX\ `New' Font Selection Scheme.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \textbf{Warning:}
+% The macro documentation is still basically the documentation from the
+% first NFSS release and therefore in some cases probably not
+% completely accurate.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \changes{v3.0v}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Documentation fixes.}
+% \changes{v3.0j}{1995/10/22}{(RmS) New size function macro
+% \cs{genb@sfcnt} needs to be disabled at \cs{document}.}
+% \changes{v3.0i}{1995/10/20}
+% {(DPC) Modify autoload code, change \cs{undefined}}
+% \changes{v3.0g}{1995/10/04}{Modify autoload code}
+% \changes{v3.0f}{1995/08/24}{Added autoload code}
+% \changes{v3.0d}{1995/07/13}
+% {minor documentation changes}
+% \changes{v3.0c}{1995/06/15}
+% {(DPC) minor documentation changes}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) Make file from previous file, fam.dtx 1995/05/20 v2.2d}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.1x}{1994/11/18}{(DPC) use \cs{reserved@f} not \cs{next}}
+% \changes{v2.1q}{1994/05/20}{Use new error commands}
+% \changes{v2.1o}{1994/05/15}{encoding cmds changed to {enc}-cmd}
+% \changes{v2.1k}{1994/05/13}{Remove File identification `typeout'}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{New baselinestretch concept}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{Replaced hand-protected commands by
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand} defs}
+% \changes{v2.1h}{1994/04/11}{Added \cs{defaultscriptratio} and
+% \cs{defaultscriptscriptratio}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1994/03/13}{add 2ekernel module to omit repeated code}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{1993/03/18}{Changed all \cs{@tempdima} in
+% \cs{@tempdimb} to avoid killing \cs{numberline}}
+% \changes{v1.91a}{1992/09/22}{Introduced \cs{tf@size} for math size.}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{1991/11/27}{All \cs{family}, \cs{shape} etc.
+% renamed to \cs{fontfamily} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1990/04/01}{Code added from tracefnt.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.2i}{1990/04/01}{Support for TeX3.}
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1990/02/16}{Support for changes of \cs{baselineskip}
+% without changing the size.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1990/01/23}{\cs{no@version@warning} renamed to
+% \cs{no@alphabet@error}.}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1989/11/25}{All \cs{edef}\cs{font@name} changed to
+% \cs{xdef}\cs{font@name}.
+% Necessary after introduction of
+% \cs{begingroup}/\cs{endgroup} in v1.0q.}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1989/11/25}{extra// $\to$ + in \cs{extra@def}.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1989/11/08}{First parameter of
+% \cs{define@mathalphabet}
+% and \cs{define@mathgroup} changed
+% from string to control sequence.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1989/09/14}
+% {Global replacement: \cs{group} to \cs{mathgroup}}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1989/05/22}{Lines longer than 72 characters folded.}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1989/05/01}{Default for \cs{baselinestretch} added.}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1989/04/29}
+% {Removed the \cs{halign} \cs{noalign} correction
+% (wasn't bugfree)}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1989/04/29}{Documented problem with \cs{halign}, and
+% \cs{noalign}}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1989/04/27}{Documentation revised.}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1989/04/23}{\% in \cs{getanddefinefonts} added.}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1989/04/21}{Documentation is fun!!
+% Parameters of \cs{define@mathalphabet} changed.}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1989/04/19}{Even more doc.}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1989/04/14}{More documentation added.}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1989/04/10}{\cs{preload@sizes} added.}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1989/04/10}{\cs{wrong@fontshape} changed to define
+% substitution font/shape macro.}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1989/04/10}{Starting with version numbers!!
+% \cs{ifmmode} added in \cs{math@group}}
+% \changes{v2.1w}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+%
+%
+% \section{Autoloading parts of NFSS}
+%
+% This code is set up in a way that some parts of it can be kept
+% separate and will only be loaded if needed.
+%
+% If we are producing an autoload version of \LaTeXe{} then all those
+% parts with \textsf{def1} or \textsf{def2} docstrip guards will be
+% placed into the autoloadable files \texttt{autofss1.sty} and
+% \texttt{autofss2.sty}.
+%
+% The `2ekernel' code ensures that a |\usepackage{autofss1}| is
+% essentially ignored if a `full' format is being used that has
+% picture mode already in the format.
+%
+% Note the |autofss2| loading is currently disabled.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<2ekernel>\expandafter\let\csname ver@autofss1.sty\endcsname\fmtversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The autoload file \texttt{autofss2} is a specialty because it
+% contains
+% code which will be completely local, ie loaded every time again.
+%
+% \section{Preliminary macros}
+%
+% We define a number
+% of macros that will be used later.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nomath}
+% |\@nomath| is used by most macros that will have no effect
+% in math mode. It issues a warning message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\@nomath#1{\relax\ifmmode
+ \@font@warning{Command \noexpand#1invalid in math mode}\fi}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1990/01/23}{Macro \cs{no@alphabet@help} added}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/04/18}{Macro \cs{no@alphabet@help}
+% removed again}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\no@alphabet@error}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1990/01/23}{Changed to error call}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/04/18}{Use std LaTeX error macro}
+% The macro |\no@alphabet@error| is called whenever
+% the user requests a math \emph{alphabet} that is not
+% available in the current \emph{version}.
+% In math mode an error message is produced otherwise the command
+% keeps silent.
+% The argument is the name of the control sequence that identifies
+% the math \emph{alphabet}.
+% The |\relax| at the beginning is necessary to prevent
+% \TeX{} from scanning too far in certain situations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+\gdef\no@alphabet@error#1{\relax \ifmmode
+ \@latex@error{Math\space alphabet\space identifier\space
+ \noexpand#1is\space undefined\space in\space math\space
+ version\space `\math@version'}%
+ {Your\space requested\space math\space alphabet\space
+ is\space undefined\space in\space the\space current\space
+ math\space version.^^JCheck\space the\space spelling\space
+ or\space use\space the\space \noexpand\SetMathAlphabet\space
+ command.}
+ \fi}
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+%<*autoload>
+\gdef\no@alphabet@error{\relax \ifmmode
+ \expandafter\try@sizes\expandafter\no@alphabet@error \fi}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@mathgroup}
+% \begin{macro}{\mathgroup}
+% We also give a new name to |\newfam| and |\fam|
+% to avoid verbal confusion
+% (see the introduction).\footnote{For the same reason
+% it seems advisable to
+% {\ttfamily\bslash let\bslash fam} and
+% {\ttfamily\bslash newfam}
+% equal to {\ttfamily\bslash relax},
+% but this is commented out to retain
+% compatibility to existing style files.}
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1990/01/28}{\cs{newfam} let to \cs{new@mathgroup}.}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) No need to redefine \cs{newfam} as not outer}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1995/05/27}
+% {(FMi) But a need to define \cs{new@mathgroup}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\new@mathgroup{\alloc@8\mathgroup\chardef\sixt@@n}
+\let\mathgroup\fam
+\let\newfam\new@mathgroup
+\@onlypreamble\new@mathgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Macros for setting up the tables}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFontShape}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{Introduced \cs{DeclareFontShape}}
+% The macro |\DeclareFontShape| takes $6$ arguments:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareFontShape{\begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we restore the catcodes of all characters used in the syntax.
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/02/24}
+% {Separate restoration of catcodes for fd cmds}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \nfss@catcodes
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use |\expandafter| |\endgroup| to restore catcode in case
+% something goes wrong with the argument parsing (suggested by Tim
+% Van Zandt)
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFontShape}
+% \changes{v2.1c}{1994/02/07}{revert catcode settings earlier}
+% \changes{v3.0m}{1995/11/01}
+% {(DPC) Test for \cs{relax} not \cs{undefined}, internal/1933}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \DeclareFontShape@}
+\def\DeclareFontShape@#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1+#2\endcsname\relax
+ \@latex@error{Font family `#1+#2' unknown}\@eha
+ \else
+ \expandafter
+ \xdef\csname#1/#2/#3/#4\endcsname{\expandafter\noexpand
+ \csname #5\endcsname}%
+ \def\reserved@a{#6}%
+ \global
+ \expandafter\let\csname#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@empty
+ \@empty
+ \else
+ \reserved@a
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFixedFont}
+% Define a direct font switch that avoids all overhead.
+% \changes{v2.1u}{1994/11/06}{Renamed
+% \cs{every@size} to \cs{every@math@size}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareFixedFont#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \begingroup
+ \math@fontsfalse
+ \every@math@size{}%
+ \fontsize{#6}\z@
+ \usefont{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\expandafter#1\the\font
+ \endgroup
+ }
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@subst@correction}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\do@subst@correction{%
+ \xdef\subst@correction{%
+ \font@name
+ \global\expandafter\font
+ \csname \curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname
+ \noexpand\fontname\font
+ \relax}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Calling |\subst@correction| after the current group means calling
+% it after we have loaded the substitution font which is done
+% inside a group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \aftergroup\subst@correction
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFontFamily}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareFontFamily#1#2#3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we want fast checking for the encoding scheme we can just
+% check for |\T@..| being defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \@tempswafalse
+% \def\reserved@b{#1}%
+% \def\cdp@elt##1##2##3##4{\def\reserved@c{##1}%
+% \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c \@tempswatrue\fi}%
+% \cdp@list
+% \if@tempswa
+ \@ifundefined{T@#1}%
+ {%
+ \@latex@error{Encoding scheme `#1' unknown}\@eha
+ }%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we have to define the macro |\|\meta{\#1}|+|\meta{\#2}
+% to contain |#3|. But since most of the time |#3| will be empty
+% we use |\let| in a tricky way rather than a simple |\def| since
+% this will save internal memory.
+% We store the argument |#3| in a temporary macro
+% |\reserved@a|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We compare |\reserved@a| with |\@empty|
+% If these two are the same we |\let| the `extra'
+% macro equal to |\@empty| which is not the same a doing a |\let|
+% to |\reserved@a| --- the latter would blow one extra memory
+% location rather then reusing the one from |\@empty|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global
+ \expandafter\let\csname #1+#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \ifx \reserved@a\@empty
+ \@empty
+ \else \reserved@a
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cdp@list}
+% We initialize the code page list to be empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\cdp@list\@empty
+\@onlypreamble\cdp@list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cdp@elt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\cdp@elt\relax
+\@onlypreamble\cdp@elt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFontEncoding}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareFontEncoding{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we start with ignoring all blanks and newlines since every
+% surplus space in the second or third argument will come out in
+% a weird place in the document.
+% \changes{v2.1c}{1994/02/07}{revert catcode settings earlier}
+% \changes{v2.1t}{1994/10/19}{Add missing \cs{relax}.}
+% \changes{v2.1z}{1994/12/06}{use \cs{nfss@catcodes}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \nfss@catcodes
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \DeclareFontEncoding@}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareFontEncoding
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.0g}{1993/09/15}
+% {Corrected: \cs{default@T} to \cs{default@M}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareFontEncoding@#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter
+ \ifx\csname T@#1\endcsname\relax
+ \def\cdp@elt{\noexpand\cdp@elt}%
+ \xdef\cdp@list{\cdp@list\cdp@elt{#1}%
+ {\default@family}{\default@series}%
+ {\default@shape}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To support encoding dependent commands (like accents) we
+% initialise the command
+% |\|\meta{encoding}|-cmd| to be |\@changed@cmd|.
+% (See \texttt{ltoutenc.dtx} for details.)
+% \changes{v2.1l}{1994/05/13}{Init encoding change command}
+% \changes{v2.1n}{1994/05/14}{Only init enc change cmd when
+% new encoding}
+% \changes{v2.1n}{1994/05/14}{Log if encoding is redeclared}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1-cmd\endcsname\@changed@cmd
+ \else
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring font encoding #1}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\@namedef{T@#1}{#2}%
+ \global\@namedef{M@#1}{\default@M#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Keep a record of the last encoding being declared:
+% \changes{v3.0w}{1999/01/06}{Added \cs{LastDeclaredEncoding} to
+% support cyrillic integration (pr/2988)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\LastDeclaredEncoding{#1}%
+ }
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareFontEncoding@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}
+% \changes{v3.0w}{1999/01/06}{Added \cs{LastDeclaredEncoding} to
+% support cyrillic integration (pr/2988)}
+% The last encoding being declared by |\DeclareFontEncoding|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LastDeclaredEncoding{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFontSubstitution}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareFontSubstitution#1#2#3#4{%
+ \expandafter
+ \ifx\csname T@#1\endcsname\relax
+ \@latex@error{Encoding scheme `#1' unknown}\@eha
+ \else
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.0x}{2002/10/02}{Adding \cs{LastDeclaredEncoding}
+% introduced a bug as on some occasions that macro name was stored
+% in the internal lists instead of the actual encoding. (pr/3459)}
+% We loop through the |\cdp@list| and rebuild it anew in |\toks@|
+% thereby replacing the defaults for the encoding in question with
+% the new defaults. It is important to store the encoding to test
+% against expanded in |\reserved@a| since it might just be
+% |\LastDeclaredEncoding| that is passed as |#1|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\reserved@a{#1}%
+ \toks@{}%
+ \def\cdp@elt##1##2##3##4{%
+ \def\reserved@b{##1}%
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we use the new defaults but we use |##1| (i.e., the encoding
+% name already stored previously) since we know that it is expanded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\cdp@elt{##1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |\reserved@a| and |\reserved@b| differ then we simply copy
+% from the old list to the new.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\cdp@elt{##1}{##2}{##3}{##4}}%
+ \fi}%
+ \cdp@list
+ \xdef\cdp@list{\the\toks@}%
+ \endgroup
+ \global
+ \@namedef{D@#1}{%
+ \def\default@family{#2}%
+ \def\default@series{#3}%
+ \def\default@shape{#4}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareFontSubstitution
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults#1#2{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\else
+ \ifx\default@T\@empty\else
+ \@font@info{Overwriting encoding scheme text defaults}%
+ \fi
+ \gdef\default@T{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\relax#2\else
+ \ifx\default@M\@empty\else
+ \@font@info{Overwriting encoding scheme math defaults}%
+ \fi
+ \gdef\default@M{#2}%
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\default@T}
+% \begin{macro}{\default@M}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\default@T\@empty
+\let\default@M\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclarePreloadSizes}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclarePreloadSizes#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \@ifundefined{T@#1}%
+ {\@latex@error{Encoding scheme `#1' unknown}\@eha}%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Don't know at the moment what this group here does!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We define a macro |\reserved@f|\footnote{We cannot use
+% {\ttfamily\bslash @tempa}
+% since it is needed in
+% {\ttfamily\bslash pickup@font}.}
+% that grabs the next \emph{size} and loads the corresponding
+% font.
+% This is done by delimiting |\reserved@f|'s only argument by the
+% \textsf{token} |,| (comma).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@f##1,{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The end of the list will be detected when there are no more
+% elements, i.e.\ when |\reserved@f|'s argument is empty.
+% The trick used here is explained in Appendix~D of the
+% \TeX{}book: if the argument is empty the |\if|
+% will select the first clause and |\let| |\reserved@f|
+% equal to |\relax|.
+% (We use the |>| character here since it cannot appear
+% in font file names.)
+% \changes{v1.2j}{1990/06/24}{Missing percent added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if>##1>%
+ \let\reserved@f\relax
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, we define |\font@name| appropriately and
+% call |\pickup@font| to do the work.
+% Note that the requested |\curr@fontshape|
+% combination must have been defined, or you will get an error.
+% The definition of |\font@name| is carried out globally
+% to be consistent with the rest of the code in this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\font@name{\csname#1/#2/#3/#4/##1\endcsname}%
+ \pickup@font
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we forget the name of the font just loaded.
+% More precisely, we set the corresponding control sequence
+% to |\relax|. This means that later on, when the font
+% is first used, the macro |\define@newfont| is called
+% again to execute the `extra' macro for this font.
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1990/01/27}{Font identifier set to \cs{relax}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\expandafter\let\font@name\relax
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we call |\reserved@f| again to process the next
+% \emph{size}. If |\reserved@f| was |\let| equal to |\relax|
+% this will end the macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \reserved@f}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We finish with reinserting the list of sizes after the
+% |\reserved@f|
+% macro and appending an empty element so that the end of the list
+% is recognized properly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \reserved@f#5,,%
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclarePreloadSizes
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmath@fonts}
+% We need a switch to decide if we have to switch math fonts.
+% For this purpose we provide |\ifmath@fonts|
+% that can be set to true or false by the |\S@...| macros
+% depending on if math fonts
+% are provided for this size or not.
+% The default is of course to switch all fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmath@fonts \math@fontstrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathSizes}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathSizes*}
+% |\DeclareMathSizes| takes the text size, math text size, math
+% script size, and math scriptscript size as arguments and defines
+% the right |\S@|\dots{} macro.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMathSizes{%
+ \@ifstar{\@DeclareMathSizes\math@fontsfalse}%
+ {\@DeclareMathSizes{}}}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMathSizes
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@DeclareMathSizes}
+% \changes{v3.0p}{1996/07/26}{use faster \cs{if} test}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@DeclareMathSizes#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \@defaultunits\dimen@#2pt\relax\@nnil
+ \if$#3$%
+ \expandafter \let
+ \csname S@\strip@pt\dimen@\endcsname
+ \math@fontsfalse
+ \else
+ \expandafter \gdef
+ \csname S@\strip@pt\dimen@\endcsname
+ {\gdef\tf@size{#3}\gdef\sf@size{#4}%
+ \gdef\ssf@size{#5}%
+ #1%
+ }%
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\@DeclareMathSizes
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Selecting a new font}
+%
+% \subsection{Macros for the user}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fontencoding}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\f@encoding}
+% As we said in the introduction a font is described by four parameters.
+% We first define macros to specify the wanted \emph{family},
+% \emph{series}, or \emph{shape}.
+% These are simply recorded in internal macros
+% |\f@family|, |\f@series|, and |\f@shape|, resp.
+% We use |\edef|'s so that the arguments can also be macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontencoding[1]{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname T@#1\endcsname\relax
+ \@latex@error{Encoding scheme `#1' unknown}\@eha
+ \else
+ \edef\f@encoding{#1}%
+ \ifx\cf@encoding\f@encoding
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the new encoding is the same as the old
+% encoding we have nothing to do.
+% However, in case we had a sequence of several encoding changes
+% without a |\selectfont| inbetween we can save processing by
+% making sure that |\enc@update| is |\relax|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\enc@update\relax
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If current and new encoding differ we define the macro
+% |\enc@update|
+% to contain all updates necessary at |\selectfont| time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\enc@update\@@enc@update
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@enc@update}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@enc@update{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When |\@@enc@update| is executed |\f@encoding| holds the encoding
+% name
+% for the new encoding and |\cf@encoding| the name of the last active
+% encoding.
+%
+% We start by setting the init command for encoding dependent
+% macros to |\@changed@cmd|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter
+ \let
+ \csname\cf@encoding -cmd\endcsname
+ \@changed@cmd
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we turn the one for the new encoding to |\@current@cmd| (see
+% \texttt{ltoutenc.dtx} for further explanations).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter
+ \let
+ \csname\f@encoding-cmd\endcsname
+ \@current@cmd
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We execute the default settings |\default@T|, followed by the one
+% for the new encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \default@T
+ \csname T@\f@encoding\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we change the default substitution values, disable
+% |\enc@update| and make |\f@encoding| officially the current
+% encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \csname D@\f@encoding\endcsname
+ \let\enc@update\relax
+ \let\cf@encoding\f@encoding
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enc@update}
+% \changes{v2.1m}{1994/05/14}{Macro added}
+% The default action in |\selectfont| is to do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\enc@update\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fontfamily}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\f@family}
+% \begin{macro}{\fontseries}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\f@series}
+% \begin{macro}{\fontshape}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}.}
+% \changes{v2.1y}{1994/11/30}{Use \cs{@current@cmd} in
+% \cs{@@enc@update}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macro}{\f@shape}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontfamily[1]{\edef\f@family{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontseries[1]{\edef\f@series{#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontshape [1]{\edef\f@shape{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some handy abbreviation if you want to get some particular font
+% in the current size. If also the size should change one has to
+% issue a |\fontsize| comand first.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\usefont#1#2#3#4{\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}%
+ \fontseries{#3}\fontshape{#4}\selectfont
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linespread}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{New macro}
+% \changes{v2.1p}{1994/05/16}{Remove surplus braces}
+% The comand |\linespread| changes the current |\baselinestretch|
+% by calling |\set@fontsize|. The values for |\f@size| and
+% |\f@baselineskip| will be left unchanged.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\linespread[1]
+ {\set@fontsize{#1}\f@size\f@baselineskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fontsize}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{Redefined to use \cs{set@fontsize}}
+% \changes{v2.1p}{1994/05/16}{Pass \cs{baselinstretch} not
+% \cs{f@linespread}}
+% We also define a macro that allows to specify a size. In this
+% case, however, we also need the value of |\baselineskip|. As the
+% first argument to |\set@fontsize| we pass the current value of
+% |\baselinestretch|. This will either match the internal value (in
+% which case nothing changes, or it will be an updated value due to
+% a user change of that macro using |\renewcommand|. If we would
+% pass the internal |\f@linespread| such a change would be
+% efectively overwritten by a size change.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\fontsize[2]
+ {\set@fontsize\baselinestretch{#1}{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.1n}{1994/05/14}{Set defaults for all \cs{f@...}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\f@linespread}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{New macro}
+% This macro holds the current internal value for
+% |\baselinestretch|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\f@family\@empty
+\let\f@series\@empty
+\let\f@shape\@empty
+\let\f@size\@empty
+\let\f@baselineskip\@empty
+\let\f@linespread\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cf@encoding}
+% \changes{v2.1u}{1994/11/06}{New macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\f@encoding\@empty
+\let\cf@encoding\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@defaultunits}
+%
+% The function |\@defaultunits| when wrapped around a dimen or skip
+% assignment supplies default units. Usage:
+%
+% |\@defaultunits\dimen@=#1pt\relax\@nnil|
+%
+% Note: the |\relax| is *important*. Other units can be substituted
+% for the `pt' if desired.
+%
+% We use |\remove@to@nnil| as an auxiliary macros for
+% |\@defaultunits|. It just has to gobble the supplied default unit
+% `pt' or whatever, if it wasn't used in the assignment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@defaultunits{\afterassignment\remove@to@nnil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\strip@pt}
+% \begin{macro}{\rem@pt}
+% This macro strips the characters |pt| produced by using |\the|
+% on a dimen register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`P=12
+ \catcode`T=12
+ \lowercase{
+ \def\x{\def\rem@pt##1.##2PT{##1\ifnum##2>\z@.##2\fi}}}
+ \expandafter\endgroup\x
+\def\strip@pt{\expandafter\rem@pt\the}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathversion}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1989/04/29}{Test if version defined added.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1989/09/14}
+% {Corrected typo: \cs{endscname} to \cs{endcsname}.}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/12}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\math@version}
+% |\mathversion| takes the math \emph{version} name as
+% argument, defines |\math@version| appropriately and switches
+% to the font selected
+% forcing a call to |\glb@settings| if the \emph{version} is
+% known to the system.
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1989/11/14}{Math version prefix `mv@' added.}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1989/11/22}
+% {\cs{def} $\to$ \cs{edef} for \cs{math@version}.}
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1990/02/16}{\cs{@nomath} added.}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\mathversion[1]
+ {\@nomath\mathversion
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname mv@#1\endcsname\relax
+ \@latex@error{Math version `#1' is not defined}\@eha\else
+ \edef\math@version{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need to force a math font setup both now and at the point
+% where we return to the previous math version.
+% Forcing a math font setup can simply be done by setting
+% |\glb@currsize| to an invalid value since this will trigger the
+% setup when the formula starts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\glb@currsize{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the scope of the current |\mathversion| ends we need to
+% restore the old setup. However this time we need to force it
+% directly at least if we are inside math, otherwise we could wait.
+% Another way to enhance this code here is todo the setting only if
+% the version really has changed after all. This might be
+% interesting in case of \texttt{amstext} and \texttt{boldsymbol}.
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1994/01/25}{Corrections for math setup}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \aftergroup\glb@settings
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% If \TeX{} would support a hook just before the end of a formula
+% (opposite of |\everymath| so to speak) the implementation of the
+% algorithm would be much simpler because in that case we would set up
+% the correct math fonts at this point without having to worry about
+% incorrect settings due to nesting. The same would be true if in
+% \LaTeX{} the use of |$| (as the primitive \TeX{} command) would be
+% impossible and instead only a higher-level interface would be
+% available. Note that this does not mean that a |$| couldn't be the
+% short-hand for starting and stopping that higher-level interface, it
+% only means that the direct \TeX{} function must be hidden.
+%
+% Anyway, since we don't have this and won't have it in \LaTeXe{} we
+% need to implement it in a somewhat slower way.
+%
+%
+% We test for the current math font setup on entry of a formula,
+% i.e., on the
+% hooks |\everymath| and |\everydisplay|. But since these hooks may
+% contain user data we provide ourselves with an internal version of
+% these hooks which stays frozen.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frozen@everymath}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\frozen@everydisplay}
+% New internal names for |\everymath| and |\everydisplay|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\frozen@everymath\everymath
+\let\frozen@everydisplay\everydisplay
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\everymath}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\everydisplay}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% Now we provide now user hooks that will be called in the
+% frozen internals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\everymath
+\newtoks\everydisplay
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frozen@everymath}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% Now we define the behaviour of the frozen hooks: first
+% check the math setup then call the user hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\frozen@everymath = {\check@mathfonts
+ \the\everymath}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frozen@everydisplay}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% Ditto for the display hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\frozen@everydisplay = {\check@mathfonts
+ \the\everydisplay}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v3.0q}{1996/07/27}{\cs{if@inmath} switch removed}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\curr@math@size}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% This holds locally the current math size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\curr@math@size\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Macros for loading fonts}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pickup@font}
+% The macro |\pickup@font| which is used in
+% |\selectfont| is very simple:
+% if the font name is undefined (i.e.\ not known yet) it calls
+% |\define@newfont| to load it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pickup@font{%
+ \expandafter \ifx \font@name \relax
+ \define@newfont
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\split@name}
+% |\pickup@font| assumes that |\font@name| is set
+% but it is sometimes called when |\f@family|, |\f@series|,
+% |\f@shape|, or |\f@size| may have the wrong settings
+% (see, e.g., the definition of |\getanddefine@fonts|).
+% Therefore we need a macro to extract font \emph{family},
+% \emph{series}, \emph{shape}, and \emph{size} from the font name.
+% To this end we define |\split@name| which takes the font
+% name as a list of characters of |\catcode| 12 (without the
+% backslash at the beginning) delimited by the
+% special control sequence |\@nil|.
+% This is not very complicated: we first ensure that |/| has
+% the right |\catcode|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\/=12
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and define |\split@name| so that it will define our
+% private |\f@encoding|, |\f@family|, |\f@series|, |\f@shape|,
+% and |\f@size| macros.
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{Added splitting into \cs{f@encoding}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\split@name#1/#2/#3/#4/#5\@nil{\def\f@encoding{#1}%
+ \def\f@family{#2}%
+ \def\f@series{#3}%
+ \def\f@shape{#4}%
+ \def\f@size{#5}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\curr@fontshape}
+% Abbreviation which may get removed again for speed.
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\curr@fontshape{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/\f@shape}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\define@newfont}
+% Now we can tackle the problem of defining a new font.
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\define@newfont{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have already mentioned that the \textsf{token} list that
+% |\split@name| will get as argument must not start with
+% a backslash.
+% To reach this goal we will set the |\escapechar| to $-1$ so
+% that the |\string| primitive will not generate an
+% escape character.
+% To keep this change local we open a group. We use
+% |\begingroup| for this purpose since |\define@newfont|
+% might be called in math mode, and an empty
+% |\bgroup|\ldots|\egroup| would add an empty Ord atom
+% to the math list and thus affect the spacing.
+%
+% Also locally redefine |\typeout| so that `No file ...fd'
+% Warnings become Font Info message just sent to the log file.
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1989/11/19}{Group added.}
+% \changes{v3.0m}{1995/11/17}{Redefine \cs{typeout} latex/1676}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let\typeout\@font@info
+ \escapechar\m@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we extract \emph{encoding scheme}, \emph{family},
+% \emph{series}, \emph{shape},
+% and \emph{size} from the font name.
+% Note the four |\expandafter|'s so that |\font@name| is
+% expanded first, then |\string|, and finally
+% |\split@name|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \split@name\expandafter\string\font@name\@nil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the |\curr@fontshape| combination is not available,
+% (i.e.\ undefined) we call the macro |\wrong@fontshape| to take
+% care of this case. Otherwise |\extract@font|
+% will load the external font for us.
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1990/01/28}{Added call to \cs{curr@fontshape} macro
+% to allow substitution.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \expandafter\ifx
+% \csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname \relax
+ \try@load@fontshape % try always
+% \fi
+ \expandafter\ifx
+ \csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname \relax
+ \wrong@fontshape\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To allow substitution we call the |curr@fontshape| macro
+% which usually will expand to |\relax| but may hold code for
+% substitution (see |\subst@fontshape| definition).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname
+ \extract@font\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are nearly finished and must only restore the
+% |\escapechar| by closing the group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% As |autofss2.sty| only makes local definitions it is re-loaded
+% for each font, to save some string memory in the kernel, and to
+% speed up the loading of some packages which may load fonts
+% The code is actually pre-loaded into the kernel and removed
+% at |\begin{document}|. The |\ifx| test below ensures that
+% if |\usepackage{autofss2}| apears in the preamble, then the code
+% is not removed at this time. Can not use |\AtBeginDocument| here
+% as it is not defined yet! Listing all the commands like this
+% is not ideal as any changes to the |autofss2.sty| need to be
+% reflected here, but this seems the most memory efficient mechanism
+% as it avoids the use of an extra csname to store the list.
+%
+% This is currently disabled, so the `autofss2' code remains
+% in the kernel, and |autofss2.sty| is not generated in the current
+% public release.
+% \changes{v3.0l}{1995/10/26}
+% {(DPC) disable autofss2 for now}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*autoloadxxx>
+\expandafter\def\expandafter\@begindocumenthook\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@autofss2.sty\endcsname\relax
+ \gdef\define@newfont{%
+ \begingroup
+ \makeatletter\nfss@catcodes
+ \catcode`\#6\relax
+ \@@input autofss2.sty\relax\define@newfont
+ \endgroup}%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\do##1{\global\let##1\@undefined}%
+ \do\extract@sizefn
+ \do\try@simple@size
+ \do\set@simple@size@args
+ \do\extract@rangefontinfo
+ \do\is@range
+ \do\check@range
+ \do\check@single
+ \do\set@size@funct@args
+ \do\set@size@funct@args@
+ \do\try@size@range
+ \do\empty@sfcnt
+ \do\gen@sfcnt
+ \do\genb@sfcnt
+ \do\sub@sfcnt
+ \do\subf@sfcnt
+ \do\fixed@sfcnt
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}
+%</autoloadxxx>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\try@load@fontshape{%
+ \expandafter
+ \ifx\csname \f@encoding+\f@family\endcsname\relax
+ \@font@info{Try loading font information for
+ \f@encoding+\f@family}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We predefine this combination to be |\@empty| which means that
+% next time we don't try again unnecessary in case we don't find a
+% |.fd| file. If the file contains a |\DeclareFontFamily| command
+% than this setting will be overwritten.
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/02/24}
+% {Separate restoration of catcodes for fd cmds}
+% \changes{v2.1l}{1994/05/13}{Use \cs{@input@} for fd files}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname\f@encoding+\f@family\endcsname\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set the catcodes used in the syntax, but do it only once (this
+% will be restored at the end of the font loading group).
+% \changes{v3.0t}{1997/10/21}{Move \cs{makeatletter} to
+% \cs{nfss@catcodes}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \nfss@catcodes
+ \let\nfss@catcodes\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.0s}{1996/11/18}
+% {(DPC) lowercase fd file names. internal/1044}
+% For increased portability make the external filename
+% monocase, but look for the (old style) mixed case
+% filename if the first attempt fails.
+%
+% On any monocase system this means that the file is looked for twice
+% which takes up time and string space, but at least for this release
+% Check for both names to give people time to re-install their private
+% fd files with lowercase names.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \lowercase{%
+ \noexpand\InputIfFileExists{\f@encoding\f@family.fd}}}%
+ \reserved@a\relax
+ {\@input@{\f@encoding\f@family.fd}}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nfss@catcodes}
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/02/24}
+% {Separate restoration of catcodes for fd cmds}
+% This macro should contain the standard |\catcode| assignments to
+% all characters which are used in the commands found in an
+% \texttt{.fd} file and which might have special |\catcode|s in the
+% middle of a document. If necessary, this list can be extended in
+% a package file using a suitable number of |\expandafter|, i.e.,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \expandafter\def\expandafter\nfss@catcodes
+% \expandafter{\nfss@catcodes <additional settings>}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Note, that this macro might get executed several times since it
+% is also called by |\DeclareFontShape|, thus it probably should
+% not be misused as a general purpose hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nfss@catcodes{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We start by making |@| a letter and ignoring all blanks and newlines.
+% \changes{v2.1z}{1994/12/06}{Added tab char as well}
+% \changes{v3.0p}{1996/07/26}{omit \cs{relax} as not needed}
+% \changes{v3.0t}{1997/10/21}{Moved \cs{makeatletter} from
+% \cs{try@load@font@shape}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \makeatletter
+ \catcode`\ 9%
+ \catcode`\^^I9%
+ \catcode`\^^M9%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we set up |\|, |{|, |}|, |#| and |%| in case an \texttt{.fd}
+% file is loaded during a verbatim environment.
+% \changes{v3.0n}{1995/11/27}{Reset hash, for definitions in fd files}
+% \changes{v3.00}{1995/12/06}{Reset hat, for typeouts etc in fd files}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \catcode`\\\z@
+ \catcode`\{\@ne
+ \catcode`\}\tw@
+ \catcode`\#6%
+ \catcode`\^7%
+ \catcode`\%14%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The we make sure that the important syntax parts have the right
+% |\catcode|.
+% \changes{v2.1s}{1994/09/16}{Reset [ and ] as well, just in case}
+% \changes{v3.0r}{1996/08/25}{Reset the acute, grave and double quote
+% chars as well}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@makeother\<%
+ \@makeother\>%
+ \@makeother\*%
+ \@makeother\.%
+ \@makeother\-%
+ \@makeother\/%
+ \@makeother\[%
+ \@makeother\]%
+ \@makeother\`%
+ \@makeother\'%
+ \@makeother\"%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareErrorFont}
+% Declare the last resort shape! We assume that in this fontshape
+% there is a 10pt font but it doesn't really matter. We only loose
+% one macro name if the assumption is false. But at least the font
+% should be there!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareErrorFont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \xdef\error@fontshape{%
+ \noexpand\expandafter\noexpand\split@name\noexpand\string
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname#1/#2/#3/#4/#5\endcsname
+ \noexpand\@nil}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Initialize all those internal variables which may or may not have
+% values in the first seconds of NFSS' bootstraping process. Later
+% on such values will be updated when an encoding is selected, etc.
+%
+% We definitely don't want to set |\f@encoding|; we can set all the
+% others since if they are left ``blank'' any selection would grap
+% ``error default values'' as well. However, this probably should
+% go also.
+% \changes{v2.1n}{1994/05/14}{Don't set \cs{f@encoding}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \gdef\f@encoding{#1}%
+ \gdef\default@family{#2}%
+ \gdef\default@series{#3}%
+ \gdef\default@shape{#4}%
+ \global\let\f@family\default@family
+ \global\let\f@series\default@series
+ \global\let\f@shape\default@shape
+ \gdef\f@size{#5}%
+ \gdef\f@baselineskip{#5pt}%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareErrorFont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\wrong@fontshape}
+% Before we come to the macro |\extract@font| we have to take
+% care of unknown |\curr@fontshape| combinations.
+% The general strategy is to issue a warning and to try a default
+% \emph{shape}, then a default \emph{series},
+% and finally a default \emph{family}.
+% If this last one also fails \TeX{} will go into an infinite loop.
+% But if the defaults are set incorrectly one deserves nothing else!
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\wrong@fontshape{%
+ \csname D@\f@encoding\endcsname % install defaults if in math
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We remember the wanted |\curr@fontshape| combination
+% which we will need in a moment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\reserved@a{\csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname}%
+ \ifx\last@fontshape\reserved@a
+ \errmessage{Corrupted NFSS tables}%
+ \error@fontshape
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we warn the user about the mess and set the shape to its
+% default.
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1989/11/19}
+% {Instead of calling \cs{family}\cs{default@family},
+% etc. we directly set \cs{f@family}, etc.}
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1990/01/28}{Warning message slightly changed.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\f@shape\default@shape
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the combination is not known, try the default \emph{series}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname\relax
+ \let\f@series\default@series
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this is still undefined, try the default \emph{family}.
+% Otherwise give up. We never try to change the encoding scheme!
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter
+ \ifx\csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname\relax
+ \let\f@family\default@family
+ \fi \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point a valid |\curr@fontshape| combination must
+% have been found.
+% We inform the user about this fact.
+%\changes{v3.0n}{1995/11/02}
+% {(DPC) Remove extra space with \cs{string} for latex/1676}
+% \changes{v3.0m}{1995/11/17}
+% {Support \cs{@wrong@font@char} latex/1676}
+%
+% The |\expandafter\string| here stops \TeX\ adding the space
+% that it usually puts after command names in messages. The similar
+% construction with |\@undefined| just produces `undefined', but saves
+% a few tokens.
+%
+% |\@wrong@font@char| is locally redefined in |\UseTextSymbol| from
+% its normal (empty) definition, to report the symbol generating the
+% font switch.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@font@warning{Font shape `\expandafter\string\reserved@a'
+ \expandafter\@gobble\string\@undefined\MessageBreak
+ using `\curr@fontshape' instead\@wrong@font@char}%
+ \global\let\last@fontshape\reserved@a
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We change |\@defaultsubs| to produce a warning at the end of
+% the document.
+% \changes{v3.0d}{1995/07/13}{Change a macro not a switch to flag
+% default font substitutions}
+% \changes{v3.0k}{1995/10/24}{Make this code inline since it
+% happens only here}
+% The macro |\@defaultsubs| is initially |\relax| but gets changed
+% here if some default font substitution happens.
+% It is then executed in |\enddocument|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\@defaultsubs{%
+ \@font@warning{Some font shapes were not available, defaults
+ substituted.\@gobbletwo}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we substitute a |\curr@fontshape| combination
+% by the default one we don't want the warning to be printed out
+% whenever this (unknown) combination is used.
+% Therefore we globally |\let| the macro corresponding to
+% the wanted combination equal to its substitution.
+% This requires the use of four |\expandafter|'s
+% since |\csname|\dots|\endcsname| has to be
+% expanded before |\reserved@a| (i.e.\ the requested
+% combination),
+% and this must happen before the |\let| is executed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
+ \expandafter\reserved@a
+ \csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can redefine |\font@name| accordingly.
+% This \emph{must} be done globally since it might occur in the
+% group opened by |\define@newfont|. If we would this
+% definition were local the closing |\endgroup| there
+% would restore the old meaning of |\font@name| and then
+% switch to the wrong font at the end of |\selectfont|
+% although the correct font was loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\font@name{%
+ \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The last thing this macro does is to call |\pickup@font|
+% again to load the font if it is not defined yet.
+% At this point this code will loop endlessly if
+% the defaults are not well defined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \pickup@font}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wrong@font@char}
+% \changes{v3.0m}{1995/11/17}{(DPC) Macro added. latex/1676}
+% Normally empty but redefined in |\UseTextSymbol| so that the
+% Font shape undefined message can refer to the symbol causing the
+% problem.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@wrong@font@char\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@defaultsubs}
+% \changes{v3.0d}{1995/07/13}{macro added}
+% \changes{v3.0k}{1995/10/24}{macro removed}
+% \begin{macro}{\@defaultsubs}
+% \changes{v3.0d}{1995/07/13}{macro added}
+% See above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@defaultsubs\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\strip@prefix}
+% In |\extract@font| we will need a way to recover the
+% replacement text of a macro.
+% This is done by the primitive |\meaning| together
+% with the macro |\strip@prefix| (for the details
+% see appendix~D of the \TeX{}book, p.\ 382).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\strip@prefix#1>{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A \extract@font
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Assigning math fonts to \emph{versions}}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\install@mathalphabet}
+% This is just another name for |\gdef| but we can redefine it if
+% necessary later on.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\install@mathalphabet\gdef
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math@fonts}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\math@fonts\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\select@group}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1989/11/26}{\cs{bgroup}/\cs{egroup} changed to
+% \cs{begingroup}/\cs{endgroup} to avoid empty Ord atom on math list.}
+% |\select@group| has four arguments: the new
+% \meta{math alphabet identifier} (a control sequence), the
+% \meta{math group number}, the extra macro for math mode
+% and the |\curr@fontshape| definition macro name.
+% We first check if we are in math mode.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1989/12/16}{\cs{relax} in front added.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1989/12/16}{Now four arguments.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\select@group#1#2#3{\relax\ifmmode
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We do these things locally using |\begingroup| instead
+% of |\bgroup| to avoid the appearance of an empty Ord
+% atom on the math list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We set the math fonts for the \emph{family} in question by calling
+% |\getanddefine@fonts| in the correct environment.
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \escapechar\m@ne
+% \getanddefine@fonts{\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname}#3%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We globally select the math fonts\dots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \globaldefs\@ne \math@fonts
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \dots{} and close the group to
+% restore |\globaldefs| and |\escapechar|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As long as no \emph{size} or \emph{version} change occurs
+% the \meta{math alphabet identifier} should simply switch to the
+% installed \emph{math group} instead of calling
+% |\select@group|
+% unnecessarily. So we globally redefine the first argument
+% (the new \meta{math alphabet identifier})
+% to expand into a |\mathgroup| switch
+% and then select this \emph{alphabet}. Note that this redefinition
+% will be overwritten by the next call to a \emph{version} macro.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1989/12/16}{Usage of `\quotechar=' macro added.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1989/12/16}{Redefinition of alphabet now simpler.}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1990/01/20}{Def for alph id changed.}
+% The original code for the end of |\select@group| was
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \gdef#1{#3\mathgroup #2}#1\fi}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% i.e.\ first redefining the \meta{math alphabet identifier} and
+% then calling the new definition to switch to the wanted
+% \meta{math group}. Now we define the \meta{math alphabet
+% identifier} as a call to the |\use@mathgroup| command.
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1990/01/21}{Code moved to \cs{use@mathgroup}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \xdef#1{\noexpand\use@mathgroup\noexpand#2%
+% {\number\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1992/05/12}{Added call to
+% \cs{extract@alph@from@version}.}
+% But this is not sufficient, as we learned the hard way.
+% The problem here is that the loading of the fonts that comprise
+% the alphabet identifier |#1|, as well as the necessary math font
+% assignments is deferred until it is used. This is OK so far, but
+% if the fonts are switched within the current formula (which may
+% happen if a sub-formula is a box that contains a math version
+% switch) the font assignments for |#1| are not restored unless
+% |#1| is used again. This is disastrous since TeX sees the wrong
+% fonts at the end of the math formula, when it converts the math
+% list into a horizontal list.
+%
+% This is taken into account as follows: When a math alphabet
+% identifier is used for the first time in a certain version
+% it modifies the corresponding macro |\mv@|\meta{version}
+% so that it calls |\getanddefine@fonts| directly in future as well.
+% We use the macro |\extract@alph@from@version| to do this.
+% It takes the math alphabet identifer |#1| and the math version
+% macro as arguments.
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \expandafter\extract@alph@from@version
+% \csname mv@\math@version\expandafter\endcsname
+% \expandafter{\number\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname}%
+% #1%
+% \stepcounter{mv@\math@version}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, it is not possible to simply call the new definition
+% since we
+% have an argument (the third argument of |\use@mathgroup|
+% or more exactly the argument od |\math@egroup| if the {\ttfamily
+% margid} option is in force)
+% which would swallow our closing |\fi|. So
+% we use the |\expandafter| technique to remove the |\fi|
+% before the |\use@mathgroup| is expanded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\expandafter #1\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\extract@alph@from@version}
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1992/05/12}{Macro added.}
+% We proceed to the definition of the
+% macro |\extract@alph@from@version|. As stated above, it takes
+% a math alphabet identifier and a math version macro
+% (e.g.\ |\mv@normal|) as its arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\extract@alph@from@version#1#2#3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To extract and replace the definition of math alphabet identifier
+% |#3| in macro |#1| we have to recall how this definition looks
+% like: Somewhere in the replacement text of |#1| there is
+% the sequence\\[2pt]
+% |\install@mathalphabet|\meta{math alphabet identifier} |#3||{%| \\
+% \hspace*{\MacroIndent}\hspace*{5mm}
+% \meta{Definitions for }|#3}| \\[2pt]
+% Hence, the first thing we do is to extract the tokens preceding
+% this definitions, the definition itself, and the tokens following
+% it. To this end we define one auxiliary macro |\reserved@a|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@a##1\install@mathalphabet#3##2##3\@nil{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When |\reserved@a| is expanded, it will have the tokens preceding
+% the definition in question in its first argument (|##1|), the
+% following tokens in its third argument (|##3|), and the replacement
+% text for the math alphabet identifier |#3| in its second argument.
+% (|##2|). This is then recorded for later use in a temporary macro
+% |\reserved@b|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@b{##2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Additionally, we define a macro |\reserved@c| to reconstruct the
+% definitions for the math version in question from the tokens that
+% will remain unchanged (|##1| and |##3|) and the yet to build new
+% definitions for the math alphabet identifier |#3|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@c####1{\gdef#1{##1####1##3}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we execute our auxiliary macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\reserved@a#1\@nil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% OK, so now we have to build the new definition for |#3|. To do so,
+% we first extract the interesting parts out of the old one.
+% The old definition looks like:\\[2pt]
+% |\select@group|\meta{math alphabet identifier} \\
+% \hspace*{\MacroIndent}\hspace*{5mm}
+% \meta{math group number}\meta{math extra part}\\
+% \meta{|curr@fontshape| definition} \\[2pt]
+% So we define a new temporary macro |\reserved@a| that
+% extracts these parts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@a\select@group#3##1##2\@nil{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This macro can now directly rebuild the math version definition
+% by calling |\reserved@c|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \reserved@c{%
+ \getanddefine@fonts{#2}##2%
+ \install@mathalphabet#3{%
+ \relax\ifmmode \else \non@alpherr#3\fi
+ \use@mathgroup##1{#2}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.1t}{1994/10/15}{Warn if math alpha is used outside math}
+% In addtion it defines the alphabet the way it should be used from
+% now on.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef#3{\relax\ifmmode \else \non@alpherr#3\fi
+ \use@mathgroup##1{#2}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, we only have to call this macro |\reserved@a| on the old
+% definitions recorded in |\reserved@b|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\reserved@a\reserved@b\@nil
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math@bgroup}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1990/01/20}{Def. placed in this file.}
+% \begin{macro}{\math@egroup}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1990/01/20}{Def. placed in this file.}
+% \changes{v1.2h}{1990/03/30}{Changed to have one arg.}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{1994/03/10}{Changed \cs{begingroup}/\cs{endgroup} to
+% \cs{bgroup}/\cs{egroup}.}
+% Here are the default definitions for |\math@bgroup| and
+% |\math@egroup|. We use |\bgroup| instead of |\begingroup|
+% to avoid `leaking out' of style changes. This has the side
+% effect of always producing mathord atoms.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\math@bgroup\bgroup
+\def\math@egroup#1{#1\egroup}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\calculate@math@sizes}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/04/18}{Changed message to log only}
+% Here is the default definition for |\calculate@math@sizes|
+% a more elaborate interface
+% is under testing in mthscale.sty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+\gdef\calculate@math@sizes{%
+ \@font@info{Calculating\space math\space sizes\space for\space
+ size\space <\f@size>}%
+ \dimen@\f@size \p@
+ \@tempdimb \defaultscriptratio \dimen@
+ \dimen@ \defaultscriptscriptratio \dimen@
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname S@\f@size\endcsname{%
+ \gdef\noexpand\tf@size{\f@size}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\sf@size{\strip@pt\@tempdimb}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\ssf@size{\strip@pt\dimen@}%
+ \noexpand\math@fontstrue}}
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+%<*autoload>
+\def\calculate@math@sizes{\try@sizes\calculate@math@sizes}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\defaultscriptratio}
+% \changes{v2.1h}{1994/04/11}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\defaultscriptscriptratio}
+% \changes{v2.1h}{1994/04/11}{Macro added}
+% The default ratio for math
+% sizes is:\\
+% 1 to |\defaultscriptratio| to |\defaultscriptscriptratio|.\\
+% By default this is 1 to .7 to .5.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\defaultscriptratio{.7}
+\def\defaultscriptscriptratio{.5}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\noaccents@}
+% If we don't have a definition for |\noaccents@| we provide a
+% dummy.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\noaccents@\@undefined
+ \let\noaccents@\@empty
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showhyphens}
+% \changes{v1.2l}{1990/06/30}{Macro added.}
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1993/05/16}{Use \cs{reset@font}}
+% \changes{v3.0h}{1995/10/10}
+% {Use \cs{normalfont} and make colour safe, and autoloadable}
+% \changes{v3.0u}{1998/03/25}
+% {Suppress unnecessary error when used in preamble}
+% The |\showhyphens| command must be redefined since the version in
+% \texttt{plain.tex} uses |\tenrm|. We have also made some further
+% adjustments for its use in \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+%<*2ekernel|autoerr>
+\gdef\showhyphens#1{%
+ \setbox0\vbox{%
+ \color@begingroup
+ \everypar{}%
+ \parfillskip\z@skip\hsize\maxdimen
+ \normalfont
+ \pretolerance\m@ne\tolerance\m@ne\hbadness\z@\showboxdepth\z@\ #1%
+ \color@endgroup}}
+%</2ekernel|autoerr>
+%<autoload>\def\showhyphens{\@autoerr\showhyphens}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addto@hook}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1989/12/05}{\cs{addto@hook} added.}
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1994/02/10}{Made \cs{addto@hook} long.}
+% We need a macro to add tokens to a hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vpt}
+% \changes{v2.1v}{1994/11/09}{(DPC) macros added, from setsize.dtx}
+% \changes{v2.1v}{1994/11/09}{(DPC) reduce save stack usage latex/1742}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@vpt{5}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vipt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@vipt{6}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@viipt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@viipt{7}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@viiipt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@viiipt{8}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ixpt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@ixpt{9}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xpt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@xpt{10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xipt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@xipt{10.95}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xiipt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@xiipt{12}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xivpt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@xivpt{14.4}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xviipt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@xviipt{17.28}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xxpt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@xxpt{20.74}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xxvpt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@xxvpt{24.88}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b4441aa4120
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsscmp.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,414 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfsscmp.dtx
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+%% all rights reserved.
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+%
+%
+\ProvidesFile{ltfsscmp.dtx}
+ [1995/08/26 v3.0c LaTeX Kernel (NFSS1 Compatibility)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{ltfsscmp.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<+checkmem>\def\CHECKMEM{\tracingstats=2
+%<+checkmem> \newlinechar=`\^^J
+%<+checkmem> \message{^^JMemory usage: \filename}\shipout\hbox{}}
+%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{235}
+%
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltfsscmp.dtx}
+% \title{A new font selection scheme for \TeX{} macro packages\\
+% (Compatibility with NFSS1)\thanks
+% {This file has version number
+% \fileversion\ dated \filedate}}
+%
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% This file contains the implementation of commands giving
+% compatibility with the original `NFSS1' release of the Font Selection
+% Scheme.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \textbf{Warning:}
+% The macro documentation is still basically the documentation from the
+% first NFSS release and therefore in some cases probably not
+% completely accurate.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1995/06/15}
+% {(DPC) minor documentation edits}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) Make file from previous file, fam.dtx 1995/05/20 v2.2d}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Compatibility code for NFSS release 1}
+%
+% There have been a couple of commands which became obsolete with NFSS2.
+% In the past they have been still part of the kernel code to make it
+% possible to process old packages using those commands but since they
+% take up valuable space we decided to remove them and instead
+% auto-load their definitions if they are actually encountered in some
+% file.
+%
+% Thus the following code doesn't really belong to this file but I put
+% it here for the moment until finally a documented version of
+% \texttt{ltfss.dtx} is available.
+%
+% [ auto-loading not activated ]
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@fontshape}
+% \begin{macro}{\subst@fontshape}
+% \begin{macro}{\extra@def}
+% \begin{macro}{\default@mextra}
+% \begin{macro}{\define@mathalphabet}
+% \begin{macro}{\define@mathgroup}
+% These macros are the interfaces in NFSS1 which shouldn't be used
+% any longer. We all define them to call the macro
+% |\scan@fontshape| which is an internal macro that loads the real
+% definitions and then to execute themselves again. Once this
+% auto-loading has happened they have the definition shown below and
+% thus execute their real code directly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*autoload>
+\def\new@fontshape{\scan@fontshape\new@fontshape}
+\def\subst@fontshape{\scan@fontshape\subst@fontshape}
+\def\extra@def{\scan@fontshape\extra@def}
+\def\default@mextra{\scan@fontshape\default@mextra}
+\def\define@mathalphabet{\scan@fontshape\define@mathalphabet}
+\def\define@mathgroup{\scan@fontshape\define@mathgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scan@fontshape}
+% Here is the kernel definition for |\scan@fontshape| which loads
+% the actual definitions from the file \texttt{nfsscmp.def}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\scan@fontshape{\input{nfsscmp.def}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The following definitions are now placed into the auto-load file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Since we don't know when this file will be read in we need to
+% provide ourselves with standard |\catcode| settings. This is done
+% by placing all definitions in a group and calling
+% |\nfss@catcodes|. But this macro will also disable spaces which
+% isn't very appropriate for the following code because it contains
+% a lot of helper messages. Therefore we change this back.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\nfss@catcodes
+\catcode`\ =10\relax
+%</autoload>
+%<*compat>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@fontshape}
+% The interface is now |\DeclareFontShape|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\new@fontshape#1#2#3#4{%
+ \warn@rel@i\new@fontshape\DeclareFontShape
+ \expandafter\scan@fontshape\@gobble#4<\@nil><<%
+ \DeclareFontShape U{#1}{#2}{#3}\reserved@f}
+\@onlypreamble\new@fontshape
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\warn@rel@i}
+% The warning message used above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\warn@rel@i#1#2{%
+ \@font@warning{*** NFSS release 1 command
+ \noexpand#1found\MessageBreak
+ *** Update by using release 2 command
+ \string#2.\MessageBreak
+ *** Recovery is probably possible}%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\warn@rel@i
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scan@fontshape}
+% This will scan the old font shape definition syntax.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\scan@fontshape{%
+ \let\reserved@f\@empty
+ \let\reserved@e\@empty % holds last info
+ \scan@@fontshape
+}
+\@onlypreamble\scan@fontshape
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scan@@fontshape}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\scan@@fontshape#1>#2#3<{%
+ \ifx\@nil#1%
+ \edef\reserved@f{\reserved@f\reserved@e}%
+ \else
+ \def\reserved@b{#1}% nick names
+ \def\reserved@c{#3}%
+ \in@{ at}{#3}%
+ \ifin@
+ \in@{pt}{#3}% not a proof but a good chance
+ \ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We grap also everything after pt and discard it if people have
+% forgotten to place a percent sign there.
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1994/02/10}{scan away stuff after pt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@a##1 at##2pt##3\@nil{%
+ \def\reserved@b{##2}%
+ \def\reserved@c{##1}%
+ }%
+ \reserved@a#3\@nil
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifnum 0<0#2
+ \edef\reserved@d{subf*\reserved@c}%
+ \ifcase #2\or
+ \or
+ \else
+ \errmessage{*** What's this? NFSS release 0? ***}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \edef\reserved@d{#2\reserved@c}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\reserved@d\reserved@e
+ \edef\reserved@f{\reserved@f<\reserved@b>}%
+ \else
+ \edef\reserved@f{\reserved@f\reserved@e<\reserved@b>}%add old info
+ \let\reserved@e\reserved@d
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\scan@@fontshape
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\scan@@fontshape
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subst@fontshape}
+% This is now also handled by the extend syntax of
+% |\DeclareFontShape|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\subst@fontshape#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \warn@rel@i\subst@fontshape\DeclareFontShape
+ \DeclareFontShape{U}{#1}{#2}{#3}{<->sub*#4/#5/#6}{}}
+\@onlypreamble\subst@fontshape
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\extra@def}
+% This was replaced by |\DeclareFontFamily|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\extra@def#1#2#3{%
+ \warn@rel@i\extra@def\DeclareFontFamily
+ \DeclareFontFamily{U}{#1}{}%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\extra@def
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\default@mextra}
+% The new name is |\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults| but in this case
+% we don't feel comfortable with this either.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\default@mextra{%
+ \warn@rel@i\default@mextra\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We pick up the argument to |\default@mextra| implicitly as
+% the second argument of |\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \DeclareFontEncodingDefaults\relax
+}
+\@onlypreamble\default@mextra
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preload@sizes}
+% The new interface is |\DeclarePreloadSizes|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\preload@sizes{%
+ \warn@rel@i\preload@sizes\DeclarePreloadSizes
+ \DeclarePreloadSizes U%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\preload@sizes
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\err@rel@i}
+% This macro is used in cases where emulation with NFSS2 features
+% is not really possible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\err@rel@i#1#2{%
+ \@latex@error{*** NFSS release 1 command \noexpand#1found%
+ ^^J*** Recovery not possible. Use \string#2}%
+ {The new release of NFSS doesn't support the
+ \noexpand#1command^^Jany longer.
+ Please upgrade your file to the syntax of NFSS
+ release 2^^Jusing the \noexpand#2command.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Let's die.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \batchmode\input.\relax
+}
+\@onlypreamble\err@rel@i
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newmathalphabet}
+% \begin{macro}{\newmathalphabet@@}
+% \begin{macro}{\newmathalphabet@@@}
+% |\newmathalphabet| is the old form.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\newmathalphabet{%
+ \if@no@font@opt
+ \@latex@error{*** NFSS release 1 command
+ \noexpand\newmathalphabet found%
+ ^^J \space*** Automatic recovery not possible.%
+ ^^J \space*** TYPE H for Help%
+ }%
+ {Please look at the file usrguide.tex for hints on
+ how to resolve this problem.}%
+ \else
+ \warn@rel@i\newmathalphabet\DeclareMathAlphabet
+ \fi
+ \@ifstar\newmathalphabet@@@
+ \newmathalphabet@@}
+\gdef\newmathalphabet@@#1{\DeclareMathAlphabet#1{U}{}{}{}}
+\gdef\newmathalphabet@@@#1#2#3#4{%
+ \DeclareMathAlphabet{#1}{U}{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+\@onlypreamble\newmathalphabet
+\@onlypreamble\newmathalphabet@@
+\@onlypreamble\newmathalphabet@@@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@no@font@opt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@no@font@optfalse}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\global\let\if@no@font@opt\iftrue
+\gdef\@no@font@optfalse{\let\if@no@font@opt\iffalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\define@mathalphabet}
+% This is a case where dying is best.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\define@mathalphabet{%
+ \err@rel@i\define@mathalphabet\DeclareMathAlphabet
+}
+\@onlypreamble\define@mathalphabet
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\define@mathgroup}
+% And here is another one
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\define@mathgroup{%
+ \err@rel@i\define@mathgroup\DeclareSymbolFont
+}
+\@onlypreamble\define@mathgroup
+%</compat>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtoversion}
+% |\addtoversion| is the old form.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addtoversion#1#2{%
+ \warn@rel@i\addtoversion\SetMathAlphabet
+ \SetMathAlphabet#2{#1}{U}}
+\@onlypreamble\addtoversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% That finishes the definitions for the old interfaces --- but first
+% we better finish the group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*autoload>
+\endgroup
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f2aee76bdab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssdcl.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1521 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfssdcl.dtx
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-1998 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+%% all rights reserved.
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+%
+%
+\ProvidesFile{ltfssdcl.dtx}
+ [1998/08/17 v3.0i LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Declarative Interface)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{ltfssdcl.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<+checkmem>\def\CHECKMEM{\tracingstats=2
+%<+checkmem> \newlinechar=`\^^J
+%<+checkmem> \message{^^JMemory usage: \filename}\shipout\hbox{}}
+%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1871}
+%
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltfssdcl.dtx}
+% \title{A new font selection scheme for \TeX{} macro packages\\
+% (Declarative Interface)\thanks
+% {This file has version number
+% \fileversion\ dated \filedate}}
+%
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% This file contains the main implementation of the font selection
+% scheme commands. See other parts of the \LaTeX\ distribution, or
+% \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} for higher level documentation of these
+% commands.
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \textbf{Warning:}
+% The macro documentation is still basically the documentation from the
+% first NFSS release and therefore in some cases probably not
+% completely accurate.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Interface Commands}
+%
+% \changes{v3.0i}{1998/08/17}
+% {(RmS) Corrected minor glitches in changes entries.}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1995/06/15}
+% {(DPC) minor documentation changes}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) Make file from previous file, latint.dtx 1995/05/21 v2.1t}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.1o}{1994/11/22}
+% {wrap long lines}
+% \changes{v2.1m}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/29}{Use new error commands}
+% \changes{v2.1h}{1994/05/13}{Removed file identification typeout}
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1994/05/12}{Allow \cs{relax}'ed cmds to be declared}
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1994/05/12}{Allow \cs{relax} as undefined command}
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/04/28}{Removed all \cs{uppercase} in hex num
+% parsing macros}
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1994/04/18}{Removed surplus \cs{no@alphabet@error}
+% (see fam.dtx)}
+%
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.1f}{1994/05/03}{Renamed \cs{@@DeclareMathDelimiter} to
+% \cs{@DeclareMathDelimiter}}
+% \changes{v2.1c}{1994/03/13}{add 2ekernel module to omit repeated code}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\in@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifin@}
+% |\@in| is a utility macro with two arguments. It determines
+% whether its first argument occurs in its second (after expanding
+% it) and sets the switch |\if@in| accordingly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\in@#1#2{%
+ \def\in@@##1#1##2##3\in@@{%
+ \ifx\in@##2\in@false\else\in@true\fi}%
+ \in@@#2#1\in@\in@@}
+\newif\ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Before the |\begin{document}| command several
+% \meta{math versions} and \meta{math alphabet identifiers} may
+% be declared.
+% In principle, there should be exactly one family/series/shape
+% combination be declared for each version/alphabet pair.
+% But we want to allow for defaults as well for automagical
+% filling of holes.
+%
+% While building the tables for math alphabet identifiers and math
+% versions we keep several lists:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item the list of all math versions, |\version@list|,
+% each entry prefixed by the control sequence |\version@elt|,
+% i.e.\ this list has the following form
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\version@elt|\meta{version$_1$}^^A
+% |\version@elt|\meta{version$_2$}\ldots\\\hspace*{\fill}^^A
+% |\version@elt|\meta{version$_n$}
+% \end{quote}
+% \item the list of all math alphabet identifiers. Here every
+% entry has the form:\\[2pt]
+% \hspace*{\MacroIndent}
+% |\group@elt|\meta{math group number}\\
+% \hspace*{\MacroIndent}
+% |{{|\meta{default family}^^A
+% |}{|\meta{default series}^^A
+% |}{|\meta{default shape}|}}|.
+% \item Each defined math alphabet identifier holds a list containing
+% Information about the {\em versions\/} for which it is
+% defined. This list has a more complicated structure: it
+% looks as follows:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\set@alpha|\meta{the alphabet identifier itself}\\
+% \hspace*{\MacroIndent}
+% |\reserved@c|\meta{math version}\meta{font info}\\
+% \hspace*{\MacroIndent}\ldots\\
+% |\@nil|
+% \end{quote}
+% where \meta{font info} is either |\reserved@e|
+% (if the combination is not defined yet) or
+% \begin{quote}
+% |{{|\meta{family}|}{|\meta{series}^^A
+% |}{|\meta{shape}|}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\version@list}
+% We initialize the version list to be empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\version@list=\@empty
+\@onlypreamble\version@list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\version@elt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\version@elt\relax
+\@onlypreamble\version@elt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@mathversion}
+% The macro |\new@mathversion| is called with the version control
+% sequence as its argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\new@mathversion#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first thing this macro does is to check if the version
+% identifier is already present in |\version@list|.
+% We enclose |\version@list| in braces since it might be empty
+% (if no {\em version\/} is defined yet). But this means that
+% we need a suitable number of |\expandafter| primitives.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \expandafter\in@\expandafter#1\expandafter{\version@list}%
+% \ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If so it prints an error message.
+% The |\next| macro is used to get rid of the four characters
+% |\mv@| that would otherwise appear at the begin of the
+% version name in the error message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \@latex@error{Math version
+% `\expandafter\@gobblefour\string#1'
+% already defined}\@eha
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we have a new version, and we can proceed with
+% entering it into the tables.
+% We add it to |\version@list|. This is very easy:
+% we define |\version@elt| (which is the delimiter in
+% |\version@list|) to protect itself and the following token
+% from being expanded and simply redefine |\version@list|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \else
+% \global\expandafter\newcount\csname c@\expandafter
+% \@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+% \global\csname c@\expandafter
+% \@gobble\string#1\endcsname\@ne
+% \def\version@elt{\noexpand\version@elt\noexpand}%
+% \edef\version@list{\version@list\version@elt#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we prepare to enter the new version into all math
+% alphabet identifier lists. Remember that these lists
+% use |\reserved@c| as delimiter, and that there appears the
+% control sequence |\reserved@e| that must not be expanded.
+% Therefore we take suitable precautions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\reserved@c{\noexpand\reserved@c\noexpand}%
+% \let\reserved@e\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We will now go through the |\alpha@list| to process every
+% \meta{math alphabet identifier} in turn.
+% Since this list has |\group@elt| as a delimiter we define
+% this control sequence. It has three arguments as every
+% entry consists of three items (as explained above).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\group@elt##1##2##3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first of these arguments is the \meta{math alphabet
+% identifier}. We redefine it by appending the information
+% about the new version at the end of the list contained in
+% it. However, there is one subtlety: the definitions for
+% |\reserved@c| and |\reserved@e| made above prevent the
+% main part of the list from being expanded. But we still have
+% to take care of the header and the trailer. To do this we
+% remove the trailer by means of the macro |\remove@nil|
+% which also protect the header from being expanded. Its
+% definition is given below. Now we can prepare to add the
+% new version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \edef##1{\expandafter\remove@nil##1%
+% \reserved@c
+% #1%
+% \reserved@e
+% \noexpand\@nil}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we call |\alpha@list| which will now execute
+% the macro |\group@elt| once for every defined \meta{math
+% alphabet identifier}. And that's all for now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \alpha@list
+% \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alpha@list}
+% As we explained above every entry in |\alpha@list| has
+% the form\\[2pt]
+% |\alpha@elt|\\\meta{alphabet identifier}\meta{internal
+% group number}\meta{default font assignments}\ldots\\[2pt]
+% We initialize it to |\@empty|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\alpha@list\@empty
+\@onlypreamble\alpha@list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alpha@elt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\alpha@elt\relax
+\@onlypreamble\alpha@elt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newgroup}
+% Start the group (fam) allocation at 0. (Doesn't belong here.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\count18=-1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \changes{v3.0f}{1997/11/13}
+% {(DPC) Remove as never used. (Re)defined in ltcounts}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\select@group}
+% We surround |\select@group| with braces so that functions using it
+% can be used directly after |_| or |^|.
+% \changes{v2.1p}{1994/12/10}{Surround with braces (add fourth arg)}
+% However, if we use oldstyle syntax where the math alphabet
+% doesn't have arguments (ie if |\math@bgroup| is not |\bgroup|) we
+% need to get rid of the extra group.
+% \changes{v2.1q}{1995/04/02}{fix problem for pr/1275}
+% \changes{v3.0g}{1997/11/20}
+% {(DPC) inline use of \cs{stepcounter} (faster, and saves a csname
+% per math version as no reset list)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\select@group#1#2#3#4{%
+ \ifx\math@bgroup\bgroup\else\relax\expandafter\@firstofone\fi
+ {%
+ \ifmmode
+ \ifnum\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname<\sixt@@n
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar\m@ne
+ \getanddefine@fonts{\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname}#3%
+ \globaldefs\@ne \math@fonts
+ \endgroup
+ \init@restore@version
+ \xdef#1{\noexpand\use@mathgroup\noexpand#2%
+ {\number\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname}}%
+ \global\advance\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname\@ne
+ \else
+ \let#1\relax
+ \@latex@error{Too many math alphabets used in
+ version \math@version}%
+ \@eha
+ \fi
+ \else \expandafter\non@alpherr\fi
+ #1{#4}%
+ }%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\restore@mathversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\init@restore@version}
+% \changes{v3.0e}{1996/07/26}{Removed \cs{ifrestore@version} switch
+% and replaced by \cs{init@restore@version}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\init@restore@version{%
+ \global\let\init@restore@version\relax
+ \xdef\restore@mathversion
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\csname mv@\math@version\endcsname
+ \global\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname
+ \number\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname\relax}%
+ \aftergroup\dorestore@version
+}
+\@onlypreamble\init@restore@version
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\non@alpherr}
+% \changes{v3.0c}{1995/10/10}
+% {(DPC) autoload error message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+%<*2ekernel|autoerr>
+\gdef\non@alpherr#1{\@latex@error{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since the argument is the internal alphabet name, we have to get
+% rid of the |@| in its name. The trick here is to use |\@firstoftwo|
+% which is a \LaTeX{} macro which discards the second of two
+% arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo\string#1 allowed only in math mode}\@ehd}
+%</2ekernel|autoerr>
+%<autoload>\def\non@alpherr{\@autoerr\non@alpherr}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dorestore@version}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dorestore@version
+ {\ifmmode
+ \aftergroup\dorestore@version
+ \else
+ \gdef\init@restore@version{%
+ \global\let\init@restore@version\relax
+ \xdef\restore@mathversion
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\csname mv@\math@version\endcsname
+ \global\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname
+ \number\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname\relax}%
+ \aftergroup\dorestore@version
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\getanddefine@fonts\@gobbletwo
+ \restore@mathversion
+ \endgroup
+ \fi}%
+\@onlypreamble\dorestore@version
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\document@select@group}
+% We surround |\select@group| with braces so that functions using it
+% can be used directly after |_| or |^|.
+% \changes{v2.1p}{1994/12/10}{Surround with braces (add fourth arg)}
+% \changes{v2.1q}{1995/04/02}{fix problem for pr/1275}
+% \changes{v3.0g}{1997/11/20}
+% {(DPC) inline use of \cs{stepcounter} (faster, and saves a csname
+% per math version as no reset list)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\document@select@group#1#2#3#4{%
+ \ifx\math@bgroup\bgroup\else\relax\expandafter\@firstofone\fi
+ {%
+ \ifmmode
+ \ifnum\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname<\sixt@@n
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar\m@ne
+ \getanddefine@fonts{\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname}#3%
+ \globaldefs\@ne \math@fonts
+ \endgroup
+ \expandafter\extract@alph@from@version
+ \csname mv@\math@version\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\number\csname
+ c@mv@\math@version\endcsname}%
+ #1%
+ \global\advance\csname c@mv@\math@version\endcsname\@ne
+ \else
+ \let#1\relax
+ \@latex@error{Too many math alphabets used
+ in version \math@version}%
+ \@eha
+ \fi
+ \else \expandafter\non@alpherr\fi
+ #1{#4}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\process@table}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\process@table{%
+ \def\cdp@elt##1##2##3##4{%
+ \@font@info{Checking defaults for
+ ##1/##2/##3/##4}%
+ \expandafter
+ \ifx\csname##1/##2/##3/##4\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Grouping is important for two reasons, first |\cdp@elt| will get
+% redefined if |\Declare...| functions are executed within the
+% external |.fd| file and secondly |\try@load@fontshape| changes a
+% lot of catcodes without surrounding itself with a group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\f@encoding{##1}\def\f@family{##2}%
+ \try@load@fontshape
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \expandafter
+ \ifx\csname##1/##2/##3/##4\endcsname\relax
+ \@latex@error{This NFSS system isn't set up properly}%
+ {For encoding scheme ##1 the defaults
+ ##2/##3/##4 do not form a valid font shape}%
+ \else
+ \@font@info{... okay}%
+ \fi}%
+ \cdp@list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we make sure that |\error@fontshape| is okay.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar\m@ne
+ \error@fontshape
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname \curr@fontshape\endcsname\relax
+ \begingroup
+ \try@load@fontshape
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname \curr@fontshape\endcsname\relax
+ \@latex@error{This NFSS system isn't set up properly}%
+ {The system maintainer forgot to specify a suitable
+ substitution
+ font shape using the \noexpand\DeclareErrorFont
+ command}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set |\select@group| to its meaning used within the document body.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\select@group\document@select@group
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Install the default font attributes they are currently pointing
+% to error font shape.
+% Don't use |\reset@font| since that would trigger |\selectfont|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}%
+ \fontfamily{\familydefault}%
+ \fontseries{\seriesdefault}%
+ \fontshape{\shapedefault}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% kill all macros not longer needed.
+% we need to add many more!!!!!!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \everyjob{}%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\process@table
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\@onlypreamble\set@mathradical
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathVersion}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMathVersion#1{%
+ \expandafter\new@mathversion\csname mv@#1\endcsname}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMathVersion
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@mathversion}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\new@mathversion#1{%
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter#1\expandafter{\version@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring math version
+ `\expandafter\@gobblefour\string#1'}%
+ \else
+ \global\expandafter\newcount\csname c@\expandafter
+ \@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+ \def\version@elt{\noexpand\version@elt\noexpand}%
+ \edef\version@list{\version@list\version@elt#1}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\toks@| is used to gather all tokens for the math version.
+% |\count@| will be used to count the math groups we add to this
+% version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \toks@{}%
+ \count@\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we loop over |\group@list| to add all math groups defined so
+% far to the version and at the same time to count them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\group@elt##1##2{%
+ \advance\count@\@ne
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\getanddefine@fonts##1##2}%
+ }%
+ \group@list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We set the counter for this math version to the number of math
+% groups found in |\group@list|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\csname c@\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname\count@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we loop over |\alpha@list| to add all math alphabets known so
+% far. We have to distinugish the case that an alphabet by default
+% should produce an error in new versions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\alpha@elt##1##2##3{%
+ \ifx##2\no@alphabet@error
+ \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\install@mathalphabet##1%
+ {\no@alphabet@error##1}}%
+ \else
+ \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\install@mathalphabet##1%
+ {\select@group##1##2##3}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \alpha@list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we define the math version to expand to the contents of
+% |\toks@|.
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1993/08/18}{Exchanged names of encodings in warning
+% message of \cs{SetSymbolFont}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef#1{\the\toks@}%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\new@mathversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSymbolFont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareSymbolFont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \edef\reserved@b{#2}%
+ \def\cdp@elt##1##2##3##4{\def\reserved@c{##1}%
+ \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c \@tempswatrue\fi}%
+ \cdp@list
+ \if@tempswa
+ \@ifundefined{sym#1}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\new@mathgroup\csname sym#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\new@symbolfont\csname sym#1\endcsname
+ {#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring symbol font `#1'}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v3.0f}{1997/11/13}
+% {(DPC) Really update \cs{group@list} dont
+% leave new version in \cs{toks@}. latex/2661}
+% Update the group list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\group@elt##1##2{%
+ \noexpand\group@elt\noexpand##1%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname sym#1\endcsname##1%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2/#3/#4/#5\endcsname
+ \else
+ \noexpand##2%
+ \fi}%
+ \xdef\group@list{\group@list}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Update the version list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\version@elt##1{%
+ \expandafter
+ \SetSymbolFont@\expandafter##1\csname#2/#3/#4/#5\expandafter
+ \endcsname \csname sym#1\endcsname
+ }%
+ \version@list
+ }%
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Encoding scheme `#2' unknown}\@eha
+ \fi
+ }
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareSymbolFont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\group@list}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\group@list\@empty
+\@onlypreamble\group@list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\group@elt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\group@elt\relax
+\@onlypreamble\group@elt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@symbolfont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\new@symbolfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \edef\group@list{\the\toks@\noexpand\group@elt\noexpand#1%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2/#3/#4/#5\endcsname}%
+ \def\version@elt##1{\toks@\expandafter{##1}%
+ \edef##1{\the\toks@\noexpand\getanddefine@fonts
+ #1\expandafter\noexpand\csname#2/#3/#4/#5\endcsname}%
+ \global\advance\csname c@\expandafter
+ \@gobble\string##1\endcsname\@ne
+ }%
+ \version@list
+}
+\@onlypreamble\new@symbolfont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SetSymbolFont}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetSymbolFont#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \edef\reserved@b{#3}%
+ \def\cdp@elt##1##2##3##4{\def\reserved@c{##1}%
+ \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c \@tempswatrue\fi}%
+ \cdp@list
+ \if@tempswa
+ \expandafter\SetSymbolFont@
+ \csname mv@#2\expandafter\endcsname\csname#3/#4/#5/#6\expandafter
+ \endcsname \csname sym#1\endcsname
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Encoding scheme `#3' unknown}\@eha
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\SetSymbolFont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SetSymbolFont@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetSymbolFont@#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter#1\expandafter{\version@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter#3\expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\get@cdp\string#2\@nil\reserved@a
+ \toks@{}%
+ \def\install@mathalphabet##1##2{%
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\install@mathalphabet##1{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \def\getanddefine@fonts##1##2{%
+ \ifnum##1=#3%
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\getanddefine@fonts#3#2}%
+ \expandafter\get@cdp\string##2\@nil\reserved@b
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\else
+ \@font@warning{Encoding `\reserved@b' has changed
+ to `\reserved@a' for symbol font\MessageBreak
+ `\expandafter\@gobblefour\string#3' in the
+ math version `\expandafter
+ \@gobblefour\string#1'}%
+ \fi
+ \@font@info{%
+ Overwriting symbol font
+ `\expandafter\@gobblefour\string#3' in
+ version `\expandafter
+ \@gobblefour\string#1'\MessageBreak
+ \@spaces \expandafter\@gobble\string##2 -->
+ \expandafter\@gobble\string#2}%
+ \else
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\getanddefine@fonts##1##2}%
+ \fi}%
+ #1%
+ \xdef#1{\the\toks@}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `\expandafter\@gobblefour\string#3'
+ not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Math version `\expandafter\@gobblefour\string#1'
+ is not
+ defined}{You probably mispelled the name of the math
+ version.^^JOr you have to specify an additional package.}%
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\SetSymbolFont@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\get@cdp}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\get@cdp#1#2/#3\@nil#4{\def#4{#2}}
+\@onlypreamble\get@cdp
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathAlphabet}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMathAlphabet#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \edef\reserved@b{#2}%
+ \def\cdp@elt##1##2##3##4{\def\reserved@c{##1}%
+ \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c \@tempswatrue\fi}%
+ \cdp@list
+ \if@tempswa
+ \expandafter\ifx
+ \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+ \relax
+ \new@mathalphabet#1{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check if it is already a math alphabet.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\in@{\string\select@group}%
+ {\expandafter\meaning\csname @\expandafter
+ \@gobble\string#1\endcsname}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring math alphabet \string#1}%
+ \def\version@elt##1{%
+ \expandafter\SetMathAlphabet@\expandafter
+ ##1\csname#2/#3/#4/#5\expandafter\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{???}{1994/04/18}{Pass correct arg (2 not 3)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \csname M@#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname @\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname#1}%
+ \version@list
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check if it is a math alphabet defined via
+% |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\in@{\string\use@mathgroup}%
+ {\expandafter\meaning\csname @\expandafter
+ \@gobble\string#1\endcsname}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In that case overwriting is simple since there is nothing
+% inserted in the math version macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring math alphabet \string#1}%
+ \new@mathalphabet#1{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise panic.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Command `\string#1' already defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Encoding scheme `#2' unknown}\@eha
+ \fi
+ }
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMathAlphabet
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\new@mathalphabet}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\new@mathalphabet#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\alpha@list}%
+ \edef#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname @\expandafter
+ \@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+ \if/#5/%
+ \noexpand\no@alphabet@error
+ \noexpand\no@alphabet@error
+ \else
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname M@#2\endcsname
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2/#3/#4/#5\endcsname
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \toks2\expandafter{#1}%
+ \edef\alpha@list{\the\toks@\noexpand\alpha@elt\the\toks2}%
+ \def\version@elt##1{\toks@\expandafter{##1}%
+ \edef##1{\the\toks@\install@mathalphabet
+ \expandafter\noexpand
+ \csname @\expandafter\@gobble
+ \string#1\endcsname
+ {\if/#5/%
+ \noexpand\no@alphabet@error
+ \noexpand#1%
+ \else
+ \noexpand\select@group\the\toks2
+ \fi}}%
+ }%
+ \version@list
+ \expandafter\edef\csname @\expandafter\@gobble
+ \string#1\endcsname{\if/#5/%
+ \noexpand\no@alphabet@error
+ \noexpand#1%
+ \else
+ \noexpand\select@group\the\toks2
+ \fi}%
+ \edef#1{\noexpand\protect
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname @\expandafter
+ \@gobble\string#1\endcsname}%
+}
+\@onlypreamble\new@mathalphabet
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SetMathAlphabet}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetMathAlphabet#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \edef\reserved@b{#3}%
+ \def\cdp@elt##1##2##3##4{\def\reserved@c{##1}%
+ \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c \@tempswatrue\fi}%
+ \cdp@list
+ \if@tempswa
+ \expandafter\SetMathAlphabet@
+ \csname mv@#2\expandafter\endcsname\csname#3/#4/#5/#6\expandafter
+ \endcsname \csname M@#3\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname @\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname#1%
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Encoding scheme `#3' unknown}\@eha
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\SetMathAlphabet
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SetMathAlphabet@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetMathAlphabet@#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter#1\expandafter{\version@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter#4\expandafter{\alpha@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \begingroup
+ \toks@{}%
+ \def\getanddefine@fonts##1##2{%
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\getanddefine@fonts##1##2}%
+ }%
+ \def\reserved@c##1##2##3##4{% % for message below
+ \expandafter\@gobble\string##4}%
+ \def\install@mathalphabet##1##2{%
+ \ifx##1#4%
+ \addto@hook\toks@
+ {\install@mathalphabet#4{\select@group#4#3#2}}%
+ \@font@info{Overwriting math alphabet
+ `\string#5' in version `\expandafter
+ \@gobblefour\string#1'\MessageBreak
+ \@spaces \reserved@c##2 -->
+ \expandafter\@gobble\string#2}%
+ \else
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\install@mathalphabet##1{##2}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \xdef#1{\the\toks@}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the math alphabet was defined via |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|
+% we have remove its external definition and add it as a normal
+% math alphabet to every version before trying to change it in one
+% version.
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1994/03/11}{Changed parameter template in temporary
+% macro to catch check add below.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\in@{\string\use@mathgroup}{\meaning#4}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+ \def\reserved@b##1\use@mathgroup##2##3{%
+ \def\reserved@b{##3}\def\reserved@c{##2}}%
+ \expandafter\reserved@b#4%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\install@mathalphabet##1##2{%
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\install@mathalphabet##1{##2}}%
+ }%
+ \def\getanddefine@fonts##1##2{%
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\getanddefine@fonts##1##2}%
+ \ifnum##1=\reserved@b
+ \expandafter
+ \addto@hook\expandafter\toks@
+ \expandafter{\expandafter\install@mathalphabet
+ \expandafter#4\expandafter
+ {\expandafter\select@group\expandafter
+ #4\reserved@c##2}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \def\version@elt##1{%
+ \toks@{}%
+ ##1%
+ \xdef##1{\the\toks@}%
+ }%
+ \version@list
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Put it into the |\alpha@list| with default `error'
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\alpha@list\expandafter
+ {\alpha@list
+ \alpha@elt #4\no@alphabet@error \no@alphabet@error}%
+ \gdef#4{\no@alphabet@error #5}% fake things :-)
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then call the internal setting routine again:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \SetMathAlphabet@{#1}{#2}{#3}#4#5%
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Command `\string#5' not defined as a
+ math alphabet}%
+ {Use \noexpand\DeclareMathAlphabet to define it.}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Math version `\expandafter\@gobblefour\string#1'
+ is not
+ defined}{You probably mispelled the name of the math
+ version.^^JOr you have to specify an additional package.}%
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\SetMathAlphabet@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathAlphabet}
+% could do with more checks like allowing single number in |#4|
+% lowercase in |#4| etc
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMathAccent#1#2#3#4{%
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#3\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \begingroup
+ \count\z@=#4\relax
+ \count\tw@\count\z@
+ \divide\count\z@\sixt@@n
+ \count@\count\z@
+ \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \advance\count\tw@-\count@
+ \if\relax\noexpand#1% is command?
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\in@{\string\mathaccent}{\meaning#1}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\set@mathaccent
+ \csname sym#3\endcsname#1#2%
+ {\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring math accent \string#1}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifx
+ \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+ \relax
+ \expandafter\set@mathaccent
+ \csname sym#3\endcsname#1#2%
+ {\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Command `\string#1' already defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Not a command name: `\noexpand#1'}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `#3' is not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMathAccent
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@mathaccent}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@mathaccent#1#2#3#4{%
+ \xdef#2{\mathaccent"\mathchar@type#3\hexnumber@#1#4\relax}}
+\@onlypreamble\set@mathaccent
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathSymbol}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMathSymbol#1#2#3#4{%
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#3\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \begingroup
+ \count\z@=#4\relax
+ \count\tw@\count\z@
+ \divide\count\z@\sixt@@n
+ \count@\count\z@
+ \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \advance\count\tw@-\count@
+ \if\relax\noexpand#1% is command?
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\in@{\string\mathchar}{\meaning#1}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\set@mathsymbol
+ \csname sym#3\endcsname#1#2%
+ {\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring math symbol \string#1}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifx
+ \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+ \relax
+ \expandafter\set@mathsymbol
+ \csname sym#3\endcsname#1#2%
+ {\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Command `\string#1' already defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \expandafter\set@mathchar
+ \csname sym#3\endcsname#1#2
+ {\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `#3' is not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMathSymbol
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@mathchar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@mathchar#1#2#3#4{%
+ \global\mathcode`#2="\mathchar@type#3\hexnumber@#1#4\relax}
+\@onlypreamble\set@mathchar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@mathsymbol}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@mathsymbol#1#2#3#4{%
+ \global\mathchardef#2"\mathchar@type#3\hexnumber@#1#4\relax}
+\@onlypreamble\set@mathsymbol
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\mathsymbol#1#2#3{%
+% \@tempcnta=#3\relax
+% \@tempcntb\@tempcnta
+% \divide\@tempcnta\sixt@@n
+% \count@\@tempcnta
+% \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+% \advance\@tempcntb-\count@
+% \mathchar"\mathchar@type#1\hexnumber@#2%
+% \hexnumber@\@tempcnta\hexnumber@\@tempcntb\relax}
+%
+%\def\DeclareMathAlphabetCharacter#1#2#3{%
+% \DeclareMathSymbol{#1}7{#2}{#3}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathDelimiter}
+% \changes{v2.1m}{1994/11/18}
+% {(DPC) \cs{expandafter} instead of \cs{next}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMathDelimiter#1{%
+ \if\relax\noexpand#1%
+ \expandafter\@DeclareMathDelimiter
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@xxDeclareMathDelimiter
+ \fi
+ #1}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMathDelimiter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xxDeclareMathDelimiter}
+% \changes{v3.0h}{1998/04/15}{Macro added (pr/2662)}
+% This macro checks if the second arg is a ``math type'' such
+% as |\mathopen|. The undocumented original code didn't use math
+% types when the delimiter was a single letter.
+% For this reason the coding is a bit strange as it tries to
+% support the undocumented syntax for compatibility reasons.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xxDeclareMathDelimiter#1#2#3#4{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% 7 is the default value returned in the case that |\mathchar@type|
+% is passed something unexpected, like a math symbol font name.
+% We locally move |\mathalpha| out of the way so if you use that
+% the right branch is taken. This will still fail if an explicit
+% number |7| is used!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let\mathalpha\mathord
+ \ifnum7=\mathchar@type{#2}%
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this branch is taken we have old syntax (5 arguments).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this branch is taken |\mathchar@type| is different from 7 so
+% we assume new syntax. In this case we also use the arguments to
+% set up the letter as a math symbol for the case where it is not
+% used as a delimiter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endgroup
+ \DeclareMathSymbol#1{#2}{#3}{#4}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we arrange that |\@xDeclareMathDelimiter| only gets |#1|,
+% |#3|, |#4| \ldots\ as it does not expect a math type as argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \fi
+ {\@xDeclareMathDelimiter#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+\@onlypreamble\@xxDeclareMathDelimiter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@DeclareMathDelimiter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@DeclareMathDelimiter#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#3\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#5\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \begingroup
+ \count\z@=#4\relax
+ \count\tw@\count\z@
+ \divide\count\z@\sixt@@n
+ \count@\count\z@
+ \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \advance\count\tw@-\count@
+ \edef\reserved@c{\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ %
+ \count\z@=#6\relax
+ \count\tw@\count\z@
+ \divide\count\z@\sixt@@n
+ \count@\count\z@
+ \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \advance\count\tw@-\count@
+ \edef\reserved@d{\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ %
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\in@{\string\delimiter}{\meaning#1}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\set@mathdelimiter
+ \csname sym#3\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname sym#5\endcsname#1#2%
+ \reserved@c\reserved@d
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring math delimiter \string#1}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifx
+ \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+ \relax
+ \expandafter\set@mathdelimiter
+ \csname sym#3\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname sym#5\endcsname#1#2%
+ \reserved@c\reserved@d
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Command `\string#1' already defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `#5' is not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `#3' is not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\@DeclareMathDelimiter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xDeclareMathDelimiter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xDeclareMathDelimiter#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#4\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \begingroup
+ \count\z@=#3\relax
+ \count\tw@\count\z@
+ \divide\count\z@\sixt@@n
+ \count@\count\z@
+ \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \advance\count\tw@-\count@
+ \edef\reserved@c{\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ %
+ \count\z@=#5\relax
+ \count\tw@\count\z@
+ \divide\count\z@\sixt@@n
+ \count@\count\z@
+ \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \advance\count\tw@-\count@
+ \edef\reserved@d{\hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ \expandafter\set@@mathdelimiter
+ \csname sym#2\expandafter\endcsname\csname sym#4\endcsname#1%
+ \reserved@c\reserved@d
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `#4' is not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `#2' is not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\@xDeclareMathDelimiter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@mathdelimiter}
+% We have to end the definition of a math delimiter like |\lfloor|
+% with a space and not with |\relax| as we did before, because
+% otherwise contructs involving |\abovewithdelims| will prematurely
+% end (pr/1329)
+%
+% \changes{v2.1q}{1995/04/02}{fix pr/1329}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@mathdelimiter#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \xdef#3{\delimiter"\mathchar@type#4\hexnumber@#1#5%
+ \hexnumber@#2#6 }}
+\@onlypreamble\set@mathdelimiter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@@mathdelimiter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@@mathdelimiter#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \global\delcode`#3="\hexnumber@#1#4\hexnumber@#2#5\relax}
+\@onlypreamble\set@@mathdelimiter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareMathRadical}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMathRadical#1#2#3#4#5{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Below is a crude fix to make this macro work if |#1| is undefined
+% or |\relax|. Should be improved!
+% \changes{v2.1t}{1995/05/21}{Allow for undefined cs names}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx
+ \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+ \relax
+ \let#1\radical
+ \fi
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\in@{\string\radical}{\meaning#1}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#4\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+ \begingroup
+ \count\z@=#3\relax
+ \count\tw@\count\z@
+ \divide\count\z@\sixt@@n
+ \count@\count\z@
+ \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \advance\count\tw@-\count@
+ \edef\reserved@c{%
+ \hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+ \count\z@=#5\relax
+ \count\tw@\count\z@
+ \divide\count\z@\sixt@@n
+ \count@\count\z@
+ \multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \advance\count\tw@-\count@
+ \edef\reserved@d{%
+ \hexnumber@{\count\z@}\hexnumber@{\count\tw@}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Coded inline instead of using |\set@mathradical|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \expandafter\set@mathradical
+% \csname sym#2\expandafter\endcsname
+% \csname sym#4\endcsname#1%
+% \reserved@c\reserved@d
+ \xdef#1{\radical"\expandafter\hexnumber@
+ \csname sym#2\endcsname\reserved@c
+ \expandafter\hexnumber@
+ \csname sym#4\endcsname\reserved@d
+ \relax}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `#4' is not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Symbol font `#2' is not defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Command `\string#1' already defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMathRadical
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Definition below was wrong it contained |\delimiter| !
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\set@mathradical#1#2#3#4#5{%
+% \xdef#3{\radical"\hexnumber@#1#4\hexnumber@#2#5\relax}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathalpha}
+% just a dummy currently
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mathalpha\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathchar@type}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathchar@type#1{%
+ \ifodd 2#11 #1\else % is this non-negative number?
+ \ifx#1\mathord 0\else
+ \ifx#1\mathop 1\else
+ \ifx#1\mathbin 2\else
+ \ifx#1\mathrel 3\else
+ \ifx#1\mathopen 4\else
+ \ifx#1\mathclose 5\else
+ \ifx#1\mathpunct 6\else
+ 7% % anything else is variable ord
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\mathchar@type
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@
+ \csname @\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname{#2}#1}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@#1#2#3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use the switch |\if@tempswa| to decide if we can declare this
+% symbol font alphabet.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempswatrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First check if |#2| is known to be a symbol font
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\in@\csname sym#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\group@list}%
+ \ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Check if |#1| is defined as a math alphabet defined via
+% |\DeclareMathAlphabet|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter#1\expandafter{\alpha@list}%
+ \ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If so remove it from the |\alpha@list| and from all math version
+% macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring math alphabet \string#3}%
+ \toks@{}%
+ \def\alpha@elt##1##2##3{%
+ \ifx##1#1\else\addto@hook\toks@{\alpha@elt##1##2##3}\fi}%
+ \alpha@list
+ \xdef\alpha@list{\the\toks@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we loop over all versions and remove the math alphabet:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\version@elt##1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \toks@{}%
+ \def\getanddefine@fonts####1####2{%
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\getanddefine@fonts####1####2}}%
+ \def\install@mathalphabet####1####2{%
+ \ifx####1#1\else
+ \addto@hook\toks@{\install@mathalphabet
+ ####1{####2}}\fi}%
+ ##1%
+ \xdef##1{\the\toks@}%
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \version@list
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |#3| is not defined as a math alphabet check if it is defined
+% at all:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx
+ \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\endcsname
+ \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If it is undefined, fine otherwise check if it is a math alphabet
+% defined via |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \edef\reserved@a{%
+ \noexpand\in@{\string\use@mathgroup}{\meaning#1}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \ifin@
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring math alphabet \string#3}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since the command |#3| is defined to be something which is not a
+% math alphabet we have to skip redefining it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \@latex@error{Command `\string#3' already defined}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since the symbol font is not known we better skip defining this
+% alphabet.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \@latex@error{Unknown symbol font `#2'}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we reach this point we are allowed to define |#1| to be a
+% symbol font math alphabet. This means that we have to set it to
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\use@mathgroup| \meta{math-settings} |\sym|\meta{name}
+% \end{quote}
+% The \meta{math-settings} are the one for the encoding that is
+% used in the font shape where |\sym|\meta{name} is pointing to.
+% This means that we have to get it from the information stored in
+% |\group@list|. Thus we loop through that list after defining
+% |\group@elt| in a suitable way.
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1994/03/11}{Added check against use of alphabet
+% switch outside of math mode.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\group@elt##1##2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname sym#2\endcsname##1%
+ \expandafter\reserved@a\string##2\@nil
+ \fi}%
+ \def\reserved@a##1##2/##3\@nil{%
+ \def\reserved@a{##2}}%
+ \group@list
+ \toks@{\relax\ifmmode \else \non@alpherr#1\fi}%
+ \edef#1{\the\toks@
+ \noexpand\use@mathgroup
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname M@\reserved@a\endcsname
+ \csname sym#2\endcsname}%
+ \def#3{\protect#1}%
+ \fi
+}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c815906b882
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfssini.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,583 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfssini.dtx
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-2001 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+%% all rights reserved.
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+%
+%
+\ProvidesFile{ltfssini.dtx}
+ [2001/06/01 v3.0k LaTeX Kernel (NFSS Initialisation)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{ltfssini.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<+checkmem>\def\CHECKMEM{\tracingstats=2
+%<+checkmem> \newlinechar=`\^^J
+%<+checkmem> \message{^^JMemory usage: \filename}\shipout\hbox{}}
+%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{298}
+%
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltfssini.dtx}
+% \title{A new font selection scheme for \TeX{} macro packages\\
+% (Initialisation)\thanks
+% {This file has version number
+% \fileversion\ dated \filedate}}
+%
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% This file contains the top level \LaTeX\ interface to the font
+% selection scheme commands. See other parts of the \LaTeX\
+% distribution, or \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} for higher level
+% documentation of these commands.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v3.0i}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1995/06/28}
+% {(DPC) Fix documentation typos}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) Make file from previous file, lfonts.dtx 1995/05/23 v2.2e}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{NFSS Initialisation}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1994/10/14}{New coding for cfg files}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/12/03}{update for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1992/01/06}{added slitex code}
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1992/03/21}{Renamed \cs{text} to \cs{nfss@text}
+% to make it internal.}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1991/11/27}{All \cs{family}, \cs{shape} etc. renamed
+% to \cs{fontfamily} etc.}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1990/04/02}{\cs{input} of files now handled
+% by docstrip.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1990/02/08}{Protected the commands
+% \cs{family}, \cs{series},
+% \cs{shape}, \cs{size}, \cs{selectfont}, and \cs{mathversion}.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1989/12/03}{Some internal macros renamed to make them
+% inaccessible.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1989/12/02}{\cs{rmmath} renamed to \cs{mathrm}}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1989/11/07}{All family, series, and shape names
+% abbreviated.}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1989/05/22}{Lines shortened to 72 characters}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1989/04/29}{Corrections to \LaTeX\ tabular env.
+% added.}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1989/04/27}{Definitions of \LaTeX\ symbols corrected.}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1989/04/26}{\cs{xpt} added.}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1989/04/21}{Changed to conform to fam.tex.}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1989/04/15}{\cs{mathfontset} renamed to
+% \cs{mathversion.}}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1989/04/10}{Starting with version numbers!
+% \cs{newif} for \cs{@tempswa} added since this switch is
+% unkown at the time when this file is read in.
+% (latex.tex is loaded later.)
+% \cs{math@famname} changed to \cs{math@version.}}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1994/05/13}{Removed file identification typeout}
+%
+% Finally, there are six commands that are to be used in \LaTeX{}
+% and that we will therefore protect against expansion at the
+% wrong point:
+% |\fontfamily|, |\fontseries|, |\fontshape|, |\fontsize|,
+% |\selectfont|, and |\mathversion|.
+%
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/05/12}{Moved \cs{fontfamily} to fam.dtx}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/05/12}{Moved \cs{fontencoding} to fam.dtx}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/05/12}{Moved \cs{fontseries} to fam.dtx}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/05/12}{Moved \cs{fontshape} to fam.dtx}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/05/12}{Moved \cs{fontsize} to fam.dtx}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/05/12}{Moved \cs{mathversion} to fam.dtx}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1994/05/12}{Moved \cs{selectfont} to tracefnt.dtx}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Providing math \emph{versions}}
+%
+% \LaTeX{} provides two \emph{versions}. We call them
+% \textsf{normal} and \textsf{bold}, respectively.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathVersion{normal}
+\DeclareMathVersion{bold}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Now we define the standard font change commands.
+% We don't allow the use of |\rmfamily| etc.\ in math mode.
+%
+% First the changes to another \emph{family}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\rmfamily
+ {\not@math@alphabet\rmfamily\mathrm
+ \fontfamily\rmdefault\selectfont}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\sffamily
+ {\not@math@alphabet\sffamily\mathsf
+ \fontfamily\sfdefault\selectfont}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\ttfamily
+ {\not@math@alphabet\ttfamily\mathtt
+ \fontfamily\ttdefault\selectfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then the commands changing the \emph{series}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\bfseries
+ {\not@math@alphabet\bfseries\mathbf
+ \fontseries\bfdefault\selectfont}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\mdseries
+ {\not@math@alphabet\mdseries\relax
+ \fontseries\mddefault\selectfont}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\upshape
+ {\not@math@alphabet\upshape\relax
+ \fontshape\updefault\selectfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then the commands changing the \emph{shape}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\slshape
+ {\not@math@alphabet\slshape\relax
+ \fontshape\sldefault\selectfont}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\scshape
+ {\not@math@alphabet\scshape\relax
+ \fontshape\scdefault\selectfont}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\itshape
+ {\not@math@alphabet\itshape\mathit
+ \fontshape\itdefault\selectfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% We also have to define the {\em emphasize\/} font change command
+% (i.e.\ |\em|). This command will look is the current font is
+% sloped (i.e.\ has a positive |\fontdimen1|) and will then
+% select either |\upshape| or |\itshape|.
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1990/01/28}{Call to \cs{@nomath} added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\em
+ {\@nomath\em \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font >\z@
+ \upshape \else \itshape \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\not@math@alphabet}
+% This function generates an error message when it is called in
+% math mode. The same function should be defined in
+% \texttt{newlfont.sty}.
+% \changes{v1.4d}{1992/09/21}{Macro defined.}
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/01/17}{Message changed}
+% \changes{v2.1f}{1994/01/18}{Message corrected}
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1994/04/22}{Message changed again}
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1995/04/02}{add \cs{noexpand} to second part of message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\not@math@alphabet#1#2{%
+ \relax
+ \ifmmode
+ \@latex@error{Command \noexpand#1invalid in math mode}%
+ {%
+ Please
+ \ifx#2\relax
+ define a new math alphabet^^J%
+ if you want to use a special font in math mode%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have to a |\noexpand| below to prevent expansion of |#2|. In
+% case of |#1| we can omit this (due to the current definition of
+% robust commands since they do come out right there :-).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ use the math alphabet \noexpand#2instead of
+ the #1command%
+ \fi
+ .
+ }%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% Finally we provide two abbreviations to switch to the \LaTeX{}
+% \emph{versions}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\boldmath{\@nomath\boldmath
+ \mathversion{bold}}
+\def\unboldmath{\@nomath\unboldmath
+ \mathversion{normal}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we switch to the default math version by defining the internal
+% macro |\math@version|. We dare not to call |\mathversion|
+% at this place because this would call |\glb@settings|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\math@version{normal}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Miscellaneous}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newfont}
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1991/03/30}{Definition added.}
+% \changes{v2.2e}{1995/05/23}{Font assignment made local again.}
+% \begin{macro}{\symbol}
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1991/03/30}{Definition added.}
+% We start by defining a few macros that are part of
+% standard \LaTeX's user interface. The use of these functions is
+% not encouraged, but they will allow to process older documents
+% without changes to the source.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newfont#1#2{\@ifdefinable#1{\font#1=#2\relax}}
+\def\symbol#1{\char #1\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setfontsize}
+% \begin{macro}{\@setsize}
+% This abbreviation is used by \LaTeX's user level size changing
+% commands, such as |\large|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setfontsize#1#2#3{\@nomath#1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For the benefit of people relying on keeping the name of the
+% current font command saved in |\@currsize| we define it. To ensure
+% that |\@setfontsize| keeps being robust we omit this assignment
+% during times where |\protect| differs from |\@typeset@protect|.
+% \changes{v1.4b}{1992/08/20}{Added \cs{@currsize}.}
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1994/11/06}{Use \cs{@typeset@protect}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+ \let\@currsize#1%
+ \fi
+ \fontsize{#2}{#3}\selectfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For compatibility we also define |\@setsize| the 209 command
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*compat>
+\def\@setsize#1#2#3#4{\@setfontsize#1{#4}{#2}}
+%</compat>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\oldstylenums}
+% This macro implements old style numerals but only works if we
+% assume that the standard math fonts are used. Thus it needs
+% changing in case other math encodings are used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oldstylenums#1{%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Provide spacing using the interword space of the current font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \spaceskip\fontdimen\tw@\font
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then switch to the math italic font. We don't change the current
+% value of |\f@series| which means that you can use bold numerals
+% if |\bfseries| is in force. As family we use |\rmdefault| which
+% means that this only works if there exist an |OML| encoded
+% version of that font or rather a corresponding |.fd| file (which
+% is the case for standard \LaTeX{} fonts even though they only
+% contain substitutions).
+% \changes{v3.0j}{1999/02/12}{Use \cs{rmdefault} instead of \texttt{cmm}
+% (pr/2954)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \usefont{OML}{\rmdefault}{\f@series}{it}%
+ \mathgroup\symletters #1%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hexnumber@}
+% To set up \LaTeX's special math character
+% definitions we first provide a macro to generate hexadecimal
+% numbers. It is a rather simple |\ifcase|.
+% \changes{v?}{1992/11/13}{Made expandable.}
+% \changes{v?}{1992/12/03}{Make it accept counters.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hexnumber@#1{\ifcase\number#1
+ 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or 8\or
+ 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nfss@text}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1990/01/25}{Macro added.}
+% In it simplest form |\nfss@text| is an |\mbox|. This will
+% produce unbreakable text outside math and inside math you will
+% get text with the same fonts as outside. The only drawback is
+% that such item won't change sizes in subscripts. But this
+% behavior can be easily changed. With the \texttt{amstex} style
+% option one will get a sub style called \texttt{amstext} which will
+% redefine the |\nfss@text| macro to produce correct text in all
+% sizes.
+%
+% We have to use |\def| instead of the shorter |\let| since
+% |\mbox| is undefined when we reach this point.
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1990/06/23}{Changed to \cs{mbox}.}
+% \changes{v2.1n}{1994/05/17}{Added braces to allow use in subscripts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nfss@text#1{{\mbox{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\copyright}
+% The definition of |\copyright| was changed so
+% that it works in other type styles,
+% and to make it robust. We leave the family untouched so that
+% the copyright notice will come out differently if a different
+% font family is in use.
+% This command is commented out, since it is now defined in
+% ltoutenc.dtx.
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1991/03/28}{Extra braces added.}
+% \changes{v2.1n}{1994/05/17}{Really add extra braces}
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1994/12/02}{\cs{copyright} is now in ltoutenc.
+% ASAJ}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareRobustCommand\copyright
+% {{\ooalign{\hfil
+% \raise.07ex\hbox{\mdseries\upshape c}\hfil\crcr
+% \mathhexbox20D}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/11/24}{Removed \cs{xpt} stuff}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalfont}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/11/11}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\reset@font}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@reset@font}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1991/08/26}{Macro introduced}
+% The macro |\reset@font| is used in \LaTeX{} to switch to a standard
+% font, in order to initialize the current font in situations where
+% typesetting is done in a new visual context (e.g.\ in a
+% footnote). We define it here to allow the test for the new
+% \LaTeX{} version above but nevertheless are able to run all kind
+% of mixtures.
+% \changes{v1.1o}{1991/11/21}{Changed to protected version of macro.}
+% \changes{v1.1o}{1991/11/21}{Added extra braces for robustness.}
+%
+% The user interface name for |\reset@font| is |\normalfont|:
+% \changes{v2.1k}{1994/05/14}{Remove surplus braces}
+% \changes{v3.0f}{1995/10/16}{Added \cs{relax} after \cs{usefont},
+% as the latter eats up spaces.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\normalfont
+ {\usefont\encodingdefault
+ \familydefault
+ \seriesdefault
+ \shapedefault
+ \relax}
+\let\reset@font\normalfont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% We left out the special \LaTeX{} fonts which are not automatically
+% included in the base version of the font selection since these fonts
+% contain only a few characters which are also included in the AMS
+% fonts so anybody who is using these fonts doesn't need them.
+% But for compatibility reasons we will define these symbols.
+%
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1994/02/22}{Correct error mssage}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\not@base#1{\@latex@error
+ {Command \noexpand#1not provided in base LaTeX2e}%
+ {Load the latexsym or the amsfonts package to
+ define this symbol}}
+\def\mho{\not@base\mho}
+\def\Join{\not@base\Join}
+\def\Box{\not@base\Box}
+\def\Diamond{\not@base\Diamond}
+\def\leadsto{\not@base\leadsto}
+\def\sqsubset{\not@base\sqsubset}
+\def\sqsupset{\not@base\sqsupset}
+\def\lhd{\not@base\lhd}
+\def\unlhd{\not@base\unlhd}
+\def\rhd{\not@base\rhd}
+\def\unrhd{\not@base\unrhd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% We now initialize all variables set by |\DeclareErrorFont|. These
+% values are not really important since they will be overwritten
+% later on by the definition in |fontdef.ltx|.
+%
+% However, if \texttt{fontdef.cfg} is corrupted then at least a
+% hopefully suitable error font is present.
+%
+% \changes{v2.1k}{1994/05/14}{Init error font just before checking for
+% fontdef.cfg}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} %% don't modify this setting
+ %% overwrite it in fontdef.cfg
+ %% if necessary
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% We now load the customizable parts of NFSS.
+% \changes{v3.0d}{1995/07/19}
+% {(DPC) TeX2 support}
+% \changes{v3.0e}{1995/09/15}
+% {(DPC) Modify TeX2 message}
+% \changes{v3.0g}{1995/11/01}
+% {(DPC) Switch meaning of \cs{@addtofilelist} for cfg files}
+% \changes{v3.0h}{1996/12/06}
+% {(DPC) Remove *** from messages internal/2338}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum\inputlineno=\m@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Still using \TeX2. need a configuration file to avoid setting the 8bit
+% characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{fonttext.cfg}
+ {\typeout{====================================^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ Local config file fonttext.cfg used^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ ====================================}%
+ \def\@addtofilelist##1{\xdef\@filelist{\@filelist,##1}}%
+ }
+ {\typeout{!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J%
+ !^^J%
+ ! You MUST use a fonttext.cfg file!^^J%
+ ! As you are still using TeX2!!!!!^^J%
+ !^^J%
+ ! See the documentation file tex2.txt^^J%
+ !^^J%
+ !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!}%
+ \batchmode \@@end}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% With \TeX3 can use the standard |ltx| file if no configuration file
+% exists.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{fonttext.cfg}
+ {\typeout{====================================^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ Local config file fonttext.cfg used^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ ====================================}%
+ \def\@addtofilelist##1{\xdef\@filelist{\@filelist,##1}}%
+ }
+ {\input{fonttext.ltx}}
+\fi
+\let\@addtofilelist\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Ditto for math although I don't think that we will get a lot of
+% customisation :-)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{fontmath.cfg}
+ {\typeout{====================================^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ Local config file fontmath.cfg used^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ ====================================}%
+ \def\@addtofilelist##1{\xdef\@filelist{\@filelist,##1}}%
+ }
+ {\input{fontmath.ltx}}
+\let\@addtofilelist\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then we preload several fonts. This file might be customized
+% \emph{without} changing the behavior of the format (i.e.\ necessary
+% font definitions will be loaded at runtime if they are not
+% preloaded). This is done in the file \texttt{preload.ltx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{preload.cfg}
+ {\typeout{====================================^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ Local config file preload.cfg used^^J%
+ ^^J%
+ =====================================}%
+ \def\@addtofilelist##1{\xdef\@filelist{\@filelist,##1}}%
+ }
+ {\input{preload.ltx}}
+\let\@addtofilelist\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@acci}
+% \begin{macro}{\@accii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@acciii}
+% \changes{v2.1m}{1994/05/16}{Define saved versions of accents}
+% We also save the values of some accents in |\@acci|, |\@accii|
+% and |\@acciii| so they can be restored by a |minipage| inside a
+% |tabbing| environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@acci\' \let\@accii\` \let\@acciii\=
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cal}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) Remove definition}
+% \begin{macro}{\mit}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) Remove definition}
+% Here were the two old \meta{alphabet identifiers}.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
+% \fi
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b77cfcf22c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltfsstrc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1887 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltfsstrc.dtx
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-97 by Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf.
+%% Copyright (C) 1994-97 by LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved.
+%
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/05/16]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{tracefnt}
+%<package> [1997/05/29 v3.0j Standard LaTeX package (font tracing)]
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{ltfsstrc.dtx}
+% [1997/05/29 v3.0j LaTeX Kernel (NFSS tracing)]
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1041}
+%
+%
+%
+% \changes{v3.0g}{1995/11/28}
+% {documentation fixes}
+% \changes{v3.0f}{1995/10/22}{Added `genb' and `sgenb' size functions
+% to support new DC font naming scheme.}
+% \changes{v3.0e}{1995/10/20}
+% {(DPC) Modify autoload code}
+% \changes{v3.0d}{1995/10/04}
+% {(DPC) Modify autoload code}
+% \changes{v3.0b}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) Fix \cs{ProvidesFile} usage}
+% \changes{v3.0a}{1995/05/24}
+% {(DPC) Make file from previous file, tracefnt 1995/05/16 v2.3o}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3m}{1994/11/18}
+% {\cs{next} to \cs{reserved@f}}
+% \changes{v2.3l}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v2.3i}{1994/05/20}{Use new error command names}
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1994/05/13}{Removed typeouts as
+% \cs{ProvidesPackage} writes to log.}
+% \changes{v2.3e}{1994/04/27}{Corrected item that was forgotten
+% in last change.}
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/04/18}{Changed to new error/warning scheme}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1993/11/11}{Option concept added for LaTeX2e}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1993/09/15}{Corrected spelling of \cs{noxpand}.}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1993/09/02}{Corrected name of sgen size function.}
+% \changes{v2.1h}{1993/07/16}{Changed layout of info messages}
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1993/03/18}
+% {Changed all \cs{@tempdimb} in \cs{@tempdimx}
+% to avoid killing \cs{numberline}}
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1993/03/18}
+% {Changed all \cs{@tempdima} in \cs{@tempdimb}
+% to avoid killing \cs{numberline}}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1990/04/01}{Part of code moved to fam.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1990/03/14}{Added code for TeX3.}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1990/01/18}{\cs{tracingfonts} meaning changed.}
+%
+% \newcommand\module[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+% \providecommand{\dst}{\textsc{DocStrip}}
+% \newcommand\Loption[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltfsstrc.dtx}
+% \title{The \texttt{tracefnt} package\thanks
+% {This file has version number \fileversion, dated
+% \filedate.} \\
+% for use with the new font selection scheme}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This package contains the code for tracing font loading and font
+% changes. It basically overlays some of the low-level functions of
+% NFSS with additional code used for tracing.
+%
+% The package accepts the following options:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[errorshow] Write all information about font changes etc.\
+% only to the transcript file unless an error happens. This means
+% that information about font substitution will not be shown on the
+% terminal.
+%
+% \item[warningshow] Show all NFSS warnings on the terminal. This
+% setting corresponds to the default behaviour of NFSS if the
+% \texttt{tracefnt} package is \emph{not} loaded!
+%
+% \item[infoshow] Show all NFSS warning and all NFSS info
+% messages (that are normally only written to the transcript file)
+% also on the terminal. This is the default if the \texttt{tracefnt}
+% package is loaded.
+%
+% \item[debugshow] In addition to \texttt{infoshow} show also
+% changing of math fonts as far as possible (this option can produce a
+% large amount of output.
+%
+% \item[loading] Show the name of external fonts when they are
+% loaded. This option shows only ``newly'' loaded fonts not those
+% already preloaded in the format or the class file before the
+% \texttt{tracefnt} package became active.
+%
+% \item[pausing]
+% Turn all font warnings into errors so that \LaTeX{} will stop.
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{A driver for this document}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you
+% are currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the
+% \dst{} program.
+%
+% When this file is processed directly by \LaTeX{} this will
+% produce the documentation as well.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+
+
+%\OnlyDescription % comment out for implementation details
+
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{ltfsstrc.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \textbf{Warning:} Read the macro documentation with a grain of
+% salt. It is still basically the documentation from the first NFSS
+% release and therefore in some cases probably not completely
+% accurate.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% If we are making a package file it is a good idea to test whether
+% we are running under 2e.
+% This code is actually placed at the very beginning of this file
+% for easier maintenance, thus commented out here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%\ProvidesPackage{tracefnt}[??/??/?? v?.??
+% Standard LaTeX package (font tracing)]
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% The \texttt{debug} module makes use of commands contained in a
+% special package file named \texttt{trace.sty}.\footnote{This package
+% is not in distribution at the moment (and probably doesn't any
+% longer work). Think of this part of the code as being historical
+% artefacts.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+debug> \input trace.sty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Handling Options}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tracingfonts}
+% Here is the definition of the integer register for the font
+% trace. As a default in a package file we use $1$ to give error
+% messages if fonts are substituted. If this code is used for
+% debugging or tracing reasons in the format file (i.e.\ in
+% \texttt{fam.dtx}) we use $0$ as the default. But if no font
+% trace is used we build a definition that will produce a warning
+% message.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1990/04/01}
+% {Check if \cs{tracingfonts} already defined.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1990/04/01}
+% {Check if \cs{tracingfonts} defined removed again.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\tracingfonts{%
+ \@font@warning{Command \noexpand\tracingfonts
+ not provided.\MessageBreak
+ Use the `tracefnt' package.\MessageBreak Command found:}%
+ \count@}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\count@| in the line above will remove the number after
+% |\tracingfonts|. Note that this definition will be overwritten be
+% the next line if one of these modules are included.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package,trace,debug>
+\newcount\tracingfonts
+\tracingfonts=0
+%</package,trace,debug>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The option \Loption{errorshow} turns off all warnings so that only
+% real errors are shown. \Loption{warningshow} corresponds to the
+% NFSS default (when \texttt{tracefnt} is not loaded).
+% \Loption{infoshow} is the default for this package here; and
+% \Loption{debugshow}, \Loption{loading}, and
+% \Loption{pausing} extend the amount of information even further.
+% \changes{v2.3o}{1995/05/13}
+% {Use single hash mark in \cs{DeclareOption}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\DeclareOption{errorshow}{%
+ \def\@font@info#1{%
+ \GenericInfo{(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Info: \space\space\space#1}}%
+ \def\@font@warning#1{%
+ \GenericInfo{(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Warning: #1}}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{warningshow}{%
+ \def\@font@info#1{%
+ \GenericInfo{(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Info: \space\space\space#1}}%
+ \def\@font@warning#1{%
+ \GenericWarning{(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Warning: #1}}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{infoshow}{%
+ \def\@font@info#1{%
+ \GenericWarning{(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Info: \space\space\space#1}}%
+ \def\@font@warning#1{%
+ \GenericWarning{(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Warning: #1}}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{loading}{%
+ \tracingfonts\tw@
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{debugshow}{%
+ \ExecuteOptions{infoshow}%
+ \tracingfonts\thr@@
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v3.0j}{1997/05/29}{Replaced \texttt{\symbol{92}\symbol{92}}
+% by \cs{MessageBreak}, as suggested by Donald Arseneau.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{pausing}{%
+ \def\@font@warning#1{%
+ \GenericError
+ {(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Warning: #1}%
+ {See the LaTeX Companion for details.}%
+ {I'll stop for every LaTeX Font Warning because
+ you requested\MessageBreak the `pausing' option
+ to the tracefnt package.}}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We make |infoshow| the default, which in turn defines
+% |\font@warning| and |\font@info|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{infoshow}
+\ProcessOptions
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We also need a default definition inside the kernel:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\@font@info#1{%
+ \GenericInfo{(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Info: \space\space\space#1}}%
+\def\@font@warning#1{%
+ \GenericWarning{(Font)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\space\space}%
+ {LaTeX Font Warning: #1}}%
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Macros common to \texttt{fam.tex} and \texttt{tracefnt.sty}}
+%
+% In the first versions of \texttt{tracefnt.dtx} some macros of
+% \texttt{fam.dtx}\footnote{This file is currently not distributed in
+% documented form. Its code is part of \texttt{ltfss.dtx}.}
+% were redefined to included the extra tracing
+% information. Now these macros are all defined in this file (i.e.\
+% removed from \texttt{fam.dtx}) and different production versions can
+% be obtained simply by specifying a different set of modules to
+% include when generating \texttt{ltfss.dtx}.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{General font loading}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\extract@font}
+%
+% This macro organizes the font loading.
+% It first calls |\get@external@font|
+% which will return in |\external@font| the name of the external
+% font file (the \texttt{.tfm}) as it was determined by the NFSS
+% tables.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|package|autoload>
+\def\extract@font{%
+ \get@external@font
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then the external font is loaded and assigned to the font
+% identifier stored inside |\font@name|
+% (for this reason we need |\expandafter|).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\expandafter\font\font@name\external@font\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When tracing we typeout the internal and external font name.
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1990/03/14}{Added code for TeX3.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts >\@ne
+ \@font@info{External font `\external@font'
+ loaded as\MessageBreak \font@name}\fi
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we call the corresponding ``loading action'' macros to
+% finish things. First the font is locally selected to allow the
+% use of |\font| inside the loading action macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \font@name \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next two lines execute the ``loading actions'' for the
+% family and then for the individual font shape.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \csname \f@encoding+\f@family\endcsname
+ \csname\curr@fontshape\endcsname
+ \relax
+ }
+%</2ekernel|package|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\relax| at the end needs to be explained.
+% This is inserted to prevent \TeX{} from scanning too far
+% when it is executing the replacement text of the loading
+% code macros.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\get@external@font}
+% This function tries to find an external font name. It will place
+% the name into the macro
+% |\external@font|. If no font is found it will return the one
+% that was defined via |\DeclareErrorFont|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\get@external@font{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We don't know the external font name at the beginning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\external@font\@empty
+ \edef\font@info{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\string
+ \csname \curr@fontshape \endcsname}%
+ \try@size@range
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If this failed, we'll try to substitute another size of the same
+% font. This is done by the |\try@size@substitution| macro. It
+% ``knows about'' |\do@extract@font|, |\font@name|, |\f@size|, and
+% so on.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\external@font\@empty
+ \try@size@substitution
+ \ifx\external@font\@empty
+ \@latex@error{Font \expandafter \string\font@name\space
+ not found}\@eha
+ \error@fontshape
+ \get@external@font
+ \fi\fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1990/02/18}
+% {Redefine unprotected version \cs{p@selectfont}
+% instead of \cs{selectfont}.}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\selectfont}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1989/12/16}{Changed order of calls.}
+% \changes{v2.3f}{1994/05/12}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}}
+% The macro |\selectfont| is called whenever a font change must
+% take place.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|package|autoload>
+\DeclareRobustCommand\selectfont
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When \module{debug} is specified we actually want something like
+% `undebug'. The font selection is now stable so that using
+% |\tracingall| on some other macros will show us a lot of unwanted
+% information about font loading. Therefore we disable tracing during
+% font loading as long as |\tracingfonts| is less than $4$.
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1990/04/05}
+% {Call \cs{tracingon} only if \cs{tracingfonts} greater than 3.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1990/05/05}{\cs{tracingon} with new syntax.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+debug> \pushtracing
+%<+debug> \ifnum\tracingfonts<4 \tracingoff
+%<+debug> \else \tracingon\p@selectfont \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |\baselinestretch| was redefined by the user it will not
+% longer match its internal counterpart |\f@linespread|. If so we
+% call |\set@fontsize| to prepare |\size@update|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\f@linespread\baselinestretch \else
+ \set@fontsize\baselinestretch\f@size\f@baselineskip \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we generate the internal name of the font
+% by concatenating {\em family}, {\em series},
+% {\em shape}, and current {\em size},
+% with slashes as delimiters between them.
+% This is much more readable than standard
+% \LaTeX's |\twfbf|, etc.
+% We define |\font@name| globally, as always.
+% The reason for this is explained later on.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\font@name{%
+ \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We call the macro |\pickup@font| which will load the font if
+% necessary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \pickup@font
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we select the font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \font@name
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |\tracingfonts| is
+% greater than 2 we also show the font switch.
+% We do this before |\glb@settings| is called since this
+% macro might redefine |\font@name|.
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1990/03/14}{Added code for TeX3.}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1990/02/16}{Changed \cs{f@size} to \cs{lcl@currsize}
+% (see fam file).}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+ \@font@info{Switching to \font@name}\fi
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we call |\size@update|. This macro is normally empty but
+% will contain actions (like setting the |\baselineskip|) that have
+% to be carried out when the font size, the base |\baselineskip| or
+% the |\baselinestretch| have changed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \size@update
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A similar function is called to handle anything related to
+% encoding updates. This one is changed from |\relax| by
+% |\fontencoding|.
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1994/05/14}{Added \cs{enc@update}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \enc@update
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Just before ending this macro we have to pop the tracing stack
+% if it was pushed before.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+debug> \poptracing
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@fontsize}
+% The macro |\set@fontsize| does the actual work. First it assigns
+% new values to |\f@size|, |\f@baselineskip| and |\f@linespread|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@fontsize#1#2#3{%
+ \@defaultunits\@tempdimb#2pt\relax\@nnil
+ \edef\f@size{\strip@pt\@tempdimb}%
+ \@defaultunits\@tempskipa#3pt\relax\@nnil
+ \edef\f@baselineskip{\the\@tempskipa}%
+ \edef\f@linespread{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For backward compatibility and for later testing within
+% |\selectfont| the internal value of |\f@linespread| is passed
+% back to |\baselinestretch|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\baselinestretch\f@linespread
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Additional processing will happen within |\selectfont|. For this
+% reason the macro |\size@update| (which will be called in
+% |\selectfont|) will be defined to be:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\size@update{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First calculate the new |\baselineskip| and also store it in
+% |normalbaselineskip|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \baselineskip\f@baselineskip\relax
+ \baselineskip\f@linespread\baselineskip
+ \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% then to set up a new |\strutbox|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\strutbox\hbox{%
+ \vrule\@height.7\baselineskip
+ \@depth.3\baselineskip
+ \@width\z@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We end with a bit of tracing information.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+ \ifx\f@linespread\@empty
+ \let\reserved@a\@empty
+ \else
+ \def\reserved@a{\f@linespread x}%
+ \fi
+ \@font@info{Changing size to \f@size/\reserved@a
+ \f@baselineskip}%
+ \aftergroup\type@restoreinfo \fi
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When all this is processed |\size@update| redefines itself to
+% |\relax| so that in later calls of |\selectfont| no extra code
+% will be executed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\size@update\relax}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Instead of defining this macro internally we might speed things
+% up by placing the code into a separate macro and use |\let|!
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\size@update}
+% Normally this macro does nothing; it will be redefined by
+% |\set@fontsize| to initiate an update.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\size@update\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\type@restoreinfo}
+% This macro produces some info when a font size and/or baseline
+% change will get restored.
+% \changes{1.0r}{1990/08/27}{Some extra tracing info.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \def\type@restoreinfo{%
+ \ifx\f@linespread\@empty
+ \let\reserved@a\@empty
+ \else
+ \def\reserved@a{\f@linespread x}%
+ \fi
+ \@font@info{Restoring size to
+ \f@size/\reserved@a\f@baselineskip}}
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glb@settings}
+% \begin{macro}{\glb@currsize}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% \changes{v2.3k}{1994/11/06}{New implementation}
+% The macro |\glb@settings| globally selects
+% all math fonts for the current size if necessary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\glb@settings{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When |\glb@settings| gains control a size
+% change was requested and all previous font assignments need to
+% be replaced.
+% Therefore the old values of the fonts are no longer needed.
+% For every {\em math group\/} the new assignments are appended to
+% |\math@fonts|.
+% But this happens only if the |math@fonts| switch
+% is set to true.
+% However, we always set up the correct math sizes for script and
+% scriptscript fonts since they may be needed even if we don't set
+% up the whole math machinery.
+%
+% Here we set the math size, script size and scriptscript size.
+% If the |S@|\ldots{} macro is not defined we have to first
+% calculate the three sizes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname S@\f@size\endcsname\relax
+ \calculate@math@sizes
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The effect of this is that |\calculate@math@sizes|
+% may or may not define the |S@|\ldots{} macro. In the
+% first case the next time the same size is requested
+% this macro is used, otherwise |\calculate@math@sizes| is
+% called again.
+% This also sets the |math@fonts| switch.
+% If it is true we must switch the math fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
+ \ifmath@fonts
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+ \@font@info{Setting up math fonts for
+ \f@size/\f@baselineskip}\fi
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Inside a group we execute the macro for the current math {\em
+% version}. This sets |\math@fonts| to a list of
+% |\textfont|\dots{} assignments. |\getanddefine@fonts| (which may
+% be called at this point) needs the |\escapechar| parameter to be
+% set to $-1$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \escapechar\m@ne
+ \csname mv@\math@version \endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we set |\globaldefs| to 1 so that all following changes are
+% done globally. The math font assignments recorded in
+% |\math@fonts| are executed and |\glb@currsize| is set equal to
+% |\f@size|. This signals that the fonts for math in this size are
+% set up.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \globaldefs\@ne
+ \math@fonts
+ \let \glb@currsize \f@size
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we execute any code that is supposed to happen
+% whenever the math font setup changes. This register will
+% be executed in local mode which means that everything that is
+% supposed to have any effect should be done globally inside.
+% We can't execute it within |\globaldefs\@ne| as we don't know
+% what ends up inside this register, e.g., it might contain
+% calculations which use some local registers to calculate the
+% final (global) value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \the\every@math@size
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we announce that the math fonts are not set up for this
+% size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+ \@font@info{No math setup for
+ \f@size/\f@baselineskip}\fi
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|package|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1990/06/24}{Moved to tracefnt.dtx.}
+% In |\selectfont| we used |\baselinestretch| as
+% a factor when assigning a value to |\baselineskip|.
+% We use 1 as a default (i.e.\ no stretch).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\baselinestretch{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\every@math@size}
+% \changes{v1.0u fam.dtx}{1989/12/05}{Hook \cs{every@size} added.}
+% \changes{v23.k}{1994/10/23}{Renamed to \cs{every@math@size}}
+% We must still define the hook |\every@math@size| we used in
+% |\glb@settings|. We initialize it to nothing. It is important to
+% remember that everything that goes into this hook should to global
+% updates, local changes will have weird effects.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\every@math@size
+\every@math@size={}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Math fonts setup}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Outline of algorithm for math font sizes}
+%
+% \TeX{} uses the the math fonts that are current when the end of a
+% formula is reached. If we don't want to keep font setups local to
+% every formula (which would result in an enormous overhead, we have
+% to be careful not to end up with the wrong setup in case formulas
+% are nested, e.g., we need to be able to handle
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% $ a=b+c \mbox{ \small for all $b$ and $c\in Z$}$
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Here the inner formulae |b| and |c\in Z| are typeset in |\small| but
+% we have to return to |\normalsize| before we reach the closing |$|
+% of the outer formula.
+%
+% This is handled in the following way:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item At any point in the document the global variable
+% |\gbl@currsize| contains the point size for which the math fonts
+% currently are set up.
+%
+% \item \label{it:everymath} Whenever we start a formula we compare
+% its value with the local variable |\f@size| that describes the
+% current text font size.
+%
+% \item If both are the same we assume that we can use the current
+% math font setup without adjustment.
+%
+% \item \label{it:everymathend} If they differ we call |\gbl@settings|
+% which changes the math font setup and updates |\gbl@currsize|.
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item If we are recursively inside another formula (|\if@inmath|) we
+% ensure that |\gbl@settings| is executed again in the outer
+% formula, so that the old setup is automatically restored.
+% \item Otherwise, we set the switch |@inmath| locally to |true| so
+% that all nested formulae will be able to detect that they are
+% nested in some outer formula.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+% The above algorithm has the following features:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item For sizes which are not containing any formula no math setup
+% is done. Compared to the original algorithm of NFSS this results
+% in the following savings:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item No unnecessary loading of math fonts for sizes that are not
+% used to typeset any math formulae (explicit or implicit ones).
+% \item No time overhead due to unnecessary changes of the math font
+% setup on entrance and exit of the text font size.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item Math font setup changes for top-level formulae will survive
+% (there is no restoration after the formula) thus any following
+% formula in the same size will be directly typesetable. Compared to
+% original implementation in NFSS2
+% the new algorithm has the overhead of one test per formula
+% to see if the current math setup is valid (in the original
+% algorithm the setup was always valid, thus no test was necessary).
+%
+% \item In nested formulae the math font setup is restored in the
+% outer formula by a series of |\aftergroup| commands and checks.
+% Compared to the original algorithm this involves additional checks
+% ($2 \times \langle\mbox{non-math levels}\rangle$ per inner
+% formula).
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Code for math font size setting}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@mathfonts}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1994/01/26}{Correct trace info placement}
+% In the |\check@mathfonts| macros we implement the steps
+% \ref{it:everymath} to \ref{it:everymathend} except that instead
+% of a switch the macro |\init@restore@glb@settings| is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|package|autoload>
+\def\check@mathfonts{%
+ \ifx \glb@currsize \f@size
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\thr@@
+ \@font@info{*** MATH: no change \f@size\space
+ curr/global (\curr@math@size/\glb@currsize)}\fi
+%</trace>
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\thr@@
+ \@font@info{*** MATH: setting up \f@size\space
+ curr/global (\curr@math@size/\glb@currsize)}\fi
+%</trace>
+ \glb@settings
+ \init@restore@glb@settings
+ \fi
+ \let\curr@math@size\f@size
+ \def\init@restore@glb@settings{\aftergroup\restglb@settings}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\init@restore@glb@settings}
+% \changes{v3.0i}{1996/07/26}{macro added replacing \cs{if@inmath} switch}
+% This macros does by default nothing but get redefined inside
+% |\check@mathfonts| to initiate fontsize restoring in nested
+% formulas.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<-trace>\let\init@restore@glb@settings\relax
+%<*trace>
+\def\init@restore@glb@settings{%
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\thr@@
+ \@font@info{*** MATH: no resetting (not in
+ nested math)}\fi
+}
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\restglb@settings}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1994/01/17}{New math font setup}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1994/01/26}{Correct trace info placement}
+% This macro will be executed the first time after the current
+% formula.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\restglb@settings{%
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\thr@@
+ \@font@info{*** MATH: restoring}\fi
+%</trace>
+ \begingroup
+ \let\f@size\curr@math@size
+ \ifx\glb@currsize \f@size
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\thr@@
+ \@font@info{*** MATH: ... already okay (\f@size)}\fi
+%</trace>
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\thr@@
+ \@font@info{*** MATH: ... to \f@size}\fi
+%</trace>
+ \glb@settings
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Other code for math}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\use@mathgroup}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1990/01/21}{Macro added to allow cleaner interface.}
+% \changes{v1.2h}{1990/03/30}{Third argument removed (see
+% \cs{math@egroup}).}
+% The |\use@mathgroup| macro should be used in user
+% macros to select a math group. Depending on whether or not the
+% \texttt{margid} option is in force it has two or three arguments.
+% For this reason it should be called as the last macro.
+%
+% First we test if we are inside math mode since we don't want to
+% apply a useless definition.
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1989/12/16}{Usage of `\quotechar=' macro added.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1989/12/16}{Redefinition of alphabet now simpler.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\use@mathgroup#1#2{\relax\ifmmode
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1990/06/24}{Tracing code added.}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1990/07/07}{Group number added to tracing.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+ \count@#2\relax
+ \@font@info{Using \noexpand\mathgroup
+ (\the\count@) #2}\fi
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If so we first call the `=' macro (i.e.\ argument three) to set
+% up special things for the selected math group. Then we call
+% |\mathgroup| to select the group given by argument two and
+% finally we place |#1| (i.e.\ the argument of the \meta{math
+% alphabet identifier} at the end. This part of the code is
+% surrounded by two commands which behave like |\begingroup|
+% and |\endgroup| if we want \meta{math alphabet identifier}s
+% but will expand into |\@empty| if we want simply switches to
+% a new math group.
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1990/06/30}{Added \cs{relax} after math group number.}
+% Since argument number $2$ may be a digit instead of a control
+% sequence we add a |\relax|.
+% Otherwise something like |\mit{1}| would switch to math group
+% $11$ (and back) instead of printing an oldstyle $\mit {1}$.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \math@bgroup
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname M@\f@encoding\endcsname#1\else
+ #1\fi
+ \mathgroup#2\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Before we reinsert the swallowed token (arg.\ three) into the
+% input stream, in the case that the \meta{math alphabet
+% identifier} isn't called in math mode, we remove the |\fi|
+% with the |\expandafter| trick. This is necessary if the
+% token is actually an macro with arguments. In such a case the
+% |\fi| will be misinterpreted as the first argument which
+% would be disastrous.
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1989/12/13}
+% {\cs{expandafter} added before final \cs{fi}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\math@egroup\fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The surrounding macros equal |\begingroup| and |\endgroup|. But
+% using internal names makes it possible to overwrite their meaning
+% in certain cases. This is for example used in \AmSTeX{} macros
+% for placing accents.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math@egroup}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1990/07/07}{Tracing code added.} If the
+% \texttt{margid} option is in force (which can be tested by
+% looking at the definition of |\math@bgroup| we change the
+% |\math@egroup| command a bit to display the current \meta{math
+% group number} after it closes the scope of \meta{math alphabet}
+% with |\endgroup|.
+% \changes{v3.0h}{1996/05/08}{Use \cs{bgroup} instead of \cs{begingroup}
+% to match a kernel change made in 1994!!!!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \ifx\math@bgroup\bgroup
+ \def\math@egroup#1{#1\egroup
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+ \@font@info{Restoring \noexpand\mathgroup
+ (\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne default\else \the\mathgroup \fi)%
+ }\fi}
+ \fi
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getanddefine@fonts}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1990/06/24}{\cs{Macro} moved from fam.dtx.}
+% |\getanddefine@fonts| has two arguments: the \meta{math
+% group number} and the {\em family/series/shape\/} name as a
+% control sequence.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\getanddefine@fonts#1#2{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we turn of tracing when |\tracingfonts| is less than $4$.
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1990/06/24}{Adding debug code.}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1990/08/27}
+% {Correcting missing name after \cs{tracingon}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+debug> \pushtracing
+%<+debug> \ifnum\tracingfonts<4 \tracingoff
+%<+debug> \else \tracingon\getanddefine@fonts \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1990/06/24}{\cs{Adding} tracing code.}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1990/07/07}{Group number added to tracing.}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1992/09/22}{Introduced \cs{tf@size} for math size.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \ifnum \tracingfonts>\tw@
+ \count@#1\relax
+ \@font@info{\noexpand\mathgroup (\the\count@) #1 :=\MessageBreak
+ \string#2 \tf@size/\sf@size/\ssf@size}\fi
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We append the current |\tf@size| to |#2| to obtain the font
+% name.\footnote{One might ask why this expansion does not generate
+% a macro name that starts with an additional \texttt{\bslash}
+% character. The solution is that \texttt{\bslash escapechar} is
+% set to $-1$ before \texttt{\bslash getanddefine@fonts} is
+% called.} Again, |font@name| is defined globally, for the reasons
+% explained in the description of |\wrong@fontshape|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\font@name{\csname \string#2/\tf@size\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we call |\pickup@font| to load it if necessary.
+% We remember the internal name as |\textfont@name|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \pickup@font \let\textfont@name\font@name
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Same game for |\scriptfont| and |\scriptscriptfont|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\font@name{\csname \string#2/\sf@size\endcsname}%
+ \pickup@font \let\scriptfont@name\font@name
+ \xdef\font@name{\csname \string#2/\ssf@size\endcsname}%
+ \pickup@font
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we append the new |\textfont|\ldots{} assignments to
+% the |\math@fonts|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\math@fonts{\math@fonts
+ \textfont#1\textfont@name
+ \scriptfont#1\scriptfont@name
+ \scriptscriptfont#1\font@name}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Just before ending this macro we have to pop the tracing stack
+% if it was pushed before.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+debug> \poptracing
+ }
+%</2ekernel|package|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Scaled font extraction}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnot@nil}
+% We begin with a simple auxiliary macro. It checks
+% whether its argument is the token |\@nil|. If so,
+% it expands to |\@gobble| which discards the following
+% argument, otherwise it expands to |\@firstofone| which
+% reproduces it argument.
+% \changes{v2.3n}{1995/05/08}{Use \cs{@firstofone}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\ifnot@nil#1{\def\reserved@a{#1}%
+ \ifx\reserved@a\@nnil \expandafter\@gobble
+ \else \expandafter\@firstofone\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\remove@to@nnil}
+% \begin{macro}{\remove@angles}
+% \begin{macro}{\remove@star}
+% Three other auxiliary macros will be needed in the following:
+% |\remove@to@nnil| gobbles up everything up to, and including,
+% the next |\@nnil| token, and |\remove@angles| and |\remove@star|
+% do the same
+% for the character |>| and |*|, respectively, instead of |\@nnil|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\remove@to@nnil#1\@nnil{}
+\def\remove@angles#1>{\set@simple@size@args}
+\def\remove@star#1*{#1}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \changes{v3.0c}{1995/08/24}{Macro \cs{gobble@font@spec} removed}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\extract@sizefn}
+% This macro takes a size specification and parses it into size
+% function and the optional and mandatory arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\extract@sizefn#1*#2\@nil{%
+ \if>#2>\set@size@funct@args#1\@nil
+ \let\sizefn@info\@empty
+ \else\expandafter\set@size@funct@args\remove@star#2\@nil
+ \def\sizefn@info{#1}\fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\try@simple@size}
+% This function tries to extract the given size (specified by
+% |\f@size|) for the requested font shape. The font information
+% must already be present in |\font@info|.
+% The central macro that does the real work is |\extract@fontinfo|.
+% We will first give a simple example how this macro works, and
+% describe it in full generality later.
+%
+% Assume that the requested parameters are: {\em encoding scheme\/}
+% `OT1', {\em family\/} `cm', {\em series\/} `sansserif',
+% {\em shape\/} `normal', and {\em size\/} `$12$'.
+% The correspondign font definitions have already been
+% extracted from the macro |\OT1/cm/sansserif/normal| and
+% stored in |font@info|.
+% (Otherwise |\extract@fontinfo| doesn't get called.)
+% This information consists of a token list made of characters
+% of category code $12$ of the form
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% <10*>cmss10<12*>cmss12<17*>cmss17
+%\end{verbatim}
+% For reasonable packages one usually needs more sizes but this is
+% sufficient to get the flavour.
+% We will define a macro |\extract@fontinfo| to find
+% the external font name (`cmss12') for us:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\extract@fontinfo#1<12*#2>#3<#4\@nnil{%
+% \set@simple@size@args#3<#4\@nnil
+% \execute@size@function{#2}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% so that when it gets called via
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \extract@fontinfo<10*>cmss10<12*>cmss12<17*>cmss17\@nnil
+%\end{verbatim}
+% |#1| will contain all characters before |<12*>|,
+% |#2| will be empty, |#3| will be exactly |cmss12|,
+% and |#3| will be |17>cmss17|.
+% The expansion is therefore
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \set@simple@size@args cmss12<17*>cmss17\@nnil
+% \execute@size@function{}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% This means: the default (empty) size function will be executed,
+% with its optional argument argument set to empty and its mandatory
+% argument set to |cmss12| by |\set@simple@size@args|.
+% As we discussed earlier, the effect of the default size function
+% is to load the given external font (cmss12) at the specified size
+% (12)---which is exactly what was intended.
+%
+% But this is only part of the whole story.
+% It may be that the size requested does not occur
+% in the token list |\font@info|.
+% And the simple definition of |\extract@fontinfo| we gave
+% above does not allow to specify give more than one
+% size specification in front of the external font name.
+%
+% Let's address these two problems separately. The first one
+% is solved with the following trick:
+% We define |\extract@fontinfo| as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\extract@fontinfo#1<12*#2>#3<#4\@nnil{%
+% \ifnot@nil{#3}%
+% {\set@simple@size@args#3<#4\@nnil
+% \execute@size@function{#2}%
+% }}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% How does this work?
+% We call |\extract@fontinfo| via
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \expandafter\extract@fontinfo\font@info<12*>\@nil<\@nnil
+%\end{verbatim}
+% i.e. by appending |<12*>\@nil<\@nnil|.
+% If the size (`12' in this case) appears in |\font@info|
+% everything works as explained above, the only difference being
+% that argument |#4| of |\extract@fontinfo|
+% additionally gets the tokens |<12*>\@nil<\@nnil|.
+% However, if the size is not found everything up to the final
+% |<12*>| is in argument |#1|,
+% |#3| gets |\@nil|,
+% and |#2| and |#4| are empty.
+% The macro |\ifnot@nil| will discard the calls to
+% |\set@simple@size@args| and |execute@size@function|, and
+% hence |\font@info| will continue to be equal to |\@empty|.
+% This means that no simple size specification matching the
+% requested size could be found.
+%
+% The second problem (more than one simple size specification
+% for one external font name) will be addressed in
+% |\set@simple@size@args| below.
+%
+% The macros are hidden inside other control sequences
+% so that we have to build |\extract@fontinfo| in
+% several steps.
+%
+% So here's the actual definition of |\extract@font| in
+% |\try@simple@size|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% % this could be replaced by \try@size@range making the subst slower!
+\def\try@simple@size{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\reserved@a| is made an abbreviation for the head of the
+% definition of the macro |\extract@fontinfo|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@a{\def\extract@fontinfo####1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can define |\extract@fontinfo|. Here we handle a small
+% but convenient variation: in case of the default (empty) size
+% function it is allowed to omit the |*| character.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \changes{v2.0c}{1992/09/19}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\reserved@a\expandafter<\f@size>##2<##3\@nnil{%
+ \ifnot@nil{##2}%
+ {\set@simple@size@args##2<##3\@nnil
+ \execute@size@function\sizefn@info
+ }}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1992/07/26}{}
+% Now we call |\extract@fontinfo|. Note the |<\@nil| \textsf{tokens}
+% at the end.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\extract@fontinfo\expandafter\font@info
+ \expandafter<\f@size>\@nil<\@nnil
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@simple@size@args}
+% As promised above, the macro |\set@simple@size@args| will handle
+% the case of several size specifications in a row.
+% If another size specification follows, the very first token of
+% its argument list is the character |<|.
+% By starting the definition as follows,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@simple@size@args#1<{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% parameter |#1| is empty in this case, and contains the size
+% function's arguments otherwise. We distinguish these two cases
+% (Note that the character |<| cannot appear in |#1|) by calling
+% |\remove@angles| for empty |#1| and |\extract@sizefn|
+% otherwise. In the latter case we have to take care of the
+% remaining character tokens and discard them. This is done by
+% |\remove@to@nnil|. Note also the use of Kabelschacht's method.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if<#1<%
+ \expandafter\remove@angles
+ \else
+ \extract@sizefn#1*\@nil
+ \expandafter\remove@to@nnil
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Now, we are through with the case of a simple size, except for
+% calling the size function. This will be handled later, as it is
+% the same mechanism for all types of size specification. We will
+% now proceed to macors for extraction of size range specification.
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\extract@rangefontinfo}
+% |\extract@rangefontinfo| goes through a font shape definition
+% in the input until it recognizes the tokens |<\@nil->|.
+% It looks for font ranges with font size functions. It's operation
+% is rather simple: it discards everything up to the next size
+% specification and passes this on to |\is@range| for inspection.
+% The specification (parameter |#2| is inserted again, in case
+% it is needed later.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\extract@rangefontinfo#1<#2>{%
+ \is@range#2->\@nil#2>}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\is@range}
+% |\is@range| is again a sort of dispatcher macro: if the size
+% specification it is looking at is not a range specification
+% it discards it and calls |\extract@rangefontinfo| to continue
+% the search. Otherwise it calls |\check@range| to check the
+% requested size against the specified range.
+%
+% From the way |\is@range| is called inside |\extract@rangefontinfo|
+% we see that |#2| is the character |>| if the size specification
+% found is a simple one (as it does not contain a |-| character.
+% This is checked easily enough and |\extract@rangefontinfo|
+% called again. Note that the extra tokens inserted after the
+% |\@nil| in the call to |\is@range| appear at the beginning of
+% the first argument to |\extract@rangefontinfo| and are hence
+% ignored.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\is@range#1-#2\@nil{%
+ \if>#2\expandafter\check@single\else
+ \expandafter\check@range\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@range}
+% |\check@range| takes lower bound as parameter |#1|, upper bound
+% as |#2|, size function as |#3| and the size function's arguments
+% as |#4|. If |#3| is the special token |\@nil| |\font@info| is
+% exhausted and we can stop searching.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check@range#1-#2>#3<#4\@nnil{%
+ \ifnot@nil{#3}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |#3| wasn't |\@nil| we have a range. We start by assuming that
+% we have to recurse. Note that we have to reinsert an |<| as it
+% was already removed by scanning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@f{\extract@rangefontinfo<#4\@nnil}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have to make sure that both boundaries are present, if not we
+% have to set them. Here we check the upper bound. If |\upper@bound|
+% is zero after the assignment we set it to |\maxdimen| (upper open
+% range). We need to use a \meta{dimen} register for the scan since
+% we may have a decimal number as the boundary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \upper@bound0#2\p@
+ \ifdim\upper@bound=\z@ \upper@bound\maxdimen\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we check the upper boundary against |\f@size|.
+% If it is larger or equal than |\f@size| this
+% range is no good and we have to recurse.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \f@size \p@<\upper@bound
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we have to check the lower bound. This time it is not
+% necessary to scan the boundary value into a register because if
+% it is empty we get zero as desired. We could even omit the |0|
+% which would result in |1pt| as default lower boundary. If
+% |\f@size| is smaller than the boundary we have to recurse.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \lower@bound0#1\p@
+ \ifdim \f@size \p@<\lower@bound
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If both tests are passed we can try executing the size function.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \set@simple@size@args#3<#4\@nnil
+ \execute@size@function\sizefn@info
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the function was successful it should have left an external
+% font name in |\external@font|. We use this to see if we can stop
+% scanning. Otherwise we recurse.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\external@font\@empty
+ \else
+ \let\reserved@f\@empty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \reserved@f}}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lower@bound}
+% \begin{macro}{\upper@bound}
+% We use two dimen registers |\lower@bound| and |\upper@bound|
+% to store the lower and upper endpoints of the range we found.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\newdimen\lower@bound
+\newdimen\upper@bound
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check@single}
+% |\check@single| takes the size as parameter |#1|, size function
+% as |#2| and the size function's arguments as |#3|. We can assume
+% that there is always something in the pipeline since the very
+% last entry is a faked range (see above).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\check@single#1>#2<#3\@nnil{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We start by assuming that
+% we have to recurse. Note that we have to reinsert an |<| as it
+% was already removed by scanning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\reserved@f{\extract@rangefontinfo<#3\@nnil}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we check the the size against |\f@size|. If it is not equal
+% |\f@size| it is no good and we have to recurse.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \f@size \p@=#1\p@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise if this test is passed we can try executing the size
+% function.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \set@simple@size@args#2<#3\@nnil
+ \execute@size@function\sizefn@info
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the function was successful it should have left an external
+% font name in |\external@font|. We use this to see if we can stop
+% scanning. Otherwise we recurse.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\external@font\@empty
+ \else
+ \let\reserved@f\@empty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \reserved@f}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@size@funct@args}
+% \begin{macro}{\set@size@funct@args@}
+% This macro sets the optional and mandatory arguments for a size
+% function. If the optional argument is not present it is set to
+% the empty token list. The mandatory argument is delimited by the
+% token |\@nil|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@size@funct@args{\@ifnextchar[%
+ \set@size@funct@args@{\set@size@funct@args@[]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@size@funct@args@[#1]#2\@nil{%
+ \def\mandatory@arg{#2}%
+ \def\optional@arg{#1}}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSizeFunction}
+% This function defines a new size function hiding the internal
+% from the designer. The body of the size function may use
+% |\optional@arg| and |\mandatory@arg| denoting the optional and
+% mandatory argument that may follow the size specification |<...>|.
+% \changes{v2.1c}{1993/03/18}{Added all args to avoid blanks problems}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\DeclareSizeFunction#1#2{\@namedef{s@fct@#1}{#2}}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareSizeFunction
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\execute@size@function}
+% This macro is very simple. The only point worth noting
+% is that calling an undefined size function will do nothing
+% (actually execute a |\relax|).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|package|autoload>
+\def\execute@size@function#1{% %%% could be added to autoload as well
+%<*trace>
+ \@ifundefined{s@fct@#1}%
+ {\errmessage{Undefined font size function #1}%
+ \s@fct@}%
+ {\csname s@fct@#1\endcsname}%
+%</trace>
+%<-trace> \csname s@fct@#1\endcsname
+}
+%</2ekernel|package|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3j}{1994/05/23}{Removed def of \cs{f@warn@break}}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\try@size@range}
+% This macro tries to find a suitable range for requested size
+% (specified by |\f@size|) in |\font@info|. All the relevant
+% action is done in |\extract@rangefontinfo|. All that needs
+% to be done is to stuff in the token list in |\font@info| so
+% that |\extract@rangefontinfo| can inspect it.
+% Note the |<-*\@nil><| token at the end to stop scanning.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\try@size@range{%
+ \expandafter\extract@rangefontinfo\font@info <-*>\@nil<\@nnil
+}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\try@size@substitution}
+% \changes{v2.3k}{1994/11/06}{New implementation}
+% This is the last thing that can be tried. If the desired |\f@size|
+% is found neither among the simple size specifications nor in one
+% of the ranges the whole list of size specifications is searched for
+% a nearby simple size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+\gdef\try@size@substitution{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we do some initializations. |\@tempdimb|
+% will hold the difference between the wanted size and the best
+% solution found so far, so we initialise it with |\maxdimen|.
+% The macro |\best@size| will hold the best size found, nothing
+% found is indicated by the empty value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempdimb \maxdimen
+ \let \best@size \@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we loop over the specification
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter \try@simples \font@info <\number\@M>\@nil<\@nnil
+}
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+%<*autoload>
+\def\try@size@substitution{\try@simples\try@size@substitution}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\font@submax}
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/04/18}{Changed dimen to macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\fontsubfuzz}
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/04/18}{Changed dimen to macro}
+% The macro |\font@submax| records the maximal deviation from the
+% desired size encountered so far. Its value is used in a warning
+% message at |\end{coument}|. The macro
+% |\fontsubfuzz| contains the amount that will not cause terminal
+% warnings (warnings still go into the transcript file).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\font@submax{0pt}
+\def\fontsubfuzz{.4pt}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+%<+package>\def\fontsubfuzz{0pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\try@simples}
+% \changes{v2.3k}{1994/11/06}{New implementation}
+% |\try@simples| goes through a font shape definition
+% in the input until it recognizes the tokens |<*\@nil><|.
+% It looks for simple sizes to determine the two closest sizes.
+% It is assumed that simple sizes are in increasing order.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+\gdef\try@simples#1<#2>{%
+ \tryif@simple#2->\tryif@simple}
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+%<*autoload>
+\def\try@simples{\@autoload{fss1}}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tryis@simple}
+% \changes{v2.3k}{1994/11/06}{New implementation}
+% |\tryis@simple| is similar to |\is@range|. If it sees a simple size,
+% it checks it against the value of |\f@size| and sets
+% |\lower@font@size| or |\higher@font@size|. In the latter case, it
+% stops the iteration. By adding |<\number\@M>| at the end of the
+% line we always have an end point. This is a hack which probably
+% should be corrected.
+%
+% First it checks whether it is finished already, then whether the
+% size specification in question is a simple one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+\gdef\tryif@simple#1-#2\tryif@simple{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Most common case for |\reserved@f| first:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \reserved@f \try@simples
+ \if>#2%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If so, it compares it to the value of |\f@size|. This is done using
+% a dimen register since there may be fractional numbers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@ #1\p@
+ \ifdim \dimen@<\@M\p@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If |\dimen@| is |\@M\p@| we have reached the end of the fontspec
+% (hopefully) otherwise we compare the value with |\f@size| and
+% compute in |\@tempdimc| the absolute value of the difference
+% between the two values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \f@size\p@<\dimen@
+ \@tempdimc \dimen@
+ \advance\@tempdimc -\f@size\p@
+ \else
+ \@tempdimc \f@size\p@
+ \advance\@tempdimc -\dimen@
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The result is then compared with the smallest difference we have
+% encountered, if the new value (in |\@tempdimc| is smaller) we
+% have found a size which is a better approximation so we make it
+% the |\best@size| and adjust |\@tempdimb|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \@tempdimc<\@tempdimb
+ \@tempdimb \@tempdimc
+ \def \best@size{#1}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we have reached the end of the fontspec we substitute the
+% best size found (if any). We code this inline to save macro
+% space; in the past this was done by a macro called |\subst@size|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\subst@size}
+% This macro substitutes the size recorded in |\best@size| for
+% the unavailable size |\f@size|. |\font@submax| records the maximum
+% difference between desired size and selected size in the
+% whole run.
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/04/18}{\cs{font@submax} and \cs{fontsubfuzz}
+% now macros}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% %\subst@size %% coded inline
+% %\def\subst@size{%
+ \ifx \external@font\@empty
+ \ifx \best@size\@empty
+ \else
+ \ifdim \@tempdimb>\font@submax \relax
+ \xdef \font@submax {\the\@tempdimb}%
+ \fi
+ \let \f@user@size \f@size
+ \let \f@size \best@size
+ \ifdim \@tempdimb>\fontsubfuzz\relax
+ \@font@warning{Font\space shape\space
+ `\curr@fontshape'\space in\space size\space
+ <\f@user@size>\space not\space available\MessageBreak
+ size\space <\f@size>\space substituted}%
+ \fi
+ \try@simple@size
+ \do@subst@correction
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% %}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% This brings us back into the main part of |\tryif@simple|.
+% Finally we get rid of any rubbish left over on the input stack.
+%
+% \changes{v3.0c}{1995/08/24}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \reserved@f \remove@to@nnil
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If it's a range iterate also.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \reserved@f}
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Sizefunctions}
+%
+% In the following we define some useful size functions.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\s@fct@}
+% This is the default size function. Mandatory argument is an
+% external font name, optinal argument a scale factor.
+% The font is scaled
+% to |\f@size| if no optional argument is present, and to
+% |\f@size| multiplied by the optional argument otherwise.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\DeclareSizeFunction{}{\empty@sfcnt\@font@warning}
+\DeclareSizeFunction{s}{\empty@sfcnt\@font@info}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\empty@sfcnt#1{%
+ \@tempdimb \f@size\p@
+ \ifx\optional@arg\@empty
+ \else
+ \@tempdimb \optional@arg\@tempdimb
+ #1{Font\space shape\space `\curr@fontshape'\space
+ will\space be\MessageBreak
+ scaled\space to\space size\space \the\@tempdimb}%
+ \fi
+ \edef\external@font{\mandatory@arg\space at\the\@tempdimb}}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\s@fct@gen}
+% \begin{macro}{\s@fct@sgen}
+% This size function generates the external name from the mandatory
+% argument and the requested user size, and thus can be used for
+% external names where the size is encoded in the font name. The
+% optinal argument a scale factor. The font is scaled to |\f@size|
+% if no optional argument is present, and to |\f@size| multiplied
+% by the optional argument otherwise.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\DeclareSizeFunction{gen}{\gen@sfcnt\@font@warning}
+\DeclareSizeFunction{sgen}{\gen@sfcnt\@font@info}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\gen@sfcnt{%
+ \edef\mandatory@arg{\mandatory@arg\f@size}%
+ \empty@sfcnt}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\s@fct@genb}
+% \begin{macro}{\s@fct@sgenb}
+% This size function is similar to |gen|, but for fonts where the
+% size is encoded in the font name in centipoints, as in the DC
+% fonts version 1.2. The font is scaled to |\f@size|
+% if no optional argument is present, and to |\f@size| multiplied
+% by the optional argument otherwise.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\DeclareSizeFunction{genb}{\genb@sfcnt\@font@warning}
+\DeclareSizeFunction{sgenb}{\genb@sfcnt\@font@info}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\genb@sfcnt{%
+ \edef\mandatory@arg{\mandatory@arg\expandafter\genb@x\f@size..\@@}%
+ \empty@sfcnt}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\genb@x}
+% \begin{macro}{\genb@y}
+% The auxiliary macros |\genb@x| and |\genb@y| are used to convert
+% the |\f@size| into centipoints.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\genb@x#1.#2.#3\@@{\two@digits{#1}\genb@y#200\@@}
+\def\genb@y#1#2#3\@@{#1#2}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\s@fct@sub}
+% This size function handles font substitution.
+% The mandatory argument is a family/series/shape combination,
+% the optional argument (if present) is ignored. The font encoding
+% scheme cannot be changed. Therefore, the first thing we do is to
+% prepend the encoding scheme.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1992/07/26}{}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\DeclareSizeFunction{sub}{\sub@sfcnt\@font@warning}
+\DeclareSizeFunction{ssub}{\sub@sfcnt\@font@info}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\sub@sfcnt#1{%
+ \edef\mandatory@arg{\f@encoding/\mandatory@arg}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next action is split the arg into its individual components and
+% allow for a late font shape load.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\split@name\mandatory@arg/\@nil
+ \try@load@fontshape
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we record the current |\f@size| since it may get clobbered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\f@user@size\f@size
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we check whether this new combination is defined and
+% give an error message if not. In this case we also switch to
+% |\error@fontshape|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter
+ \ifx\csname\mandatory@arg\endcsname\relax
+ \errmessage{No\space declaration\space for\space
+ shape\space \mandatory@arg}%
+ \error@fontshape
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise we warn the user about the substitution taking place.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #1{Font\space shape\space `\curr@fontshape'\space in\space
+ size\space <\f@size>\space not\space available\MessageBreak
+ Font\space shape\space `\mandatory@arg'\space tried\space
+ instead}%
+ \expandafter\split@name\mandatory@arg/\@nil
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we restart the font specification scan by calling
+% |\get@external@font|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\f@size{\f@user@size}%
+ \get@external@font
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally |\do@subst@correction| is called to get the font name
+% right.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \do@subst@correction
+}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\s@fct@subf}
+% The |subf| size function allows substitution of another font. The
+% mandatory argument is the external name of the font to be
+% substituted, the optional argument a size scaling factor like
+% in the default size function.
+% The main difference to the default size function is the warning
+% message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\DeclareSizeFunction{subf}{\subf@sfcnt\@font@warning}
+\DeclareSizeFunction{ssubf}{\subf@sfcnt\@font@info}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\subf@sfcnt#1{%
+ #1{Font\space shape\space `\curr@fontshape'\space in\space
+ size\space \f@size\space not\space available\MessageBreak
+ external\space font\space `\mandatory@arg'\space used}%
+ \empty@sfcnt#1%
+ }
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\s@fct@fixed}
+% The |fixed| size function is for using a font at a different size
+% than requested. A warning message is printed, and the external
+% font to be used is taken from the mandatory argument.
+% If an optional argument is present it is used as the `at'
+% size for the font. Otherwise the font is loaded at its design size.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\DeclareSizeFunction{fixed}{\fixed@sfcnt\@font@warning}
+\DeclareSizeFunction{sfixed}{\fixed@sfcnt\@font@info}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+\def\fixed@sfcnt#1{%
+ \ifx\optional@arg\@empty
+ \let\external@font\mandatory@arg
+ \else
+ \edef\external@font{\mandatory@arg\space at\optional@arg pt}%
+ \fi
+ #1{External\space font\space `\external@font'\space loaded\space
+ for\space size\MessageBreak
+ <\f@size>}%
+}
+%</2ekernel|def2|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<+checkmem>\CHECKMEM
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..03849a56131
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lthyphen.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\ProvidesFile{lthyphen.dtx}
+%</driver>
+%<default>\ProvidesFile{hyphen.ltx}
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{lthyphen.dtx}
+ [1994/12/04 v1.0h LaTeX Kernel (hyphenation interface)]
+%
+%
+% \CheckSum{13}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+%\iffalse This is a META comment
+%
+% File `lthyphen.dtx'.
+% Copyright (C) 1994-94 LaTeX3 project, Frank Mittelbach and
+% Rainer Sch\"opf, all rights reserved.
+%
+%\fi
+% \GetFileInfo{lthyphen.dtx}
+% \title{The \texttt{lthyphen.dtx} file\thanks
+% {This file has version number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}\\
+% for use with \LaTeXe}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \def\dst{{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% This file contains the code for loading hyphenation patterns into
+% \LaTeX. Most of this will end up in a file called
+% \texttt{hyphen.ltx}. If you wish to customize your \LaTeX{} system
+% in respect of hyphenation patterns, write a file
+% \texttt{hyphen.cfg}. If this file exists, it will be loaded instead
+% of \texttt{hyphen.ltx}. See the comments below for additional
+% information.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% To produce the printed version of this file the following code
+% is used. It can be extracted with the \dst{} program, or one can run
+% this file directly through \LaTeXe{}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{lthyphen.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1994/03/07}{move the 2ekernel code to ltfinal.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/12/01}{Rename lthyphen.ltx/cfg to hyphen.ltx/cfg}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/12/04}{Documentation edits for /1989}
+%
+% The default file |hyphen.ltx| loads hyphenation patterns for US
+% english. If you want to load additional or other hyphenation
+% patterns, you should create a file |hyphen.cfg|. This is best done
+% by starting from |hyphen.ltx|.
+%
+% For backward compatibility, the default file, |hyphen.ltx|,
+% first tries to load
+% the file |hyphen.tex|. If this file exists, an information
+% message is issued and the appropriate defaults for \TeX's internal
+% parameters are set: |\language| is initialized to $0$, and
+% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| to $2$ and $3$, respectively,
+% to disallow x- or -xx breaks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*default>
+\InputIfFileExists{hyphen.tex}%
+ {\message{Loading hyphenation patterns for US english.}%
+ \language=0
+ \lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, since we cannot do anything without any hyphenation
+% patterns, an error message is printed and the Ini\TeX{} run
+% is terminated by invoking |\@@end| (which is the \LaTeXe{} name
+% for \TeX's |\end| primitive).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\errhelp{The configuration for hyphenation is incorrectly
+ installed.^^J%
+ If you don't understand this error message you need
+ to seek^^Jexpert advice.}%
+ \errmessage{OOPS! I can't find any hyphenation patterns for
+ US english.^^J \space Think of getting some or the
+ latex2e setup will never succeed}\@@end}
+%</default>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following example describes the possible contents of a file
+% |hyphen.cfg| that will load both US English and German hyphenation
+% patterns, making the former the default.
+% It sets |\language| to $0$ for the US patterns and to $1$ for the
+% German patterns.
+% Then |\language| is set to $0$ to make this the default and the
+% default values of |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| are set.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\language=0
+%\input hyphen % (or \input ushyphen1 if the file has been renamed)
+%\language=1
+%\input ghyph31
+%\language=0
+%\lefthyphenmin=2
+%\righthyphenmin=3
+%\endinput
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Another possibility is to use the package |babel|, by Johannes Braams.
+% That package is distributed with a suitable |hyphen.cfg| file.
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7a630b77e97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltidxglo.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltidxglo.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltidxglo.dtx}
+ [1996/01/20 v1.1e LaTeX Kernel (Index and Glossary)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltidxglo.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{77}
+%
+% \section{Index and Glossary Generation}
+% Index and Glossary commands.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\makeindex} A preamble command to turn on indexing.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\makeglossary} A preamble command to turn on making
+% glossary entries.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\index} Make an index entry for |#1|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\glossary} Make a glossary entry for |#1|.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/31}{Initial version of ltidxbib.dtx,
+% split from ltherest.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/19}{Initial version of ltidxglo.dtx,
+% split from ltidxbib.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1995/10/25}{Doc cleanup}
+%
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \makeindex ==
+% BEGIN
+% \index == BEGIN \@bsphack
+% \begingroup
+% \protect{X} == \string X\space
+% %% added 3 Feb 87 for \index commands
+% %% in \footnotes
+% re-\catcode special characters
+% to 'other'
+% \@wrindex
+% END
+%
+% \@wrindex{ITEM} ==
+% BEGIN
+% write of {\indexentry{ITEM}{page number}}
+% \endgroup
+% \@esphack
+% END
+%
+% INITIALIZATION:
+%
+% \index == BEGIN \@bsphack
+% \begingroup
+% re-\catcode special characters (in case '%' there)
+% \@index
+% END
+%
+% \@index{ITEM} == BEGIN \endgroup \@esphack END
+%
+% Changes made 14 Apr 89 to write \glossaryentry's instead of
+% \indexentry's on the .glo file.
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{index,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/04}{Removed \cs{if@filesw} from
+% \cs{makeindex}.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeindex}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makeindex{%
+ \newwrite\@indexfile
+ \immediate\openout\@indexfile=\jobname.idx
+ \def\index{\@bsphack\begingroup
+ \@sanitize
+ \@wrindex}\typeout
+ {Writing index file \jobname.idx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1996/01/20}{Make no-op after use pr/2048}
+% Opening the write channel should be done only once
+% since on some OS multiple opens are forbidden and in
+% any case it is useless. So we turn this into a no-op after
+% use.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\makeindex\@empty
+}
+\@onlypreamble\makeindex
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wrindex}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{protected@write} to
+% \cs{@wrindex}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@wrindex#1{%
+ \protected@write\@indexfile{}%
+ {\string\indexentry{#1}{\thepage}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\index}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\index{\@bsphack\begingroup \@sanitize\@index}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@index}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@index#1{\endgroup\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeglossary}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/04}{Removed \cs{if@filesw} from
+% \cs{makeglossary}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makeglossary{%
+ \newwrite\@glossaryfile
+ \immediate\openout\@glossaryfile=\jobname.glo
+ \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup
+ \@sanitize
+ \@wrglossary}\typeout
+ {Writing glossary file \jobname.glo }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1996/01/20}{Make no-op after use pr/2048}
+% Opening the write channel should be done only once
+% since on some OS multiple opens are forbidden and in
+% any case it is useless. So we turn this into a no-op after
+% use.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\makeglossary\@empty
+}
+\@onlypreamble\makeglossary
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wrglossary}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{protected@write} to
+% \cs{@wrglossary}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@wrglossary#1{%
+ \protected@write\@glossaryfile{}%
+ {\string\glossaryentry{#1}{\thepage}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glossary}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e48ebfeedd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlength.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltlength.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltlength.dtx}
+ [1995/08/11 v1.1b LaTeX Kernel (Lengths)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltlength.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{40}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/29}
+% {Create file ltcntlen from parts of ltmiscen and ltherest.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/19}
+% {Extract file ltlength from ltcntlen.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/08/11}
+% {Doc typos fixed for latex/753}
+%
+% \section{Lengths}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\newlength}
+% Declare |#1| to be a new length command.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\setlength}
+% Set the length command, |#1|, to the value |#2|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\addtolength}
+% Increase the value of the length command, |#1|, by the value |#2|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\settowidth}
+% Set the length, |#1| to the width of a box containing |#2|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\settoheight}
+% Set the length, |#1| to the height of a box containing |#2|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\settodepth}
+% Set the length, |#1| to the depth of a box containing |#2|.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{lengths,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newlength}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newlength#1{\@ifdefinable#1{\newskip#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setlength#1#2{#1#2\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtolength}
+% |\relax| added 24 Mar 86
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addtolength#1#2{\advance#1 #2\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\settoheight}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\settodepth}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\settowidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@settodim}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{(DPC) Extra group for colour}
+% The obvious analogs of |\settowidth|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@settodim#1#2#3{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#3}}#2#1\@tempboxa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Clear the memory afterwards (which might be a lot).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\box\voidb@x}
+\def\settoheight{\@settodim\ht}
+\def\settodepth {\@settodim\dp}
+\def\settowidth {\@settodim\wd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@settopoint}
+% This macro takes the contents of the skip register that is
+% supplied as its argument and removes the fractional part to make
+% it a whole number of points. This can be used in class files to
+% avoid values like |345.4666666pt| when calulating a dimension.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@settopoint#1{\divide#1\p@\multiply#1\p@}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6a4a91d7271
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlists.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1075 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltlists.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltlists.dtx}
+ [2002/10/28 v1.0s LaTeX Kernel (List Environments)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltlists.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Tobias Oetiker\thanks{Tobi has converted the documentation to
+ doc.sty standard}\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{498}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/28}{Improve documentation}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/21}{Use new error commands}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1995/05/21}{Moved to doc.sty standard}
+%
+% \section{List, and related environments}
+%
+% The generic commands for creating an indented environment --
+% |enumerate|, |itemize|, |quote|, etc -- are:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\list|\marg{LABEL}\marg{COMMANDS} ... |\endlist|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% which can be invoked by the user as the list environment. The LABEL
+% argument specifies item labeling. COMMANDS contains commands for
+% changing the horizontal and vertical spacing parameters.
+%
+% Each item of the environment is begun by the command
+% |\item[|ITEMLABEL|]|
+% which produces an item labeled by ITEMLABEL. If the argument is
+% missing, then the LABEL argument of the |\list| command is used as the
+% item label.
+%
+% The label is formed by putting |\makelabel|\marg{ITEMLABEL} in an hbox
+% whose width is either its natural width or else |\labelwidth|,
+% whichever is larger. The |\list| command defines |\makelabel| to have
+% the default definition:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\makelabel|\marg{ARG} == BEGIN |\hfil| ARG END
+% \end{quote}
+% which, for a label of width less than |\labelwidth|, puts the label
+% flushright, |\labelsep| to the left of the item's text. However,
+% |\makelabel| can be |\let| to another command by the |\list|'s
+% COMMANDS argument.
+%
+% A |\usecounter|\marg{foo} command in the second argument causes the
+% counter \emph{foo} to be initialized to zero, and stepped by every
+% |\item| command without an argument. (|\label| commands within the
+% list refer to this counter.)
+%
+% When you leave a list environment, returning either to an enclosing
+% list or normal text mode, LaTeX begins a new paragraph if and only if
+% you leave a blank line after the |\end| command. This is accomplished
+% by the |\@endparenv| command.
+%
+% Blank lines are ignored every other reasonable place--i.e.:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Between the |\begin{list}| and the first |\item|,
+% \item Between the |\item| and the text of that item.
+% \item Between the end of the last item and the |\end{list}|.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% For an environment like quotation, in which items are not labeled,
+% the entire environment is a single item. It is defined by
+% letting |\quotation| == |\list{}{...}\item\relax|. (Note the
+% |\relax|, there in case the first character in the environment is a
+% '['.) The spacing parameters provide a great deal of flexability in
+% designing the format, including the ability to let the indentation of
+% the first paragraph be different from that of the subsequent ones.
+%
+% The trivlist environment is equivalent to a list environment
+% whose second argument sets the following parameter values:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{leftmargin} = 0:] causes no indentation of left margin
+% \item[\cs{labelwidth} = 0:] see below for precise effect this has.
+% \item[\cs{itemindent} = 0:] with a null label, makes first paragraph
+% have no indentation. Succeeding paragraphs have |\parindent|
+% indentation. To give first paragraph same indentation, set
+% |\itemindent| = |\parindent| before the |\item[]|.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% Every |\item| in a trivlist environment must have an argument---in
+% many cases, this will be the null argument (|\item[]|). The trivlist
+% environment is mainly used for paragraphing environments, like
+% verbatim, in which there is no margin change. It provides the same
+% vertical spacing as the list environment, and works reasonably well
+% when it occurs immediately after an |\item| command in an enclosing
+% list.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{Long lines wrapped to 72 columns}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{List and Trivlist}
+%
+%
+% The following variables are used inside a list environment:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{@totalleftmargin}] The distance that the prevailing left
+% margin is indented from the outermost left margin,
+% \item[\cs{linewidth}] The width of the current line. Must be
+% initialized to |\hsize|.
+% \item[\cs{@listdepth}] A count for holding current list nesting depth.
+% \item[\cs{makelabel}] A macro with a single argument, used to
+% generate the label from the argument (given or implied)
+% of the |\item| command. Initialized to |\@mklab| by the |\list|
+% command. This command must produce some stretch---i.e., an
+% |\hfil|.
+% \item[\cs{@inlabel}] A switch that is false except between the time
+% an |\item| is encountered and the time that \TeX{}
+% actually enters horizontal mode. Should be tested by commands
+% that can be messed up by the list environment's use of |\everypar|.
+% \item[\cs{box\@labels}] When |@inlabel = true|, it holds the labels
+% to be put out by |\everypar|.
+% \item[\texttt{@noparitem}] A switch set by |\list| when
+% |@inlabel = true|.
+% Handles the case of a |\list| being the first thing in an item.
+% \item[\texttt{@noparlist}] A switch set true for a list that begins an
+% item. No |\topsep| space is added before or after |\item|'s such a
+% list.
+% \item[\texttt{@newlist}] Set true by |\list|, set false by the first
+% text (by |\everypar|).
+% \item[\texttt{@noitemarg}] Set true when executing an |\item| with no
+% explicit argument. Used to save space. To save time, make two
+% separate |\@item| commands.
+% \item[\texttt{@nmbrlist}] Set true by |\usecounter| command, causes
+% list to be numbered.
+% \item[\cs{@listctr}] |\def|'ed by |\usecounter| to name of counter.
+% \item[\cs{@noskipsec}] A switch set true by a sectioning command when
+% it is creating an in-text heading with |\everypar|.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% Throughout a list environment, |\hsize| is the width of the current
+% line, measured from the outermost left margin to the outermost right
+% margin. Environments like tabbing should use |\linewidth| instead of
+% |\hsize|.
+%
+% Here are the parameters of a list that can be set by commands in
+% the |\list|'s COMMANDS argument. These parameters are all TeX
+% skips or dimensions (defined by |\newskip| or |\newdimen|), so the
+% usual \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ commands can be used to set them. The
+% commands will be executed in vmode if and only if the |\list| was
+% preceded by a |\par| (or something like an |\end{list}|), so the
+% spacing parameters can be set according to whether the list is
+% inside a paragraph or is its own paragraph.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical Spacing (skips)}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{topsep}:] Space between first item and preceding paragraph.
+% \item[\cs{partopsep}:] Extra space added to \cs{topsep} when
+% environment starts a new paragraph (is called in vmode).
+% \item[\cs{itemsep}:] Space between successive items.
+% \item[\cs{parsep}:] Space between paragraphs within an item -- the
+% \cs{parskip} for this environment.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \subsection{Penalties}
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[\cs{@beginparpenalty}:] put at the beginning of a list
+% \item[\cs{@endparpenalty}:] put at end of list
+% \item[\cs{@itempenalty}:] put between items.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal Spacing (dimens)}
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{leftmargin}:] space between left margin of enclosing
+% environment (or of page if top level list) and left margin of
+% this list. Must be nonnegative.
+% \item[\cs{rightmargin}:] analogous.
+% \item[\cs{listparindent}:] extra indentation at beginning of every
+% paragraph of a list except the one started by the \cs{item}
+% command. May be negative! Usually, labeled
+% lists have \cs{listparindent} equal to zero.
+% \item[\cs{itemindent}:] extra indentation added right BEFORE an item
+% label.
+% \item[\cs{labelwidth}:] nominal width of box that contains the label.
+% If the natural width of the
+% label $< =$ \cs{labelwidth},
+% then the label is flushed right inside a box
+% of width \cs{labelwidth} (with an \cs{hfil}).
+% Otherwise,
+% a box of the natural width is employed, which
+% causes an indentation of the text on that line.
+% \item[\cs{labelsep}:] space between end of label box and text of
+% first item.
+% \end{description}
+% \subsection{Default Values}
+% Defaults for the list environment are set as follows.
+% First, \cs{rightmargin}, \cs{listparindent} and \cs{itemindent}
+% are set
+% to 0pt. Then, one of the commands
+% \cs{@listi}, \cs{@listii}, ... , \cs{@listvi}
+% is called, depending upon the current level of the list.
+% The \cs{@list} \ldots commands should be defined by the document
+% style. A convention that the document style should follow is
+% to set \cs{leftmargin} to
+% \cs{leftmargini},\ldots, \cs{leftmarginvi} for
+% the appropriate level. Items that aren't changed may be left
+% alone, but everything that could possibly be changed must be
+% reset.
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \list{LABEL}{COMMANDS} ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@listdepth > 5
+% then LaTeX error: 'Too deeply nested'
+% else \@listdepth :=G \@listdepth + 1
+% fi
+% \rightmargin := 0pt
+% \listparindent := 0pt
+% \itemindent := 0pt
+% \eval(@list \romannumeral\the\@listdepth) %% Set default values:
+% \@itemlabel :=L LABEL
+% \makelabel == \@mklab
+% @nmbrlist :=L false
+% COMMANDS
+%
+% \@trivlist % commands common to \list and \trivlist
+%
+% \parskip :=L \parsep
+% \parindent :=L \listparindent
+% \linewidth :=L \linewidth - \rightmargin -\leftmargin
+% \@totalleftmargin :=L \@totalleftmargin + \leftmargin
+% \parshape 1 \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+% \ignorespaces % gobble space up to \item
+% END
+%
+% \endlist == BEGIN \@listdepth :=G \@listdepth -1
+% \endtrivlist
+% END
+%
+% \@trivlist ==
+% BEGIN
+% if @newlist = T then \@noitemerr fi
+% %% This command removed for some forgotten reason.
+% \@topsepadd :=L \topsep
+% if @noskipsec then leave vertical mode fi %% Added 11 Jun 85
+% if vertical mode
+% then \@topsepadd :=L \@topsepadd + \partopsep
+% else \unskip \par % remove glue from end of last line
+% fi
+% if @inlabel = true
+% then @noparitem :=L true
+% @noparlist :=L true
+% else @noparlist :=L false
+% \@topsep :=L \@topsepadd
+% fi
+% \@topsep :=L \@topsep + \parskip %% Change 4 Sep 85
+% \leftskip :=L 0pt % Restore paragraphing parameters
+% \rightskip :=L \@rightskip
+% \parfillskip :=L 0pt + 1fil
+%
+% NOTE: \@setpar called on every \list in case \par has been
+% temporarily munged before the \list command.
+% \@setpar{if @newlist = false then {\@@par} fi}
+% \@newlist :=G T
+% \@outerparskip :=L \parskip
+% END
+%
+% \trivlist ==
+% BEGIN
+% \parsep := \parskip
+% @nmbrlist := F
+% \@trivlist
+% \labelwidth := 0
+% \leftmargin := 0
+% \itemindent := \parindent
+% \@itemlabel :=L "empty" %% added 93/12/13
+% \makelabel{LABEL} == LABEL
+% END
+%
+% \endtrivlist ==
+% BEGIN
+% if @inlabel = T then \indent fi
+% if horizontal mode then \unskip \par fi
+% if @noparlist = true
+% else if \lastskip > 0
+% then \@tempskipa := \lastskip
+% \vskip - \lastskip
+% \vskip \@tempskipa -\@outerparskip + \parskip
+% fi
+% \@endparenv
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@endparenv ==
+% BEGIN
+% \addpenalty{@endparpenalty}
+% \addvspace{\@topsepadd}
+% \endgroup %% ends the \begin command's \begingroup
+% \par == BEGIN
+% \@restorepar
+% \everypar{}
+% \par
+% END
+% \everypar == BEGIN remove \lastbox \everypar{} END
+% \begingroup %% to match the \end commands \endgroup
+% END
+%
+% \item == BEGIN if math mode then WARNING fi
+% if next char = [
+% then \@item
+% else @noitemarg := true
+% \@item[@itemlabel]
+% END
+%
+% \@item[LAB] ==
+% BEGIN
+% if @noparitem = true
+% then @noparitem := false
+% % NOTE: then clause hardly every taken,
+% % so made a macro \@donoparitem
+% \box\@labels :=G \hbox{\hskip -\leftmargin
+% \box\@labels
+% \hskip \leftmargin }
+% if @minipage = false then
+% \@tempskipa := \lastskip
+% \vskip -\lastskip
+% \vskip \@tempskipa + \@outerparskip - \parskip
+% fi
+% else if @inlabel = true
+% then \indent \par % previous item empty.
+% fi
+% if hmode then 2 \unskip's
+% % To remove any space at end of prev.
+% % paragraph that could cause a blank line.
+% \par
+% fi
+% if @newlist = T
+% then if @nobreak = T % Kludge if list follows \section
+% then \addvspace{\@outerparskip - \parskip}
+% else \addpenalty{\@beginparpenalty}
+% \addvspace{\@topsep}
+% \addvspace{-\parskip} %% added 4 Sep 85
+% fi
+% else \addpenalty{\@itempenalty}
+% \addvspace{\itemsep}
+% fi
+% @inlabel :=G true
+% fi
+%
+% \everypar{ @minipage :=G F
+% @newlist :=G F
+% if @inlabel = true
+% then @inlabel :=G false
+% \hskip -\parindent
+% \box\@labels
+% \penalty 0
+% %% 3 Oct 85 -- allow line break here
+% \box\@labels :=G null
+% fi
+% \everypar{} }
+% @nobreak :=G false
+% if @noitemarg = true
+% then @noitemarg := false
+% if @nmbrlist
+% then \refstepcounter{\@listctr}
+% fi fi
+% \@tempboxa :=L \hbox{\makelabel{LAB}}
+% \box\@labels :=G \@labels \hskip \itemindent
+% \hskip - (\labelwidth + \labelsep)
+% if \wd \@tempboxa > \labelwidth
+% then \box\@tempboxa
+% else \hbox to \labelwidth {\unhbox\@tempboxa}
+% fi
+% \hskip\labelsep
+% \ignorespaces %gobble space up to text
+% END
+%
+% \makelabel{LABEL} == ERROR %% default to catch lonely \item
+%
+%
+% \usecounter{CTR} == BEGIN @nmbrlist :=L true
+% \@listctr == CTR
+% \setcounter{CTR}{0}
+% END
+%
+% DEFINE \dimen's and \count
+% \end{oldcomments}
+% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\partopsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topsepadd}
+% \begin{macro}{\outerparskip}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\newskip\topsep
+\newskip\partopsep
+\newskip\itemsep
+\newskip\parsep
+\newskip\@topsep
+\newskip\@topsepadd
+\newskip\@outerparskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargin}\begin{macro}{\rightmargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\listparindent}\begin{macro}{\itemindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelwidth}\begin{macro}{\labelsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@totalleftmargin}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\leftmargin
+\newdimen\rightmargin
+\newdimen\listparindent
+\newdimen\itemindent
+\newdimen\labelwidth
+\newdimen\labelsep
+\newdimen\linewidth
+\newdimen\@totalleftmargin \@totalleftmargin=\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargini}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginvi}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\leftmargini
+\newdimen\leftmarginii
+\newdimen\leftmarginiii
+\newdimen\leftmarginiv
+\newdimen\leftmarginv
+\newdimen\leftmarginvi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listdepth}\begin{macro}{\@itempenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@beginparpenalty}\begin{macro}{\@endparpenalty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@listdepth \@listdepth=0
+\newcount\@itempenalty
+\newcount\@beginparpenalty
+\newcount\@endparpenalty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@labels}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\@labels
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@inlabel}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inlabelfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inlabeltrue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@inlabel \@inlabelfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@newlist}
+% \begin{macro}{\@newlistfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@newlisttrue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@newlist \@newlistfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@noparitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\@noparitemfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@noparitemtrue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@noparitem \@noparitemfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@noparlist}
+% \begin{macro}{\@noparlistfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@noparlisttrue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@noparlist \@noparlistfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@noitemarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\@noitemargfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@noitemargtrue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@noitemarg \@noitemargfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@newlist}
+% \begin{macro}{\@newlistfalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@newlisttrue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@nmbrlist \@nmbrlistfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\list}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\list#1#2{%
+ \ifnum \@listdepth >5\relax
+ \@toodeep
+ \else
+ \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne
+ \fi
+ \rightmargin\z@
+ \listparindent\z@
+ \itemindent\z@
+ \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname
+ \def\@itemlabel{#1}%
+ \let\makelabel\@mklab
+ \@nmbrlistfalse
+ #2\relax
+ \@trivlist
+ \parskip\parsep
+ \parindent\listparindent
+ \advance\linewidth -\rightmargin
+ \advance\linewidth -\leftmargin
+ \advance\@totalleftmargin \leftmargin
+ \parshape \@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\par@deathcycles}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\par@deathcycles
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@trivlist}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/12/02}{RmS: Added check for looping}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1996/10/31}{Added check for missing item in outer
+% list}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1996/11/04}{Moved check for missing item: only checked
+% when not inlabel flag is false}
+% Because |\par| is sometimes made a no-op it is possible for a missing
+% |\item| to produce a loop that does not fill memory and so never gets
+% trapped by \TeX. We thus need to trap this here by seting |\par| to
+% count the number of times a paragraph ii is called with no progress
+% being made started.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@trivlist{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \@topsepadd \topsep
+ \ifvmode
+ \advance\@topsepadd \partopsep
+ \else
+ \unskip \par
+ \fi
+ \if@inlabel
+ \@noparitemtrue
+ \@noparlisttrue
+ \else
+ \if@newlist \@noitemerr \fi
+ \@noparlistfalse
+ \@topsep \@topsepadd
+ \fi
+ \advance\@topsep \parskip
+ \leftskip \z@skip
+ \rightskip \@rightskip
+ \parfillskip \@flushglue
+ \par@deathcycles \z@
+ \@setpar{\if@newlist
+ \advance\par@deathcycles \@ne
+ \ifnum \par@deathcycles >\@m
+ \@noitemerr
+ {\@@par}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ {\@@par}%
+ \fi}%
+ \global \@newlisttrue
+ \@outerparskip \parskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{0.0}{1992/03/18}{RmS: added \cs{@nmbrlistfalse}}
+% \begin{macro}{\trivlist}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\trivlist{%
+ \parsep\parskip
+ \@nmbrlistfalse
+ \@trivlist
+ \labelwidth\z@
+ \leftmargin\z@
+ \itemindent\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We initialise |\@itemlabel| so that a \texttt{trivlist} with
+% an |\item| not having an optional argument doesn't produce an
+% error message.
+% \changes{latex2e}{1993/12/13}{Initialised \cs{@itemlabel}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@itemlabel\@empty
+ \def\makelabel##1{##1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endlist}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endlist{%
+ \global\advance\@listdepth\m@ne
+ \endtrivlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The definition of \cs{trivlist} used to be in ltspace.dtx
+% so that other commands could be `let to it'.
+% They now use \cs{def}.
+% \begin{macro}{\endtrivlist}
+% \changes{v1.2b ltspace}{1994/11/12}{Changed order of tests to make
+% \cs{@noitemerror} correct: end of an era.}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1995/05/25}{Macros moved from ltspace.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1996/10/25}{Change \cs{indent} to \cs{leavevmode}}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1996/10/25}{Reset flags explicitly}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1996/10/26}{Correct typo}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endtrivlist{%
+ \if@inlabel
+ \leavevmode
+ \global \@inlabelfalse
+ \fi
+ \if@newlist
+ \@noitemerr
+ \global \@newlistfalse
+ \fi
+ \ifhmode\unskip \par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also check if we are in math mode and issue an error message
+% if so (hoping that |\@currenvir| resolves suitably). Otherwise
+% the usual ``perhaps a missing item'' error will get triggered
+% later which is confusing.
+% \changes{v1.0s}{2002/10/28}{Check for math mode (pr/3437)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \@inmatherr{\end{\@currenvir}}%
+ \fi
+ \if@noparlist \else
+ \ifdim\lastskip >\z@
+ \@tempskipa\lastskip \vskip -\lastskip
+ \advance\@tempskipa\parskip \advance\@tempskipa -\@outerparskip
+ \vskip\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \@endparenv
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@endparenv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@doendpe}
+% To suppress the paragraph indentation in text immediately following
+% a paragraph-making environment, \cs{everypar} is changed to remove the
+% space, and \cs{par} is redefined to restore \cs{everypar}. Instead of
+% redefining \cs{par} and \cs{everpar}, \cs{@endparenv} was changed to
+% set the @endpe switch, letting \cs{end} redefine \cs{par} and
+% \cs{everypar}.
+%
+% This allows paragraph-making environments to work right when called
+% by other environments. (Changed 27 Oct 86)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@endparenv{%
+ \addpenalty\@endparpenalty\addvspace\@topsepadd\@endpetrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@doendpe{\@endpetrue
+ \def\par{\@restorepar\everypar{}\par\@endpefalse}\everypar
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Use |\setbox0=\lastbox| instead of |\hskip -\parindent|
+% so that a \cs{noindent} becomes a no-op when used before
+% a line immediately following a list environment(23 Oct 86).
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1995/11/07}{Enclosed \cs{setbox0} assignment by a
+% group so that it leaves the contents of box $0$ intact.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {{\setbox\z@\lastbox}\everypar{}\@endpefalse}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@endpe}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endpefalse}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endpeltrue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@endpe
+\@endpefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mklab}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mklab#1{\hfil #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/09/18}
+% {(RmS) Added warning if \cs{item} is used in math mode}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/04/28}
+% {Replaced \cs{@ltxnomath} by \cs{@inmatherr}}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/03}
+% {Removed superfluous braces}
+% \begin{macro}{\item}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\item{%
+ \@inmatherr\item
+ \@ifnextchar [\@item{\@noitemargtrue \@item[\@itemlabel]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@donoparitem}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@donoparitem{%
+ \@noparitemfalse
+ \global\setbox\@labels\hbox{\hskip -\leftmargin
+ \unhbox\@labels
+ \hskip \leftmargin}%
+ \if@minipage\else
+ \@tempskipa\lastskip
+ \vskip -\lastskip
+ \advance\@tempskipa\@outerparskip
+ \advance\@tempskipa -\parskip
+ \vskip\@tempskipa
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@item}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1996/07/26}{Remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \cs{@minipage...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@item[#1]{%
+ \if@noparitem
+ \@donoparitem
+ \else
+ \if@inlabel
+ \indent \par
+ \fi
+ \ifhmode
+ \unskip\unskip \par
+ \fi
+ \if@newlist
+ \if@nobreak
+ \@nbitem
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@beginparpenalty
+ \addvspace\@topsep
+ \addvspace{-\parskip}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@itempenalty
+ \addvspace\itemsep
+ \fi
+ \global\@inlabeltrue
+ \fi
+ \everypar{%
+ \@minipagefalse
+ \global\@newlistfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This |\if@inlabel| check is needed in case an item starts of
+% inside a group so that |\everypar| does not become empty
+% outside that group.
+% \@nobreakfalse, etc etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@inlabel
+ \global\@inlabelfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The paragraph indent is now removed by using |\setbox...| since
+% this makes |\noindent| a no-op here, as it should be. Thus the
+% following comment is redundant but is left here for the sake of
+% future historians:
+% this next command was changed from an hskip to a kern to avoid
+% a break point after the parindent box: the skip could cause a
+% line-break if a very long label occurs in raggedright setting.
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/03}{\cs{hskip} changed to \cs{kern}}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1996/10/23}{\cs{kern...} changed to \cs{setbox...}}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1997/02/21}
+% {\cs{ifvoid} check added for \cs{noindent}. latex/2414}
+% If |\noindent| was used after |\item| want to cancel the |\itemindent|
+% skip. This case can be detected as the indentation box will be void.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\setbox\z@\lastbox
+ \ifvoid\z@
+ \kern-\itemindent
+ \fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \box\@labels
+ \penalty\z@
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This code is intended to prevent a page break after the first
+% line of an item that comes immediately after a section title. It
+% may be sensible to always forbid a page break after one line of
+% an item? As with all such settings of |\clubpenalty| it is local
+% so will have no effect if the item starts in a group.
+%
+% Only resetting |\@nobreak| when it is true is now
+% essential since now it is sometimes set locally.
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1996/10/23}{Added setting of \cs{clubpenalty} and
+% set \cs{@nobreakfalse} only when necessary}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@nobreak
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \clubpenalty \@M
+ \else
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
+ \everypar{}%
+ \fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1996/07/26}{Remove unecessary \cs{global} before
+% \cs{@nobreak...}}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1996/10/23}{\cs{@nobreak...} moved into the
+% \cs{everypar} and not executed unconditionally, see above}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@noitemarg
+ \@noitemargfalse
+ \if@nmbrlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/05/17}{Removed surplus braces}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \refstepcounter\@listctr
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We use |\sbox| to support colour commands.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/08}{use \cs{sbox} to support colour}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \sbox\@tempboxa{\makelabel{#1}}%
+ \global\setbox\@labels\hbox{%
+ \unhbox\@labels
+ \hskip \itemindent
+ \hskip -\labelwidth
+ \hskip -\labelsep
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\labelwidth
+ \box\@tempboxa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/11/22}
+% {(RmS) Changed second call to \cs{makelabel} to
+% \cs{unhbox}\cs{@tempboxa}.
+% Avoids problems with side effects in \cs{makelabel} and is
+% more efficient.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \hbox to\labelwidth {\unhbox\@tempboxa}%
+ \fi
+ \hskip \labelsep}%
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makelabel}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/11/04}
+% {(RmS) added default definition for \cs{makelabel},
+% to produce an error message.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makelabel#1{%
+ \@latex@error{Lonely \string\item--perhaps a missing
+ list environment}\@ehc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nbitem}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/05/17}{Removed surplus braces}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nbitem{%
+ \@tempskipa\@outerparskip
+ \advance\@tempskipa -\parskip
+ \addvspace\@tempskipa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usecounter}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\usecounter#1{\@nmbrlisttrue\def\@listctr{#1}\setcounter{#1}\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Itemize and Enumerate}
+%
+% Enumeration is done with four counters: |enumi|, |enumii|, |enumiii|
+% and |enumiv|, where |enum|N controls the numbering of the Nth level
+% enumeration. The label is generated by the commands
+% \cs{labelenumi} \ldots{} \cs{labelenumiv}, which should be defined
+% by the document style.
+% Note that \cs{p@enum}N\cs{theenum}N defines the output
+% of a \cs{ref} command. A typical definition might be:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
+% \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+% \def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% which will print the labels as `(a)', `(b)', \ldots
+% and print a \cs{ref} as `3a'.
+%
+% The item numbers are moved to the right of the label box, so they are
+% always a distance of \cs{labelsep} from the item.
+%
+% \cs{@enumdepth} holds the current enumeration nesting depth.
+%
+% Itemization is controlled by four commands: \cs{labelitemi},
+% \cs{labelitemii},
+% \cs{labelitemiii}, and \cs{labelitemiv}.
+% To cause the second-level list to be
+% bulleted, you just define \cs{labelitemii}
+% to be $\bullet$. \cs{@itemspacing}
+% and \cs{@itemdepth} are the analogs of \cs{@enumspacing} and
+% \cs{@enumdepth}.
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \enumerate ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@enumdepth > 3
+% then errormessage: ``Too deeply nested''.
+% else \@enumdepth :=L \@enumdepth + 1
+% \@enumctr :=L eval(enum@\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth)
+% \list{\label(\@enumctr)}
+% {\usecounter{\@enumctr}
+% \makelabel{LABEL} == \hss \llap{LABEL}}
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \endenumerate == \endlist
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enumdepth}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@enumdepth \@enumdepth = 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@enumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@enumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@enumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@enumiv}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@definecounter{enumi}
+\@definecounter{enumii}
+\@definecounter{enumiii}
+\@definecounter{enumiv}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{enumerate}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/05/17}{Use \cs{thr@@} and remove surplus braces}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enumerate{%
+ \ifnum \@enumdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
+ \advance\@enumdepth\@ne
+ \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1995/07/09}{Use \cs{expandafter}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter
+ \list
+ \csname label\@enumctr\endcsname
+ {\usecounter\@enumctr\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\endenumerate =\endlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \itemize ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@itemdepth > 3
+% then errormessage: 'Too deeply nested'.
+% else \@itemdepth :=L \@itemdepth + 1
+% \@itemitem == eval(labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth)
+% \list{\@nameuse{\@itemitem}}
+% {\makelabel{LABEL} == \hss \llap{LABEL}}
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \enditemize == \endlist
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@itemdepth}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@itemdepth \@itemdepth = 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{itemize}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/05/17}{Use \cs{thr@@}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itemize{%
+ \ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
+ \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
+ \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1995/07/09}{Use \cs{expandafter}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter
+ \list
+ \csname\@itemitem\endcsname
+ {\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\enditemize =\endlist
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..61173b17e2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltlogos.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltlogos.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltlogos.dtx}
+ [1998/08/17 v1.1i LaTeX Kernel (Logos)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltlogos.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{40}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/16}{(ASAJ) Split from ltinit.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/18}{(ASAJ) Added the \TeX{} logo.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/18}{(ASAJ) Made the \LaTeXe{} logo use the
+% text font `2' rather than the math font `2'.}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \section{Logos}
+%
+% Various logos are defined here.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TeX}
+% The \TeX{} logo, adjusted so that a full stop after the logo
+% counts as ending a sentence.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\def\TeX{T\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX\@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX}
+% The \LaTeX{} logo.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/24}{Macro changed}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/05/11}{Use \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/06/01}
+% {Add \cs{m@th} to force math size calculations}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1994/07/20}{Save a few tokens}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1997/10/08}{Simplify macro (force loading of
+% suitable math fonts once).}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\LaTeX}{L\kern-.36em%
+ {\sbox\z@ T%
+ \vbox to\ht\z@{\hbox{\check@mathfonts
+ \fontsize\sf@size\z@
+ \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
+ A}%
+ \vss}%
+ }%
+ \kern-.15em%
+ \TeX}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/05/26}{Remove \cs{SLiTeX} logo}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXe}
+% The \LaTeXe\ logo as proposed by A-W designers.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/22}{Macro added}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/16}{Extended logo by DPC}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/05/11}{Use \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1994/07/20}{Save a few tokens}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1997/05/29}{Added \cs{m@th} so that the \LaTeXe{}
+% logo works with non-zero values of \cs{mathsurround}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\LaTeXe}{\mbox{\m@th
+ \if b\expandafter\@car\f@series\@nil\boldmath\fi
+ \LaTeX\kern.15em2$_{\textstyle\varepsilon}$}}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f50778c5826
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmath.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,996 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltmath.dtx
+%
+%<leqno>\ProvidesFile{leqno.clo}
+%<fleqn>\ProvidesFile{fleqn.clo}
+%<leqno,fleqn> [1998/08/17 v1.1c Standard LaTeX option
+%<leqno> (left equation numbers)]
+%<fleqn> (flush left equations)]
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltmath.dtx}
+ [1999/10/09 v1.1f LaTeX Kernel (Math Setup)]
+% \iffalse
+%</driver>
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltmath.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1101}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1996/07/26}{Removed \cs{global} before
+% \cs{@ignoretrue} in various places.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \section{Math setup}
+%
+% This file contains a lot of the original plain \TeX{} code, as well
+% as the \LaTeX{} environments for math. It still needs sorting out.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{math definitions,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%
+% \subsection{Math commands based on plain \TeX}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The log-like functions}
+%
+% \changes{1.0m}{1994/10/29}{ASAJ: Added \cs{DeclareMathOperator}.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{1.0q}{1994/11/30}{ASAJ: \cs{DeclareMathOperator} moved to
+% AMS\LaTeX.}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/05/07}{Use \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/05/21}{Update some plain macros}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1995/06/28}{minor doc edits}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\log}
+% The standard operators:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\log{\mathop{\operator@font log}\nolimits}
+\def\lg{\mathop{\operator@font lg}\nolimits}
+\def\ln{\mathop{\operator@font ln}\nolimits}
+\def\lim{\mathop{\operator@font lim}}
+\def\limsup{\mathop{\operator@font lim\,sup}}
+\def\liminf{\mathop{\operator@font lim\,inf}}
+\def\sin{\mathop{\operator@font sin}\nolimits}
+\def\arcsin{\mathop{\operator@font arcsin}\nolimits}
+\def\sinh{\mathop{\operator@font sinh}\nolimits}
+\def\cos{\mathop{\operator@font cos}\nolimits}
+\def\arccos{\mathop{\operator@font arccos}\nolimits}
+\def\cosh{\mathop{\operator@font cosh}\nolimits}
+\def\tan{\mathop{\operator@font tan}\nolimits}
+\def\arctan{\mathop{\operator@font arctan}\nolimits}
+\def\tanh{\mathop{\operator@font tanh}\nolimits}
+\def\cot{\mathop{\operator@font cot}\nolimits}
+\def\coth{\mathop{\operator@font coth}\nolimits}
+\def\sec{\mathop{\operator@font sec}\nolimits}
+\def\csc{\mathop{\operator@font csc}\nolimits}
+\def\max{\mathop{\operator@font max}}
+\def\min{\mathop{\operator@font min}}
+\def\sup{\mathop{\operator@font sup}}
+\def\inf{\mathop{\operator@font inf}}
+\def\arg{\mathop{\operator@font arg}\nolimits}
+\def\ker{\mathop{\operator@font ker}\nolimits}
+\def\dim{\mathop{\operator@font dim}\nolimits}
+\def\hom{\mathop{\operator@font hom}\nolimits}
+\def\det{\mathop{\operator@font det}}
+\def\exp{\mathop{\operator@font exp}\nolimits}
+\def\Pr{\mathop{\operator@font Pr}}
+\def\gcd{\mathop{\operator@font gcd}}
+\def\deg{\mathop{\operator@font deg}\nolimits}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bmod}
+% And some operators have to be done by hand:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bmod{%
+ \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu%
+ \mathbin{\operator@font mod}\penalty900\mkern5mu%
+ \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pmod}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pmod#1{%
+ \allowbreak\mkern18mu({\operator@font mod}\,\,#1)}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Biggggg}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\big}
+% Variants on |\big| and friends for use with delimiters:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bigl{\mathopen\big}
+\def\bigm{\mathrel\big}
+\def\bigr{\mathclose\big}
+\def\Bigl{\mathopen\Big}
+\def\Bigm{\mathrel\Big}
+\def\Bigr{\mathclose\Big}
+\def\biggl{\mathopen\bigg}
+\def\biggm{\mathrel\bigg}
+\def\biggr{\mathclose\bigg}
+\def\Biggl{\mathopen\Bigg}
+\def\Biggm{\mathrel\Bigg}
+\def\Biggr{\mathclose\Bigg}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The UNSORTED Rest}
+%
+% The other math commands are lifted from plain \TeX.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\jot}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\jot
+\jot=3pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interdisplaylinepenalty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\interdisplaylinepenalty
+\interdisplaylinepenalty=100
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\choose}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\choose{\atopwithdelims()}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\atopwithdelims}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\brack{\atopwithdelims[]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\brace}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\brace{\atopwithdelims\{\}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathpalette}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/05/21}{Use \cs{sqrtsign} instead of
+% \cs{sqrt}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathpalette#1#2{%
+ \mathchoice
+ {#1\displaystyle{#2}}%
+ {#1\textstyle{#2}}%
+ {#1\scriptstyle{#2}}%
+ {#1\scriptscriptstyle{#2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\root}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1997/01/08}
+% {(DPC) Remove spurious space tokens from
+% plain \TeX\ definition /2359}
+% \begin{macro}{\rootbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@@t}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\rootbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\root#1\of{%
+ \setbox\rootbox\hbox{$\m@th\scriptscriptstyle{#1}$}%
+ \mathpalette\r@@t}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\r@@t#1#2{%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{$\m@th#1\sqrtsign{#2}$}%
+ \dimen@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@
+ \mkern5mu\raise.6\dimen@\copy\rootbox
+ \mkern-10mu\box\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\phantom}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/11/18}
+% {(DPC) use \cs{expandafter} instead of \cs{next}}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/11/18}
+% {(DPC) colour support}
+% \begin{macro}{\hphantom}
+% \begin{macro}{\vphantom}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifv@
+\newif\ifh@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\vphantom{\v@true\h@false\ph@nt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hphantom{\v@false\h@true\ph@nt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\phantom{\v@true\h@true\ph@nt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ph@nt{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \expandafter\mathpalette\expandafter\mathph@nt
+ \else
+ \expandafter\makeph@nt
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makeph@nt#1{%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{\color@begingroup#1\color@endgroup}\finph@nt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathph@nt#1#2{%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{$\m@th#1{#2}$}\finph@nt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\finph@nt{%
+ \setbox\tw@\null
+ \ifv@ \ht\tw@\ht\z@ \dp\tw@\dp\z@\fi
+ \ifh@ \wd\tw@\wd\z@\fi \box\tw@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathstrut}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathstrut{\vphantom(}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smash}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/11/18}
+% {(DPC) use \cs{expandafter} instead of \cs{next}}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/11/18}
+% {(DPC) colour support}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\smash{%
+ \relax % \relax, in case this comes first in \halign
+ \ifmmode
+ \expandafter\mathpalette\expandafter\mathsm@sh
+ \else
+ \expandafter\makesm@sh
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makesm@sh#1{%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{\color@begingroup#1\color@endgroup}\finsm@sh}
+\def\mathsm@sh#1#2{%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{$\m@th#1{#2}$}\finsm@sh}
+\def\finsm@sh{\ht\z@\z@ \dp\z@\z@ \box\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\buildrel}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\buildrel#1\over#2{\mathrel{\mathop{\kern\z@#2}\limits^{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cases}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/08/14}
+% {(RmS) inserted extra braces around entry for NFSS}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cases#1{\left\{\,\vcenter{\normalbaselines\m@th
+ \ialign{$##\hfil$&\quad{##}\hfil\crcr#1\crcr}}\right.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\matrix}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\matrix#1{\null\,\vcenter{\normalbaselines\m@th
+ \ialign{\hfil$##$\hfil&&\quad\hfil$##$\hfil\crcr
+ \mathstrut\crcr\noalign{\kern-\baselineskip}
+ #1\crcr\mathstrut\crcr\noalign{\kern-\baselineskip}}}\,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pmatrix}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pmatrix#1{\left(\matrix{#1}\right)}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bordermatrix}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/01/25}{Removed \cs{p@renwd}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bordermatrix#1{\begingroup \m@th
+ \@tempdima 8.75\p@
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{%
+ \def\cr{\crcr\noalign{\kern2\p@\global\let\cr\endline}}%
+ \ialign{$##$\hfil\kern2\p@\kern\@tempdima&\thinspace\hfil$##$\hfil
+ &&\quad\hfil$##$\hfil\crcr
+ \omit\strut\hfil\crcr\noalign{\kern-\baselineskip}%
+ #1\crcr\omit\strut\cr}}%
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvcopy\z@\global\setbox\@ne\lastbox}%
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox{\unhbox\@ne\unskip\global\setbox\@ne\lastbox}%
+ \setbox\tw@\hbox{$\kern\wd\@ne\kern-\@tempdima\left(\kern-\wd\@ne
+ \global\setbox\@ne\vbox{\box\@ne\kern2\p@}%
+ \vcenter{\kern-\ht\@ne\unvbox\z@\kern-\baselineskip}\,\right)$}%
+ \null\;\vbox{\kern\ht\@ne\box\tw@}\endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\openup}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\openup{\afterassignment\@penup\dimen@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@penup{\advance\lineskip\dimen@
+ \advance\baselineskip\dimen@
+ \advance\lineskiplimit\dimen@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\displaylines}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifdt@p
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\displ@y{\global\dt@ptrue\openup\jot\m@th
+ \everycr{\noalign{\ifdt@p \global\dt@pfalse \ifdim\prevdepth>-1000\p@
+ \vskip-\lineskiplimit \vskip\normallineskiplimit \fi
+ \else \penalty\interdisplaylinepenalty \fi}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@lign{\tabskip\z@skip\everycr{}} % restore inside \displ@y
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\displaylines#1{\displ@y \tabskip\z@skip
+ \halign{\hb@xt@\displaywidth{$\@lign\hfil\displaystyle##\hfil$}\crcr
+ #1\crcr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/05/21}{Remove \cs{mathhexbox} from this file}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sp}
+% \begin{macro}{\sb}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sp=^
+\let\sb=_
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\>}
+% \begin{macro}{\;}
+% \begin{macro}{\!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\,{\mskip\thinmuskip} % already defined in ltspace
+\def\>{\mskip\medmuskip}
+\def\;{\mskip\thickmuskip}
+\def\!{\mskip-\thinmuskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\*}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\*{\discretionary{\thinspace\the\textfont2\char2}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\:}
+% Nickname for the medium space since |\>| is not available inside
+% \texttt{tabbing}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\:=\>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\active@math@prime}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1999/10/09}{Macro added, see PR 3104.}
+% This is the definition of the active math prime.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\active@math@prime{^\bgroup\prim@s}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prime@s}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/11/18}
+% {(DPC) use \cs{@let@token} instead of \cs{next}
+% and \cs{expandafter} instead of \cs{nxt}}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1999/10/09}{Introduce \cs{active@math@prime}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let'\active@math@prime}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\prim@s{%
+ \prime\futurelet\@let@token\pr@m@s}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pr@m@s{%
+ \ifx'\@let@token
+ \expandafter\pr@@@s
+ \else
+ \ifx^\@let@token
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\pr@@@t
+ \else
+ \egroup
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pr@@@s#1{\prim@s}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pr@@@t#1#2{#2\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/05/17}{Replaced \cs{let} by \cs{gdef}, for
+% indirect definition.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\_=\active \gdef_{\_}} % _ in math is
+ % either subscript or \_
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/10/29}{ASAJ: Removed \cs{dag}, \cs{ddag}.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/10/29}{ASAJ: Renamed \cs{S} and \cs{P} to
+% \cs{mathsection} and \cs{mathparagraph} and made them
+% \cs{mathchardef}s.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/10/29}{ASAJ: Added \cs{mathellipsis},
+% \cs{mathdollar} and \cs{mathsterling}.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/10/30}{ASAJ: Moved the new commands to ltoutenc.}
+%
+% \subsection{Math Environments}
+%
+% \changes{1.0m}{1994/10/29}{ASAJ: Tidied up documentation.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\(}
+% \begin{macro}{\)}
+% Produces |$...$| with checks that |\(| isn't used in math mode, and
+% that |\)| is only used in math mode begun with |\(|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\({\relax\ifmmode\@badmath\else$\fi}
+\def\){\relax\ifmmode\ifinner$\else\@badmath\fi\else \@badmath\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\[}
+% \begin{macro}{\]}
+% Produces |$$...$$| with checks that |\[| isn't used in math mode,
+% and that |\]| is only used in math mode begun with |\]|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\[{%
+ \relax\ifmmode
+ \@badmath
+ \else
+ \ifvmode
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \makebox[.6\linewidth]%
+ \fi
+ $$%%$$ BRACE MATCH HACK
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\]{%
+ \relax\ifmmode
+ \ifinner
+ \@badmath
+ \else
+ $$%%$$ BRACE MATCH HACK
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@badmath
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{math}
+% \begin{environment}{displaymath}
+% Disguises for |\(...\)| and |\[...\]|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\math=\(
+\let\endmath=\)
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\displaymath{\[}
+\def\enddisplaymath{\]\@ignoretrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{equation}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/01/10}{RmS: put \cs{hbox} around \cs{@eqnnum}
+% to typeset the equation number in text mode
+% (as in the eqnarray env.)}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@equation}
+% Numbered equations, using the counter |\c@equation|.
+% \emph{Note}: The document style must define |\theequation| etc., and
+% do the appropriate |\@addtoreset|. It should also redefine |\@eqnnum|
+% if another format for the equation number is desired other than the
+% standard (...), or to move the equation numbers to the flushleft.
+% (See comment on the |\def| of |\@eqnnum|.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@definecounter{equation}
+\def\equation{$$\refstepcounter{equation}}
+\def\endequation{\eqno \hbox{\@eqnnum}$$\@ignoretrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/09/29}{RmS: \cs{reset@font} added.}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/10/23}{Added \cs{normalcolor} since \cs{eqno}
+% introduces a subgroup of the displayed math group}
+%
+% Produces the equation number for equation and
+% eqnarray environments. The following definition is for
+% flushright numbers; for flushleft numbers, see leqno.clo.
+% The equation number is set in black roman type even
+% if an eqnarray environment appears in an italic environment.
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1995/05/26}{Removed \cs{rmfamily} (PR 1578),
+% replaced \cs{reset@font} with \cs{normalfont}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@eqnnum{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stackrel}
+% A disguise for plain \TeX's buildrel.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stackrel#1#2{\mathrel{\mathop{#2}\limits^{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9g}{1993/12/11}{Added a group around the first argument
+% of \cs{frac} to prevent
+% changes (for example font changes) from modifying the contents of
+% the second argument.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frac}
+% A disguise for plain \TeX's |\over|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frac#1#2{{\begingroup#1\endgroup\over#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sqrt}
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Make robust /1808}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sqrt}
+% Add an optional argument to plain's |\sqrt| to give the $n$th root
+% of an expression $\sqrt[n]{e}$.
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/05/21}{Use \cs{sqrtsign}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\sqrt{\@ifnextchar[\@sqrt\sqrtsign}
+\def\@sqrt[#1]{\root #1\of}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1985/11/04}{produce warning message if line
+% extends into margin. Doesn't warn about formula
+% overprinting equation number.}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/11/02}{RmS:
+% Corrected description of \cs{@eqnsel}, moved \cs{@eqnsel}
+% accordingly and removed extra \cs{tabskip} assignment.}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/11/03}{RmS: Initialized \cs{everycr} to empty}
+% \changes{v0.9i}{1993/12/16}
+% {use \cs{refstepcounter} instead of shortcut}
+% \changes{v0.9o}{1994/01/13}{correcting 0.9i}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{eqnarray}
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqcnt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqpen}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@eqnsw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqnsel}
+% Here's the eqnarray environment:
+% Default is for left-hand side of equations to be flushright.
+% To make them flushleft, |\let\@eqnsel = \hfil|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@eqcnt
+\newcount\@eqpen
+\newif\if@eqnsw\@eqnswtrue
+\newskip\@centering
+\@centering = 0pt plus 1000pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To get a proper \cs{@currentlabel} we have to redefine it for the
+% whole display. Note that we can't use \cs{refstepcounter} as this
+% results in |\@currentlabel| getting restored at the wrong and
+% thus always writing the first label to the \texttt{.aux} file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqnarray{%
+ \stepcounter{equation}%
+ \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}%
+ \global\@eqnswtrue
+ \m@th
+ \global\@eqcnt\z@
+ \tabskip\@centering
+ \let\\\@eqncr
+ $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
+ \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel
+ &\global\@eqcnt\@ne\hskip \tw@\arraycolsep \hfil${##}$\hfil
+ &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ \hskip \tw@\arraycolsep
+ $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
+ &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@ \hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
+ \tabskip\z@skip
+ \cr
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endeqnarray{%
+ \@@eqncr
+ \egroup
+ \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne
+ $$\@ignoretrue
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@eqnsel=\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nonumber}
+% Switches off equation numbering.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqncr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xeqncr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yeqncr}
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Use \cs{@testopt} /1911}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@eqncr{%
+ {\ifnum0=`}\fi
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \global\@eqpen\@M\@yeqncr
+ }{%
+ \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@yeqncr
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@yeqncr{\@testopt\@xeqncr\z@skip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xeqncr[#1]{%
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+ \@@eqncr
+ \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@eqncr}
+% \changes{v0.9i}{1993/12/16}{use \cs{refstepcounter} instead of shortcut}
+% \changes{v0.9o}{1994/01/13}{correcting 0.9i}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@eqncr{\let\reserved@a\relax
+ \ifcase\@eqcnt \def\reserved@a{& & &}\or \def\reserved@a{& &}%
+ \or \def\reserved@a{&}\else
+ \let\reserved@a\@empty
+ \@latex@error{Too many columns in eqnarray environment}\@ehc\fi
+ \reserved@a \if@eqnsw\@eqnnum\stepcounter{equation}\fi
+ \global\@eqnswtrue\global\@eqcnt\z@\cr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{eqnarray*}
+% \begin{macro}{\@seqncr}
+% Here's the eqnarray* environment:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@seqncr=\@eqncr
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{eqnarray*}{\def\@eqncr{\nonumber\@seqncr}\eqnarray}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{endeqnarray*}{\nonumber\endeqnarray}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lefteqn}
+% |\lefteqn{FORMULA}| typesets |FORMULA| in display math style
+% flushleft in a box of width zero.
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1995/05/21}{Use \cs{rlap}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lefteqn#1{\rlap{$\displaystyle #1$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ensuremath}
+% In math mode, |\ensuremath{text}| is equivalent to text; in LR or
+% paragraph mode, it is equivalent to |$|text|$|.
+% |\relax| is not needed
+% in front of the |\ifmmode| as |\protect| will be |\let| to |\relax|.
+% This version (due to Donald Arseneau) avoids duplicating its
+% argument in the `then' and `else' part of the |\ifmath| which is
+% necessary in nested `tabular' like environments. See amslatex/2104.
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/05/16}
+% {Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand} and add extra braces in math mode}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/10/23}{Remove extra braces: but see p 168 of
+% Leslie's book}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1996/03/25}{Reimplement for amslatex/2104}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\ensuremath}{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \expandafter\@firstofone
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@ensuredmath
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ensuredmath}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1996/03/25}{Macro added for amslatex/2104}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1996/11/09}{Made long, as it was before. /2104}
+% The |\relax| stops |\ensuremath{}| starting display math.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{External options to the standard document classes}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1995/08/09}
+% {Added code for class options leqno and fleqn}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Left equation numbering}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
+% To put the equation number on the left side of an equation we
+% have to use a little trick. The number is shifted |\displaywidth|
+% to the left inside a box of (approximately) zero width. This
+% fails when the quation is too wide, the equation number than may
+% overprint the equation itself.
+% \changes{v1.2y classes}{1995/01/12}{Added \cs{normalcolor}}
+% \changes{v1.3c classes}{1995/05/25}
+% {replace \cs{reset@font}\cs{rmfamily} with \cs{normalfont}
+% (PR 1578)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*leqno>
+\renewcommand\@eqnnum{\hb@xt@.01\p@{}%
+ \rlap{\normalfont\normalcolor
+ \hskip -\displaywidth(\theequation)}}
+%</leqno>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Flush left equations}
+%
+% To get the displayed math environments to print the contents
+% flush left (with an indentation) we have to redefine all of
+% \LaTeXe's displayed math environments.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathindent}
+% The amount of indentation of the equations is stored in a register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fleqn>
+\newdimen\mathindent
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The setting of |\mathindent| has to be deferred until the class
+% file has been processed, because |\leftmargini| is still 0pt
+% wide at the moment \texttt{fleqn.clo} is read in.
+% \changes{v1.0n classes}
+% {1994/01/19}{Deferred setting of \cs{mathindent}}
+% \changes{v1.2t classes}
+% {1994/06/22}{Set \cs{mathindent} at the end of the
+% class instead of at begin document}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndOfClass{\mathindent\leftmargini}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\[}
+% Begin display math;
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\[{\relax
+ \ifmmode\@badmath
+ \else
+ \begin{trivlist}%
+ \@beginparpenalty\predisplaypenalty
+ \@endparpenalty\postdisplaypenalty
+ \item[]\leavevmode
+ \hb@xt@\linewidth\bgroup $\m@th\displaystyle %$
+ \hskip\mathindent\bgroup
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\]}
+% end display math;
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\]{\relax
+ \ifmmode
+ \egroup $\hfil% $
+ \egroup
+ \end{trivlist}%
+ \else \@badmath
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{equation}
+% The \textsf{equation} environment
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{equation}%
+ {\@beginparpenalty\predisplaypenalty
+ \@endparpenalty\postdisplaypenalty
+ \refstepcounter{equation}%
+ \trivlist \item[]\leavevmode
+ \hb@xt@\linewidth\bgroup $\m@th% $
+ \displaystyle
+ \hskip\mathindent}%
+ {$\hfil % $
+ \displaywidth\linewidth\hbox{\@eqnnum}%
+ \egroup
+ \endtrivlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{eqnarray}
+% The \textsf{eqnarray} environment
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{eqnarray}{%
+ \stepcounter{equation}%
+ \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}%
+ \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th
+ \global\@eqcnt\z@
+ \tabskip\mathindent
+ \let\\=\@eqncr
+ \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}%
+ \ifvmode
+ \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the documentclass uses a non-zero |\parskip| setting the
+% |\topsep| might have a negative value to compensate for
+% that. Therefore we add |\parskip| to |\abovedisplayskip|.
+% \changes{v1.2v classes}{1994/11/10}{Added value of \cs{parskip} to
+% \cs{abovedisplayskip} to compensate for negative \cs{topsep}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ $$\everycr{}\halign to\linewidth% $$
+ \bgroup
+ \hskip\@centering
+ $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel&%
+ \global\@eqcnt\@ne \hskip \tw@\arraycolsep \hfil${##}$\hfil&%
+ \global\@eqcnt\tw@ \hskip \tw@\arraycolsep
+ $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil \tabskip\@centering&%
+ \global\@eqcnt\thr@@
+ \hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup\tabskip\z@skip\cr}%
+ {\@@eqncr
+ \egroup
+ \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne$$% $$
+ \@ignoretrue
+ }
+%</fleqn>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e6eb56416ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltmiscen.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,796 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltmiscen.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltmiscen.dtx}
+ [2000/07/11 v1.1j LaTeX Kernel (Misc. Environments)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltmiscen.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{457}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/28}{Improve Documentation}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/03/29}{Remove counter macros to ltcntlen}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/05/02}{Changed 91 to 1991 and moved some bits}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/05/05}{Removed braces from ifnextchar and
+% ifstar arguments}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/05/20}{Use new warning commands}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/05/21}{Use new error commands}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1994/10/14}{Move math to other file}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0x}{1995/04/22}{Removed extra def of \cs{@gobble}}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Improve Documentation}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1996/04/22}{Improve Documentation}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1996/06/03}{Move setting of verbatim font and
+% \cs{@noligs}.}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \section{Miscellaneous Environments}
+% This section implements the basic environment mechanism, and also
+% a few specific environments including |document|, The math
+% environments and related commands, the `flushing' environments,
+% (|center|, |flushleft|, |flushright|), and |verbatim|.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{environments,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Environments}
+%
+% |\begin{foo}| and |\end{foo}| are used to delimit environment |foo|.
+%
+% |\begin{foo}| starts a group and calls |\foo| if it is defined,
+% otherwise it does nothing.
+%
+% |\end{foo}| checks to see that it matches the
+% corresponding |\begin| and if so, it calls |\endfoo| and does an
+% |\endgroup|. Otherwise, |\end{foo}| does nothing.
+%
+% If |\end{foo}| needs to ignore blanks after it, then |\endfoo| should
+% globally set the |@ignore| switch true with |\@ignoretrue|
+% (this will automatically be global).
+%
+%
+% NOTE: |\@@end| is defined to be the |\end| command of \TeX82.
+%
+% |\enddocument| is the user's command for ending the manuscript file.
+%
+% |\stop| is a panic button --- to end \TeX\ in the middle.
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \enddocument ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@checkend{document} %% checks for unmatched \begin
+% \clearpage
+% \begingroup
+% if @filesw = true
+% then close file @mainaux
+% if G@refundefined = true
+% then LaTeX Warning: 'There are undefined references.' fi
+% if @multiplelabels = true
+% then LaTeX Warning:
+% 'One or more label(s) multiply defined.'
+% else
+% \@setckpt {ARG1}{ARG2} == null
+% \newlabel{LABEL}{VAL} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \reserved@a == VAL
+% if def(\reserved@a) = def(\r@LABEL)
+% else @tempswa := true fi
+% END
+% \bibcite{LABEL}{VAL} == null
+% BEGIN
+% \reserved@a == VAL
+% if def(\reserved@a) = def(\g@LABEL)
+% else @tempswa := true fi
+% END
+% @tempswa := false
+% make @ a letter
+% \input \jobname.AUX
+% if @tempswa = true
+% then LaTeX Warning: 'Label may have changed.
+% Rerun to get cross-references right.'
+% fi fi fi
+% \endgroup
+% finish up
+% END
+%
+% \@writefile{EXT}{ENTRY} ==
+% if tf@EXT undefined
+% else \write\tf@EXT{ENTRY}
+% fi
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@currenvir}
+% The name of the current environment. Initialized to
+% \texttt{document} to so that |\end{document}| works correctly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@currenvir{document}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@ignore}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ignoretrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ignorefalse}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1996/07/26}{put \cs{global} into definition}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ignorefalse{\global\let\if@ignore\iffalse}
+\def\@ignoretrue {\global\let\if@ignore\iftrue}
+\@ignorefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ignorespacesafterend}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1996/07/26}{user level macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ignorespacesafterend\@ignoretrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enddocument}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/08/03}
+% {Changed redefinition of \cs{global} to redefinition
+% of \cs{@setckpt}.}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/09/08}
+% {Added warning in case of undefined references.}%
+% \changes{v0.9e}{1993/12/09}{Hook added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enddocument{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\end{document}| hook is executed first. If necessary it can
+% contain a |\clearpage| to output dangling floats first. In this
+% position it can also contain something like |\end{foo}| so that
+% the whole document effectively starts and ends with some special
+% environment. However, this must be used with care, eg if two
+% applications would use this without knowledge of each other the
+% order of the environments will be wrong after all.
+% |\AtEndDocument| is redefined
+% at this point so that and such commands that get into the hook do
+% not chase their tail\ldots
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1995/04/27}{\cs{@checkend} moved after hook}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Set \cs{@setckpt} to \cs{@gobbletwo}
+% instead of defining it by hand}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{2000/05/19}
+% {Reset \cs{AtEndDocument} for latex/3060}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AtEndDocument\@firstofone
+ \@enddocumenthook
+ \@checkend{document}%
+ \clearpage
+ \begingroup
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\closeout\@mainaux
+ \let\@setckpt\@gobbletwo
+ \let\@newl@bel\@testdef
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Sorten redefinition of \cs{bibcite} and
+% \cs{newlabel}}
+% The previous line is equiv to setting
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \def\newlabel{\@testdef r}%
+% \def\bibcite{\@testdef b}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \makeatletter \input\jobname.aux
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0w}{1994/11/30}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{@dofilelist}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@dofilelist
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we check for font size substitution bigger than
+% |\fontsubfuzz|. The |\relax| is necessary because this is a macro
+% not a register.
+% \changes{v1.0w}{1994/11/30}
+% {(DPC) Do warnings even for \cs{nofiles}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \font@submax >\fontsubfuzz\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In case you wonder about the |\@gobbletwo| inside the message
+% below, this is a horrible hack to remove the tokens |\on@line.|
+% that are added by |\@font@warning| at the end.
+% \changes{v1.1j}{2000/07/11}{Fix typo in warning}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@font@warning{Size substitutions with differences\MessageBreak
+ up to \font@submax\space have occurred.\@gobbletwo}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro |\@defaultsubs| is initially |\relax| but gets redefined
+% to produce
+% a warning if there have been some default font substitutions.
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Use \cs{\@defaultsubs} instead of switch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@defaultsubs
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro |\@refundefined| is initially |\relax| but gets redefined
+% to produce a warning if there are undefined refs.
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/10/24}{Use \cs{\@refundefined} instead of switch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@refundefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If a label is defined more than once, |\@tempswa| will always be
+% true and thus produce a ``Label(s) may \ldots'' warning. But
+% since a rerun will not solve that problem (unless one uses a
+% package like \texttt{varioref} that generates labels on the fly),
+% we suppress this message.
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/04/20}{Changed logic for producing
+% warning messages}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/10/24}{Changed logic for producing
+% warning messages and removed switch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@filesw
+ \ifx \@multiplelabels \relax
+ \if@tempswa
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{Label(s) may have changed.
+ Rerun to get cross-references right}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@multiplelabels
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \deadcycles\z@\@@end}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@testdef}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@testdef #1#2#3{%
+ \def\reserved@a{#3}\expandafter \ifx \csname #1@#2\endcsname
+ \reserved@a \else \@tempswatrue \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@writefile}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/05/20}{Added correct setting of \cs{protect}.}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1994/11/04}{Removed setting of \cs{protect}. ASAJ.}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Added missing percent and use \cs{relax}
+% in the THEN case}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@writefile#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{tf@#1}\relax
+ {\@temptokena{#2}%
+ \immediate\write\csname tf@#1\endcsname{\the\@temptokena}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stop}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stop{\clearpage\deadcycles\z@\let\par\@@par\@@end}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\everypar{\@nodocument} %% To get an error if text appears before the
+\nullfont %% \begin{document}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin, \end, and \@checkend changed so \end{document} will catch
+% an unmatched \begin. Changed 24 May 89 as suggested by
+% Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf.
+%
+% \begin{NAME} ==
+% BEGIN
+% IF \NAME undefined THEN \reserved@a == BEGIN report error END
+% ELSE \reserved@a ==
+% (\@currenvir :=L NAME) \NAME
+% FI
+% @ignore :=G F %% Added 30 Nov 88
+% \begingroup
+% \@endpe := F
+% \@currenvir :=L NAME
+% \NAME
+% END
+%
+% \end{NAME} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \endNAME
+% \@checkend{NAME}
+% \endgroup
+% IF @endpe = T %% @endpe set True by \@endparenv
+% THEN \@doendpe %% \@doendpe redefines \par and \everypar
+% %% to suppress paragraph indentation in
+% FI %% immediately following text
+% IF @ignore = T
+% THEN @ignore :=G F
+% \ignorespaces
+% FI
+% END
+%
+% \@checkend{NAME} ==
+% BEGIN
+% IF \@currenvir = NAME
+% ELSE \@badend{NAME}
+% FI
+% END
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\begin}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/03/18}{Changed \cs{@ignoretrue} to
+% \cs{@ignorefalse} (as documented)}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/08/24}{Added code to \cs{begin} to
+% remember line number. Used by \cs{@badend} to display
+% position of non-matching \cs{begin}.}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1996/07/26}{remove \cs{global} before \cs{@ignore...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\begin#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{#1}%
+ {\def\reserved@a{\@latex@error{Environment #1 undefined}\@eha}}%
+ {\def\reserved@a{\def\@currenvir{#1}%
+ \edef\@currenvline{\on@line}%
+ \csname #1\endcsname}}%
+ \@ignorefalse
+ \begingroup\@endpefalse\reserved@a}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\end}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1996/07/26}{remove \cs{global} before \cs{@ignore...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end#1{%
+ \csname end#1\endcsname\@checkend{#1}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup\if@endpe\@doendpe\fi
+ \if@ignore\@ignorefalse\ignorespaces\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@checkend}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@checkend#1{\def\reserved@a{#1}\ifx
+ \reserved@a\@currenvir \else\@badend{#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@currenvline}
+% We do need a default value for |\@currenvline| on top-level since
+% the document environment cancels the brace group. This means that
+% a missmatch with |\begin|\allowbreak|{document}| will not produce
+% a line number. Thus the outer default must be |\@empty| or we
+% will end up with two spaces.
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/05/24}{Use \cs{@empty} as outer default}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@currenvline\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Center, Flushright, Flushleft}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{center,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% \center, \flushright and \flushleft set
+% \rightskip = 0pt or \@flushglue (as appropriate)
+% \leftskip = 0pt or \@flushglue (as appropriate)
+% \parindent = 0pt
+% \parfillskip = 0pt. (except \flushleft)
+% \\ == \par \vskip -\parskip
+% \\[LENGTH] == \\ \vskip LENGTH
+% \\* == \par \penalty 10000 \vskip -\parskip
+% \\*[LEN] == \\* \vskip LENGTH
+%
+% They invoke the trivlist environment to handle vertical spacing before
+% and after them.
+%
+% \centering, \raggedright and \raggedleft are the declaration analogs
+% of the above.
+%
+% \raggedright has a more universal effect, however. It sets
+% \@rightskip := flushglue. Every environment, like the list
+% environments,
+% that set \rightskip to its 'normal' value set it to \@rightskip
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@centercr}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/03}{\cs{@badcrerr} replaced by \cs{@nolnerr}}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Use \cs{nobreak}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@centercr{\ifhmode \unskip\else \@nolnerr\fi
+ \par\@ifstar{\nobreak\@xcentercr}\@xcentercr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xcentercr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xcentercr{\addvspace{-\parskip}\@ifnextchar
+ [\@icentercr\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@icentercr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@icentercr[#1]{\vskip #1\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{center}
+% \changes{v0.9h}{1993/12/13}{Removed optional argument of \cs{item}}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1994/11/12}{Changed end macro to \cs{def}: safer and
+% consistent}
+% We use |\relax| to prevent |\item| scanning too far.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\center{\trivlist \centering\item\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endcenter{\endtrivlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\centering}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\centering{%
+ \let\\\@centercr
+ \rightskip\@flushglue\leftskip\@flushglue
+ \parindent\z@\parfillskip\z@skip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@rightskip}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\@rightskip \@rightskip \z@skip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{flushleft}
+% \changes{v0.9h}{1993/12/13}{Removed optional argument of \cs{item}}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1994/11/12}{Changed end macro to \cs{def}: safer and
+% consistent}
+% We use |\relax| to prevent |\item| scanning too far.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\flushleft{\trivlist \raggedright\item\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endflushleft{\endtrivlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\raggedright{%
+ \let\\\@centercr\@rightskip\@flushglue \rightskip\@rightskip
+ \leftskip\z@skip
+ \parindent\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{flushright}
+% \changes{v0.9h}{1993/12/13}{Removed optional argument of \cs{item}}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1994/11/12}{Changed end macro to \cs{def}: safer and
+% consistent}
+% We use |\relax| to prevent |\item| scanning too far.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\flushright{\trivlist \raggedleft\item\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endflushright{\endtrivlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedleft}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\raggedleft{%
+ \let\\\@centercr
+ \rightskip\z@skip\leftskip\@flushglue
+ \parindent\z@\parfillskip\z@skip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{verbatim,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Verbatim}
+%
+%
+% The verbatim environment uses the fixed-width |\ttfamily| font, turns
+% blanks into spaces, starts a new line for each carrige return (or
+% sequence of consecutive carriage returns), and interprets
+% \emph{every} character literally.
+% I.e., all special characters |\, {, $|, etc.
+% are |\catcode|'d to 'other'.
+%
+% The command |\verb| produces in-line verbatim text, where the argument
+% is delimited by any pair of characters. E.g., |\verb #...#| takes
+% `|...|' as its argument, and sets it verbatim in |\ttfamily| font.
+%
+% The *-variants of these commands are the same, except that spaces
+% print as the \TeX{}book's space character instead of as blank spaces.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vobeyspaces}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\ =\active%
+\gdef\@vobeyspaces{\catcode`\ \active\let \@xobeysp}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xobeysp}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1995/07/13}{Use \cs{nobreak}}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1996/09/28}{Moved to ltspace.dtx}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xverbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sxverbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup \catcode `|=0 \catcode `[= 1
+\catcode`]=2 \catcode `\{=12 \catcode `\}=12
+\catcode`\\=12 |gdef|@xverbatim#1\end{verbatim}[#1|end[verbatim]]
+|gdef|@sxverbatim#1\end{verbatim*}[#1|end[verbatim*]]
+|endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@verbatim}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/07/24}{Added \cs{penalty}\cs{interlinepenalty}
+% to definition of \cs{par} so that \cs{samepage} works}
+% \changes{v0.9h}{1993/12/13}{Removed optional argument of \cs{item}}
+% Real start of verbatim environment
+% We use |\relax| to prevent |\item| scanning too far.
+% \changes{v0.9p}{1994/01/18}
+% {Add \cs{global}\cs{@inlabelfalse}}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/16}
+% {Remove \cs{global}\cs{@inlabelfalse} again.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@verbatim{\trivlist \item\relax
+ \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
+ \leftskip\@totalleftmargin\rightskip\z@skip
+ \parindent\z@\parfillskip\@flushglue\parskip\z@skip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/08/26}{\cs{@@par} added}
+% Added |\@@par| to clear possible |\parshape| definition
+% from a surrounding list (the verbatim guru says).
+% \changes{v0.9p}{1994/01/18}
+% {Only add \cs{penalty} if in hmode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@par
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \def\par{%
+ \if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A |\leavevmode| added: needed if, for example, a blank verbatim
+% line is the first thing in a list item (wow!).
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/04/29}{\cs{leavevmode} added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \leavevmode \null \@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
+ \fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To allow customization we hide the font used in a separate macro.
+% \changes{v0.9a}{1993/11/21}{use \cs{verbatim@font} instead of \cs{tt}}
+% \changes{v0.9h}{1993/12/13}{Readded \cs{@noligs}}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1996/06/03}{Exchanged the following two code lines
+% so that \cs{dospecials} cannot reset the category code
+% of characters handled by \cs{@noligs}.}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{2000/01/07}{Disable hyphenation even if the font allows it.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
+ \obeylines \verbatim@font \@noligs
+ \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To avoid a breakpoint after the labels box, we remove the penalty
+% put there by the list macros: another use of |\unpenalty|!
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/04/29}{Change to \cs{everypar} added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim}
+% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim}
+% (RmS 93/09/19) Protected against `missing item' error message
+% triggered by empty verbatim environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim{\@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces \@xverbatim}
+\def\endverbatim{\if@newlist \leavevmode\fi\endtrivlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
+% \changes{v0.9a}{1993/11/21}{Macro added}
+% Macro to select the font used for verbatim typesetting.
+% It also does other work if necessary for the font used.
+% \changes{v0.9s}{1994/01/21}{Removed unnecessary category code
+% hackery.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@font{\normalfont\ttfamily}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{verbatim*}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{verbatim*}{\@verbatim\@sxverbatim}
+\expandafter\let\csname endverbatim*\endcsname =\endverbatim
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makeother}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makeother#1{\catcode`#112\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verb@balance@group}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/09/07}
+% {(RmS) Changed definition of \cs{verb} so that it detects a
+% missing second delimiter.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\verb@balance@group\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verb@egroup}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verb@egroup{\global\let\verb@balance@group\@empty\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verb@eol@error}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \obeylines%
+ \gdef\verb@eol@error{\obeylines%
+ \def^^M{\verb@egroup\@latex@error{%
+ \noexpand\verb ended by end of line}\@ehc}}%
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verb}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/08/24}
+% {Changed \cs{verb} and \cs{@sverb} to work correctly
+% in math mode}
+% \changes{v0.9a}{1993/11/21}{Use \cs{verbatim@font} instead of
+% \cs{tt}.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1995/09/19}{Put \cs{@noligs} after
+% \cs{verbatim@font} where it belongs.}
+% Typesetting a small piece verbatim.
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1996/06/03}{Put setting of verbatim font after
+% \cs{dospecials}
+% so that \cs{dospecials} cannot reset the category code
+% of characters handled by \cs{@noligs}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verb{\relax\ifmmode\hbox\else\leavevmode\null\fi
+ \bgroup
+ \verb@eol@error \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
+ \verbatim@font\@noligs
+ \@ifstar\@sverb\@verb}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sverb}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/05/10}{Slight change in error message text.}
+% Definitions of |\@sverb| and |\@verb| changed so |\verb+ foo+|
+% does not lose leading blanks when it comes at the beginning of a line.
+% Change made 24 May 89. Suggested by Frank Mittelbach and Rainer
+% Sch\"opf.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sverb#1{%
+ \catcode`#1\active
+ \lccode`\~`#1%
+ \gdef\verb@balance@group{\verb@egroup
+ \@latex@error{\noexpand\verb illegal in command argument}\@ehc}%
+ \aftergroup\verb@balance@group
+ \lowercase{\let~\verb@egroup}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@verb}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@verb{\@vobeyspaces \frenchspacing \@sverb}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@nolig@list}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/09/03}
+% {Replaced \cs{@noligs} by extensible list}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\'\do\-}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do@noligs}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do@noligs#1{%
+ \catcode`#1\active
+ \begingroup
+ \lccode`\~`#1\relax
+ \lowercase{\endgroup\def~{\leavevmode\kern\z@\char`#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@noligs}
+% To stay compatible with packages that use |\@noligs| we keep it.
+% \changes{v0.9h}{1993/12/13}{Readded \cs{@noligs}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@noligs{\let\do\do@noligs \verbatim@nolig@list}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v0.9i}{1993/12/16}{\cs{literal} added}
+% \changes{v1.0r}{1994/05/26/16}{\cs{literal} removed}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f31394f32d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,3320 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltoutenc.dtx
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2000/06/01]
+%<OT1>\ProvidesFile{ot1enc.def}
+%<T1>\ProvidesFile{t1enc.def}
+%<OMS>\ProvidesFile{omsenc.def}
+%<OML>\ProvidesFile{omlenc.def}
+%<OT4>\ProvidesFile{ot4enc.def}
+%<TS1>\ProvidesFile{ts1enc.def}[2001/06/05 v3.0e (jk/car/fm)
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{fontenc}
+%<TS1sty>\ProvidesPackage{textcomp}
+%<OT1|T1|OMS|OML|OT4|package|TS1sty> [2004/02/22 v1.99f
+%<OT1|T1|OMS|OML|OT4|TS1> Standard LaTeX file]
+%<package|TS1sty> Standard LaTeX package]
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltoutenc.dtx}
+ [2004/02/22 v1.99f LaTeX Kernel (font encodings)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltoutenc.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\usepackage{textcomp}
+\begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{2762}
+%
+% \CharacterTable
+% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.99e}{2004/02/13}{Documentation fixes: typos}
+% \changes{v1.9k}{1998/01/12}{Added \cs{ProvidesPackage}
+% for textcomp.sty}
+% \changes{v1.9i}{1997/12/19}{Documentation corrections.}
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}{Documentation changes and additions.}
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}{Added textcomp.sty.}
+% \changes{v1.9f}{1997/08/29}{Added OT4 encoding,
+% provided by Marcin Woli\'nski.}
+% \changes{v1.7r}{1995/11/28}{doc fixes}
+% \changes{v1.7h}{1995/04/21}{Added \cs{null} \cs{k} latex/1274}
+% \changes{v1.7f}{1994/12/14}{Added braces to \cs{copyright} so it
+% works unbraced in subscripts.}
+% \changes{v1.7f}{1994/12/14}{Added check for math mode in
+% \cs{@changed@cmd}.}
+% \changes{v1.7f}{1994/12/14}{Commented out \cs{textasciicircum},
+% \cs{textasciitilde}, \cs{textbackslash}, \cs{textbar},
+% \cs{textgreater}, \cs{texthyphenchar}, \cs{texthyphen} and
+% \cs{textless} to save memory.}
+% \changes{v1.7e}{1994/12/10}{Added documentation for the OML encoding.}
+% \changes{v1.7e}{1994/12/10}{Replaced width with \cs{@width} and
+% ditto height in vrules.}
+% \changes{v1.7d}{1994/12/08}{Added \cs{null} and \cs{sh@ft} to \cs{b}
+% and \cs{d}.}
+% \changes{v1.7c}{1994/12/05}{Added braces to \cs{textcircled}.}
+% \changes{v1.7b}{1994/12/02}{Fixed a bug with \cs{a}.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1994/11/30}{Added new code for encoding-specific
+% commands. These now expand in the mouth, which means that
+% ligaturing and kerning can happen.}
+% \changes{v1.6i}{1994/11/22}{Fixed empty accents. Again.}
+% \changes{v1.6i}{1994/11/22}{Corrected \cs{dots} so that there's no
+% kerning in monowidth fonts.}
+% \changes{v1.6i}{1994/11/22}{Corrected typo with
+% \cs{mathunderscore}.}
+% \changes{v1.6h}{1994/11/17}{(DPC) \cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/11/02}{Wrapped lines longer than 70 characters.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added math commands.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added OML encoding.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added \cs{textcircled}.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added \cs{DeclareTextCompositeCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.6c}{1994/10/29}{Renamed \cs{P}, \cs{S}, \cs{dag} and
+% \cs{ddag} to \cs{textparagraph}, \cs{textsection},
+% \cs{textdagger} and \cs{textdaggerdbl}.}
+% \changes{v1.6b}{1994/10/27}{Removed the enc.def files}
+% \changes{v1.6a}{1994/10/25}{Added \cs{ProvideTextCommand},
+% \cs{UseTextSymbol},
+% \cs{UseTextAccent},
+% \cs{DeclareTextSymbolDefault},
+% \cs{DeclareTextAccentDefault},
+% \cs{DeclareTextCommandDefault}, and
+% \cs{ProvideTextCommandDefault}.}
+% \changes{v1.5m}{1994/10/18}{Added new definitions of \cs{patterns}
+% and \cs{hyphenation}.}
+% \changes{v1.5l}{1994/10/07}{Moved the ogonek accent.}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1994/05/18}{Removed braces from \cs{pounds} and
+% \cs{dollar}.}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1994/05/18}{Replaced \cs{defaultencoding} with
+% \cs{encodingdefault}.}
+% \changes{v1.5k}{1994/05/18}{Made dotted-i produce `i'.}
+% \changes{v1.5j}{1994/05/17}{Added braces to \cs{pounds} so it works
+% as a subscript.}
+% \changes{v1.5i}{1994/05/16}{Fixed a bug with \cs{d}.}
+% \changes{v1.5h}{1994/05/16}{Added \cs{NG}, \cs{ng}, \cs{TH},
+% \cs{th}, \cs{DH}, \cs{dh}, \cs{DJ} and \cs{dj}.}
+% \changes{v1.5h}{1994/05/16}{Added \cs{r} (ring accent) and \cs{k}
+% (ogonek) accents.}
+% \changes{v1.5h}{1994/05/16}{Removed \cs{P} from the OT1 definitions
+% file.}
+% \changes{v1.5h}{1994/05/16}{Fixed a bug with \cs{pounds}.}
+% \changes{v1.5g}{1994/05/16}{Made fontenc.sty use the new mixed-case
+% encoding files.}
+% \changes{v1.5f}{1994/05/16}{Revert code so that the encoding
+% given is used in \cs{DeclareTextCommand} (FMi)}
+% \changes{v1.5f}{1994/05/16}{enc files now have uc encoding name
+% parts (FMi)}
+% \changes{v1.5e}{1994/05/14}{Replaced \cs{ENC@cmd} by \cs{ENC-cmd}.}
+% \changes{v1.5d}{1994/05/14}{Rewrote \cs{DeclareTextCommand} to define
+% its argument to use the current encoding by default, rather than
+% the encoding provided to \cs{DeclareTextCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.5d}{1994/05/14}{Tidied up the documentation.}
+% \changes{v1.5c}{1994/05/14}{Added the fontenc package.}
+% \changes{v1.5c}{1994/05/14}{Fixed a bug which caused an infinite loop
+% if \cs{f@encoding} was incorrectly set.}
+% \changes{v1.5c}{1994/05/14}{Moved fontsmpl to its own dtx file.}
+% \changes{v1.5b}{1994/05/13}{Added \cmd\{, \cmd\} and \cmd\$.}
+% \changes{v1.5b}{1994/05/13}
+% {Replaces \cs{space} by `~' in \cs{csname}.}
+% \changes{v1.5b}{1994/05/13}{Renamed \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand} to
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.5a}{1994/05/11}{Renamed the commands again. Made the
+% encoding part of the command syntax. Added the
+% \cs{DeclareTextCommand} interface. Used
+% \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.4a}{1994/05/01}{Renamed the commands, removed the
+% \cs{EncodingSpecific} command. Turned all slots into decimal.
+% Added \cs{a}.}
+% \changes{v1.4a}{1994/05/01}{Removed Rokicki's encoding.}
+% \changes{v1.3d}{1993/12/18}{Some T1 stuff had drifted into the OT1
+% file.}
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1993/12/18}{A new syntax, separating
+% accent-definitions from encoing-specific definitions, and
+% allowing encoding-specific \cs{chardef}, \cs{let}, etc.}
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1993/12/18}{Rewrote for the new syntax of
+% \cs{EncodingSpecific}.}
+% \changes{v1.3b}{1993/12/18}{Corrected typos.}
+% \changes{v1.3b}{1993/12/18}{Replaced the missing last argument to
+% \cs{DeclareFontEncoding}.}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{1993/12/18}{Replaced OT3 by XXX}
+% \changes{v1.3}{1993/12/17}{Added \cs{EncodingSpecificAccent},
+% \cs{EncodingSpecificAccentedLetter} and
+% \cs{EncodingSpecificCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.3}{1993/12/17}{Made Rokicki's encoding a proper encoding
+% scheme rather than a variant of OT1.}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1993/12/13}{Corrected file name in driver code.}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1993/12/11}{Corrected for t1enc, math.}
+% \changes{v1.2}{1993/12/10}{Added source code for t1enc.sty.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1993/12/07}{Made all character numbers decimal.}
+% \changes{v1.1}{1993/12/07}{Removed a lot of equal signs and the
+% like.}
+%
+%
+% \section{Font encodings}
+%
+% This section of the kernel contains commands for declaring
+% encoding-specific
+% commands, such as accents. It also contains the code for some of
+% the encoding files, including |omlenc.def|,
+% |omsenc.def|, |t1enc.def| and |ot1enc.def| files, which define
+% the |OLM|,
+% |OMS|, |T1| and |OT1| encodings, and the |fontenc| package
+% for selecting encodings.
+%
+% The |fontenc| package has options for encodings, of which the
+% last option is the default encoding. For example, to use the
+% |OT2|, |OT3| and |T1| encodings, with |T1| as the default, you
+% say:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \usepackage[OT2,OT3,T1]{fontenc}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% The standard kernel set-up loads font encoding files and selects
+% an encoding as follows.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \input {omlenc.def}
+% \input {t1enc.def}
+% \input {ot1enc.def}
+% \input {omsenc.def}
+% \fontencoding{OT1}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Note that the files in the standard |inputenc| package depend on
+% this behaviour of the kernel.
+%
+% The syntax for declaring encoding-specific commands is:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareTextCommand{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}|\\\hspace*{\fill}|[|^^A
+% \meta{number}|][|^^A
+% \meta{default}|]{|^^A
+% \meta{commands}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% This command is like |\newcommand|, except that it defines a
+% command which is specific to one encoding. The resulting command
+% is always robust, even if its definition is fragile. For example,
+% the definition of |\l| in the |OT1| encoding is:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\l}{OT1}{{\@xxxii l}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% |\DeclareTextCommand| takes the same optional arguments as
+% |\newcommand|.
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\ProvideTextCommand{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}|\\\hspace*{\fill}|[|^^A
+% \meta{number}|][|^^A
+% \meta{default}|]{|^^A
+% \meta{commands}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% This acts like |\DeclareTextCommand|, but does nothing if the
+% command is already defined.
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareTextSymbol{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{slot}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% This command defines a text symbol, with a particular slot in that
+% encoding. The commands:
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}{Example corrected, braces removed.}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{OT1}{25}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\ss}{OT1}{\char25 }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% have the same effect, but the |\DeclareTextSymbol| is faster.
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareTextAccent{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{slot}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \changes{v1.8e}{1996/11/23}{Corrected description}
+% \changes{v1.9k}{1997/12/31}{Further correction}
+% This command declares a text accent. The commands:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\"}{OT1}{\add@accent {127}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% have the same effect.
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
+% {Corrected syntax descriptions}
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareTextComposite{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}|\\\hspace*{\fill}|{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{argument}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{slot}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% This command declares a composite letter, for example in the |T1|
+% encoding |\'{a}| is slot 225, which is declared by:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{a}{225}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.8e}{1996/11/23}
+% {Corrected description}
+% The \emph{command} will normally have been declared with
+% |\DeclareTextAccent|, or as a one-argument |\DeclareTextCommand|.
+%
+% |\DeclareTextComposite| is the most common example of using
+% the more general declaration
+% |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand|, which can define a composite
+% to be an arbitrary piece of text.
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}|\\\hspace*{\fill}|{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{argument}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{text}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% For example, in the OT1 encoding \r A has a hand-crafted
+% defintion this is declared as follows
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\r}{OT1}{A}
+% {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{!}\dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@-1ex%
+% \rlap{\raise.67\dimen@\hbox{\char23}}A}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.8e}{1996/11/23}
+% {Corrected description}
+% The \emph{command} will normally have been declared with
+% |\DeclareTextAccent|, or as a one-argument |\DeclareTextCommand|.
+%
+% The commands defined using the above declarations can be used in
+% two ways.
+% Normally they are used by just calling the command in the
+% appropriate encoding, for example |\ss|. However, sometimes you
+% may wish to use a command in an encoding where it is not defined.
+% If the command has no arguments, then you can use it in another
+% encoding by calling |\UseTextSymbol|:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\UseTextSymbol{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \task{Document the problems of these commands, see pr/3160}
+% \changes{v1.9e}{1997/08/05}{Corrected order of arguments in
+% \cs{UseTextSymbol} example.}
+% For example, |\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ss}| has the same effect as:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% {\fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\ss}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% If the command has one argument then you can use it in another
+% encoding by calling
+% |\UseTextAccent|:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\UseTextAccent{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{text}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% For example, if the current encoding is |OT2| then
+% |\UseTextAccent{OT1}{\'}{a}| has the same effect as:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% {\fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\'{\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont a}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \changes{v1.8e}{1996/11/23}
+% {Extended description}
+% You can also declare a default definition for a text command, which
+% will be used if the current encoding has no appropriate definition.
+% Such use will also set the definition for this command in the
+% current encoding to equal this default definition; this makes
+% subsequent uses of the command much faster.
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareTextCommandDefault{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{definition}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% For example, the default definition of the command
+% |\textonequarter| (which produces the fraction $\frac14$) could be
+% built using math mode:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath {\frac14}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% There is a matching |\Provide| command which will not override an
+% existing default definition:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\ProvideTextCommandDefault{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}{|^^A
+% \meta{definition}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% The most common use for these commands is to use symbols from
+% other encodings, so there are some optimizations provided:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}|\\
+% |\DeclareTextAccentDefault{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% are short for:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\DeclareTextCommandDefault{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}|\\\hspace*{\fill}^^A
+% |{\UseTextSymbol{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}{|\meta{command}|}}| \\
+% |\DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{|^^A
+% \meta{command}|}|\\\hspace*{\fill}^^A
+% |{\UseTextAccent{|^^A
+% \meta{encoding}|}{|\meta{command}|}{#1}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% For example, to make |OT1| the default encoding for |\ss| and
+% |\'| you say:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ss}{OT1}
+% \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\'}{OT1}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Note that you can use these commands on any zero- or one-argument
+% commands declared with |\DeclareText*| or |\ProvideText*|, not
+% just those defined using |\DeclareTextSymbol| or
+% |\DeclareTextAccent|.
+%
+% \subsection{Removing encoding-specific commands}
+% \label{sec:removeencspec}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9o}{1998/03/20}{Documentation added for pr/2783}
+%
+% In some cases encoding definitions are given to provide some limited
+% support since nothing better is available, for example, the definition
+% for |\textdollar| in \texttt{OT1} is a hack since \$ and \pounds{}
+% actually share the same slot in this encoding. Thus if such a glyph
+% becomes available in a different encoding (e.g., \texttt{TS1}) one
+% would like to get rid of the flacky one and make the default
+% definition point to the new encoding. In such a case defining
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextSymbol{\textdollar}{TS1}{36}
+% \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{TS1}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% is not enough since if typesetting in \texttt{OT1} \LaTeX{} will
+% still find the encoding specific-definition for \texttt{OT1} and
+% therefore ignore the new default.
+% Therefore to ensure that in this case the \texttt{TS1} version is
+% used we have to remove the \texttt{OT1} declaration:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \UndeclareTextCommand{\textdollar}{OT1}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Since the \$ sign is a proper glyph in the \texttt{T1} encoding there
+% is no point removing its definition and forcing \LaTeX{} to pick up
+% the \texttt{TS1} version if typesetting in this encoding.
+% However, assume you want to use the variant dollar sign,
+% i.e., \textdollaroldstyle{}
+% for your dollars. In that case you have to get rid of the \texttt{T1}
+% declaration as well, e.g., the following would do that for you:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \UndeclareTextCommand{\textdollar}{OT1}
+% \UndeclareTextCommand{\textdollar} {T1}
+% \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdollar}
+% {\UseTextSymbol{TS1}\textdollaroldstyle}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{The order of declarations}\label{sec:orderofdecls}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9o}{1998/03/20}{Documentation added about order of decls}
+%
+% If an encoding-specific command is defined for more than one encoding,
+% then it will execute fastest in the encoding in which it was defined
+% last since its top-level definition will be set up to execute in that
+% encoding without any overhead.
+%
+% For this reason the file \texttt{fonttext.ltx} currently first loads
+% the definitions for the \texttt{T1} encoding and then those for the
+% \texttt{OT1} encoding so that typesetting in \texttt{OT1} is optimized
+% since that is (still) the default. However, when \texttt{T1} is
+% explicitly requested (via |\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}|) the
+% top-level definitions are automatically changed to favour
+% \texttt{T1} since its declarations are reloaded in the process.
+%
+% For the same reason default declarations should never come last since
+% they are implemented as a special encoding themselves (with the
+% name |?|).
+% Specifying them last would simply mean to make those encoding-specific
+% commands equally inefficient in all encodings. Therefore the
+% \texttt{textcomp} package, for example, first sets up all defaults
+% to point to \texttt{TS1} and then declares the commands in the
+% \texttt{TS1} encoding.
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \subsection{Docstrip modules}
+%
+% This |.dtx| file is be used to generate several related files
+% containing font encoding definitions. The mutually exclusive
+% docstrip options are listed here.
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{lp{10cm}}
+% |T1| & generates |t1enc.def| for the Cork encoding. \\
+% |TS1| & generates |ts1enc.def| for the Text Companion
+% encoding. \\
+% |TS1sty| & generates |textcomp.sty|, package that sets up use
+% of the Text Companion encoding. \\
+% |OT1| & generates |ot1enc.def| for Knuth's CM encoding. \\
+% |OMS| & generates |omsenc.def| for Knuth's
+% math symbol encoding. \\
+% |OML| & generates |omlenc.def| for Knuth's
+% math letters encoding. \\
+% |OT4| & generates |ot4enc.def| for the Polish extension to
+% the OT1 encoding, created by B.~Jackowski and
+% M.~Ry\'cko for use with the Polish version of
+% Computer Modern and Computer Concrete.\\
+% |package| & generates |fontenc.sty| for
+% selecting encodings. \\
+% |2ekernel| & for the kernel commands.\\
+% |autoload| & for the `autoload' kernel commands.\\
+% |autoerr| & for the autoerr.sty error message autoload file.
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% \changes{1.0d}{1993/07/17}{changed \cs{catcoding} @}
+% \changes{1.0f}{1993/08/13}{Protected against active @ sign.}
+% \changes{1.0g}{1993/08/16}{Needs space after \cs{string}}
+% \changes{1.1}{1993/12/07}{Protected all special characters with
+% \cs{string}.}
+% \changes{1.3}{1993/12/17}{Removed the catcode hackery, since the file
+% is only read as a package in the preamble, and removed all the
+% messages on the screen, which just confuse users. Replaced them
+% by the appropriate \cs{ProvidesPackage} commands. Added XXXenc.}
+% \changes{1.3b}{1993/12/18}
+% {Fixed typos with \cs{ProvidesPackage} lines.
+% Added the \cs{NeedsTeXFormat} line. Added the last argument to
+% \cs{DeclareEncoding}. Moved the use of the encodings to after their
+% declaration. }
+% \changes{1.4a}{1994/04/29}{Removed Rokicki's OT1 variant encoding.
+% Moved the driver to the top.}
+% \changes{1.5a}{1994/05/11}{Made T1 and OT1 generate packages rather
+% than def files. Renamed the `package' module to `teststy'.}
+% \changes{1.5d}{1994/05/14}{Moved the driver to the top.}
+%
+% \subsection{Definitions for the kernel}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Declaration commands}
+%
+% \changes{1.3}{1993/12/17}{Added this section}
+% \changes{1.3c}{1993/12/18}{Split \cs{EncodingSpecificAccent} up into
+% \cs{EncodingSpecific} and \cs{DeclareAccent}.}
+% \changes{1.4a}{1994/04/29}{Removed \cs{EncodingSpecific}. Renamed
+% all the commands. Added \cs{DeclareTextGlyph} and
+% \cs{UndeclareTextCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.5a}{1994/05/11}{Reimplemented \cs{DeclareTextCommand}
+% using \cs{@changed@cmd} and \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.5c}{1994/05/14}{Fixed a bug which caused an infinite loop
+% if \cs{f@encoding} was incorrectly set.}
+% \changes{v1.5d}{1994/05/14}{Rewrote \cs{DeclareTextCommand} to define
+% its argument to use the current encoding by default, rather than
+% the encoding provided to \cs{DeclareTextCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.6a}{1994/10/25}{Added the \cs{Provide} commands,
+% and the default definitions.}
+%
+% This section contains definitions for commands such as accents which
+% depend on the current encoding. These commands will usually be kept
+% in |.def| files, for example |ot1enc.def| contains the definitions
+% for the |OT1| encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\message{font encodings,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.5d}{1994/10/27}{Rewrote \cs{DeclareTextSymbol} to define
+% its argument to use the current encoding by default, to fit with
+% \cs{DeclareTextCommand}.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1994/11/30}{Redefined \cs{@changed@cmd} to expand in
+% the mouth.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1994/11/30}{Removed \cs{@changed@x@mouth} since
+% \cs{@changed@x} now expands in the mouth.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.7r}{1995/11/28}{Renamed \cs{@changed@x@err} to
+% \cs{TextSymbolUnavailable}.}
+% \changes{v1.7r}{1995/11/28}{Added math mode checks to text commands.}
+% Far too many macros in one block here!
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvideTextCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextSymbol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dec@text@cmd}
+% \begin{macro}{\chardef@text@cmd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@changed@cmd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@changed@x}
+% \begin{macro}{\TextSymbolUnavailable}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inmathwarn}
+% If you say:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\foo}{T1}...
+%\end{verbatim}
+% then |\foo| is defined to be |\T1-cmd \foo \T1\foo|,
+% where |\T1\foo| is \emph{one} control sequence, not two!
+% We then call |\newcommand| to define |\T1\foo|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareTextCommand{%
+ \@dec@text@cmd\newcommand}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ProvideTextCommand{%
+ \@dec@text@cmd\providecommand}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dec@text@cmd#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#2%
+ \expandafter{%
+ \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter#2%
+ \csname#3\string#2\endcsname
+ }%
+ \let\@ifdefinable\@rc@ifdefinable
+ \expandafter#1\csname#3\string#2\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.99d}{2004/02/06}{New command added to fix
+% severe bug: pr/3563}
+% This command was introduced to fix a major bug
+% in |\@dec@text@cmd| without changing that command itself.
+% This was thought to be necessary because it is defined
+% in more than one package. (Perhaps the more serious bug is to put
+% complex low-level commands like this in packages?)
+%
+% The problem it solves is that whereas both |\newcommand| and
+% |\providecommand| (used just above) both handle the
+% resetting of |\@ifdefinable| (following its disabling in
+% |\@dec@text@cmd|), the primitive |\chardef| neither needs the
+% disabling, nor does the resetting.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\chardef@text@cmd{%
+ \let\@ifdefinable\@@ifdefinable
+ \chardef
+ }
+\def\DeclareTextSymbol#1#2#3{%
+ \@dec@text@cmd\chardef@text@cmd#1{#2}#3\relax
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The declarations are only available before |\begin{document}|.
+% \changes{v1.7h}{1995/05/21}{Added several \cs{@onlypreamble}}
+% \changes{v1.7k}{1995/06/05}{Removed \cs{protected@cmd} and replaced
+% with explicit \cs{noexpand}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextCommand
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextSymbol
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The sneaky bit in all this is what |\T1-cmd \foo \T1\foo| does.
+% There are five possibilities, depending on the current values of
+% |\protect|, |\cf@encoding| and |\ifmmode|:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item If |\protect| is |\@typeset@protect| and |\cf@encoding| is
+% |T1|, then we execute |\T1\foo|. This should be the normal
+% behaviour, and is optimized for speed.
+% \item If |\protect| is |\@typeset@protect|, |\cf@encoding| is
+% (say) |OT1|, and |\OT1\foo| is defined, then we execute
+% |\OT1\foo|.
+% \item If |\protect| is |\@typeset@protect|, |\cf@encoding| is
+% (say) |OT1|, we're in text mode,
+% and |\OT1\foo| is undefined, then we define
+% |\OT1\foo| to be the default value of |\foo|, and execute
+% |\OT1\foo|.
+% \item If |\protect| is |\@typeset@protect|, |\cf@encoding| is
+% (say) |OT1|, we're in math mode,
+% and |\OT1\foo| is undefined, then we execute the default value
+% of |\foo|. (This is necessary so that things like
+% |$X_\copyright$| work properly.)
+% \item If |\protect| is not |\@typeset@protect| then we execute
+% |\noexpand\foo|. For example, if we are writing to a file,
+% then this results in |\foo| being written. If we are in a
+% |\mark|, then |\foo| will be put in the mark---since |\foo| is
+% robust, it will then survive all the things which may happen
+% to it whilst it's a |\mark|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% So after all that, we will either execute the appropriate
+% definition of |\foo| for the current encoding, or we will execute
+% |\noexpand\foo|.
+%
+% The default value of |\foo| is |\?\foo| if it is defined, and an
+% error message otherwise.
+%
+% When the encoding is changed from |T1| to |OT1|, |\T1-cmd| is
+% defined to be |\@changed@cmd| and |\OT1-cmd| is defined to be
+% |\@current@cmd|. This means that the test for what the current
+% encoding is can be performed quickly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@current@cmd#1{%
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+ \@inmathwarn#1%
+ \else
+ \noexpand#1\expandafter\@gobble
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@changed@cmd#1#2{%
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+ \@inmathwarn#1%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname\cf@encoding\string#1\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname ?\string#1\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\def\csname ?\string#1\endcsname{%
+ \TextSymbolUnavailable#1%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname\cf@encoding \string#1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname ?\string#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+ \csname\cf@encoding\string#1%
+ \expandafter\endcsname
+ \else
+ \noexpand#1%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.7m}{1995/10/09}{Autoload error}
+% \changes{v1.7v}{1995/12/05}{Changed \cs{TextSymbolUnavailable} text}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+%<*2ekernel|autoerr>
+\gdef\TextSymbolUnavailable#1{%
+ \@latex@error{%
+ Command \protect#1 unavailable in encoding \cf@encoding%
+ }\@eha}
+%</2ekernel|autoerr>
+%<autoload>\gdef\TextSymbolUnavailable{\@autoerr\TextSymbolUnavailable}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The command |\@inmathwarn| produces a warning message if we are
+% currently in math mode. Note that since this command is used
+% inside text commands, it can't call |\relax| before the
+% |\ifmmode|. This means that it is possible for the warning to
+% fail to be issued at the beginning of a row of an halign whose
+% template enters math mode. This is probably a bad feature, but
+% there's not much that can be done about it, since adding a |\relax|
+% would break ligatures and kerning between text symbols.
+%
+% A more efficient solution would be to make |\@inmathwarn| and
+% |\@inmatherr| equal to |\@empty| and |\relax| by default, and
+% to have
+% |\everymath| reset them to their usual definitions. This is left
+% for future investigation (for example it may break some third
+% party code).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@inmathwarn#1{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \@latex@warning{Command \protect#1 invalid in math mode}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.7k}{1995/06/05}{Allowed \cs{ProvideTextCommandDefault}
+% after the preamble.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextCommandDefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvideTextCommandDefault}
+% These define commands with encoding |?|.
+%
+% Note that |\DeclareTextCommandDefault| can only be used in the
+% preamble, but that the |\Provide| version is allowed in inputenc
+% |.def| files, so is allowed anywhere.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareTextCommandDefault#1{%
+ \DeclareTextCommand#1?}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ProvideTextCommandDefault#1{%
+ \ProvideTextCommand#1?}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextCommandDefault
+%\@onlypreamble\ProvideTextCommandDefault
+% \end{macrocode}
+% They require |\?-cmd| to be initialized as |\@changed@cmd|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\let\csname?-cmd\endcsname\@changed@cmd
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextAccent}
+% \changes{v1.5a}{1994/05/11}
+% {Reimplemented using \cs{DeclareTextCommand}.}
+% \changes{v1.7z}{1996/05/23}
+% {Reimplemented using \cs{add@accent} to save space latex/2133}
+% This is just a disguise for defining a \TeX~|\accent| command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareTextAccent#1#2#3{%
+ \DeclareTextCommand#1{#2}{\add@accent{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextAccent
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1994/11/30}{Rewrote \cs{@text@composite} so it
+% allows an empty argument, or an argument containing lots of
+% commands.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\add@accent}
+% \changes{v1.7z}{1996/05/23}{macro added. latex/2133}
+% \changes{v1.91}{2000/08/30}{Rearranged but no change to final code,
+% CAR (pr/3160)}
+% To save space this code is shared between all text accents that are
+% set using the |\accent| primitive.
+% The argument is pre-set in a box so that any
+% font loading that is needed is already done within the box.
+% This is needed because font-loading involves grouping and that would
+% prevent the accent mechanism from working so that the accent would
+% not be positioned over the argument.
+% Declarations that change the font should be allowed (only low-level
+% ones are at present) inside the argument of an accent command,
+% but not size changes, as they involve |\setbox| operations which
+% also inhibit the mechanism of the |\accent| primitive.
+%
+% Note that the whole process is within a group.
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% For a detailed discussion of this reimplementation and its
+% deficiencies, see pr/3160.
+% \task{Improve this and document its problems, see pr/3160}
+% \changes{v1.9z}{2000/01/30}{Macro reimplemented (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add@accent#1#2{\hmode@bgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Turn off the group in |\UseTextSymbol| in case this is used
+% inside the argument of |\add@accent|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\hmode@start@before@group\@firstofone
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When presetting the argument in a box we record its |\spacefactor|
+% for later use after the accent got typeset. This way something like
+% |\`A| gets the spacefactor of |A| (i.e., 999) rather than the
+% default value of 1000.
+% \changes{v1.9q}{1998/06/12}
+% {Explicitly set \cs{spacefactor} after \cs{accent} (pr/2877)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}%
+ \accent#1 #2\egroup\spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Default definition for |\accent@spacefactor| prevents a horrible
+% death of the above macro inside an unprotected |\edef|.
+% \changes{v1.9w}{1999/10/28}{Give \cs{accent@spacefactor} a default
+% definition (pr/3084)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\accent@spacefactor\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hmode@bgroup}
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hmode@bgroup{\leavevmode\bgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextCompositeCommand}
+% \changes{v1.7z}{1996/05/23}
+% {Modified to cope with new \cs{add@accent} command: required
+% removal of check for one argument-command}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextComposite}
+% \changes{v1.7l}{1995/06/09}{Rewrote \cs{DeclareTextComposite} to
+% define the composite as a no-argument command rather than a
+% two-argument command.}
+% \begin{macro}{\@text@composite}
+% \begin{macro}{\@text@composite@x}
+% \begin{macro}{\@strip@args}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
+% {Removed macro}
+% Another amusing game to play with |\expandafter|, |\csname|, and
+% |\string|. When you say
+% |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\foo}{T1}{a}{bar}|, we look to see
+% if the expansion of |\T1\foo| begins with |\@text@composite|, and
+% if it doesn't, we redefine |\T1\foo| to be:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% #1 -> \@text@composite \T1\foo #1\@empty \@text@composite {...}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% where |...| is the
+% previous definition of |\T1\foo|. Finally, we define |\\T1\foo-a|
+% to expand to |bar|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareTextCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@a\csname#2\string#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\ifx
+ \expandafter\@car\reserved@a\relax\relax\@nil \@text@composite \else
+ \edef\reserved@b##1{%
+ \def\expandafter\noexpand
+ \csname#2\string#1\endcsname####1{%
+ \noexpand\@text@composite
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\string#1\endcsname
+ ####1\noexpand\@empty\noexpand\@text@composite
+ {##1}}}%
+ \expandafter\reserved@b\expandafter{\reserved@a{##1}}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname
+ #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3\endcsname{#4}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextCompositeCommand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This all works because:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \@text@composite \T1\foo A\@empty \@text@composite {...}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% expands to
+% |\\T1\foo-A| if |\\T1\foo-A| has been defined, and |{...}|
+% otherwise.
+%
+% Note that |\@text@composite| grabs the first token of the
+% argument and puts just that in the
+% csname. This is so that |\'{\textit{e}}| will work---it checks
+% whether |\\T1\'-\textit| is defined (which presumably it isn't)
+% and so expands to |{\accent 1 \textit{e}}|.
+%
+% This trick won't always work, for example |\'{{\itshape e}}| will
+% expand to (with spaces added for clarity):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \csname \string \T1\' - \string {\itshape e} \@empty \endcsname
+%\end{verbatim}
+% which will die pretty horribly. Unfortunately there's not much
+% can be done about this if we're going to use |\csname| lookups as a
+% fast way of accessing composites.
+%
+% This has an unfortunate `misfeature' though, which is that in
+% the T1 encoding, |\'{aa}| produces \'a. This is not the expected
+% behaviour, and should perhaps be fixed if the fix doesn't affect
+% performance too badly.
+%
+% Finally, it's worth noting that the |\@empty| is used in
+% |\@text@composite| so that accents will work even when the
+% argument is empty. If you say |\'{}| then this looks up
+% |\\T1\'-\@empty|, which ought to be |\relax|, and so all is well.
+% If we didn't include the |\@empty|, then |\'{}| would expand to:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \csname \string \T1\' - \string \endcsname
+%\end{verbatim}
+% so the |\endcsname| would be |\string|'ed and the whole of the
+% rest of the document would be put inside the |\csname|. This
+% would not be good.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@text@composite#1#2#3\@text@composite{%
+ \expandafter\@text@composite@x
+ \csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.7z}{1996/05/23}
+% {\cs{expandafter} added to match other changes for latex/2133}
+% \changes{v1.9r}{1999/01/06}{New impl for latex/2930}
+% \changes{v1.9s}{1999/01/13}{Simplified solution for latex/2930}
+% Originally the |\@text@composite@x| macro had two arguments and if
+% |#1| was not |\relax| it was executed, otherwise |#2| was executed.
+% All this happened within the |\ifx| code so that neither |#1|
+% nor |#2| could have picked up any additional arguments form
+% the input stream.
+% This has now being changed using the typical |\@firstoftwo| /
+% |\@secondoftwo| coding. This way the
+% final expansion will happen without any |\else| or |\fi|
+% intervening in the case that we need to get a further token
+% from the input stream.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@text@composite@x#1{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \fi
+ #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The command |\DeclareTextComposite| uses
+% |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand| to declare a command which
+% expands out to a single glyph.
+% \changes{v1.8a}{1996/07/19}
+% {Use char 0 not @ as carrier for \cs{lowercase} /2197}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode\z@=11\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareTextComposite#1#2#3#4{%
+ \def\reserved@a{\DeclareTextCompositeCommand#1{#2}{#3}}%
+ \bgroup
+ \lccode\z@#4%
+ \lowercase{%
+ \egroup
+ \reserved@a ^^@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode\z@=15\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextComposite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\UseTextAccent}
+% \begin{macro}{\UseTextSymbol}
+% \changes{v1.7p}{1995/11/17}{Support \cs{@wrong@font@char} latex/1676}
+% \changes{v1.7q}{1995/11/18}{Modify message slightly}
+% \begin{macro}{\@use@text@encoding}
+% \changes{v1.91}{2000/08/30}{Rearranged but no change to final code,
+% CAR (pr/3160)}
+% These fragile commands access glyphs from different encodings.
+% They use grotty low-level calls to the font selection scheme for
+% speed, and in order to make sure that |\UseTextSymbol| doesn't
+% do anything which you're not allowed to do between an |\accent|
+% and its glyph.
+%
+% For a detailed discussion of this reimplementation and its
+% deficiencies, see pr/3160.
+% \task{Improve this and document its problems, see pr/3160}
+% \changes{v1.9z}{2000/01/30}{Macro reimplemented (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UseTextAccent#1#2#3{%
+ \hmode@start@before@group
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Turn off the group in |\UseTextSymbol| in case this is used
+% inside the arguments of |\UseTextAccent|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\hmode@start@before@group\@firstofone
+ \let\@curr@enc\cf@encoding
+ \@use@text@encoding{#1}%
+ #2{\@use@text@encoding\@curr@enc#3}%
+ }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9z}{2000/01/30}{Macro reimplemented (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UseTextSymbol#1#2{%
+ \hmode@start@before@group
+ {%
+ \def\@wrong@font@char{\MessageBreak
+ for \noexpand\symbol`\string#2'}%
+ \@use@text@encoding{#1}%
+ #2%
+ }%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@use@text@encoding#1{%
+ \edef\f@encoding{#1}%
+ \xdef\font@name{%
+ \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname}%
+ \pickup@font
+ \font@name
+ \@@enc@update}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hmode@start@before@group}
+% The |\hmode@start@before@group| starts hmode and should be
+% immediately followed by an explicit |{...}|. Its purpose is to
+% ensure that hmode is started before this group is opened. Inside
+% |\add@accent| and |\UseTextAccent| it is redefined to remove this
+% group so that it doesn't conflict with the |\accent| primitive.
+%
+% For a detailed discussion see pr/3160.
+% \changes{v1.9z}{2000/01/30}{Macro added (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\hmode@start@before@group\leavevmode
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextSymbolDefault}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareTextAccentDefault}
+% Some syntactic sugar. Again, these should probably be optimized
+% for speed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareTextSymbolDefault#1#2{%
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault#1{\UseTextSymbol{#2}#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareTextAccentDefault#1#2{%
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault#1{\UseTextAccent{#2}#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextSymbolDefault
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextAccentDefault
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\UndeclareTextCommand}
+% This command safely removes and encoding specific declaration
+% for a given encoding. It is helpful if one intends to use the
+% default definition always and therefore wants to get rid of
+% a declaration for some specific encoding.
+% \changes{v1.9o}{1998/03/20}{Macro added for pr/2783}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UndeclareTextCommand#1#2{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If there is no declaration for the current encoding do nothing.
+% (This makes a hash table entry but without e\TeX{} we can't do
+% anything about that).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\string#1\endcsname\relax
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Else: throw away that declaration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname#2\string#1\endcsname
+ \@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% But this is unfortunately not enough, we have to take a look
+% at the top-level definition of the encoding specific command
+% which for a command |\foo| would look similar to
+% |\T1-cmd \foo \T1\foo| (three tokens).
+%
+% Of course, instead of |T1| one could see a different encoding name;
+% which one depends the encoding for which |\foo| was declared
+% last.
+%
+% Now assume we have just removed the declaration for |\foo| in |T1|
+% and the top-level of |\foo| expands to the above. Then we better
+% change that pretty fast otherwise we do get an ``undefined csname
+% error'' when we try to typeset |\foo| within |T1| instead of
+% getting the default definition for |\foo|.
+% And what is the best way to change that top-level definition? Well,
+% the only ``encoding'' we know for sure will still be around is
+% the default encoding denoted by |?|.
+%
+% Thus in case the last token of the top-level expansion
+% is now undefined we change the declaration to look like
+% |\?-cmd \foo \?\foo| which is done by the following
+% (readable?) code:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \ifx\expandafter\@thirdofthree#1\@undefined
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter#1\expandafter
+ {\csname ?-cmd\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter
+ #1\csname?\string#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\UndeclareTextCommand
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Hyphenation}
+%
+% \changes{v1.5l}{1994/10/18}{Added new definitions of \cs{patterns}
+% and \cs{hyphenation}.}
+% \changes{v1.6g}{1994/11/05}{Added setting of \cs{@typeset@protect}
+% to \cs{patterns} and \cs{hyphenation}.}
+% \changes{v1.6g}{1994/11/30}{Removed new definitions of \cs{patterns}
+% and \cs{hyphenation}, since encoding-specific commands now expand
+% in the mouth.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\patterns}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@patterns}
+% \begin{macro}{\hyphenation}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@hyphenation}
+% We redefine |\patterns| and |\hyphenation| to allow the use of
+% commands declared with |\DeclareText*| to be used inside them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\let\@@patterns\patterns
+%\let\@@hyphenation\hyphenation
+%\def\patterns{%
+% \bgroup
+% \let\protect\@empty
+% \let\@typeset@protect\@empty
+% \let\@changed@x\@changed@x@mouth
+% \afterassignment\egroup
+% \@@patterns
+%}
+%\def\hyphenation{%
+% \bgroup
+% \let\protect\@empty
+% \let\@typeset@protect\@empty
+% \let\@changed@x\@changed@x@mouth
+% \afterassignment\egroup
+% \@@hyphenation
+%}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Miscellania}
+%
+% \changes{1.4a}{1994/05/01}{Added the \cs{a} command.}
+% \changes{1.7a}{1994/11/30}{Redefined \cs{a} for the new scheme.}
+% \changes{1.7b}{1994/12/02}{Redefined \cs{a} properly.}
+% \changes{1.7g}{1995/03/03}{Corrected an error in documentation
+% referring to the tabular rather than the tabbing
+% environment.}
+% \changes{v1.7n}{1995/11/02}{Changed internal name \cs{a} to
+% \cs{@tabacckludge} to protect against redefinition by malicicous
+% users.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\a}
+% The |\a| command is used to access the accent commands even when
+% they have been redefined (for example by the |tabbing|
+% environment). Its internal name is |\@tabacckludge|.
+%
+% The |\string| within the |\csname| guards against something
+% like |'| being active at the point of use.
+% \changes{v1.9r}{1998/09/19}{Added \cs{string} (pr/2878)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabacckludge#1{\expandafter\@changed@cmd
+ \csname\string#1\endcsname\relax}
+\let\a=\@tabacckludge
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6a}{1994/10/25}{Added the files OT1enc.def, T1enc.def and
+% OMSenc.def.}
+% \changes{v1.6b}{1994/10/27}{Removed the files OT1enc.def, T1enc.def
+% and OMSenc.def.}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Default encodings}
+%
+% We define the default encodings for most commands to be either OT1,
+% OML or OMS. These defaults are in the kernel and therefore
+% fonts with these encodings must be available unless these
+% defaults are redefined elsewhere. Recall that the standard kernel
+% loads the encoding files for these encodings, and also that for
+% the T1 encoding.
+%
+% The naming conventions in the kernel are not what we would use if we
+% were starting from scratch\dots\
+% Those defined by DEK (like |\ae| and |\ss|) or by the \TeX{} Users
+% Group Technical Working Group on multi-lingual typesetting (like
+% |\th| and |\ng|) have short names. Those which were added to the
+% kernel in 1993 and early 1994 are named after their Adobe glyph
+% names (like |\guillemotleft| and |\quotedblbase|). Unfortunately,
+% this naming scheme won't work for all glyphs, since some names (like
+% |\space|) are already used, and some (like |\endash|) are very
+% likely to be defined by users. So we're now using the naming scheme
+% of |\text| followed by the Adobe name, (like |\textendash| and
+% |\textsterling|). Except that some glyphs don't have Adobe names,
+% so we're using the names used by fontinst for those (like
+% |\textcompwordmark|). Sigh.
+%
+% \changes{v1.6a}{1994/10/25}{Added the defaults.}
+% \changes{v1.6b}{1994/10/27}{Added more defaults for OT1.}
+% \changes{v1.6c}{1994/10/29}{Added commands like \cs{dots} for use in
+% text and math.}
+%
+% Some accents from OT1:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\'}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\.}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\=}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\H}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\^}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\`}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\b}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\c}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\d}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\r}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\u}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\v}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\~}{OT1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some symbols from OT1:
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
+% {Removed \cs{aa} and \cs{AA}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AE}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\L}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\OE}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\O}{OT1}
+%\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ae}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\i}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\j}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\l}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\oe}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\o}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ss}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textemdash}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textendash}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textexclamdown}{OT1}
+%\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\texthyphenchar}{OT1}
+%\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\texthyphen}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textquestiondown}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textquotedblleft}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textquotedblright}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textquoteleft}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textquoteright}{OT1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textsterling}{OT1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some symbols from OMS:
+% \changes{v1.7t}{1995/11/29}{Added \cs{textbackslash} and
+% \cs{textbar}.}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
+% {Added \cs{textasteriskcentered}}
+% \changes{v1.95}{2002/06/16}{Added default for \cs{textbardbl} (pr/3400)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textasteriskcentered}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbackslash}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbar}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbardbl}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbraceleft}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbraceright}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbullet}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdaggerdbl}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdagger}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textparagraph}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textperiodcentered}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textsection}{OMS}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\textcircled}{OMS}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added OML encoding.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Made \cs{textless} and \cs{textgreater}
+% come from OML.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added \cs{t}.}
+% \changes{v1.7k}{1995/06/05}{Commented out \cs{textless} and
+% \cs{textgreater}.}
+%
+% Some symbols from OML:
+% \changes{v1.7t}{1995/11/29}{Added \cs{textless} and
+% \cs{textgreater}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textless}{OML}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textgreater}{OML}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\t}{OML}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added \cs{textcircled}.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Rewrote \cs{copyright} to use
+% \cs{textcircled}.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Removed \cs{textregistered}.}
+% \changes{v1.7k}{1995/06/05}{Save some tokens in
+% \cs{textvisiblespace} and \cs{textunderscore}.}
+% \changes{v1.7t}{1995/11/29}{Added \cs{textasciicircum},
+% \cs{textasciitilde}, \cs{textregistered} and \cs{texttrademark}.}
+% \changes{v1.7u}{1995/12/01}{Made \cs{SS} a Default, rather than
+% having the default point to the OT1 definition.}
+% \changes{v1.7w}{1995/12/11}{Modified \cs{copyright}}
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1997/04/30}{Introduced \cs{textcopyright} and modified
+% \cs{copyright}}
+%
+% Some defaults we can fake.
+%
+% The interface for defining |\copyright| changed, it used to
+% use |\expandafter| to add braces at the appropriate points.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcopyright}{\textcircled{c}}
+% \expandafter\def\expandafter
+% \copyright\expandafter{\expandafter{\copyright}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1997/04/30}{Modified \cs{textunderscore}, removing
+% \cs{mathunderscore}}
+% \changes{v1.9b}{1997/04/30}{Added \cs{leavevmode} to
+% \cs{textunderscore}}
+% \changes{v1.9d}{1997/05/07}{Added \cs{leavevmode} to
+% \cs{textcompwordmark}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciicircum}{\^{}}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textasciitilde}{\~{}}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcompwordmark}{\leavevmode\kern\z@}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{%
+ \leavevmode \kern.06em\vbox{\hrule\@width.3em}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textvisiblespace}{%
+ \mbox{\kern.06em\vrule \@height.3ex}%
+ \vbox{\hrule \@width.3em}%
+ \hbox{\vrule \@height.3ex}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Using |\fontdimen3| in the next definition is some sort of a
+% kludge (since it is the interword stretch) but it makes the
+% ellipsis come out right in mono-spaced fonts too (since there it
+% is zero).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textellipsis}{%
+ .\kern\fontdimen3\font
+ .\kern\fontdimen3\font
+ .\kern\fontdimen3\font}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1997/04/30}{Changed \cs{textsc} to \cs{scshape}}
+% \changes{v1.95}{2002/06/18}{Changed def for \cs{textregistered} to
+% avoid small caps (pr/3420)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textregistered}{\textcircled{\scshape r}}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textregistered}{\textcircled{%
+ \check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont R}}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttrademark}{\textsuperscript{TM}}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\SS}{SS}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9n}{1998/03/05}{Added masc/fem ords as in pr/2579}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textordfeminine}{\textsuperscript{a}}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textordmasculine}{\textsuperscript{o}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Math material}
+%
+% Some commands can be used in both text and math mode:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\$}{\ifmmode\mathdollar\else\textdollar\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\{}{\ifmmode\lbrace\else\textbraceleft\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\}}{\ifmmode\rbrace\else\textbraceright\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\P}{\ifmmode\mathparagraph\else\textparagraph\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\S}{\ifmmode\mathsection\else\textsection\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\dag}{\ifmmode{\dagger}\else\textdagger\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\ddag}{\ifmmode{\ddagger}\else\textdaggerdbl\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For historical reasons |\copyright|
+% needs |{}| around the definition in maths.
+%
+% \changes{v1.6f}{1994/11/04}{Added \cmd\_.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1997/04/30}{Modified \cs{underscore}, removing
+% \cs{mathunderscore}}
+% \changes{v1.9a}{1997/04/30}{Introduced \cs{textcopyright} and modify
+% \cs{copyright}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\_}{%
+ \ifmmode\nfss@text{\textunderscore}\else\textunderscore\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\copyright}{%
+ \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textcopyright}}\else\textcopyright\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\pounds}{%
+ \ifmmode\mathsterling\else\textsterling\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\dots}{%
+ \ifmmode\mathellipsis\else\textellipsis\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ldots\dots
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Moved math commands here from ltmath.}
+% \changes{v1.6f}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{mathunderscore}.}
+% \changes{v1.7k}{1995/06/05}{Moved math commands to fontdef.dtx.}
+%
+%
+% \changes{1.4a}{1994/05/01}{Added the \cs{SaveAtCatcode} and
+% \cs{RestoreAtCatcode} commands.}
+%
+% \changes{1.5a}{1994/05/12}{Removed the \cs{SaveAtCatcode} and
+% \cs{RestoreAtCatcode} commands.}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Definitions for the OT1 encoding}
+%
+% \changes{1.3}{1993/12/17}{Removed all the hackery for use in
+% \cs{DeclareFontEncoding}, and redid everything using
+% \cs{DeclareTextFoo}.}
+% \changes{1.3b}{1993/12/18}{Replaced the missing last argument to
+% \cs{DeclareFontEncoding}.}
+% \changes{1.3c}{1993/12/18}{Rewrote for the new syntax of
+% \cs{EncodingSpecific}.}
+% \changes{1.4a}{1994/05/01}{Rewrote for the new syntax.}
+% \changes{1.5a}{1994/05/12}{Rewrote for the new syntax.}
+% \changes{1.5h}{1994/05/16}{\cs{pounds} was still using u rather than
+% ui shape.}
+% \changes{1.6b}{1994/10/27}{Added:
+% \cs{textemdash}
+% \cs{textendash}
+% \cs{textexclamdown}
+% \cs{texthyphenchar}
+% \cs{texthyphen}
+% \cs{textquestiondown}
+% \cs{textquotedblleft}
+% \cs{textquotedblright}
+% \cs{textquoteleft}
+% \cs{textquoteright}
+% }
+%
+% The definitions for the `\TeX{} text' (OT1) encoding.
+%
+% Declare the encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT1>
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OT1}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the accents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\'}{OT1}{19}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\.}{OT1}{95}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\=}{OT1}{22}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{OT1}{94}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\`}{OT1}{18}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\~}{OT1}{126}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\H}{OT1}{125}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\u}{OT1}{21}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\v}{OT1}{20}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\r}{OT1}{23}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some accents have to be built by hand:
+% Note that |\ooalign| and |\o@lign| must be inside a group.
+% \changes{v1.7j}{1995/05/21}{Updated some plain macros}
+% \changes{v1.7o}{1995/11/07}{Added \cs{leavevmode} at start of
+% \cs{c}, otherwise the output routine might be invoked within the
+% macro.}
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\b}{OT1}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{29}%
+ \vbox to.2ex{\hbox{\char22}\vss}\hidewidth}\egroup}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\c}{OT1}[1]
+ {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\ifdim\ht\z@=1ex\accent24 #1%
+ \else{\ooalign{\unhbox\z@\crcr\hidewidth\char24\hidewidth}}\fi}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\d}{OT1}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup
+ \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{10}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the text symbols.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\AE}{OT1}{29}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\OE}{OT1}{30}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\O}{OT1}{31}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ae}{OT1}{26}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\i}{OT1}{16}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\j}{OT1}{17}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\oe}{OT1}{27}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\o}{OT1}{28}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{OT1}{25}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textemdash}{OT1}{124}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textendash}{OT1}{123}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Using the ligatures helps with OT1 fonts that have
+% |\textexclamdown| and |\textquestiondown| in unusual positions.
+% \changes{v1.95}{2002/06/17}{Definition of \cs{textexclamdown} changed (pr/3368)}
+% \changes{v1.95}{2002/06/17}{Definition of \cs{textquestiondown} changed (pr/3368)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textexclamdown}{OT1}{60}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquestiondown}{OT1}{62}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textexclamdown}{OT1}{!`}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textquestiondown}{OT1}{?`}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\texthyphenchar}{OT1}{`\-}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\texthyphen}{OT1}{`\-}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotedblleft}{OT1}{92}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotedblright}{OT1}{`\"}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquoteleft}{OT1}{`\`}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquoteright}{OT1}{`\'}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some symbols which are faked from others:
+% \changes{v1.7o}{1995/11/07}{Changed \cs{char}32 to \cs{@xxxii} (two
+% tokens less).}
+% \changes{v1.7o}{1995/11/07}{Replaced octal number 27 by decimal
+% number 23 to protect against the quote character being active.}
+% \changes{v1.7o}{1995/11/07}{Replaced some 0's by \cs{z@} (faster).}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
+% {Removed \cs{aa} and \cs{AA}}
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}
+% {{\accent23a}}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\L}{OT1}
+ {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{L}\hb@xt@\wd\z@{\hss\@xxxii L}}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\l}{OT1}
+ {\hmode@bgroup\@xxxii l\egroup}
+% \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}
+% {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{h}\dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@-1ex%
+% \rlap{\raise.67\dimen@\hbox{\char23}}A}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the OT1 encoding \r A has a hand-crafted definition, so we
+% have here the first recorded explicit use of
+% |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand|.
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
+% {Added \cs{r} A}
+% \changes{v1.96}{2002/10/28}{%
+% coding change, to follow bug fix by DEK in plain.tex (pr/3469)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\r}{OT1}{A}
+ {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{!}\dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@-1ex%
+ \rlap{\raise.67\dimen@\hbox{\char23}}A}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the OT1 encoding, \pounds~and \$ share a slot.
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textdollar}{OT1}{\hmode@bgroup
+ \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font >\z@
+ \slshape
+ \else
+ \upshape
+ \fi
+ \char`\$\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textsterling}{OT1}{\hmode@bgroup
+ \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font >\z@
+ \itshape
+ \else
+ \fontshape{ui}\selectfont
+ \fi
+ \char`\$\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here we are adding some more composite commands to the |OT1|
+% encoding. This makes the use of certain accents with |i|
+% compatible with their use with the |T1| encoding; this
+% enables them to become true \LaTeX{} internal representations.
+% However, it will make these accents work a little less fast since
+% a check will always be made for the existence of a composite.
+%
+% \changes{v1.93}{2001/05/28}{Added composites for compatibility with
+% T1, pr/3295}
+% \changes{v1.94}{2001/06/05}{Text composite Commands need kludges for
+% `,' -- see tlb1903.lvt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{OT1}{i}{`\i}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{OT1}{\i}{`\i}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\`}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\^}{OT1}{i}{\^\i}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\"\i}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</OT1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Definitions for the T1 encoding}
+%
+% \changes{1.3}{1993/12/17}{Removed all the hackery for use in
+% \cs{DeclareFontEncoding}, and redid everything using
+% \cs{DeclareTextFoo}.}
+% \changes{1.3b}{1993/12/18}{Replaced the missing last argument to
+% \cs{DeclareFontEncoding}.}
+% \changes{1.3c}{1993/12/18}{Rewrote for the new syntax of
+% \cs{EncodingSpecific}.}
+% \changes{1.4a}{1994/05/01}{Rewrote for the new syntax.}
+% \changes{1.5a}{1994/05/12}{Rewrote for the new syntax.}
+% \changes{1.6a}{1994/10/25}{Added \cs{textdollar},
+% \cs{textlbrace}, \cs{textrbrace}, \cs{textsterling},
+% \cs{textunderline}.}
+% \changes{1.6a}{1994/10/25}{Removed
+% \cs{textlbrace}, \cs{textrbrace}, \cs{textunderline} to give them
+% their proper names.}
+% \changes{1.6b}{1994/10/27}{Added
+% \cs{textasciicircum}
+% \cs{textasciitilde}
+% \cs{textbackslash}
+% \cs{textbar}
+% \cs{textbraceleft}
+% \cs{textbraceright}
+% \cs{textcompwordmark}
+% \cs{textemdash}
+% \cs{textendash}
+% \cs{textexclamdown}
+% \cs{textgreater}
+% \cs{texthyphenchar}
+% \cs{texthyphen}
+% \cs{textless}
+% \cs{textquestiondown}
+% \cs{textquotedblleft}
+% \cs{textquotedblright}
+% \cs{textquotedbl}
+% \cs{textquoteleft}
+% \cs{textquoteright}
+% \cs{textunderscore}
+% \cs{textvisiblespace}
+% }
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}
+% {Added \cs{textperthousand} and \cs{textpertenthousand}}
+%
+% The definitions for the `Extended \TeX{} text' (T1) encoding.
+%
+% Declare the encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*T1>
+\DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the accents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\`}{T1}{0}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\'}{T1}{1}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\~}{T1}{3}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\"}{T1}{4}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\H}{T1}{5}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\r}{T1}{6}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\v}{T1}{7}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\u}{T1}{8}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\=}{T1}{9}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\.}{T1}{10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some accents have to be built by hand.
+% Note that |\ooalign| and |\o@lign| must be inside a group.
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}{As in OT1, Added \cs{leavevmode} at
+% start of \cs{c}, otherwise the output routine might be invoked
+% within the macro.}
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \changes{v1.95}{2002/06/17}{Corrected \cs{c} for T1 (pr/3442)}
+% \changes{v1.99b}{2004/01/03}{Use \cs{ooalign} for \cs{k} (pr/3532)}
+% \changes{v1.99b}{2004/01/03}{Added \cs{textogonekcentered} (pr/3532)}
+% \changes{v1.99c}{2004/01/04}{More adjustments for ogonek (pr/3532)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\b}{T1}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{29}%
+ \vbox to.2ex{\hbox{\char9}\vss}\hidewidth}\egroup}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\c}{T1}[1]
+ {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\ifdim\ht\z@=1ex\accent11 #1%
+ \else{\ooalign{\unhbox\z@\crcr
+ \hidewidth\char11\hidewidth}}\fi}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\d}{T1}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup
+ \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{10}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup\ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12}\egroup}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textogonekcentered}{T1}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup\ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12\hidewidth}\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Some symbols are constructed.
+%
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}
+% {Added \cs{textperthousand} and \cs{textpertenthousand}}
+% Slot 24 contains a small circle intended for construction of
+% these two glyphs.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{T1}
+ {\%\char 24 } % space or `relax as delimiter?
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textpertenthousand}{T1}
+ {\%\char 24\char 24 } % space or `relax as delimiter?
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Declare the text symbols.
+% \changes{v1.7t}{1995/11/29}{Added \cs{textasciicircum},
+% \cs{textasciitilde}, \cs{textbackslash}, \cs{textbar},
+% \cs{textgreater} and \cs{textless}.}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
+% {Removed \cs{aa} and \cs{AA}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\AA}{T1}{197}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\AE}{T1}{198}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\DH}{T1}{208}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\DJ}{T1}{208}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\L}{T1}{138}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\NG}{T1}{141}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\OE}{T1}{215}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\O}{T1}{216}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\SS}{T1}{223}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\TH}{T1}{222}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\aa}{T1}{229}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ae}{T1}{230}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\dh}{T1}{240}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\dj}{T1}{158}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotleft}{T1}{19}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotright}{T1}{20}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\guilsinglleft}{T1}{14}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\guilsinglright}{T1}{15}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\i}{T1}{25}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\j}{T1}{26}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\l}{T1}{170}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ng}{T1}{173}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\oe}{T1}{247}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\o}{T1}{248}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\quotedblbase}{T1}{18}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\quotesinglbase}{T1}{13}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{T1}{255}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasciicircum}{T1}{`\^}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasciitilde}{T1}{`\~}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbackslash}{T1}{`\\}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbar}{T1}{`\|}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbraceleft}{T1}{`\{}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbraceright}{T1}{`\}}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcompwordmark}{T1}{23}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdollar}{T1}{`\$}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textemdash}{T1}{22}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textendash}{T1}{21}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textexclamdown}{T1}{189}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textgreater}{T1}{`\>}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\texthyphenchar}{T1}{127}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\texthyphen}{T1}{`\-}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textless}{T1}{`\<}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquestiondown}{T1}{190}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotedblleft}{T1}{16}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotedblright}{T1}{17}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotedbl}{T1}{`\"}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquoteleft}{T1}{`\`}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquoteright}{T1}{`\'}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textsection}{T1}{159}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textsterling}{T1}{191}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textunderscore}{T1}{95}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textvisiblespace}{T1}{32}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\th}{T1}{254}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the composites.
+% \changes{v1.93}{2001/05/28}{Changed the effect of
+% \cs{\.}\cs{\i}, pr/3295}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{T1}{i}{`\i}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{T1}{\i}{`\i}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.9c}{1997/05/04}{Added `hex index tabs'}
+% "80 = 128
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\u}{T1}{A}{128}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\k}{T1}{A}{129}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{C}{130}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{C}{131}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{D}{132}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{E}{133}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\k}{T1}{E}{134}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\u}{T1}{G}{135}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "88 = 136
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{L}{136}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{L}{137}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{N}{139}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{N}{140}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\H}{T1}{O}{142}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{R}{143}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "90 = 144
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{R}{144}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{S}{145}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{S}{146}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\c}{T1}{S}{147}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{T}{148}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\c}{T1}{T}{149}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\H}{T1}{U}{150}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\r}{T1}{U}{151}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "98 = 152
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{Y}{152}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{Z}{153}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{Z}{154}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{T1}{Z}{155}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{T1}{I}{157}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "A0 = 160
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\u}{T1}{a}{160}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\k}{T1}{a}{161}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{c}{162}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{c}{163}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{d}{164}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{e}{165}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\k}{T1}{e}{166}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\u}{T1}{g}{167}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "A8 = 168
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{l}{168}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{l}{169}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{n}{171}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{n}{172}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\H}{T1}{o}{174}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{r}{175}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "B0 = 176
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{r}{176}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{s}{177}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{s}{178}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\c}{T1}{s}{179}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{t}{180}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\c}{T1}{t}{181}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\H}{T1}{u}{182}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\r}{T1}{u}{183}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "B8 = 184
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{y}{184}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{z}{185}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\v}{T1}{z}{186}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{T1}{z}{187}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "C0 = 192
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{A}{192}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{A}{193}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{A}{194}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{A}{195}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{A}{196}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\r}{T1}{A}{197}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\c}{T1}{C}{199}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "C8 = 200
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{E}{200}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{E}{201}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{E}{202}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{E}{203}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{I}{204}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{I}{205}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{I}{206}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{I}{207}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "D0 = 208
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{N}{209}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{O}{210}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{O}{211}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{O}{212}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{O}{213}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{O}{214}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "D8 = 216
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{U}{217}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{U}{218}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{U}{219}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{U}{220}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{Y}{221}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "E0 = 224
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{a}{224}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{a}{225}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{a}{226}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{a}{227}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{a}{228}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\r}{T1}{a}{229}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\c}{T1}{c}{231}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "E8 = 232
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{e}{232}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{e}{233}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{e}{234}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{e}{235}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{i}{236}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{\i}{236}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{i}{237}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{\i}{237}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{i}{238}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{\i}{238}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{i}{239}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{\i}{239}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "F0 = 240
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{n}{241}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{o}{242}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{o}{243}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{o}{244}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{o}{245}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{o}{246}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "F8 = 248
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\`}{T1}{u}{249}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{u}{250}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{u}{251}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{u}{252}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{y}{253}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.99b}{2004/01/03}{Added composites for \cs{k} (pr/3532)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\k}{T1}{o}{\textogonekcentered{o}}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\k}{T1}{O}{\textogonekcentered{O}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</T1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{1.4a}{1994/05/01}{Removed the uc/lc table settings, since
+% the T1 uc/lc table is now the default.}
+%
+% \subsection{Definitions for the OMS encoding}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6a}{1994/10/25}{Added the OMS encoding.}
+% \changes{v1.6b}{1994/10/27}{Renamed \cs{textlbrace} to
+% \cs{textbraceleft} and \cs{textrbrace} to \cs{textbraceright}.}
+% \changes{v1.6b}{1994/10/27}{Added \cs{textbackslash}.}
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added \cs{textcircled}.}
+%
+% The definitions for the `\TeX{} math symbol' (OMS) encoding. Even
+% though this is meant to be a math font, it includes some of the
+% standard \LaTeX{} text symbols.
+%
+% Declare the encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OMS>
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OMS}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the symbols.
+% \changes{v1.7t}{1995/11/29}{Added \cs{textbackslash} and
+% \cs{textbar}.}
+% \changes{v1.8c}{1996/10/27}
+% {Added \cs{textasteriskcentered}}
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \changes{v1.95}{2002/06/16}{Added \cs{textbardbl} (pr/3400)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.99}{2004/02/02}{Added \cs{textbigcircle}}
+% Note that slot 13 has in places been named |\Orb|: please root
+% out and destroy this impolity wherever you find it!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasteriskcentered}{OMS}{3} % "03
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbackslash}{OMS}{110} % "6E
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbar}{OMS}{106} % "6A
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbardbl}{OMS}{107} % "6B
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbraceleft}{OMS}{102} % "66
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbraceright}{OMS}{103} % "67
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbullet}{OMS}{15} % "0F
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdaggerdbl}{OMS}{122} % "7A
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdagger}{OMS}{121} % "79
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textparagraph}{OMS}{123} % "7B
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textperiodcentered}{OMS}{1} % "01
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textsection}{OMS}{120} % "78
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbigcircle}{OMS}{13} % "0D
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textcircled}{OMS}[1]{\hmode@bgroup
+ \ooalign{%
+ \hfil \raise .07ex\hbox {\upshape#1}\hfil \crcr
+ \char 13 % "0D
+ }%
+ \egroup}
+%</OMS>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Definitions for the OML encoding}
+%
+% \changes{v1.6d}{1994/10/30}{Added the OML encoding.}
+%
+% The definitions for the `\TeX{} math italic' (OML) encoding. Even
+% though this is meant to be a math font, it includes some of the
+% standard \LaTeX{} text symbols.
+%
+% Declare the encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OML>
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OML}{}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the symbols.
+% \changes{v1.7t}{1995/11/29}{Added \cs{textless} and
+% \cs{textgreater}.}
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}{Changed to decimal codes.}
+% \changes{v1.9m}{1998/01/16}{fixed decimal codes. latex/2734}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textless}{OML}{`\<}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textgreater}{OML}{`\>}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\t}{OML}{127} % "7F
+%</OML>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Definitions for the OT4 encoding}
+%
+% These definitions are for the Polish extension to the
+% `\TeX\ text' (OT1) encoding.
+% This encoding was created by B.~Jackowski and M.~Ry\'cko
+% for use with the Polish version of Computer Modern and Computer
+% Concrete. In positions 0--127 it is identical to OT1 but it
+% contains some additional characters in the upper half. The \LaTeX{}
+% support was developed by Mariusz Olko.
+%
+% The PL fonts that use it are available as follows:\\
+% Metafont sources
+% \texttt{ftp://ftp.gust.org.pl/TeX/language/polish/pl-mf.zip};
+%
+% Font files
+% \texttt{ftp://ftp.gust.org.pl/TeX/language/polish/pl-tfm.zip}.
+%
+% Declare the encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*OT4>
+\DeclareFontEncoding{OT4}{}{}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{OT4}{cmr}{m}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the accents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT4}{127}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\'}{OT4}{19}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\.}{OT4}{95}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\=}{OT4}{22}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{OT4}{94}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\`}{OT4}{18}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\~}{OT4}{126}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\H}{OT4}{125}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\u}{OT4}{21}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\v}{OT4}{20}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\r}{OT4}{23}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The ogonek accent is available only under a e A \& E. But we
+% have to provide some definition for \cs{k}. Some other accents
+% have to be built by hand as in OT1:
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\k}{OT4}[1]{%
+ \TextSymbolUnavailable{\k{#1}}#1}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\b}{OT4}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup\o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{29}%
+ \vbox to.2ex{\hbox{\char22}\vss}\hidewidth}\egroup}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\c}{OT4}[1]
+ {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\ifdim\ht\z@=1ex\accent24 #1%
+ \else{\ooalign{\unhbox\z@\crcr\hidewidth\char24\hidewidth}}\fi}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\d}{OT4}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup
+ \o@lign{\relax#1\crcr\hidewidth\sh@ft{10}.\hidewidth}\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the text symbols.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\AE}{OT4}{29}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\OE}{OT4}{30}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\O}{OT4}{31}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\L}{OT4}{138}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ae}{OT4}{26}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotleft}{OT4}{174}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotright}{OT4}{175}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\i}{OT4}{16}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\j}{OT4}{17}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\l}{OT4}{170}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\o}{OT4}{28}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\oe}{OT4}{27}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\quotedblbase}{OT4}{255}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{OT4}{25}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textemdash}{OT4}{124}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textendash}{OT4}{123}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textexclamdown}{OT4}{60}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\texthyphenchar}{OT4}{`\-}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\texthyphen}{OT4}{`\-}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquestiondown}{OT4}{62}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotedblleft}{OT4}{92}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotedblright}{OT4}{`\"}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquoteleft}{OT4}{`\`}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquoteright}{OT4}{`\'}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Definition for \r A as in OT1:
+% \changes{v1.96}{2002/10/28}{%
+% coding change, to follow bug fix by DEK in plain.tex (pr/3469)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\r}{OT4}{A}
+ {\leavevmode\setbox\z@\hbox{!}\dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@-1ex%
+ \rlap{\raise.67\dimen@\hbox{\char23}}A}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the OT4 encoding, \pounds~and \$ share a slot.
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textdollar}{OT4}{\hmode@bgroup
+ \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font >\z@
+ \slshape
+ \else
+ \upshape
+ \fi
+ \char`\$\egroup}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textsterling}{OT4}{\hmode@bgroup
+ \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font >\z@
+ \itshape
+ \else
+ \fontshape{ui}\selectfont
+ \fi
+ \char`\$\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Declare the composites.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\k}{OT4}{A}{129}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{C}{130}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\k}{OT4}{E}{134}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{N}{139}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{S}{145}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{Z}{153}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{OT4}{Z}{155}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\k}{OT4}{a}{161}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{c}{162}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\k}{OT4}{e}{166}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{n}{171}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{s}{177}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{z}{185}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\.}{OT4}{z}{187}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{O}{211}
+\DeclareTextComposite{\'}{OT4}{o}{243}
+%</OT4>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Definitions for the TS1 encoding}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9c}{1997/05/04}{Added TS1 encoding v2.2.beta}
+% \changes{v1.9g}{1997/11/23}
+% {Use \cs{textperthousand}, \cs{textpertenthousand} and
+% \cs{textfractionsolidus} not
+% \cs{textpermill}, \cs{textpertenmill} and \cs{textfraction}.
+% /2673 }
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}
+% {Removed default settings, see next section.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*TS1>
+\DeclareFontEncoding{TS1}{}{}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{TS1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some accents have to be built by hand.
+% Note that |\ooalign| and |\o@lign| must be inside a group.
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\capitalcedilla}{TS1}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup
+ \ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char11\hidewidth}\egroup}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\capitalogonek}{TS1}[1]
+ {\hmode@bgroup
+ \ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12\hidewidth}\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Accents for capital letters.
+%
+% These commands can be used by the end user either directly or through
+% definitions of the type
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{T1}{X}{\capitalacute X}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% None of the latter definitions are provided by default, since they
+% are probably rarely used.
+%
+% "00 = 0
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalgrave}{TS1}{0}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalacute}{TS1}{1}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalcircumflex}{TS1}{2}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitaltilde}{TS1}{3}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitaldieresis}{TS1}{4}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalhungarumlaut}{TS1}{5}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalring}{TS1}{6}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalcaron}{TS1}{7}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "08 = 8
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalbreve}{TS1}{8}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalmacron}{TS1}{9}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitaldotaccent}{TS1}{10}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Tie accents.
+%
+% The tie accent was borrowed from the |cmmi| font. The tc fonts
+% now provide four tie accents, the first two are done in the
+% classical way with assymetric glyphs hanging out of their boxes;
+% the new ties are centered in their boxes like all other accents.
+% They need a name: please tell us if you know what to call them.
+%
+% " =
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\t}{TS1}{26}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitaltie}{TS1}{27}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\newtie}{TS1}{28}
+\DeclareTextAccent{\capitalnewtie}{TS1}{29}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Compund word marks.
+%
+% The text companion fonts contain two compound word marks of
+% different heights, one has |cap_height|, the other |asc_height|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcapitalcompwordmark}{TS1}{23}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textascendercompwordmark}{TS1}{31}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The text companion symbols.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotestraightbase}{TS1}{13}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "10 = 16
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotestraightdblbase}{TS1}{18}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\texttwelveudash}{TS1}{21}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textthreequartersemdash}{TS1}{22}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "18 = 24
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textleftarrow}{TS1}{24}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textrightarrow}{TS1}{25}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "20 = 32
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textblank}{TS1}{32}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdollar}{TS1}{36}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textquotesingle}{TS1}{39}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "28 = 40
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasteriskcentered}{TS1}{42}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note that '054 is a comma and '056 is a full stop: these make
+% numbers using oldstyle digits easier to input.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdblhyphen}{TS1}{45}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textfractionsolidus}{TS1}{47}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Oldstyle digits.
+%
+% "30 = 48
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textzerooldstyle}{TS1}{48}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textoneoldstyle}{TS1}{49}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\texttwooldstyle}{TS1}{50}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textthreeoldstyle}{TS1}{51}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textfouroldstyle}{TS1}{52}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textfiveoldstyle}{TS1}{53}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textsixoldstyle}{TS1}{54}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textsevenoldstyle}{TS1}{55}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "38 = 56
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\texteightoldstyle}{TS1}{56}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textnineoldstyle}{TS1}{57}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% More text companion symbols.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textlangle}{TS1}{60}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textminus}{TS1}{61}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textrangle}{TS1}{62}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "48 = 72
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textmho}{TS1}{77}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9r}{1999/01/06}{Minor documentation fix.}
+% The big circle is here to define the command \cs{textcircled}.
+% Formerly it was taken from the |cmsy| font.
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}{Changed to decimal codes in \cs{ooalign}.}
+% \changes{v1.9k}{1998/01/12}{Adding missing braces and \cs{ushape}.}
+% \changes{v1.9y}{2000/01/30}{Use \cs{hmode@bgroup} where applicable
+% (pr/3160)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbigcircle}{TS1}{79}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\textcircled}{TS1}[1]{\hmode@bgroup
+ \ooalign{%
+ \hfil \raise .07ex\hbox {\upshape#1}\hfil \crcr
+ \char 79 % '117 = "4F
+ }%
+ \egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% More text companion symbols.
+%
+% "50 = 80
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textohm}{TS1}{87}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "58 = 88
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textlbrackdbl}{TS1}{91}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textrbrackdbl}{TS1}{93}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textuparrow}{TS1}{94}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdownarrow}{TS1}{95}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "60 = 96
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasciigrave}{TS1}{96}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textborn}{TS1}{98}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdivorced}{TS1}{99}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdied}{TS1}{100}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "68 = 104
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textleaf}{TS1}{108}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textmarried}{TS1}{109}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textmusicalnote}{TS1}{110}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "78 = 120
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\texttildelow}{TS1}{126}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This glyph, |\textdblhyphenchar| is hanging, like the hyphenchar of
+% the ec fonts.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdblhyphenchar}{TS1}{127}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "80 = 128
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasciibreve}{TS1}{128}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasciicaron}{TS1}{129}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This next glyph is \emph{not} the same as |\textquotedbl|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.9p}{1998/06/12}{Corrected 130 and 131, see pr/2834}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textacutedbl}{TS1}{130}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textgravedbl}{TS1}{131}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdagger}{TS1}{132}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdaggerdbl}{TS1}{133}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbardbl}{TS1}{134}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textperthousand}{TS1}{135}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "88 = 136
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbullet}{TS1}{136}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcelsius}{TS1}{137}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdollaroldstyle}{TS1}{138}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcentoldstyle}{TS1}{139}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textflorin}{TS1}{140}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcolonmonetary}{TS1}{141}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textwon}{TS1}{142}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textnaira}{TS1}{143}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "90 = 144
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textguarani}{TS1}{144}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textpeso}{TS1}{145}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textlira}{TS1}{146}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textrecipe}{TS1}{147}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textinterrobang}{TS1}{148}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textinterrobangdown}{TS1}{149}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdong}{TS1}{150}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\texttrademark}{TS1}{151}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "98 = 152
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textpertenthousand}{TS1}{152}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textpilcrow}{TS1}{153}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbaht}{TS1}{154}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textnumero}{TS1}{155}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This next name may change.
+% For the following sign we know only a german name, which is
+% abz\"uglich. The meaning is something like ``commercial minus''.
+% An ASCII ersatz is ./. (dot slash dot).
+% The temporary English name is |\textdiscount|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdiscount}{TS1}{156}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textestimated}{TS1}{157}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textopenbullet}{TS1}{158}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textservicemark}{TS1}{159}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "A0 = 160
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textlquill}{TS1}{160}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textrquill}{TS1}{161}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcent}{TS1}{162}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textsterling}{TS1}{163}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcurrency}{TS1}{164}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textyen}{TS1}{165}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbrokenbar}{TS1}{166}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textsection}{TS1}{167}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "A8 = 168
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasciidieresis}{TS1}{168}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcopyright}{TS1}{169}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textordfeminine}{TS1}{170}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcopyleft}{TS1}{171}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textlnot}{TS1}{172}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The meaning of the circled-P is ``sound recording copyright''.
+%
+% \changes{v1.9p}{1998/06/12}{Renamed \cs{textmacron} pr/2840}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcircledP}{TS1}{173}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textregistered}{TS1}{174}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasciimacron}{TS1}{175}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "B0 = 176
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdegree}{TS1}{176}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textpm}{TS1}{177}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\texttwosuperior}{TS1}{178}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textthreesuperior}{TS1}{179}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasciiacute}{TS1}{180}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textmu}{TS1}{181} % micro sign
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textparagraph}{TS1}{182}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textperiodcentered}{TS1}{183}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "B8 = 184
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textreferencemark}{TS1}{184}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textonesuperior}{TS1}{185}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textordmasculine}{TS1}{186}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textsurd}{TS1}{187}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textonequarter}{TS1}{188}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textonehalf}{TS1}{189}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textthreequarters}{TS1}{190}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\texteuro}{TS1}{191}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "E0 = 208
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\texttimes}{TS1}{214}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% "F0 = 240
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textdiv}{TS1}{246}
+%</TS1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Package files}
+%
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}{Added section.}
+% \changes{v1.9h}{1997/12/17}{Added code for textcomp.sty.}
+% This file now also contains some packages that provide access to
+% the more specialised encodings.
+%
+% \subsection{The fontenc package}
+%
+% \changes{v1.5c}{1994/05/14}{Added the fontenc package}
+% \changes{v1.5g}{1994/05/16}{Removed the lowercasing of the filename.}
+% \changes{v1.7a}{1994/11/30}{Always load the enc.def file, so that
+% the default encoding for the commands will change.}
+% \changes{v1.7x}{1996/05/18}{Produce error if encoding not found.
+% pr/2054}
+% \changes{v1.7y}{1996/05/21}{Corrected error message (CAR)}
+% \changes{v1.8d}{1996/11/18}
+% {(DPC) lowercase external file names. internal/1044}%
+% This package allows authors to specify which encodings they will use.
+% For each encoding |FOO|, the package looks to see if the encoding
+% |FOO| has already been declared. If it has not, the file |fooenc.def|
+% is loaded. The default encoding is set to be |FOO|.
+%
+% In addition the package at the moment contains extra code to extend
+% the |\@uclclist| (list of upper/lower case pairs) for encodings that
+% involve cyrillic characters. THIS IS A TEMPORARY SOLUTION and will not
+% stay this way forever (or so we hope) but right now we are missing a
+% proper interface for this and didn't wanted to rush it.
+% \changes{v1.9r}{1999/01/07}{Hackery to temp support cyrillic uc/lc}
+% \changes{v1.9t}{1999/02/24}{Corrected hackery cyrillic uc/lc list}
+% \changes{v1.9x}{1999/12/08}{Changed \cs{CYRRHOOK} and \cs{cyrrhook}
+% to\cs{CYRRHK} and \cs{cyrrhk} as name changed in the cyrillic
+% bundle for naming consistency with other ``hook'' glyphs.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here we define a macro that extends the |\@uclclist| if needed and
+% aferwards turns itself in a noop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\update@uclc@with@cyrillic{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\@uclclist\expandafter
+ {\@uclclist
+ \cyra\CYRA\cyrabhch\CYRABHCH\cyrabhchdsc\CYRABHCHDSC\cyrabhdze
+ \CYRABHDZE\cyrabhha\CYRABHHA\cyrae\CYRAE\cyrb\CYRB\cyrbyus
+ \CYRBYUS\cyrc\CYRC\cyrch\CYRCH\cyrchldsc\CYRCHLDSC\cyrchrdsc
+ \CYRCHRDSC\cyrchvcrs\CYRCHVCRS\cyrd\CYRD\cyrdelta\CYRDELTA
+ \cyrdje\CYRDJE\cyrdze\CYRDZE\cyrdzhe\CYRDZHE\cyre\CYRE\cyreps
+ \CYREPS\cyrerev\CYREREV\cyrery\CYRERY\cyrf\CYRF\cyrfita
+ \CYRFITA\cyrg\CYRG\cyrgdsc\CYRGDSC\cyrgdschcrs\CYRGDSCHCRS
+ \cyrghcrs\CYRGHCRS\cyrghk\CYRGHK\cyrgup\CYRGUP\cyrh\CYRH
+ \cyrhdsc\CYRHDSC\cyrhhcrs\CYRHHCRS\cyrhhk\CYRHHK\cyrhrdsn
+ \CYRHRDSN\cyri\CYRI\cyrie\CYRIE\cyrii\CYRII\cyrishrt\CYRISHRT
+ \cyrishrtdsc\CYRISHRTDSC\cyrizh\CYRIZH\cyrje\CYRJE\cyrk\CYRK
+ \cyrkbeak\CYRKBEAK\cyrkdsc\CYRKDSC\cyrkhcrs\CYRKHCRS\cyrkhk
+ \CYRKHK\cyrkvcrs\CYRKVCRS\cyrl\CYRL\cyrldsc\CYRLDSC\cyrlhk
+ \CYRLHK\cyrlje\CYRLJE\cyrm\CYRM\cyrmdsc\CYRMDSC\cyrmhk\CYRMHK
+ \cyrn\CYRN\cyrndsc\CYRNDSC\cyrng\CYRNG\cyrnhk\CYRNHK\cyrnje
+ \CYRNJE\cyrnlhk\CYRNLHK\cyro\CYRO\cyrotld\CYROTLD\cyrp\CYRP
+ \cyrphk\CYRPHK\cyrq\CYRQ\cyrr\CYRR\cyrrdsc\CYRRDSC\cyrrhk
+ \CYRRHK\cyrrtick\CYRRTICK\cyrs\CYRS\cyrsacrs\CYRSACRS
+ \cyrschwa\CYRSCHWA\cyrsdsc\CYRSDSC\cyrsemisftsn\CYRSEMISFTSN
+ \cyrsftsn\CYRSFTSN\cyrsh\CYRSH\cyrshch\CYRSHCH\cyrshha\CYRSHHA
+ \cyrt\CYRT\cyrtdsc\CYRTDSC\cyrtetse\CYRTETSE\cyrtshe\CYRTSHE
+ \cyru\CYRU\cyrushrt\CYRUSHRT\cyrv\CYRV\cyrw\CYRW\cyry\CYRY
+ \cyrya\CYRYA\cyryat\CYRYAT\cyryhcrs\CYRYHCRS\cyryi\CYRYI\cyryo
+ \CYRYO\cyryu\CYRYU\cyrz\CYRZ\cyrzdsc\CYRZDSC\cyrzh\CYRZH
+ \cyrzhdsc\CYRZHDSC}%
+ \let\update@uclc@with@cyrillic\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here we process each option:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption*{%
+ \let\encodingdefault\CurrentOption
+ \edef\reserved@f{%
+ \lowercase{\def\noexpand\reserved@f{\CurrentOption enc.def}}}%
+ \reserved@f
+ \InputIfFileExists\reserved@f
+ {}{\PackageError{fontenc}%
+ {Encoding file `\reserved@f' not found.%
+ \MessageBreak
+ You might have misspelt the name of the encoding}%
+ {Necessary code for this encoding was not
+ loaded.\MessageBreak
+ Thus calling the encoding later on will
+ produce further error messages.}}%
+ \let\reserved@f\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In case the current encoding is one of a list of known
+% cyrillic ones we extend the |\@uclclist|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
+ {T2A,T2B,T2C,X2,LCY,OT2}%
+ \ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% But only if it hasn't already been extended. This might happen if
+% there are several calls to fontenc loading one of the above
+% encodings. If we don't do this check the |\@uclclist| gets
+% unnecessarily big, slowing down the processing at runtime.
+% \changes{v1.9v}{1999/06/12}{Extend \cs{@uclclist} only once}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter\cyra\expandafter
+ {\@uclclist}%
+ \ifin@
+ \else
+ \update@uclc@with@cyrillic
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions*
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fontencoding\encodingdefault\selectfont
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% To save some space we get rid of the macro extending the
+% |\@uclclist| (might have happened already).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\update@uclc@with@cyrillic\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Finally we pretend that the fontenc package wasn't read in. This
+% allows for using it several times, e.g., in a class file and in the
+% preamble (at the cost of not getting any version info).
+% That kind of hackery shows that using a general purpose
+% package just for loading an encoding is not the right kind
+% of interface for setting up encodings --- it will get replaced at
+% some point in the future.
+% \changes{v1.9r}{1999/01/07}{Hackery to allow using fontenc several
+% times}
+% \changes{v1.9u}{1999/06/10}{Ensure that we also forget old options
+% (pr/2888)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\global\expandafter\let\csname ver@fontenc.sty\endcsname\relax
+\global\expandafter\let\csname opt@fontenc.sty\endcsname\relax
+\global\let\@ifl@ter@@\@ifl@ter
+\def\@ifl@ter#1#2#3#4#5{\global\let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@@}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The textcomp package}
+%
+% This one is for the |TS1| encoding which contains text symbols
+% for use with the |T1|-encoded text fonts. It therefore first
+% inputs the file |TS1enc.def| and then sets (or resets) the
+% defaults for the symbols it contains. The result of this is that
+% when one of these symbols is accessed and the current encoding
+% does not provide it, the symbol will be supplied by a silent,
+% local change to this encoding.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*TS1sty>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since many PostScript fonts only implement a subset of |TS1| many
+% commands only produce black blobs of ink. To resolve the
+% resulting problems a number of options have been introduced and
+% some code has been developed to distinguish sub-encodings.
+%
+% The sub-encodings have a numerical id and are defined as follows
+% for \texttt{TS1}:
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[\#5] those \texttt{TS1} symbols that are also in the ISO-Adobe
+% character set; without \verb=textcurrency=, which is often
+% misused for the Euro. Older Type1 fonts from the non-\TeX{}
+% world provide only this subset.
+%
+% \item[\#4] = \#5 + \verb=\texteuro=. Most newer fonts provide this.
+%
+% \item[\#3] = \#4 + \verb=\textomega=. Can also be described as
+% $\texttt{TS1} \cap (\texttt{ISO-Adobe} \cup
+% \texttt{MacRoman})$. (Except for the missing "currency".)
+
+%
+% \item[\#2] = \#3 + \verb=\textestimated= + \verb=\textcurrency=. Can
+% also be described as $\texttt{TS1} \cap
+% \texttt{Adobe-Western-2}$. This may be relevant for OpenType
+% fonts, which usually show the Adobe-Western-2 character set.
+%
+% \item[\#1] = \texttt{TS1} without \verb=\textcircled= and \verb=\t=.
+% These two glyphs are often not implemented and if their kernel
+% defaults are changed commands like \verb=\copyright=
+% unnecessarily fail.
+%
+% \item[\#0] = full \texttt{TS1}
+% \end{description}
+%
+% And here a summary to go in the transcript file:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\PackageInfo{textcomp}{Sub-encoding information:\MessageBreak
+ \space\space 5 = only ISO-Adobe without \string\textcurrency\MessageBreak
+ \space\space 4 = 5 + \string\texteuro\MessageBreak
+ \space\space 3 = 4 + \string\textohm\MessageBreak
+ \space\space 2 = 3 + \noexpand\textestimated+ \string\textcurrency\MessageBreak
+ \space\space 1 = TS1 - \noexpand\textcircled- \string\t\MessageBreak
+ \space\space 0 = TS1 (full)\MessageBreak
+ Font families with sub-encoding setting implement\MessageBreak
+ only a restricted character set as indicated.\MessageBreak
+ Family '?' is the default used for unknown fonts.\MessageBreak
+ See the documentation for details\@gobble}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareEncodingSubset}
+% An encoding subset to which a font family belongs is declared by
+% |\DeclareEncodingSubset| that take the major encoding as the
+% first argument (e.g., |TS1|), the family name as the second
+% argument (e.g., |cmr|), and the subset encoding id as a third,
+% (e.g., |0| for |cmr|).
+%
+% The default encoding subset to use when nothing is known about
+% the current font family is named |?|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareEncodingSubset#1#2#3{%
+ \@ifundefined{#1:#2}%
+ {\PackageInfo{textcomp}{Setting #2 sub-encoding to #1/#3}}%
+ {\PackageInfo{textcomp}{Changing #2 sub-encoding to #1/#3}}%
+ \@namedef{#1:#2}{#3}}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareEncodingSubset
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The options for the package are the following:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[safe]
+% for unknown font families enables only symbols that are also
+% in the ISO-Adobe character set; without "currency", which is
+% often misused for the Euro. Older Type1 fonts from the
+% non-TeX world provide only this subset.
+%
+% \item[euro]
+% enables the ``safe'' symbols plus the |\texteuro|
+% command. Most newer fonts provide this.
+%
+% \item[full] enables all |TS1| commands; useful only with fonts
+% like EC or CM bright.
+%
+% \item[almostfull]
+% same as ``full'', except that |\textcircled|
+% and |\t| are \emph{not} redefined from their defaults to avoid
+% that commands like |\copyright| suddenly no longer work.
+%
+% \item[force]
+% ignore all subset encoding definitions stored in the package
+% itself or in the configuration file and always use the default
+% subset as specifed by one of the other options (seldom useful,
+% only dangerous).
+% \end{description}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\iftc@forced}
+% Switch used to implement the \texttt{force} option
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftc@forced \tc@forcedfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% This is implemented by defining the default subset:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{full}{\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{?}{0}}
+\DeclareOption{almostfull}{\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{?}{1}}
+\DeclareOption{euro}{\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{?}{4}}
+\DeclareOption{safe}{\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{?}{5}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The default is ``almostfull'' which means that old documents will
+% work except that |\textcircled| and |\t| will use the kernel
+% defaults (with the advantage that this also works if the current
+% font (as often the case) doesn't implement these glyphs.
+%
+% The ``force'' option simply sets the switch to true.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{force}{\tc@forcedtrue}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The suggestions to user is to use the ``safe'' option always
+% unless that balks in which case they could switch to
+% ``almostfull'' but then better check their output manually.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tc@errorwarn{\PackageError}
+\DeclareOption{warn}{\gdef\tc@errorwarn#1#2#3{\PackageWarning{#1}{#2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{almostfull}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CheckEncodingSubset}
+% The command |\CheckEncodingSubset| will check if the current font
+% family has the right encoding subset to typeset a certain
+% command. It takes five arguments as follows:
+% first argument is either |\UseTextSymbol|, |\UseTextAccent|
+% depending on whether or not the symbol is a text symbol or a text
+% accent.
+
+% The second argument is the encoding from which this symbol should
+% be fetched.
+%
+% The third argument is either a fake accessor command or an error
+% message. the code in that argument (if ever executed) receives
+% two arguments: |#2| and |#5| of |\CheckEncodingSubset|.
+%
+% Argument four is the subset encoding id to test against: if this
+% value is higher than the subset id of the current font family
+% then we typeset the symbol, i.e., execute |#1{#2}#5| otherwise
+% it runs |#3#5|, e.g., to produce an error message or fake the
+% glyph somehow.
+%
+% Argument five is the symbol or accent command that is being
+% checked.
+%
+% For usage examples see definitions below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftc@forced
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the ``force'' option was given we always use the default for
+% testing against.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\CheckEncodingSubset#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifnum #4>%
+ 0\csname #2:?\endcsname
+ \relax
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
+ {#1{#2}}{#3}%
+ #5%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In normal circumstances the test is a bit more complicated: first
+% check if there exists a macro
+% |\|\meta{arg2}|:|\meta{current-family} and if so use that value
+% to test against, otherwise use the default to test against.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+\def\CheckEncodingSubset#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifnum #4>%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #2:\f@family\endcsname\relax
+ 0\csname #2:?\endcsname
+ \else
+ \csname #2:\f@family\endcsname
+ \fi
+ \relax
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi
+ {#1{#2}}{#3}%
+ #5%
+}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{tc@subst}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tc@subst#1{%
+ \tc@errorwarn{textcomp}% % should be latex error if general
+ {Symbol \string#1 not provided by\MessageBreak
+ font family \f@family\space
+ in TS1 encoding.\MessageBreak Default family used instead}\@eha
+ \bgroup\fontfamily\textcompsubstdefault\selectfont#1\egroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textcompsubstdefault}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\textcompsubstdefault{cmr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\tc@error}
+% |\tc@error| is going to be used in arg |#3| of
+% |\CheckEncodingSubset| when a symbol is not available in a
+% certain font family. It gets pass the encoding it normally lives
+% in (arg one) and the name of the symbol or accent that has a
+% problem.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% error commands take argument:
+% #1 symbol to be used
+\def\tc@error#1{%
+ \PackageError{textcomp}% % should be latex error if general
+ {Accent \string#1 not provided by\MessageBreak
+ font family \f@family\space
+ in TS1 encoding}\@eha
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tc@fake@euro}
+% |\tc@fake@euro| is an example of a ``fake'' definition to use in arg |#3| of
+% |\CheckEncodingSubset| when a symbol is not available in a
+% certain font family. Here we produce an Euro symbol by combining
+% a ``C'' with a ``=''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tc@fake@euro#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \PackageInfo{textcomp}{Faking \noexpand#1for font family
+ \f@family\MessageBreak in TS1 encoding}%
+ \valign{##\cr
+ \vfil\hbox to 0.07em{\dimen@\f@size\p@
+ \math@fontsfalse
+ \fontsize{.7\dimen@}\z@\selectfont=\hss}\vfil\cr%
+ \hbox{C}\crcr
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tc@check@symbol}
+% \begin{macro}{\tc@check@accent}
+% These are two abbreviations that we use below to check symbols
+% and accents in TS1. Only there to save some space, e.g., we can
+% then write
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}{\tc@check@symbol3\textcurrency}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% to ensure that |\textcurrency| is only typeset if the current
+% font has a \texttt{TS1} subset id of less than 3. Otherwise
+% |\tc@error| is called telling the user that for this font family
+% |\textcurreny| is not available.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tc@check@symbol{\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextSymbol{TS1}\tc@subst}
+\def\tc@check@accent{\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextAccent{TS1}\tc@error}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We start with the commands that are ``safe'' and which can be
+% unconditionally set up, first the accents\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalcedilla}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalogonek}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalgrave}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalacute}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalcircumflex}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitaltilde}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitaldieresis}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalhungarumlaut}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalring}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalcaron}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalbreve}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitalmacron}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\capitaldotaccent}{TS1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \ldots and then the other glyphs.
+% \changes{v1.9p}{1998/06/12}{Renamed \cs{textmacron} pr/2840}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textcapitalcompwordmark}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textascendercompwordmark}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textquotestraightbase}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textquotestraightdblbase}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\texttwelveudash}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textthreequartersemdash}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textquotesingle}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textasteriskcentered}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textfractionsolidus}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textminus}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textlbrackdbl}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textrbrackdbl}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textasciigrave}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\texttildelow}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textasciibreve}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textasciicaron}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textgravedbl}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textacutedbl}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdagger}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdaggerdbl}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbardbl}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textperthousand}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbullet}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textcelsius}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textflorin}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\texttrademark}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textcent}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textsterling}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textyen}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbrokenbar}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textsection}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textasciidieresis}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textcopyright}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textordfeminine}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textlnot}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textregistered}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textasciimacron}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdegree}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textpm}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\texttwosuperior}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textthreesuperior}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textasciiacute}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textmu}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textparagraph}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textperiodcentered}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textonesuperior}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textordmasculine}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textonequarter}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textonehalf}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textthreequarters}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\texttimes}{TS1}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdiv}{TS1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\texteuro| is only available for subsets with id 4 or
+% less. Otherwise we fake the glyph using |\tc@fake@euro|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteuro}
+ {\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextSymbol{TS1}\tc@fake@euro5\texteuro}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\textohm| is only available for subsets with id 3 or
+% less. Otherwise we produce an error.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textohm}{\tc@check@symbol4\textohm}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\textestimated| and |\textcurrency| are only provided for
+% fonts with subset encoding with id 2 or less.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textestimated}{\tc@check@symbol3\textestimated}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}{\tc@check@symbol3\textcurrency}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Nearly all of the remaining glyphs are provided only with fonts
+% with id 1 or 0, i.e., are essentially complete.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitaltie}{\tc@check@accent2\capitaltie}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\newtie}{\tc@check@accent2\newtie}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\capitalnewtie}{\tc@check@accent2\capitalnewtie}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textleftarrow}{\tc@check@symbol2\textleftarrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrightarrow}{\tc@check@symbol2\textrightarrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textblank}{\tc@check@symbol2\textblank}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdblhyphen}{\tc@check@symbol2\textdblhyphen}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textzerooldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textzerooldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textoneoldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textoneoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texttwooldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\texttwooldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textthreeoldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textthreeoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textfouroldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textfouroldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textfiveoldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textfiveoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsixoldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textsixoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsevenoldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textsevenoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteightoldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\texteightoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnineoldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textnineoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlangle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textlangle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrangle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textrangle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmho}{\tc@check@symbol2\textmho}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textbigcircle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textbigcircle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textuparrow}{\tc@check@symbol2\textuparrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdownarrow}{\tc@check@symbol2\textdownarrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textborn}{\tc@check@symbol2\textborn}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdivorced}{\tc@check@symbol2\textdivorced}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdied}{\tc@check@symbol2\textdied}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textleaf}{\tc@check@symbol2\textleaf}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmarried}{\tc@check@symbol2\textmarried}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textmusicalnote}{\tc@check@symbol2\textmusicalnote}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdblhyphenchar}{\tc@check@symbol2\textdblhyphenchar}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdollaroldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textdollaroldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcentoldstyle}{\tc@check@symbol2\textcentoldstyle}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcolonmonetary}{\tc@check@symbol2\textcolonmonetary}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textwon}{\tc@check@symbol2\textwon}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnaira}{\tc@check@symbol2\textnaira}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textguarani}{\tc@check@symbol2\textguarani}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpeso}{\tc@check@symbol2\textpeso}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlira}{\tc@check@symbol2\textlira}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrecipe}{\tc@check@symbol2\textrecipe}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textinterrobang}{\tc@check@symbol2\textinterrobang}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textinterrobangdown}{\tc@check@symbol2\textinterrobangdown}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdong}{\tc@check@symbol2\textdong}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpertenthousand}{\tc@check@symbol2\textpertenthousand}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textpilcrow}{\tc@check@symbol2\textpilcrow}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textbaht}{\tc@check@symbol2\textbaht}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textnumero}{\tc@check@symbol2\textnumero}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textdiscount}{\tc@check@symbol2\textdiscount}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textopenbullet}{\tc@check@symbol2\textopenbullet}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textservicemark}{\tc@check@symbol2\textservicemark}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textlquill}{\tc@check@symbol2\textlquill}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textrquill}{\tc@check@symbol2\textrquill}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcopyleft}{\tc@check@symbol2\textcopyleft}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcircledP}{\tc@check@symbol2\textcircledP}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textreferencemark}{\tc@check@symbol2\textreferencemark}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textsurd}{\tc@check@symbol2\textsurd}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\textcircled| and |\t| are handled specially, unless the
+% current font has a subset id of 0 (i.e. full \texttt{TS1}) we
+% pick the symbols up from the the math font encodings, i.e., the
+% third argument to |\CheckEncodingSubset| uses |\UseTextAccent| to
+% get them from there.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textcircled}
+ {\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextAccent{TS1}{\UseTextAccent{OMS}}1\textcircled}
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\t}
+ {\CheckEncodingSubset\UseTextAccent{TS1}{\UseTextAccent{OML}}1\t}
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+
+%
+% Finally input the encoding-specific definitions for
+% \texttt{TS1} thus making the top-level definitions
+% optimised for this encoding (and not for the default
+% encoding, see section~\ref{sec:orderofdecls}).
+% \changes{v1.9o}{1998/03/20}{Load decls after defaults for speed.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\input{ts1enc.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now having the new glyphs available we also want to make sure
+% that they are used. For most cases this will automatically happen
+% but for some glyphs there are inferior definitions already known
+% to \LaTeX{} which will prevent the usage of the \texttt{TS1}
+% versions (see section~\ref{sec:removeencspec} above). So we better
+% get rid of them:
+% \changes{v1.9o}{1998/03/20}{Added various \cs{UndeclareTextCommand}
+% declarations for pr/2783}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\UndeclareTextCommand{\textsterling}{OT1}
+\UndeclareTextCommand{\textdollar} {OT1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Similar declarations should probably be made for other encodings
+% like \texttt{OT4} if they are in use.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\UndeclareTextCommand{\textsterling}{OT4}
+%\UndeclareTextCommand{\textdollar} {OT4}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% From the \texttt{T1} encoding there are two candidates for removal:
+% \textperthousand{} and \textpertenthousand{} since these are both
+% constructed from \% followed by a tiny
+% `{\fontencoding{T1}\selectfont \char 24}'
+% rather than being a single glyph. The problem with this
+% approach is that in PostScript fonts this small zero is usually not
+% available resulting in \%\rule{3pt}{3pt} rather than
+% \textperthousand{} while the real glyph (at least for
+% |\textperthousand|) is available in the PostScript version of
+% \texttt{TS1}. So for the moment we compromise by removing the
+% \texttt{T1} declaration for |\textperthousand| but keeping the one
+% for |\textpertenthousand|. This will have the effect that with
+% Computer Modern fonts everything will come out (although
+% \textperthousand{} and \textpertenthousand{} are not taken from the
+% same physical font) and with PostScript fonts \textperthousand{}
+% will come out correctly while \textpertenthousand{} will most
+% likely look like \%\rule{6pt}{3pt} --- which is probably an
+% improvement over just getting a single `\rule{3pt}{3pt}' to
+% indicate a completely missing glyph, which would happen if we
+% also `undeclared' |\textpertenthousand|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\UndeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{T1}
+%\UndeclareTextCommand{\textpertenthousand}{T1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Supporting oldstyle digits}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\oldstylenums[1]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \ifmmode
+ \mathgroup\symletters #1%
+ \else
+ \CheckEncodingSubset\@use@text@encoding{TS1}%
+ {\PackageWarning{textcomp}%
+ {Oldstyle digits unavailable for
+ family \f@family.\MessageBreak
+ Lining digits used instead}}%
+ \tw@{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Subset encoding defaults}
+%
+% For many font families commonly used in the \TeX{} world we
+% provide the subset encoding data here. Users can add additional
+% font families in the file \texttt{textcomp.cfg} if they own other
+% fonts.
+%
+% However, if the option ``forced'' was given then all subset
+% encoding specifications are ignored, so there is no point in
+% setting any of them up:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftc@forced \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Computer modern based fonts (e.g., CM, CM-Bright, Concrete):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cmr} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cmss} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cmtt} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cmvtt} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cmbr} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{cmtl} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ccr} {0}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% PSNFSS fonts:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ptm} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pcr} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{phv} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ppl} {3}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pag} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pbk} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pnc} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pzc} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{bch} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{put} {5}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Other CTAN fonts (probably not complete):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{uag} {5}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ugq} {5}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ul8} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ul9} {4} % (LuxiSans, one day)
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{augie} {5}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{dayrom} {3}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{dayroms} {3}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pxr} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pxss} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pxtt} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{txr} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{txss} {0}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{txtt} {0}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Fourier-GUTenberg:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futs} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futx} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{futj} {4}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Y\&Y's Lucida Bright
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hlh} {3}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hls} {3}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hlst} {3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The remaining settings for Lucida are conservative: the following
+% fonts contain the |\textohm| character but not the |\texteuro|,
+% i.e., belong to neither subset~4 nor subset~3. If you want to
+% use the |\textohm| with these fonts copy these definition to
+% \texttt{textcomp.cfg} and change the subset to~3. However in that
+% case make sure that you do not use the |\texteuro|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hlct} {5}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hlx} {5}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hlce} {5}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hlcn} {5}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hlcw} {5}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{hlcf} {5}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Other commercial families\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pplx} {3}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{pplj} {3}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ptmx} {4}
+\DeclareEncodingSubset{TS1}{ptmj} {4}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If the file \texttt{textcomp.cfg} exists it will be loaded at
+% this point. This allows to define further subset encodings for
+% font families not covered by default.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{textcomp.cfg}
+ {\PackageInfo{textcomp}{Local configuration file used}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+%</TS1sty>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8212686c492
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutenc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{ot1enc.def}{
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{OT1}}
+ \file{omsenc.def}{
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{OMS}}
+ \file{omlenc.def}{
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{OML}}
+ \file{t1enc.def}{
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{T1}}
+ \file{ot4enc.def}{
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{OT4}}
+ \file{ts1enc.def}{
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{TS1}}
+ \file{textcomp.sty}{
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{TS1sty}}
+ \file{fontenc.sty}{
+ \from{ltoutenc.dtx}{package}}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d7eee068854
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltoutput.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,3963 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltoutput.dtx
+%<def1>\ProvidesFile{autoout1.sty}
+%<flafter>\ProvidesPackage{flafter}
+%<def1,flafter> [2000/07/23 v1.2i
+%<def1> Output Routine autoload file]
+%<flafter> Standard LaTeX floats after reference (FMi)]
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltoutput.dtx}
+ [2004/02/07 v1.2l LaTeX Kernel (Output Routine)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltoutput.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{Leslie Lamport, Frank Mittelbach, Chris Rowley}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{2764}
+%
+%
+% \iffalse
+% LATEX VERSION 2e
+% Copyright (C) 1992 by Leslie Lamport
+% Copyright (C) 1994-2000 by Leslie Lamport, LaTeX3 project
+%
+% LaTeX 2e kernel file for the output routine.
+%
+% Part of this file is the latest (not greatest, it still
+% deserves its name) version of kludge.sty.
+%
+% It also contains a few enhancements and many changes (corrections
+% and tidyings) to the float mechanism and other parts of the output
+% routine.
+%
+% The tracing in the file at present is mainly to help in testing the
+% code but it may well be developed into a full float tracing
+% package one day.
+%
+% ============================
+% \fi
+%
+% \changes{v1.1p}{1995/08/25}{Support autoloading feature (FMi).}
+% \task{CAR}{Update documentation.}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/02/08}{Documentation and tasks tidied.}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Driver added and further tidying.}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Some boxmaxdepth settings removed.}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Added some warnings when page gets full of
+% top floats.}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Removed duplicated code and corrected
+% docstrip options.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Removed some long lines and other
+% aesthetic changes.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Corrected unverbed commands in
+% documentation.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Changed \cs{@normalsize} to
+% \cs{normalsize}.}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Warning messages changed/corrected.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Added \cs{col@number}.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Fixed bug from \cs{dblfigrule} with
+% \cs{@topnewpage}.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Documentation tidied.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{\cs{@activechar@warning} changed to an
+% info message.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Full of floats action improved.}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Empty column action added.}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/05/02}{Code of \cs{@resethfps} shortened.}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/05/12}{\cs{normalcolor}added in various
+% places (DPC).}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/05/16}{Changed setting of accents (FMi).}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1994/05/20}{Added setting of \cs{protect}
+% during \cs{shipout}.}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1994/05/22}{Changed warnings and infos to
+% new commands.}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1994/05/23}{Added \cs{MessageBreak}.}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1994/05/23}{Changed resetting of \cs{protect} after
+% shipout.}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1994/05/25}{Extra documentation.}
+% \changes{v1.0w}{1994/06/01}{Tidied up typesetting.}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/14}{Removed old definition of \cs{@testfp}.}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}.}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1995/05/07}{Use \cs{hb@xt@}.}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \def \ie {i.e.~}
+% \def \eg {e.g.~}
+%
+% \section{Output Routine}
+%
+% \subsection{Floats}
+%
+% The `2ekernel' code ensures that a |\usepackage{autoout1}| is
+% essentially ignored if a `full' format is being used that has
+% the autoload file mode already in the format.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<defx>\begingroup
+%<defx>\makeatletter
+%<defx>\nfss@catcodes
+%<2ekernel>\expandafter\let\csname ver@autoout1.sty\endcsname\fmtversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\message{output,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% ****************************************
+% * OUTPUT *
+% ****************************************
+%
+%
+% PAGE LAYOUT PARAMETERS
+%
+% \topmargin : Extra space added to top of page.
+% @twoside : boolean. T if two-sided printing
+% \oddsidemargin : IF @twoside = T
+% THEN extra space added to left of odd-numbered
+% pages.
+% ELSE extra space added to left of all pages.
+% \evensidemargin : IF @twoside = T
+% THEN extra space added to left of even-numbered
+% pages.
+% \headheight : height of head
+% \headsep : separation between head and text
+% \footskip : distance separation between baseline of last
+% line of text and baseline of foot.
+% Note difference between \footSKIP and \headSEP.
+% \textheight : height of text on page, excluding head and foot
+% \textwidth : width of printing on page
+% \columnsep : IF @twocolumn = T
+% THEN width of space between columns
+% \columnseprule : IF @twocolumn = T
+% THEN width of rule between columns (0 if none).
+% \columnwidth : IF @twocolumn = T
+% THEN (\textwidth - \columnsep)/2
+% ELSE \textwidth
+% It is set by the \twocolumn and
+% \onecolumn commands.
+% \@textbottom : Command executed at bottom of vbox holding text of
+% page (including figures). The \raggedbottom
+% command almost \let's this to \vfil (actually sets
+% it to \vskip \z@ plus.0001fil).
+% Should have depth 0pt.
+%
+% \@texttop : Command executed at top of vbox holding text of
+% page (including figures). Used by letter style;
+% can also be used to produce centered pages.
+% Let to \relax by \raggedbottom and \flushbottom.
+%
+% Page layout must initialize \@colht and \@colroom to \textheight.
+%
+% PAGE STYLE PARAMETERS:
+%
+% \floatsep : Space left between floats.
+% \textfloatsep : Space between last top float or first bottom float
+% and the text.
+% \topfigrule : Command to place rule (or whatever) between floats
+% at top of page and text. Executed in inner
+% vertical mode right before the \textfloatsep skip
+% separating the floats from the text. Must occupy
+% zero vertical space. (See \footnoterule.)
+% \botfigrule : Same as \topfigrule, but put after the
+% \textfloatsep skip separating text from the
+% floats at bottom of page.
+% \intextsep : Space left on top and bottom of an in-text float.
+% \dblfloatsep : Space between double-column floats.
+% \dbltextfloatsep : Space between top double-column floats
+% and text.
+% \dblfigrule : Similar to \topfigrule, but for double-column
+% floats.
+% \@fptop : Glue to go at top of float column -- must be 0pt +
+% stretch
+% \@fpsep : Glue to go between floats in a float column.
+% \@fpbot : Glue to go at bottom of float column
+% -- must be 0pt +
+% stretch
+% \@dblfptop, \@dblfpsep, \@dblfpbot
+% : Analogous for double-column float page in
+% two-column format.
+%
+% FOOTNOTES: As in PLAIN, footnotes use \insert\footins.
+%
+% PAGE LAYOUT SWITCHES AND MACROS
+%
+% @twocolumn : Boolean. T if two columns per page globally.
+%
+% PAGE STYLE MACROS AND SWITCHES
+%
+% \@oddhead : IF @twoside = T
+% THEN macro to generate head of odd-numbered
+% pages.
+% ELSE macro to generate head of all pages.
+% \@evenhead : IF @twoside = T
+% THEN macro to generate head of even-numbered
+% pages.
+% \@oddfoot : IF @twoside = T
+% THEN macro to generate foot of odd-numbered
+% pages.
+% ELSE macro to generate foot of all pages.
+% \@evenfoot : IF @twoside = T
+% THEN macro to generate foot of even-numbered
+% pages.
+% @specialpage : boolean. T if current page is to have a special
+% format.
+% \@specialstyle : If its value is foo then
+% IF @specialpage = T
+% THEN the command \ps@foo is executed to
+% temporarily reset the page style parameters
+% before composing the current page.
+% This command should execute only \def's and
+% \edef's, making only local definitions.
+%
+% FLOAT PLACEMENT PARAMETERS
+%
+% The following parameters are set by the macro \@floatplacement.
+% When \@floatplacement is called,
+% \@colht is the height of the page or column being built. I.e.:
+% * For single-column page it equals \textheight.
+% * For double-column page it equals \textheight - height
+% of double-column floats on page.
+% Note that some are set globally and some locally:
+% \@topnum :=G Maximum number of floats allowed on the top of a
+% column.
+% \@toproom :=G Maximum amount of top of column devoted to floats--
+% excluding \textfloatsep separation below the floats
+% and \floatsep separation between them. For
+% two-column output, should be computed as a function
+% of \@colht.
+% \@botnum, \@botroom
+% : Analogous to above.
+% \@colnum :=G Maximum number of floats allowed in a column,
+% including in-text floats.
+% \@textmin :=L Minimum amount of text (excluding footnotes) that
+% must appear on a text page.
+% %% 27 Sep 85 : made local to
+% %% \@addtocurcol and \@addtonextcol
+% It is now also used locally in processing double
+% floats.
+% \@fpmin :=L Minimum height of floats in a float column.
+%
+% The macro \@dblfloatplacement sets the following parameters.
+% \@dbltopnum :=G Maximum number of double-column floats allowed at
+% the top of a two-column page.
+% \@dbltoproom :=G Maximum height of double-column floats allowed at
+% top of two-column page.
+% \@fpmin :=L Minimum height of floats in a float column.
+% It should also perform the following local assignments where necessary
+% -- i.e., where the new value differs from the old one:
+% \@fptop :=L \@dblfptop
+% \@fpsep :=L \@dblfpsep
+% \@fpbot :=L \@dblfpbot
+%
+% OUTPUT ROUTINE VARIABLES
+%
+% \@colht : The total height of the current column. In single column
+% style, it equals \textheight. In two-column style, it is
+% \textheight minus the height of the double-column floats
+% on the current page. MUST BE INITIALIZED TO \textheight.
+%
+% \@colroom : The height available in the current column for text and
+% footnotes. It equals \@colht minus the height of all
+% floats committed to the top and bottom of the current
+% column.
+%
+% \@textfloatsheight : The total height of in-text floats on the
+% current page.
+%
+% \footins : Footnote insertion number.
+%
+% \@maxdepth : Saved value of TeX's \maxdepth. Must be set
+% when any routine sets \maxdepth.
+%
+% CALLING THE OUTPUT ROUTINE
+% --------------------------
+%
+% The output routine is called either by TeX's normal page-breaking
+% mechanism, or by a macro putting a penalty < or = -10000 in the output
+% list. In the latter case, the penalty indicates why the output
+% routine was called, using the following code.
+%
+% penalty reason
+% ------- ------
+% -10000 \pagebreak
+% \newpage
+% -10001 \clearpage (\penalty -10000 \vbox{} \penalty -10001)
+% -10002 float insertion, called from horizontal mode
+% -10003 float insertion, called from vertical mode.
+% -10004 float insertion.
+%
+% Note: A float or marginpar puts the following sequence in the output
+% list: (i) a penalty of -10004,
+% (ii) a null \vbox
+% (iii) a penalty of -10002 or -10003.
+% This solves two special problems:
+% 1. If the float comes right after a \newpage or \clearpage,
+% then the first penalty is ignored, but the second one
+% invokes the output routine.
+% 2. If there is a split footnote on the page, the second 'page'
+% puts out the rest of the footnote.
+%
+% THE OUTPUT ROUTINE
+% ------------------
+%
+% FUNCTIONS USED IN THE OUTPUT ROUTINE:
+%
+% \@outputpage : Produces an output page with the contents of box
+% \@outputbox as the text part.
+% Also sets \@colht :=G \textheight.
+% The page style is determined as follows.
+% IF @thispagestyle = true
+% THEN use \thispagestyle style
+% ELSE use ordinary page style.
+%
+% \@tryfcolumn\FLIST : Tries to form a float column composed of floats
+% from \FLIST (if nonempty) with the following parameters:
+% \@colht : height of box
+% \@fpmin : minimum height of floats in the box
+% \@fpsep : interfloat space
+% \@fptop : glue at top of box
+% \@fpbot : glue at bottom of box.
+% If it succeeds, then it does the following:
+% * \@outputbox :=L the composed float box.
+% * @fcolmade :=G true
+% * \FLIST :=G \FLIST - floats put in box
+% * \@freelist :=G \@freelist + floats put in box
+% If it fails, then:
+% * @fcolmade :=G false
+% NOTE: BIT MUST BE A SINGLE TOKEN!
+%
+% \@makefcolumn \FLIST : Same as \@tryfcolumn except that it
+% fails to make a float column only if \FLIST is empty.
+% Otherwise, it makes a float column containing at least
+% the first box in \FLIST, disregarding \@fpmin.
+%
+% \@startcolumn :
+% Calls \@tryfcolumn\@deferlist. If \@tryfcolumn returns with
+% (globally set) @fcolmade = false, then:
+% * Globally sets \@toplist and \@botlist to floats
+% from \@deferlist to go at top and bottom of column,
+% deleting them from \@deferlist. It does
+% this using \@colht as the total height, the page
+% style parameters \@floatsep and \@textfloatsep, and
+% the float placement parameters \@topnum, \@toproom,
+% \@botnum, \@botroom, \@colnum and \textfraction.
+% * Globally sets \@colroom to \@colht minus the height
+% of the added floats.
+%
+% \@startdblcolumn :
+% Calls \@tryfcolumn\@dbldeferlist{8}. If \@tryfcolumn returns
+% with (globally set) @fcolmade = false, then:
+% * Globally sets \@dbltoplist to floats from
+% \@dbldeferlist to go at top and bottom of column,
+% deleting them from \@dbldeferlist.
+% It does this using \textheight as the
+% total height, and the parameters \@dblfloatsep, etc.
+% * Globally sets \@colht to \textheight minus the height
+% of the added floats.
+%
+% \@combinefloats : Combines the text from box
+% \@outputbox with the floats from \@toplist and \@botlist,
+% putting the new box in \@outputbox. It uses \floatsep
+% and \textfloatsep for the appropriate separations.
+% It puts the elements of \TOPLIST and \BOTLIST onto
+% \@freelist, and makes those lists null.
+%
+% \@makecol : Makes the contents of \box255 plus the accumulated
+% footnotes, plus the floats in \@toplist and \@botlist,
+% into a single column of height \@colht (unless the page
+% height has been locally changed), which it puts
+% into box \@outputbox. It puts boxes in \@midlist back
+% onto \@freelist and restores \maxdepth.
+%
+% \@opcol : Outputs a column whose text is in box \@outputbox
+% If @twocolumn = false, then it calls \@outputpage,
+% sets \@colht :=G \textheight, and calls \@floatplacement.
+%
+% If @twocolumn = true, then:
+% If @firstcolumn = true, then it puts box \@outputbox
+% into \@leftcolumn and sets @firstcolumn :=G false.
+%
+% If @firstcolumn = false, then it puts out the current
+% two-column page, any possible two-column float pages,
+% and determines \@dbltoplist for the next page.
+%
+%
+%
+% USER COMMANDS THAT CALL OR AFFECT THE OUTPUT ROUTINE
+% ----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% \newpage == BEGIN \par\vfil\penalty -10000 END
+%
+% \clearpage == BEGIN \newpage
+% \write -1{} % Part of hack to make sure no
+% \vbox{} % \write's get lost.
+% \penalty -10001
+% END
+%
+% \cleardoublepage == BEGIN \clearpage
+% if @twoside = true and c@page is even
+% then \hbox{} \newpage fi
+% END
+%
+%
+% \twocolumn[BOX] : starts a new page, changing to twocolumn setting
+% and puts BOX in a parbox of width \textwidth across the top.
+% Useful for full-width titles for double-column pages.
+% SURPRISE: The stretch from \@dbltextfloatsep will be inserted
+% between the BOX and the top of the two columns.
+%
+%
+% FLOAT-HANDLING MECHANISMS
+% -------------------------
+%
+% The float environment obtains an insertion number B from the
+% \@freelist (see below for a description of list manipulation), puts
+% the float into box B and sets \count B to a FLOAT SPECIFIER. For
+% a normal (not double-column) float, it then causes a page break
+% in one of the following two ways:
+% - In outer hmode: \vadjust{\penalty -10002}
+% - In vmode : \penalty -10003.
+% For a double-column float, it puts B onto the \@dbldeferlist.
+% The float specifier has two components:
+% * A PLACEMENT SPECIFICATION, describing where the float may
+% be placed.
+% * A TYPE, which is a power of two--e.g., figures might be
+% type 1 floats, tables type 2 floats, programs type 4 floats, etc.
+% The float specifier is encoded as follows, where bit 0 is the least
+% significant bit.
+%
+% Bit Meaning
+% --- -------
+% 0 1 iff the float may go where it appears in the text.
+% 1 1 iff the float may go on the top of a page.
+% 2 1 iff the float may go on the bottom of a page.
+% 3 1 iff the float may go on a float page.
+% 4 1 unless the PLACEMENT incluses a !
+% 5 1 iff a type 1 float
+% 6 1 iff a type 2 float
+% etc.
+%
+% A negative float specifier is used to indicate a marginal note.
+%
+% MACROS AND DATA STRUCTURES FOR PROCESSING FLOATS
+% ------------------------------------------------
+%
+% A FLOAT LIST consisting of the floats in boxes \boxa ... \boxN has
+% the form:
+% \@elt \boxa ... \@elt \boxN
+% where \boxI is defined by
+% \newinsert\boxI
+% Normally, \@elt is \let to \relax. A test can be performed on the
+% entire float list by locally \def'ing \@elt appropriately and
+% executing the list.
+% This is a lot more efficient than looping through the list.
+%
+% The following macros are used for manipulating float lists.
+%
+% \@next \CS \LIST {NONEMPTY}{EMPTY} == %% NOTE: ASSUME \@elt = \relax
+% BEGIN assume that \LIST == \@elt \B1 ... \@elt \Bn
+% if n = 0
+% then EMPTY
+% else \CS :=L \B1
+% \LIST :=G \@elt \B2 ... \@elt \Bn
+% NONEMPTY
+% fi
+% END
+%
+%
+% \@bitor\NUM\LIST : Globally sets switch @test to the disjunction for
+% all I of bit log2 \NUM of the float specifiers of all the
+% floats in \LIST.
+% I.e., @test is set to true iff there is at least one
+% float in \LIST having bit log2 \NUM of its float specifier
+% equal to 1.
+%
+% Note: log2 [(\count I)/32] is the bit number corresponding to the
+% type of float I. To see if there is any float in \LIST having
+% the same type as float I, you run \@bitor with
+% \NUM = [(\count I)/32] * 32.
+%
+% \@bitor\NUM\LIST ==
+% BEGIN
+% @test :=G false
+% { \@elt \CTR == if \NUM <> 0 then
+% if \count\CTR / \NUM is odd
+% then @test := true fi fi
+% \LIST
+% }
+% END
+%
+%
+% \@cons\LIST\NUM : Globally sets \LIST := \LIST * \@elt \NUM
+%
+% \@cons\LIST\NUM ==
+% BEGIN { \@elt == \relax
+% \LIST :=G \LIST \@elt \NUM
+% }
+%
+% BOX LISTS FOR FLOAT-PLACEMENT ALGORITHMS
+%
+% \@freelist : List of empty boxes for placing new floats.
+% \@toplist : List of floats to go at top of current column.
+% \@midlist : List of floats in middle of current column.
+% \@botlist : List of floats to go at bottom of current column.
+% \@deferlist : List of floats to go after current column.
+% \@dbltoplist : List of double-col. floats to go at top of current
+% page.
+% \@dbldeferlist : List of double-column floats to go on subsequent
+% pages.
+%
+% FLOAT-PLACEMENT ALGORITHMS
+%
+%
+% \@addtobot : Tries to put insert \@currbox on \@botlist.
+% Called only when:
+% * \ht BOX < \@colroom
+% * type of \@currbox not on \@deferlist
+% * \@colnum > 0
+% * @insert = false
+% If it succeeds, then:
+% * sets @insert true
+% * decrements \@botroom by \ht BOX
+% * decrements \@botnum and \@colnum by 1
+% * decrements \@colroom by \ht BOX + either \floatsep
+% or \textfloatsep, as appropriate.
+% * sets \maxdepth to 0pt
+%
+% \@addtotoporbot : Tries to put insert \@currbox on \@toplist or
+% \@botlist.
+% Called only under same conditions as \@addtobot.
+% If it succeeds, then:
+% * sets @insert true
+% * decrements \@toproom or \@botroom by \ht BOX
+% * decrements \@colnum and either \@topnum or
+% \@botnum by 1
+% * decrements \@colroom by \ht BOX + \floatsep
+% or \textfloatsep, as appropriate.
+%
+% \@addtocurcol : Tries to add \@currbox to current column, setting
+% @insert true if it succeeds, false otherwise.
+% It will add \@currbox to top only if bit 0 of
+% \count \@currbox is 0, and to the bottom only if
+% bit 0 = 0 or an earlier float of the same type is
+% put on the bottom.
+% If the float is put in the text, then
+% \penalty\interlinepenalty is put
+% right after the float, before the following \vskip,
+% and \outputpenalty :=L 0.
+%
+% \@addtonextcol : Tries to add \@currbox to the next column, setting
+% @insert true if it succeeds, false otherwise.
+%
+% \@addtodblcol : Tries to add \@currbox to the next double-column page,
+% adding it to \@dbltoplist if it succeeds and
+% \@dbldeferlist if it fails.
+%
+%
+% \@addmarginpar ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@currlist nonempty
+% then remove \@marbox from \@currlist
+% add \@marbox and \@currbox to \@freelist
+% %% NOTE: \@currbox = left box
+% else LaTeX error: ? %% shouldn't happen
+% fi
+% \@tempcnta := 1 %% 1 = right, -1 = left
+% if @twocolumn = true
+% then if @firstcolumn = true
+% then \@tempcnta := -1
+% fi
+% else if @mparswitch = true
+% then if count0 odd
+% else \@tempcnta := -1
+% fi
+% fi
+% if @reversemargin = true
+% then \@tempcnta := -\@tempcnta
+% fi
+% fi
+% if \@tempcnta < 0 then \box\@marbox :=G \box\@currbox
+% fi
+% \@tempdima :=L maximum(\@mparbottom - \@pageht
+% + ht of \@marbox, 0)
+% if \@tempdima > 0 then LaTeX warning: 'marginpar moved' fi
+% \@mparbottom :=G \@pageht + \@tempdima + depth of \@marbox
+% + \marginparpush
+% \@tempdima :=L \@tempdima - ht of \@marbox
+% \box\@marbox :=G \box\@currbox
+% \vbox { \vskip \@tempdima
+% \box\@marbox
+% }
+% height of \@marbox :=G depth of \@marbox :=G 0
+% \kern -\@pagedp
+% \nointerlineskip
+% \hbox{ if @tempcnta > 0 then \hskip \columnwidth
+% \hskip \marginparsep
+% else \hskip -\marginparsep
+% \hskip -\marginparwidth
+% fi
+% \box\@marbox \hss
+% }
+% \nobreak
+% \nointerlineskip
+% \hbox{\vrule height 0 width 0 depth \@pagedp}
+% END
+%
+% Floats and marginpars add a lot of dead cycles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\maxdeadcycles = 100
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@elt\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@next#1#2#3#4{\ifx#2\@empty #4\else
+ \expandafter\@xnext #2\@@#1#2#3\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xnext \@elt #1#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\gdef#4{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1v}{1996/07/26}{put \cs{global} into definition}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@testfalse{\global\let\if@test\iffalse}
+\def\@testtrue {\global\let\if@test\iftrue}
+\@testfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1v}{1996/07/26}{remove \cs{global} before \cs{@test...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bitor#1#2{\@testfalse {\let\@elt\@xbitor
+ \@tempcnta #1\relax #2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% RmS 91/11/22: Added test for |\count#1 = 0|.
+% Suggested by Chris Rowley.
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.1v}{1996/07/26}{remove \cs{global} before \cs{@test...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xbitor #1{\@tempcntb \count#1
+ \ifnum \@tempcnta =\z@
+ \else
+ \divide\@tempcntb\@tempcnta
+ \ifodd\@tempcntb \@testtrue\fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% DEFINITION OF FLOAT BOXES:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newinsert\bx@A
+\newinsert\bx@B
+\newinsert\bx@C
+\newinsert\bx@D
+\newinsert\bx@E
+\newinsert\bx@F
+\newinsert\bx@G
+\newinsert\bx@H
+\newinsert\bx@I
+\newinsert\bx@J
+\newinsert\bx@K
+\newinsert\bx@L
+\newinsert\bx@M
+\newinsert\bx@N
+\newinsert\bx@O
+\newinsert\bx@P
+\newinsert\bx@Q
+\newinsert\bx@R
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@freelist{\@elt\bx@A\@elt\bx@B\@elt\bx@C\@elt\bx@D\@elt\bx@E
+ \@elt\bx@F\@elt\bx@G\@elt\bx@H\@elt\bx@I\@elt\bx@J
+ \@elt\bx@K\@elt\bx@L\@elt\bx@M\@elt\bx@N
+ \@elt\bx@O\@elt\bx@P\@elt\bx@Q\@elt\bx@R}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@toplist{}
+\gdef\@botlist{}
+\gdef\@midlist{}
+\gdef\@currlist{}
+\gdef\@deferlist{}
+\gdef\@dbltoplist{}
+\gdef\@dbldeferlist{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% PAGE LAYOUT PARAMETERS
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\topmargin
+\newdimen\oddsidemargin
+\newdimen\evensidemargin
+\let\@themargin=\oddsidemargin
+\newdimen\headheight
+\newdimen\headsep
+\newdimen\footskip
+\newdimen\textheight
+\newdimen\textwidth
+\newdimen\columnwidth
+\newdimen\columnsep
+\newdimen\columnseprule
+\newdimen\marginparwidth
+\newdimen\marginparsep
+\newdimen\marginparpush
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDvi}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Added macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@begindvibox}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Added macro}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/14}{Use normal box register: why a box?}
+% \changes{v1.1l}{1995/04/24}{Add \cs{vbox} latex/1392}
+%
+% We use a box register in which to put
+% stuff that must appear before anything else in the
+% |.dvi| file.
+%
+% The stuff in the box should not add any typeset material to the
+% page when it is unboxed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\@begindvibox
+\def \AtBeginDvi #1{%
+ \global \setbox \@begindvibox
+ \vbox{\unvbox \@begindvibox #1}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@maxdepth}
+% This is not the right place to set this; it needs to be set in a
+% class/style file when |\maxdepth| is set.
+%
+% Also, many settings to |\maxdepth| should be to |\@maxdepth|,
+% probably?
+% \task{All}{Sort out maxdepth: both should be set in the class files.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@maxdepth
+\@maxdepth = \maxdepth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\paperheight}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/11/23}{Register added}
+% \begin{macro}{\paperwidth}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1993/11/23}{Register added}
+% New |\paper|\ldots\ registers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\paperheight
+\newdimen\paperwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@insert}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@fcolmade}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@specialpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstcolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twoside}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@reversemarginpar}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mparswitch}
+% \begin{macro}{\col@number}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Added \cs{col@number}}
+% Local switches first:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif \if@insert
+% \end{macrocode}
+% These should definitely be global:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif \if@fcolmade
+\newif \if@specialpage \@specialpagefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% These should be global but are not always set globally in other
+% files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif \if@firstcolumn \@firstcolumntrue
+\newif \if@twocolumn \@twocolumnfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not sure about these: two questions.
+% Should things which must apply to a whole doument be local or
+% global (they probably should be `preamble only' commands)?
+% Are these three such things?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif \if@twoside \@twosidefalse
+\newif \if@reversemargin \@reversemarginfalse
+\newif \if@mparswitch \@mparswitchfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This counter has been imported from `multicol'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount \col@number
+\col@number \@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% INTERNAL REGISTERS
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@topnum
+\newdimen\@toproom
+\newcount\@dbltopnum
+\newdimen\@dbltoproom
+\newcount\@botnum
+\newdimen\@botroom
+\newcount\@colnum
+\newdimen\@textmin
+\newdimen\@fpmin
+\newdimen\@colht
+\newdimen\@colroom
+\newdimen\@pageht
+\newdimen\@pagedp
+\newdimen\@mparbottom \@mparbottom\z@
+\newcount\@currtype
+\newbox\@outputbox
+\newbox\@leftcolumn
+\newbox\@holdpg
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@thehead{\@oddhead} % initialization
+\def\@thefoot{\@oddfoot}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clearpage}
+% \changes{v1.1r}{1995/10/11}{Added a check so that it does not lose
+% the argument of \cs{twocolumn[...]}}
+%
+% The tests at the beginning are an experimental attempt to avoid a
+% completely empty page after a |\twocolumn[...]|. This prevents the
+% text from the argument vanishing into a float box, never to be seen
+% again. We hope that it does not produce wrong formatting in other
+% cases.
+% \changes{v1.1v}{1996/07/26}{add number of missing percents}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\clearpage{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \ifnum \@dbltopnum =\m@ne
+ \ifdim \pagetotal <\topskip
+ \hbox{}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \newpage
+ \write\m@ne{}%
+ \vbox{}%
+ \penalty -\@Mi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
+ \hbox{}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\onecolumn}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Added setting of \cs{col@number}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+\def\onecolumn{%
+ \clearpage
+ \global\columnwidth\textwidth
+ \global\hsize\columnwidth
+ \global\linewidth\columnwidth
+ \global\@twocolumnfalse
+ \col@number \@ne
+ \@floatplacement}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newpage}
+% \changes{v1.1x}{1996/09/29}{Checks for noskipsec and inlabel added}
+% \changes{v1.1x}{1996/09/29}{Checks for noskipsec and inlabel added}
+% \changes{v1.1y}{1996/09/30}{Checks for noskipsec and inlabel removed
+% pending further tests}
+% \changes{v1.1z}{1996/10/24}{Better checks for noskipsec and
+% inlabel added, plus nobreak}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1996/10/25}{Reset all flags explicitly}
+% The two checks at the beginning ensure that an item label or
+% run-in section title immediately before a |\newpage| get printed
+% on the correct page, the one before the page break.
+%
+% All three tests are largely to make error processing more robust;
+% that is why they all reset the flags explicitly, even when it
+% would appear that this would be done by a |\leavevmode|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \newpage {%
+ \if@noskipsec
+ \ifx \@nodocument\relax
+ \leavevmode
+ \global \@noskipsecfalse
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@inlabel
+ \leavevmode
+ \global \@inlabelfalse
+ \fi
+ \if@nobreak \@nobreakfalse \everypar{}\fi
+ \par
+ \vfil
+ \penalty -\@M}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@emptycol}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Empty column action added:
+% \cs{@emptycol}}
+% It may be better to use an invisible rule rather than an empty
+% box here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@emptycol {\vbox{}\penalty -\@M}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Commands changed}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1993/12/06}{\cs{@floatplacement} placement bug
+% fixed}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/17}{check for vsize too small added}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1997/11/09}{Documentation of vsize check enhanced}
+% There are several bug fixes to the two-column stuff here.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Added setting of \cs{col@number}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \twocolumn {%
+ \clearpage
+ \global\columnwidth\textwidth
+ \global\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep
+ \global\divide\columnwidth\tw@
+ \global\hsize\columnwidth
+ \global\linewidth\columnwidth
+ \global\@twocolumntrue
+ \global\@firstcolumntrue
+ \col@number \tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There is no reason to put a |\@dblfloatplacement| here since
+% |\@topnewpage| ignores these settings.
+% The |\@floatplacement| is needed in case this comes after some
+% changes.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{braces removed}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnextchar [\@topnewpage\@floatplacement
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that here, getting a box from the freelist can assume
+% success since this comes just after a |\clearpage|.
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Added setting of \cs{col@number}}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Use \cs{color@begingroup} for colour}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Use \cs{normalcolor}}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Extra box added to remove colour resetting from vmode}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/05}
+% {Use new \cs{color@hbox} concept.}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1994/11/21}{Changed to \cs{color@vbox}}
+% \changes{v1.1z}{1996/10/24}{Added \cs{@nodocument} to trap
+% \cs{twocolumn} in the preamble}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \@topnewpage [#1]{%
+ \@nodocument
+ \@next\@currbox\@freelist{}{}%
+ \global \setbox\@currbox
+ \color@vbox
+ \normalcolor
+ \vbox {%
+ \hsize\textwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \col@number \@ne
+ #1%
+ \vskip -\dbltextfloatsep
+ }%
+ \color@endbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Added size test and warning message; perhaps we should use
+% an error message.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Corrected and amended warning message}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Warning message removed as it will be
+% generated later}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \ht\@currbox>\textheight
+ \ht\@currbox \textheight
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This next line is not essential but it is more robust to make this
+% value non-zero, in case of weird errors.
+%
+% This next bit is what is needed from |\@addtodblcol|, plus some
+% extra checks for error trapping.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \count\@currbox \tw@
+ \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+ \advance \@tempdima -\dbltextfloatsep
+ \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
+ \ifx \@dbltoplist \@empty
+ \else
+ \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
+ \let \@dbltoplist \@empty
+ \fi
+ \@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This setting of |\@dbltopnum| is used only to change the
+% typesetting in\\ |\@combinedblfloats|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \@dbltopnum \m@ne
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{dbltopnum set to -1 (= \the \@dbltopnum) (topnewpage)}%
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At points such as this we need to check that there is still a
+% minimal amount of room left on the page; this uses an arbitrary
+% small value at present; but note that this value is larger than
+% that used when checking that page is too full of normal floats.
+%
+% If there is little room left we just force a page-break, OK?
+% This involves producing two empty columns. The second empty
+% column may be produced by |\output|, in which case an extra,
+% misleading, warning will be generated, OK? (This happens only
+% when there is too little room left on the page for any float.)
+% Otherwise (\ie if the size is such that it is allowed as a normal
+% float) the extra |\@emptycol| will be invoked in the second
+% column by the conditional code guarded by the |\if@firstcolumn|
+% test.
+%
+% I now think that the cut-off point here should be |3\baselineskip|,
+% but we make it a bit less so that 3 lines of text will be
+% allowed, OK?
+%
+% Since this happens only when there is nothing on the page but the
+% `top-box', the empty box should not cause any problem other than
+% some overfull box messages, which is not entirely misleading.
+%
+% Here we need two page-ends since both columns need to be empty.
+% \task{???}{Make it less arbitrary?}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/17}{Page room test added}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Warning added: it should be improved}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Message changed to give more info}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Message changed for Frank}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Empty column action added:
+% \cs{@emptycol}}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Cut-off point changed to
+% 3\cs{baselineskip}}
+% \changes{v1.1t}{1996/05/24}{Cut-off point changed to
+% 2.5\cs{baselineskip}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \@colht<2.5\baselineskip
+ \@latex@warning@no@line {Optional argument of \noexpand\twocolumn
+ too tall on page \thepage}%
+ \@emptycol
+ \if@firstcolumn
+ \else
+ \@emptycol
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global \vsize \@colht
+ \global \@colroom \@colht
+ \@floatplacement
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% \begin{macro}{\@specialoutput}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1993/11/23}{Command changed}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/06}{Unboxing of 255 added to rescue writes}
+% This needs some small adjustments. We cannot
+% guarantee that the float mechanism will interact correctly with
+% this stuff, but that mechanism does not always work properly
+% with footnotes already.
+%
+% RmS 91/09/29:
+%
+% added reset of |\par| to the output routine.
+% This avoids problems when the output routine is
+% called within a list where |\par| may be a no-op.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\output {%
+ \let \par \@@par
+ \ifnum \outputpenalty<-\@M
+ \@specialoutput
+ \else
+ \@makecol
+ \@opcol
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Moved to |\@opcol|: |\@floatplacement|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@startcolumn
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This loop could be replaced by an |\expandafter| tail
+% recursion in |\@startcolumn|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@whilesw \if@fcolmade \fi
+ {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: float \if@twocolumn column \else page \fi
+ completed}%
+%</trace>
+ \@opcol\@startcolumn}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \outputpenalty>-\@Miv
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At points such as this we need to check that there is still a
+% minimal amount of room left on the page; this uses an arbitrary
+% small value at present. If there is little room left we just
+% force a page-break, OK?
+%
+% This bit is essential only if a float has just been processed so
+% maybe it should be moved; but this is the natural place at which
+% to set the vsize and a test would need to be done anyway. A
+% check has been added to ensure that there really has been a
+% change in the value of |\@colroom|.
+%
+% Since this happens only when there is nothing on the page but
+% floats, the empty box should not cause any problem other than
+% some overfull box messages, which is not entirely misleading.
+%
+% The twocolumn case does not need any extra code here since this
+% is the |\output| itself; in the second column there will still
+% not be enough room left so |\@emptycol| will be executed again
+% when the OR is called by the-page builder when it gets to the
+% penalty inserted by the first execution. (The page-builder is
+% never invoked whilst the OR is being executed since it builds a
+% inner vlist; thus any conditional code for the two-column case
+% within |\output| may not get executed with the correct value of
+% |\if@firstcolumn|.
+%
+% \task{???}{Make it less arbitrary?}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/17}{Page room test added}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Message changed to give more info and
+% `top' removed}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Extra empty column added for
+% twocolumn case (wrong, see below)}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Extra empty column added for
+% twocolumn case}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Empty column action added:
+% \cs{@emptycol}}
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Cut-off point changed to
+% 2\cs{baselineskip}}
+% \changes{v1.1t}{1996/05/24}{Cut-off point changed to
+% 1.5\cs{baselineskip}}
+% \changes{v1.1t}{1996/05/24}{Check that \cs{@colroom} is less
+% than \cs{vsize}, indicating that a float has been added}
+% \changes{v1.1u}{1996/05/25}{Correct the above check}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1997/11/09}{Remove incorrect code: only one
+% \cs{@emptycol} is needed here}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \@colroom<1.5\baselineskip
+ \ifdim \@colroom<\textheight
+ \@latex@warning@no@line {Text page \thepage\space
+ contains only floats}%
+ \@emptycol
+% \if@twocolumn
+% \if@firstcolumn
+% \else
+% \@emptycol
+% \fi
+% \fi
+ \else
+ \global \vsize \@colroom
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global \vsize \@colroom
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \global \vsize \maxdimen
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% CHANGES TO \@specialoutput:
+% * \penalty\z@ changed to \penalty\interlinepenalty so \samepage
+% works properly with figure and table environments.
+% (Changed 23 Oct 86)
+%
+% * Definition of \@specialoutput changed 26 Feb 88 so \@pageht and
+% \@pagedp aren't changed for a marginal note.
+% (Change suggested by Chris Rowley.)
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1|autoload|fltrace>
+\gdef\@specialoutput{%
+ \ifnum \outputpenalty>-\@Mii
+ \@doclearpage
+ \else
+ \ifnum \outputpenalty<-\@Miii
+ \ifnum \outputpenalty<-\@MM \deadcycles \z@ \fi
+ \global \setbox\@holdpg \vbox {\unvbox\@cclv}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note that |\boxmaxdepth| should not be set here since we wish to
+% record the natural depth of the holdpg box.
+%
+% This is changed so as to not lose anything, such as writes
+% and marks, which may get into box 255 and should be returned to
+% the list. This should only happen when the first penalty in the
+% mechanism is discarded and therefore |\@holdpg| should always be
+% void in this case. This can happen because a penalty is
+% discarded whenever there is no box on the list.
+%
+% It was just: |\setbox\@tempboxa \box \@cclv|.
+%
+% The last box which is removed is the box put there by the
+% double-penalty mechanism. The |\unskip| then removes the
+% |\topskip| which is put there since the box is the first on the
+% page.
+% \task{CAR/FMi}{Is it more efficient to check whether the holdpg box
+% is void and then act accordingly?}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \setbox\@holdpg \vbox{%
+ \unvbox\@holdpg
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We must now remove the box added by the float mechanism and the
+% |\topskip| glue therefore added above it by \TeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \lastbox
+ \unskip
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% These two are needed as separate dimensions only by
+% |\@addmarginpar|; for other purposes we put the whole size into
+% |\@pageht| (see below).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@pagedp \dp\@holdpg
+ \@pageht \ht\@holdpg
+ \unvbox \@holdpg
+ \@next\@currbox\@currlist{%
+ \ifnum \count\@currbox>\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Putting the whole size into |\@pageht| (see above).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance \@pageht \@pagedp
+ \ifvoid\footins \else
+ \advance \@pageht \ht\footins
+ \advance \@pageht \skip\footins
+ \advance \@pageht \dp\footins
+ \fi
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+ \ifvbox \@kludgeins
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We want to make the adjustment due to this insert only if the
+% non-star form is used. The *-form will probably not work with
+% floats, but maybe it still could make some adjustment here even
+% so?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \wd\@kludgeins=\z@
+ \advance \@pageht \ht\@kludgeins
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce {Extra size added: \the \ht\@kludgeins}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This version puts the inserts back just before the additional
+% material; it could be moved earlier, before unboxing the
+% page-so-far. Neither is guaranteed not to put things on the wrong
+% page. This version is similar to the original version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@reinserts
+ \@addtocurcol
+ \else
+ \@reinserts
+ \@addmarginpar
+ \fi
+ }\@latexbug
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A 2e change: use |\addpenalty| instead of |\penalty| here. Some
+% penalty is needed to create a potential break-point immediately
+% after the reinserts (or the marginal). Otherwise there can be no
+% possibility to break here and this can cause the reinserts or the
+% marginal to appear on the next page (which is often incorrect).
+% However, if the nobreak flag is true, a |\nobreak| must be
+% correct.
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1994/11/21}{Added \cs{if@nobreak} test}
+% \changes{v1.1z}{1996/10/24}{Added \cs{nobreak} as appropriate}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \outputpenalty<\z@
+ \if@nobreak
+ \nobreak
+ \else
+ \addpenalty \interlinepenalty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|def1|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@doclearpage}
+% \task{CAR/FMi}{Investigate better float clearance}
+% \task{CAR/FMi}{Put non-boxes back in the `right place', or nowhere?}
+% This is a very much an emergency action, just dumping everything:
+% footnotes first then floats. A more sophisticated version is
+% needed; but even more urgent is a bug-free version (see, for
+% example, pr/3528).
+%
+% Also, it puts any left-over non-boxes (writes, specials, etc.) back
+% after any float pages created: this is a very bad bug since,
+% for example, a kludge insert will be in quite the wrong place
+% and, worse, be irremovable and uncancelable.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def \@doclearpage {%
+ \ifvoid\footins
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.2l}{2004/02/07}{Empty kludgeins box if necessary, pr/3528}
+% We empty any left over kludge insert box here; this is a temporary fix.
+% It should perhaps be applied to one page of cleared floats, but
+% who cares? The whole of this stuff needs completely redoing for
+% many such reasons.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifvbox\@kludgeins
+ {\setbox \@tempboxa \box \@kludgeins}%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce {kludgeins box made void}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\@cclv to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv
+ \xdef\@deferlist{\@toplist\@botlist\@deferlist}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{defs changed to lets}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \let \@toplist \@empty
+ \global \let \@botlist \@empty
+ \global \@colroom \@colht
+ \ifx \@currlist\@empty
+ \else
+ \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{defs changed to lets}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \let \@currlist \@empty
+ \fi
+ \@makefcolumn\@deferlist
+ \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@opcol\@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \if@firstcolumn
+ \xdef\@dbldeferlist{\@dbltoplist\@dbldeferlist}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{defs changed to lets}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \let \@dbltoplist \@empty
+ \global \@colht \textheight
+ \begingroup
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+ \@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist
+ \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@outputpage
+ \@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \vbox{}\clearpage
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\box\@cclv\vfil}%
+ \@makecol\@opcol
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@opcol}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Hook added}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/17}{Hook removed}
+% Several changes in detail here.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+\def \@opcol {%
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \@outputdblcol
+ \else
+ \@outputpage
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: one column (float? see above) page completed}%
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not needed since it comes after |\@outputpage|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \global\@colht\textheight
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% These do not need to be done every time |\@opcol| is used: they
+% should be grouped together since they all need to be done at the
+% end of the non-special output routine, or at the end of a clearpage
+% one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \@mparbottom \z@ \global \@textfloatsheight \z@
+ \@floatplacement
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1993/11/23}{Command changed}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1993/11/29}{\cs{@makespecialcolbox} added}
+% We must rewrite this macro to alllow for variations in page-makeup
+% required by changes in page-length.
+%
+% This uses a different macro if a special-length column is being
+% produced.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1|autoload>
+\gdef \@makecol {%
+ \ifvoid\footins
+ \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
+ \else
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This |\boxmaxdepth| setting is to ensure that deep footnotes
+% do not overwrite the footer (on account of the negative skip
+% added later): it should use |\@maxdepth| otherwise the change is
+% pointless when there are footnotes.
+% \task{CAR}{Investigate providing an option to put the footnotes
+% below the bottom floats.}
+%
+% But see also its use when combining floats.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{\cs{maxdepth} changed to \cs{@maxdepth}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2e}{1999/01/06}{Added negative vskip, as when processing
+% outputbox below: suggested by Fred Bartlett pr/2892}
+% \changes{1.2i}{2000/07/12}{Removed negative vskip, as it gives
+% unacceptable results when the depth is large: pr/3189}
+% \task{CAR}{As can be seen from the above two changes, getting a good
+% layout here is difficult: fix!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
+ \unvbox \@cclv
+% \vskip-\@tempdima
+ \vskip \skip\footins
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/31}
+% {(DPC/CAR) Colour resetting moved to here}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \color@begingroup
+ \normalcolor
+ \footnoterule
+ \unvbox \footins
+ \color@endgroup
+ }%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The h floats have now been finally committed to this page so we
+% can reset their list. The top and bottom floats are then added
+% to the page.
+% \changes{v1.2k}{2003/12/16}{Ensure that \cs{@elt} has a defined
+% state (pr/3586)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{defs changed to lets}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \let \@midlist \@empty
+ \@combinefloats
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The variations start here in case |\enlargethispage| has
+% been used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+ \ifvbox\@kludgeins
+ \@makespecialcolbox
+ \else
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This extra reboxing is only needed to add the
+% |\@texttop| and |\@textbotttom| but this could be done earlier,
+% when the floats are added.
+%
+% The |\boxmaxdepth| resetting here will have no effect unless
+% |\@textbottom| ends with a box or rule. So is this (or possibly
+% |\@maxdepth|) the correct value?
+%
+% The |\vskip -\dimen@|
+% ensures that the visible depth of the box does not
+% affect the placement of anything on the page.
+% Thus very deep pages will overprint the footer; but these should
+% have been prevented by suitable settings of the maxdepths at
+% appropriate times.
+%
+% If |\@textbottom| ends with a box or rule of non-zero depth
+% then this skip adjustemnt should be done again after it.
+%
+% I think that the final boxing of the main text page could have a
+% common ending which may make it simpler to see what is going on.
+%
+% This needs further investigation, especially in the `special
+% case'.
+% \task{CAR}{Further investigation of makecol}
+%
+% Also, the |\boxmaxdepth| setting here affects what happens wthin
+% |\@texttop| and |\@textbottom|, should it? Is it needed at all?
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Removed boxmaxdepth setting.}
+%
+% RmS 91/10/22: Replaced |\dimen128| by |\dimen@|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht {%
+% \boxmaxdepth \maxdepth %??
+ \@texttop
+ \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
+ \unvbox \@outputbox
+ \vskip -\dimen@
+ \@textbottom
+ }%
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+ \fi
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+ \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth
+}
+%</2ekernel|def1|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@reinserts}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1993/12/01}{Command added}
+% This is the code which reinserts the inserts. It puts them all
+% in one place; this can make some of them come out on the wrong
+% page.
+% It has been put into a separate macro to expidite experimentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1|autoload>
+\gdef \@reinserts{%
+ \ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
+%<+2ekernel|def1> \ifvbox\@kludgeins\insert\@kludgeins
+%<+2ekernel|def1> {\unvbox\@kludgeins}\fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|def1|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makespecialcolbox}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1993/11/29}{Command added}
+% This implements certain variations in page-makeup.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1|fltrace>
+\gdef \@makespecialcolbox {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{Kludgeins ht \the\ht\@kludgeins\space
+ dp \the\dp\@kludgeins\space
+ wd \the\wd\@kludgeins}%
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we find the natural height of the column.
+%
+% See above for discussion of what is happening here.
+%
+% This needs further investigation, especially in this `special
+% case'.
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/02/08}{boxmaxdepth setting removed}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {%
+ \@texttop
+ \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ \vskip-\dimen@
+ }%
+ \@tempdima \@colht
+ \ifdim \wd\@kludgeins>\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note that in this case (the *-version), the height of the
+% |\@kludgeins| box is not used since its value is somewhat
+% arbitrary: it need only be big enough to ensure that the
+% page-break is not taken prematurely.
+%
+% Here we calculate how much vertical space needs to be added in
+% order to enable the column to fit into a box of size |\@colht|
+% using the best information we have about the amount of shrink
+% available (another thing which is known internally about a box,
+% but cannot be accessed at the \TeX{} level!).
+%
+% This needs \TeX3 otherwise |\pageshrink| is zero anyway; it may
+% not be exactly the figure we wish as it is the total available
+% from the all the material collected before the page-break
+% decision is made. It will, we think, always be an overestimate
+% of the actual shrink in the box; therefore this should always
+% force the shortest possible column with the possibility of an
+% overfull box.
+%
+% This should work for bothe flush- and ragged-bottom setting since
+% it makes the contents no smaller than the size (|\@colht|) of the
+% box into which they are put.
+%
+% Their should perhaps be an upper limit, of 0pt?, on the extra
+% space added to force shrinking.
+% \task{CAR}{Further investigation of kludge-* space}
+%
+% See above for a discussion of the |\boxmaxdepth| setting here.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/02/08}{boxmaxdepth setting added}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Removed boxmaxdepth setting.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance \@tempdima -\ht\@outputbox
+ \advance \@tempdima \pageshrink
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce {Natural ht of col: \the \ht\@outputbox}%
+ \tr@ce {\string \@colht: \the \@colht}%
+ \tr@ce {Pageshrink added: \the \pageshrink}%
+ \tr@ce {Hence, space added: \the \@tempdima}%
+%</trace>
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to \@colht {%
+% \boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ \vskip \@tempdima
+ \@textbottom
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For the unstarred version, the final size of the page is
+% precisely specified. Therefore, at least for the flush-bottom
+% case, we need to ensure that, visually, it has this size exactly.
+%
+% Thus we calculate this size and set the material in a box of this
+% size, which is then put into a box of size |\@colht| with |\vss|
+% at the bottom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else
+ \advance \@tempdima -\ht\@kludgeins
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce {Natural ht of col: \the \ht\@outputbox}%
+ \tr@ce {\string \@colht: \the \@colht}%
+ \tr@ce {Extra size added: -\the \ht \@kludgeins}%
+ \tr@ce {Hence, height of inner box: \the \@tempdima}%
+ \tr@ce {Max? pageshrink available: \the \pageshrink}%
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This type of final packaging could be done always; this may
+% simplify all of this page-makeup.
+%
+% It is not necessary to set |\boxmaxdepth| here since the
+% |\@outputbox| ends with glue.
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/02/03}{correct mistakes in the documentation}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox \@outputbox \vbox to \@colht {%
+ \vbox to \@tempdima {%
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ \@textbottom}%
+ \vss}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we need to explicitly make the insert box void.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\setbox \@tempboxa \box \@kludgeins}%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce {kludgeins box made void}%
+%</trace>
+}
+%</2ekernel|def1|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@texttop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@textbottom}
+% These do nothing as a default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\let \@texttop \relax
+\let \@textbottom \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@resetactivechars}
+% \begin{macro}{\@activechar@info}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{\cs{@activechar@warning} changed to
+% \cs{@activechar@info}}
+% RmS 93/09/06:
+% added hook to protect against certain active characters in the
+% output routine. Default checks are for active space and end-of-line.
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1994/05/23}{Added \cs{MessageBreak}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@activechar@info #1{%
+ \@latex@info@no@line {Active #1 character found while
+ output routine is active
+ \MessageBreak
+ This may be a bug in a package file
+ you are using}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Do not put any spaces in this next bit!
+% \changes{1.2f}{1999/10/09}{Reset definition of active prime
+% character (used in math mode)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\catcode`\'\active%
+\gdef\@resetactivechars{%
+\def^^M{\@activechar@info{EOL}\space}%
+\def {\@activechar@info{space}\space}%
+\let'\active@math@prime}%
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% \begin{macro}{\@shipoutsetup}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% \changes{v1.1s}{1995/11/10}{Command removed}
+% \begin{macro}{\@writesetup}
+% \changes{v1.1s}{1995/11/10}{Command removed}
+% \changes{v1.1o}{1995/07/21}{Command added}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{\cs{@startpagehook} added}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/17}{---and then removed}
+% \changes{v1.0p}{1994/05/12}{\cs{normalcolor}added}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1994/05/20}{Added setting of \cs{protect}
+% during \cs{shipout}.}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1994/05/23}{Changed resetting of \cs{protect} after
+% shipout to use \cs{aftergroup}}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/05}
+% {Use new \cs{color@hbox} concept.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/05}
+% {Change protect settings for new-style, protect-free
+% aux-files.}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Add new \cs{AtBeginDvi} concept}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1994/11/10}
+% {Modify \cs{protect} setting}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/14}
+% {Modify new \cs{AtBeginDvi} concept}
+% \changes{v1.1o}{1995/07/21}
+% {New, experimental, versions: need in-lining}
+% \changes{v1.1s}{1995/11/10}{In-lined}
+% \changes{v1.1w}{1996/09/21}{Added \cs{@parboxrestore} and made
+% consequent deletions: wait for the howls of protest}
+%
+% The |\color@hbox| hooks here are used to avoid putting just a
+% colour special into an otherwise empty box (in a header or
+% footer). These boxes are often set to be completely empty and so
+% adding a special produces a very underfull box message.
+%
+% There has been extensive tidying up of the old code here;
+% including the removal of a level of grouping.
+%
+% The setting of |\protect| immediately before the |\shipout|
+% is needed so that protected commands within |\write|s are
+% handled correctly.
+%
+% Within shipout's vbox it is reset to its default value, |\relax|.
+%
+% Resetting it to its default value after the shipout has been
+% completed (and the contents of the writes have been expanded)
+% must be done by use of |\aftergroup|.
+% This is because it must have the value |\relax|
+% before macros coming from other uses of |\aftergroup| within
+% this box are expanded.
+%
+% Putting this into the |\aftergroup| token list does not affect
+% the definition used in expanding the |\write|s because the
+% aftergroup token list is only constructed when popping the
+% save-stack, it is not expanded until after the shipout is
+% completed.
+%
+% Question: should things from an |\aftergroup| within the shipped
+% out box be executed in the environment set up for the writes, or
+% after it finishes?
+%
+% A lot of this code has been in-lined tp prevent mis-use of
+% internal commands as hooks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@outputpage{%
+\begingroup % the \endgroup is put in by \aftergroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now all the set-up stuff has been in-lined for Frank.
+%
+% First the stuff for the writes.
+%
+% From here \ldots\ was in the command |\@writesetup|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let \protect \noexpand
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% RmS 93/08/19: Redefined accents to allow changes in font encoding;
+% but exactly why was this needed?
+%
+% The |\catcode`\ = 10| was removed as it was considered useless
+% (presumably because nothing gets tokenised during shipout).
+%
+% This was put in as some error produced active spaces in a mark, I
+% think.
+%
+% Why was the hyphen reset?
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@resetactivechars
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If a page break happens between the start of a list and its first
+% item the |@newlist| will be true and this will mess up any list
+% that is used in the header or footer of the page. So we have to
+% reset that flag.
+% \changes{v1.2h}{2000/07/19}
+% {Reset and restore \cs{@if@newlist} for internal/3231}
+% \changes{v1.2j}{2001/01/07}
+% {And do it in the right macro! (pr/3286)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\@@if@newlist\if@newlist
+ \global\@newlistfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1994/05/16}{Changed setting of accents (FMi):
+% with the new encoding setup they can use \cs{let}.
+% It could also use the new internal commands?}
+% \changes{v1.1l}{1995/04/24}{Reset \cmd\\ latex/1451 (DPC)}
+% This next hook replaces the following:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \let\-\@dischyph
+% \let\'\@acci\let\`\@accii\let\=\@acciii
+% \let\\\@normalcr
+% \let\par\@@par %% 15 Sep 87 (this was once inside the box)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% and it does more than they did; in particular it sets:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \parindent\z@
+% \parskip\z@skip
+% \everypar{}%
+% \leftskip\z@skip
+% \rightskip\z@skip
+% \parfillskip\@flushglue
+% \lineskip\normallineskip
+% \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip
+% \sloppy
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@parboxrestore
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \ldots\ to here was in the command |\@writesetup|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \shipout \vbox{%
+ \set@typeset@protect
+ \aftergroup \endgroup
+ \aftergroup \set@typeset@protect
+ % correct? or just restore by ending
+ % the group?
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This first bit has been moved inside the shipped out box.
+%
+% Now the setup inside the shipped out box; this should conatin all
+% the stuff that could only affect typesetting; other stuff may need
+% to be reset for the writes also.
+%
+% From here \ldots\ was in the command |\@shipoutsetup|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@specialpage
+ \global\@specialpagefalse\@nameuse{ps@\@specialstyle}%
+ \fi
+ \if@twoside
+ \ifodd\count\z@ \let\@thehead\@oddhead \let\@thefoot\@oddfoot
+ \let\@themargin\oddsidemargin
+ \else \let\@thehead\@evenhead
+ \let\@thefoot\@evenfoot \let\@themargin\evensidemargin
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The rest was always inside the box.
+%
+% RmS 91/08/15: aded this line:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \reset@font
+% \end{macrocode}
+% RmS 93/08/06 Added |\lineskiplimit=0pt| to guard against it being
+% nonzero: e.g. by |\offinterlineskip| being in effect.
+%
+% There are probably lots of other things that may need resetting.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \normalsize
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Reset the space factors.
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1997/04/14}
+% {Call \cs{normalsfcodes} (from patch file) latex/2404}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \normalsfcodes
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Reset these here (previously reset separately for head and foot)
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1997/04/14}
+% {Move \cs{label} and \cs{index} (from patch file)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\label\@gobble
+ \let\index\@gobble
+ \let\glossary\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \baselineskip\z@skip \lineskip\z@skip \lineskiplimit\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \ldots\ to here was in the command |\@shipoutsetup|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@begindvi
+ \vskip \topmargin
+ \moveright\@themargin \vbox {%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox to\headheight{%
+ \vfil
+ \color@hbox
+ \normalcolor
+ \hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thehead}%
+ \color@endbox
+ }% %% 22 Feb 87
+ \dp\@tempboxa \z@
+ \box\@tempboxa
+ \vskip \headsep
+ \box\@outputbox
+ \baselineskip \footskip
+ \color@hbox
+ \normalcolor
+ \hb@xt@\textwidth{\@thefoot}%
+ \color@endbox
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\endgroup| now inserted by |\aftergroup|
+%
+% Restore |\if@newlist|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\if@newlist\@@if@newlist
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \@colht \textheight
+ \stepcounter{page}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% It is now clear that this does something useful, thanks to Piet
+% van Oostrum. It is needed because a float page is made without
+% using TeX's page-builder; thus the output routine is never called
+% so the marks are not updated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\firstmark\botmark
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@begindvi}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/05}
+% {Added macro}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/14}{Use normal box register: why a box?}
+%
+% This unboxes stuff that must appear before anything else in the
+% |.dvi| file, then returns that box register to the free list and
+% cancels itself.
+%
+% The stuff in the box should not add any typeset material to the
+% page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@begindvi{%
+ \unvbox \@begindvibox
+ \global\let \@begindvi \@empty
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@combinefloats}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cflt}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{name changed}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cflb}
+% The |\boxmaxdepth| setting here was not made local to
+% a box so was dangerous. It is needed only within the box made
+% by |\@cflt| (and not normally even there), so it has been
+% moved there; this also agrees with the original pseudcode.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{boxmaxdepth setting moved}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@combinefloats {%
+% \boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
+ \ifx \@toplist\@empty \else \@cflt \fi
+ \ifx \@botlist\@empty \else \@cflb \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{defs changed to lets}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@cflt{%
+ \let \@elt \@comflelt
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+ \@toplist
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+ \boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
+ \unvbox\@tempboxa
+ \vskip -\floatsep
+ \topfigrule
+ \vskip \textfloatsep
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ }%
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@toplist}%
+ \global\let\@toplist\@empty
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@cflb {%
+ \let\@elt\@comflelt
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+ \@botlist
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ \vskip \textfloatsep
+ \botfigrule
+ \unvbox\@tempboxa
+ \vskip -\floatsep
+ }%
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@botlist}%
+ \global \let \@botlist\@empty
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@comflelt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@comdblflelt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@combinedblfloats}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@comflelt#1{\setbox\@tempboxa
+ \vbox{\unvbox\@tempboxa\box #1\vskip\floatsep}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@comdblflelt#1{\setbox\@tempboxa
+ \vbox{\unvbox\@tempboxa\box #1\vskip\dblfloatsep}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@combinedblfloats{%
+ \ifx \@dbltoplist \@empty
+ \else
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+ \let \@elt \@comdblflelt
+ \@dbltoplist
+ \let \@elt \relax
+ \xdef \@freelist {\@freelist\@dbltoplist}%
+ \global\let \@dbltoplist \@empty
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\textheight
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The setting of |\boxmaxdepth| here has no effect since the
+% |\@outputbox| should already have depth zero. Even so, it would
+% have no effect on the layout of the page.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Removed boxmaxdepth setting.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth %% probably not needed, CAR
+ \unvbox\@tempboxa\vskip-\dblfloatsep
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we need different typesetting if the top float comes from
+% |\@topnewpage|.
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Removed rule in topnewpage case}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum \@dbltopnum>\m@ne
+ \dblfigrule
+ \fi
+ \vskip \dbltextfloatsep
+ \box\@outputbox
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startcolumn}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% \begin{macro}{\@startdblcolumn}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+%
+% We could combine (most of) these two into |\@startcol <list>|.
+% Note that |\@xstartcol| was only used once (\ie in
+% |\@startcolumn|); it has therefore been removed. This is not quite
+% as efficient but it now has the same structure as
+% |\@startdblcolumn|.
+%
+% The empty-list test has been moved to |\@tryfcolumn|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+\def \@startcolumn {%
+ \global \@colroom \@colht
+ \@tryfcolumn \@deferlist
+ \if@fcolmade
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: float \if@twocolumn column \else page \fi
+ completed}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{defs changed to lets}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let \reserved@b \@deferlist
+ \global \let \@deferlist \@empty
+ \let \@elt \@scolelt
+ \reserved@b
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This one does not need to set |\@colht|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@startdblcolumn {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Not needed since this always comes after |\@outputpage|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \global \@colht \textheight
+ \@tryfcolumn \@dbldeferlist
+ \if@fcolmade
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: double float page completed}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{defs changed to lets}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \let \reserved@b \@dbldeferlist
+ \global \let \@dbldeferlist \@empty
+ \let \@elt \@sdblcolelt
+ \reserved@b
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tryfcolumn}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% Now tests if its list is empty before any further exertion.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@tryfcolumn #1{%
+ \global \@fcolmadefalse
+ \ifx #1\@empty
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: try float \if@twocolumn column/page\else page\fi
+ ---\string #1}%
+ \tr@ce{----- \string #1: #1}%
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{defs changed to lets}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \xdef\@trylist{#1}%
+ \global \let \@failedlist \@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \let \@elt \@xtryfc \@trylist
+ \endgroup
+ \if@fcolmade
+ \@vtryfc #1%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@scolelt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@scolelt#1{\def\@currbox{#1}\@addtonextcol}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sdblcolelt}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sdblcolelt#1{\def\@currbox{#1}\@addtodblcol}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vtryfc}
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1997/11/19}{Reindent code, to be understandable(DPC).}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vtryfc #1{%
+ \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{}%
+ \let\@elt\@wtryfc
+ \@flsucceed
+ \global\setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht{%
+ \vskip \@fptop
+ \vskip -\@fpsep
+ \unvbox \@outputbox
+ \vskip \@fpbot}%
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \xdef #1{\@failedlist\@flfail}%
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@flsucceed}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wtryfc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@wtryfc #1{%
+ \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ \vskip\@fpsep
+ \box #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtryfc}
+% \changes{v1.1v}{1996/07/26}{remove \cs{global} before \cs{@test...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xtryfc #1{%
+ \@next\reserved@a\@trylist{}{}%
+ \@currtype \count #1%
+ \divide\@currtype\@xxxii
+ \multiply\@currtype\@xxxii
+ \@bitor \@currtype \@failedlist
+ \@testfp #1%
+ \ifdim \ht #1>\@colht
+ \@testtrue
+ \fi
+ \if@test
+ \@cons\@failedlist #1%
+ \else
+ \@ytryfc #1%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ytryfc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ytryfc #1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \gdef\@flsucceed{\@elt #1}%
+ \global\let\@flfail\@empty
+ \@tempdima\ht #1%
+ \let\@elt\@ztryfc
+ \@trylist
+ \ifdim \@tempdima >\@fpmin
+ \global\@fcolmadetrue
+ \else
+ \@cons\@failedlist #1%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \if@fcolmade
+ \let\@elt\@gobble
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ztryfc}
+% \changes{v1.1v}{1996/07/26}{remove \cs{global} before \cs{@test...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ztryfc #1{%
+ \@tempcnta \count#1%
+ \divide\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+ \multiply\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+ \@bitor \@tempcnta {\@failedlist \@flfail}%
+ \@testfp #1%
+ \@tempdimb\@tempdima
+ \advance\@tempdimb \ht#1%
+ \advance\@tempdimb\@fpsep
+ \ifdim \@tempdimb >\@colht
+ \@testtrue
+ \fi
+ \if@test
+ \@cons\@flfail #1%
+ \else
+ \@cons\@flsucceed #1%
+ \@tempdima\@tempdimb
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The major changes for float suppression and the changes to the float
+% mechanism to make it conform to the documentation are in these next
+% macros.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtobot}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% Lots of changes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+\def \@addtobot {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{***Start addtobot}%
+%</trace>
+ \@getfpsbit 4\relax
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype \ifodd \@tempcnta OK \else not \fi bot:
+ \the \@fpstype}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifodd \@tempcnta
+ \@flsetnum \@botnum
+ \ifnum \@botnum>\z@
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \@flcheckspace \@botroom \@botlist
+ \if@tempswa
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This next line means that this page is produced with box 255
+% having depth zero, rather than the normal maxdepth: is this
+% needed, useful?
+% \task{CAR/FMi}{Investigate resetting of maxdepth: I do not think it is
+% necessary here; Frank does.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \maxdepth \z@
+ \@flupdates \@botnum \@botroom \@botlist
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{colroom (after-bot) = \the \@colroom}%
+ \tr@ce{colnum (after-bot) = \the \@colnum}%
+ \tr@ce{botnum (after-bot) = \the \@botnum}%
+ \tr@ce{***Success: bot}%
+%</trace>
+ \@inserttrue
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail: botnum = \the \@botnum:
+ fpstype \the \@fpstype=ORD?}%
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+ \tr@ce{ERROR: !b float not successful (addtobot)}%
+ \fi
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtotoporbot}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% Lots of changes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@addtotoporbot {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{***Start addtotoporbot}%
+%</trace>
+ \@getfpsbit \tw@
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype \ifodd \@tempcnta OK \else not \fi top:
+ \the \@fpstype}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifodd \@tempcnta
+ \@flsetnum \@topnum
+ \ifnum \@topnum>\z@
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \@flcheckspace \@toproom \@toplist
+ \if@tempswa
+ \@bitor\@currtype{\@midlist\@botlist}%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{(mid+bot)list: \@midlist, \@botlist:
+ (addtotoporbot-before)}%
+%</trace>
+ \if@test
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{type already on list: mid or bot---sent to addtobot}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \@flupdates \@topnum \@toproom \@toplist
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{colroom (after-top) = \the \@colroom}%
+ \tr@ce{colnum (after-top) = \the \@colnum}%
+ \tr@ce{topnum (after-top) = \the \@topnum}%
+ \tr@ce{***Success: top}%
+%</trace>
+ \@inserttrue
+ \fi
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail: topnum = \the \@topnum: fpstype
+ \the \@fpstype=ORD?}%
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+ \tr@ce{ERROR: !t float not successful (addtotoporbot)}%
+ \fi
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{sent to addtobot (addtotoporbot)}%
+%</trace>
+ \@addtobot
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtocurcol}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% \task{CAR}{Add rules around h floats for FMi}
+% \task{CAR}{Investigate pagebreak option possibilities}
+% Lots of changes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace|flafter>
+\def \@addtocurcol {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{***Start addtocurcol}%
+%</trace>
+ \@insertfalse
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=8
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype !p only (addtocurcol): \the \@fpstype = 8?}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=24
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype p only (addtocurcol): \the \@fpstype = 24?}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \@flsettextmin
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is a new adjustment which is quite a major change in
+% functionality; but it implements the documentation.
+% Note that |\@reqcolroom| will include the whole of the
+% page-so-far, and hence includes |\@textfloatsheight| of floats,
+% so before comparing it with |\@textmin|, we add this to
+% |\@textmin| also.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{textfloatsheight (before) = \the \@textfloatsheight}%
+%</trace>
+ \advance \@textmin \@textfloatsheight
+ \@reqcolroom \@pageht
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This line must be removed since |\@specialoutput| changed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \advance \@reqcolroom \@pagedp
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{textmin + textfloatsheight: \the \@textmin}%
+ \tr@ce{page-so-far: \the \@reqcolroom}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifdim \@textmin>\@reqcolroom
+ \@reqcolroom \@textmin
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{ORD? textmin being used}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \ht\@currbox
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{float size = \the \ht \@currbox (addtocurcol)}%
+ \tr@ce{colroom = \the \@colroom (addtocurcol)}%
+ \tr@ce{reqcolroom = \the \@reqcolroom (addtocurcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \@flsetnum \@colnum
+ \ifnum \@colnum>\z@
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@deferlist
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{deferlist: \@deferlist: (addtocurcol-before)}%
+%</trace>
+ \if@test
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{type already on list: defer (addtocurcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@botlist
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{botlist: \@botlist: (addtocurcol-before)}%
+%</trace>
+ \if@test
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{type already on list: bot---sent to addtobot}%
+%</trace>
+ \@addtobot
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype \ifodd \@tempcnta OK \else not \fi
+ here: \the \@fpstype}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifodd \count\@currbox
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \intextsep
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \global \advance \@colnum \m@ne
+ \global \advance \@textfloatsheight \ht\@currbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This may sometimes give an overestimate.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global \advance \@textfloatsheight 2\intextsep
+ \@cons \@midlist \@currbox
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{***Success: here}%
+ \tr@ce{textfloatsheight (after-here) =
+ \the \@textfloatsheight}%
+ \tr@ce{colnum (after-here) = \the \@colnum}%
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% CHANGE TO |\@addtocurcol|:
+%
+% |\penalty\z@| changed to |\penalty\interlinepenalty| so |\samepage|
+% works properly with figure and table environments.
+% (Changed 23 Oct 86)
+%
+% There is also an |\addpenalty\interlinepenalty| above.
+%
+% Since in 2e |\samepage| is no longer supported, these could be
+% removed.
+%
+% Although it is best to use |\addvspace| in case two h floats come
+% together, this makes other spacing more difficult to adjust; whereas
+% if a user specifies two h floats together then they can more easily
+% get the spacing correct by ad hoc commands.
+%
+% It is necessary to adjust for the addition of |\parskip| here in
+% case the float is added betweeen paragraphs (\ie when in vertical
+% mode).
+%
+% If the nobreak switch is true we need to reset it and clear
+% |\everypar| sionce the float may not reset the flag and cannot reset
+% the |\everypar| globally.
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1994/03/15}{Changed \cs{addvspace} to \cs{vskip}}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1994/11/21}
+% {Added \cs{if@nobreak} test before float box}
+% \changes{v1.1z}{1996/10/24}{Added \cs{nobreak}, etc as appropriate}
+%
+% Typesetting starts here (we are in vertical mode).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@nobreak
+ \nobreak
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty \interlinepenalty
+ \fi
+ \vskip \intextsep
+ \box\@currbox
+ \penalty\interlinepenalty
+ \vskip\intextsep
+ \ifnum\outputpenalty <-\@Mii \vskip -\parskip\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Typesetting ends here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \outputpenalty \z@
+ \@inserttrue
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail---no room at 2nd test of colroom
+ (addtocorcol \string\intextsep)}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{not here: sent to addtotoporbot}%
+%</trace>
+ \@addtotoporbot
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+%<*!2ekernel&!autoload&!fltrace>
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{not here: sent to addtobot}%
+%</trace>
+ \@addtobot
+%</!2ekernel&!autoload&!fltrace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail: colnum = \the \@colnum:
+ fpstype \the \@fpstype=ORD?}%
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+ \tr@ce{ERROR: BANG float not successful (addtocurcol)}%
+ \fi
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail---no room: fl box ht: \the \ht \@currbox
+ (addtocurcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+ \@resethfps
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{put on deferlist (addtocurcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{deferlist: \@deferlist: (addtocurcol-after)}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace|flafter>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtonextcol}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% Lots of changes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+\def\@addtonextcol{%
+ \begingroup
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{***Start addtonextcol}%
+%</trace>
+ \@insertfalse
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=8
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype not curcol: \the \@fpstype = 8?}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=24
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype not curcol: \the \@fpstype = 24?}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \@flsettextmin
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{text-so-far: 0pt (top of col)}%
+%</trace>
+ \@reqcolroom \ht\@currbox
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{float size: \the \@reqcolroom (addtonextcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \@textmin
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{colroom = \the \@colroom (addtonextcol)}%
+ \tr@ce{reqcolroom = \the \@reqcolroom (addtonextcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \@flsetnum \@colnum
+ \ifnum\@colnum>\z@
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@deferlist
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{deferlist: \@deferlist: (addtonextcol-before)}%
+%</trace>
+ \if@test
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{type already on list: defer (addtonextcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{sent to addtotoporbot (addtonextcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \@addtotoporbot
+ \fi
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail---no room: fl box ht: \the \ht \@currbox
+ (addtonextcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{put back on deferlist (addtonextcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{deferlist: \@deferlist: (addtonextcol-after)}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{End of addtonextcol -- locally counts:}%
+ \tr@ce{ col: \the \@colnum. top: \the \@topnum. bot: \the \@botnum.}%
+%</trace>
+ \endgroup
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{End of addtonextcol -- globally counts:}%
+ \tr@ce{col: \the \@colnum. top: \the \@topnum. bot: \the \@botnum.}%
+%</trace>
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtodblcol}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command changed}
+% Lots of changes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtodblcol{%
+ \begingroup
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{***Start addtodblcol}%
+%</trace>
+ \@insertfalse
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \@getfpsbit \tw@
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype \ifodd \@tempcnta OK \else not \fi dbltop:
+ \the \@fpstype}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifodd\@tempcnta
+ \@flsetnum \@dbltopnum
+ \ifnum \@dbltopnum>\z@
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \ifdim \@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox
+ \@tempswatrue
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{Space OK: \@dbltoproom =
+ \the \@dbltoproom > \the \ht \@currbox
+ (dbltoproom)}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype: \the \@fpstype (addtodblcol)}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{BANG float ignoring \@dbltoproom}%
+ \tr@ce{\@spaces \@dbltoproom = \the \@dbltoproom.
+ Ht float: \the \ht \@currbox-BANG}%
+%</trace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Need to check that there is room on the page, using the local value
+% of |\@textmin| to make the necessary adjustment to |\@dbltoproom|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance \@dbltoproom \@textmin
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{Local value of texmin: \the\@textmin}%
+ \tr@ce{\@spaces space on page = \the \@dbltoproom.
+ Ht float: \the \ht \@currbox-BANG}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifdim \@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox
+ \@tempswatrue
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{Space OK BANG: space on page = \the \@dbltoproom >
+ \the \ht \@currbox}%
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{fpstype: \the \@fpstype}%
+ \tr@ce{Fail---no room dbltoproom-BANG?:}%
+ \tr@ce{\@spaces space on page = \the \@dbltoproom.
+ Ht float: \the \ht \@currbox}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \advance \@dbltoproom -\@textmin
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{fpstype: \the \@fpstype}%
+ \tr@ce{Fail---no room dbltoproom-ORD?:}%
+ \tr@ce{\@spaces \@dbltoproom = \the \@dbltoproom.
+ Ht float: \the \ht \@currbox}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@tempswa
+ \@bitor \@currtype \@dbldeferlist
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{dbldeferlist: \@dbldeferlist: (before)}%
+%</trace>
+ \if@test
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{type already on list: dbldefer}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+ \advance\@tempdima
+ -\ifx \@dbltoplist\@empty \dbltextfloatsep \else
+ \dblfloatsep \fi
+ \global \advance \@dbltoproom \@tempdima
+ \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
+ \global \advance \@dbltopnum \m@ne
+ \@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{dbltopnum (after) = \the \@dbltopnum}%
+ \tr@ce{***Success: dbltop}%
+%</trace>
+ \@inserttrue
+ \fi
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail: dbltopnum = \the \@dbltopnum: fpstype
+ \the \@fpstype=ORD?}%
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+ \tr@ce{ERROR: !t float not successful (addtodblcol)}%
+ \fi
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@insert
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{put on dbldeferlist}%
+%</trace>
+ \@cons\@dbldeferlist\@currbox
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{dbldeferlist: \@dbldeferlist: (after)}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{End of addtodblcol -- locally count:}%
+ \tr@ce{ dbltop: \the \@dbltopnum.}%
+%</trace>
+ \endgroup
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{End of addtodblcol -- globally count:}%
+ \tr@ce{dbltop: \the \@dbltopnum.}%
+%</trace>
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def\@addmarginpar{\@next\@marbox\@currlist{\@cons\@freelist\@marbox
+ \@cons\@freelist\@currbox}\@latexbug\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \if@twocolumn
+ \if@firstcolumn \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
+ \else
+ \if@mparswitch
+ \ifodd\c@page \else\@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@reversemargin \@tempcnta -\@tempcnta \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta <\z@ \global\setbox\@marbox\box\@currbox \fi
+ \@tempdima\@mparbottom
+ \advance\@tempdima -\@pageht
+ \advance\@tempdima\ht\@marbox
+ \ifdim\@tempdima >\z@
+ \@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page \thepage\space moved}%
+ \else
+ \@tempdima\z@
+ \fi
+ \global\@mparbottom\@pageht
+ \global\advance\@mparbottom\@tempdima
+ \global\advance\@mparbottom\dp\@marbox
+ \global\advance\@mparbottom\marginparpush
+ \advance\@tempdima -\ht\@marbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Putting box movement inside the `marbox':
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\setbox \@marbox
+ \vbox {\vskip \@tempdima
+ \box \@marbox}%
+ \global \ht\@marbox \z@
+ \global \dp\@marbox \z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Sticking (rather than gluing:-) the `marbox' to the line above,
+% changed vskip to kern:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \kern -\@pagedp
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \hb@xt@\columnwidth
+ {\ifnum \@tempcnta >\z@
+ \hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep
+ \else
+ \hskip -\marginparsep \hskip -\marginparwidth
+ \fi
+ \box\@marbox \hss}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For this reason the following code can vanish:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \nobreak %% No longer needed. CAR92/12
+% \vskip -\@tempdima %% No longer needed. CAR92/12
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \hbox{\vrule \@height\z@ \@width\z@ \@depth\@pagedp}}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Kludgeins}
+%
+% This part of the file is part of the implementation of the following
+% two new commands for \LaTeX2e{}.
+%
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \enlargethispage{<dim>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Adds |<dim>| to the height of the current column only. On the printed
+% page the bottom of this column is extended downwards by exactly
+% |<dim>| without having any effect on the placement of the footer; this
+% may result in an overprinting.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \enlargethispage*{<dim>}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Similar to |\enlargethispage| but it tries to squeeze the column to
+% be printed in as small a space as possible, ie it uses any
+% shrinkability in the column. If the column was not explicitly broken
+% (\eg with |\pagebreak|) this may result in an overfull box message but
+% execpt for this it will come out as expected (if you know what to
+% expect).
+%
+% The star form of this command is dedicated to Leslie Lamport, the
+% other we need for ourselves (FMi, CAR).
+%
+% These commands may well have unwanted effects if used soon
+% before a \clearpage: please give keep them clear of such places.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@kludgeins}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1993/11/23}{Insert added}
+% The insert which makes \TeX{} do a lot of the necessary work.
+% All we need to put into it is the amount by which the pagegoal
+% should be changed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+\newinsert \@kludgeins
+\global\dimen\@kludgeins \maxdimen
+\global\count\@kludgeins 1000
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enlargethispage}
+% \begin{macro}{\enlargethispage*}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1993/11/23}{Commands added}
+% The user command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+\gdef \enlargethispage {%
+ \@ifstar
+ {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{Enlarging page height * }%
+%</trace>
+ \@enlargepage{\hbox{\kern\p@}}}%
+ {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{Enlarging page height exactly---}%
+%</trace>
+ \@enlargepage\@empty}%
+}
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+%<*autoload>
+\def\enlargethispage{\@autoload{out1}\enlargethispage}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@enlargepage}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1993/11/23}{Command added}
+% This actually inserts the insert, after checking for extreme
+% values of the change.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def1>
+\gdef\@enlargepage#1#2{%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{\@spaces\@spaces by #2}%
+%</trace>
+ \@tempskipa#2\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>.5\maxdimen
+ \@latexerr{Suggested\space extra\space height\space
+ (\the\@tempskipa)\space dangerously\space
+ large}\@eha
+ \else
+ \ifdim \vsize<.5\maxdimen
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce {Kludgeins added--pagegoal before: \the\pagegoal}%
+%</trace>
+ \@bsphack
+ \insert\@kludgeins{#1\vskip-\@tempskipa}%
+ \@esphack
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This next bit is for tracing only:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+ \ifvmode \par
+ \tr@ce {Kludgeins added--pagegoal after: \the \pagegoal}%
+ \fi
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \@latexerr{Page\space height\space already\space
+ too\space large}\@eha
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|def1>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Float control}
+%
+% This part implements controllable floats and other changes
+% to the float mechanism.
+%
+% It provides, at the doument level, the following command for
+% inclusion in \LaTeX2e{}.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \suppressfloats
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% This suppresses all further floats on the current page.
+%
+% With an optional argument it suppresses only floats only in certain
+% positions on the current page.
+% \begin{quote}
+% |[t]|\quad suppresses only floats at the top of the page
+% |[b]|\quad suppresses only floats at the bottom of the page
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% It also enables the use of an extra specifier, {\tt !}, in the
+% location optional argument of a float. If this is present then,
+% just for this particular float, whenever it is processed by the float
+% mechanism the followinhg are ignored:
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item all restrictions on the number of floats which can appear;
+% \item all explicit restrictions on the amount of space which should
+% (not) be occupied by floats and/or text.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% The mechanism will still attempt to ensure that pages are not
+% overfull.
+%
+% These specifiers override, for the single float, the suppression
+% commands described above.
+%
+%
+% In its current form, it also suplies a reasonably exhaustive, and
+% somewhat baroque, means of tracing some aspects of the float
+% mechanism.
+%
+% More tracing.
+% \begin{macro}{\tr@ce}
+% \begin{macro}{\notrace}
+% \begin{macro}{\tracefloats}
+% \begin{macro}{\@traceval}
+% \begin{macro}{\tracefloatvals}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tracemessage}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1993/11/30}{Commands added}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{Commands changed}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1993/12/17}{tracefloatvals made a document command}
+% Set-up tracing for floats independent of other tracing as it
+% produces mega-output. Default is no tracing.
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1995/04/24}
+% {Do not add to kernel unless `trace' specified}
+% \task{???}{Make proper tracing module}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*trace>
+\def \@tracemessage #1{\typeout{LaTeX2e: #1}}
+\def \tracefloats{\let \tr@ce \@tracemessage}
+\def \notrace {\let \tr@ce \@gobble}
+\notrace
+\def \@traceval #1{\tr@ce{\string #1 = \the #1}}
+\def \tracefloatvals{%
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+ \@floatplacement
+ \@traceval\@colnum
+ \@traceval\@colroom
+ \@traceval\@topnum
+ \@traceval\@toproom
+ \@traceval\@botnum
+ \@traceval\@botroom
+ \@traceval\@fpmin
+ \tr@ce{\string\textfraction = \textfraction}%
+ \@traceval\@dbltopnum
+ \@traceval\@dbltoproom
+}
+%</trace>
+%<*flafter>
+\providecommand\tr@ce[1]{}
+%</flafter>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\suppressfloats}
+% \begin{macro}{\@flstop}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Commands added}
+% Float suppression commands: these set the relevant counter
+% globally to zero. Thus they are overridden for a particular float
+% by an ! specifier.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def \suppressfloats {%
+ \@ifnextchar [%
+ \@flstop
+ {\global \@colnum \z@}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Maybe this should be a loop over |#1|?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@flstop [#1]{%
+ \if t#1%
+ \global \@topnum \z@
+ \fi
+ \if b#1%
+ \global \@botnum \z@
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Manipulation of float placement and type; both their strings and the
+% corresponding count registers.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fpstype}
+% \begin{macro}{\@reqcolroom}
+% \begin{macro}{\@textfloatsheight}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Commands added}
+% First a new count register to go with |\@currtype|.
+%
+% Then a new skip register, for information needed to remove the
+% |\@maxsep| conservatism: it is possible that this could use a
+% temporary register.
+%
+% Finally a dimension register to hold the total height of in-text
+% floats on the current page. This is needed to implement a
+% major change in the functionality of |\@addtocurcol| which is,
+% nevertheless, a bug fix.
+% It is not local and therefore cannot be a temporary register.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount \@fpstype
+\newdimen \@reqcolroom
+\newdimen \@textfloatsheight
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fpsadddefault}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% Adds the default placement to what is already there.
+%
+% Should not need to change this, but could do it as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def \@fpsadddefault {%
+% \@temptokena \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+% {\csname fps@\@captype \endcsname}%
+% \edef \reserved@a {\the\@temptokena}%
+% \@onelevel@sanitize \reserved@a
+% \edef \@fps {\@fps\reserved@a}%
+%}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+\def \@fpsadddefault {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fps changed from: \@fps}%
+%</trace>
+ \edef \@fps {\@fps\csname fps@\@captype \endcsname}%
+ \@latex@warning {%
+ No positions in optional float specifier.\MessageBreak
+ Default added (so using `\@fps')}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setfloattypecounts}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% Sets counters |\@fpstype| and |\@currtype|.
+%
+% BANG $==$ bit4 of $|\count\@currbox| = 0$.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@setfloattypecounts {%
+ \@currtype \count\@currbox
+ \@fpstype \count\@currbox
+ \divide\@currtype\@xxxii \multiply\@currtype\@xxxii
+ \advance \@fpstype -\@currtype
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{(mod 32) fpstype: \the \@fpstype}%
+ \tr@ce{(mult of 32) currtype: \the \@currtype}%
+% Tracing only: but some should be changed into real errors/warnings?
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=\z@
+ \tr@ce{ERROR: no PLACEMENT, fpstype = \the \@fpstype = 0?}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=\@ne
+ \tr@ce{WARNING: only h, fpstype = \the \@fpstype = 1?}%
+ \fi
+ \tr@ce{BANG float}%
+ \else
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=\sixt@@n
+ \tr@ce{ERROR: no PLACEMENT, fpstype = \the \@fpstype = 16?}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=17
+ \tr@ce{WARNING: only h, fpstype = \the \@fpstype = 17?}%
+ \fi
+ \tr@ce{ORD float}%
+ \fi
+%</trace>
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Macros for getting, testing and setting bits of the fps.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@getfpsbit}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% Sets |\@tempcnta| to required bit of |\count\@currbox|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def \@getfpsbit {%
+ \@boxfpsbit \@currbox
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@boxfpsbit}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% Used above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@boxfpsbit #1#2{%
+ \@tempcnta \count#1%
+ \divide \@tempcnta #2\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@testfp}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% New definition of the float page test.
+%
+% \changes{v1.1v}{1996/07/26}{remove \cs{global} before \cs{@test...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@testfp #1{%
+ \@boxfpsbit #18\relax % Really `#1 8' for human readers!
+ \ifodd \@tempcnta
+ \else
+ \@testtrue
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setfpsbit}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% Sets required bit of |\@tempcnta| (to 1).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@setfpsbit #1{%
+ \@tempcntb \@tempcnta
+ \divide \@tempcntb #1\relax
+ \ifodd \@tempcntb
+ \else
+ \advance \@tempcnta #1\relax
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@resethfps}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1993/12/12}{Warnings added: minimal}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Warning changed}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1994/04/24}{Number 2 changed to \cs{tw@}}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/05/02}{Code shortened}
+% Globally adds t as a possible location for an h or !h only placement:
+% this must be done using the count.
+%
+% Although it will leave |\@fpstype| set to 17 even if it was
+% originally 1, this does not matter since it is the last thing in
+% |\@addtocurcol|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+\def \@resethfps {%
+ \let\reserved@a\@empty
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=\@ne
+ \def \reserved@a {!}%
+ \@fpstype 17
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=17
+ \global \advance \count\@currbox \tw@
+ \@latex@warning@no@line {%
+ `\reserved@a h' float specifier changed to `\reserved@a ht'}%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{%
+ `t' added to `\reserved@a h'- new Count: \the \count\@currbox}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Special stuff for BANG floats.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@flsetnum}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+%
+% Ignores any zero float counter value in case BANG.
+%
+% It uses a local assignment to the normally global counter: a bit
+% naughty, perhaps?
+%
+% These assgnments are safe so long as the counter involved is only
+% consulted once (\ie only for the `bang float') with the changed value.
+% This is the case within |\@addtocurcol| because it is used only
+% once within a call of the output routine (which forms a group).
+%
+% For |\@addtonextcol| this is achieved by putting a group around its
+% code; this is needed because it is called (by |\@startcolumn|) for
+% each float which was on the deferlist. Almost identical
+% considerations pertain to |\@addtodblcol|. There may be more
+% efficient ways to handle this, but the group seems to be the simplest.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0n}{1994/04/30}{Rogue space removed}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@flsetnum #1{%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype: \the \@fpstype (flsetnum \string#1)}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+ \ifnum #1=\z@
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{BANG float resetting \string#1 to 1}%
+%</trace>
+ #1\@ne
+ \fi
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{#1 (before) = \the #1}%
+%</trace>
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@flsettextmin}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% This ignores |\textfraction| space restriction in case BANG.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@flsettextmin {%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype: \the \@fpstype (flsettextmin)}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{BANG ignoring textmin}%
+%</trace>
+ \@textmin \z@
+ \else
+ \@textmin \textfraction\@colht
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{ORD textmin = \the \@textmin}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@flcheckspace}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% This ignores space restriction in case BANG; this is still slightly
+% conervative since it does not allow for the fact that, if there is
+% no text in the column then |\textfloatsep| is not needed.
+% Sets |@tempswa| true if there is room for |\@currbox|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@flcheckspace #1#2{%
+ \advance \@reqcolroom
+ \ifx #2\@empty \textfloatsep \else \floatsep \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{colroom = \the \@colroom (flcheckspace \string#1 \string#2)}%
+ \tr@ce{reqcolroom = \the \@reqcolroom
+ (flcheckspace \string#1 \string#2)}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \ifdim #1>\ht\@currbox
+ \@tempswatrue
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{Space OK: #1 = \the #1 > \the \ht \@currbox
+ (flcheckspace \string#1 \string#2)}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{fpstype: \the \@fpstype
+ (flcheckspace \string#1 \string#2)}%
+%</trace>
+ \ifnum \@fpstype<\sixt@@n
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{BANG float ignoring #1
+ (flcheckspace \string#1 \string#2):}%
+ \tr@ce{\@spaces #1 = \the #1. Ht float: \the \ht \@currbox
+ BANG}%
+%</trace>
+ \@tempswatrue
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail---no room (flcheckspace \string#1 \string#2)
+ (fpstype \the \@fpstype=ORD?):}%
+ \tr@ce{\@spaces #1 = \the #1. Ht float: \the \ht \@currbox
+ ORD?}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+ \fi
+%<*trace>
+ \else
+ \tr@ce{Fail---no room at 2nd test of colroom
+ (flcheckspace \string#1 \string#2)}%
+%</trace>
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@flupdates}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1993/12/05}{Command added}
+% This updates everything when a float is placed.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\def \@flupdates #1#2#3{%
+ \global \advance #1\m@ne
+ \global \advance \@colnum \m@ne
+ \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+ \advance \@tempdima
+ -\ifx #3\@empty \textfloatsep \else \floatsep \fi
+ \global \advance #2\@tempdima
+ \global \advance \@colroom \@tempdima
+ \@cons #3\@currbox
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Interesting facts about float mechanisms past and present, together
+% with a summary of various features, some unresolved:
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item The value |\textfraction| does not affect the processing
+% of doublecol floats: this seems sensible, but should be
+% documented.
+% \item |\twocolumn| floatplacement was wrong: dbl not needed, ord
+% needed.
+% \item |\@floatplacement| was not called after |\@startdblcol|
+% or |\@topnewpage|. This has been changed; it is clearly a bug
+% fix.
+% \item The use |\@topnewpage| when |\dblfigrule| is non-trivial
+% produced a rule in the wrong place. This has been fixed by not
+% using |\dblfigrule| when processing the `float' from
+% |\@topnewpage|.
+% \item If the specifier was just h and the float could not be put
+% here, it went on the deferlist and stayed there until a clearpage.
+% It now gets changed to a `th': this is only an error-recovery
+% action, putting just h or !h should be deprecated.
+% \item |\@dblmaxsep| was `the maximum of |\dblfloatsep| and
+% |\dbltexfloatsep|'. But it was never used! Now gone completely,
+% like |\@maxsep|.
+% \item After an h float is put on a page, it was counted as text when
+% applying the |\textfraction| test; this is possibly too big a
+% change although it is a bug fix?
+% \item Two consecutive h floats are separated by twice |\intextsep|:
+% this could be changed to one by use of |\addvspace|, OK?
+% Note that it would also mean that less space is put in if an h
+% float immediaiely follows other spaces. This is also possibly
+% too big a change, at least for compatibility mode?
+% Or it may be simply wrong! It has not been changed.
+% \item Now |\@addtocurcol| checks first for just p fps. I think
+% that this is an increase in efficiency, but maybe the coding
+% should be made even more efficient.
+% \item |\@tryfcolumn| now tests if the list is empty first, otherwise
+% lots of wasted time! Thus this test has been removed from
+% |\@startcolumn|.
+% As Frank pointed out, this makes |\@startcolumn| less
+% efficient. But it is now the same as |\@startdblcolumn|: I can
+% see no reason why they should be different, but which is best?
+% \item Why is |\@colroom| set in |\@doclearpage|?
+% \item Footnotes. Check what |\clearpage| does when footnotes are
+% left over. Footnotes are not put on float pages and, also,
+% |\@addtonextcol| ignores the existence of held-over footnotes
+% in deciding what floats can go on the page. Not changed.
+% \item |\clearpage| can still lose non-boxes, at least when floats
+% are involved. It also moves some to the `wrong page', but this
+% may be a coding problem.
+% \item The ! option makes it necessary to check in |\output| that
+% there is enough room left on the page after adding a float. (This
+% would have been necessary anyway if anyone set |\@textmin| too
+% close to zero! A similar danger existed also if the text in a
+% |\twocolumn[text]| entity gets too large.)
+% The current implementation of this also makes the normal case a
+% little less efficient, OK?
+% Not enough room means, at present, less than |\baselineskip|,
+% with a warning: is this OK? Should it be made generic (another
+% parameter)?
+% \item There are four possibilities for supporting this:
+%
+% |\twocolumn[\maketitle more text]|
+%
+% One is to change
+% |\maketitle| slightly to allow this. Another is to change
+% |\@topnewpage| so that more than one |\twocolumn[]| command is
+% allowed; in this case |\maketitle\twoclumn[more text]| will work.
+% The former is more robust from the user's viewpoint, but makes the
+% code for |\maketitle| rather ad hoc (maybe it is already?).
+% Another is to misuse the global twocolumn flag locally within
+% |\@topnewpage|.
+% Yet another is to move the column count register from the multicol
+% package into the kernel. This has beeen done.
+% \item Where should the reinserts be put to maximise the
+% probability that footmotes come out on the correct page?
+% Or should we go for as much compatibility as possible (but see
+% next item)?
+% \item Should we continue to support (as much as possible)
+% |\samepage|? Some of its intended functionality is now advertised
+% as being provided by |\enlargethispage|. Use of either is likely
+% to result in wrongly placed footnotes, marginals, etc.
+% Which should have priority: obeying the pagination instructions,
+% or correct placement of notes/marginalia?
+% \item Is the adjustment of space to cause shrinking in the
+% kludge-* case correct? Should it be limited to 0pt?
+% \item Is the setting of |\boxmaxdepth| in makecol and friends
+% needed? It only has any effect if |\@textbottom| ends with a box
+% or rule, in which case the vskip to allow for its depth should
+% also be added. If it is kept, it should probably be the last
+% thing in the box. It has now been removed.
+%
+% It would perhaps be better to document that |\@textbottom|
+% and |\@texttop| must have natural height 0pt.
+% \item I cannot see why the vskip adjustement for the depth
+% is needed if boxmaxdepth is used to ensure that there is never
+% a too deep box.
+% \item The value of |\boxmaxdepth| should be explicitly set
+% whenever necessary: it is too risky to assume that it has any
+% particular value. Care is needed in deciding what to set it to.
+%
+% It is interesting to note that the value of |\boxmaxdepth| is
+% unique in being read before the local settings for the box group
+% are reset; all other parameter settings which affect the box
+% construction use their values outside the box group.
+% \item Should |\@maxdepth| store the setting of |\maxdepth| from
+% lplain? Or should we provide a proper interface to class files
+% for setting these?
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% An analysis of various other macros.
+%
+% |\@opcol| should do |\@floatplacement|, but where? Right at the
+% end, since it always occurs at the start of a column.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\@opcol{%
+% % Why is this done first?
+% \global \@mparbottom \z@
+% \if@twocolumn
+% \@outputdblcol
+% \else
+% \@outputpage
+% % This is not needed since it is done at the end of
+% % |\@outputpage|:
+% \global \@colht \textheight
+% \fi}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Only tracing has been added to these.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+\def\@makefcolumn #1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@fpmin \z@
+ \let \@testfp \@gobble
+ \@tryfcolumn #1%
+ \endgroup
+%<*trace>
+ \if@fcolmade
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: in \string\clearpage \if@twocolumn ---twocolumn\fi---}%
+ \tr@ce{----- float column/page completed from \string#1}%
+ \fi
+%</trace>
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This will line up the last baselines in the two
+% columns provided they are constructed in the normal way: \ie ending
+% in a skip of minus the original depth, with |\@textbottom| adding
+% nothing.
+%
+% Thus again it is essential for |\@textbottom| to have depth 0pt.
+% \changes{1.2g}{2000/07/12}{Ensure that rule is in \cs{normalcolor}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@outputdblcol{%
+ \if@firstcolumn
+ \global \@firstcolumnfalse
+ \global \setbox\@leftcolumn \box\@outputbox
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: first column boxed}%
+%</trace>
+ \else
+ \global \@firstcolumntrue
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {%
+ \hb@xt@\textwidth {%
+ \hb@xt@\columnwidth {%
+ \box\@leftcolumn \hss}%
+ \hfil
+ {\normalcolor\vrule \@width\columnseprule}%
+ \hfil
+ \hb@xt@\columnwidth {%
+ \box\@outputbox \hss}%
+ }%
+ }%
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: second column also boxed}%
+%</trace>
+ \@combinedblfloats
+ \@outputpage
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: two column page completed}%
+%</trace>
+ \begingroup
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+ \@startdblcolumn
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This loop could be replaced by an |\expandafter| tail
+% recursion in\\ |\@startdblcolumn|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi
+ {\@outputpage
+%<*trace>
+ \tr@ce{PAGE: double float page completed}%
+%</trace>
+ \@startdblcolumn}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|fltrace>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Float placement parameters}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1993/12/14}{Section added to declare all parameters}
+%
+% The main purpose of this section is to ensure that all the
+% float-placement parameters which need to be set in a class file or
+% package have been declared. It also describes their use and sets
+% values for them which are reasonable for typical douments using
+% US letter or A4 sized paper.
+%
+% \paragraph{Limits for the placement of floating objects}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@topnumber}
+% This counter holds the maximum number of
+% floats that can appear at the top of a text page or column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\newcount\c@topnumber
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topfraction}
+% This macro holds the maximum proportion (as a decimal number) of
+% a text page or column that can be occupied by floats at the top.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\topfraction{.7}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@bottomnumber}
+% This counter holds the maximum number of
+% floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page or column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\c@bottomnumber
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bottomfraction}
+% This macro holds the maximum proportion (as a decimal number) of
+% a text page or column that can be occupied by floats at the bottom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bottomfraction{.3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@totalnumber}
+% This counter holds the maximum number of floats that can appear on
+% any text page or column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\c@totalnumber
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textfraction}
+% This macro holds the minimum proportion (as a decimal number) of
+% a text page or column that must be occupied by text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\textfraction{.2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floatpagefraction}
+% This macro holds the minimum proportion (as a decimal number) of
+% a page or column that must be occupied by floating objects before a
+% `float page' is produced.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\floatpagefraction{.5}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@dbltopnumber}
+% This counter holds the maximum number of double-column floats that
+% can appear on the top of a two-column text page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\c@dbltopnumber
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dbltopfraction}
+% This macro holds the maximum proportion (as a decimal number) of
+% a two-column text page that can be occupied by double-column floats
+% at the top.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\dbltopfraction{.7}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatpagefraction}
+% This macro holds the minimum proportion (as a decimal number) of
+% a page that must be occupied by double-column floating objects
+% before a `double-column float page' is produced.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\dblfloatpagefraction{.5}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Floats on a text page}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\textfloatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\intextsep}
+% When a floating object is placed on a page with text, these
+% parameters control the seperation between the float and the other
+% objects on the page. These parameters are used for both
+% one-column mode and single-column floats in two-column mode.
+% They are all rubber lengths.
+%
+% |\floatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are placed
+% at the top or bottom of the text page or column.
+%
+% |\textfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
+% at the top or bottom of the page or column.
+%
+% |\intextsep| is the space between in-text floats and the text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\floatsep
+\newskip\textfloatsep
+\newskip\intextsep
+\setlength\floatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\dbltextfloatsep}
+% When double-column floats (floating objects that span the whole
+% |\textwidth|) are placed at the top of a text page in two-column
+% mode, the separation between the float and the text is controlled
+% by |\dblfloatsep| and |\dbltextfloatsep|. They are rubber lengths.
+%
+% |\dblfloatsep| is the space between adjacent double-column floats
+% placed at the top of the text page.
+%
+% |\dbltextfloatsep| is the space between the main text and
+% double-column floats at the top of the page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\dblfloatsep
+\newskip\dbltextfloatsep
+\setlength\dblfloatsep {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Floats on their own page or column}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fptop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fpsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@fpbot}
+% When floating objects are placed on a seperate page or column,
+% called a `float page', the layout of the page is controlled by
+% these parameters, which are rubber lengths.
+%
+% At the top of the page |\@fptop| is inserted;
+% typically this supplies some stretchable whitespace.
+% At the bottom of the page |\@fpbot| ais inserted.
+% Between adjacent floats |\@fpsep| is inserted.
+%
+% These parameters are used for all floating objects on a
+% `float page' in one-column mode, and for single-column
+% floats in two-column mode.
+%
+% Note that at least one of the two parameters |\@fptop| and
+% |\@fpbot| should contain a |plus ...fil| so as to fill the
+% remaining empty space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\@fptop
+\newskip\@fpsep
+\newskip\@fpbot
+\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfptop}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpbot}
+% Double-column `float pages' in two-column mode use similar
+% parameters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\@dblfptop
+\newskip\@dblfpsep
+\newskip\@dblfpbot
+\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
+\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topfigrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\botfigrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\dblfigrule}
+% The macros can be used to put in rules between floats and text;
+% whatever they insert should be vertical mode material which takes
+% up zero space.
+% \task{CAR}{Add more rules (for Frank in addtocurcol)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\topfigrule=\relax
+\let\botfigrule=\relax
+\let\dblfigrule=\relax
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e7ded9e0e48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpage.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,334 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltpage.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltpage.dtx}
+ [2000/06/02 v1.0k LaTeX Kernel (page style setup)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltpage.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{175}
+%
+% \section{Page styles and related commands}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{Initial version, split from ltherest.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/04/19}{Improve documentation}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1996/04/18}{Improve documentation}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Page Style Commands}
+%
+% |\pagestyle|\marg{style} : sets the page style of the
+% current and succeeding pages to \emph{style}
+%
+% |\thispagestyle|\marg{style} : sets the page style of the
+% current page only to \emph{style}.
+%
+% To define a page style \emph{style}, you must define
+% |\ps@|\emph{style} to set the page style parameters.
+%
+% \subsection{How a page style makes running heads and feet}
+%
+% The |\ps@|\ldots command defines the macros |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|,
+% |\@evenhead|, and |\@evenfoot| to define the running heads and feet.
+% (See output routine.) To make headings determined by the sectioning
+% commands, the page style defines the commands |\chaptermark|,
+% |\sectionmark|, etc., where |\chaptermark|\marg{text} is called by
+% |\chapter| to set a mark. The |\...mark| commands and the |\...head|
+% macros are defined with the help of the following macros.
+%
+% (All the |\...mark| commands should be initialized to no-ops.)
+%
+% \subsection{marking conventions}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ extends \TeX's |\mark| facility by producing two kinds of marks
+% a `left' and a `right' mark, using the following commands:\\
+% |\markboth|\marg{left}\marg{right} : Adds both marks.\\
+% |\markright|\marg{right} : Adds a 'right' mark.\\
+% |\leftmark| :
+% Used in the output routine, gets the current `left' mark.
+% Works like \TeX's |\botmark.|\\
+% |\rightmark| :
+% Used in the output routine, gets the current `right' mark.
+% Works like \TeX's |\firstmark|.
+% The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks `numbered
+% within' left marks---e.g., the left mark is changed by a |\chapter|
+% command and the right mark is changed by a |\section| command.
+% However, it does produce somewhat anomalous results if 2 |\markboth|'s
+% occur on the same page.
+%
+% Commands like |\tableofcontents| that should set the marks in some
+% page styles use a |\@mkboth| command, which is |\let| by the pagestyle
+% command (|\ps@...|) to |\markboth| for setting the heading or to
+% |\@gobbletwo| to do nothing.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle}
+% User command to set the page style for this and following pages.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/01/24}
+% {(DPC) Complain if pagestyle is undefined.}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/02/01}
+% {(DPC) Modify to get nicer error message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pagestyle#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{ps@#1}%
+ \undefinedpagestyle
+ {\@nameuse{ps@#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle}
+% User command to set the page style for this page only.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1994/02/01}
+% {(DPC) Modify to get nicer error message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thispagestyle#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{ps@#1}%
+ \undefinedpagestyle
+ {\global\@specialpagetrue\gdef\@specialstyle{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@empty}
+% The empty page style: No head or foot line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@empty{%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo\let\@oddhead\@empty\let\@oddfoot\@empty
+ \let\@evenhead\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/05/26}{removed \cs{rmfamily} (PR 1578)}
+% The plain page style: No head, centred page number in foot.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@plain{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \let\@oddhead\@empty\def\@oddfoot{\reset@font\hfil\thepage
+ \hfil}\let\@evenhead\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@leftmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@rightmark}
+% We implement |\@leftmark| and |\@rightmark| in terms of already
+% defined commands to save token space. We can't get rid of them
+% since they are sometimes used in applications.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@leftmark\@firstoftwo
+\let\@rightmark\@secondoftwo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\markright}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/20}{Changed setting for \cs{protect}.}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{@unexpandable@protect}.
+% ASAJ.}
+%
+% User commands for setting \LaTeX\ marks.
+%
+% Test for |\@nobreak| added 15 Apr 86 in |\markboth| and |\markright|
+% letting |\label| and |\index| to |\relax| added 22 Feb 86 so these
+% commands can appear in sectioning command arguments
+% RmS 91/06/21 Same for |\glossary|
+% \changes{v1.0k}{2000/06/02}{Tidied 1.0j reimplementation, CAR}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{2000/06/02}{Small adjustment to give slightly less
+% expansion, CAR}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{2000/05/26}{Reimplementation to fix expansion
+% error (pr/3203).}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\markboth#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@themark {{#1}{#2}}%
+ \@temptokena \expandafter{\@themark}%
+ \mark{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
+\def\markright#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Protection is handled inside |\@markright|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@markright\@themark {#1}%
+ \@temptokena \expandafter{\@themark}%
+ \mark{\the\@temptokena}%
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@markright}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{2000/05/26}{Reimplementation to fix expansion
+% error (pr/3203).}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{2000/06/02}{Small adjustment to give slightly less
+% expansion, CAR}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmark}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{2000/05/26}{Use \cs{@empty} instead of brace group
+% (pr/3203).}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightmark}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/17}{Stopgap solution to mark \cs{leftmark}
+% and \cs{rightmark} work without initializing mark until
+% the problem is solved.}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{2000/05/26}{Use \cs{@empty} instead of brace group
+% (pr/3203).}
+% \task{???}{mark initialisation solved?}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@markright#1#2#3{\@temptokena {#1}%
+ \unrestored@protected@xdef\@themark{{\the\@temptokena}{#3}}}
+\def\leftmark{\expandafter\@leftmark\botmark\@empty\@empty}
+\def\rightmark{\expandafter\@rightmark\firstmark\@empty\@empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@themark}
+% Initialise \LaTeX's marks without setting a \TeX\ mark \meta{whatsit}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@themark{{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mark}
+% Test versions of \LaTeXe\ initialised \TeX's |\mark| system
+% at this point, but this was removed before the first release.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/16}{Init \cs{mark} at begin document}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/17}{Removed init \cs{mark} at begin
+% document, since it doesn't work.}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\AtBeginDocument{\mark{{}{}}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottom}
+% |\raggedbottom| typesets pages with no vertical stretch, so they have
+% their natural height instead of all being exactly the
+% same height. (Uses a space of .0001fil to avoid
+% interfering with the 1fil space of |\newpage|.)
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\raggedbottom{%
+ \def\@textbottom{\vskip \z@ \@plus.0001fil}\let\@texttop\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\flushbottom}
+% |\flushbottom|:
+% Inverse of |\raggedbottom| --- makes all pages the same height.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\flushbottom{%
+ \let\@textbottom\relax \let\@texttop\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sloppy}
+% |\sloppy| will never (well, hardly ever) produce overfull boxes, but
+% may produce underfull ones. (14 June 85)
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/18}{Added \cs{emergencystretch}}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/07/20}{Save a few tokens}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sloppy{%
+ \tolerance 9999%
+ \emergencystretch 3em%
+ \hfuzz .5\p@
+ \vfuzz\hfuzz}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{sloppypar}
+% A sloppypar environment is equivalent to |{\par \sloppy ... \par}|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sloppypar{\par\sloppy}
+\def\endsloppypar{\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fussy}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1995/04/24}{reset \cs{emergencystretch} latex/1344}
+% Resets \TeX's parameters to their normal finicky values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fussy{%
+ \emergencystretch\z@
+ \tolerance 200%
+ \hfuzz .1\p@
+ \vfuzz\hfuzz}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\overfullrule}
+% \LaTeX\ default is no overfull box rule. Changed by document
+% class option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\overfullrule 0pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3deb9820936
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpageno.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltpageno.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltpageno.dtx}
+ [1994/05/19 v1.1a LaTeX Kernel (Page Numbering)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltpageno.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{16}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/29}
+% {Create file ltcntlen from parts of ltmiscen and ltherest.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/19}
+% {Extract file ltpageno from ltcntlen.}
+%
+% \section{Page Numbering}
+% Page numbers are produced by a page counter, used just like any other
+% counter. The only difference is that |\c@page| contains the number of
+% the next page to be output (the one currently being produced), rather
+% than one minus it. Thus, it is normally initialized to~1 rather
+% than~0. |\c@page| is defined to be |\count0|, rather than a count
+% assigned by |\newcount|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\pagenumbering}
+% The user sets the pagenumber style with the |\pagenumbering|\marg{foo}
+% command, which sets the page counter to 1 and defines |\thepage| to be
+% |\foo|. For example, |\pagenumbering{roman}| causes pages to be
+% numbered i, ii, etc.
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{page nos.,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\countdef\c@page=0 \c@page=1
+\def\cl@page{}
+\def\pagenumbering#1{%
+ \global\c@page \@ne \gdef\thepage{\csname @#1\endcsname
+ \c@page}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..417d45226b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpar.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltpar.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltpar.dtx}
+ [1995/04/29 v1.1c LaTeX Kernel (paragraphs)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltpar.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Tobias Oetiker \thanks{Tobi did the documentation update}\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{18}
+%
+% \CharacterTable
+% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/16}{(ASAJ) Split from ltinit.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/04/29}{(TO) Comments clean-up.}
+%
+% \section{Paragraphs}
+%
+% This section of the kernel declares the commands used to set
+% |\par| and |\everypar| when ever their function needs to be
+% changed for a long time.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \subsection{Implementation}
+%
+%
+% There are two situations in which |\par| may be changed:
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Long-term changes, in which the new value is to remain in effect
+% until the current environment is left. The environments that
+% change |\par| in this way are the following:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item All list environments (itemize, quote, etc.)
+% \item Environments that turn |\par| into a noop:
+% tabbing, array and tabular.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \item Temporary changes, in which |\par| is restored to its previous
+% value the next time it is executed. The following are all such uses.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\end| when preceded by |\@endparenv|, which is called by
+% |\endtrivlist|
+% \item The mechanism for avoiding page breaks and getting the
+% spacing right after section heads.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@setpar}
+% To permit the proper interaction of these two situations, long-term
+% changes are made by the |\@setpar{|\meta{VAL}|}| command.
+% It's function is:
+% \begin{quote}
+% To set |\par|. It |\def|'s |\par| and |\@par| to \meta{VAL}.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@restorepar}
+% Short-term changes are made by the usual |\def\par| commands.
+% The original values are restored after a short-term change
+% by the |\@restorepar| commands.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\@@par}
+% |\@@par| always is defined to be the original \TeX{} |\par|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\everypar}
+% |\everypar| is changed only for the short term. Whenever |\everypar|
+% is set non-null, it should restore itself to null when executed.
+%
+% The following commands change |\everypar| in this way:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\item|
+% \item |\end| when preceded by |\@endparenv|, which is called by
+% |endtrivlist|
+% \item |\minipage|
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% When dealing with |\par| and |\everypar| remember the following two
+% warnings:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item Commands that make short-term changes to |\par| and |\everypar|
+% must take account of the possibility that the new commands and the
+% ones that do the restoration may be executed inside a group. In
+% particular, |\everypar| is executed inside a group whenever a new
+% paragraph begins with a left brace. The |\everypar| command
+% that restores its definition should be local to the current
+% group (in case the command
+% is inside a minipage used inside someplace where |\everypar| has
+% been redefined). Thus, if |\everypar| is redefined to do an
+% |\everypar{}| it could take several executions of |\everypar|
+% before the restoration ``holds''. This usually causes no problem.
+% However, to prevent the extra executions from doing harm,
+% use a global switch to keep anything harmful in the new
+% |\everypar| from being done twice.
+% \item Commands that change |\everypar| should remember that
+% |\everypar| might be supposed to set the following switches false:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |@nobreak|
+% \item |@minipage|
+% \end{itemize}
+% they should do the setting if necessary.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{par,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setpar}
+% \begin{macro}{\@par}
+% Initiate a long-term change to |\par|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setpar#1{\def\par{#1}\def\@par{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The default definition of |\@par| will ensure that if
+% |\@restorepar| defines |\par| to execute |\@par| it will redefine
+% itself to the primitive |\@@par| after one iteration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@par{\let\par\@@par\par}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@restorepar}
+% Restore from a short-term change to |\par|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@restorepar{\def\par{\@par}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a93f3f4cd67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltpictur.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1487 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltpictur.dtx
+%<def>\ProvidesFile{autopict.sty}
+%<def> [2001/08/27 v1.1k Picture mode autoload file]
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+ \ProvidesFile{ltpictur.dtx}
+ [2003/12/30 v1.1j LaTeX Kernel (Picture Mode)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltpictur.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1528}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/05/07}{Use \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1995/05/19}{Support autoloading feature}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/06/13}{Use \cs{ProvidesFile} in autoload}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1995/07/12}{allow 2e commands in 209 mode. latex/1737}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1995/10/03}{New autoload code}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1999/04/15}{Replaced octal numbers, CAR}
+%
+% \section{Picture Mode}
+% Picture mode commands. In addition to the commands available in
+% \LaTeX2.09, This section adds the new |\qbezier| command for
+% drawing curves.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\qbezier}
+% |\qbezier|\oarg{N}\parg{AX,AY}\parg{BX,BY}\parg{CX,CY}
+% plots a quadratic Bezier curve from \parg{AX,AY} to \parg{CX,CY},
+% with \parg{BX,BY} as the third Bezier point, using $N+1$ points
+% equally spaced parametrically.
+% If $N = 0$ (the default value), then a sufficient number of points
+% are used to draw a connected curve--except that at most
+% $|\qbeziermax| + 1$ points are drawn. A ``point'' is a square of
+% side |\@wholewidth|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\bezier}
+% In addition, to be compatible with the old |bezier| package, a
+% variant of this command, |\bezier|, is defined, in which the first
+% argument is not optional.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v0.1a}{1994/03/07}{Long lines wrapped to 72 columns}
+% \changes{v0.1b}{1994/04/24}
+% {Removed surplus spaces after \cs{hbox to } in several cases}
+% \changes{v0.1d}{1994/05/13}
+% {Removed surplus braces from \cs{@if..} constructions}
+% \changes{v0.1e}{1994/05/22}{Use new warning cmds}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% \unitlength = value of dimension argument
+% \@wholewidth = current line width
+% \@halfwidth = half of current line width
+% \@linefnt = font for drawing lines
+% \@circlefnt = font for drawing circles
+%
+% \linethickness{DIM} : Sets the width of horizontal and vertical lines
+% in a picture to DIM. Does not change width of slanted lines
+% or circles. Width of all lines reset by \thinlines and
+% \thicklines
+%
+% \picture(XSIZE,YSIZE)(XORG,YORG)
+% BEGIN
+% \@picht :=L YSIZE * \unitlength
+% box \@picbox :=
+% \hb@xt@ XSIZE * \unitlength
+% {\hskip -XORG * \unitlength
+% \lower YORG * \unitlength
+% \hbox{
+% \ignorespaces %% added 13 June 89
+% END
+%
+% \endpicture ==
+% BEGIN
+% } \hss }
+% heigth of \@picbox := \@picht
+% depth of \@picbox := 0
+% \mbox{\box\@picbox} %% change 26 Aug 91
+% END
+%
+% \put(X, Y){OBJ} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@killglue
+% \raise Y * \unitlength \hb@xt@ 0pt { \hskip X * \unitlength
+% OBJ \hss }
+% \ignorespaces
+% END
+%
+% \multiput(X,Y)(DELX,DELY){N}{OBJ} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@killglue
+% \@multicnt := N
+% \@xdim := X * \unitlength
+% \@ydim := Y * \unitlength
+% while \@multicnt > 0
+% do \raise \@ydim \hb@xt@ 0pt { \hskip \@xdim
+% OBJ \hss }
+% \@multicnt := \@multicnt - 1
+% \@xdim := \@xdim + DELX * \unitlength
+% \@ydim := \@ydim + DELY * \unitlength
+% od
+% \ignorespaces
+% END
+%
+% \shortstack[POS]{TEXT} : Makes a \vbox containing TEXT stacked as
+% a one-column array, positioned l, r or c as indicated by POS.
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% The `2ekernel' code ensures that a |\usepackage{autopict}| is
+% essentially ignored if a `full' format is being used that has
+% picture mode already in the format.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<2ekernel>\expandafter\let\csname ver@autopict.sty\endcsname\fmtversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wholewidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@halfwidth}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\newdimen\@wholewidth
+\newdimen\@halfwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\unitlength}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\unitlength \unitlength =1pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@picbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\@picht}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\@picbox
+\newdimen\@picht
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\picture}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1994/04/28}{(DPC) Ignore spaces before (}
+% |#1| should be white space.
+% \begin{macro}{\pictur@}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1995/05/12}{Macro added for latex/1355}
+% |#1| should be a |(| (eating any white space before the bracket),
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\long\gdef\picture#1{\pictur@#1}
+\gdef\pictur@(#1){%
+ \@ifnextchar({\@picture(#1)}{\@picture(#1)(0,0)}}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+%<*autoload>
+\def\pictur@{\@autoload{pict}}
+\def\picture{\pictur@\picture}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@picture}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\gdef\@picture(#1,#2)(#3,#4){%
+ \@picht#2\unitlength
+ \setbox\@picbox\hb@xt@#1\unitlength\bgroup
+ \hskip -#3\unitlength
+ \lower #4\unitlength\hbox\bgroup
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endpicture}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/08/26}
+% {(RmS \& FMi) extra boxing level around \cs{@picbox}
+% to guard against unboxing in math mode
+% (proposed by John Hobby)}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\endpicture{%
+ \egroup\hss\egroup
+ \ht\@picbox\@picht\dp\@picbox\z@
+ \mbox{\box\@picbox}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% In the definitions of |\put| and |\multiput|, |\hskip| was replaced by
+% |\kern| just in case arg |#3| = ``plus''. (Bug detected by Don Knuth.
+% changed 20 Jul 87).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\put(#1,#2)#3{%
+ \@killglue\raise#2\unitlength
+ \hb@xt@\z@{\kern#1\unitlength #3\hss}%
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multiput}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1994/04/28}{(DPC) Ignore spaces between )(}
+% |#3| had better be a |(|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\multiput(#1,#2)#3{%
+ \@xdim #1\unitlength
+ \@ydim #2\unitlength
+ \@multiput(}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multiput}
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1994/04/28}{(DPC) Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\gdef\@multiput(#1,#2)#3#4{%
+ \@killglue\@multicnt #3\relax
+ \@whilenum \@multicnt >\z@\do
+ {\raise\@ydim\hb@xt@\z@{\kern\@xdim #4\hss}%
+ \advance\@multicnt\m@ne
+ \advance\@xdim#1\unitlength\advance\@ydim#2\unitlength}%
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@killglue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@killglue{\unskip\@whiledim \lastskip >\z@\do{\unskip}}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thinlines}
+% \begin{macro}{\thicklines}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\gdef\thinlines{\let\@linefnt\tenln \let\@circlefnt\tencirc
+ \@wholewidth\fontdimen8\tenln \@halfwidth .5\@wholewidth}
+\gdef\thicklines{\let\@linefnt\tenlnw \let\@circlefnt\tencircw
+ \@wholewidth\fontdimen8\tenlnw \@halfwidth .5\@wholewidth}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+%<*autoload>
+\def\thinlines{\pictur@\thinlines}
+\def\thicklines{\pictur@\thicklines}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linethickness}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\gdef\linethickness#1{\@wholewidth #1\relax \@halfwidth .5\@wholewidth}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+%<*autoload>
+\def\linethickness{\pictur@\linethickness}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ishortstack}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+\gdef\shortstack{\@ifnextchar[\@shortstack{\@shortstack[c]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ishortstack}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@shortstack[#1]{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \baselineskip-\p@\lineskip 3\p@
+ \let\mb@l\hss\let\mb@r\hss
+ \expandafter\let\csname mb@#1\endcsname\relax
+ \let\\\@stackcr
+ \@ishortstack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/08/14}
+% {(RmS) inserted extra braces around entry for NFSS}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/11/03}
+% {(RmS) changed \cs{halign} to \cs{ialign} to initialize
+% \cs{tabskip} and \cs{everycr}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ishortstack}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@ishortstack#1{\ialign{\mb@l {##}\unskip\mb@r\cr #1\crcr}\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@stackcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ixstackcr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@stackcr{\@ifstar\@ixstackcr\@ixstackcr}
+\gdef\@ixstackcr{\@ifnextchar[\@istackcr{\cr\ignorespaces}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@istackcr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@istackcr[#1]{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \line(X,Y){LEN} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@xarg := X
+% \@yarg := Y
+% \@linelen := LEN * \unitlength
+% if \@xarg = 0
+% then \@vline
+% else if \@yarg = 0
+% then \@hline
+% else \@sline
+% if
+% if
+% END
+%
+% \@sline ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@xarg < 0
+% then @negarg := T
+% \@xarg := -\@xarg
+% \@yyarg := -\@yarg
+% else @negarg := F
+% \@yyarg := \@yarg
+% fi
+% \@tempcnta := |\@yyarg|
+% if \@tempcnta > 6
+% then error: 'LATEX ERROR: Illegal \line or \vector argument.'
+% \@tempcnta := 0
+% fi
+% \box\@linechar := \hbox{\@linefnt \@getlinechar(\@xarg,\@yyarg) }
+% if \@yarg > 0 then \@upordown = \raise
+% \@clnht := 0
+% else \@upordown = \lower
+% \@clnht := height of \box\@linechar
+% fi
+% \@clnwd := width of \box\@linechar
+% if @negarg
+% then \hskip - width of \box\@linechar
+% \reserved@a == \hskip - 2* width of box \@linechar
+% else \reserved@a == \relax
+% fi
+% %% Put out integral number of line segments
+% while \@clnwd < \@linelen
+% do \@upordown \@clnht \copy\@linechar
+% \reserved@a
+% \@clnht := \@clnht + ht of \box\@linechar
+% \@clnwd := \@clnwd + width of \box\@linechar
+% od
+%
+% %% Put out last segment
+% \@clnht := \@clnht - height of \box\@linechar
+% \@clnwd := \@clnwd - width of \box\@linechar
+% \@tempdima := \@linelen - \@clnwd
+% \@tempdimb := \@tempdima - width of \box\@linechar
+% if @negarg then \hskip -\@tempdimb
+% else \hskip \@tempdimb
+% fi
+% \@tempdima := 1000 * \@tempdima
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempdima / width of \box\@linechar
+% \@tempdima := (\@tempcnta * ht of \box\@linechar)/1000
+% \@clnht := \@clnht + \@tempdima
+% if \@linelen < width of box\@linechar
+% then \hskip width of box\@linechar
+% else \hbox{\@upordown \@clnht \copy\@linechar}
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@hline ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@xarg < 0 then \hskip -\@linelen \fi
+% \vrule height \@halfwidth depth \@halfwidth width \@linelen
+% if \@xarg < 0 then \hskip -\@linelen \fi
+% END
+%
+% \@vline == if \@yarg < 0 \@downline else \@upline fi
+%
+%
+% \@getlinechar(X,Y) ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@tempcnta := 8*X - 9
+% if Y > 0
+% then \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + Y
+% else \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta - Y + 64
+% fi
+% \char\@tempcnta
+% END
+%
+% \vector(X,Y){LEN} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@xarg := X
+% \@yarg := Y
+% \@linelen := LEN * \unitlength
+% if \@xarg = 0
+% then \@vvector
+% else if \@yarg = 0
+% then \@hvector
+% else \@svector
+% if
+% if
+% END
+%
+% \@hvector ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@hline
+% {\@linefnt if \@xarg < 0 then \@getlarrow(1,0)
+% else \@getrarrow(1,0)
+% fi}
+% END
+%
+% \@vvector == if \@yarg < 0 \@downvector else \@upvector fi
+%
+% \@svector ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@sline
+% \@tempcnta := |\@yarg|
+% if \@tempcnta < 5
+% then \hskip - width of \box\@linechar
+% \@upordown \@clnht \hbox
+% {\@linefnt
+% if @negarg then \@getlarrow(\@xarg,\@yyarg)
+% else \@getrarrow(\@xarg,\@yyarg)
+% fi }
+% else error: 'LATEX ERROR: Illegal \line or \vector argument.'
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@getlarrow(X,Y) ==
+% BEGIN
+% if Y = 0
+% then \@tempcnta := '33
+% else \@tempcnta := 16 * X - 9
+% \@tempcntb := 2 * Y
+% if \@tempcntb > 0
+% then \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + \@tempcntb
+% else \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta - \@tempcntb + 64
+% fi
+% fi
+% \char\@tempcnta
+% END
+%
+% \@getrarrow(X,Y) ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@tempcntb := |Y|
+% case of \@tempcntb
+% 0 : \@tempcnta := '55
+% 1 : if X < 3
+% then \@tempcnta := 24*X - 6
+% else if X = 3
+% then \@tempcnta := 49
+% else \@tempcnta := 58 fi
+% fi
+% 2 : if X < 3
+% then \@tempcnta := 24*X - 3
+% else \@tempcnta := 51 % X must = 3
+% fi
+% 3 : \@tempcnta := 16*X - 2
+% 4 : \@tempcnta := 16*X + 7
+% endcase
+% if Y < 0
+% then \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + 64
+% fi
+% \char\@tempcnta
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@negarg}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@negarg
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\line}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\line(#1,#2)#3{\@xarg #1\relax \@yarg #2\relax
+ \@linelen #3\unitlength
+ \ifdim\@linelen<\z@\@badlinearg\else
+ \ifnum\@xarg =\z@ \@vline
+ \else \ifnum\@yarg =\z@ \@hline \else \@sline\fi
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@sline{%
+ \ifnum\@xarg<\z@ \@negargtrue \@xarg -\@xarg \@yyarg -\@yarg
+ \else \@negargfalse \@yyarg \@yarg \fi
+\ifnum \@yyarg >\z@ \@tempcnta\@yyarg \else \@tempcnta -\@yyarg \fi
+\ifnum\@tempcnta>6 \@badlinearg\@tempcnta\z@ \fi
+\ifnum\@xarg>6 \@badlinearg\@xarg \@ne \fi
+\setbox\@linechar\hbox{\@linefnt\@getlinechar(\@xarg,\@yyarg)}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we have something like |\line(5,5){30}| the |\@linechar| will
+% not contain a char and later on we will end in an infinite loop.
+% So we check the width of the box and put in something as an
+% emergency fix if necessary.
+% \changes{v1.1k}{2003/08/27}{check for \cs{@linechar} being empty pr/3570}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifdim\wd\@linechar=\z@
+ \setbox\@linechar\hbox{.}%
+ \@badlinearg
+\fi
+\ifnum \@yarg >\z@ \let\@upordown\raise \@clnht\z@
+ \else\let\@upordown\lower \@clnht \ht\@linechar\fi
+\@clnwd \wd\@linechar
+\if@negarg
+ \hskip -\wd\@linechar \def\reserved@a{\hskip -2\wd\@linechar}%
+\else
+ \let\reserved@a\relax
+\fi
+\@whiledim \@clnwd <\@linelen \do
+ {\@upordown\@clnht\copy\@linechar
+ \reserved@a
+ \advance\@clnht \ht\@linechar
+ \advance\@clnwd \wd\@linechar}%
+\advance\@clnht -\ht\@linechar
+\advance\@clnwd -\wd\@linechar
+\@tempdima\@linelen\advance\@tempdima -\@clnwd
+\@tempdimb\@tempdima\advance\@tempdimb -\wd\@linechar
+\if@negarg \hskip -\@tempdimb \else \hskip \@tempdimb \fi
+\multiply\@tempdima \@m
+\@tempcnta \@tempdima
+\@tempdima \wd\@linechar \divide\@tempcnta \@tempdima
+\@tempdima \ht\@linechar \multiply\@tempdima \@tempcnta
+\divide\@tempdima \@m
+\advance\@clnht \@tempdima
+\ifdim \@linelen <\wd\@linechar
+ \hskip \wd\@linechar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Warn if line gets so short that it can't be printed.
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1997/09/15}{Warn if lines become invisible pr/2524}
+% But don't warn if it is exactly zero since that was probably
+% deliberate (e.g., to get a vector head only).
+% \changes{v1.1j}{2001/06/04}{Don't warn for exactly zero pr/3318}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim \@linelen = \z@
+ \else
+ \@picture@warn
+ \fi
+ \else\@upordown\@clnht\copy\@linechar\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@hline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@hline{\ifnum \@xarg <\z@ \hskip -\@linelen \fi
+\vrule \@height \@halfwidth \@depth \@halfwidth \@width \@linelen
+\ifnum \@xarg <\z@ \hskip -\@linelen \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getlinechar}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@getlinechar(#1,#2){\@tempcnta#1\relax\multiply\@tempcnta 8%
+ \advance\@tempcnta -9\ifnum #2>\z@ \advance\@tempcnta #2\relax\else
+ \advance\@tempcnta -#2\relax\advance\@tempcnta 64 \fi
+ \char\@tempcnta}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vector}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\vector(#1,#2)#3{\@xarg #1\relax \@yarg #2\relax
+ \@tempcnta \ifnum\@xarg<\z@ -\@xarg\else\@xarg\fi
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta<5\relax
+ \@linelen #3\unitlength
+ \ifdim\@linelen<\z@\@badlinearg\else
+ \ifnum\@xarg =\z@ \@vvector
+ \else \ifnum\@yarg =\z@ \@hvector \else \@svector\fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else\@badlinearg\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@hvector}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@hvector{\@hline\hb@xt@\z@{\@linefnt
+ \ifnum \@xarg <\z@ \@getlarrow(1,0)\hss\else
+ \hss\@getrarrow(1,0)\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vvector}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@vvector{\ifnum \@yarg <\z@ \@downvector \else \@upvector \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@svector}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@svector{\@sline
+ \@tempcnta\@yarg \ifnum\@tempcnta <\z@ \@tempcnta -\@tempcnta\fi
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta <5%
+ \hskip -\wd\@linechar
+ \@upordown\@clnht \hbox{\@linefnt \if@negarg
+ \@getlarrow(\@xarg,\@yyarg)\else \@getrarrow(\@xarg,\@yyarg)\fi}%
+ \else\@badlinearg\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@getlarrow}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1999/04/15}{Replaced octal number, CAR}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@getlarrow(#1,#2){\ifnum #2=\z@ \@tempcnta 27 % '33
+ \else
+ \@tempcnta #1\relax\multiply\@tempcnta \sixt@@n
+ \advance\@tempcnta -9 \@tempcntb #2\relax\multiply\@tempcntb \tw@
+ \ifnum \@tempcntb >\z@ \advance\@tempcnta \@tempcntb
+ \else\advance\@tempcnta -\@tempcntb\advance\@tempcnta 64
+ \fi\fi\char\@tempcnta}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1999/04/15}{Replaced octal number, CAR}
+% \begin{macro}{\@getrarrow}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@getrarrow(#1,#2){\@tempcntb #2\relax
+\ifnum\@tempcntb <\z@ \@tempcntb -\@tempcntb\relax\fi
+\ifcase \@tempcntb\relax \@tempcnta 45 % '55
+\or
+\ifnum #1<\thr@@ \@tempcnta #1\relax\multiply\@tempcnta
+24\advance\@tempcnta -6 \else \ifnum #1=\thr@@ \@tempcnta 49
+\else\@tempcnta 58 \fi\fi\or
+\ifnum #1<\thr@@ \@tempcnta=#1\relax\multiply\@tempcnta
+24\advance\@tempcnta -\thr@@ \else \@tempcnta 51 \fi\or
+\@tempcnta #1\relax\multiply\@tempcnta
+\sixt@@n \advance\@tempcnta -\tw@ \else
+\@tempcnta #1\relax\multiply\@tempcnta
+\sixt@@n \advance\@tempcnta 7 \fi\ifnum #2<\z@ \advance\@tempcnta 64 \fi
+\char\@tempcnta}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@vline{\ifnum \@yarg <\z@ \@downline \else \@upline\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@upline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@upline{%
+ \hb@xt@\z@{\hskip -\@halfwidth \vrule \@width \@wholewidth
+ \@height \@linelen \@depth \z@\hss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@downline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@downline{%
+ \hb@xt@\z@{\hskip -\@halfwidth \vrule \@width \@wholewidth
+ \@height \z@ \@depth \@linelen \hss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@upvector}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1999/04/15}{Replaced octal number, CAR}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{2000/01/15}{Removed space at end-of-line, CAR}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@upvector{\@upline\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\@linefnt\char 54}% % '66
+ \raise \@linelen \hb@xt@\z@{\lower \ht\@tempboxa\box\@tempboxa\hss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1999/04/15}{Replaced octal number, CAR}
+% \begin{macro}{\@downvector}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@downvector{\@downline\lower \@linelen
+ \hb@xt@\z@{\@linefnt\char 63 % '77
+ \hss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \dashbox{D}(X,Y) ==
+% BEGIN
+% leave vertical mode
+% \hb@xt@ 0pt {
+% \baselineskip := 0pt
+% \lineskip := 0pt
+% %% HORIZONTAL DASHES
+% \@dashdim := X * \unitlength
+% \@dashcnt := \@dashdim + 200 % to prevent roundoff error
+% \@dashdim := D * \unitlength
+% \@dashcnt := \@dashcnt / \@dashdim
+% if \@dashcnt is odd
+% then \@dashdim := 0pt
+% \@dashcnt := (\@dashcnt + 1) / 2
+% else \@dashdim := \@dashdim / 2
+% \@dashcnt := \@dashcnt / 2 - 1
+% \box\@dashbox := \hbox{\vrule height \@halfwidth
+% depth \@halfwidth width \@dashdim}
+% \put(0,0){\copy\@dashbox}
+% \put(0,Y){\copy\@dashbox}
+% \put(X,0){\hskip -\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}
+% \put(X,Y){\hskip -\@dashdim\box\@dashbox}
+% \@dashdim := 3 * \@dashdim
+% fi
+% \box\@dashbox := \hbox{\vrule height \@halfwidth
+% depth \@halfwidth width D * \unitlength
+% \hskip D * \unitlength}
+% \@tempcnta := 0
+% \put(0,0){\hskip \@dashdim
+% while \@tempcnta < \@dascnt
+% do \copy\@dashbox
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + 1
+% od
+% }
+% \@tempcnta := 0
+% put(0,Y){\hskip \@dashdim
+% while \@tempcnta < \@dascnt
+% do \copy\@dashbox
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + 1
+% od
+% }
+%
+% %% vertical dashes
+% \@dashdim := Y * \unitlength
+% \@dashcnt := \@dashdim + 200 % to prevent roundoff error
+% \@dashdim := D * \unitlength
+% \@dashcnt := \@dashcnt / \@dashdim
+% if \@dashcnt is odd
+% then \@dashdim := 0pt
+% \@dashcnt := (\@dashcnt + 1) / 2
+% else \@dashdim := \@dashdim / 2
+% \@dashcnt := \@dashcnt / 2 - 1
+% \box\@dashbox := \hbox{\hskip -\@halfwidth
+% \vrule width \@wholewidth
+% height \@dashdim }
+% \put(0,0){\copy\@dashbox}
+% \put(X,0){\copy\@dashbox}
+% \put(0,Y){\lower\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}
+% \put(X,Y){\lower\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}
+% \@dashdim := 3 * \@dashdim
+% fi
+% \box\@dashbox := \hbox{\vrule width \@wholewidth
+% height D * \unitlength }
+% \@tempcnta := 0
+% put(0,0){\hskip -\halfwidth
+% \vbox{while \@tempcnta < \@dashcnt
+% do \vskip D*\unitlength
+% \copy\@dashbox
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + 1
+% od
+% \vskip \@dashdim
+% } }
+% \@tempcnta := 0
+% put(X,0){\hskip -\halfwidth
+% \vbox{while \@tempcnta < \@dashcnt
+% do \vskip D*\unitlength
+% \copy\@dashbox
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + 1
+% od
+% \vskip \@dashdim
+% }
+% }
+% } % END DASHES
+%
+% \@imakepicbox(X,Y)
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dashbox}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\dashbox#1(#2,#3){\leavevmode\hb@xt@\z@{\baselineskip \z@skip
+\lineskip \z@skip
+\@dashdim #2\unitlength
+\@dashcnt \@dashdim \advance\@dashcnt 200
+\@dashdim #1\unitlength\divide\@dashcnt \@dashdim
+\ifodd\@dashcnt\@dashdim \z@
+\advance\@dashcnt \@ne \divide\@dashcnt \tw@
+\else \divide\@dashdim \tw@ \divide\@dashcnt \tw@
+\advance\@dashcnt \m@ne
+\setbox\@dashbox \hbox{\vrule \@height \@halfwidth \@depth \@halfwidth
+\@width \@dashdim}\put(0,0){\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(0,#3){\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(#2,0){\hskip-\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(#2,#3){\hskip-\@dashdim\box\@dashbox}%
+\multiply\@dashdim \thr@@
+\fi
+\setbox\@dashbox \hbox{\vrule \@height \@halfwidth \@depth \@halfwidth
+\@width #1\unitlength\hskip #1\unitlength}\@tempcnta\z@
+\put(0,0){\hskip\@dashdim \@whilenum \@tempcnta <\@dashcnt
+\do{\copy\@dashbox\advance\@tempcnta \@ne }}\@tempcnta\z@
+\put(0,#3){\hskip\@dashdim \@whilenum \@tempcnta <\@dashcnt
+\do{\copy\@dashbox\advance\@tempcnta \@ne }}%
+\@dashdim #3\unitlength
+\@dashcnt \@dashdim \advance\@dashcnt 200
+\@dashdim #1\unitlength\divide\@dashcnt \@dashdim
+\ifodd\@dashcnt \@dashdim \z@
+\advance\@dashcnt \@ne \divide\@dashcnt \tw@
+\else
+\divide\@dashdim \tw@ \divide\@dashcnt \tw@
+\advance\@dashcnt \m@ne
+\setbox\@dashbox\hbox{\hskip -\@halfwidth
+\vrule \@width \@wholewidth
+\@height \@dashdim}\put(0,0){\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(#2,0){\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(0,#3){\lower\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(#2,#3){\lower\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}%
+\multiply\@dashdim \thr@@
+\fi
+\setbox\@dashbox\hbox{\vrule \@width \@wholewidth
+\@height #1\unitlength}\@tempcnta\z@
+\put(0,0){\hskip -\@halfwidth \vbox{\@whilenum \@tempcnta <\@dashcnt
+\do{\vskip #1\unitlength\copy\@dashbox\advance\@tempcnta \@ne }%
+\vskip\@dashdim}}\@tempcnta\z@
+\put(#2,0){\hskip -\@halfwidth \vbox{\@whilenum \@tempcnta<\@dashcnt
+\do{\vskip #1\unitlength\copy\@dashbox\advance\@tempcnta \@ne }%
+\vskip\@dashdim}}}\@makepicbox(#2,#3)}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% CIRCLES AND OVALS
+%
+% USER COMMANDS:
+%
+% \circle{D} : Produces the circle with the diameter as close as
+% possible to D * \unitlength. \put(X,Y){\circle{D}}
+% puts the circle with its center at (X,Y).
+%
+% \oval(X,Y) : Makes an oval as round as possible that fits in the
+% rectangle of width X * \unitlength and height
+% Y * \unitlength. The reference point is the center.
+%
+% \oval(X,Y)[POS] : Save as \oval(X,Y) except it draws only the
+% half or quadrant of the oval indicated by POS.
+% E.G., \oval(X,Y)[t] draws just the top half
+% and \oval(X,Y)[br] draws just the bottom right
+% quadrant. In all cases, the reference point is
+% the same as the unqualified \oval(X,Y) command.
+%
+% \@ovvert {DELTA1} {DELTA2} : Makes a vbox containing either the left
+% side or the right side of the oval being constructed. The baseline
+% will coincide with the outside bottom edge of the oval; the left
+% side of the box will coincide with the left edge of the vertical
+% rule. The width of the box will be \@tempdima.
+% DELTA1 and DELTA2 are added to the character number in \@tempcnta
+% to get the characters for the top and bottom quarter circle pieces.
+%
+% \@ovhorz : Makes an hbox containing the straight rule for either the
+% top or the bottom of the oval being constructed. The baseline
+% will coincide with bottom edge of the rule; the left side of
+% the box will coincide with the left side of the oval.
+% The width of the box will be \@ovxx.
+%
+% \@getcirc {DIAM} : Sets \@tempcnta to the character number
+% of the top-right quarter circle with the largest
+% diameter less than or equal to DIAM.
+% Sets \@tempboxa to an hbox containing that character.
+% Sets \@tempdima to \wd \@tempboxa, which is the distance
+% from the circle's left outside edge to its right
+% inside edge.
+% (These characters are like those described in the
+% TeXbook, pp. 389-90.)
+%
+% \@getcirc {DIAM} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@tempcnta := integer coercion of (DIAM + 2pt)
+% + 2pt added 1 Nov 88
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta / integer coercion of 4pt
+% if \@tempcnta > 10
+% then \@tempcnta := 10 fi
+% if \@tempcnta > 0
+% then \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta-1
+% else LaTeX Warning: Oval too small.
+% fi
+% \@tempcnta := 4 * \@tempcnta
+% \@tempboxa := \hbox{\@circlefnt \char \@tempcnta}
+% \@tempdima := \wd \@tempboxa
+% END
+%
+% \@put{X}{Y}{OBJ} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \raise Y \hb@xt@ 0pt{\hskip X OBJ \hss}
+% END
+%
+% \@oval(X,Y)[POS] ==
+% BEGIN
+% \begingroup
+% \boxmaxdepth := \maxdimen
+% @ovt := @ovb := @ovl := @ovr := true
+% for all E in POS
+% do @ovE := false od
+% \@ovxx := X * \unitlength
+% \@ovyy := Y * \unitlength
+% \@tempdimb := min(\@ovxx,\@ovyy)
+% \@getcirc{\@tempdimb-2pt} %% "-2pt" added 7 Dec 89
+% \@ovro := \ht \@tempboxa
+% \@ovri := \dp \@tempboxa
+% \@ovdx := \@ovxx - \@tempdima
+% \@ovdx := \@ovdx/2
+% \@ovdy := \@ovyy - \@tempdima
+% \@ovdy := \@ovyy/2
+% \@circlefnt
+% \@tempboxa :=
+% \hbox{
+% if @ovr
+% then \@ovvert{3}{2} \kern -\@tempdima
+% fi
+% if @ovl
+% then \kern \@ovxx \@ovvert{0}{1} \kern -\@tempdima
+% \kern -\@ovxx
+% fi
+% if @ovt
+% then \@ovhorz \kern -\@ovxx
+% fi
+% if @ovb
+% then \raise \@ovyy \@ovhorz
+% fi
+% }
+% \@ovdx := \@ovdx + \@ovro
+% \@ovdy := \@ovdy + \@ovro
+% \ht\@tempboxa := \dp\@tempboxa := 0
+% \@put{-\@ovdx}{-\@ovdy}{\box\@tempboxa}
+% \endgroup
+% END
+%
+% \@ovvert {DELTA1} {DELTA2} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \vbox to \@ovyy {
+% if @ovb
+% then \@tempcntb := \@tempcnta + DELTA1
+% \kern -\@ovro
+% \hbox { \char \@tempcntb }
+% \nointerlineskip
+% else \kern \@ovri \kern \@ovdy
+% fi
+% \leaders \vrule width \@wholewidth \vfil
+% \nointerlineskip
+% if @ovt
+% then \@tempcntb := \@tempcnta + DELTA2
+% \hbox { \char \@tempcntb }
+% else \kern \@ovdy \kern \@ovro
+% fi
+% }
+% END
+%
+% \@ovhorz ==
+% BEGIN
+% \hb@xt@ \@ovxx{
+% \kern \@ovro
+% if @ovr
+% then
+% else \kern \@ovdx
+% fi
+% \leaders \hrule height \@wholewidth \hfil
+% if @ovl
+% then
+% else \kern \@ovdx
+% fi
+% \kern \@ovri
+% }
+% END
+%
+% \circle{DIAM} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \begingroup
+% \boxmaxdepth := maxdimen
+% \@tempdimb := DIAM *\unitlength
+% if \@tempdimb > 15.5pt
+% then \@getcirc{\@tempdimb}
+% \@ovro := \ht \@tempboxa
+% \@tempboxa := \hbox{
+% \@circlefnt
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + 2
+% \char \@tempcnta
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta - 1
+% \char \@tempcnta
+% \kern -2\@tempdima
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + 2
+% \raise \@tempdima \hbox { \char \@tempcnta }
+% \raise \@tempdima \box\@tempboxa
+% }
+% \ht\@tempboxa := \dp\@tempboxa := 0
+% \@put{-\@ovro}{-\@ovro}{\@tempboxa}
+% else
+% \@circ{\@tempdimb}{96}
+% fi
+% \endgroup
+% END
+%
+% \circle*{DIAM} == \@dot{DIAM} == \@circ{DIAM*\unitlength}{112}
+%
+% \@circ{DIAM}{CHAR} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@tempcnta := integer coercion of (DIAM + .5pt)/1pt.
+% if \@tempcnta > 15 then \@tempcnta := 15 fi
+% if \@tempcnta > 1 then \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta - 1 fi
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta + CHAR
+% \@circlefnt
+% \char \@tempcnta
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@ovt}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@ovb}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@ovl}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@ovr}
+% If producing the Top Bottom Left or Right of an oval.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@ovt
+\newif\if@ovb
+\newif\if@ovl
+\newif\if@ovr
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ovxx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ovyy}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ovdx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ovdy}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ovro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ovri}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@ovxx
+\newdimen\@ovyy
+\newdimen\@ovdx
+\newdimen\@ovdy
+\newdimen\@ovro
+\newdimen\@ovri
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% |\advance\@tempdima 2pt\relax| added 1 Nov 88 to fix bug in which
+% size of drawn circle not monotonic function of argument of |\circle|,
+% caused by different rounding for dimensions of large and small
+% circles.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@getcirc}
+% \changes{v1.1j}{2003/12/30}{issue warning if circle size can't be met pr/3473}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@getcirc#1{\@tempdima #1\relax \advance\@tempdima 2\p@
+ \@tempcnta\@tempdima
+ \@tempdima 4\p@ \divide\@tempcnta\@tempdima
+ \ifnum \@tempcnta >10\relax
+ \@picture@warn
+ \@tempcnta 10\relax
+ \fi
+ \ifnum \@tempcnta >\z@ \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Warn if requirements for oval or circle can't be met.
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1997/09/15}{Warn if lines become invisible pr/2524}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else \@picture@warn \fi
+ \multiply\@tempcnta 4\relax
+ \setbox \@tempboxa \hbox{\@circlefnt
+ \char \@tempcnta}\@tempdima \wd \@tempboxa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@picture@warn}
+% Generic warning for lines, vectors (used in |\@sline|) and
+% oval or circle (used un |\@getcirc|) are not available at
+% right size.
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1997/09/15}{Macro added pr/2524}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@picture@warn{\@latex@warning{%
+ \string\oval, \string\circle, or \string\line\space
+ size unavailable}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@put}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@put#1#2#3{\raise #2\hb@xt@\z@{\hskip #1#3\hss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\oval}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\oval(#1,#2){\@ifnextchar[{\@oval(#1,#2)}{\@oval(#1,#2)[]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@oval}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@oval(#1,#2)[#3]{\begingroup\boxmaxdepth \maxdimen
+ \@ovttrue \@ovbtrue \@ovltrue \@ovrtrue
+ \@tfor\reserved@a :=#3\do{\csname @ov\reserved@a false\endcsname}%
+ \@ovxx
+ #1\unitlength \@ovyy #2\unitlength
+ \@tempdimb \ifdim \@ovyy >\@ovxx \@ovxx\else \@ovyy \fi
+ \advance \@tempdimb -2\p@
+ \@getcirc \@tempdimb
+ \@ovro \ht\@tempboxa \@ovri \dp\@tempboxa
+ \@ovdx\@ovxx \advance\@ovdx -\@tempdima \divide\@ovdx \tw@
+ \@ovdy\@ovyy \advance\@ovdy -\@tempdima \divide\@ovdy \tw@
+ \@circlefnt \setbox\@tempboxa
+ \hbox{\if@ovr \@ovvert32\kern -\@tempdima \fi
+ \if@ovl \kern \@ovxx \@ovvert01\kern -\@tempdima \kern -\@ovxx \fi
+ \if@ovt \@ovhorz \kern -\@ovxx \fi
+ \if@ovb \raise \@ovyy \@ovhorz \fi}\advance\@ovdx\@ovro
+ \advance\@ovdy\@ovro \ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@
+ \@put{-\@ovdx}{-\@ovdy}{\box\@tempboxa}%
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ovvert}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@ovvert#1#2{\vbox to\@ovyy{%
+ \if@ovb \@tempcntb \@tempcnta \advance \@tempcntb #1\relax
+ \kern -\@ovro \hbox{\char \@tempcntb}\nointerlineskip
+ \else \kern \@ovri \kern \@ovdy \fi
+ \leaders\vrule \@width \@wholewidth\vfil \nointerlineskip
+ \if@ovt \@tempcntb \@tempcnta \advance \@tempcntb #2\relax
+ \hbox{\char \@tempcntb}%
+ \else \kern \@ovdy \kern \@ovro \fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ovhorz}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@ovhorz{\hb@xt@\@ovxx{\kern \@ovro
+ \if@ovr \else \kern \@ovdx \fi
+ \leaders \hrule \@height \@wholewidth \hfil
+ \if@ovl \else \kern \@ovdx \fi
+ \kern \@ovri}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\circle}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/08/05}
+% {(RMS) Added error message if \cs{circle} is used in math mode.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\circle{\@inmatherr\circle\@ifstar\@dot\@circle}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@circle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@circle#1{%
+ \begingroup \boxmaxdepth \maxdimen \@tempdimb #1\unitlength
+ \ifdim \@tempdimb >15.5\p@ \@getcirc\@tempdimb
+ \@ovro\ht\@tempboxa
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\@circlefnt
+ \advance\@tempcnta\tw@ \char \@tempcnta
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne \char \@tempcnta \kern -2\@tempdima
+ \advance\@tempcnta\tw@
+ \raise \@tempdima \hbox{\char\@tempcnta}\raise \@tempdima
+ \box\@tempboxa}\ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@
+ \@put{-\@ovro}{-\@ovro}{\box\@tempboxa}%
+ \else \@circ\@tempdimb{96}\fi\endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dot}
+% Internal form of |\circle*|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@dot#1{\@tempdimb #1\unitlength \@circ\@tempdimb{112}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@circ}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@circ#1#2{\@tempdima #1\relax \advance\@tempdima .5\p@
+ \@tempcnta\@tempdima \@tempdima \p@
+ \divide\@tempcnta\@tempdima
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta >15\relax \@tempcnta 15\relax \fi
+ \ifnum \@tempcnta >\z@ \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne\fi
+ \advance\@tempcnta #2\relax
+ \@circlefnt \char\@tempcnta}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yyarg}
+% Counters used for manipulating the `slope' arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@xarg
+\newcount\@yarg
+\newcount\@yyarg
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@multicnt}
+% Counter used in |\multiput|, and also |\multicolumn|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@multicnt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xdim}
+% \begin{macro}{\yxdim}
+% Length registers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@xdim
+\newdimen\@ydim
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@linechar}
+% Box for holding a line segment character, for sloping lines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\@linechar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@linelen}
+% Length of the line currently being built.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@linelen
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@clnwd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@clnht}
+% Height and width of current line segment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@clnwd
+\newdimen\@clnht
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dashdim}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dashbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dashcnt}
+% |\dashbox| internal registers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@dashdim
+\newbox\@dashbox
+\newcount\@dashcnt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Initialization: ``|\thinlines|''
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1995/10/27}
+% {Move initialisation to kernel from autoload file}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@linefnt\tenln
+\let\@circlefnt\tencirc
+\@wholewidth\fontdimen8\tenln
+\@halfwidth .5\@wholewidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Curves}
+% The new |\qbezier| command, based on the old |\bezier| defined in
+% |bezier.sty|.
+% \changes{v0.1c}{1994/04/28}{bezier curves added}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% \qbezier[N] == \bezier{N}
+%
+% \bezier{N}(AX,AY)(BX,BY)(CX,CY) ==
+% BEGIN
+% IF N = 0
+% THEN \@xdima := |BX - AX|
+% \@xb := |CX - BX|
+% \@xa := Max(\@xa, \@xb)
+% \@ya := |BY - AY|
+% \@yb := |CY - BY|
+% \@ya := Max(\@ya, \@yb)
+% @sc := Max(\@xa, \@ya)
+% %% The coefficient .5 below is the degree of overlap of
+% %% successive points, where 1 is no overlap and 0 is
+% %% complete overlap. A coefficient of C multiplies
+% %% the number of points plotted by 1/C.
+% %%
+% \@xa := .5 * \@halfwidth
+% @sc := @sc / \@halfwidth
+% @sc := Max(@sc, qbeziermax)
+% ELSE @sc := N
+% @scp := @sc+1
+% \@xb := 2 * (BX - AX) * \unitlength
+% \@xa := ((CX-AX)*\unitlength - \@xb)/@sc
+% \@yb := 2 * (BY - AY) * \unitlength
+% \@ya := ((CY-AY)*\unitlength - \@yb)/@sc
+% \@pictdot := square rule of width \@wholewidth
+% \count@ := 0
+% WHILE \count@ < @scp
+% DO \@xdim := ((\count@*\@xa + @xb) / @sc) * \count@
+% \@ydim := ((\count@*\@ya + @yb) / @sc) * \count@
+% plot pt with relative coords (\@xdim,\@ydim)
+% \count@ := \count@+1
+% OD
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\qbeziermax}
+% The maximum number of points to plot.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+%<def>\ifx\qbeziermax\@undefined
+\gdef\qbeziermax{500}
+%<def>\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% In the code below, to save registers |\@a| \ldots\ are not used.
+% Instead other registers are reused.
+%
+% |\newcounter{@sc} -> \c@multicnt|\par
+% |\newcounter{@scp} -> \@tempcnta|\par
+% |\newdimen\@xa -> \@ovxx|\par
+%
+% |\newdimen\@xb -> \@ovdx|
+%
+% |\newdimen\@ya -> \@ovyy|\par
+% |\newdimen\@yb -> \@ovdy|
+%
+% |\newsavebox{\@pictdot} -> \@tempboxa|
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\qbezier}
+% Main user-level command to plot quadratic bezier curves.
+% |#2| should be |(|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\qbezier[2][0]{\bezier{#1}#2}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bezier}
+% Form of |\bezier| compatible with 2.09 |bezier.sty|, but modified to
+% ignore spaces between its arguments.
+% |#2| should be white space, and |#4| should be |(|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\bezier#1)#2(#3)#4({\@bezier#1)(#3)(}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bezier}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@bezier#1(#2,#3)(#4,#5)(#6,#7){%
+ \ifnum #1=\z@
+ \@ovxx #4\unitlength
+ \advance\@ovxx -#2\unitlength
+ \ifdim \@ovxx<\z@ \@ovxx -\@ovxx \fi
+ \@ovdx #6\unitlength
+ \advance\@ovdx -#4\unitlength
+ \ifdim \@ovdx<\z@ \@ovdx -\@ovdx \fi
+ \ifdim \@ovxx<\@ovdx \@ovxx \@ovdx \fi
+ \@ovyy #5\unitlength
+ \advance\@ovyy -#3\unitlength
+ \ifdim \@ovyy<\z@ \@ovyy -\@ovyy \fi
+ \@ovdy #7\unitlength
+ \advance\@ovdy -#5\unitlength
+ \ifdim \@ovdy<\z@ \@ovdy -\@ovdy \fi
+ \ifdim \@ovyy<\@ovdy \@ovyy \@ovdy \fi
+ \@multicnt
+ \ifdim \@ovxx>\@ovyy \@ovxx \else \@ovyy \fi
+ \@ovxx .5\@halfwidth \divide\@multicnt\@ovxx
+ \ifnum \qbeziermax<\@multicnt \@multicnt\qbeziermax\relax \fi
+ \else \@multicnt#1\relax \fi
+ \@tempcnta\@multicnt \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \@ovdx #4\unitlength \advance\@ovdx -#2\unitlength
+ \multiply\@ovdx \tw@
+ \@ovxx #6\unitlength \advance\@ovxx -#2\unitlength
+ \advance\@ovxx -\@ovdx \divide\@ovxx\@multicnt
+ \@ovdy #5\unitlength \advance\@ovdy -#3\unitlength
+ \multiply\@ovdy \tw@
+ \@ovyy #7\unitlength \advance\@ovyy -#3\unitlength
+ \advance\@ovyy -\@ovdy \divide\@ovyy\@multicnt
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1k}{2003/08/27}{added missing displacement pr/3566}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
+ \hskip -\@halfwidth
+ \vrule \@height\@halfwidth
+ \@depth \@halfwidth
+ \@width \@wholewidth}%
+ \put(#2,#3){%
+ \count@\z@
+ \@whilenum{\count@<\@tempcnta}\do
+ {\@xdim\count@\@ovxx
+ \advance\@xdim\@ovdx
+ \divide\@xdim\@multicnt
+ \multiply\@xdim\count@
+ \@ydim\count@\@ovyy
+ \advance\@ydim\@ovdy
+ \divide\@ydim\@multicnt
+ \multiply\@ydim\count@
+ \raise \@ydim
+ \hb@xt@\z@{\kern\@xdim
+ \unhcopy\@tempboxa\hss}%
+ \advance\count@\@ne}}}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0b172df540b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltplain.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1112 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltplain.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltplain.dtx}
+ [2004/02/24 v1.1x LaTeX Kernel (Plain TeX)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltplain.dtx}
+\begin{document}
+\title{\filename\\(The file plain.tex, modified for \LaTeX)}
+\author{Donald~E.~Knuth\\
+ Modified by
+ Leslie Lamport, Frank Mittelbach,\\
+ Rainer Sch\"opf, David Carlisle}
+\date{\filedate}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{756}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/08}
+% {Remove need for a driver file.}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/12}
+% {Name changed from lplain. The end of an era}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/03/12}{Replaced remaining width, height, depth
+% by \LaTeX{} macro names to save tokens.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/10/14}
+% {Moved code to other files.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/10}
+% {(CAR) added patch to \cs{loop}.}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1994/11/25}
+% {(DPC) Comment out lots of obsolete code}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1994/12/01}
+% {(DPC) More doc changes}
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1995/05/07}{Use \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1995/05/21}{Moved some code to other files}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/07/02}{Removed surplus `by' and `\quotechar=' in
+% various places}
+% \changes{v1.1o}{1995/09/14}{Moved \cs{multispan} to lttab.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.1r}{1995/10/10}{Autoload tracing code}
+% \changes{v1.1u}{1996/10/28}{(CAR) More doc changes}
+%
+% \section{Plain \TeX}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ includes almost all of the functionality of Knuth's original
+% `Basic Macros' That is, the plain \TeX\ format described in Appendix~B
+% of the \TeX{}Book. However, some of the user commands are not much
+% use so, in order to save memory, we may remove them from the kernel
+% into a package. Here is a list of the commands that may be removed
+% (PROBABLY NOT COMPLETE).
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \magstep \magstephalf
+% \mathhexbox
+% \vglue \vgl@
+% \hglue \hgl@
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% This file is by now very small as most of it has been moved to more
+% appropriate kernel files: it may disappear completely one day.
+%
+% \LaTeX\ font definitions are done using NFSS2 so none of PLAIN's
+% font definitions are in \LaTeX.
+%
+% \LaTeX\ has its own tabbing environment, so PLAIN's is disabled.
+%
+% \LaTeX{} uses its own output routine, so most of the plain one was
+% removed.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\catcode`\{=1 % left brace is begin-group character
+\catcode`\}=2 % right brace is end-group character
+\catcode`\$=3 % dollar sign is math shift
+\catcode`\&=4 % ampersand is alignment tab
+\catcode`\#=6 % hash mark is macro parameter character
+\catcode`\^=7 % circumflex and uparrow are for superscripts
+\catcode`\_=8 % underline and downarrow are for subscripts
+\catcode`\^^I=10 % ascii tab is a blank space
+\chardef\active=13 \catcode`\~=\active % tilde is active
+\catcode`\^^L=\active \outer\def^^L{\par}% ascii form-feed is \outer\par
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{catcodes,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We had to define the |\catcodes| right away, before the message line,
+% since |\message| uses the |{| and |}| characters.
+% When INITEX (the \TeX\ initializer) starts up,
+% it has defined the following |\catcode| values:\\
+% |\catcode`\^^@=9 % | ascii null is ignored\\
+% |\catcode`\^^M=5 % | ascii return is end-line\\
+% |\catcode`\\=0 % | backslash is TeX escape character\\
+% |\catcode`\%=14 % | percent sign is comment character\\
+% |\catcode`\ =10 % | ascii space is blank space\\
+% |\catcode`\^^?=15 %| ascii delete is invalid\\
+% |\catcode`\A=11 ... \catcode`\Z=11 %| uppercase letters\\
+% |\catcode`\a=11 ... \catcode`\z=11 %| lowercase letters\\
+% all others are type 12 (other)
+%
+% Here is a list of the characters that have been specially catcoded:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+ \do\#\do\^\do\_\do\%\do\~}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% (not counting ascii null, tab, linefeed, formfeed, return, delete)
+% Each symbol in the list is preceded by \do, which can be defined
+% if you want to do something to every item in the list.
+%
+% We make |@| signs act like letters, temporarily, to avoid conflict
+% between user names and internal control sequences of plain format.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\catcode`@=11
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% To make the plain macros more efficient in time and space,
+% several constant values are declared here as control sequences.
+% If they were changed, anything could happen;
+% so they are private symbols.
+% \begin{macro}{\@ne}
+% \begin{macro}{\tw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\thr@@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sixt@@n}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cclv}
+% Small constants are defined using |\chardef|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\@ne=1
+\chardef\tw@=2
+\chardef\thr@@=3
+\chardef\sixt@@n=16
+\chardef\@cclv=255
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cclvi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@m}
+% \begin{macro}{\@M}
+% \begin{macro}{\@MM}
+% Constants above 255 defined using |\mathchardef|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\@cclvi=256
+\mathchardef\@m=1000
+\mathchardef\@M=10000
+\mathchardef\@MM=20000
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Allocation of registers
+%
+% Here are macros for the automatic allocation of |\count|, |\box|,
+% |\dimen|, |\skip|, |\muskip|, and |\toks| registers, as well as
+% |\read| and |\write| stream numbers, |\fam| codes, |\language| codes,
+% and |\insert| numbers.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{registers,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When a register is used only temporarily, it need not be allocated;
+% grouping can be used, making the value previously in the register
+% return after the close of the group. The main use of these macros is
+% for registers that are defined by one macro and used by others,
+% possibly at different nesting levels. All such registers should be
+% defined through these macros; otherwise conflicts may occur,
+% especially when two or more macro packages are being used at
+% the same time.
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% The following counters are reserved:
+% 0 to 9 page numbering
+% 10 count allocation
+% 11 dimen allocation
+% 12 skip allocation
+% 13 muskip allocation
+% 14 box allocation
+% 15 toks allocation
+% 16 read file allocation
+% 17 write file allocation
+% 18 math family allocation
+% 19 language allocation
+% 20 insert allocation
+% 21 the most recently allocated number
+% 22 constant -1
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% New counters are allocated starting with 23, 24, etc. Other registers
+% are allocated starting with 10. This leaves 0 through 9 for the user
+% to play with safely, except that counts 0 to 9 are considered to be
+% the page and subpage numbers (since they are displayed during
+% output). In this scheme, |\count| 10 always contains the number of the
+% highest-numbered counter that has been allocated, |\count| 14 the
+% highest-numbered box, etc. Inserts are given numbers 254, 253, etc.,
+% since they require a |\count|, |\dimen|, |\skip|, and |\box| all with
+% the same number; |\count| 20 contains the lowest-numbered insert that
+% has been allocated. Of course, |\box|255 is reserved for |\output|;
+% |\count|255, |\dimen|255, and |\skip|255 can be used freely.
+%
+% It is recommended that macro designers always use
+% |\global| assignments with respect to registers numbered\\
+% 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,\\
+% and always non-|\global| assignments with respect to registers\\
+% 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 255.\\
+% This will prevent ``save stack buildup'' that might otherwise occur.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\count10=22 % allocates \count registers 23, 24, ...
+\count11=9 % allocates \dimen registers 10, 11, ...
+\count12=9 % allocates \skip registers 10, 11, ...
+\count13=9 % allocates \muskip registers 10, 11, ...
+\count14=9 % allocates \box registers 10, 11, ...
+\count15=9 % allocates \toks registers 10, 11, ...
+\count16=-1 % allocates input streams 0, 1, ...
+\count17=-1 % allocates output streams 0, 1, ...
+\count18=3 % allocates math families 4, 5, ...
+\count19=0 % allocates \language codes 1, 2, ...
+\count20=255 % allocates insertions 254, 253, ...
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\insc@unt}
+% \begin{macro}{\allocationnumber}
+% The insertion counter and most recent allocation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\countdef\insc@unt=20
+\countdef\allocationnumber=21
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@ne}
+% The constant $-1$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\countdef\m@ne=22 \m@ne=-1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\wlog}
+% Write on log file (only)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\wlog{\immediate\write\m@ne}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\count@}
+% \begin{macro}{\dimen@}
+% \begin{macro}{\dimen@i}
+% \begin{macro}{\dimen@ii}
+% \begin{macro}{\skip@}
+% \begin{macro}{\toks@}
+% Here are abbreviations for the names of scratch registers
+% that don't need to be allocated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\countdef\count@=255
+\dimendef\dimen@=0
+\dimendef\dimen@i=1 % global only
+\dimendef\dimen@ii=2
+\skipdef\skip@=0
+\toksdef\toks@=0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newcount}
+% \begin{macro}{\newdimen}
+% \begin{macro}{\newskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\newmuskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\newbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\newhelp}
+% \begin{macro}{\newtoks}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/28}
+% {Remove some \cs{outer} declarations.}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1995/04/24}
+% {Remove remaining \cs{outer} declarations.}
+% Now, we define |\newcount|, |\newbox|, etc. so that you can say
+% |\newcount\foo| and |\foo| will be defined (with |\countdef|) to
+% be the next counter.
+%
+% To find out which counter |\foo| is, you can look at
+% |\allocationnumber|.
+%
+% Since there's no |\boxdef| command, |\chardef| is used to define a
+% |\newbox|, |\newinsert|, |\newfam|, and so on.
+%
+% \LaTeX\ change: remove |\outer| from |\newcount| and |\newdimen| (FMi)
+% This is necessary to use |\newcount| inside |\if...|
+% later on. Also remove from |\newskip|, |\newbox|
+% |\newwrite| and |\newfam| (DPC) to save later redefinition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newcount{\alloc@0\count\countdef\insc@unt}
+\def\newdimen{\alloc@1\dimen\dimendef\insc@unt}
+\def\newskip{\alloc@2\skip\skipdef\insc@unt}
+\def\newmuskip{\alloc@3\muskip\muskipdef\@cclvi}
+\def\newbox{\alloc@4\box\chardef\insc@unt}
+\def\newhelp#1#2{\newtoks#1#1\expandafter{\csname#2\endcsname}}
+\def\newtoks{\alloc@5\toks\toksdef\@cclvi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newread}
+% \begin{macro}{\newwrite}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n}
+\def\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ defines |\newfam| in |ltfss.dtx|.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\newfam{\alloc@8\fam\chardef\sixt@@n}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newlanguage}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alloc@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\alloc@#1#2#3#4#5{\global\advance\count1#1\@ne
+ \ch@ck#1#4#2% make sure there's still room
+ \allocationnumber\count1#1%
+ \global#3#5\allocationnumber
+ \wlog{\string#5=\string#2\the\allocationnumber}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newinsert}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newinsert#1{\global\advance\insc@unt \m@ne
+ \ch@ck0\insc@unt\count
+ \ch@ck1\insc@unt\dimen
+ \ch@ck2\insc@unt\skip
+ \ch@ck4\insc@unt\box
+ \allocationnumber\insc@unt
+ \global\chardef#1\allocationnumber
+ \wlog{\string#1=\string\insert\the\allocationnumber}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ch@ck}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+%<*2ekernel|autoload|autoerr>
+\gdef\ch@ck#1#2#3{%
+ \ifnum\count1#1<#2\else
+%<!autoload> \errmessage{No room for a new #3}%
+%<autoload> \@autoerr\ch@ck#1#2#3%
+ \fi}
+%</2ekernel|autoload|autoerr>
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxdimen}
+% \begin{macro}{\hideskip}
+% Here are some examples of allocation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\maxdimen \maxdimen=16383.99999pt % the largest legal <dimen>
+\newskip\hideskip \hideskip=-1000pt plus 1fill % negative but can grow
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\p@}
+% \begin{macro}{\z@}
+% \begin{macro}{\z@skip}
+% \begin{macro}{\voidb@x}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\p@ \p@=1pt % this saves macro space and time
+\newdimen\z@ \z@=0pt % can be used both for 0pt and 0
+\newskip\z@skip \z@skip=0pt plus0pt minus0pt
+\newbox\voidb@x % permanently void box register
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1p}{1995/10/02}{Move \cs{newif} to ltdefns}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{compatibility for TeX 2, }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If this file is used in an old \TeX\ we define the new features
+% of \TeX\ 3.0 as simple macros or counters so that files that uses
+% these features can be processed in such an environment
+% (They will however produce some other results).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@undefined\inputlineno
+ \newcount\inputlineno
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This could be used to detect that an old \TeX\ is in force
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \inputlineno-1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Extra test for MLTeX 2, RmS 91/11/07.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@undefined\language
+ \newcount\language
+ \fi
+ \newcount\lefthyphenmin
+ \newcount\righthyphenmin
+ \newcount\errorcontextlines
+ \newcount\holdinginserts
+ \newdimen\emergencystretch
+ \newcount\badness
+ \let\noboundary\relax
+ \newcount\setlanguage
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Assign initial values to \TeX's parameters
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{parameters,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% All of \TeX's numeric parameters are listed here,
+% but the code is commented out if no special value needs to be set.
+% INITEX makes all parameters zero except where noted.
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pretolerance=100
+\tolerance=200 % INITEX sets this to 10000
+\hbadness=1000
+\vbadness=1000
+\linepenalty=10
+\hyphenpenalty=50
+\exhyphenpenalty=50
+\binoppenalty=700
+\relpenalty=500
+\clubpenalty=150
+\widowpenalty=150
+\displaywidowpenalty=50
+\brokenpenalty=100
+\predisplaypenalty=10000
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \postdisplaypenalty=0
+% \interlinepenalty=0
+% \floatingpenalty=0, set during \insert
+% \outputpenalty=0, set before TeX enters \output
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\doublehyphendemerits=10000
+\finalhyphendemerits=5000
+\adjdemerits=10000
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \looseness=0, cleared by TeX after each paragraph
+% \pausing=0
+% \holdinginserts=0
+% \tracingonline=0
+% \tracingmacros=0
+% \tracingstats=0
+% \tracingparagraphs=0
+% \tracingpages=0
+% \tracingoutput=0
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\tracinglostchars=1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \tracingcommands=0
+% \tracingrestores=0
+% \language=0
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\uchyph=1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 set below
+% \globaldefs=0
+% \maxdeadcycles=25 % INITEX does this
+% \hangafter=1 % INITEX does this, also TeX after each paragraph
+% \fam=0
+% \mag=1000 % INITEX does this
+% \escapechar=`\\ % INITEX does this
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\defaulthyphenchar=`\-
+\defaultskewchar=-1
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \endlinechar=`\^^M % INITEX does this
+% \newlinechar=-1 \LaTeX\ sets this in ltdefns.dtx.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\delimiterfactor=901
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \time=now % TeX does this at beginning of job
+% \day=now % TeX does this at beginning of job
+% \month=now % TeX does this at beginning of job
+% \year=now % TeX does this at beginning of job
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+% In \LaTeX{} we don't want box information in the transcript
+% unless we do a full tracing.
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/04/28}{Turn off overfull box tracing in log}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\showboxbreadth=-1
+\showboxdepth=-1
+\errorcontextlines=-1
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\hfuzz=0.1pt
+\vfuzz=0.1pt
+\overfullrule=5pt
+\maxdepth=4pt
+\splitmaxdepth=\maxdimen
+\boxmaxdepth=\maxdimen
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \lineskiplimit=0pt, changed by \normalbaselines
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\delimitershortfall=5pt
+\nulldelimiterspace=1.2pt
+\scriptspace=0.5pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \mathsurround=0pt
+% \predisplaysize=0pt, set before TeX enters $$
+% \displaywidth=0pt, set before TeX enters $$
+% \displayindent=0pt, set before TeX enters $$
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\parindent=20pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \hangindent=0pt, zeroed by TeX after each paragraph
+% \hoffset=0pt
+% \voffset=0pt
+%
+% \baselineskip=0pt, changed by \normalbaselines
+% \lineskip=0pt, changed by \normalbaselines
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\parskip=0pt plus 1pt
+\abovedisplayskip=12pt plus 3pt minus 9pt
+\abovedisplayshortskip=0pt plus 3pt
+\belowdisplayskip=12pt plus 3pt minus 9pt
+\belowdisplayshortskip=7pt plus 3pt minus 4pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \leftskip=0pt
+% \rightskip=0pt
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\topskip=10pt
+\splittopskip=10pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \tabskip=0pt
+% \spaceskip=0pt
+% \xspaceskip=0pt
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalbaselineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\normallineskiplimit}
+% We also define special registers that function like parameters:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\normalbaselineskip \normalbaselineskip=12pt
+\newskip\normallineskip \normallineskip=1pt
+\newdimen\normallineskiplimit \normallineskiplimit=0pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interfootlinepenalty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\interfootnotelinepenalty \interfootnotelinepenalty=100
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Definitions for preloaded fonts
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\magstephalf}
+% \begin{macro}{\magstep}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\magstephalf{1095 }
+\def\magstep#1{\ifcase#1 \@m\or 1200\or 1440\or 1728\or
+ 2074\or 2488\fi\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Macros for setting ordinary text
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frenchspacing}
+% \begin{macro}{\nonfrenchspacing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode`\.\@m \sfcode`\?\@m \sfcode`\!\@m
+ \sfcode`\:\@m \sfcode`\;\@m \sfcode`\,\@m}
+\def\nonfrenchspacing{\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000%
+ \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalbaselines}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalbaselines{\lineskip\normallineskip
+ \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip \lineskiplimit\normallineskiplimit}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\M}
+% \begin{macro}{\I}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1995/09/01}{Use \cs{let} to save space}
+% Save a bit of space by using |\let| here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\^^M{\ } % control <return> = control <space>
+\let\^^I\^^M % same for <tab>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lq}
+% \begin{macro}{\rq}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lq{`}
+\def\rq{'}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lbrack}
+% \begin{macro}{\rbrack}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lbrack{[}
+\def\rbrack{]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aa}
+% \begin{macro}{\AA}
+% These are not from plain.tex but they are similar to other commands
+% found here and nowhere else, being alternate input forms for
+% characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \aa {\r a}
+\def \AA {\r A}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endgraf}
+% \begin{macro}{\endline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\endgraf=\par
+\let\endline=\cr
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\space}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\space{ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\empty}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1995/09/01}{Use \cs{let} to save space}
+% This probably ought to go altogether, but let it to the \LaTeX\
+% version to save space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\empty\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\null}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\null{\hbox{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bgroup}
+% \begin{macro}{\egroup}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bgroup={
+\let\egroup=}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\obeylines}
+% \begin{macro}{\obeyspaces}
+% In |\obeylines|, we say |\let^^M=\par| instead of |\def^^M{\par}|
+% since this allows, for example, |\let\par=\cr \obeylines \halign{...|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\active % these lines must end with %
+ \gdef\obeylines{\catcode`\^^M\active \let^^M\par}%
+ \global\let^^M\par} % this is in case ^^M appears in a \write
+\def\obeyspaces{\catcode`\ \active}
+{\obeyspaces\global\let =\space}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\loop}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/16}{Use Kabelschacht method}
+% \begin{macro}{\iterate}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/11/10}
+% {(CAR) added extra \cs{relax}}
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1994/05/26}
+% {(CAR) added \cs{long}}
+% \begin{macro}{\repeat}
+% We use Kabelschacht's method of doing loops, see TUB 8\#2 (1987).
+% (unless that breaks something :-). It turned out to need an
+% extra |\relax|: see pr/642 (|\loop| could do one iteration too much
+% in certain cases).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def \loop #1\repeat{%
+ \def\iterate{#1\relax % Extra \relax
+ \expandafter\iterate\fi
+ }%
+ \iterate
+ \let\iterate\relax
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This setting of |\repeat| is needed to make |\loop...\if...\repeat|
+% skippable within another |\if...|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\repeat=\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ defines |\smallskip|, etc.\ in |ltspace.dtx|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nointerlineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\offinterlineskip}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/07/02}{Replaced 1000 by \cs{@m}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nointerlineskip{\prevdepth-\@m\p@}
+\def\offinterlineskip{\baselineskip-\@m\p@
+ \lineskip\z@ \lineskiplimit\maxdimen}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vglue}
+% \begin{macro}{\hglue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\vglue{\afterassignment\vgl@\skip@=}
+\def\vgl@{\par \dimen@\prevdepth \hrule \@height\z@
+ \nobreak\vskip\skip@ \prevdepth\dimen@}
+\def\hglue{\afterassignment\hgl@\skip@=}
+\def\hgl@{\leavevmode \count@\spacefactor \vrule \@width\z@
+ \nobreak\hskip\skip@ \spacefactor\count@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ defines |~| in |ltdefns.dtx|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\slash}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\slash{/\penalty\exhyphenpenalty} % a `/' that acts like a `-'
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\break}
+% \begin{macro}{\nobreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\allowbreak}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\break{\penalty-\@M}
+\def\nobreak{\penalty \@M}
+\def\allowbreak{\penalty \z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\filbreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\goodbreak}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\filbreak{\par\vfil\penalty-200\vfilneg}
+\def\goodbreak{\par\penalty-500 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eject}
+% \changes{v1.1s}{1995/10/17}{Move \cs{supereject} to compat file}
+% Define |\eject| as in plain \TeX\ but define |\supereject| only in
+% the compatibility file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eject{\par\break}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\removelastskip}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\removelastskip{\ifdim\lastskip=\z@\else\vskip-\lastskip\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smallbreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\medbreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigbreak}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\smallbreak{\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi}
+\def\medbreak{\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi}
+\def\bigbreak{\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\m@th}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/16}{Remove unnecssary space}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\m@th{\mathsurround\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\underbar}
+% Due to \LaTeX's redefinition of |\underline| plain \TeX's
+% |\underbar| can be done in a simpler fashion (but do we
+% need it at all?).
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1994/05/26}
+% {(CAR/FMi) changed to use box \cs{tw@}}
+% \changes{v1.1p}{1994/05/26}
+% {(DPC) changed to use \cs{sbox}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\underbar#1{\underline{\sbox\tw@{#1}\dp\tw@\z@\box\tw@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\strutbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\strut}
+% \LaTeX\ sets |\strutbox| in |\set@fontsize|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\strutbox
+\def\strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\strutbox\else\unhcopy\strutbox\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hidewidth}
+% For alignment entries that can stick out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hidewidth{\hskip\hideskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/16}{Remove unnecessary def for \cs{item}}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1995/04/27}
+% {Move \cs{hang} and \cs{textindent} to latex209.def}
+% \changes{RmS}{1991/11/04}{Removed \cs{itemitem} since never
+% needed/useful with \LaTeX.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\narrower}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\narrower{%
+ \advance\leftskip\parindent
+ \advance\rightskip\parindent}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/11/12}{Comment out more encoding specific
+% commands}
+% \LaTeX\ defines |\ae| and similar commands elsewhere.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\%=`\%
+\chardef\&=`\&
+\chardef\#=`\#
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Most text commands are actually encoding specific and therefore
+% defined later, so commented out or removed from this file.
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/16}{Comment out encoding specific commands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leavevmode}
+% begins a paragraph, if necessary
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leavevmode{\unhbox\voidb@x}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mathhexbox}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mathhexbox#1#2#3{\mbox{$\m@th \mathchar"#1#2#3$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ialign}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ialign{\everycr{}\tabskip\z@skip\halign} % initialized \halign
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\oalign}
+% \begin{macro}{\o@lign}
+% \begin{macro}{\ooalign}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oalign#1{\leavevmode\vtop{\baselineskip\z@skip \lineskip.25ex%
+ \ialign{##\crcr#1\crcr}}}
+\def\o@lign{\lineskiplimit\z@ \oalign}
+\def\ooalign{\lineskiplimit-\maxdimen \oalign}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sh@ft}
+% \changes{v1.1t}{1996/07/26}{replace \cs{dimen}\cs{z@} by
+% \cs{dimen@}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sh@ft#1{\dimen@.00#1ex\multiply\dimen@\fontdimen1\font
+ \kern-.0156\dimen@} % compensate for slant in lowered accents
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ change: |\d|, |\b|, |\c|, |\copyright|, |\TeX|
+% defined elsewhere.
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}
+% {1993/11/29}{All accents in decimals; suggested by Paul Taylor}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/04/12}
+% {Define \cs{@acci}}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/16}{Remove \cs{@acci} and friends again}
+%
+% \LaTeX{} change: Make |\t| work in a moving argument.
+% Now defined elsewhere.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hrulefill}
+% \begin{macro}{\dotfill}
+% \LaTeX\ change: |\kern\z@| added to end of
+% |\hrulefill| and |\dotfill|
+% to make them work in `tabular' and `array' environments.
+% (Change made 24 July 1987).
+% \LaTeX\ change: |\leavevmode| added at begining of
+% |\dotfill| and |\hrulefill|
+% so that they work as expected in vertical mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hrulefill{\leavevmode\leaders\hrule\hfill\kern\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The box in |\dotfill| originally contained (in plain.tex):
+% |\mkern 1.5mu .\mkern 1.5mu|; the width of .44em differs from this
+% by .04pt which is probably an acceptable difference within leaders.
+% \changes{v1.1u}{1996/10/28}{Removed math mode}
+% \changes{v1.1v}{1996/10/29}{Got arithmetic correct (CAR)}
+% \changes{v1.1w}{1996/11/03}{Saved tokens by using \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dotfill{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \cleaders \hb@xt@ .44em{\hss.\hss}\hfill
+ \kern\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% INITEX sets |\sfcode x=1000| for all x, except that |\sfcode`X=999|
+% for uppercase letters. The following changes are needed:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\sfcode`\)=0 \sfcode`\'=0 \sfcode`\]=0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\nonfrenchspacing| macro will make further changes to
+% |\sfcode| values.
+%
+%
+% Definitions related to output
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1995/05/22}{Definitions of \cs{footins} and
+% \cs{footnoterule} moved to ltfloat.}
+%
+%
+% |\magnification| doesn't work in \LaTeX.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\magnification{\afterassignment\m@g\count@}
+%\def\m@g{\mag\count@
+% \hsize6.5truein\vsize8.9truein\dimen\footins8truein}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showoverfull}
+% \changes{v0.1k ltfinal}{1994/05/19}{used \cs{@ne} not 1}
+% The following commands are used in debugging:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\showoverfull{\tracingonline\@ne}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showoutput}
+% \changes{v0.1k ltfinal}{1994/05/19}
+% {used \cs{maxdimen} not 99999}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/07/02}{Use \cs{showoverfull} to save space}
+% \changes{v1.1x}{2002/02/24}{Use newly added \cs{loggingoutput}}
+% \begin{macro}{\loggingoutput}
+% \changes{v1.1x}{2002/02/24}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+%<*2ekernel|autoerr>
+\gdef\loggingoutput{\tracingoutput\@ne
+ \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen\errorstopmode}
+\gdef\showoutput{\loggingoutput\showoverfull}
+%</2ekernel|autoerr>
+%<autoload>\def\showoutput{\@autoerr\showoutput}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tracingall}
+% \changes{LaTeX209}{1991/08/26}{Added
+% \cs{errorcontextlines}!=\cs{maxdimen}, suggested by J. Schrod}
+% \changes{v1.1n}{1995/07/02}{Use \cs{showoutput} to save space}
+% \changes{v1.1x}{2002/02/24}{Use newly added \cs{loggingoutput}}
+% \begin{macro}{\loggingall}
+% \changes{v1.1x}{2002/02/24}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoerr>
+\gdef\loggingall{\tracingcommands\tw@\tracingstats\tw@
+ \tracingpages\@ne\tracinglostchars\@ne
+ \tracingmacros\tw@\tracingparagraphs\@ne\tracingrestores\@ne
+ \errorcontextlines\maxdimen\loggingoutput}
+\gdef\tracingall{\loggingall\showoverfull}
+%</2ekernel|autoerr>
+%<autoload>\def\tracingall{\@autoerr\tracingall}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \LaTeX\ change: |\showhyphens| Defined later.
+%
+% Punctuation affects the spacing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\nonfrenchspacing
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6f66a92755b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltsect.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,866 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltsect.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltsect.dtx}[1996/12/20 v1.0z LaTeX Kernel (Sectioning)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltsect.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Tobias Oetiker\thanks{Tobi updated
+ the comments to `doc' conventions}\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{363}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1995/05/07}{Use \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \changes{v1.0y}{1996/10/31}{Corrected and tidied documentation;
+% removed long lines}
+%
+%
+% \section{Sectioning Commands}
+%
+% This file defines the declarations such as |\author| which are used
+% by |\maketitle|. |\maketitle| itself is defined by each class, not
+% in the \LaTeX{} kernel.
+%
+% The second part of the file defines the generic commands used for
+% defining sectioning commands such as |\chapter|. Again the actual
+% document level commands are defined in the class files, in terms of
+% these commands.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/04}{Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/28}{Split further from ltherest.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/21}{Use new error commands}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/10/12}{Doc. typos}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/10/18}{Added \cs{normalcolor}}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{1995/05/03}{TO: Promoted documentation to doc.sty
+% standard}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{title,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Title}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\title}
+% The user defines the title and author by the declarations
+% |\title|\marg{name},
+% \DescribeMacro{\author}
+% |\author|\marg{name}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\date}
+% Similarly the date is declared with
+% |\date|\marg{date}.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\thanks}
+% Inside these, the |\thanks|\marg{footnote text} command may be used
+% to make acknowledgements, notice of address, etc.\ in a footnote.
+% \DescribeMacro{\and}
+% If there are multiple authors, they have to be separated with the
+% |\and| command.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\maketitle}
+% And finally, the |\maketitle| command produces the actual title,
+% using the information previously saved with the other commands.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title}
+% \begin{macro}{\@title}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/11}{Added default}
+% |\title| for use in |\maketitle|. If not given |\maketitle| will
+% produce an error message.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\title#1{\gdef\@title{#1}}
+\def\@title{\@latex@error{No \noexpand\title given}\@ehc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\author}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/11}{Added default}
+%
+% |\author| for use in |\maketitle|. If not given |\maketitle| will
+% produce a warning message.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
+\def\@author{\@latex@warning@no@line{No \noexpand\author given}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\date}
+% \begin{macro}{\@date}
+% |\date| for use in |\maketitle|. If not given |\maketitle| will
+% produce |\today| as the default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\date#1{\gdef\@date{#1}}
+\gdef\@date{\today}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{1.0h}{1994/11/04}{(ASAJ) Added \cs{protected@xdef} to
+% \cs{thanks}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
+ \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
+ \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@thanks}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@thanks\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\and}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\and{% % \begin{tabular}
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \hskip 1em \@plus.17fil%
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}}% % \end{tabular}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{sectioning,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Sectioning}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@secpenalty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@secpenalty
+\@secpenalty = -300
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@noskipsec}
+% \begin{macro}{\@noskipsectrue}
+% \changes{1.0w}{1996/09/29}{Added documentation}
+% Way back in 1991 (08/26) FMi \& RmS set the |\@noskipsec| switch
+% to true for the preamble and to false in |\document|.
+% This was done to trap lists and related text in the preamble but it
+% does not catch everything.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@noskipsec \@noskipsectrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
+%
+% The |\@startsection{|\meta{name}|}{|\meta{level}|}{|%
+% \meta{indent}|}{|\meta{beforeskip}|}|\\
+% |{|\meta{afterskip}|}{|\meta{style}|}*[|\meta{altheading}%
+% |]{|\meta{heading}|}|
+% command is the mother of all the user level sectioning commands.
+% The part after the |*|, including the |*| is optional.
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[name:] e.g., 'subsection'
+% \item[level:] a number, denoting depth of section -- e.g., chapter=1,
+% section = 2, etc.
+% \item[indent:] Indentation of heading from left margin
+% \item[beforeskip:] Absolute value = skip to leave above the heading.
+% If negative, then paragraph indent of text following
+% heading is suppressed.
+% \item[afterskip:] if positive, then skip to leave below heading, else
+% negative of skip to leave to right of run-in heading.
+% \item[style:] Commands to set style. Since June 1996 release the
+% \emph{last} command in this argument may be a command
+% such as |\MakeUppercase| or |\fbox| that takes an
+% argument. The section heading will be supplied as the
+% argument to this command. So setting |#6| to, say,
+% |\bfseries\MakeUppercase| would produce bold,
+% uppercase headings.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% If `|*|' is missing, then increment the counter. If it is
+% present, then there should be no |[|\meta{altheading}|]| argument.
+% The command uses the counter 'secnumdepth'. It contains a pointer
+% to the highest section level that is to be numbered.
+%
+% \textbf{Warning:}
+% The |\@startsection| command should be at the same or higher
+% grouping level as the text that follows it. For example, you should
+% \emph{not} do something like
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \def\foo{ \begingroup ...
+% \paragraph{...}
+% \endgroup}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Pseudocode for the |\@startsection| command
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \@startsection {NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE} ==
+% BEGIN
+% IF @noskipsec = T THEN \leavevmode FI
+% % true if previous section had no body.
+%
+% \par
+% \@tempskipa := BEFORESKIP
+% @afterindent := T
+% IF \@tempskipa < 0 THEN \@tempskipa := -\@tempskipa
+% @afterindent := F
+% FI
+% IF @nobreak = true
+% THEN \everypar == null
+% ELSE \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}
+% \addvspace{\@tempskipa}
+% FI
+% IF * next
+% THEN \@ssect{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}
+% ELSE \@dblarg{\@sect
+% {NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}
+% {BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}}
+% FI
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ \if@nobreak
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \@ifstar
+ {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}%
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% Pseudocode for the |\@sect| command
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \@sect{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}[ARG1]{ARG2}
+% ==
+% BEGIN
+% IF LEVEL > \c@secnumdepth
+% THEN \@svsec :=L null
+% ELSE \refstepcounter{NAME}
+% \@svsec :=L BEGIN \@seccntformat{#1}\relax END
+% FI
+% IF AFTERSKIP > 0
+% THEN \begingroup
+% STYLE
+% \@hangfrom{\hskip INDENT\@svsec}
+% {\interlinepenalty 10000 ARG2\par}
+% \endgroup
+% \NAMEmark{ARG1}
+% \addcontentsline{toc}{NAME}
+% { IF LEVEL > \c@secnumdepth
+% ELSE \protect\numberline{\theNAME} FI
+% ARG1 }
+% ELSE \@svsechd == BEGIN STYLE
+% \hskip INDENT\@svsec
+% ARG2
+% \NAMEmark{ARG1}
+% \addcontentsline{toc}{NAME}
+% { IF LEVEL > \c@secnumdepth
+% ELSE
+% \protect\numberline{\theNAME}
+% FI
+% ARG1 }
+% END
+% FI
+% \@xsect{AFTERSKIP}
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/08/25}
+% {(FMi) replaced explicit setting of \cs{@svsec}
+% by call to \cs{@seccntformat}}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1993/08/05}
+% {(RmS) Made sure that \cs{protect} works correctly in
+% expansion of \cs{the} counter}
+% \changes{1.0h}{1994/11/04}
+% {(ASAJ) Added \cs{protected@edef}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+ \let\@svsec\@empty
+ \else
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since |\@seccntformat| might end with an improper |\hskip| which
+% is scanning forward for |plus| or |minus| we end the definition
+% of |\@svsec| with |\relax| as a precaution.
+% \changes{1.0n}{1995/05/06}{Added \cs{relax} after
+% \cs{@seccntformat} just in case}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
+ \fi
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1996/05/21}
+% {(DPC) Moved brace to allow commands like
+% \cs{MakeUppercase} in 6th argument.
+% Changed \cs{par} to \cs{endgraf} to allow non-long
+% commands. internal/2148}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1996/06/10}
+% {(DPC) Changed \cs{endgraf} to \cs{@@par}}
+% This |{| used to be after the argument to |\@hangfrom| but was moved
+% here to allow commands such as |\MakeUppercase| to be used at the end
+% of |#6|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #6{%
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
+ \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
+ \endgroup
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ #7}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\relax| added 2 May 90
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1996/05/21}
+% {(DPC) Added extra braces for internal/2148}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@svsechd{%
+ #6{\hskip #3\relax
+ \@svsec #8}%
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ #7}}%
+ \fi
+ \@xsect{#5}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xsect}%
+% Pseudocode for the |\@xsect| command
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \@xsect{AFTERSKIP} ==
+% BEGIN
+% IF AFTERSKIP > 0
+% THEN \par \nobreak
+% \vskip AFTERSKIP
+% \@afterheading
+% ELSE @nobreak :=G F
+% @noskipsec :=G T
+% \everypar{ IF @noskipsec = T
+% THEN @noskipsec :=G F
+% \clubpenalty :=G 10000
+% \hskip -\parindent
+% \begingroup
+% \@svsechd
+% \endgroup
+% \unskip
+% \hskip -AFTERSKIP \relax
+% %% relax added 14 Jan 91
+% ELSE \clubpenalty :=G \@clubpenalty
+% \everypar := NULL
+% FI
+% }
+% FI
+%
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \changes{0.0}{1992/08/19}
+% {(RmS) corrected bug: stretch and shrink in argument to
+% \cs{hskip} previously not negated}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xsect#1{%
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Why not combine |\@sect| and |\@xsect| and save doing the
+% same test twice? It is not possible to change this now as these
+% have become hooks!
+%
+% This |\par| seems unnecessary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \par \nobreak
+ \vskip \@tempskipa
+ \@afterheading
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1996/07/26}{Removed \cs{global} before
+% \cs{@nobreak...}}
+% \changes{v1.0x}{1996/10/23}{Replaced \cs{hskip...} with \cs{setbox...}
+% as used in \cs{@afterheading}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \global\@noskipsectrue
+ \everypar{%
+ \if@noskipsec
+ \global\@noskipsecfalse
+ {\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+ \clubpenalty\@M
+ \begingroup \@svsechd \endgroup
+ \unskip
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax
+ \hskip -\@tempskipa
+ \else
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
+ \everypar{}%
+ \fi}%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@seccntformat}
+% This command formats the section number including the space
+% following it.
+% \changes{1.0n}{1995/05/06}{Use \cs{quad} instead of \cs{hskip}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Pseudocode for the |\@ssect| command
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \@ssect{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}{ARG} ==
+% BEGIN
+% IF AFTERSKIP > 0
+% THEN \begingroup
+% STYLE
+% \@hangfrom{\hskip INDENT}{\interlinepenalty 10000 ARG\par}
+% \endgroup
+% ELSE \@svsechd == BEGIN STYLE
+% \hskip INDENT
+% ARG
+% END
+% FI
+% \@xsect{AFTERSKIP}
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% Pseudocode for the |\@afterheading| command
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \@afterheading ==
+% BEGIN
+% @nobreak :=G true
+% \everypar := BEGIN IF @nobreak = T
+% THEN @nobreak :=G false
+% \clubpenalty :=G 10000
+% IF @afterindent = F
+% THEN remove \lastbox
+% FI
+% ELSE \clubpenalty :=G \@clubpenalty
+% \everypar := NULL
+% FI
+% END
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \@tempskipa #3\relax
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1996/05/21}
+% {(DPC) Moved brace to allow commands like
+% \cs{MakeUppercase} in 4th argument.
+% Changed \cs{par} to \cs{endgraf} to allow non-long
+% commands. internal/2148}
+% \changes{v1.0t}{1996/06/10}
+% {(DPC) Changed \cs{endgraf} to \cs{@@par}}
+% This |{| used to be after the argument to |\@hangfrom| but was moved
+% here to allow commands such as |\MakeUppercase| to be used at the end
+% of |#4|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ #4{%
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}%
+ \interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0s}{1996/05/21}
+% {(DPC) Added extra braces for internal/2148}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5}}%
+ \fi
+ \@xsect{#3}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@afterindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\@afterindenttrue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@afterindent \@afterindenttrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
+% \changes{v1.0v}{1996/08/02}{Removed \cs{global}
+% before \cs{@nobreak...}}
+%
+% This hook is used in setting up custom-built headings in classes.dtx.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@afterheading{%
+ \@nobreaktrue
+ \everypar{%
+ \if@nobreak
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \clubpenalty \@M
+ \if@afterindent \else
+ {\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty
+ \everypar{}%
+ \fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom}
+%
+% |\@hangfrom{|\meta{text}|}| : Puts \meta{text} in a box, and makes a
+% hanging indentation of the following material up to the first
+% |\par|. Should be used in vertical mode.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{(DPC)Extra groups for colour}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@hangfrom#1{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
+ \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@secnumdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\c@secnumdepth
+\newcount\c@tocdepth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}\end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\secdef}
+%
+% |\secdef{|\meta{unstarcmds}|}{|\meta{unstarcmds}|}{|%
+% \meta{starcmds}|}|\\
+% When defining a |\chapter| or |\section| command without using
+% |\@startsection|, you can use |\secdef| as follows:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item |\def\chapter{| \ldots |\secdef|
+% |\|\meta{starcmd} |\|\meta{unstarcmd} |}|
+% \item |\def\|\meta{starcmd}|[#1]#2{| \ldots |}|
+% |%| Command to define |\chapter[|\ldots|]{|\ldots|}|
+% \item |\def\|\meta{unstarcmd}|#1{| \ldots |}|
+% |%| Command to define |\chapter*{|\ldots|}|
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secdef#1#2{\@ifstar{#2}{\@dblarg{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Initializations}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraphmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphmark}
+% \changes{v1.0q}{1995/10/25}{Use \cs{let} not \cs{def} to save space.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sectionmark\@gobble
+\let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+\let\subsubsectionmark\@gobble
+\let\paragraphmark\@gobble
+\let\subparagraphmark\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{contents,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Table of Contents etc.}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Convention}
+% |\tf@|\meta{foo} = file number for output for table foo.
+% The file is opened only if |@filesw| = |true|.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands}
+%
+%
+% A |\l@|\meta{type}|{|\meta{entry}|}{|\meta{page}|}| Macro needs to
+% defined by document style for making an entry of type \meta{type}
+% in a table of contents, etc. E.g., the document style
+% should define |\l@chapter|, |\l@section|, etc.
+%
+% \textbf{Note:} When the |\protect| command is
+% used in the \meta{entry} or \meta{text} of one of the commands
+% below, it causes the following control sequence to be written on
+% the file without being expanded. The sequence will be expanded
+% when the table of contents entry is processed.
+%
+% \textbf{Surprise:} Inside an |\addcontentsline| or |\addtocontents|
+% command argument, the commands: |\index|, |\glossary|, and |\label|
+% are no-ops . This could cause a problem if the user puts an
+% |\index| or |\label| into one of the commands he writes, or into the
+% optional `short version' argument of a |\section| or |\caption|
+% command.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@starttoc}
+% The |\@starttoc|\marg{ext} command is used to define the commands:\\
+% |\tableofcontents|, |\listoffigures|, etc.
+%
+% For example:
+% |\@starttoc{lof}| is used in |\listoffigures|. This command
+% reads the |.|\meta{ext} file and sets up to write the new
+% |.|\meta{ext} file.
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \@starttoc{EXT} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \begingroup
+% \makeatletter
+% read file \jobname.EXT
+% IF @filesw = true
+% THEN open \jobname.EXT as file \tf@EXT
+% FI
+% @nobreak :=G FALSE %% added 24 May 89
+% \endgroup
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \changes{0.0}{1992/01/14}{(RmS) added \cs{immediate} to \cs{openout}
+% as all \cs{write} commands
+% are also executed \cs{immediate}}
+% \changes{v1.0u}{1996/07/26}{removed \cs{global}
+% before \cs{@nobreak...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@starttoc#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \makeatletter
+ \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+ \if@filesw
+ \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+ \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+ \fi
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% The |\addcontentsline{|\meta{table}|}{|\meta{type}|}{|%
+% \meta{entry}|}| command allows the user to add
+% his/her own entry to a table of contents, etc. The command adds the
+% entry |\contentsline{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{entry}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
+% to the |.|\meta{table} file.
+%
+% This macro is implemented as an aplication of |\addtocontents|.
+% Note that |\thepage| is not expandable during |\protected@write|
+% therefore one gets the page number at the time of the |\shipout|.
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/20}{Correct setting of \cs{protect}.}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1995/04/23}{Use \cs{contentsline} internally.}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{protected@write} to
+% \cs{addcontentsline}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{%
+ \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{\thepage}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/20}{Correct setting of \cs{protect}.}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/11/04}{Added \cs{protected@write} to
+% \cs{addtocontents}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+%
+% The |\addtocontents{|\meta{table}|}{|\meta{text}|}| command
+% adds \meta{text} to the |.|\meta{table} file, with no
+% page number.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\addtocontents#1#2{%
+ \protected@write\@auxout
+ {\let\label\@gobble \let\index\@gobble \let\glossary\@gobble}%
+ {\string\@writefile{#1}{#2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% The |\contentsline{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{entry}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
+% macro produces a \meta{type} entry in a table of contents, etc.
+% It will appear in the |.toc| or other file. For example,
+% The entry for subsection 1.4.3 in the table of contents for
+% example, might be produced by:
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \contentsline{subsection}
+% {\makebox{30pt}[r]{1.4.3} Gnats and Gnus}{22}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |\protect| command causes command sequences to be written
+% without expanding them.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\contentsline#1{\csname l@#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% |\@dottedtocline{|\meta{level}|}{|\meta{indent}|}{|\meta{numwidth}%
+% |}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|:
+% Macro to produce a table of contents line with the following
+% parameters:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[level] If \meta{level} $>$ |\c@tocdepth|, then no line
+% produced.
+% \item[indent] Total indentation from the left margin.
+% \item[numwidth] Width of box for number if the \meta{title} has a
+% |\numberline| command.
+% As of 25 Jan 1988, this is also the amount of extra
+% indentation added to second and later lines of a
+% multiple line entry.
+% \item[title] Contents of entry.
+% \item[page] Page number.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% Uses the following parameters, which must be set by the document
+% style. They should be defined with |\def|'s.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[|\@pnumwidth|] Width of box in which page number is set.
+% \item[|\@tocrmarg|] Right margin indentation for all but last line
+% of multiple-line entries.
+% \item[|\@dotsep|] Separation between dots, in mu units.
+% Should be |\def|'d to a number like 2 or 1.7
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/09/29}
+% {(RmS) added \cs{reset@font} for page number}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1994/05/25}{Put braces around argument 4
+% (the actual toc entry) to avoid font (and possibly other)
+% changes leaking out to the leaders.}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1994/10/18}{Added \cs{normalcolor} for page number}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1996/12/20}{Added \cs{nobreak} for latex/2343}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
+ \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
+ {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+ \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+ \interlinepenalty\@M
+ \leavevmode
+ \@tempdima #3\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.0z}{1996/12/20}{Added \cs{nobreak} for latex/2343}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+ {#4}\nobreak
+ \leaders\hbox{$\m@th
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If a document uses fonts other than computer modern, the use of a
+% dot from math can be very disturbing despite the fact that this
+% might be the only place in a document that then uses computer
+% modern.
+% Therefore we surround the dot with an |\hbox| to escape to the
+% surrounding text font.
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1995/04/25}{Added \cs{hbox} around dots.}
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1995/05/02}{Don't reset to \cs{rmfamily}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep
+ mu$}\hfill
+ \nobreak
+ \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor #5}%
+ \par}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \textbf{Note:} |\nobreak|'s added 7 Jan 86 to prevent bad line break
+% that left the page number dangling by itself at left edge of a new
+% line.
+%
+% Changed 25 Jan 88 to use |\leftskip| instead of |\hangindent| so
+% leaders of multiple-line contents entries would line up properly.
+% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
+% |\numberline{|\meta{number}|}|: For use in a |\contentsline| command.
+% It puts \meta{number} flushleft in a box of width |\@tempdima|
+% (Before 25
+% Jan 88 change, it also added |\@tempdima| to the hanging
+% indentation.)
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\numberline#1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{#1\hfil}}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e455958dc24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltspace.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1000 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltspace.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltspace.dtx}
+ [2004/02/15 v1.3a LaTeX Kernel (spacing)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltspace.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{459}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/16}{(ASAJ) Split from ltinit.dtx.}
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1995/05/25}{Macros moved to ltlists.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.2n}{1996/04/22}{Documentation Improvements}
+% \changes{v1.2o}{1996/06/22}{Documentation of problems added}
+% \changes{v1.2q}{1996/07/27}{Further documentation of problems}
+% \changes{v1.2r}{1996/07/27}{Correct documentation of problems}
+% \changes{v1.2w}{1998/08/17}{Documentation fixes.}
+%
+%
+% \section{Spacing}
+%
+% This section deals with spacing, and line- and page-breaking.
+%
+% \subsection{User Commands}
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\nopagebreak\oarg{i} : \meta{i} = 0,...,4.
+%
+% Default argument = 4. Puts a penalty into the vertical list
+% output as follows:\\
+% 0 : penalty = 0\\
+% 1 : penalty = |\@lowpenalty|\\
+% 2 : penalty = |\@medpenalty|\\
+% 3 : penalty = |\@highpenalty|\\
+% 4 : penalty = 10000
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\pagebreak\oarg{i} :
+% same as \nopagebreak except negatives of its penalty
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\linebreak\oarg{i} : analog of the above
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\nolinebreak\oarg{i} : analog of the above
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\samepage :
+% inhibits page breaking most places by setting the
+% following penalties to 10000:\\
+% |\interlinepenalty|\\
+% |\postdisplaypenalty|\\
+% |\interdisplaylinepenalty|\\
+% |\@beginparpenalty|\\
+% |\@endparpenalty|\\
+% |\@itempenalty|\\
+% |\@secpenalty|\\
+% |\interfootnotelinepenalty|
+%
+% \DescribeMacro{\\} : initially defined to be |\newline|
+%
+% |\\|\oarg{length} : initially defined to be
+% |\vspace|\marg{length}|\newline|\\
+% Note: |\\*| adds a |\vadjust{\penalty 10000}|
+%
+% OBSOLETE COMMANDS (which never made it into the manual):
+%
+% |\obeycr| : defines <CR> == |\\\relax|\\
+% |\restorecr| : restores <CR> to its usual meaning.
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \subsection{Chris' comments}
+%
+% There are several aspects of the handling of space in horizontal
+% mode that are inconsistent or do not work well in some cases.
+% These are largely concerned with ignoring the effect of space
+% tokens that would otherwise typeset an inter-word space.
+%
+% Negating the effect of such space tokens is achieved by two
+% mechanisms:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item |\unskip| is used to remove the glue just added by
+% a space that has already had its effect; it is sometimes
+% invoked after an |\ifdim| test on |\lastskip| (see below);
+% \item |\ignorespaces| is used to ignore space-tokens yet to come.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% The test done on |\lastskip| is sometimes for equality with zero and
+% sometimes for being positive. Recall also that the test is only on
+% the natural length of the glue and that no glue cannot be
+% distinguished from glue whose natural length is zero: to summarise,
+% a pretty awful test. It is not clear why these tests are not all
+% the same; I think that they should all be for equality. One place
+% where |\unskip| is often used is just before a |\par| (which itself
+% internally does an |\unskip|) and one bit of code (in |\@item|) even
+% has two |\unskips| before a |\par|. These uses may be fossil code
+% but if they are necessary, maybe |\@killglue| would be even safer.
+%
+% Such removal of glue by |\unskip| may sometimes have the wrong result,
+% removing not the glue from a space-token but other explicit glue;
+% this is sometimes not what is intended.
+%
+% A common way to prevent such removal is to add an |\hskip\z@| after
+% the glue that should not be removed. This protects that glue
+% against one |\unskip| with no test but not against more than one.
+% It does work for `tested |\unskip|s'. This is used
+% by |\hspace*| but not by |\hspace|; this is inconsistent as the star
+% is supposed to prevent removal only at the beginning of a line, not
+% at the end, or in a tabular, etc.
+%
+% If this reason for removing glue were the only consideration then a
+% tested-|\unskip| and protection by |\hskip\z@| would suffice but
+% would need to be consistently implemented.
+%
+% However, the class of invisibles, commands and environments tries to
+% be even cleverer: one of these tries to leave only one inter-word
+% space whenever there is one before it and one after it; and it does
+% this quite well.
+%
+% But problems can arise when there is not a space-token on
+% both sides of it; in particular, when an invisible appears at the
+% beginning or end of a piece of text the method still leaves one space
+% token whereas usually in these cases it should leave none.
+%
+% Also, the current rules do not work well when more than one such
+% command appears consecutively, separated by space-tokens; it leaves
+% glue between every other invisible.
+%
+% There is also a question about what these commands should do when
+% they occur next to spaces that do not come from space tokens but,
+% for example, from |\hspace|. Should they still produce `just one
+% space'? If so, which one? It is good to note that the manual
+% is sufficiently cautious about invisibles that we are not obliged to
+% make anything work.
+%
+% Another interesting side-road to explore is whether the space-tokens
+% either side of an |\hspace{...}| should be ignored.
+%
+% One alternative to the current algorithm that is often suggested is
+% that all glue around the invisible should be consolidated into a
+% space after it (usually without stating how much glue should be put
+% there). The command |\nolinebreak| is implemented this way (and
+% |\linebreak| should also be). This does not work correctly for the
+% following common case:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ... some text
+% \index{some-word}
+% some-word and more text.
+% \end{verbatim}
+% This is optimal coding since it is normal to index a word that gets
+% split across a page-break on its starting page. This would, on the
+% other hand, fix another common (and documented) failure of the
+% current system: when the invisible is the last thing in a paragraph
+% the space before it is not removed and, worse, it is also hidden
+% from the paragraph-ending mechanism so that an `empty' line can be
+% created at the end of the paragraph.
+%
+% Another deficiency (I think) of the current system is that the
+% following is treated as having the |\index| command between the
+% paragraphs, which is probably not what the author intended (since
+% there is no empty line after it).
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%
+% \index{beginnings}
+% Beginnings of paragraphs ...
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% I know of no algorithm that will handle satisfactorily even
+% all the most common cases; note that it could be that the best
+% algorithm may be different for different invisibles since,
+% for example, the common uses and expected behaviour of
+% |\index|, |\marginpar|, |\linebreak|, |\pagebreak| and
+% |\vspace| are somewhat different. [For example, is
+% |\vspace| ever used in the middle of a paragraph?]
+%
+% One method that can (and is) used to make invisible commands produce
+% no space when used at the beginning of text is to put in some glue
+% that is nearly enough the same as no glue or glue of zero length in
+% all respects except for the precise test for not being exactly equal
+% to zero; examples of such glue are |\hskip 1sp| and, possibly better
+% but more complex, |\hskip -1sp \hskip 1sp|. However, this only works
+% when it is known that user-supplied text is about to start.
+%
+% Some similar concerns apply to the handling of space and penalties
+% in vertical mode; there is an extra hurdle here as |\unskip| does
+% not work on the main vertical list. The complexity of the tests done
+% by |\addvspace| have never been explained.
+%
+% The implementation of space hacks etc for vertical mode is another
+% major area that needs further attention; my earlier experiments
+% did not produce much improvement over the current unsatisfactory
+% situation.
+%
+% One particular problem is what happens when the following very
+% natural coding is used (part of the problem here is that this looks
+% like an hmode problem, but it is not):
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% ... end of text.
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item \label{item:xxx} Item text.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{Some immediate actions}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Fix bug in |\linebreak|.
+% \item Fix bug in |\\*|.
+% \item Reimplement |\\|, etc, removing extra |\vadjust|s and getting
+% better error trapping (this seems to involve a lot more tokens).
+% \item Investigate whether |\\|, etc need to be errors in vmode; I
+% think that they could be noops (maybe with a warning).
+% \item Make all(?) |\unskips| include test for zero skip (rather than
+% other tests or no test).
+% \item Consider replacing |\hskip 1sp| by something better (here
+% called an `infinitesimal' skip).
+% \item Look at all |\hskip\z@| (or similar) to see if they should be
+% changed to an `infinitesimal' skip.
+% \item Resolve the inconsistency between |\hspace| and |\hspace*|.
+% \item Remove unnecessary |\unskips|.
+% \item Investigate and rationalise the `newline' code.
+% \item Find better algorithms for all sorts of things or, easier(?),
+% fix \TeX{} itself.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsection{The code}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{spacing,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagebreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopagebreak}
+% \changes{v1.2h}{1995/07/05}{Reimplemented both using \cs{@no@pgbk}}
+% \changes{v1.2j}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Use \cs{@testopt} /1911}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pagebreak{\@testopt{\@no@pgbk-}4}
+\def\nopagebreak{\@testopt\@no@pgbk4}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@no@pgbk}
+% \changes{v1.2h}{1995/07/05}{Macro replaces \cs{@pgbk}
+% and \cs{@nopgbk}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@no@pgbk #1[#2]{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \penalty #1\@getpen{#2}%
+ \else
+ \@bsphack
+ \vadjust{\penalty #1\@getpen{#2}}%
+ \@esphack
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linebreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\nolinebreak}
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1996/10/29}{Reimplemented both using \cs{@no@lnbk}}
+% \changes{v1.2j}{1995/10/16}{(DPC) Use \cs{@testopt} /1911}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\linebreak{\@testopt{\@no@lnbk-}4}
+\def\nolinebreak{\@testopt\@no@lnbk4}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@no@lnbk}
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1996/10/29}{Macro replaces \cs{@lnbk}
+% and \cs{@nolnbk}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@no@lnbk #1[#2]{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \@nolnerr
+ \else
+ \@tempskipa\lastskip
+ \unskip
+ \penalty #1\@getpen{#2}%
+ \ifdim\@tempskipa>\z@
+ \hskip\@tempskipa
+ \ignorespaces
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\samepage}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\samepage{\interlinepenalty\@M
+ \postdisplaypenalty\@M
+ \interdisplaylinepenalty\@M
+ \@beginparpenalty\@M
+ \@endparpenalty\@M
+ \@itempenalty\@M
+ \@secpenalty\@M
+ \interfootnotelinepenalty\@M}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1994/11/11}{(DPC) Make robust}
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1994/11/14}{(DPC) Macro modified}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1996/10/29}{Corrected and rationalised code}
+% The purpose of the new code is to fix a few bugs; however, it also
+% attempts to optimize the following, in order of priority:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item efficient execution of plain |\\|;
+% \item efficient execution of |\\[...]|;
+% \item memory use;
+% \item name-space use.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% The changes should make no difference to the typeset output.
+% It appears to be safe to use |\reserved@e| and |\reserved@f| here
+% (other reserved macros are somewhat disastrous).
+%
+% These changes made |\newline| even less robust than it had been,
+% so now it is explicitly robust, like |\\|.
+% \begin{macro}{\@normalcr}
+% The internal definition of the `normal' definition of |\\|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\\{%
+ \let \reserved@e \relax
+ \let \reserved@f \relax
+ \@ifstar{\let \reserved@e \vadjust \let \reserved@f \nobreak
+ \@xnewline}%
+ \@xnewline}
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\@normalcr
+ \csname\expandafter\@gobble\string\\ \endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\newline}
+% A simple form of the `normal' definition of |\\|.
+% \changes{v1.2v}{1997/05/07}{Made completely robust.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\newline{\@normalcr\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xnewline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xnewline{\@ifnextchar[% ] bracket matching
+ \@newline
+ {\@gnewline\relax}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@newline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@newline[#1]{\let \reserved@e \vadjust
+ \@gnewline {\vskip #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@gnewline}
+% \changes{v1.2u}{1996/10/29}{Added macro}
+% The |\nobreak| added to prevent null lines when |\\|
+% ends an overfull line. Change made 24 May 89 as suggested by
+% Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf
+% \changes{v1.2h}{1995/07/05}{Use \cs{break}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gnewline #1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \@nolnerr
+ \else
+ \unskip \reserved@e {\reserved@f#1}\nobreak \hfil \break
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@getpen}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@getpen#1{\ifcase #1 \z@ \or \@lowpenalty\or
+ \@medpenalty \or \@highpenalty
+ \else \@M \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@nobreak}
+% \changes{v1.2p}{1996/07/26}{put \cs{global} inside definition}
+% Switch used to avoid page breaks caused by |\label| after a
+% section heading, etc. It should be \textbf{GLOBALLY} set true
+% after the |\nobreak| and \textbf{globally} set false by the
+% next invocation of |\everypar|.
+%
+% Commands that reset |\everypar| should globally set it false if
+% appropriate.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nobreakfalse{\global\let\if@nobreak\iffalse}
+\def\@nobreaktrue {\global\let\if@nobreak\iftrue}
+\@nobreakfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@savsk}
+% \begin{macro}{\@savsf}
+% Registers used to save the space factor and last skip.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@savsk
+\newcount\@savsf
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bsphack}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/08}
+% {Command reimplemented; late birthday present for Chris}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/08}{Command reimplemented}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/16}{Corrected optimisation :-)}
+% |\@bsphack| and |\@esphack|
+% used by macros such as |\index| and
+% |\begin{@float}| \ldots |\end{@float}|
+% that want to be invisible --- i.e.,
+% not leave any extra space when used in the middle of text. Such
+% a macro should begin with |\@bsphack| and end with |\@esphack|
+% The macro in question should not create any text, nor change the
+% mode.
+%
+% Before giving the current definition we give an extended definition
+% that is currently not used (because it doesnt work as advertised:-)
+%
+% These are generalised hacks which attempt to do sensible things
+% when `invisible commands' appear in vmode too.
+%
+% They need to cope with space in both hmode (plus spacefactor) and
+% vmode, and also cope with breaks etc. In vmode this means
+% ensuring that any following |\addvspace|, etc sees the correct
+% glue in |\lastskip|.
+%
+% In fact, these improved versions should be used for other cases
+% of `whatsits, thingies etc' which should be invisible. They are
+% only for commands, not environments (see notes on |\@Esphack|).
+%
+% BTW, anyone know why the standard hacks are surrounded by
+% |\ifmmode\else| rather than simply |\ifhmode|?
+%
+% And are there any cases where saving the spacefactor is
+% essential? I have some extensions where it is, but it does not
+% appear to be so in the standard uses.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def \@bsphack{%
+% \relax \ifvmode
+% \@savsk \lastskip
+% \ifdim \lastskip=\z@
+% \else
+% \vskip -\lastskip
+% \fi
+% \else
+% \ifhmode
+% \@savsk \lastskip
+% \@savsf \spacefactor
+% \fi
+% \fi
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% I think that, in vmode, it is the safest to put
+% in a |\nobreak| immediately after such things since writes,
+% inserts etc followed by glue give valid breakpoints and, in
+% general, it is possible to create breaks but impossible to
+% destroy them.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def \@esphack{%
+% \relax \ifvmode
+% \nobreak
+% \ifdim \@savsk=\z@
+% \else
+% \vskip\@savsk
+% \fi
+% \else
+% \ifhmode
+% \spacefactor \@savsf
+% \ifdim \@savsk>\z@
+% \ignorespaces
+% \fi
+% \fi
+% \fi
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% For the moment we are going to ignore the vertical versions until
+% they are correct.
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/19}{There seem to be problems with selfmade
+% birthday presents}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bsphack{%
+ \relax
+ \ifhmode
+ \@savsk\lastskip
+ \@savsf\spacefactor
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@esphack}
+% Companion to |\@bsphack|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@esphack{%
+ \relax
+ \ifhmode
+ \spacefactor\@savsf
+ \ifdim\@savsk>\z@
+ \ignorespaces
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@Esphack}
+% A variant of |\@esphack| that sets the |@ignore| switch to
+% true (as |\@esphack| used to do previously).
+% This is currently used only for floats and similar environments.
+% \changes{v1.2s}{1996/08/02}{Remove \cs{global} before \cs{@ignore...}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Esphack{%
+ \relax
+ \ifhmode
+ \spacefactor\@savsf
+ \ifdim\@savsk>\z@
+ \@ignoretrue
+ \ignorespaces
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@vbsphack}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/08}{Command added}
+% Another variant which is useful for invisible things which should
+% not live in vmode (this is how some people feel about marginals).
+%
+% If it occurs in vmode then it enters hmode and ensures that
+% |\@savsk| is nonzero so that the |\ignorespaces| is put in later.
+% It is not used at present.
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1995/05/25}{(CAR) not used so `removed'.}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \def \@vbsphack{ %
+% \relax \ifvmode
+% \leavevmode
+% \@savsk 1sp
+% \@savsf \spacefactor
+% \else
+% \ifhmode
+% \@savsk \lastskip
+% \@savsf \spacefactor
+% \fi
+% \fi
+% }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Vertical spacing}
+%
+%
+% \LaTeX\ supports the plain \TeX\ commands
+% |\smallskip|, |\medskip| and |\bigskip|.
+% However, it redefines them using |\vspace| instead of |\vskip|.
+%
+% Extra vertical space is added by the command
+% |\addvspace|\marg{skip},
+% which adds a vertical skip of \meta{skip} to the document.
+% The sequence\\
+% |\addvspace|\marg{s1} |\addvspace|\marg{s2}
+% is equivalent to\\
+% |\addvspace|\marg{maximum of s1, s2}.
+%
+% |\addvspace| should be used only in vertical mode, and gives an
+% error if it's not. The |\addvspace| command does \emph{not} add
+% vertical space if |@minipage| is true. The minipage environment uses
+% this to inhibit the addition of extra vertical space at the beginning.
+%
+% Penalties are put into the vertical list with the
+% |\addpenalty|\marg{penalty}
+% command. It works properly when |\addpenalty| and |\addvspace|
+% commands are mixed.
+%
+% The |@nobreak| switch is set true used when in vertical mode and no
+% page break should occur. (Right now, it is used only by the section
+% heading commands to inhibit page breaking after a heading.)
+%
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \addvspace{SKIP} ==
+% BEGIN
+% if vmode
+% then if @minipage
+% else if \lastskip =0
+% then \vskip SKIP
+% else if \lastskip < SKIP
+% then \vskip -\lastskip
+% \vskip SKIP
+% else if SKIP < 0 and \lastskip >= 0
+% then \vskip -\lastskip
+% \vskip \lastskip + SKIP
+% fi fi fi fi
+% else useful error message (CAR).
+% fi
+% END
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xaddvskip}
+% Internal macro for |\vspace| handling the case that space has
+% previously been added.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xaddvskip{%
+ \ifdim\lastskip<\@tempskipb
+ \vskip-\lastskip
+ \vskip\@tempskipb
+ \else
+ \ifdim\@tempskipb<\z@
+ \ifdim\lastskip<\z@
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempskipb\lastskip
+ \vskip-\lastskip
+ \vskip \@tempskipb
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addvspace}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1994/11/12}{Corrected error message}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/11/13}{Recorrected error message}
+% Add vertical space taking into account space already added, as
+% described above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addvspace#1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \if@minipage\else
+ \ifdim \lastskip =\z@
+ \vskip #1\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempskipb#1\relax
+ \@xaddvskip
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@noitemerr
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addpenalty}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1994/11/12}{Corrected error message}
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1994/11/13}{Recorrected error message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addpenalty#1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \if@minipage
+ \else
+ \if@nobreak
+ \else
+ \ifdim\lastskip=\z@
+ \penalty#1\relax
+ \else
+ \@tempskipb\lastskip
+ \vskip -\lastskip
+ \penalty#1%
+ \vskip\@tempskipb
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@noitemerr
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vspace}
+% \changes{v1.2m}{1996/01/20}{Made robust}
+% \begin{macro}{\@vspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\@vspacer}
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1995/05/25}
+% {(CAR) macros modified to be more efficient}
+% \changes{v1.2f}{1995/05/25}{(CAR) \cs{@restorepar} added to avoid
+% possible infinite tail recursion caused by a typo in the argument.}
+% The new code for these commands depends on the following facts:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The value of prevdepth is changed only when a box or rule
+% is created and added to a vertical list;
+% \item The value of prevdepth is used only when a box is created
+% and added to a vertical list;
+% \item The value of prevdepth is always local to the building of
+% one vertical list.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\vspace{\@ifstar\@vspacer\@vspace}
+\def\@vspace #1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \vskip #1
+ \vskip\z@skip
+ \else
+ \@bsphack
+ \vadjust{\@restorepar
+ \vskip #1
+ \vskip\z@skip
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vspacer#1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \dimen@\prevdepth
+ \hrule \@height\z@
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip #1
+ \vskip\z@skip
+ \prevdepth\dimen@
+ \else
+ \@bsphack
+ \vadjust{\@restorepar
+ \hrule \@height\z@
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip #1
+ \vskip\z@skip}%
+ \@esphack
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smallskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\medskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskip}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\smallskip{\vspace\smallskipamount}
+\def\medskip{\vspace\medskipamount}
+\def\bigskip{\vspace\bigskipamount}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\smallskipamount \smallskipamount=3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+\newskip\medskipamount \medskipamount =6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+\newskip\bigskipamount \bigskipamount =12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Horizontal space (and breaks)}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nobreakdashes}
+% \changes{v1.3}{2004/02/04}{(Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.3a}{2004/02/15}{(Added spacefactor setting}
+% This idea is borrowed from the \textsf{amsmath} package but
+% here we define a robust command.
+%
+% This command is a low-level command designed for use only before
+% hyphens or dashes (such as |-|, |--|, or |---|).
+%
+% It could probably be better implemented: it may need its own
+% private token register and temporary commmand.
+%
+% Setting the hyphen in a box and then unboxing it means that the
+% normal penalty will not be added after it---and if the penalty is
+% not there a break will not be taken (unless an explicit penalty
+% or glue follows, thus the final \verb=\nobreak=).
+%
+% Note that even if it is not followed by a `-', it still leaves
+% vmode and sets the spacefactor; so use it carefully!
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\nobreakdashes}{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \toks@{}%
+ \def\reserved@a##1{\toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@-}%
+ \futurelet\@let@token \reserved@b}%
+ \def\reserved@b {\ifx\@let@token -%
+ \expandafter\reserved@a
+ \else
+ \setbox\z@ \hbox{\the\toks@\nobreak}%
+ \unhbox\z@
+ \spacefactor\sfcode`\-
+ \fi}%
+ \futurelet\@let@token \reserved@b
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nobreakspace}
+% \changes{v1.2k}{1995/12/04}{(Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xobeysp}
+% \changes{v1.2t}{1996/09/28}{Moved from ltmiscen.dtx and redefined to
+% use \cs{nobreakspace }}
+%
+% This is a robust command that produces a horizontal space at
+% which, in paragraph-mode, a line-break is not possible. We then
+% define an active |~| to expand to it since this is the documented
+% behaviour of |~|. One reason for introducing this is that some
+% 8-bit input encodings have a slot for such a space and we do not
+% want to use active characters as the \LaTeX{} internal commands.
+%
+% The braces in the definition of |~| are needed to ensure that a
+% following space is preserved when reading to/from internal files.
+% \changes{v1.2l}{1995/12/04}{(braces added to definition of tilde}
+%
+% We need to keep \cs{@xobeysp} as it is widely used; so here it is
+% let to the non-robust command \cs{nobreakspace }.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\nobreakspace}{%
+ \leavevmode\nobreak\ }
+\catcode `\~=13
+\def~{\nobreakspace{}}
+\expandafter\let\expandafter\@xobeysp\csname nobreakspace \endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\,}
+% Used in paragraph mode produces a |\thinspace|. It has the
+% ordinary definition in math mode. Useful for quotes inside quotes,
+% as in |``\,`Foo', he said.''|
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/05/11}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\,}{%
+ \relax\ifmmode\mskip\thinmuskip\else\thinspace\fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@}
+% Placed before a '.', makes it a sentence-ending period. Does the
+% right thing for other punctuation marks as well. Does this by
+% setting spacefactor to 1000.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@{\spacefactor\@m}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hspace}
+% \changes{v1.0o}{1994/05/11}{Use \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}. ASAJ.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\hspace{\@ifstar\@hspacer\@hspace}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@hspace}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/08/05}
+% {(RmS) Removed superfluous \cs{leavevmode} in \cs{@hspace} and
+% \cs{@hspacer}, as suggested by CAR.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@hspace#1{\hskip #1\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@hspacer}
+% extra |\hskip 0pt| added 1985/17/12 to guard
+% against a following |\unskip|
+% |\relax| added 13 Oct 88 for usual \TeX\ lossage
+% replaced both changes by |\hskip\z@skip| 27 Nov 91
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@hspacer#1{\vrule \@width\z@\nobreak
+ \hskip #1\hskip \z@skip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fill}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\fill
+\fill = 0pt plus 1fill
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stretch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stretch#1{\z@ \@plus #1fill\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thinspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\negthinspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\enspace}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thinspace{\kern .16667em }
+\def\negthinspace{\kern-.16667em }
+\def\enspace{\kern.5em }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\quad}
+% \begin{macro}{\qquad}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enskip{\hskip.5em\relax}
+\def\quad{\hskip1em\relax}
+\def\qquad{\hskip2em\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\obeycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\restorecr}
+% The following definitions will probably get deleted or moved to
+% compatibility mode soon.
+%
+% \changes{v1.2g}{1995/06/11}
+% {(CAR) \cs{relax} added to stop silent eating of *.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\^^M=13 \gdef\obeycr{\catcode`\^^M13 \def^^M{\\\relax}%
+ \@gobblecr}%
+{\catcode`\^^M=13 \gdef\@gobblecr{\@ifnextchar
+\@gobble\ignorespaces}}
+\gdef\restorecr{\catcode`\^^M5 }}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..501e9455faa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/lttab.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1621 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: lttab.dtx
+%<def>\ProvidesFile{autotabg.sty}
+%<def> [1998/11/13 v1.1m tabbing autoload file]
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{lttab.dtx}[1998/11/13 v1.1m LaTeX Kernel (Columns)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{lttab.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \CheckSum{1131}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0l}{1995/05/07}{Use \cs{hb@xt@}}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1995/05/22}{Support autoloading feature}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1995/06/14}{Use \cs{ProvidesFile} in autoload}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1995/10/04}{Modify autoload support}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{1998/06/18}{Small addition to documentation}
+% \changes{v1.1l}{1998/07/06}{Small correction to documentation}
+%
+% \section{Tabbing, Tabular and Array Environments}
+% This section deals with `Lining It Up in Columns'. First the
+% |tabbing| environment is defined, and then in second part, |tabular|
+% together with its variants, |tabular*| and |array|.
+%
+% Note that the |tabular| defined here is essentially the original
+% \LaTeX~2.09 version, not the extended version described in \emph{The
+% \LaTeX\ Companion}. Use the |array| package to obtain the extended
+% version.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/04}{Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/07}{Long lines wrapped to 72 columns}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/03/28}{Improve documentation}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/07}{Removed definition of \cs{+}}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/07}{Removed surplus braces from
+% \cs{@ifnextchar} constructs}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1994/05/21}{Use new error commands}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1994/11/17}
+% {\cs{@tempa} to \cs{reserved@a}}
+%
+% \subsection{tabbing}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% \dimen(\@firsttab + i) = distance of tab stop i from left margin
+% 0 <= i <= 15 (?).
+%
+% \dimen\@firsttab is initialized to \@totalleftmargin, so it starts
+% at the prevailing left margin.
+%
+% \@maxtab = number of highest defined tab register
+% probably = \@firsttab + 12
+% \@nxttabmar = tab stop number of next line's left margin
+% \@curtabmar = tab stop number of current line's left margin
+% \@curtab = number of the current tab. At start of line,
+% it equals \@curtabmar
+% \@hightab = largest tab number currently defined.
+% \@tabpush = depth of \pushtab's
+%
+% \box\@curline = contents of current line, excluding left margin
+% skip, and excluding contents of current field
+% \box\@curfield = contents of current field
+%
+% @rjfield = switch: T iff the last field of the line should
+% be right-justified at the right margin.
+%
+% \tabbingsep = distance left by the \' command between the
+% current position and the field that is
+% ``left-shifted''.
+%
+% UTILITY MACROS
+% \@stopfield : closes the current field
+% \@addfield : adds the current field to the current line.
+% \@contfield : continues the current field
+% \@startfield : begins the next field
+% \@stopline : closes the current line and outputs it
+% \@startline : starts the next line
+% \@ifatmargin : an \if that is true iff the current line.
+% has width zero
+%
+% \@startline ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@curtabmar :=G \@nxttabmar
+% \@curtab :=G \@curtabmar
+% \box\@curline :=G null
+% \@startfield
+% \strut
+% END
+%
+% \@stopline ==
+% BEGIN
+% \unskip
+% \@stopfield
+% if @rjfield = T
+% then @rjfield :=G F
+% \@tempdima := \@totalleftmargin + \linewidth
+% \hb@xt@ \@tempdima{\@itemfudge
+% \hskip \dimen\@curtabmar
+% \box\@curline
+% \hfil
+% \box\@curfield}
+% else \@addfield
+% \hbox {\@itemfudge
+% \hskip \dimen\@curtabmar
+% \box\@curline}
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@startfield ==
+% BEGIN
+% \box\@curfield :=G \hbox {
+% END
+%
+% \@stopfield ==
+% BEGIN
+% }
+% END
+%
+% \@contfield ==
+% BEGIN
+% \box\@curfield :=G \hbox { \unhbox\@currfield %%} brace matching
+% END
+% \@addfield ==
+% BEGIN
+% \box\@curline :=G \unbox\@curline * \unbox\@curfield
+% END
+%
+% \@ifatmargin ==
+% BEGIN
+% if dim of box\@curline = 0pt then
+% END
+%
+%
+% \tabbing ==
+% BEGIN
+% \lineskip :=L 0pt
+% \> == \@rtab
+% \< == \@ltab
+% \= == \@settab
+% \+ == \@tabplus
+% \- == \@tabminus
+% \` == \@tabrj
+% \' == \@tablab
+% \\ == BEGIN \@stopline \@startline END
+% \\[DIST] == BEGIN
+% \@stopline \vskip DIST \@startline\ignorespaces END
+% \\* == BEGIN \@stopline \penalty 10000 \@startline END
+% \\*[DIST] == BEGIN \@stopline \penalty 10000 \vskip DIST
+% \@startline\ignorespaces END
+% \@hightab := \@nxttabmar :=G \@firsttab
+% \@tabpush :=G 0
+% \dimen\@firsttab := \@totalleftmargin
+% @rjfield :=G F
+% \trivlist \item\relax
+% if @minipage = F then \vskip \parskip fi
+% \box\@tabfbox = \rlap{\indent\the\everypar}
+% % note: \the\everypar sets @inlabel :=G F
+% \@itemfudge == BEGIN \box\@tabfbox END
+% \@startline
+% \ignorespaces
+% END
+%
+% \@endtabbing ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@stopline
+% if \@tabpush > 0 then error message: ''unmatched \poptabs'' fi
+% \endtrivlist
+% END
+%
+% \@rtab ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@stopfield
+% \@addfield
+% if \@curtab < \@hightab
+% then \@curtab :=G \@curtab + 1
+% else error message ``Undefined Tab'' fi
+% \@tempdima := \dimen\@curtab - \dimen\@curtabmar
+% - width of box \@curline
+% \box\@curline :=G \hbox{\unhbox\@curline + \hskip\@tempdima}
+% \@startfield
+% END
+%
+% \@settab ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@stopfield
+% \@addfield
+% if \@curtab < \@maxtab
+% then \@curtab :=G \@curtab+1
+% else error message: ``Too many tabs'' fi
+% if \@curtab > \@hightab
+% then \@hightab :=L \@curtab fi
+% \dimen\@curtab :=L \dimen\@curtabmar + width of \box\@curline
+% \@startfield
+% END
+%
+% \@ltab ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@ifatmargin
+% then if \@curtabmar > \@firsttab
+% then \@curtab :=G \@curtab - 1
+% \@curtabmar :=G \@curtabmar - 1
+% else error message ``Too many untabs'' fi
+% else error message ``Left tab in middle of line''
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@tabplus ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@nxttabmar < \@hightab
+% then \@nxttabmar :=G \@nxttabmar+1
+% else error message ``Undefined tab''
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@tabminus ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \@nxttabmar > \@firsttab
+% then \@nxttabmar :=G \@nxttabmar-1
+% else error message ``Too many untabs''
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@tabrj ==
+% BEGIN \@stopfield
+% \@addfield
+% @rjfield :=G T
+% \@startfield
+% END
+%
+% \@tablab ==
+% BEGIN \@stopfield
+% \box\@curline G:= \hbox{\box\@curline %% `G' added 17 Jun 86
+% \hskip - width of \box\@curfield
+% \hskip -\tabbingsep
+% \box\@curfield
+% \hskip \tabbingsep }
+% \@startfield
+% END
+%
+% \pushtabs ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@stopfield
+% \@tabpush :=G \@tabpush + 1
+% \begingroup
+% \@contfield
+% END
+%
+% \poptabs ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@stopfield
+% if \@tabpush > 0
+% then \endgroup
+% \@tabpush :=G \@tabpush - 1
+% else error message: ``Too many \poptabs''
+% fi
+% \@contfield
+% END
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\a}
+% The accents |\`| , |\'| , and |\=| that have been redefined inside a
+% tabbing environment can be called by typing |\a`| , |\a'| , and |\a=|.
+% The macro |\a| is defined in |ltoutenc.dtx|.
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/13}
+% {moved to ltoutenc}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The `2ekernel' code ensures that a |\usepackage{autotabg}| is
+% essentially ignored if a `full' format is being used that has
+% picture mode already in the format.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<2ekernel>\expandafter\let\csname ver@autotabg.sty\endcsname\fmtversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@firsttab}
+% \begin{macro}{\@maxtab}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/07}{Changed \cs{@firsttab} to \cs{chardef}}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/07}{Changed \cs{@maxtab} to \cs{chardef}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\newdimen\@gtempa
+\chardef\@firsttab=\the\allocationnumber
+\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa
+\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa
+\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa\newdimen\@gtempa
+\newdimen\@gtempa
+\chardef\@maxtab=\the\allocationnumber
+\dimen\@firsttab=0pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nxttabmar}
+% \begin{macro}{\@curtabmar}
+% \begin{macro}{\@curtab}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hightab}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabpush}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@nxttabmar
+\newcount\@curtabmar
+\newcount\@curtab
+\newcount\@hightab
+\newcount\@tabpush
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@curline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@curfield}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabfbox}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\@curline
+\newbox\@curfield
+\newbox\@tabfbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+%<*2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@rjfield}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@rjfield
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startline}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1995/10/23}{(CAR)Ensure that \cs{@nxttabmar} is never
+% larger than \cs{@hightab}}
+% It is, in some sense, an error if the current margin
+% tab setting is higher than the value of |\@hightab| (which is
+% a local variable). That this is allowed is a fundamental design
+% flaw which is not going to be corrected now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@startline{%
+ \ifnum \@nxttabmar >\@hightab
+ \@badtab
+ \global\@nxttabmar \@hightab
+ \fi
+ \global\@curtabmar \@nxttabmar
+ \global\@curtab \@curtabmar
+ \global\setbox\@curline \hbox {}%
+ \@startfield
+ \strut}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@stopline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@stopline{%
+ \unskip
+ \@stopfield
+ \if@rjfield
+ \global\@rjfieldfalse
+ \@tempdima\@totalleftmargin
+ \advance\@tempdima\linewidth
+ \hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
+ \@itemfudge\hskip\dimen\@curtabmar
+ \box\@curline
+ \hfil
+ \box\@curfield}%
+ \else
+ \@addfield
+ \hbox{\@itemfudge\hskip\dimen\@curtabmar\box\@curline}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startfield}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/13}
+% {Colour support}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@startfield{%
+ \global\setbox\@curfield\hbox\bgroup\color@begingroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@stopfield}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/13}
+% {Colour support}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@stopfield{%
+ \color@endgroup\egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@contfield}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/13}
+% {Colour support}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@contfield{%
+ \global\setbox\@curfield\hbox\bgroup\color@begingroup
+ \unhbox\@curfield}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addfield}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@addfield{\global\setbox\@curline\hbox{\unhbox
+ \@curline\unhbox\@curfield}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifatmargin}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@ifatmargin{\ifdim \wd\@curline =\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabcr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@tabcr{\@stopline \@ifstar{\penalty \@M \@xtabcr}\@xtabcr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtabcr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@xtabcr{\@ifnextchar[\@itabcr{\@startline\ignorespaces}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@itabcr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@itabcr[#1]{\vskip #1\@startline\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\kill{\@stopfield\@startline\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabbing}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1995/10/23}{(CAR)Make \cs{@hightab} consistently a
+% local variable}
+% \changes{latex2e}{1993/12/13}{Removed optional argument of \cs{item}}
+% We use |\relax| to prevent |\item| from scanning too far.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\tabbing{\lineskip \z@skip\let\>\@rtab\let\<\@ltab\let\=\@settab
+ \let\+\@tabplus\let\-\@tabminus\let\`\@tabrj\let\'\@tablab
+ \let\\=\@tabcr
+ \@hightab\@firsttab
+ \global\@nxttabmar\@firsttab
+ \dimen\@firsttab\@totalleftmargin
+ \global\@tabpush\z@ \global\@rjfieldfalse
+ \trivlist \item\relax
+ \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1996/10/21}{Moved the \cs{indent} so that the
+% \cs{everypar} can remove it when necessary; this is needed because
+% the code for items in lists has changed (see pr/22111)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@tabfbox\hbox{%
+ \rlap{\hskip\@totalleftmargin\indent\the\everypar}}%
+ \def\@itemfudge{\box\@tabfbox}%
+ \@startline\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabbing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\endtabbing{%
+ \@stopline\ifnum\@tabpush >\z@ \@badpoptabs \fi\endtrivlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@rtab}
+% Omitted |\global| added to |\@rtab| 17 Jun 86
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@rtab{\@stopfield\@addfield\ifnum \@curtab<\@hightab
+ \global\advance\@curtab \@ne \else\@badtab\fi
+ \@tempdima\dimen\@curtab
+ \advance\@tempdima -\dimen\@curtabmar
+ \advance\@tempdima -\wd\@curline
+ \global\setbox\@curline\hbox{\unhbox\@curline\hskip\@tempdima}%
+ \@startfield\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@settab}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1995/10/23}{(CAR)Ensure that \cs{@hightab} increases
+% by at most one}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@settab{\@stopfield\@addfield
+ \ifnum \@curtab <\@maxtab
+ \ifnum\@curtab =\@hightab
+ \advance\@hightab \@ne
+ \fi
+ \global\advance\@curtab \@ne
+ \else
+ \@latex@error{Tab overflow}\@ehd
+ \fi
+ \dimen\@curtab \dimen\@curtabmar
+ \advance\dimen\@curtab \wd\@curline
+ \@startfield
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ltab}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@ltab{\@ifatmargin\ifnum\@curtabmar >\@firsttab
+ \global\advance\@curtab \m@ne \global\advance\@curtabmar\m@ne\else
+ \@badtab\fi\else
+ \@latex@error{\string\<\space in mid line}\@ehd\fi\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabplus}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@tabplus{%
+ \ifnum\@nxttabmar<\@hightab
+ \global\advance\@nxttabmar\@ne
+ \else
+ \@badtab
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabminus}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@tabminus{%
+ \ifnum\@nxttabmar>\@firsttab
+ \global\advance\@nxttabmar\m@ne
+ \else
+ \@badtab
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabrj}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@tabrj{%
+ \@stopfield\@addfield\global\@rjfieldtrue\@startfield\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tablab}
+% |\setbox\@curline| made |\global| in |\@tablab|. 17 Jun 86
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\@tablab{%
+ \@stopfield
+ \global\setbox\@curline\hbox{%
+ \box\@curline
+ \hskip-\wd\@curfield \hskip-\tabbingsep
+ \box\@curfield
+ \hskip\tabbingsep}%
+ \@startfield
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pushtabs}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\pushtabs{%
+ \@stopfield\@addfield\global\advance\@tabpush \@ne \begingroup
+ \@contfield}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\poptabs}
+% \changes{v1.1f}{1995/10/23}{(CAR)Ensure that \cs{@curtab} is never
+% larger than \cs{@hightab}}
+% It is, in some sense, an error if, after the endgroup, the current
+% tab setting is higher than the new value of |\@hightab| (which is
+% a local variable). That this is allowed is a fundamental design
+% flaw which is not going to be corrected now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\poptabs{\@stopfield\@addfield
+ \ifnum \@tabpush >\z@
+ \endgroup
+ \global\advance\@tabpush \m@ne
+ \ifnum \@curtab >\@hightab
+ \global \@curtab \@hightab
+ \@badtab
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \@badpoptabs
+ \fi
+ \@contfield}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|def>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabbingsep}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+\newdimen\tabbingsep
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabbing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*autoload>
+\def\tabbing{\@autoload{tabg}\tabbing}
+%</autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{array and tabular environments}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% ARRAY PARMETERS:
+% \arraycolsep
+% : half the width separating columns in an array environment
+% \tabcolsep
+% : half the width separating columns in a tabular environment
+% \arrayrulewidth
+% : width of rules
+% \doublerulesep
+% : space between adjacent rules in array or tabular
+% \arraystretch
+% : line spacing in array and tabular environments is done by
+% placing a strut in every row of height and depth
+% \arraystretch times the height and depth of the strut
+% produced by an ordinary \strut commmand.
+%
+% PREAMBLE:
+% The PREAMBLE argument of an array or tabular environment can
+% contain the following:
+% l,r,c : indicate where entry is to be placed.
+% | : for vertical rule
+% @{EXP} : inserts the text EXP in every column.
+% \arraycolsep or \tabcolsep spacing is suppressed.
+% *{N}{PRE} : equivalent to writing N copies of PRE in the preamble.
+% PRE may contain *{N'}{EXP'} expressions.
+% p{LEN} : makes entry in parbox of width LEN.
+%
+% SPECIAL ARRAY COMMANDS:
+% \multicolumn{N}{FORMAT}{ITEM} : replaces the next N column
+% items by ITEM, formatted according to FORMAT.
+% FORMAT should contain at most one l,r or c.
+% If it contains none, then ITEM is ignored.
+%
+% \vline : draws a vertical line the height of the current row. May
+% appear in an array element entry.
+% \hline : draws a horizontal line between rows. Must appear either
+% before the first entry (to appear above the first row) or
+% right after a \\ command. If followed by another \hline,
+% then adds a \vskip of \doublerulesep.
+%
+% \cline[i-j] : draws horizontal lines between rows covering columns
+% i through j, inclusive. Multiple commands may follow
+% one another to provide lines covering several disjoint
+% columns
+% \extracolsep{WIDTH} : for use inside an @ in the preamble. Causes
+% a WIDTH space to be added between columns for the rest
+% of the columns. This is in addition to the ordinary
+% intercolumn space.
+%
+% \array ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@acol == \@arrayacol
+% \@classz == \@arrayclassz
+% \@classiv == \@arrayclassiv
+% \\ == \@arraycr
+% \@halignto == NULL
+% \@tabarray
+% END
+%
+% \endarray{NAME} == BEGIN \crcr }} END
+%
+% \tabular ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@halignto == NULL
+% \@tabular
+% END
+%
+% \tabular*{WIDTH} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@halignto == to WIDTH
+% \@tabular
+% END
+%
+% \@tabular ==
+% BEGIN
+% \leavevmode
+% \hbox { $
+% \@acol == \@tabacol
+% \@classz == \@tabclassz
+% \@classiv == \@tabclassiv
+% \\ == \@tabularcr
+% \@tabarray
+% END
+%
+% \endtabular == BEGIN \crcr}} $} END
+%
+% \@tabarray == if next char = [ then \@array else \@array[c] fi
+%
+% \@array[POS]{PREAMBLE} ==
+% BEGIN
+% define \@arstrutbox to make \@arstrut produce strut of height
+% and depth \arraystretch times the height and
+% depth of a normal strut.
+% \@mkpream{PREAMBLE}
+% \@preamble == \halign \@halignto {\tabskip=0pt\@arstrut
+% eval{\@preamble}\tabskip = 0pt\cr %%}
+% \@startpbox == \@@startpbox
+% \@endpbox == \@@endpbox
+% if POS = t then \vtop
+% else if POS = b then \vbox
+% else \vcenter
+% fi fi
+% {
+% \par ==L {} % changed 92/09/18
+% \@sharp == #
+% \protect == \relax
+% \lineskip :=L 0pt
+% \baselineskip :=L 0pt
+% \@preamble
+% END
+%
+%
+% \@arraycr ==
+% BEGIN
+% $ %% Prevents extra space at end of row's last entry.
+% if next char = [
+% then \@argarraycr
+% else $ \cr %% Needed to balance $
+% END
+%
+% \@argarraycr[LENGTH] ==
+% BEGIN
+% $ %% Needed to balance $ of \@arraycr
+% if LENGTH > 0
+% then \@tempdima := depth of \@arstrutbox + LENGTH
+% \vrule height 0pt width 0pt depth \@tempdima
+% \cr
+% else \cr \noalign{\vskip LENGTH}
+% END
+%
+% \@tabularcr and \@argtabularcr same as \@arraycr and \@argarraycr
+% except without the extra $'s.
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\extracolsep}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\extracolsep#1{\tabskip #1\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\array}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\array{\let\@acol\@arrayacol \let\@classz\@arrayclassz
+ \let\@classiv\@arrayclassiv
+ \let\\\@arraycr\let\@halignto\@empty\@tabarray}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular*}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endarray{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
+\def\endtabular{\crcr\egroup\egroup $\egroup}
+\expandafter \let \csname endtabular*\endcsname = \endtabular
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabular}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tabular{\let\@halignto\@empty\@tabular}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabular*}
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1998/05/18}{Use \cs{setlength}, so that
+% calc extensions apply.}
+% Note that the change to use |\setlength| slightly alters the
+% timing of the expansion and use of the length in |#1| but this is
+% very unlikely to have any practical effect.
+% \changes{latex2e}{1993/08/05}{Replaced \cs{expandafter}\cs{def}
+% by \cs{@namedef}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{tabular*}#1{%
+ \setlength\dimen@{#1}%
+ \edef\@halignto{to\the\dimen@}\@tabular}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabular}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabular{\leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\let\@acol\@tabacol
+ \let\@classz\@tabclassz
+ \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv \let\\\@tabularcr\@tabarray}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabarray}
+% RmS 91/11/04 added |\m@th|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabarray{\m@th\@ifnextchar[\@array{\@array[c]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% RmS 1993/11/03 changed |\halign| to |\ialign| and removed superfluous
+% |\tabskip| assignment
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1996/10/21}{Moved the code associated with
+% \cs{@mkpream} into the group provided by the box, for robustness
+% (latex/2183)}
+% \begin{macro}{\@array}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@array[#1]#2{%
+ \if #1t\vtop \else \if#1b\vbox \else \vcenter \fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/09/18}
+% {Changed \cs{par} to \cs{@empty} to avoid starting new row
+% e.g. after \cs{hline}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This next bit of code sets up the strut and then builds the halign
+% and its preamble according to the specification in the second
+% argument.
+%
+% This code has been moved inside the box.
+% A side effect of this has been to expose what was a buglet in the
+% previous version: since the |\@arstrut| below is expanded and
+% contains an |\ifmmode| then it could produce an unnecessary extra
+% box in every row, thus wasting `lots of' main memory.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{%
+ \vrule \@height\arraystretch\ht\strutbox
+ \@depth\arraystretch \dp\strutbox
+ \@width\z@}%
+ \@mkpream{#2}%
+ \edef\@preamble{%
+ \ialign \noexpand\@halignto
+ \bgroup \@arstrut \@preamble \tabskip\z@skip \cr}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% That is the end of setting up the preamble; now we reset
+% things before executing the halign built-up in |\@preamble|.
+% The restorations could be done by introducing an extra group,
+% thus saving tokens.
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/12/08}{Add \cs{tabularnewline}}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1996/10/21}{Use \cs{set@typeset@protect}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\@startpbox\@@startpbox \let\@endpbox\@@endpbox
+ \let\tabularnewline\\%
+ \let\par\@empty
+ \let\@sharp##%
+ \set@typeset@protect
+ \lineskip\z@skip\baselineskip\z@skip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the parsing of the preamble goes wrong there my be some
+% characters left which \TeX{} then tries to typeset, i.e., we
+% would be in horizontal mode. That would produce an endless loop
+% because the |\halign| expects vertical mode thus issues a |\par|
+% but that is a no-op at this point. So we better test this case
+% issue some error message and make a crude recovery by ending that
+% horizontal mode with force.
+% A better fix would be to ensure that we never pick up more than a
+% single character token (not done).
+% \changes{v1.1m}{1998/11/13}{Check for hmode to see if something
+% went wrong during parsing (pr/2884)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifhmode \@preamerr\z@ \@@par\fi
+ \@preamble}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arraycr}
+% Array version of |\\|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arraycr{%
+ ${\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar\@xarraycr\@xarraycr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arraycr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xarraycr{\@ifnextchar[\@argarraycr{\ifnum0=`{\fi}${}\cr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@argarraycr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@argarraycr[#1]{%
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi}${}\ifdim #1>\z@ \@xargarraycr{#1}\else
+ \@yargarraycr{#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabularnewline}
+% \changes{v1.0i}{1994/11/14}{(DPC) Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{1994/12/08}{(DPC) Made it \cs{relax}}
+% Tabular version of |\\|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\tabularnewline\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabularcr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabularcr{%
+ {\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar\@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtabularcr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xtabularcr{\@ifnextchar[\@argtabularcr{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@argtabularcr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@argtabularcr[#1]{%
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+ \ifdim #1>\z@
+ \unskip\@xargarraycr{#1}%
+ \else
+ \@yargarraycr{#1}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xargarraycr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xargarraycr#1{\@tempdima #1\advance\@tempdima \dp \@arstrutbox
+ \vrule \@height\z@ \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@ \cr}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@yargarraycr}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@yargarraycr#1{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multicolumn}
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \multicolumn{NUMBER}{FORMAT}{ITEM} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \multispan{NUMBER}
+% \begingroup
+% \@addamp == null
+% \@mkpream{FORMAT}
+% \@sharp == ITEM
+% \protect == \relax
+% \@startpbox == \@@startpbox
+% \@endpbox == \@@endpbox
+% \@arstrut
+% \@preamble
+% \endgroup
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% The command |\def\@addamp{}| was removed from |\multicolumn| on
+% 6 Dec 86 because it caused embedded array environments not to work. I
+% think that it was included originally to prevent an error message if
+% the 2nd argument to the |\multicolumn| command had two column
+% specifiers.
+%
+% 8 Feb 89 --- |\hbox{}| added after |\@preamble| to correct bug that
+% occurred if |\multicolumn| preceded |\\[D]| with |D > 0|,
+% caused by |\\[]| command doing an |\unskip|, which removed
+% |\tabcolsep| glue inserted by |\multicolumn|.
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/11/04}{(ASAJ) added \cs{set@typeset@protect}.}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1996/10/21}{Make \cs{multicolumn} long (latex/2180)}
+% This has been made long so that, for example, a |p|-column can
+% contain multiple paragraphs; maybe the arguments of |@|-expressions
+% should also be able to contain multiple paragraphs.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\multicolumn#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}\begingroup
+ \@mkpream{#2}%
+ \def\@sharp{#3}\set@typeset@protect
+ \let\@startpbox\@@startpbox\let\@endpbox\@@endpbox
+ \@arstrut \@preamble\hbox{}\endgroup\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% Codes for classes and character numbers of array, tabular and
+% multicolumn arguments.
+%
+% Character Class Number
+% --------- ----- ------
+% c 0 0
+% l 0 1
+% r 0 2
+%
+% | 1 -
+% @ 2 -
+% p 3 -
+% {@-exp} 4 -
+% {p-arg} 5 -
+%
+% \@testpach \foo : expands \foo, which should be an array parameter
+% token, and sets \@chclass and \@chnum to its class and
+% number. Uses \@lastchclass to distinguish 4 and 5
+%
+% Preamble error codes
+% 0: 'illegal character'
+% 1: 'Missing @-exp'
+% 2: 'Missing p-arg'
+%
+% \@addamp ==
+% BEGIN if @firstamp = true then @firstamp := false
+% else & fi
+% END
+%
+% \@mkpream TOKENLIST ==
+% BEGIN
+% @firstamp := T
+% \@lastchclass := 6
+% \@preamble == null
+% \@sharp == \relax
+% \protect == BEGIN \noexpand\protect\noexpand END
+% \@startpbox == \relax
+% \@endpbox == \relax
+% \@expast{TOKENLIST}
+% for \@nextchar := expand(\reserved@a)
+% do \@testpach{\@nextchar}
+% case of \@chclass
+% 0 -> \@classz
+% 1 -> \@classi
+% ...
+% 5 -> \@classv
+% end case
+% \@lastchclass := \@chclass
+% od
+% case of \@lastchclass
+% 0 -> \hskip \arraycolsep % lrc
+% 1 -> % |
+% 2 -> \@preamerr1 % 'Missing @-exp' % @
+% 3 -> \@preamerr2 % 'Missing p-arg' % p
+% 4 -> % @-exp
+% 5 -> \hskip \arraycolsep % p-exp
+% end case
+% END
+%
+% \@arrayclassz ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@preamble := \@preamble *
+% case of \@lastchclass
+% 0 -> \hskip \arraycolsep \@addamp \hskip \arraycolsep
+% 1 -> \@addamp \hskip \arraycolsep
+% 2 -> % impossible
+% 3 -> % impossible
+% 4 -> \@addamp
+% 5 -> \hskip \arraycolsep \@addamp \hskip \arraycolsep
+% 6 -> \@addamp \hskip \arraycolsep
+% end case
+% * case of \@chnum
+% 0 -> \hfil$\relax\@sharp$\hfil
+% 1 -> $\relax\@sharp$\hfil
+% 2 -> \hfil$\relax\@sharp$
+% end case
+% END
+%
+% \@tabclassz == similar to \@arrayclassz
+%
+% \@classi ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@preamble := \@preamble *
+% case of \@lastchclass
+% 0 -> \hskip \arraycolsep \@arrayrule
+% 1 -> \hskip \doublerulesep \@arrayrule
+% 2 -> % impossible
+% 3 -> % impossible
+% 4 -> \@arrayrule
+% 5 -> \hskip \arraycolsep \@arrayrule
+% 6 -> \@arrayrule
+% end case
+% END
+%
+% \@classii ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@preamble := \@preamble *
+% case of \@lastchclass
+% 0 ->
+% 1 -> \hskip .5\arrayrulewidth
+% 2 -> % impossible
+% else ->
+% end case
+% END
+%
+% \@classiii ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@preamble := \@preamble *
+% case of \@lastchclass
+% 0 -> \hskip \arraycolsep \@addamp \hskip \arraycolsep
+% 1 -> \@addamp \hskip \arraycolsep
+% 2 -> % impossible
+% 3 -> % impossible
+% 4 -> \@addamp
+% 5 -> \hskip \arraycolsep \@addamp \hskip \arraycolsep
+% 6 -> \@addamp \hskip \arraycolsep
+% end case
+% END
+%
+% \@arrayclassiv ==
+% BEGIN \@preamble := \@preamble * $ \@nextchar$ END
+%
+% \@tabclassiv == same as \@arrayclassv except without the $ ... $
+%
+% \@classv ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@preamble :=
+% \@preamble * \@startpbox{\@nextchar}\ignorespaces\@sharp
+% \@endpbox
+% END
+%
+% \@expast{S}:
+% Sets \reserved@a := S with all instances of *{N}{STRING}
+% replaced by N copies of STRING, where N > 0. An *
+% appearing inside braces is ignored, but *-expressions
+% inside STRING are expanded, so nested *-expressions are
+% handled properly.
+%
+% \@expast{S} == BEGIN \@xexpast S *0x\@@ END
+%
+% \@xexpast S1 *{N}{S2} S3 \@@ ==
+% BEGIN
+% \reserved@a := S1
+% \@tempcnta := N
+% if \@tempcnta > 0
+% then while \@tempcnta > 0 do \reserved@a := \reserved@a S2
+% \@tempcnta := \@tempcnta - 1 od
+% \reserved@b == \@xexpast
+% else \reserved@b == \@xexnoop
+% fi
+% \expandafter \reserved@b \reserved@a S3 \@@
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xexnoop}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xexnoop #1\@@{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@expast}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@expast#1{\@xexpast #1*0x\@@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xexpast}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xexpast#1*#2#3#4\@@{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{#1}%
+ \@tempcnta#2\relax
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@
+ \@whilenum\@tempcnta>\z@\do
+ {\edef\reserved@a{\reserved@a#3}\advance\@tempcnta \m@ne}%
+ \let\reserved@b\@xexpast
+ \else
+ \let\reserved@b\@xexnoop
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\reserved@b\reserved@a #4\@@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstamp}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addamp}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@firstamp
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addamp{%
+ \if@firstamp
+ \@firstampfalse
+ \else
+ \edef\@preamble{\@preamble &}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayacol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabacol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ampacol}
+% \begin{macro}{\@acolampacol}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayacol{\edef\@preamble{\@preamble \hskip \arraycolsep}}
+\def\@tabacol{\edef\@preamble{\@preamble \hskip \tabcolsep}}
+\def\@ampacol{\@addamp \@acol}
+\def\@acolampacol{\@acol\@addamp\@acol}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkpream}
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/11/04}{(ASAJ) Added \cs{@unexpandable@protect}
+% to \cs{@mkpream}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mkpream#1{\@firstamptrue\@lastchclass6
+ \let\@preamble\@empty
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \let\@sharp\relax
+ \let\@startpbox\relax\let\@endpbox\relax
+ \@expast{#1}%
+ \expandafter\@tfor \expandafter
+ \@nextchar \expandafter:\expandafter=\reserved@a\do
+ {\@testpach\@nextchar
+ \ifcase \@chclass \@classz \or \@classi \or \@classii \or \@classiii
+ \or \@classiv \or\@classv \fi\@lastchclass\@chclass}%
+ \ifcase \@lastchclass \@acol
+ \or \or \@preamerr \@ne\or \@preamerr \tw@\or \or \@acol \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayclassz}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayclassz{\ifcase \@lastchclass \@acolampacol \or \@ampacol \or
+ \or \or \@addamp \or
+ \@acolampacol \or \@firstampfalse \@acol \fi
+\edef\@preamble{\@preamble
+ \ifcase \@chnum
+ \hfil$\relax\@sharp$\hfil \or $\relax\@sharp$\hfil
+ \or \hfil$\relax\@sharp$\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabclassz}
+% RmS 91/08/14 inserted extra braces around entry for NFSS
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabclassz{%
+ \ifcase\@lastchclass
+ \@acolampacol
+ \or
+ \@ampacol
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or
+ \@addamp
+ \or
+ \@acolampacol
+ \or
+ \@firstampfalse\@acol
+ \fi
+ \edef\@preamble{%
+ \@preamble{%
+ \ifcase\@chnum
+ \hfil\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\hfil
+ \or
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1996/04/22}
+% {(DPC) Extra \cs{hskip} keeps tabcolsep in empty columns
+% internal/2122}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1996/06/14}
+% {(DPC) Change both\cs{z@skip} to 1sp for latex/2160}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \hskip1sp\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip\hfil
+ \or
+ \hfil\hskip1sp\ignorespaces\@sharp\unskip
+ \fi}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classi}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classi{%
+ \ifcase\@lastchclass
+ \@acol\@arrayrule
+ \or
+ \@addtopreamble{\hskip \doublerulesep}\@arrayrule
+ \or
+ \or
+ \or
+ \@arrayrule
+ \or
+ \@acol\@arrayrule
+ \or
+ \@arrayrule
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classii}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classii{%
+ \ifcase\@lastchclass
+ \or
+ \@addtopreamble{\hskip .5\arrayrulewidth}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classiii}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classiii{\ifcase \@lastchclass \@acolampacol \or
+ \@addamp\@acol \or
+ \or \or \@addamp \or
+ \@acolampacol \or \@ampacol \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabclassiv}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabclassiv{\@addtopreamble\@nextchar}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayclassiv}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayclassiv{\@addtopreamble{$\@nextchar$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@classv}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@classv{\@addtopreamble{\@startpbox{\@nextchar}\ignorespaces
+\@sharp\@endpbox}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtopreamble}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtopreamble#1{\edef\@preamble{\@preamble #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@chclass}
+% \begin{macro}{\@lastchclass}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chnum}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\@chclass
+\newcount\@lastchclass
+\newcount\@chnum
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arraycolsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabcolsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulewidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesep}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\arraycolsep
+\newdimen\tabcolsep
+\newdimen\arrayrulewidth
+\newdimen\doublerulesep
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arraystretch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\arraystretch{1} % Default value.
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arstrutbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\@arstrut}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\@arstrutbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arstrut{%
+ \relax\ifmmode\copy\@arstrutbox\else\unhcopy\@arstrutbox\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayrule}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayrule{\@addtopreamble{\hskip -.5\arrayrulewidth
+ \vrule \@width \arrayrulewidth\hskip -.5\arrayrulewidth}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@testpatch}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@testpach#1{\@chclass \ifnum \@lastchclass=\tw@ 4 \else
+ \ifnum \@lastchclass=3 5 \else
+ \z@ \if #1c\@chnum \z@ \else
+ \if #1l\@chnum \@ne \else
+ \if #1r\@chnum \tw@ \else
+ \@chclass \if #1|\@ne \else
+ \if #1@\tw@ \else
+ \if #1p3 \else \z@ \@preamerr 0\fi
+ \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi \fi
+\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hline{%
+ \noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\hrule \@height \arrayrulewidth \futurelet
+ \reserved@a\@xhline}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xhline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xhline{\ifx\reserved@a\hline
+ \vskip\doublerulesep
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Measure from the middle of the rules.
+% \changes{latex2e}{1993/12/16}{Measure from middle of vertical rules}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \vskip-\arrayrulewidth
+ \fi
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vline}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\vline{\vrule \@width \arrayrulewidth}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cline}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1995/09/14}
+% {(DPC) New implementation}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cline}
+% The old \LaTeX2.09 implementation of |\cline| used up quite
+% a lot of memory and two precious count registers.
+% This new (1995/09/14) implementation does not use any count registers.
+% It is coded in a way that depends heavily on the definition of
+% |\multispan| so that command has been moved here from the file
+% |ltplain.dtx|.
+%
+% These counters are no longer declared.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \newcount\@cla
+% \newcount\@clb
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cline#1{\@cline#1\@nil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1995/10/17}
+% {(DPC) Use \cs{@multicnt}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cline#1-#2\@nil{%
+ \omit
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Use the counter from |\multispan|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@multicnt#1%
+ \advance\@multispan\m@ne
+ \ifnum\@multicnt=\@ne\@firstofone{&\omit}\fi
+ \@multicnt#2%
+ \advance\@multicnt-#1%
+ \advance\@multispan\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The original had |\unskip| at this point,
+% but how could a skip get here ???
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \leaders\hrule\@height\arrayrulewidth\hfill
+ \cr
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This is back spacing is fairly horrible,
+% but it is what happened in the old version\ldots\
+% An alternative would be to make |\cline| look ahead for a following
+% |\cline| as does |\hline|. This would alter the spacing in existing
+% documents so keep the old version in the kernel. Perhaps a package
+% should do this differently.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \noalign{\vskip-\arrayrulewidth}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mscount}
+% The |\mscount| counter is no longer declared, saving a csname and a
+% register. It is declared in compatibility mode.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\multispan}
+% \begin{macro}{\@multispan}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1995/10/17}
+% {(DPC) Macro added.}
+% \begin{macro}{\sp@n}
+% Modify |\multispan| slightly from its plain \TeX\ definition
+% to allow more efficient code sharing with |\multicolumn|.
+% Also share a count register with |\multiput|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\multispan{\omit\@multispan}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@multispan#1{%
+ \@multicnt#1\relax
+ \loop\ifnum\@multicnt>\@ne \sp@n\repeat}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sp@n{\span\omit\advance\@multicnt\m@ne}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startpbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endpbox}
+% Helper macros for `p' columns.
+%
+% |\@startpbox|\marg{width} \emph{text} |\egroup| is essentially
+% |\parbox|\marg{width}\marg{text}
+%
+% |\@endpbox| is essentially |\unskip \strut \par \egroup\hfil|
+% (Changed 14 Jan 89) (changed again 1994/05/13)
+%
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/03}
+% {Use \cs{@finalstrut} based on depth of \cs{@arstrutbox}}
+
+% \changes{v1.1j}{1998/05/18}{Use \cs{setlength} to set \cs{hsize},
+% so that the changes in the calc package apply here.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startpbox#1{\vtop\bgroup \setlength\hsize{#1}\@arrayparboxrestore}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@endpbox{\@finalstrut\@arstrutbox\par\egroup\hfil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% 14 Jan 89: Def of |\@endpbox| changed from\\
+% |\def\@endpbox{\par\vskip\dp\@arstrutbox\egroup\hfil}|\\
+% so vertical spacing works out right if the last line of a `p' entry
+% has a descender.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@startpbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@endpbox}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@startpbox=\@startpbox
+\let\@@endpbox=\@endpbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel|autoload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5290fea8bd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltthm.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltthm.dtx
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltthm.dtx}
+ [1995/10/10 v1.0f LaTeX Kernel (Theorems)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltthm.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{115}
+%
+% \section{Theorem Environments}
+%
+%
+% The user creates his own theorem-like environments with the command\\
+% |\newtheorem|\marg{name}\marg{text}\oarg{counter} or\\
+% |\newtheorem|\marg{name}\oarg{oldname}\marg{text}\\
+% This defines the environment \meta{name} to be just as one would
+% expect a theorem environment to be, except that it prints \meta{text}
+% instead of ``Theorem''.
+%
+% If \meta{oldname} is given, then environments \meta{name} and
+% \meta{oldname} use the same counter, so using a \meta{name}
+% environment advances the number of the next \meta{name} environment,
+% and vice-versa.
+%
+% If \meta{counter} is given, then environment \meta{name} is numbered
+% within \meta{counter}.
+%
+% E.g., if \meta{counter} = |subsection|, then the first \meta{name} in
+% subsection 7.2 is numbered \meta{text} 7.2.1.
+%
+% The way \meta{name} environments are numbered can be changed by
+% redefining |\the|\meta{name}.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/28}{Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/05/25}{Modify documentation}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1995/10/10}{Make \cs{newtheorem} `only preamble'}
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1995/10/16}
+% {Revert to previous \cs{newtheorem} behaviour}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+%
+% DOCUMENT STYLE PARAMETERS
+%
+% \@thmcounter{COUNTER} : A command such that
+% \edef\theCOUNTER{\@thmcounter{COUNTER}}
+% defines \theCOUNTER to produce a number for a theorem environment.
+% The default is:
+% BEGIN \noexpand\arabic{COUNTER} END
+%
+% \@thmcountersep : A separator placed between a theorem number and
+% the number of the counter within which it is numbered.
+% E.g., to make the third theorem of section 7.2 be numbered
+% 7.2-3, \@thmcountersep should be \def'ed to '-'. Its
+% default is '.'.
+%
+% \@begintheorem{NAME}{NUMBER} : A command that begins a theorem
+% environment for a 'theorem' named 'NAME NUMBER' --
+% e.g., \@begintheorem{Lemma}{3.7} starts Lemma 3.7.
+%
+% \@opargbegintheorem{NAME}{NUMBER}{OPARG} :
+% A command that begins a theorem
+% environment for a 'theorem' named 'NAME NUMBER' with optional
+% argument OPARG -- e.g., \@begintheorem{Lemma}{3.7}{Jones}
+% starts `Lemma 3.7 (Jones):'.
+%
+% \@endtheorem : A command that ends a theorem environment.
+%
+% \newtheorem{NAME}{TEXT}[COUNTER] ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \NAME is definable
+% then \@definecounter{NAME}
+% if COUNTER present
+% then \@newctr{NAME}[COUNTER] fi
+% \theNAME == BEGIN \theCOUNTER \@thmcountersep
+% eval\@thmcounter{NAME} END
+% else \theNAME == BEGIN eval\@thmcounter{NAME} END
+% \NAME == \@thm{NAME}{TEXT}
+% \endNAME == \@endtheorem
+% else error
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \newtheorem{NAME}[OLDNAME]{TEXT}==
+% BEGIN
+% if counter OLDNAME nonexistant
+% then ERROR
+% else
+% if \NAME is definable
+% then BEGIN
+% \theNAME == \theOLDNAME
+% \NAME == \@thm{OLDNAME}{TEXT}
+% \endNAME == \@endtheorem
+% END
+% else error
+% fi
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@thm{NAME}{TEXT} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \refstepcounter{NAME}
+% if next char = [
+% then \@ythm{NAME}{TEXT}
+% else \@xthm{NAME}{TEXT}
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \@xthm{NAME}{TEXT} ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@begintheorem{TEXT}{\theNAME}
+% \ignorespaces
+% END
+%
+% \@ythm{NAME}{TEXT}[OPARG] ==
+% BEGIN
+% \@opargbegintheorem{TEXT}{\theNAME}{OPARG}
+% \ignorespaces
+% END
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newtheorem}
+% |\newtheorem| ought really be allowed only in the preamble
+% Which would be good document style, and allow some main memory to be
+% saved by declaring these commands to be
+% |\@onlypreamble|. Unfortunately the \LaTeX\ book indicates that
+% |\newtheorem| may be used anywhere in the document\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\def\newtheorem#1{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@othm{#1}}{\@nthm{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nthm}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@nthm#1#2{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@xnthm{#1}{#2}}{\@ynthm{#1}{#2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xnthm}
+%
+% 92/09/18 RmS: Changed |\@addtoreset| to |\@newctr| to produce error
+% message if counter |#3| does not exist (to be
+% consistent with behaviour of |\newcounter|)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
+ \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+ {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
+ \@thmcounter{#1}}%
+ \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
+ \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ynthm}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ynthm#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+ {\@definecounter{#1}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@thmcounter{#1}}%
+ \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
+ \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@othm}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/01/10}
+% {(RmS) Check for existence of theorem environment}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1992/08/19}
+% {(RmS) Changed error message to complain about undefined
+% counter}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/04/09}{Use standard counter error message (FMi)}
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/04/17}{Use new std counter error message (FMi)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@othm#1[#2]#3{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\@nocounterr{#2}}%
+ {\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+ {\global\@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}}%
+ \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#2}{#3}}%
+ \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@thm}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@thm#1#2{%
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@ythm{#1}{#2}}{\@xthm{#1}{#2}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xthm}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ythm}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xthm#1#2{%
+ \@begintheorem{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}\ignorespaces}
+\def\@ythm#1#2[#3]{%
+ \@opargbegintheorem{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}{#3}\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Default values
+% \begin{macro}{\@thmcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@thmcountersep}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}}
+\def\@thmcountersep{.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@begintheorem}
+% \begin{macro}{\@opargbegintheorem}
+% \begin{macro}{\@endtheorem}
+% \changes{LaTeX2.09}{1991/08/14}
+% {Moved \cs{itshape} after \cs{item} to make it work with
+% NFSS}
+% Providing theorem defaults.
+% \task{???}{add `reset@font?}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist
+ \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2}]\itshape}
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist
+ \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\ (#3)}]\itshape}
+\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d4ad7af5f8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltvers.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltvers.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltvers.dtx}
+ [2004/01/28 v1.0k LaTeX Kernel (Version Info)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltvers.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{48}
+%
+% \section{Version Identification}
+% First we identify the date and version number of this release of
+% \LaTeX, and set |\everyjob| so that it is printed at the start of
+% every \LaTeX\ run.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0g}{1996/11/28}
+% {Check for old format modified /2319}
+% \changes{v1.0f}{1996/11/20}
+% {Check for old format modified /2319}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1995/05/12}
+% {Add autoload docstrip guards}
+% \changes{v1.0e}{1995/05/12}
+% {Check for format older than 1 year}
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1994/05/25}
+% {Remove PRELIMINARY TEST RELEASE from startup banner
+% (spring is here)}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1994/04/12}
+% {Have version info generated automatically.}
+% \changes{v1.0a}{1994/03/04}
+% {Initial version, split from latex.dtx}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fmtname}
+% \begin{macro}{\fmtversion}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\def\fmtname{LaTeX2e}
+\edef\fmtversion{2003/12/01}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Check that the format being made is not too old.
+% The error message complains about `more than 5 years'
+% but in fact the error is not triggered until 65 months.
+%
+% This code is currently not activated as we don't know if we already
+% got to the last official 2e version (due to staff shortage or due to
+% a successor (think positive:-)).
+% \changes{v1.0i}{2001/06/04}{Check for old format disabled}
+% \changes{v1.0k}{2004/01/28}{Check for old format made 5 years (pr/3601)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\iftrue
+\def\reserved@a#1/#2/#3\@nil{%
+ \count@\year
+ \advance\count@-#1\relax
+ \multiply\count@ by 12\relax
+ \advance\count@\month
+ \advance\count@-#2\relax}
+\expandafter\reserved@a\fmtversion\@nil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\count@| is now the age of this file in months. Take a generous
+% definition of `year' so this message is not generated too often.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum\count@>65
+ \typeout{^^J%
+!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J%
+! You are attempting to make a LaTeX format from a source file^^J%
+! That is more than five years old.^^J%
+!^^J%
+! If you enter <return> to scroll past this message then the format^^J%
+! will be built, but please consider obtaining newer source files^^J%
+! before continuing to build LaTeX.^^J%
+!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!^^J%
+}
+ \errhelp{To avoid this error message, obtain new LaTeX sources.}
+ \errmessage{LaTeX source files more than 5 years old!}
+\fi
+\let\reserved@a\relax
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This startup banner may be further modified by the code in
+% |ltfinal.dtx| if a patch file is present.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\everyjob{\typeout{\fmtname
+%<autoload>\space(autoload version)%
+ \space<\fmtversion>}}
+\immediate\write16{\fmtname
+%<autoload>\space(autoload version)%
+ \space<\fmtversion>}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..80390a76fcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxdoc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,518 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%
+%<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<class>\ProvidesClass{ltxdoc}
+%<class> [1999/08/08 v2.0u Standard LaTeX documentation class]
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltxdoc.cls}
+\providecommand\dst{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+\title{The file \texttt{ltxdoc.dtx} for use with
+ \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
+ number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}\\[2pt]
+ It contains the code for \texttt{ltxdoc.cls}}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{David Carlisle}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{ltxdoc.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{415}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0i}{1994/04/29}{Update the documentation.}
+% \changes{v2.0s}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \section{Documentation of the \LaTeX\ sources}
+%
+% This class file is designed for documenting the \LaTeX\ source files.
+% You may however find it generally useful as a class for typesetting
+% the documentation of files produced in `doc' format.
+%
+% Each documented file in the standard distribution comes with extension
+% |dtx|. The appropriate class package or initex file will be extracted
+% from the source by the docstrip system. Each |dtx| file may be
+% directly processed with \LaTeXe, for example
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% latex2e docclass.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+% would produce the documentation of the Class and package interface.
+%
+% Each file that is used in producing the \LaTeXe\ format (ie not
+% including the standard class and packages) will be printed together in
+% one document if you \LaTeX\ the file |sources2e.tex|. This has the
+% advantage that one can produce a full index of macro usage across all
+% the source files.
+%
+% If you need to customise the typesetting of any of these files, there
+% are two options:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item You can use \dst\ with the module `driver' to extract a small
+% \LaTeX\ file that you may edit to use whatever class or package
+% options you require, before inputting the source file.
+% \item You can create a file |ltxdoc.cfg|. This configuration file will
+% be read whenever the |ltxdoc| class is used, and so can be used to
+% customise the typesetting of all the source files, without having to
+% edit lots of small driver files.
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+% The second option is usually more convenient. Various possibilities
+% are discussed in the next section.
+%
+% \section{Customisation}
+%
+% The simplest form of customisation is to pass more options to the
+% |article| class which is loaded by |ltxdoc|. For instance if you wish
+% all the documentation to be formated for A4 paper, add the following
+% line to |ltxdoc.cfg|:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% All the source files are in two parts, separated by |\StopEventually|.
+% The first part (should) contain `user' documentation. The second part
+% is a full documented listing of the source code. The |doc| package
+% provides the command |\OnlyDescription| which suppresses the code
+% listings. This may also be used in the configuration file, but as the
+% |doc| package is read later, you must delay the execution of
+% |\OnlyDescription| until after the |doc| package has been read. The
+% simplest way is to use |\AtBeginDocument|. Thus you could put the
+% following in your |ltxdoc.cfg|.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% If the full source listing |sources2e.tex| is processed, then an index
+% and change history are produced by default, however indices are not
+% normally produced for individual files.
+%
+% As an example, consider |ltclass.dtx|, which contains the sources for
+% the new class and package interface commands. With no |cfg|
+% file, a 19~page document is produced. With the above configuration
+% a slightly more readable document (4~pages) is produced.
+%
+% Conversely, if you really want to read the source listings in detail,
+% you will want to have an index. Again the index commands provided by
+% the doc package may be used, but their execution must be delayed.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs}
+% \AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% The |doc| package writes index files to be sorted using MakeIndex with
+% the |gind| style, so one would then use a command such as
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltclass.idx
+%\end{verbatim}
+% and re-run \LaTeX.
+%
+% Similarly to print a Change history, you would add
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \AtBeginDocument{\RecordChanges}
+% \AtEndDocument{\PrintChanges}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% to |ltxdoc.cfg|, and use MakeIndex with a comand such as
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltclass.gls ltclass.glo
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Finally if you do not want to list all the sections of |source2e.tex|,
+% you can use |\includeonly| in the |cfg| file:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \includeonly{ltvers,ltboxes}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \section{Options}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+\DeclareOption{a5paper}{\@latexerr{Option not supported}%
+ {}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption*{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass {\CurrentOption}{article}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Configuration}
+% Input a local configuration file, if it exists.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{ltxdoc.cfg}
+ {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+ * Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used^^J%
+ *************************************}}
+ {}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Option Processing}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Loading article and doc}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\LoadClass{article}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{doc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Make \verb+|+ be a `short verb' character, but not in the document
+% preamble, where an active character may interfere with packages that
+% are loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\MakeShortVerb{\|}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% As `doc' documents tend to have a lot of monospaced material,
+% Set up some |tt| substitutions to occur silently.
+% \changes{v2.0p}{1995/11/02}{Add font substitutions}
+% \changes{v2.0t}{1999/04/17}{Replaced octal number, CAR}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmtt}{\skewchar\font 48} % '60
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{m}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This substitution is in the standard fd file, but not silent.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\CodelineNumbered
+\DisableCrossrefs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Increase the text width slightly so that width the standard fonts
+% 72 columns of code may appear in a |macrocode| environment.
+% \changes{v2.0c}{1994/03/15}{Set \cs{textwidth}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\textwidth}{355pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Increase the marginpar width slightly, for long command names.
+% And increase the left margin by a similar amount
+% \changes{v2.0l}
+% {1994/05/25}{Increase \cs{marginparwidth}}
+% \changes{v2.0q}{1995/11/28}
+% {Increase \cs{marginparwidth} and page margin.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\addtolength\marginparwidth{30pt}
+\addtolength\oddsidemargin{20pt}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{20pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Useful abbreviations}
+%
+% |\cmd{\foo}| Prints |\foo| verbatim. It may be used inside moving
+% arguments. |\cs{foo}| also prints |\foo|, for those who prefer that
+% syntax. (This second form may even be used when |\foo| is |\outer|).
+% \begin{macro}{\cmd}
+% \changes{v2.0k}{1994/05/21}{New definition, so \cmd\{ works.}
+% \begin{macro}{\cs}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1994/03/17}{Add \cs{cs}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
+\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0r}{1996/01/11}{Removed \cs{star} since useless pr/2039}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marg}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1994/03/17}{Add \cs{marg}}
+% |\marg{text}| prints \marg{text}, `mandatory argument'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\marg[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\oarg}
+% |\oarg{text}| prints \oarg{text}, `optional argument'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\oarg[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parg}
+% |\parg{te,xt}| prints \parg{te,xt}, `picture mode argument'.
+% \changes{v2.0h}{1994/04/28}{Add \cs{parg}}
+% \changes{v2.0o}{1995/08/09}{Use \cs{meta} when showing arguments}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\parg[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily)}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \section{Old Comments}
+%
+% The \LaTeXe\ sources contain a lot of code inherited from
+% \LaTeX2.09. The comments in this code were not designed to be
+% typeset, and do not contain the necessary \LaTeX\ markup. The
+% \texttt{oldcomments} environment typesets these comments,
+% automatically sensing when any control sequence appears, and
+% implicitly adding the |\verb|. This procedure does not produce
+% particularly beautiful pages, but it allows us to fully document new
+% sections, and have some form of typeset comments on all the old
+% code.
+% \changes{v2.0e}{1994/03/18}{Use a fixed font.}
+%
+% Scan control names and put them in tt.
+% will actually (incorrectly) scan past |\\| but this does not matter as
+% this is almost never followed by a letter in practice.
+% (ie |\\foo|) would put |foo| in |\ttfamily|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oc@scan#1{%
+ \ifx\oc@bslash#1%
+ \egroup\let\next\oc@bslash\else
+ \ifcat a\noexpand#1%
+ #1\let\next\oc@scan\else
+ \ifx\oc@percent#1%
+ \def\next{\char`\%\egroup}%
+ \else
+ #1\let\next\egroup
+ \fi\fi\fi\next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oc@bslash{\bgroup\oc@ttf\char`\\\oc@scan}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oc@verb#1{%
+ \catcode`#1\active
+ \uccode`\~`#1%
+ \uppercase{\def~{{\oc@ttf\char`#1}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \obeyspaces%
+ \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\
+ /catcode`/\/active
+ /catcode`<=/catcode`{%
+ /catcode`>=/catcode`}%
+ /catcode`/{/active%
+ /catcode`/}/active%
+ /gdef/oldc< \end{oldcomments}>%
+ /gdef/begmac< \begin{macrocode}>%
+ /gdef/obs</def <</oc@ttf/ >>>%
+/endgroup%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\
+ \catcode`\\=13
+ /catcode`/|=/catcode`/%
+ /catcode`/%=13
+ /gdef/oldcomments{|
+ /makeatletter
+ /let/do/oc@verb/dospecials
+ /frenchspacing/@vobeyspaces/obs
+ /raggedright
+ /oc@verb/>|
+ /oc@verb/<|
+ /let\/oc@bslash
+ /let%/oc@percent
+ /obeylines
+ /parindent/z@
+ /ttfamily/expandafter/let/expandafter/oc@ttf/the/font
+ /rmfamily
+ /hfuzz/maxdimen
+ }
+/endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \sloppy%
+ \obeylines%
+ \gdef\oc@percent#1^^M{%
+ \ifvmode%
+ \def\commentline{#1}%
+ \ifx\commentline\oldc%
+ \end{oldcomments}%
+ \else%
+ \ifx\commentline\begmac%
+ \begin{macrocode}%
+ \else%
+ \leavevmode%
+ #1^^M%
+ \fi\fi%
+ \else%
+ {\oc@ttf\char`\%}#1^^M%
+ \fi}%
+\endgroup%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{DocInclude}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{part}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DocInclude}
+% More or less exactly the same as |\include|, but uses |\DocInput|
+% on a |dtx| file, not |\input| on a |tex| file.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1994/03/14}{Rename from \cs{docinclude}}
+% \changes{v2.0f}{1994/03/25}{Use \cs{part}}
+% \changes{v2.0u}{1999/08/08}{Also works for .fdd (M. Schroeder)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partname{File}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\DocInclude}[1]{%
+ \relax
+ \clearpage
+ \docincludeaux
+ \IfFileExists{#1.fdd}{\def\currentfile{#1.fdd}}{\def\currentfile{#1.dtx}}%
+ \ifnum\@auxout=\@partaux
+ \@latexerr{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha
+ \else \@docinclude#1 \fi}
+\def\@docinclude#1 {\clearpage
+\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi
+\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\edef\@tempb{#1}\@for
+\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi
+\if@tempswa \let\@auxout\@partaux \if@filesw
+\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux
+\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need to save (and later restore) various index-related
+% commands which might be changed by the included file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex\PrintIndex
+\let\PrintIndex\relax
+\let\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges\PrintChanges
+\let\PrintChanges\relax
+\let\@ltxdoc@theglossary\theglossary
+\let\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary\endtheglossary
+\part{\currentfile}%
+ {\let\ttfamily\relax
+ \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}%
+\DocInput{\currentfile}%
+\let\PrintIndex\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex
+\let\PrintChanges\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges
+\let\theglossary\@ltxdoc@theglossary
+\let\endtheglossary\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary
+\clearpage
+\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw \immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi
+\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi\let\@auxout\@mainaux}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\codeline@wrindex#1{\if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@indexfile
+ {\string\indexentry{#1}%
+ {\filesep\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\filesep\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aalph}
+% Special form of |\alph| as currently |source2e.tex|
+% includes more than 26 files
+% \changes{v2.0n}{1994/05/27}{Use uppercase letters, for makeindex}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aalph#1{\@aalph{\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
+\def\@aalph#1{%
+ \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or
+ j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or
+ t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\or A\or B\or C\or
+ D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or
+ N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or
+ X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\docincludeaux}
+% \changes{v2.06}{1994/03/31}{Use \cs{footnotesize} in file key.}
+% \changes{v2.0k}{1994/05/21}{Use \cs{aalph}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\docincludeaux{%
+ \def\thepart{\aalph{part}}\def\filesep{\thepart-}%
+ \let\filekey\@gobble
+ \g@addto@macro\index@prologue{%
+ \gdef\@oddfoot{\parbox{\textwidth}{\strut\footnotesize
+ \raggedright{\bfseries File Key:} \filekey}}%
+ \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}%
+ \global\let\docincludeaux\relax
+ \gdef\@oddfoot{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@\currentfile\endcsname\relax
+ File \thepart: {\ttfamily\currentfile} %
+ \else
+ \GetFileInfo{\currentfile}%
+ File \thepart: {\ttfamily\filename} %
+ Date: \filedate\ %
+ Version \fileversion
+ \fi
+ \hfill\thepage}%
+ \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\task#1#2{}
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f0435c49261
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/ltxref.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,341 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: ltxref.dtx
+%
+%<*driver>
+% \fi
+\ProvidesFile{ltxref.dtx}
+ [2001/02/16 v1.1k LaTeX Kernel (Cross Referencing)]
+% \iffalse
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{ltxref.dtx}
+\title{\filename}
+\date{\filedate}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\and
+ David Carlisle\and
+ Alan Jeffrey\and
+ Leslie Lamport\and
+ Frank Mittelbach\and
+ Chris Rowley\and
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{\filename}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{92}
+%
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1994/03/29}
+% {Create file ltcntlen from parts of ltmiscen and ltherest.}
+% \changes{v1.1a}{1994/05/19}
+% {Extract file ltxref from ltcntlen.}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/21}{Use new warning commands}
+% \changes{v1.1c}{1994/05/25}{Modify documentation}
+%
+% \section{Cross Referencing}
+% The user writes |\label|\marg{foo} to define the following
+% cross-references:
+%
+% |\ref|\marg{foo}: value of most recently incremented referencable
+% counter. in the current environment. (Chapter, section,
+% theorem and enumeration counters counters are
+% referencable, footnote counters are not.)
+%
+% |\pageref|\marg{foo}: page number at which |\label{foo}| command
+% appeared. where foo can be any string of characters not
+% containing `|\|', `|{|' or `|}|'.
+%
+% Note: The scope of the |\label| command is delimited by environments,
+% so\\
+% |\begin{theorem} \label{foo} ... \end{theorem} \label{bar}|\\
+% defines |\ref{foo}| to be the theorem number and |\ref{bar}| to be
+% the current section number.
+%
+% Note: |\label| does the right thing in terms of spacing -- i.e.,
+% leaving a space on both sides of it is equivalent to leaving
+% a space on either side.
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \subsection{Cross Referencing}
+%
+% \begin{oldcomments}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*2ekernel>
+\message{x-ref,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This is implemented as follows. A referencable counter CNT is
+% incremented by the command \refstepcounter{CNT} , which sets
+% \@currentlabel == {CNT}{eval(\p@cnt\theCNT)}. The command
+% \label{FOO} then writes the following on file \@auxout :
+% \newlabel{FOO}{{eval(\@currentlabel)}{eval(\thepage)}}
+%
+% \ref{FOO} ==
+% BEGIN
+% if \r@foo undefined
+% then @refundefined := G T
+% ??
+% Warning: 'reference foo on page ... undefined'
+% else \@car \eval(\r@FOO)\@nil
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \pageref{foo} =
+% BEGIN
+% if \r@foo undefined
+% then @refundefined := G T
+% ??
+% Warning: 'reference foo on page ... undefined'
+% else \@cdr \eval(\r@FOO)\@nil
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \end{oldcomments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\G@refundefinedtrue}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1995/12/07}{Renamed (back) from \cs{G@refundefined}}
+% \begin{macro}{\@refundefined}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1995/10/24}{Switch for refundefined replaced}
+% This does not save on name-space (since \cs{G@refundefinedfalse}
+% was never needed) but it does make the implmentation of such
+% one-way switches more consistent. The extra macro to make the
+% change is used since this change appears several times.
+%
+% \textbf{Note} despite its name, |\G@refundefinedtrue| does
+% \emph{not} correspnd to an |\if| command, and there is no
+% matching \ldots|false|. It would be more natural to call the
+% command |\G@refundefined| (as inspection of the change log will
+% reveal) but unfortunately such a change would break any package
+% that had defined a |\ref|-like command that mimicked the
+% definition of |\ref|, calling |\G@refundefinedtrue|. Inspection
+% of the \TeX\ archives revealed several such packages, and so this
+% command has been named \ldots|true| so that the definition of
+% |\ref| need not be changed, and the packages will work without
+% change.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \newif\ifG@refundefined
+% \def\G@refundefinedtrue{\global\let\ifG@refundefined\iftrue}
+% \def\G@refundefinedfalse{\global\let\ifG@refundefined\iffalse}
+\def\G@refundefinedtrue{%
+ \gdef\@refundefined{%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{There were undefined references}}}
+\let\@refundefined\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\ref}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/11}{Macro reimplemented}
+% \begin{macro}{\pageref}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/11}{Macro reimplemented}
+% \begin{macro}{\@setref}
+% \changes{LaTeX2e}{1993/12/11}{Macro added}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1995/10/24}{Switch for refundefined renamed}
+% \changes{v1.1i}{1995/12/07}{Switch for refundefined restored}
+% Referencing a |\label|.
+% RmS 91/10/25: added a few extra |\reset@font|,
+% as suggested by Bernd Raichle
+%
+% RmS 92/08/14: made |\ref| and |\pageref| robust
+%
+% RmS 93/09/08: Added setting of refundefined switch.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setref#1#2#3{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ \protect\G@refundefinedtrue
+ \nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}%
+ \@latex@warning{Reference `#3' on page \thepage \space
+ undefined}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter#2#1\null
+ \fi}
+\def\ref#1{\expandafter\@setref\csname r@#1\endcsname\@firstoftwo{#1}}
+\def\pageref#1{\expandafter\@setref\csname r@#1\endcsname
+ \@secondoftwo{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\newlabel}
+% \changes{v1.1b}{1994/05/21}{Use new warning commands}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1995/04/24}{Make \cs{@onlypreamble} for /1388.}
+% \changes{v1.1e}{1995/06/19}
+% {Use \cs{@newl@bel} to share code with \cs{bibcite}}
+% \changes{v1.1g}{1995/07/14}
+% {Remove \cs{@onlypreamble} so still defined in new \cs{enddocument}}
+% This command will be written to the \texttt{.aux} file to
+% pass label information from one run to another.
+% \begin{macro}{\@newl@bel}
+% The internal form of |\newlabel| and |\bibcite|. Note that this
+% macro does it's work inside a group. That way the local
+% assignments it needs to do don't clutter the save stack. This
+% prevents large documents with many labels to run out of save
+% stack.
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1995/10/24}{Switch for multiplelabels replaced by
+% inline code}
+% \changes{v1.1k}{2001/02/16}{Added an extra grouplevel (PR3250), jlb}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{{%
+ \@ifundefined{#1@#2}%
+ \relax
+ {\gdef \@multiplelabels {%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}}%
+ \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newlabel{\@newl@bel r}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\@newl@bel
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@multiplelabels}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1995/10/24}{Macro removed}
+% \begin{macro}{\@multiplelabels}
+% \changes{v1.1h}{1995/10/24}{Switch for multiplelabels removed}
+% This is redefined to produce a warning if at least one label is
+% defined more than once. It is executed by the |\enddocument|
+% command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let \@multiplelabels \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\label}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/11/04}{(ASAJ)Added \cs{protected@write}}
+% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter}
+% \changes{v1.1d}{1994/11/04}{(ASAJ)Added \cs{protected@edef}}
+% The commands |\label| and |\refstepcounter| have been changed to
+% allow |\protect|'ed commands to work properly. For example,
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \def\thechapter{\protect\foo{\arabic{chapter}.\roman{section}}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% will cause a |\label{bar}| command to define |\ref{bar}| to expand
+% to something like |\foo{4.d}|. Change made 20 Jul 88.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\label#1{\@bsphack
+ \protected@write\@auxout{}%
+ {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\@currentlabel}{\thepage}}}%
+ \@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refstepcounter#1{\stepcounter{#1}%
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+ {\csname p@#1\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@currentlabel}
+% For |\label| commands that come before any environment
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@currentlabel{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</2ekernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{An extension of counter referencing}
+%
+%
+% At the moment a reference to a counter |foo| will generate the
+% equivalent of |\p@foo\thefoo| although not quite in this form. For
+% some applications it would be nice of one could have |\thefoo| being
+% an argument to |\p@foo| to be able to put material before and after
+% the number generated by |\thefoo|. This can be easily achieved with
+% a small change to one of the kernel commands as follows:
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\refstepcounter#1{\stepcounter{#1}%
+% \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+% {\csname p@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% The trick is to ensure that |\csname the#1\endcsname| is turned into
+% a single token before |\p@...| is expanded further. This way, if the
+% |\p@...| command is a macro with one argument it will receive
+% |\the...|. With the kernel code (i.e., without the |\expandafter|)
+% it will instead pick up |\csname| which would be disastrous.
+%
+% Using |\expandafter| instead of braces delimiting the argument is
+% better because, assuming that the |\p@...| command is not defined as
+% a macro with one argument, the braces will stay and prohibit kerning
+% that might otherwise happen between the glyphs generated by
+% |\the...| and surrounding glyphs.
+%
+% We have refrained from making this change in the kernel code
+% although for exisiting documents it would be 100\% backward
+% compatible. The reason being that any class or package making use of
+% this functionality would then horribly fail with older \LaTeX{}
+% installations.
+%
+% Instead we suggest that people who are interested in using this
+% functionality in a document class or package add the redefinition to
+% the class file. To ensure that this redefinition is properly applied
+% they might want to test for the original definition first, e.g.
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\CheckCommand*\refstepcounter[1]{\stepcounter{#1}%
+% \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+% {\csname p@#1\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%}
+%\renewcommand*\refstepcounter[1]{\stepcounter{#1}%
+% \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+% {\csname p@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..563058817f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,313 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%\CheckSum{178}
+%\iffalse
+% Copyright (C) 1985 by Leslie Lamport
+% Copyright (C) 1994-98 by \LaTeX3 Project and Johannes Braams
+%\fi
+%
+% \changes{1.0b}{1994/01/21}{added a missing \cs{end\{macro\}}, a
+% missing docstrip end of module and corrected a few typos}
+% \changes{1.0d}{1994/02/11}{Corrected a few documentation errors;
+% added \cs{Checksum}}
+% \changes{1.0e}{1994/02/22}{Another documentation flaw fixed}
+% \changes{1.0f}{1994/03/01}{Moved driver further up; corrected a few
+% errors}
+% \changes{1.0f}{1994/03/01}{Added overview of {\sc docstrip} modules}
+% \changes{1.0i}{1994/11/11}{(DPC) Removed spurious \cs{wlog}}
+% \changes{1.0k}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation corrections.}
+% \changes{1.0m}{2000/03/29}{(RmS) Added macros \cs{seealso} and \cs{alsoname}.}
+%
+%\title{Standard \LaTeXe\ packages \texttt{makeidx} and
+% \texttt{showidx}}
+%
+% \author{%
+% Johannes Braams\and
+% David Carlisle\and
+% Alan Jeffrey\and
+% Leslie Lamport\and
+% Frank Mittelbach\and
+% Chris Rowley\and
+% Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \date{1994/11/11}
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Description}
+%
+% \subsection{Makeidx}
+%
+% The package \texttt{makeidx} provides two new commands, |\see|
+% and |\printindex|.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\see
+% The command |\see| can used in the index to cross reference to
+% other items.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\printindex
+% This command can be used to include the sorted and formatted
+% index in the document.
+%
+% \subsection{Showidx}
+%
+% The package \texttt{showidx} changes a number of internal
+% \LaTeXe\ commands in such a way that each index entry is shown in
+% the margin on the page where the entry appears. This package was
+% originally meant to be used with the \texttt{report} and
+% \texttt{book} document classes, but works with other classes as
+% well. It makes |\flushbottom| the default.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{The {\sc docstrip} modules}
+%
+% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
+% {\sc docstrip} in generating the external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% makeidx & produce makeidx.sty\\
+% showidx & produce showidx.sty\\
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \section{The documentation driver file}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
+% currently reading. It can be extracted from this file by the
+% {\sc docstrip} program.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{makeindx.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+% \subsection{Identification}
+%
+% Announce the package and its version:
+% \changes{v1.0h}{1994/05/01}{Removed use of variables}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<makeidx>\ProvidesPackage{makeidx}
+%<showidx>\ProvidesPackage{showidx}
+ [2000/03/29 v1.0m Standard LaTeX package]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Makeidx}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\see}
+% This macro discards its second argument (typically a page number)
+% and just prints |\seename| together with the entry the reader is
+% pointed to.
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1995/04/19}{Use \cs{emph} instead of \cs{em}}
+% \changes{v1.0j}{1995/04/19}{Disallow \cs{par} in argument}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*makeidx>
+\newcommand*\see[2]{\emph{\seename} #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\seealso}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{2000/03/29}{Macro added (see PR 3133).}
+% This macro discards its second argument (typically a page number)
+% and just prints |\alsoname| together with the entry the reader is
+% pointed to. We use |\providecommand| to retain compatibility with
+% existing files that define this macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*\seealso[2]{\emph{\alsoname} #1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
+% This command simply inputs the (formatted) index if it exists,
+% otherwise a warning is issued.
+% \changes{1.0c}{1994/02/08}{Use \cs{@input@} instead of \cs{@input} to
+% get the index listed by \cs{listfiles}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\printindex{\@input@{\jobname.ind}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\seename}
+% This package is for documents prepared in the English language.
+% To prepare a version for another language, various English words
+% must be replaced. All the English words that require replacement
+% are% defined below in command names.
+% \changes{1.0g}{1994/03/07}{Replaced \cs{newcommand} by \cs{providecommand}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\seename{see}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We used |\providecommand| in case the command is already defined
+% by a package loaded earlier.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alsoname}
+% \changes{v1.0m}{2000/03/29}{Macro added (see PR 3133).}
+% This macro discards its second argument (typically a page number)
+% and just prints |\alsoname| together with the entry the reader is
+% pointed to. We use |\providecommand| to retain compatibility with
+% existing files that define this macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*\alsoname{see also}
+%</makeidx>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{showidx}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\indexbox}
+% This package uses \TeX's insert mechanism, therefore it needs to
+% allocate an insert register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*showidx>
+\newinsert\indexbox
+\dimen\indexbox=\maxdimen
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\index}
+% This is a modified default definition for the user level |\index|
+% command. The difference is the change of the category code of the
+% space character.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\index{\@bsphack\begingroup
+ \@sanitize\catcode32=10\relax\@index}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\makeindex}
+% The same change has to be included in the user level |\makeindex|
+% command, which changes the definition of |\index| to actually
+% write index entries to an external file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\makeindex{\if@filesw \newwrite\@indexfile
+ \immediate\openout\@indexfile=\jobname.idx
+ \def\index{\@bsphack\begingroup
+ \def\protect####1{\string####1\space}\@sanitize
+ \catcode32=10 \@wrindex\@indexfile}\typeout
+ {Writing index file \jobname.idx }\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@wrindex}
+% This macro takes care of writing the index entries to a file. The
+% definition is modified to call |\@showidx|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@wrindex#1#2{\let\thepage\relax
+ \xdef\@gtempa{\write#1{\string
+ \indexentry{#2}{\thepage}}}\endgroup\@gtempa
+ \@showidx{#2}\if@nobreak \ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@index}
+% When the user didn't use the |\makeindex| command, the |\index|
+% macro calls |\@index|, which normally does basically nothing.
+% This package changes the definition to call |\@showidx|, which
+% includes the entry in the list of indexentries on the current page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@index#1{\@showidx{#1}\endgroup\@esphack}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@showidx}
+% This macro adds the current index entry to the insert
+% |\indexbox|. The |\indexbox| is typeset as a flushleft paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@showidx#1{%
+ \insert\indexbox{\small
+ \hsize\marginparwidth
+ \hangindent\marginparsep \parindent\z@
+ \everypar{}\let\par\@@par \parfillskip\@flushglue
+ \lineskip\normallineskip
+ \baselineskip .8\normalbaselineskip\sloppy
+ \raggedright \leavevmode
+ \vrule \@height .7\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
+ #1\relax
+ \vrule \@height \z@ \@depth .3\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottom}
+% \begin{macro}{\flushbottom}
+% The definition of these macros from \texttt{latex.dtx} is changed
+% here to add the execution of |\@mkidx| to |\@texttop|, which is
+% executed at the top of each page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\raggedbottom{\def\@textbottom{\vskip
+ \z@ plus.0001fil}\let\@texttop\@mkidx}
+\renewcommand\flushbottom{\let\@textbottom\relax
+ \let\@texttop\@mkidx}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkidx}
+% This macro actually typesets the box containing all the index
+% entries on the current page. They will occur on the left or the
+% right side of the text, or both, depending on the setting of the
+% switches |\if@twocolumn| and |\if@twoside|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mkidx{\vbox to \z@{\hbox{\if@twocolumn
+ \if@firstcolumn \@leftidx \else \@rightidx \fi
+ \else \if@twoside \ifodd\c@page \@rightidx
+ \else \@leftidx \fi
+ \else \@rightidx \fi
+ \fi
+ \box\indexbox}\vss}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@leftidx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@rightidx}
+% These macros give the amount of displacemant for the |\indexbox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@leftidx{\hskip-\marginparsep \hskip-\marginparwidth}
+\def\@rightidx{\hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% To make this work we have to execute either |\raggedbottom| or
+% |\flushbottom|. Assuming this package is used most often with the
+% document classes \texttt{report} and \texttt{book}, we execute
+% |\flushbottom|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\flushbottom
+%</showidx>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..73e45c3f7c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/makeindx.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{\file{makeidx.sty}{\from{makeindx.dtx}{makeidx}}
+ \file{showidx.sty}{\from{makeindx.dtx}{showidx}}
+ }
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space makeidx.sty}
+\Msg{* \space\space showidx.sty}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.dtx' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1e02efda6f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newdc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
+this file to serve the needs of your installation.
+
+However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
+of this file under its original name.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating font defs for Cork encoded
+ and Text Companion fonts ***}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{t1cmfib.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmfib,new}}
+ \file{t1cmfr.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmfr,new}}
+ \file{t1cmdh.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmdh,new}}
+ \file{t1cmr.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmr,new}}
+ \file{t1cmss.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmss,new}}
+ \file{t1cmtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmtt,tt,new,nowarn}}
+ \file{t1cmvtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmvtt,tt,new}}
+ \file{ts1cmr.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,TS1cmr,new}}
+ \file{ts1cmss.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,TS1cmss,new}}
+ \file{ts1cmtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,TS1cmtt,new,tt}}
+ \file{ts1cmvtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,TS1cmvtt,new,tt}}
+}
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e400850f680
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/newlfont.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%\iffalse % this is a METACOMMENT !
+%
+%% File `newlfont.dtx'.
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-1998 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+%% all rights reserved.
+%
+%<*dtx>
+ \ProvidesFile{newlfont.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{newlfont}
+%<driver> \ProvidesFile{newlfont.drv}
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{newlfont.dtx}
+ [1998/08/17 v2.2m Standard LaTeX package]
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{newlfont.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{88}
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1994/01/17}{Added missing definitions to support
+% newlfont in compat mode}
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1994/01/27}{Removed if@compat test since
+% these settings need also be executed in 2e mode.}
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1994/03/06}{Added def for \cs{cal} and \cs{mit}}
+% \changes{v2.2l}{1995/11/29}{Remove duplicate driver code.}
+% \changes{v2.2m}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \providecommand\dst{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+%
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{newlfont.dtx}
+%
+% \title{The file \texttt{newlfont.dtx} for use with
+% \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
+% number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}\\[2pt]
+% It contains the code for \texttt{newlfont.sty}}
+%
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file contains the code for the \texttt{newlfont} package
+% which provides defines commands like |\rm| to behave as with
+% NFSS1, i.e., to change one font attribute without resetting the
+% other attributes.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \section{The Code}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We define the font commands for selecting the typeface. They are
+% probably defined by the document class/style but we want to force
+% the old meaning from NFSS1.
+%
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/05/11}{DPC Remove definitions of \cs{prm} etc.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\rm\rmfamily
+\let\sf\sffamily
+\let\tt\ttfamily
+\let\bf\bfseries
+\let\sl\slshape
+\let\sc\scshape
+\let\it\itshape
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also have to define the \emph{emphasize} font change command
+% (i.e.\ |\em|). This command will look whether the current font is
+% sloped (i.e.\ has a positive |\fontdimen1|) and will then select
+% either an upright or italic font.
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/05/11}{DPC use \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}}
+% \changes{v2.2h}{1994/05/13}{DPC renamed to \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\em{%
+ \@nomath\em
+ \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font >\z@\upshape \else \itshape \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% For compatibility with old sources we should define the following
+% commands although their use in new documents is discouraged.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mediumseries\mdseries
+\let\normalshape\upshape
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In case \texttt{newlfont} is used in compatibility mode, eg
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \documentstyle[newlfont]{article}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% or with the \texttt{oldlfont} package already loaded
+% we have to undo a number of settings changed by the compatibility
+% mode for \LaTeX~2.09 documents.
+%
+% |\@setfontsize| should not have a |\reset@font| included.
+% \changes{v2.2j}{1994/11/06}{Use \cs{@typeset@protect}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setfontsize#1#2#3{\@nomath#1%
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+ \let\@currsize#1%
+ \fi
+ \fontsize{#2}{#3}\selectfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Math alphabet identifiers should have an argument.
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1994/03/10}{Changed \cs{begingroup}/\cs{endgroup} to
+% \cs{bgroup}/\cs{egroup}.}
+% \changes{v2.2f}{1994/05/05}{Added saved versions of the
+% math-groupers, CAR}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\math@bgroup\bgroup
+\def\math@egroup#1{#1\egroup}
+\let \@@math@bgroup \math@bgroup
+\let \@@math@egroup \math@egroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Warn again, if text font commands are used in math
+% (same macro as in \texttt{lfonts.dtx}).
+% \changes{v2.2e}{1994/04/21}{Changed error message}
+% \changes{v2.2k}{1995/04/02}{add \cs{noexpand} to second part of message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\not@math@alphabet#1#2{%
+ \relax
+ \ifmmode
+ \@latex@error{Command \noexpand#1invalid in math mode}%
+ {%
+ Please
+ \ifx#2\relax
+ define a new math alphabet^^J%
+ if you want to use a special font in math mode%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have to add |\noexpand| below to prevent expansion of |#2|. In
+% case of |#1| we can omit this (due to the current definition of
+% robust commands since they do come out right there :-).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ use the math alphabet \noexpand#2instead of
+ the #1command%
+ \fi
+ .
+ }%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In NFSS1 math alphabets had arguments so we have to change |\cal|
+% and |\mit| which by default are defined to behave like in
+% \LaTeX209.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\pcal\@undefined
+\let\cal\mathcal
+\let\pmit\@undefined
+\let\mit\mathnormal
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The NFSS1 version of \texttt{newlfont} included the \LaTeX{}
+% symbols. And that is probably all there is.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{latexsym}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..02da5a8db9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,445 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+\def\nfssfontfileversion{v2.1a}
+\def\nfssfontfiledate{2003/01/12}
+
+% \CheckSum{1182}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% Copyright (C) 1994 Donald E. Knuth
+% Copyright (C) 1994-94,2003 Frank Mittelbach,
+% all rights reserved.
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \title{The program \texttt{nfssfont}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach\thanks{Adapted from code written
+% by Donald E.~Knuth}}
+% \date{\nfssfontfiledate}
+%
+%
+% \def\dst{{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+% \def\NFSS{\textsf{NFSS}}
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% Within the \NFSS{} distribution there is a \LaTeX{} file
+% \texttt{nfssfont.tex} which can be used to test new fonts, produce
+% font tables showing all characters, etc. This is an addaption of a
+% program originally written by Don Knuth.
+
+% When you run this file through \LaTeX{} you will be asked to enter
+% the name of the font to test. Your answer should be the external
+% font name without any extension, e.g.\ \texttt{cmr10} (Computer
+% Modern Roman 10pt) or \texttt{yinit} (Yannis Haralambous' Initial
+% font).
+%
+% Alternatively (since version 2.1), you can press \meta{return} at
+% this point. In that case a dialog is started that asks you for the
+% font characteristics in \NFSS{} notation, i.e., first for the
+% encoding scheme (default \texttt{T1}), then for the family name
+% (default \texttt{cmr}), then for the series (default \texttt{m}),
+% then for the shape (default \texttt{n}), and finally for the size
+% (default \texttt{10pt}).
+%
+% You are then requested to enter a command. Probably the most
+% important one is |\table|, which will produce a font chart. To
+% switch to a new test font, type |\init|; to finish the test, type
+% |\bye|; and to learn about all the other possible tests type
+% |\help|.
+%
+% This is at
+% the moment only a crude addaption of the test program for the
+% Computer Modern fonts by Donald Knuth.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{A driver for this document}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
+% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the
+% \dst{} program.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+ % \OnlyDescription % comment out for implementation details
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{nfssfont.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The code}
+%
+% A testbed for font evaluation (see The METAFONTbook, Appendix H)
+% changed for \LaTeX{} with \NFSS.
+%
+% This program should get a complete rewrite some day or at least some
+% code documentation. Any volunteers?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*code>
+\documentclass{article} %FMi
+\nofiles %FMi
+\textwidth=470pt %FMi
+\oddsidemargin=0pt %FMi
+\textheight=1000pt %FMi
+\def\sevenrm{\fontsize{7}{9pt}\rmfamily} %FMi
+
+\typeout{**********************************************}
+\typeout{* NFSS font test program version <\nfssfontfileversion>}
+\typeout{*}
+\typeout{* Follow the instructions}
+\typeout{**********************************************}
+\typeout{}
+
+\tracinglostchars=0
+\tolerance=1000
+\raggedbottom
+\parindent=0pt
+%\newlinechar=`@ %FMi
+\hyphenpenalty=200
+\doublehyphendemerits=30000
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\m \newcount\n \newcount\p \newdimen\dim
+\chardef\other=12
+
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+ January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+ July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+ \space\number\day, \number\year}
+\def\hours{\n=\time \divide\n 60
+ \m=-\n \multiply\m 60 \advance\m \time
+ \twodigits\n\twodigits\m}
+\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum #1<10 0\fi \number#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We first ask for a real external font name\ldots
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\init{%
+ \typein[\currfontname]%
+ {Input external font name, e.g., cmr10^^J%
+ (or <enter> for NFSS classification of font):}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the user answers with ``return'' we ask for the \NFSS{}
+% classification of the font in form of encoding, family, series,
+% shape, and size offering a default each time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\currfontname\empty
+ \begingroup
+ \typein[\encoding]{^^J^^J*** NFSS classification
+ ***^^J^^JFont encoding [T1]:}%
+ \ifx\encoding\empty
+ \fontencoding{T1}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The requested encoding might not be loaded, so we pretend that it
+% was loaded here to avoid an error, after all we only need it to
+% find out the external font name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\csname T@\encoding\endcsname\empty
+ \fontencoding\encoding
+ \fi
+ \typein[\family]{Font family [cmr]:}%
+ \relax
+ \ifx\family\empty
+ \fontfamily{cmr}%
+ \else
+ \fontfamily\family
+ \fi
+ \typein[\series]{Font series [m]:}%
+ \ifx\series\empty
+ \fontseries{m}%
+ \else
+ \fontseries\series
+ \fi
+ \typein[\shape]{Font shape [n]:}%
+ \ifx\shape\empty
+ \fontshape{n}%
+ \else
+ \fontshape\shape
+ \fi
+ \typein[\size]{Font size [10pt]:}%
+ \ifx\size\empty
+ \fontsize{10}{10}%
+ \else
+ \fontsize\size\size
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally select the font and globally assign it to |\currfontname|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \selectfont\xdef\currfontname{\fontname\font}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+ \startfont
+ \message{Now type a test command (\string\help\space for help):}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\startfont{\font\testfont=\currfontname
+ \leftline{\sevenrm Test of \currfontname\unskip\ on \today\ at \hours}
+ \medskip
+ \testfont \setbaselineskip
+ \ifdim\fontdimen6\testfont<10pt \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt
+ \else\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \fi
+ \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\testfont % space between words (\raggedright)
+ \xspaceskip=\fontdimen2\testfont \advance\xspaceskip
+ by\fontdimen7\testfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=\other
+|gdef|help{|message{%
+\init switches to another font;^^J%
+\stop or \bye finishes the run;^^J%
+\table prints the font layout in tabular format;^^J%
+\text prints a sample text, assuming TeX text font conventions;^^J%
+\sample combines \table and \text;^^J%
+\mixture mixes a background character with a series of others;^^J%
+\alternation interleaves a background character with a series;^^J%
+\alphabet prints all lowercase letters within a given background;^^J%
+\ALPHABET prints all uppercase letters within a given background;^^J%
+\series prints a series of letters within a given background;^^J%
+\lowers prints a comprehensive test of lowercase;^^J%
+\uppers prints a comprehensive test of uppercase;^^J%
+\digits prints a comprehensive test of numerals;^^J%
+\math prints a comprehensive test of TeX math italic;^^J%
+\names prints a text that mixes upper and lower case;^^J%
+\punct prints a punctuation test;^^J%
+\bigtest combines many of the above routines;^^J%
+\help repeats this message;^^J%
+and you can use ordinary TeX commands (e.g., to \input a file).}}}
+
+\def\setbaselineskip{\setbox0=\hbox{\n=0
+\loop\char\n \ifnum \n<255 \advance\n 1 \repeat}
+\baselineskip=6pt \advance\baselineskip\ht0 \advance\baselineskip\dp0 }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setchar#1{{\escapechar-1\message{\string#1 character = }%
+ \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials
+ \read-1 to\next
+ \expandafter\finsetchar\next\next#1}}
+\def\finsetchar#1#2\next#3{\global\chardef#3=`#1
+ \ifnum #3=`\# \global\chardef#3=#2 \fi}
+\def\promptthree{\setchar\background
+ \setchar\starting \setchar\ending}
+
+\def\mixture{\promptthree \domix\mixpattern}
+\def\alternation{\promptthree \domix\altpattern}
+\def\mixpattern{\0\1\0\0\1\1\0\0\0\1\1\1\0\1}
+\def\altpattern{\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0}
+\def\domix#1{\par\chardef\0=\background \n=\starting
+ \loop \chardef\1=\n #1\endgraf
+ \ifnum \n<\ending \advance\n 1 \repeat}
+
+\def\!{\discretionary{\background}{\background}{\background}}
+\def\series{\promptthree \!\doseries\starting\ending\par}
+\def\doseries#1#2{\n=#1\loop\char\n\!\ifnum\n<#2\advance\n 1 \repeat}
+\def\complower{\!\doseries{`a}{`z}\doseries{'31}{'34}\par}
+\def\compupper{\!\doseries{`A}{`Z}\doseries{'35}{'37}\par}
+\def\compdigs{\!\doseries{`0}{`9}\par}
+\def\alphabet{\setchar\background\complower}
+\def\ALPHABET{\setchar\background\compupper}
+
+\def\lowers{\docomprehensive\complower{`a}{`z}{'31}{'34}}
+\def\uppers{\docomprehensive\compupper{`A}{`Z}{'35}{'37}}
+\def\digits{\docomprehensive\compdigs{`0}{`4}{`5}{`9}}
+\def\docomprehensive#1#2#3#4#5{\par\chardef\background=#2
+ \loop{#1} \ifnum\background<#3\m=\background\advance\m 1
+ \chardef\background=\m \repeat \chardef\background=#4
+ \loop{#1} \ifnum\background<#5\m=\background\advance\m 1
+ \chardef\background=\m \repeat}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\names{ {\AA}ngel\aa\ Beatrice Claire
+ Diana \'Erica Fran\c{c}oise Ginette H\'el\`ene Iris
+ Jackie K\=aren {\L}au\.ra Mar{\'\i}a N\H{a}ta{\l}{\u\i}e {\O}ctave
+ Pauline Qu\^eneau Roxanne Sabine T\~a{\'\j}a Ur\v{s}ula
+ Vivian Wendy Xanthippe Yv{\o}nne Z\"azilie\par}
+\def\punct{\par\dopunct{min}\dopunct{pig}\dopunct{hid}
+ \dopunct{HIE}\dopunct{TIP}\dopunct{fluff}
+ \$1,234.56 + 7/8 = 9\% @ \#0\par}
+\def\dopunct#1{#1,\ #1:\ #1;\ `#1'\ ?`#1?\ !`#1!\ (#1)\ [#1]\
+ #1*\ #1.\par}
+
+\def\bigtest{\sample
+ hamburgefonstiv HAMBURGEFONSTIV\par
+ \names \punct \lowers \uppers \digits}
+
+\def\math{\textfont1=\testfont \skewchar\testfont=\skewtrial
+ \mathchardef\Gamma="100 \mathchardef\Delta="101
+ \mathchardef\Theta="102 \mathchardef\Lambda="103 \mathchardef\Xi="104
+ \mathchardef\Pi="105 \mathchardef\Sigma="106 \mathchardef\Upsilon="107
+ \mathchardef\Phi="108 \mathchardef\Psi="109 \mathchardef\Omega="10A
+ \def\ii{i} \def\jj{j}
+ \def\\##1{|##1|+}\mathtrial
+ \def\\##1{##1_2+}\mathtrial
+ \def\\##1{##1^2+}\mathtrial
+ \def\\##1{##1/2+}\mathtrial
+ \def\\##1{2/##1+}\mathtrial
+ \def\\##1{##1,{}+}\mathtrial
+ \def\\##1{d##1+}\mathtrial
+ \let\ii=\imath \let\jj=\jmath \def\\##1{\hat##1+}\mathtrial}
+\newcount\skewtrial \skewtrial='177
+\def\mathtrial{$\\A \\B \\C \\D \\E \\F \\G \\H \\I \\J \\K \\L \\M \\N
+ \\O \\P \\Q \\R \\S \\T \\U \\V \\W \\X \\Y \\Z \\a \\b \\c \\d \\e \\f
+ \\g \\h \\\ii \\\jj \\k \\l \\m \\n \\o \\p \\q \\r \\s \\t \\u \\v \\w
+ \\x \\y \\z \\\alpha \\\beta \\\gamma \\\delta \\\epsilon \\\zeta
+ \\\eta \\\theta \\\iota \\\kappa \\\lambda \\\mu \\\nu \\\xi \\\pi
+ \\\rho \\\sigma \\\tau \\\upsilon \\\phi \\\chi \\\psi \\\omega
+ \\\vartheta \\\varpi \\\varphi \\\Gamma \\\Delta \\\Theta \\\Lambda
+ \\\Xi \\\Pi \\\Sigma \\\Upsilon \\\Phi \\\Psi \\\Omega \\\partial
+ \\\ell \\\wp$\par}
+\def\mathsy{\begingroup\skewtrial='060 % for math symbol font tests
+ \def\mathtrial{$\\A \\B \\C \\D \\E \\F \\G \\H \\I \\J \\K \\L
+ \\M \\N \\O \\P \\Q \\R \\S \\T \\U \\V \\W \\X \\Y \\Z$\par}
+ \math\endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rmfamily\'{}\kern-.2em\itshape
+ #1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant
+\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rmfamily\H{}\ttfamily#1}} % hexadecimal constant
+\def\setdigs#1"#2{\gdef\h{#2}% \h=hex prefix; \0\1=corresponding octal
+ \m=\n \divide\m by 64 \xdef\0{\the\m}%
+ \multiply\m by-64 \advance\m by\n \divide\m by 8 \xdef\1{\the\m}}
+\def\testrow{\setbox0=\hbox{\penalty 1\def\\{\char"\h}%
+ \\0\\1\\2\\3\\4\\5\\6\\7\\8\\9\\A\\B\\C\\D\\E\\F%
+ \global\p=\lastpenalty}} % \p=1 if none of the characters exist
+\def\oddline{\cr
+ \noalign{\nointerlineskip}
+ \multispan{19}\hrulefill&
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{\h x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr
+ \noalign{\nointerlineskip}}
+\newif\ifskipping
+\def\evenline{\loop\skippingfalse
+ \ifnum\n<256 \m=\n \divide\m 16 \chardef\next=\m
+ \expandafter\setdigs\meaning\next \testrow
+ \ifnum\p=1 \skippingtrue \fi\fi
+ \ifskipping \global\advance\n 16 \repeat
+ \ifnum\n=256 \let\next=\endchart\else\let\next=\morechart\fi
+ \next}
+\def\morechart{\cr\noalign{\hrule\penalty5000}
+ \chartline \oddline \m=\1 \advance\m 1 \xdef\1{\the\m}
+ \chartline \evenline}
+\def\chartline{&\oct{\0\1x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&}
+\def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}}
+\def\table{$$\global\n=0
+ \halign to\hsize\bgroup
+ \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt&
+ &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr
+ \lower6.5pt\null
+ &&&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline}
+\def\endchart{\cr\noalign{\hrule}
+ \raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B&
+ &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$\par}
+\def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\char\n}%
+ \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition
+ \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi
+ \box0\global\advance\n 1 }
+\def\reposition{\setbox0=\vbox{\kern2pt\box0}\dim=\dp0
+ \advance\dim 2pt \dp0=\dim}
+\def\centerlargechars{
+ \def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\text{{\advance\baselineskip-4pt
+\setbox0=\hbox{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\ifdim\hsize>2\wd0
+ \ifdim 15pc>2\wd0 \hsize=15pc \else \hsize=2\wd0 \fi
+\fi
+On November 14, 1885, Senator \& Mrs.~Leland Stanford called together
+at their San Francisco mansion the 24~prominent men who had been
+chosen as the first trustees of The Leland Stanford Junior University.
+They handed to the board the Founding Grant of the University, which
+they had executed three days before. This document---with various
+amendments, legislative acts, and court decrees---remains as the
+University's charter. In bold, sweeping language it stipulates that
+the objectives of the University are ``to qualify students for
+personal success and direct usefulness in life; and to promote the
+publick welfare by exercising an influence in behalf of humanity and
+civilization, teaching the blessings of liberty regulated by law, and
+inculcating love and reverence for the great principles of government
+as derived from the inalienable rights of man to life, liberty, and
+the pursuit of happiness.'' \moretext
+(!`THE DAZED BROWN FOX QUICKLY GAVE 12345--67890 JUMPS!)\par}}
+\def\moretext{?`But aren't Kafka's Schlo{\ss} and {\AE}sop's
+{\OE}uvres often na{\"\i}ve vis-\`a-vis the d{\ae}monic ph{\oe}nix's
+official r\^ole in fluffy souffl\'es? }
+\def\omitaccents{\let\moretext=\relax}
+
+\def\sample{\table\text}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bye{\end{document}} %FMi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The redefinition of |\typeout| around the |\begin{document}|
+% prevents \LaTeX{} from reporting that there is no |.aux| file.
+% This is a bad hack, I agree :-)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\oldtypeout\typeout %FMi
+\def\typeout#1{} %FMi
+\begin{document} %FMi
+\let\typeout\oldtypeout %FMi
+
+\ifx\noinit!\else\init\fi
+%</code>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1c08e06029b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/nfssfont.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generateFile{nfssfont.tex}{t}{%
+ \from{nfssfont.dtx}{code}}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fb79a18f460
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/olddc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
+this file to serve the needs of your installation.
+
+However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
+of this file under its original name.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating font defs for Cork encoded fonts ***}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{t1cmfib.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmfib,old}}
+ \file{t1cmfr.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmfr,old}}
+ \file{t1cmdh.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmdh,old}}
+ \file{t1cmr.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmr,old}}
+ \file{t1cmss.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmss,old}}
+ \file{t1cmtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmtt,old}}
+ \file{t1cmvtt.fd}{
+ \from{cmfonts.fdd}{fd,T1cmvtt,old}}
+}
+
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..08856eac7f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/oldlfont.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%\iffalse % this is a METACOMMENT !
+%
+%% File `oldlfont.dtx'.
+%% Copyright (C) 1989-1995 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+%% all rights reserved.
+%
+%<*dtx>
+ \ProvidesFile{oldlfont.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{oldlfont}
+%<driver> \ProvidesFile{oldlfont.drv}
+%<*!latex209>
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{oldlfont.dtx}
+ [1994/11/29 v2.2k Standard LaTeX package]
+%
+% \iffalse
+%</!latex209>
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{oldlfont.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{117}
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+%
+%
+% \providecommand\dst{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{oldlfont.dtx}
+%
+% \title{The file \texttt{oldlfont.dtx} for use with
+% \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
+% number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}\\[2pt]
+% It contains the code for \texttt{oldlfont.sty}}
+%
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file contains the code for the \texttt{oldlfont} package
+% which emulates the following \LaTeX~2.09 font commands:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The two-letter font-changing commands |\rm|, etc.~are
+% defined to cancel each other out as they did in \LaTeX~2.09.
+% \item The two-letter font-changing commands are allowed in math
+% mode.
+% \item The |latexsym| package is loaded.
+% \end{itemize}
+% For full compatibility mode, the file |latex209.def| is loaded by
+% |\documentstyle|.
+%
+% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
+% \dst{} in generating the external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% package & produce |oldlfont.sty| \\
+% latex209 & produce part of |latex209.def|
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2k}{1995/11/29}{Remove duplicate driver code.}
+%
+% \section{The Code}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\math@bgroup}
+% \begin{macro}{\math@egroup}
+% To make \meta{math alphabet identifier} work like simple font
+% switches we change the meaning of |\math@bgroup| and
+% |\math@egroup| to |\@empty|. This emulates the behavior of
+% \texttt{oldlfont.sty} in NFSS1 setups. These definitions are not
+% part of \texttt{latex209} automatically, since to emulate 2.09
+% they are not necessary (all standard fonts are declared as math
+% symbol fonts).
+% \changes{v2.2f}{1994/05/05}{Added saved versions of the
+% math-groupers, CAR}
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/05/09}{Moved outside latex209 part}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\math@bgroup\@empty
+\let\math@egroup\@empty
+\let \@@math@bgroup \math@bgroup
+\let \@@math@egroup \math@egroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The rest of this document describes code that is used in
+% |oldlfont.sty| and |latex209.def|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package|latex209>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When emulating the old settings we don't want a lot of NFSS
+% information being displayed. Thus we required that the
+% \texttt{tracefnt} package is loaded with the option
+% \texttt{errorshow}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage[errorshow]{tracefnt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We define math \emph{alphabet} identifiers for the typefaces
+% described in the \LaTeX{} manual. This is straightforward. Some
+% are already defined by the kernel code.
+% And here are the other ones defined by the old \LaTeX{}. They all
+% get declared as math symbol font alphabets. Thus we first
+% allocate the additional symbol fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{sans}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{typewriter}{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{italic}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{it}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{smallcaps}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sc}
+\DeclareSymbolFont{slanted}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And here are the corresponding math identifiers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\mathbf{bold}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\mathsf{sans}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\mathtt{typewriter}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\mathsc{smallcaps}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\mathsl{slanted}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We undefine the old |\mit| and |\cal| macros (whatever meaning
+% they have) and reallocate them as symbol font alphabets.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mit\undefined
+\let\cal\undefined
+\let\mathit\undefined
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\mathit{italic}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mit}{letters}
+\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\cal}{symbols}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We define the font commands for selecting the typeface. They are
+% probably defined by the document class/style but we want to force
+% the old meaning.
+%
+% And here are the definition as they were in \LaTeX~2.09 but
+% translated into NFSS2 language.
+% \changes{v2.2h}{1994/05/11}{DPC use \cs{DeclareProtectedCommand}}
+% \changes{v2.2i}{1994/05/13}{DPC renamed to \cs{DeclareRobustCommand}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\rm{\normalfont\rmfamily\mathgroup\symoperators}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\sf{\normalfont\sffamily\mathgroup\symsans}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\sl{\normalfont\slshape\mathgroup\symslanted}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\bf{\normalfont\bfseries\mathgroup\symbold}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\sc{\normalfont\scshape\mathgroup\symsmallcaps}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\it{\normalfont\itshape\mathgroup\symitalic}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\tt{\normalfont\ttfamily\mathgroup\symtypewriter}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We also have to define the \emph{emphasize} font change command
+% (i.e.\ |\em|). This command will look whether the current font is
+% sloped (i.e.\ has a positive |\fontdimen1|) and will then select
+% either |\rm| or |\it|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\em{%
+ \@nomath\em
+ \ifdim \fontdimen\@ne\font>\z@\rm\else\it\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setfontsize}
+% Font size changes are handled using the |\@setfontsize| command
+% (in new class files) or by the |@setsize| command in old document
+% style files. The latter is now defined to call |\@setfontsize| in
+% the NFSS2 kernel code.
+% Thus to make all size changing commands automatically return to
+% the normal font of the document we only have to slightly modify
+% the definition of |\@setfontsize| by adding a |\normalfont|
+% command to it.
+% \changes{v2.2j}{1994/11/06}{Use \cs{@typeset@protect}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setfontsize#1#2#3{\@nomath#1%
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+ \let\@currsize#1%
+ \fi
+ \fontsize{#2}{#3}\normalfont}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\non@alpherr}
+% Since we emulate the old syntax we also have to silently ignore
+% uses of a math alphabet outside math mode. Since we now use the
+% |\sym...| switches the following setting is not longer necessary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\let\non@alpherr\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\not@math@alphabet}
+% But we need to disable the error message that is generated from
+% |\bfseries| etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\not@math@alphabet\@gobbletwo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% We left out the special \LaTeX{} fonts which are not automaticly
+% included in the base version of the font selection since these
+% fonts contain only a few characters which are also included in
+% the AMS fonts so anybody who is using these fonts doesn't need
+% them. But for compatiblity reasons we will define these symbols.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{latexsym}
+%</package|latex209>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..20415b73b4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/preload.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%%% From File: preload.dtx
+%<*dtx>
+ \ProvidesFile{preload.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<*preload>
+%<*!tex>
+%<+cm> \ProvidesFile{cmpreloa.%
+%<+dc> \ProvidesFile{dcpreloa.%
+%<+xpt> xpt}
+%<+xipt> xip}
+%<+xiipt> xii}
+%<+min> \ProvidesFile{preload.min}
+%<+ori> \ProvidesFile{preload.ori}
+%</!tex>
+%<+tex> \ProvidesFile{preload.ltx}
+% \fi
+% \ProvidesFile{preload.dtx}
+ [1998/08/17 v2.1g LaTeX Kernel (Font Preloading)]
+%
+% \CheckSum{41}
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+%\iffalse This is a META comment
+%
+% File `preload.dtx'.
+% Copyright (C) 1989-1994 Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf,
+% all rights reserved.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{preload.dtx}
+% \title{The \texttt{preload.dtx} file\thanks {This file has version
+% number \fileversion, dated \filedate}\\ for use with \LaTeXe}
+% \date{\filedate}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1993/03/08}{Added 12pt preloads}
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/11/07}{(DPC) Updated to use \cs{ProvidesFile}}
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \def\dst{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+%
+% \setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Overview}
+%
+% This file contains an number of possible settings for preloading
+% fonts during installation of NFSS2 (which is used by \LaTeXe). It
+% will be used to generate the following files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% preload.min & minimal subset of fonts necessary to run NFSS2 \\
+% preload.ori & preload of CM fonts similar to the old
+% \texttt{lfonts.tex} \\
+% preload.ltx & The standard selection of preloads \\
+% cmpreloa.xpt & preload of CM fonts for 10pt document size\\
+% cmpreloa.xip & preload of CM fonts for 11pt document size\\
+% cmpreloa.xii & preload of CM fonts for 12pt document size\\
+% dcpreloa.xpt & preload of DC fonts for 10pt size \\
+% dcpreloa.xip & preload of DC fonts for 11pt size \\
+% dcpreloa.xii & preload of DC fonts for 12pt size \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% These files are for installations that make use of Computer
+% Modern fonts either old encoding (OT1) or Cork encoding (T1). The
+% Computer Modern fonts with Cork encoding are known as DC-fonts.
+%
+% Most important is \texttt{preload.ltx} which is used during
+% format generation. You are \emph{not} allowed to change this file.
+%
+% \section{Customization}
+%
+% You can customize the preloaded fonts in your \LaTeXe{} system by
+% installing a file with the name \texttt{preload.cfg}. If this
+% file exists it will be used in place of the system file
+% \texttt{preload.ltx}. You can, for example, copy one of the
+% files mentioned above (that can be generated from this source) to
+% \texttt{preload.cfg}.
+%
+% Or you can define completely other preloads. In that case start
+% from \texttt{preload.min} since that contains the fonts that have
+% to be preloaded by *all* \LaTeXe{} sytems.
+%
+% Avoid using \texttt{preload.ori}, it will load so many fonts that
+% on most installations it is nearly impossible to load other font
+% families afterwards. This file is only generated to show what
+% fonts have been preloaded by \LaTeX~2.09.
+%
+% If you normally use other fonts than Computer Modern
+% \texttt{preload.min} might be best.
+%
+% \begin{quote} \textbf{Warning:} If you preload fonts with
+% encodings other than the normally supported encodings you have to
+% declare that encoding in a \texttt{fontdef.cfg} configuration
+% file (see the documentation in the file \texttt{fontdef.dtx}).
+% Adding an extra encoding to the format might produce non-portable
+% documents, thus this should be avoided if possible.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Module switches for the \dst{} program}
+%
+% The \dst{} will generate the above file from this source using the
+% following module directives:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% preload& produce a preload\ldots file \\[2pt]
+% cm & for OT1 encoded Computer Modern \\
+% dc & for T1 encoded Computer Modern \\[2pt]
+% min & produce minimal subset \\
+% xpt & produce 10pt preloads \\
+% xipt & produce 11pt preloads \\
+% xiipt & produce 12pt preloads \\
+% ori & produce preloads similar to old \texttt{lfonts.tex}\\
+% tex & produce preload.ltx\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% A typical \dst{} command file would then have entries like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\generateFile{preload.min}{t}{\from{preload.dtx}{preload,min}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% for generating preload files.
+%
+% \section{A driver for this document}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you
+% are currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the
+% \dst{} program.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+%\OnlyDescription % comment out for implementation details
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{preload.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The code}
+%
+% We begin by loading the math extension font (cmex10)
+% and the \LaTeX{} line and circle fonts.
+% It is necessary to do this explicitly since these are
+% used by \texttt{lplain.tex} and \texttt{latex.tex}.
+% Since the internal font name contains |/| characters
+% and digits we construct the name via |\csname|.
+% These are the only fonts (!) that must be loaded in this file.
+%
+% All |\DeclarePreloadSizes| can be removed or others can be added,
+% they only influence the processing speed.
+% \changes{v2.0c}{1993/08/13}{Added \cs{relax} at end of font names.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\font\csname OMX/cmex/m/n/10\endcsname=cmex10\relax
+\font\tenln =line10 \font\tenlnw =linew10\relax
+\font\tencirc=lcircle10 \font\tencircw=lcirclew10\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The above fonts should not be touched but anything below this
+% point here in the preload suggestions can be modified without any
+% problems.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<-tex>%*******************************************
+%<-tex>% Start any modification below this point **
+%<-tex>%*******************************************
+%<-tex>
+%%
+%% Computer Modern Roman:
+%%-----------------------
+%<*ori>
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+ {5,6,7,8,9,10,10.95,12,14.4,17.28,20.74,24.88}
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}{9,10,10.95,12,14.4,17.28}
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{10,10.95,12}
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{it}{7,8,9,10,10.95,12}
+%</ori>
+%<+xpt&cm> \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{5,7,10}
+%<+xpt&dc> \DeclarePreloadSizes{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}{5,7,10}
+%<+xipt&cm> \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{6,8,10.95}
+%<+xipt&dc> \DeclarePreloadSizes{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}{6,8,10.95}
+%<+xiipt&cm> \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{6,8,12}
+%<+xiipt&dc> \DeclarePreloadSizes{T1}{cmr}{m}{n}{6,8,12}
+%%
+%% Computer Modern Sans:
+%%----------------------
+%<+ori> \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n}{10,10.95,12}
+%%
+%% Computer Modern Typewriter:
+%%----------------------------
+%<+ori> \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n}{9,10,10.95,12}
+%%
+%% Computer Modern Math:
+%%----------------------
+%<*ori>
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}
+ {5,6,7,8,9,10,10.95,12,14.4,17.28,20.74}
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
+ {5,6,7,8,9,10,10.95,12,14.4,17.28,20.74}
+%</ori>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The math fonts are the same for both DC and CM fonts. So far
+% there isn't an agreed on standard.
+% \changes{v2.4e}{1995/12/04}
+% {Ulrik Vieth. added 12pt OMS and OML preloads /1989}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xpt>
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}{5,7,10}
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}{5,7,10}
+%</xpt>
+%<*xipt>
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}{6,8,10.95}
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}{6,8,10.95}
+%</xipt>
+%<*xiipt>
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OML}{cmm}{m}{it}{6,8,12}
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}{6,8,12}
+%</xiipt>
+%%
+%% LaTeX symbol fonts:
+%%--------------------
+%<*ori>
+\DeclarePreloadSizes{U}{lasy}{m}{n}
+ {5,6,7,8,9,10,10.95,12,14.4,17.28,20.74}
+%</ori>
+%</preload>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9ecc070aa7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,456 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{173}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% Copyright (C) 1991,1992 by Leslie Lamport \and
+% Copyright (C) 1994,1995 by the \LaTeX3 project \and Johannes Braams
+%
+% \changes{v1.1}{1994/01/25}{Made `proc' a document class and provide
+% a .sty file for compatibility mode}
+% \changes{v1.2}{1994/01/26}{Removed the setting of a number of
+% variables that became superfluous by passing the twocolumn option
+% to the article class}
+% \changes{v1.3}{1994/03/01}{Moved driver further up; added overview
+% of docstrip modules; added \cs{CheckSum}, \cs{StopEventually} and
+% \cs{Finale}}
+% \changes{v1.3e}{1994/05/22}{Use new warning and error commands}
+% \changes{v1.3f}{1994/05/26}{Inserted missing 'v's in \cs{changes}
+% entries}
+% \changes{v1.3f}{1994/05/26}{Moved identification and driver to the
+% front of the file; these sections now no longer print}
+%
+% \subsection{Identification}
+%
+% This document class can only be used with \LaTeXe, so it is made
+% sure that an appropiate message is displayed when another \TeX{}
+% format is used.
+% \changes{v1.3l}{1995/11/30}{Added date of \LaTeX\ format to argument
+% of \cs{NeedsTeXFormat}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+class|style>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Announce the document class and its version.
+% \changes{v1.3c}{1994/04/15}{Added missing / guard}
+% \changes{v1.3d}{1994/05/01}{Removed the use of variables such as
+% \cs{fileversion}}
+% \changes{v1.3b}{1994/03/16}{Removed use of \cs{wlog}, no longer
+% needed}
+% \changes{v1.3f}{1994/05/26}{Removed \cs{typeout} from .sty file;
+% changed description}
+% \changes{v1.3h}{1994/05/26}{The second argument to \cs{ProvidesFile}
+% wasn't closed in the driver and the style file}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\ProvidesFile{proc.drv}
+%</driver>
+%<+class>\ProvidesClass{proc}
+%<+style>\ProvidesFile{proc.sty}
+ [1995/11/30 v1.3l
+%<+class> Standard LaTeX document class]
+%<+style> LaTeX 2.09 compatibility style option `proc']
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The documentation driver file}
+%
+% This bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you
+% are currently reading. It can be extracted from this file by the
+% {\sc docstrip} program.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{proc.drv}
+\begin{document}
+\newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf {#1}}
+\DocInput{proc.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \fi
+%
+% \title{Producing proceedings articles with \LaTeXe\thanks
+% {File version \fileversion, dated \filedate}}
+%
+% \author{%
+% Johannes Braams\and
+% David Carlisle\and
+% Alan Jeffrey\and
+% Leslie Lamport\and
+% Frank Mittelbach\and
+% Chris Rowley\and
+% Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+% \date{\filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Description}
+%
+% This \LaTeXe\ document class is designed to produce camera-ready
+% conference proceedings. It is based upon the document class
+% \texttt{article}, but modifies some of its layout decisions.
+% It also adds one command.
+%
+% For compatibility with \LaTeX2.09 a \texttt{.sty} version is
+% provided because \texttt{proc} used to be a style file. The
+% \texttt{.sty} file can \emph{not} be used as a package however.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\copyrightspace
+% The |\copyrightspace| command is used to produce a blank space in
+% the first column where a copyright notice belongs. Note that it
+% should appear after any |\footnote| commands that produce
+% footnotes for the first column.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{The {\sc docstrip} modules}
+%
+% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
+% {\sc docstrip} in generating the external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% class & produce the proc document class\\
+% sty & produce proc.sty for compatibility mode\\
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+% In this case a check is needed to see wether \LaTeXe\ runs in
+% compatibility mode.
+% \changes{v1.3i}{1994/05/27}{Added missing docstrip guard}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*style>
+\if@compatibility
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In this case processing silently continues, but in the |\else|
+% case a warning is issued and reading of this file stops.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \ClassWarningNoLine{proc}{^^J\@spaces%
+ You requested the use of `proc' as a package^^J\@spaces%
+ but it has been turned into a document class.^^J\@spaces%
+ Please change your file to use `proc' as a class.^^J}
+ \expandafter\endinput
+\fi
+%</style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Paper sizes smaller than A4 are not supported.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+\DeclareOption{a5paper}
+ {\ClassError{proc}{Option `a5paper' not supported}{}}
+\DeclareOption{b5paper}
+ {\ClassError{proc}{Option `b5paper' not supported}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Also the \Lopt{onecolumn} option is disabled in this document
+% class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}%
+ {\ClassError{proc}{Option `onecolumn' not supported}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Proceedings articles never have separate titlepages, therefore
+% this option is disabled.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{titlepage}%
+ {\ClassError{proc}{Option `titlepage' not supported}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Always print in two column mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\PassOptionsToClass{twocolumn}{article}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Any other options are passed on to the article class on which
+% this document class is based.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now we can process the options
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% and load the article document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\LoadClass{article}
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Document Layout}
+%
+% Proceedings articles have a different layout than normal
+% articles. Therefore some of the layout parameters are given
+% different values here.
+%
+% \subsection{Page Layout}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footskip}
+% The distance from the baseline of the box which contains the
+% running footer to the baseline of last line of text is controlled
+% by the |\footskip|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class|style>
+\setlength\footskip{75\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The dimension of text}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
+% When \LaTeXe\ runs in compatibility mode it has to be made sure
+% that the dimensions of the printed area are not different from
+% what the user was used to see.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\textwidth{6.75in}
+\else
+ \setlength\textwidth{\paperwidth}
+ \addtolength\textwidth{-126\p@}
+ \@settopoint\textwidth
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here the width of the text a little is modified to be a whole
+% number of points.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+\else
+ \@settopoint\textwidth
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
+% Now that we have computed the width of the text, we have to take
+% care of the height. The |\textheight| is the height of text
+% (including footnotes and figures, excluding running head and
+% foot).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\textheight{9in}
+\else
+ \ifcase\@ptsize
+ \setlength\textheight{53\baselineskip}
+ \or
+ \setlength\textheight{47\baselineskip}
+ \or
+ \setlength\textheight{44\baselineskip}
+ \fi
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The first line on the page has a height of |\topskip|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\advance\textheight by \topskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Margins}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
+% The width of the text is quite large, therefore the margins
+% have a negative width.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\oddsidemargin{-10\p@}
+\setlength\evensidemargin{-10\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
+% Because we have such a large |\textwidth| there is no real room
+% for notes in the margins.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\marginparwidth {\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
+% The |\topmargin| is the distance between the top of `the
+% printable area' --which is 1 inch below the top of the paper--
+% and the top of the box which contains the running head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\topmargin{-47\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
+% Proceedings articles are always set in |\twocolumn| mode,
+% therefore the distance between the two columns (|\columnsep|)is
+% set to a non zero value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\columnsep{.375in}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The page style}
+%
+% The user can use |\markright| (or |\markboth|) to put an
+% identification in the lower left side of the page. The page
+% number is printed in the lower right side of the page.
+%
+% This works as long as he doesn't use either |\pagestyle| or
+% |\thispagestyle| comands.
+% \changes{v1.3f}{1994/05/26}{changed \cs{rm} to
+% \cs{normalfont}\cs{rmfamily}}
+% \changes{v1.3j}{1995/05/26}{Removed \cs{rmfamily} (PR 1578)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@oddhead\@empty
+\let\@evenhead\@empty
+\def\@oddfoot{\normalfont\rightmark \hfil
+ \pagename{} \thepage}
+\def\@evenfoot{\@oddfoot}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Document Markup}
+%
+% \subsection{The title}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+% \changes{v1.3k}{1995/07/18}{Modify footnote handling (PR 1735)}
+% The defintion of |\maketitle| here is basically the same as the
+% one in the document class \texttt{article}, but the pagestyle is
+% \emph{not} set to \texttt{plain}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maketitle{\par
+ \begingroup
+ \renewcommand\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}%
+ \def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}%
+ \long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent
+ \hb@xt@1.8em{%
+ \hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}##1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This document class always uses two column mode but the title is
+% set to the full width of the text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
+ \@thanks
+ \endgroup
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+ \let\maketitle\relax
+ \let\@maketitle\relax
+ \gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}\let\thanks\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
+% This macro takes care of formatting the title information.
+%
+% The information is set inside |\vbox| with a width of
+% |\textwidth| and a hight of 2.25in. The text is vertically and
+% hirizontally centered.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@maketitle{%
+ \vbox to 2.25in{%
+ \hsize\textwidth
+ \linewidth\hsize
+ \vfil
+ \centering
+ {\LARGE \@title \par}
+ \vskip 2em
+ {\large \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author \end{tabular}\par}
+ \vfil}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\copyrightspace}
+% The |\copyrightspace| command is used to produce a blank space in
+% the first column where a copyright notice belongs. It works by
+% producing a blank footnote of the appropriate size.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\copyrightspace{%
+ \footnotetext[0]{\mbox{}\vrule \@height 97\p@ \@width \z@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Modifying environments}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Abstract}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\abstract}
+% For this document class the definition of the abstract
+% environment is quit simple.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{abstract}%
+ {\section*{\abstractname}}
+ {\par}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Initialization}
+%
+% \subsection{Words}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagename}
+% This document class is for documents prepared in the English
+% language. To prepare a version for another language, one English
+% word must be replaced. It is defined below in a command name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\pagename{Page}
+%</class|style>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..38d5985202c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/proc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{proc.cls}{\from{proc.dtx}{class}}
+ \file{proc.sty}{\from{proc.dtx}{style}}
+ }
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space proc.cls}
+\Msg{* \space\space proc.sty}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.dtx' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2582a414d83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,2724 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{2704}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \iffalse
+% Copyright (C) 1994-97 LaTeX3 project, Frank Mittelbach
+% and Rainer Sch\"opf, all rights reserved.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1997/06/01]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Announce the Class name and its version:
+% \changes{v2.3b}{1994/05/01}{Removed the use of \cs{fileversion}
+% c.s.}
+% \changes{v2.3b}{1994/05/01}{Added \cs{ProvidesFile} to slides.def.}
+% \changes{v2.3o}{1995/05/17}{Replaced all \cs{hbox to} with
+% \cs{hb@xt@}.}
+% \changes{v2.3o}{1995/05/17}{Cleaned up the \cs{changes} entries.}
+% \changes{v2.3p}{1995/05/23}{Corrected some brace mismatches.}
+% \changes{v2.3q}{1995/09/20}{Replaced \cs{@tempa} by \cs{reserved@a}.}
+% \changes{v2.3r}{1995/09/27}{Globally replaced scale factor 19.91 by
+% 19.907 in \cs{DeclareFontShape}, as this gives better
+% rounded font sizes at 600dpi (suggested by Denis Roegel).}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<+class>\ProvidesClass{slides}
+%<+cmd>\ProvidesFile{slides.def}
+%<*driver>
+ \ProvidesFile{slides.drv}
+%</driver>
+ [1997/08/15 v2.3z
+%<+class> Standard LaTeX document class]
+%<+cmd> SLiTeX definitions]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{A driver for this document}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3f}{1994/05/26}{Moved the driver to the front of the
+% file; it doesn't print any longer}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
+% currently reading. It can be extracted from this file by the
+% \dst{} program.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+]
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from the file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\GetFileInfo{slides.drv}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Some commonly used abbreviations:
+% \changes{v2.3h}{1994/06/01}{Added definition of \cs{SLiTeX}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\SLiTeX}{{%
+ \normalfont S\kern -.06em
+ {\scshape l\kern -.035emi}\kern -.06em
+ \TeX
+}}
+\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}
+\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}
+\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}
+\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}
+\newcommand*{\dst}{{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now start the document and input this file.
+% \changes{v2.3d}{1994/05/12}{Added a missing \cs{begin\{macrocode\}}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{slides.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1993/12/13}{Removed \cs{CodelineIndex} from the
+% driver code.}
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1993/12/16}{Removed again different definitions for
+% font commands font commands in non-compatibility mode.}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2}{1993/12/18}{Changes to make it work with
+% compatibility mode.}
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1993/12/19}{Removed float parms}
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1994/01/31}{Removed \cs{@normalsize definition}}
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/03/01}{Removed option makeidx.}
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/03/01}{Moved driver up front.}
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/03/01}{Renamed files \file{slides.ltx} and
+% \file{sfontdef.ltx} to \file{slides.def} and \file{sfonts.def}.}
+% \changes{v2.2l}{1994/03/16}{Removed \cs{typeouts}}
+% \changes{v2.3}{1994/03/16}{Removed root/slide-file structure except
+% for compatibility mode. (LL)}
+% \changes{v2.3}{1994/03/16}{Added clock option (LL)}
+% \changes{v2.3}{1994/03/16}{Modified slide, overlay, note
+% environments. (LL)}
+% \changes{v2.3}{1994/03/16}{Added titlepage option and
+% \cs{maketitle}. (LL)}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1994/05/06}{Changed documentation to use
+% `environment' instead of `macro' environment for environments}
+% \changes{v2.3f}{1994/05/26}{Wrapped two long lines}
+% \changes{v2.3l}{1994/12/16}{Use \cs{newcommand*} to define commands
+% with an argument}
+% \changes{v2.3n}{1995/04/02}{a slight documentation fix (PR 1517)}
+%
+% \title{Producing slides with \LaTeXe{}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach}
+% \date{\filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% With \LaTeXe{} it is now no longer necessary to maintain a special
+% format for producing overhead slides. Instead the standard format
+% may be used and internally only different font definition files come
+% into play.
+%
+% \section{Usage}
+%
+% For producing slides you have to use |slides| as the
+% document class. This class is very similar to the |slides| style
+% that came with \SliTeX{}, in fact it is basically a copy changed to
+% work under \LaTeXe{}.\footnote{Therefore you should compare the
+% new class with old \SliTeX{} styles
+% in case you have local slide classes to see what you have to change
+% in order to use them with \LaTeXe{}.} Thus you have to say something
+% like
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \documentclass[...]{slides}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% and process this with \LaTeXe.
+%
+% \section{Fonts}
+%
+% Note, that that with NFSS you can easily produce slides with special
+% fonts just by calling an appropriate style file (like |times|) in a
+% |\usepackage| command. This works, for example, with all
+% fonts that are defined to be scaleable (e.g., PostScript fonts) since
+% they can be used at any size by NFSS.
+%
+% However, packages like |pandora| won't work because the standard
+% |.fd| files shipped with NFSS only contain small sizes. You can, of
+% course, produce additional sizes and change the |.fd| files
+% accordingly so that they would be useable for slides as well.
+%
+% \section{Invisible text and color separation}
+%
+% In the original \SliTeX{} it was possible to produce invisible text
+% using the |\invisible| command, so that one was able to put several
+% slides on top of each other (with each slides showing additional
+% details, etc.). It was also possible to produce `color' slides. This
+% was done by producing individual slides one for each color and
+% placing them on top of each other.
+%
+% The availability of color printers and the |color| package make
+% color separation obsolete, so it has been removed. Although the
+% |color| has also made |\invisible| obsolete, the command is
+% retained in the \LaTeXe{} implementation, but there
+% are a few restrictions. Invisible fonts are implemented as special
+% shapes where the shape names are build by prefixing the normal shape
+% name with an uppercase |I|. For example, the `normal invisible
+% shape' would be |In|. When \LaTeX{} is requested to typeset
+% invisible it will thus change the current shape attribute in this
+% manner. To make this work it is necessary that the resulting font
+% shape group is defined. If not, the normal font substitution
+% mechanism of \LaTeXe{} will change the attribute until it finds a
+% usable font shape group with the result that the text may become
+% visible.
+%
+% As long as you use the standard fonts for slides this is not a
+% problem because all the visible font shape groups have invisible
+% counterparts. However, if you decide on using special fonts, e.g.,
+% PostScript fonts, your |\DeclareFontShape| settings may not contain
+% invisible font shape groups and thus you may be unable to use these
+% features without adding additional |\DeclareFontShape| commands to
+% your |.fd| files or the preamble of your document.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \section{The Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{quote}
+% \textbf{Warning:} The implementation is still very experimental and
+% may change internally very much. It currently basically consists of a
+% slightly modified copy of |slides.sty| (which then forms
+% |slides.cls|) followed by a slightly changed copy of |slitex.tex|.
+% Documentation is practically
+% non-existing. Everybody is invited to help changing this!
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% The code is divided into two parts, we first implement the class
+% related functions and declarations and then define lowlevel stuff
+% that is necessary within every class. By placing such commands into
+% a separate file it will be possible to share it with other slide
+% classes.
+%
+% \subsection{The class code}
+%
+% At this point we input the redefinitions that are necessary for
+% \SLiTeX.
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1994/05/26}{Use \cs{input} instead of \cs{@@input}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*class>
+\input{slides.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Now we are ready for setting up the font tables. As usual, we first
+% look for a local configuration file |sfonts.cfg|. If there isn't
+% one, we fall back to the default one (|sfonts.def|).
+% \changes{v2.2i}{1994/03/08}{Corrected first argument of
+% \cs{IfFileExists}: \file{sfonts.def} to \file{sfonts.cfg}.}
+% \changes{v2.3g}{1994/05/26}{Use \cs{InputIfFileExists} instead of
+% \cs{IfFileExists} and \cs{input} instead of \cs{@@input}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\InputIfFileExists{sfonts.cfg}
+ {\typeout{**************************************^^J%
+ *^^J%
+ * Local config file sfonts.cfg used^^J%
+ *^^J%
+ **************************************}}%
+ {\input{sfonts.def}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Declaration of Options}
+%
+% We declare a few options as illegal.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}
+%
+% The variables |\paperwidth| and |\paperheight| should reflect the
+% physical paper size after trimming. For desk printer output this
+% is usually the real paper size since there is no post-processing.
+% Classes for real book production will probably add other paper
+% sizes and additionally the production of crop marks for trimming.
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1993/12/14}{Corrected typo, A4 is not 279 mm high}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {297mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {210mm}}
+\DeclareOption{a5paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {210mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {148mm}}
+\DeclareOption{b5paper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {250mm}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {176mm}}
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {11in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {8.5in}}
+\DeclareOption{legalpaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {14in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {8.5in}}
+\DeclareOption{executivepaper}
+ {\setlength\paperheight {10.5in}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {7.25in}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{landscape} switches the values of |\paperheight|
+% and |\paperwidth|, assuming the dimensions wer given for portrait
+% paper.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{landscape}
+ {\setlength\@tempdima {\paperheight}%
+ \setlength\paperheight {\paperwidth}%
+ \setlength\paperwidth {\@tempdima}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The clock option}
+
+% The option \Lopt{clock} prints the time at the bottom of each note.
+% We also define here the commands and counters used to keep track of
+% time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@clock \@clockfalse
+\DeclareOption{clock}{\@clocktrue
+ \AtEndDocument{\typeout{\@arabic\c@minutes\space minutes}}
+}%
+\newcounter{minutes}%
+\newcounter{seconds}%
+\newcommand*{\settime}[1]{\setcounter{seconds}{0}\addtime{#1}}%
+\newcommand*{\addtime}[1]{\addtocounter{seconds}{#1}%
+ \setcounter{minutes}{\value{seconds}}%
+ \global \divide \value{minutes} by 60\relax}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}
+%
+% Two-sided printing is not allowed, so don't declare an option.
+% But it is necessary to initialize the switch.
+% \changes{v2.2h}{1994/03/07}{Removed declared option twoside.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@twosidefalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Draft option}
+%
+% If the user requests \Lopt{draft} we show any overfull boxes.
+% We could probably add some more interesting stuff to this option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}}
+\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength\overfullrule{0pt}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Titlepage option}
+% The default is for a |\maketitle| command to make a new page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@titlepage
+\@titlepagetrue
+\DeclareOption{titlepage}{\@titlepagetrue}
+\DeclareOption{notitlepage}{\@titlepagefalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Twocolumn printing}
+%
+% Two-column printing is again forbidden.
+% \changes{v2.3e}{1994/05/22}{twocolumn produces only a warning}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{}
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{%
+ \ClassWarning{slides}{No 'twocolumn' layout for slides}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Equation numbering on the left}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{leqno} can be used to get the equation numbers
+% on the left side of the equation.
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/03/01}{Option leqno loads \file{leqno.clo}
+% file.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{leqno}{\input{leqno.clo}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Flush left displays}
+%
+% The option \Lopt{fleqn} redefines the displayed math environmens
+% in such a way that they come out flush left, with an indentation
+% of |\mathindent| from the prevailing left margin.
+% \changes{v2.2g}{1994/03/01}{Added fleqn option.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Executing Options}
+%
+% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
+% variables.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,final}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code
+% for every option \Lopt{FOO}
+% which is declared and for which the user typed
+% the \Lopt{FOO} option in his
+% |\documentclass| command. For every option \Lopt{BAR} he typed,
+% which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option.
+% All options will be passed as document options to any
+% |\usepackage| command in the document preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Loading Packages}
+%
+% The standard class files do not load additional packages.
+%
+%
+% \section{Document Layout}
+%
+%
+% In this section we are finally dealing with the nasty typographical
+% details.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Fonts}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% FMi:
+\def\rmdefault{lcmss} % no roman
+\def\sfdefault{lcmss}
+\def\ttdefault{lcmtt}
+\def\itdefault{sl}
+\def\sldefault{sl}
+\def\bfdefault{bx}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% Since the number of parameters to set are very large it seems
+% reasonable to set up one command |\@setfontsize@parms| which will
+% do the work for us.
+%
+% \LaTeX\ offers the user commands to change the size of the font,
+% relative to the `main' size. Each relative size changing command
+% |\size| executes the command
+% |\@setfontsize||\size|\meta{font-size}\meta{baselineskip} where:
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\meta{font-size}] The absolute size of the font to use from
+% now on.
+%
+% \item[\meta{baselineskip}] The normal value of |\baselineskip|
+% for the size of the font selected. (The actual value will be
+% |\baselinestretch| * \meta{baselineskip}.)
+% \end{description}
+%
+% A number of commands, defined in the \LaTeX{} kernel, shorten the
+% following definitions and are used throughout. They are:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll@{\qquad}ll@{\qquad}ll}
+% \verb=\@vpt= & 5 & \verb=\@vipt= & 6 & \verb=\@viipt= & 7 \\
+% \verb=\@viiipt= & 8 & \verb=\@ixpt= & 9 & \verb=\@xpt= & 10 \\
+% \verb=\@xipt= & 10.95 & \verb=\@xiipt= & 12 & \verb=\@xivpt= & 14.4\\
+% ...
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifourteenpt}
+% \begin{macro}{\iseventeenpt}
+% \begin{macro}{\itwentypt}
+% \begin{macro}{\itwentyfourpt}
+% \begin{macro}{\itwentyninept}
+% \begin{macro}{\ithirtyfourpt}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifortyonept}
+% For \SLiTeX{}, however, these are not sufficient, and we therefore
+% need to add a few extra, larger, sizes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ifourteenpt{13.82}
+\def\iseventeenpt{16.59}
+\def\itwentypt{19.907}
+\def\itwentyfourpt{23.89}
+\def\itwentyninept{28.66}
+\def\ithirtyfourpt{34.4}
+\def\ifortyonept{41.28}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@setfontsize@parms}
+% This routine is used in \SliTeX{} to interface font size setting
+% it is modeled after the settings I found in \texttt{slides.sty}, so
+% it probably needs an update. But any class is free to redefine
+% it, as it is used only as an abbreviation.
+% It's syntax is:
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\@setfontsize@parms| \\
+% | |\meta{lineskip} \\
+% | |\meta{parskip} \\
+% | |\meta{abovedisplayskip} \\
+% | |\meta{belowdisplayskip} \\
+% | |\meta{abovedisplayshortskip} \\
+% | |\meta{belowdisplayshortskip} \\
+% | |\meta{strut ht} \meta{strut dp} (without pt)
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% For NFSS1 a similar style existed which did run both with a
+% \SliTeX{} with old font selection or with NFSS1. But when no
+% separate format is made this doesn't make much sense.
+% So the following note is history and would only be true if all NFSS
+% stuff would be removed from the file and placed into the format.
+% \begin{quote}\small
+% Note: To interface the old \texttt{sfonts.tex} the \meta{size} must be
+% hidden in commands denoting the size by its name prefixed with
+% `i', i.e.\ 20pt size is called |\itwentypt| at this point. The
+% NFSS interface will define those sizes to expand to the internal
+% size, e.g.\ 20 but for the old sfonts the command name, e.g.
+% |\itwentypt|, will be used to construct the name |\twentypt| etc.
+%
+% This is a crude interface to the old \texttt{sfonts.tex}. It will
+% be a bit slower than the old one because it must define |\@tiny|
+% etc.\ every time a size changes.
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% If classes are set up that are only for use with NFSS then the second
+% argument may be an ordinary font size!
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1993/11/12}{Replaced all pt by \cs{p@}, corrected
+% definition for \cs{tiny}.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setfontsize@parms#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
+ \lineskip #1\relax%
+ \parskip #2\relax
+ \abovedisplayskip #3\relax
+ \belowdisplayskip #4\relax
+ \abovedisplayshortskip #5\relax
+ \belowdisplayshortskip #6\relax
+%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% I don't see a reason why the |\strutbox| has a dim different from
+% |\baselineskip| but we will leave it for the moment
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\strutbox=\hbox{\vrule \@height#7\p@\@depth#8\p@\@width\z@}%
+ \baselineskip\baselinestretch\baselineskip
+ \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Setting size relations for math scripts:
+% \changes{v2.2e}{1994/02/07}{Corrected entry for size 23.89.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathSizes{13.82}{13.82}{10}{7}
+\DeclareMathSizes{16.59}{16.59}{12}{7}
+\DeclareMathSizes{19.907}{19.907}{16.59}{13.82}
+\DeclareMathSizes{23.89}{23.89}{19.907}{16.59}
+\DeclareMathSizes{28.66}{28.66}{23.89}{19.907}
+\DeclareMathSizes{34.4}{34.4}{28.66}{23.89}
+\DeclareMathSizes{41.28}{41.28}{34.4}{28.66}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\normalsize{%
+ \@setfontsize\normalsize\itwentypt{28\p@ plus3\p@ minus4\p@}%
+% {20}{30\p@ plus3\p@ minus3\p@}% made a bit shorter
+ \@setfontsize@parms
+ {2pt}%
+ {30\p@ plus18\p@ minus9\p@}%
+ {15\p@ plus3\p@ minus3\p@}%
+ {10\p@ plus3\p@ minus3\p@}%
+ {10\p@ plus3\p@}
+ \abovedisplayshortskip
+ {17}{7}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% We initially choose the normalsize font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\normalsize
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\small}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\small{\@setfontsize\small\iseventeenpt{19\p@ plus3\p@ minus\p@}%
+ \@setfontsize@parms
+ {2\p@}%
+ {15\p@ plus15\p@ minus7\p@}%
+ {12\p@ plus3\p@ minus3\p@}%
+ {9\p@ plus3\p@ minus3\p@}%
+ {6\p@ plus3\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayshortskip
+ {13.5}{5.6}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
+% \begin{macro}{\scriptsize}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\footnotesize=\small
+\let\scriptsize=\small
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tiny}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\ifourteenpt{16\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@}%
+ \@setfontsize@parms
+ {2pt}%
+ {14\p@ plus3\p@ minus10\p@}%
+ {11\p@ plus3\p@ minus10\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayskip
+ {8\p@ plus3\p@ minus5\p@}%
+ {\z@ plus3\p@}%
+ {10}{4}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Actually copying the code above would be better because this would
+% correct the error message. Maybe one should remove the first
+% argument of |\set@font@size@parms|.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\large}
+% \begin{macro}{\Large}
+% \begin{macro}{\LARGE}
+% \begin{macro}{\huge}
+% \begin{macro}{\Huge}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize\large\itwentyfourpt{42\p@ plus8\p@ minus5\p@}%
+ \@setfontsize@parms
+ {2\p@}%
+ {40\p@ plus20\p@ minus4\p@}%
+ {20\p@ plus8\p@ minus3\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayskip
+ {10\p@ plus5\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayshortskip
+ {20}{8.5}}
+
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\itwentyninept{48\p@ plus10\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ \@setfontsize@parms
+ {2\p@}%
+ {48\p@ plus30\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ {24\p@ plus10\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayskip
+ {12\p@ plus8\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayshortskip
+ {27}{11}}
+
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\ithirtyfourpt{52\p@ plus10\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ \@setfontsize@parms
+ {2\p@}%
+ {52\p@ plus30\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ {24\p@ plus10\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayskip
+ {12\p@ plus8\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayshortskip
+ {27}{11}}
+
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\ifortyonept{60\p@ plus10\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ \@setfontsize@parms
+ {2\p@}%
+ {60\p@ plus30\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ {24\p@ plus10\p@ minus6\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayskip
+ {12\p@ plus8\p@}%
+ \abovedisplayshortskip
+ {27}{11}}
+
+\let\Huge\huge
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Paragraphing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
+% This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|. The default is
+% to {\em not\/} stretch the baselines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\baselinestretch{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
+% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\parindent{\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}%
+% The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties
+% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
+% They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|,
+% dependant on their argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@lowpenalty 51
+\@medpenalty 151
+\@highpenalty 301
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
+% These penalties are use to discourrage club and widow lines.
+% Because we use their default values we only show them here,
+% commented out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \clubpenalty 150
+% \widowpenalty 150
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
+% Discourrage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display
+% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
+% after a display without a penalty. Again the default values are
+% used, therefore we only show them here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \displaywidowpenalty 50
+% \predisplaypenalty 10000
+% \postdisplaypenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
+% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \interlinepenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
+% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \brokenpenalty 0
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Page Layout}
+%
+% All margin dimensions are measured from a point one inch from the
+% top and lefthand side of the page.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
+% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
+% The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the
+% running head. The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom
+% of the running head and the top of the text. |\topskip| is the
+% |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\headheight{14\p@}
+\setlength\headsep {15\p@}
+\setlength\topskip {30\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footskip}
+% The distance from the baseline of the box which contains the
+% running footer to the baseline of last line of text is controlled
+% by the |\footskip|.
+% Bottom of page:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\footskip{25\p@} %
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maxdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@maxdepth}
+% \changes{v2.3c}{1994/05/06}{Added setting of \cs{maxdepth} and
+% \cs{@maxdepth}}
+% The \TeX\ primitive register |\maxdepth| has a function that is
+% similar to that of |\topskip|. The register |\@maxdepth| should
+% always contain a copy of |\maxdepth|. In both plain \TeX\ and
+% \LaTeX~2.09 |\maxdepth| had a fixed value of \texttt{4pt}; in
+% native \LaTeX2e\ mode we let the value depend on the typesize. We
+% set it so that |\maxdepth| $+$ |\topskip| $=$ typesize $\times
+% 1.5$. As it happens, in these classes |\topskip| is equal to the
+% typesize, therefor we set |\maxdepth| to half the value of
+% |\topskip|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\maxdepth{4\p@}
+\else
+ \setlength\maxdepth{.5\topskip}
+\fi
+\setlength\@maxdepth\maxdepth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The dimension of text}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
+% When we are in compatibility mode we have to make sure that the
+% dimensions of the printed area are not different from what the
+% user was used to see.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\textwidth{460\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we are not in compatibility mode we can set some of the
+% dimensions differently, taking into account the paper size for
+% instance.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First, we calculate the maximum textwidth, which depends on the
+% papersize. Then we calculate the approximate length of 65
+% characters, which should be the maximum length of a line of text.
+% The calculated values are stored in |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\@tempdima{\paperwidth}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\rmfamily im}
+ \setlength\@tempdimb{.5\wd\@tempboxa}
+ \setlength\@tempdimb{65\@tempdimb}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now we can set the |\textwidth|, depending on whether we will be
+% setting one or two columns.
+%
+% The text should not be wider than the minimum
+% of the paperwidth (minus 2 inches for the margins) and the
+% maximum length of a line as defined by the number of characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifdim\@tempdima>\@tempdimb\relax
+ \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdimb}
+ \else
+ \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
+ \fi
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here we modify the width of the text a little to be a whole
+% number of points.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@settopoint\textwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnseprule}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\columnwidth \textwidth
+\columnsep 10pt
+\columnseprule \z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
+% Now that we have computed the width of the text, we have to take
+% care of the height. The |\textheight| is the height of text
+% (including footnotes and figures, excluding running head and
+% foot).
+%
+% First make sure that the compatibility mode gets the same
+% dimensions as we had with \LaTeX2.09. The number of lines was
+% calculated as the floor of the old |\textheight| minus
+% |\topskip|, divided by |\baselineskip| for |\normalsize|. The
+% old value of |\textheight| was 528pt.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\textheight{600\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Again we compute this, depending on the papersize and depending
+% on the baselineskip that is used, in order to have a whole number
+% of lines on the page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \setlength\@tempdima{\paperheight}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We leave at least a 1 inch margin on the top and the bottom of
+% the page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We also have to leave room for the running headers and footers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima{-1in}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then we divide the result by the current |\baselineskip| and
+% store this in the count register |\@tempcnta|, which then
+% contains the number of lines that fit on this page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \divide\@tempdima\baselineskip
+ \@tempcnta=\@tempdima
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% From this we can calculate the height of the text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\textheight{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The first line on the page has a height of |\topskip|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\advance\textheight by \topskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Margins}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
+% First we give the values for the compatibility mode.
+%
+% Values for two-sided printing:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\oddsidemargin {17\p@}
+ \setlength\evensidemargin {17\p@}
+ \setlength\marginparwidth {20\p@}
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When we are not in compatibility mode we can take the dimensions
+% of the selected paper into account.
+%
+% We center the text on the page, by
+% calculating the difference between |textwidth| and
+% |\paperwidth|$-$|2in|. Half of that difference is then used for
+% the margin. The amount of space that can be used for marginal
+% notes is at least 0.8~inch, to which we add any `leftover' space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setlength\@tempdima {\paperwidth}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima {-2in}
+ \addtolength\@tempdima {-\textwidth}
+ \setlength\oddsidemargin {.5\@tempdima}
+ \setlength\marginparwidth {.8in}
+ \addtolength\marginparwidth {.5\@tempdima}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |\evensidemargin| can now be computed from the values set
+% above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\evensidemargin {\paperwidth}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{-2in}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\textwidth}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\oddsidemargin}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
+% The horizontal space between the main text and marginal notes is
+% determined by |\marginparsep|, the minimum vertical separation
+% between two marginal notes is controlled by |\marginparpush|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\marginparsep {5\p@}
+\setlength\marginparpush{5\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
+% The |\topmargin| is the distance between the top of `the
+% printable area' --which is 1 inch below the top of the paper--
+% and the top of the box which contains the running head.
+%
+% It can now be computed from the values set above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+ \setlength\topmargin{-10pt}
+\else
+ \setlength\topmargin{\paperheight}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-2in}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-\headheight}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-\headsep}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-\textheight}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-\footskip} % this might be wrong!
+% \end{macrocode}
+% By changing the factor in the next line the complete page
+% can be shifted vertically.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \addtolength\topmargin{-.5\topmargin}
+\fi
+\@settopoint\topmargin
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
+% |\footnotesep| is the height of the strut placed at the beginning
+% of every footnote. It equals the height of a normal
+% |\footnotesize| strut in this
+% class, thus no extra space occurs between footnotes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\footnotesep{20\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footins}
+% |\skip\footins| is the space between the last line of the main
+% text and the top of the first footnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\skip\footins}{10\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Page Styles}
+%
+% The page style \pstyle{foo} is defined by defining the command
+% |\ps@foo|. This command should make only local definitions.
+% There should be no stray spaces in the definition, since they
+% could lead to mysterious extra spaces in the output (well, that's
+% something that should be always avoided).
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@evenhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\@oddhead}
+% \begin{macro}{\@evenfoot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@oddfoot}
+% The |\ps@...| command defines the macros |\@oddhead|,
+% |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|, and |\@evenfoot| to define the running
+% heads and feet---e.g., |\@oddhead| is the macro to produce the
+% contents of the heading box for odd-numbered pages. It is called
+% inside an |\hbox| of width |\textwidth|.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% The page styles of slides is determined by the 'slide' page style,
+% the slide environment executing a |\thispagestyle{slide}| command.
+% The page styles of overlays and notes are similarly determined by
+% 'overlay' and 'note' page styles. The command standard 'headings',
+% 'plain' and 'empty' page styles work by redefining the 'slide',
+% 'overlay', and 'note' styles.
+%
+% \changes{v2.3q}{1995/09/20}{Wrap some long lines, and use \cs{null}.}
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+\def\ps@headings{%
+\def\ps@slide{\def\@oddfoot{\@mainsize +\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theslide
+ \hss}}%
+ \def\@oddhead{\@mainsize +\hfil +}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\@mainsize +\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theslide\hss}}%
+ \def\@evenhead{\@mainsize +\hfil +}}
+
+\def\ps@overlay{\def\@oddfoot{\@mainsize +\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theoverlay
+ \hss}}%
+ \def\@oddhead{\@mainsize +\hfil +}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\@mainsize +\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theoverlay\hss}}%
+ \def\@evenhead{\@mainsize +\hfil +}}
+\def\ps@note{\def\@oddfoot{\@mainsize \hbox{}\hfil\thenote}%
+ \def\@oddhead{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\@mainsize \hbox{}\hfil\thenote}%
+ \def\@evenhead{}}}
+%
+\else %%if@compatibility
+%
+\def\ps@headings{%
+ \def\ps@slide{%
+ \def\@oddfoot{\@mainsize \mbox{}\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theslide\hss}}%
+ \def\@oddhead{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\@mainsize \mbox{}\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theslide\hss}}%
+ \def\@evenhead{}}
+
+ \def\ps@overlay{%
+ \def\@oddfoot{\@mainsize \mbox{}\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theoverlay\hss}}%
+ \def\@oddhead{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\@mainsize \mbox{}\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theoverlay\hss}}%
+ \def\@evenhead{}}
+
+ \def\ps@note{%
+ \def\@oddfoot{%
+ \@mainsize
+ \if@clock
+ \fbox{\large \@arabic\c@minutes\space min}%
+ \else
+ \null
+ \fi
+ \hfil\thenote}%
+ \def\@oddhead{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{%
+ \@mainsize
+ \if@clock
+ \fbox{\large \@arabic\c@minutes\space min}%
+ \else
+ \null
+ \fi
+ \hfil\thenote}%
+ \def\@evenhead{}}}
+\fi %% if@compatibility
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@plain{\def\ps@slide{%
+ \def\@oddfoot{\@mainsize \mbox{}\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theslide\hss}}%
+ \def\@oddhead{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\@mainsize \mbox{}\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theslide\hss}}%
+ \def\@evenhead{}}
+\def\ps@overlay{\def\@oddfoot{\@mainsize
+ \mbox{}\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theoverlay\hss}}%
+ \def\@oddhead{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\@mainsize \mbox{}\hfil\hb@xt@3em{\theoverlay\hss}}%
+ \def\@evenhead{}}
+\def\ps@note{\def\@oddfoot{\@mainsize \hbox{}\hfil\thenote}%
+ \def\@oddhead{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\@mainsize \hbox{}\hfil\thenote}%
+ \def\@evenhead{}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps@empty}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@empty{%
+\def\ps@slide{\def\@oddhead{}\def\@oddfoot{}%
+\def\@evenhead{}\def\@evenfoot{}}%
+\def\ps@overlay{\def\@oddhead{}\def\@oddfoot{}%
+\def\@evenhead{}\def\@evenfoot{}}%
+\def\ps@note{\def\@oddhead{}\def\@oddfoot{}%
+\def\@evenhead{}\def\@evenfoot{}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Default definition the 'slide', 'overlay', and 'note' page styles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ps@headings
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Set ordinary page style to 'empty'
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@oddhead\@empty\let\@oddfoot\@empty
+\let\@evenhead\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Providing math {\em versions}}
+%
+% \LaTeX{} provides two {\em versions\/}. We call them
+% \textsf{normal} and \textsf{bold}, respectively.
+% \SliTeX{} does not have a \textsf{bold} version. But we treat the
+% invisible characters as a version. The only thing we have to take
+% care of is to ensure that we have exactly the same fonts in both
+% versions available.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMathVersion{invisible}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now we define the basic {\em math groups\/} used by \LaTeX{}. Later
+% on, in packages some other {\em math groups}, e.g., the AMS
+% symbol fonts, will be defined.
+%
+% As a default I used serif fonts for mathgroup 0 to get things like
+% \verb+\log+ look right.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}
+ {OT1}{lcmss}{m}{n}
+
+\SetSymbolFont{letters}{normal}
+ {OML}{lcmm}{m}{it}
+\SetSymbolFont{symbols}{normal}
+ {OMS}{lcmsy}{m}{n}
+\SetSymbolFont{largesymbols}{normal}
+ {OMX}{lcmex}{m}{n}
+
+\SetSymbolFont{operators}{invisible}
+ {OT1}{lcmss}{m}{In}
+\SetSymbolFont{letters}{invisible}
+ {OML}{lcmm}{m}{Iit}
+\SetSymbolFont{symbols}{invisible}
+ {OMS}{lcmsy}{m}{In}
+\SetSymbolFont{largesymbols}{invisible}
+ {OMX}{lcmex}{m}{In}
+
+
+\def\@mainsize{\visible\tiny}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Environments}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{titlepage}
+% This environment starts a new page, with pagestyle \pstyle{empty}
+% and sets the page counter to 0.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{titlepage}
+ {\newpage
+ \thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \setcounter{page}{\z@}}
+ {\newpage}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \subsubsection{General List Parameters}
+%
+% The following commands are used to set the default values for the
+% list environment's parameters. See the \LaTeX{} manual for an
+% explanation of the meaning of the parameters.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmargini}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginv}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginvi}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\leftmargini {38\p@}
+\setlength\leftmarginii {30\p@}
+\setlength\leftmarginiii {20\p@}
+\setlength\leftmarginiv {15\p@}
+\setlength\leftmarginv {15\p@}
+\setlength\leftmarginvi {10\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listiv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listv}
+% \begin{macro}{\@listvi}
+% These commands set the values of |\leftmargin|, |\parsep|,
+% |\topsep|, and |\itemsep| for the various levels of lists.
+% \changes{v2.3z}{1997/08/15}{Add initialization of \cs{leftmargin} to
+% \cs@listi.}
+% It is even necessary to initialize |\leftmargin| in |\@listi|,
+% i.e. for a level one list, as a list environment may appear
+% inside a \texttt{trivlist}, for example inside a \texttt{theorem}
+% environment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \parsep .5\parskip
+ \topsep \parsep
+ \itemsep\parskip
+ \partopsep \z@}
+
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginii
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \parsep .5\parskip
+ \topsep \parsep
+ \itemsep\parskip}
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginv
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Here we initialize |\leftmargin| and |\labelwidth|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\leftmargin\leftmargini
+\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Paragraph-formatting environments}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{verse}
+% Inside a |verse| environment, |\\| ends a line, and
+% line continuations are indented further.
+% A blank line makes new paragraph with |\parskip| space.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
+ \list{}{\itemsep \z@
+ \itemindent -15\p@
+ \listparindent \itemindent
+ \rightmargin \leftmargin
+ \advance\leftmargin 15\p@}%
+ \item[]}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quotation}
+% The |quotation| environment fills lines, indents paragraphs.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 20\p@
+ \itemindent\listparindent
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin}%
+ \item[]}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{quote}
+% The |quote| environment is the same as the |quotation| environment,
+% except that there is no paragraph indentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{List-making environments}
+%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{description}
+% The description environment is defined here -- while the itemize
+% and enumerate environments are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{description}{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@
+ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+ \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel}
+% To change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
+% |\descriptionlabel|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
+ \normalfont\bfseries #1}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Enumerate}
+%
+% The enumerate environment uses four counters: \Lcount{enumi},
+% \Lcount{enumii}, \Lcount{enumiii} and \Lcount{enumiv}, where
+% \Lcount{enumN} controls the numbering of the Nth level
+% enumeration.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
+% The counters are already defined in \file{latex.dtx}, but their
+% representation is changed here.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\theenumi{\@arabic\c@enumi}
+\renewcommand\theenumii{\@alph\c@enumii}
+\renewcommand\theenumiii{\@roman\c@enumiii}
+\renewcommand\theenumiv{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumi}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiv}
+% The label for each item is generated by the four commands
+% |\labelenumi| \ldots\ |\labelenumiv|.
+% \changes{v2.3k}{1994/12/12}{Handle the \cs{label...} commands as in
+% the other class files}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
+\newcommand\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
+\newcommand\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
+\newcommand\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumii}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiv}
+% The expansion of |\p@enumN||\theenumN| defines the output of a
+% |\ref| command when referencing an item of the Nth level of an
+% enumerated list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+\renewcommand\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\renewcommand\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Itemize}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemi}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemii}
+% \changes{v2.3x}{1996/08/25}{replaced -{}- with \cs{textendash}}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
+% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiv}
+% Itemization is controlled by four commands: |\labelitemi|,
+% |\labelitemii|, |\labelitemiii|, and |\labelitemiv|, which\
+% define the labels of the various itemization levels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\bullet$}
+\newcommand\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries \textendash}
+\newcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\ast$}
+\newcommand\labelitemiv{$\m@th\cdot$}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Setting parameters for existing environments}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Array and tabular}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arraycolsep}
+% The columns in an array environment are separated by
+% 2|\arraycolsep|.% Array and tabular environment parameters
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arraycolsep{8\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabcolsep}
+% The columns in an tabular environment are separated by
+% 2|\tabcolsep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\tabcolsep{10\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulewidth}
+% The width of rules in the array and tabular environments is given
+% by the length parameter|\arrayrulewidth|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.6\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesep}
+% The space between adjacent rules in the array and tabular
+% environments is given by |\doublerulesep|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\doublerulesep{3\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Tabbing}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tabbingsep}
+% This controls the space that the |\'| command puts in. (See
+% \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\labelsep 10pt
+\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Minipage}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
+% The macro |\@minipagerestore| is called upon entry to a minipage
+% environment to set up things that are to be handled differently
+% inside a minipage environment. In the current styles, it does
+% nothing.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootins}
+% Minipages have their own footnotes; |\skip||\@mpfootins| plays
+% same r\^ole for footnotes in a minipage as |\skip||\footins| does
+% for ordinary footnotes.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Framed boxes}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxsep}
+% The space left by |\fbox| and |\framebox| between the box and the
+% text in it.
+% \begin{macro}{\fboxrule}
+% The width of the rules in the box made by |\fbox| and |\framebox|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\fboxsep{5\p@}
+\setlength\fboxrule{.6\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
+% The equation number will be typeset as arabic numerals.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\theequation{\@arabic\c@equation}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\jot}
+% |\jot| is the extra space added between lines of an eqnarray
+% environment. The default value is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \setlength\jot{3pt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
+% The macro |\@eqnnum| defines how equation numbers are to appear in
+% equations. Again the default is used.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \def\@eqnnum{(\theequation)}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Font changing}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3j}{1994/11/10}{fixed a few typos}
+%
+% Here we supply the declarative font changing commands that were
+% common in \LaTeX\ version 2.09 and earlier. These commands work
+% in text mode \emph{and} in math mode. They are provided for
+% compatiblity, but one should start using the |\text...| and
+% |\math...| commands instead. These commands are redefined using
+% |\DeclareOldFontCommand|, a command with three arguments: the
+% user command to be defined, \LaTeX\ commands to execute in text
+% mode and \LaTeX\ commands to execute in math mode.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rm}
+% \begin{macro}{\tt}
+% \begin{macro}{\sf}
+% \changes{v2.2}{1993/12/18}{Changed \cs{@newfontswitch} to
+% \cs{@renewfontswitch}.}
+% \changes{v2.3a}{1994/04/14}{\cs{@renewfontswitch} has become
+% \cs{DeclareOldFontCommand}}
+%
+% The commands to change the family. When in compatibility mode we
+% select the `default' font first, to get \LaTeX2.09 behaviour.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bf}
+% The command to change to the bold series. One should use
+% |\mdseries| to explicitly switch back to medium series.
+% \changes{v2.2}{1993/12/18}{Changed \cs{@newfontswitch} to
+% \cs{@renewfontswitch}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sl}
+% \begin{macro}{\it}
+% \begin{macro}{\sc}
+% \changes{v2.2}{1993/12/18}{Changed \cs{@newfontswitch} to
+% \cs{@renewfontswitch}.}
+% And the commands to change the shape of the font. The slanted and
+% small caps shapes are not available by default as math alphabets,
+% so those changes do nothing in math mode. One should use
+% |\upshape| to explicitly change back to the upright shape.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\relax}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cal}
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1993/12/14}{Macro added}
+% \begin{macro}{\mit}
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1993/12/14}{Macro added}
+%
+% The commands |\cal| and |\mit| should only be used in math mode,
+% outside math mode they have no effect. Currently the New Font
+% Selection Scheme defines these commands to generate warning
+% messages. Therefore we have to define them `by hand'.
+% \changes{v2.3k}{1994/12/12}{Now define \cs{cal} and \cs{mit} using
+% \cs{DeclareRobustCommand*}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\cal}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathcal}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mit}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathnormal}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
+% Usually, footnotes are separated from the main body of the text
+% by a small rule. This rule is drawn by the macro |\footnoterule|.
+% We have to make sure that the rule takes no vertical space (see
+% \file{plain.tex}). The resulting rule will appear on all color
+% layers, so it's best not to draw a rule.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\footnoterule{}
+% \let \footnoterule = \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@footnote}
+% \begin{macro}{\thefootnote}
+% Footnotes are numbered within slides, overlays, and notes and
+% numbered with $\ast$, $\dagger$, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \newcounter{footnote}
+\def\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+\@addtoreset{footnote}{slide}
+\@addtoreset{footnote}{overlay}
+\@addtoreset{footnote}{note}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+% \changes{v2.2i}{1994/03/08}{Always call \cs{@makefnmark}.}
+% The footnote mechanism of \LaTeX{} calls the macro |\@makefntext|
+% to produce the actual footnote. The macro gets the text of the
+% footnote as its argument and should use |\@makefnmark| to produce
+% the mark of the footnote. The macro |\@makefntext| is called when
+% effectively inside a |\parbox| of width |\columnwidth| (i.e.,
+% with |\hsize| = |\columnwidth|).
+%
+% An example of what can be achieved is given by the following piece
+% of \TeX\ code.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+% \@setpar{\@@par
+% \@tempdima = \hsize
+% \advance\@tempdima-10pt
+% \parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}%
+% \par
+% \parindent 1em\noindent
+% \hbox to \z@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% The effect of this definition is that all lines of the footnote
+% are indented by 10pt, while the first line of a new paragraph is
+% indented by 1em. To change these dimensions, just substitute the
+% desired value for `10pt' (in both places) or `1em'. The mark is
+% flushright against the footnote.
+%
+% In these document classes we use a simpler macro, in which the
+% footnote text is set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no
+% indentation except on the first line of a paragraph, and the
+% first line of the footnote. Thus, all the macro must do is set
+% |\parindent| to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs
+% and put the proper indentation before the mark.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{
+ \noindent
+ \hangindent 10\p@
+ \hb@xt@10\p@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
+% The footnote markers that are printed in the text to point to the
+% footnotes should be produced by the macro |\@makefnmark|. We use
+% the default definition for it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{$^{\@thefnmark}\m@th$}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The title}
+% The commands |\title|, |\author|, and |\date| are already
+% defined, so here we just define |\maketitle|.
+%
+% \changes{v2.3s}{1995/10/10}{Move \cs{par} inside the scope of
+% \cs{Large}, to get even line spacing.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\maketitle{{\centering {\Large \@title \par}%
+ \@author \par \@date\par}%
+ \if@titlepage \break \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+% \section{Initialisation}
+%
+% \subsection{Date}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% This macro uses the \TeX\ primitives |\month|, |\day| and |\year|
+% to provide the date of the \LaTeX-run.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\today{\ifcase\month\or
+ January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+ July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+ \space\number\day, \number\year}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Default initializations
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+\onecolumn
+%</class>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Basic code}
+%
+% The code below is basically a copy of |slitex.tex| with some
+% changes.
+%
+% Global changes so far:
+%
+% \changes{FMi}{1990/06/01}{\cs{gdef}\cs{@slidesw} ... replaced by a
+% \cs{newifG} which is similar to \cs{newif} but uses \cs{global}
+% inside.}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Hacks for slide macros}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cmd>
+\message{hacks,}
+
+\outer\def\newifG#1{\count@\escapechar \escapechar\m@ne
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \edef\@ifG#1{true}{\global\let\noexpand#1\noexpand\iftrue}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \edef\@ifG#1{false}{\global\let\noexpand#1\noexpand\iffalse}%
+ \@ifG#1{false}\escapechar\count@} % the condition starts out false
+\def\@ifG#1#2{\csname\expandafter\ifG@\string#1#2\endcsname}
+{\uccode`1=`i \uccode`2=`f \uccode`3=`G \uppercase{\gdef\ifG@123{G}}}
+ % `ifG' is required
+
+\def\@gobbletoend#1{\def\@argend{#1}\@ggobtoend}
+
+\long\def\@ggobtoend#1\end#2{\fi\def\reserved@a{#2}%
+\ifx\reserved@a\@argend\else\@ggobtoend\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% FMi: I don't see any reason for this command since |\fi| is hidden
+% anyway in the replacement text
+% |\def\@xfi{\fi}|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \message{slides,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Slide macros}
+%
+%
+% Switches:\\
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% |@bw| & true if making black and white slides \\
+% |@visible| & true if visible output to be produced.\\
+% |@makingslides| & true if making a slide/overlay/note
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@bw
+\newif\if@visible
+\newif\if@onlyslidesw \@onlyslideswfalse
+\newif\if@onlynotesw \@onlynoteswfalse
+\newif\if@makingslides
+% \end{macrocode}
+% FMi: |\newifG| replaces |\gdef\@slidesw{T}| stuff
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newifG\ifG@slidesw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Counters\\
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% slide & slide number\\
+% overlay & overlay number for a slide\\
+% note & note number for a slide
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\countdef\c@slide=0 \c@slide=0
+\def\cl@slide{}
+\countdef\c@overlay=1 \c@overlay=0
+\def\cl@overlay{}
+\countdef\c@note=2 \c@note=0
+\def\cl@note{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Add these counters explicitly to the `ckpt list' so that the
+% |\include| mechanism works.
+% \changes{v2.3u}{1996/05/09}{Make include work: pr/2140(CAR)}
+% \changes{v2.3y}{1997/05/09}{Make include work properly: add the
+% counters in case some are already in there: pr/2140+2474(CAR)}
+% \changes{v2.3v}{1996/05/11}{Do not add page counter here as it is
+% added below(CAR)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\g@addto@macro\cl@@ckpt{\@elt{slide}\@elt{overlay}\@elt{note}}
+\@addtoreset{overlay}{slide}
+\@addtoreset{note}{slide}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Redefine page counter to some other number.
+% The page counter will always be zero except when putting out an
+% extra page for a slide, note or overlay.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@definecounter{page}
+\@addtoreset{page}{slide}
+\@addtoreset{page}{note}
+\@addtoreset{page}{overlay}
+
+\def\theslide{\@arabic\c@slide}
+\def\theoverlay{\theslide-\@alph\c@overlay}
+\def\thenote{\theslide-\@arabic\c@note}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@setlimits \LIST \LOW \HIGH
+%
+% Assumes that \LIST = RANGE1,RANGE2,...,RANGEn (n>0)
+% Where RANGEi = j or j-k.
+%
+% Then \@setlimits globally sets
+% (i) \LIST := RANGE2, ... , RANGEn
+% (ii) \LOW := p
+% (iii) \HIGH := q
+% where either RANGE1 = p-q or RANGE1 = p and q=p.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sl@getargs#1-#2-#3\relax#4#5{\xdef#4{#1}\xdef#5{#2}}
+\def\@sl@ccdr#1,#2\relax#3#4{\xdef#3{#1-#1-}\xdef#4{#2}}
+
+\def\@setlimits #1#2#3{\expandafter\@sl@ccdr#1\relax\@sl@gtmp #1%
+\expandafter\@sl@getargs\@sl@gtmp\relax#2#3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \onlyslides{LIST} ::=
+% BEGIN
+% @onlyslidesw := true
+% \@doglslidelist :=G LIST,999999,999999
+% if @onlynotesw = true
+% else @onlynotesw := true
+% \@doglnotelist :=G LIST,999999,999999
+% fi
+% message: Only Slides LIST
+% END
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\onlyslides#1{\@onlyslideswtrue
+ \gdef\@doglslidelist{#1,999999,999999}%
+ \if@onlynotesw \else
+ \@onlynoteswtrue\gdef\@doglnotelist{999999,999999}\fi
+ \typeout{Only Slides #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \onlynotes{LIST} ::=
+% BEGIN
+% @onlynotesw := true
+% \@doglnotelist :=G LIST,999999,999999
+% if @onlyslidesw = true
+% else \@onlyslidesw := true
+% \@doglslidelist{999999,999999}
+% fi
+% message: Only Notes LIST
+% END
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\onlynotes#1{\@onlynoteswtrue
+ \gdef\@doglnotelist{#1,999999,999999}%
+ \if@onlyslidesw \else
+ \@onlyslideswtrue\gdef\@doglslidelist{999999,999999}\fi
+ \typeout{Only Notes #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \setupcounters ::= (similar to old \blackandwhite #1 ::= )
+% \newpage
+% page counter := 0
+% @bw := T
+% @visible := T
+% if @onlyslidesw = true
+% then \@doslidelist := \@doglslidelist
+% \@setlimits\@doslidelist\@doslidelow\@doslidehigh
+% fi
+% if @onlynotesw = true
+% then \@donotelist := \@doglnotelist
+% \@setlimits\@donotelist\@donotelow\@donotehigh
+% fi
+% \normalsize % Note, this sets font to \rmfamily , which sets
+% % \@currfont to \rmfamily
+% counter slidenumber := 0
+% counter note := 0
+% counter overlay := 0
+% @makingslides := F %% \blackandwhite: @makingslides := T
+% %% input #1
+% %% @makingslides := F
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+% In compatibility mode, need to define \verb+\blackandwhite+,
+% \verb+\colors+, \verb+\colorslides+, etc.
+\def\blackandwhite#1{\newpage\setcounter{page}{0}\@bwtrue\@visibletrue
+\if@onlyslidesw \xdef\@doslidelist{\@doglslidelist}%
+\@setlimits\@doslidelist\@doslidelow\@doslidehigh\fi
+\if@onlynotesw \xdef\@donotelist{\@doglnotelist}%
+\@setlimits\@donotelist\@donotelow\@donotehigh\fi
+\normalsize\setcounter{slide}{0}\setcounter{overlay}{0}%
+\setcounter{note}{0}\@makingslidestrue\input #1\@makingslidesfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \colors{COLORS} ::=
+% for \@colortemp := COLORS
+% do \csname \@colortemp \endcsname == \@color{\@colortemp} od
+% if \@colorlist = empty
+% then \@colorlist := COLORS
+% else \@colorlist := \@colorlist , COLORS
+% fi
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\colors#1{\@for\@colortemp:=#1\do{\expandafter
+ \xdef\csname\@colortemp\endcsname{\noexpand\@color{\@colortemp}}}\ifx
+ \@colorlist\@empty \gdef\@colorlist{#1}%
+ \else \xdef\@colorlist{\@colorlist,#1}\fi}
+
+\def\@colorlist{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \colorslides{FILE} ::=
+% \newpage
+% page counter := 0
+% @bw := F
+% for \@currcolor := \@colorlist
+% do @visible := T
+% if @onlyslidesw = true
+% then \@doslidelist := \@doglslidelist
+% \@setlimits\@doslidelist\@doslidelow\@doslidehigh
+% fi
+% if @onlynotesw = true
+% then \@donotelist := \@doglnotelist
+% \@setlimits\@donotelist\@donotelow\@donotehigh
+% fi
+% \normalsize
+% counter slide := 0
+% counter overlay := 0
+% counter note := 0
+% type message
+% generate color layer output page
+% @makingslides := T
+% input #1
+% @makingslides := F
+% od
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\colorslides#1{\newpage\setcounter{page}{0}\@bwfalse
+\@for\@currcolor:=\@colorlist\do
+{\@visibletrue
+\if@onlyslidesw \xdef\@doslidelist{\@doglslidelist}%
+\@setlimits\@doslidelist\@doslidelow\@doslidehigh\fi
+\if@onlynotesw \xdef\@donotelist{\@doglnotelist}%
+\@setlimits\@donotelist\@donotelow\@donotehigh\fi
+\normalsize\setcounter{slide}{0}\setcounter{overlay}{0}%
+\setcounter{note}{0}\typeout{color \@currcolor}%
+\newpage
+\begin{huge}%
+\begin{center}%
+COLOR LAYER\\[.75in]%
+\@currcolor
+\end{center}%
+\end{huge}%
+\newpage
+\@makingslidestrue
+\input #1
+\@makingslidesfalse}}
+%
+\else %% if@compatibility
+%
+\def\setupcounters{\newpage\setcounter{page}{0}\@bwtrue\@visibletrue
+\if@onlyslidesw \xdef\@doslidelist{\@doglslidelist}%
+\@setlimits\@doslidelist\@doslidelow\@doslidehigh\fi
+\if@onlynotesw \xdef\@donotelist{\@doglnotelist}%
+\@setlimits\@donotelist\@donotelow\@donotehigh\fi
+\normalsize\setcounter{slide}{0}\setcounter{overlay}{0}%
+\setcounter{note}{0}\@makingslidesfalse}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{\setupcounters}
+\fi %% if@compatibility
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \slide COLORS ::=
+% BEGIN
+% \changes{v2.3}{1994/03/16}{Moved \cs{newpage} up front, here and in
+% \cs{note} and \cs{overlay}}
+% \par\break
+% \stepcounter{slide}
+% \setcounter{page}{0} % in case of non-slide pages
+% \@slidesw :=G T
+% if @onlyslidesw = true % set \@slidesw = T iff
+% then % page to be output
+% while \c@slide > \@doslidehigh
+% do \@setlimits\@doslidelist\@doslidelow\@doslidehigh od
+% if \c@slide < \@doslidelow
+% then \@slidesw := F
+% fi
+% fi
+% if \@slidesw = T
+% then \@slidesw :=G F
+% \begingroup
+% if @bw = true
+% then \@slidesw :=G T
+% else \@color{COLORS}
+% \if@visible then \@slidesw :=G T \fi
+% fi
+% \endgroup
+% fi
+% if \@slidesw = T
+% then @makingslides := T
+% \thispagestyle{slide}
+% else \end{slide}
+% \@gobbletoend{slide}
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \endslide ::=
+% BEGIN
+% \par\break
+% END
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+\def\slide#1{\stepcounter{slide}\G@slideswtrue\if@onlyslidesw
+\@whilenum \c@slide >\@doslidehigh\relax
+\do{\@setlimits\@doslidelist\@doslidelow\@doslidehigh}\ifnum
+\c@slide <\@doslidelow\relax\G@slideswfalse\fi\fi
+\ifG@slidesw
+ \G@slideswfalse
+% FMi this is only a hack at the moment to get things running.
+% \begingroup
+ \if@bw\G@slideswtrue\else
+ \@color{#1}\if@visible \G@slideswtrue \fi
+ \fi
+% \endgroup
+\fi
+\ifG@slidesw \newpage\thispagestyle{slide}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This will set up the last color specified in the argument to
+% \verb+\slide+ as the current color. If only back and white slides
+% are prepared \verb+\last@color+ will be empty and effectly
+% \verb+\relax+ will be generated (hopefully).
+%
+% We need to reset to a default font at the beginning of a slide.
+% (not done yet).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\csname \last@color \endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else\end{slide}\@gobbletoend{slide}\fi}
+%
+\else %% if@compatibility
+%
+\def\slide{\par\break
+\stepcounter{slide}\setcounter{page}{0}\G@slideswtrue\if@onlyslidesw
+\@whilenum \c@slide >\@doslidehigh\relax
+\do{\@setlimits\@doslidelist\@doslidelow\@doslidehigh}\ifnum
+\c@slide <\@doslidelow\relax\G@slideswfalse\fi\fi
+\ifG@slidesw
+ \G@slideswfalse
+% FMi this is only a hack at the moment to get things running.
+% \begingroup
+ \if@bw\G@slideswtrue\else
+ \if@visible \G@slideswtrue \fi
+ \fi
+% \endgroup
+\fi
+\ifG@slidesw \@makingslidestrue\thispagestyle{slide}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This will set up the last color specified in the argument to
+% \verb+\slide+ as the current color. If only back and white slides
+% are prepared \verb+\last@color+ will be empty and effectly
+% \verb+\relax+ will be generated (hopefully).
+%
+% We need to reset to a default font at the beginning of a slide.
+% (not done yet).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\csname \last@color \endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else\end{slide}\@gobbletoend{slide}\fi}
+\fi %% if@compatibility
+
+\let\last@color\@empty
+
+\def\endslide{\par\break}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \overlay COLORS ::=
+% BEGIN
+% \par\break
+% \stepcounter{overlay}
+% \setcounter{page}{0} % in case of non-slide pages
+% \@slidesw :=G T
+% if @onlyslidesw = T % set \@slidesw = T iff
+% then % page to be output
+% if \c@slide < \@doslidelow
+% then \@slidesw :=G F
+% fi
+% fi
+% if \@slidesw = T
+% \@slidesw :=G F
+% \begingroup
+% if @bw = true
+% then \@slidesw :=G T
+% else \@color{COLORS}
+% \if@visible then \@slidesw :=G T \fi
+% fi
+% \endgroup
+% fi
+% if \@slidesw = T
+% then @makingslides := T
+% \thispagestyle{overlay}
+% else \end{overlay}
+% \@gobbletoend{overlay}
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \endoverlay ::=
+% BEGIN
+% \par\break
+% END
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+\def\overlay#1{\stepcounter{overlay}\G@slideswtrue%
+\if@onlyslidesw\ifnum \c@slide <\@doslidelow\relax
+\G@slideswfalse\fi\fi
+\ifG@slidesw \G@slideswfalse\begingroup\if@bw\G@slideswtrue%
+\else\@color{#1}\if@visible \G@slideswtrue\fi\fi\endgroup\fi
+\ifG@slidesw \newpage\thispagestyle{overlay}%
+\else\end{overlay}\@gobbletoend{overlay}\fi}
+%
+\else %%if@compatibility
+%
+\def\overlay{\par\break
+ \stepcounter{overlay}%
+ \setcounter{page}{0}%
+ \G@slideswtrue%
+ \if@onlyslidesw\ifnum \c@slide <\@doslidelow\relax
+ \G@slideswfalse\fi\fi
+ \ifG@slidesw \G@slideswfalse
+ \begingroup\if@bw\G@slideswtrue%
+ \else\if@visible \G@slideswtrue\fi\fi
+ \endgroup\fi
+ \ifG@slidesw \@makingslidestrue\thispagestyle{overlay}%
+ \else\end{overlay}\@gobbletoend{overlay}\fi}
+\fi %%if@compatibility
+
+\def\endoverlay{\par\break}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1993/11/12}{Removed extra blank.}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \note ::=
+% BEGIN
+% \par\break
+% \stepcounter{note}
+% \setcounter{page}{0} % in case of non-slide pages
+% if @bw = T
+% then
+% \@slidesw :=G T
+% if @onlynotesw = true % set \@notesw = T iff
+% then % page to be output
+% while \c@slide > \@donotehigh
+% do \@setlimits\@donotelist\@donotelow\@donotehigh od
+% if \c@slide < \@donotelow
+% then \@slidesw :=G F
+% fi
+% fi
+% else \@slidesw :=G F
+% fi
+% if \@slidesw = T
+% then @makingslides := T
+% \thispagestyle{note}
+% else \end{note}
+% \@gobbletoend{note}
+% fi
+% END
+%
+% \endnote ::=
+% BEGIN
+% \par\break
+% END
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+\def\note{\stepcounter{note}%
+ \if@bw
+ \G@slideswtrue
+ \if@onlynotesw\@whilenum \c@slide >\@donotehigh\relax
+ \do{\@setlimits\@donotelist\@donotelow\@donotehigh}\ifnum
+ \c@slide <\@donotelow\relax \G@slideswfalse\fi\fi
+ \else\G@slideswfalse\fi
+ \ifG@slidesw \newpage\thispagestyle{note}\else
+ \end{note}\@gobbletoend{note}\fi}
+%
+\else %%if@compatibility
+%
+\def\note{\par\break\stepcounter{note}\setcounter{page}{0}%
+ \if@bw
+ \G@slideswtrue
+ \if@onlynotesw\@whilenum \c@slide >\@donotehigh\relax
+ \do{\@setlimits\@donotelist\@donotelow\@donotehigh}\ifnum
+ \c@slide <\@donotelow\relax \G@slideswfalse\fi\fi
+ \else\G@slideswfalse\fi
+ \ifG@slidesw \@makingslidestrue\thispagestyle{note}\else
+ \end{note}\@gobbletoend{note}\fi}
+\fi %%if@compatibility
+
+\def\endnote{\par\break}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \@color{COLORS} ::=
+% BEGIN
+% if math mode
+% then type warning
+% fi
+% if @bw
+% then \visible
+% else \invisible
+% for \last@color := COLORS
+% do if \last@color = \@currcolor
+% then \visible
+% fi
+% od
+% fi
+% \ignorespaces
+% END
+%\end{verbatim}
+% FMi: |\last@color| will be used in |\slide| to set up first
+% color if no color is given.
+% I suppose that this is much too complicated. |\else\@tempswafalse|
+% would produce the same effect I imagine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@color#1{\@mmodetest
+ {\if@bw \@tempswatrue \else \@tempswafalse
+ \@for \reserved@a :=#1\do{\ifx\reserved@a\@currcolor\@tempswatrue\fi
+ \let\last@color\reserved@a}\fi
+ \if@tempswa \visible \else \invisible \fi
+ \ignorespaces}}
+
+\def\@mmodetest#1{\ifmmode\ClassWarning{slides}{Color-changing command
+ in math mode has been ignored}\else #1\fi}
+
+\def\invisible{\@mmodetest
+ {\if@visible
+ \@visiblefalse
+ \fontshape\f@shape\selectfont
+ \mathversion{invisible}%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces}}
+
+\def\visible{\@mmodetest
+ {\if@visible
+ \else
+ \@visibletrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here is the \LaTeXe{} interface hidden. We use a trick to provide
+% ourselves with a sort of additional attribute without making the
+% current mechanism even larger. The trick is that we denote
+% invisible by putting an uppercase |I| in front of the shape name
+% for invisible shapes and remove it again if we want to become
+% visible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \fontshape{\expandafter\@gobble\f@shape}\selectfont
+ \mathversion{normal}%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces}}
+
+\def\fontshape#1{\edef\f@shape{\if@visible \else I\fi #1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Macros for font handling}
+%
+% We let |\familydefault| point at |\sfdefault|, to make it easier
+% to use the document class slides with packages that set up other
+% fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\familydefault}{\sfdefault}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3l}{1994/12/16}{Added the declaration of the lasy font
+% family}
+% The \texttt{latexsym} package, which is needed to be able to access
+% the \LaTeX\ symbol fonts (lasy), sets things up so that for sizes
+% larger then 10 point magnifications of \texttt{lasy10} are
+% used. For slides we want to use magnifications of \texttt{lasy8},
+% so we set up the lasy family here to prevent \LaTeX\ from loading
+% \texttt{Ulasy.fd}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{lasy}{}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{lasy}{m}{n}{%
+ <12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>lasy8
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{lasy}{m}{In}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>ilasy8
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{picture,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Modifications to the picture environment}
+%
+% Below are the new definitions of the picture-drawing macros
+% required for SLiTeX. Only those commands that actually
+% draw something must be changed so that they do not produce
+% any output when the |@visible| switch is false.
+%
+% \changes{v2.2j}{1994/03/11}{Corrected \cs{@oval}, like previous
+% change to \file{latex.dtx}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\line(#1,#2)#3{\if@visible\@xarg #1\relax \@yarg #2\relax
+\@linelen #3\unitlength
+\ifnum\@xarg =\z@ \@vline
+ \else \ifnum\@yarg =\z@ \@hline \else \@sline\fi
+\fi\fi}
+
+\def\vector(#1,#2)#3{\if@visible\@xarg #1\relax \@yarg #2\relax
+\@linelen #3\unitlength
+\ifnum\@xarg =\z@ \@vvector
+ \else \ifnum\@yarg =\z@ \@hvector \else \@svector\fi
+\fi\fi}
+
+\def\dashbox#1(#2,#3){%
+\leavevmode\if@visible\hb@xt@\z@{\baselineskip \z@
+\lineskip \z@
+\@dashdim #2\unitlength
+\@dashcnt \@dashdim \advance\@dashcnt 200
+\@dashdim #1\unitlength\divide\@dashcnt \@dashdim
+\ifodd\@dashcnt\@dashdim\z@
+\advance\@dashcnt \@ne \divide\@dashcnt \tw@
+\else \divide\@dashdim \tw@ \divide\@dashcnt \tw@
+\advance\@dashcnt \m@ne
+\setbox\@dashbox \hbox{\vrule \@height \@halfwidth \@depth \@halfwidth
+\@width \@dashdim}\put(0,0){\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(0,#3){\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(#2,0){\hskip-\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(#2,#3){\hskip-\@dashdim\box\@dashbox}%
+\multiply\@dashdim \thr@@
+\fi
+\setbox\@dashbox \hbox{\vrule \@height \@halfwidth \@depth \@halfwidth
+\@width #1\unitlength\hskip #1\unitlength}\@tempcnta\z@
+\put(0,0){\hskip\@dashdim \@whilenum \@tempcnta <\@dashcnt
+\do{\copy\@dashbox\advance\@tempcnta \@ne }}\@tempcnta\z@
+\put(0,#3){\hskip\@dashdim \@whilenum \@tempcnta <\@dashcnt
+\do{\copy\@dashbox\advance\@tempcnta \@ne }}%
+\@dashdim #3\unitlength
+\@dashcnt=\@dashdim \advance\@dashcnt 200
+\@dashdim #1\unitlength\divide\@dashcnt \@dashdim
+\ifodd\@dashcnt \@dashdim=\z@
+\advance\@dashcnt \@ne \divide\@dashcnt \tw@
+\else
+\divide\@dashdim \tw@ \divide\@dashcnt \tw@
+\advance\@dashcnt \m@ne
+\setbox\@dashbox\hbox{\hskip -\@halfwidth
+\vrule \@width \@wholewidth
+\@height \@dashdim}\put(0,0){\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(#2,0){\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(0,#3){\lower\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}%
+\put(#2,#3){\lower\@dashdim\copy\@dashbox}%
+\multiply\@dashdim \thr@@
+\fi
+\setbox\@dashbox\hbox{\vrule \@width \@wholewidth
+\@height #1\unitlength}\@tempcnta\z@
+\put(0,0){\hskip -\@halfwidth \vbox{\@whilenum \@tempcnta <\@dashcnt
+\do{\vskip #1\unitlength\copy\@dashbox\advance\@tempcnta \@ne }%
+\vskip\@dashdim}}\@tempcnta\z@
+\put(#2,0){\hskip -\@halfwidth \vbox{\@whilenum \@tempcnta <\@dashcnt
+\relax\do{\vskip #1\unitlength\copy\@dashbox\advance\@tempcnta \@ne }%
+\vskip\@dashdim}}}\fi\@makepicbox(#2,#3)}
+
+\def\@oval(#1,#2)[#3]{\if@visible\begingroup \boxmaxdepth \maxdimen
+ \@ovttrue \@ovbtrue \@ovltrue \@ovrtrue
+ \@tfor\reserved@a :=#3\do
+ {\csname @ov\reserved@a false\endcsname}\@ovxx
+ #1\unitlength \@ovyy #2\unitlength
+ \@tempdimb \ifdim \@ovyy >\@ovxx \@ovxx\else \@ovyy \fi
+ \advance \@tempdimb -2\p@
+ \@getcirc \@tempdimb
+ \@ovro \ht\@tempboxa \@ovri \dp\@tempboxa
+ \@ovdx\@ovxx \advance\@ovdx -\@tempdima \divide\@ovdx \tw@
+ \@ovdy\@ovyy \advance\@ovdy -\@tempdima \divide\@ovdy \tw@
+ \@circlefnt \setbox\@tempboxa
+ \hbox{\if@ovr \@ovvert32\kern -\@tempdima \fi
+ \if@ovl \kern \@ovxx \@ovvert01\kern -\@tempdima \kern -\@ovxx \fi
+ \if@ovt \@ovhorz \kern -\@ovxx \fi
+ \if@ovb \raise \@ovyy \@ovhorz \fi}\advance\@ovdx\@ovro
+ \advance\@ovdy\@ovro \ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@
+ \@put{-\@ovdx}{-\@ovdy}{\box\@tempboxa}%
+ \endgroup\fi}
+
+\def\@circle#1{\if@visible \begingroup \boxmaxdepth \maxdimen
+ \@tempdimb #1\unitlength
+ \ifdim \@tempdimb >15.5\p@\relax \@getcirc\@tempdimb
+ \@ovro\ht\@tempboxa
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\@circlefnt
+ \advance\@tempcnta\tw@ \char \@tempcnta
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne \char \@tempcnta \kern -2\@tempdima
+ \advance\@tempcnta\tw@
+ \raise \@tempdima \hbox{\char\@tempcnta}\raise \@tempdima
+ \box\@tempboxa}\ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@
+ \@put{-\@ovro}{-\@ovro}{\box\@tempboxa}%
+ \else \@circ\@tempdimb{96}\fi\endgroup\fi}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1993/11/12}{Removed extra blank.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dot#1{%
+ \if@visible\@tempdimb #1\unitlength \@circ\@tempdimb{112}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes {v2.3m}{1994/03/20}{(DPC) Remove old \cs{@iframebox} and
+% \cs{fbox} defn}
+% \changes {v2.3m}{1994/03/20}{(DPC) Add \cs{@frameb@x} defn.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@frameb@x#1{%
+ \@tempdima\fboxrule
+ \advance\@tempdima\fboxsep
+ \advance\@tempdima\dp\@tempboxa
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox{%
+ \lower\@tempdima\hbox{%
+ \vbox{%
+ \if@visible\hrule\@height\else\vskip\fi\fboxrule
+ \hbox{%
+ \if@visible\vrule\@width\else\hskip\fi\fboxrule
+ #1%
+ \vbox{%
+ \vskip\fboxsep
+ \box\@tempboxa
+ \vskip\fboxsep}%
+ #1%
+ \if@visible\vrule\@width\else\hskip\fi\fboxrule}%
+ \if@visible\hrule\@height\else\vskip\fi\fboxrule}}}}
+
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frame#1{\if@visible\leavevmode
+\vbox{\vskip-\@halfwidth\hrule \@height\@halfwidth \@depth \@halfwidth
+ \vskip-\@halfwidth\hbox{\hskip-\@halfwidth \vrule \@width\@wholewidth
+ \hskip-\@halfwidth #1\hskip-\@halfwidth \vrule \@width \@wholewidth
+ \hskip -\@halfwidth}\vskip -\@halfwidth\hrule \@height \@halfwidth
+ \@depth \@halfwidth\vskip -\@halfwidth}\else #1\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1993/11/12}{Corrected \cs{@math} to \cs{m@th} in
+% definition of \cs{underline}.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{mods,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Other modifications to \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} commands}
+%
+% |\rule|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@rule[#1]#2#3{\@tempdima#3\advance\@tempdima #1\leavevmode
+ \hbox{\if@visible\vrule
+ \@width#2 \@height\@tempdima \@depth-#1\else
+\vrule \@width \z@ \@height\@tempdima \@depth-#1\vrule
+ \@width#2 \@height\z@\fi}}
+
+% \_ (Added 10 Nov 86)
+
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \if@visible\vbox{\hrule \@width.3em}\else
+ \vbox{\hrule \@height \z@ \@width.3em}\vbox{\hrule \@width \z@}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \overline, \underline, \frac and \sqrt
+%
+% \@mathbox{STYLE}{BOX}{MTEXT} : Called in math mode, typesets MTEXT and
+% stores result in BOX, using style STYLE.
+%
+% \@bphant{BOX} : Creates a phantom with dimensions BOX.
+% \@vbphant{BOX} : Creates a phantom with ht of BOX and zero width.
+% \@hbphant{BOX} : Creates a phantom with width of BOX
+% and zero ht & dp.
+% \@hvsmash{STYLE}{MTEXT} : Creates a copy of MTEXT with zero height and
+% width in style STYLE.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@mathbox#1#2#3{\setbox#2\hbox{$\m@th#1{#3}$}}
+
+\def\@vbphantom#1{\setbox\tw@\null \ht\tw@\ht #1\dp\tw@\dp #1%
+ \box\tw@}
+
+\def\@bphantom#1{\setbox\tw@\null
+ \wd\tw@\wd #1\ht\tw@\ht #1\dp\tw@\dp #1%
+ \box\tw@}
+
+\def\@hbphantom#1{\setbox\tw@\null \wd\tw@\wd #1\ht\tw@\z@ \dp\tw@\z@
+ \box\tw@}
+
+\def\@hvsmash#1#2{\@mathbox#1\z@{#2}\ht\z@\z@ \dp\z@\z@ \wd\z@\z@
+ \box\z@}
+
+\def\underline#1{\relax\ifmmode
+ \@xunderline{#1}\else $\m@th\@xunderline{\hbox{#1}}$\relax\fi}
+
+\def\@xunderline#1{\mathchoice{\@xyunderline\displaystyle{#1}}%
+ {\@xyunderline
+ \textstyle{#1}}{\@xyunderline\scriptstyle{#1}}{\@xyunderline
+ \scriptscriptstyle{#1}}}
+
+\def\@xyunderline#1#2{%
+ \@mathbox#1\@smashboxa{#2}\@hvsmash#1{\copy\@smashboxa}%
+ \if@visible \@hvsmash#1{\@@underline{\@bphantom\@smashboxa}}\fi
+ \@mathbox#1\@smashboxb{\@@underline{\box\@smashboxa}}%
+ \@bphantom\@smashboxb}
+
+\let\@@overline=\overline
+
+\def\overline#1{\mathchoice{\@xoverline\displaystyle{#1}}{\@xoverline
+ \textstyle{#1}}{\@xoverline\scriptstyle{#1}}{\@xoverline
+ \scriptscriptstyle{#1}}}
+
+\def\@xoverline#1#2{%
+ \@mathbox#1\@smashboxa{#2}\@hvsmash#1{\copy\@smashboxa}%
+ \if@visible \@hvsmash#1{\@@overline{\@bphantom\@smashboxa}}\fi
+ \@mathbox#1\@smashboxb{\@@overline{\box\@smashboxa}}%
+ \@bphantom\@smashboxb}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1993/04/14}{Corrected \cs{frac} command.}
+% \changes{v2.0d}{1993/11/12}{Removed \cs{vcenter} in \cs{@frac}.}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \@frac {STYLE}{DENOMSTYLE}{NUM}{DEN}{FONTSIZE} :
+% Creates \frac{NUM}{DENOM}
+% in style STYLE with NUM and DENOM in style DENOMSTYLE
+% FONTSIZE should be \textfont \scriptfont or \scriptscriptfont
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Added a group around the first argument of |\frac| to prevent
+% changes (for example font changes) to modify the contents of the
+% second argument.
+% \changes{v2.1c}{1993/12/13}{Added group around first arg.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frac#1#2{\mathchoice
+ {\@frac\displaystyle\textstyle{#1}{#2}\textfont}{\@frac
+ \textstyle\scriptstyle{#1}{#2}\textfont}{\@frac
+ \scriptstyle\scriptscriptstyle{#1}{#2}\scriptfont}{\@frac
+ \scriptscriptstyle\scriptscriptstyle{#1}{#2}\scriptscriptfont}}
+
+\def\@frac#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \@mathbox#1\@smashboxc{{\begingroup#3\endgroup\over#4}}%
+ \setbox\tw@\null
+ \ht\tw@ \ht\@smashboxc
+ \dp\tw@ \dp\@smashboxc
+ \wd\tw@ \wd\@smashboxc
+ \box\if@visible\@smashboxc\else\tw@\fi}
+
+\def\r@@t#1#2{\setbox\z@\hbox{$\m@th#1\@xysqrt#1{#2}$}%
+ \dimen@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@
+ \mskip5mu\raise.6\dimen@\copy\rootbox \mskip-10mu\box\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{v2.3w}{1996/05/15}{Removed use of obsolete command
+% \cs{@@sqrt} (CAR)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sqrt{\@ifnextchar[{\@sqrt}{\@xsqrt}}
+\def\@sqrt[#1]{\root #1\of}
+\def\@xsqrt#1{\mathchoice{\@xysqrt\displaystyle{#1}}{\@xysqrt
+ \textstyle{#1}}{\@xysqrt\scriptstyle{#1}}{\@xysqrt
+ \scriptscriptstyle{#1}}}
+\def\@xysqrt#1#2{\@mathbox#1\@smashboxa{#2}\if@visible
+ \@hvsmash#1{\sqrtsign{\@bphantom\@smashboxa}}\fi
+ \phantom{\sqrtsign{\@vbphantom\@smashboxa}}\box\@smashboxa}
+
+\newbox\@smashboxa
+\newbox\@smashboxb
+\newbox\@smashboxc
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% array and tabular environments: changes to `\verb+|+', |\hline|,
+% |\cline|, and |\vline|,
+% added 8 Jun 88
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arrayrule{\if@visible\@addtopreamble{\hskip -.5\arrayrulewidth
+ \vrule \@width \arrayrulewidth\hskip -.5\arrayrulewidth}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v2.3t}{1996/01/31}{Change in \cs{cline} calling interface}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cline#1{\if@visible\@cline#1\@nil\fi}
+
+\def\hline{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi
+ \if@visible \hrule \@height \arrayrulewidth
+ \else \hrule \@width \z@
+ \fi
+ \futurelet \reserved@a\@xhline}
+
+\def\vline{\if@visible \vrule \@width \arrayrulewidth
+ \else \vrule \@width \arrayrulewidth \@height \z@
+ \@depth \z@ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{output,}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Changes to \LaTeX{} output routine}
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \@makecol ==
+% BEGIN
+% % Following test added for slides to check if extra page
+% if @makingslides = T
+% then if \c@page > 0
+% then if \c@note > 0
+% then type 'Note \thenote too long.'
+% else if \c@overlay > 0
+% then type 'Overlay \theoverlay too long.'
+% else type 'Slide \theslide too long'
+% fi fi fi fi
+% ifvoid \insert\footins
+% then \@outputbox := \box255
+% else \@outputbox := \vbox {\unvbox255
+% \vskip \skip\footins
+% \footnoterule
+% \unvbox\@footinsert
+% }
+% fi
+% \@freelist :=G \@freelist * \@midlist
+% \@midlist :=G empty
+% \@combinefloats
+% \@outputbox := \vbox to \@colht{\boxmaxdepth := \maxdepth
+% \vfil %%\vfil added for slides
+% \unvbox\@outputbox
+% \vfil } %%\vfil added for slides
+% \maxdepth :=G \@maxdepth
+% END
+%\end{verbatim}
+% FMi simple hack to allow none centered slides Should be revised
+% of course.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@topfil\vfil
+
+\def\@makecol{\if@makingslides\ifnum\c@page>\z@ \@extraslide\fi\fi
+\ifvoid\footins \setbox\@outputbox\box\@cclv \let\@botfil\vfil
+ \else\let\@botfil\relax\setbox\@outputbox
+ \vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\vfil
+ \vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule\unvbox\footins\vskip
+ \z@ plus.1fil\relax}\fi
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}\gdef\@midlist{}\@combinefloats
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\@colht{\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth
+ \@topfil\unvbox\@outputbox\@botfil}\global\maxdepth\@maxdepth}
+
+\def\@extraslide{\ifnum\c@note>\z@
+ \ClassWarning{slides}{Note \thenote\space too long}\else
+ \ifnum\c@overlay>\z@
+ \ClassWarning{slides}{Overlay \theoverlay\space too long}\else
+ \ClassWarning{slides}{Slide \theslide\space too long}\fi\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\message{init}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Special \SLiTeX{} initializations}
+%
+%FMi why not allow for ref's ?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \nofiles
+
+\@visibletrue
+%</cmd>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..753528f9f29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slides.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\Msg{*** Generating slide cmd files and styles ***}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{slides.cls}{
+ \from{slides.dtx}{class}}
+ \file{slides.def}{
+ \from{slides.dtx}{cmd}}
+ }
+
+\Msg{*** Generating default fonts setup file for slides ***}
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+Details of how to use a configuration file to modify this part of
+the system are in the document `cfgguide.tex'.
+
+
+\endpreamble
+
+
+
+\Msg{*** Generating .fd files ***}
+
+\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
+this file to serve the needs of your installation.
+
+However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
+of this file under its original name.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generate{
+ \file{sfonts.def}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{main}}
+ \usepreamble\fdpreamble % change of preamble !
+ \file{ot1lcmss.fd}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{lcmss,fd}}
+ \file{ot1lcmtt.fd}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{lcmtt,fd}}
+ \file{omllcmm.fd}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{lcmm,fd}}
+ \file{omslcmsy.fd}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{lcmsy,fd}}
+ \file{omxlcmex.fd}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{lcmex,fd}}
+ \file{ullasy.fd}{
+ \from{slifonts.fdd}{llasy,fd}}
+ }
+
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
+\Msg{* \space\space All *.def}
+\Msg{* \space\space slides.cls}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
+\Msg{* `.drv' through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a3e3f3f1971
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/slifonts.fdd
@@ -0,0 +1,485 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+%\iffalse This is a META comment
+%
+% File `slifonts.fdd'.
+% Copyright (C) 1989-1998 LaTeX3 project, Frank Mittelbach and
+% Rainer Sch\"opf, all rights reserved.
+%
+%<lcmss&!ec>\ProvidesFile{ot1lcmss.fd}
+%<lcmtt&!ec>\ProvidesFile{ot1lcmtt.fd}
+%<lcmss&ec>\ProvidesFile{t1lcmss.fd}
+%<lcmtt&ec>\ProvidesFile{t1lcmtt.fd}
+%<lcmm, >\ProvidesFile{omllcmm.fd}
+%<lcmsy, >\ProvidesFile{omslcmsy.fd}
+%<lcmex, >\ProvidesFile{omxlcmex.fd}
+%<llasy, >\ProvidesFile{ullasy.fd}
+%<main, >\ProvidesFile{sfonts.def}
+%<*driver, >
+ \ProvidesFile{sfonts.drv}
+%</driver, >
+ [1998/06/12 v2.2e Standard LaTeX slide font definitions]
+%
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{sfonts.drv}
+\providecommand\dst{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+\title{The file \texttt{slifonts.fdd} for use with
+ \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
+ number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
+\date{\filedate}
+\author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+ \DocInput{slifonts.fdd}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%
+%\fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{78}
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.2c}{1997/05/26}{Removed spaces in and around arguments
+% to \cs{DeclareFontShape} and \cs{EC@family}.}
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1997/01/15}
+% {ec font support added}
+% \changes{v2.1m}{1996/11/20}
+% {lowercase fd filenames /1044}
+% \changes{v2.1l}{1996/05/17}
+% {Force \cs{hyphenchar} of OT1 fonts to 45, in case
+% \cs{defaulthyphenchar} has changed.}
+% \changes{v2.1l}{1996/05/17}
+% {Remove some spurious extra empty arguments to
+% \cs{DeclareFontFamily} calls}
+% \changes{v2.1j}{1995/09/27}{Globally replaced scale factor 19.91 by
+% 19.907 in \cs{DeclareFontShape}, as this gives better
+% rounded font sizes at 600dpi (suggested by Denis Roegel).}
+% \changes{v2.1i}{1995/09/19}{Corrected names of .fd files in argument
+% to \cs{ProvidesFile} commands.}
+% \changes{v2.1h}{1994/05/12}{Added \cs{ProvidesFile} commands.}
+% \changes{v2.1c}{1993/12/17}{Added size 8 to allow for \cs{LaTeX}
+% logo.}
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1993/12/13}{Removed \cs{CodelineIndex} from the
+% driver code.}
+% \changes{v2.1e}{1994/01/31}{Corrected extension in typeout.}
+% \changes{v2.1f}{1994/02/28}{Moved driver further up.}
+%
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% This file contains the external font information for special
+% variants of the the Computer Modern fonts to be used for overhead
+% slides. They allow to produce slides in a similar fashion as it was
+% originally done by \SliTeX{}.
+%
+% With \LaTeXe{} it is now no longer necessary to maintain a special
+% format. Instead the standard format may be used and internally only
+% different font definition files come into play.
+%
+% Note, that that you therefore can easily produce slides in different
+% fonts just by calling an appropriate package (like |times|) in
+% your |\usepackage| command. This works, for example, with all
+% fonts that are defined to be scalable (eg PostScript fonts) since
+% they can be scaled to any size.
+%
+% However, minor styles like |pandora| won't work because the standard
+% |.fd| files shipped with \LaTeXe{} only contain small sizes. You can,
+% of course, produce additional sizes and change the |.fd| files
+% accordingly, but in this case it might be better to distinguish
+% |.fd| files for normal text and for slides by prefixing the family
+% name with an |l| (see below).
+%
+% All the standard family names for \SliTeX{} fonts start out with
+% with an |l| as the first character. This will distinguish them from
+% text font families with similar names.
+%
+% In addition, we introduce an additional convention for shapes: if
+% $x$ is a shape, then |I|$x$ represents the invisible form of the
+% shape. This is used by the color separation macros and the
+% |\invisible| command of the slides style file.
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{A driver for this document}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
+% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the
+% \dst{} program.
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1993/12/14}{Corrected \cs{documentclass}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+%\DisableCrossrefs % Say \DisableCrossrefs if index is ready
+\RecordChanges % Gather update information
+%\OnlyDescription % comment out for implementation details
+%\OldMakeindex % use if your MakeIndex is pre-v2.9
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{slifonts.fdd}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The \dst{} modules}
+%
+% The following modules are used to direct \dst{} in
+% generating external files:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
+% main & generate \texttt{sfonts.def} \\
+% fd & produce a font definition file \\
+% ec & Use the extended EC font set rather than cm \\[2pt]
+% lccr & Concrete Roman slide sizes \\
+% lcmss & Computer Modern Sans slide sizes \\
+% lcmtt & Computer Modern Typewriter slide sizes \\
+% lcmm & Computer Modern Math italic slide sizes \\
+% lcmm & Computer Modern Math symbols slide sizes \\
+% lcmex & Computer Modern Math extension symbols slide sizes \\
+% llasy & \LaTeX{} symbols slide sizes \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% A typical \dst{} command file would then have entries like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\generateFile{OMSlcmsy.fd}{t}{\from{slifonts.fdd}{lcmsy,fd}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{The font definition files}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Concrete Roman}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2b}{1997/02/25}
+% {typo fixed in cccsc10. latex/2395}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lccr>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{lccr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lccr}{m}{sc}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>cccsc10%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lccr}{m}{sl}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>ccslc9%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lccr}{m}{n}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>ccr8%
+ }{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lccr}{m}{In}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>iccr8%
+ }{}
+%</lccr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Computer Modern Sans}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lcmss>
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{lcmss}{\hyphenchar\font45 }
+%<ec> \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{lcmss}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{n}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{n}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> lcmss8%
+%<ec> eclq8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{In}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{In}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> ilcmss8%
+%<ec> ieclq8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> lcmssi8%
+%<ec> ecli8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{Isl}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{Isl}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> ilcmssi8%
+%<ec> iecli8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{it}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{it}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{Iit}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{m}{Iit}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/m/Isl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> lcmssb8%
+%<ec> eclb8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{In}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{In}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> ilcmssb8%
+%<ec> ieclb8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% EC fonts have a bold slanted font for the slides class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+ eclo8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{Isl}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+ ieclo8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/bx/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmss}{bx}{Iit}{%
+ <->sub*lcmss/bx/Isl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</ec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% There are extra substitutions for the shape |ui| which are needed
+% for |\pounds| to not come out as a \$ sign (mostly).
+% \changes{v2.1k}{1995/10/31}{Added substitutions to make \cs{pounds}
+% work right in slides.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{ui}{%
+ <->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{ui}{%
+ <->sub*cmr/m/ui}{}
+%</!ec>
+%</lcmss>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Computer Modern Typewriter}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lcmtt>
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+%<ec> \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> cmtt8%
+%<ec> ecltt8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{In}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{In}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> icmtt8%
+%<ec> iecltt8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<!ec> \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{%
+%<ec> \DeclareFontShape{T1}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>%
+%<!ec> cmitt10%
+%<ec> ecit1000%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There are extra substitutions for the shape |ui| which are needed
+% for |\pounds| to not come out as a \$ sign (mostly).
+% \changes{v2.1k}{1995/10/31}{Added substitutions to make \cs{pounds}
+% work right in slides.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!ec>
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{m}{ui}{%
+ <->sub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmtt}{bx}{ui}{%
+ <->sub*cmtt/m/it}{}
+%</!ec>
+%</lcmtt>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Computer Modern Math}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lcmm>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{lcmm}{\skewchar\font'177}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{lcmm}{m}{it}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>cmmi8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{lcmm}{m}{Iit}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>icmmi8%
+ }{}
+%</lcmm>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Computer Modern Symbol}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lcmsy>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{lcmsy}{\skewchar\font'60}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{lcmsy}{m}{n}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>cmsy8%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{lcmsy}{m}{In}{%
+ <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>icmsy8%
+ }{}
+%</lcmsy>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Computer Modern large symbols}
+%
+% \changes{v2.1g}{1994/03/01}{Removed extra pair of curly braces
+% at end of \cs{DeclareFontFamily} command.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lcmex>
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMX}{lcmex}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{lcmex}{m}{n}{%
+ <->sfixed*[17.28]cmex10%
+ }{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{lcmex}{m}{In}{%
+ <->sfixed*[17.28]icmex10%
+ }{}
+%</lcmex>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{\LaTeX{} symbols}
+%
+% \changes{v2.2d}{1997/10/20}{Removed superfluous pair of braces at
+% end of \cs{DeclareFontFamily} command.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*llasy>
+\DeclareFontFamily{U}{llasy}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{llasy}{m}{n}{%
+ <12><13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>lasy8%
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontShape{U}{llasy}{m}{In}{%
+ <13.82><16.59><19.907><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>ilasy8%
+}{}
+%</llasy>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Setting defaults}
+%
+% The following statements go into the file \texttt{sfonts.def}
+% which plays a r\^ole similar to \texttt{fontdef.ltx}. Thus, you may
+% want to produce your own local variant of it if you intend to use
+% different fonts in your slides.
+% \changes{v2.0b}{1993/03/09}{Added \cs{fd@prefix} for \cs{input}}
+% \changes{v2.2a}{1997/01/15}{lowercase fd file}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*main>
+\DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{n}{19.907}
+\DeclareFontSubstitution{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{n}
+\input ot1lcmss.fd
+%</main>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% The next line goes into all files and in addition prevents \dst{}
+% from adding any further code from the main source file (such as a
+% character table.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/source2e.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/source2e.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..facf8547381
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/source2e.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,477 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 1999/12/01 or later.
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% \fi
+
+% This document will typeset the LaTeX sources as a single document.
+% This will produce quite a large file (roughly 555 pages) and may
+% take a long time.
+%
+% Some notes on processing this document are contained at the end
+% of this document, after \end{document}
+%
+% DPC 1997/11/17
+%
+% First a special index style for makeindex
+%
+
+\begin{filecontents}{source2e.ist}
+actual '='
+quote '!'
+level '>'
+preamble
+"\n \\begin{theindex} \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
+postamble
+"\n\n \\end{theindex}\n"
+item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem "
+item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem "
+delim_0 "\\pfill "
+delim_1 "\\pfill "
+delim_2 "\\pfill "
+% The next lines will produce some warnings when
+% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different
+% versions of the program:
+lethead_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil "
+lethead_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+lethead_flag 1
+heading_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil "
+heading_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+headings_flag 1
+
+% and just for source2e:
+% Remove R so I is treated in sequence I J K not I II III
+page_precedence "rnaA"
+\end{filecontents}
+
+
+
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+
+\listfiles
+
+% Do not index some TeX primitives, and some common plain TeX commands.
+
+\DoNotIndex{\def,\long,\edef,\xdef,\gdef,\let,\global}
+\DoNotIndex{\if,\ifnum,\ifdim,\ifcat,\ifmmode,\ifvmode,\ifhmode,%
+ \iftrue,\iffalse,\ifvoid,\ifx,\ifeof,\ifcase,\else,\or,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\box,\copy,\setbox,\unvbox,\unhbox,\hbox,%
+ \vbox,\vtop,\vcenter}
+\DoNotIndex{\@empty,\immediate,\write}
+\DoNotIndex{\egroup,\bgroup,\expandafter,\begingroup,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\divide,\advance,\multiply,\count,\dimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\relax,\space,\string}
+\DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\@spaces,\openin,\openout,%
+ \closein,\closeout}
+\DoNotIndex{\catcode,\endinput}
+\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\message,\read,\the,\m@ne,\noexpand}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\vsize,\hskip,\vskip,\kern,\hfil,\hfill,\hss}
+\DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\z@,\z@skip,\@ne,\tw@,\p@}
+\DoNotIndex{\dp,\wd,\ht,\vss,\unskip}
+
+% Set up the Index and Change History to use \part
+\IndexPrologue{\part*{Index}%
+ \markboth{Index}{Index}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Index}%
+ The italic numbers denote the pages where the
+ corresponding entry is described,
+ numbers underlined point to the definition,
+ all others indicate the places where it is used.}
+
+\GlossaryPrologue{\part*{Change History}%
+% Allow control names to be hyphenated here...
+ {\GlossaryParms\ttfamily\hyphenchar\font=`\-}%
+ \markboth{Change History}{Change History}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Change History}}
+
+% The standard \changes command modified slightly to better cope with
+% this multiple file document.
+\makeatletter
+\def\changes@#1#2#3{%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{#2\space\currentfile\space#1\levelchar
+ \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty
+ \space
+ \actualchar
+ \generalname
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@gobble
+ \saved@macroname
+ \actualchar
+ \string\verb\quotechar*%
+ \verbatimchar\saved@macroname
+ \verbatimchar
+ \fi
+ :\levelchar #3}}%
+ \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack}
+\makeatother
+
+% Produce a Change Log and (2 column) Index.
+\RecordChanges
+\CodelineIndex
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+
+% Needed for documentation in ltoutenc.dtx
+\usepackage{textcomp}
+
+\begin{document}
+ \title{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}
+ \author{%
+ Johannes Braams\\
+ David Carlisle\\
+ Alan Jeffrey\\
+ Leslie Lamport\\
+ Frank Mittelbach\\
+ Chris Rowley\\
+ Rainer Sch\"opf}
+
+% This command will be used to input the patch file
+% if that file exists.
+\newcommand{\includeltpatch}{%
+ \def\currentfile{ltpatch.ltx}
+ \part{ltpatch}
+ {\let\ttfamily\relax
+ \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}%
+ Things we did wrong\ldots
+ \IndexInput{ltpatch.ltx}}
+
+
+
+% Get the date from ltvers.dtx
+\makeatletter
+\let\patchdate=\@empty
+\begingroup
+ \def\ProvidesFile#1\fmtversion#2{\date{#2}\endinput}
+ \input{ltvers.dtx}
+\global\let\X@date=\@date
+
+% Add the patch version if available.
+ \long\def\Xdef#1#2#3\def#4#5{%
+ \xdef\X@date{#2}%
+ \xdef\patchdate{#5}%
+ \endinput}%
+ \InputIfFileExists{ltpatch.ltx}
+ {\let\def\Xdef}{\global\let\includeltpatch\relax}
+\endgroup
+
+\ifx\@date\X@date
+ \def\Xpatch{0}
+ \ifx\patchdate\Xpatch\else
+ \edef\@date{\@date\space Patch level \patchdate}
+ \fi
+\else
+ \@warning{ltpatch.ltx does not match ltvers.dtx!}
+ \let\includeltpatch\relax
+\fi
+\makeatother
+
+ \pagenumbering{roman}
+ \maketitle
+ \renewcommand\maketitle{}
+
+ \tableofcontents
+
+ \clearpage
+
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% Each of the following \DocInclude lines includes a file with extension
+% .dtx. Each of these files may be typeset separately. For instance
+% latex ltboxes.dtx
+% will typeset the source of the LaTeX box commands.
+%
+% If this file is processed, each of these separate dtx files will be
+% contained as a part of a single document. Using ltxdoc.cfg you can
+% then optionally produce a combined index and/or change history for
+% the entire source of the format file. Note that such a document will
+% be quite large (about 555 pages).
+%
+
+ \DocInclude{ltdirchk} % System dependant initialisation
+
+ \DocInclude{ltplain} % LaTeX version of Knuth's plain.tex
+
+ \DocInclude{ltvers} % Current version date
+
+ \DocInclude{ltdefns} % Initial definitions.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltalloc} % Allocation of counters and others.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltcntrl} % Program control macros.
+
+ \DocInclude{lterror} % Error handling.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltpar} % Paragraphs.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltspace} % Spacing, line and page breaking.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltlogos} % Logos.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfiles} % \input files and related commands
+
+ \DocInclude{ltoutenc} % Output encoding interface
+
+ \DocInclude{ltcounts} % Counters
+
+ \DocInclude{ltlength} % Lengths
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfssbas} % NFSS Base macros
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfsstrc} % NFSS Tracing (and tracefnt.sty)
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfsscmp} % NFSS1 Compatibility
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfssdcl} % NFSS Declarative interface
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfssini} % NFSS Initialisation
+
+ \DocInclude{fontdef} % fonttext.ltx/fontmath.ltx
+
+ \DocInclude{preload} % preload.ltx
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfntcmd} % \textrm etc
+
+ \DocInclude{ltpageno} % Page numbering
+
+ \DocInclude{ltxref} % Cross referencing
+
+ \DocInclude{ltmiscen} % Miscellaneous environment definitions.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltmath} % Mathematics set up.
+
+ \DocInclude{ltlists} % List and related environments
+
+ \DocInclude{ltboxes} % Parbox and friends
+
+ \DocInclude{lttab} % Tabbing tabular and array
+
+ \DocInclude{ltpictur} % Picture mode
+
+ \DocInclude{ltthm} % Theorem environments
+
+ \DocInclude{ltsect} % Sectioning
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfloat} % Floats
+
+ \DocInclude{ltidxglo} % Index and Glossary
+
+ \DocInclude{ltbibl} % Bibliography
+
+ \DocInclude{ltpage} % \pagestyle \raggedbottom \sloppy
+
+ \DocInclude{ltoutput} % Output routine
+
+ \DocInclude{ltclass} % Package & Class interface
+
+ \DocInclude{lthyphen} % Hyphenation (hyphen.ltx).
+
+ \DocInclude{ltfinal} % Last minute initialisations and dump
+
+ \includeltpatch % Corrections distributed after the full release
+
+% Stop here if ltxdoc.cfg says \AtEndOfClass{\OnlyDescription}
+\StopEventually{\end{document}}
+
+\clearpage
+\pagestyle{headings}
+
+% Make TeX shut up.
+\hbadness=10000
+\newcount\hbadness
+\hfuzz=\maxdimen
+
+\typeout{%
+ Produce change log with^^J%
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo}
+
+
+\PrintChanges
+
+\clearpage
+
+% makeindex needs a symbol between the parts of composite page numbers
+% but we dont want one, so:
+\typeout{%
+ Produce index with^^J%
+ makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx}
+
+\begingroup
+\def\endash{--}
+\catcode`\-\active
+\def-{\futurelet\temp\indexdash}
+\def\indexdash{\ifx\temp-\endash\fi}
+
+\PrintIndex
+\endgroup
+
+% Make sure that the index is not printed twice
+% (ltxdoc.cfg might have a second \PrintIndex command)
+\let\PrintChanges\relax
+\let\PrintIndex\relax
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+To use this file to produce a fully indexed source code
+you need to execute the following (or equivalent) commands:
+
+ latex source2e.tex
+
+ makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo
+
+ latex source2e.tex
+ latex source2e.tex
+
+
+The makeindex style source2e.ist is used in place of the usual
+doc gind.ist to ensure that I is used in the sequence I J K
+not I II II, which would be the default makeindex behaviour.
+
+The third run with latex is only required to get the table of
+contents entries for the change log and index. You may speed things up
+by using the \includeonly mechanism so as not to typeset the source
+files on the second run. This involves changing the file
+ltxdoc.cfg
+between the latex runs.
+
+The following unix script automates this.
+ (It could easily be ported to scripts for DOS or VMS,
+ rm is ReMove a file, and echo "..." > file writes ... to "file".)
+
+
+After this script (after the second ==============) is a similar script
+that will produce the documentation for all the files in the base
+distribution that are *not* included in source2e.dvi. This second script
+was requested, but before using it, beware it will take a long time!
+It may however be modified as required, eg to not typeset the fdd files
+or whatever...
+
+==============
+#!/bin/sh
+
+rm -f source2e.gls source2e.ind source2e.toc
+
+# First run:
+# Create new standard ltxdoc.cfg file
+# Pass the (possibly empty) list of arguments supplied on the
+# command line to article class.
+#
+# If you use A4 paper, running this script with argument
+# a4paper
+# may save about 30 pages.
+#
+echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg
+
+
+# Now LaTeX the file with this cfg file.
+#
+latex source2e.tex
+
+
+# Make the Change log and Glossary.
+#
+makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx
+makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo
+
+
+# Second run: append \includeonly{} to ltxdoc.cfg to speed up things
+# (this run needed only to get changes and index listed in .toc file)
+#
+# Note that the index will not be made incorrect by the insertion
+# of the table of contents as the front matter uses a diferent page
+# numbering scheme.
+#
+echo "\includeonly{}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+
+latex source2e.tex
+
+
+# Third and final run, to put everything together.
+# First restore the cfg file:
+#
+echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg
+latex source2e.tex
+
+
+==============
+#!/bin/sh
+
+# Running this script will process all the dtx fdd and *guide.tex
+# and ltnews*.tex files in the LaTeX distribution, except the dtx
+# files included in source2e.tex.
+# (The shell first script in the comments of source2e.tex will
+# process those.)
+
+# Any command line arguments (eg a4paper) are taken as options to the
+# article class.
+
+# This script is likely to take ages!
+
+echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg
+echo "\batchmode" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+
+# The next four lines produce full indexes and change logs
+# you may not want those.
+echo "\AtBeginDocument{\RecordChanges}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+echo "\AtEndDocument{\PrintChanges}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+echo "\AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+echo "\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+
+# If you do not want any code listings, just documentation, then instead
+# of the above four lines, uncomment the following:
+# echo "\AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}" >> ltxdoc.cfg
+
+echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxguide.cfg
+echo "\batchmode" >> ltxguide.cfg
+
+cp ltxguide.cfg ltnews.cfg
+
+
+for i in *dtx *fdd *guide.tex ltnews*.tex
+do
+B=`basename $i .dtx`
+
+if (grep "Include{$B}" source2e.tex >/dev/null ; )
+then
+echo In source2e: $i
+else
+echo latex $i
+ if (latex $i > /dev/null)
+ then
+ echo latex $i
+ latex $i > /dev/null
+ echo makeindex -s gind.ist $B.idx
+ makeindex -s gind.ist $B.idx > /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+ echo makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $B.gls $B.glo
+ makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $B.gls $B.glo > /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+ echo latex $i
+ latex $i > /dev/null
+ else
+ echo "!!! LaTeX ERROR: $i. (See $B.log.)"
+ fi
+fi
+
+done
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3f549590488
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%% \CheckSum{110}
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%
+%
+% \changes{v2.1a}{1994/03/10}{Update for \LaTeXe}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\@cclvi,\@cclv,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ifnextchar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@M,\@tempboxa,\advance,\alloc,\begingroup,\bgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\box,\count@,\def,\do,\docdate,\egroup,\endgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\fi,\filedate,\fileversion,\font,\fontdimen,\global}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifinner,\ifnum,\immediate,\let,\long,\loop,\m@ne}
+% \DoNotIndex{\noexpand,\relax,\repeat,\scriptfont}
+% \DoNotIndex{\scriptscriptfont,\setbox,\sixt@@n,\space,\textfont}
+% \DoNotIndex{\toks,\toksdef,\write,\xdef,\z@}%
+%
+%
+%\title{The file \texttt{syntonly.dtx} for use with
+% \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
+% number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}\\[2pt]
+% It contains the code for \texttt{syntonly.sty}}
+% \author{Frank Mittelbach \and Rainer Sch\"opf}
+%
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% This package implements the |\syntaxonly| declaration for \LaTeXe.
+% This command can be used in the preamble for running a document
+% through \LaTeX{} without actually getting any output.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+% \section{Identification}
+%
+% We identify the package and its current version.
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1995/04/22}{Removed surplus \cs{typeout} lines}
+% \changes{v2.1c}{1996/06/14}{Rearange \cs{GetFileInfo} useage.}
+% \changes{v2.1d}{1998/08/17}{(RmS) Minor documentation fixes.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{syntonly}
+%<*dtx>
+ \ProvidesFile{syntonly.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%<*package|dtx>
+ [1999/09/17 v2.1e Standard LaTeX2e package]
+%</package|dtx>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\iffalse
+%
+% \section{The documentation driver file}
+%
+% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
+% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
+% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the \dst{}
+% program.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\GetFileInfo{syntonly.dtx}
+\providecommand\dst{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{syntonly.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dummyft@}
+% First of all we need to define the `dummy' font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\font\dummyft@=dummy \relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1995/05/25}{Removed unneeded fontdimen settings for
+% dummyft@}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifsyntax@}
+% Now we can define the `syntax only' feature. We define a switch
+% |\if@syntax| so that any macro can always find out if it
+% is really supposed to typeset text. Its default is to run in
+% normal mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifsyntax@
+\syntax@false
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\syntaxonly}
+% The |\syntaxonly| macro sets up everything for syntax
+% checking.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\syntaxonly{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First of all it sets the |syntax@| switch to \texttt{true}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \syntax@true
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then it globally sets all fonts to the dummy font. These are:
+% the current font outside math mode,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\dummyft@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and the $3\times16$ math fonts for the $16$ math \emph{groups}.
+% We use a loop to set these.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \count@\sixt@@n
+ \loop
+ \ifnum\count@ >\z@
+ \advance\count@\m@ne
+ \global\textfont\count@\dummyft@
+ \global\scriptfont\count@\dummyft@
+ \global\scriptscriptfont\count@\dummyft@
+ \repeat
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Since all font changes occur either via |\selectfont| (in
+% text or |\mathversion| (for math mode) it is sufficient
+% to change these to no-ops. In addition we must prevent
+% the loading of math fonts, this is done by making
+% |\getanddefine@fonts| a no-op.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\selectfont\relax
+ \global\let\mathversion\@gobble
+ \global\let\getanddefine@fonts\@gobbletwo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We prevent \TeX{} from complaining about the dummy font
+% having no characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tracinglostchars\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we disable the output routine, and set |\frenchspacing|
+% (which is slightly faster than |\nonfrenchspacing|).
+% Finally we set |\hbadness| to $10000$ to avoid overfull box
+% messages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \nopages@
+ \frenchspacing
+ \hbadness\@M}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1995/05/25}{Removed non-outer newtoks@: newtoks is no
+% longer outer}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nopages@}
+% \changes{v1.0b}{1990/01/14}{Rewrite of the \cs{nopages@} macro to
+% correctly handle footnote insertions, floats and marginpars.}
+% The |\nopages@| macro disables the \LaTeX{} output routine.
+% To this end we define a very simple output routine that empties
+% the output \emph{and} footnote boxes (remember that the latter
+% are insertions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nopages@{%
+ \output {\setbox\z@\box\@cclv
+ \setbox\z@\box\footins
+ \deadcycles\z@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we protect it against definition by a style file.
+% \changes{v2.1b}{1995/05/25}{newtoks is no longer outer}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \newtoks\output
+% \end{macrocode}
+% But this is not enough: normally the \LaTeX{} output routine
+% is responsible for dealing with floating objects.
+% We therefore also redefine the internal macros for handling
+% floats and marginpars.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@xfloat##1[##2]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There are a few things that have to be retained:
+% the definition of |\@captype| since it is used by the
+% |\caption| command,
+% \changes{v1.0c}{1990/01/16}{Definition of \cs{@captype} added.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@captype{##1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% the error message issued when not in outer paragraph mode,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifinner\@parmoderr\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and the |\@parboxrestore| command for the body of the
+% float. This is necessary since it restores the original
+% definitions of important commands like |\par| or |\\|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup\@parboxrestore}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\end@float| must now only close the brace:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\end@float\egroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The redefinition of the |\marginpar| command is a bit more
+% complicated since we have to check for the optional argument.
+% First we redefine the command itself:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\marginpar{\ifinner\@parmoderr\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We open a group so that everything gathered in a temporary box
+% can easily be thrown away by closing it again (see below).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup \@ifnextchar [\@xmpar\@ympar}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\@xmpar| and |\@ympar| are now defined similar to
+% |\@xfloat| above.
+% If an optional argument is present |\@xmpar| typesets
+% it in a temporary box that is thrown away later.
+% Then it calls up |\@ympar| to process |\marginpar|'s
+% argument.
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1990/01/21}{Added forgotten \cs{vbox}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \long\def\@xmpar[##1]{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\@parboxrestore ##1}\@ympar}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% |\@ympar| gathers its argument in the same temporary box
+% and throws away its contents by closing the group opened up in
+% |\marginpar| above.
+% \changes{v1.0d}{1990/01/21}{Added forgotten \cs{vbox}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \long\def\@ympar##1{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\@parboxrestore ##1}\endgroup}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And that's all we had to do.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@preamblecmds}
+% We disable the use of the |\syntaxonly| command after
+% |\begin{document}|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\syntaxonly
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \Finale
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b4aaa71c761
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/syntonly.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
+%%
+
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file.
+
+This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+--------------------------------------------------------------
+
+It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+version 2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+
+This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the LaTeX
+base system. You may however distribute the LaTeX base system without
+such generated files.
+
+The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+information.
+
+The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+\usedir{tex/latex/base}
+
+\generateFile{syntonly.sty}{t}{%
+ \from{syntonly.dtx}{package}}
+
+\endbatchfile
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e2e47214875
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/unpack.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+%%
+%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
+%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
+%% LaTeX or TeX.
+%%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%%
+%% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+%% -------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% In particular, NO PERMISSION is granted to modify the contents of this
+%% file since it contains the legal notices that are placed in the files
+%% it generates.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%%
+%% --------------- start of bootstrap commands ------------------
+%%
+%%
+%% LaTeX 2e installation script (concurrent version)
+\let\documentclass\undefined
+\input ltdirchk.dtx
+\input docstrip.dtx
+
+{
+\def\ProvidesFile#1\end#2{}
+\def\everyjob#1\endinput{}
+\@@input ltvers.dtx
+\Msg{**********************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Welcome to the Installation routine of}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* \space\space\space\space\fmtname\space <\fmtversion>}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Depending on your machine the installation}
+\Msg{* might take a long time --- this is the}
+\Msg{* price for being able to run on all platforms.}
+\Msg{* So please be patient :-)}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{**********************************************}
+\Msg{}
+\Msg{}
+}
+
+
+\askonceonly
+
+\keepsilent
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% generate main kernel file
+%%% and the .ltx files that set up the default settings
+%%% that may be changed by the use of .cfg files.
+
+\batchinput{format.ins}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% generate .def files for encoding support
+
+\batchinput{inputenc.ins}
+\batchinput{ltoutenc.ins}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%% other classes and packages
+
+\batchinput{classes.ins}
+
+\batchinput{letter.ins}
+
+\batchinput{slides.ins}
+
+\batchinput{proc.ins}
+
+\batchinput{latexsym.ins}
+
+\batchinput{cmfonts.ins}
+
+\batchinput{ec.ins}
+
+\batchinput{latex209.ins}
+
+\batchinput{docstrip.ins}
+
+\batchinput{ifthen.ins}
+
+\batchinput{graphpap.ins}
+
+\batchinput{makeindx.ins}
+
+\batchinput{syntonly.ins}
+
+\batchinput{exscale.ins}
+
+\batchinput{alltt.ins}
+
+\batchinput{nfssfont.ins}
+
+\batchinput{fixltx2e.ins}
+
+
+\Msg{}
+\Msg{***********************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Now run INITEX on latex.ltx}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{***********************************}
+\Msg{}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f0c3e434ccb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/base/utf8ienc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1221 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
+% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+% in this file.
+%
+% This file is part of the LaTeX base system.
+% -------------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
+% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+%% \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} %% That looked wrong to Chris.
+\GetFileInfo{utf8.def}
+\title{Providing some UTF-8 support via \texttt{inputenc}}
+\date{\fileversion\space\filedate{} printed \today}
+ \author{%
+ Frank Mittelbach \and Chris Rowley\thanks{Borrowing heavily from
+ code by David Carlisle and tables by Sebastian Rahtz; some table
+ and code cleanup by Javier Bezos}}
+\begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ \tableofcontents
+ \DocInput{utf8ienc.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{1068}
+%
+% \newpage
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% [The whole section is rather unfinished \ldots\ just like the code, sorry!]
+%
+% \subsection{Background and general stuff}
+%
+% For many reasons what this package provides is a long way from any
+% type of `Unicode compliance'.
+%
+% In stark contrast to 8-bit character sets, with 16 or more bits it can
+% easily be very inefficient to support the full range.\footnote{In
+% fact, \LaTeX's current 8-bit support does not go so far as to make
+% all 8-bit characters into valid input.} Moreover, useful support of
+% character input by a typesetting system overwhelmingly means finding
+% an acceptable visual representation of a sequence of characters and
+% this, for \LaTeX{}, means having available a suitably encoded 8-bit
+% font.
+%
+% Unfortunately it is not possible to predict exactly what valid UTF-8
+% octet sequences will appear in a particular file so it is best to
+% make all the unsupported but valid sequences produce a reasonably
+% clear and noticeable error message.
+%
+% There are two directions from which to approach the question of what
+% to load. One is to specify the ranges of Unicode characters that will
+% result in some sensible typesetting; this requires the provider to
+% ensure that suitable fonts are loaded and that these input characters
+% generate the correct typesetting via the encodings of those fonts. The
+% other is to inspect the font encodings to be used and use these to
+% define which input Unicode characters should be supported.
+%
+% For Western European languages, at least, going in either direction
+% leads to many straightforward decisions and a few that are more
+% subjective. In both cases some of the specifications are \TeX{}
+% specific whilst most are independent of the particular typesetting
+% software in use.
+%
+% As we have argued elsewhere, \LaTeX{} needs to refer to characters via
+% `seven-bit-text' names and, so far, these have been chosen by
+% reference to historical sources such as Plain \TeX{} or Adobe encoding
+% descriptions. It is unclear whether this ad hoc naming structure should
+% simply be extended or whether it would be useful to
+% supplement it with standardised internal Unicode character names such as
+% one or more of the following:\footnote{Burkhard und Holger Mittelbach
+% spielen mit mir! Sie haben etwas hier geschrieben.}
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ltxutwochar <4 hex digits>
+%
+% \ltxuchar {<hex digits>}
+% B H U R R R
+%
+% \ltxueightchartwo <2 utf8 octets as 8-bit char tokens>
+% \ltxueightcharthree <3 utf8 octets ...>
+% \ltxueightcharfour <4 utf8 octets ...>
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{More specific stuff}
+%
+% In addition to setting up the mechanism for reading UTF-8 characters
+% and specifying the \LaTeX-level support available, this package
+% contains support for some default historically expected \TeX-related
+% characters and some example `Unicode definition files' for standard
+% font encodings.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Notes}
+%
+% This package does not support Unicode combining characters as \TeX{}
+% is not really equipped to make this possible.
+%
+% No attempt is made to be useful beyond Latin, and maybe Cyrillic,
+% for European languages (as of now).
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Basic operation of the code}
+%
+% The \texttt{inputenc} package makes the upper 8-bit characters active and
+% assigns to all of them an error message. It then waits for the
+% input encoding files to change this set-up. Similarly, whenever
+% |\inputencoding| is encountered in a document, first the upper
+% 8-bit characters are set back to produce an error and then the
+% definitions for the new input encoding are loaded, changing some of the
+% previous settings.
+%
+% The 8-bit input encodings currently supported by \texttt{inputenc}
+% all use declarations such as |\DeclareInputText| and the like to map an
+% 8-bit number to some \LaTeX{} internal form, e.g.~to |\"a|.
+%
+% The situation when supporting UTF-8 as the input encoding is
+% different, however. Here we only have to set up the actions of
+% those 8-bit numbers that can be the first octet in a UTF-8
+% representation of a Unicode character. But we cannot simply set
+% this to some internal \LaTeX{} form since the Unicode character
+% consists of more than one octet; instead we have to define this
+% starting octet to parse the right number of further octets that
+% together form the UTF-8 representation of some Unicode character.
+%
+% Therefore when switching to \texttt{utf8} within the
+% \texttt{inputenc} framework the characters with numbers (hex)
+% from \texttt{"C2} to \texttt{"DF} are defined to parse for a
+% second octet following, the characters from \texttt{"E0} to
+% \texttt{"EF} are defined to parse for two more octets and finally
+% the characters from \texttt{"F0} to \texttt{"F3} are defined to
+% parse for three additional octets. These additional octets are
+% always in the range \texttt{"80} to \texttt{"B9}.
+%
+% Thus, when such a character is encountered in the document (so
+% long as expansion is not prohibited) a defined number of
+% additional octets (8-bit characters) are read and from them a
+% unique control sequence name is immediately constructed.
+%
+% This control sequence is either defined (good) or undefined
+% (likely); in the latter case the user gets an error message
+% saying that this UTF-8 sequence (or, better, Unicode character)
+% is not supported.
+%
+% If the control sequence is set up to do something useful then it will
+% expand to a \LaTeX{} internal form: e.g.~for the utf8 sequence of
+% two octets \texttt{"C3 "A4} we get |\"a| as the
+% internal form which then, depending on the font encoding,
+% eventually resolves to the single glyph `latin-a-umlaut' or to
+% the composite glyph `latin-a with an umlaut accent'.
+%
+% These mappings from (UTF-8 encoded) Unicode characters to \LaTeX{}
+% internal forms are made indirectly. The code below provides a
+% declaration |\DeclareUnicodeCharacter| which maps Unicode numbers
+% (as hexadecimal) to \LaTeX{} internal forms.
+%
+% This mapping needs to be set up only once so here it is done at
+% |\begin{document}| by looking at the list of font encodings that
+% are loaded by the document and providing mappings related to
+% those font encodings whenever these are available. Thus at most
+% only those Unicode characters that can be represented by the glyphs
+% available in these encodings will be defined.
+%
+% Technically this is done by loading one file per encoding,
+% if available, that is supposed to provide the necessary mapping
+% information.
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Coding}
+%
+% \subsection{Housekeeping}
+%
+% The usual introductory bits and pieces:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<utf8>\ProvidesFile{utf8.def}
+%<test>\ProvidesFile{utf8-test.tex}
+%<+lcy> \ProvidesFile{lcyenc.dfu}
+%<+ly1> \ProvidesFile{lcyenc.dfu}
+%<+oms> \ProvidesFile{omsenc.dfu}
+%<+ot1> \ProvidesFile{ot1enc.dfu}
+%<+ot2> \ProvidesFile{ot2enc.dfu}
+%<+t1> \ProvidesFile{t1enc.dfu}
+%<+t2a> \ProvidesFile{t2aenc.dfu}
+%<+t2b> \ProvidesFile{t2benc.dfu}
+%<+t2c> \ProvidesFile{t2cenc.dfu}
+%<+ts1> \ProvidesFile{ts1enc.dfu}
+%<+x2> \ProvidesFile{x2enc.dfu}
+%<+all> \ProvidesFile{utf8enc.dfu}
+ [2004/02/09 v1.1b UTF-8 support for inputenc]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*utf8>
+\makeatletter
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Parsing UTF-8 input}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@two@octets}
+% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@three@octets}
+% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@four@octets}
+% A UTF-8 char (that is not actually a 7-bit char, i.e.~a single
+% octet) is parsed as follows: each starting octet is an active
+% \TeX{} character token; each of these is defined below to be a
+% macro with one to three arguments nominally (depending on the
+% starting octet). It calls one of |\UTFviii@two@octets|,
+% |\UTFviii@three@octets|, or |\UTFviii@four@octets| which then
+% actually picks up the argument(s).
+%
+% From the arguments a control sequence with a name of the form
+% \verb=u8:#1#2...= is constructed where the |#i| ($i>1$) are the
+% arguments and |#1| is the starting octet (as a \TeX{} character
+% token). Since some or even all of these characters are active
+% (when inputenc is loaded) we need to use |\string| when building
+% the csname.
+%
+% The csname thus constructed can of course be undefined but to
+% avoid producing an unhelpful low-level undefined command error we
+% pass it to |\UTFviii@defined| which is responsible for producing
+% a more sensible error message (not yet done!!). If, however, it is
+% defined we simply execute the thing (which should then expand to
+% an encoding specific internal \LaTeX{} form).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UTFviii@two@octets#1#2{\expandafter
+ \UTFviii@defined\csname u8:#1\string#2\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UTFviii@three@octets#1#2#3{\expandafter
+ \UTFviii@defined\csname u8:#1\string#2\string#3\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UTFviii@four@octets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
+ \UTFviii@defined\csname u8:#1\string#2\string#3\string#4\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@defined}
+% This tests whether its argument is different from |\relax|: it
+% either calls for a sensible error message (not done), or it gets
+% the |\fi| out of the way (in case the command has arguments) and
+% executes it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UTFviii@defined#1{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The endline character has a special definition within the
+% inputenc package (it is gobbling spaces). For this reason we
+% can't produce multiline strings without some precaution.
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{no newlines in error messages allowed}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \PackageError{inputenc}{Unicode char \string#1 not set up\space
+ for use with LaTeX}\@eha
+ \else\expandafter
+ #1%
+ \fi
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\UTFviii@loop}
+% This wonderful bit of code from Dr Carlisle defines the starting
+% octets to call |\UTFviii@two@octets| etc as appropriate. The starting
+% octet itself is passed directly as the first argument, the others
+% are picked up later en route.
+%
+% The |\UTFviii@loop| loops through the numbers starting at
+% |\count@| and ending at |\@tempcnta|${} - 1$, each time executing
+% the code in |\UTFviii@tmp|.
+%
+% All this is done in a group so that temporary catcode changes
+% etc.~vanish after everything is set up.
+%
+% It may be a good idea to add code to deal with `illegal utf8 octets':
+% at present these will be handled by whatever code was in use for 8-bit
+% input before this code is executed.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\~13
+\catcode`\"12
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\UTFviii@loop{%
+ \uccode`\~\count@
+ \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviii@tmp}%
+ \advance\count@\@ne
+ \ifnum\count@<\@tempcnta
+ \expandafter\UTFviii@loop
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Setting up 2-byte UTF-8:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \count@"C2
+ \@tempcnta"E0
+ \def\UTFviii@tmp{\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviii@two@octets\string~}}
+\UTFviii@loop
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Setting up 3-byte UTF-8:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \count@"E0
+ \@tempcnta"F0
+ \def\UTFviii@tmp{\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviii@three@octets\string~}}
+\UTFviii@loop
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Setting up 4-byte UTF-8:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \count@"F0
+ \@tempcnta"F4
+ \def\UTFviii@tmp{\xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviii@four@octets\string~}}
+\UTFviii@loop
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For this case we must disable the warning generated by
+% \texttt{inputenc} if it doesn't see any new |\DeclareInputText|
+% commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@inpenc@test
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% If this file (\texttt{utf8.def}) is not being read while setting
+% up \texttt{inputenc}, i.e.~in the preamble, but when
+% |\inputencoding| is called somewhere within the document, we do not
+% need to input the specific Unicode mappings again. We therefore
+% stop reading the file at this point.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@begindocumenthook\@undefined
+ \makeatother
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\fi| must be on the same line as |\endinput| or else it will
+% never be seen!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endinput \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Mapping Unicode codes to \LaTeX{} internal forms}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareUnicodeCharacter}
+% The |\DeclareUnicodeCharacter| declaration defines a mapping from
+% a Unicode character code point to a \LaTeX{} internal form. The first
+% argument is the Unicode number as hexadecimal digits and the second is
+% the actual \LaTeX{} internal form.
+%
+% We start by making sure that some characters have the right
+% |\catcode| when they are used in the definitions below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\"=12
+\catcode`\<=12
+\catcode`\.=12
+\catcode`\,=12
+\catcode`\;=12
+\catcode`\!=12
+\catcode`\~=13
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
+ \count@"#1\relax
+ \wlog{ \space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\count@)}%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next we do the parsing of the number stored in |\count@| and assign the
+% result to |\UTFviii@tmp|. Actually all this could be done in-line,
+% the macro |\parse@XML@charref| is only there to extend this code
+% to parsing Unicode numbers in other contexts one day (perhaps).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \parse@XML@charref
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here is an example of what is happening, for the pair \texttt{"C2 "A3}
+% (which is the utf8 represenation for the character \textsterling{}).
+% After |\parse@XML@charref| we have, stored in |\UTFviii@tmp|, a
+% single command with two character tokens as arguments:
+% \begin{quote}
+% [$t_{C2}$ and $t_{A3}$ are the characters corresponding to these
+% two octets]\\
+% |\UTFviii@two@octets| $t_{\rm C2}t_{\rm A3}$
+% \end{quote}
+% what we actually need to produce is a definition of the form
+% \begin{quote}
+% |\def\u8:|$t_{\rm C2}$$t_{\rm A3}$ |{|\textit{\LaTeX{} internal form}|}|\,.
+% \end{quote}
+% So here we temporarily redefine the prefix commands
+% |\UTFviii@two@octets|, etc.~to
+% generate the csname that we wish to define> the |\string|s are
+% added in case these tokens are still active.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\UTFviii@two@octets##1##2{\csname u8:##1\string##2\endcsname}%
+ \def\UTFviii@three@octets##1##2##3{\csname u8:##1%
+ \string##2\string##3\endcsname}%
+ \def\UTFviii@four@octets##1##2##3##4{\csname u8:##1%
+ \string##2\string##3\string##4\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we simply:-) need to use the right number of |\expandafter|s to
+% finally construct the definition: expanding |\UTFviii@tmp| once to get
+% its contents, a second time to replace the prefix command by its
+% |\csname| expansion, and a third time to turn the expansion into
+% a csname after which the |\gdef| finally gets applied.
+% We add an irrelevant |\IeC| and braces around the definition, in
+% order to avoid any space after the command being gobbled up
+% when the text is written out to an auxiliary file (see
+% \texttt{inputenc} for further details
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter
+ \gdef\UTFviii@tmp{\IeC{#2}}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parse@XML@charref}
+% This macro parses a Unicode number (decimal) and returns its
+% UTF-8 representation as a sequence of non-active \TeX{} character
+% tokens. In the
+% original code it had two arguments delimited by \texttt{;} here,
+% however, we supply the Unicode number implicitly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\parse@XML@charref{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We need to keep a few things local, mainly the |\uccode|'s that
+% are set up below. However, the group originally used here is
+% actually unnecessary since we call this macro only within another
+% group; but it will be important to restore the group if this
+% macro gets used for other purposes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The original code from David supported the convention that a
+% Unicode slot number could be given either as a decimal or as a
+% hexadecimal (by starting with \texttt{x}). We do not do this so
+% this code is also removed. This could be reactivated if one
+% wants to support document commands that accept Unicode numbers
+% (but then the first case needs to be changed from an error
+% message back to something more useful again).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \uppercase{\count@\if x\noexpand#1"\else#1\fi#2}\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As |\count@| already contains the right value we make
+% |\parse@XML@charref| work without arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifnum\count@<"A0\relax
+ \PackageError{inputenc}{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}\@eha
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Do not ask us to provide an explanation for the code below, it is
+% borrowed straight from \texttt{xmltex} by David and we trust him
+% totally (and we are too lazy to reread the Unicode book to see if
+% this is the correct algorithm).\footnote{We were hoping to also
+% find in his work the \TeX{} code for going the other way: from
+% UTF-8 octets to Unicode slot number, but no luck!}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \else\ifnum\count@<"800\relax
+ \parse@UTFviii@a,%
+ \parse@UTFviii@b C\UTFviii@two@octets.,%
+ \else\ifnum\count@<"10000\relax
+ \parse@UTFviii@a;%
+ \parse@UTFviii@a,%
+ \parse@UTFviii@b E\UTFviii@three@octets.{,;}%
+ \else
+ \parse@UTFviii@a;%
+ \parse@UTFviii@a,%
+ \parse@UTFviii@a!%
+ \parse@UTFviii@b F\UTFviii@four@octets.{!,;}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+% \endgroup
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parse@UTFviii@a}
+% \ldots so somebody else can document this part :-) \ldots~David?:-))))!
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{space in the wrong place \cs{count @64}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\parse@UTFviii@a#1{%
+ \@tempcnta\count@
+ \divide\count@ 64
+ \@tempcntb\count@
+ \multiply\count@ 64
+ \advance\@tempcnta-\count@
+ \advance\@tempcnta 128
+ \uccode`#1\@tempcnta
+ \count@\@tempcntb}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parse@UTFviii@b}
+% \ldots same here
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\gdef\parse@UTFviii@b#1#2#3#4{%
+ \advance\count@ "#10\relax
+ \uccode`#3\count@
+ \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviii@tmp{#2#3#4}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareUnicodeCharacter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% These are preamble only as long as we don't support Unicode
+% charrefs in documents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\parse@XML@charref
+\@onlypreamble\parse@UTFviii@a
+\@onlypreamble\parse@UTFviii@b
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Loading Unicode mappings at begin document}
+%
+% The original plan was to set up the UTF-8 support at
+% |\begin{document}|; but then any text characters used in the preamble
+% (as people do even though advised against it) would fail in one way or
+% the other.
+% So the implementation was changed and the Unicode definition files
+% for already defined encodings are loaded here.
+%
+% We loop through all defined font encodings
+% (stored in |\cdp@list|) and for each load a file
+% \textit{name}\texttt{enc.dfu} if it exist. That file is then
+% supposed to contain |\DeclareUnicodeCharacter| declarations.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{%
+ \wlog{Now handling font encoding #1 ...}%
+ \lowercase{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1enc.dfu}}
+ {\wlog{... processing UTF-8 mapping file for font encoding #1}}%
+ {\wlog{... no UTF-8 mapping file for font encoding #1}}%
+ }
+ \cdp@list
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% However, we don't know if there are font encodings still to be
+% loaded (either with \texttt{fontenc} or directly with |\input| by
+% some some package). Font enconding files are loaded only if the
+% corresponding encoding has not been loaded yet, and they always
+% begin with |\DeclareFontEncoding|. We now redefine the internal
+% kernel version of the latter to load the Unicode file if available.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareFontEncoding@#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter
+ \ifx\csname T@#1\endcsname\relax
+ \def\cdp@elt{\noexpand\cdp@elt}%
+ \xdef\cdp@list{\cdp@list\cdp@elt{#1}%
+ {\default@family}{\default@series}%
+ {\default@shape}}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1-cmd\endcsname\@changed@cmd
+ \begingroup
+ \wlog{Now handling font encoding #1 ...}%
+ \lowercase{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1enc.dfu}}%
+ {\wlog{... processing UTF-8 mapping file for font encoding #1}}%
+ {\wlog{... no UTF-8 mapping file for font encoding #1}}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \@font@info{Redeclaring font encoding #1}%
+ \fi
+ \global\@namedef{T@#1}{#2}%
+ \global\@namedef{M@#1}{\default@M#3}%
+ \xdef\LastDeclaredEncoding{#1}%
+ }
+%</utf8>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Mapping characters ---\newline based on font (glyph) encodings}
+%
+% This section is a first attempt to provide Unicode definitions for
+% characters whose standard glyphs are currently provided by the
+% standard \LaTeX{} font-encodings |T1|, |OT1|, etc. They are by
+% no means completed and need checking.
+%
+% For example, one should check the already existing input encodings
+% for glyphs that may in fact be available and required,
+% e.g.~\texttt{latin4} has a number of glyphs with the |\=|
+% accent. Since the |T1| encoding does not provide such glyphs,
+% these characters are not listed below (yet).
+%
+% The list below was generated by looking at the current \LaTeX{} font
+% encoding files, e.g., \texttt{t1enc.def} and using the work by
+% Sebastian Rahtz in (\texttt{ucharacters.sty}), with a few
+% modifications. In combinations such as |\^\i| the preferred form
+% is that and not |\^i|.
+%
+% This list has been built from several sources, obviously including
+% the Unicode Standard itself. These sources include Passive \TeX{} by
+% Sebastian Rahtz, the \texttt{unicode}
+% package by Dominique P. G. Unruh (mainly for Latin encodings) and
+% \texttt{text4ht} by Eitan Gurari (for Cyrillic ones).
+%
+% Note that it strictly follows the Mittelbach principles for
+% input character encodings: thus it offers no support for using utf8
+% representations of math symbols such as $\times$ or $\div$ (in math mode).
+%
+%
+% \subsection{About the table itself}
+%
+% In addition to generating indivdual files, the table below is, at present,
+% a one-one (we think) partial relationship between the (ill-defined) set
+% of LICRs and the Unicode slots "0080 to "FFFF. At present these entries
+% are used only to define a collection of partial mappings from Unicode
+% slots to LICRs; each of these mappings becomes full if we add an exception
+% value (`not defined') to the set of LICRs.
+%
+% It is probably not essential for the relationship in the full table to be
+% one-one; this raises questions suach as: the exact role of LICRs;
+% the formal relationships on the set of LICRs; the (non-mathematical)
+% relationship between
+% LICRs and Unicode (which has its own somewhat fuzzy equivalences);
+% and ultimately what a character is and what a character representation
+% and/or name is.
+%
+% Viewed this a way, the result has, perhaps puzzingly, just two (we think)
+% gaps in the second 128 `Unicode slots' (00A0 and 00AD): neither of these
+% is really a character, of course.
+%
+% It is unclear the extent to which entries in this table should
+% resemble the closely related ones in the 8-bit \texttt{inputenc} files.
+% The Unicode standard claims that the first 256 slots `are' ASCII and
+% Latin-1.
+%
+% Of course, \TeX{} itself typically does not treat even many perfectly
+% `normal text' 7-bit slots as text characters, so it is unclear
+% whether \LaTeX{} should even attempt to deal in any consistent way with
+% those Unicode slots that are not definitive text characters.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The mapping table}
+%
+% Note that the first argument must be a 4-hex-digit number greater
+% than \texttt{00BF}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\textexclamdown}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{\textcent}
+%<all,ts1,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\textsterling}
+%<all,x2,ts1,t2c,t2b,t2a,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{\textcurrency}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{\textyen}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{\textbrokenbar}
+%<all,x2,ts1,t2c,t2b,t2a,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\textsection}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\textasciidieresis}
+%<all,ts1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\textcopyright}
+%<all,ts1,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\textordfeminine}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemotleft}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\textlnot}
+%<all,ts1,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\textregistered}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\textasciimacron}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\textdegree}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\textpm}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{\texttwosuperior}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{\textthreesuperior}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\textasciiacute}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{\textmu} % micro sign
+%<all,ts1,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\textparagraph}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\textperiodcentered}
+%<all,ot1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\c\ }
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{\textonesuperior}
+%<all,ts1,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\textordmasculine}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemotright}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{\textonequarter}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{\textonehalf}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{\textthreequarters}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\textquestiondown}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\@tabacckludge`A}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\@tabacckludge'A}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\r A}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\c C}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\@tabacckludge`E}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\@tabacckludge'E}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\@tabacckludge`I}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\@tabacckludge'I}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\@tabacckludge`O}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\@tabacckludge'O}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\texttimes}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\@tabacckludge`U}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\@tabacckludge'U}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\@tabacckludge'Y}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\@tabacckludge`a}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\@tabacckludge'a}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\r a}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\c c}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\@tabacckludge`e}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\@tabacckludge'e}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\@tabacckludge`\i}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^\i}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"\i}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\@tabacckludge`o}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\@tabacckludge'o}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\textdiv}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\@tabacckludge`u}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\@tabacckludge'u}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\@tabacckludge'y}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u A}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u a}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\k A}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\k a}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\@tabacckludge'C}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\@tabacckludge'c}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v C}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v c}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v D}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{\v d}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DJ}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dj}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\k E}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\k e}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v E}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v e}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u G}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u g}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\.I}
+%<all,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\i}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\@tabacckludge'L}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\@tabacckludge'l}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{\v L}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{\v l}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\@tabacckludge'N}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\@tabacckludge'n}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v N}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v n}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\NG}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\ng}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H O}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H o}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
+%<all,t1,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\@tabacckludge'R}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\@tabacckludge'r}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v R}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v r}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\@tabacckludge'S}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\@tabacckludge's}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\c S}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\c s}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v S}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v s}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\c T}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\c t}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v T}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v t}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\r U}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\r u}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H U}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H u}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\@tabacckludge'Z}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\@tabacckludge'z}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\.Z}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\.z}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v Z}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v z}
+%<all,ts1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0192}{\textflorin}
+%<all,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02C6}{\textasciicircum}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02C7}{\textasciicaron}
+%<all,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02CA}{\textasciitilde}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02D8}{\textasciibreve}
+%<all,oms>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02D9}{\textperiodcentered}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DD}{\textacutedbl}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0401}{\CYRYO}
+%<all,x2,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0402}{\CYRDJE}
+%<all,x2,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0404}{\CYRIE}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0405}{\CYRDZE}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0406}{\CYRII}
+%<all,x2,t2a,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0407}{\CYRYI}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0408}{\CYRJE}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0409}{\CYRLJE}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{040A}{\CYRNJE}
+%<all,x2,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{040B}{\CYRTSHE}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{040E}{\CYRUSHRT}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{040F}{\CYRDZHE}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0410}{\CYRA}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0411}{\CYRB}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0412}{\CYRV}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0413}{\CYRG}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0414}{\CYRD}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0415}{\CYRE}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0416}{\CYRZH}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0417}{\CYRZ}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0418}{\CYRI}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0419}{\CYRISHRT}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{041A}{\CYRK}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{041B}{\CYRL}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{041C}{\CYRM}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{041D}{\CYRN}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{041E}{\CYRO}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{041F}{\CYRP}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0420}{\CYRR}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0421}{\CYRS}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0422}{\CYRT}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0423}{\CYRU}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0424}{\CYRF}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0425}{\CYRH}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0426}{\CYRC}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0427}{\CYRCH}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0428}{\CYRSH}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0429}{\CYRSHCH}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{042A}{\CYRHRDSN}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{042B}{\CYRERY}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{042C}{\CYRSFTSN}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{042D}{\CYREREV}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{042E}{\CYRYU}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{042F}{\CYRYA}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0430}{\cyra}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0431}{\cyrb}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0432}{\cyrv}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0433}{\cyrg}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0434}{\cyrd}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0435}{\cyre}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0436}{\cyrzh}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0437}{\cyrz}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0438}{\cyri}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0439}{\cyrishrt}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{043A}{\cyrk}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{043B}{\cyrl}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{043C}{\cyrm}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{043D}{\cyrn}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{043E}{\cyro}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{043F}{\cyrp}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0440}{\cyrr}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0441}{\cyrs}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0442}{\cyrt}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0443}{\cyru}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0444}{\cyrf}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0445}{\cyrh}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0446}{\cyrc}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0447}{\cyrch}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0448}{\cyrsh}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0449}{\cyrshch}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{044A}{\cyrhrdsn}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{044B}{\cyrery}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{044C}{\cyrsftsn}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{044D}{\cyrerev}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{044E}{\cyryu}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{044F}{\cyrya}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0451}{\cyryo}
+%<all,x2,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0452}{\cyrdje}
+%<all,x2,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0454}{\cyrie}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0455}{\cyrdze}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0456}{\cyrii}
+%<all,x2,t2a,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0457}{\cyryi}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0458}{\cyrje}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0459}{\cyrlje}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{045A}{\cyrnje}
+%<all,x2,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{045B}{\cyrtshe}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{045E}{\cyrushrt}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2a,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{045F}{\cyrdzhe}
+%<all,x2,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0462}{\CYRYAT}
+%<all,x2,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0463}{\cyryat}
+%<all,x2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{046A}{\CYRBYUS}
+%<all,x2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{046B}{\cyrbyus}
+%<all,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0472}{\CYRFITA}
+%<all,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0473}{\cyrfita}
+%<all,x2,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0474}{\CYRIZH}
+%<all,x2,ot2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0475}{\cyrizh}
+%<all,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{048C}{\CYRSEMISFTSN}
+%<all,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{048D}{\cyrsemisftsn}
+%<all,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{048E}{\CYRRTICK}
+%<all,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{048F}{\cyrrtick}
+%<all,x2,t2a,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0490}{\CYRGUP}
+%<all,x2,t2a,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0491}{\cyrgup}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0492}{\CYRGHCRS}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0493}{\cyrghcrs}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0494}{\CYRGHK}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0495}{\cyrghk}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0496}{\CYRZHDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0497}{\cyrzhdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0498}{\CYRZDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0499}{\cyrzdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{049A}{\CYRKDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{049B}{\cyrkdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{049C}{\CYRKVCRS}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{049D}{\cyrkvcrs}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{049E}{\CYRKHCRS}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{049F}{\cyrkhcrs}
+%<all,x2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A0}{\CYRKBEAK}
+%<all,x2>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A1}{\cyrkbeak}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A2}{\CYRNDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A3}{\cyrndsc}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A4}{\CYRNG}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A5}{\cyrng}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A6}{\CYRPHK}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A7}{\cyrphk}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A8}{\CYRABHHA}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04A9}{\cyrabhha}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04AA}{\CYRSDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04AB}{\cyrsdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04AC}{\CYRTDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04AD}{\cyrtdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04AE}{\CYRY}
+%<all,x2,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04AF}{\cyry}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B0}{\CYRYHCRS}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B1}{\cyryhcrs}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B2}{\CYRHDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B3}{\cyrhdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B4}{\CYRTETSE}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B5}{\cyrtetse}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B6}{\CYRCHRDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B7}{\cyrchrdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B8}{\CYRCHVCRS}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04B9}{\cyrchvcrs}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04BA}{\CYRSHHA}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04BB}{\cyrshha}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04BC}{\CYRABHCH}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04BD}{\cyrabhch}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04BE}{\CYRABHCHDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04BF}{\cyrabhchdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C0}{\CYRpalochka}
+%<all,x2,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C3}{\CYRKHK}
+%<all,x2,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C4}{\cyrkhk}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C5}{\CYRLDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C6}{\cyrldsc}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C7}{\CYRNHK}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04C8}{\cyrnhk}
+%<all,x2,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04CB}{\CYRCHLDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04CC}{\cyrchldsc}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04CD}{\CYRMDSC}
+%<all,x2,t2c>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04CE}{\cyrmdsc}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04D4}{\CYRAE}
+%<all,x2,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04D5}{\cyrae}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04D8}{\CYRSCHWA}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04D9}{\cyrschwa}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04E0}{\CYRABHDZE}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04E1}{\cyrabhdze}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04E8}{\CYROTLD}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{04E9}{\cyrotld}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0E37}{\textbaht}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{200C}{\textcompwordmark}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{\textendash}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{\textemdash}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\textbardbl}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\textquoteleft}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\textquoteright}
+%<all,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\textquotedblleft}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ot2,ot1,ly1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\textquotedblright}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
+%<all,ts1,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\textdagger}
+%<all,ts1,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\textdaggerdbl}
+%<all,ts1,oms,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\textbullet}
+%<all,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\textellipsis}
+%<all,x2,ts1,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2030}{\textperthousand}
+%<all,x2,ts1,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2031}{\textpertenthousand}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
+%<all,t1,ly1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203B}{\textreferencemark}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203D}{\textinterrobang}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2044}{\textfractionsolidus}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{204E}{\textasteriskcentered} % LOW ASTERISK
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2052}{\textdiscount}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20A1}{\textcolonmonetary}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20A4}{\textlira}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20A6}{\textnaira}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20A9}{\textwon}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AB}{\textdong}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\texteuro}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20B1}{\textpeso}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2103}{\textcelsius}
+%<all,x2,ts1,t2c,t2b,t2a,ot2,lcy>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2116}{\textnumero}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2117}{\textcircledP}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211E}{\textrecipe}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2120}{\textservicemark}
+%<all,ts1,ly1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2122}{\texttrademark}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2126}{\textohm}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2127}{\textmho}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{212E}{\textestimated}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\textleftarrow}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\textuparrow}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\textrightarrow}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\textdownarrow}
+%<all,x2,ts1,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2329}{\textlangle}
+%<all,x2,ts1,t2c,t2b,t2a>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{232A}{\textrangle}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2422}{\textblank}
+%<all,x2,t2c,t2b,t2a,t1,utf8>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2423}{\textvisiblespace}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25E6}{\textopenbullet}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25EF}{\textbigcircle}
+%<all,ts1>\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266A}{\textmusicalnote}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following definitions are in the encoding file but have no
+% direct equivalent in Unicode or simply do not make sense in that
+% context (or we have not yet found anything or \ldots :-). For
+% example, the non-combining accent charcaters are certainly
+% available somehwere but these are not equivalent to a \TeX{}
+% accent command.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\j}{OT1}{17}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\SS}{T1}{223}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textcompwordmark}{T1}{23}
+%
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\'}{OT1}{19}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\.}{OT1}{95}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\=}{OT1}{22}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\H}{OT1}{125}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{OT1}{94}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\`}{OT1}{18}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\r}{OT1}{23}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\u}{OT1}{21}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\v}{OT1}{20}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\~}{OT1}{126}
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\b}{OT1}[1]
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\c}{OT1}[1]
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\d}{OT1}[1]
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1]
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Mappings for OT1 glyphs}
+%
+% This is even more incomplete as again it covers only the single
+% glyphs from |OT1| plus some that have been explicitly defined for
+% this encoding. Everything that is provided in |T1|, and that
+% could be provided as composite glyphs via |OT1|, could and
+% probably should be set up as well. Which leaves the many things
+% that are not provided in |T1| but can be provided in |OT1| (and
+% in |T1|) by composite glyphs.
+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Stuff not mapped (note that |\j| ($\jmath$) is not equivalent to any
+% Unicode character):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\j}{OT1}{17}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\'}{OT1}{19}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\.}{OT1}{95}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\=}{OT1}{22}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{OT1}{94}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\`}{OT1}{18}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\~}{OT1}{126}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\H}{OT1}{125}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\u}{OT1}{21}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\v}{OT1}{20}
+%\DeclareTextAccent{\r}{OT1}{23}
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\b}{OT1}[1]
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\c}{OT1}[1]
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\d}{OT1}[1]
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Mappings for OMS glyphs}
+%
+% Characters like |\textbackslash| are not mapped as they are
+% (primarily) only in the lower 127 and the code here only sets up
+% mappings for UTF-8 characters that are at least 2 octets long.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbackslash}{OMS}{110} % "6E
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbar}{OMS}{106} % "6A
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbraceleft}{OMS}{102} % "66
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbraceright}{OMS}{103} % "67
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% But the following (and some others) might actually lurk in Unicode
+% somewhere\ldots
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareTextSymbol{\textasteriskcentered}{OMS}{3} % "03
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\textcircled}{OMS}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Mappings for TS1 glyphs}
+%
+% Exercise for somebody else.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Mappings for \texttt{latex.ltx} glyphs}
+%
+% There is also a collection of characters already set up in the kernel,
+% one way or the other. Since these do not clearly relate to any
+% particular font encoding they are mapped when the
+% \texttt{utf8} support is first set up.
+%
+% Also there are a number of |\providecommand|s in the various input
+% encoding files which may or may not go into this part.
+% \changes{v1.1b}{2004/02/09}{added commands already defined in the kernel}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*utf8>
+% This space is intentionally empty ...
+%</utf8>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{A test document}
+%
+% Here is a very small test document which may or may not survive
+% if the current document is transfered from one place to the
+% other.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*test>
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage[latin1,utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{trace}
+
+\scrollmode % to run past the error below
+
+\begin{document}
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc %%% äöü
+
+\inputencoding{latin1} % switch to latin1
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8 but read by latin1 (and will produce one
+ error since \verb=\textcurrency= is not provided): ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc
+
+\inputencoding{utf8} % switch back to utf8
+
+ German umlauts in UTF-8: ^^c3^^a4^^c3^^b6^^c3^^bc
+
+
+Some codes that should produce errors as nothing is set up
+for them: ^^c3F ^^e1^^a4^^b6
+
+And some that are not legal utf8 sequences: ^^c3X ^^e1XY
+
+\showoutput
+\tracingstats=2
+\stop
+%</test>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput